Ewsd v16

S I E M E N S
E W S D
Digital Electronic Switching System
Task Manual
TML Version V16 Classic
TP072160_CEXXX05_V07 (TPQ9200V5V16)
NetManager (NetM) APS 13 / Patch Y
APS-ID: BELCBK1V.16
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Issued by Bereich Oeffentliche Vermittlungssysteme
Hofmannstrasse 51, D-81359 Muenchen
The reproduction, transmission or use of this
document or its contents is not permitted without
express written authority. Offenders will be liable
for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved. Specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Subject to technical alterations without notice.
Copyright (c) SIEMENS AG 2002
| T M L E W S D : Administration Section
ADMIN-2 | P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
q~~~~~~~~~~~~~~{
| ADMIN |
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Hints for interpreting the change designations:
The designations mean:
A ] Alternation, changed
N ] New, no previous chapter
0 ] Chapter removed, no replacement
This document comprises a total of 6912 pages.
Index of Issue: Issue: Pages:
ADMINISTRATION SECTION 02 ADMIN -1... 3 A
LIST OF CONTENTS 02 CONT -1... 26 A
INTRODUCTION TML/OML 02 IN -1... 9 A
COMMANDS 02 -1...6610 A
REFERENCE LIST COMMAND - MASKS 02 TAB -1... 264 A
T M L E W S D : Administration Section
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ADMIN-3
Contents and Issue Information
Command Description Number Issue Command Code Pages
Display all AAL5 Terminated PVC IDs 1.00 2 DISPAAAL5TPVCID -1... 1
Create AAL5 Terminated PVC 1.00 2 CR_AAL5TPVC -1... 3
Delete AAL5 Terminated PVC 1.00 2 DEL_AAL5TPVC -1... 1
Display AAL5 Terminated PVC 1.00 2 DISP_AAL5TPVC -1... 5
Modify AAL5 Terminated PVC 1.00 2 MOD_AAL5TPVC -1... 3
Disp AAL5 Terminated PVC Interface Attr. 1.00 2 DISPAAL5TPVCIFA -1... 7
Mod AAL5 Terminated PVC Interface Attr. 1.00 2 MOD_AAL5TPVCIFA -1... 1
Display all ATM Cross Connect IDs 1.00 2 DISPAATMCCONNID -1... 1
Display all ATM Traffic Descriptor 1.00 2 DISP_AATMTRDES -1... 1
Display Atuc Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data 1.00 2 DISP_ACATLPD -1... 2
Display Atuc Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data Int 1.00 2 DISP_ACATLPDI -1... 1
CANCEL AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3664.47 2 CAN_ACC -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3665.47 2 DISP_ACC -1... 1
ENTER AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3663.48 2 ENTR_ACC -1... 3
DISP. STATUS OF AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL 3666.47 2 STAT_ACC -1... 1
Display Access Control Configuration 1.00 2 DISP_ACCFG -1... 1
Modify Access Control Configuration 1.00 2 MOD_ACCFG -1... 2
Display Atuc Channel Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ACCHATT -1... 2
Display Atuc Channel Perf. Data 1.00 2 DISP_ACCHPD -1... 2
Display Atuc Channel Perf. Data Int. 1.00 2 DISP_ACCHPDI -1... 1
CANCEL AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3661.47 2 CAN_ACCTRAF -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3662.47 2 DISP_ACCTRAF -1... 1
ENTER AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3660.48 2 ENTR_ACCTRAF -1... 3
DISPLAY GENERAL ALARM CALL DATA 1589.01 2 DISP_ACDATA -1... 1
ENTER ALARM CALL DATA 1590.05 2 ENTR_ACDATA -1... 3
Cancel Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 2 CAN_ACINIGRP -1... 1
Create Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 2 CR_ACINIGRP -1... 1
Display Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 2 DISP_ACINIGRP -1... 1
Modify Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 2 MOD_ACINIGRP -1... 1
CANCEL ALARM CALL ORDER 1587.07 2 CAN_ACORD -1... 3
ENTER ALARM CALL ORDER 1585.08 2 ENTR_ACORD -1... 4
SELECT ALARM CALL ORDER 1586.04 2 SEL_ACORD -1... 1
Display Atuc Physical Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ACPHATT -1... 2
Display Atuc Physical Perf. Data 1.00 2 DISP_ACPHPD -1... 3
Display Atuc Physical Perf. Data Int. 1.00 2 DISP_ACPHPDI -1... 1
Cancel Access Control Rule 1.00 2 CAN_ACRULE -1... 1
Create Access Control Rule 1.00 2 CR_ACRULE -1... 3
Display Access Control Rule 1.00 2 DISP_ACRULE -1... 2
Modify Access Control Rule 1.00 2 MOD_ACRULE -1... 3
DISPLAY ALARM CALL STATISTICS 1588.00 2 DISP_ACSTAT -1... 1
Cancel Access Control Target Group 1.00 2 CAN_ACTARGRP -1... 1
Create Access Control Target Group 1.00 2 CR_ACTARGRP -1... 2
Display Access Control Target Group 1.00 2 DISP_ACTARGRP -1... 1
Modify Access Control Target Group 1.00 2 MOD_ACTARGRP -1... 2
Display all DLCIs 1.00 2 DISP_ADLCI -1... 1
Display Data Network State Information 1.00 2 DISP_ADNSI -1... 1
ACT AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2829.00 2 ACT_ADPHMEAS -1... 1
CAN AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2830.01 2 CAN_ADPHMEAS -1... 3
DISP AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2832.01 2 DISP_ADPHMEAS -1... 5
ENTR AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS. 2833.01 2 ENTR_ADPHMEAS -1... 3
Display Entity Info 1.00 2 DISP_AENTI -1... 2
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY 1518.03 2 DISP_AENTRY -1... 1
SELECT ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY 1519.08 2 SEL_AENTRY -1... 4
CANCEL ARCHIVE FILE 1515.01 2 CAN_AFILE -1... 1
CREATE ARCHIVE FILE 1514.03 2 CR_AFILE -1... 3
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES 1517.00 2 DISP_AFILE -1... 1
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES 1516.02 2 MOD_AFILE -1... 3
Display Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_AIFATT -1... 2
Modify Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_AIFATT -1... 1
Display all IMA Link Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_AIMALNKATT -1... 1
Display all IP Addresses 1.00 2 DISP_AIPADR -1... 2
Display all IP Routes 1.00 2 DISP_AIPROUTE -1... 5
DISPLAY ALARM STATUS 1483.03 2 DISP_ALARM -1... 2
SEARCH ALARM MESSAGE 1486.04 2 SRCH_ALARM -1... 2
ACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY 2017.01 2 ACT_ALDISP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY 2019.01 2 DACT_ALDISP -1... 2
DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY 2020.00 2 DISP_ALDISP -1... 1
CANCEL ALIAS NAME 3079.00 2 CAN_ALIAS -1... 1
DISPLAY ALIAS FILE NAMES 3075.00 2 DISP_ALIAS -1... 1
ENTER ALIAS FILE NAME 3076.00 2 ENTR_ALIAS -1... 1
MODIFY ALIAS NAME 3077.00 2 MOD_ALIAS -1... 1
DISPLAY ALARM MODE 771.01 2 DISP_ALMODE -1... 1
ENTER ALARM MODE 770.02 2 ENTR_ALMODE -1... 1
CANCEL ALARM PERIOD 2018.01 2 CAN_ALPER -1... 1
CONT-1 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DISP ALARM PERIOD 2021.00 2 DISP_ALPER -1... 1
ENTER ALARM PERIOD 2022.01 2 ENTR_ALPER -1... 2
CANCEL ALARM PRIORITY 2922.00 2 CAN_ALPRIO -1... 2
DISPLAY ALARM PRIORITY 769.14 2 DISP_ALPRIO -1... 4
ENTER ALARM PRIORITY 768.14 2 ENTR_ALPRIO -1... 5
DISPLAY ALARM PROFILE 3174.00 2 DISP_ALPROF -1... 1
SET ALARM STATUS 1485.04 2 SET_ALSTAT -1... 1
CANCEL ALARM TEXT 946.02 2 CAN_ALTEXT -1... 1
DISPLAY ALARM TEXT 947.01 2 DISP_ALTEXT -1... 1
ENTER ALARM TEXT 943.01 2 ENTR_ALTEXT -1... 1
DISPLAY AMA DATA 528.77 2 DISP_AMA -1... 3
Display all MG Service Selection Entries 1.00 2 DISPAMGSERVSELE -1... 1
Display all MLPPP Connections 1.00 2 DISP_AMLPPPC -1... 1
Display all MLPPP Layers 1.00 2 DISP_AMLPPPL -1... 1
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2888.04 2 CAN_ANELEM -1... 5
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 4098.01 2 CR_ANELEM -1... 11
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2890.04 2 DISP_ANELEM -1... 6
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 4099.01 2 MOD_ANELEM -1... 10
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS 216.07 2 CAN_ANGCOS -1... 1
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS 215.07 2 ENTR_ANGCOS -1... 9
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 214.03 2 CAN_ANGRP -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 213.83 2 CR_ANGRP -1... 10
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 222.03 2 DISP_ANGRP -1... 1
RECORD ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP DATA 2876.00 2 REC_ANGRP -1... 4
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS 220.05 2 CAN_ANLCOS -1... 1
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS 219.07 2 ENTR_ANLCOS -1... 1
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 218.03 2 CAN_ANLN -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 217.81 2 CR_ANLN -1... 5
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 221.03 2 DISP_ANLN -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 847.69 2 STAT_ANLN -1... 2
DISPLAY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET VALUE 2896.07 2 DISP_ANPREV -1... 2
MODIFY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET VALUE 2895.07 2 MOD_ANPREV -1... 3
Display all NT ATM Port Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ANTAATMA -1... 1
Create NT ATM Port Attributes 1.00 2 CR_ANTATMAT -1... 1
Delete NT ATM Port Attributes 1.00 2 DEL_ANTATMAT -1... 1
Display NT ATM Port Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ANTATMAT -1... 1
Modify NT ATM Port Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_ANTATMAT -1... 1
Display NT Ethernet Port Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ANTETHAT -1... 2
Modify NT Ethernet Port Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_ANTETHAT -1... 1
Display NT General Configuration 1.00 2 DISP_ANTGCONF -1... 1
Modify NT General Configuration 1.00 2 MOD_ANTGCONF -1... 1
Display NT General Status 1.00 2 DISP_ANTGSTAT -1... 2
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2902.01 2 CAN_ANTXT -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2903.01 2 CR_ANTXT -1... 2
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2891.01 2 DISP_ANTXT -1... 1
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2904.01 2 MOD_ANTXT -1... 2
Display all OAM Table Destinations 1.00 2 DISP_AOAMTABD -1... 1
CANCEL APPLICATION 1767.00 2 CAN_APPL -1... 1
CREATE APPLICATION 1769.08 2 CR_APPL -1... 7
DISPLAY APPLICATION 1771.01 2 DISP_APPL -1... 1
MODIFY APPLICATION 1774.09 2 MOD_APPL -1... 7
ENTER APS NAME 321.01 2 ENTR_APSNAME -1... 1
INCREMENT APS VERSION NUMBER 322.01 2 INCR_APSVN -1... 1
Display Atur Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data 1.00 2 DISP_ARATLPD -1... 2
Display Atur Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data Int 1.00 2 DISP_ARATLPDI -1... 1
Display Atur Channel Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ARCHATT -1... 1
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE 4131.00 2 MOD_ARCHIVE -1... 3
Display Atur Channel Perf. Data 1.00 2 DISP_ARCHPD -1... 3
Display Atur Channel Perf. Data Int. 1.00 2 DISP_ARCHPDI -1... 1
CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE 1052.46 2 CAN_AREACODE -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL AREA CODE DATA 311.46 2 DISP_AREACODE -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL AREA CODE 310.46 2 ENTR_AREACODE -1... 2
MODIFY LOCAL AREA CODE 1051.58 2 MOD_AREACODE -1... 2
Display Atur Physical Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ARPHATT -1... 2
Display Atur Physical Perf. Data 1.00 2 DISP_ARPHPD -1... 3
Display Atur Physical Perf. Data Int. 1.00 2 DISP_ARPHPDI -1... 1
Display ADSL SLMI Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ASLMIA -1... 2
Display all Subscriber L2TP Sessions 1.00 2 DISP_ASUBLSESS -1... 1
Display all TCP Connections 1.00 2 DISP_ATCPCONN -1... 1
CONNECT ATE 1296.11 2 CONN_ATE -1... 2
DISCONNECT ATE 1297.10 2 DISCONNATE -1... 1
Display ATM25 Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_ATM25IFA -1... 1
Modify ATM25 Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_ATM25IFA -1... 1
Create ATM Cross Connect 1.00 2 CR_ATMCCONN -1... 2
CONT-2 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
Delete ATM Cross Connect 1.00 2 DEL_ATMCCONN -1... 1
Display ATM Cross Connect 1.00 2 DISP_ATMCCONN -1... 1
Modify ATM Cross Connect 1.00 2 MOD_ATMCCONN -1... 2
Create ATM Cell Layer 1.00 2 CR_ATMCL -1... 2
Delete ATM Cell Layer 1.00 2 DEL_ATMCL -1... 1
Display ATM Cell Layer 1.00 2 DISP_ATMCL -1... 1
Modify ATM Cell Layer 1.00 2 MOD_ATMCL -1... 2
Display ATM Cell Layer Interface Attr. 1.00 2 DISP_ATMCLIFA -1... 1
Modify ATM Cell Layer Interface Attr. 1.00 2 MOD_ATMCLIFA -1... 1
Create ATM Traffic Descriptor 1.00 2 CR_ATMTRDES -1... 2
Delete ATM Traffic Descriptor 1.00 2 DEL_ATMTRDES -1... 1
Display ATM Traffic Descriptor 1.00 2 DISP_ATMTRDES -1... 1
Modify ATM Traffic Descriptor 1.00 2 MOD_ATMTRDES -1... 2
Display all Tunnel Domains 1.00 2 DISP_ATUNDOM -1... 1
Display all Tunnels 1.00 2 DISP_ATUNNEL -1... 1
ALLOW AUDIT 242.79 2 ALLOW_AUDIT -1... 2
DISPLAY AUDIT 240.70 2 DISP_AUDIT -1... 1
INHIBIT AUDIT 241.79 2 INHIB_AUDIT -1... 2
START AUDIT 239.81 2 START_AUDIT -1... 4
Display all UDP Listeners 1.00 2 DISP_AUDPLIS -1... 1
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION 897.01 2 CAN_AUT -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION 898.01 2 DISP_AUT -1... 1
ENTER AUTHORIZATION 896.01 2 ENTR_AUT -1... 1
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION CLASS 894.01 2 CAN_AUTCL -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION CLASS 895.01 2 DISP_AUTCL -1... 1
ENTER AUTHORIZATION CLASS 893.01 2 ENTR_AUTCL -1... 1
Display Authentication Defaults CP 1.00 2 DISP_AUTHDEFCP -1... 1
Modify Authentication Defaults CP 1.00 2 MOD_AUTHDEFCP -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL DATA OF BASIC ACCESS 1592.04 2 STAT_BA -1... 2
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS FAULT 1818.09 2 DISP_BAFAULT -1... 3
COMMUTE BASE PROCESSORS 1099.00 2 COM_BAP -1... 1
CONFIGURE BASE PROCESSOR 1089.00 2 CONF_BAP -1... 1
DIAGNOSE BASE PROCESSOR 1109.00 2 DIAG_BAP -1... 2
TEST BASE PROCESSOR 1128.00 2 TEST_BAP -1... 1
ACTIVATE BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE MEAS. 2739.02 2 ACT_BAPERF -1... 2
DEACTIVATE BA PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT 2740.01 2 DACT_BAPERF -1... 2
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE DATA 2741.01 2 DISP_BAPERF -1... 4
CONFIGURE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1101.00 2 CONF_BCMY -1... 1
DIAGNOSE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1112.00 2 DIAG_BCMY -1... 1
TEST BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1130.01 2 TEST_BCMY -1... 1
ACT BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT 3242.04 2 ACT_BERM -1... 8
DISPLAY BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT 3183.17 2 DISP_BERM -1... 9
Display BRAS Configuration 1.00 2 DISP_BRASCONF -1... 2
Modify BRAS Configuration 1.00 2 MOD_BRASCONF -1... 1
TRANSFER INDIV. CALL DATA BUFFER TO DISK 593.18 2 TRANS_BUFFER -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 DISCARDED MSUS 2951.00 2 DISP_C7DCDMSU -1... 1
REC CCS7 DISCARDED MESSAGE SIGNAL UNITS 1405.09 2 REC_C7DCDMSU -1... 3
DISPLAY CCS7 DISC. MSU 3443.00 2 DISP_C7DMDAT -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 DISCARDED MSU DATA 3444.00 2 MOD_C7DMDAT -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 485.08 2 CAN_C7DP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 1686.04 2 CONF_C7DP -1... 2
CREATE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 481.06 2 CR_C7DP -1... 2
DISPLAY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 492.12 2 DISP_C7DP -1... 2
MODIFY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT 1712.04 2 MOD_C7DP -1... 4
RECORD CCS7 GRADE OF SERVICE 1398.10 2 REC_C7GOS -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCS7 LEVEL1 COMPONENTS 2718.03 2 STAT_C7L1 -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 LINK 486.12 2 CAN_C7LINK -1... 1
CONFIGURE CCS7 LINK 490.03 2 CONF_C7LINK -1... 2
CREATE CCS7 LINK 482.75 2 CR_C7LINK -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK 493.12 2 DISP_C7LINK -1... 6
MODIFY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK 1896.00 2 MOD_C7LINK -1... 1
RECORD CCS7 LINK LOAD 1401.10 2 REC_C7LLOAD -1... 4
CANCEL CCS7 LINK SET 487.00 2 CAN_C7LSET -1... 1
CREATE CCS7 LINK SET 483.06 2 CR_C7LSET -1... 2
DISPLAY CCS7 LINK SET 495.12 2 DISP_C7LSET -1... 4
MODIFY CCS7 LINK SET 2948.02 2 MOD_C7LSET -1... 2
RECORD CCS7 LINK SET 3096.10 2 REC_C7LSET -1... 4
CANCEL CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR.OF DPC 1711.02 2 CAN_C7LSETDP -1... 1
DISP.FOR A GIVEN CCS7 LINK SET ALL DPCS 1715.01 2 DISP_C7LSETDP -1... 1
ENTER CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR. OF DPC 1709.02 2 ENTR_C7LSETDP -1... 2
REC CCS7 MESSAGE SIGNAL UNIT 2923.09 2 REC_C7MSU -1... 3
DISPLAY CCS7 NOTIFICATION 2737.00 2 DISP_C7NOTI -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2715.00 2 CAN_C7OP -1... 1
CREATE CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2716.04 2 CR_C7OP -1... 2
CONT-3 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DISPLAY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2721.03 2 DISP_C7OP -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT 2717.02 2 MOD_C7OP -1... 3
DISPLAY CCS7 ROUTE SET 496.10 2 DISP_C7RSET -1... 1
RECORD CCS7 ROUTE SET TRAFFIC DATA 1399.09 2 REC_C7RSET -1... 5
DISPLAY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME 3407.00 2 DISP_C7SMTIME -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME 3408.00 2 MOD_C7SMTIME -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1758.00 2 CAN_C7TGREL -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1759.25 2 DISP_C7TGREL -1... 3
ENTER CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1757.25 2 ENTR_C7TGREL -1... 2
CANCEL CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREM. 2165.00 2 CAN_C7TRST -1... 1
DISP CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT 1402.01 2 DISP_C7TRST -1... 1
ENTER CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT 2164.01 2 ENTR_C7TRST -1... 3
TEST CCS7 TRUNK STATUS (ISUP) 3492.25 2 TEST_C7TRSTAT -1... 4
TEST CCS7 TRUNK 854.25 2 TEST_C7TRUNK -1... 4
CANCEL CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1684.25 2 CAN_C7USER -1... 2
CREATE CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1685.25 2 CR_C7USER -1... 2
DISPLAY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1695.25 2 DISP_C7USER -1... 2
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2445.52 2 CAN_CAC -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2444.52 2 CR_CAC -1... 2
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2447.52 2 DISP_CAC -1... 2
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2446.54 2 MOD_CAC -1... 2
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT 4032.52 2 CAN_CACCPT -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT 4031.56 2 CR_CACCPT -1... 3
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT 4034.52 2 DISP_CACCPT -1... 2
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT 4033.52 2 MOD_CACCPT -1... 4
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4040.52 2 CAN_CACLST -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4037.52 2 CR_CACLST -1... 1
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4039.52 2 DISP_CACLST -1... 1
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4038.52 2 MOD_CACLST -1... 1
CANCEL MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4019.13 2 CAN_CALIDREC -1... 1
CREATE MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4016.13 2 CR_CALIDREC -1... 2
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4018.13 2 DISP_CALIDREC -1... 1
MODIFY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4017.13 2 MOD_CALIDREC -1... 2
ACCEPT CALL 1272.15 2 ACCEP_CALL -1... 2
RELEASE CALL 1279.01 2 REL_CALL -1... 1
SET UP CALL 1282.03 2 SETUP_CALL -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING DATA 639.80 2 DISP_CALLDAT -1... 6
ACCEPT CALL IDENTIFICATION 1484.01 2 ACCEP_CALLID -1... 1
MODIFY CALL MONITORING 713.15 2 MOD_CALLMON -1... 2
CALL MONITORING 711.24 2 START_CALLMON -1... 4
STOP CALL MONITORING 712.15 2 STOP_CALLMON -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS 1945.07 2 DISP_CALLPOPT -1... 2
MODIFY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS 1950.16 2 MOD_CALLPOPT -1... 33
CANCEL CALL TYPE DATA 3387.05 2 CAN_CALLTYPE -1... 1
CREATE CALL TYPE DATA 2395.07 2 CR_CALLTYPE -1... 10
DISPLAY CALL TYPE DATA 3386.07 2 DISP_CALLTYPE -1... 4
MODIFY CALL TYPE DATA 2396.07 2 MOD_CALLTYPE -1... 14
CANCEL CALL PROCESSOR 3165.00 2 CAN_CAP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CALL PROCESSOR 1090.00 2 CONF_CAP -1... 1
CREATE CALL PROCESSOR 3157.00 2 CR_CAP -1... 1
DIAGNOSE CALL PROCESSOR 1110.00 2 DIAG_CAP -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSOR 3161.00 2 DISP_CAP -1... 1
TEST CALL PROCESSOR 1129.01 2 TEST_CAP -1... 1
CANCEL CATASTROPHE CONDITION 253.44 2 CAN_CATAST -1... 1
DISPLAY CATASTROPHE CONDITION 254.44 2 DISP_CATAST -1... 1
ENTER CATASTROPHE CONDITION 252.44 2 ENTR_CATAST -1... 1
ACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3025.02 2 ACT_CBPGRP -1... 1
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3026.03 2 CAN_CBPGRP -1... 1
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3027.04 2 CR_CBPGRP -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3028.02 2 DACT_CBPGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3029.02 2 DISP_CBPGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3030.04 2 MOD_CBPGRP -1... 2
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT 328.85 2 CAN_CBPT -1... 2
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT 326.87 2 CR_CBPT -1... 4
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT 329.84 2 DISP_CBPT -1... 2
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT 327.85 2 MOD_CBPT -1... 3
DISPLAY COIN BOX PULSE 250.01 2 DISP_CBPULS -1... 1
ENTER COIN BOX PULSE 251.02 2 ENTR_CBPULS -1... 1
CONFIGURE CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR 928.60 2 CONF_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR 921.10 2 DISP_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCG 143.80 2 STAT_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY CCG-PARAMETER 1549.21 2 DISP_CCGPAR -1... 5
MODIFY CCG-PARAMETER 1548.21 2 MOD_CCGPAR -1... 5
CONFIGURE CCNC 502.71 2 CONF_CCNC -1... 11
CONT-4 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DIAGNOSE CCNC 503.72 2 DIAG_CCNC -1... 4
DISPLAY OST OF CCNC 506.71 2 STAT_CCNC -1... 1
ACTIVATE CCNC TRACER 779.15 2 ACT_CCNCTRAC -1... 5
CANCEL CCNC TRACER 783.20 2 CAN_CCNCTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNC TRACER 782.20 2 DISP_CCNCTRAC -1... 1
DUMP CCNC TRACER 3509.00 2 DMP_CCNCTRAC -1... 1
ACTIVATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 3378.05 2 ACT_CDS -1... 2
CANCEL CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 3377.07 2 CAN_CDS -1... 1
CREATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 2393.07 2 CR_CDS -1... 4
DISPLAY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 3379.07 2 DISP_CDS -1... 5
MODIFY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA 2394.07 2 MOD_CDS -1... 5
DISPLAY CDS STATISTICS FILE 2433.03 2 DISP_CDSFILE -1... 7
ACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3858.07 2 ACT_CDSPROG -1... 1
CANCEL CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3856.07 2 CAN_CDSPROG -1... 2
DEACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3859.07 2 DACT_CDSPROG -1... 1
DISPLAY CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3857.07 2 DISP_CDSPROG -1... 6
ENTER CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3855.07 2 ENTR_CDSPROG -1... 4
CANCEL CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3851.07 2 CAN_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
CREATE CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3850.07 2 CR_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
DISPLAY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3853.07 2 DISP_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
MODIFY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3852.07 2 MOD_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
ACTIVATE CDS STATUS REPORT 2431.02 2 ACT_CDSSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY CDS STATUS REPORT 2432.02 2 DISP_CDSSTAT -1... 2
CANCEL CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2791.11 2 CAN_CDTDAT -1... 3
DISPLAY CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2796.02 2 DISP_CDTDAT -1... 1
ENTER CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2799.11 2 ENTR_CDTDAT -1... 13
RESET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS 952.00 2 RESET_CFOPT -1... 1
SET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS 951.01 2 SET_CFOPT -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL FAILURE TREATMENT 1208.00 2 DISP_CFT -1... 1
ENTER CALL FAILURE TREATMENT 1207.00 2 ENTR_CFT -1... 1
DISPLAY COMMAND FILE TIME JOB 648.01 2 DISP_CFTJOB -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGING DATA RECORDS 3819.03 2 DISP_CHAREC -1... 31
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT RECORD 2420.03 2 DISP_CHF -1... 3
ACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2182.03 2 ACT_CHFCASE -1... 2
CREATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2181.01 2 CR_CHFCASE -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2183.03 2 DACT_CHFCASE -1... 2
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2184.02 2 DISP_CHFCASE -1... 2
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE 2419.03 2 MOD_CHFCASE -1... 3
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS 2186.02 2 DISP_CHFSTAT -1... 1
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS 2185.02 2 MOD_CHFSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGING FEATURES 3760.03 2 DISP_CHRGFEA -1... 1
MODIFY CHARGING FEATURES 3759.04 2 MOD_CHRGFEA -1... 4
DISPLAY CHARGING OPTIONS 4130.01 2 DISP_CHRGOPT -1... 1
MODIFY CHARGING OPTIONS 4124.03 2 MOD_CHRGOPT -1... 6
CANCEL COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE 3799.00 2 CAN_CITERA -1... 1
CONFIGURE COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE 3800.00 2 CONF_CITERA -1... 1
CREATE COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE 3798.00 2 CR_CITERA -1... 1
DISPLAY COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE 3801.00 2 DISP_CITERA -1... 1
MODIFY COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE 3802.00 2 MOD_CITERA -1... 2
ACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2814.00 2 ACT_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
CANCEL CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2802.00 2 CAN_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2803.00 2 DACT_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2804.00 2 DISP_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
DUMP CONNECTION LIST TRACER 2805.01 2 DMP_CLSTTRAC -1... 1
ENTER CONNECTION LIST TRACER OBJECT DATA 2813.07 2 ENTR_CLSTTRAC -1... 8
SKIP COMMAND 1.00 2 SKIP_CMD -1... 1
EXECUTE COMMAND FILE 671.75 2 EXEC_CMDFILE -1... 3
CONFIGURE COMMON MEMORY 1102.00 2 CONF_CMY -1... 1
DIAGNOSE COMMON MEMORY 1113.00 2 DIAG_CMY -1... 1
TEST COMMON MEMORY 1131.01 2 TEST_CMY -1... 1
DUMP CCNC MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3897.00 2 DMP_CNIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3899.00 2 ACT_CNPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3902.00 2 CAN_CNPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3900.00 2 DACT_CNPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3903.01 2 DISP_CNPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3898.00 2 ENTR_CNPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3901.00 2 UPD_CNPRPCH -1... 1
ACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3905.00 2 ACT_CNTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3907.00 2 CAN_CNTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3906.00 2 DACT_CNTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3908.01 2 DISP_CNTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3904.00 2 ENTR_CNTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL COUNTRY CODE 2450.44 2 CAN_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
DISPLAY COUNTRY CODE 2451.46 2 DISP_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
CONT-5 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
ENTER COUNTRY CODE 2449.46 2 ENTR_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
Display Codec Negotiation Table 1.00 2 DISP_CODNEGTAB -1... 2
Modify Codec Negotiation Table 1.00 2 MOD_CODNEGTAB -1... 3
DISPLAY LARGE CONFERENCE 3508.07 2 DISP_CONFL -1... 2
MODIFY LARGE CONFERENCE 3507.07 2 MOD_CONFL -1... 1
CANCEL CONFERENCE 1932.07 2 CAN_CONFRNC -1... 1
CREATE CONFERENCE 1933.07 2 CR_CONFRNC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONFERENCE 1934.07 2 DISP_CONFRNC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONNECTIONS 1652.12 2 DISP_CONN -1... 6
RELEASE CONNECTION 1581.55 2 REL_CONN -1... 5
STAT COMMERCIAL PLATFORM 4167.00 2 STAT_COPL -1... 1
Start CoPl Backup Procedure 1.00 2 START_COPLBUPP -1... 1
Start CoPl Software Exchange 1.00 2 START_COPLSWEX -1... 3
Display CoPl Type Information 1.00 2 DISP_COPLTI -1... 1
Display CoPl Version Information 1.00 2 DISP_COPLVI -1... 1
CONFIGURATE CONFERENCE UNIT 1492.18 2 CONF_COU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE CONFERENCE UNIT 1491.08 2 DIAG_COU -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CONFERENCE UNIT 1490.88 2 STAT_COU -1... 1
RECORD COORDINATION PROCESSOR 277.04 2 REC_CP -1... 4
ACTIVATE CP DUMP CONDITIONS 1066.20 2 ACT_CPDMPC -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CONDITIONAL CPDUMP 1068.02 2 DACT_CPDMPC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONDITIONAL CPDUMP 1067.00 2 DISP_CPDMPC -1... 1
DUMP CP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3605.00 2 DMP_CPIMDMP -1... 3
DUMP CP MEMORY 1069.20 2 DMP_CPMEM -1... 2
ACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3593.00 2 ACT_CPPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CP PERMANENT PATCH 3596.00 2 CAN_CPPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3594.00 2 DACT_CPPRPCH -1... 2
DISPLAY CP PERMANENT PATCH 3597.02 2 DISP_CPPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CP PERMANENT PATCH 3592.00 2 ENTR_CPPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3595.00 2 UPD_CPPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CODE POINT 21.49 2 CAN_CPT -1... 3
CREATE CODE POINT 19.58 2 CR_CPT -1... 17
DISPLAY CODE POINT 197.58 2 DISP_CPT -1... 4
MERGE CODE POINT 387.58 2 MERGE_CPT -1... 6
MODIFY CODE POINT 314.58 2 MOD_CPT -1... 15
SPLIT CODE POINT 385.58 2 SPLIT_CPT -1... 7
CANCEL CODE POINT NOT ALLOWED FOR FEAT. 2160.46 2 CAN_CPTNAF -1... 1
CREATE CODE POINT NOT ALLOWED FOR FEAT. 2159.46 2 CR_CPTNAF -1... 1
DISPL. CODE POINTS NOT ALLOWED FOR FEAT. 2161.46 2 DISP_CPTNAF -1... 1
ACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3599.00 2 ACT_CPTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3601.00 2 CAN_CPTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3600.00 2 DACT_CPTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3602.02 2 DISP_CPTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3598.00 2 ENTR_CPTRPCH -1... 2
ENTER CARRIER QUOTA DATA 1805.02 2 ENTR_CQDAT -1... 4
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA DATA 1807.05 2 MOD_CQDAT -1... 9
CAN CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1800.01 2 CAN_CQGRP -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1802.03 2 CR_CQGRP -1... 2
DISPLAY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1804.02 2 DISP_CQGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1808.02 2 MOD_CQGRP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CODE RECEIVER 383.78 2 CONF_CR -1... 2
DIAGNOSE CODE RECEIVER 996.18 2 DIAG_CR -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CODE RECEIVER 384.88 2 STAT_CR -1... 3
CANCEL CODE RECEIVER MODULE 186.73 2 CAN_CRMOD -1... 1
CREATE CODE RECEIVER MODULE 166.81 2 CR_CRMOD -1... 2
DISPLAY CODE RECEIVER MODULE 176.75 2 DISP_CRMOD -1... 1
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 1087.01 2 CAN_CSC -1... 1
CONFIGURE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 1086.01 2 CONF_CSC -1... 1
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 1104.02 2 CR_CSC -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 3031.00 2 DISP_CSC -1... 1
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL 3033.00 2 MOD_CSC -1... 1
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1495.00 2 CAN_CSCGRP -1... 1
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1493.00 2 CR_CSCGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1496.00 2 DISP_CSCGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP 1494.00 2 MOD_CSCGRP -1... 1
ACTIVATE CSC-TRACER 1073.06 2 ACT_CSCTRAC -1... 3
DEACTIVATE CSC-TRACER 1074.02 2 DACT_CSCTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CSC-TRACE COMMAND 1076.01 2 DISP_CSCTRAC -1... 1
DUMP CSC-TRACE DATA 1075.01 2 DMP_CSCTRAC -1... 1
ACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY 2872.14 2 ACT_CSF -1... 12
DEACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY 2871.09 2 DACT_CSF -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL STATUS FACILITY 2873.09 2 DISP_CSF -1... 1
DUMP CALL STATUS FACILITY 2874.09 2 DMP_CSF -1... 1
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3393.02 2 CAN_CSGRP -1... 1
CONT-6 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
CREATE COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3392.07 2 CR_CSGRP -1... 8
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3395.05 2 DISP_CSGRP -1... 3
MODIFY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA 3394.07 2 MOD_CSGRP -1... 15
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA 3402.07 2 CAN_CSSUB -1... 19
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA 3401.07 2 DISP_CSSUB -1... 11
ENTER COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA 3400.07 2 ENTR_CSSUB -1... 43
START CSWD PROCESSES 280.10 2 START_CSWD -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL CONTROL TIME 1032.00 2 DISP_CTRLTIME -1... 1
ENTER CALL CONTROL TIME 1031.01 2 ENTR_CTRLTIME -1... 1
TEST CIRCUIT TYPE 67.13 2 TEST_CTYPE -1... 6
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP 2764.04 2 CAN_CUG -1... 2
DISPLAY CLOSED USER GROUP DATA 2766.02 2 DISP_CUG -1... 2
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP 2768.06 2 ENTR_CUG -1... 2
MODIFY CLOSED USER GROUP AUTHORIZATION 2770.02 2 MOD_CUGAUTH -1... 2
CANCEL CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA 2898.63 2 CAN_CXCATFEA -1... 2
DISPLAY CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA 2899.61 2 DISP_CXCATFEA -1... 1
ENTER CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA 2901.63 2 ENTR_CXCATFEA -1... 2
CANCEL CENTREX CODE POINT 1338.64 2 CAN_CXCPT -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX CODE POINT 1336.72 2 CR_CXCPT -1... 19
DISPLAY CENTREX CODE POINT 1339.69 2 DISP_CXCPT -1... 5
MODIFY CENTREX CODE POINT 1337.72 2 MOD_CXCPT -1... 16
CANCEL CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1328.63 2 CAN_CXDN -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1327.67 2 CR_CXDN -1... 4
DISPLAY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1329.67 2 DISP_CXDN -1... 3
MODIFY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER 1747.67 2 MOD_CXDN -1... 4
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP 1318.65 2 CAN_CXGRP -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX GROUP 1317.69 2 CR_CXGRP -1... 7
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP DATA 1324.65 2 DISP_CXGRP -1... 3
MODIFY CENTREX GROUP 1319.69 2 MOD_CXGRP -1... 10
RECORD CENTREX GROUP 2953.03 2 REC_CXGRP -1... 12
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP LTG RELATIONSHIP 2900.61 2 DISP_CXGRPLTG -1... 1
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES 3821.02 2 CAN_CXGRPRES -1... 2
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES 3822.00 2 DISP_CXGRPRES -1... 3
ENTER CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES 3820.02 2 ENTR_CXGRPRES -1... 3
CANCEL CENTREX INTERCEPT 1341.66 2 CAN_CXINC -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX INTERCEPT 1340.67 2 CR_CXINC -1... 11
DISPLAY CENTREX INTERCEPT 1342.67 2 DISP_CXINC -1... 1
CANCEL CENTREX MDR DATA 3336.60 2 CAN_CXMDR -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTREX MDR DATA 1720.60 2 DISP_CXMDR -1... 1
ENTER CENTREX MDR DATA 3335.61 2 ENTR_CXMDR -1... 2
CANCEL CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 2941.67 2 CAN_CXPBX -1... 3
DISPLAY CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 2943.66 2 DISP_CXPBX -1... 3
ENTER CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 2945.72 2 ENTR_CXPBX -1... 9
CANCEL CENTREX PBX LINE 2942.66 2 CAN_CXPBXLN -1... 2
DISPLAY CENTREX PBX LINE 2944.63 2 DISP_CXPBXLN -1... 3
ENTER CENTREX PBX LINE 2946.67 2 ENTR_CXPBXLN -1... 8
DISPLAY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2326.06 2 DISP_CXSCFEA -1... 3
MODIFY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2325.06 2 MOD_CXSCFEA -1... 27
CANCEL CENTREX SECURITY 3995.60 2 CAN_CXSEC -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTREX SECURITY 3996.60 2 DISP_CXSEC -1... 1
ENTER CENTREX SECURITY 3994.60 2 ENTR_CXSEC -1... 1
CANCEL CENTREX SUBSCRIBER 1333.67 2 CAN_CXSUB -1... 3
DISPLAY CENTREX SUBSCRIBER 1331.65 2 DISP_CXSUB -1... 4
ENTER CENTREX SUBSCRIBER 1330.71 2 ENTR_CXSUB -1... 10
CANCEL CENTREX ZONE POINT 3785.03 2 CAN_CXZOPT -1... 1
CREATE CENTREX ZONE POINT 3784.03 2 CR_CXZOPT -1... 3
DISPLAY CENTREX ZONE POINT 3786.03 2 DISP_CXZOPT -1... 3
MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT 3787.03 2 MOD_CXZOPT -1... 4
RELEASE CYCLIC FILE 410.03 2 REL_CYCFILE -1... 1
START DATA BASE 3568.00 2 START_DB -1... 1
ACTIVATE DATABASE QUERY 4009.16 2 ACT_DBQUERY -1... 2
DISPLAY DATA BASE DESCRIPTION 1251.04 2 DISP_DBSIZE -1... 1
MODIFY DB-SIZE 1079.04 2 MOD_DBSIZE -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER 998.08 2 DIAG_DCR -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR 997.08 2 DIAG_DES -1... 1
ACTIVATE DESTINATION 1799.01 2 ACT_DEST -1... 1
CANCEL DESTINATION 5.02 2 CAN_DEST -1... 1
CREATE DESTINATION 25.87 2 CR_DEST -1... 7
DEACTIVATE DESTINATION 1803.01 2 DACT_DEST -1... 1
DISPLAY DESTINATION 193.07 2 DISP_DEST -1... 2
MODIFY DESTINATION 412.88 2 MOD_DEST -1... 8
RECORD DESTINATION 261.07 2 REC_DEST -1... 5
CANCEL DESTINATION CONTROL DATA 2957.01 2 CAN_DESTCNTL -1... 2
ENTER DESTINATION CONTROL DATA 2958.01 2 ENTR_DESTCNTL -1... 2
CONT-7 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
CANCEL DESTINATION DATA 1801.03 2 CAN_DESTDAT -1... 1
ENTER DESTINATION DATA 1806.06 2 ENTR_DESTDAT -1... 3
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA 1809.05 2 MOD_DESTDAT -1... 3
DISPLAY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION 900.01 2 DISP_DEVAUT -1... 1
MODIFY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION 899.02 2 MOD_DEVAUT -1... 1
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS STATISTICS 1118.00 2 DISP_DIAGSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITS CP 2162.49 2 DISP_DIGITCP -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITS GP 915.01 2 CAN_DIGITGP -1... 1
CREATE DIGITS GP 992.52 2 CR_DIGITGP -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITS GP 913.46 2 DISP_DIGITGP -1... 1
MODIFY DIGITS GP 1926.49 2 MOD_DIGITGP -1... 3
DISPLAY DISK 635.74 2 DISP_DISK -1... 6
PATCH DISK 634.75 2 PATCH_DISK -1... 1
STOP DISPLAY 379.70 2 STOP_DISP -1... 1
CONFIGURE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 393.88 2 CONF_DIU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 995.08 2 DIAG_DIU -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 356.88 2 STAT_DIU -1... 1
DISPLAY DATA LINK CONNECTION IDENTIFIER 2936.03 2 DISP_DLCI -1... 4
Create DLCI Entry 1.00 2 CR_DLCIE -1... 1
Delete DLCI Entry 1.00 2 DEL_DLCIE -1... 1
Display DLCI Entry 1.00 2 DISP_DLCIE -1... 2
Modify DLCI Entry 1.00 2 MOD_DLCIE -1... 1
Display DLCI Performance Data 1.00 2 DISP_DLCIPD -1... 1
Create DLCMI Entry 1.00 2 CR_DLCMIE -1... 1
Delete DLCMI Entry 1.00 2 DEL_DLCMIE -1... 1
Display DLCMI Entry 1.00 2 DISP_DLCMIE -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT 655.05 2 CAN_DLU -1... 1
CONFIGURE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 667.50 2 CONF_DLU -1... 2
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 652.83 2 CR_DLU -1... 5
DIAGNOSIS OF THE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1020.50 2 DIAG_DLU -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT 649.03 2 DISP_DLU -1... 1
EXTEND DIGITAL LINE UNIT 657.09 2 EXT_DLU -1... 4
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT 4097.01 2 MOD_DLU -1... 2
RECORD DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1056.04 2 REC_DLU -1... 4
REDUCE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 656.07 2 RED_DLU -1... 2
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU SYSTEMS 663.50 2 STAT_DLU -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4102.01 2 CAN_DLUEQ -1... 1
CONFIGURE DLU EQUIPMENT 670.50 2 CONF_DLUEQ -1... 3
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4100.01 2 CR_DLUEQ -1... 2
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-EQUIPMENT 1022.50 2 DIAG_DLUEQ -1... 2
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4103.01 2 DISP_DLUEQ -1... 2
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4101.01 2 MOD_DLUEQ -1... 2
DISPLAY OST OF DLU EQUIPMENT 665.50 2 STAT_DLUEQ -1... 3
TEST DLU LINE CIRCUIT 676.15 2 TEST_DLULC -1... 6
CANCEL DLU MODULE 654.11 2 CAN_DLUMOD -1... 2
CONFIGURE DLU MODULE 668.50 2 CONF_DLUMOD -1... 2
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE 653.03 2 CR_DLUMOD -1... 11
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-MODULES 1021.50 2 DIAG_DLUMOD -1... 1
DISPLAY DLU MODULE 651.09 2 DISP_DLUMOD -1... 2
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE 1041.11 2 MOD_DLUMOD -1... 3
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU MODULES 664.50 2 STAT_DLUMOD -1... 2
DISPLAY TRANSIENT DLU PATH DATA 849.04 2 DISP_DLUPD -1... 1
CONFIGURE DLU PORTS 669.10 2 CONF_DLUPORT -1... 2
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT PORT 661.13 2 DISP_DLUPORT -1... 2
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF DLU PORT 650.05 2 SEL_DLUPORT -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF DLU PORTS 666.07 2 STAT_DLUPORT -1... 2
ACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1942.00 2 ACT_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
DACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1944.00 2 DACT_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
DISP DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1946.00 2 DISP_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER 990.84 2 CAN_DN -1... 1
CREATE DIRECTORY NUMBER 988.86 2 CR_DN -1... 2
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA 192.83 2 DISP_DN -1... 3
MODIFY DIRECTORY NUMBER 989.86 2 MOD_DN -1... 3
RECORD DIRECTORY NUMBERS 2924.04 2 REC_DN -1... 10
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE 1050.46 2 DISP_DNATT -1... 1
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE 1049.54 2 ENTR_DNATT -1... 2
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2960.05 2 CAN_DNOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2961.04 2 DISP_DNOBS -1... 1
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2962.05 2 ENTR_DNOBS -1... 3
DISPLAY DESTINATION NUMBER POINTS 454.16 2 DISP_DNP -1... 1
Display DS1 Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_DS1IFATT -1... 2
Modify DS1 Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_DS1IFATT -1... 1
Display DS1 Phub Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_DS1PHATT -1... 4
Modify DS1 Phub Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_DS1PHATT -1... 2
CONT-8 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
Display DS3 Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_DS3ATT -1... 3
Modify DS3 Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_DS3ATT -1... 2
Display DS3 Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_DS3IFATT -1... 3
Modify DS3 Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_DS3IFATT -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3404.03 2 CAN_DSB -1... 1
CREATE DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3403.07 2 CR_DSB -1... 4
DISPLAY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3361.07 2 DISP_DSB -1... 4
MODIFY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3405.07 2 MOD_DSB -1... 5
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD 3362.04 2 STAT_DSB -1... 4
CANCEL DEVICE GROUP 1791.01 2 CAN_DVGRP -1... 1
CREATE DEVICEGROUP 1793.01 2 CR_DVGRP -1... 2
SELECT DEVICE GROUP 1798.01 2 SEL_DVGRP -1... 1
DISP DEVICE GROUP LINK 1794.00 2 DISP_DVGRPLNK -1... 1
MODIFY DEVICE GROUP LINK 1796.02 2 MOD_DVGRPLNK -1... 2
CANCEL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1016.02 2 CAN_EAL -1... 1
CREATE EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1015.03 2 CR_EAL -1... 1
DISPLAY EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1017.01 2 DISP_EAL -1... 1
CREATE EAL LEVEL 1019.02 2 CR_EALLVL -1... 1
DISPLAY EAL LEVEL 1018.01 2 DISP_EALLVL -1... 1
EXECUTE EDT SYSTEM 8 270.00 2 EXEC_EDTS8 -1... 4
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2338.00 2 CAN_ELMSG -1... 1
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2334.02 2 CR_ELMSG -1... 6
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2339.01 2 DISP_ELMSG -1... 2
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2335.02 2 MOD_ELMSG -1... 6
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2341.00 2 CAN_ELMSGERR -1... 1
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2336.01 2 CR_ELMSGERR -1... 1
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2342.00 2 DISP_ELMSGERR -1... 1
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2340.01 2 MOD_ELMSGERR -1... 1
RESET EMERGENCY OPERATION 647.01 2 RESET_EMERGOP -1... 1
MODIFY EQUIPMENT NUMBER 1860.19 2 MOD_EQN -1... 7
ACTIVATE EQUIPMENT TRAP 345.32 2 ACT_EQTRAP -1... 13
CANCEL EQUIPMENT TRAP 348.32 2 CAN_EQTRAP -1... 5
Display Error Notebook 1.00 2 DISP_ERRNB -1... 1
Reset Error Notebook 1.00 2 RSET_ERRNB -1... 1
DISPLAY ERROR STATISTIC DATA 2815.06 2 DISP_ERRSTDAT -1... 10
Save Error Symptoms 1.00 2 SAVE_ERRSYMP -1... 2
Display Ethernet Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_ETHSTAT -1... 3
Cancel Event Destination 1.00 2 CAN_EVDEST -1... 1
Display Event Destination 1.00 2 DISP_EVDEST -1... 1
Create Event Destination CP 1.00 2 CR_EVDESTCP -1... 3
Modify Event Destination CP 1.00 2 MOD_EVDESTCP -1... 2
Cancel Event Log on CP 1.00 2 CAN_EVLOGCP -1... 1
Create Event Log on CP 1.00 2 CR_EVLOGCP -1... 3
Display Event Log on CP 1.00 2 DISP_EVLOGCP -1... 1
Modify Event Log on CP 1.00 2 MOD_EVLOGCP -1... 2
Display Event Log Records on CP 1.00 2 DISP_EVRECCP -1... 2
RECORD EXCHANGE DATA 290.06 2 REC_EXCH -1... 4
INTERFACE DCP TO SSP 940.01 2 STAT_EXCH -1... 1
ENTER EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION 309.04 2 ENTR_EXCHID -1... 2
DISPLAY EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA 1030.07 2 DISP_EXDDAT -1... 1
ENTER EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA 1029.07 2 ENTR_EXDDAT -1... 3
CANCEL FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2792.11 2 CAN_FAICHA -1... 4
CREATE FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2794.11 2 CR_FAICHA -1... 5
DISPLAY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2797.11 2 DISP_FAICHA -1... 4
MODIFY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING 2800.11 2 MOD_FAICHA -1... 5
CANCEL FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2793.11 2 CAN_FAUCHA -1... 3
CREATE FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2795.11 2 CR_FAUCHA -1... 6
DISPLAY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2798.02 2 DISP_FAUCHA -1... 1
MODIFY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING 2801.11 2 MOD_FAUCHA -1... 6
START FILE CONTROL PROCESSING 279.10 2 START_FCP -1... 1
DISPLAY FCS COUNTERS 1231.03 2 DISP_FCS -1... 2
CANCEL FILE GROUP 1879.02 2 CAN_FGRP -1... 1
CREATE FILE GROUP 1880.04 2 CR_FGRP -1... 2
DISPLAY FILE GROUPS 1876.02 2 DISP_FGRP -1... 1
MODIFY FILE GROUP 2328.00 2 MOD_FGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1507.02 2 DISP_FGRPATT -1... 1
RESET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1878.01 2 RSET_FGRPATT -1... 1
SET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1506.06 2 SET_FGRPATT -1... 3
CANCEL FILE GROUP PASSWORD 3410.00 2 CAN_FGRPPW -1... 1
RSET FILE GROUP PASSWORD 1886.01 2 RSET_FGRPPW -1... 1
SET FILE GROUP PASSWORD 1887.02 2 SET_FGRPPW -1... 2
CONFIGURE FRAME HANDLER MODULE 2917.08 2 CONF_FHM -1... 1
DIAGNOSE FRAME HANDLER MODULE 2918.08 2 DIAG_FHM -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF FRAME HANDLER MODULE 2939.18 2 STAT_FHM -1... 1
CONT-9 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
Cancel NE Files 1.00 2 CAN_FILE -1... 1
CATALOG FILE 245.03 2 CAT_FILE -1... 2
CREATE FILE 237.06 2 CR_FILE -1... 1
DELETE FILE 235.04 2 DEL_FILE -1... 2
DISPLAY FILE 959.07 2 DISP_FILE -1... 2
Receive File from NE 1.00 2 RCV_FILE -1... 2
Send File to NE 1.00 2 SEND_FILE -1... 3
TRANSFER FILE 939.08 2 TRANS_FILE -1... 9
MODIFY FILE AUTHORIZATION 966.02 2 MOD_FILEAUT -1... 1
ENTER FILE PASSWORD 1891.00 2 ENTR_FILEPSW -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE SECURITY METHOD 3896.00 2 DISP_FILESEC -1... 1
SET FILE SECURITY METHOD 3895.00 2 SET_FILESEC -1... 1
Start File Transfer 1.00 2 START_FILET -1... 3
DISPLAY FILETEXT 2837.00 2 DISP_FILETEXT -1... 1
CANCEL FILE TRANSFERS 3246.00 2 CAN_FILETRF -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE TRANSFERS 2870.01 2 DISP_FILETRF -1... 1
STOP FILE TRANSFERS 3245.00 2 STOP_FILETRF -1... 1
DISPLAY FACILITY INPUT RECORDING RECORD 3104.05 2 DISP_FIRREC -1... 2
ACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT 958.02 2 ACT_FNS -1... 1
CANCEL FILE NAME SEGMENT 968.02 2 CAN_FNS -1... 1
DEACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT 1508.00 2 DACT_FNS -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE NAME SEGMENT 956.01 2 DISP_FNS -1... 1
ENTER FILE NAME SEGMENT 967.02 2 ENTR_FNS -1... 1
CANCEL FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2934.03 2 CAN_FRAMEHD -1... 1
CREATE FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2935.05 2 CR_FRAMEHD -1... 5
DISPLAY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2937.04 2 DISP_FRAMEHD -1... 1
MODIFY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE 2938.05 2 MOD_FRAMEHD -1... 3
REC FRAMEHANDLER 3078.00 2 REC_FRAMEHD -1... 4
Display File Security Configuration 1.00 2 DISP_FSCFG -1... 1
Modify File Security Configuration 1.00 2 MOD_FSCFG -1... 1
Cancel File Security File Group 1.00 2 CAN_FSFGRP -1... 1
Create File Security File Group 1.00 2 CR_FSFGRP -1... 3
Display File Security File Group 1.00 2 DISP_FSFGRP -1... 2
Modify File Security File Group 1.00 2 MOD_FSFGRP -1... 3
Modify File Security File Group Password 1.00 2 MOD_FSFGRPPW -1... 2
Reset File Security File Group Password 1.00 2 RSET_FSFGRPPW -1... 2
Cancel File Security Initiator Group 1.00 2 CAN_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Create File Security Initiator Group 1.00 2 CR_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Display File Security Initiator Group 1.00 2 DISP_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Modify File Security Initiator Group 1.00 2 MOD_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Cancel File Security Rule 1.00 2 CAN_FSRULE -1... 1
Create File Security Rule 1.00 2 CR_FSRULE -1... 3
Display File Security Rule 1.00 2 DISP_FSRULE -1... 2
Modify File Security Rule 1.00 2 MOD_FSRULE -1... 2
CANCEL FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL 1510.01 2 CAN_FUOMT -1... 1
CREATE FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL 1509.01 2 CR_FUOMT -1... 1
SELECT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINALS 1511.01 2 SEL_FUOMT -1... 1
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS 1512.00 2 DISP_FUOMTLNK -1... 1
MODIFY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS 1513.01 2 MOD_FUOMTLNK -1... 1
COPY FIRMWARE LOAD 4015.01 2 COPY_FWLOAD -1... 1
DISPLAY FIRMWARE LOAD 4013.01 2 DISP_FWLOAD -1... 2
LOAD FIRMWARE LOAD 4014.01 2 LOAD_FWLOAD -1... 2
ACTIVATE GENERATION 1204.03 2 ACT_GEN -1... 1
CANCEL GENERATION 1299.01 2 CAN_GEN -1... 1
COPY GENERATION 1302.06 2 COPY_GEN -1... 6
DISPLAY GENERATION 1298.02 2 DISP_GEN -1... 1
ENTER GENERATION 1081.03 2 ENTR_GEN -1... 3
MERGE GENERATION 2698.00 2 MERGE_GEN -1... 2
MODIFY GENERATION 2699.02 2 MOD_GEN -1... 2
UPDATE GENERATION 1202.00 2 UPD_GEN -1... 1
RECORD GRADE OF SERVICE 692.03 2 REC_GOS -1... 4
RECORD GROUP PROCESSOR 276.15 2 REC_GP -1... 4
CAN GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2834.30 2 CAN_GTCGPACD -1... 1
DISP GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2835.30 2 DISP_GTCGPACD -1... 1
ENTER GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2836.41 2 ENTR_GTCGPACD -1... 4
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 2617.30 2 CAN_GTCPT -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 1970.41 2 CR_GTCPT -1... 5
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 2641.50 2 DISP_GTCPT -1... 1
MERGE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 3122.41 2 MERGE_GTCPT -1... 32
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 1998.41 2 MOD_GTCPT -1... 4
SPLIT GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 3123.50 2 SPLIT_GTCPT -1... 2
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 2618.30 2 CAN_GTDEST -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 1971.41 2 CR_GTDEST -1... 16
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 2642.50 2 DISP_GTDEST -1... 1
CONT-10 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 1999.41 2 MOD_GTDEST -1... 16
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 2619.50 2 CAN_GTDIGTR -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 1972.41 2 CR_GTDIGTR -1... 4
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 2643.41 2 DISP_GTDIGTR -1... 3
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE 2660.41 2 MOD_GTDIGTR -1... 3
Display H323 Stack Configuration 1.00 2 DISP_H323SC -1... 1
Modify H323 Stack Configuration 1.00 2 MOD_H323SC -1... 1
Display H323 Security Configuration 1.00 2 DISP_H323SECC -1... 1
Modify H323 Security Configuration 1.00 2 MOD_H323SECC -1... 1
CANCEL HOLIDAY 55.16 2 CAN_HOLIDAY -1... 2
DISPLAY HOLIDAY 53.39 2 DISP_HOLIDAY -1... 1
ENTER HOLIDAY 54.16 2 ENTR_HOLIDAY -1... 2
CANCEL THE HOT OPERATION FEATURE 4194.00 2 CAN_HOPFEAT -1... 2
CREATE THE HOT OPERATION FEATURE 4193.01 2 CR_HOPFEAT -1... 3
DISPLAY THE HOT OPERATION FEATURES 4195.00 2 DISP_HOPFEAT -1... 1
MODIFY THE HOT OPERATION FEATURE 4196.01 2 MOD_HOPFEAT -1... 3
DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE OPERATION LINK 4197.00 2 STAT_HOPFEAT -1... 1
ACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3688.00 2 ACT_HTRCDEST -1... 1
DACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3689.00 2 DACT_HTRCDEST -1... 1
DISP HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3691.01 2 DISP_HTRCDEST -1... 1
MOD HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION 3690.01 2 MOD_HTRCDEST -1... 2
CANCEL IACHASTA OBJECT 2386.04 2 CAN_IACOBJ -1... 8
CREATE IACHASTA OBJECT 2385.04 2 CR_IACOBJ -1... 8
DISPLAY IACHASTA OBJECT 2387.04 2 DISP_IACOBJ -1... 9
ACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2397.04 2 ACT_IACRG -1... 4
DEACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2398.02 2 DACT_IACRG -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2399.02 2 DISP_IACRG -1... 1
CANCEL IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2389.04 2 CAN_IACRGPT -1... 2
CREATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2388.05 2 CR_IACRGPT -1... 7
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2391.04 2 DISP_IACRGPT -1... 4
MODIFY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2390.05 2 MOD_IACRGPT -1... 4
DISPLAY IACHASTA SCHEDULE 2441.02 2 DISP_IACSCHED -1... 1
MODIFY IACHASTA SCHEDULE 2440.02 2 MOD_IACSCHED -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA SETTINGS 2364.02 2 DISP_IACSET -1... 1
ENTER IACHASTA SETTINGS 2363.04 2 ENTR_IACSET -1... 1
DISPLAY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION 2453.02 2 DISP_IACTRADI -1... 1
MODIFY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION 2438.04 2 MOD_IACTRADI -1... 6
CANCEL INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST 2479.08 2 CAN_IADLST -1... 1
DISPLAY INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST 2480.08 2 DISP_IADLST -1... 1
ENTER INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST 2478.08 2 ENTR_IADLST -1... 1
ACTIVATE INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE 835.19 2 ACT_IAFEAT -1... 12
CANCEL INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE 836.18 2 CAN_IAFEAT -1... 1
DISPLAY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURES 833.18 2 DISP_IAFEAT -1... 1
MODIFY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE 3946.18 2 MOD_IAFEAT -1... 1
ACTIVATE INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 831.01 2 ACT_IAOPT -1... 1
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 832.01 2 CAN_IAOPT -1... 1
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 834.01 2 DISP_IAOPT -1... 1
RECORD ISDN BASIC ACCESS D-CHANNEL LOAD 2925.05 2 REC_IBADCH -1... 9
ACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY 3913.00 2 ACT_IBFS -1... 1
DEACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY 3914.00 2 DACT_IBFS -1... 1
DISPLAY INITIATOR BASED FILE SEC. STATUS 3915.00 2 DISP_IBFS -1... 1
Display ICMP Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_ICMPSTAT -1... 3
SWITCH OFF IDENTIFICATION TONE 2368.01 2 SWOFF_IDTONE -1... 1
SWITCH ON IDENTIFICATION TONE 46.04 2 SWON_IDTONE -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF LAYER 1 FOR ISDN PORTS 1591.01 2 STAT_ILAYER1 -1... 2
Create IMA Group 1.00 2 CR_IMAGRP -1... 1
Delete IMA Group 1.00 2 DEL_IMAGRP -1... 1
Display IMA Group Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_IMAGRPATT -1... 1
Modify IMA Group Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_IMAGRPATT -1... 1
Display IMA Group Current Statistics 1.00 2 DISPIMAGRPCSTAT -1... 1
Display IMA Group Interval Statistics 1.00 2 DISPIMAGRPISTAT -1... 1
Add IMA Link 1.00 2 ADD_IMALNK -1... 1
Delete IMA Link 1.00 2 DEL_IMALNK -1... 1
Display IMA Link Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_IMALNKATT -1... 1
Display IMA Link Current Statistics 1.00 2 DISPIMALNKCSTAT -1... 1
Display IMA Link Interval Statistics 1.00 2 DISPIMALNKISTAT -1... 1
CANCEL IN AUTHORIZATION 3804.02 2 CAN_INAUTH -1... 1
CREATE IN AUTHORIZATION 3803.02 2 CR_INAUTH -1... 2
DISPLAY IN AUTHORIZATION 3806.02 2 DISP_INAUTH -1... 2
MODIFY IN AUTHORIZATION 3805.02 2 MOD_INAUTH -1... 3
CANCEL INTERCEPT 82.13 2 CAN_INC -1... 4
CREATE INTERCEPT 81.13 2 CR_INC -1... 49
DISPLAY INTERCEPT 194.13 2 DISP_INC -1... 12
TEST INDAS ANNOUNCEMENT 4265.00 2 TEST_INDAN -1... 13
CONT-11 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DISPLAY INDICATION STATUS 1487.04 2 DISP_INDIC -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA 3244.04 2 DISP_INEXDATA -1... 1
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA 3243.04 2 ENTR_INEXDATA -1... 1
Cancel Initiator CP 1.00 2 CAN_INICP -1... 1
Create Initiator CP 1.00 2 CR_INICP -1... 3
Display Initiator CP 1.00 2 DISP_INICP -1... 2
Modify Initiator CP 1.00 2 MOD_INICP -1... 3
CANCEL IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3169.08 2 CAN_INOVLCO -1... 2
DISPLAY IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3167.08 2 DISP_INOVLCO -1... 2
ENTER IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3168.06 2 ENTR_INOVLCO -1... 3
CAN IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2413.03 2 CAN_INSCM -1... 1
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2411.09 2 CR_INSCM -1... 25
DISP IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2414.03 2 DISP_INSCM -1... 2
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2412.09 2 MOD_INSCM -1... 27
ACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 3673.02 2 ACT_INSCMREF -1... 9
CANCEL IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2417.03 2 CAN_INSCMREF -1... 8
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2415.03 2 CR_INSCMREF -1... 10
DEACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REF. 3674.02 2 DACT_INSCMREF -1... 8
DISPLAY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2418.03 2 DISP_INSCMREF -1... 7
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2416.03 2 MOD_INSCMREF -1... 9
ACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2818.08 2 ACT_INSLDAT -1... 1
CAN INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2820.08 2 CAN_INSLDAT -1... 1
DACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2831.08 2 DACT_INSLDAT -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2825.09 2 DISP_INSLDAT -1... 2
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2816.09 2 ENTR_INSLDAT -1... 9
END INSTALLATION RECOVERY 296.10 2 END_INSTALL -1... 1
RECORD INTELLIGENT NETWORK STATISTIC 3170.04 2 REC_INSTAT -1... 3
ENTER INSTALLATION GENERATION 1214.02 2 ENTR_INSTGEN -1... 2
TEST INTERNATIONAL TRUNK 1831.16 2 TEST_INTLTRK -1... 10
ACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2819.07 2 ACT_INTRIG -1... 1
CAN INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2821.05 2 CAN_INTRIG -1... 1
CR INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2823.50 2 CR_INTRIG -1... 20
DACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2824.05 2 DACT_INTRIG -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2826.09 2 DISP_INTRIG -1... 2
MOD INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2828.50 2 MOD_INTRIG -1... 22
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM 1133.00 2 TEST_IO -1... 1
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 3154.00 2 CAN_IOC -1... 1
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1100.00 2 CONF_IOC -1... 1
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 3158.00 2 CR_IOC -1... 1
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1111.00 2 DIAG_IOC -1... 2
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1119.00 2 DISP_IOC -1... 1
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1132.01 2 TEST_IOC -1... 1
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1092.06 2 CAN_IOP -1... 1
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1091.06 2 CONF_IOP -1... 1
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1105.10 2 CR_IOP -1... 5
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1114.06 2 DIAG_IOP -1... 3
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1120.06 2 DISP_IOP -1... 1
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1134.07 2 TEST_IOP -1... 1
CONFIGURE IOP GROUP 1411.01 2 CONF_IOPG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE IOP GROUP 1410.01 2 DIAG_IOPG -1... 1
TEST IOP GROUP 1409.01 2 TEST_IOPG -1... 1
DUMP IOP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3604.00 2 DMP_IOPIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3582.00 2 ACT_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3585.00 2 CAN_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3583.00 2 DACT_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3586.02 2 DISP_IOPPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3581.00 2 ENTR_IOPPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3584.00 2 UPD_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
ACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3588.00 2 ACT_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3590.00 2 CAN_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3589.00 2 DACT_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3591.02 2 DISP_IOPTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3587.00 2 ENTR_IOPTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL AN IP-ADDRESS 3794.00 2 CAN_IPADR -1... 1
CREATE AN IP-ADDRESS 3792.01 2 CR_IPADR -1... 1
DISPLAY IP-ADDRESSES 3795.00 2 DISP_IPADR -1... 1
MODIFY IP-ADDRESS 3793.01 2 MOD_IPADR -1... 2
Display IP Forwarding 1.00 2 DISP_IPFWD -1... 1
Modify IP Forwarding 1.00 2 MOD_IPFWD -1... 1
ACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1006.03 2 ACT_IPNUC -1... 1
CANCEL PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1005.03 2 CAN_IPNUC -1... 1
CREATE PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1008.16 2 CR_IPNUC -1... 10
DEACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1871.02 2 DACT_IPNUC -1... 1
DISP PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1007.16 2 DISP_IPNUC -1... 4
CONT-12 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
MOD ISDN P DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1004.16 2 MOD_IPNUC -1... 2
Modify IP over ATM Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_IPOAATT -1... 1
Display IP over ATM Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_IPOAIFA -1... 4
Modify IP over ATM Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_IPOAIFA -1... 1
Create IP over ATM Layer 1.00 2 CR_IPOAL -1... 1
Delete IP over ATM Layer 1.00 2 DEL_IPOAL -1... 1
Display IP over ATM Layer 1.00 2 DISP_IPOAL -1... 6
Create IP over FR Layer 1.00 2 CR_IPOFRL -1... 1
Delete IP over FR Layer 1.00 2 DEL_IPOFRL -1... 1
Display IP over FR Layer 1.00 2 DISP_IPOFRL -1... 1
Modify IP over FR Layer 1.00 2 MOD_IPOFRL -1... 1
Create IP over MLPPP 1.00 2 CR_IPOMLPPP -1... 1
Display IP over MLPPP 1.00 2 DISP_IPOMLPPP -1... 1
Modify IP over MLPPP 1.00 2 MOD_IPOMLPPP -1... 1
Create IP Pool Entry 1.00 2 CR_IPPOOLE -1... 4
Delete IP Pool Entry 1.00 2 DEL_IPPOOLE -1... 1
Modify IP Pool Entry 1.00 2 MOD_IPPOOLE -1... 5
Create IP Route 1.00 2 CR_IPROUTE -1... 4
Delete IP Route 1.00 2 DEL_IPROUTE -1... 2
Display IP Route 1.00 2 DISP_IPROUTE -1... 5
Modify IP Route 1.00 2 MOD_IPROUTE -1... 4
Display IP Routing Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_IPRSTAT -1... 3
TEST OF ISDN SUBSCRIBER BASIC ACCESS 1233.10 2 TEST_ISUB -1... 5
CANCEL JOB 115.00 2 CAN_JOB -1... 1
CONTINUE JOB 116.01 2 CONT_JOB -1... 1
DISPLAY JOB 34.02 2 DISP_JOB -1... 1
STOP JOB 113.00 2 STOP_JOB -1... 1
DISPLAY JOSIT DATA 1904.00 2 DISP_JOSITDAT -1... 1
CANCEL KEYWORD 818.14 2 CAN_KEYWORD -1... 4
DISPLAY KEYWORD 819.14 2 DISP_KEYWORD -1... 4
ENTER KEYWORD 817.16 2 ENTR_KEYWORD -1... 6
Display L2TP Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_L2TPATT -1... 2
Modify L2TP Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_L2TPATT -1... 1
Display L2TP Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_L2TPIFATT -1... 4
Modify L2TP Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_L2TPIFATT -1... 1
Display Line Alarm Configuration Profile 1.00 2 DISP_LACNFPRF -1... 2
Modify Line Alarm Configuration Profile 1.00 2 MOD_LACNFPRF -1... 4
CONFIGURE LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1858.00 2 CONF_LAU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1859.00 2 DIAG_LAU -1... 2
TEST LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1862.00 2 TEST_LAU -1... 1
Display Line Configuration Profile 1.00 2 DISP_LCNFPRF -1... 3
Modify Line Configuration Profile 1.00 2 MOD_LCNFPRF -1... 3
Modify Line Configuration Profile 1.00 2 MOD_LCNFPRFA -1... 2
Display Line Common Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_LCOMATT -1... 2
Display Line Common Performance 1.00 2 DISP_LCOMP -1... 1
MODIFY LINE CIRCUIT VARIANT 599.01 2 MOD_LCVAR -1... 2
DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR 4278.00 2 DISP_LDFACTOR -1... 4
ENTER LOAD FACTOR 4277.00 2 ENTR_LDFACTOR -1... 3
TEST LINE CIRCUIT 62.13 2 TEST_LIC -1... 4
DISPLAY ENHANCED STATUS OF SUB AND PBXLN 2983.07 2 STAT_LINE -1... 5
TEST LINE 1396.11 2 TEST_LINE -1... 5
DISPLAY LINE DATA 3712.15 2 DISP_LINEDATA -1... 5
DISP LINE THRESHOLDS 1888.00 2 DISP_LINETHR -1... 1
ENTER LINE THRESHOLDS 2547.00 2 ENTR_LINETHR -1... 1
DISPLAY LISTENER TO ANNOUNCEMENT 843.01 2 DISP_LISTTOAN -1... 1
CANCEL LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 2557.16 2 CAN_LMBLK -1... 10
ENTER LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 2558.16 2 ENTR_LMBLK -1... 16
DISPLAY LINE LOCKOUT 359.15 2 DISP_LNLCKOUT -1... 3
CANCEL LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3865.00 2 CAN_LNPDAT -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3866.00 2 DISP_LNPDAT -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3867.00 2 ENTR_LNPDAT -1... 1
MODIFY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3868.00 2 MOD_LNPDAT -1... 1
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3893.49 2 CAN_LNPTCPT -1... 1
CREATE LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3891.49 2 CR_LNPTCPT -1... 2
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3894.49 2 DISP_LNPTCPT -1... 1
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3892.49 2 MOD_LNPTCPT -1... 1
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3887.49 2 ACT_LNPTPROF -1... 1
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3889.49 2 CAN_LNPTPROF -1... 1
CREATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3885.52 2 CR_LNPTPROF -1... 2
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3888.49 2 DACT_LNPTPROF -1... 1
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3890.52 2 DISP_LNPTPROF -1... 2
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3886.52 2 MOD_LNPTPROF -1... 3
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3882.49 2 ACT_LNPTTYP -1... 2
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3883.49 2 DACT_LNPTTYP -1... 1
CONT-13 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DISPLAY STATUS OF LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3884.49 2 DISP_LNPTTYP -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT 1034.00 2 DISP_LOCDIAL -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT 1033.00 2 ENTR_LOCDIAL -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCATION DIGITS 419.01 2 DISP_LOCDIG -1... 1
ENTER LOCATION DIGITS 418.01 2 ENTR_LOCDIG -1... 1
CANCEL LOCKING RESTRICTION 3080.00 2 CAN_LOCKRST -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCKING RESTRICTION 3082.00 2 DISP_LOCKRST -1... 1
ENTER LOCKING RESTRICTION 3085.00 2 ENTR_LOCKRST -1... 1
RESET LOG FUNCTION 1920.00 2 RSET_LOG -1... 1
SET LOG FUNCTION 366.03 2 SET_LOG -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF LOG 368.00 2 STAT_LOG -1... 1
DISPLAY LOG ATTRIBUTES 741.00 2 DISP_LOGATT -1... 1
CANCEL LOGGING EVENTS 3081.01 2 CAN_LOGEVENT -1... 1
DISPLAY LOGGING EVENT 3083.00 2 DISP_LOGEVENT -1... 1
ENTER LOGGING EVENTS 3086.01 2 ENTR_LOGEVENT -1... 1
MODIFY LOG FILE 1919.01 2 MOD_LOGFILE -1... 3
CANCEL LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3088.00 2 CAN_LOGOBJ -1... 1
DISPLAY LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3089.00 2 DISP_LOGOBJ -1... 1
ENTER LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3090.00 2 ENTR_LOGOBJ -1... 2
LOOPBACK TEST OF ISDN BA SUBSCRIBER 1228.07 2 TEST_LOOPBA -1... 4
SEND LOOPBACK 1786.10 2 SEND_LOOPBACK -1... 3
START LINE TEST 1395.14 2 START_LTEST -1... 5
DISPLAY LINE TEST THRESHOLDS 2851.02 2 DISP_LTESTTHR -1... 1
MODIFY LINE TEST THRESHOLDS 2854.00 2 MOD_LTESTTHR -1... 10
CANCEL LTG 181.75 2 CAN_LTG -1... 1
CONFIGURE LINE TRUNK GROUP 929.17 2 CONF_LTG -1... 2
CREATE LINE TRUNK GROUP 163.95 2 CR_LTG -1... 2
DIAGNOSE LTG 980.03 2 DIAG_LTG -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG 175.73 2 DISP_LTG -1... 1
MODIFY LINE TRUNK GROUP 182.93 2 MOD_LTG -1... 2
RECORD LINE TRUNK GROUP 275.15 2 REC_LTG -1... 4
DISPLAY STATE OF LTG 917.17 2 STAT_LTG -1... 1
ACTIVATE LTG BREAKPOINT 786.14 2 ACT_LTGBPT -1... 1
CANCEL LTG BREAKPOINT 788.01 2 CAN_LTGBPT -1... 1
DELETE LTG BREAKPOINT 789.04 2 DEL_LTGBPT -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG BREAKPOINT 787.04 2 DISP_LTGBPT -1... 1
DUMP LTG BREAKPOINT 3510.00 2 DMP_LTGBPT -1... 1
ENTER LTG BREAKPOINT 785.09 2 ENTR_LTGBPT -1... 4
DUMP LTG ERROR NOTEBOOK 430.00 2 DMP_LTGENB -1... 1
ALLOW LTG FAULT REPORT 922.17 2 ALLOW_LTGFRPT -1... 1
DUMP LTG MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3603.01 2 DMP_LTGIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3571.01 2 ACT_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3574.00 2 CAN_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3572.01 2 DACT_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3575.03 2 DISP_LTGPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3570.00 2 ENTR_LTGPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3573.00 2 UPD_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG RESOURCES 2947.03 2 DISP_LTGRES -1... 1
ACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3577.01 2 ACT_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3579.01 2 CAN_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3578.01 2 DACT_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3580.03 2 DISP_LTGTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3576.01 2 ENTR_LTGTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL LINE TRUNK UNIT 184.81 2 CAN_LTU -1... 1
CREATE LINE TRUNK UNIT 164.13 2 CR_LTU -1... 5
DISPLAY LINE TRUNK UNIT 199.73 2 DISP_LTU -1... 1
EXTEND LINE TRUNK UNIT 195.83 2 EXT_LTU -1... 2
REDUCE LINE TRUNK UNIT 196.83 2 RED_LTU -1... 2
STOP MALICIOUS CALL ID 268.06 2 STOP_MACID -1... 1
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL CONNECTIONS 675.04 2 DISP_MAL -1... 4
SELECT DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL DATA 2763.00 2 SEL_MAL -1... 1
CANCEL MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA 672.02 2 CAN_MALAD -1... 1
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA 658.00 2 DISP_MALAD -1... 1
ENTER MALICIOUS CALL ADMIN. DATA 674.01 2 ENTR_MALAD -1... 1
DISPLAY HELD MALCIOUS CALL CONNECTIONS 826.03 2 DISP_MALCON -1... 7
ACTIVATE MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2463.00 2 ACT_MASSC -1... 1
CANCEL MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2462.00 2 CAN_MASSC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2465.00 2 DACT_MASSC -1... 1
DISPLAY MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2466.01 2 DISP_MASSC -1... 1
ENTER MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2461.03 2 ENTR_MASSC -1... 2
MODIFY MASS-CALLING DESTINATIONS 2464.04 2 MOD_MASSC -1... 3
CONFIGURE MATRIX CONTROL 4081.17 2 CONF_MATC -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MATRIX CONTROL 4091.00 2 DIAG_MATC -1... 1
CONFIGURE MATRIX MODULE 4082.17 2 CONF_MATM -1... 2
CONT-14 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DIAGNOSE MATRIX MODULE 4092.00 2 DIAG_MATM -1... 1
Display Medium Attachment Unit Table 1.00 2 DISP_MAUTAB -1... 5
CONFIGURE MB 923.60 2 CONF_MB -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER 977.00 2 DIAG_MB -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE BUFFER 330.00 2 DISP_MB -1... 1
MODIFY MESSAGE BUFFER 3929.01 2 MOD_MB -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF MESSAGE BUFFER 919.10 2 STAT_MB -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB ATM INTERFACE 3880.00 2 CONF_MBIA -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER ATM INTERFACE 3879.00 2 DIAG_MBIA -1... 1
CONFIGURE MBD INTERFACE ETHERNET 4213.21 2 CONF_MBIE -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER ETHERNET IF 4221.00 2 DIAG_MBIE -1... 1
CONFIGURE MBIE CHANNEL 4248.21 2 CONF_MBIECH -1... 1
DISPLAY MBIE CHANNEL 4247.00 2 DISP_MBIECH -1... 1
MODIFY MBIE CHANNEL 4246.00 2 MOD_MBIECH -1... 1
DISPLAY STATE OF MBIECH 4249.21 2 STAT_MBIECH -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB HDLC INTERFACE 3881.00 2 CONF_MBIH -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER HDLC INTERFACE 3878.00 2 DIAG_MBIH -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB UNIT LTG 924.60 2 CONF_MBUL -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MB UNIT FOR LINE TRUNK GROUP 978.00 2 DIAG_MBUL -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB UNIT SPACE GROUP CONTROL 925.60 2 CONF_MBUS -1... 2
DIAGNOSE UNIT SWITCH GROUP CONTROL 979.00 2 DIAG_MBUS -1... 1
CONFIGURE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3807.10 2 CONF_MCT -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3809.08 2 DIAG_MCT -1... 1
DISP. STATUS MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3808.08 2 STAT_MCT -1... 1
DISPLAY MAGNETIC DISK 961.01 2 DISP_MD -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC DISK 962.01 2 INIT_MD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1093.01 2 CONF_MDD -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1115.01 2 DIAG_MDD -1... 3
TEST MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1137.01 2 TEST_MDD -1... 1
CONTINUE MDD-ACTIVATION 1203.00 2 CONT_MDDACT -1... 1
STOP ACTIVATION OF DISC 1215.00 2 STOP_MDDACT -1... 1
ACTIVATE MDD AUDIT 2984.00 2 ACT_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
DEACTIVATE MDD AUDIT 2985.00 2 DACT_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
DISPLAY MDD AUDIT ATTRIBUTES 2988.00 2 DISP_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
MODIFY DATA FOR ROUTINE MDD AUDIT 2992.00 2 MOD_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
CANCEL MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3682.01 2 CAN_MDTOG -1... 1
CONFIGURE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3612.10 2 CONF_MDTOG -1... 1
CREATE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3681.01 2 CR_MDTOG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3614.08 2 DIAG_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3683.01 2 DISP_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3613.08 2 STAT_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGE METERS 112.78 2 DISP_MET -1... 3
EDIT CHARGE METER 517.77 2 EDIT_MET -1... 4
REGENERATE CHARGE METER 518.03 2 REG_MET -1... 1
SAVE CHARGE METER 68.76 2 SAVE_MET -1... 2
DISPLAY METER ADMINISTRATION DATA 360.03 2 DISP_METADM -1... 1
ENTER METER ADMINISTRATION DATA 1010.10 2 ENTR_METADM -1... 4
DISPLAY METER SAVE TIMES 69.01 2 DISP_METSAV -1... 1
ENTER METER SAVE TIMES 601.01 2 ENTR_METSAV -1... 1
MEASURE MFC-SIGNAL 1789.10 2 MEAS_MFC -1... 5
SEND MULTI FREQUENCY CODE SIGNAL 1787.10 2 SEND_MFC -1... 4
Create MG Entry 1.00 2 CR_MGE -1... 1
Delete MG Entry 1.00 2 DEL_MGE -1... 1
Display MG Entries 1.00 2 DISP_MGE -1... 1
Modify MG Entry 1.00 2 MOD_MGE -1... 1
CANCEL MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE 4174.00 2 CAN_MGIF -1... 1
CREATE MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE 4168.03 2 CR_MGIF -1... 3
DISPLAY MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE 4170.03 2 DISP_MGIF -1... 2
MODIFY MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE 4172.03 2 MOD_MGIF -1... 2
STATE OF MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE 4180.00 2 STAT_MGIF -1... 1
CANCEL MEDIA GATEWAY LINK 4175.03 2 CAN_MGLINK -1... 1
CREATE MEDIA GATEWAY LINK 4169.03 2 CR_MGLINK -1... 2
DISPLAY MEDIA GATEWAY LINK 4171.03 2 DISP_MGLINK -1... 2
MODIFY MEDIA GATEWAY LINK 4173.03 2 MOD_MGLINK -1... 2
Create MG Service Selection Entry 1.00 2 CR_MGSERVSELE -1... 1
Delete MG Service Selection Entry 1.00 2 DEL_MGSERVSELE -1... 1
Display MG Service Selection Entry 1.00 2 DISP_MGSERVSELE -1... 1
Modify MG Service Selection Entry 1.00 2 MOD_MGSERVSELE -1... 1
Display MLPPP Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_MLPPPIFA -1... 7
Modify MLPPP Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_MLPPPIFA -1... 1
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2331.00 2 DISP_MO -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2332.00 2 INIT_MO -1... 2
MOUNT MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2330.00 2 MOUNT_MO -1... 2
RESET MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2333.00 2 RSET_MO -1... 1
CONT-15 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
ACTIVATE METER OBSERVATION 71.76 2 ACT_MOBS -1... 3
CANCEL METER OBSERVATION 72.75 2 CAN_MOBS -1... 3
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION 110.75 2 DISP_MOBS -1... 2
SELECT METER OBSERVATION 858.73 2 SEL_MOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION DATA 993.06 2 DISP_MOBSDAT -1... 4
CANCEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2356.00 2 CAN_MOD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2357.00 2 CONF_MOD -1... 1
CREATE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2358.00 2 CR_MOD -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2359.00 2 DIAG_MOD -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2360.00 2 DISP_MOD -1... 1
TEST MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2361.00 2 TEST_MOD -1... 1
DUMP MODULE MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 4137.00 2 DMP_MODIMDMP -1... 2
SELECT MESSAGE 1533.02 2 SEL_MSG -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE LINK 1527.01 2 DISP_MSGLNK -1... 2
RESET MESSAGE LINK 1526.02 2 RSET_MSGLNK -1... 2
SET MESSAGE LINK 1525.03 2 SET_MSGLNK -1... 2
CANCEL MESSAGE GROUP 1531.02 2 CAN_MSGRP -1... 1
CREATE MESSAGE GROUP 1530.03 2 CR_MSGRP -1... 2
SELECT MESSAGE GROUP 1532.02 2 SEL_MSGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE GROUP LINK 1529.01 2 DISP_MSGRPLNK -1... 1
SET MESSAGE GROUP LINK 1537.05 2 SET_MSGRPLNK -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE 965.01 2 DISP_MT -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC TAPE 964.01 2 INIT_MT -1... 2
REWIND MAGNETIC TAPE 963.01 2 REWIND_MT -1... 1
CONNECT METALLIC TEST ACCESS 2838.08 2 CONN_MTA -1... 1
DISPLAY METALLIC TEST ACCESS ERROR LIST 1612.02 2 DISP_MTAERR -1... 1
CANCEL MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1096.01 2 CAN_MTD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1095.00 2 CONF_MTD -1... 1
CREATE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1107.03 2 CR_MTD -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1116.00 2 DIAG_MTD -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 2362.00 2 DISP_MTD -1... 1
TEST MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1136.01 2 TEST_MTD -1... 1
CANCEL MULTIPLEXER 999.03 2 CAN_MUX -1... 1
CREATE MULTIPLEXER 827.01 2 CR_MUX -1... 1
DISPLAY MULTIPLEXER 828.01 2 DISP_MUX -1... 1
CANCEL MULTIPLEXER MASTER B 3108.01 2 CAN_MUXMB -1... 1
CREATE MULTIPLEXER MASTER B 3109.00 2 CR_MUXMB -1... 1
DISPLAY NOTE BOOK 505.71 2 DISP_NBOOK -1... 2
CANCEL NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1768.00 2 CAN_NEATSADR -1... 1
CREATE NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1770.01 2 CR_NEATSADR -1... 2
DISPLAY NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1772.00 2 DISP_NEATSADR -1... 1
MODIFY NEATT TRANSPORT SYSTEM ADDRESS 1775.01 2 MOD_NEATSADR -1... 2
Create Network PPP Layer 1.00 2 CR_NETPPPL -1... 1
Delete Network PPP Layer 1.00 2 DEL_NETPPPL -1... 1
Display Network PPP Layer 1.00 2 DISP_NETPPPL -1... 7
CANCEL NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL 1909.05 2 CAN_NMCNTL -1... 1
DISPLAY NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL DATA 376.93 2 DISP_NMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROLS 325.97 2 ENTR_NMCNTL -1... 3
ACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2806.02 2 ACT_NTMINFO -1... 1
CAN NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2807.02 2 CAN_NTMINFO -1... 1
CR NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO 2808.03 2 CR_NTMINFO -1... 4
DACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2809.01 2 DACT_NTMINFO -1... 1
DISP NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2810.13 2 DISP_NTMINFO -1... 7
ENTER NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2811.13 2 ENTR_NTMINFO -1... 4
MOD NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO 2812.07 2 MOD_NTMINFO -1... 2
ACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 838.04 2 ACT_NUC -1... 4
CANCEL NAILED-UP CONNECTION 839.02 2 CAN_NUC -1... 1
CREATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 837.16 2 CR_NUC -1... 9
DEACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1872.03 2 DACT_NUC -1... 3
DISPLAY NAILED-UP CONNECTION 840.13 2 DISP_NUC -1... 6
MODIFY NAILED-UP CONNECTION 841.16 2 MOD_NUC -1... 8
Add OAM Connection 1.00 2 ADD_OAMCONN -1... 1
Delete OAM Connection 1.00 2 DEL_OAMCONN -1... 1
Modify OAM Connection 1.00 2 MOD_OAMCONN -1... 1
Display OAM Connection Table 1.00 2 DISP_OAMCONNTAB -1... 1
CONFIGURE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 1811.20 2 CONF_OCANEQ -1... 1
DIAGNOSE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNCEM. EQU. 1825.10 2 DIAG_OCANEQ -1... 1
DISP OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 3616.03 2 DISP_OCANEQ -1... 3
STATUS OF OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 1826.29 2 STAT_OCANEQ -1... 1
CANCEL OCANEQ VARIANT 3050.05 2 CAN_OCAVAR -1... 1
DISPLAY OCANEQ VARIANT 2892.04 2 DISP_OCAVAR -1... 1
ENTER OCANEQ VARIANT 2894.04 2 ENTR_OCAVAR -1... 1
ACTIVATE OCT LOADER 3789.01 2 ACT_OCTLOAD -1... 3
DEACTIVATE OCT LOADER 3791.01 2 DACT_OCTLOAD -1... 2
CONT-16 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DISPLAY OCT LOADER 3790.01 2 DISP_OCTLOAD -1... 2
ACTIVATE ODR 3671.02 2 ACT_ODR -1... 1
CANCEL ODR 3670.00 2 CAN_ODR -1... 1
CREATE ODR 3667.00 2 CR_ODR -1... 1
DEACTIVATE ODR 3672.00 2 DACT_ODR -1... 1
DISPLAY ODR 3669.01 2 DISP_ODR -1... 1
MODIFY ODR 3668.00 2 MOD_ODR -1... 2
START O&M PROCESSES 278.10 2 START_OM -1... 1
CANCEL O&M TERMINAL 1363.03 2 CAN_OMT -1... 1
CONFIGURE O&M TERMINAL 1362.02 2 CONF_OMT -1... 1
CREATE O&M TERMINAL 1361.04 2 CR_OMT -1... 1
DIAGNOSE O&M TERMINAL 1360.01 2 DIAG_OMT -1... 2
DISPLAY O&M TERMINAL 3032.02 2 DISP_OMT -1... 1
MODIFY O&M TERMINAL 3034.01 2 MOD_OMT -1... 2
TEST O&M TERMINAL 1359.02 2 TEST_OMT -1... 1
ACTIVATE CSSUB CONDITION MONITORING 2421.02 2 ACT_OPRCOND -1... 1
DISPLAY CSSUB CONDITION REPORT 2422.03 2 DISP_OPRCOND -1... 1
DISPLAY CSSUB CONFIGURATION REPORT 2429.03 2 DISP_OPRCONF -1... 3
DISPLAY CSSUB CTYPE PERF. REPORT 2425.04 2 DISP_OPRCTP -1... 3
DISPLAY CSSUB PERFORMANCE REPORT 2430.03 2 DISP_OPRPERF -1... 3
CANCEL ORIGINATION DATA 2374.15 2 CAN_ORIGDAT -1... 2
CREATE ORIGINATION DATA 2373.15 2 CR_ORIGDAT -1... 4
DISPLAY ORIGINATION DATA 2376.15 2 DISP_ORIGDAT -1... 4
MODIFY ORIGINATION DATA 2375.14 2 MOD_ORIGDAT -1... 1
CANCEL OSI ADDRESSES 1863.00 2 CAN_OSIADR -1... 1
CREATE OSI ADDRESSES 1864.04 2 CR_OSIADR -1... 2
DISPLAY OSI ADDRESSES 1857.00 2 DISP_OSIADR -1... 1
MODIFY OSI ADDRESSES 1865.04 2 MOD_OSIADR -1... 3
DISPLAY OSITIMER 3797.00 2 DISP_OSITIMER -1... 1
ENTER OSITIMER 3796.00 2 ENTR_OSITIMER -1... 2
ACTIVATE OSI TRACER 1903.05 2 ACT_OSITRAC -1... 7
DISPLAY OSI TRACE DATA 1905.02 2 DISP_OSITRAC -1... 1
DUMP OSI TRACE DATA 1906.05 2 DMP_OSITRAC -1... 3
CANCEL OPEN SERVICE PLATFORM 4233.00 2 CAN_OSP -1... 1
CREATE OPEN SERVICE PLATFORM 4232.00 2 CR_OSP -1... 1
DISPLAY OPEN SERVICE PLATFORM 4234.00 2 DISP_OSP -1... 1
DISPLAY OS RESOURCE DATA 3627.00 2 DISP_OSRES -1... 2
ACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION 949.00 2 ACT_OUTDIV -1... 2
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION 950.00 2 DEC_OUTDIV -1... 1
ACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1535.00 2 ACT_OUTSUP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1721.02 2 DACT_OUTSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1536.00 2 DISP_OUTSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY OVERLOAD 400.22 2 DISP_OVLD -1... 1
CANCEL PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2720.00 2 CAN_PA -1... 1
CREATE PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2719.01 2 CR_PA -1... 1
DISPLAY PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2722.00 2 DISP_PA -1... 1
TEST PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 1708.02 2 TEST_PA -1... 1
DISPLAY PA CHANNEL STATUS 1910.01 2 DISP_PACHSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY PA FAULT 1869.02 2 DISP_PAFAULT -1... 3
DISPLAY PA LINK STATISTICS 1777.01 2 DISP_PASTAT -1... 1
CANCEL PBX 105.85 2 CAN_PBX -1... 2
CREATE PBX 104.19 2 CR_PBX -1...210
DISPLAY PBX 170.19 2 DISP_PBX -1... 14
MODIFY PBX 551.18 2 MOD_PBX -1...274
RECORD PBX 342.06 2 REC_PBX -1... 12
CANCEL PBX DDI NUMBER 3999.02 2 CAN_PBXDDINO -1... 2
DISPLAY PBX DDI NUMBER 3998.02 2 DISP_PBXDDINO -1... 1
ENTER PBX DDI NUMBER 3997.02 2 ENTR_PBXDDINO -1... 2
CANCEL PBX LINE 77.12 2 CAN_PBXLN -1... 2
CREATE PBX LINE 76.18 2 CR_PBXLN -1...189
DISPLAY PBX LINE 168.27 2 DISP_PBXLN -1... 11
MODIFY PBX LINE 1039.22 2 MOD_PBXLN -1...118
DISPLAY STATUS OF PBX LINE 537.87 2 STAT_PBXLN -1... 4
TEST PBX LINE 1902.16 2 TEST_PBXLN -1... 12
ACTIVATE PBX TRAP 1057.32 2 ACT_PBXTRAP -1... 13
CANCEL PBX TRAP 1059.32 2 CAN_PBXTRAP -1... 4
DISPLAY PCM ALARM COUNTER 695.55 2 DISP_PCMAC -1... 2
CANCEL PACKET CONTROL UNIT 4228.00 2 CAN_PCU -1... 1
CREATE PACKET CONTROL UNIT 4227.00 2 CR_PCU -1... 1
DISPLAY PACKET CONTROL UNIT 4231.00 2 DISP_PCU -1... 1
MODIFY PACKET CONTROL UNIT 4235.00 2 MOD_PCU -1... 1
Display PCU Configuration Parameters 1.00 2 DISP_PCUCNFP -1... 1
Modify PCU Configuration Parameters 1.00 2 MOD_PCUCNFP -1... 1
STATUS CALL CONTROL LTG TO PCU RELATION 4240.00 2 STAT_PCUREL -1... 5
CONT-17 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DISPLAY PDC CHARACTERISTICS 1900.09 2 DISP_PDCCHR -1... 3
ENTER PDC CHARACTERISTICS 1901.21 2 ENTR_PDCCHR -1... 21
DISPLAY PDC CONTROLS 2608.17 2 DISP_PDCCNTL -1... 2
ENTER PDC CONTROLS 2609.17 2 ENTR_PDCCNTL -1... 12
ACTIVATE PDC FEATURE 1913.00 2 ACT_PDCFEA -1... 1
DEACTIVATE PDC FEATURE 1914.00 2 DACT_PDCFEA -1... 1
DISPLAY PDC FEATURE INFORMATIONS 1915.00 2 DISP_PDCFEA -1... 1
CANCEL PRIMARY DIGITAL CARRIER LINK 3321.06 2 CAN_PDCLNK -1... 1
CREATE PRIMARY DIGITAL CARRIER LINK 3320.06 2 CR_PDCLNK -1... 2
DISPLAY PRIMARY DIGITAL CARRIER LINK 3360.06 2 DISP_PDCLNK -1... 1
DISPLAY PDC PERFORMANCE DATA 1916.14 2 DISP_PDCPERF -1... 9
DISPLAY PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2733.08 2 DISP_PDCTHR -1... 1
RESET PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2734.00 2 RSET_PDCTHR -1... 1
SET PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2736.08 2 SET_PDCTHR -1... 1
CANCEL PHONMEET GROUP DATA 1943.07 2 CAN_PHONMEET -1... 1
DISPLAY PHONMEET DATA 1948.07 2 DISP_PHONMEET -1... 2
ENTER PHONMEET GROUP DATA 1949.07 2 ENTR_PHONMEET -1... 2
MODIFY PHONMEET GROUP DATA 1951.07 2 MOD_PHONMEET -1... 3
Create Packet Hub Domain 1.00 2 CR_PHUBD -1... 2
Delete Packet Hub Domain 1.00 2 DEL_PHUBD -1... 1
Display Packet Hub Domain 1.00 2 DISP_PHUBD -1... 3
Modify Packet Hub Domain 1.00 2 MOD_PHUBD -1... 2
DUMP PIO STATISTICS 2580.00 2 DMP_PIOSTC -1... 1
RESET PIO STATISTICS 2582.00 2 RSET_PIOSTC -1... 1
Display PLCP Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_PLCPATT -1... 1
DISPLAY PBX MAINTENANCE CONTROL 1048.11 2 DISP_PMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER PBX MAINTENANCE CONTROLS 1040.11 2 ENTR_PMCNTL -1... 2
CONFIGURE PORT 807.20 2 CONF_PORT -1... 2
DISPLAY PORT 201.75 2 DISP_PORT -1... 2
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF PORT 600.01 2 SEL_PORT -1... 3
DISPLAY STATUS OF PORT 353.88 2 STAT_PORT -1... 2
ACTIVATE PORT TRACER 2369.15 2 ACT_PORTTRAC -1... 5
DEACTIVATE PORT TRACER 2392.00 2 DACT_PORTTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY PORT TRACER 2370.00 2 DISP_PORTTRAC -1... 1
DUMP PORT TRACER 2372.00 2 DMP_PORTTRAC -1... 1
Connect PPP to MLPPP 1.00 2 CONN_PPPML -1... 2
Disconnect PPP from MLPPP 1.00 2 DISCONNPPPML -1... 1
CANCEL PROCESSOR 888.02 2 CAN_PRO -1... 1
CREATE PROCESSOR 886.07 2 CR_PRO -1... 2
DISPLAY PROCESSOR 1773.00 2 DISP_PRO -1... 1
MODIFY PROCESSOR 1776.04 2 MOD_PRO -1... 2
START PROCESS 281.10 2 START_PROCESS -1... 1
RESET PROCESSOR CONNECTION 1498.00 2 RSET_PROCON -1... 1
SET PROCESSOR CONNECTION 1497.00 2 SET_PROCON -1... 1
CANCEL ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4042.13 2 CAN_PROTTAB -1... 1
CREATE ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4041.16 2 CR_PROTTAB -1... 2
DISPLAY ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4044.13 2 DISP_PROTTAB -1... 1
MODIFY ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4043.16 2 MOD_PROTTAB -1... 3
MODIFY PASSWORD 41.01 2 MOD_PSW -1... 1
DISPLAY PASSWORD DATA 2857.00 2 DISP_PSWDAT -1... 1
MODIFY PASSWORD DATA 2859.00 2 MOD_PSWDAT -1... 1
Display Q931 Timers 1.00 2 DISP_Q931TIMER -1... 2
Modify Q931 Timers 1.00 2 MOD_Q931TIMER -1... 2
DISPLAY QUALITY OF SERVICE CONTROL 4252.01 2 DISP_QOSCNTL -1... 1
ENTER QUALITY OF SERVICE CONTROL 4251.01 2 ENTR_QOSCNTL -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF QOS CONTROL 4253.01 2 STAT_QOSCNTL -1... 1
CANCEL QUEUE 2882.10 2 CAN_QUE -1... 2
DISPLAY QUEUE 2885.09 2 DISP_QUE -1... 5
ENTER QUEUE 3380.10 2 ENTR_QUE -1... 12
RECORD QUEUE 3271.04 2 REC_QUE -1... 5
Display RADIUS Accounting Parameters 1.00 2 DISP_RADACCP -1... 2
Display RADIUS Authentication Parameters 1.00 2 DISP_RADAUTP -1... 2
CANCEL REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1832.00 2 CAN_RCU -1... 1
CREATE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1834.01 2 CR_RCU -1... 1
DISPLAY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1840.00 2 DISP_RCU -1... 1
EXTEND RCU 2559.00 2 EXT_RCU -1... 1
REDUCE RCU 2560.00 2 RED_RCU -1... 1
STATUS REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 1837.00 2 STAT_RCU -1... 1
DISPLAY INTERMEDIATE RESULT OF RDS MEAS 1230.02 2 DISP_RDSMEAS -1... 2
START RDS MEASUREMENT 1232.02 2 START_RDSMEAS -1... 2
STOP RDS MEASUREMENT 1229.02 2 STOP_RDSMEAS -1... 2
DISPLAY RECOVERY ESCALATION CONDITION 1253.00 2 DISP_RECESC -1... 1
RESET RECOVERY ESCALATION CONDITION 1259.21 2 RSET_RECESC -1... 1
SET RECOVERY ESCALATION CONDITION 1264.21 2 SET_RECESC -1... 1
CONT-18 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
EXECUTE REGENERATION 611.75 2 EXEC_REGEN -1... 10
TEST ROUTING DATA BASE 3095.12 2 TEST_ROUDB -1... 35
ACTIVATE ROUTE 32.10 2 ACT_ROUTE -1... 2
BAR ROUTE 27.11 2 BAR_ROUTE -1... 2
CANCEL ROUTE 13.80 2 CAN_ROUTE -1... 4
CREATE ROUTE 10.95 2 CR_ROUTE -1... 26
DISPLAY ROUTE 206.85 2 DISP_ROUTE -1... 3
INSERT ROUTE 30.95 2 INS_ROUTE -1... 26
MODIFY ROUTE 413.90 2 MOD_ROUTE -1... 15
TAKE OUT ROUTE 31.80 2 TAKO_ROUTE -1... 4
CANCEL ROUTE SWITCH 313.82 2 CAN_ROUTESW -1... 8
DISPLAY ROUTE SWITCH 414.05 2 DISP_ROUTESW -1... 1
ENTER ROUTE SWITCH 312.83 2 ENTR_ROUTESW -1... 6
CANCEL ROUTE THRESHOLD 1792.02 2 CAN_ROUTETHR -1... 1
DISPLAY ROUTE THRESHOLD 1790.03 2 DISP_ROUTETHR -1... 2
ENTER ROUTE THRESHOLD 1795.04 2 ENTR_ROUTETHR -1... 3
MODIFY ROUTE THRESHOLD 1797.04 2 MOD_ROUTETHR -1... 1
CANCEL REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT 3969.00 2 CAN_RSU -1... 1
CREATE REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT 3967.06 2 CR_RSU -1... 5
DISPLAY REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT 3970.04 2 DISP_RSU -1... 1
MODIFY REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT 3968.03 2 MOD_RSU -1... 7
RECORD REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT 4090.00 2 REC_RSU -1... 4
DISPLAY RSU AMUX PORT 4025.00 2 DISP_RSUAPT -1... 2
CANCEL REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT DATA 4135.00 2 CAN_RSUDAT -1... 1
DISPLAY REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT DATA 4136.00 2 DISP_RSUDAT -1... 1
ENTER REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT DATA 4134.00 2 ENTR_RSUDAT -1... 1
CONFIGURE RSU EQUIPMENT 4020.04 2 CONF_RSUEQ -1... 2
DIAGNOSE RSU EQUIPMENT 4046.00 2 DIAG_RSUEQ -1... 2
DISPLAY REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT EQUIPMENT 3971.00 2 DISP_RSUEQ -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF RSU EQUIPMENT 4021.00 2 STAT_RSUEQ -1... 2
DUMP RSU MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3950.00 2 DMP_RSUIMDMP -1... 3
CANCEL RSU LINK 3974.00 2 CAN_RSULINK -1... 1
CREATE RSU LINK 3972.00 2 CR_RSULINK -1... 2
DISPLAY RSU LINK 3975.00 2 DISP_RSULINK -1... 2
MODIFY RSU LINK 3973.00 2 MOD_RSULINK -1... 2
DISPLAY RSU LINK PORT 3976.00 2 DISP_RSULPT -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF RSU LINK PORT 4096.00 2 STAT_RSULPT -1... 2
CANCEL RSU LTG CONNECTION 3978.06 2 CAN_RSULTGCN -1... 1
CREATE RSU LTG CONNECTION 3977.06 2 CR_RSULTGCN -1... 3
DISPLAY RSU LTG CONNECTION 3979.06 2 DISP_RSULTGCN -1... 2
ACTIVATE RSU PERMANENT PATCH 3952.00 2 ACT_RSUPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL RSU PERMANENT PATCH 3955.00 2 CAN_RSUPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE RSU PERMANENT PATCH 3953.00 2 DACT_RSUPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY RSU PERMANENT PATCH 3956.01 2 DISP_RSUPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER RSU PERMANENT PATCH 3951.00 2 ENTR_RSUPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE RSU PERMANENT PATCH 3954.00 2 UPD_RSUPRPCH -1... 1
ACTIVATE RSU TRACE EVENT 3962.00 2 ACT_RSUTRC -1... 2
CANCEL RSU TRACE EVENT 3964.00 2 CAN_RSUTRC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE RSU TRACE EVENT 3963.00 2 DACT_RSUTRC -1... 2
DISPLAY RSU TRACE EVENT 3965.00 2 DISP_RSUTRC -1... 2
DUMP RSU TRACE EVENT 3966.00 2 DMP_RSUTRC -1... 2
ENTER RSU TRACE EVENT 3949.00 2 ENTR_RSUTRC -1... 2
ACTIVATE RSU TRANSIENT PATCH 3958.00 2 ACT_RSUTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL RSU TRANSIENT PATCH 3960.00 2 CAN_RSUTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE RSU TRANSIENT PATCH 3959.00 2 DACT_RSUTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY RSU TRANSIENT PATCH 3961.01 2 DISP_RSUTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER RSU TRANSIENT PATCH 3957.00 2 ENTR_RSUTRPCH -1... 2
Display SDSL AAL5 Interface Attr. 1.00 2 DISP_SAAL5IFA -1... 1
Modify SDSL AAL5 Interface Attr. 1.00 2 MOD_SAAL5IFA -1... 1
Display SDSL AAL5 Performance Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_SAAL5PSTAT -1... 1
Display SDSL all Connections for Port 1.00 2 DISP_SACONPRT -1... 1
RECORD DATA OF SERVICES APPL. AND FEAT. 2150.01 2 REC_SAF -1... 4
CANCEL RSU SAS CODE POINT 4178.56 2 CAN_SASCPT -1... 1
CREATE RSU SAS CODE POINT 4176.56 2 CR_SASCPT -1... 1
DISPLAY RSU SAS CODE POINT 4179.56 2 DISP_SASCPT -1... 1
MODIFY RSU SAS CODE POINT 4177.56 2 MOD_SASCPT -1... 1
CANCEL RSU SAS CENTREX INTERCEPT 4259.00 2 CAN_SASCXINC -1... 1
CREATE RSU SAS CENTREX INTERCEPT 4258.00 2 CR_SASCXINC -1... 2
DISPLAY RSU SAS CENTREX INTERCEPT 4260.00 2 DISP_SASCXINC -1... 1
CANCEL RSU SAS INTERCEPT 4256.00 2 CAN_SASINC -1... 1
CREATE RSU SAS INTERCEPT 4255.00 2 CR_SASINC -1... 3
DISPLAY RSU SAS INTERCEPT 4257.00 2 DISP_SASINC -1... 3
Display SDSL ATM25 Interface Attr. 1.00 2 DISP_SATM25IFA -1... 1
Display SDSL ATM Configuration Attr. 1.00 2 DISP_SATMCONFA -1... 1
CONT-19 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
Modify SDSL ATM Configuration Attr. 1.00 2 MOD_SATMCONFA -1... 1
Display SDSL ATM Interface Attr. 1.00 2 DISP_SATMIFA -1... 1
CANCEL SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 1964.41 2 CAN_SCCGPA -1... 2
CREATE SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 1977.41 2 CR_SCCGPA -1... 18
DISPLAY SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 1989.41 2 DISP_SCCGPA -1... 2
MODIFY SCCP CALLING PARTY ADDRESS 2004.41 2 MOD_SCCGPA -1... 6
CANCEL SCCP COMMON SERVICE DATA 3106.17 2 CAN_SCDATA -1... 2
DISPLAY SCCP COMMON SERVICE DATA 3107.41 2 DISP_SCDATA -1... 2
ENTER SCCP COMMON SERVICE DATA 3105.41 2 ENTR_SCDATA -1... 4
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE 2038.51 2 CAN_SCFEA -1... 3
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED FEATURE 2039.51 2 DISP_SCFEA -1... 5
ENTER SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED FEATURE 2040.51 2 ENTR_SCFEA -1... 28
CANCEL SCREENING LIST 2404.05 2 CAN_SCLST -1... 5
DISPLAY SCREENING LIST 2405.05 2 DISP_SCLST -1... 5
ENTER SCREENING LIST 2403.05 2 ENTR_SCLST -1... 12
Create SDSL Connection 1.00 2 CR_SCONN -1... 1
Delete SDSL Connection 1.00 2 DEL_SCONN -1... 1
Display SDSL Connection 1.00 2 DISP_SCONN -1... 1
CANCEL SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2041.00 2 CAN_SCRBLST -1... 1
CREATE SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2042.00 2 CR_SCRBLST -1... 2
DISPLAY SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2043.00 2 DISP_SCRBLST -1... 1
MODIFY SCCP REMOTE BROADCAST LIST 2044.00 2 MOD_SCRBLST -1... 2
CANCEL SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1965.41 2 CAN_SCSS -1... 3
CONFIGURE SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1969.41 2 CONF_SCSS -1... 3
CREATE SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1978.41 2 CR_SCSS -1... 4
DISPLAY SCCP SUBSYSTEM 1990.41 2 DISP_SCSS -1... 3
MODIFY SCCP SUBSYSTEM 2005.41 2 MOD_SCSS -1... 3
DISPLAY STATUS OF SCCP SUBSYSTEM 2007.41 2 STAT_SCSS -1... 3
CANCEL SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3148.41 2 CAN_SCSSG -1... 1
CREATE SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3149.41 2 CR_SCSSG -1... 4
DISPLAY SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3150.41 2 DISP_SCSSG -1... 3
MODIFY SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE GROUP 3151.41 2 MOD_SCSSG -1... 5
CANCEL SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE DATA 1966.41 2 CAN_SCSSSD -1... 3
DISPLAY SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE DATA 1991.41 2 DISP_SCSSSD -1... 3
ENTER SCCP SUBSYSTEM SERVICE DATA 1996.41 2 ENTR_SCSSSD -1... 5
RECORD SCCP AND TCAP 2940.00 2 REC_SCTC -1... 3
CANCEL SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 1967.41 2 CAN_SCTRLG -1... 1
CREATE SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 1979.41 2 CR_SCTRLG -1... 5
DISPLAY SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 1992.41 2 DISP_SCTRLG -1... 1
MODIFY SCCP TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP 2006.41 2 MOD_SCTRLG -1... 2
CANCEL TRANSLATION TYPE CONVERSION DATA 3398.41 2 CAN_SCTTCD -1... 3
DISPLAY TRANSLATION TYPE CONVERSION DATA 3399.41 2 DISP_SCTTCD -1... 4
ENTER TRANSLATION TYPE CONVERSION DATA 3397.41 2 ENTR_SCTTCD -1... 4
CANCEL SCCP USER 2841.41 2 CAN_SCUSER -1... 2
CREATE SCCP USER 2839.41 2 CR_SCUSER -1... 3
DISPLAY SCCP USER 2840.41 2 DISP_SCUSER -1... 2
Display SDSL Data Net State Info 1.00 2 DISP_SDNSI -1... 1
Display Security Alarming CP 1.00 2 DISP_SECALCP -1... 1
Modify Security Alarming CP 1.00 2 MOD_SECALCP -1... 1
Cancel Security Alarm Report Log CP 1.00 2 CAN_SECALLOGCP -1... 1
Create Security Alarm Report Log CP 1.00 2 CR_SECALLOGCP -1... 2
Display Security Alarm Report Log CP 1.00 2 DISP_SECALLOGCP -1... 1
Display Security Alarm Report Records CP 1.00 2 DISP_SECALRECCP -1... 1
UPDATE SECURITY DATA 3087.00 2 UPD_SECDATA -1... 1
DISPLAY SECURITY THRESHOLDS 3084.00 2 DISP_SECTHR -1... 1
MODIFY SECURITY THRESHOLDS 3091.00 2 MOD_SECTHR -1... 3
Display Security Tracer CP 1.00 2 DISP_SECTRCCP -1... 1
Modify Security Tracer CP 1.00 2 MOD_SECTRCCP -1... 1
Display SDSL EWSD Port Configurations 1.00 2 DISP_SEPCONF -1... 1
CANCEL SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2765.07 2 CAN_SERVCUG -1... 2
DISPLAY SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2767.04 2 DISP_SERVCUG -1... 2
ENTER SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2769.06 2 ENTR_SERVCUG -1... 2
CANCEL SESSION 2855.00 2 CAN_SESSION -1... 1
DISPLAY SESSION 2858.00 2 DISP_SESSION -1... 1
END SESSION 45.00 2 END_SESSION -1... 1
START SAFEGUARDING SOFTWARE 632.10 2 START_SFGSW -1... 1
DUMP COLLECTED SAFEGUARDING SYMPTOMS 2817.10 2 DMP_SFGSYMP -1... 1
Display SDSL FR Like Alarm Conf. Attr. 1.00 2 DISP_SFRACONFA -1... 1
Modify SDSL FR Like Alarm Conf. Attr. 1.00 2 MOD_SFRACONFA -1... 2
Disp SDSL FR like Performance Data 1.00 2 DISP_SFRPD -1... 1
Disp SDSL FR like Perf. Data Interval 1.00 2 DISP_SFRPDI -1... 1
Disp SDSL FR like Perf. Data Prev. Int. 1.00 2 DISP_SFRPDPI -1... 1
DUMP SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1947.00 2 DMP_SGMSG -1... 1
ACTIVATE SIGNALING TRACER 1028.82 2 ACT_SIGNTRAC -1... 4
CONT-20 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
CANCEL SIGNALING TRACER 2760.00 2 CAN_SIGNTRAC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SIGNALING TRACER 2762.00 2 DACT_SIGNTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY SIGNALING TRACER 2033.00 2 DISP_SIGNTRAC -1... 1
DUMP SIGNALING TRACER 2758.02 2 DMP_SIGNTRAC -1... 3
ENTER SIGNALING TRACER OBJECT DATA 2752.10 2 ENTR_SIGNTRAC -1... 32
ACTIVATE SILC TRACE EVENT 3607.02 2 ACT_SILCTRC -1... 2
CANCEL SILC TRACE EVENT 3609.02 2 CAN_SILCTRC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SILC TRACE EVENT 3608.02 2 DACT_SILCTRC -1... 2
DISPLAY SILC TRACE EVENT 3610.02 2 DISP_SILCTRC -1... 2
DUMP SILC TRACE EVENT 3611.02 2 DMP_SILCTRC -1... 2
ENTER SILC TRACE EVENT 3606.02 2 ENTR_SILCTRC -1... 2
Display SDSL Layer1 Alarm Conf. Attr. 1.00 2 DISP_SLAY1ACA -1... 1
Modify SDSL Layer1 Alarm Conf. Attr. 1.00 2 MOD_SLAY1ACA -1... 1
Display SDSL Layer1 IF Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_SLAY1IFA -1... 1
Modify SDSL Layer1 IF Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_SLAY1IFA -1... 1
Display SDSL Layer1 Performance Data 1.00 2 DISP_SLAY1PD -1... 1
Disp SDSL Layer1 Perf. Data Interval 1.00 2 DISP_SLAY1PDI -1... 1
Disp SDSL Layer1 Perf. Data Previous Int 1.00 2 DISP_SLAY1PDPI -1... 1
TEST SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT 63.14 2 TEST_SLC -1... 3
Create SDSL Linecard NT Compat. Entry 1.00 2 CR_SLCNTCE -1... 1
Delete SDSL Linecard NT Compat. Entry 1.00 2 DEL_SLCNTCE -1... 1
Display SDSL Linecard NT Compat. Entry 1.00 2 DISP_SLCNTCE -1... 1
Display SLMI Command Table 1.00 2 DISP_SLMICTAB -1... 1
Display SLMI Data Transfer Table 1.00 2 DISP_SLMIDTTAB -1... 1
Display SLMI Version Table 1.00 2 DISP_SLMIVTAB -1... 2
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3652.04 2 CAN_SLNACC -1... 1
CREATE SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3649.05 2 CR_SLNACC -1... 8
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3651.08 2 DISP_SLNACC -1... 4
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3650.08 2 MOD_SLNACC -1... 32
MODIFY SLRAM 1080.01 2 MOD_SLRAM -1... 1
Display SDSL Module Entity Information 1.00 2 DISP_SMENTI -1... 1
CONFIGURE SWITCHING NETWORK 926.17 2 CONF_SN -1... 3
DIAGNOSE SWITCHING NETWORK 974.03 2 DIAG_SN -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF SN 918.10 2 STAT_SN -1... 1
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE SN 938.00 2 TEST_SN -1... 3
DISPLAY SN BIT ERROR RATE COUNT 694.01 2 DISP_SNBERC -1... 1
START SN BIT ERROR RATE COUNT 693.02 2 START_SNBERC -1... 2
DISPLAY SWITCHING NETWORK DATA 4071.01 2 DISP_SNDAT -1... 1
MODIFY SWITCHING NETWORK DATA 4070.02 2 MOD_SNDAT -1... 7
CONFIGURE SWITCHING NETWORK MATRIX 4083.17 2 CONF_SNMAT -1... 1
DIAGNOSE SWITCHING NETWORK MATRIX 4093.00 2 DIAG_SNMAT -1... 1
CONFIGURE SWITCHING NETWORK MULTIPLEXER 4084.17 2 CONF_SNMUX -1... 2
DIAGNOSE SWITCHING NETWORK MULTIPLEXER 4094.00 2 DIAG_SNMUX -1... 1
DISPLAY SN PATH DATA (TRANSIENT) 848.01 2 DISP_SNPD -1... 1
Display SDSL NT Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_SNTA -1... 1
Reset SDSL NT Password 1.00 2 RSET_SNTPWD -1... 1
Display SDSL Port Entity Information 1.00 2 DISP_SPENTI -1... 1
CANCEL SPOOLENTRY 1761.01 2 CAN_SPENTRY -1... 1
DISPLAY SPOOLENTRY 1764.00 2 DISP_SPENTRY -1... 1
MODIFY SPOOLENTRY 1766.01 2 MOD_SPENTRY -1... 1
DISPLAY SPOOLFILE 1765.00 2 DISP_SPFILE -1... 1
DISPLAY SPLIT OPTION 3480.00 2 DISP_SPLITOPT -1... 1
RESET SPLIT OPTION 3479.00 2 RSET_SPLITOPT -1... 1
ACTIVATE SPOOLSERVICE 1760.02 2 ACT_SPSERV -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SPOOLSERVICE 1762.00 2 DACT_SPSERV -1... 1
Display SDSL Port State Information 1.00 2 DISP_SPSI -1... 1
ALLOW SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1083.00 2 ALLOW_SSA -1... 1
DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS DATA 1121.00 2 DISP_SSA -1... 1
INHIBIT SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1123.00 2 INHIB_SSA -1... 1
MODIFY SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1126.00 2 MOD_SSA -1... 1
CONFIGURE SPACE STAGE GROUP 927.17 2 CONF_SSG -1... 2
DIAGNOSE SPACE STAGE GROUP 976.00 2 DIAG_SSG -1... 3
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE SSG 971.00 2 TEST_SSG -1... 5
Display SDSL SLMI Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_SSLMIA -1... 1
DISPLAY SSP 1654.01 2 DISP_SSP -1... 1
MERGE SSP 1125.00 2 MERGE_SSP -1... 1
RECOVER SSP 453.10 2 RECOV_SSP -1... 1
SPLIT SSP 1088.01 2 SPLIT_SSP -1... 1
SEARCH SSP 1127.01 2 SRCH_SSP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF SSP 123.71 2 STAT_SSP -1... 1
TEST SSP 121.70 2 TEST_SSP -1... 1
ACTIVATE CONSISTENCY CHECK 1082.00 2 ACT_SSPCONCK -1... 1
ALLOW ROUTINE TEST 1085.01 2 ALLOW_SSPRT -1... 1
CUT OFF ROUTINETEST 1108.00 2 CUT_SSPRT -1... 1
CONT-21 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
DISPLAY ROUTINE TEST DATA 1122.01 2 DISP_SSPRT -1... 1
INHIBIT ROUTINE TEST 1124.01 2 INHIB_SSPRT -1... 1
MODIFY ROUTINE TEST DATA 1084.03 2 MOD_SSPRT -1... 3
DISPLAY STATISTICS METER 257.71 2 DISP_STATMET -1... 1
CANCEL STATISTIC COUNTER SWITCH TIMES 697.03 2 CAN_STATSW -1... 1
DISPLAY STATISTIC COUNTER SWITCH TIMES 698.03 2 DISP_STATSW -1... 1
ENTER STATISTIC COUNTER SWITCH TIMES 696.04 2 ENTR_STATSW -1... 2
ACTIVATE SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2928.12 2 ACT_STMON -1... 7
DEACTIVATE SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2930.41 2 DACT_STMON -1... 7
DISPLAY SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2932.12 2 DISP_STMON -1... 10
ENTER SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2921.12 2 ENTR_STMON -1... 17
DISPLAY SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING INFO 3482.00 2 DISP_STMONINF -1... 1
ENTER SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING INFO 3481.00 2 ENTR_STMONINF -1... 1
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER 4.82 2 CAN_SUB -1... 2
CREATE SUBSCRIBER 2.18 2 CR_SUB -1...331
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER 171.18 2 DISP_SUB -1... 16
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER 1038.22 2 MOD_SUB -1...320
RECORD SUBSCRIBER 344.74 2 REC_SUB -1... 8
DISPLAY STATUS OF SUBSCRIBER 536.80 2 STAT_SUB -1... 4
TEST SUBSCRIBER 1397.15 2 TEST_SUB -1... 4
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER DIRECTORY NUMBER 1861.14 2 MOD_SUBDN -1... 2
Display Subscriber L2TP Session 1.00 2 DISP_SUBLSESS -1... 4
Create Subscriber PPP Layer 1.00 2 CR_SUBPPPL -1... 1
Delete Subscriber PPP Layer 1.00 2 DEL_SUBPPPL -1... 1
Display Subscriber PPP Layer 1.00 2 DISP_SUBPPPL -1... 8
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER PROFILE ID 4011.01 2 CAN_SUBPRFID -1... 1
CREATE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE ID 4010.01 2 CR_SUBPRFID -1... 1
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER PROFILE ID 4012.01 2 DISP_SUBPRFID -1... 1
ACTIVATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3815.06 2 ACT_SVSUB -1... 1
CANCEL SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3817.06 2 CAN_SVSUB -1... 1
CREATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3813.07 2 CR_SVSUB -1... 5
DEACTIVATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3816.06 2 DACT_SVSUB -1... 1
DISPLAY SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3818.07 2 DISP_SVSUB -1... 2
MODIFY SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3814.07 2 MOD_SVSUB -1... 5
TRANSFER SYSTEM FILES 1002.06 2 TRANS_SYFILE -1... 6
CONFIGURE SYSTEM PANEL 930.60 2 CONF_SYP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF SYSTEM PANEL 920.10 2 STAT_SYP -1... 1
ACTIVATE SYSTEM LOAD DISPLAY 2561.00 2 ACT_SYSLDD -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SYSTEM LOAD DISPLAY 2562.00 2 DACT_SYSLDD -1... 1
RECOVER SYSTEM 456.14 2 RECOV_SYSTEM -1... 2
ACTIVATE SYSTEM UPGRADE 3238.00 2 ACT_SYSUPG -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SYSTEM UPGRADE 3239.00 2 DACT_SYSUPG -1... 1
START SYSTEM UPGRADE 3241.00 2 START_SYSUPG -1... 1
MOUNT TAPE 8.01 2 MOUNT_TAPE -1... 1
CANCEL TARIFF 57.06 2 CAN_TAR -1... 1
DISPLAY TARIFF 202.04 2 DISP_TAR -1... 2
ENTER TARIFF 56.09 2 ENTR_TAR -1... 4
MODIFY TARIFF 58.06 2 MOD_TAR -1... 2
CANCEL TARIFF SWITCH 60.07 2 CAN_TARSW -1... 2
DISPLAY TARIFF SWITCH 205.07 2 DISP_TARSW -1... 2
ENTER TARIFF SWITCH 59.07 2 ENTR_TARSW -1... 2
Display TCP Connection 1.00 2 DISP_TCPCONN -1... 1
Display TCP Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_TCPSTAT -1... 2
Display TC Sublayer Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_TCSUBLA -1... 1
CANCEL TEAC 3864.00 2 CAN_TEAC -1... 1
CREATE TEAC 3862.00 2 CR_TEAC -1... 1
DISPLAY TEAC 3863.00 2 DISP_TEAC -1... 1
CANCEL TEST POINT 198.49 2 CAN_TEPT -1... 2
CREATE TEST POINT 188.52 2 CR_TEPT -1... 3
DISPLAY TEST POINT 1216.46 2 DISP_TEPT -1... 1
CANCEL TEST EQUIPMENT 247.06 2 CAN_TEQ -1... 2
CREATE TEST EQUIPMENT 246.35 2 CR_TEQ -1... 44
DISPLAY TEST EQUIPMENT 249.32 2 DISP_TEQ -1... 1
MODIFY TEST EQUIPMENT 248.11 2 MOD_TEQ -1... 52
DISPLAY STATUS OF TEST EQUIPMENT 845.76 2 STAT_TEQ -1... 2
CANCEL TEST EQUIPMENT DATA 1036.06 2 CAN_TEQDAT -1... 3
DISPLAY TEST EQUIPMENT DATA 1037.00 2 DISP_TEQDAT -1... 1
ENTER TEST EQUIPMENT DATA 1035.06 2 ENTR_TEQDAT -1... 3
TEST TERADYNE 3869.00 2 TEST_TERA -1... 1
ACTIVATE TEST PATH 842.12 2 ACT_TESTPATH -1... 2
CANCEL TEST THRESHOLD 1838.01 2 CAN_TESTTHR -1... 1
CREATE TEST THRESHOLD 1839.01 2 CR_TESTTHR -1... 4
DISPLAY TEST THRESHOLD 1841.01 2 DISP_TESTTHR -1... 1
MODIFY TEST THRESHOLD 1842.01 2 MOD_TESTTHR -1... 4
CONT-22 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
TRANSFER TEXT 1505.00 2 TRANS_TEXT -1... 1
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2772.01 2 CAN_TGCLU -1... 1
CREATE TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2771.04 2 CR_TGCLU -1... 3
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2773.01 2 DISP_TGCLU -1... 1
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2774.04 2 MOD_TGCLU -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP DATA 1874.49 2 CAN_TGDAT -1... 5
ENTER TRUNK GROUP DATA 1875.51 2 ENTR_TGDAT -1... 67
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP 14.39 2 CAN_TGRP -1... 1
CREATE TRUNK GROUP 11.53 2 CR_TGRP -1... 81
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP 226.51 2 DISP_TGRP -1... 7
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP 35.49 2 MOD_TGRP -1... 8
RECORD TRUNK GROUP 291.07 2 REC_TGRP -1... 5
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD 1889.30 2 DISP_TGRPTHR -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK GROUP ALARM THRESHOLDS 2548.30 2 ENTR_TGRPTHR -1... 10
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 721.27 2 CAN_TGTSTDAT -1... 2
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 722.28 2 DISP_TGTSTDAT -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 719.33 2 ENTR_TGTSTDAT -1... 6
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP TEST DATA 720.33 2 MOD_TGTSTDAT -1... 6
DISPLAY THRESHOLD 256.01 2 DISP_THR -1... 1
ENTER THRESHOLD 255.73 2 ENTR_THR -1... 1
MEASURE THRESHOLD-VIOLATION 1785.10 2 MEAS_THVIOL -1... 3
DISPLAY TIME 50.15 2 DISP_TIME -1... 1
ENTER TIME 52.15 2 ENTR_TIME -1... 2
MODIFY TIME 4142.15 2 MOD_TIME -1... 3
DISPLAY TIMEOUT 767.13 2 DISP_TIOUT -1... 1
MODIFY TIMEOUT 850.21 2 MOD_TIOUT -1... 10
DISPLAY TIME JOB 259.01 2 DISP_TJOB -1... 1
CAN TRUNK MAINTENANCE BLOCKING STATUS 1882.08 2 CAN_TMBLK -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK MAINTENANCE BLOCKING STATUS 1883.07 2 ENTR_TMBLK -1... 2
DISPLAY TRUNK MAINTENANCE CONTROL 377.71 2 DISP_TMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK MAINTENANCE CONTROL 324.30 2 ENTR_TMCNTL -1... 7
CANCEL TOLL CATASTROPHE 306.49 2 CAN_TOLLCAT -1... 1
DISPLAY TOLL CATASTROPHE 305.49 2 DISP_TOLLCAT -1... 1
ENTER TOLL CATASTROPHE 307.49 2 ENTR_TOLLCAT -1... 1
CANCEL TONE IDENTIFICATION 2344.01 2 CAN_TONEID -1... 1
CREATE TONE IDENTIFICATION 2337.02 2 CR_TONEID -1... 4
DISPLAY TONE IDENTIFICATION 2345.01 2 DISP_TONEID -1... 1
MODIFY TONE IDENTIFICATION 2343.02 2 MOD_TONEID -1... 4
CANCEL TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1416.52 2 CAN_TRABLOCK -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1415.49 2 DISP_TRABLOCK -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1417.52 2 ENTR_TRABLOCK -1... 3
DISPLAY TRAFFIC FILE CHARACTERISTIC 283.04 2 DISP_TRAFICH -1... 1
GET TRAFFIC FILE 286.11 2 GET_TRAFILE -1... 2
ACT TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT SUMMATION 2158.00 2 ACT_TRAFISUM -1... 1
RECORD TRAFFIC FLOW 2016.00 2 REC_TRAFLOW -1... 4
CANCEL TRAFFIC MONITORING TASKS 3374.12 2 CAN_TRAMON -1... 5
DISPLAY TRAFFIC MONITORING TASKS 3375.12 2 DISP_TRAMON -1... 5
ENTER TRAFFIC MONITORING TASK 3373.13 2 ENTR_TRAMON -1... 13
DISPLAY TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT ORDERS 507.04 2 DISP_TRAMORD -1... 1
DISPLAY IRREGULARITY TRAPS 1058.32 2 DISP_TRAPS -1... 10
CANCEL TRAFFIC TYPE 3639.46 2 CAN_TRAT -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC TYPE 3637.54 2 CR_TRAT -1... 3
DISPLAY TRAFFIC TYPE 3640.46 2 DISP_TRAT -1... 1
MODIFY TRAFFIC TYPE 3638.52 2 MOD_TRAT -1... 3
CANCEL TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3643.46 2 CAN_TRATCPT -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3641.57 2 CR_TRATCPT -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3644.57 2 DISP_TRATCPT -1... 2
MODIFY TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3642.57 2 MOD_TRATCPT -1... 2
CANCEL TRUNK DATA 687.41 2 CAN_TRDAT -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK DATA 686.41 2 ENTR_TRDAT -1... 3
MEASURE TRUNK SIGNAL 1311.10 2 MEAS_TRKSIG -1... 9
SEND TRUNK SIGNAL 1312.11 2 SEND_TRKSIG -1... 11
ACTIVATE TRUNK SUPERVISION 1850.02 2 ACT_TRKSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK METER 262.02 2 DISP_TRMET -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBJECTS 1575.00 2 DISP_TRO -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT CENTREX GROUP 2877.00 2 CAN_TROCXGRP -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT CENTREX GROUP 2875.01 2 ENTR_TROCXGRP -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS DESTINATION 1576.02 2 CAN_TRODEST -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECTS DESTINATION 1562.02 2 ENTR_TRODEST -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1570.00 2 CAN_TRODLU -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1569.01 2 ENTR_TRODLU -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS GROUP 1577.00 2 CAN_TROGRP -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP 1558.04 2 CR_TROGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBJECTS GROUPS 1574.00 2 DISP_TROGRP -1... 1
CONT-23 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJ PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 3069.00 2 CAN_TROPA -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 3066.01 2 ENTR_TROPA -1... 1
CAN TRAFFIC OBJ PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 1561.01 2 CAN_TROPBX -1... 1
ENTR TRAFFIC OBJ PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 1560.04 2 ENTR_TROPBX -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS SUBSCRIBER 1564.03 2 CAN_TROSUB -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECTS SUBSCRIBER 1563.05 2 ENTR_TROSUB -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNKGROUP 1566.00 2 CAN_TROTGRP -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNKGROUP 1565.01 2 ENTR_TROTGRP -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT V52 INTERFACE 3830.00 2 CAN_TROV52IF -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT V52 INTERFACE 3829.00 2 ENTR_TROV52IF -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT JOB 700.06 2 CAN_TRST -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT JOB 701.01 2 DISP_TRST -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT JOB 2670.16 2 ENTR_TRST -1... 3
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2026.01 2 CAN_TRSVCNTL -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2028.02 2 DISP_TRSVCNTL -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2030.08 2 ENTR_TRSVCNTL -1... 3
MODIFY TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2032.07 2 MOD_TRSVCNTL -1... 2
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRIT. 2027.04 2 CAN_TRSVCRIT -1... 3
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRIT. 2029.06 2 DISP_TRSVCRIT -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRITERIA 2031.05 2 ENTR_TRSVCRIT -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3811.00 2 CAN_TRSVTRAF -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3812.00 2 DISP_TRSVTRAF -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3810.02 2 ENTR_TRSVTRAF -1... 5
MODIFY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3942.02 2 MOD_TRSVTRAF -1... 7
ACTIVATE TRUNK TRAP 346.30 2 ACT_TRTRAP -1... 15
CANCEL TRUNK TRAP 347.30 2 CAN_TRTRAP -1... 5
CANCEL TRUNK 15.41 2 CAN_TRUNK -1... 2
CREATE TRUNK 12.55 2 CR_TRUNK -1... 20
DISPLAY TRUNK 189.43 2 DISP_TRUNK -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF TRUNK 355.52 2 STAT_TRUNK -1... 6
TEST TRUNK 61.16 2 TEST_TRUNK -1... 13
CONFIGURE TIME STAGE GROUP 972.17 2 CONF_TSG -1... 2
DIAGNOSE TIME STAGE GROUP 975.00 2 DIAG_TSG -1... 3
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE TSG 973.00 2 TEST_TSG -1... 5
CREATE TSM 4122.00 2 CR_TSM -1... 1
RELEASE TEST CALL 1280.15 2 REL_TSTCALL -1... 1
SET UP TEST CALL 1283.30 2 SETUP_TSTCALL -1... 24
DISPLAY TESTING JOBS 803.01 2 DISP_TSTJOB -1... 1
CHANGE TEST OBJECT 1273.30 2 CHANGE_TSTOBJ -1... 24
CHANGE TPC TEST PORT 1784.00 2 CHANGE_TSTPRT -1... 1
DISPLAY TEST RESULTS 801.01 2 DISP_TSTRES -1... 1
DELETE TEST SCHEDULE 802.00 2 DEL_TSTSCHED -1... 1
DISPLAY TEST SCHEDULE 800.01 2 DISP_TSTSCHED -1... 1
ENTER TEST SCHEDULE 799.00 2 ENTR_TSTSCHED -1... 18
Create Tunnel Domain 1.00 2 CR_TUNDOM -1... 2
Delete Tunnel Domain 1.00 2 DEL_TUNDOM -1... 1
Display Tunnel Domain 1.00 2 DISP_TUNDOM -1... 3
Modify Tunnel Domain 1.00 2 MOD_TUNDOM -1... 2
Display Tunnel Domain Given LNS Address 1.00 2 DISP_TUNDOMLNSA -1... 1
Display Tunnel Domain Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_TUNDOMSTAT -1... 1
Create Tunnel 1.00 2 CR_TUNNEL -1... 2
Delete Tunnel 1.00 2 DEL_TUNNEL -1... 1
Display Tunnel 1.00 2 DISP_TUNNEL -1... 3
Modify Tunnel 1.00 2 MOD_TUNNEL -1... 2
Display Tunnel Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_TUNSTAT -1... 2
Display Tunnel UDP Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_TUNUDPSTAT -1... 1
CANCEL TELEWORKER 4108.00 2 CAN_TW -1... 2
DISPLAY TELEWORKER 4109.01 2 DISP_TW -1... 2
ENTER TELEWORKER 4107.01 2 ENTR_TW -1... 5
Display UDSL Data Net State Info 1.00 2 DISP_UDNSI -1... 1
Display UDP Statistics 1.00 2 DISP_UDPSTAT -1... 1
Display UDSL Entity Info 1.00 2 DISP_UENTI -1... 2
Display UDSL Interface Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_UIFATT -1... 2
Modify UDSL Interface Attributes 1.00 2 MOD_UIFATT -1... 1
DISPLAY UPDATE 406.02 2 DISP_UPDATE -1... 1
ACTIVATE UPDATE CHECKPOINTING 4226.10 2 ACT_UPDCHP -1... 1
DISPLAY UPGRADE OPTIONS 4119.00 2 DISP_UPGRDOPT -1... 1
RESET UPGRADE OPTIONS 4121.00 2 RSET_UPGRDOPT -1... 1
SET UPGRADE OPTIONS 4120.00 2 SET_UPGRDOPT -1... 1
CANCEL USER IDENTIFICATION 2860.01 2 CAN_USERID -1... 1
CREATE USER IDENTIFICATION 2856.02 2 CR_USERID -1... 2
DISPLAY USER IDENTIFICATION 2861.00 2 DISP_USERID -1... 1
MODIFY USER IDENTIFICATION 2862.02 2 MOD_USERID -1... 2
Display UDSL SLMI Attributes 1.00 2 DISP_USLMIA -1... 2
CONT-24 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
CANCEL V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3534.00 2 CAN_V5CMCHAN -1... 1
CREATE V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3527.01 2 CR_V5CMCHAN -1... 4
DISPLAY V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3529.02 2 DISP_V5CMCHAN -1... 2
MODIFY V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3615.00 2 MOD_V5CMCHAN -1... 4
DISP STATUS OF V5 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL 3567.00 2 STAT_V5CMCHAN -1... 1
CANCEL V5 COMMUNICATION PATH 3535.01 2 CAN_V5CMPATH -1... 1
CREATE V5 COMMUNICATION PATH 3528.04 2 CR_V5CMPATH -1... 5
DISPLAY V5 COMMUNICATION PATH 3530.02 2 DISP_V5CMPATH -1... 2
CANCEL V5 INTERFACE 3097.02 2 CAN_V5IF -1... 1
CREATE V5 INTERFACE 3098.05 2 CR_V5IF -1... 4
DISPLAY V5 INTERFACE 3099.04 2 DISP_V5IF -1... 2
MODIFY V5 INTERFACE 3101.05 2 MOD_V5IF -1... 4
RECORD V5.2 INTERFACE 3550.37 2 REC_V5IF -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 INTERFACE 3132.02 2 STAT_V5IF -1... 2
CANCEL V5 LINK 3533.01 2 CAN_V5LINK -1... 3
CONFIGURE V5 LINK 3131.05 2 CONF_V5LINK -1... 10
CREATE V5 LINK 3526.03 2 CR_V5LINK -1... 3
DISPLAY V5 LINK 3511.04 2 DISP_V5LINK -1... 4
MODIFY V5 LINK 3531.02 2 MOD_V5LINK -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 LINK 3133.03 2 STAT_V5LINK -1... 4
TEST V5LINK IDENTIFICATION 3680.01 2 TEST_V5LINK -1... 3
CONFIGURE V5 PORTS 3152.03 2 CONF_V5PORT -1... 2
DISPLAY V5 PORT 3100.03 2 DISP_V5PORT -1... 2
SELECT V5 PORT 3102.03 2 SEL_V5PORT -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 PORTS 3153.02 2 STAT_V5PORT -1... 1
ACTIVATE V5 RE-PROVISIONING 2173.00 2 ACT_V5PROV -1... 2
DEACTIVATE V5 RE-PROVISIONING 2175.00 2 DACT_V5PROV -1... 1
DISPLAY V5 RE-PROVISIONING 2174.00 2 DISP_V5PROV -1... 1
CANCEL NEW V5 PROVISIONING VARIANT 2172.00 2 CAN_V5PROVAR -1... 1
DISPLAY NEW V5 PROVISIONING VARIANT 2171.00 2 DISP_V5PROVAR -1... 1
ENTER NEW V5 PROVISIONING VARIANT 2170.00 2 ENTR_V5PROVAR -1... 1
DISPLAY V5 TIME SLOT 3512.03 2 DISP_V5TS -1... 4
MODIFY V5 TIME SLOT 3532.03 2 MOD_V5TS -1... 11
DISPLAY STATUS OF V5 TIME SLOT 2163.02 2 STAT_V5TS -1... 4
CANCEL VOICE RECOGNITION 2348.00 2 CAN_VOICEREC -1... 1
CREATE VOICE RECOGNITION 2346.00 2 CR_VOICEREC -1... 1
DISPLAY VOICE RECOGNITION 2349.00 2 DISP_VOICEREC -1... 1
MODIFY VOICE RECOGNITION 2347.00 2 MOD_VOICEREC -1... 1
Create VoIP Customer Premises Gateway 1.00 2 CR_VOIPCPG -1... 1
Delete VoIP Customer Premises Gateway 1.00 2 DEL_VOIPCPG -1... 1
Display VoIP Customer Premises Gateway 1.00 2 DISP_VOIPCPG -1... 1
CONFIGURE VOICE PROCESSING UNIT 4143.00 2 CONF_VPU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE VOICE PROCESSING UNIT RECEIVERS 4144.00 2 DIAG_VPU -1... 1
DISP. STATUS VPU RECEIVERS 4145.00 2 STAT_VPU -1... 1
COPY VSD DATABASE BACKUP FILE 4125.15 2 COPY_VSD -1... 1
LOAD VSD DATABASE BACKUP FILE 4129.16 2 LOAD_VSD -1... 1
MERGE VSD 4088.28 2 MERGE_VSD -1... 1
MODIFY VSD DATABASE 4250.16 2 MOD_VSD -1... 1
RELINK VSD RECORDS 4127.14 2 RLINK_VSD -1... 1
UPDATE VSD BACKUP FILE 4128.16 2 UPD_VSD -1... 1
DISPLAY VSD DATABASE STATISTIC DATA 4126.16 2 DISP_VSDSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY WEEKDAY CATEGORY 685.39 2 DISP_WDCAT -1... 1
MODIFY WEEKDAY CATEGORY 725.39 2 MOD_WDCAT -1... 1
ACTIVATE WORK STATION 1286.24 2 ACT_WST -1... 2
CANCEL WORKSTATION 1222.00 2 CAN_WST -1... 1
CREATE WORKSTATION 1219.36 2 CR_WST -1... 8
DEACTIVATE WORK STATION 1287.01 2 DACT_WST -1... 1
DISPLAY WORKSTATION 1223.00 2 DISP_WST -1... 1
MODIFY WORKSTATION 1425.11 2 MOD_WST -1... 2
STATUS OF WORK STATION 1788.01 2 STAT_WST -1... 1
CANCEL WORKSTATION GROUP 1227.00 2 CAN_WSTGRP -1... 1
CREATE WORKSTATION GROUP 1220.28 2 CR_WSTGRP -1... 4
DISPLAY WORKSTATION GROUP 1221.00 2 DISP_WSTGRP -1... 1
MODIFY WORKSTATION GROUP 1453.28 2 MOD_WSTGRP -1... 2
ALLOW INCOMING CALL TO WORK STATION 1285.01 2 ALLOW_WSTIC -1... 1
INHIBIT INCOMING CALL TO WORK STATION 1284.01 2 INHIB_WSTIC -1... 1
CANCEL WORKSTATION TESTPORT 1225.00 2 CAN_WSTPRT -1... 1
CREATE WORKSTATION TESTPORT 1224.29 2 CR_WSTPRT -1... 2
DISPLAY WORKSTATION TESTPORT 1226.00 2 DISP_WSTPRT -1... 1
STATUS X25 DATA 3037.01 2 STAT_X25DAT -1... 2
CANCEL X25DTE 2685.00 2 CAN_X25DTE -1... 1
CREATE X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2689.03 2 CR_X25DTE -1... 12
DISPLAY X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2695.03 2 DISP_X25DTE -1... 3
MODIFY X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2701.03 2 MOD_X25DTE -1... 3
CONT-25 + P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
CANCEL X25 LINK 2512.02 2 CAN_X25LINK -1... 1
CONFIGURE X25 LINK 2513.02 2 CONF_X25LINK -1... 1
CREATE X25 LINK 2509.05 2 CR_X25LINK -1... 9
DISPLAY X25 LINK 2511.02 2 DISP_X25LINK -1... 1
MODIFY X25 LINK 2510.05 2 MOD_X25LINK -1... 10
CANCEL X25PVC 2520.02 2 CAN_X25PVC -1... 1
CREATE X25PVC 2519.02 2 CR_X25PVC -1... 2
DISPLAY X25PVC 2521.04 2 DISP_X25PVC -1... 1
CANCEL X25ROUTE 2686.00 2 CAN_X25ROUTE -1... 1
CREATE X25ROUTE 2690.03 2 CR_X25ROUTE -1... 3
DISPLAY X25ROUTE 2696.01 2 DISP_X25ROUTE -1... 1
ACTIVATE X25 STATISTICS 2754.00 2 ACT_X25STC -1... 2
DEACTIVATE X25 STATISTICS 2755.00 2 DACT_X25STC -1... 1
DISPLAY X25 STATISTICS INFORMATION 2756.00 2 DISP_X25STC -1... 1
DUMP X25 STATISTICS 2581.01 2 DMP_X25STC -1... 2
ACTIVATE X25 TRACER 2501.02 2 ACT_X25TRAC -1... 9
DEACTIVATE X25 TRACER 2502.01 2 DACT_X25TRAC -1... 2
DISPLAY X25 TRACER INFORMATION 2504.00 2 DISP_X25TRAC -1... 1
DUMP X25 TRACE DATA 2503.01 2 DMP_X25TRAC -1... 3
DISPLAY ZONING INFORMATION 2869.04 2 DISP_ZOINF -1... 1
MODIFY ZONING INFORMATION 2868.04 2 MOD_ZOINF -1... 1
CANCEL ZONE POINT 29.73 2 CAN_ZOPT -1... 4
CREATE ZONE POINT 26.73 2 CR_ZOPT -1... 8
DISPLAY ZONE POINT 190.73 2 DISP_ZOPT -1... 5
MERGE ZONE POINT 388.73 2 MERGE_ZOPT -1... 6
MODIFY ZONE POINT 37.73 2 MOD_ZOPT -1... 11
SPLIT ZONE POINT 386.73 2 SPLIT_ZOPT -1... 6
CONT-26 - P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTRODUCTION TO TML/OML
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 IN-1
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IN-2 P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The Task Manual (TML) is a reference document which contains all tasks needed to
operate the system including those tasks intended only for system specialists
with special authorization.
Technological advances have led to changes in the way the switch is addressed.
Concretely this means that there are new interfaces via which communication with
the switch possible. Therefore some tasks communicate with the switch via
traditional commands, others via a slightly different input format. For the
sake of continuity all of these elements will be called tasks in future and will
be described in this document. As in the past, the reader accesses the required
information from the TML Table of Contents, or if task access is made from one
of the manuals, through links in those documents.
Care has been taken to make input format representation as similar as possible.
There are however differences which the user must be aware of. For example the
output masks for traditional commands are described in an independent document
(OML). The outputs in the new form of tasks, if further clarification is required,
are described in the relevant task in this document. Another example is that the
length of the input parameters is not limited to 8 characters in the new tasks,
the parameter names may be up to 20 characters long.
Structure
The structure of the TML is as follows:
Overview and Index of issues
Introduction
Cross reference lists for MML
Task descriptions
Overview and Index of Issues
The TML overview makes up the administration section. The overview contains all
tasks in tabular order. All entries contain an issue report and, if necessary,
a change designation.
In addition it contains a list of the other TML sections, for example Introduction.
The overview contains links which allow the user to jump to the information in the
other TML section.
Introduction
The Introduction contains specific instruction for using the TML including the
differences relevant to operation between traditional commands (MML tasks) and the
newer tasks. Where the information is valid for all tasks, it appears only once.
Where there are differences it is clearly stated for which type of task the
information is intended.
Task descriptions
The task descriptions are the main part of the TML and reflect the set of tasks
relevant to a specific APS. Task descriptions include information about the syntax,
parameters, and where applicable paths and parameter values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 IN-3
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Task descriptions are structured as follows:
1. Task short and long name
2. Task helptext
3. Task syntax
4. Parameter information including general parameter information, and where
applicable, subparameter and parameter value information
Input syntax
This section provides an overview of the input format for tasks and the syntax.
The syntax is displayed in Backus-Naur Notation:
Input format
[ Graphic display of [ Comment [

[ parameters [ [
[[[
[ DEMO= [ Entering the parameters is [
[ [ mandatory. [
[[[
[ [,DEMO ] [ Entering the parameters is [
[ [ optional. [
[[[
[ ,DEMO1= [ Entering exactly one parameter [
[ ,DEMO2= [ is mandatory. [
[ [ [
[[[
[ ,DEMO1= [ Entering exactly one parameter [
[ [ ,DEMO2= [ [ is optional. [
[ ! - [ [
[[[
[ [ ,DEMO1=,DEMO2= ] [ Entering all parameter or none [
[ [ entered. [
[[[
[ [ ,DEMO1= [ ,DEMO2= ] ] [ Possible combinations: [
[ [ - Enter all parameters [
[ [ - Enter only parameter DEMO1 [
[ [ - Enter both parameters [
[ [ (Parameter DEMO2 alone may [
[ [ not be entered.) [
[[[
[ <,DEMO1=,DEMO2=,DEMO3= > [ At least one parameter must [
[ [ be entered. [
!-
The syntax diagrams contain links which allow direct access to the individual
parameter descriptions.
IN-4 P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MML task specific
MML tasks which can be used for different purposes are split into different input
formats (paths). This applies particularly in cases in which the above mentioned
syntax is not able to represent all the dependencies among parameters, parameters
and parameter values, or among parameter values. An overview of the input formats
is given at the beginning of each command description.
Example: The MML task has the following paths:
1. CR TEQ - ATCL ACCESS TEST CIRCUIT SUB LINE
2. CR TEQ - ATE AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT
3. CR TEQ - ATEMAN ATE FOR TESTING AND MEASURING
4. CR TEQ - ATESELF ATE FOR SELFTEST
5. CR TEQ - TEMLE TEST MODULE LEVEL
6. CR TEQ - TESTSET TEST SET
7. CR TEQ - RBSI RING BACK SERVICE INTEGRATED
8. CR TEQ - TLFI TRANSLATION FUNCTION INTEGRAT.
9. CR TEQ - ADDATE ADDITIONAL ATE PORT
The paths also contain links which allow direct access to the individual input
descriptions.
Input parameters
The description of the input parameters explains the syntax of the individual
parameters.
In the simplest cases, parameters are described by the parameter short and long
name and the parameter value range. The parameter value range may be, e.g. a range
of decimal numbers or it may be defined by a specific character set as shown below:
Alphanumeric symbolic names: A...Z 0...9. + * % #
Alphanumeric text strings: A...Z 0...9. + * % # < ( & ! $ ) ; - / ,
_ > ? : @ =
<enter> <line feed>
Text strings must be enclosed in quotation marks ("). If a quotation mark must be
included in a text string, it must be doubled (""). The maximum length of a text
string including the quotation marks is 72 characters.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 IN-5
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example:
PARDM1 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 1 =
5...8 characters from the symbolic name character set
However in certain cases, mnemonic abbreviations may be entered for a parameter.
These abbreviations are also called identifiers. Identifiers have short and long
names and may be supplemented by a help text.
Example:
PARDM2 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 2=
IDF1 LONGNAME IDENTIFIER NO.1
IDF2 LONGNAME IDENTIFIER NO.2
Under certain circumstances a parameter may have up to 4 subparameters.
Subparameters are also called information units; they must be separated
by a hyphen. In the Task Manual, information units are symbolized by the
lowercase letters a, b, c, and d.
Example:
PARDM3 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 3 =
a-b-c-d
a: FIRST INFORMATION UNIT =
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: SECOND INFORMATION UNIT =
etc.
The so-called new and old parameters are also represented by lowercase
letters.
Example:
DIGIT DIGITS =
The parameter specifies the prefix digits for test multiple.
n/o
n/
/o
1...8 hexadecimal number where B is interchangeable with *
and C is interchangeable with #
In this case, new and old have a very general meaning.
EXAMPLE:
MOD TEQ: DIGITS=newvalue/oldvalue Changes the prefix digit
new value/old value
MOD TEQ: DIGITS=newvalue/ Enters new prefix digit
MOD TEQ: DIGITS= /oldvalue Deletes old prefix digit
IN-6 P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default values
If the syntax allows omission of a parameter or subparameter, the key word
"Default" in the parameter help text describes how the system will responds.
The following cases are possible:
- Default value: <value>
<value> is a parameter value within the permissible range that is
automatically used if the parameter is omitted.
- Default behavior: <value>
Values given are added to the default value.
This combination indicates that one can add other values to default values.
- Default behavior: <text>
<text> describes the behavior of the system if the parameter is
omitted. This option is selected if it is not possible to specify
a default value.
Examples:
- Optional parameter DATE
Default value: current date.
The current date is used.
- Option selection parameter for DISP and STAT commands
Default behavior: no restriction of output
Output is not restricted by omission of the parameter.
- Optional control parameter for CR, ENTR, CAN and MOD commands
Default behavior: no effect on the database
The database is not modified.
- Optional control parameter for ACT, DACT, DIAG and TEST commands
Default behavior: no effect on the process
The process is not affected by omission of the parameter.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 IN-7
EWSD IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OML structure
The OML contains the following registers:
TAB - Cross-reference lists
MASK - Status reports
More information on these registers is provided below. All examples given are
fictitious; they may not be part of the actual software.
The OML contains the status reports and the cross-reference lists that
allow you to assign output mask numbers to report groups.
The cross-reference list is subdivided into two tables that are sorted
as follows:
- Report group, mask number, mask variant and, if necessary, the command
- Mask number, mask variant, report group and, if necessary, the command
MASK
Masks that occur in various situations are described only once.
For this reason, parameters may be listed for a mask that do not
apply in a specific case.
The explanation includes
- the reason for the report,
- remedies, and
- the meaning of the output parameters.
The output parameters are displayed in a grid.
Example:
[
[
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
[ [
0 [ [
1 [ TEXTTEXT TEXT TEXT TEXTTEXTTEXT TEXT [
2 [ [
3 [ PARAM2 [
4 [ [
5 [ XXXXXX [
[ [
!-
Output parameters
Position of the Meaning of the output
output in the
mask
(row, column)
5,32 PARAMETER 2 =
:
:
:
etc.
IN-8 P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619
IN EWSD
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
For a detailed explanation of the output parameters, please refer to the parameters
on the command level. These parameters can be found in the OML cross-reference
lists and in the associated basic commands in the CMD part; these are usually
setup commands.
Example:
You need a detailed explanation of the output parameter value of a report.
This information can be found by referring to the five-digit mask number that
appears in the mask header. The mask number is the number following the
forward slash, for example, 3077/00045.
By looking up the mask number in the OML cross-reference list, you can find
the command that initiated this report. For example, this could be the display
command of the object. Detailed information can then be found in the create
command for the object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 IN-9
DISP AAAL5TPVCID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all AAL5 Terminated PVC IDs
This task displays all terminated PVCs
VPI and VCI on top of a specified port.
Output Parameters:
vpiOut:
Vpi value for this VCC.
vciOut:
Vci value for this VCC.
tableOut:
Terminated PVC IDs
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AAAL5TPVCID : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the port(DS1/E1, DS3/E3,
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL)where all terminated PVCs
VPI and VCI are to be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAAL5TPVCID- 1-
CR AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create AAL5 Terminated PVC
This task creates an AAL5 Terminated PVC per VPI/VCI
on top of a specified port.
Prerequisites:
- ATM Cell Layer must be present as lower layer prior
to the creation of AAL5 Terminated PVC.
Input format
[ [
[ CR AAL5TPVC : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ,VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex= [
[ [
[ ,VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex= [
[ [
[ ,VclReceiveTrafficDescrIndex= [
[ [
[ ,VclTransmitTrafficDescrIndex= ,VplAdminStatus= [
[ [
[ ,VclAdminStatus= ,EncapsType= ,CpcsTransmitSduSize= [
[ [
[ ,CpcsReceiveSduSize= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL)where terminated PVC(via
ATM Adaptation Layer 5)is to be created.
Together with the VPI & VCI inputs, this uniquely
identifies a specific AAL5 interface.
VPI
The VPI value of the terminated PVC.
Together with the EQN & VCI inputs, this uniquely
VCI
The VCI value of the terminated PVC.
Together with the EQN & VPI inputs, this uniquely
VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex
The value identifies the row of the
atmTrafficDescrParamTable which applies to the
receive direction of the VPL.
VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR AAL5TPVC- 1+
CR AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
transmit direction of the VPL.
VclReceiveTrafficDescrIndex
receive direction of the VCL.
VclTransmitTrafficDescrIndex
transmit direction of the VCL.
VplAdminStatus
This value specifies the desired administrative
state of the VPL. The up and down states indicate
that the traffic flow is enabled and disabled
respectively for this VPL.
This is implemented only for a VPL which
terminates a VPC (i.e., one which is NOT
cross-connected to other VPLs).
VclAdminStatus
state of the VCL. The up and down states indicate
respectively for this VCL.
This is implemented only for a VCL which
terminates a VCC (i.e., one which is NOT
cross-connected to other VCLs).
EncapsType
The type of data encapsulation used over the
AAL5 SSCS layer. The definitions reference
RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM
AAL5 and to the ATM Forum LAN Emulation
specification.
It only exists when the
local VCL end-point is also the VCC end-point,
and AAL5 is in use.
CpcsTransmitSduSize
The maximum AAL5 CPCS SDU size in octets that
is supported on the transmit direction of this
VCC.
It only exists when the local VCL end-point
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR AAL5TPVC- 2+
CR AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is also the VCC end-point, and AAL5 is in use.
CpcsReceiveSduSize
is supported on the receive direction of this
VCC.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR AAL5TPVC- 3-
DEL AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete AAL5 Terminated PVC
This task deletes an AAL5 Terminated PVC
and associated VPL/VCL on top of a specified port.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL AAL5TPVC : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL)where terminated PVC(via
ATM Adaptation Layer 5)is to be retired.
Together with the VPI & VCI inputs,
this uniquely identifies a specific AAL5 interface.
VPI
VCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL AAL5TPVC- 1-
DISP AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display AAL5 Terminated PVC
This task displays relevant attributes of an
AAL5 Terminated PVC on top of a specified port.
Output Parameters:
VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex:
The traffic descriptor index of receive direction of VPL.
VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex:
The traffic descriptor index of transmit direction of VPL.
VclReceiveTrafficDescrIndex:
The traffic descriptor index of receive direction of the
(cross-connected) Vcl.
VclTransmitTrafficDescrIndex:
The traffic descriptor index of trasmit direction of the
(cross-connected) Vcl.
VplAdminStatus:
The value specifies the administrative status of the Vpl.
VclAdminStatus:
The value specifies the administrative status of the Vcl.
VplOperStatus:
The current operational status of the Vpl.
VclOperStatus:
The current operational status of the Vcl.
VplLastChange:
The value of sysUpTime at the time this
Vpl entered its current operational state.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAL5TPVC- 1+
DISP AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
sysUpTime is the time (in hundredths of a second) since
the PHUB was last re-initialized.
VclLastChange:
The value of sysUpTime at the time this
Vcl entered its current operational state.
sysUpTime is the time (in hundredths of a second) since
the PHUB was last re-initialized.
VplRowStatus:
Status of existing conceptual row for the Vpl.
It has three states: it is either available for use by the
managed device (the status column has value active); it is
not available for use by the managed device, though the
PHUB has sufficient information to make it so (the status
column has value notInService); or, it is not available
for use by the managed device, and an attempt to make it so
would fail because the PHUB has insufficient information
(the state column has value notReady).
VclRowStatus:
Status of existing conceptual row for the Vcl.
It has three states: it is either available for use by the
managed device (the status column has value active); it is
not available for use by the managed device, though the
PHUB has sufficient information to make it so (the status
column has value notInService); or, it is not available
for use by the managed device, and an attempt to make it so
would fail because the PHUB has insufficient information
(the state column has value notReady).
AalType:
An instance of this object only exists when the
and AAL is in use.
The type of AAL used on this VCC.
The AAL type includes AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAL5TPVC- 2+
DISP AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
and AAL5. The other(4) may be user-defined
AAL type. The unknown type indicates that
the AAL type cannot be determined.
CpcsTransmitSduSize:
and AAL5 is in use.
The maximum AAL5 CPCS SDU size in octets that is
supported on the transmit direction of this VCC.
CpcsReceiveSduSize:
and AAL5 is in use.
The maximum AAL5 CPCS SDU size in octets that is
supported on the receive direction of this VCC.
EncapsType:
and AAL5 is in use.
The type of data encapsulation used over
the AAL5 SSCS layer. The definitions reference
RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation
over ATM AAL5 and to the ATM Forum
LAN Emulation specification.
CrcErrors:
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs received with
CRC-32 errors on this AAL5 VCC at the
interface associated with an AAL5 entity.
SarTimeOuts:
The number of partially re-assembled AAL5
CPCS PDUs which were discarded
on this AAL5 VCC at the interface associated
with an AAL5 entity because they
were not fully re-assembled within the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAL5TPVC- 3+
DISP AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
required time period. If the re-assembly
timer is not supported, then this object
contains a zero value.
OverSizedSDUs:
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs discarded
on this AAL5 VCC at the interface
associated with an AAL5 entity because the
AAL5 SDUs were too large.
VpNextVpiValue:
This object contains an appropriate value to be used for
atmVplVpi when creating entries in the atmVplTable. The
value -1 indicates that no unassigned entries are available.
To obtain the atmVplVpi value for a new entry, the manager
issues a management protocol retrieval operation to obtain
the current value of this object. After each retrieval, the
agent should modify the value to the next unassigned index
(or -1).
VcNextVciValue:
This object contains an appropriate value to be used for
atmVclVci when creating entries in the atmVclTable. The
value -1 indicates that no unassigned entries are available.
To obtain the atmVclVci value for a new entry, the manager
issues a management protocol retrieval operation to obtain
the current value of this object. After each retrieval, the
agent should modify the value to the next unassigned index
(or -1).
VclSegEndPoint:
Specifies whether the VCL termination point is a segment
end-point.
VplSegEndPoint:
Specifies whether the VPL termination point is a segment
end-point.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAL5TPVC- 4+
DISP AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AAL5TPVC : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL)where attributes of
terminated PVC(via ATM Adaptation Layer 5)
are to be displayed.
Together with the VPI VCI inputs, this
uniquely identifies a specific AAL5 interface.
VPI
The Vpi value of the terminated PVC.
Together with the EQN VCI inputs, this
VCI
The Vci value of the terminated PVC.
Together with the EQN VPI inputs, this
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAL5TPVC- 5-
MOD AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify AAL5 Terminated PVC
This task modifies relevant attributes of an AAL5
Terminated PVC on top of a specified port.
Note:
- Modification of VplTransmit/ReceiveTrafficDescrIndex
will cause all VplTrafficDescrIndex to be changed.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD AAL5TPVC : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= [,VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex=] [
[ [
[ [,VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex=] [
[ [
[ [,VclReceiveTrafficDescrIndex=] [
[ [
[ [,VclTransmitTrafficDescrIndex=] [,VplAdminStatus=] [
[ [
[ [,VclAdminStatus=] [,EncapsType=] [
[ [
[ [,CpcsTransmitSduSize=] [,CpcsReceiveSduSize=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL)where attributes of terminated
PVC(via ATM Adaptation Layer 5)are to be modified.
Together with the VPI & VCI inputs, this
VPI
VCI
VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex
The value identifies the row in the
receive direction of the VPL.
VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AAL5TPVC- 1+
MOD AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
transmit direction of the VPL.
VclReceiveTrafficDescrIndex
receive direction of this VCL.
VclTransmitTrafficDescrIndex
transmit direction of this VCL.
VplAdminStatus
state of the VPL. The up and down states indicate
respectively for this VPL.
This is implemented only for a VPL which
terminates a VPC (i.e., one which is NOT
cross-connected to other VPLs).
VclAdminStatus
state of the VCL. The up and down states indicate
respectively for this VCL.
This is implemented only for a VCL which
terminates a VCC (i.e., one which is NOT
cross-connected to other VCLs).
EncapsType
The type of data encapsulation used over the
AAL5 SSCS layer. The definitions reference
RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM
AAL5 and to the ATM Forum LAN Emulation
specification.
It only exists when the local VCL end-point is
also the VCC end-point, and AAL5 is in use.
CpcsTransmitSduSize
is supported on the transmit direction of this
VCC.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AAL5TPVC- 2+
MOD AAL5TPVC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CpcsReceiveSduSize
is supported on the receive direction of this
VCC.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AAL5TPVC- 3-
DISP AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Disp AAL5 Terminated PVC Interface Attr.
This task displays relevant interface attributes
of AAL5 Terminated PVC on top of a specified port.
Output parameters:
ifIndex:
A unique value, greater than zero, for each
interface. It is recommended that values are assigned
contiguously starting from 1. The value for each
interface sub-layer must remain constant at least from
one re-initialization of the entitys network
management system to the next re-initialization.
ifDescr:
A textual string containing information about the
interface. This string should include the name of the
manufacturer, the product name and the version of the
interface hardware/software.
ifType:
The type of interface. Additional values for ifType
are assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA), through updating the syntax of the
IANAifType textual convention.
ifMtu:
The size of the largest packet which can be
sent/received on the interface, specified in octets.
For interfaces that are used for transmitting network
datagrams, this is the size of the largest network
datagram that can be sent on the interface.
ifSpeed:
An estimate of the interfaces current bandwidth in
bits per second. For interfaces which do not vary in
bandwidth or for those where no accurate estimation
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAL5TPVCIFA- 1+
DISP AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
can be made, this object should contain the nominal
bandwidth. If the bandwidth of the interface is
greater than the maximum value reportable by this
object then this object should report its maximum
value (4,294,967,295) and ifHighSpeed must be used to
report the interaces speed. For a sub-layer which
has no concept of bandwidth, this object should be
zero.
ifPhysAddress:
The interfaces address at its protocol sub-layer.
For example, for an 802.x interface, this object
normally contains a MAC address. The interfaces
media-specific MIB must define the bit and byte
ordering and the format of the value of this object.
For interfaces which do not have such an address
(e.g., a serial line), this object should contain an
octet string of zero length.
ifAdminStatus:
The desired state of the interface. The testing(3)
state indicates that no operational packets can be
passed. When a managed system initializes, all
interfaces start with ifAdminStatus in the down(2)
state. As a result of either explicit management
action or per configuration information retained by
the managed system, ifAdminStatus is then changed to
either the up(1) or testing(3) states (or remains in
the down(2) state).
ifOperStatus:
The current operational state of the interface. The
testing(3) state indicates that no operational packets
can be passed. If ifAdminStatus is down(2) then
ifOperStatus should be down(2). If ifAdminStatus is
changed to up(1) then ifOperStatus should change to
up(1) if the interface is ready to transmit and
receive network traffic; it should change to
DISP AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
dormant(5) if the interface is waiting for external
actions (such as a serial line waiting for an incoming
connection); it should remain in the down(2) state if
and only if there is a fault that prevents it from
going to the up(1) state; it should remain in the
notPresent(6) state if the interface has missing
(typically, hardware) components.
ifLastChange:
The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface
entered its current operational state. If the current
state was entered prior to the last re-initialization
of the local network management subsystem, then this
object contains a zero value.
ifInOctets:
The total number of octets received on the interface,
including framing characters.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur
at re-initialization of the management system, and at
other times as indicated by the value of
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
ifInUcastPkts:
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to
a higher (sub-)layer, which were not addressed to a
multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
ifInNUcastPkts:
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to
a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a
multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
DISP AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This object is deprecated in favour of
ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts.
ifInDiscards:
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be
discarded even though no errors had been detected to
prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer
protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a
packet could be to free up buffer space.
ifInErrors:
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound
packets that contained errors preventing them from
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. For
character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the
number of inbound transmission units that contained
errors preventing them from being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.
ifInUnknownProtos:
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of packets
DISP AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
received via the interface which were discarded
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. For
character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces that
support protocol multiplexing the number of
transmission units received via the interface which
were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol. For any interface that does not support
protocol multiplexing, this counter will always be 0.
ifOutOctets:
The total number of octets transmitted out of the
interface, including framing characters.
ifOutUcastPkts:
The total number of packets that higher-level
protocols requested be transmitted, and which were not
addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not
sent.
ifOutNUcastPkts:
The total number of packets that higher-level
protocols requested be transmitted, and which were
addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this
DISP AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not
sent.
This object is deprecated in favour of
ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts.
ifOutDiscards:
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to
be discarded even though no errors had been detected
to prevent their being transmitted. One possible
reason for discarding such a packet could be to free
up buffer space.
ifOutErrors:
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of
outbound packets that could not be transmitted because
of errors. For character-oriented or fixed-length
interfaces, the number of outbound transmission units
that could not be transmitted because of errors.
ifOutQLen:
The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
DISP AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AAL5TPVCIFA : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL)where interface attributes
of terminated PVC(via ATM Adaptation Layer 5)
Together with the VPI VCI inputs, this
VPI
The VPI value of the terminated PVC of interest.
Together with the EQN VCI inputs, this
VCI
The VCI value of the terminated PVC of interest.
Together with the EQN VPI inputs, this
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AAL5TPVCIFA- 7-
MOD AAL5TPVCIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Mod AAL5 Terminated PVC Interface Attr.
This task modifies relevant interface attributes of an AAL5
Terminated PVC on top of a specified port.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD AAL5TPVCIFA : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= [,AdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the port (DS1/E1, DS3/E3,
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL) where interface attributes
of terminated PVC (via ATM Adaptation Layer 5)
are to be modified.
Together with the VPI & VCI inputs, this
VPI
VCI
AdminStatus
When a managed system
initializes, all interfaces start with
AdminStatus in the down state. As a result of
either explicit management action or per
configuration information retained by the
managed system, AdminStatus is then changed
to the up (or remains in the down state).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AAL5TPVCIFA- 1-
DISP AATMCCONNID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all ATM Cross Connect IDs
This task displays VPI and Cross Connect index of all
VP-ATM Cross Connect between two specified ports.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AATMCCONNID : EQN(Prov)= ,EQN(Subs)= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN(Prov)
The cross-connected equipment number of
the provider/network side port(DS3/E3 or DS1/E1).
EQN(Subs)
the subscriber side port(ADSL, SDSL and UDSL).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AATMCCONNID- 1-
DISP AATMTRDES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all ATM Traffic Descriptor
This task displays all ATM Traffic Descriptors
available on a specified Packet hub.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AATMTRDES : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Any equipment number of the Packet hub
where all available Traffic Descriptor(s)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AATMTRDES- 1-
DISP ACATLPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data
This task displays central-office side ATM TC layer performance statistics.
Output Parameters:
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfNeHecViolCount:
Near-end HEC violation count Interleaved/Fast: Count of
the number of occurrences of a near-end hec-I/hec-F anomaly
since agent reset.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfNeHecTotalCell:
Near-end HEC total cell count Interleaved/Fast: Count of the
total number of cells passed through the cell delineation process
operating on the interleaved/fast data while in the SYNC state
since agent reset.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfNeUserTotalCell:
Near-end User total cell count Interleaved/Fast: Count of the
total number of cells in the interleaved/fast data path delivered
at the V-C (for ATU-C) ou T-R (for ATU-R) interface since agent reset.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr15MinNeHecViolCount:
Near-end HEC violation count on this channel within the current
15 minute interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr15MinNeHecTotalCell:
Near-end HEC total cell count on this channel within the current
15 minute interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr15MinNeUserTotalCell:
Near-end User total cell count on this channel within the current
15 minute interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr1DayNeHecViolCount:
Near-end HEC violation count on this channel
during the current day as measured by
adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr1DayNeHecTotalCell:
Near-end HEC total cell count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr1DayNeUserTotalCell:
Near-end User total cell count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfPrev1DayNeHecViolCount:
Near-end HEC violation count on this channel
within the most recent previous 1 day period.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfPrev1DayNeHecTotalCell:
Near-end HEC total cell count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfPrev1DayNeUserTotalCell:
Near-end User total cell count on this channel
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACATLPD : EQN= ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of a linecard port.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACATLPD- 1+
DISP ACATLPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Channel
Channel type.
Possible values are fast or interleaved.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACATLPD- 2-
DISP ACATLPDI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data Int
This task displays ATM TC layer performance data in 15-minute intervals.
Output Parameters:
adslAtucChanIntervalNumber:
Performance Data Interval number. 1 is the
the most recent interval; interval 96 is 24
hours ago. Interval 2..96 are optional.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfHistoryNeHecViolCount:
Count of the number of occurrences of a near-end hec-I/hec-F
anomaly during this interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfHistoryNeHecTotalCell:
Count of the total number of cells passed through the cell
delineation process operating on the interleaved/fast data
while in the SYNC state during this interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfHistoryNeUserTotalCell:
Count of the total number of cells in the interleaved/fast data
path delivered at the V-C (for ATU-C) ou T-R (for ATU-R) interface
during this interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACATLPDI : EQN= [,Start=] [,End=] ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Start
Starting interval number(min = 1 max = 96).
End
Ending interval number(min = 1 max = 96).
Channel
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACATLPDI- 1-
CAN ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command cancels an automatic congestion control element.
This command is normally logged.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ACC : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
element.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACC- 1-
DISP ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command displays data for
- one automatic congestion control element,
- a maximum of two automatic congestion control elements according to the
addressed trunk group number, or
- all automatic congestion control elements.
When addressing with the trunk group number the element for
CNTRL = CANCEL is displayed before the element for CNTRL = SKIP
if both elements exist for this trunk group.
If all elements are displayed, the display can be sorted by NAME or TGNO.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [NAME=[ [
[ DISP ACC : TGNO= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
element to be displayed.
If X is entered, the elements will be displayed in alphabetical order
of parameter NAME.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to be displayed.
of parameter TGNO.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACC- 1-
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command creates or modifies an automatic congestion control element.
If an overload occurs in a succeeding exchange the responding congestion level
is sent to the preceding exchange. In the preceding exchange the reaction of
the overload has to be administrated if it is needed by the commands for
automatic congestion control traffic and automatic congestion control.
The overload is sent via a trunk of a trunk group. Therefore the indicator can
be administrated by the command CR TGRP with GCOS = SENDACCL.
The automatic congestion control element connects the relevant trunk group with
one automatic congestion control traffic element per type of CNTRL.
This means a maximum of two automatic congestion control traffic elements can be
assigned per trunk group. The assigned values for CNTRL = CANCEL
are preferred to the assigned values for CNTRL = SKIP.
The parameter INCEPT depends on parameter CNTRL:
In the case of CNTRL = CANCEL the parameter INCEPT is mandatory.
In the case of CNTRL = SKIP the parameter INCEPT is optional, i.e. only
relevant if there is an overflow in the last trunk group to a destination.
If CNTRL (i.e. = SKIP) is entered without a value for parameter INCEPT an
already existing value of parameter INCEPT is canceled.
Prerequisites: - the automatic congestion control traffic element must already
exist
- the trunk group must already exist
- only allowed for ISUP trunk groups.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ACC : NAME= <,TGNO= ,ACCTRAF= ,BLK= ,CNTRL= ,INCEPT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
element. The name must be unique.
Six control types share a naming pool:
- CR CBPT,
- ENTR TRSVCNTL,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = SKIP,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANTO,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANFROM,
- ENTR ACC.
This means that each NAME may only be used by one of these
controls.
The user may specify any name not yet used in the above-mentioned
naming pool except for two specific values:
- The user must not choose a single "X" as name because this input
stands for all existing values of a display command parameter.
- The NAME "MABEZ" is reserved for the mass call control function
which is an automatic network management control.
Therefore "MABEZ" must not be entered in this command.
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter must be entered when the element is created and may not
be entered if additional data of the element are modified.
The trunk group number must already exist.
The parameter value cannot be changed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACC- 1+
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCTRAF ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the automatic congestion control traffic
element for the relevant type of CNTRL.
This parameter must be entered when the element is created.
The automatic congestion control traffic element must already exist.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking entered for the automatic
congestion control element.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value NONE is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
NONE NO BLOCK
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This blocking prevents activation of the
administrated control, even when an overload
occurs.
CNTRL NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the type of control.
the value SKIP is set at creation of
SKIP SKIP TO THE NEXT TGRP
The traffic percentages defined in the given
automatic congestion control traffic element
are rejected for this trunk group and flow over
to the next trunk group of the routing list.
In the case of modification, an existing
INCEPT-value is canceled.
CANCEL CANCEL THE CALL
The traffic percentages defined in the given
automatic congestion control traffic element
are rejected for this trunk group. Overflow to
the next trunk group is prevented.
Prerequisites: INCEPT is mandatory.
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept, which defines the system
reaction for rejected calls.
The parameter is mandatory in the case of CNTRL = CANCEL
and optional in the case of CNTRL = SKIP.
If parameter CNTRL is changed to value SKIP, an existing
INCEPT-value is canceled.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACC- 2+
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACC- 3-
STAT ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP. STATUS OF AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL
This command displays the status for
- one automatic congestion control element,
- a maximum of two automatic congestion control elements according to the
addressed trunk group number, or
- all automatic congestion control elements.
When addressing with the trunk group number the element for
CNTRL = CANCEL is displayed before the element for CNTRL = SKIP
if both elements exist for one trunk group.
If all elements are displayed, the display can be sorted by NAME or TGNO.
Only elements which received a congestion level are considered.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [NAME=[ [
[ STAT ACC : TGNO= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
element to be displayed.
of parameter NAME.
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to be displayed.
of parameter TGNO.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT ACC- 1-
DISP ACCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Configuration
This task displays the global parameters of Q3 Access Control:
Default access, Denial response, Sec. administrator and
Rule restriction.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACCFG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACCFG- 1-
MOD ACCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Configuration
This task modifies the global parameters of Q3 Access Control.
It is used for an initial setup of the Access Control System and
to change the default access rights after definition of
individual Access Control Rules.
!!!!! C A U T I O N !!!!!
Do not change the Default access before defining a Sec.
administrator and setting up access rights by Access Control
Rules. Otherwise any Q3 operation might be rejected and no
further administration would be possible.
Therefore:
1. Always set up the Sec. administrator first: assign the AET
of the NetM (user group) that is used to administrate the Q3
security data base. This will ensure that this NetM (user group)
can always access the Q3 Access Control data base, e.g. to
correct incorrect Access Control Rules or an incorrect
Default access. The Sec. administrator should be assigned
already during installation of a new network element.
2. Set up your Access Control data base and assign access rights for
Q3 operations.
3. Change the Default access - to disable unauthorized Q3 access -
only after individual access rights have been set up.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ACCFG : [Default access=] [,Denial response=] [
[ [
[ [,Sec. administrator=] [,Rule restriction=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default access
This parameter defines Default access rights for Q3
operations. Default access rights are applied if
there is no matching Access Control Rule.
Default access should be set to Deny after creating
the Rules for an individual Access Control system.
!!!!! C A U T I O N !!!!!:
Default access must be changed to Deny only, after
you have assigned a Sec. administrator AET and after
you have assigned Q3 access rights by Access Control
rules. Otherwise any Q3 administration might be
inhibited.
Input format:
Deny : Denies default access right for the Q3 operation.
Allow : Grants default access right for the Q3 operation.
Select Default access for the Q3 operations M-GET,
M-SET, M-CREATE, M-DELETE and M-ACTION.
Denial response
This parameter defines the response to a Q3 request which is
rejected due to missing Default access rights.
Input format:
Deny : Deny by Q3 response "Access Denied"
Abort : Abort Q3 Association
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACCFG- 1+
MOD ACCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Sec. administrator
This parameter defines the AET of a Sec. administrator application.
An AET represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS.
The Sec. administrator is always granted the right to access the
Access Control database.
Q3 Authentication ensures that authentication data is defined
for this AET.
The password used for authentication will not change in the event of
a generation fallback.
Make sure that the AET assigned here is the AET of the initiator
that will be used for Q3 administration in an emergency case, e.g.
after System Recovery with a generation fallback.
Prerequisite:
System access rights for this AET have been defined by Q3
Authentication. Otherwise the parameter is rejected.
Input format: 3 to 16 numbers separated by blank
(AET as "Object Identifier")
Rule restriction
This parameter may be used to restrict the supported Rule type
of the Access Control Rules. Such a restriction may help to make
an Access Control System less complex, and may thus help to avoid
conflicting rules. Therefore, use only Allow rules and set the
Default access to Deny for all Q3 operations.
Prerequisite:
If the Rule restriction is set either to Deny rules or to
Allow rules only, no Access Control Rule of the other type
may exist.
Input format:
Deny rules : Only Rules of Type Deny or Abort are
supported.
Allow rules : Only Rules of Type Allow are supported.
All rules : All Rule types are supported.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACCFG- 2-
DISP ACCHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Channel Attributes
This task displays central-office side channel parametersfor a specific line card.
Output Parameters:
adslAtucChanInterleaveDelay:
Interleave Delay for this channel per
ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d)
-------------
4 milli-seconds,
where d is the Interleaving Depth.
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel
and defines the mapping (relative spacing) between
subsequent input bytes at the interleaver input and their
placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.
Larger numbers provide greater separation between
consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream allowing
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of
payload latency.
In the case where the ifType is Fast(125), use noSuchName.
adslAtucChanCurrTxRate:
Actual transmit rate on this channel.
adslAtucChanPrevTxRate:
The rate at the time of the last
adslAtucRateChangeTrap event. It is also set at
initialization to prevent a trap being sent.
Rate changes less than adslAtucThresh(*)RateDown
or less than adslAtucThresh(*)RateUp will not
cause a trap or cause this object to change.
(*) == Fast or Interleave.
See AdslLineAlarmConfProfileEntry.
adslAtucChanCrcBlockLength:
Indicates the length of the channel data-block
on which the CRC operates.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathFailNe:
This variable indicates the ATM data path
related near-end failures.
The slmuAdslAtmDataPathFailNe is a bit map
represented as a sum, therefore, it can represent
multiple failures (alarms) simultaneously.
NoAlarm must be set if and only if no other flag is set.
The various bit positions are:
1 noAlarm No alarm present
2 ncd No Cell Delineation (NCD-I/NCD-F) failure
4 lcd Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD-I/ LCD-F) failure
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACCHATT : EQN= ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Channel
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACCHATT- 1+
DISP ACCHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACCHATT- 2-
DISP ACCHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Channel Perf. Data
This task displays central-office side channel performance statistics.
Output Parameters:
adslAtucChanReceivedBlks:
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel
since agent reset.
adslAtucChanTransmittedBlks:
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this
channel since agent reset.
adslAtucChanCorrectedBlks:
Count of all blocks received with errors that were
corrected since agent reset. These blocks are passed on
as good data.
adslAtucChanUncorrectBlks:
Count of all blocks received with uncorrectable
errors since agent reset.
adslAtucChanPerfValidIntervals:
Number of previous 15-minute intervals in the
adslAtucChanIntervalTable Table for which valid data
has been stored. This value will be equal to the maximum
number of intervals that are kept (n) unless the device
was brought online within the last (nx15) minutes. In
the case where the agent is a proxy, it is possible
that some intervals are unavailable. In this case,
this interval is the maximum interval for which valid
data is available.
adslAtucChanPerfInvalidIntervals:
The number of 15 minute intervals which no valid data
is available.
adslAtucChanPerfCurr15MinTimeElapsed:
Total elapsed seconds in this interval.
A full interval is 900 seconds.
adslAtucChanPerfCurr15MinReceivedBlks:
within the current 15 minute interval.
adslAtucChanPerfCurr15MinTransmittedBlks:
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel
adslAtucChanPerfCurr15MinCorrectedBlks:
corrected on this channel within the current 15 minute
interval.
adslAtucChanPerfCurr15MinUncorrectBlks:
errors on this channel within the current 15 minute
interval.
adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed:
Number of seconds that have elapsed since the beginning
of the current 1Day interval.
adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayReceivedBlks:
adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayTransmittedBlks:
adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayCorrectedBlks:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACCHPD- 1+
DISP ACCHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
corrected on this channel during the current day as
measured by adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayUncorrectBlks:
errors on this channel during the current day as measured
by adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAtucChanPerfPrev1DayMoniSecs:
The time in the previous 1-day interval over which
the performance monitoring information is actually
counted. This value will normally be the same as the
total interval duration except in a situation where
performance monitoring information can not be collected
for any reason. Typically Elapsed 1-day Time will be
copied into Monitored Seconds when the 1-day roll-over
occurs.
adslAtucChanPerfPrev1DayReceivedBlks:
adslAtucChanPerfPrev1DayTransmittedBlks:
adslAtucChanPerfPrev1DayCorrectedBlks:
corrected on this channel within the most recent
previous 1 day period.
adslAtucChanPerfPrev1DayUncorrectBlks:
errors on this channel within the most recent previous
1 day period.
slmuChanAdslLinePerfCodeViolLineNe:
Code violation-line (CVI-L/CVF-L): Count of interleaved/fast
data stream crc-8 anomalies since agent reset.
slmuChanAdslLinePerfCurr1DayCodeViolLineNe:
Count of interleaved/fast data stream crc-8 anomalies
slmuChanAdslLinePerfPrev1DayCodeViolLineNe:
Count of interleaved/fast data stream crc-8 anomalies
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACCHPD : EQN= ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Channel
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACCHPD- 2-
DISP ACCHPDI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Channel Perf. Data Int.
This task displays central-office side channel performance data in 15-minute
intervals.
Output Parameters:
adslAtucChanIntervalReceivedBlks:
adslAtucChanIntervalTransmittedBlks:
adslAtucChanIntervalCorrectedBlks:
corrected on this channel during this interval.
adslAtucChanIntervalUncorrectBlks:
errors on this channel during this interval.
adslAtucChanIntervalValidData:
This variable indicates if there is valid data
for this interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACCHPDI : EQN= [,Start=] [,End=] ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Start
End
Channel
Channel type. Allowable values are fast or interleaved.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACCHPDI- 1-
CAN ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command cancels an automatic congestion control traffic element.
It may not be connected to an automatic congestion control element.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ACCTRAF : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
traffic element.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACCTRAF- 1-
DISP ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command displays data for
- one automatic congestion control traffic element, or
- all automatic congestion control traffic elements (in alphabetical order).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACCTRAF : NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
traffic element.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACCTRAF- 1-
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command creates or modifies an automatic congestion control traffic
element. With such an element different traffic reduction percentages for the
following congestion level - route type combinations can be administrated:
+--------------------------------------------------------+
Route type Command parameter
----------------------------------------------------------
Congestion level 1 direct route CL1DRT
Congestion level 1 alternate route CL1ART
Congestion level 2 direct route CL2DRT
Congestion level 2 alternate route CL2ART
+--------------------------------------------------------+
Additionally it is possible to administrate per congestion level whether
priority traffic is also affected by the traffic reduction or not.
An automatic congestion control traffic element can be connected to several
automatic congestion control elements (see command ENTR ACC).
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ACCTRAF : NAME= <,CL1DRT= ,CL1ART= ,CL2DRT= ,CL2ART= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CL1PRIOT= ,CL2PRIOT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
traffic element. The name must be unique.
CL1DRT CL1 DIRECT ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for direct route
traffic and a received congestion level 1.
the value UNSPEC is set at creation of
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12,5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
UNSPEC UNSPECIFIED BLOCKING
CL1ART CL1 ALTERNATE ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for alternate route
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF- 1+
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
CL2DRT CL2 DIRECT ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for direct route
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
CL2ART CL2 ALTERNATE ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for alternate route
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
CL1PRIOT CL1 PRIORITY TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies whether priority traffic is affected by the
administrated reductions for congestion level 1 or not.
the value CNTRL is set at creation of
NOCNTRL NO CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF- 2+
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNTRL CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
CL2PRIOT CL2 PRIORITY TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies whether priority traffic is affected by the
administrated reductions for congestion level 2 or not.
the value CNTRL is set at creation of
NOCNTRL NO CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
CNTRL CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF- 3-
DISP ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GENERAL ALARM CALL DATA
This command displays the general alarm call data :
- indication whether the alarm call execution is active
- maximum number of alarm call orders in the database
- maximum number of alarm call orders per interval
- maximum number of tries per alarm call order
- number of alarm call orders present in the database
- directory number of the announcement that will be used to execute the alarm
call orders
- directory number of the alarm call trunk group
- index of the alarm call trunk group
- category of the alarm call trunk group
- maximum number of previous intervals an alarm call can be moved to
- indication if an alarm call order should be searched in the previous
intervals when not found in the entered interval
- indication whether there should be an extra execution for the automatic and
semi-automatic alarm calls by means of the ADMOSS operator.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACDATA ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACDATA- 1-
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM CALL DATA
This command enters the general alarm call data.
Prerequisites:
- The necessary ports must be available in the LTGs were the alarm
call program is running.
- At least one announcement trunk group and announcement line must be
available.
- The number of trunk ports and announcement lines must be in proportion
to the maximum number of alarm call executions within one 5 minute interval.
Formula :
2 x D x M x (W + 1) N
N = A =
5 2
N = number of alarm call ports to be created
A = number of announcement lines to be created
D = average time of an alarm call connection in minutes
(ringing time + listening time)
M = number of maximum permitted alarm call orders per 5
minute interval (<= 200)
W = percentage of the alarm call orders that must be repeated
- The timers which determine ringing and listening time should have the
required values, the default values are :
ringing timer : T25 = 30 s.
listening timer : T33 = 30 s.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ACDATA : <MAX= ,RETRY= ,ANNDN= ,TGRPDN= ,CAT= ,BLOCK= [
[ [
[ ,ASHIFT= ,ASRCHE= ,OPRRETRY=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MAX MAX NO OF ORDERS PER INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the maximum number of alarm call orders per
5 minute interval.
If there are intervals that contain more alarm call orders than
permitted in the new maximum, the alarm call orders are nevertheless
executed.
RETRY NUMBER OF RETRIES
This parameter specifies how often an unsuccessful
executed alarm call order can be re-executed.
ANNDN ANNOUNCEMENT DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the
announcement that will be used to execute the alarm call
orders.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACDATA- 1+
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TGRPDN TRUNK GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the alarm
call trunk group of which the ports will be used to set up
the alarm call.
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the alarm call trunk group.
The category must be the same as the category entered when creating
the trunk group.
BLOCK BLOCK ALARM CALL EXECUTION
This parameter specifies whether the alarm call execution is active
or not.
NO ALARM CALL EXEC. NOT BLOCKED
YES ALARM CALL EXECUTION BLOCKED
ASHIFT ALARM CALL SHIFT
This parameter specifies the maximum permitted number of previous
intervals an alarm call can be moved to when the interval,
corresponding the booking time, is full. The shift function is only
valid for orders entered by subscriber controlled input.
ASRCHE ALARM CALL ORDER SEARCH METHOD
This parameter indicates whether the ASHIFT-intervals must be
searched for an alarm call order that is not found in the
entered interval. This extended search has only effect for actions
by subscriber controlled input.
SINGLE SEARCH ONLY ENTERED INTERVAL
SHIFTED SEARCH ALSO SHIFT INTERVALS
OPRRETRY ADMOSS OPERATOR RETRY
This parameter indication whether there should be an extra
execution for the automatic and semi-automatic alarm calls
by means of the ADMOSS operator.
Notes:
- when this parameter is omitted there will be no
reexecution. Default value = NO.
NO NO OPERATOR RETRY
When the execution of the automatic and
semi-automatic alarm call orders are unsuccessful
there will be no extra execution by means of the
ADMOSS operator.
YES OPERATOR RETRY
When the execution of the automatic and
semi-automatic alarm call orders are unsuccessful
there will be attempt to have an execution by
means of the ADMOSS operator.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACDATA- 2+
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies whether a reexecution should be
done by means of the ADMOSS operator for automatic and
semi-automatic alarm calls.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACDATA- 3-
CAN ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Access Control Initiator Group
This task cancels an Access Control Initiator group, which defines a list of
remote initiators.
Prerequisite:
The Initiator group is no longer be referenced by any Access Control Rule.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ACINIGRP : Initiator group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter defines a unique name for the Initiator
group. This name is used by an Access Control Rule
to reference the Initiator group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACINIGRP- 1-
CR ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Access Control Initiator Group
This task creates an Access Control Initiator group which defines a list of
remote initiators. Each initiator is defined by its AET (Application
Entity Title), which represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS.
An Access Control Initiator group is referenced by one or more Access Control
Rules in order to grant or deny access rights to Q3 objects.
Input format
[ [
[ CR ACINIGRP : Initiator group= ,AET list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
group. This name is used by an Access Control Rule
AET list
This parameter defines a list of initiators for this
Access Control Initiator group. Each initiator is represented
by its AET (Application Entity Title).
Input format: Set (1..10) of AETs
One AET consists of 3 to 16 numbers separated
by blank (AET as "Object Identifier").
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ACINIGRP- 1-
DISP ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Initiator Group
This task displays one or more Access Control Initiator groups, which define
a list of remote initiators. Each initiator is defined by its AET (Application
remote TMN-OS.
The following selections are possible:
- One single Access Control Initiator group:
--> Enter the Initiator group
- All Access Control Initiator groups:
--> Default: Enter no selection parameter
- Selection by filter criteria:
--> Enter Substring for Initiator group name (match at any position),
--> Enter AET entry for AET list (AET is in the list).
If both criteria are entered they must both be met.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACINIGRP : [Initiator group=] [,Substring=] [,AET entry=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter selects one specific Initiator group by its
name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if all Initiator groups
are to be selected, or Substring or AET entry is entered
as a filter parameter.
Substring
This parameter defines a string pattern for the Initiator
group name. The Initiator group name must contain this
pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if an Initiator group
is entered.
AET entry
This parameter defines an AET which must be contained in the AET list.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if an Initiator group
is entered.
Input format: 3 to 16 numbers separated
by blank (AET as "Object Identifier")
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACINIGRP- 1-
MOD ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Initiator Group
This task modifies an Access Control Initiator group, which defines a list of
remote initiators. Each initiator is defined by its AET (Application
remote TMN-OS.
The AET list of the Initiator group can be replaced or AETs may be added to
or removed from the list.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ACINIGRP : Initiator group= ,AET list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
group. This name is used by the Access Control Rule
Input format: String (1-12 characters).
AET list
This parameter updates the list of initiators for this
Access Control Initiator group. Each initiator is represented
by its AET (Application Entity Titles).
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace AET list,
ADD : Add AETs in AET list to the old list,
REMOVE : Remove AETs in AET list from the old
list.
AET list: Set (1..10) of AETs
One AET consists of 3 to 16 numbers separated
by blank (AET as "Object Identifier")
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACINIGRP- 1-
CAN ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM CALL ORDER
This command cancels casual, daily, specific or/and yearly alarm call orders.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if the DN is related to a secured
CENTREX business group BGID for which the operator has no
administration permission (see command DISP CXSEC).
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ACORD : DN= ,TIME= ,TYPE= [,FIRST=] [,LAC=] [,CHRGINF=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,KIND= [,DAYWK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber line.
TIME TIME OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the time of the alarm call.
a[-b]
a: HOUR=
This unit specifies the hour of the alarm call time.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MINUTE=
This unit specifies the minute of the alarm call time.
Notes:
- The entered minute will be rounded to a previous 5 minute
interval.
TYPE TYPE OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specifies the alarm call type.
CASUAL CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
One execution at the specified time.
DAILY DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on consecutive days at the
specified time.
SPECIFIC SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on the specified days at
the specified time.
YEARLY YEARLY ALARM CALL ORDER
Yearly executions on the specified day at the
specified time.
X ALL TYPES OF ALARM CALL ORDERS
Casual, daily, specific and yearly alarm calls
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACORD- 1+
CAN ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FIRST SKIP FIRST EXECUTION
This parameter determines whether only the first execution
of a daily or specific alarm call order must be disabled or whether the
complete order must be removed.
NO REMOVE ALARM CALL ORDER
YES DISABLE FIRST EXECUTION
Default: NO
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code to which the
directory number of this object is linked.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
1...6 digit decimal number
CHRGINF CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter indicates whether the order is
canceled by an automatic operator.
MACHINE MACHINE CONTROLLED INPUT
The alarm call is canceled by an
automatic operator.
KIND KIND OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specified the kind of alarm call order.
AUTO AUTOMATIC ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the automatic alarm call orders will be
canceled.
SEMIAUTO SEMI-AUTOM. ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the semi-automatic alarm call orders will be
canceled.
COMFORT COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the comfort alarm call orders will be
canceled.
X ALL KINDS OF ALARM CALL ORDERS
All automatic, semi-automatic and comfort alarm
call orders will be canceled.
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm you want
to cancel.
DAYWK DAYS OF WEEK
This parameter indicates the days of the week that should be
deleted for the alarm call.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=SPECIFIC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACORD- 2+
CAN ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SU SUNDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACORD- 3-
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM CALL ORDER
This command books a casual, daily, specific or yearly alarm call.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if the DN is related to a secured
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,DAYNO= [[ [
[ ENTR ACORD : DN= ,TIME= ,TYPE= [,WEEKNO=[ [,LAC=] [
[ [[,DATE= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,SHIFT=] [,CHRGINF=] [,KIND=] [,DAYWK=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,EXECHOL=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
interval.
TYPE TYPE OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the alarm call type.
CASUAL CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
One execution on the specified time.
Notes:
- if DATE is entered the execution will be
performed on that particular day otherwise the
execution will be within the next 24 hours.
DAILY DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on consecutive days on the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACORD- 1+
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
specified time.
Prerequisites:
- DAYNO
SPECIFIC SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on specified days on the
specified time.
Prerequisites:
- WEEKNO
- DAYWK
YEARLY YEARLY ALARM CALL ORDER
Yearly executions on specified day on the
specified time.
Prerequisites:
- DATE
This parameter specifies the type of alarm call.
DAYNO NUMBER OF DAYS
This parameter specifies the number of consecutive days during
which a daily alarm call order is to be executed.
When DAYNO = 0 is entered, the alarm call order will be
executed for an unlimited number of days.
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE=CASUAL
- =SPECIFIC
- =YEARLY
WEEKNO NUMBER OF WEEKS
This parameter specifies the number of weeks during
which a specific alarm call order is to be executed.
When WEEKNO = 0 is entered, the alarm call order will be
executed for an unlimited number of weeks.
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE=CASUAL
- =DAILY
- =YEARLY
DATE DATE OF LAST EXECUTION
This parameter specifies the date on which the alarm call order
must be executed for the last time.
If it is entered, the following applies:
- for TYPE=CASUAL, date must be within two years.
- for TYPE=DAILY, date must be within 99 days.
- for TYPE=SPECIFIC, date must be within one year.
- for TYPE=YEARLY, year = X means : execution every year.
year = yy means : last execution year.
month and day : execution day.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
unit values.
b: MONTH=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACORD- 2+
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code to which the
directory number of the object is linked.
Notes:
number volume.
SHIFT ALARM CALL SHIFTED
This parameter specifies whether the alarm call order should be
marked as shifted. Shifting is normally only valid for an alarm
call order entered by subscriber controlled input, but must be
available for regeneration of such orders.
NO ALARM CALL NOT SHIFTED
YES ALARM CALL SHIFTED
CHRGINF CHARGING INFORMATION
MACHINE MACHINE CONTROLLED INPUT
The alarm call is booked by an
automatic operator.
KIND KIND OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm call.
AUTO AUTOMATIC ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by the system and
will be executed by the system.
SEMIAUTO SEMI-AUTOM. ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by means of the
ADMOSS operator and executed by the system. This
value is only relevant in case of regeneration of
a semi-automatic alarm call.
COMFORT COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by means of the
ADMOSS operator and executed by means of the
ADMOSS operator. This value is only relevant in
case of regeneration of a comfort alarm call.
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm call order
you want to book.
Default: AUTO
DAYWK DAY OF WEEK
This parameter indicates the days of the week on which the
alarm call should be executed.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=SPECIFIC
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACORD- 3+
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
EXECHOL EXECUTION ON HOLIDAYS
This parameter indicates whether the alarm calls must be
executed on holidays or not.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=DAILY
- =SPECIFIC
YES EXECUTIONS ON HOLIDAYS
NO NO EXECUTION ON HOLIDAYS
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ACORD- 4-
SEL ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT ALARM CALL ORDER
This command displays all casual, daily, specific and yearly alarm call orders
for one or all subscribers for the specified time.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL ACORD : DN= ,TIME= [,LAC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
a[-b]
a: HOUR=
unit values.
b: MINUTE=
Notes:
interval.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code to which the directory
number of this object is linked.
Notes:
number volume.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL ACORD- 1-
DISP ACPHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Physical Attributes
This task displays central-office side physical attributes.
Output Parameters:
adslAtucInvSerialNumber:
Vendor specific string that identifies the vendor
equipment.
adslAtucInvVendorID:
The vendor ID assigned by T1E1.413 according to its
Annex D.
adslAtucInvVersionNumber:
Vendor specific Version number sent by this ATU as
part of the initialization messages.
adslAtucCurrSnrMgn:
Noise Margin as seen by this ATU with respect to its
received signal in tenth dB.
adslAtucCurrAtn:
Measured difference in the total power transmitted by
the peer ATU and the total power received by this ATU.
This is measured in in tenth dB.
adslAtucCurrStatus:
Status indicates current state ATUC line. This is a
bit-map of possible conditions. The various bit
positions are:
1 noDefect There no defects on the line
2 lossOfFraming ATUC failure due to not
receiving valid frame.
4 lossOfSignal ATUC failure due to not
receiving signal.
8 lossOfPower ATUC failure due to loss of power.
Note: the Agent may still function.
16 lossOfLink ATUC failure due to inability
to link with ATUR.
32 lossOfSignalQuality Loss of Signal Quality is declared
when the Noise Margin falls below
the Minimum Noise Margin, or the
bit-error-rate exceeds 10^-7.
64 dataInitFailure ATUC failure during
initialization due to bit
errors corrupting startup
exchange data.
128 configInitFailure ATUC failure during
initialization due to peer
ATU not able to support
requested configuration
256 protocolInitFailure ATUC failure during
initialization due to
incompatible protocol used by
the peer ATU.
512 noPeerAtuPresent ATUC failure during
initialization due to no
activation sequence detected
from peer ATU.
This is intended to supplement ifOperStatus.
adslAtucCurrOutputPwr:
Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.
adslAtucCurrAttainableRate:
Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACPHATT- 1+
DISP ACPHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
by the ATU. This value will be equal or greater than
the current line rate.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACPHATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACPHATT- 2-
DISP ACPHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Physical Perf. Data
This task displays central-office side physical performance data.
Output Parameters:
adslAtucPerfLof:
Count of the number of Loss of Framing failures since
agent reset.
adslAtucPerfLos:
Count of the number of Loss of Signal failures since
agent reset.
adslAtucPerfLol:
Count of the number of Loss of Link failures since
agent reset.
adslAtucPerfLpr:
Count of the number of Loss of Power failures since
agent reset.
adslAtucPerfES:
Count of the number of Errored Seconds since agent
reset. The errored second paramter is a count of
one-second intervals containing one or more crc
anomolies, or one or more los or sef defects.
adslAtucPerfValidIntervals:
adslAtucInterval Table for which valid data
data is available.
adslAtucPerfInvalidIntervals:
is available.
adslAtucPerfCurr15MinTimeElapsed:
adslAtucPerfCurr15MinLofs:
Count of seconds in the current 15 minute interval
when there was Loss of Framing.
adslAtucPerfCurr15MinLoss:
Count of seconds in the current 15 minute interval when
there was Loss of Signal.
adslAtucPerfCurr15MinLols:
there was Loss of Link.
adslAtucPerfCurr15MinLprs:
there was Loss of Power.
adslAtucPerfCurr15MinESs:
Count of Errored Seconds in the current 15 minute
interval. The errored second paramter is a count of
adslAtucPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed:
adslAtucPerfCurr1DayLofs:
Count of the number of seconds when there was Loss of
Framing during the current day as measured by
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACPHPD- 1+
DISP ACPHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
adslAtucPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAtucPerfCurr1DayLoss:
Signal during the current day as measured by
adslAtucPerfCurr1DayLols:
Link during the current day as measured by
adslAtucPerfCurr1DayLprs:
Power during the current day as measured by
adslAtucPerfCurr1DayESs:
Count of Errored Seconds during the current day as
measured by adslAtucPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
The errored second paramter is a count of
adslAtucPerfPrev1DayMoniSecs:
performance monitoring dara can not be collected
occurs.
adslAtucPerfPrev1DayLofs:
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of
Framing within the most recent previous 1 day period.
adslAtucPerfPrev1DayLoss:
Signal within the most recent previous 1 day period.
adslAtucPerfPrev1DayLols:
Link within the most recent previous 1 day period.
adslAtucPerfPrev1DayLprs:
Power within the most recent previous 1 day period.
adslAtucPerfPrev1DayESs:
Count of Errored Seconds within the most recent
previous 1 day period. The errored second paramter is
a count of one-second intervals containing one or more
crc anomolies, or one or more los or sef defects.
slmuAdslLinePerfFecSecLineNe:
Forward Error Correction second-line (ECS-L): Count of
1-second intervals with one or more fec anomalies since agent reset.
slmuAdslLinePerfSeverelyErroredSecLineNe:
Severely errored second-line (SES-L): Count of 1-second
intervals with 18 or more crc-8 anomalies, or one or more
los defects, or one or more sef defects, or one or more lpr
defects since agent reset.
slmuAdslLinePerfUnavailableSecNe:
Unavailable second (UAS-L): Count of 1-second intervals for wich
the ADSL line is unavailable since agent reset.
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr15MinFecSecLineNe:
Count of 1-second intervals with one or more fec anomalies
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr15MinSeverelyErroredSecLineNe:
Count of 1-second intervals with 18 or more crc-8 anomalies,
or one or more los defects, or one or more sef defects, or one or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACPHPD- 2+
DISP ACPHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
more lpr defects within the current 15 minute interval.
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr15MinUnavailableSecNe:
Count of 1-second intervals for wich the ADSL line is unavailable
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr1DayFecSecLineNe:
during the current day as measured by adslAtucChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr1DaySeverelyErroredSecLineNe:
more lpr defects during the current day as measured by
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr1DayUnavailableSecNe:
slmuAdslLinePerfPrev1DayFecSecLineNe:
slmuAdslLinePerfPrev1DaySeverelyErroredSecLineNe:
more lpr defects within the most recent previous 1 day period.
slmuAdslLinePerfPrev1DayUnavailableSecNe:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACPHPD : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACPHPD- 3-
DISP ACPHPDI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atuc Physical Perf. Data Int.
This task displays central-office side performance data in 15-minute intervals.
Output Parameters:
adslAtucChanIntervalReceivedBlks:
adslAtucChanIntervalTransmittedBlks:
adslAtucChanIntervalCorrectedBlks:
adslAtucChanIntervalUncorrectBlks:
adslAtucChanIntervalValidData:
for this interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACPHPDI : EQN= [,Start=] [,End=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Start
End
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACPHPDI- 1-
CAN ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Access Control Rule
This task cancels an Access Control Rule, which defines the access rights
of an Access Control Initiator group on an Access Control Target group
for the Q3 operations defined by Target group.
Depending on the Rule type the cancel operation can remove existing
access rights (Rule type = Allow) or grant new access rights
(Rule type = Deny).
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ACRULE : Rule= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter defines the name of the Access Control Rule.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACRULE- 1-
CR ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Access Control Rule
This task creates an Access Control Rule which defines the access
rights of an Access Control Initiator group list on an Access Control
Target group list for the Q3 operations defined by Target group.
An Allow Rule (Rule type = Allow) will allow execution of the
Q3 operation as long as no matching Deny Rule exists. A Deny Rule
will reject the Q3 operation (Rule type = Deny) or abort the
association (Rule type = Abort) in any case.
A Global Rule references no Target group. It defines the access
rights for the referenced Initiator group globally, i.e. it
includes all Q3 object classes and all Q3 operations.
A Common Rule references no Initiator group. It defines the common
access rights to the referenced Target group, i.e. it is valid for
all initiators (AETs).
Optional time dependencies may be defined by scheduling parameters.
The validity of the Access Control Rule can be restricted by:
- Duration: a Start time and Stop time) and/or
- Daily scheduling: time intervals for all days of the week or
- Weekly scheduling: time intervals per day of the week
The parameter Availability status indicates if a Rule with
scheduling parameters is active (On) or not (Off). This parameter
is only for output. " " indicates that no scheduling parameter was
entered.
Prerequisite:
- The referenced Access Control Initiator groups and Access Control
Target groups must have been created by CR ACINIGRP and
CR ACTARGRP.
- The supported Rule type may have been restricted by the parameter
Rule restriction in MOD ACCFG. In this case only Allow Rules or
only Deny Rules can be created.
Note:
- The parameters Daily intervals and Weekly intervals exclude one
another.
- The scheduling parameters must be selected when the Access Control
Rule is created. It is not possible to add scheduling parameters by
MOD ACRULE.
Input format
[ [
[ CR ACRULE : Rule= ,Rule type= ,Initiator group list= [
[ [
[ ,Target group list= [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
Rule type
Defines the Rule type, i.e. the action performed
when the Rule matches.
The supported values can be restricted by MOD ACCFG.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ACRULE- 1+
CR ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Allow Allow access (if no other deny rule exists)
Deny Deny access by "Access Denied"
Abort Deny access and abort the association
Initiator group list
This parameter references a list of Access Control
Initiator groups. The rule is applied to all Initiators
(AETs) of all Initiator Groups in this list.
Enter an empty Initiator group list to create a Common
Rule, which is valid for all initiators (AETs).
The referenced Initiator groups must have been created by
CR ACINIGRP.
Input format: Set (0..10) of Initiator groups
One Initiator group is identified by its
name (1-12 characters).
Target group list
This parameter references a list of Access Control
Target groups, each member defines an object class list
and a set of Q3 operations.
Enter an empty list (size=0) to create a Global Rule,
which defines global access rights (to all object classes
and for all Q3 operations) for the referenced Initiator groups.
The referenced Target groups in the list must have been created
by CR ACTARGRP.
Input format: Set (0..10) of Target groups
One Target group is identified by its
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the rule
becomes active.
If only the Start time is set the Stop time will be set
automatically to Continuous.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes or
10 minutes (EWSD classic).
Input format: standard date and time values
Default value: actual system time
will be set if this parameter is omitted but
Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the rule becomes
inactive.
If only the Stop time is set the Start time will be set
automatically to the actual system time of the switch.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
Start time is set.
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified within which the rule is active.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for weekly
scheduling must not be entered.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ACRULE- 2+
CR ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week.
The rule will be inactive on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals set. At least
one day with one interval must be selected.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for daily
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use "00:00-00:00" to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled
from the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ACRULE- 3-
DISP ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Rule
This task displays one or more Access Control Rules, which define
the access rights of Access Control Initiator groups on Access Control
Target groups for the Q3 operations.
- One single Access Control Rule:
--> Enter Rule
- All Access Control Rules:
--> Enter Substring for Rule name (match at any position),
--> Enter Rule type (equality)
--> Enter Initiator group (member in Initiator group list).
--> Enter Target group (member in Target group list).
More than one selection criteria are combined by logical AND.
Different output formats are supported for the display of a single Access
control Rule.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACRULE : [Rule=] ,Output format= [,Substring=] [,Rule type=] [
[ [
[ [,Initiator group=] [,Target group=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter selects one specific Access Control Rule.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if all Access Control
Rules are to be selected or one of the following filter
parameters is entered.
Output format
This parameter defines the Output format of the displayed Access
Control Rules. Format Compact must be used if parameter Rule
is not specified.
Input format:
Compact displays Access Control Rule parameters without
scheduling parameters.
Complete displays all Access Control Rule parameters.
Extended displays all Access Control Rule parameters plus
the referenced Initiator group and Target group.
Default: Compact
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the Rule name. The Rule
name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if Rule was entered.
Rule type
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACRULE- 1+
DISP ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter selects the Rule type of the Rules to display.
Input format:
Allow Select Allow Rules
Deny Select Deny Rules
Abort Select Deny Rules with Abort
Initiator group
This parameter selects the referenced Initiator group list of
the Rules to display.
If a value is entered, the Initiator group list must
contain the value;
if "" is entered, only common rules are selected.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for Initiator group name
"" (empty string) selects Common Rules (with no Initiator
group).
Target group
This parameter selects the referenced Target group list
of the Rules to display.
If a value is entered, the Target group list must contain
the entered value;
if "" is entered, only global rules are selected.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for Target group name
"" (empty string) selects Global Rules (with no Target
group).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACRULE- 2-
MOD ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Rule
This task modifies the parameters of an Access Control Rule,
which defines the access rights of Access Control
Initiator groups on an Access Control Target groups for Q3
operations.
Depending on the parameters entered, the Rule type, the
referenced Target group list or Initiator group list is changed.
Scheduling parameters can be modified as follows:
- Duration: replace Start time and/or Stop time.
- Daily scheduling: replace Daily intervals.
- Weekly Scheduling: replace time intervals of single days of the
week.
Note:
- It is not possible to change a Common Rule (empty
Initiator group list) to a non Common Rule or to change a non
Common Rule to a Common Rule. Thus it is only possible to modify
a Initiator group list, which is not empty.
- It is not possible to change a Global Rule (no Target group) to
a non Global Rule or to change a non Global Rule to a Global Rule.
Thus it is only possible to modify a Target group list, which
is not empty.
- It is not possible to change an Allow Rule to a Deny Rule or a
Deny Rule to an Allow Rule respectively. Thus it is only possible
to change the Rule Type from Deny to Abort or vice versa.
- Only scheduling parameters selected by CR ACRULE can be modified.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ACRULE : Rule= [,Rule type=] [,Initiator group list=] [
[ [
[ [,Target group list=] [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
Rule type
This parameter replaces the Rule type, i.e. the action performed
when the Rule matches.
Note: It is not possible to change an Allow Rule to a Deny Rule, or
a Deny Rule to an Allow Rule.
Input format:
Deny Deny access by "Access Denied"
Abort Deny access and abort the association
This parameter modifies the Access Control Initiator group list,
which defines the Initiator groups the Rule is applied to.
Note: It is not possible to set up an Initiator group list for
a Common Rule (empty Initiator group list) or to change a
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACRULE- 1+
MOD ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
non Common Rule to a Common Rule (remove all
Initiator groups.
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace Initiator group list,
ADD : Add Initiator groups to the old list,
REMOVE : Remove Initiator groups from the old
list.
Group list: Set (1..10) of Initiator groups
One Initiator group is identified by its
Target group list
This parameter modifies the Access Control Target group list;
each member defines an object classes list and a set ofQ3
operations.
Note: It is not possible to set up a Target group list for a
Global Rule (empty Target group list) or to change a
non Global Rule to a Global Rule (remove all Target Groups.
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace Target group list,
ADD : Add Target groups to the old list,
REMOVE : Remove Target groups from the old list.
Group list: Set (1..10) of Target groups
One Target group is identified by its
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the rule
becomes active.
The parameter can be replaced only if a Start time or
Stop time was entered when the Rule was created.
Input format: standard date and time values
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the rule
becomes inactive.
Stop time was entered when the Rule was created.
time values
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces Daily intervals (up to 6) within which
the rule is active. The parameter can be entered only if Daily
intervals were entered when the Rule was created. The
time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces Weekly intervals within which the
rule is active.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are replaced.
The intervals of the days not selected will not be changed.
Enter 0 intervals to disable the whole day.
At least one day with one interval must be active in the
resultant Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is
rejected.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACRULE- 2+
MOD ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACRULE- 3-
DISP ACSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM CALL STATISTICS
This command displays the alarm call statistics.
Following data are displayed :
- number of refused orders; the number of input attempts, entered
between the last but one and the last activation of the interval,
which were refused
- number of accepted orders; the number of alarm call orders in the
interval at the moment of the last activation of the interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACSTAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACSTAT- 1-
CAN ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Access Control Target Group
This task cancels an Access Control Target group which defines a set
of Q3 object classes (OCs) and the Q3 operations on these object classes.
Prerequisite:
The Target group is not canceled if it is referenced by an Access Control Rule
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ACTARGRP : Target group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter defines the unique name of the Target group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ACTARGRP- 1-
CR ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Access Control Target Group
This task creates an Access Control Target group which defines a set
A Target group is referenced by one or more Access Control Rules in order
to grant or deny access rights for the Q3 operations on the OCs.
The set of OCs is defined by an Object class list and a Scope parameter.
The Scope parameter selects a subtree for the OCs in the Object class list.
Thus the Target Group contains the sum of all "scopes" of the OCs in the
Object class list.
The optional parameter Ref. target group allows an already defined set
of OCs to be reused. If defined, the Object class list and Scope are copied
from the Ref. target group.
Note:
- The scope of each OC in the Object class list must not be empty, i.e. it must
contain at least 1 OC.
Input format
[ [
[ CR ACTARGRP : Target group= [,Ref. target group=] [
[ [
[ [,Object class list=] [,Scope=] ,Operations list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter defines the name of the Target group.
This name is used by an Access Control Rule to reference
the Target group.
Ref. target group
This parameter defines an optional reference Target group.
If entered, the parameters Object class list and Scope
may be omitted. Their values are then copied from the reference
Target group.
Object class list
This parameter defines a list of Q3 object classes (OCs).
This parameter may be omitted only if a Ref. target group
is entered. In this case the Object class list is copied
from the Ref. target group.
See also Scope parameter
Input format: Set (1..10) of Q3 object classes
Select object classes from list
Scope
This parameter defines the Scope of all object classes in
Object class list according to the Q3 "Name Binding" relation.
This parameter may be omitted only if a Ref. target group
is entered. In this case the Scope is copied from the
Ref. target group.
Input format:
Standard:
Base object Base OC only
First level 1st level subordinate base OC
Whole subtree Base OC and all subordinate OCs
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ACTARGRP- 1+
CR ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Level: n nth level subordinate base OC
Base to level: n Base OC and all OCs down to level n
Default Value: Whole subtree
Operations list
This parameter selects the Q3 Operations that are defined for this
Target group.
Input format:
Enabled: Q3 operation is included
Disabled: Q3 operation is not included
Select value for all Q3 operations:
M-GET, M-SET, M-CREATE, M-DELETE and M-ACTION.
Default value: All Q3 operations are selected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ACTARGRP- 2-
DISP ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Target Group
This task displays one or more Access Control Target groups, which define
a set of Q3 object classes (OCs) and the Q3 operations on these object classes.
- One single Access Control Target group:
--> Enter the Target group
- All Access Control Target groups:
- Selection by filter criteria
--> Enter Substring for Target group name (match at any position),
--> Enter Object class for Object class list (Object class is in the list)
If both criteria are entered they must both be met.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ACTARGRP : [Target group=] [,Substring=] [,Object class=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter selects one specific Target group by its name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if all Target groups
are to be selected, or if Substring or Object class is
entered as a filter parameter.
Substring
This parameter defines a name pattern for the Target group name.
The Target group name must contain this pattern at any one position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if Target group was entered.
Object class
This parameter defines an Object class which must be contained in
the Object class list.
Note:
The task will evaluate the Object class list but not
the Scope.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if a Target group
was entered.
Input format: Select Object class from list
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ACTARGRP- 1-
MOD ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Target Group
This task modifies an Access Control Target group, which defines a list
The set of OCs defined by the Target group is affected by modification
of the Object class list and/or the Scope parameter.
Note:
- The modification of the Object class list or Scope parameter must not
produce empty scopes, i.e. the scope of each OC in the Object class list
must contain at least 1 OC.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ACTARGRP : Target group= [,Object class list=] [,Scope=] [
[ [
[ [,Operations list=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter defines the name of the Target group.
Object class list
This parameter updates the Object class list of the Target group.
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace Object class list.
ADD : Add OCs in Object class list to the
old list.
REMOVE : Remove OCs in Object class list from the
old list.
Object class list: Set (1..10) of Q3 object classes
Select Object classes from list.
Scope
This parameter replaces the Scope for the object classes in
Object class list according to the Q3 "Name Binding" relation.
Input format:
Std:
Base object OC only
Whole subtree OC and all subordinate OCs
First level 1st level subordinate OC
Level: n nth level subordinate OC
Base to level: n OC itself and all OCs down to level
n
Operations list
This parameter replaces the Q3 operations that are defined for this
Target group.
Input format:
Enabled : Q3 operation is included.
Disabled: Q3 operation is not included.
Select Value for all Q3 operations:
M-GET, M-SET, M-CREATE, M-DELETE and M-ACTION.
Default value: All Q3 operations are selected.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACTARGRP- 1+
MOD ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ACTARGRP- 2-
DISP ADLCI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all DLCIs
This task displays a list of all created DLCIs and their belonging VcIfIndex
values.
Output Parameters:
Frame Relay Virtual Circuits Table:
DLCI:
Data Link Connection Identifier for this virtual circuit.
VcIfIndex:
The interface index value of this virtual circuit.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ADLCI : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Physical Equipment Number of the E1/T1 line. The EQN serves to
identify a module or port uniquely within its switch.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ADLCI- 1-
DISP ADNSI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Data Network State Information
This task displays the data net state attributes of a line card or port.
Output Parameters:
AdminState:
Administrative state of the physical entity (module or port)
according to EWSD OAM. In EWSD mode the AdminState is read-only.
In stand-alone mode the AdminState can be set by the NMS.
OpState:
Operational state of the physical entity (module or port).
OpStateReason:
Reason for being in the current operational state.
OpStateDetailsId:
Descriptive text for current operational state.
OpStateDetails:
Descriptive text for current operational state.
AlarmState:
Alarm state of the physical entity (module or port).
AlarmStateReason:
Reason for being in the current alarm state.
AlarmStateDetailsId:
An identifier which can be mapped to a desciptive
text by means of an external mapping file.
AlarmStateDetails:
Descriptive text for current alarm state.
UpTime:
The time (in hundredths of a second) since the
physical entity was last re-initialized.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ADNSI : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of a linecard, linecard port, or the packet hub.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ADNSI- 1-
ACT ADPHMEAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command activates the average of daily peak full hour measurement
or reactivates a stopped measurement or changes the measurement periods
of an active measurement.
Prerequisites:
- Before this command is executed,measurement objects must be entered in
the measurement by means of the command ENTR ADPHMEAS.
- Disc space of 640 PAM pages for 14 result files is necessary.
Possible effects:
If the execution of the job is interrupted by recovery ,
the job will be restarted automatically with the same job number.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT ADPHMEAS : [PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PER PERIOD OF ADPH MEASUREMENT
This parameter delimits the recurrent days of the week on which
recording is to take place. The measurement periods can be delimited
to working days only (WO) .
Default: daily measurement
NO DEFAULT
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT ADPHMEAS- 1-
CAN ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command specifies measurement objects to be cancelled from the
measurement.
Possible effects:
If all measurement objects are cancelled from an active measurement, the
measurement job will be cancelled.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN ADPHMEAS - OTHER OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
2. CAN ADPHMEAS - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
1. Input format
OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ADPHMEAS : <TGNO= ,GRP=> [,DN= [,LAC=]] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group to be cancelled
from the measurement.
A maximum of 32 trunk groups can be linked with &.
Cancellation of all trunk groups is possible.
GRP OBJECT GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a group whose elements are to be
cancelled from the measurement .
A maximum of 4 groups can be linked with &.
Cancellation of all groups is possible.
DN PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the private branch exchange
directory number to be cancelled. A maximum of 32 directory numbers can
be linked with &. Cancellation of all directory numbers is possible.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code for the private
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ADPHMEAS- 1+
CAN ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
branch exchange directory numbers.
Default: in exchanges with only one local network, this
parameter may be omitted.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ADPHMEAS- 2+
CAN ADPHMEAS
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ADPHMEAS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,GRP=] [,TGNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
directory number to be cancelled. A maximum of 32 directory numbers can
be linked with &. Cancellation of all directory numbers is possible.
cancelled from the measurement .
Cancellation of all groups is possible.
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group to be cancelled
from the measurement.
Cancellation of all trunk groups is possible.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ADPHMEAS- 3-
DISP ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command displays the job data and the state of the job and of the
measurement objects which selected.
<job number>.
1. DISP ADPHMEAS- OTHER OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
2. DISP ADPHMEAS- PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
3. DISP ADPHMEAS- STATUS STATUS
1. Input format
[ [
[ DISP ADPHMEAS : <TGNO= ,GRP=> [,DN= [,LAC=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group to be displayed.
Display of all trunk groups is possible.
In combination with STATUS only all trunk groups may be selected.
displayed.
Display of all groups is possible.
directory number to be displayed. A maximum of 32 directory numbers can
be linked with &. Display of all directory numbers is possible.
In combination with STATUS only all directory numbers may be selected.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ADPHMEAS- 1+
DISP ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP ADPHMEAS
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
[ [
[ DISP ADPHMEAS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,GRP=] [,TGNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
displayed.
DISP ADPHMEAS
STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
STATUS
[ [
[ DISP ADPHMEAS : STATUS= [,DN= [,LAC=]] [,TGNO=] [,GRP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
STATUS STATUS OF MEASUREMENT OBJECT
This parameter specifies the state of the measurement objects to be
displayed. Any combination of states can be linked with &.
Display of all states is also possible.
Combination with the other parameters is possible.
ACTIVE OBJECT IS ACTIVE
CANCELED OBJECT IS CANCELED
NOTEXIST OBJECT IS NOT EXISTING
WAITING OBJECT IS WAITING
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
displayed.
DISP ADPHMEAS
STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ADPHMEAS- 5-
ENTR ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR AVERAGE DAILY PEAK HOUR TRAF. MEAS.
This command specifies the measurement objects to be entered in the
measurement. This command can also be executed during an active
measurement.
If a measurement object is entered in an active measurement, the
measurement for this object will begin at the next measurement day.
The maximum number of measurement objects is 200 for trunk groups and
600 for private branch exchanges.
1. ENTR ADPHMEAS- OTHER OTHER MEASUREMENT OBJECTS
2. ENTR ADPHMEAS- PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
1. Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ADPHMEAS : <TGNO= ,GRP=> [,DN= [,LAC=]] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group for which
traffic data are to be recorded.
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter specifies the name of a group for whose elements
measurements are to be obtained. Only groups of GRPTYP = TGRP or
PBX are possible.
A maximum of 10 faulty elements of a group will be accepted.
You can cancel faulty elements from the measurement with the command
CAN ADPHMEAS .
directory number. Up to 32 parameter values can be linked
with &.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ADPHMEAS- 1+
ENTR ADPHMEAS
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ADPHMEAS- 2+
ENTR ADPHMEAS
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ADPHMEAS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,GRP=] [,TGNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
directory number. Up to 32 parameter values can be linked
with &.
This parameter specifies the name of a group for whose elements
measurements are to be obtained. Only groups of GRPTYP = TGRP or
PBX are possible.
A maximum of 10 faulty elements of a group will be accepted.
You can cancel faulty elements from the measurement with the command
CAN ADPHMEAS .
This parameter specifies the name of the trunk group for which
traffic data are to be recorded.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ADPHMEAS- 3-
DISP AENTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Entity Info
This task displays the relevant attributes of the entity-mib for a line card or
port.
Output Parameters:
PhysicalDescr:
A textual description of physical entity. This object
should contain a string which identifies the manufacturers
name for the physical entity, and should be set to a
distinct value for each version or model of the physical
entity.
PhysicalVendorType:
An indication of the vendor-specific hardware type of the
physical entity. Note that this is different from the
definition of MIB-IIs sysObjectID.
An agent should set this object to a enterprise-specific
registration identifier value indicating the specific
equipment type in detail. The associated instance of
PhysicalClass is used to indicate the general type of
hardware device.
If no vendor-specific registration identifier exists for
this physical entity, or the value is unknown by this agent,
then the value { 0 0 } is returned.
PhysicalContainedIn:
The value of entPhysicalIndex for the physical entity which
contains this physical entity. A value of zero indicates
this physical entity is not contained in any other physical
entity. Note that the set of containment relationships
define a strict hierarchy; that is, recursion is not
allowed.
PhysicalClass:
An indication of the general hardware type of the physical
entity.
An agent should set this object to the standard enumeration
value which most accurately indicates the general class of
the physical entity, or the primary class if there is more
than one.
If no appropriate standard registration identifier exists
for this physical entity, then the value other is
returned. If the value is unknown by this agent, then the
value unknown is returned.
PhysicalParentRelPos:
An indication of the relative position of this child
component among all its sibling components. Sibling
components are defined as PhysicalEntries which share the
same instance values of each of the PhysicalContainedIn
and PhysicalClass objects.
An NMS can use this object to identify the relative ordering
for all sibling components of a particular parent
(identified by the PhysicalContainedIn instance in each
sibling entry).
This value should match any external labeling of the
physical component if possible. For example, for a module
labeled as card #3, PhysicalParentRelPos should have
the value 3.
If the agent cannot determine the parent-relative position
for some reason, or if the associated value of
PhysicalContainedIn is 0, then the value -1 is
returned. Otherwise a non-negative integer is returned,
indicating the parent-relative position of this physical
entity.
Parent-relative ordering normally starts from 1 and
continues to N, where N represents the highest
positioned child entity. However, if the physical entities
(e.g. slots) are labeled from a starting position of zero,
then the first sibling should be associated with a
PhysicalParentRelPos value of 0. Note that this
ordering may be sparse or dense, depending on agent
implementation.
The actual values returned are not globally meaningful, as
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AENTI- 1+
DISP AENTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
each parent component may use different numbering
algorithms. The ordering is only meaningful among siblings
of the same parent component.
PhysicalName:
The textual name of the physical entity. The value of this
object should be the name of the component as assigned by
the local device and should be suitable for use in commands
entered at the devices console. This might be a text
name, such as console or a simple component number (e.g.
port or module number), such as 1, depending on the
physical component naming syntax of the device.
If there is no local name, or this object is otherwise not
applicable, then this object contains a zero-length string.
Note that the value of PhysicalName for two physical
entities will be the same in the event that the console
interface does not distinguish between them, e.g., slot-1
and the card in slot-1.
AliasMappingIdentifier:
The value of this object identifies a particular conceptual
row associated with the indicated PhysicalIndex and
LogicalIndex pair.
Since only physical ports are modeled in this table, only
entries which represent interfaces or ports are allowed. If
an ifEntry exists on behalf of a particular physical port,
then this object should identify the associated ifEntry.
For repeater ports, the appropriate row in the
rptrPortGroupTable should be identified instead.
For example, suppose a physical port was represented by
PhysicalEntry.3, LogicalEntry.15 existed for a
repeater, and LogicalEntry.22 existed for a bridge. Then
there might be two related instances of
AliasMappingIdentifier:
AliasMappingIdentifier.3.15 == rptrPortGroupIndex.5.2
AliasMappingIdentifier.3.22 == ifIndex.17
It is possible that other mappings (besides interfaces and
repeater ports) may be defined in the future, as required.
Bridge ports are identified by examining the Bridge MIB and
appropriate ifEntries associated with each dot1dBasePort,
and are thus not represented in this table.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AENTI : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of a linecard, linecard port, or the packet hub.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AENTI- 2-
DISP AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This command displays the contents of archive files.
The messages can be specified either in their entirety or as
a list containing general information (table of contents) for the
selected message entries. The amount of messages can be restricted by
specifying the entry numbers.
Prerequisite:
- The file must exist and have the attributes of an archive file.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AENTRY : AFILE= [,AENTRY=] [,TOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter designates an archive file.
Notes:
- The first character may not be a period, the last character
may be neither a period nor an asterisk, and two periods may
not appear consecutively in the filename.
AENTRY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This parameter specifies the entry number assigned by the FCP to
incoming messages for an archive file. When displaying archive files, a
list of ranges (intervals) of these numbers can be specified as limits.
Notes:
- A maximum of two intervals can be linked with &.
- If 99999 is entered, the most recently entered message is displayed.
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS
This parameter specifies whether only message headers or whole messages
are displayed.
NO NO TABLE OF CONTENTS
YES TABLE OF CONTENTS
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AENTRY- 1-
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This command displays data from an archive file. These data are
restricted via parameter entry.
of records from an archive file to the output device. The search
direction can be set either to ascending or descending. As long as the
individual conditions from the combination of named possibilities do not
contradict themselves, they are linked to form an overall condition.
The following can be selected:
- messages with a certain job number
- messages which are determined by context and
format number or only by context
- alarm messages, limited to alarms with a certain priority
- messages which have been entered within a specified period of time
- If neither DATE nor TIME are specified, the search covers
the entire file.
- If only DATE is specified, the search covers all entries within
the specified DATE interval.
- If only TIME is specified, the current date is implied for DATE.
- If DATE and TIME are specified, the search covers all entries in
each of the specified TIME intervals on every day included in the
specified DATE intervals.
Prerequisite:
- The specified file must exist and must be created with the attributes
of an archive file.
Input format
[ [
[ SEL AENTRY : AFILE= [,TIME=] [,DATE=] [,JN=] [,MSG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ALPRIO=] [,DIR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Note:
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time as one of the search
criteria for selecting records from an archive file.
Note:
- Seconds are ignored during conversion to an internal format.
- If selective output of archive entries is desired, where the
intended time interval contains a date change, it is not
possible to achieve the result with one time interval.
- For example,
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, TIME = 23-00-00&&01-00-00
will not work, since without a specified date, always the
current day is assumed. A date change is not considered.
The mentioned example will produce entries between
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL AENTRY- 1+
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1h and 23h of the same day.
The desired result can be achieved as follows, working
with the DATE parameter:
- if for ONE time interval the entries are to be selected,
2 commands are needed:
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, DATE = 98-10-05,
TIME = 23-00-00 && 23-59-59
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, DATE = 98-10-06,
TIME = 00-00-00 && 01-00-00
- if cyclically (i.e. on each day), entries are to be
displayed, the TIME interval must be split in two:
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, DATE = 98-09-01&&98-12-31,
TIME = 23-00-00&&23-59-59 & 00-00-00&&01-00-00.
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
unit values.
b: MINUTES=
unit values.
c: SECONDS=
unit values.
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date as one of the search criteria.
Note:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies job number as one of the search criteria.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL AENTRY- 2+
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSG MESSAGE
This parameter specifies a message.
Note:
- There are two kinds of messages: command response messages and
system messages.
- system context for system messages with the following
possible values:
SPT spontaneous message which is not an alarm
Alarm contexts:
SYOP SYSTEM OPERATOR CALL
SYPUPD SYSTEM PANEL UPDATE
SYPCHNG SYSTEM PANEL CHANGE
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE ALARM
CALLID CALL IDENTIFICATION
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
CU CENTRAL UNIT ALARM
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR ALARM
MB MESSAGE BUFFER ALARM
SN SWITCHING NETWORK ALARM
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ALARM
LNMAIN LINE MAINTENANCE ALARM
LNLNCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK ALARM
TRMAIN TRUNK MAINTENANCE ALARM
TGBL TRUNKGROUP BLOCKED
TGAL TRUNKGROUP ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
SYP SYSTEM PANEL ALARM
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
NLMPAL NO LAMP ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
SERV SERVICE CIRCUITS
TAXUP CCS7 TAXATION USER PART
TIMESYNC EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
ATMF ATM FABRIC
- project-specific some of the values may be unused.
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
Corresponds to the command code in a
command response message or the
system context in a system message.
The following characters are not permitted:
.
unit values.
b: FORMAT=
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the priority of an alarm output message
as a search criteria.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL AENTRY- 3+
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the read direction when archive file records
are searched.
FORW FORWARD SEARCH DIRECTION
BACKW BACKWARD SEARCH DIRECTION
Default: FORW
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL AENTRY- 4-
CAN AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ARCHIVE FILE
This command cancels an archive file.
Prerequisite:
- the archive file must exist
- the archive file may not be assigned to any device group
- If output suppression is deactivated, the AFILE may not
be the output device.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN AFILE : AFILE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies an archive file.
Note:
not appear consecutively in the file name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN AFILE- 1-
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ARCHIVE FILE
This command creates an archive file to act as a functional device,
its static attributes (size and type) and the variable attributes
(threshold limits and alarm) which can be set by administration .
Notes:
A threshold triple consists of THRU, THRD and THRF.
If the occupancy level of the archive file exceeds the threshold value
set in THRU,
- a system panel alarm is output if the corresponding THRF value
is set to ALARM
- an INFO system message is sent if the corresponding THRF value
is set to NOALARM.
These alarm indications are not canceled until the occupancy level of the
archive file is less than the value set in THRD.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR AFILE : AFILE= ,SIZE= ,TYPE= [,THRU=] [,THRD=] [,THRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Note:
SIZE SIZE OF AN ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the size of an archive file in 2 KB blocks.
Notes:
- The theoretical upper limit is dependent on the hardware.
- The command is rejected if the specified memory requirement is
too big or too small.
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies whether an archive file is to be created
as a single file or a double file.
SINGLE SINGLE
DOUBLE DOUBLE
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level of an archive file
at which the alarm condition should commence.
Notes:
- The occupancy level is expressed as a percentage.
- An upper threshold value must be higher than the associated
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR AFILE- 1+
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
lower threshold value, i.e. THRU=0, THRD>0 is not allowed.
- If no THRU value has been set, the corresponding THRF should
not be set to ALARM.
- The THRU values entered must be different.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which the alarm
condition (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level of
an archive file), is to be reset.
Note:
- An upper threshold value must not be less than the associated
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
THRF THRESHOLD FEATURES
This parameter specifies whether the alarm which was activated by
the excessive occupancy level of an archive file is to be displayed
on the system panel.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT LOW
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGES
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR AFILE- 2+
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGE
Default: NOALARM
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH
Default: NOALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR AFILE- 3-
DISP AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES
This command displays a table of archive files and their respective
attributes. The information can be displayed for individual archive
files or for all archive files.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AFILE : AFILE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies an archive file. It can be input
in partially qualified form. Up to five parameter values can
be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AFILE- 1-
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES
This command modifies the threshold values and threshold value
characteristics of an archive file.
Threshold values THRU and THRD, together with the threshold value
characteristic THRF, make up a threshold value triple
(THRU,THRD,THRF).
A maximum of three threshold value triples can be assigned to an archive
file. However, they must have different THRU components.
While THRU, THRD and THRF must be entered in the input form of
a-b-c, the user can use dummy value 0 for THRU, THRD and dummy value
NOALARM for THRF, if necessary.
The following operations are possible:
- Adding up to three threshold value triples:
The components THRU,THRD and THRF must be entered like a-b-c/
- Switching between up to three threshold value triples:
Independent of modification the old THRU parameter a-b-c must be
specified for identification.
The components THRU THRD and THRF will be changed by entering
d-e-f/a-b-c with d-e-f as new and a-b-c as old input parameters.
- Canceling up to three threshold value triples:
The threshold value triple (THRU,THRD,THRF), that will be
canceled, must be changed to the triple (0,0,NOALARM).
Prerequisite:
- The available threshold value triples are known and can be displayed
using command DISP AFILE.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD AFILE : AFILE= [,THRU=] [,THRD=] [,THRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
not appear consecutively in the file name.
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which an alarm
message (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level
of an archive file), is to be initiated.
Notes:
- An upper threshold value must be higher than the associated
- If no THRU value has been set, the corresponding THRF should
not be set to ALARM.
- The THRU values entered must be different.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AFILE- 1+
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which the alarm
message (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level
of an archive file), is to be reset.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if an upper threshold value is below the
associated lower threshold value THRU=0, THRD>0.
n/o
n/
/o
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT LOW=
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
Default: 0
This parameter specifies whether the alarm which was activated by
the excessive occupancy level of an archive file is to be displayed
on the system panel.
n/o
n/
/o
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT LOW
Default: NOALARM
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AFILE- 2+
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM
Default: NOALARM
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH
Default: NOALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AFILE- 3-
DISP AIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Interface Attributes
This task displays the relevant interface attributes for physical and channel
layers.
Output Parameters:
Index:
A unique value, greater than zero, for each interface. It is
recommended that values are assigned contiguously starting from 1. The
value for each interface sub-layer must remain constant at least from
one re-initialization of the entitys network management system to the
next re-initialization.
Descr:
A textual string containing information about the interface. This
string should include the name of the manufacturer, the product name
and the version of the interface hardware/software.
Type:
The type of interface. Additional values for ifType are assigned by
the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA), through updating the
syntax of the IANAifType textual convention.
Speed:
An estimate of the interfaces current bandwidth in bits per second.
For interfaces which do not vary in bandwidth or for those where no
accurate estimation can be made, this object should contain the
nominal bandwidth. If the bandwidth of the interface is greater than
the maximum value reportable by this object then this object should
report its maximum value (4,294,967,295) and ifHighSpeed must be used
to report the interaces speed. For a sub-layer which has no concept
of bandwidth, this object should be zero.
PhysAddress:
The interfaces address at its protocol sub-layer. For example, for an
802.x interface, this object normally contains a MAC address. The
interfaces media-specific MIB must define the bit and byte ordering
and the format of the value of this object. For interfaces which do
not have such an address (e.g., a serial line), this object should
contain an octet string of zero length.
AdminStatus:
The desired state of the interface. The testing state indicates
that no operational packets can be passed. When a managed system
initializes, all interfaces start with AdminStatus in the down
state. As a result of either explicit management action or per
configuration information retained by the managed system,
ifAdminStatus is then changed to either the up or testing states
(or remains in the down state).
OperStatus:
The current operational state of the interface. The testing state
indicates that no operational packets can be passed. If AdminStatus
is down then OperStatus should be down. If AdminStatus is
changed to up then OperStatus should change to up if the
interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic; it should
change to dormant if the interface is waiting for external actions
(such as a serial line waiting for an incoming connection); it should
remain in the down state if and only if there is a fault that
prevents it from going to the up state; it should remain in the
notPresent state if the interface has missing (typically, hardware)
components.
LastChange:
The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current
operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last
re-initialization of the local network management subsystem, then this
Input format
[ [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIFATT- 1+
DISP AIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ DISP AIFATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIFATT- 2-
MOD AIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Interface Attributes
This task allows editing of interface attributes of a linecard port.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD AIFATT : EQN= [,AdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
AdminStatus
The desired state of the interface. The testing
interfaces start with ifAdminStatus in the down
the managed system, ifAdminStatus is then changed to
either the up or testing states (or remains in
the down state).
Possible values are up or down.
Input format:
Selection from:
- up
- down
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AIFATT- 1-
DISP AIMALNKATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all IMA Link Attributes
This task displays the Attributes of all IMA links of a PHUB.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AIMALNKATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of the PHUB.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIMALNKATT- 1-
DISP AIPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all IP Addresses
This task displays all entries in the phubIpConfigTable.
This is a table that contains a mapping from interface index
to IP address IP netmask and IP Default Gateway.
Output Parameters:
IpAddress:
The IP address of the interface.
IpNetmask:
The network mask of the interface.
IpConfigRowStatus:
This object is used to create a new row or modify
or delete an existing row in this table.
IpDefGateway:
Default Gateway Address of the interface.
If it is not equal 0.0.0.0, then the value is the ip-address
of the default Gateway (Edge-Router).
If the address is equal 0.0.0.0, then the ip-address is used,
which is provided by DHCP.
IpGatewaySupervisionTime:
This object defines the check time for the alive monitoring
of the connection to the gateway (Edge-Router).
It specifies the maximum waiting time before a switch over
to the redundant part will be executed.
If the chosen monitoring time is too short, a continual
switch over will be the consequence. High monitoring time
values will cause a long switch over time.
The senseful range depends on the used monitoring method and
the environment (e.g. edge router configuration). In the most
cases the internal default value will work well.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIPADR- 1+
DISP AIPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If the value is equal 0, then the gateway monitoring is
disabled.
For interfaces, which have no connection to a gateway
(Edge-Router), this object has no effect.
PHUB IP Config Table:
Table that contains a mapping from interface index
to IP address IP netmask and IP Default Gateway.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AIPADR : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the Packet Hub.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIPADR- 2-
DISP AIPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all IP Routes
This task displays the Packet Hubs IP routing table.
Output Parameters:
RouteDest:
The destination IP address of this route.
This object may not take a Multicast (Class D)
address value.
Any assignment (implicit or otherwise) of an
instance of this object to a value x must be
rejected if the bitwise logical-AND of x with
the value of the corresponding instance of the
RouteMask object is not equal to x.
RouteMask:
Indicate the mask to be logical-ANDed with the
destination address before being compared to
the value in the RouteDest field. For
those systems that do not support arbitrary
subnet masks, an agent constructs the value of
the RouteMask by reference to the IP Address Class.
RouteDest object is not equal to RouteDest.
RouteTos:
The policy specifier is the IP TOS Field. The encoding
of IP TOS is as specified by the following convention.
Zero indicates the default path if no more specific
policy applies.
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
| | | |
| PRECEDENCE | TYPE OF SERVICE | 0 |
| | | |
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIPROUTE- 1+
DISP AIPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
IP TOS IP TOS
Field Policy Field Policy
Contents Code Contents Code
0 0 0 0 ==> 0 0 0 0 1 ==> 2
0 0 1 0 ==> 4 0 0 1 1 ==> 6
0 1 0 0 ==> 8 0 1 0 1 ==> 10
0 1 1 0 ==> 12 0 1 1 1 ==> 14
1 0 0 0 ==> 16 1 0 0 1 ==> 18
1 0 1 0 ==> 20 1 0 1 1 ==> 22
1 1 0 0 ==> 24 1 1 0 1 ==> 26
1 1 1 0 ==> 28 1 1 1 1 ==> 30
RouteNextHop:
On remote routes, the address of the next sys-
tem en route; Otherwise, 0.0.0.0.
RouteIfIndex:
The ifIndex value which identifies the local
interface through which the next hop of this
route should be reached.
RouteType:
The type of route. Note that local(3) refers
to a route for which the next hop is the final
destination; remote(4) refers to a route for
which the next hop is not the final destination.
Routes which do not result in traffic forwarding or
rejection should not be displayed even if the
implementation keeps them stored internally.
reject (2) refers to a route which, if matched, discards
the message as unreachable. This is used in some
protocols as a means of correctly aggregating routes.
RouteProto:
The routing mechanism via which this route was
DISP AIPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
learned. Inclusion of values for gateway routing
protocols is not intended to imply that
hosts should support those protocols.
RouteAge:
The number of seconds since this route was
last updated or otherwise determined to be
correct. Note that no semantics of `too old
can be implied except through knowledge of the
routing protocol by which the route was
learned.
RouteInfo:
A reference to MIB definitions specific to the
particular routing protocol which is responsible
for this route, as determined by the value
specified in the routes RouteProto value.
If this information is not present, its value
should be set to the OBJECT IDENTIFIER { 0 0 },
which is a syntactically valid object identifier,
and any implementation conforming to ASN.1
and the Basic Encoding Rules must be able to
generate and recognize this value.
RouteNextHopAS:
The Autonomous System Number of the Next Hop.
The semantics of this object are determined by
the routing-protocol specified in the routes
RouteProto value. When this object is
unknown or not relevant its value should be set
to zero.
RouteMetric1:
The primary routing metric for this route.
The semantics of this metric are determined by
RouteProto value. If this metric is not
used, its value should be set to -1.
DISP AIPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RouteMetric2:
An alternate routing metric for this route.
RouteMetric3:
RouteMetric4:
RouteMetric5:
RouteStatus:
The row status variable, used according to
row installation and removal conventions.
IP Cidr Route Table:
Table that displays the Packet Hubs IP routing table
with all the above parameters.
Input format

DISP AIPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ DISP AIPROUTE : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIPROUTE- 5-
DISP ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM STATUS
This command displays the current alarm status of objects.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALARM : [OBJECT=] [,ALSTAT=] [,ALPRIO=] [,RSUINF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJECT ALARM OBJECT
This parameter specifies the alarm object.
Note:
- If one parameter is omitted, all its values will be taken
into consideration.
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
SN SWITCHING NETWORK
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK
CU CENTRAL UNITS
LNLCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT
SAL SERVICE ALARM
TGAL TRUNK GROUP ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE
SYOP CALL FOR SYSTEM OPERATOR
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
This parameter describes the fault clearance status of an
alarm condition. The processing code is a part of the alarm
file entry.
Note:
into consideration.
NP NOT PROCESSED
D DEFERRED
IP IN PROCESS
UR UNDER REPAIR
This parameter specifies the alarm priority.
Note:
into consideration.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALARM- 1+
DISP ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
RSUINF RSU INFORMATION
This parameter specifies, whether an extended output with
additional RSU information for RSU specific alarms is
requested.
NO NO RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
N NO RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
YES RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
Y RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALARM- 2-
SRCH ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEARCH ALARM MESSAGE
This command displays the alarm message. The information output is
organized according to the time at which the alarm occurred. Current
messages are displayed first.
Input format
[ [
[ SRCH ALARM : <OBJECT= ,ALSTAT= ,ALPRIO= ,MSGNO=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJECT ALARM OBJECT
This parameter specifies the alarm object.
Note:
into consideration.
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK
CU CENTRAL UNITS
LNLCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT
SAL SERVICE ALARM
SYOP CALL FOR SYSTEM OPERATOR
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
file entry.
Note:
into consideration.
NC NOT CLEARED
All alarms with NP, D, IP and UR
are displayed.
NP NOT PROCESSED
D DEFERRED
IP IN PROCESS
UR UNDER REPAIR
This parameter specifies the target priority for alarm signaling.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SRCH ALARM- 1+
SRCH ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MSGNO MESSAGE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a 5-digit message number, which
corresponds to the entry number used in the alarm file
AM.ALARM.
Note:
- There is no relation to the entry numbers of the history
file HF.ARCHIVE !
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SRCH ALARM- 2-
ACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY
This command cancels the present entries of the alarm display suppression
and sets the default values.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT ALDISP : WDCAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the alarm display
suppression.
The following values are possible:
- WO for workday.
- EH for half weekend day.
This means a portion of a day with the half weekend
day category ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- EF for full weekend day.
This means the full day with 24 hours and with the full
weekend day category.
- HH for half holiday international. It means a day
with the half holiday category, which contains only a
portion of a day ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- HO for full holiday international. It means a day
with the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
- HN for full holiday national. It means a day with
the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
International holidays are applicable for all countries.
National holidays are applicable only for one country.
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HN > HO > HH > EF > EH > WO
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT ALDISP- 1-
DACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY
This command sets the parameters for the alarm display suppression.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for
the specified weekday category.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT ALDISP : ALPRIO= ,WDCAT= ,BEGTIM= ,ENDTIM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the priorities for the alarm display
suppression.
MINOR MINOR ALARM
display of minor alarms are suppressed
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
display of minor and major alarms are suppressed
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the alarm display
suppression.
- WO for workday.
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT ALDISP- 1+
DACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the start time of the alarm display
suppression.
ENDTIM END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the alarm display
suppression.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT ALDISP- 2-
DISP ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY
This command lists the parameters of alarm display suppression.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALDISP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALDISP- 1-
CAN ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALIAS NAME
This command has two functions:
- Cancel an alias name from the alias name table.
- Start the garbage treatment.
Which function has to be performed is indicated by the parameter given.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ALIAS= [ [
[ CAN ALIAS : GARBAGE= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALIAS ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter indicates that an alias name of a file shall be
cancelled.
The value of the parameter specifies the alias name to be cancelled.
After the execution of this command this file can just be accessed with
the file name.
Prerequisites:
- The alias name must exist.
- The file must not be in use by using the alias name.
Notes:
- The alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
GARBAGE GARBAGE TREATMENT
This parameter indicates that the user wants to start the garbage
treatment.
This command starts the garbage treatment to check the shadow catalog
whether there are existing alias names to files, that are not existing
anymore.
As long as the garbage treatment is running no other command to modify
the alias name table will be accepted.
Y START GARBAGE TREATMENT
YES START GARBAGE TREATMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ALIAS- 1-
DISP ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALIAS FILE NAMES
This command displays a list of all existing alias names or a specified
subset of them.
The list contains the alias names and the file names which they are
related to.
Notes:
- If no parameter is given all alias names are displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[ALIAS=[[ [
[ DISP ALIAS : [FILE= [ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the alias name(s) that should be displayed.
The output list will be displayed sorted by the alias names.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not given or supplied with X, all existing alias
names with their relation to the file names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a partly qualified alias name
(indicated by a . as the last character) all matching alias names
with their relation to the file names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a fully qualified alias name then
the relation of this name to the original file name will be
displayed.
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name(s) with related alias names,
that should be displayed.
The output list will be displayed sorted by the file names.
Notes:
- If the parameter is supplied with X, all file names with their
related alias names are displayed (so far there are related alias
names).
- If the parameter is supplied with a partly qualified file name
(indicated by a . as the last character) all matching file names
with their related alias names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a fully qualified file name then
the related alias name to the original file name will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALIAS- 1-
ENTR ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALIAS FILE NAME
This command creates an alias name to an existing disk file.
Afterwards this file can be accessed either with the original file name or the
alias name.
Prerequisites:
- The file must exist.
- The file must not be a generation file.
- The alias name must not exist (neither as a file name nor as an alias name).
- The file must not yet have an alias name.
- The alias name must not be file name protected.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ALIAS : FILE= ,ALIAS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an existing file.
Notes:
- The file name has to be entered fully qualified.
This parameter specifies the alias name for the file.
Notes:
- The alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALIAS- 1-
MOD ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ALIAS NAME
This command renames the alias name of disk files.
After the execution of this command the old alias name is no longer valid.
The file can only be accessed by using the original file name or the new
alias name.
Prerequisites:
- The old alias name must exist.
- The new alias name must not exist (neither as a file name nor as an alias
name).
- The new alias name must not be file name protected.
- The file must not be in use by using the old alias name.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ALIAS : ALIAS= ,NEWALIAS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALIAS OLD ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the old alias name that shall be renamed.
Notes:
- The old alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
NEWALIAS NEW ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the new alias name.
Notes:
- The new alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ALIAS- 1-
DISP ALMODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM MODE
This command displays the current system panel alarm mode.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALMODE ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALMODE- 1-
ENTR ALMODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM MODE
This command enters an alarm signaling mode on the system panel.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ALMODE : <STATUS= ,HLIM=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
STATUS STATUS
This parameter specifies the status for the output and
forwarding of alarms on the system panel display. The
characteristics assigned to a status are defined in the
system panel firmware.
ALSTAT0 ALARM FORWARDING BLOCKED
ALSTAT1 ALARM STATUS 1
ALSTAT2 ALARM STATUS 2
HLIM LIMITATION OF HORN DURATION
This parameter specifies whether the horn time limit for the
system panel display is switched on.
NO NO LIMITATION OF HORN DURATION
YES LIMITATION OF HORN DURATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALMODE- 1-
CAN ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM PERIOD
This command cancels the present entries of the periodic alarm status
report and sets the default values.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ALPER : WDCAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the periodic alarm
status report.
- WO for workday.
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ALPER- 1-
DISP ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP ALARM PERIOD
This command displays all parameters of the periodic alarm status report.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALPER ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALPER- 1-
ENTR ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM PERIOD
This command sets the parameters for the periodic alarm status report.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for the
specified weekday category.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ALPER : WDCAT= ,BEGTIM= ,ENDTIM= ,PERIOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the periodic alarm
status report.
- WO for workday.
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the start time of the periodic alarm
status report.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALPER- 1+
ENTR ALPER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENDTIM END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the periodic alarm
status report.
PERIOD PERIOD
This parameter specifies the period of the periodic alarm
status report, which can be only printed on the hour.
The value entered for the parameter PERIOD is the multiple of
an hour. Therefore, within the possible range, the shortest
period is an hour, the longest a day.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALPER- 2-
CAN ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM PRIORITY
This command cancels the individual priorities of a specified alarm unit.
1. CAN ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. CAN ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
[ [
[ CAN ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units with alarm unit individual
priorities.
DLUC DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
Here the number of the affected DLU with individual alarm priorities
is specified in the three high-order positions (value range 1 to 255 ).
The lowest-order position must always be 0.
For a DLU Controller (DLUC) of a DLUG the alarm priority cannot be
administered by this command. Please use the commands:
MOD DLU or
MOD DLUEQ or
MOD DLUMOD
to administer the alarm profile.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ALPRIO- 1+
CAN ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
[ [
[ CAN ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units with alarm unit individual
priorities.
CCSLS COMMON CHANNEL SIGN. LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the affected linkset name with individual
alarm priority.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ALPRIO- 2-
DISP ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM PRIORITY
This command displays the priorities for alarm signaling which are
currently set in the system. All alarm priorities can be displayed.
1. DISP ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. DISP ALPRIO - GENERAL GENERAL PRIORITIES
3. DISP ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
DISP DLU or
DISP DLUEQ or
DISP DLUMOD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 1+
DISP ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GENERAL PRIORITIES
[ [
[ DISP ALPRIO : [ALUNIT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
ACTGENDE DOUBLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ACTGENSE SINGLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ADMFIL1 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 1
AIC AIR CIRCULATOR
ANNAL REC. ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP ALARM
BAP BASE PROCESSOR
BCMY BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
CALLID1 CALL IDENTIFICATION 1
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
CCG CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
CCNCCD CCNC CODE OR DATA
CCNCTD CCNC TRUNK DATA
CCNP COMMON CHANNEL NETW. PROCESSOR
CCNPPAF PARTIAL FAILURE CCNP
CCSL COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING LINK
CCSLNAC CCS LINK NAC
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
CCSLSNAC CCS LINK SET NAC
CCSLSNEX CCS LINK SET NAC EXCEPTION
CCSTGAL CCS TRUNK GROUP ALARM
CDBUS CD-BUS FAILURE
CITERA COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
CMY COMMON MEMORY
CPACC UNAUTHORIZED CP-ACCESS
CR CODE RECEIVER
CSC CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
CYCFIL1 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 1
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER
DFILFAIL DOUBLE FILE FAILURE
ECSL EMERGENCY CALL STATION LINE
ECSM EMERGENCY CALL STATION MODULE
FISPARES NO SPARE SECT. FOR DOUBLE FILE
ICHAN INTERNET CHANNEL
IOC INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL
IOPLAU IOP LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPSCDV IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. V
IOPSCDX IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. X
IOPTA IOP TIME/ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
ISTART CP INITIAL START RECOVERY
ISTART2G CP ISTART + FALLBACK OLD. GEN.
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
LTGCEN LTG CENTRAL FAILURE
LTGPAF LTG PARTIAL FAILURE
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter is only valid for DE3.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 2+
DISP ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT LTG
This parameter is only valid for DE4 and DE5.
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT SGC
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
MTACC METALLIC TEST ACCESS ERROR
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
MUXMFAIL MULTIPLEXER FAILURE
NODEISO LOCAL NODE ISOLATION
NSTART CP NEW START RECOVERY
OMT OPERATION/MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
PCHANNUC P-CHANNEL NUC FAILURE
PCHANS P-CHANNEL SWITCHED FAILURE
PCMMAL PCM MAINTENANCE ALARM
PCMSAL PCM SERVICE ALARM
RAE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPM.
RCI RADIO CLOCK INTERFACE
RGMG RING-/METER GENERATOR FOR DLU
RSUAMUX RSU ACCESS MULTIPLEXER
RSUBASE RSU BASE UNITS
RSUDIU RSU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
RSUISO RSU ISOLATION
RSUMAL RSU MAINTENANCE ALARM
RSUMH RSU MESSAGE HANDLER
RSUSAL RSU SERVICE ALARM
SAVGENE SAVE GENERATION ERROR
SILT SIGNALING DATA LINK TERMINAL
SILTC SILT CONTROL
SLM SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE
SSG SPACE STAGE GROUP
SUB SUBSCRIBER
SYPC SYSTEM PANEL CONTROL
SYSOP SYSTEM OPERATOR
TIMINCOR TIME INCORRECT
TRUNKHD TRUNK HELD
TSG TIME STAGE GROUP
UNSPARES NO SPARE SECT. F. UNUSED SPACE
VOCAFAIL VOLUME/CATALOG FAILURE
VSDDISK VSD DISK FAILURE
VSDNSTRT VSD NSTART ALARM
VSDODAG VSD ODAGEN ALARM
VSDRLINK VSD RELINK ALARM
VSDTOTAL VSD TOTAL FAILURE
X25LINK BX.25 LINK
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 3+
DISP ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
alarm priority.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 4-
ENTR ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM PRIORITY
This command modifies the priorities for alarm signaling which are
currently set in the system.
- Units which are in MBL or CBL are displayed on the system panel
by a HARDWARE UNITS lamp.
This display cannot be changed with this command.
Nor can the displays for the advisory messages CAT1, CAT2, TGBL,
SIGLBL and ALDSUP be changed with this command.
- Procedures to determine an operational restriction are implemented
for some alarm units. If one of these procedures finds an operational
restriction for the unit with alarm condition, the alarm priority is
raised to CRITICAL. This alarm priority cannot be changed with this
command.
- DLU failures are displayed on the system panel with the double LED
for the line/trunk group. The lamp for remote equipment (under the
the line/trunk group lamp) also lights up. The lamp display for
remote equipment cannot be changed with this command.
- System panel failures trigger an alarm on the double LED. The alarm
priority for this lamp (at present CRITICAL) is determined in the
system panel firmware. However, the priority for this alarm can be
changed for other alarm units (system status displays, output messages,
critical indicator channel to SCC) with this command.
Prerequisite:
- The priorities for external exchange alarms are part of the SYPC firm-
ware.
- If the system panel has only one LED for a particular alarm, ALPRIO
cannot be set to CRITICAL because this requires 2 LEDs.
- The use of the command only makes sense, if there is no active alarm
of the specified ALUNIT, because different priorities of active alarm
and new alarm with modified alarm priority lead to different alarm
signaling.
1. ENTR ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. ENTR ALPRIO - GENERAL GENERAL PRIORITIES
3. ENTR ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ,ALPRIO= [,SDG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 1+
ENTR ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR DLU/MOD DLU or
CR DLUEQ/MOD DLUEQ or
CR DLUMOD/MOD DLUMOD
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
SDG SERVICE DEGRADATION
This parameter defines the check of service degradation condition.
Default: no affect on database
NO NO SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
YES SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 2+
ENTR ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GENERAL PRIORITIES
Prerequisite:
The command is rejected if no service degradation condition is defined
for the specified ALUNIT.
[ [
[ ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,ALPRIO= [,SDG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
ACTGENDE DOUBLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ACTGENSE SINGLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
AIC AIR CIRCULATOR
ANNAL REC. ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP ALARM
BAP BASE PROCESSOR
BCMY BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
CCNCCD CCNC CODE OR DATA
CCNCTD CCNC TRUNK DATA
CCNP COMMON CHANNEL NETW. PROCESSOR
CCNPPAF PARTIAL FAILURE CCNP
CCSL COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING LINK
CCSLNAC CCS LINK NAC
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
CCSLSNAC CCS LINK SET NAC
CCSLSNEX CCS LINK SET NAC EXCEPTION
CCSTGAL CCS TRUNK GROUP ALARM
CMY COMMON MEMORY
CPACC UNAUTHORIZED CP-ACCESS
CR CODE RECEIVER
DFILFAIL DOUBLE FILE FAILURE
ECSL EMERGENCY CALL STATION LINE
ECSM EMERGENCY CALL STATION MODULE
FISPARES NO SPARE SECT. FOR DOUBLE FILE
ICHAN INTERNET CHANNEL
IOC INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL
IOPLAU IOP LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPSCDV IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. V
IOPSCDX IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. X
IOPTA IOP TIME/ALARM
ISTART CP INITIAL START RECOVERY
ISTART2G CP ISTART + FALLBACK OLD. GEN.
LTGCEN LTG CENTRAL FAILURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 3+
ENTR ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LTGPAF LTG PARTIAL FAILURE
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT LTG
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT SGC
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
MTACC METALLIC TEST ACCESS ERROR
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
MUXMFAIL MULTIPLEXER FAILURE
NODEISO LOCAL NODE ISOLATION
NSTART CP NEW START RECOVERY
OMT OPERATION/MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PCHANNUC P-CHANNEL NUC FAILURE
PCHANS P-CHANNEL SWITCHED FAILURE
PCMMAL PCM MAINTENANCE ALARM
PCMSAL PCM SERVICE ALARM
RAE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPM.
RCI RADIO CLOCK INTERFACE
RGMG RING-/METER GENERATOR FOR DLU
RSUAMUX RSU ACCESS MULTIPLEXER
RSUBASE RSU BASE UNITS
RSUDIU RSU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
RSUISO RSU ISOLATION
RSUMAL RSU MAINTENANCE ALARM
RSUMH RSU MESSAGE HANDLER
RSUSAL RSU SERVICE ALARM
SAVGENE SAVE GENERATION ERROR
SILT SIGNALING DATA LINK TERMINAL
SILTC SILT CONTROL
SLM SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE
SSG SPACE STAGE GROUP
SUB SUBSCRIBER
SYPC SYSTEM PANEL CONTROL
SYSOP SYSTEM OPERATOR
TIMINCOR TIME INCORRECT
TRUNKHD TRUNK HELD
TSG TIME STAGE GROUP
UNSPARES NO SPARE SECT. F. UNUSED SPACE
VOCAFAIL VOLUME/CATALOG FAILURE
VSDDISK VSD DISK FAILURE
VSDNSTRT VSD NSTART ALARM
VSDODAG VSD ODAGEN ALARM
VSDRLINK VSD RELINK ALARM
VSDTOTAL VSD TOTAL FAILURE
X25LINK BX.25 LINK
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
SDG SERVICE DEGRADATION
This parameter defines the check of service degradation condition.
Default: no affect on database
NO NO SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
YES SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 4+
ENTR ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ,ALPRIO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
alarm priority.
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 5-
DISP ALPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM PROFILE
This command displays
- all alarm profiles for alarm signaling which are currently set in the
system;
- the assignment of alarm priorities ( non-degrading and degrading ) to
the existing probable causes for a specified alarm profile identifica-
tion.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALPROF : ALPROF= [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the alarm profile identification for
alarm signaling.
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the output format.
CONTENTS CONTENTS OF ALARM PROFILE
SUMMARY SUMMARY OF EXISTING PROFILES
Default: SUMMARY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALPROF- 1-
SET ALSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET ALARM STATUS
This command sets the processing code which describes the current status
of fault clearance in the alarm file stored for each alarm.
Input format
[ [
[ SET ALSTAT : MSGNO= ,ALSTAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSGNO MESSAGE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a 5-digit message number, which
corresponds to the entry number used in the alarm file
AM.ALARM.
Note:
- There is no relation to the entry numbers of the history
file HF.ARCHIVE !
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
file entry.
D DEFERRED
The command is rejected, if the corres-
ponding object instance is UR.
IP IN PROCESS
The command is rejected, if the corres-
ponding object instance is UR.
C CLEARED
This value applies for
- System operator alarms (SYOP)
- Administration alarms (ADMINAL)
Exception: Alarms with alarm class THRES
- Recovery alarms (RECOV )
- Time insecure alarms (TIMINSEC)
with alarm unit/class TIMINCOR.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET ALSTAT- 1-
CAN ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM TEXT
This command cancels an existing alarm text.
Prerequisite:
- The cancellation job is only executed if the alarm text in
question is not assigned to an external alarm circuit.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number assigned to an alarm text.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ALTEXT- 1-
DISP ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM TEXT
This command displays the alarm texts assigned to a number.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the alarm text number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ALTEXT- 1-
ENTR ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM TEXT
This command enters an alarm text and assigns a text number to it.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if a text already exists under
this number.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ,TEXT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the alarm text number.
TEXT TEXT
This parameter consists of a text (freely definable).
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ALTEXT- 1-
DISP AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AMA DATA
This command displays AMA records of a subscriber which are stored in
an AMA file on disk or on magnetic tape/optical disk (created with
TRANS FILE).Only the AMA records with a fixed format length of
32 or 64 byte can be displayed with this command.
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AMA : DN= [,VSN=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [
[ [
[ [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber for
which the AMA record was made (inclusive areacode but without
discrimination digits).
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered,the file is assumed to be on disk.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME.
Default value of parameters BEGDATE,BEGTIME:
BEGDATE BEGTIME LOWER LIMIT OF DISPLAY INTERVAL
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
x x (BEGDATE,BEGTIME).
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AMA- 1+
DISP AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE.
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with ENDTIME.
Default value of parameters ENDDATE,ENDTIME:
ENDDATE ENDTIME UPPER LIMIT OF DISPLAY INTERVAL
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
x x (ENDDATE,ENDTIME).
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with ENDDATE.
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AMA- 2+
DISP AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape/optical
disk or on disk.
Default: IA.ICAMA
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AMA- 3-
DISP AMGSERVSELE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all MG Service Selection Entries
This task displays all entries in the service selection table.
Output Parameters:
Service:
Service assigned to this combination of BC Service and Digit-String.
ConnAddr:
This object defines the connection address content to be sent
to the Media Gateway for the various services.
Typically the following information entered:
RAS - RADIUS server domain name
LAC - LNS domain name or IP address.
The value for ConnAddr must also be entered into the mgTable as domain name
accompagnied by the corresponding IP-Adress (command Create MG Entry).
TOS:
The TOS byte of a Service assignd to this combination of BC Service and
Digit-String.
BcService:
The service requested according to the ITC and UIL1 fields of the Q.931 protocol.
DigitString:
Digits administered as in EWSD either as b-number or as DDI or both
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AMGSERVSELE : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the MGC HW-Module.
The MGC HW-Module can be found on the PCU on CoPl.
Therefore you must enter the EQN of the PCU
whose MGC-Hardware you want to access.
You can find the needed EQN in the containment view under the
corresponding network element. It is case sensitive !
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AMGSERVSELE- 1-
DISP AMLPPPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all MLPPP Connections
This task displays interface index (PPPIndex)
of all PPP Layers multi-linked to a specified
MLPPP Layer(MLPPPIndex) on a Packet hub.
Output parameters:
Multi-Linked PPP:
PPPIndex:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AMLPPPC : EQN= ,MLPPPIndex= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment of the Packet hub where the MLPPP Layer
(specified by MLPPPIndex) of interest exist.
MLPPPIndex
The interface index of MLPPP Layer.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AMLPPPC- 1-
DISP AMLPPPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all MLPPP Layers
This task displays all existing MLPPP
Layers on a Packet hub.
Output parameters:
mlPppIndicies:
mlPppIndex:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AMLPPPL : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the Packet hub where all existing
MLPPP layers interface index(s) to be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AMLPPPL- 1-
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command cancels announcement elements of the types
INDAS phrase, INDAS word, INDAS standard announcement, and INDAS pause.
Prerequisites:
- The INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant must be available.
Notes:
- The cancelation of announcement elements is considered
dangerous because this request may remove announcements for
call processing.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel is requested
to determine whether the command is to be executed or not by
entering + or -.
- If the last announcement element for the specified OCANEQ variant
is canceled, the OCANEQ variant will be removed implicitly,
provided that the related UI database is empty and no LTG
exists for which this OCANEQ variant is entered.
1. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format cancels the links between
INDAS pauses and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
4 characters from the
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PAUSEALL ANELEM ALL INDAS PAUSE
All INDAS pauses.
This value is not allowed to be linked
with other values.
PAUSEEND ANELEM INDAS PAUSE END
Pause after the end of each announcement cycle.
PAUSELA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE LANGUAGE
Pause between two different languages of
an announcement.
PAUSEPH ANELEM INDAS PAUSE PHRASE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANELEM- 1+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Pause between two phrases of an announcement.
PAUSEST ANELEM INDAS PAUSE START
Pause before the start of each announcement
cycle.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANELEM- 2+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
INDAS phrase and INDAS phrase definition.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PHRASE ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-1023, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be canceled.
The number range follows from the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANELEM- 3+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
INDAS standard announcement and INDAS standard
announcement definition.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
STDANN ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
Notes :
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANELEM- 4+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
INDAS word numbers and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 32 INDAS word numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
Notes :
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANELEM- 5-
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command creates announcement elements of the types
It allows announcements, which are played by INDAS with OCANEQ, to be
composed from sets of text fragments stored in the OCANEQ.
A text fragment is the smallest physical speech unit and can be addressed
by its text fragment number.
A text fragment consists of one or more spoken words or is a pause or
a tone burst.
Text fragments can be put together in any sequence desired.
There are two types of announcements:
- Individual announcements:
Each individual announcement is logically addressed by one or more
announcement elements of the type "INDAS phrase".
An INDAS phrase consists of several fixed text parts and several variable
parts (e.g. directory number, hour, minute, week-day) determined by
INDAS parameters which use groups of logical announcement elements of the
type "INDAS word" that can be addressed.
- Standard announcements:
Each standard announcement is logically addressed by an announcement
element of the type "INDAS standard announcement" and consists only of
fixed text parts.
No variable parts are included.
Within the system, each announcement element created by INDAS is immediately
active and can be accessed by call processing.
Prerequisites:
- Memory space for the OCANEQ variant data must be provided in the
database (for expandable groups OC1/OC2, see MOD DBSIZE).
Notes:
- If the OCANEQ variant has not yet been registered by either ENTR OCAVAR
or CR ANELEM or through User Interaction database administration,
a new element in the OCANEQ variant specific data structure will be used.
- The command will be rejected with an error message saying that the database
list has been exceeded, and specifying the parameter name OCAVAR if the
maximum number of 10 OCANEQ variants have already been registered in the
system (see also ENTR OCAVAR).
- If the command is rejected with the above error message and the specified
parameter names are OCAVAR and LANGUAGE, the database area for group OC1
has to be expanded (use MOD DBSIZE).
- If the command is rejected with the above error message and the specified
parameter name is PHDEFIN or STDADEF, the database area for group OC2
has to be expanded (use MOD DBSIZE).
- The available text fragments and the associated text fragment numbers are
to be taken from the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
- The command should only be used for LANGUAGE values identified by the
INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
MOD CALLPOPT will adapt the way in which announcements are played in these
identified languages or in a specific language sequence, dependent upon the
exchange location.
1. CR ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. CR ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. CR ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. CR ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format is used to create an announcement element "INDAS
pause" by assigning a pause type to a text fragment.
INDAS pause specifies all pauses defined by INDAS which are inserted
according to attribute if an announcement is to be played. They are
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 1+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
used separately from an INDAS phrase or INDAS standard announcement
definition.
An INDAS pause consists of just one text fragment.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PAUSE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PAUSE ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
Notes:
- Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANN. ELEM. INDAS PAUSE
A pause is inserted at the end of each
announcement cycle.
A pause is inserted between two different
languages if the announcement is to be
played in more than one language.
A pause is inserted between two phrases
if the individual announcement consists
of more than one INDAS phrase.
A pause is inserted at the start of each
announcement cycle.
b: OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 2+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
phrase" by entering its phrase definition.
An INDAS phrase consists of several fixed text parts defined by one
or more text fragments, and several variable parts defined by text
fragments which are determined by INDAS parameters using groups of
INDAS words.
Notes:
- INDAS functions are used to identify individual announcements in the
system.
Only INDAS phrases selected by INDAS functions are allowed.
The allowed number range is to be taken from the INDAS document
related to the OCANEQ variant.
The parameter numbers and the specific meaning assigned to an INDAS
phrase are also described.
INDAS phrases applied by User Interaction must have phrase numbers
between 1 and 900.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PHDEFIN= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
PHDEFIN INDAS PHRASE DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS phrase definition.
The phrase definition for an INDAS phrase describes the various
modifications of an announcement text for an individual
announcement as a function of the actual INDAS parameter values
and takes the foreign-language requirements into account.
It specifies the sequence in which fixed text fragments are to be
arranged and locates the positions where the text fragments
determined by the INDAS parameter values must be inserted. An
INDAS parameter is represented by a fixed parameter number assigned.
As a result, the phrase definition controls the combination of text
fragments which form an announcement.
For each one of the allowed INDAS phrases and each valid language,
the phrase definition in its application form is part of the INDAS
To produce such a phrase definition, a formal definition language
similar to a programming language is used.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 3+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Syntax of INDAS phrase definition components:
The following INDAS phrase definition components are specified
and completed by the permissible combination of the required units:
- "Insert fragment definition":
Statement to insert a text fragment,
e.g.: compose the fixed text part of an announcement.
INFRAGM-<fragment no>
input values:
<fragment no> = 0 .. 65279, range of decimal numbers
- "Insert parameter definition":
Statement to insert an INDAS parameter:
Fit in the text fragment determined by the parameter value by
using the corresponding INDAS word.
INPAR-<parameter no>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODNONE
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVNONE
(MLVNONE: only for INDAS parameters
which may have more than one value)
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
using the corresponding INDAS word modified plus or minus by a
specified INDAS word offset. This corresponds with a change to
an alternative group of text fragments.
This statement may be used
- for modification to lower voice
(e.g.: the INDAS parameter is the final part of an announcement),
- for the several interpretations of the INDAS parameter "number"
(e.g.: applied as year, as part of a price),
- for a different representation of an INDAS parameter in the same
context
(e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "month" by its name ("January")
or alternatively by its ordinal number ("first")).
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODPLUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODMINUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVPLUS-<word offset>
(MLVPLUS: only for INDAS parameters
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVMINUS-<word offset>
(MLVMINUS: only for INDAS parameters
input values:
<word offset> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
- "Parameter block definition":
Statement to process an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value,
e.g.: the INDAS parameter "directory number".
PARDO-<parameter no>
input values:
- "IF condition block definition":
An "Insert fragment definition" or "Insert parameter definition"
is to be dependent of the value(s) of one INDAS parameter or
several INDAS parameters correlated to each other,
e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "minute" unless it is a full hour.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 4+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A single condition will be initiated by IFPAR. The parameter
value must be specified by its INDAS word.
Several conditions can be combined by ANDIFPAR ("and" relation,
i.e. all conditions must be true) or ORIFPAR ("or" relation, i.e.
one of the conditions must be true).
ELSIFPAR corresponds to a nested "IF condition definition" in
the form of ELSE IFPAR ... ENDIF.
If the condition(s) stated by IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ANDIFPAR /
ORIFPAR is(are) true the definition statement(s) following will
be executed. If the condition(s) is(are) false, the definition
statement(s) following ELSE (if existent) or ENDIF will be
executed.
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
input values:
<word no> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
<condition> = EQUAL
NOTEQUAL
LESS
GREATER
or
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
input values:
<condition> = FRSTWORD
NOTFRSTW
LASTWORD
NOTLASTW
SELECTED
The conditions FRSTWORD, NOTFRSTW, LASTWORD, NOTLASTW
are only valid for an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value.
The condition SELECTED is true if the INDAS parameter has
at least one value.
or
ELSE
- "End definition" :
Statement to terminate a block definition or phrase definition.
ENDDO
ENDIF
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS phrase definition:
- A "definition block" must consist of one
"Insert fragment definition" or
"Insert parameter definition" or
"Parameter block definition" or
"IF condition block definition".
- A "Parameter block definition" is mandatory if an INDAS parameter
which may have more than one value is to be processed.
This "Parameter block definition" for an INDAS parameter must be
specified before an "IF condition block definition" or "Insert
parameter definition" of that parameter is entered.
There are however the following exceptions:
- The "IF condition block definition" can be entered prior to the
"Parameter block definition" if the condition(s) of an
"IF condition block definition" has(have) been formed using
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 5+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECTED.
- Mandatory input of a "Parameter block definition" is excluded
if no "IF condition block definition" has been specified for
the INDAS parameter and
- only the last value of that parameter has to be modified
exclusively and the corresponding "Insert parameter definition"
is formed with MLVPLUS, MLVMINUS,
- none of the INDAS parameter values has to be modified and the
corresponding "Insert parameter definition" is formed with
MLVNONE.
- The body of a "Parameter block definition" must contain at least
one "definition block" and must be terminated with ENDDO.
- The "IF condition block definition" must contain at least one
statement initiated by IFPAR and must be terminated with ENDIF.
- For each case of "IF condition block definition" initiated by
IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ELSE the body must contain at least one
"definition block".
- Nested "IF condition block definitions" and/or "Parameter block
definitions" may be used up to the maximum nested level = 10.
- Nested "Parameter block definitions" for the same parameter
number are not allowed.
- The body of an INDAS phrase definition must contain at least one
"definition block" and must be terminated with END.
Notes:
- Within an INDAS phrase, INDAS parameters may be rearranged from
the original order indicated by the parameter numbers.
The parameter number retains the meaning of the INDAS parameter.
- The length of an INDAS phrase definition is only restricted by
the maximum number of permissible characters for an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS phrase definition components that
can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS phrase definition components must be
observed.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ACTION CODE
ANDIFPAR AND IF PARAMETER CONDITION
ELSE ELSE CONDITION
ELSIFPAR ELSE IF PARAMETER CONDITION
END END OF PHRASE DEFINITION
ENDDO END OF PARAMETER DO LOOP
ENDIF END OF IF CONDITION
IFPAR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
INFRAGM INSERT FRAGMENT
INPAR INSERT PARAMETER
ORIFPAR OR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
PARDO FOR ALL PARAMETER VALUES DO
b: FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM- NO.=
c: MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
EQUAL EQUAL
[FRSTWORD[ FIRST WORD
[GREATER [ GREATER
[LASTWORD[ LAST WORD
[LESS [ LESS
[MLVMINUS[ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: DECRE.
[MLVNONE [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MLVPLUS [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: INCRE.
[MODMINUS[ MOD. PARAM VALUE: DECREMENT
[MODNONE [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MODPLUS [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: INCREMENT
[NOTEQUAL[ NOT EQUAL
[NOTFRSTW[ NOT FIRST WORD
[NOTLASTW[ NOT LAST WORD
!SELECTED- SELECTED
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 6+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: OFFSET=
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in an exchange.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 7+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
standard announcement" by entering its standard announcement definition.
Notes:
- The standard announcement number specified here must be used as the
STANNO for CR ANGRP if the assignment of an announcement to an
announcement group leading to OCANEQ is defined as definite (fixed).
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,STDADEF= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
STDADEF INDAS STD. ANN. DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS standard announcement
definition.
The standard announcement definition for each INDAS standard
announcement describes the way in which text fragments are
sequenced and takes foreign-language requirements into account.
As a result, the standard announcement definition controls the
combination of text fragments which form an announcement.
For each one of the allowed INDAS standard announcements and
each valid language, the standard announcement definition in
its application form is part of the INDAS document related to
the OCANEQ variant.
To produce such a standard announcement definition, a formal
definition language similar to a programming language is used.
Syntax of INDAS standard announcement definition components:
Statement to insert a text fragment.
input values:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 8+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Statement to terminate a standard announcement definition.
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS standard
announcement definition:
- The body of an INDAS standard announcement definition must
contain at least one "Insert fragment definition" and must be
terminated with END.
Notes:
- The length of an INDAS standard announcement definition is only
restricted by the maximum number of permissible characters for
an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS standard announcement definition
components that can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS standard announcement definition
components must be observed.
a[-b]
a: ACTION CODE
END END OF STD. ANN. DEFINITION
b: FRAGMENT-NO.=
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 9+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
word" by entering its allocation to a text fragment.
An INDAS word is the smallest logical speech unit and is addressable by its
INDAS word number. A group of INDAS words represents an INDAS parameter
with its definite meaning. An INDAS parameter is a variable part of an
INDAS phrase. Each INDAS word consists of just one text fragment.
Notes:
- The meaning of the defined INDAS words and the associated INDAS word
numbers are to be taken from the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ
variant.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,WORD= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- Up to 32 INDAS words and/or ranges can be linked with &.
- Input of an INDAS word range is only allowed if the resulting
number of INDAS words equals those of text fragments (implicit
increment one by one for both), or exactly one and the same
text fragment is assigned to all INDAS words of a given range.
- An INDAS word number may not be entered twice with different
text fragment numbers.
a-b
a: INDAS WORD NUMBER=
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 10+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANELEM- 11-
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command displays announcement elements of the types
Prerequisites:
- Only those announcement elements will be displayed which are
previously created.
<job number>.
1. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format displays the links between
INDAS pauses and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked.
[ [
[ DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes :
- If the entered OCANEQ variant is unknown there are no data to
display.
PAUSEALL ANELEM ALL INDAS PAUSE
All INDAS pauses.
This value is not allowed to be linked
with other values.
Pause after the end of each announcement cycle.
Pause between two different languages of
an announcement.
Pause between two phrases of an announcement.
Pause before the start of each announcement
cycle.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANELEM- 1+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format displays the components of an
INDAS phrase definition.
Each component may consist of up to 4 units:
ACTION CODE
FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM- NO.
MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
OFFSET
The phrase definition controls the combination of text
Up to 32 INDAS phrase numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.
[ [
[ DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,LANGUAGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes :
display.
a-b
the announcement elements to be displayed.
If X is specified, the announcement elements are
displayed for all the languages for which they are defined.
Notes :
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANELEM- 2+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL OFFICIAL LANGUAGES
Default: X
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANELEM- 3+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format displays the components of an
INDAS standard announcement definition.
Each component may consist of up to 2 units:
ACTION CODE
FRAGMENT-NO.
The standard announcement definition controls the
Up to 32 INDAS standard announcement numbers and/or
intervals can be linked.
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes :
display.
a-b
Notes :
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANELEM- 4+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: X
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANELEM- 5+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format displays the links between
INDAS word numbers and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 32 INDAS word numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes :
display.
a-b
Notes :
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANELEM- 6-
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command modifies announcement elements of the types
Prerequisites:
- Only the announcement elements previously created by CR ANELEM
can be modified.
1. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format is used to modify the text fragment allocated
to each type of the announcement element "INDAS pause".
INDAS pause specifies all pauses defined by INDAS which are inserted
according to attribute if an announcement is to be played. They are
used separately from an INDAS phrase or INDAS standard announcement
definition.
An INDAS pause consists of just one text fragment.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PAUSE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANN. ELEM. INDAS PAUSE
A pause is inserted at the end of each
announcement cycle.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 1+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A pause is inserted between two different
languages if the announcement is to be
played in more than one language.
A pause is inserted between two phrases
if the individual announcement consists
of more than one INDAS phrase.
A pause is inserted at the start of each
announcement cycle.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 2+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to modify the phrase definition of
an announcement element "INDAS phrase".
Notes:
- The modified phrase definition must be entered completely.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PHDEFIN= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
PHDEFIN INDAS PHRASE DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS phrase definition.
The phrase definition for an INDAS phrase describes the various
modifications of an announcement text for an individual
announcement as a function of the actual INDAS parameter values
and takes the foreign-language requirements into account.
It specifies the sequence in which fixed text fragments are to be
arranged and locates the positions where the text fragments
determined by the INDAS parameter values must be inserted. An
INDAS parameter is represented by a fixed parameter number assigned.
As a result, the phrase definition controls the combination of text
For each one of the allowed INDAS phrases and each valid language,
the phrase definition in its application form is part of the INDAS
To produce such a phrase definition, a formal definition language
similar to a programming language is used.
Syntax of INDAS phrase definition components:
The following INDAS phrase definition components are specified
and completed by the permissible combination of the required units:
Statement to insert a text fragment,
e.g.: compose the fixed text part of an announcement.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 3+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
input values:
- "Insert parameter definition":
using the corresponding INDAS word.
INPAR-<parameter no>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODNONE
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVNONE
(MLVNONE: only for INDAS parameters
input values:
using the corresponding INDAS word modified plus or minus by a
specified INDAS word offset. This corresponds with a change to
an alternative group of text fragments.
This statement may be used
- for modification to lower voice
(e.g.: the INDAS parameter is the final part of an announcement),
- for the several interpretations of the INDAS parameter "number"
(e.g.: applied as year, as part of a price),
- for a different representation of an INDAS parameter in the same
context
(e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "month" by its name ("January")
or alternatively by its ordinal number ("first")).
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODPLUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODMINUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVPLUS-<word offset>
(MLVPLUS: only for INDAS parameters
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVMINUS-<word offset>
(MLVMINUS: only for INDAS parameters
input values:
<word offset> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
- "Parameter block definition":
Statement to process an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value,
e.g.: the INDAS parameter "directory number".
PARDO-<parameter no>
input values:
- "IF condition block definition":
An "Insert fragment definition" or "Insert parameter definition"
is to be dependent of the value(s) of one INDAS parameter or
several INDAS parameters correlated to each other,
e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "minute" unless it is a full hour.
A single condition will be initiated by IFPAR. The parameter
value must be specified by its INDAS word.
Several conditions can be combined by ANDIFPAR ("and" relation,
i.e. all conditions must be true) or ORIFPAR ("or" relation, i.e.
one of the conditions must be true).
ELSIFPAR corresponds to a nested "IF condition definition" in
the form of ELSE IFPAR ... ENDIF.
If the condition(s) stated by IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ANDIFPAR /
ORIFPAR is(are) true the definition statement(s) following will
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 4+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be executed. If the condition(s) is(are) false, the definition
statement(s) following ELSE (if existent) or ENDIF will be
executed.
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
input values:
<word no> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
<condition> = EQUAL
NOTEQUAL
LESS
GREATER
or
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
input values:
<condition> = FRSTWORD
NOTFRSTW
LASTWORD
NOTLASTW
SELECTED
The conditions FRSTWORD, NOTFRSTW, LASTWORD, NOTLASTW
are only valid for an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value.
The condition SELECTED is true if the INDAS parameter has
at least one value.
or
ELSE
Statement to terminate a block definition or phrase definition.
ENDDO
ENDIF
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS phrase definition:
- A "definition block" must consist of one
"Insert fragment definition" or
"Insert parameter definition" or
"Parameter block definition" or
"IF condition block definition".
- A "Parameter block definition" is mandatory if an INDAS parameter
which may have more than one value is to be processed.
This "Parameter block definition" for an INDAS parameter must be
specified before an "IF condition block definition" or "Insert
parameter definition" of that parameter is entered.
There are however the following exceptions:
- The "IF condition block definition" can be entered prior to the
"Parameter block definition" if the condition(s) of an
"IF condition block definition" has(have) been formed using
SELECTED.
- Mandatory input of a "Parameter block definition" is excluded
if no "IF condition block definition" has been specified for
the INDAS parameter and
- only the last value of that parameter has to be modified
exclusively and the corresponding "Insert parameter definition"
is formed with MLVPLUS, MLVMINUS,
- none of the INDAS parameter values has to be modified and the
corresponding "Insert parameter definition" is formed with
MLVNONE.
- The body of a "Parameter block definition" must contain at least
one "definition block" and must be terminated with ENDDO.
- The "IF condition block definition" must contain at least one
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 5+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
statement initiated by IFPAR and must be terminated with ENDIF.
- For each case of "IF condition block definition" initiated by
IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ELSE the body must contain at least one
"definition block".
- Nested "IF condition block definitions" and/or "Parameter block
definitions" may be used up to the maximum nested level = 10.
- Nested "Parameter block definitions" for the same parameter
number are not allowed.
- The body of an INDAS phrase definition must contain at least one
"definition block" and must be terminated with END.
Notes:
- Within an INDAS phrase, INDAS parameters may be rearranged from
the original order indicated by the parameter numbers.
The parameter number retains the meaning of the INDAS parameter.
- The length of an INDAS phrase definition is only restricted by
the maximum number of permissible characters for an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS phrase definition components that
can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS phrase definition components must be
observed.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ACTION CODE
ANDIFPAR AND IF PARAMETER CONDITION
ELSE ELSE CONDITION
ELSIFPAR ELSE IF PARAMETER CONDITION
END END OF PHRASE DEFINITION
ENDDO END OF PARAMETER DO LOOP
ENDIF END OF IF CONDITION
IFPAR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
INPAR INSERT PARAMETER
ORIFPAR OR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
PARDO FOR ALL PARAMETER VALUES DO
b: FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM- NO.=
c: MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
EQUAL EQUAL
[FRSTWORD[ FIRST WORD
[GREATER [ GREATER
[LASTWORD[ LAST WORD
[LESS [ LESS
[MLVMINUS[ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: DECRE.
[MLVNONE [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MLVPLUS [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: INCRE.
[MODMINUS[ MOD. PARAM VALUE: DECREMENT
[MODNONE [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MODPLUS [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: INCREMENT
[NOTEQUAL[ NOT EQUAL
[NOTFRSTW[ NOT FIRST WORD
[NOTLASTW[ NOT LAST WORD
!SELECTED- SELECTED
d: OFFSET=
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 6+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 7+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
This input format is used to modify the standard announcement definition
of an announcement element "INDAS standard announcement".
Notes:
- The modified standard announcement definition must be entered completely.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,STDADEF= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
STDADEF INDAS STD. ANN. DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS standard announcement
definition.
The standard announcement definition for each INDAS standard
announcement describes the way in which text fragments are
sequenced and takes foreign-language requirements into account.
As a result, the standard announcement definition controls the
For each one of the allowed INDAS standard announcements and
each valid language, the standard announcement definition in
its application form is part of the INDAS document related to
the OCANEQ variant.
To produce such a standard announcement definition, a formal
definition language similar to a programming language is used.
Syntax of INDAS standard announcement definition components:
Statement to insert a text fragment.
input values:
Statement to terminate a standard announcement definition.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 8+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS standard
announcement definition:
- The body of an INDAS standard announcement definition must
contain at least one "Insert fragment definition" and must be
terminated with END.
Notes:
- The length of an INDAS standard announcement definition is only
restricted by the maximum number of permissible characters for
an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS standard announcement definition
components that can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS standard announcement definition
components must be observed.
a[-b]
a: ACTION CODE
END END OF STD. ANN. DEFINITION
b: FRAGMENT-NO.=
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 9+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format is used to modify the text fragment allocated
to an announcement element "INDAS word".
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,WORD= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- Up to 32 INDAS words and/or ranges can be linked with &.
- Input of an INDAS word range is only allowed if the resulting
number of INDAS words equals those of text fragments (implicit
increment one by one for both), or exactly one and the same
text fragment is assigned to all INDAS words of a given range.
- An INDAS word number may not be entered twice with different
text fragment numbers.
a-b
a: INDAS WORD NUMBER=
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANELEM- 10-
CAN ANGCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS
This command cancels the given announcement group data for the specified
announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement group must already exist.
- The given announcement group data to be cancelled must already exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be cancelled in the
announcement group table.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
SASANN SAS ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates an announcement group for
stand alone service (SAS) announcements in the
remote switching unit (RSU).
It is only allowed for standard announcement
groups.
DATEANN DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates a date announcement in
addition to the time announcement.
It is only allowed for time announcement groups.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This announcement group is administratively
blocked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANGCOS- 1-
ENTR ANGCOS
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS
This command enters the given announcement group data for the specified
announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The given announcement group data (parameters GCOS and BLK) to be entered
must not already exist.
1. ENTR ANGCOS - OCINDANN INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANN. - OCANEQ, MGIF
2. ENTR ANGCOS - OCSTDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
3. ENTR ANGCOS - OCTIMANN TIME ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
4. ENTR ANGCOS - STDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - DAS, HAG
1. Input format
INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANN. - OCANEQ, MGIF
This input format enters the given announcement group data for the specified
individual or user interactive (UI) announcement group leading to OCANEQ or
to a media gateway interface (MGIF) providing the interactive voice response
(IVR) services.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,VARIANT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
VARIANT IVR ANNOUNCEM. PROJECT VARIANT
This parameter specifies the variant of the IVR announcement project
which is assigned to the announcement group.
Note:
It is only allowed for IVR announcement groups (GCOS=MGIF).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 1+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 2+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
standard announcement group leading to OCANEQ or to a media gateway interface
(MGIF) providing the interactive voice response (IVR) services.
[ [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,STANNO= ,NUMCYC= ,SIT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,OCALSEQ= ,VARIANT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
<CHARGABL> CHARGEABLE
< > Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
<SASANN > SAS ANNOUNCEMENT
Incompatibilities:
- GCOS=NONBARGE
- GCOS=MGIF
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the standard announcement number for the
announcement group.
Note:
It is evaluated only in input format OCSTDANN.
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles.
Value 0 indicates an endless-loop announcement.
Note:
The entered value is not relevant in case of barge-in announcements
(i.e. GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered at the creating of the announcement
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 3+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
group).
SIT SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
This parameter specifies the use of the special information tone.
Note:
The entered value is not relevant in case of non barge-in announcements
(GCOS=NONBARGE).
N NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
[Y [ SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for OCANEQ. Input of up to 4 languages
for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 4+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Note:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 5+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TIME ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
time announcement group leading to OCANEQ or to a media gateway interface (MGIF)
providing the interactive voice response (IVR) services.
[ [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,TIMINT= ,OCALSEQ= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,VARIANT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
<DATEANN > DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates a date announcement in
addition to the time announcement.
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
TIMINT PERIODIC TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval (in seconds) for
time announcements.
10,15,20,30,60, range of decimal numbers
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 6+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Note:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 7+
ENTR ANGCOS
STDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - DAS, HAG
standard announcement group leading to an external announcement device (DAS,
HAG).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,STANNO= ,NUMCYC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
<SASANN > SAS ANNOUNCEMENT
Incompatibilities:
- GCOS=NONBARGE
- GCOS=MGIF
BLK BLOCKING
blocked.
announcement group.
Note:
Note:
(i.e. GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered at the creating of the announcement
group).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 8+
ENTR ANGCOS
STDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 9-
CAN ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command cancels an existing announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The announcement group must not contain any announcement lines.
- No route may exist to this announcement group.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANGRP : TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANGRP- 1-
CR ANGRP
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command creates an announcement group with the specified trunk group
number. All specified data will be entered in the announcement group table.
Prerequisite:
- The specified trunk group number must not exist within the exchange.
1. CR ANGRP - OCINDANN INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANN. - OCANEQ, MGIF
2. CR ANGRP - OCSTDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
3. CR ANGRP - OCTIMANN TIME ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
4. CR ANGRP - STDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - DAS, HAG
1. Input format
INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANN. - OCANEQ, MGIF
This input format creates an announcement group for individual or user
interactive (UI) announcements leading to OCANEQ or to a media gateway
interface (MGIF) providing the interactive voice response (IVR) services.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= [,BLK=] [,VARIANT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number. Any number can be
selected by the system operator provided it is clearly identifiable
within the exchange.
It is used for:
- addressing the announcement group, if commands are entered which are
related to the announcement group.
- identifying the announcement group in system outputs.
OCANEQ OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
This announcement group leads to OCANEQ.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
[ [ Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
!MGIF - MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE
IVR announcements provided by a media gateway
interface.
BLK BLOCKING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 1+
CR ANGRP
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<ADMIN > ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
< > This announcement group is administratively
< > blocked.
<MAINT > MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement group is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
Note:
In case of IVR announcements (GCOS=MGIF) the parameter is mandatory,
otherwise it is not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 2+
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
This input format creates an announcement group for standard announcements
leading to OCANEQ or to a media gateway interface (MGIF) providing the
interactive voice response (IVR) services.
[ [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= ,STANNO= [,BLK=] [,NUMCYC=] [,SIT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,OCALSEQ=] [,VARIANT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
It is used for:
MGIF MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE
[[ [[ This value indicates an announcement group for
[[ [[ IVR announcements provided by a media gateway
[ [ interface.
[[NONBARGE[[ NON BARGE-IN ANNOUNCEMENT
[[ [[ This value indicates an announcement group for
[[ [[ non barge-in announcements.
!SASANN - SAS ANNOUNCEMENT
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
!STAGGER - TIME STAGGER FOR NONBARGE
If this value is entered, time-staggering for the
announcement lines of this announcement group will
be activated.
It is only allowed for non barge-in announcements
(GCOS=NONBARGE).
announcement group.
Note:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 3+
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLK BLOCKING
< > blocked.
purposes.
Note:
(i.e. GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered).
Default: 2
This parameter specifies the use of the special information tone.
Note:
The entered value is not relevant in case of non barge-in announcements
(GCOS=NONBARGE).
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, in case of non barge-in
announcements the default value will be set to NO,
otherwise it will be set to YES.
[Y [ SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 4+
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
Note:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 5+
CR ANGRP
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TIME ANNOUNCEMENT - OCANEQ, MGIF
This input format creates an announcement group for time announcements
leading to OCANEQ or to a media gateway interface (MGIF) providing the
interactive voice response (IVR) services.
[ [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= ,TIMINT= [,BLK=] [,OCALSEQ=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,VARIANT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
It is used for:
TIMEANN TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
time announcements.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
[DATEANN [ DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
[ [ This value indicates a date announcement in
[ [ addition to the time announcement.
!MGIF - MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE
IVR announcements provided by a media gateway
interface.
TIMINT PERIODIC TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval (in seconds) for
time announcements.
10,15,20,30,60, range of decimal numbers
BLK BLOCKING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 6+
CR ANGRP
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
< > blocked.
purposes.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 7+
CR ANGRP
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
Note:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 8+
CR ANGRP
STDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT - DAS, HAG
This input format creates an announcement group for standard announcements
leading to an external announcement device (DAS, HAG).
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= [,GCOS=] [,BLK=] [,STANNO=] [,NUMCYC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
It is used for:
NONBARGE NON BARGE-IN ANNOUNCEMENT
[ [ This value indicates an announcement group for
[[ [[ non barge-in announcements.
!SASANN - SAS ANNOUNCEMENT
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
!STAGGER - TIME STAGGER FOR NONBARGE
If this value is entered, time-staggering for the
announcement lines of this announcement group will
be activated.
It is only allowed for non barge-in announcements
(GCOS=NONBARGE).
BLK BLOCKING
< > blocked.
purposes.
announcement group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 9+
CR ANGRP
STDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Note:
Default: 0
Note:
(i.e. GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered).
Default: 2
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANGRP- 10-
DISP ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command displays the announcement group specific data.
Prerequisite:
- The specified announcement group(s) must already exist.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANGRP : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number(s) of the announcement
group(s) to be addressed.
Up to 34 trunk group numbers may be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANGRP- 1-
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP DATA
This command enables announcement trunk group data
to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is accepted.
Notes:
- 8 measurement jobs can be started.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more than one job at
any one time.
- Traffic data are output to OMT or MDD file every 15 minutes.
- The measurement job can be stopped by STOP JOB if it is not a
daily measurement job and if the time parameter values allow a
continuation of the job.
- A STOP JOB command during the last or the only measurement interval
results automatically in job termination.
Input format
[ [
[ REC ANGRP : TGNO= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the announcement trunk groups
for which traffic data are to be recorded.
Allowed parameter values are:
- X, means: measurement of all created announcement
trunk groups,
or
- up to 16 specified announcement group numbers
(separated by &).
Prerequisites:
- The measurement of all announcement trunk groups (TGNO=X)
is only allowed if the data output will be to the magnetic
disk device (single or daily measurement file).
Notes:
- Only the names of existing announcement trunk groups may be
specified.
Up to 16 trunk groups may be linked with &.
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data will be output to
OMT every 15 minutes throughout the specified
measurement period.
If this option is selected, a measurement file
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC ANGRP- 1+
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is created and the received traffic data are
output every 15 minutes to this file.
After the parameter has been accepted and at
the end of the last recording, an acknowledgement
is output to the OMT. It includes the name of the
file in which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data will be
output to single measurement files.
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended, a
message appears at OMT.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data will be
output to daily files.
Additional time parameters are not allowed.
This type of measurement is appropriate to
continuous measurements which start immediately
and have no defined end.
They can only be cancelled by the command
CAN JOB.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7 daily
files (MO...SU) are prepared and created during
command acceptance.
The first data output after command acceptance
will be at the second 15-minute stroke.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day and th
new file for the next day is automatically opened
or created.
Existing files are replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file for
the same day of the week before will be
overwritten.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output unit = MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates may be linked with &. In case of
linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
Default: current date
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC ANGRP- 2+
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after command
entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
specified.
in daily files.
Default: If no termination date is entered, single day measurement
takes place.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter reduces the daily data delivery by defining
measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a begin date
(BEG).
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
are to be recorded.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which are not
linkable with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC ANGRP- 3+
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC ANGRP- 4-
CAN ANLCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS
This command cancels the given announcement line data for the specified
announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement line must already exist.
- The given data to be canceled must already exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANLCOS : TGNO= ,LNO= ,BLK= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement line.
This announcement line is administratively
blocked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANLCOS- 1-
ENTR ANLCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS
This command enters the given announcement line data for the specified
announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement line must already exist.
- The given data to be entered must not already exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ANLCOS : TGNO= ,LNO= <,BLK= ,SEIZMX=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line.
BLK BLOCKING
This announcement line is administratively
blocked.
SEIZMX SEIZURE COUNTER MAXIMUM VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum number of subscribers that can
simultaneously be connected to the announcement line.
Notes:
- For IP based announcements the parameter is not allowed.
- For individual announcements only value 1 is allowed.
- For time and for non barge-in announcements value 1 is not allowed.
- The entered value is not relevant in case of stand alone service
announcements.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR ANLCOS- 1-
CAN ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command cancels an existing announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The announcement line must be administrativly blocked.
- The announcement line is no longer seized for call processing.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line to be
canceled.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, the line with the highest
existing number available in the announcement group
will be deleted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANLN- 1-
CR ANLN
IPANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command creates an announcement line with the specified data.
Prerequisites:
- The specified equipment number or the media gateway link must exist and
has to be free.
1. CR ANLN - IPANN IP BASED ANNOUNCEMENT
2. CR ANLN - LTGANN LTG BASED ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
IP BASED ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an IP based announcement line leading to a media
gateway interface (MGIF) providing the interactive voice response (IVR)
services.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement group must have been created with GCOS=MGIF.
- The specified media gateway link must have the type ANN.
[ [
[ CR ANLN : TGNO= ,MGIF= ,MGPCM= ,MGTS= [,LNO=] [,LCOS=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,BLK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MGIF MEDIA GATEWAY INTERFACE NAME
This parameter specifies the media gateway interface name (domain name)
of the media gateway interface.
MGPCM MEDIA GATEWAY PCM NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the media gateways PCM link.
MGTS MEDIA GATEWAY TIMESLOT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the timeslot number of the media gateway link.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANLN- 1+
CR ANLN
IPANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
created.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, the line will be given
the highest existing number available in the
announcement group plus 1. When the first line
is created, the value is set to 1.
LCOS LINE CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the signaling type when creating an
announcement line, or changes the port construction type.
UIPRT USER INTERACTION PORT
This value indicates a port for user interaction.
It is only possible on port construction type
INDASPRT. The announcement group must have been
created with input format OCINDANN.
The port construction type will be changed to
UIPRT.
BLK BLOCKING
< > This announcement line is administratively
< > blocked.
This announcement line is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANLN- 2+
CR ANLN
LTGANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTG BASED ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an LTG based announcement line leading to OCANEQ or
to an external announcement device (DAS, HAG).
The announcement line can be created on the following port construction types:
- DIUPORT
- DIURAPRT
- INDASPRT Prerequisite: GCOS=OCANEQ is entered for the announcement group.
- INDAS0PT Prerequisite: GCOS=OCANEQ is entered for the announcement group.
Incompatibility: GCOS=MGIF.
[ [
[ CR ANLN : TGNO= ,LTG= ,LC= [,LNO=] [,LCOS=] [,BLK=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SEIZMX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the line connection.
In case of time announcement lines the following conditions apply:
- It is necessary to combine two adjacent ports to get one "logical"
port. This port pair must always be completed before another pair
is created.
- The ports of a coupled pair must belong to the same announcement
group.
- The ports of a coupled pair must have successive port numbers,
whereby the lower number always has to be odd and the higher even.
- The total number of created time announcement lines belonging to the
same LTU:OCANEQ must not exceed 6 lines (3 pairs).
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANLN- 3+
CR ANLN
LTGANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: CHANNEL=
LNO LINE NUMBER
created.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, the line will be given
the highest existing number available in the
announcement group plus 1. When the first line
is created, the value is set to 1.
LCOS LINE CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the signaling type when creating an
announcement line, or changes the port construction type.
DIGSIG1 DIGITAL SIGNALING 01
[ [ Only possible on port construction type DIUPORT.
[DIGSIG10[ DIGITAL SIGNALING 10
[ [ LT = 72 DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= UI operat.ass.
[ [ LT = 72 DIR =IN,BW Sig.= announcem. NUC
[ [ LT = 73 DIR =IN,BW Sig.= ISUP
[ [ LT = 72 & 73, DIR =IN,OUT Sig.= pool echo circ
[ [ LT = 72 DIR =IN,BW Sig.= line trunkmon.
[ [ LT = 73 DIR =BW Sig.= BTUP
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =BW Sig.= ITUP
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =IN,OUT Sig.= loop R2
[DIGSIG2 [ DIGITAL SIGNALING 02
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =BW Sig.= rcs
[ [ LT = 72, DIR =BW Sig.= TWS
[ [ LT = 72, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= call back
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =OUT Sig.= LVD
DIGSIG23 DIGITAL SIGNALING 23
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= isup
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =BW Sig.= isup
[ [ LT = 72, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= Service port
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =OUT Sig.= announcem. NUC
[ [ LT = 72, DIR =IN Sig.= MCR & CME
[ [ LT = 72, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= cas sub/pabx
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= loop/R2D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANLN- 4+
CR ANLN
LTGANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ LT = 73, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= kaehler-last
[ [ LT = 72 & 73, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= pabx
[ [ LT = 72 & 73, DIR =IN,OUT,BW Sig.= nailed up conn
[ [ LT = 72 & 73, DIR =BW Sig.= wake up serv.
UIPRT USER INTERACTION PORT
This value indicates a port for user interaction.
It is only possible on port construction type
INDASPRT. The announcement group must have been
created with input format OCINDANN.
The port construction type will be changed to
UIPRT.
BLK BLOCKING
< > This announcement line is administratively
< > blocked.
This announcement line is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
SEIZMX SEIZURE COUNTER MAXIMUM VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum number of subscribers that can
simultaneously be connected to the announcement line.
Notes:
- For individual announcements only value 1 is allowed.
- For time and for non barge-in announcements value 1 is not allowed.
- The entered value is not relevant in case of stand alone service
announcements.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, in case of individual
announcements the default value will be set to 1,
otherwise it will be set to 16.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANLN- 5-
DISP ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command displays the announcement line specific data.
Prerequisite:
- The specified announcement group(s) must already exist.
All combinations of linked trunk group numbers and linked line numbers or a
range of line numbers are possible.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number(s) of the announcement
group(s) to be addressed.
Up to 34 trunk group numbers may be linked.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number(s) of the announcement line(s)
to be displayed.
Up to 34 line numbers or ranges of line numbers may be linked.
Standard Behavior: If this parameter is not entered, all announcement
lines within the specified announcement group(s)
will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANLN- 1-
STAT ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command displays the transient states and the seizure counters for one
or more or all lines of one or all announcement trunk groups.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] [,STATUS= [,MODE=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- The administration assigns trunk group numbers for recorded
announcement groups, trunk groups and test equipment groups.
- The trunk group number is used in the sequence as a search criterion
for a specific group in the system.
- Only alphanumeric characters are permitted for this parameter.
- All trunk group numbers can be assigned with X.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the recorded announcement
group.
Notes:
- Up to 32 LNO parameter values can be chained as input.
STATUS TRANSIENT RCA TRUNK STATE
This parameter specifies the status of a recorded announcement group.
The default value of this parameter is X.
OUT BUSY OUTGOING
INT BUSY INTERNAL
PBMS PORT BLOCKED BY MANUAL SWITCH
BBAC BLOCK BACKWARD
BPRM BLOCK PERMANENT
BMNT BLOCK MAINTENANCE
BADM BLOCK ADMINISTRATIVE
CADM CAMPED ON ADMINISTRATION
NLTG NOT ACCESSIBLE LTG
NDIU NOT ACCESSIBLE DIU
NPRT NOT ACCESSIBLE PORT
NCAR NOT ACCESSIBLE CARRIER
NMNT NOT ACCESSIBLE MAINTENANCE
NMNI NAC MAINTENANCE INDICATION
AUD AUDIT
MLTG MAINTENANCE BLOCKED LTG
MDIU MAINTENANCE BLOCKED DIU
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT ANLN- 1+
STAT ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MPRT MAINTENANCE BLOCKED PORT
CLTG CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED LTG
CDIU CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED DIU
CPRT CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED PORT
IDLE IDLE STATUS
GBAD GROUP BLOCKED ADMIN
GBMT GROUP BLOCKED MAINT
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
BSTC TRANSMISSION CHANNEL BLOCKED
MODE SEARCH MODE
This parameter specifies the search mode.
This parameter can be set up only together with the STATUS parameter.
With this parameter announcement lines with special status values can
be restricted.
The default value is ANY.
ANY ANY MATCH
ALL ALL MATCHES
ONLY EXACT STATUS MATCH
SUBSET SUBSET OF RESPECTIVE STATE SET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT ANLN- 2-
DISP ANPREV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET VALUE
This command displays the preset values
- number of announcement cycles NUMCYC
- flag for special information tone SIT
or
- modification to lower voice MODLOWER
which are only used by individual announcements.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANPREV : IFU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IFU INDAS FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the INDAS function used to select
individual announcements.
Up to 8 values and/or ranges can be linked.
X ALL INDAS FUNCTIONS
CHGDNIND IFU ANN CHANGED DN
Individual announcement if the B-side
directory number has changed.
WUPCAS IFU WAKEUP CASUAL
Individual announcement used as a positive
acknowledgement when a casual wakeup call is
requested by subscriber controlled input.
WUPDAY IFU WAKEUP DAILY
acknowledgement when a daily wakeup call is
WUPWEEK IFU WAKEUP WEEKLY
acknowledgement when a weekly wakeup call is
ANNCDVDN IFU ANN CALL DIVERSION DN
Individual announcement used as a call
diversion acknowledgement after successful
activation of call forwarding or for data
query by subscriber controlled input.
SWUPCAS IFU SHIFT WAKEUP CASUAL
requested by subscriber controlled input
but the wakeup time is shifted.
A wakeup call is shifted automatically if lack
of resources in the timer interval has occurred.
SWUPDAY IFU SHIFT WAKEUP DAILY
CFIACATC IFU CF INDIV ANN CAT COMPOSED
Individual announcement for announcement texts
based on a text element dictionary,
used by a subscriber to divert incoming calls
to his private announcement (previously defined
by the operator combining the related text
elements)
or used for project specific routing dependent
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANPREV- 1+
DISP ANPREV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
announcement.
CHCPTIND IFU ANN CHANGED CPT
Individual announcement used as an information
if a destination code number has changed.
ANNCHARG IFU ANN OF CHARGE
Individual announcement used as an automatic
verbal information of the charge for an
outgoing call after it has been completed
and the subscriber has released.
ANNDINUM IFU ANN RETRIEVED DN
information of the directory number retrieved
by an operator for national or international
enquiry.
ANNSCLDN IFU ANN SCREENING DN
Individual announcement for individual
screening list of directory numbers,
used as a positive acknowledgement for
data query by subscriber controlled input.
ANNAUTGR IFU ANN AUTOMATIC GREETING
Individual announcement played to a subscriber
after the call has been forwarded to an operator
and before the subscriber is connected to the
operators headset.
ANNARDN IFU ANN AUTOMATIC RECALL
Individual announcement fed in as an information
about the stored A party number if requested by
subscriber controlled input.
SWUPWEEK IFU SHIFT WAKEUP WEEKLY
ANNQINF IFU ANN QUE INFO
about the current queue position in an ADMOSS
or CENTREX queue and/or the estimated delay
time.
ANNSCLIM IFU ANN SCLIM
Individual announcement for subscriber credit
limit supervision, used as an information in
case of interrogation by subscriber controlled
input.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANPREV- 2-
MOD ANPREV
ANNCYC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT PRESET VALUE
This command modifies preset values which are only used by
1. MOD ANPREV - ANNCYC ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLE VALUES
2. MOD ANPREV - MODLOWER MODIFICATION TO LOWER VOICE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLE VALUES
This input format modifies the preset values
- number of announcement cycles NUMCYC
- flag for special information tone SIT
of individual announcements.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANPREV : IFU= <,NUMCYC= ,SIT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IFU INDAS FUNCTION
[ [ Individual announcement fed in as an information
[ [ about the stored A party number if requested by
[ [ subscriber controlled input.
[ANNAUTGR[ IFU ANN AUTOMATIC GREETING
[ [ Individual announcement played to a subscriber
[ [ after the call has been forwarded to an operator
[ [ and before the subscriber is connected to the
[ [ operators headset.
[ANNCDVDN[ IFU ANN CALL DIVERSION DN
[ [ Individual announcement used as a call
[ [ diversion acknowledgement after successful
[ [ activation of call forwarding or for data
[ [ query by subscriber controlled input.
[ANNCHARG[ IFU ANN OF CHARGE
[ [ Individual announcement used as an automatic
[ [ verbal information of the charge for an
[ [ outgoing call after it has been completed
[ [ and the subscriber has released.
[ANNDINUM[ IFU ANN RETRIEVED DN
[ [ Individual announcement used as an automatic
[ [ information of the directory number retrieved
[ [ by an operator for national or international
[ [ enquiry.
[ANNQINF [ IFU ANN QUE INFO
[ [ Individual announcement used as an information
[ [ about the current queue position in an ADMOSS
[ [ or CENTREX queue and/or the estimated delay
[ [ time.
[ANNSCLDN[ IFU ANN SCREENING DN
[ [ Individual announcement for individual
[ [ screening list of directory numbers,
[ [ used as a positive acknowledgement for
[ [ data query by subscriber controlled input.
[ANNSCLIM[ IFU ANN SCLIM
[ [ Individual announcement for subscriber credit
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANPREV- 1+
MOD ANPREV
ANNCYC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ case of interrogation by subscriber controlled
[ [ input.
[CHCPTIND[ IFU ANN CHANGED CPT
[ [ Individual announcement used as an information
[ [ if a destination code number has changed.
[CHGDNIND[ IFU ANN CHANGED DN
[ [ Individual announcement if the B-side
[ [ directory number has changed.
[SWUPCAS [ IFU SHIFT WAKEUP CASUAL
[ [ Individual announcement used as a positive
[ [ acknowledgement when a casual wakeup call is
[ [ requested by subscriber controlled input
[ [ but the wakeup time is shifted.
[ [ A wakeup call is shifted automatically if lack
[ [ of resources in the timer interval has occurred.
[SWUPDAY [ IFU SHIFT WAKEUP DAILY
[ [ acknowledgement when a daily wakeup call is
[SWUPWEEK[ IFU SHIFT WAKEUP WEEKLY
[ [ acknowledgement when a weekly wakeup call is
[WUPCAS [ IFU WAKEUP CASUAL
[ [ acknowledgement when a casual wakeup call is
[ [ requested by subscriber controlled input.
[WUPDAY [ IFU WAKEUP DAILY
[ [ acknowledgement when a daily wakeup call is
[ [ requested by subscriber controlled input.
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles
for an individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until
the listener hangs up.
This parameter determines whether each language of any announcement
cycle has to start with the special information tone or not.
[Y [ YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANPREV- 2+
MOD ANPREV
MODLOWER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFICATION TO LOWER VOICE
This input format modifies the preset value
- modification to lower voice MODLOWER
which is used for announcements based on a text element dictionary.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANPREV : IFU= ,MODLOWER= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IFU INDAS FUNCTION
elements)
announcement.
MODLOWER MODIFICATION TO LOWER VOICE
This parameter determines whether the modification to lower voice
is active or not. It is only valid for announcements based on a
text element dictionary.
Notes:
Unit b is mandatory if the modification to lower voice is set to
active. Otherwise it is not allowed.
a[-b]
a: MODLOWER VALIDATION FLAG
N NO MODIFICATION TO LOWER VOICE
NO NO MODIFICATION TO LOWER VOICE
[Y [ MODIFICATION TO LOWER VOICE
YES MODIFICATION TO LOWER VOICE
b: MODLOWER OFFSET=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANPREV- 3-
DISP ANTAATMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all NT ATM Port Attributes
This task displays all ATM port attributes of one NT.
The attributes for the ATM port are indexed by a VPI, so this task shows all
attributes of the already created VPIs, of one NT specified by the EQN port to
which it is connected.
Output Parameters:
NT ATM Port Configuration and Status Table:
VPI:
This Object contains the VPI of the adslNtAtmConfigTable.
RowStatus:
This Object contains the RowStatus for the adslNtAtmConfigTable.
TrafficMode:
This Object contains the Traffic Mode.
PCR:
This Object contains the Peak Cell Rate in kbit/s.
ConfigDataResponse:
This Object contains the response of the NT to the command PutATMFConfigData.
0x01 ... NT announces autonomous reboot (fatal error occured in message)
0x02 ... No NT reboot
This object contains all attributes of the ATM port for the already
created VPIs, of one NT.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANTAATMA : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the line card port connected to the NT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTAATMA- 1-
CR ANTATMAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create NT ATM Port Attributes
This task creates on the NT attributes for the ATM port.
The attributes for the ATM port are indexed by a VPI, so in order to create new
attributes there must be entered a new VPI.
Input format
[ [
[ CR ANTATMAT : EQN= ,VPI= [,TrafficMode=] [,PCR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
Virtual Path Identifier of the ATM port.
Input format:
TrafficMode
Traffic Mode of the ATM port.
Input format:
Selection from:
- cbr: constant bitrate
- ubr: unassigned bitrate
PCR
Peak Cell Rate of the ATM port in kbit/s.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANTATMAT- 1-
DEL ANTATMAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete NT ATM Port Attributes
This task deletes the attributes of an ATM port on the NT.
The attributes for the ATM port are indexed by a VPI, so in order to delete
attributes there must be entered an already created VPI.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL ANTATMAT : EQN= ,VPI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
The Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) of the ATM port.
Input format:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL ANTATMAT- 1-
DISP ANTATMAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display NT ATM Port Attributes
This task displays a specified ATM port attributes of one NT.
The attributes for the ATM port are indexed by a VPI, so this task shows the
attributes of a specified VPI, of one NT specified by the EQN port to which it
is connected.
Output Parameters:
RowStatus:
This Object contains the RowStatus for the adslNtAtmConfigTable.
TrafficMode:
This Object contains the Traffic Mode.
PCR:
This Object contains the Peak Cell Rate in kbit/s.
ConfigDataResponse:
This Object contains the response of the NT to the command PutATMFConfigData.
0x01 ... NT announces autonomous reboot (fatal error occured in message)
0x02 ... No NT reboot
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANTATMAT : EQN= ,VPI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
The Virtual Path Identifier of the NT ATM port.
Input format:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTATMAT- 1-
MOD ANTATMAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify NT ATM Port Attributes
This task edits the attributes of one ATM port of the NT.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ANTATMAT : EQN= ,VPI= [,TrafficMode=] [,PCR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
Virtual Path Identifier of the ATM port.
Input format:
TrafficMode
Traffic Mode of the ATM port.
Input format:
Selection from:
PCR
Peak Cell Rate of the ATM port in kbit/s.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANTATMAT- 1-
DISP ANTETHAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display NT Ethernet Port Attributes
This task displays the Ethernet port attributes of the NT.
Output Parameters:
RowStatus:
The RowStatus of the adslNtEthConfigTable.
VCI:
The Virtual channel identifier (VCI) of the Ethernet port.
VPI:
The Virtual path identifier (VPI) of the Ethernet port.
IpAddrCpSide:
The IP Address of the Ethernet port.
IpMaskCpSide:
The Subnet-Mask of the Ethernet port.
IpAddrRoutingCpSide:
The IP-Address of the next hop router.
OperatingMode:
The Operating Mode of the Ethernet port.
NOTE: tunneling (3) is currently not supported by the NT.
TrafficMode:
The Traffic Mode of the Ethernet port.
PCR:
The peak cell rate in kbit/s.
ConfigDataResponse:
The response of the NT to the command PutATMFConfigData.
0x01 ... NT announces autonomous reboot (fatal error occured in message).
0x02 ... No NT reboot.
ATMTPDefectsF4:
This Object contains the Faults on the F4 Layer (Vp) of the ATM/Ethernet
Termination Point:
bit0 AIS downstream
0 cleared
1 present
bit1 RDI downstream
0 cleared
1 present
bit2 AIS upstream
0 cleared
1 present
bit3 RDI upstream
0 cleared
1 present
ATMTPDefectsF5:
This Object contains the Faults on the F5 Layer (Vp/Vc) of the ATM/Ethernet
Termination Point:
bit0 AIS downstream
0 cleared
1 present
bit1 RDI downstream
0 cleared
1 present
bit2 AIS upstream
0 cleared
1 present
bit3 RDI upstream
0 cleared
1 present
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTETHAT- 1+
DISP ANTETHAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANTETHAT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTETHAT- 2-
MOD ANTETHAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify NT Ethernet Port Attributes
This task edits the attributes of one Ethernet port of the NT.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ANTETHAT : EQN= [,VCI=] [,VPI=] [,IpAddrCpSide=] [
[ [
[ [,IpMaskCpSide=] [,IpAddrRoutingCpSide=] [
[ [
[ [,OperatingMode=] [,TrafficMode=] [,PCR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VCI
The Virtual channel identifier (VCI) of the Ethernet port.
Input format:
VPI
The Virtual path identifier (VPI) of the Ethernet port.
Input format:
IpAddrCpSide
The IP Address of the Ethernet port.
IpMaskCpSide
The Subnet-Mask of the Ethernet port.
IpAddrRoutingCpSide
The IP-Address of the next hop router.
OperatingMode
The Operating Mode of the Ethernet port.
NOTE: tunneling (3) is currently not supported by the NT.
Input format:
Selection from:
- bridging
- ipforwarding
- tunneling
TrafficMode
The Traffic Mode of the Ethernet port.
Input format:
Selection from:
PCR
The peak cell rate in kbit/s.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANTETHAT- 1-
DISP ANTGCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display NT General Configuration
This task displays the general configuration of the NT.
Output Parameters:
Model detection:
This object is used to choose the appropriate initialization sequence.
detected Model:
This object contains the detected model of ADSL Network Termination.
AtmPortState:
With this object it is possible to lock or unlock the ATM port.
EthPortState:
With this object it is possible to lock or unlock the ETH port.
PhysLoopState:
With this object it is possible to establish a physical loop back in the NT.
LoopbackLocId:
The Loopback Location ID of the NT. This parameter must have 16
characters. When the variable has the default value (0xFF in all 16
characters), the content of the parameter will be printed as default.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANTGCONF : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTGCONF- 1-
MOD ANTGCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify NT General Configuration
This task edits the NT General Configuration.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ANTGCONF : EQN= [,Model detection=] [,AtmPortState=] [
[ [
[ [,EthPortState=] [,PhysLoopState=] [,LoopbackLocId=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Model detection
This object is used to choose the appropriate initialization sequence.
Input format:
Selection from:
- autodetect: NT will be automatically detected (default)
- unmanaged: unmanaged NT
- twinNt: Siemens TwinNT
AtmPortState
With this object it is possible to lock or unlock the ATM port.
Input format:
Selection from:
- unlock: unlock the ATM port
- lock: lock the ATM port
EthPortState
With this object it is possible to lock or unlock the ETH port.
Input format:
Selection from:
- unlock: unlock the ETH port
- lock: lock the ETH port
PhysLoopState
With this object it is possible to establish a physical loop back in
the NT.
Input format:
Selection from:
- loopoff: physical loop off
- loopon: physical loop on
LoopbackLocId
The Loopback Location ID of the NT. This parameter must have 16
characters.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANTGCONF- 1-
DISP ANTGSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display NT General Status
This task displays the general status of the NT.
Output Parameters:
Status:
This Object contains the alive status of the NT
1 ... the Inband Communication Cannel SLMI-NT is functional
2 ... the Inband Communication Cannel SLMI-NT is not functional
SelftestResult:
During startup the NT performs a selftest. This Object contains
the result of this selftest.
bit0 ... Core / TcNt status
bit1 ... Ethernet IF status
bit2 ... ATMF status
bit3 ... CRC status
0 ... no defect
1 ... defect
StartupInfo:
This Object contains the startup info of the NT.
bit 0,1
00 ... coldstart (SW_reset, HW_reset)
01 ... warmstart
10 ... WDT
11 ... First time power up
bit 2
0 ... no ACK_PEND active
1 ... ACK_PEND active (not used)
bit 3
0 ... no download in progress
1 ... download in progress
bit 4
0 ... no SW error escalation
1 ... SW error escalation (SW_failure, WDT) (not used)
bit 5
000 ... wait for RestartAnn1 (not used)
001 ... wait for RestartConf
010 ... wait for RestartAnn2 (not used)
011 ... active, administrative locked (not used)
100 ... active, administrative unlocked
TcaIFDefect:
This Object contains the status of the Transmission Convergence Adaptor.
nodefect: no defect
defect : (LOS, LCD, TxError defect)
AtmIFDefect:
This Object contains the status of the ATM Interface.
nodefect: no defect
EthIFDefect:
This Object contains the status of the Ethernet Interface.
nodefect: no defect
FirmwareVersion:
This Object contains the Firmware Version Number of the NT.
SoftwareVersion:
This Object contains the Software Version Number of the NT.
FWCode:
This Object contains the Firmware Code of the NT.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANTGSTAT : EQN= ; [
[ [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTGSTAT- 1+
DISP ANTGSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTGSTAT- 2-
CAN ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command cancels a definition of an announcement text of OCANEQ
(Operationally Controlled Equipment for Announcement).
When the definitions of all official languages are canceled, the
textnumber and its data (use if the special information tone,
number of announcement cycles) is canceled too.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANTXT : TXTNO= [,LANGUAGE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the selected announcement
text.
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE OF ANNOUCEMENT TEXT
for the announcement text.
Default: Announcement text is canceled for all official
languages.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ANTXT- 1-
CR ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command creates definitions of an announcement text (in up
to four languages) by combining numbers of text parts that are
available on OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled Equipment for
Announcement).
Input format
[ [
[ CR ANTXT : TXTNO= <,TXTLAN1= ,TXTLAN2= ,TXTLAN3= ,TXTLAN4=> [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SIT=] [,NUMCYC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
text.
TXTLAN1 TEXT DATA OF FIRST LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the first official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN1 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
TXTLAN2 TEXT DATA OF SECOND LANGUAGE
announcement text for the second official language:
Example: TXTLAN2 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN3 TEXT DATA OF THIRD LANGUAGE
announcement text for the third official language:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANTXT- 1+
CR ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example: TXTLAN3 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN4 TEXT DATA OF FOURTH LANGUAGE
announcement text for the fourth official language:
Example: TXTLAN4 = "4+16+#73154+50".
This parameter determines whether the announcement text in every
language has to start with the special information tone or not.
Y YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles for an
individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until the listener hangs up.
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ANTXT- 2-
DISP ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command displays the definitions of announcement texts of OCANEQ
(Operationally Controlled Equipment of Announcement).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ANTXT : [TXTNO=] [,LANGUAGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies those numbers of the announcement texts
that shall be displayed.
Up to 10 parameter values can be linked by &.
Default: All announcement texts
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE OF ANNOUCEMENT TEXT
for the annoucement texts.
Default: The announcement texts are displayed for all the
languages for which they are defined.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ANTXT- 1-
MOD ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command modifies a definition of an announcement text (in up
to four languages) by combining numbers of text parts that are
available on OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled Equipment for
Announcement).
Modifications of the number of announcement cycles and the use of
the special information tone are valid for all languages.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ANTXT : TXTNO= <,TXTLAN1= ,TXTLAN2= ,TXTLAN3= ,TXTLAN4= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SIT= ,NUMCYC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
text.
TXTLAN1 TEXT DATA OF FIRST LANGUAGE
announcement text for the first official language:
Example: TXTLAN1 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN2 TEXT DATA OF SECOND LANGUAGE
announcement text for the second official language:
Example: TXTLAN2 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN3 TEXT DATA OF THIRD LANGUAGE
announcement text for the third official language:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANTXT- 1+
MOD ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example: TXTLAN3 = "4+16+#73154+50".
TXTLAN4 TEXT DATA OF FOURTH LANGUAGE
announcement text for the fourth official language:
Example: TXTLAN4 = "4+16+#73154+50".
This parameter determines whether the announcement text in every
language has to start with the special information tone or not.
Y YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles for an
individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until the listener hangs up.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ANTXT- 2-
DISP AOAMTABD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all OAM Table Destinations
Displays all OAM destinations from table
Output Parameters:
oamIpAddress: IP address of peer.
oamRowStatus: Controls row creation and deletion
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AOAMTABD : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the PHUB
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AOAMTABD- 1-
CAN APPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL APPLICATION
This command cancels all information concerning the specified application.
Notes:
- NEATT data network:
When this command is entered, the server concerned is sent a message
informing it of the modification to the database (providing that it is
registered). If the server acknowledges this modification negatively,
the command will not be executed.
- OSI data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, the local application
concerned (providing it is registered) is sent a message informing
it of the modification to the database. If the local application
acknowledges this modification negatively, the command will not be
executed.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of the application in
an
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN APPL- 1-
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE APPLICATION
This command is used to create applications in processors.
When this command is entered, a message is sent to the server concerned,
informing it of the database modification (providing the server is
- OSI and IP data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, a message is sent to
the local application concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the local application is registered). If the local application
executed.
The servers are the local partners from remote applications in the NEATT
data network. They only report in a special table of the databases.The
difference between servers and local applications is that local applications
must be additionally created via command CR APPL. Local applications
are only used in data networks with OSI or IP addressing.
1. CR APPL - CRNEAAPL CREATE NEA APPLICATIONS
2. CR APPL - CROSIAPL CREATE OSI APPLICATIONS
1. Input format
CREATE NEA APPLICATIONS
Input format for NEA applications.
When this command is entered, a message is sent to the server concerned,
informing it of the database modification (providing the server is
[ [
[ CR APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ,ADRNAM= [,SSID=] [,PSID=] [
[ [
[ [,SERVID=] [,AUT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the application
in an
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name for an address which
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR APPL- 1+
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
has been defined by CR NEATSADR or CR OSIADR or CR IPADR.
Notes:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA or OSI
or IPA.
- Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- In the OSI data network a maximum of sixteen addresses can be
specified.
- If the entered address is an IP-address only one address is
allowed.
SSID SESSION SERVICE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the session layer for
file transfer jobs (layer 5 in the ISO reference model).
Notes:
- Default: "FJAM" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
for all NEAB applications).
PSID PRESENTATION PROCESSOR ID
This parameter specifies the name of the presentation layer for
Notes:
- Default: "NDMS" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
SERVID SERVER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the server responsible for
the applications which have been entered.
Notes:
- Only those servers already registered in the CLS database can
be assigned to the applications ( not to be used with
OSI-addresses).
- The parameter SERVID specifies the service identification
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR APPL- 2+
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
associated with the application. The local application is to
be taken from the software module specific documentation.
AUT AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the authorization name for an external
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must previously be created using the
command ENTR AUT.
Notes:
- The authorization must be specified for dialog applications.
- This parameter can be entered only for remote applications.
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR APPL- 3+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE OSI APPLICATIONS
Input format for OSI applications.
If the command is entered for remote applications, a message is sent to
the local application concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the local application is registered). If the local application
executed.
[ [
[ CR APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ,ADRNAM= [,LOCAPL=] [,PORTNR=] [
[ [
[ [,SPROCESS=] [,AUT=] [,TSEL=] [,SSEL=] [,PSEL=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,AET=[[ [
[ [,MUX=] [,APQ=[ [,AEQ=] [,APPLC=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
in an
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
or IPA.
- Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- In the OSI data network a maximum of sixteen addresses can be
specified.
allowed.
LOCAPL LOCAL APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the corresponding
local application.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR APPL- 4+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered only for remote
applications connected via TCP/IP.
PORTNR PORTNUMBER
This parameter specifies application specific portnumbers.
Notes:
- The parameter can be entered only for remote applications
connected via TCP/IP.
- If the parameter is not entered the default value 102 will
be administrated.
- The value of the portnumber can be an integer value from
0 to 32767.
Default: 102
SPROCESS SERVER PROCESS
This parameter specifies the name of the server process
which supports the entered application.
AUT AUTHORIZATION
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must previously be created using the
command ENTR AUT.
Notes:
- The authorization must be specified for dialog applications.
Default: 0
TSEL TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Transport Layer Entity.
In case of OSI applications that do not allow the use of selectors
this parameter can not be entered.
Notes:
-Only hexadecimal values (numbers from 0 to 9 and characters
from A to F) are allowed.
SSEL SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Session Layer Entity.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR APPL- 5+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
PSEL PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Presentation Layer Entity.
Notes:
MUX MULTIPLEX SIGN
This parameter specifies if a remote application can be multiplexed
or not.
If this parameter is not entered the value is set to NO. This means
that the application cannot be multiplexed.
Y MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
YES MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
AET APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
This parameter is an additional identification of the
application.
A maximum of 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- For the first component only the values 0, 1 and
2 are allowed.
- For the second component only a value from 0 to
39 is allowed.
APQ APPLICATION PROCESS QUALIFIER
The application process qualifier is a part of the
application entity title and specifies the application
on a specific processor.
Notes:
-The parameter APQ can only be entered for applications
with a server process on a processor with system title.
-The maximum length of APQ is 14 components.
AEQ APPLICATION ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter is a part of the application entity title.
Notes:
-This parameter can only be entered if the parameter
APQ has been entered, too.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR APPL- 6+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
APPLC APPLICATION CONTEXT
This parameter specifies the application context.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered for local Q3-application.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR APPL- 7-
DISP APPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY APPLICATION
This command displays information about:
- one application in a processor, or
- all applications in a processor, or
- all known applications.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP APPL : APPLID= [,PRONAM=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the identification of the application in all
processors.
ALL ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies if only short information (NO)
or all information (YES) about the application will be
displayed.
If the parameter is not entered, the short information
will be displayed.
YES can only be entered for a specified application.
Y DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
YES DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
N DISPLAY SHORT INFORMATION
NO DISPLAY SHORT INFORMATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP APPL- 1-
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY APPLICATION
This command modifies information concerning applications which have
been entered.
If no default application is present, a message is sent to the
server concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the server is registered). If the server acknowledges
this modification negatively, the command will not be executed.
- OSI and IP data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, a message
is sent to the local application concerned, informing it of the
database modification (providing the local application is
registered). If the local application acknowledges this modification
negatively, the command will not be executed.
- The authorization (parameter AUT) can also be modified in the
case of default applications.
- The names of the message and data description levels (parameters
SSID and PSID) can also be modified in the case of default
applications.
- In case of default applications, the address name cannot be
modified by the MOD APPL command. The MOD PRO command has to be
used.
the exchange!
1. MOD APPL - MDNEAAPL MODIFY NEA APPLICATIONS
2. MOD APPL - MDOSIAPL MODIFY OSI APPLICATIONS
1. Input format
MODIFY NEA APPLICATIONS
Input format for NEA applications.
If no default application is present, a message is sent to the
server concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the server is registered). If the server acknowledges
this modification negatively, the command will not be executed.
[ [
[ MOD APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= [,ADRNAM=] [,AUT=] [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ [,PSID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
in an
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
n
n/o
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD APPL- 1+
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
or IPA.
Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- Only in OSI data network can a maximum of sixteen addresses be
specified.
allowed.
AUT AUTHORIZATION
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must be created previously.
Notes:
n/o
SSID SESSION SERVICE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the session layer for
Notes:
- Default: "FJAM" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
n/o
PSID PRESENTATION PROCESSOR ID
This parameter specifies the name of the presentation layer for
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD APPL- 2+
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Default: "NDMS" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
n/o
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD APPL- 3+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY OSI APPLICATIONS
Input format for OSI applications.
If the command is entered for remote applications, a message is
sent to the local application concerned, informing it of the
database modification (providing the local application is
registered). If the application acknowledges this modification
negatively, the command will not be executed.
[ [
[ MOD APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= [,ADRNAM=] [,AUT=] [,OTSEL=] [
[ [
[ [,OSSEL=] [,OPSEL=] [,NTSEL=] [,NSSEL=] [,NPSEL=] [
[ [
[ [,MUX=] [,OAET=] [,NAET=] [,OAPQ=] [,NAPQ=] [
[ [
[ [,OAEQ=] [,NAEQ=] [,OAPPLC=] [,NAPPLC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
in an
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
n
n/o
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
or IPA.
- Only in OSI data network can a maximum of sixteen addresses be
specified.
allowed.
AUT AUTHORIZATION
application.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD APPL- 4+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must be created previously.
Notes:
n/o
OTSEL OLD TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Transport
Layer Entity.
OSSEL OLD SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Session Layer
Entity.
OPSEL OLD PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Presentation
Layer Entity.
NTSEL NEW TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This value specifies the new value of the Transport Layer Entity.
If Transport Layer Entity already has an old value the user must
enter the OTSEL parameter.
NSSEL NEW SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the new value of the Session Layer Entity.
If Session Layer Entity already has an old value, the user must
enter the OSSEL parameter.
NPSEL NEW PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the new value of the Presentation Layer
Entity.
If the Presentation Layer Entity already has an old value the user
must enter the OPSEL parameter.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD APPL- 5+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MUX MULTIPLEX SIGN
This parameter specifies if a remote application can be multiplexed
or not.
If this parameter is not entered the value is set to NO. This means
that the application cannot be multiplexed.
Y MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
YES MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
OAET OLD APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
application. It specifies the old value of the identification.
Notes:
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
NAET NEW APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
application. It specifies the new value of the application
entity title.
Notes:
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
OAPQ OLD APPL. PROCESS QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the old value of the application
process qualifier.
NAPQ NEW APPL. PROCESS QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the new value for the
application process qualifier.
A maximum of 14 parameter values can be linked with &
OAEQ OLD APPL. ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the old value for the
application entity qualifier.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD APPL- 6+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAEQ NEW APPL. ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the new value for the
application entity qualifier.
OAPPLC OLD APPLICATION CONTEXT
This parameter specifies the old application context.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered for a local Q3-application.
NAPPLC NEW APPLICATION CONTEXT
This parameter specifies the new application context.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered for a local Q3-application.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD APPL- 7-
ENTR APSNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER APS NAME
This command enters the name and version number of an APS.
The name and version number of an APS appear in the 1st header line
of every output.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR APSNAME : NAME= [,VN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the name segment in the APS version.
VN VERSION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the version number of an APS.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR APSNAME- 1-
INCR APSVN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INCREMENT APS VERSION NUMBER
This command increments the APS version number by 1.
The version number appears in the 1st header line of every output.
Input format
[ [
[ INCR APSVN ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 INCR APSVN- 1-
DISP ARATLPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data
This task displays subscriber-side ATM TC layer performance data.
Output Parameters:
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfFeHecViolCount:
Far-end HEC violation count Interleaved/Fast: Count of
the number of occurrences of a far-end hec-I/hec-F anomaly
since agent reset.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfFeHecTotalCell:
Far-end HEC total cell count Interleaved/Fast: Count of the
total number of cells passed through the cell delineation process
operating on the interleaved/fast data while in the SYNC state
since agent reset.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfFeUserTotalCell:
Far-end User total cell count Interleaved/Fast: Count of the
total number of cells in the interleaved/fast data path delivered
at the V-C (for ATU-C) ou T-R (for ATU-R) interface since agent reset.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr15MinFeHecViolCount:
Far-end HEC violation count on this channel within the current 15 minute interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr15MinFeHecTotalCell:
Far-end HEC total cell count on this channel within the current 15 minute
interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr15MinFeUserTotalCell:
Far-end User total cell count on this channel within the current 15 minute
interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr1DayFeHecViolCount:
Far-end HEC violation count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr1DayFeHecTotalCell:
Far-end HEC total cell count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfCurr1DayFeUserTotalCell:
Far-end User total cell count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfPrev1DayFeHecViolCount:
Far-end HEC violation count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfPrev1DayFeHecTotalCell:
Far-end HEC total cell count on this channel
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfPrev1DayFeUserTotalCell:
Far-end User total cell count on this channel
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARATLPD : EQN= ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARATLPD- 1+
DISP ARATLPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Channel
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARATLPD- 2-
DISP ARATLPDI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Atm Tc Layer Perf. Data Int
This task displays subscriber-side ATM TC layer performance data in 15-minute
intervals.
Output Parameters:
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfHistoryFeHecViolCount:
Count of the number of occurrences of a far-end hec-I/hec-F
anomaly during this interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfHistoryFeHecTotalCell:
Count of the total number of cells passed through the cell
delineation process operating on the interleaved/fast data
while in the SYNC state during this interval.
slmuAdslAtmDataPathPerfHistoryFeUserTotalCell:
Count of the total number of cells in the interleaved/fast data
path delivered at the V-C (for ATU-C) ou T-R (for ATU-R) interface
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARATLPDI : EQN= [,Start=] [,End=] ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Start
End
Channel
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARATLPDI- 1-
DISP ARCHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Channel Attributes
This task displays subscriber-side channel attributes.
Output Parameters:
adslAturChanInterleaveDelay:
Interleave Delay for this channel per
ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d)
-------------
4 milli-seconds,
subsequent input bytes at the interleaver input and
their placement in the bit stream at the interleaver
output. Larger numbers provide greater separation
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit
stream allowing for improved impulse noise immunity at
the expense of payload latency.
In the case where the ifType is Fast(125), use noSuchName.
adslAturChanCurrTxRate:
Actual transmit rate on this channel.
adslAturChanPrevTxRate:
The rate at the time of the last
adslAturRateChangeTrap event. It is also set at
initialization to prevent a trap being sent.
Rate changes less than adslAturThresh(*)RateDown
or less than adslAturThresh(*)RateUp will not
cause a trap or cause this object to change.
(*) == Fast or Interleave.
See AdslLineAlarmConfProfileEntry.
adslAturChanCrcBlockLength:
Indicates the length of the channel data-block
on which the CRC operates.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARCHATT : EQN= ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Channel
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARCHATT- 1-
MOD ARCHIVE
COMPRESS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE
This command comprises two functions:
- Compress one or more files and combine these files to an
archive file.
- Extract all files from an existing archive.
<job number>.
1. MOD ARCHIVE - COMPRESS ENTRY FOR COMPRESSING FILES
2. MOD ARCHIVE - EXTRACT ENTRY FOR EXTRACTING FILES
1. Input format
ENTRY FOR COMPRESSING FILES
This command compresses the files listed in FILE and stores
them in the ARCHIVE file.
Prerequisite:
The archive file must not exist.
[ [
[ MOD ARCHIVE : OPTION= ,ARCHIVE= ,FILE= [,GEN=] [,SSWF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OPTION COMPRESSING OPTION
This parameter specifies which function of the command
has to be performed.
Note:
Valid values are:
- COMPRESS
- EXTRACT
COMPRESS COMPRESS FILE
ARCHIVE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the archive file.
FILE FILE LIST
This parameter specifies a list of up to 10 file names
that will be compressed and combined to the archive
file.
Each file name can specify either a fully qualified
file name or a partly qualified file name with a dot
at the end of the file name.
GEN GENERATION NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the generation the files
belong to.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ARCHIVE- 1+
MOD ARCHIVE
COMPRESS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default:
Files of actual generation and non-generation files.
SSWF SUPPORT SOFTWARE FORMAT
This parameter specifies if an SSWF header will be
added to each of the specified files when a new
archive file is created or if an SSWF header exists
for the files in an archive.
Default:
- NO
NO NO SSWF HEADER TREATMENT
YES INCLUDE SSWF HEADER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ARCHIVE- 2+
MOD ARCHIVE
EXTRACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTRY FOR EXTRACTING FILES
This command extracts all files stored in the specified archive.
The extracted files are not added to a generation.
[ [
[ MOD ARCHIVE : OPTION= ,ARCHIVE= [,SSWF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OPTION COMPRESSING OPTION
This parameter specifies which function of the command
has to be performed.
Note:
Valid values are:
- COMPRESS
- EXTRACT
EXTRACT EXTRACT FILE
ARCHIVE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the archive file.
SSWF SUPPORT SOFTWARE FORMAT
This parameter specifies if an SSWF header will be
added to each of the specified files when a new
archive file is created or if an SSWF header exists
for the files in an archive.
Default:
- NO
NO NO SSWF HEADER TREATMENT
YES INCLUDE SSWF HEADER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ARCHIVE- 3-
DISP ARCHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Channel Perf. Data
This task displays subscriber-side channel performance data.
Output Parameters:
adslAturChanReceivedBlks:
since agent reset.
adslAturChanTransmittedBlks:
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this
channel since agent reset.
adslAturChanCorrectedBlks:
corrected since agent reset. These blocks are passed on
as good data.
adslAturChanUncorrectBlks:
errors since agent reset.
adslAturChanPerfValidIntervals:
adslAturChanIntervalTable Table for which valid data
data is available.
adslAturChanPerfInvalidIntervals:
is available.
adslAturChanPerfCurr15MinTimeElapsed:
adslAturChanPerfCurr15MinReceivedBlks:
adslAturChanPerfCurr15MinTransmittedBlks:
adslAturChanPerfCurr15MinCorrectedBlks:
corrected on this channel within the current 15 minute
interval.
adslAturChanPerfCurr15MinUncorrectBlks:
errors on this channel within the current 15 minute
interval.
adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed:
adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayReceivedBlks:
adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayTransmittedBlks:
adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayCorrectedBlks:
corrected on this channel during the current day as
measured by adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARCHPD- 1+
DISP ARCHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayUncorrectBlks:
errors on this channel during the current day as measured
by adslAturChanPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAturChanPerfPrev1DayMoniSecs:
performance monitoring information can not be collected
occurs.
adslAturChanPerfPrev1DayReceivedBlks:
adslAturChanPerfPrev1DayTransmittedBlks:
adslAturChanPerfPrev1DayCorrectedBlks:
corrected on this channel within the most recent
previous 1 day period.
adslAturChanPerfPrev1DayUncorrectBlks:
errors on this channel within the most recent previous
1 day period.
slmuChanAdslLinePerfCodeViolLineFe:
Code violation-line far-end (CVI-LFE/CVF-LFE): Count of
interleaved/fast data stream febe-i/febe-f anomalies since agent reset.
slmuChanAdslLinePerfCurr15MinCodeViolLineFe:
Count of interleaved/fast data stream febe-i/febe-f anomalies
slmuChanAdslLinePerfCurr1DayCodeViolLineFe:
slmuChanAdslLinePerfPrev1DayCodeViolLineFe:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARCHPD : EQN= ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Channel
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARCHPD- 2+
DISP ARCHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARCHPD- 3-
DISP ARCHPDI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Channel Perf. Data Int.
This task displays subscriber-side channel performance data in 15-minute
intervals.
Output Parameters:
adslAturChanIntervalNumber:
adslAturChanIntervalReceivedBlks:
adslAturChanIntervalTransmittedBlks:
adslAturChanIntervalCorrectedBlks:
adslAturChanIntervalUncorrectBlks:
adslAturChanIntervalValidData:
for this interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARCHPDI : EQN= [,Start=] [,End=] ,Channel= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Start
End
Channel
Channel type.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARCHPDI- 1-
CAN AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This command cancels the local area code (as well as existing
blocks in the digit destination translator)
or the local area code originating from the local area code table.
Prerequisites:
- No linkages from the entered local area code to directory numbers,
code points, bothway trunk groups or test equipments exist.
- No linkages from the entered local area code originating to digit zone
translators, bothway trunk groups or iarstat data exist.
Attention:
- Before canceling the local area code:
- verify that no traffic measurement to the old local area code is
running since traffic measurements may be performed for code belonging
to this local area code,
- verify that no traffic type code point beginning with the same digit
string like the old local area code still exists.
- If a DLU is entered, only the linkage between the local area code and
the DLU will be canceled, not the local area code itself.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [LAC= [ ; [
[ CAN AREACODE : LACOR= [,DLU=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
It consists of the national prefix code
and the local area code.
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code originating.
This parameter specifies the external DLU number.
Notes:
- Up to 32 DLUs can be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN AREACODE- 1-
DISP AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCAL AREA CODE DATA
Furthermore it displays the local area codes originating.
It is possible to define one, several or all local area codes for display.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AREACODE : <LAC= ,LACOR=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
local area code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AREACODE- 1-
ENTR AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCAL AREA CODE
This command creates a local area code or a local area code originating,
i.e. an entry in the table of local area codes.
(Depending on the number of digits entered and EVLAC was preset
or the DNVOL is multiple (see MML command ENTR DNATT),
the blocks are seized in the digit-destination translator and
linked together.)
The entire digit combination of the local area code (i.e. with national
prefix code) and the area code table are transmitted to the
GP (group processor).
The entire digit combination of the local area code originating are
transmitted to the GP (group processor), too.
Prerequisites:
- Before a local area code will be created, the directory number attribute
must be entered (see MML command ENTR DNATT).
- The local area code to be created may be a part of another shorter local
area code.
- The local area code to be created may not be part of another digit chain.
- The number of digits in the local area code must be greater or equal as
the national prefix code length.
- The specified DLU must have been created before.
It isnt possible to assign a DLU to a local area code if this DLU
was assigned to another local area code before.
- The local area code originating to be created may not be part of another
local area code or local area code originating.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [LAC= [ ; [
[ ENTR AREACODE : LACOR= [,DLU=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
local area code.
Notes:
- Up to 50 local area codes can be set up in an exchange.
Notes:
- Up to 48 local area codes originating can be set up in an exchange.
This parameter specifies the external DLU number.
Notes:
- Up to 32 DLUs can be linked.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR AREACODE- 1+
ENTR AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR AREACODE- 2-
MOD AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOCAL AREA CODE
This command modifies the local area code whereby the DLU allocation
remains unchanged.
Alternatively it is possible to modify the local area code originating.
Before command execution, a check is made to see whether the old local
area code (originating also) exists and whether the new one is available.
Prerequisites:
- The number of digits of the local area code has to be greater or equal
than that of the national prefix code.
Attention:
- Before modifying the local area code to a new local area code:
- verify that no traffic measurement to the old area code is running,
since traffic measurements may be performed for code belonging to the
old local area code,
- verify that no traffic type code point beginning with the same digit
string like the old local area code still exists.
- After modifying the local area code by command MOD AREACODE
the command SAVE MET must be executed.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [LAC= [ ; [
[ MOD AREACODE : LACOR= [,NEWLAC=] [,NLACOR=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
It usually consists of the national prefix code
and the local area code.
Notes:
- Up to 48 local area codes originating can be set up in an exchange.
NEWLAC NEW LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the new local area code. It has the same
attributes as the old local area code.
NLACOR NEW LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATG.
This parameter specifies the new local area code originating.
It has the same attributes as the old local area code originating.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AREACODE- 1+
MOD AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AREACODE- 2-
DISP ARPHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Physical Attributes
This task displays subscriber-side physical attributes.
Output Parameters:
adslAturInvSerialNumber:
Vendor specific string that identifies the vendor
equipment.
adslAturInvVendorID:
The vendor ID assigned by T1E1.413 according to its
Annex D.
adslAturInvVersionNumber:
Vendor specific Version number sent by this ATU as
part of the initialization messages.
adslAturCurrSnrMgn:
Noise Margin as seen by this ATU with respect to its
received signal.
adslAturCurrAtn:
Measured difference in the total power transmitted by
the peer ATU and the total power received by this ATU.
adslAturCurrStatus:
Status indicates current state ATUR line. This is a
bit-map of possible conditions. Due to the isolation
of the ATUR when line problems occur, many state
conditions like loss of power, loss of quality signal,
and initialization errors, can not be determined.
While trouble shooting ATUR, also use object,
adslAtucCurrStatus. The various bit positions are:
1 noDefect There no defects on the line
2 lossOfFraming ATUR failure due to not
receiving valid frame
4 lossOfSignal ATUR failure due to not
receiving signal
8 lossOfPower ATUR failure due to loss of power
32 lossOfSignalQuality Loss of Signal Quality is declared
when the Noise Margin falls below
the Minimum Noise Margin, or the
bit-error-rate exceeds 10^-7.
This is intended to supplement ifOperStatus.
adslAturCurrOutputPwr:
Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.
adslAturCurrAttainableRate:
Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate
by the ATU. This value will be equal or greater than
the current line rate.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARPHATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARPHATT- 1+
DISP ARPHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARPHATT- 2-
DISP ARPHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Physical Perf. Data
This task displays subscriber-side physical performance data.
Output Parameters:
adslAturPerfLof:
Count of the number of Loss of Framing failures since
agent reset.
adslAturPerfLos:
Count of the number of Loss of Signal failures since
agent reset.
adslAturPerfLpr:
Count of the number of Loss of Power failures since
agent reset.
adslAturPerfES:
Count of the number of Errored Seconds since agent
reset. The errored second paramter is a count of
adslAturPerfValidIntervals:
adslAturInterval Table for which valid data
that some intervals are unavailable. In this case, this
interval is the maximum interval for which valid data
is available.
adslAturPerfInvalidIntervals:
is available.
adslAturPerfCurr15MinTimeElapsed:
adslAturPerfCurr15MinLofs:
Count of seconds in the current 15 minute interval
when there was Loss of Framing.
adslAturPerfCurr15MinLoss:
there was Loss of Signal.
adslAturPerfCurr15MinLprs:
there was Loss of Power.
adslAturPerfCurr15MinESs:
Count of Errored Seconds in the current 15 minute
interval. The errored second paramter is a count of
adslAturPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed:
adslAturPerfCurr1DayLofs:
Framing during the current day as measured by
adslAturPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAturPerfCurr1DayLoss:
Signal during the current day as measured by
adslAturPerfCurr1DayLprs:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARPHPD- 1+
DISP ARPHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Power during the current day as measured by
adslAturPerfCurr1DayESs:
Count of Errored Seconds during the current day as
measured by adslAturPerfCurr1DayTimeElapsed.
adslAturPerfPrev1DayMoniSecs:
performance monitoring data can not be collected
occurs.
adslAturPerfPrev1DayLofs:
Framing within the most recent previous 1 day period.
adslAturPerfPrev1DayLoss:
Signal within the most recent previous 1 day period.
adslAturPerfPrev1DayLprs:
Power within the most recent previous 1 day period.
adslAturPerfPrev1DayESs:
Count of Errored Seconds within the most recent
previous 1 day period. The errored second paramter is
a count of one-second intervals containing one or more
crc anomolies, or one or more los or sef defects.
slmuAdslLinePerfFecSecLineFe:
Forward Error Correction second-line far-end
(ECS-LFE): Count of 1-second intervals with
one or more ffec anomalies since agent reset.
slmuAdslLinePerfSeverelyErroredSecLineFe:
Severely errored second-line far-end (SES-LFE): Count of 1-second
intervals with 18 or more febe, or one or more far-end los defects,
or one or more rdi defects, or one or more lpr-fe defects since agent reset.
slmuAdslLinePerfUnavailableSecFe:
Unavailable seconds far-end (UAS-LFE): Count of 1-second
intervals for wich the far-end ADSL line is unavailable since agent reset.
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr15MinFecSecLineFe:
Count of 1-second intervals with one or more ffec anomalies
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr15MinSeverelyErroredSecLineFe:
Count of 1-second intervals with 18 or more febe, or one or
more far-end los defects, or one or more rdi defects, or one
or more lpr-fe defects within the current 15 minute interval.
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr15MinUnavailableSecFe:
Count of 1-second intervals for wich the far-end ADSL line is unavailable
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr1DayFecSecLineFe:
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr1DaySeverelyErroredSecLineFe:
or more lpr-fe defects during the current day as measured by
slmuAdslLinePerfCurr1DayUnavailableSecFe:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARPHPD- 2+
DISP ARPHPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
slmuAdslLinePerfPrev1DayFecSecLineFe:
slmuAdslLinePerfPrev1DaySeverelyErroredSecLineFe:
or more lpr-fe defects within the most recent previous 1 day period.
slmuAdslLinePerfPrev1DayUnavailableSecFe:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARPHPD : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARPHPD- 3-
DISP ARPHPDI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Atur Physical Perf. Data Int.
This task displays subscriber-side performance data in 15-minute intervals.
Output Parameters:
adslAturIntervalNumber:
adslAturIntervalLofs:
Framing.
adslAturIntervalLoss:
Signal.
adslAturIntervalLprs:
Power.
adslAturIntervalESs:
Count of Errored Seconds in the interval.
adslAturIntervalValidData:
for this interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ARPHPDI : EQN= [,Start=] [,End=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Start
End
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ARPHPDI- 1-
DISP ASLMIA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ADSL SLMI Attributes
This task displays SLMI attributes of a linecard.
Output Parameters:
SerialNo:
The serial number of the module. Empty if a serial number
is not available.
VersionHwVersion:
A textual description of the version/revision level for
this modules hardware.
VersionFwVersion:
this modules firmware. This FW version will be started after
a reboot of the module.
VersionBackupFwVersion:
this modules backup firmware. The backup FW will be
started if startup with the primary FW is not possible.
VersionDataBackupDate:
The date of the last data backup operation.
VersionMibType:
Identifies the MIBs supported by this type of module. This
flag identifies the type of the module with respect to its
MIB support. The overall type of the network element (NE) can
be constructed by combining flags of all SLMIs belonging to this
NE.
Syntax:
none (0),
phub (1),
slmi-udsl (2),
slmi-adsl (4),
slmi-sdsl (8),
mopc (16),
slmi-vosdsl (32),
mgi (64)
VersionMibLevel:
Identifies the implemented revision level of the MIB.
The initial revision has the value 1. For each functional
enhancement the MIB level is incremented by 1.
VersionDataChanged:
Indicates if the configuration data of the module
has changed since the last backup.
VersionCurrentFw:
the firmware which is currently running.
VersionBootstrapVersion:
this modules boot firmware.
HwEnbLast:
Index of the most recent entry in HW Error Notebook.
SwEnbLast:
Index of the most recent entry in SW Error Notebook.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ASLMIA : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ASLMIA- 1+
DISP ASLMIA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of linecard or packet hub.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ASLMIA- 2-
DISP ASUBLSESS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all Subscriber L2TP Sessions
The task displays all the L2TP sessions associated with the specified subscriber
Output Parameters:
VPI:
Virtual Path Identifier.
VCI:
Virtual Channel Identifier.
AAL5IfIndex:
The AAL5 IfIndex of the subscribers connection.
L2TP Sessions:
Table displaying the L2TP sessions associated with the specified subscriber.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ASUBLSESS : EQN= [,ATMIfIndex=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Physical Equipment Number, the EQN serves to identify a specific
subscriber (Physical Port) and PHUB.
ATMIfIndex
The IfIndex of the subscribers ATM Layer.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ASUBLSESS- 1-
DISP ATCPCONN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all TCP Connections
This task displays the TCP connection table of a packet hub.
Output Parameters:
ConnTable:
A table containing TCP connection-specific information.
ConnState:
The state of this TCP connection.
ConnLocalAddress:
The local IP address for the TCP connection.
ConnLocalPort:
The local port number for the TCP connection.
ConnRemAddress:
The remote IP address for the TCP connection.
ConnRemPort:
The remote port number for the TCP connection.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATCPCONN : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of the packet hub.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATCPCONN- 1-
CONN ATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONNECT ATE
This command connects an ATE to an established test connection.
For the actual test, the ATE is controlled by the following commands:
SEND TRKSIG
SEND MFC
SEND LOOPBACK
MEAS TRKSIG
MEAS MFC
MEAS THVIOL
Prerequisites:
- A trunk workstation (TWS) must be available.
- A test connection must have been set up via a trunk or a connection
must have been made to an outgoing connection.
In order to perform tests, the station at the far end must also be
operated manually. This station could be, for example, an ATE
operated in manual mode by agreement with the communicating station.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [TPNO=[ [
[ CONN ATE : TPDN= [,ATE=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPNO TPC TEST PORT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the workstation test port number
where the test call to be connected to the ATE is currently
connected. It may not be used for remote operation.
TPDN TPC TEST PORT DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the workstation test port
directory number of the test port to which the ATE
should be connected. It must be used for remote
operation.
ATE AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the
automatic test equipment. If the parameter is omitted,
any ATE is connected.
a-b
a: AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT=
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones) for the identification of the automatic
test equipment.
b: AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONN ATE- 1+
CONN ATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Corresponds to the Line Trunk Group Number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONN ATE- 2-
DISCONN ATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISCONNECT ATE
This command disconnects an ATE that was connected using command CONN ATE.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [TPNO=[ [
[ DISCONN ATE : TPDN= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPNO TPC TEST PORT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the workstation test port number of the test
port, to which the ATE is connected. It must be used for local
operation.
TPDN TPC TEST PORT DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the workstation test port directory number of
the test port to which the ATE is connected. It must be used for remote
operation.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISCONN ATE- 1-
DISP ATM25IFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM25 Interface Attributes
This task displays the admin and operational status of the specified
ATM25 interface between Phub and MoPc.
Output Parameters:
AdminStatus:
interfaces start with AdminStatus in the down(2)
the managed system, AdminStatus is then changed to
either the up(1) or testing(3) states (or remains in
the down(2) state).
OperStatus:
can be passed. If AdminStatus is down(2) then
OperStatus should be down(2). If AdminStatus is
changed to up(1) then OperStatus should change to
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATM25IFA : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of an ATM25 interface of the packet hub (e. g.
x-y-z-6100)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATM25IFA- 1-
MOD ATM25IFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM25 Interface Attributes
This task modifies the attributes of the specified ATM25 interface.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ATM25IFA : EQN= [,AdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of an ATM25 interface of the packet hub (e. g.
x-y-z-6100).
ATM25 ports are in the range of 6100-7600.
AdminStatus
The desired state of the ATM25 interface.
Possible states are up(active) and down (inactive, not to be
connected).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATM25IFA- 1-
CR ATMCCONN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create ATM Cross Connect
This task creates an VP-ATM Cross Connect between
two specified ports.
Prerequisites:
- ATM Cell Layer must be present on each side of
cross-connecting ports.
Note:
- Cross connection(one-to-one) is only supported
between DS3/E3 or DS1/E1(IMA) and ADSL/UDSL or SDSL ports.
Input format
[ [
[ CR ATMCCONN : EQN(Prov)= ,EQN(Subs)= ,VPI(Prov)= ,VPI(Subs)= [
[ [
[ ,VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)= [
[ [
[ ,VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)= [
[ [
[ ,VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)= [
[ [
[ ,VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)= [
[ [
[ ,CrossConnectAdminStatus= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN(Prov)
Equipment number of the provider/network
side port(DS3/E3 or DS1/E1) which is to be cross-connected.
EQN(Subs)
Equipment number of the subscriber side
port(ADSL, SDSL, or UDSL) which is to be
cross-connected.
VPI(Prov)
The VPI value of provider/network side
where a cross connect is to be established.
The VPI value cannot exceed the number
supported by the MaxActiveVpiBits and
must be unique for point-to-point
cross connect at the ATM interface on the
provider/network side port.
VPI(Subs)
The VPI value of subscriber side where
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ATMCCONN- 1+
CR ATMCCONN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a cross connect is to be established.
supported by the MaxActiveVpiBits and
must be unique for point-to-point
cross connect at the ATM interface on the
subscriber side port.
VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)
The traffic descriptor index of transmit
direction of VPL on the provider side.
VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)
The traffic descriptor index of receive
VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)
direction of VPL on the subscriber side.
VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)
CrossConnectAdminStatus
The value identifies the desired administrative
status of this bi-directional VP cross connect.
The up and down states indicate that the traffic
flow is enabled and disabled respectively on this
VP cross connect.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ATMCCONN- 2-
DEL ATMCCONN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete ATM Cross Connect
This task deletes an VP-ATM Cross Connect and
associated VPLs between two specified ports.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL ATMCCONN : EQN(Prov)= ,EQN(Subs)= ,VPI(Prov)= ,VPI(Subs)= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN(Prov)
the provider/network side port(DS3/E3 or DS1/E1)
which is to be deleted.
EQN(Subs)
the subscriber side port(ADSL, SDSL and UDSL)
which is to be deleted.
VPI(Prov)
where a cross-connect is to be deleted.
supported by the MaxVPIBits and must be
unique for point-to-point cross-connect at
the ATM interface on the provider/network
side port.
VPI(Subs)
a cross-connect is to be deleted.
supported by the MaxVPIBits and must be
unique for point-to-point cross-connect
at the ATM interface on the subscriber
side port.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL ATMCCONN- 1-
DISP ATMCCONN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Cross Connect
This task displays relevant attributes of VP-ATM Cross Connect
and relevant attributes of cross-connected VPLs between two
specified ports.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATMCCONN : EQN(Prov)= ,EQN(Subs)= ,VPI(Prov)= ,VPI(Subs)= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN(Prov)
which is to be displayed.
EQN(Subs)
which is to be displayed.
VPI(Prov)
where a cross-connect is to be displayed.
VPI(Subs)
a cross-connect is to be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATMCCONN- 1-
MOD ATMCCONN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM Cross Connect
This task modifies ATM Traffic Descriptor index
and Administration Status of a specified VP-ATM
CrossConnect between two specified ports.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ATMCCONN : EQN(Prov)= ,EQN(Subs)= ,VPI(Prov)= ,VPI(Subs)= [
[ [
[ [,VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)=] [
[ [
[ [,VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)=] [
[ [
[ [,VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)=] [
[ [
[ [,VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)=] [
[ [
[ [,CrossConnectAdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN(Prov)
which is to be modified.
EQN(Subs)
which is to be modified.
VPI(Prov)
where a cross-connect is to be modified.
VPI(Subs)
a cross-connect is to be modified.
VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)
VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Prov)
VplTransmitTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)
VplReceiveTrafficDescrIndex(Subs)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATMCCONN- 1+
MOD ATMCCONN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CrossConnectAdminStatus
The value identifies the desired
administrative status of this
bi-directional VP cross-connect.
The up and down states indicate that the
traffic flow is enabled and disabled
respectively on this VP cross-connect.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATMCCONN- 2-
CR ATMCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create ATM Cell Layer
This task creates an ATM Cell Layer on top of a specified port.
Prerequisites:
- Lower layer must be compatible with ATM technology
i.e DS3/E3, ADSL/UDSL, SDSL, DS1/E1 on MoPC, and DS1/E1
on PacketHub.
Input format
[ [
[ CR ATMCL : EQN= ,MaxVpcs= ,MaxVccs= ,MaxActiveVpiBits= [
[ [
[ ,MaxActiveVciBits= [,CellScrambling=] [
[ [
[ [,LoopbackLocationCode=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ADSL, SDSL or UDSL) where ATM Cell Layer is
to be created.
MaxVpcs
The maximum number of VPCs(PVCs and SVCs)
supported at this ATM interface. At the
ATM UNI, the maximum number of VPCs(PVCs
and SVCs)ranges from 0 to 256 only and
must be supported by MaxActiveVpiBits.
MaxVccs
The maximum number of VCCs(PVCs and SVCs)
supported at this ATM interface. It must
be supported by MaxActiveVciBits.
MaxActiveVpiBits
The maximum number of active Vpi bits
configured for use at the ATM interface.
At the ATM UNI, the maximum number of
active Vpi bits, configured for use, ranges:
- from 0 to 8 if EQN is from provider side port
- from 0 to 6 if EQN is from subscriber side port.
MaxActiveVciBits
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ATMCL- 1+
CR ATMCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The maximum number of active Vci bits
configured for use at this ATM interface.
CellScrambling
This is used by the management system to activate and
deactivate the ATM cell scrambling function. When the
value of this attribute is TRUE, cell scrambling on
the interface is activated. This attribute shall be
set only for interfaces that support the deactivation
of cell scrambling. The ATM Forum UNI specification
requires cell scrambling for ATM/SONET interfaces but
allows cell scrambling to be controlled(i.e., turned on
and off) for ATM/DS3 interfaces. Otherwise it is ignored.
LoopbackLocationCode
Specifies the code that shall exist in incoming OAM
Loopback cells that are to be looped back at this
interface. A value of zero shall indicate that the
management system has not set any loopback location
code for this interface. Therefore, zero should not
be used as the actual loopback location code for any
interface. This shall be present only for table
entries that represent an actual ATM cell layer
interface(i.e., the IfType is not none).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ATMCL- 2-
DEL ATMCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete ATM Cell Layer
This task deletes an ATM Cell Layer on top of a specified port.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL ATMCL : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the port
(DS1/E1, DS3/E3, ADSL, SDSL or UDSL)
where ATM Cell Layer is to be deleted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL ATMCL- 1-
DISP ATMCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Cell Layer
This task displays attributes of an ATM Cell Layer
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATMCL : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
(DS3/E3, DS1/E1 on PacketHub, ADSL,
SDSL or UDSL) where the ATM Cell
Layer exist.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATMCL- 1-
MOD ATMCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM Cell Layer
This task modifies values of an ATM Cell Layer
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ATMCL : EQN= [,MaxVpcs=] [,MaxVccs=] [,MaxActiveVpiBits=] [
[ [
[ [,MaxActiveVciBits=] [,CellScrambling=] [
[ [
[ [,LoopbackLocationCode=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
where the ATM Cell Layer exist.
MaxVpcs
The maximum number of VPCs (PVCs and SVCs)
supported at this ATM interface.
At the ATM UNI, the maximum number of VPCs
(PVCs and SVCs) ranges from 0 to 256 only and
must be supported by MaxActiveVpiBits.
MaxVccs
The maximum number of VCCs (PVCs and SVCs)
supported at this ATM interface. It must
be supported by MaxActiveVciBits.
MaxActiveVpiBits
The maximum number of active VPI bits
configured for use at the ATM interface.
At the ATM UNI, the maximum number of
active VPI bits configured for use ranges
from 0 to 8 only.
MaxActiveVciBits
The maximum number of active VCI bits
configured for use at this ATM interface.
CellScrambling
This is used by the management system to
activate and deactivate the ATM cell
scrambling function. When the value of
this attribute is TRUE, cell scrambling on
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATMCL- 1+
MOD ATMCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the interface is activated.
This attribute shall be set only for
interfaces that support the deactivation
of cell scrambling.
The ATM Forum UNI specification requires
cell scrambling for ATM/SONET interfaces
but allows cell scrambling to be controlled
(i.e., turned on and off) for ATM/DS3
interfaces. Otherwise it is ignored.
LoopbackLocationCode
Specifies the code that shall exist in
incoming OAM Loopback cells that are to
be looped back at this interface. A value
of zero shall indicate that the management
system has not set any loopback location
code for this interface. Therefore, zero
should not be used as the actual loopback
location code for any interface.
This object shall be present only for
table entries that represent an actual ATM
cell layer interface (i.e., the atmfM4IfType
is not none).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATMCL- 2-
DISP ATMCLIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Cell Layer Interface Attr.
This task displays interface attributes of
an ATM Cell Layer on top of a specified port.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATMCLIFA : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATMCLIFA- 1-
MOD ATMCLIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM Cell Layer Interface Attr.
This task modifies interface values of an ATM Cell Layer
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ATMCLIFA : EQN= [,AdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
AdminStatus
When a managed system
initializes, all interfaces start with
AdminStatus in the down state. As a result of
either explicit management action or per
configuration information retained by the
managed system, AdminStatus is then changed
to the up(or remains
in the down state).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATMCLIFA- 1-
CR ATMTRDES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create ATM Traffic Descriptor
This task creates ATM Traffic Descriptor
on a specified Packet hub.
Note:
- ParamIndex 1 is pre-defined as READ_ONLY.
Input format
[ [
[ CR ATMTRDES : EQN= ,ParamIndex= ,Type= [,Param1=] [,Param2=] [
[ [
[ [,Param3=] ,QoSClass= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Any equipment number of the Packet hub where
ATM Traffic Descriptor is to be created.
ParamIndex
The index value of the traffic descriptor
to be created.
Type
The value identifies the type of ATM traffic descriptor.
The type may indicate no traffic descriptor or traffic
descriptor with one or more parameters. These parameters
are specified as a parameter vector, in the corresponding
instances of the objects: Param1..Param3
The type must be one of these 3 choices:
1. atmNoTrafficDescriptor - Param1 is not used(ignored).
This traffic descriptor type can be used for best effort traffic.
2. atmNoClpNoScr - no Sustained Cell Rate.
Param1: CLP=0+1 peak cell rate in cells per second.
3. atmClpNoTaggingMcr - CLP with Minimum Cell Rate and no Tagging.
Param1: peak cell rate in cells per second for CLP=0+1 traffic.
Param2: CDVT in tenths of microseconds.
Param3: minimum cell rate in cells per second.
Param1
The first parameter of the ATM traffic descriptor
used according to the value of Type. It is ignored if not used.
Param2
The second parameter of the ATM traffic descriptor
Param3
The third parameter of the ATM traffic descriptor
QoSClass
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ATMTRDES- 1+
CR ATMTRDES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The value of this object identifies the QoS Class.
Four Service classes have been specified in the
ATM Forum UNI Specification:
Service Class A: Constant bit rate video and Circuit emulation
Currently ONLY Best Effort and Class A are supported at this UNI.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ATMTRDES- 2-
DEL ATMTRDES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete ATM Traffic Descriptor
This task deletes an ATM Traffic Descriptor
Note:
- This operation can be denied if the specified
traffic descriptor(by the ParamIndex) is still
in use by another resources such as active ATM
Virtual Path (VP)Cross Connect.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL ATMTRDES : EQN= ,ParamIndex= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Any equipment number of the Packet hub
where the ATM Traffic Descriptor exist.
ParamIndex
The index value of traffic descriptor to be deleted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL ATMTRDES- 1-
DISP ATMTRDES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Traffic Descriptor
This task displays ATM Traffic Descriptor
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATMTRDES : EQN= ,ParamIndex= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ATM Traffic Descriptor is to be displayed.
ParamIndex
to be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATMTRDES- 1-
MOD ATMTRDES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM Traffic Descriptor
This task modifies an ATM Traffic Descriptor
Note:
- This operation can be denied if the specified
traffic descriptor(by the ParamIndex) is still
in use by another resources such as active ATM
Virtual Path (VP)Cross Connect.
- To modify a Type, associated parameters(Param1..Param3)
must be supplied together when applicable.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ATMTRDES : EQN= ,ParamIndex= [,Type=] [,Param1=] [,Param2=] [
[ [
[ [,Param3=] [,QoSClass=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
ATM Traffic Descriptor exist.
ParamIndex
to be modified.
Type
The value identifies the type of ATM traffic descriptor.
The type may indicate no traffic descriptor or traffic
descriptor with one or more parameters. These parameters
are specified as a parameter vector, in the corresponding
instances of the objects: Param1..Param3
The type must be one of these 3 choices:
1. atmNoTrafficDescriptor - Param1 is not used(ignored).
2. atmNoClpNoScr - no Sustained Cell Rate.
Param1: CLP=0+1 peak cell rate in cells per second.
3. atmClpNoTaggingMcr - CLP with Minimum Cell Rate and no Tagging.
Param1: peak cell rate in cells per second for CLP=0+1 traffic.
Param2: CDVT in tenths of microseconds.
Param3: minimum cell rate in cells per second.
Param1
The first parameter of the ATM traffic descriptor
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATMTRDES- 1+
MOD ATMTRDES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Param2
The second parameter of the ATM traffic descriptor
Param3
The third parameter of the ATM traffic descriptor
QoSClass
The value of this object identifies the QoS Class.
Four Service classes have been specified in the
ATM Forum UNI Specification:
Service Class A: Constant bit rate video and Circuit emulation
Service Class B: Variable bit rate video/audio
Service Class C: Connection-oriented data
Service Class D: Connectionless data
Currently ONLY Best Effort and Class A are supported at this UNI.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ATMTRDES- 2-
DISP ATUNDOM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all Tunnel Domains
This task displays the names of all the provisioned tunnel domains
Output Parameters:
DomainName:
This parameter may be:
1)The name which identifies the domain
or
2)The DNIS (Dialed Number Information String).
DomainList:
List the domains, found in brasDomainTable for the defined
domain name, that are L2TP domains.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATUNDOM : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATUNDOM- 1-
DISP ATUNNEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all Tunnels
Display All the Tunnels provisioned on this PHUB
Output Parameters:
DomainName:
This parameter may be:
1)The name which identifies the domain
or
2)The DNIS (Dialed Number Information String).
LocalAddress :
The address of the local endpoint of the tunnel, or 0.0.0.0
if the device is free to choose any of its addresses at
tunnel establishment time.
RemoteAddress :
The address of the remote endpoint of the tunnel.
LnsIndex:
Index of this LNS. A maximum of 10 LNS per domain are configurable.
ConfigID:
An identifier used to distinguish between multiple tunnels
of the same encapsulation method, with the same endpoints.
TunnelData:
Table displaying all the Tunnels provisioned on the specified PHUB.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ATUNNEL : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Physical Equipment Number, the EQN serves to identify a specific PHUB.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ATUNNEL- 1-
ALLOW AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLOW AUDIT
This command allows an audit to be started that was previously inhibited by
the command INHIB AUDIT.
Input format
[ [
[ ALLOW AUDIT : NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the audit. The names of all audits known to
the system can be called up with the command DISP AUDIT.
The names of the common audits are:
ABILREG Billing Register Audit
The idle band linkage of all free billing
registers or the billing register to
channel register linkage of all active
billing registers is tested.
CHANREG Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers are checked for each LTG:
- call status
. highest value
. validity
- call status in the channel register as compared
with associated channel register data
with the status of the port involved in this
connection (channel).
Exception: DSB ports (OSS).
- Busy status of the relevant channel in the
GS table in the CP (module PASDA)
- Specific channel register contents (CTE_ACTIVE,
PATH_DATA)
- Announcement table contents for a busy
announcement line and speech channel as compared
with the channel register contents on the A-side.
- specific channel register contents (OCCUPIED_BY
ISDN, CALL_DIVERSION_FOR_ISDN_PBX, OCCUPIED_BY
B_SIDE, IARSTAT_ACTIVE)
To clear a channel register inconsistency, the
interprocessor message MSG_ABORT_CHANNEL is sent to
the Call Processing Process.
CHKSUMVA Interprocessor checksums audit.
The CALL PROCESSING checksum and the LTG checksum
are compared. Errors are corrected.
CPBUFFER Call Processing Buffer Audit
The idle band linkage of all free call processing
buffers is checked, or the call processing buffer
to channel register linkage of all active call
processing buffers.
EQSTA Equipment Status Audit
A check is made to determine whether the
transient operating states of the peripheral
units are valid and whether the transient
and semipermanent operating states are identical.
In the case of DE5 the SW operating states
are compared with the HW operating states.
IPCHASTA Interprocessor Channel Register Audit
The speech channel states in the GP and CP
are checked for consistency, i.e. the channel
states in the GP should be identical with
those in the CP.
IPTRUSTA Interprocessor Trunk Status Audit
The transient states of ports in the CP
are checked for consistency:
- port states are compared
- port states in the GP are compared with port
states in the CP.
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ALLOW AUDIT- 1+
ALLOW AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to the IPTRUSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency the interprocessor
message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to the call processing
process.
IDLLSTAU Idle List Audit
The idle band linkage of trunk groups,
announcement groups and PBX groups is checked.
NWCONF Switching network configuration audit.
The TSG and SSG data are checked for consistency
with the relevant administration and safeguarding
data. Errors are corrected.
NWMAP Switching Network Map Audit.
The consistency between path data and switching
network busy states is checked. Errors are
corrected.
IPPRTSTA Interprocessor Port Status Audit
The transient port states of DLU-Ports and
V5IF-Ports are checked:
- CP port states are compared
- GP port states are compared with CP port states
to the IPPRTSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to
the call processing process.
CCS7AU Common Channel Signaling No.7 Audit
The port states of TUP and ISUP trunks lines
are checked:
Blocks which have been set or cancelled
(NAC_SYNCHRO and NUC_SEIZED), are compared
with DPC blocking.
processor message MSG_ABORT_CCS7_PORT
is sent to the call processing process.
OCHANREG OSS Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers of an OSS LTGB are
checked with respect to the port state of an
associated DSB port.
OCPBUFF OSS Call Processing Buffer Audit
The CPBs in the OSS-specific states
CPB_QUEUED and CPB_TRUNK_QUEUEING, and their
associated data, are checked.
COPRTSTA Conference Port Audit
The conference port data within the CP are checked.
NUCAUDIT Nailed Up Connection Audit
The active nailed-up connections (NUC) are checked for
their connection status during operation. In the event
of an error, the faulty NUC is through-connected
again. The NUC database data serve as a reference
for this purpose.
MMBUAUD MSB/MAC output buffer audit:
The buffers used to store the systems responses to
administration requests originated via MSB/MAC are
tested, if the linkage to the job registers is valid.
Buffers with invalid linkage are initialized and
inserted in the list of free buffers.
CDRSUTR RSU Trunk and Channel Register Audit
The consistency between the transient RSU trunk data
and the Channel Register data for trunk indices is
checked. In the event of an error, the RSU trunk is
idled and placed back into the trunk idle list.
RSUTRKST RSU Trunk Status Audit
and the CP Safeguarding data for high-speed links
is checked against the RSUC high-speed link data.
In the event of an error, the transient RSU trunk
data and the CP Safeguarding data will be
updated by Communication Maintenance.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ALLOW AUDIT- 2-
DISP AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUDIT
This command displays the state of currently running audits and the names
of inhibited audits. All audits known to the system are displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AUDIT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AUDIT- 1-
INHIB AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INHIBIT AUDIT
This command inhibits audits thereby preventing their execution.
Prerequisites:
- The audit name must be known to the system.
- The audit must not already be inhibited.
Input format
[ [
[ INHIB AUDIT : NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
- call status
. highest value
. validity
PATH_DATA)
processing buffers.
those in the CP.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 INHIB AUDIT- 1+
INHIB AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
states in the CP.
process.
corrected.
are checked:
with DPC blocking.
OCHANREG OSS Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers of an OSS LTGB are
checked with respect to the port state of an
associated DSB port.
OCPBUFF OSS Call Processing Buffer Audit
The CPBs in the OSS-specific states
CPB_QUEUED and CPB_TRUNK_QUEUEING, and their
associated data, are checked.
for this purpose.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 INHIB AUDIT- 2-
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START AUDIT
This command starts an audit. Audits are programs with a low priority which
run periodically to check whether the code and data areas are correct.
Detected errors are corrected automatically. The audits IPTRUSTA and
IPPRTSTA stop correcting if they detect that previous corrections have
been unsuccessful.
Prerequisites:
- The name of the audit must be known to the system.
- The audit must not be inhibited.
- The audit must have a demand attribute.
- The audit state table must not be dynamically expanded during
execution of the command.
- The audit must not already be running.
- The requested processor must not be seized by an audit or a
fault detection.
- Only one project-specific audit may run at one time.
- Only five demand audits (audits that can be demanded via MML command
or via a user process) may run at one time.
- Sufficient resources must be available to allow the audit to be
started dynamically.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ START AUDIT : NAME= [,UNIT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
- call status
. highest value
. validity
PATH_DATA)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START AUDIT- 1+
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
processing buffers.
those in the CP.
states in the CP.
process.
corrected.
are checked:
with DPC blocking.
for this purpose.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START AUDIT- 2+
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the equipment unit where the audit is to
be performed.
Compatibilities:
- If NAME=CHANREG, then entry of the parameter UNIT is mandatory,
parameter values LTG and MBUL are allowed.
- If NAME=CDRSUTR, then entry of the parameter UNIT is mandatory,
parameter value RSU is allowed.
- If NAME=ABILREG, CPBUFFER, EQSTA, NWMAP, or NWCONF,then parameter
UNIT is illegal.
- If NAME=CHKSUMVA, IPCHASTA, IPPRTSTA, or IPTRUSTA, then LTG
must be entered for parameter value a in parameter UNIT.
- If a= LTG, then units b and c refer to:
b: LTGSET number =
0 for SN15LTG,SN63LTG
0, 1 for SN126LTG
0...3 for SN252LTG
0...7 for SN504LTG
0...11 for SN756LTG
0...15 for SN1008LTG
c: LTG number =
1...15 for SN15LTG
1...63 for SN63LTG .. SN2016LTG
- If a= MBUL, then units b and c refer to:
b: System side =
0,1
c: MBUL number =
0 for SN15LTG,SN63LTG
0, 1 for SN126LTG
0...3 for SN252LTG
0...7 for SN504LTG
0...11 for SN756LTG
- If a= RSU, then units b and c refer to:
b: RSU number =
1...286
c: Not applicable
a-b[-c]
a: EQUIPMENT UNIT
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT : LTG
RSU REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START AUDIT- 3+
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TIME STAGE GROUP NUMBER / SYSTEM SIDE / RSU NUMBER=
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER / MBUL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START AUDIT- 4-
DISP AUDPLIS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display all UDP Listeners
Displays the UDP listener table of a packet hub. For each UDP listener, its
local IP address and local port number are displayed.
Output Parameters:
udpTable:
A table containing UDP listener information.
LocalAddress:
The local IP address for this UDP listener. In
the case of a UDP listener which is willing to
accept datagrams for any IP interface associated
with the node, the value 0.0.0.0 is used.
LocalPort:
The local port number for this UDP listener.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AUDPLIS : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the packet hub
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AUDPLIS- 1-
CAN AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION
This command cancels authorization classes from an authorization and
cancels entire authorizations from the authorization table.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN AUT : AUT= [,AUTCL=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUT CP AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies an authorization.
An authorization contains a number of authorization classes.
AUTCL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This parameter specifies an authorization class.
An authorization class contains a number of command authorizations.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN AUT- 1-
DISP AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION
This command displays the authorization classes associated with
the authorizations on the terminal.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AUT : AUT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AUT- 1-
ENTR AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTHORIZATION
This command enters new authorizations with their associated
authorization classes and allows authorization classes to be
entered in an existing authorization.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR AUT : AUT= ,AUTCL= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR AUT- 1-
CAN AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command cancels command authorizations for MML commands from a
particular authorization class.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN AUTCL : AUTCL= ,CMDCOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies command to be entered into or deleted
from an authorization class. CMDCOD must be a valid command name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN AUTCL- 1-
DISP AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command displays the command authorizations defined
in single or in all authorization classes.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AUTCL : AUTCL= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AUTCL- 1-
ENTR AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command enters a desired authorization class for the MML command
authorizations.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR AUTCL : AUTCL= ,CMDCOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies command to be entered into or deleted
from an authorization class. CMDCOD must be a valid command name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR AUTCL- 1-
DISP AUTHDEFCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Authentication Defaults CP
This task displays the global parameters of Q3 Authentication:
Default authent. and Denial response.
Note: These settings are only relevant for system access via Q3-interface.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP AUTHDEFCP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AUTHDEFCP- 1-
MOD AUTHDEFCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Authentication Defaults CP
This task modifies the global parameters of Q3 Authentication.
It is used to change the default authentication access and to specify the
response which shall be returned for unauthorized authentication attempts.
Note: The settings are only relevant for system access via Q3-interface. For file
transfer there is no default access possible.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD AUTHDEFCP : [defaultAuth=] [,denialResp=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
defaultAuth
This parameter specifies the default authentication access
for initiators, which are not known at the authentication
domain:
Input values:
allow : System access allowed.
abortAssociation : abort Q3 association request.
denyWithResponse : reject Q3 association request.
denialResp
This parameter defines the response to be returned for
identified initiators if the authentication check
should fail.
Input values:
abortAssociation : abort Q3 association request.
denyWithResponse : reject Q3 association request.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD AUTHDEFCP- 1-
STAT BA
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DATA OF BASIC ACCESS
This command displays all current call-related data for the specified
basic access.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing ISDN.
1. STAT BA - DN DN ORIENTED
2. STAT BA - EQN EQN ORIENTED
1. Input format
DN ORIENTED
Input format for directory-number-oriented output.
[ [
[ STAT BA : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more
than one local network connected to an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber.
Up to ten parameters can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT BA- 1+
STAT BA
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQN ORIENTED
Input format for equipment-number-oriented output.
[ [
[ STAT BA : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the port connected to
the subscriber or PBX line to be displayed.
a-b-c[-d]
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT / V5INTERFACE=
- DLU number (10,20,30...2550 for a DLU port)
- V5IF number (6000,6001,..8999 for a V5 port)
b: SHELF=
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU port, 0 for a V5 port)
c: MODULE=
- Module number (0..15 for a DLU port, 0..20 for a V5 port)
d: CIRCUIT / V5PORT=
- Circuit number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..15 for a DLU16 port,
0..99 for a V5 port)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT BA- 2-
DISP BAFAULT
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS FAULT
This command displays the last occured ISDN basic access faults.
<job number>.
1. DISP BAFAULT - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DISP BAFAULT - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
Path input format for display basic access fault, directory number oriented.
[ [
[ DISP BAFAULT : DN= ,TYPE= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber or PBX line.
Maximum 12 digits in the range 1...9,A...F hexadecimal
value is specified.
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the last occurred basic access line fault.
BER BIT ERROR RATE
Bit error frequency of transmission
(10exp-3/10exp-6).
LAY1 LAYER 1 FAULT
LAY2 LAYER 2 FAULT
Loss or deactivation of Layer2 of lines with
lineattribut "Lay2hold".
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
Maximum 6 digits in the range 1...9 value is specified.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BAFAULT- 1+
DISP BAFAULT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Path input format for display basic access fault, digital line unit
number oriented.
[ [
[ DISP BAFAULT : EQN= ,TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR DLU/V5=
For DLU port: a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V51IF port: a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
b: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR SHELF=
For DLU port: a shelf in the range 0...7
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: 0
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR MODULE/TH V52 PORT=
For DLU port: a module number in the range 0...15
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: THv5port number in the range 00...20
unit values.
d: EQUIP. NUMBER FOR CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range 0...7 for DLU8
0...15 for DLU16
For V51IF port: a v5port number in the range 0...31
For V52IF port: TUv5port number in the range 00...99
Note: v52port is limited to the number 2047.
unit values.
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the last occurred basic access line fault.
BER BIT ERROR RATE
Bit error frequency of transmission
(10exp-3/10exp-6).
LAY1 LAYER 1 FAULT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BAFAULT- 2+
DISP BAFAULT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAY2 LAYER 2 FAULT
Loss or deactivation of Layer2 of lines with
lineattribut "Lay2hold".
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BAFAULT- 3-
COM BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COMMUTE BASE PROCESSORS
This command initiates a master-spare commutation. Prior to command
execution, the base processor spare (which will be the future base
processor master) is tested.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ COM BAP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COM BAP- 1-
CONF BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE BASE PROCESSOR
This command configures the BAP spare.
A configuration attempt of the BAP master to MBL is rejected.
Notes:
- The configuration from SPR to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to SPR is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF BAP : [BAP=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BAP BASE PROCESSOR NUMBER
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
ACT ACTIVE
SPR ACTIVE SPARE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows the base processor to be diagnosed before
configuring it from MBL or UNA to ACT.
Notes:
- Interim diagnostic messages are displayed if SUP=NO and
DIAG=YES is entered.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF BAP- 1-
DIAG BAP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE BASE PROCESSOR
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a base processor.
Prerequisites:
- The base processor must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
1. DIAG BAP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG BAP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a base processor.
The diagnosis includes a BCMY interface test.
[ [
[ DIAG BAP : [BAP=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG BAP- 1+
DIAG BAP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a base
processor. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY interface test.
[ [
[ DIAG BAP : [BAP=] ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG BAP- 2-
TEST BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST BASE PROCESSOR
This command tests the BAP spare.
Prerequisites:
- The base processor must be SPR.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST BAP : [BAP=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST BAP- 1-
ACT BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE MEAS.
This command activates a performance measurement for a
basic access.
1. ACT BAPERF - DN ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. ACT BAPERF - EQN ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
Directory-number-oriented input format.
[ [
[ ACT BAPERF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,SCHED=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number.
Notes:
- For PBX lines the line service number must be
specified.
- Not allowed for V5 ports.
Processing will be rejected with "DLU NOT EXISTING".
SCHED TIME SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the time schedule that determines
when the performance measurement will be activated
(and deactivated).
A time schedule can be entered by the mml command ENTR TSTSCHED.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BAPERF- 1+
ACT BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Equipment-number-oriented input format.
[ [
[ ACT BAPERF : DLU= ,LC= [,SCHED=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digital line unit.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit.
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
b: MODULE=
c: CIRCUIT=
SCHED TIME SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the time schedule that determines
when the performance measurement will be activated
(and deactivated).
A time schedule can be entered by the mml command ENTR TSTSCHED.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BAPERF- 2-
DACT BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE BA PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
This command deactivates a performance measurement for a
basic access.
1. DACT BAPERF - DN ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DACT BAPERF - EQN ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
[ [
[ DACT BAPERF : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT BAPERF- 1+
DACT BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
[ [
[ DACT BAPERF : DLU= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
b: MODULE=
c: CIRCUIT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT BAPERF- 2-
DISP BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS PERFORMANCE DATA
This command displays performance measurement data for a basic access:
- EFS = error free seconds:
Seconds without frame errors
- ES = errored seconds:
Seconds with at least one frame error
- SES = severely errored seconds:
Seconds with at least 32 frame errors. This
corresponds to a bit error rate (BER) > 10exp-3
- DM = degraded minutes:
60 consecutive seconds (without SES and UAS) with
at least 2 frame errors. This corresponds to
a bit error rate (BER) > 10exp-6
- UAS = unavailable seconds:
Timespan, beginning with the first of at least 10
consecutive seconds with a bit error rate (BER) >
10exp-3, and ending with the last second with a
BER > 10exp-3, which is followed by at least 10
consecutive seconds with BER < 10exp-3
- FRAME ERRORS = frame errors:
Number of frame errors that occurred within the
measuring interval
1. DISP BAPERF - DN ENTRY WITH DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DISP BAPERF - EQN ENTRY WITH EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
[ [
[ DISP BAPERF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM= [,ENDDAT= [
[ [
[ ,ENDTIM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display starts.
Format: <YY>-<MM>-<DD>
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BAPERF- 1+
DISP BAPERF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display starts.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display ends.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display ends.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BAPERF- 2+
DISP BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
[ [
[ DISP BAPERF : DLU= ,LC= ,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM= [,ENDDAT= [
[ [
[ ,ENDTIM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digital line unit number.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Format: <SHELF>-<MODULE>-<CIRCUIT>
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
b: MODULE=
c: CIRCUIT=
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display starts.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display starts.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BAPERF- 3+
DISP BAPERF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the date on which the display ends.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME OF RETRIEVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the display ends.
Format: <HH>-<MM>
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BAPERF- 4-
CONF BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command configures a bus to common memory.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to ACT is considered dangerous.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF BCMY : [BCMY=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCMY BUS FOR COMMON MEMORY
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis before configuration to ACT.
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF BCMY- 1-
DIAG BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command initiates a diagnosis for a bus to common memory.
The diagnosis includes interface tests of the active processors and the
common memory. Repeated diagnosis is not possible.
Prerequisites:
- The bus to common memory must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG BCMY : [BCMY=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG BCMY- 1-
TEST BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command tests a bus to common memory.
Prerequisites:
- Both B:CMYs must be ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST BCMY : [BCMY=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, both B:CMYs are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST BCMY- 1-
ACT BERM
LTGLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT
This command starts a Bit Error Rate Measurement, the purpose of BERM
is to provide limits for bringing into service, and limits for
maintenance of digital paths, sections, and line sections in order
to achieve the performance objective given for series G recommendations.
This measurement is performed on national and international trunks,
using Test Equipment ATE:TM (application ATEBDIR as Directory and
ATEBRESP as Responder).
The measurement can also be performed on RSU interface or sidedoor
trunks. The measurement is not possible if the trunk is a busy High
Speed Link.
<job number>.
1. ACT BERM - LTGLC LTG AND LC ORIENTED
2. ACT BERM - RSU RSU LINK NUMBER AND LC ORIENTED
3. ACT BERM - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER ORIENTED
4. ACT BERM - TGNOCIC TRUNK GROUP AND CIC ORIENTED
1. Input format
LTG AND LC ORIENTED
[ [
[ ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,LTG= ,LC= [,MEASTIM=] [
[ [
[ [,BERPATT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RSPDN RESPONDER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the responder directory number.
To test an RSU interface or sidedoor trunk the responder
must be a test equipment of the type digital loop back.
This digital loop back responder must be created on an
LTG, that is connected to the RTI (Remote Timeslot
Interchange), where the RSU trunk is connected to.
The trunk group number TGNO of the test equipment
must uniquely identify the digital loopback responder
on one RTI. I.e. there must not exist any other test
equipment with the same trunk group number created
neither on a different RTI nor on the host.
MEASTYP MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Measurement.
M1 MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
Type of measurement:
End to End unidirectional.
End to End bidirectional.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 1+
ACT BERM
LTGLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Digital Loopback.
a-b
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this
unit represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB)
or the Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND
and upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter specifies:
- the Line Trunk Unit (LTU) and the channel number for trunks which
are connected to a Line Trunk Group (LTG)
- the channel number for trunks which are connected to a Remote
Switching Unit (RSU)
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT / CHANNEL=
For trunks connected to a LTG only the value 0..7 is allowed.
b: CHANNEL=
MEASTIM MEASUREMENT TIME
This parameter specifies the Bit Error Ratio Measurement time.
If this parameter is not given, the measurement is assumed to be
continuous.
Corresponds to the duration of Bit Error Ratio Measurements, in
minuts (1...1440).
BERPATT BIT PATTERN
This parameter specifies the bit pattern for Bit Error Rate
Measurement.
If this parameter is not given, the measurement is executed using a
pseudo-random bit pattern.
0...11111111, range of binary numbers
This parameter specifies the bit pattern for the Bit Error Rate
Measurement.
If this parameter are no entry, the measurement is executed
with pseudo-random bit pattern.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 2+
ACT BERM
RSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
RSU LINK NUMBER AND LC ORIENTED
This input format is only to be used to identify remote switching unit
interface or sidedoor trunks.
[ [
[ ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,RSULINK= ,LC= [,MEASTIM=] [
[ [
[ [,BERPATT=] [,ATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Digital Loopback.
RSULINK REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT LINK
LC LINE CONNECTION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 3+
ACT BERM
RSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
continuous.
minuts (1...1440).
BERPATT BIT PATTERN
Measurement.
Measurement.
automatic test equipment.
This parameter is only allowed for tests of an RSU
sidedoor trunk.
To test an RSU interface trunk, an ATE connected to
the host is selected. For all other types of trunk
In the case that the RSU sidedoor trunk is connected
to two RTI (Remote Timeslot Interchange) belonging
to the same HTI (Home Timeslot Interchange) the
parameter may be omitted. In that case an ATE
connected to the host will be selected.
The ATE must not be connected to the same RTI as
the responder.
a-b
test equipment.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 4+
ACT BERM
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER ORIENTED
[ [
[ ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,TGNO= [,MEASTIM=] [,BERPATT=] [
[ [
[ [,LNO=] [,ATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Digital Loopback.
continuous.
minuts (1...1440).
BERPATT BIT PATTERN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 5+
ACT BERM
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Measurement.
Measurement.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number.
sidedoor trunk.
the responder.
a-b
test equipment.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 6+
ACT BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRUNK GROUP AND CIC ORIENTED
[ [
[ ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,TGNO= [,MEASTIM=] [,BERPATT=] [
[ [
[ [,CIC=] [,ATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Digital Loopback.
continuous.
minuts (1...1440).
BERPATT BIT PATTERN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 7+
ACT BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Measurement.
Measurement.
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies to the circuit identification code for CCS7
trunks. Must be specified together with TGNO.
a-b
a: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
Corresponds to <PCM system>
b: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
Corresponds to <channel>
sidedoor trunk.
the responder.
a-b
test equipment.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT BERM- 8-
DISP BERM
ACTMEAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT
This command displays bit error rate data for 64kb/s paths.
Specifying the incoming trunk under measurement and date limits the
operator get the following counters:
SES, ES, MT, EFS, BS, LS, BLER, BER, AS and UAS.
A list of the active BER measurements in the exchange can be obtained
using parameter ACTMEAS.
The measurement can also be performed on RSU interface or sidedoor
trunks. The measurement is not possible if the trunk is a busy High
Speed Link.
<job number>.
1. DISP BERM - ACTMEAS LIST ACTIVE MEASUREMENTS
2. DISP BERM - LTG LTG-LC ORIENTED
3. DISP BERM - RSU RSU LINK NUMBER AND LC ORIENTED
4. DISP BERM - TGNOCIC TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND CIC ORI
5. DISP BERM - TGNOLNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND LNO ORI
1. Input format
LIST ACTIVE MEASUREMENTS
Input format: parameter for display of the currently active
measurements in the exchange ACTMEAS.
[ [
[ DISP BERM : ACTMEAS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACTMEAS LIST ACTIVE MEASUREMENTS
This parameter displays the currently active measurements
in the exchange.
Y YES
YES YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 1+
DISP BERM
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTG-LC ORIENTED
Input format: parameter for identifying the trunk under measurement
LTG, a start date/time: BEGDAT, BEGTIM and optionally an
end date/time.
[ [
[ DISP BERM : LTG= ,LC= [,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM=] [,ENDDAT=] [
[ [
[ [,ENDTIM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG number of the incoming trunk
under measurement.
a-b
Corresponds to <LTG SET no>
Corresponds to <LTG no>
LC LINE CONNECTION
this parameter accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a:LINE TRUNK UNIT= 0..7 range of decimal numbers.
b:CHANNEL= 0..31 range of decimal numbers.
a
a:CHANNEL= 0..31 range of decimal numbers.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT / CHANNEL=
b: CHANNEL=
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the beginning date of the time interval for
which the operator wants the results to be displayed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 2+
DISP BERM
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the beginning time of the time interval
for which the operator wants the results to be displayed.
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the time interval for which
the operator wants the results to be displayed.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the time interval for which
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 3+
DISP BERM
RSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RSU LINK NUMBER AND LC ORIENTED
Input format: parameter for identifying the trunk under measurement
RSU, a start date/time: BEGDAT, BEGTIM and optionally an
end date/time.
[ [
[ DISP BERM : RSULINK= ,LC= [,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM=] [,ENDDAT=] [
[ [
[ [,ENDTIM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RSULINK REMOTE SWITCHING UNIT LINK
LC LINE CONNECTION
a-b
a:LINE TRUNK UNIT= 0..7 range of decimal numbers.
b:CHANNEL= 0..31 range of decimal numbers.
a
a:CHANNEL= 0..31 range of decimal numbers.
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 4+
DISP BERM
RSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 5+
DISP BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND CIC ORI
Input format: parameters TGNO and CIC to identify the trunk under
measurement; BEGDAT and BEGTIM to specify the date from which the
operator wants the results to be displayed, and optionally an end
time/date.
[ [
[ DISP BERM : TGNO= [,CIC=] [,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM=] [,ENDDAT=] [
[ [
[ [,ENDTIM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk under
measurement. It is entered with LNO to completely specify the trunk.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for CCS7
trunks. Must be specified together with TGNO.
a-b
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 6+
DISP BERM
TGNOCIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 7+
DISP BERM
TGNOLNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER AND LNO ORI
Input format: parameters TGNO and LNO to identify the trunk under
measurement; BEGDAT and BEGTIM to specify the date from which the
operator wants the results to be displayed, and optionally an end
time/date.
[ [
[ DISP BERM : TGNO= [,LNO=] [,BEGDAT= ,BEGTIM=] [,ENDDAT=] [
[ [
[ [,ENDTIM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk under
measurement. It is entered with LNO to completely specify the trunk.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the trunk under
measurement.
BEGDAT BEGIN DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDAT END DATE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 8+
DISP BERM
TGNOLNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIM END TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BERM- 9-
DISP BRASCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display BRAS Configuration
This task displays the global BRAS configuration and statistics data.
Ouput parameters:
OwnHostName:
The own hostname of this B-RAS. This name is
used for tunnel setup
DefaultSubscrAuthen:
Default subscriber authentication method. Can be
either none, PAP or CHAP. This default can be
redefined for each domain separatly.
CurrentSubscrConnectPvc:
current number of PVC for subscriber connections
CurrentSubscrConnectSvc:
current number of SVC for subscriber connections
CurrentDomainConnectPvc:
current number of PVC for domain connections
CurrentDomainConnectSvc:
current number of SVC for domain connections
CurrentDomainConnectIp:
current number of IP connections to domain
CurrentPppSessions:
current number of PPP sessions
CurrentDomainsDefined:
Number of domains currently defined
CurrentDomainsConnectServed:
Number of domains currently served
NumberSubscriberConnections:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BRASCONF- 1+
DISP BRASCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Number of subscriber connections
Input format
[ [
[ DISP BRASCONF : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP BRASCONF- 2-
MOD BRASCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify BRAS Configuration
This task modifies the global BRAS configuration data.
Note:
If any PPP Subscriber Layer is created, its status must be down to
modify BRAS configuration data.
The status of PPP Subscriber Layers can be changed with Tasks:
- Modify All PPP Subscriber State
- Modify PPP Subscriber State.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD BRASCONF : EQN= [,OwnHostName=] [,DefaultSubscrAuthen=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
OwnHostName
The own hostname of this B-RAS. This name is
used for tunnel setup
DefaultSubscrAuthen
Default subscriber authentication method.Possible values are pap and
chap,
or none for remote authentication.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD BRASCONF- 1-
TRANS BUFFER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRANSFER INDIV. CALL DATA BUFFER TO DISK
This command initiates the immediate transfer of the contents of the
(not necessarily full) data buffer for the specified feature type
from the CP memory to the corresponding disk file.
Prerequisites :
- The specified feature type must be active (advisory and command
rejection).
- The corresponding file is not full (advisory and command rejection).
- The CP memory data buffer is not in overflow (advisory and command
rejection).
Input format
[ [
[ TRANS BUFFER : TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
MOB METER OBSERVATION
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
MAL MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
FIR FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
DNOB DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
TOB TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
TST TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT
ERS ERROR STATISTICS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS BUFFER- 1-
DISP C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 DISCARDED MSUS
This command displays the last 20 MSUs which were discarded due to
routing data error.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel
signaling according to signaling system no.7 (CCS7).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7DCDMSU : UNIT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT PROCESSOR UNIT
This parameter specifies the processor(s) for which the discarded MSUs
will be displayed.
PUSIMP PU:SIMP
MHSIMP MH:SIMP
CPI CPI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7DCDMSU- 1-
REC C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REC CCS7 DISCARDED MESSAGE SIGNAL UNITS
This command starts the recording of the number of MSUs discarded
due to routing errors and outputs the data to the OMT
or MDD.
The name of the measurement file is output to the OMT
if the traffic data are output to disk.
Notes:
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output with
immediate start.
- Data can be lost in case of reloading of CCNP.
- If a counter cannot be activated, no data from this counter can be received.
The user will be informed. After successful repetition of counter
activation, the first data will be marked as insecure.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format
[ [
[ REC C7DCDMSU : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file.
The start and the finish message include the
name of the file in which the traffic data are
available for postprocessing.
b: OUTPUT MODE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to a single measurement file.
The output mode SINGLE is only permitted in
connection with output unit = MDD.
output to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
files are prepared and created at the begin of
measurement. Daily files will be overwritten in
the following week on the same weekday.
The output mode DAILY is only permitted in
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7DCDMSU- 1+
REC C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may be
linked with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not
permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be at the latest one month after
the actual date.
- The last BEG date must be at the latest one year after
the actual date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped with
STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the last BEG day,
it will be finished.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one begin date
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7DCDMSU- 2+
REC C7DCDMSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological order
may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be at least
30 minutes apart except for measurements over midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV = 23-00-01-00
is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two interval
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval times
only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval IV
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped during the last
interval IV, it will be finished.
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF BEGIN DATE=
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN DATE=
c: HOUR OF TERMINATION DATE=
d: MINUTE OF TERMINATION DATE=
are to be recorded.
Notes:
Default: Measurement every day during the measurement
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7DCDMSU- 3-
DISP C7DMDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 DISC. MSU
This command is used to display the entered
threshold and the number of discarded MSUs
which shall be reported.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7DMDAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7DMDAT- 1-
MOD C7DMDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 DISCARDED MSU DATA
This command is used to modify the threshold and
the number of discarded MSUs to be displayed
due to routing data errors.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD C7DMDAT : <THR= ,NUMBMSU=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
THR THRESHOLD CCS7 DISC. MSU DATA
This parameter is used to specify the threshold
for discarded MSUs to be displayed.
Initial value : 20 MSUS
NUMBMSU NUMBER OF DISC. MSU DATA
This parameter is used to specify the number of
discarded MSUs to be displayed.
Initial value : 8 MSUS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7DMDAT- 1-
CAN C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command cancels a destination point within the CCS7 network either in
the own area or in the foreign area.
Input format for cancelling a destination point in the own area.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network indicator = NATO Units= 7-7
Network indicator = INATO Units= 7-7
Network indicator = NAT1 Units= 7-7
Network indicator = INAT1 Units= 7-7
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
unit values.
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7DP- 1-
CONF C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command configures a destination point in the own area to one
of the operating states: active (ACT) or administrative blocked
(ABL). When a destination point is created, it is automatically
configured to the operating state administrative blocked (ABL).
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery the command
must be reentered to prevent data inconsistency.
Notes:
- The configuring of a destination point to operating state ABL
prevents message signal units (MSUs) being transmitted to the
destination point by the users. It does not automatically prevent
MSUs being transmitted from the destination point. Bidirectional
message flow can only be terminated when both signaling points at
the end of the route set (destination point and own signaling point)
are mutually configured to ABL.
- If a non-adjacent signaling point within the own area is configured
to ABL: The own signaling point must not be used as a signaling
transfer point to the blocked signaling point (from the view of a
third signaling point).
Input format
[ [
[ CONF C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,OST= [,UNCOND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF C7DP- 1+
CONF C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
ABL ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL
N DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
NO DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
Y CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
YES CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF C7DP- 2-
CR C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command creates a destination point within the CCS7 network either in
the own area or in the foreign area. A destination point can either be
in the own area or in the foreign area.
Own area:
The route set describes all defined possibilities for reaching the
destination point. This can be via one or several routes. A route is a
link set leading either directly to the destination point or to an
adjacent signaling point via which the destination point can be reached.
The route set is created with one to eight possible route directions
(link sets). The first route direction in this set will be assigned the
highest routing priority.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
Input format for creating a destination point in the own area.
Prerequisites:
The link set of the route set must be created.
Input format
[ [
[ CR C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,PRD= ,LSK= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7DP- 1+
CR C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
PRD POSSIBLE ROUTE DIRECTION
LSK LOAD SHARING KEY FOR RT DIRECT
This parameter specifies the loadsharing key of the route set.
It indicates a method used to determine whether the load is
distributed to one (LSK = 0) or two (LSK > 0) signaling
link sets.
If distributed to two signaling link sets the LSK = 1,2,3 or 4
additionally defines which load portions are distributed to which one
of the two signaling link sets.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7DP- 2-
DISP C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command displays the following data of created destination
to route set associations of the home area:
- the destination point code
- the network indicator of this destination point
- the operating state (semipermanent) of the destination point
- the effective state (transient) of the destination point
Possible effects:
- If all destination points are requested, the display may be
terminated by the STOP DISP command.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= [,OST=] [,EST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
unit values.
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
unit values.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
OST OPERATING STATE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7DP- 1+
DISP C7DP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE
ABL ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED
EST EFFECTIVE STATE OF THE DPC
ACT DPC IS AVAILABLE
UNA DPC IS UNAVAILABLE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7DP- 2-
MOD C7DP
LSK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 DESTINATION POINT
This command either interchanges the priority orders of the two link
sets LSNAM1 and LSNAM2 in the route set of the specified
destination point or modifies the loadsharing key of the route set.
Possible effects:
must be reentered to prevent data base inconsistency.
1. MOD C7DP - LSK CHANGE LOADSHARING KEY
2. MOD C7DP - PRIORITY CHANGE PRIORITY OF TWO LINK SETS
1. Input format
CHANGE LOADSHARING KEY
Change of the loadsharing key:
The loadsharing key is used to define the traffic distribution
between the current routes.
The loadsharing key must have a value between zero and four.
If the loadsharing key has the value zero, no loadsharing will
be carried out between the routes and the possible route direction
with highest priority will be used.
If the loadsharing key has a value between one and four, loadsharing
will be carried out between the two available possible route
directions with highest priority. The different values effect the
distribution of the traffic within the route directions.
[ [
[ MOD C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSK= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7DP- 1+
MOD C7DP
LSK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSK LOAD SHARING KEY FOR RT DIRECT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7DP- 2+
MOD C7DP
PRIORITY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CHANGE PRIORITY OF TWO LINK SETS
Interchange of the priorities:
The new priority of LSNAM1 must be defined explicitely
by LSPRI1.
The highest priority is one, the lowest is eight.
[ [
[ MOD C7DP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSNAM1= ,LSNAM2= ,LSPRI1= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSNAM1 FIRST LINK SET TO BE SWAPPED
LSNAM2 SECOND LINK SET TO BE SWAPPED
LSPRI1 PRIO.OF 1ST ENTERED LINK SET
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7DP- 3+
MOD C7DP
PRIORITY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7DP- 4-
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 GRADE OF SERVICE
This command starts the recording of a grade-of-service
measurement for CCS7 links and outputs the following data
to the OMT or MDD:
- Duration of link in service
- Number of signaling units in error
- Duration of link unavailability
(any reason)
(link failure)
(local blocking)
(remote blocking)
(local and remote blocking)
A maximum of 8 commands can be entered at any one time.
Notes:
immediate start.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more than one
measurement at any one time.
- If the last measured object is canceled, the job will terminate itself.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [LSNAM= [ [
[ REC C7GOS : LINKNO= [,LCOD=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the link set name.
One single link set name may be selected.
Alternatively, up to 16 link set names may be linked
with & or X may be input if output unit is MDD.
LSNAM = X will be handled like LINKNO = X.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7GOS- 1+
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the link number associated with the link.
Up to 16 link numbers may be linked with &.
Alternatively, it is possible to select one interval of
link numbers specified with && or X if output unit
is MDD.
If an interval is entered, at least one link has to exist
within the interval.
LCOD LINK CODE
This parameter specifies the link within the link set.
It is only permitted in combination with a single
link set name.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7GOS- 2+
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7GOS- 3+
REC C7GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7GOS- 4-
STAT C7L1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCS7 LEVEL1 COMPONENTS
This command displays the status of the components building the
CCS7 level 1.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [UNIT=[ [
[ STAT C7L1 : PORT= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT TYPE AND NUMBER OF UNIT
a-b
a: TYPE OF UNIT
SILT SILT - NAME OF DEVICE
b: NUMBER OF UNIT=
unit values.
PORT NUMBER OF PORT
a-b-c[-d]
a: NUMBER OF TSG=
unit values.
b: NUMBER OF LTG=
unit values.
c: NUMBER OF LTU=
unit values.
d: NUMBER OF CHANNEL=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT C7L1- 1-
CAN C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 LINK
This command cancels a link which is a communication path between two
adjacent signaling points.
Prerequisites:
- The link must be configured to the operating state BL1.
Possible effects:
- If the command is aborted by recovery, it must be reentered
to prevent data base inconsistancy.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7LINK- 1-
CONF C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CCS7 LINK
This command configures a signaling link to one of the three operating
states active (ACT), inactive (BL1) or blocked (BL2).
Prerequisites:
- If OST=BL2 or OST=ACT the adjacent destination point must be created
for the associated link set.
Possible effects:
- The signaling link becomes active only after activation
has been initiated at both signaling points concerned, and if
the initialization tests and the link test have been
successfully completed.
must be reentered to prevent data base inconsistency.
Notes:
- The last signaling link of a link set should only be configured to BL1, if
the link set is not used as a route for any destination point.
- A link manually inactivated or blocked can only be activated by the operator.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ,OST= [,UNCOND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
activated
BL1 BLOCKED 1
deactivated:
in this state the signaling link is an inactive
member of the link set, and no messages are
transmitted
BL2 BLOCKED 2
blocked:
in this state the link will still carry
LSSU-messages (link status signal unit) to
indicate processor outage to the adjacent
destination point, but no MSU (message signal
unit) will be carried
N DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
NO DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF C7LINK- 1+
CONF C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
YES CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF C7LINK- 2-
CR C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 LINK
This command creates a signaling link, which is a communication path between
two adjacent signaling points, and assigns it to a specific link set.
Prerequisites:
- The associated link set must be created.
- The associated multiplexer must be created.
- For links connected to the switching network by the SILTs with SILT
numbers from 56 to 127 or 184 to 255 the according multiplexer
master B (MUXMB) must be created with the command CR MUXMB.
- The SILT associated with the link must not be assigned to another link.
Possible effects:
Notes:
- Up to 16 links may be assigned to one link set.
- For the SILTs with SILT numbers 0 and 128 the link type must be
an analog one.
- After creation the link set is inactive.
- The link still will not carry traffic until it has been activated using
the command CONF C7LINK.
Input format
[ [
[ CR C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ,SILTNO= ,LTYPE= [,LINKNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
SILTNO SILT NUMBER
LTYPE LINK TYPE
D64BWM DIGIT/64 K/BASIC/TAB:WM
D64PWM DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM
D64PWMA DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM ALTER.
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7LINK- 1-
DISP C7LINK
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK
This command displays the created signaling links, which are used
as communication paths between adjacent signaling points.
The following data is displayed:
- the name of the link set to which the link belongs
- the link code, the link number, the SILT number and the link type
- the operating (semipermanent) state of the link
- the inhibiting state of the link
- the effective (transient) state of the link
- the reason for the effective (transient) state of the link
The display can be selective by use of optional input parameters.
1. DISP C7LINK - ALL ALL LINKS
2. DISP C7LINK - LCOD LINK CODE
3. DISP C7LINK - LINKNO LINK NUMBER
4. DISP C7LINK - SILTNO SILT NUMBER
5. DISP C7LINK - STATUS LINK STATUS
1. Input format
ALL LINKS
This input format permits the display of all created signaling links
which have to be selected by
-LSNO = X or
-LSNAM = X or
-LINKNO = X or
-SILTNO = X.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,EST=[[ [
[ DISP C7LINK : [IST=] [,NETIND=] [,LTYPE=] [,OST=[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [
[ [,SILTNO=[ [
[ [,LINKNO=[ [
[ ,LSNAM= ; [
[ [,LSNO= [ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IST INHIBITING STATE
BTH BOTH INHIBITED
LOC LOCAL INHIBITED
NOT NOT INHIBITED
REM REMOTE INHIBITED
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LTYPE LINK TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LINK- 1+
DISP C7LINK
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
D64BWM DIGIT/64 K/BASIC/TAB:WM
D64PWM DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM
D64PWMA DIGIT/64 K/PCR /TAB:WM ALTER.
EST EFFECTIVE STATE
ACT ACTIVE
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
OST OPERATING STATUS
ACT ACTIVE
BL1 BLOCKED 1
BL2 BLOCKED 2
SILTNO SILT NUMBER
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LSNO LINK SET NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LINK- 2+
DISP C7LINK
LCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINK CODE
which are selected either by a specific link set name or a specific
link set number and optional by link code.
[ [
[ [
[ [,LSNAM=[ [
[ DISP C7LINK : [LCOD=] ,LSNO= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCOD LINK CODE
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LINK- 3+
DISP C7LINK
LINKNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LINK NUMBER
This input format permits the display of a specific signaling link which
is selected by link number.
[ [
[ DISP C7LINK : LINKNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LINK- 4+
DISP C7LINK
SILTNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SILT NUMBER
This input format permits the display of a specific signaling link which
is selected by silt number.
[ [
[ DISP C7LINK : SILTNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SILTNO SILT NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LINK- 5+
DISP C7LINK
STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
LINK STATUS
which are selected either by a specific link set name or specific link
set number and optional by inhibiting state or either by the effective
state or operating status.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,EST=[[ [,LSNAM=[ [
[ DISP C7LINK : [IST=] [,OST=[ ,LSNO= ; [
[ [[ [[ [ [ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IST INHIBITING STATE
BTH BOTH INHIBITED
LOC LOCAL INHIBITED
NOT NOT INHIBITED
REM REMOTE INHIBITED
EST EFFECTIVE STATE
ACT ACTIVE
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
ACT ACTIVE
BL1 BLOCKED 1
BL2 BLOCKED 2
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LINK- 6-
MOD C7LINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 SIGNALING LINK
This command modifies the inhibiting state of a signaling link. The
inhibiting state of a signaling link is a transient state which exists in
parallel to the (transient) effective state and the (semipermanent)
operating state of a link. An inhibited link is blocked for user generated
traffic.
Prerequisites:
- The link must be created.
Notes:
- Inhibiting/uninhibiting can be denied by the remote signaling point.
Possible effect:
- After recovery, inhibited links are automatically uninhibited.
- In emergency cases, e.g. if a destination would become unavailable,
an inhibited link will be automatically uninhibited.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD C7LINK : LSNAM= ,LCOD= ,INH= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
LCOD LINK CODE
INH INHIBITING INDICATOR
N DO NOT INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
NO DO NOT INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
Y INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
YES INHIBIT SIGNALING LINK
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7LINK- 1-
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 LINK LOAD
This command starts the recording of the signaling link load
measurement and outputs the following data to the OMT
or MDD:
- Number of SIF/SIO octets transmitted
- Number of SIF/SIO octets received
- Number of MSUs transmitted
- Number of MSUs received
- Number of retransmitted octets
- Number of discarded MSUs due to link congestion
- Number of cases of link congestion
- Duration of link congestion
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [LSNAM= [ [
[ REC C7LLOAD : LINKNO= [,LCOD=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
One single link set name may be selected.
Alternatively, up to 16 link set names may be linked
with & or X may be input if output unit is MDD.
LSNAM = X will be handled like LINKNO = X.
LINKNO LINK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the link number associated with the link.
Up to 16 link numbers may be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LLOAD- 1+
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
link numbers specified with && or X if output unit
is MDD.
LCOD LINK CODE
This parameter specifies the link within the link set.
It is only permitted in combination with a single
link set name.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LLOAD- 2+
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LLOAD- 3+
REC C7LLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LLOAD- 4-
CAN C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 LINK SET
This command cancels a link set, which is a set of up to 16 links used
for signaling traffic between adjacent signaling points.
Prerequisites :
- The destination point of this link set must be canceled.
- This link set may not be in use as a possible route direction.
- All links belonging to this signaling link set must be canceled.
Possible effects:
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7LSET : LSNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7LSET- 1-
CR C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 LINK SET
This command creates a link set, which is a set of up to 16 links used for
signaling traffic between adjacent signaling points. Only one link set may be
created to an adjacent signaling point. It also defines whether the complete
alarming of the CCS7 link set shall be suppressed or not.
The alarm units in the state UNA are administered with the command
ENTR ALPRIO.
The alarm type, the loadsharing key and the switch for the periodic link
test can be modified if necessary with the command MOD C7LSET.
Prerequisites :
- The own signaling point must be created.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must be
re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
Input format
[ [
[ CR C7LSET : LSNAM= ,SPC= ,NETIND= ,LSK= [,LSNO=] [,ALTYPE=] [
[ [
[ [,PERLTEST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
SPC SIGNALING POINT CODE
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SPC-UNIT1=
b: SPC-UNIT2=
c: SPC-UNIT3=
d: SPC-UNIT4=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7LSET- 1+
CR C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSK LOAD SHARING KEY FOR LINK SET
This parameter specifies the load sharing key of the link set. The
load sharing key indicates a method used to determine the maximum
number of active links in the link set over which the load is
distributed.
The load is distributed to one (LSK = 0), to two (LSK = 1, 2, 4, 8),
to four (LSK = 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12), to eight (LSK = 7, 11, 13, 14)
or sixteen (LSK = 15) signaling links.
If distributed to two, four or eight signaling links, the LSK
additionally defines which load portions are distributed to which
of the signaling links.
This parameter specifies the location of the link set in the database.
If the parameter is not specified, the next free location will be
assigned to the link set.
ALTYPE ALARM TYPE
This parameter specifies the alarm type which is used to alarm the
state NAC of the link set.
It indicates whether the link set will be alarmed with the
standard critical alarm or the exeption major alarm or if all alarms
(NAC and UNA) will be suppressed.
CCSLSNAC CCS7 LINK SET NAC (STANDARD)
CCSLSNEX CCS7 LINK SET NAC (EXCEPTION)
CCSLSNAL CCS7 LINK SET NOT ALARMED
Default: CCSLSNAC
PERLTEST PERIODIC LINK TEST
This parameter specifies periodic link test functionality.
In case PERLTEST is switched on, a periodic link test will
be done for all links in the specified link set.
OFF PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH OFF
ON PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH ON
Default: OFF
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7LSET- 2-
DISP C7LSET
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 LINK SET
This command displays the following data for the created link sets,
which are sets of up to 16 links used for CCS7 signaling between
signaling points:
- the link set name
- the signaling point code to which this link set leads
- the network indicator belonging to this signaling point code
- the link set number
- the load sharing key of the link set
- the operating state (semipermanent) of the link set
- the inhibiting indicator (transient) of the link set
- the effective state (transient) of the link set
- the alarm adjustment of the link set
- the periodic signaling link test state
If a certain link set is specified, the following additional data for
the links in the link set are displayed:
- the name of the link set to which the link belongs
- the link code, link number, SILT number and link type
- the operating state (semipermanent) of the link
- the inhibiting state (transient) of the links
- the effective state (transient) of the link
- the reason for the effective state (transient) of the link.
If one or more links in the link set are active the following additional
data is displayed:
- the load allocation of the links within the link set.
1. DISP C7LSET - ALL ALL LINK SETS
2. DISP C7LSET - NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
3. DISP C7LSET - ONE ONE SPECIFIC LINK SET
1. Input format
ALL LINK SETS
This input format permits the display of all created signaling link sets
which are selected by
-LSNO = X or
-LSNAM = X.
[ [
[ [
[ [LSNO= [ [
[ DISP C7LSET : LSNAM= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
The input value from the help text should be taken
into consideration.
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
into consideration.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LSET- 1+
DISP C7LSET
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LSET- 2+
DISP C7LSET
NETIND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NETWORK INDICATOR
This input format permits the display of all created signaling link sets
in a network specified by network indicator.
[ [
[ DISP C7LSET : NETIND= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LSET- 3+
DISP C7LSET
ONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ONE SPECIFIC LINK SET
This input format permits the display of one specific signaling link set
which is selected by link set name or link set number.
If FORMAT = STD is entered the display of the load allocation
of the links within the link set will be suppressed.
[ [
[ [
[ [LSNAM=[ [
[ DISP C7LSET : LSNO= [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
into consideration.
into consideration.
FORMAT CONTROL PARAM. FOR OUTPUT
Default value: LONG
LONG LONG FORMAT OF OUTPUT
STD STANDARD (SHORT OUTPUT)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LSET- 4-
MOD C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 LINK SET
This command modifies either the alarm type or the loadsharing key
or the periodic link test functionality of a CCS7 link set.
1. Modification of the alarm type
the alarm type is used to alarm the state NAC of the link set.
It also modifies the adjustment whether the complete alarming of
the CCS7 link set shall be suppressed or not. The alarm units in
the state UNA are administered with the command ENTR ALPRIO.
Note: the command will only be accepted if the entered CCS7 link
set is currently not alarmed.
2. Modification of the loadsharing key
The loadsharing key is used to distribute the traffic between
the links of the link set. The possible values are between
zero (only one link is used) and 15 (all links will be used).
Note: if the execution of this command is aborted by recovery,
the command must be reentered to prevent data base
inconsistency.
3. Modification of the periodic link test parameter
The periodic link test functionality can be modified with help
of his parameter.
Note: if the execution of this command is aborted by recovery,
the command must be reentered to prevent data base
inconsistency.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,ALTYPE= [ [
[ MOD C7LSET : LSNAM= ,LSK= ; [
[ [,PERLTEST=[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
ALTYPE ALARM TYPE
This parameter specifies the alarm type which is used to alarm the
state NAC of the link set. It indicates whether the link set will
be alarmed with the standard critical alarm or the exeption major
alarm or if all alarms (NAC and UNA) will be suppressed.
CCSLSNAC CCS7 LINK SET NAC (STANDARD)
CCSLSNEX CCS7 LINK SET NAC (EXCEPTION)
CCSLSNAL CCS7 LINK SET NOT ALARMED
Default: CCSLSNAC
LSK LOADSHARING KEY
This parameter specifies the loadsharing key of the CCS7 link set.
It is used to distribute the traffic among the links of the link set.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7LSET- 1+
MOD C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PERLTEST PERIODIC LINK TEST
This parameter specifies periodic link test functionality.
OFF PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH OFF
ON PERIODIC LINK TEST SWITCH ON
Default: OFF
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7LSET- 2-
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 LINK SET
This command starts the recording of the signaling link set
unavailability and outputs the following data to the OMT
or MDD:
- Number of cases of link set unavailability
- Duration of link set unavailability
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [LSNAM= [ [
[ REC C7LSET : LSETNO= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
Up to 16 link set names may be linked with &.
Alternatively, it is possible to input X if output
unit is MDD.
LSNAM = X will be handled like LSETNO = X.
LSETNO LSET NUMBER
This parameter specifies the link set number associated with
the link.
Up to 16 link set numbers may be linked with &.
link set numbers specified with && or X if output unit
is MDD.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LSET- 1+
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LSET- 2+
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LSET- 3+
REC C7LSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7LSET- 4-
CAN C7LSETDP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR.OF DPC
This command cancels a signaling link set from the signaling route
set for a specified signaling destination point. If the signaling
link set to be canceled is the last in the route set, the command is
rejected.
Possible effects:
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7LSETDP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7LSETDP- 1-
DISP C7LSETDP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP.FOR A GIVEN CCS7 LINK SET ALL DPCS
This command displays the following data:
- the name of the link set
- the network indicator to which the link set belongs
- the destination point code of the signaling point at the far
end of the link set (adjacent destination point)
In addition, the display shows the following data for destination
points which have the specified link set as a possible route
direction:
- the destination point code itself
- the operating (semipermanent) state of the destination point
- the effective (transient) state of the destination point
- an indication whether this link set is the current route to the
destination point
- an indication whether this destination point is reachable
exclusively (ONLY AVAILABLE) via the specified link set or not.
Notes:
- If the parameter value YES is input for the (optional) parameter
ONLYAV, only these destination points are displayed which are
exclusively reachable via the specified link set. If the parameter
value NO is input or if the parameter is omitted, all destination
points are displayed which have the specified link set as possible
route direction.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [LSNAM=[ [
[ DISP C7LSETDP : LSNO= [,ONLYAV=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the table location in level 3 for the
link set.
ONLYAV ONLY AVAIL.LINK SET TO DESTINA
NO DEST.NOT ONLY AVAIL. BY LSET
All the destination points are to be displayed
that can be reached by this link set.
YES DEST.ONLY AVAIL.BY LSET
Only those destination points are to be displayed
that can exclusively be reached by this link set.
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7LSETDP- 1-
ENTR C7LSETDP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESCR. OF DPC
This command inserts one new route direction (link set) at a specific
priority order in the route set for the destination point.
A route set may contain one to eight link sets. If there is already a link
set with the same priority as entered, this command will decrement the
priority of this and the following route directions (link sets) (lower
priority means higher number).
Possible effects:
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR C7LSETDP : DPC= ,NETIND= ,LSNAM= ,LSPRIO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
unit values.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR C7LSETDP- 1+
ENTR C7LSETDP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LSPRIO PRIORITY OF ENTERED LINK SET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR C7LSETDP- 2-
REC C7MSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REC CCS7 MESSAGE SIGNAL UNIT
This command starts the recording of the number of incoming,
outgoing and transit MSUs (including discarded MSUs) and outputs the
data to the OMT or MDD.
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
[ [
[ REC C7MSU : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7MSU- 1+
REC C7MSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7MSU- 2+
REC C7MSU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7MSU- 3-
DISP C7NOTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 NOTIFICATION
This command displays the CCS7 network elements, for which summarized
alarms (elements transient in NAC) or summarized indications (elements
transient in MBL) had occurred at the SYP.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7NOTI ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7NOTI- 1-
CAN C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command cancels the CCS7 own signaling point.
Prerequisites:
- Before the own signaling point is cancelled, all associated signaling
elements must be deactivated and cancelled.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data base inconsistency.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SPC-UNIT1=
b: SPC-UNIT2=
c: SPC-UNIT3=
d: SPC-UNIT4=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7OP- 1-
CR C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command creates the own CCS7 signaling point, which provides the EWSD with
the means to identify itself within the signaling network.
Prerequisites: The project specific SPC structure of the own signaling point
must be defined.
Note: The STPI, SDL and SENDTFP of the own signaling point may be
modified during active operation.
Possible effect: If communication with the LTG fails the command execution is
indicated as only partially executed.
If execution of this command is aborted by recovery the command
must be intered again to prevent data inconsistancy.
Input format
[ [
[ CR C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= ,STPI= [,SDL=] [,SPCSIZE=] [
[ [
[ [,SENDTFP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SPC-UNIT 1=
b: SPC-UNIT 2=
c: SPC-UNIT 3=
d: SPC-UNIT 4=
This parameter specifies the network of the own signaling point.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
STPI SIGN. TRANSFER POINT INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the function of the own signaling point
within the CCS7 network.
SP SIGNALING POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions of
a signaling end point.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7OP- 1+
CR C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STP SIGNALING TRANSFER POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions of
a signaling transfer point and a signaling end
point.
SDL SUPPORTED DATA LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum length (in bytes) of a message
signaling unit that is supported by the message transfer part.
62,272, range of decimal numbers
Default: 272
SPCSIZE SIGNALING POINT CODE SIZE
This parameter specifies the network protocol version, the size of
the signaling point code and the information about a mapping mechanism
for the given network.
The values NORMAL and EXTENDED indicate that for ITU standard
14- or 24-Bit format is used. The difference between NORMAL and
EXTENDED is the number of possibilities in the numbering plan.
NORMAL NORMAL SPC SIZE
EXTENDED EXTENDED SPC SIZE
Default: NORMAL
SENDTFP SEND TRANSFER PROHIBITED
This parameter specifies the send transfer prohibited (TFP)
functionality.
If it is not possible to route a message and the SENDTFP is switched
off, the message will be discarded and the counter for routing data
error will be increased.
In case SENDTFP is switched on, a TFP message will be sent
additionally to the adjacent siganling point, by which the discarded
message was sent.
OFF DO NOT SEND TFP MESSAGE
ON SEND TFP MESSAGE
Default: ON
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7OP- 2-
DISP C7OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command displays the following data of all created own signaling
points:
- the own signaling point code
- the network indicator belonging to this signaling point code
- an indicator showing whether this signaling point is a signaling end
point or a signaling transfer point
- the supported data length
- the SPC size
- transfer prohibited message sending status.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7OP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7OP- 1-
MOD C7OP
NETWORK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 OWN SIGNALING POINT
This command modifies the following data of the own CCS7 signaling point, which
provides the EWSD with the means to identify within the signaling network:
- signaling transfer point indicator STPI
- supported data length SDL
- send transfer prohibited switch SENDTFP
Prerequisites: The project specific SPC structure of the own signaling point
must be defined.
Possible effect: If communication with the LTG fails the command execution is
indicated as only partially executed.
If execution of this command is aborted by recovery the command
must be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
1. MOD C7OP - NETWORK NETWORK ATTRIBUTE
2. MOD C7OP - OP OWN SIGNALING POINT ATTRIBUTE
1. Input format
NETWORK ATTRIBUTE
Input format for modify the send transfer prohibited switch SENDTFP.
[ [
[ MOD C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= ,SENDTFP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SPC-UNIT 1=
b: SPC-UNIT 2=
c: SPC-UNIT 3=
d: SPC-UNIT 4=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7OP- 1+
MOD C7OP
NETWORK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SENDTFP SEND TRANSFER PROHIBITED
This parameter specifies the new send transfer prohibited (TFP)
functionality.
If it is not possible to route a message and the SENDTFP is switched
off, the message will be discarded and the counter for routing data
error will be increased.
In case SENDTFP is switched on, a TFP message will be sent
additionally to the adjacent siganling point, by which the discarded
message was sent.
OFF DO NOT SEND TFP MESSAGE
ON SEND TFP MESSAGE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7OP- 2+
MOD C7OP
OP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OWN SIGNALING POINT ATTRIBUTE
Input format for modify the signaling transfer point indicator STPI
and the supported data length SDL.
[ [
[ MOD C7OP : SPC= ,NETIND= <,STPI= ,SDL=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SPC-UNIT 1=
b: SPC-UNIT 2=
c: SPC-UNIT 3=
d: SPC-UNIT 4=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
STPI SIGN. TRANSFER POINT INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the new signaling transfer point indicator.
SP SIGNALING POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions
of a signaling end point.
STP SIGNALING TRANSFER POINT
The own signaling point provides the functions
of a signaling transfer point and a signaling
end point.
SDL SUPPORTED DATA LENGTH
This parameter specifies the new maximum length (in bytes) of a
message signaling unit that is supported by the message transfer part.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7OP- 3-
DISP C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 ROUTE SET
This command displays the provisioned route specific data of a destination
to route set association. The following data is displayed:
- the destination point code to which the route set leads
- the network indicator of this destination point code
- the load sharing key of the route set
- the operating (semipermanent) state of the destination point
- effective (transient) state of the destination point
- the name of the link sets which form this route set
- the current priority of the link set
- an indication if the link set is the current route
- the inhibiting (transient) indicator of the link set
- the effective (transient) state of the link set
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7RSET : DPC= ,NETIND= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
d: DPC-UNIT4=
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7RSET- 1-
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CCS7 ROUTE SET TRAFFIC DATA
This command starts the recording of following availability data
for signaling routes/destination points and outputs them to
the OMT or MDD:
- Number of cases of route set unavailability
- Duration of route set unavailability
Notes:
immediate start.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [DPC= [ [
[ REC C7RSET : RANAM= [,NETIND=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC UNIT 1=
b: DPC UNIT 2=
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of unit
values.
If X is entered, the maximum number of measured objects
must not be exceeded and the following unit must be
provided with X.
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7RSET- 1+
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DPC UNIT 3=
values.
The number of objects specified in this way must not exceed
the maximum number of measured objects and X must also be
entered for the following unit.
unit values.
d: DPC UNIT 4=
values.
The number of objects specified in this way must not exceed
the maximum number of measured objects.
unit values.
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA
This parameter specifies the name of the foreign routing area.
Up to 16 routing area names may be linked with &.
This parameter indicates the relevant network type.
It is only permitted in connection with a DPC.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file.
b: OUTPUT MODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7RSET- 2+
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
permitted.
command input.
the actual date.
the actual date.
a-b-c
Notes:
specified.
in daily files.
input.
immediately.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7RSET- 3+
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
BEG is selected.
is not permitted.
times, e.g.
IV = 00-00-00-30&23-00-00-00.
only.
a-b-c-d
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7RSET- 4+
REC C7RSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC C7RSET- 5-
DISP C7SMTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME
This command is used to display the entered smoothing time in seconds
for alarming and reporting of CCS7 network elements, alarming of
processor congestion and reporting of route set (routing area or
destination in own area) unavalibility.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7SMTIME ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7SMTIME- 1-
MOD C7SMTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 SMOOTHING TIME
This command is used to modify the smoothing time in seconds for alarming
and reporting of CCS7 network elements, alarming of processor congestion
and reporting of route set (routing area or destination in own area)
unavalibility.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD C7SMTIME : <LINKSMT= ,RSETSMT= ,OVLSMT=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LINKSMT LINK SMOOTHING TIME
This parameter specifies the smoothing time for alarming and
reporting of signaling links, link sets and local node.
Initial value: 60 seconds.
RSETSMT ROUTE SET SMOOTHING TIME
This parameter specifies the smoothing time for reporting of
unavalibilities of route sets for destinations or set of
destinations (routing area).
OVLSMT OVERLOAD SMOOTHING TIME
This parameter specifies the smoothing time for alarming of processor
congestion (overload). When the smoothing time is set to 600 seconds
the probability is high that the alarming of processor congestion is
due to circular routing. In this case a corresponding report for MSUs
discarded due to routing data error occured every 5 minutes with the
reason circular routing.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD C7SMTIME- 1-
CAN C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command cancels the relation between a destination point (including
the associated user part) and a trunk group with common channel signaling.
Prerequisites:
- All trunks belonging to the specified trunk group must be cancelled.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7TGREL : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7TGREL- 1-
DISP C7TGREL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command displays the relation between a destination point (including
the associated user part) and trunk groups with common channel signaling.
The display can also be selective.
1. DISP C7TGREL - DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
2. DISP C7TGREL - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
DESTINATION POINT CODE
Input format for the destination point code identifier
option
[ [
[ DISP C7TGREL : DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETIND=] [,USNAME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
d: DPC-UNIT4=
OSPC OWN SIGNALLING POINT CODE
The allowable entries are defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7TGREL- 1+
DISP C7TGREL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
SCCP SIGN. CONNECTION CONTROL PART
TUP TELEPHONE USER PART
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7TGREL- 2+
DISP C7TGREL
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
Input format for the trunk group number option
[ [
[ DISP C7TGREL : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7TGREL- 3-
ENTR C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command enters a relation between a destination point (including the
associated user part) and a trunk group with common channel signaling.
A maximum of 64 trunk groups with common channel signaling may lead to a
a destination point and each of its associated user parts.
Prerequisites:
- The destination point must be created.
- The trunk group with common channel signaling must be created.
- The dialing procedure of the trunk group with common channel signaling must
correspond to one of the created user parts for the destination point.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR C7TGREL : TGNO= ,DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETIND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
d: DPC-UNIT4=
specific basis.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR C7TGREL- 1+
ENTR C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
point is located.
exchanges.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR C7TGREL- 2-
CAN C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREM.
This command cancels the CCS7 traffic structure measurement.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7TRST ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7TRST- 1-
DISP C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
This command displays an existing CCS7 traffic structure measurement
request.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7TRST ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7TRST- 1-
ENTR C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
This command activates the recording of CCS7 traffic structure data for
one or several networks.
Prerequisites:
No other CCS7 traffic structure measurement is activated.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR C7TRST : NETIND= [,TRACFACT=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [
[ [
[ [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the network type concerned.
Notes:
- Only 14-Bit networks are allowed.
X ALL NETWORK VALUES
TRACFACT TRACE FACTOR
This parameter specifies the trace factor, which determines that after
(f minus 1) message signaling units of the traffic the next one
has to be measured.
Notes:
tracefactor : 100 .... 10000 ( = default value )
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter defines either
- the time at which the CCS7 traffic structure measurement job
should begin or
- one of the dates on which this should occur.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must
be specified.
linked BEG dates, termination date TER is not possible.
a-b-c
This information unit specifies the year in which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should begin.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR C7TRST- 1+
ENTR C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the month in which the CCS7
This information unit specifies the day on which the CCS7
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies when the CCS7 traffic structure
measurement job should terminate.
Notes:
- The CCS7 traffic structure measurement duration may not
exceed one year.
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date
TER must be specified.
a-b-c
This information unit specifies the year in which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should terminate.
This information unit specifies the month in which the CCS7
This information unit specifies the day on which the CCS7
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the interval during which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should run.
Notes:
- A maximum of four intervals can be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with
a begin date BEG.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
This information unit specifies the hour at which the CCS7
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
This information unit specifies the minutes after the
hour at which the CCS7 traffic structure measurement job
should begin.
Notes:
- Possible values are: 0, 15, 30 or 45.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR C7TRST- 2+
ENTR C7TRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: END HOUR=
This information unit specifies the hour at which the CCS7
d: END MINUTE=
This information unit specifies the minutes after the
hour at which the CCS7 traffic structure measurement job
should terminate.
Notes:
- Possible values are: 0, 15, 30 or 45.
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which the CCS7
traffic structure measurement job should run.
Notes:
- A maximum of eight weekdays/categories can be linked with &,
except the values WO and HO which are not linkable with
other values.
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date TER.
NO DEFAULT
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR C7TRST- 3-
TEST C7TRSTAT
ONDEMAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK STATUS (ISUP)
This command starts the circuit group query test for ISUP trunks.
This test examines if the ISUP trunk states at the own exchange and
at the partner exchange do match. If any discrepancies are detected,
the trunk states are automatically corrected.
If the parameter SCHED is omitted, the test is started immediately,
otherwise it is started at the scheduled time.
<job number>.
1. TEST C7TRSTAT- ONDEMAND ON DEMAND (IMMEDIATELY)
2. TEST C7TRSTAT- SCHED SCHEDULED START (ROUTINE-TEST)
1. Input format
ON DEMAND (IMMEDIATELY)
Input format for starting the circuit group query test on demand
(immediately).
[ [
[ TEST C7TRSTAT : [NETIND=] ,DPC= [,OSPC=] ,CIC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
point is located.
exchanges.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 1+
TEST C7TRSTAT
ONDEMAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: DPC-UNIT4=
specific basis.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code.
Wildcard input is allowed as X-X and a-X.
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
Possible input values:
Within an ANSI or ITU network which support a 12-bit CIC:
- 0...127, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
Within an ANSI network which supports a 14-bit CIC value:
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30.
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 2+
TEST C7TRSTAT
SCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SCHEDULED START (ROUTINE-TEST)
Input format for starting the circuit group query test by scheduler
(routine test).
[ [
[ TEST C7TRSTAT : [NETIND=] ,DPC= [,OSPC=] ,CIC= ,SCHED= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
point is located.
exchanges.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
unit values.
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
d: DPC-UNIT4=
specific basis.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 3+
TEST C7TRSTAT
SCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
Wildcard input is allowed as X-X and a-X.
a-b
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
unit values.
SCHED SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the scheduler by which the circuit
group query test is started.
The schedule number must have been set up with the
ENTER TEST SCHEDULE command.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 4-
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK
This command tests the specified circuit to determine if the circuit
identification code in the home exchange matches the circuit
identification in the partner exchange. The test is performed for up
to 31 circuits specified by the optional parameter TRRANGE.
The maximal value for TRRANGE is 24 if the trunks are connected to
a DIU24.
The test result is displayed on the OMT.
Prerequisite:
- The specified circuit must be blocked for maintenance.
Attention:
- The test result "not ok" usually indicates a circuit identification
code allocation mismatch between two exchanges. As an exception,
the result "not ok" is caused by a mismatch between the trunk
parameter LCOS and the created user. The trunk parameter LCOS
can be checked by using the command DISP TRUNK.
- If the test is cancelled by time control, wait for 30 seconds
before repeating the test.
1. TEST C7TRUNK - DPC
2. TEST C7TRUNK - TGNAM
1. Input format
This input format starts a CIC allocation test. The circuit is
defined by the signaling point to which the associated trunk group
leads, the network indicator, the user part and the circuit identification
code (CIC). The parameter trunk range (TRRANGE) is optional and defines
the number of circuits to be tested by one command. The CIC defines the
first circuit of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.
[ [
[ TEST C7TRUNK : DPC= [,OSPC=] ,CIC= [,NETIND=] ,USNAME= [
[ [
[ [,TRRANGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
c: DPC-UNIT3=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 1+
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: DPC-UNIT4=
specific basis.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
point is located.
exchanges.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 2+
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter specifies the user part.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
This parameter specifies the number of trunks to be tested by
one command. If this parameter is not entered, only the
specified trunk is tested.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 3+
TEST C7TRUNK
TGNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format starts a CIC allocation test. The circuit is
specified by the parameters trunk group number (TGNO) and the circuit
identification code (CIC) or the line number (LNO). The parameter trunk
range (TRRANGE) is optional and specifies the number of circuits to be
tested by one command. The parameter CIC or LNO specifies the first circuit
of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.
[ [
[ [
[ [,CIC=[ [
[ TEST C7TRUNK : TGNO= ,LNO= [,TRRANGE=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LNO LINE NUMBER
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
This parameter specifies the number of trunks to be tested by
one command. If this parameter is not entered, only the
specified trunk is tested.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 4-
CAN C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command cancels an association between a user part and a destination
point.
Prerequisites:
- All trunk group relations must have been cancelled if the user part is
circuit related
- All SCCP relations must have been cancelled if the user part SCCP is
to be cancelled. Possible SCCP relations are: global title translation
destinations, SCCP subsystems or translator service groups.
Possible effects:
- If the execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETIND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
specific basis.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7USER- 1+
CAN C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
point is located.
exchanges.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN C7USER- 2-
CR C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command creates an association between a user part and a destination
point.
Prerequisites:
- The destination point must have been created.
Possible effects:
- If the execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
Input format
[ [
[ CR C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETIND=] [,PCMTYP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
ISUP ISDN USER PART
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7USER- 1+
CR C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
specific basis.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
point is located by its indicator .
exchanges.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional. The default value for NETIND
is NAT0.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
PCMTYP PCM TYPE
This parameter specifies the used PCM type.
For USNAME=SCCP the parameter is allowed only for mobile switches.
DIU24 DIU 24
DIU30 DIU 30
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR C7USER- 2-
DISP C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command displays user-related data.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP C7USER : DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETIND=] [,USNAME=] [,CIC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
b: DPC-UNIT2=
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
specific basis.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7USER- 1+
DISP C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
point is located.
exchanges.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
USNAME USER NAME
ISUP ISDN USER PART
a-b
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP C7USER- 2-
CAN CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command cancels one carrier access code from the
carrier access code data table.
Prerequisites:
-Canceling of carrier access code is only allowed if all references
in the Subscriber-, PBX-line-, PBX-group-, Incoming/Bothway Trunk-,
CTX-group-, CTX-digittranslation- and CPT-digittranslation-data (com-
plete or with congruent digits-root) are deleted.
Attention:
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CAC : CAC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter determines the carrier access code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CAC- 1-
CR CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command creates the carrier access code data.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CAC : CAC= ,CARRIER= [,OWNCAC=] [,ROWNCAC=] [,EXCCAC1=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,EXCCAC2=] [,SCIALLOW=] [,DEFNA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This code combination must not exist as a carrier access code.
It also must be different from all carrier access code points.
Notes:
- Up to 1023 carrier access codes can be set up in the exchange.
CARRIER CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier name.
OWNCAC OWN CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies whether the entered CAC
belongs to the own network of carrier.
Y CAC IS OWN CAC
N CAC IS NOT OWN CAC
ROWNCAC REMOVE OWN CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies if the OWNCAC has to be
removed for routing and zoning.
Y OWN CAC IS REMOVED
N OWN CAC IS NOT REMOVED
EXCCAC1 EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 1
is the default exchange carrier access code 1.
The default exchange carrier access code is used,
if a subscriber dials a B-number without CAC-digits
and no subscriber-related prefered CAC-digits exist.
In projects with only one default carrier access code,
only EXCCAC1 has to be used.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CAC- 1+
CR CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 1
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 1
The default exchange carrier access code is used,
if a subscriber dials a B-number without CAC-digits
no subscriber-related prefered CAC-digits exist and
the evaluation of the called party number gives the
result to use the CAC2 values (CR CACCPT:
DEFCAC = CAC2).
SCIALLOW SCI HANDLING IS ALLOWED
This parameter specifies whether this carrier access code
is allowed to be entered by Subscriber Controled Input,
as a preselected carrier.
Y SCI ALLOWED
N NO SCI ALLOWED
DEFNA DEFAULT NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the default nature of address
indicator (NADI) in case that the CAC, and not PFXNAT
or PFXINAT, determines the NADI.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
NONADI NO NATURE OF ADDRESS INDICAT.
NAT NATIONAL
INTNAT INTERNATIONAL
Default: NONADI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CAC- 2-
DISP CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command displays some or all carrier access code(s)
together with the related data.
All entries are displayed if CAC = X is entered.
The optional paramters reduce the amount of displayed data if they are entered.
All parameters are logically linked with AND, i.e. only those data are displayed
which meet all the entered restrictions.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CAC : <CAC= ,PREPCAN= ,OWNCAC= ,EXCCAC1= ,EXCCAC2= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SCIALLOW= ,DEFNA= ,CARRIER=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the code for which the carrier
access data are to be displayed.
PREPCAN PREPARED TO CANCEL
This parameter specifies that the display is restricted
to those carrierr access codes, which have the selected
value assigned to.
Y PREPARED TO CANCEL
N NOT PREPARED TO CANCEL
value assigned to.
Y CAC IS OWN CAC
value assigned to.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC
value assigned to.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CAC- 1+
DISP CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC
value assigned to.
Y SCI ALLOWED
N NO SCI ALLOWED
value assigned to.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
NAT NATIONAL
CARRIER CARRIER
value assigned to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CAC- 2-
MOD CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command modifies the carrier access code data.
All parameters can be modified, including the
carrier access code itself.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CAC : CAC= <,NEWCAC= ,NCARRIER= ,PREPCAN= ,OWNCAC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,ROWNCAC= ,EXCCAC1= ,EXCCAC2= ,SCIALLOW= ,DEFNA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
It has to be an existing code combination.
NEWCAC NEW CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter determines a new carrier access code.
This code combination must not exist as a carrierr code.
It also must be different from all carrierr access code
points.
NCARRIER NEW CARRIER
This parameter specifies a new carrier name.
PREPCAN PREPARED TO CANCEL
This parameter specifies the new "prepared for cancelation"
status of the carrier.
Y PREPARED TO CANCEL
N NOT PREPARED TO CANCEL
belongs to the own network of carrier.
Y CAC IS OWN CAC
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CAC- 1+
MOD CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ROWNCAC REMOVE OWN CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies if the OWNCAC has to be
removed for routing and zoning.
Y OWN CAC IS REMOVED
N OWN CAC IS NOT REMOVED
This CAC is used, if a subscriber dials a B-number
without CAC-digits and no subscriber-related prefered
CAC-digits exists.
In projects with only one default carrier access code,
only EXCCAC1 has to be used.
This CAC is used, if a subscriber dials a B-number
without CAC-digits, no subscriber-related prefered
CAC-digits exists and the evaluation of called party
gives a result to use the CAC2 value (CR CACCPT:
DEFCAC = CAC2):
This parameter specifies whether the carrier is
allowed for Subscriber Controled Input, as a
preselected carrier.
Y SCI ALLOWED
N NO SCI ALLOWED
This parameter specifies a new default nature of address
indicator (NADI) in case that the CAC, and not PFXNAT
or PFXINAT, determines the NADI.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
NAT NATIONAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CAC- 2-
CAN CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT
This command cancels a codepoint for which special handling of carrier
access codes was performed or for which a default carrier access code
was assigned.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ ; [
[ CAN CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies a code combination which identifies the called
party (B-side).
The code combination has to be part of the code point of an existing
carrier access code.
This parameter specifies an originating local area code which partly
identifies the calling party (A-side).
The local area code originating has to be part of the code point of
an existing carrier access code.
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies an originating mark which identifies the
calling party (A-side).
The originating mark has to be part of the code point of an existing
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CACCPT- 1-
CR CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT
This command creates an object for which a special handling of carrier access
codes has to be performed and/or which is connected to one of the possible
default carriers.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ [
[ CR CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ <,DEFCAC= ,CACSHUC= ,CACSHDI= [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CACSHPS= ,CACGHUC= ,CACGHDI= ,CACGHPS=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies a code combination which identifies the
destination number or a part of it.
The destination number can be a subscriber number (including local area
code), a service number, a national significant number, an
international number or a routing number.
Prerequisites:
- This code combination must be different from all carrier access
codes which were entered with CR CAC.
This parameter specifies an originating local area code which partly
identifies the calling party (A-side).
Any local area code which is administered via ENTR AREACODE
can be specified. This applies to all LAC values and to all
LACOR values in the same manner.
This parameter specifies an originating mark which identifies the
calling party (A-side).
DEFCAC DEFAULT CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies which default carrier access code is to be
selected when applicable.
CAC1 CARRIER ACCESS CODE 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CACCPT- 1+
CR CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CACSHUC CAC SEL. HANDLING. UNCOND.
This parameter specifies a list of carrier access codes for which
special handling of carrier access codes has to be performed.
The handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Dialed and preselected carrier access codes are affected equally.
Notes:
- This parameter makes the input easier for the operator if dialed and
preselected carrier access codes are to be treated in the same
manner.
Any value entered in this parameter is stored, displayed and
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACSHDI and
CACSHPS.
Prerequisites:
- The specified list must already be created with CR CACLST.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
CACSHDI CAC SEL. HANDLING. DIALLED.
This handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Dialed carrier access codes only are affected.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI
CACSHPS CAC SEL. HANDLING. PRESELEC.
This special handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Preselected carrier access codes only are affected.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHPS
CACGHUC CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. UNCOND.
This parameter specifies which special handling of carrier access codes
has to be performed. The special handling is applied for all carrier
access codes equally.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CACCPT- 2+
CR CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
manner.
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACGHDI and
CACGHPS.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
CACGHDI CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. DIALLED.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI
- CACGHUC
CACGHPS CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. PRESELEC.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CACCPT- 3-
DISP CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT
This command displays some or all carrier access code points.
An extended display format allows to display additionally carrier access codes.
All entries are displayed if CODE = X is entered.
The optional paramters reduce the amount of displayed data if they are entered.
All parameters are logically linked with AND, i.e. only those data are displayed
which meet all the entered restrictions.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ ; [
[ DISP CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ [,CACLST=] [,FORMAT=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies the code combination(s) to be displayed.
This parameter specifies that the display is restricted to those
carrier access code points which refer to the originating local
area code.
carrier access code points which refer to the originating mark.
CACLST CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST NAME
carrier access code points which refer to the carrier access code
list name.
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the amount of data displayed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CACCPT- 1+
DISP CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STD STANDARD DATA
This value specifies that the display contains
carrier access code points (created with
CR CACCPT) only.
WITHCAC WITH CAC
This value specifies that the display contains
carrier access code points
(created with CR CACCPT) and
carrier access codes
(created with CR CAC).
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CACCPT- 2-
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT
This command modifies data for a codepoint to a destination for which special
handling of carrier access codes has to be performed and/or which is
connected to one of the possible default carriers.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ [
[ MOD CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ <,DEFCAC= ,CACSHUC= ,CACSHDI= [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CACSHPS= ,CACGHUC= ,CACGHDI= ,CACGHPS= ,CFUNC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies a code combination which identifies the called
party (B-side).
This parameter specifies the local area code of the calling
party (A-side).
This parameter specifies the origin of the calling
party (A-side).
DEFCAC DEFAULT CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies which default carrier access code is to be
selected when applicable.
CACSHUC CAC SEL. HANDLING. UNCOND.
The handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Notes:
manner.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CACCPT- 1+
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACSHDI and
CACSHPS. It replaces any existing value in those two parameters.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
CACSHDI CAC SEL. HANDLING. DIALLED.
This handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Notes:
- Any value entered in this parameter replaces any existing
value of parameter CACGHDI.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI
CACSHPS CAC SEL. HANDLING. PRESELEC.
This special handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Notes:
value of parameter CACGHPS.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHPS
CACGHUC CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. UNCOND.
Notes:
manner.
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACGHDI and
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CACCPT- 2+
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CACGHPS.It replaces any existing value in those two parameters.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
CACGHDI CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. DIALLED.
Notes:
value of parameter CACSHDI.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI
- CACGHUC
CACGHPS CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. PRESELEC.
Notes:
value of parameter CACSHPS.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
CFUNC CANCEL FUNCTION
This parameter specifies a parameter which is to be removed from the
carrier access code point being modified.
Notes:
- At least one parameter has to remain in the code point after the
command has been executed, i.e. empty code points are not allowed.
DEFCAC DEFAULT CAC
CACSHUC CAC SEL. HANDLING UNCOND.
CACSHDI CAC SEL. HANDLING DIALLED.
CACSHPS CAC SEL. HANDLING PRESELEC.
CACGHUC CAC GLOBAL HANDLING UNCOND.
CACGHDI CAC GLOBAL HANDLING DIALLED.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CACCPT- 3+
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CACGHPS CAC GLOBAL HANDLING PRESELEC.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CACCPT- 4-
CAN CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command cancels a carrier access code list for which
special carrier routing was performed.
Prerequisites:
- The list is not referred to by a carrier codepoint.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CACLST : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list name to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CACLST- 1-
CR CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command creates a list with a new listname and inserts up to 32 carrier
access codes to destinations for which special carrier routing is performed.
The same action is valid for all codes, entered with the create command.
More codes as well as codes with a different ACTION can be entered
with MOD CACLST.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CACLST : NAME= ,CAC= ,ACTION= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list name with carrier access codes.
This parameter specifies carrier access codes for which special
carrier routing is performed.
Prerequisites:
- The CAC-value(s) must already be created with CR CAC.
ACTION ACTION FOR CAC HANDLING
This parameter specifies the action for carrier routing.
The standard treatment for all CACs is
ROUTE.
This value must be administered explicitly
as an exception to another ACTION that is
assigned within a carrier access codepoint to
a shorter codepoint.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CACLST- 1-
DISP CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command displays some or all carrier access code lists.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CACLST : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list name(s) to be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CACLST- 1-
MOD CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command modifies a carrier access code list.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CACLST : NAME= [,CAC= ,ACTION=] [,CCAC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list being modified.
This parameter specifies carrier access code(s)
to be added to the list.
Prerequisites:
- The CAC-value(s) must already be created with CR CAC.
ACTION ACTION FOR CAC HANDLING
This parameter specifies the action for carrier routing
for the added CAC-value(s).
CCAC CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies carrier access code(s) to be
removed from the list.
Prerequisites:
- Only CAC-values which are assigned to the list can be removed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CACLST- 1-
CAN CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command cancels the recording center specified with the entered recording
center identification number.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CALIDREC : CALIDREC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CALIDREC MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This parameter identifies the recording center to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CALIDREC- 1-
CR CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command creates the data for a malicious call recording center.
The entered data specifies the recorder identification number,
the recording center directory number and, if needed, certain
features.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CALIDREC : CALIDREC= ,DNREC= [,CUGILC=] [,CUGDNIC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SINGCON=] [,COLPREQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter identifies the recording center to be created.
DNREC DN OF RECORDING CENTER
This parameter specifies the national significant directory number of
the recording center.
CUGILC CUG INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the national closed user group interlock code.
CUGDNIC CUG DATA NETWORK IDENT. CODE
This parameter specifies the international closed user group
identification code.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed if CUGILC value is also specified.
SINGCON SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
This parameter specifies wether call content data is transmitted
via one single 64 kb connection to the recording center as the sum
of information of A and B sides (value YES) or whether the A and B
sides information is separately transmitted via two 64 kb connections
(value NO).
N DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
NO DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Y SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
YES SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALIDREC- 1+
CR CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COLPREQ CONNECTED LINE PRESENT.REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether the call content connection has to be
protected by using the COLP feature.
N NO COLP REQUEST
NO NO COLP REQUEST
Y COLP REQUEST
YES COLP REQUEST
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALIDREC- 2-
DISP CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command displays data of one recording center specified with the entered
malicious call recording center identification number or the data of all
created centers.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CALIDREC : CALIDREC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter identifies the recording center to be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALIDREC- 1-
MOD CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command modifies the data of a malicious call recording center.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CALIDREC : CALIDREC= <,NDNREC= ,NCUGILC= ,CCUGILC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NCUGDNIC= ,CCUGDNIC= ,SINGCON= ,COLPREQ=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter identifies the recording center to be modified.
NDNREC NEW DN OF RECORDING CENTER
This parameter specifies the new national significant directory number
of the recording center.
NCUGILC NEW CUG INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the new international closed user group
identification code.
CCUGILC CANCEL CUG INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the international closed user group
identification code to be canceled.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed if no CUGDNIC is present in the
database or if CCUGDNIC is also specified.
- This parameter is incompatible with NCUGILC.
NCUGDNIC NEW CUG NETWORK IDENT.CODE
This parameter specifies the new national closed user group interlock
code.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed if a CUGILC is present in the
database or if NCUGILC is also specified.
- This parameter is incompatible with CCUGILC.
CCUGDNIC CANCEL CUG NETWORK IDENT.CODE
This parameter specifies the national closed user group interlock
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALIDREC- 1+
MOD CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
code to be canceled.
Notes:
- This parameter is incompatible with NCUGDNIC.
SINGCON SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
This parameter specifies wether call content data is transmitted
via one single 64 kb connection to the recording center as the sum
of information of A and B sides (value YES) or whether the A and B
sides information is separately transmitted via two 64 kb connections
(value NO).
N DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
NO DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Y SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
YES SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Default: NO
COLPREQ CONNECTED LINE PRESENT.REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether the call content connection has to be
protected by using the COLP feature.
N NO COLP REQUEST
NO NO COLP REQUEST
Y COLP REQUEST
YES COLP REQUEST
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALIDREC- 2-
ACCEP CALL
LOCAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCEPT CALL
This command accepts an incoming ( group, personal, position ) call which was
offered at the workstation and connects it to the headset.
1. ACCEP CALL - LOCAL LOCAL OPERATION
2. ACCEP CALL - REMOTE REMOTE OPERATION
1. Input format
LOCAL OPERATION
Input format for local operation.
[ [
[ ACCEP CALL : [TPNO=] [,CALLTP=] [,JN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPNO TEST PORT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the test port to which the incoming call is
to be connected. It may not be used for remote operation.
CALLTP TYPE OF TERMINATING TEST CALL
This parameter can be used to accept the oldest waiting call of the
specified call type.
GROUP TEST CALL TO GROUP
PERS PERSONAL CALL
PERSONAL PERSONAL CALL
POS TEST CALL TO POSITION
POSITION TEST CALL TO POSITION
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number of the job offering an
incoming group call in remote operation. It must be used for remote
operation ( see command ACT WST ).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACCEP CALL- 1+
ACCEP CALL
REMOTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REMOTE OPERATION
Input format for remote operation.
[ [
[ ACCEP CALL : [TPDN=] ,JN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPDN TEST PORT DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the test port directory number of the test
port the incoming call is to be connected to. It must be used for
remote operation ( see command ACT WST ).
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number of the job offering an
incoming group call in remote operation. It must be used for remote
operation ( see command ACT WST ).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACCEP CALL- 2-
REL CALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CALL
This command releases a personal call which was set up with the command
SETUP CALL or accepted with the command ACCEP CALL.
Input format
[ [
[ REL CALL : TPNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the test port seized for the personal call.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REL CALL- 1-
SETUP CALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET UP CALL
This command sets up a personal call to another workstation or subscriber.
The call can be released with the command REL CALL.
Prerequisites:
- The workstation must have been activated with the command ACT WST.
Input format
[ [
[ SETUP CALL : [TPNO=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the test port to be seized for the
outgoing personal call.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of another workstation
or subscriber.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SETUP CALL- 1-
DISP CALLDAT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING DATA
This command displays a snapshot of the contents of the transient CP and GP
resources for one or more ports. The resources must have a state which is
not idle.
The command displays the CP resources CHR, CPB, BOR, BKR, CQI,
CRL and TCB, as well as the GP resources CALLREG, LST, and DPS.
One or more ports can be specified by the equipment number.
<job number>.
1. DISP CALLDAT - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
2. DISP CALLDAT - LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[ [
[ DISP CALLDAT : EQN= [,FORMAT=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter defines the equipment number.
Notes:
- The following qualifications of the port are allowed:
DLU: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific DLU port
EQN = a-b-X all DLU ports of a shelf
EQN = a-b-c all DLU ports of a module
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific DLU port in each module
V5IF: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific V5IF port
a-b-c[-d]
a: DLU OR V5IF NUMBER=
(in steps of 10)
b: SHELF=
For V5IF port: 0
c: MODULE OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: a V52IF port number in the range 0...20
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 1+
DISP CALLDAT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range
0...7 for SLM with 8 ports
This parameter specifies the display format.
Notes:
- The format parameter values DATA and BOTH are allowed only if
the parameter TYPE is unsupplied or if it is supplied with CHR.
BOTH DISPLAY IN HEX AND STRUCTURED
[ [ Only for CHR (channel register).
[ [ For the equipment number range, the
[ [ channel registers found are displayed first
[ [ in structured format, followed by
[ [ an output of the channel registers in
[ [ hexadecimal format.
[ [ To identify a channel register in the structured
[ [ list and in the hexadecimal list,
the processor number and the speech channel number
[ [ are also displayed in both output formats.
[ [ Since the tailing zeros are suppressed in the
[ [ hexadecimal output, the channel register may
[ [ be displayed with different length.
[BYTE [ DISPLAY IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
[ [ This is the standard output format for all types
[ [ of resources.
[ [ Tailing zeros are suppressed in the output of
[ [ each resource. As a result, the displays may show
[ [ the resource with different lengths.
DATA DISPLAY IN STRUCTURED FORMAT
Only for CHR (channel register).
For the equipment number range, the
channel registers found are displayed
in structured format.
Default: BYTE
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the resource to be displayed.
Note:
- If the TYPE and FORMAT parameters are omitted, the
searching for data of the equipment number includes all supported
CP and GP resources. This has as condition that there is a channel
register not idle linked to this equipment number.
- If a GP resource is specifically requested, a display is attempted
regardless of the state of the channel register in CP.
Output formats dependent on input
+---------------------------------+----------------------------------+
! Input: ! Output format: !
! ! !
! TYPE= !FORMAT= ! hexadecimal structured !
! ! +---------------------+------------+
! a b c d e f g h i k ! ! a b c d e f g h i k !Channel reg.!
+---------------------+-----------+---------------------+------------+
! - - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! - ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! - ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 2+
DISP CALLDAT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! - - - x - - - - - - ! - ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! - ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! - ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! - ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! - ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! - ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! - ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! Y ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! Y ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! Y ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! Y ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! Y ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! Y ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! Y ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! Y ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! Y ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! D ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! D ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! D ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! D ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! D ! ) !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! B ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! B ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! B ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! B ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! B ! ) !
+---------------------+-----------+----------------------------------+
TYPE=TYPE, FORMAT=FORMAT,
Y=BYTE,
D=DATA,
B=BOTH
BKR BOOKING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: d = booking register
[BOR [ OPERATOR BILLING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: c = operator billing register
[CALLREG [ CALL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: h = call register
[CHR [ CHANNEL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
Table number: a = channel register
[CPB [ CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: b = call processing buffer
[CQI [ COMMON QUEUEING INDEX TABLE
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: e = common queueing index table
[DPS [ DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: k = DLU port status table
[LST [ LINE STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: i = line status table
TCB TRANSACTION CONTROL BLOCK
Resource in CP
Table number: f = transaction control block
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 3+
DISP CALLDAT
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINE TRUNK GROUP
[ [
[ DISP CALLDAT : LTG= [,LC=] [,FORMAT=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNG GROUP
This parameter specifies the line trunk group of the set of objects to
be traced.
a-b
LTGSET : 0..31
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND
and upper ones)
LTG : 1..63
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the line connection of a LTG.
Notes:
- The input of this parameter is only valid in combination
with the LTG parameter.
- The following input is allowed:
LC = X All channels of LTG
LC = X-b One specific channel on all LTUs
LC = a All channels on specific LTU
LC = a-b One specific channel
a[-b]
a: LTU NO.OF A LTG=
LTU : 0..7
unit values.
b: CHANNEL OF A LTG PORT=
Channel : 0..31
This parameter specifies the display format.
Notes:
- The format parameter values DATA and BOTH are allowed only if
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 4+
DISP CALLDAT
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the parameter TYPE is unsupplied or if it is supplied with CHR.
BOTH DISPLAY IN HEX AND STRUCTURED
[ [ Only for CHR (channel register).
[ [ For the equipment number range, the
[ [ channel registers found are displayed first
[ [ in structured format, followed by
[ [ an output of the channel registers in
[ [ hexadecimal format.
[ [ To identify a channel register in the structured
[ [ list and in the hexadecimal list,
the processor number and the speech channel number
[ [ are also displayed in both output formats.
[ [ Since the tailing zeros are suppressed in the
[ [ hexadecimal output, the channel register may
[ [ be displayed with different length.
[BYTE [ DISPLAY IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
[ [ This is the standard output format for all types
[ [ of resources.
[ [ Tailing zeros are suppressed in the output of
[ [ each resource. As a result, the displays may show
[ [ the resource with different lengths.
DATA DISPLAY IN STRUCTURED FORMAT
Only for CHR (channel register).
For the equipment number range, the
channel registers found are displayed
in structured format.
Default: BYTE
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the resource to be displayed.
Note:
- If the TYPE and FORMAT parameters are omitted, the
searching for data of the equipment number includes all supported
CP and GP resources. This has as condition that there is a channel
register not idle linked to this equipment number.
- If a GP resource is specifically requested, a display is attempted
regardless of the state of the channel register in CP.
Output formats dependent on input
+---------------------------------+----------------------------------+
! Input: ! Output format: !
! ! !
! TYPE= !FORMAT= ! hexadecimal structured !
! ! +---------------------+------------+
! a b c d e f g h i k ! ! a b c d e f g h i k !Channel reg.!
+---------------------+-----------+---------------------+------------+
! - - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! - ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! - ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! - ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! - ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! - ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! - ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! - ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! - ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! - ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! Y ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! Y ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! Y ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! Y ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! Y ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! Y ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! Y ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! Y ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! Y ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 5+
DISP CALLDAT
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! x - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! D ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! D ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! D ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! D ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! D ! ) !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! B ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! B ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! B ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! B ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! B ! ) !
+---------------------+-----------+----------------------------------+
TYPE=TYPE, FORMAT=FORMAT,
Y=BYTE,
D=DATA,
B=BOTH
BKR BOOKING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: d = booking register
[BOR [ OPERATOR BILLING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: c = operator billing register
[CALLREG [ CALL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: h = call register
[CHR [ CHANNEL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
Table number: a = channel register
[CPB [ CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: b = call processing buffer
[CQI [ COMMON QUEUEING INDEX TABLE
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: e = common queueing index table
[DPS [ DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: k = DLU port status table
[LST [ LINE STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: i = line status table
TCB TRANSACTION CONTROL BLOCK
Resource in CP
Table number: f = transaction control block
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 6-
ACCEP CALLID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCEPT CALL IDENTIFICATION
This command cancels the call identification display on the system panel.
Input format
[ [
[ ACCEP CALLID ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACCEP CALLID- 1-
MOD CALLMON
MODSIDE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL MONITORING
This command is used to switch over between listening and listening/speaking to
a specified trunk side of an existing trunk call.
Prerequisites:
- A call monitoring connection must exist ( command: START CALLMON ).
1. MOD CALLMON - MODSIDE MODIFY SIDE
2. MOD CALLMON - MODSPEAK MODIFY SPEAKING
1. Input format
MODIFY SIDE
This input format is used to change the trunk side to be listened or
spoken to.
[ [
[ [
[ [TPNO=[ [
[ MOD CALLMON : TPDN= ,SIDE= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the test port seized for the call monitoring
connection. It may not be used for remote operation.
port seized for the call monitoring connection. It must be used for
SIDE NUC CONNECTION SIDE
This parameter specifies the side of the trunk connection to be
listened to or listened and spoken to.
A A SUBSCRIBER
ALL ALL
B B SUBSCRIBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLMON- 1+
MOD CALLMON
MODSPEAK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY SPEAKING
This input format is used to switch over between listening and listening/
speaking.
[ [
[ [
[ [TPNO=[ [
[ MOD CALLMON : TPDN= ,SP= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SP CALL MONITORING / SPEAKING
This parameter specifies whether the indicated trunk side is to be
listened to or listened and spoken to.
N NO SPEAKING
NO NO SPEAKING
Y SPEAKING
YES SPEAKING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLMON- 2-
START CALLMON
CIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CALL MONITORING
This command starts monitoring of an existing trunk call. Call monitoring can
be modified with the command MOD CALLMON and stopped with the command
STOP CALLMON.
1. START CALLMON- CIC CIC ORIENTED INPUT
2. START CALLMON- LNO LNO ORIENTATED INPUT
3. START CALLMON- LTGLC EQN ORIENTED INPUT
1. Input format
CIC ORIENTED INPUT
The input format sets up a call monitoring connection to a CCS7 speech circuit.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,TPNO=[[ [
[ START CALLMON : TGNO= ,CIC= [,TPDN=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk port to
be listened to.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of the trunk
port to be listened to.
a-b
This parameter specifies the test port to be seized for the call
monitoring connection. It may not be used for remote operation.
port to be seized for the call monitoring connection. It must be used
for remote operation ( see command ACT WST ).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START CALLMON- 1+
START CALLMON
CIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START CALLMON
LNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LNO ORIENTATED INPUT
This input format sets up an line oriented call monitoring connection.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,TPNO=[[ [
[ START CALLMON : TGNO= ,LNO= [,TPDN=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the trunk port to
be listened to.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the trunk port to be
listened to.
START CALLMON
LTGLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
EQN ORIENTED INPUT
The input format sets up an equipment oriented call monitoring connection.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,TPDN=[[ [
[ START CALLMON : LTG= ,LC= [,TPNO=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group number of the trunk port
to be listened to.
a-b
a: TIME STAGE GROUP=
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit number of the trunk port to
be listened to.
a-b
a: LINE/TRUNK UNIT=
b: CHANNEL=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START CALLMON- 4-
STOP CALLMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP CALL MONITORING
This command stops monitoring of an existing trunk call.
Prerequisites:
- A call monitoring connection must exist ( command: START CALLMON ).
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [TPNO=[ [
[ STOP CALLMON : TPDN= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STOP CALLMON- 1-
DISP CALLPOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
This command displays exchange parameters related to call processing.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CALLPOPT : <FORMAT= ,SERV= ,ADMSERV=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT OUTPUT MASK FORM
This parameter is for displaying a table with the values of exchange
parameters.
OPTIONS CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE COMPATIBILITY
This parameter is for displaying a table containing
service types and all compatible services for one or
more internal services.
TANALOG TRAFFIC ANALOG MODE
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRCUIT MODE SPEECH
TCMUNRST TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.
TCMAUDIO TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
TCMAUDI7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
TCMSERV6 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
TUNKNOWN TRAFFIC UNKNOWN BEARER SERV.
TPMBCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
TPMDCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
TPMBDCHA TRAFFIC PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TTEL3K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TTEL7K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TFAX3 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
TFAX4 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTTX64K TRAFFIC TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
TVIDEOTX TRAFFIC VIDEOTEXT
TVIDEOTL TRAFFIC VIDEOTELEPHONY
TSERV19 TRAFFIC SERVICE 19
TSPCONN TRAFFIC SEMIPERM. CONNECTION
ADMSERV ADMIN. SERVICE COMPATIBILITY
This parameter is for displaying a table containing
service types and all compatible services for one or
more administrative services.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLPOPT- 1+
DISP CALLPOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CMSPEECH CIRCUIT MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CM UNRESTRICTED DIGITAL INFO.
CMAUDIO CIRCUIT MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRCUIT MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRCUIT MODE SERVICE 06
CMSERV7 CIRCUIT MODE SERVICE 07
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
PMBCHANN PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TEL3K TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTX64K TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEOTELEPHONY
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICES GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICES GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICES GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLPOPT- 2-
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
This command modifies the exchange parameters and the services related to
Call Processing.
In the following a description is given for
- modification of administrative services
- input of exchange parameters
- modification of internal services for one service
- modification of internal services for several services.
Note: The input of exchange parameters is always possible with the
input for modification of internal and administrative services.
the exchange!
1. MOD CALLPOPT - ADMSERV MODIFIC. ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
2. MOD CALLPOPT - OPTIONS OPTIONS
3. MOD CALLPOPT - SERV MODIFIC. ONE INTERNAL SERVICE
4. MOD CALLPOPT - SERVTYPE MODIFIC. SEVERAL INTERNAL SERVICES
1. Input format
MODIFIC. ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
This input format modifies the powersets of services (exept the powerset of
internal services) for one or more administrative services.
[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : ADMSERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADMSERV ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
This parameter specifies the administrative service that has values to
be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one
of the parameters TYPE, CTYPE.
- The values of parameter ADMSERV are verified against the
powersets of administrative services.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
CMAUDIO CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
CMSPEECH CIRC.MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.DIGITAL INFO
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 1+
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SERV27 SERVICE 27
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services where the entered
service shall be added.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC ,VOICE services can only be
modified using parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- All VOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
TRAFFIC services.
- All SCIVOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
VOICE services except for ADMSERV is VOICEGRP and ALLGRP.
In case of ADMSERV is NONVCGRP SCIVOICE is not possible.
- All standard services must also be contained in the powerset of
the corresponding administrative service.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
SCIVOICE, (only for administrative services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB1TR6, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH, (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG, (only for adminstrative services)
H323, (only for adminstrative services)
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
FH FRAME HANDLER SERVICE
FHSTD FRAME HANDLER SERVICE STANDARD
H323 H323 SERVICE
H323STD H323 SERVICE STANDARD
IDSB ISDN-DSB SERVICE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE SERV.
PHISTD PHI SERVICE STANDARD
QSIG Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE
QSIGSTD Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE STANDARD
SCIVOICE SCI VOICE SERVICE
SUB SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUBSTD SUBSCRIBER SERVICE STANDARD
SUB1TR6 1TR6-SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUB1TR6S 1TR6-SUBSCR. SERVICE STANDARD
CTYPE CANCEL SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services from which the entered
service shall be deleted.
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC,VOICE services can only be
- In the case of CTYPE = TRAFFIC the complete sequence of
administrative services for the addressed TRAFFIC service in
the compatibility tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = VOICE the complete sequence
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 2+
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of administrative services for the addressed VOICE
service and SCIVOICE service in the compatibility-
tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = ADMIN it is verified that the addressed
service is not used in the compatibility tables.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
FH FRAME HANDLER SERVICE
FHSTD FRAME HANDLER SERVICE STANDARD
H323 H323 SERVICE
H323STD H323 SERVICE STANDARD
IDSB ISDN-DSBSERVICE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE SERV.
PHISTD PHI SERVICE STANDARD
QSIG Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE
QSIGSTD Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE STANDARD
SCIVOICE SCI VOICE SERVICE
SUB SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUBSTD SUBSCRIBER SERVICE STANDARD
SUB1TR6 1TR6-SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUB1TR6S 1TR6-SUBSCR. SERVICE STANDARD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 3+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OPTIONS
This input format modifies the exchange parameters.
[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : <OCALSEQ= ,OOSOPT= ,COOSOPT= ,CCQUEL= [
[ [
[ ,CFWTIMER= ,CTXTIMER= ,ANITX= ,CFWMAX= [
[ [
[ ,FACFRM= ,VOIREC= ,CTXNAME= ,NUISWRH= [
[ [
[ ,TELCOCNT= ,MSNMAX= ,ABB= ,MLDIVNO= ,RELFEA= [
[ [
[ ,TRIVKW= ,CTRIVKW= ,RBSIN= ,CRBSIN= ,PHDN= [
[ [
[ ,CPHDN= ,GENPROT= ,MDMSN= ,DESTMAXL= ,DLUEM= [
[ [
[ ,SLANAPRT= ,SYSREA= ,CFWNOT= ,ANNFCFW= [
[ [
[ ,SATMAX= ,HOPCO= ,ISDNPROT= ,COURTESY= [
[ [
[ ,PROPDELY= ,TMSLRES= ,SPCHRES= ,SWAPORIG= [
[ [
[ ,LOADS4LS= ,CFACSUOR= ,CFRQSUOR= ,MWIA= [
[ [
[ ,MWIFIMM= ,MWISTI= ,SCLSTNAE= ,ISSCODEP= ,SCF= [
[ [
[ ,KEY= ,INTKEY= ,INTKEYLN= ,SECWORD= ,DNMAXL= [
[ [
[ ,TRCLMAX= ,TRCLMIN= ,CONFLMAX= ,KEYMAX= [
[ [
[ ,ANNARDN= ,KEYWREQ= ,REDUDACT= ,IGFEAMCI= [
[ [
[ ,IMPLDACT= ,ANSCIPBX= ,PINLNGTH= ,SCLSTCAT= [
[ [
[ ,POPDN= ,CPOPDN= ,IWUDN= ,CIWUDN= ,IWUILC= [
[ [
[ ,IWUDNIC= ,PRSAUTH= ,TMFEAT= ,CTMFEAT= ,ERN= [
[ [
[ ,CERN= ,NRN= ,CNRN= ,DNDTIMER= ,OPRASST= [
[ [
[ ,COPRASST= ,TRRMINA= ,TRRMINB= ,TRRNOMA= [
[ [
[ ,TRRNOMB= ,BASEPOS= ,DN2ADM= ,CTDN= ,SASCRX= [
[ [
[ ,SASCRE= ,DOMSTD= ,NETISTD= ,REDIRMAX= [
[ [
[ ,CACOVRTR= ,FPTHRS= ,FPTIMLIM= ,FPOMT= ,FPACT= [
[ [
[ ,BIERIP= ,CTXNMCHK= ,BCHDLDN= ,TMUOCAC= [
[ [
[ ,PPCSORI2=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the languages and the sequences of these
languages for the OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled ANnouncement
Equipment) within the exchange.
L1
L1L2
L1L2L3
L1L2L3L4
L1L2L4
L1L2L4L3
L1L3
L1L3L2
L1L3L2L4
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 4+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L1L3L4
L1L3L4L2
L1L4
L1L4L2
L1L4L2L3
L1L4L3
L1L4L3L2
L2
L2L1
L2L1L3
L2L1L3L4
L2L1L4
L2L1L4L3
L2L3
L2L3L1
L2L3L1L4
L2L3L4
L2L3L4L1
L2L4
L2L4L1
L2L4L1L3
L2L4L3
L2L4L3L1
L3
L3L1
L3L1L2
L3L1L2L4
L3L1L4
L3L1L4L2
L3L2
L3L2L1
L3L2L1L4
L3L2L4
L3L2L4L1
L3L4
L3L4L1
L3L4L1L2
L3L4L2
L3L4L2L1
L4
L4L1
L4L1L2
L4L1L2L3
L4L1L3
L4L1L3L2
L4L2
L4L2L1
L4L2L1L3
L4L2L3
L4L2L3L1
L4L3
L4L3L1
L4L3L1L2
L4L3L2
L4L3L2L1
OOSOPT OUT OF SERVICE OPTION
This parameter specifies the reason for automatic remove of
trunks from service.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter COOSOPT.
HOLD OOS WITH SINGLE HOLDING
KILL OOS FOR KILLER TRUNK
MDII OOS FOR EXCESSIVE MDII
COOSOPT CANCEL OUT OF SERVICE OPTION
This parameter cancels reason for automatic trunk removal from
service.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 5+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter OOSOPT.
HOLD OOS WITH CONNECTION HOLDING
KILL OOS FOR KILLER TRUNKS
MDII OOS FOR EXCESSIVE MDII
CCQUEL CCBS QUEUE LENGTH
This parameter specifies the default length for the CCBS
(Call Completion to Busy Subscribers) queue.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only during Installation Recovery.
CFWTIMER CALL FORWARDING TIMER
Defines a default value for individual
call forwarding timers.
CTXTIMER CTX CALL FORWARDING TIMER
This parameter specifies a default value for CENTREX
call forwarding timers
ANITX A-NUMB.IDENT. IN TRANSIT EXCH.
This parameter specifies whether A-number identification in
international and transit exchanges is active (YES)
or inactive (NO).
N ANITX NOT ACTIVE
NO ANITX NOT ACTIVE
Y ANITX ACTIVE
YES ANITX ACTIVE
CFWMAX CALL FORWARD (MAXIMUM)
This parameter specifies the maximum number of call forwards allowed
in the exchange.
1..5 range of decimal numbers.
FACFRM FACILITY FORMAT
This parameter specifies the type of procedure for subscriber dialed
inputs of the exchange.
CEPT CEPT FORMAT
EWSA EWSA FORMAT
VOIREC VOICE RECOGNITION
This parameter specifies whether voice recognition is disabled
or enabled in the exchange.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 6+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISABLE VOICEREC.DISABLED
ENABLE VOICEREC.ENABLED
CTXNAME CENTREXNAME
This parameter specifies whether the centrexname recognition
is disabled or enabled in the exchange.
DISABLE CTXNAME DISABLED
ENABLE CTXNAME ENABLED
NUISWRH PROMPT F. FEATURE
enabling resp. disabling the possibility to prompt for a new
feature input without replacing the handset.
DISABLE PROMPT DISABLED
ENABLE PROMPT ENABLED
TELCOCNT TELECOMMUNICATION CENTER NO.
This parameter specifies the telecommunication centre number.
It is used in traffic measurement.
MSNMAX MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO. MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the maximum number of multiple subscriber
numbers allowed in the exchange during one access.
ABB ABBREVIATED DIALING DATA
This parameter specifies the short number lower limits for abbreviated
dialing.
a-b
a: SHORT NUMBER TYPE
SLPLIM SCREENING LIST PLACE LIMIT
SNOLIM1 SHORT NUM. LIMIT ONE DIGIT
SNOLIM2 SHORT NUM. LIMIT TWO DIGITS
This parameter unit specifies whether the short number list of
one digit and/or the short number list of two digits is valid.
b: SHORT NUMBER LIMIT VALUE=
In case of SNOLIM1 this parameter unit can take the values
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 .
In case of SNOLIM2 this parameter unit can take the values
0, 10, 20 . . . 90 .
In case of SLPLIM this parameter unit can take the values
0, 1.
MLDIVNO MAX. LENGTH OF DIVERSION NO.
This parameter specifies the maximum length of diversion numbers
allowed in the exchange.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 7+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: DIVERSION
DIVBY DIVERSION BUSY
DIVDA DIVERSION NOT ANSWERED
DIVI DIVERSION IMMEDIATELY
This parameter specifies whether call forwarding
immediately, call forwarding no reply or call forwarding busy
is valid.
b: MAX. LENGTH OF DIVERSION NUMBER=
RELFEA RELEASED FEATURES
This parameter specifies the released features for the exchange.
This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
CENTREX CENTREX ALLOWED
PRIOQUE PRIORITY QUEUING ALLOWED
TRIVKW TRIVIAL KEYWORD
This parameter specifies the whether the keyword digits are
equal, in ascending order or in descending order. More than
one value connected with & may be entered.
This parameter may not be used together with the cancelling
operation.
This parameter can be used during normal operation.
ASCEDIG DIGITS IN ASCENDING ORDER
digits of keyword in ascending order
DESCDIG DIGITS IN DESCENDING ORDER
digits of keyword in descending order
EQUALDIG EQUAL DIGITS IN KEYWORD
only equal digits in keyword
CTRIVKW CANCEL TRIVIAL KEYWORD
This parameter specifies, which allowed form of the trivial
keyword has to get cancelled. It is not allowed to enter this
parameter together with the parameter to set the trivial
keyword.
This parameter can be used during normal operation.
ASCEDIG DIGITS IN ASCENDING ORDER
DESCDIG DIGITS IN DESCENDING ORDER
EQUALDIG EQUAL DIGITS IN KEYWORD
RBSIN RING BACK SERVICE ID. NO.
This parameter specifies the ring back service identification number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CRBSIN.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 8+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CRBSIN CANCEL RING BACK SERV. ID. NO.
This parameter cancels the ring back service identification number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter RBSIN.
PHDN PACKET HANDLER DIR. NO.
This parameter specifies the packet handler directory number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CPHDN.
CPHDN CANCEL PACKET HANDLER DIR. NO.
This parameter cancels the packet handler directory number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter PHDN.
GENPROT GENERIC PROTOCOL
This parameter specifies which protocol, functional and/or stimulus,
is applied.
A value for GLOBAL always has to be entered.
If GLOBAL-STIPROT or GLOBAL-FCTPROT is entered no other
value is allowed.
In case of GLOBAL-BOTH all of the other parameters
(OUTPUT, REQUEST, OUTAOC) have to be entered.
Notes:
a-b
a: GENERIC PROTOCOL
GLOBAL ALLOWED PROTOCOL
OUTAOC OUTPUT ADVICE OF CHARGE
output advice of charge default protocol
OUTPUT DEFAULT PROTOCOL FOR OUTPUT
REQUEST DEFAULT PROTOCOL FOR REQUEST
This parameter unit specifies whether the global parameter or
the subscription option ( request or output ) is valid.
b: PROTOCOL TYPE
BOTH BOTH PROTOCOLS
FCTPROT FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
STIPROT STIMULUS PROTOCOL
MDMSN DEFAULT MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO.
This parameter specifies whether the marking of a multiple subscriber
number as default multiple subscriber number is mandatory or optional.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 9+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MANDAT MANDATORY
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
DESTMAXL MAX. LENGTH OF DEST. NAME
This parameter specifies the maximum length allowed for the destination
name in the exchange.
LONG LONG NAME: 12 CHARACTERS
SHORT SHORT NAME: 6 CHARACTERS
DLUEM DLU EMERGENCY ALLOWED
This parameter specifies whether the complete DLU emergency operation
can be activated in this exchange or only a reduced mode.
PARTLY PARTLY ALLOWED
SLANAPRT SUB LINE ANALOG PORT FAILURE
This parameter specifies whether a subscriber line
port failure is printed out or not.
This parameter can only be used during Installation
Recovery.
PRTNO SUBSCRIBER PRINTOUT NO
PRTYES SUBSCRIBER PRINTOUT YES
SYSREA SYSTEM REACTION
This parameter specifies whether or not a specific
system reaction is required in call processing.
SPECIAL SPECIAL REACTION
STANDARD STANDARD REACTION
CFWNOT CFW NOTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the kind of call forwarding notification
at the calling users side.
NO NO NOTIFICATION
WITH NOTIFICATION WITH NUMBER
WITHOUT NOTIFICATION WITHOUT NUMBER
ANNFCFW ANNOUNCEMENT FOR CALL FORWARD
This parameter specifies whether an announcement must be
applied to a calling subscriber, when his call was
forwarded or whether this is done subscriberindividual.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
N DO NOT APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
NO DO NOT APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
SUBINDIV SUBSCRIBERINDIVIDUAL
Y DO APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
YES DO APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
SATMAX MAX NUMBER OF SATELLITE LINKS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of satellite links
within one connection.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 10+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HOPCO HOPCOUNTER
This parameter specifies the value of the hopcounter used to
limit of consecutive transit connections (caused by incorrect
routing data) to a certain level (1..31).
After reaching the put in value the call is released.
- This parameter can be used during normal operation.
ISDNPROT ISDN PROTOCOL
This parameter specifies the type of ISDN D1 - PROTOCOL, that is
used in the exchange.
The parameter may only be entered at installation.
BOTH BOTH 1TR6 AND EDSS1 PROTOCOL
EDSS1 EDSS1:DIG.SUB.SIGNAL.1(BLUEB.)
ISDN1TR6 1TR6:TECHN.RICHTL.(REDB.)
COURTESY COURTESY CALL
This parameter specifies whether a courtesy call attempt
to the forward-to party must be performed after subscriber
controlled input of call forwarding.
N DO NOT ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
NO DO NOT ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
Y DO ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
YES DO ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
PROPDELY PROPAGATION DELAY COUNTER
This parameter specifies the maximum value of the propagation
delay counter.
TMSLRES MAX. RESERVED TIMESLOTS
This parameter specifies the maximum value of reserved timeslots
for the BEV-condition in GP.
SPCHRES MAX. RESERVED SPEECHCHANNELS
This parameter specifies the maximum value of reserved speech-
channels for the BEV-condition in GP.
SWAPORIG SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 11+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N DO NOT SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
NO DO NOT SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
Y DO SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
YES DO SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
LOADS4LS LOADSHARING 4 LINK SETS
This parameter specifies whether the loadsharing via two or
four linksets is applied in the switch.
N LOADSHARING VIA MAX 2 LINKSETS
NO LOADSHARING VIA MAX 2 LINKSETS
Y LOADSHARING VIA MAX 4 LINKSETS
YES LOADSHARING VIA MAX 4 LINKSETS
CFACSUOR CFW. ACCOUNT SUSPENSION ORIG.
In order to choose a required interworking between enhancement call
forwarding and accountsuspension originating an action can be entered.
CFW CALL FORWARDING IS PERFORMED
CONNECT CALL CONNECTED TO B1 SUB
The call is connected to the B1 subscriber.
REJECT REJECTION(DEFAULT VALUE)
RING CALLING SUB.REC.RINGING TONE
The calling subscriber receives ringing tone.
CFRQSUOR CFW. REQ.SUSP.ORIG.
In order to choose a required interworking between
enhancement call forwarding and requested suspension
originating an action can be entered.
CFW CALL FORWARDING IS PERFORMED
CONNECT CALLING CONNECTED TO B1 SUB.
The call is connected to the B1 subscriber.
REJECT DEFAULT VALUE
RING CALLING SUB.REC.RINGING TONE
The calling subscriber receives ringing tone.
MWIA MESSAGE WAIT. INDIC. ANALOG
This parameter specifies the maximum number of controlling users for
message waiting indication analog.
MWIFIMM MESSAGE WAIT.IND.FUNC.IMM.
message waiting indication functional immediately.
MWISTI MESSAGE WAIT. INDIC. STIMULUS
message waiting indication stimulus.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 12+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCLSTNAE SCREENLIST NOT ACT WHEN EMPTY
This parameter specifies whether an empty screening list
is allowed to be active or not.
N EMPTY SCREENING LST MAY BE ACT
Empty screening lists may be active.
NO EMPTY SCREENING LST MAY BE ACT
Empty screening lists may be active.
Y EMPTY SCR. LST MAY NOT BE ACT
Empty screening lists must not be active.
YES EMPTY SCR. LST MAY NOT BE ACT
Empty screening lists must not be active.
ISSCODEP ISDN SUPLEM. SERV. CODE PROC.
This parameter specifies whether the called party number
should be used from the global title header or from
the Call Completion Busy Subscriber component to
determine the B-side user.
N DO NOT USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
NO DO NOT USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
Y DO USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
YES DO USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
SCF SELECTIVE CALL FORWARDING.
This parameter specifies whether selective call forwar-
ding takes precedence over non-selective call forwarding
or vice versa.
N PRECEDENCE FOR NON SEL CFW
Precedence for non selective call forwarding.
NO PRECEDENCE FOR NON SEL CFW
Precedence for non selective call forwarding.
Y PRECEDENCE FOR SELECTIVE CFW
Precedence for selective call forwarding.
YES PRECEDENCE FOR SELECTIVE CFW
Precedence for selective call forwarding.
KEY KEYWORD
This parameter specifies the default keyword for subscriber
controlled inputs.
The length of this parameter must be the minimum value of
PINLNGTH.
INTKEY DEFAUL INTERNET PW
This parameter specifies the default internet password.
The length of this parameter must be the minimum value
of the parameter INTKEYLN.
INTKEYLN INTKEY MIN/MAX VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum and minimum pinlength for the
internet password. It has to be entered in the form min-max:
min....minimum keylength (between 4 and 12)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 13+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
max....maximum keylength (between 4 and 12)
min has to be equal max or lower.
With this parameter the parameter INTKEY has to be entered as well.
This parameter can just be entered at installation.
a-b
a: MINIMUM INTKEY LENGTH=
b: MAXIMUM INTKEY LENGTH=
SECWORD SECRET WORD
This parameter specifies a secret password.
The parameter may be entered at normal
operation but is displayed only at installation.
DNMAXL MAX. DIRECTORY NUMBER LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum length of directory numbers
that are allowed in an exchange.
TRCLMAX MAX. TRAFFIC CLASSES
This parameter specifies the maximum number of traffic classes
that are allowed in an exchange.
TRCLMIN TRAFFIC CLASSES MINIMUM
This parameter specifies the minimum value of traffic classes
that is allowed in an exchange.
Notes:
CONFLMAX MAX. CONFERENCE PARTICIPANTS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of participants in
a large conference.
KEYMAX MAX. KEYWORD MISUSES
This parameter specifies the maximum number of keyword misuses.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 14+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANNARDN AUTOM. REC. (1 NUMB. STORED)
This Parameter specifies, whether an announcement with the
calling party number currently stored is fed in (YES) or
not (NO), if the subscriber put in the appropriate access
code for AR with announcement.
N ANNARDN NOT ACTIVATED
NO ANNARDN NOT ACTIVATED
Y ANNARDN ACTIVATED
YES ANNARDN ACTIVATED
KEYWREQ KEYWORD REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether the necessity of a keyword is
defined on feature-office-base or on subscribed base.
The parameter may only be entered at installation
recovery
FEATURE FEATURE BASE
SUBSCR SUBSCR. BASE
REDUDACT REDUNTANT ACTIVATION CFW
This Parameter specifies, whether a redundant
deactivation of CFW can be done (YES) or
is rejected (NO).
N REDUNDANT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
NO REDUNDANT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
Y REDUNDANT ACT. NOT REJ.
YES REDUNDANT ACT. NOT REJ.
IGFEAMCI IGN. FEAT. WHEN MAL. CALL ID.
This Parameter specifies, whether features are
ignored in case of malicious call identification
(YES) or not (NO).
N FEATURES NOT IGNORED.
NO FEATURES NOT IGNORED.
Y FEATURES IGNORED.
YES FEATURES IGNORED.
IMPLDACT IMPLICIT ACTIVATION CFW
This Parameter specifies, whether a implicit
deactivation of CFW can be done (YES) or
is rejected (NO).
N IMPLICIT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
NO IMPLICIT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
Y IMPLICIT ACT. NOT REJ.
YES IMPLICIT ACT. NOT REJ.
ANSCIPBX ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
This Parameter specifies, whether an analog
SCI on PBX-Level can be done (YES) or
not (NO).
N NO ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
NO NO ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
Y ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
YES ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 15+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PINLNGTH PINLENGTH MIN/MAX VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum and minimum pinlength for sub-
scriber controlled input. It has to be entered in the form min-max:
min....minimum pinlength (between 4 and 12)
max....maximum pinlength (between 4 and 12)
min may be equal max or lower.
With this parameter the parameter KEY has to be entered as well.
This parameter can only be entered at installation.
a-b
a: MINIMUM PINLENGTH=
b: MAXIMUM PINLENGTH=
SCLSTCAT SCREENING LIST CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the symbolic digit strings attached to
screening list categories
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA TRANSMIS. INTERNAT.
DATRANS DATA TRANSMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNAT.
SUBINAT SUBSCRIBER INTERNATIONAL
SUBMFC SUB. CATEG. REQUESTED BY MFC
Subscriber category requested by MFC
SUBORD SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUBSCR. INTERNAT.
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This parameter unit specifies which screening list
category the symbolic digit string is attached to.
b: SYMBOLIC DIGIT STRING=
A value between 0 and 99 may be entered.
In case of omission of part b the digit
string is removed.
POPDN POINT OF PRESENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the point of presence number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CPOPDN.
CPOPDN CANCEL POINT OF PRESENCE NO.
This parameter cancels the point of presence number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 16+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter POPDN.
IWUDN INTERWORKING UNIT DIR.NUMBER
This parameter specifies the interworking unit number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CIWUDN.
CIWUDN CAN. INTERWORKING UNIT DIR.NO.
This parameter cancels the interworking unit number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter IWUDN.
IWUILC INT.WORK UNIT INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interworking unit interlock code.
IWUDNIC IWU DATANETWORK IDENT. CODE
This parameter specifies the interworking unit datanetwork
identification code. The value may be between 0 and 9999
PRSAUTH PROTOCOL SPEC. AUTHORISATIONS
This parameter specifies whether protocol specific
authorisation is set.
It may only be entered at installation.
N NO PROTOCOL SPEC. AUTH.
NO NO PROTOCOL SPEC. AUTH.
Y PROTOCOL SPECIFIC AUTH.
YES PROTOCOL SPECIFIC AUTH.
TMFEAT TRAF.MEAS.-FEATURES
This parameter specifies the features for which
traffic measurement can be started.
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALLING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACCEPTCW ACCEPTED CALL WAITINGS USE
ACO ALARM CALL ORDER
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 17+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AFS AUTOMATIC FEATURE SUBSCRIPT.
automatic feature subscription
AGRU ANS. GEAEND. RUFNR. (TELEKOM)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
AOC ADVICE OF CHARGE ON REQUEST
allowed for EDSS1
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NUMBER
CC COMPLETION OF CALLS
CCIBI CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY IMMID.
call completion internet busy immediate,
CCIBU CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY USER
call completion internet busy user,
CCIBVOIP CALL CMP.INT.BUSY VOICE O.IP
call completion international
busy voice over internet,
CCSSVI COLL.CALL SCR.FILT.INT.SERV.
collect call screening filtered
interception service.
Allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR
calling line identification restriction,
allowed for Analog
CLIRR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
CLIRS CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
COLRR CONNECT LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
COLRS CONNECT LINE IDENT TESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
CONF3 3WAY CONFERENCE
CT CALL TRANSFER (A-SIDE, B-SIDE)
CTD CLICK TO DIAL
CW CALL WAITING
CWD CALL WAITING DE LUXE
CWDA CALL WAITING DELUXE ACCEPTED
CWDC CALL WAITING DELUXE CONF.
CWDF CALL WAITING DELUXE FORWARDED
CWIB CALL WAITING INTERN. BUSY
call waiting internet busy
DEBNC DETAILLED BILLING NEXT CALL
DIVA FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
DIVBRVMS BUSY ROUTE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVBY BUSY LINE DIVERSION
DIVBYVMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVCD CONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVCDE DIVERSION ON CALL DEFLECTION
allowed for EDSS1
DIVDA DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
DIVDAVMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION TO VMS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 18+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVI IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVIA INDIVID. ANNOUNC. DIVERSION
DIVIP CFW UNCONDITIONAL PARALLEL
DIVIVMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVLO DIVERSION LOGGED OUT
allowed for H232
DIVND DONT DISTURB DIVERSION
DIVOP OPERATOR DIVERSION
DIVOPD DELAYED DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
DIVUCD UNCONDITIONAL DIVERSION
EECT ENHANCED EXPLICIT CALL TR.
enhanced explicit call transfer
FSK FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
allowed for Analog
HOTLDEL HOTLINE DELAYED
HOTLIMM HOTLINE IMMEDIATE
ISCI INTERN.SUB.CONTR.INPUT
internet subscriber controlled input
KEYWORD KEYWORD MODIFICATION
MCII MALICIOUS CALL ID IMMED
MCIR MALICIOUS CALL ID REQU
PR PARTIAL REROUTING (EDSS1-PBX)
allowed for EDSS1
RCCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
RCREQS REVERSED CHARGE AT SET UP TIME
REJDIV CALL FORWARDING REJCTION
REQSTDA REQUEST STATUS/FEATDATA
RSCI REMOTE SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT
SCA SELECTIVE CALL ACCEPTANCE
SCD SELECTIVE CALL DIVERSION
SCIR SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT RESTR.
SCLIM SUPERVISION OF CREDIT LIMIT
SCLST SCREENING LIST
SCLSTKO SCREENING LIST KICK OUT
SCO SELECTIV CALL ORIGINATION
SCR SELECTIV CALL REJECTION
SCW SELECTIV CALL WAITING
SERVC SERVICE CHANGE
allowed for 1TR6
allowed for 1TR6
SR SELECTIVE RINGING
STH STOP HUNT
SUBADDR SUBADDRESSING
allowed for EDSS1
TRARSDN CALL RESTRICTION DN/PRT
allowed for 1TR6
TRARSS TRAFFIC RESTRICTION SUB
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 19+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRARSTR TRAFFIC RESTRICTION
TRARSTRT TRAFFIC RESTRICTION TERM
TRARSUSP BLUEBOOK OUTGOING CALL SUSP.
TWC THREE WAY CALL (INQUIRY)
UISCI USER INTERACTIVE SCI
User interactive subscriber controlled input.
allowed for Analog and ISDN
UUS1 USER-TO-USER-SIGNALLING 1
allowed for EDSS1
allowed for EDSS1
VACNC VERB ANN CHARGES FOR NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog
VMSRETR VMS MESSAGE RETRIEVAL
VOI VOICE OVER INTERNET
CTMFEAT CANCEL TRAF.MEAS.-FEATURES
This parameter is used to cancel features for which
traffic measurement can be started.
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALLING
ACCEPTCW ACCEPTED CALL WAITINGS USE
ACO ALARM CALL ORDER
AFS AUTOMATIC FEATURE SUBSCRIPT.
automatic feature subscription
AGRU ANS. GEAEND. RUFNR. (TELEKOM)
AOC ADVICE OF CHARGE ON REQUEST
allowed for EDSS1
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CC COMPLETION OF CALLS
CCIBI CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY IMMID.
call completion internet busy immediate,
CCIBU CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY USER
call completion internet busy user,
CCIBVOIP CALL COMP.INT.BUSY VOICE O.IP
call completion international
busy voice over internet,
CCSSVI COLL.CALL SCR.FILT.INT.SERV.
collect call screening filtered
interception service,
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR
allowed for Analog
CLIRR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
CLIRS CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
COLRR CONNECT LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
COLRS CONNECT LINE IDENT TESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 20+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONF3 3WAY CONFERENCE
CT CALL TRANSFER (A-SIDE, B-SIDE)
CTD CLICK TO DIAL
CW CALL WAITING
CWD CALL WAITING DE LUXE
CWDA CALL WAITING DELUXE ACCEPTED
CWDC CALL WAITING DELUXE CONF.
CWDF CALL WAITING DELUXE FORWARDED
CWIB CALL WAITING INTERN. BUSY
call waiting internet busy
DEBNC DETAILLED BILLING NEXT CALL
DIVA FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
DIVBRVMS BUSY ROUTE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVBYVMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVCD CONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVCDE DIVERSION ON CALL DEFLECTION
allowed for EDSS1
DIVDAVMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for 1TR6
DIVIA INDIVID. ANNOUNC. DIVERSION
DIVIP CFW UNCONDITIONAL PARALLEL
DIVIVMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION TO VMS
DIVLO DIVERSION LOGGED OUT
allowed for H232
DIVND DONT DISTURB DIVERSION
DIVOP OPERATOR DIVERSION
DIVOPD DELAYED DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
DIVUCD UNCONDITIONAL DIVERSION
EECT ENHANCED EXPLICIT CALL TR.
enhanced explicit call transfer
FSK FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
allowed for Analog
ISCI INTERN.SUB.CONTR.INPUT
internet subscriber controlled input
MCII MALICIOUS CALL ID IMMED
MCIR MALICIOUS CALL ID REQU
PR PARTIAL REROUTING (EDSS1-PBX)
allowed for EDSS1
RCCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
RCREQS REVERSED CHARGE AT SET UP TIME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 21+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REJDIV CALL FORWARDING REJCTION
REQSTDA REQUEST STATUS/FEATDATA
RSCI REMOTE SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT
SCA SELECTIVE CALL ACCEPTANCE
SCD SELECTIVE CALL DIVERSION
SCIR SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT RESTR.
SCLIM SUPERVISION OF CREDIT LIMIT
SCO SELECTIVE CALL ORIGINATION
SCR SELECTIVE CALL REJECTION
SCW SELECTIVE CALL WAITING
SERVC SERVICE CHANGE
allowed for 1TR6
allowed for 1TR6
SR SELECTIVE RINGING
STH STOP HUNT
SUBADDR SUBADDRESSING
allowed for EDSS1
TRARSDN CALL RESTRICTION DN/PRT
allowed for 1TR6
TRARSS TRAFFIC RESTRICTION SUB
TRARSTRT TRAFFIC RESTRICTION TERM
TRARSUSP TRAFFIC RESTR. SUSPENDED
TWC THREE WAY CALL (INQUIRY)
UISCI USER INTERACTIVE SCI
User interactive subscriber controlled input.
allowed for Analog and ISDN
allowed for EDSS1
allowed for EDSS1
VACNC VERB ANN CHARGES FOR NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog
VMSRETR VMS MESSAGE RETRIEVAL
ERN EXCHANGE ROUTING NO.
This parameter specifies the exchange routing number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CERN.
CERN CANCEL EXCHANGE ROUTING NO.
This parameter cancels the exchange routing number.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 22+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter ERN.
NRN NETWORK ROUTING NO.
This parameter specifies the network routing number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CNRN.
CNRN CANCEL NETWORK ROUTING NO.
This parameter cancels the network routing number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter NRN.
DNDTIMER DO NOT DISTURB TIMER
This parameter specifies the time in hours after which the feature
do not disturb of a subscriber is automatically deactivated.
An input of zero means that no deactivation takes place.
OPRASST OPERATOR ASSIST NO.
This parameter specifies the operator assist number
for malicious call tracing
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter COPRASST.
COPRASST CANCEL OPERATOR ASSIST NO.
This parameter cancels the operator assist number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter OPRASST.
TRRMINA TRANSFER RATE MINIMUM A
This parameter specifies the minimum
transfer rate for SLMI:SDA.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be larger
than TRRNOMA.
0,6,12, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 23+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRRMINB TRANSFER RATE MINIMUM B
This parameter specifies the minimum
transfer rate for SLMI:SDB/SCC/SDD.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be larger
than TRRNOMB.
0,6,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,
TRRNOMA TRANSFER RATE NOMINAL A
This parameter specifies nominal transfer rate
for SLMI:SDA.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be smaller
than TRRMINA.
TRRNOMB TRANSFER RATE NOMINAL B
This parameter specifies the nominal
transfer rate for SLMI:SDB/SCC/SDD.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be smaller
than TRRMINB.
0,6,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,
BASEPOS BASIC SERVICE POSSIBLE
This Parameter specifies, whether the SDSL line card will
try to set up with 160kbit/sec as a last possibility
independently of the administrated bandwidth(YES) or
not (NO).
N BASEPOS NOT ACTIVATED
NO BASEPOS NOT ACTIVATED
Y BASEPOS ACTIVATED
YES BASEPOS ACTIVATED
DN2ADM DN2 POSSIBLE
This Parameter specifies whether a second directory
number may be entered while modifying a subscriber(YES)
or not (NO). This parameter may only be entered at
installation operation.
N DN2ADM NOT ACTIVATED
NO DN2ADM NOT ACTIVATED
Y DN2ADM ACTIVATED
YES DN2ADM ACTIVATED
CTDN CLICK TO DIAL NO.
This parameter specifies the click to dial number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 24+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SASCRX SAS CALL RELEASE ON EXIT
This Parameter specifies, whether the SAS call release
will take place on exit (YES) or not (NO).
N SASCRX NOT ACTIVATED
NO SASCRX NOT ACTIVATED
Y SASCRX ACTIVATED
YES SASCRX ACTIVATED
SASCRE SAS CALL RELEASE ON ENTRY
This Parameter specifies, whether the SAS call release
will take place on entry (YES) or not (NO).
N SASCRE NOT ACTIVATED
NO SASCRE NOT ACTIVATED
Y SASCRE ACTIVATED
YES SASCRE ACTIVATED
DOMSTD DOMAIN STANDARD
This parameter specifies standard domain for MLPP.
NETISTD NETWORK ID STANDARD
This parameter specifies the default network identification
code.
REDIRMAX REDIRECTION (MAXIMUM)
This parameter specifies the maximum number of redirections allowed
in the exchange.
CACOVRTR CAC OVERRIDES TRAFFIC RESTR
This parameter specifies whether carrier access code
overrides traffic restrictions.
N NO OVERRIDE
NO NO OVERRIDE
Y OVERRIDE
YES OVERRIDE
FPTHRS FRAUD PREV THRESHHOLD
This parameter specifies the fraud prevention
threshhold.
FPTIMLIM FRAUD PREV TIMELIMIT
This parameter specifies the fraud prevention
timelimit.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 25+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FPOMT FRAUD PREV OUTPUT ON OMT
This parameter specifies whether fraud prevention is
output on operation and maintenance terminal (YES)
or not (NO).
N NO OUTPUT ON OMT
NO NO OUTPUT ON OMT
Y OUTPUT ON OMT
YES OUTPUT ON OMT
FPACT FRAUD PREVENTION ACTIVE
This parameter specifies, whether the fraud prevention
is active (YES) or not (NO).
N FRAUD PREVENTION NOT ACTIVATED
NO FRAUD PREVENTION NOT ACTIVATED
Y FRAUD PREVENTION ACTIVATED
YES FRAUD PREVENTION ACTIVATED
BIERIP BASIC INTERN. EXCH. RES.
This parameter specifies a basic internode
exchange resource IP.
Notes:
It is of the form a.b.c.d where a/b/c/d are
integers in the range 0..255.
CTXNMCHK CENTREX NUMBER CHECK
This Parameter specifies, whether, in case of centrex
call forwarding, it is checked(YES) whether the B2-
subscriber is equal the A-subscriber (in which case call
forwarding is done to B1-subscriber), or not(NO).
N CTXNMCHK NOT ACTIVATED
NO CTXNMCHK NOT ACTIVATED
Y CTXNMCHK ACTIVATED
YES CTXNMCHK ACTIVATED
BCHDLDN B-CHANNEL DATA LINK DN
This parameter specifies the b-channel data link directory
number.
Notes:
- This parameter is cancelled by entering zero.
- Up to 24 digits between 0 and 9 may be entered.
TMUOCAC TRAFFIC MEASURE. USE OWN CAC
This Parameter specifies, whether, for traffic
measurement, if the carrier access code is not dialed,
the own (CAC) has to be used (YES), or not(NO).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 26+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N DO NOT USE OWN CAC
NO DO NOT USE OWN CAC
Y USE OWN CAC
YES USE OWN CAC
PPCSORI2 PREPAID CARD SERVICE ORIG2
This parameter specifies a service specific (ORIG2)-value.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 27+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFIC. ONE INTERNAL SERVICE
This input format modifies the powersets of services and the service
compatibility tables for one service.
[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : SERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE= ,COMPORIG= ,COMPTERM= [
[ [
[ ,BSIGN=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE
This parameter specifies which internal service has parameters
to be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one of the
parameters TYPE, CTYPE, COMPORIG, COMPTERM or BSIGN.
- The values of parameter SERV are verified against the
powerset of TRAFFIC services.
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SPEECH
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
TRAFFIC services.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 28+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRAFFIC INTERNAL SERVICE
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
COMPORIG COMPAT. SERVICE (ORIG.TRAFFIC)
This parameter specifies the sequence of administrative services
associated with one internal service for originating traffic.
This internal service is specified by the parameter SERV.
Notes:
- First administrative service in the sequence has the highest
priority, with a maximum of 8 elements in the sequence.
- A service may not be entered twice.
- Administrative service must be allowed in this exchange.
SERV.
- The entered value(s) of administrative service must match
the protocol of the internal service specified by SERV.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 29+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
COMPTERM COMPAT. SERVICE (TERM.TRAFFIC)
This parameter specifies the sequence of administrative services
associated with one internal service for terminating traffic.
Notes:
- First administrative service in the sequence has the highest
priority, with a maximum of 16 elements in the sequence.
- A service may not be entered twice.
- Administrative service must be allowed in this exchange.
SERV.
- The entered value(s) of administrative service must match
the protocol of the internal service specified by SERV.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 30+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BSIGN B-SIDE SIGNALLING COMPAT.
This parameter specifies the basic signalling services
associated with one internal service.
Notes:
- A basic signalling service parameter should not be entered twice.
SERV.
a-b
a: KIND OF PROTOCOL
ANALOG ANALOG SERVICES
EDSS1 EDSS1:DIG.SUB.SIGNAL.1(BLUEB.)
ISDN1TR6 1TR6:TECHN.RICHTL.(REDB.)
This unit specifies the type of signalling protocol of the
terminating side of the call.
b: INTERNAL SERVICE OF B-SIDE
TNOSERV TRAFFIC NO SERVICE
This unit specifies the internal service, that is associated
to the type of signalling protocol of the terminating
side of the call.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 31+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERVTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MODIFIC. SEVERAL INTERNAL SERVICES
This input format modifies the powersets of services for one or more services.
[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : SERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE
This parameter specifies which internal service has parameters
to be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one of the
parameters TYPE, CTYPE, COMPORIG, COMPTERM or BSIGN.
- The values of parameter SERV are verified against the
powerset of TRAFFIC services.
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
TRAFFIC services.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 32+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERVTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
Notes:
SERV or ADMSERV.
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 33-
CAN CALLTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL TYPE DATA
This command cancels an ADMOSS or CENTREX call type
for common CDS.
Compatibilities:
- If the ADMOSS call type is assigned to a task group or if it is referenced
in the common service subscriber database, or in the common service
group specific intercept datebase or in the route database, or in the
virtual operator service database it can not be canceled.
- If the CENTREX call type is assigned to a task group or if it is referenced
in the common service subscriber database, it can not be canceled.
This input format is used to cancel an ADMOSS or CENTREX
call type.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX
call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CALLTYPE- 1-
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL TYPE DATA
This command creates an ADMOSS or CENTREX call type
for common CDS.
Prerequisites:
- A call type can only be entered if the common service group is already
existing.
- The call type name must be unique in a common service group.
1. CR CALLTYPE - CRCCTYP CREATE CENTREX CALL TYPE
2. CR CALLTYPE - CRHDCTYP CREATE HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
3. CR CALLTYPE - CROCTYP CREATE ADMOSS CALL TYPE
1. Input format
CREATE CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create a CENTREX call type.
[ [
[ CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] [
[ [
[ [,CXCTYP=] [,CTYPFEA=] [,INCEPT=] [,GOS=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,APPLID=] [,OCALSEQ=] [,LANG=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must not exist in the common service group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 1+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the call type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the call type.
CXCTYP FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the fixed CENTREX call type.
ATATGR ATTN. TO ATTN. GROUP CALL
ATNCO ATTN. RECALL FROM CAMP-ON
ATNGR DIAL ATTENDANT GROUP CALL
ATNIC ATTENDANT INTERCEPT INCOMING
ATNOG ATTENDANT INTERCEPT OUTGOING
CRLFCD CALL REDIRECTED TO LFCD NUMBER
CRNS CALL REDIRECTED TO NS NUMBER
CSHRATN CALL TO SHARED ATTENDANT
DIVDA DO NOT ANSWER DIVERSION
DTAC DIAL THROUGH ATTN. CALL
HOTATN HOTLINE CALL TO ATTN.
ILPDNAG INAT.CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
NLPDNAG NAT.CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
NOWORK CALL TO NON-WORKING NUMBER
OAWIID OPR.ASSIST.WITH IDENTIFICATION
OAWOID OPR.ASSIST.WITHOUT IDENT.
RESECATN REROUTE TO SERIAL CALL ATTN.
REST RESTRICTED CALL TO ATTENDANT
SPECL SPECIAL (E.G. NIGHT SERVICE)
TOLDIV TOLL DIVERSION TO ATTENDANT
TRANS TRANSFERRED CALL
X ALL CENTREX CALL TYPES
CTYPFEA CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of the call type.
Following inputs are allowed:
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
RMTAP
AUTOSWS
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
FEA4
FEA5
FEA6
FEA7
FEA8
Following inputs are incompatible for one Calltype:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 2+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
Following Call Type Feature are only once allowed in a
Common Service Group:
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
AUTOSWS AUTOMATIC SYNCHR.WEB SURFING
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
FEA4 FEATURE 4
FEA5 FEATURE 5
FEA6 FEATURE 6
FEA7 FEATURE 7
FEA8 FEATURE 8
RMTAP REMOTE APPLICATION
ROUTING ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept for a call type.
For following intercepts only the fix Part is allowed:
QPOS
QWAIT
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT WITH DATA
FUTURE1 FUTURE 1
FUTURE2 FUTURE 2
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
QPOS QUEUE POSITION ANNOUNCEMENT
QWAIT QUEUE WAITING ANNOUNCEMENT
ROUTFAIL ROUTING FAILED
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
b: NAME=
GOS GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the grade of service for a call type.
For following grade of service only the first time-value
can be supplied:
QWAIT.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
QABANDC QUEUEING TIME ABANDONED CALLS
QPRESC QUEUEING TIME PRESENTED CALLS
QWAIT QUEUEING WAITING TIME
b: TIME1=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 3+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: TIME2=
d: TIME3=
This parameter specifies the Application Identification.
sequences of these languages for QPOS and QWAIT. Input of up to
4 languages for one sequence is possible.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 4+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the language of the call type.
ENGLSH ENGLISH
[FRENCH [ FRENCH
[GERMAN [ GERMAN
[LOCAL1 [ LOCAL LANGUAGE1
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
[PROP2 [ PROPERTY 2
[PROP3 [ PROPERTY 3
[PROP4 [ PROPERTY 4
[PROP5 [ PROPERTY 5
[PROP6 [ PROPERTY 6
[RUSSIN [ RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 5+
CR CALLTYPE
CRHDCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create an ADMOSS call type
for high Performance Datalink
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 6+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE ADMOSS CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create an ADMOSS call type.
[ [
[ CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] [
[ [
[ [,CTYPFEA=] [,INCEPT=] [,GOS=] [,APPLID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,OCALSEQ=] [,LANG=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 7+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
RMTAP
AUTOSWS
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
FEA4
FEA5
FEA6
FEA7
FEA8
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
FEA4 FEATURE 4
FEA5 FEATURE 5
FEA6 FEATURE 6
FEA7 FEATURE 7
FEA8 FEATURE 8
ROUTING ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT
QPOS
QWAIT
a[-b]
FUTURE1 FUTURE 1
FUTURE2 FUTURE 2
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
b: NAME=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 8+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
can be supplied:
QWAIT.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
b: TIME1=
c: TIME2=
d: TIME3=
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 9+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
[FRENCH [ FRENCH
[GERMAN [ GERMAN
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
[PROP2 [ PROPERTY 2
[PROP3 [ PROPERTY 3
[PROP4 [ PROPERTY 4
[PROP5 [ PROPERTY 5
[PROP6 [ PROPERTY 6
[RUSSIN [ RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 10-
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL TYPE DATA
This command displays ADMOSS or CENTREX call type data
for common CDS.
<job number>.
1. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTCSG DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CSG
2. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTDN DISP.CALL TYPE FOR DN
3. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTOCSG DISP.CALL TYPE ONE CSG
1. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CSG
This input format is used to display call type
data of a specific common service group or
to get an overview of several common service
groups.
[ [
[ DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLTYPE- 1+
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR DN
This input format is used to display call types
that are connected with a directory number.
[ [
[ DISP CALLTYPE : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the ADMOSS
or CENTREX call type.
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the ADMOSS
or CENTREX call type.
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTOCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE ONE CSG
This input format is used to display call type
data of a specific common service group.
[ [
[ DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,CTYP=] [,CTYPFEA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX
call type name.
Notes:
- If X is entered for CSGLAC and/or CSGDN this
parameter is not allowed.
Notes:
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
FEA4 FEATURE 4
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTOCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA5 FEATURE 5
FEA6 FEATURE 6
FEA7 FEATURE 7
FEA8 FEATURE 8
INETSERV INTERNET SERVICE
RECNPREV RECONNECT IN PREV.CALL CENTER
ROUTING ROUTING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CALLTYPE- 4-
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL TYPE DATA
1. MOD CALLTYPE - MOCCTYP MODIFY CENTREX CALL TYPE
2. MOD CALLTYPE - MOHDCTYP MODIFY HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
3. MOD CALLTYPE - MOOCTYP MODIFY ADMOSS CALL TYPE
1. Input format
MODIFY CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify a CENTEX call type.
[ [
[ MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= <,LAC= ,DN= ,CLAC= [
[ [
[ ,CDN= ,CXCTYP= ,CCXCTYP= ,CTYPFEA= ,CCTYPFEA= [
[ [
[ ,INCEPT= ,CINCEPT= ,GOS= ,CGOS= ,APPLID= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,OCALSEQ= ,LANG= ,CLANG=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 1+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
CLAC CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel local area code of the call
type.
Notes:
CDN CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the cancel directory number of the
call type.
CXCTYP FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the fixed CENTREX call type.
CCXCTYP CANCEL FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the cancel fixed CENTREX call type.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 2+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
RMTAP
AUTOSWS
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
FEA4
FEA5
FEA6
FEA7
FEA8
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
FEA4 FEATURE 4
FEA5 FEATURE 5
FEA6 FEATURE 6
FEA7 FEATURE 7
FEA8 FEATURE 8
ROUTING ROUTING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 3+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCTYPFEA CANCEL CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter cancel the feature for a call type.
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
RMTAP
AUTOSWS
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
FEA4
FEA5
FEA6
FEA7
FEA8
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
FEA4 FEATURE 4
FEA5 FEATURE 5
FEA6 FEATURE 6
FEA7 FEATURE 7
FEA8 FEATURE 8
ROUTING ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT
QPOS
QWAIT
a[-b]
FUTURE1 FUTURE 1
FUTURE2 FUTURE 2
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
b: NAME=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 4+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CINCEPT CANCEL INTERCEPT
This parameter cancels the intercept for a call type.
FUTURE1 FUTURE 1
FUTURE2 FUTURE 2
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
can be supplied:
QWAIT.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
b: TIME1=
c: TIME2=
d: TIME3=
CGOS CANCEL GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter cancels the grade of service for a call type.
HOLD HOLDING
APPLID APPLICATION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 5+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L1
L1L2
L1L2L3
L1L2L3L4
L1L2L4
L1L2L4L3
L1L3
L1L3L2
L1L3L2L4
L1L3L4
L1L3L4L2
L1L4
L1L4L2
L1L4L2L3
L1L4L3
L1L4L3L2
L2
L2L1
L2L1L3
L2L1L3L4
L2L1L4
L2L1L4L3
L2L3
L2L3L1
L2L3L1L4
L2L3L4
L2L3L4L1
L2L4
L2L4L1
L2L4L1L3
L2L4L3
L2L4L3L1
L3
L3L1
L3L1L2
L3L1L2L4
L3L1L4
L3L1L4L2
L3L2
L3L2L1
L3L2L1L4
L3L2L4
L3L2L4L1
L3L4
L3L4L1
L3L4L1L2
L3L4L2
L3L4L2L1
L4
L4L1
L4L1L2
L4L1L2L3
L4L1L3
L4L1L3L2
L4L2
L4L2L1
L4L2L1L3
L4L2L3
L4L2L3L1
L4L3
L4L3L1
L4L3L1L2
L4L3L2
L4L3L2L1
NONE
Default: NONE
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 6+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL LANGUAGE1
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
CLANG CANCEL LANGUAGE
This parameter cancels the language for a call type.
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 7+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOHDCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify an ADMOSS call type
for high Performance Datalink
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 8+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY ADMOSS CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify an ADMOSS call type.
[ [
[ MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= <,LAC= ,DN= ,CLAC= [
[ [
[ ,CDN= ,CTYPFEA= ,CCTYPFEA= ,INCEPT= ,CINCEPT= [
[ [
[ ,GOS= ,CGOS= ,APPLID= ,OCALSEQ= ,LANG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CLANG=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 9+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CLAC CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel local area code of the call
type.
Notes:
CDN CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the cancel directory number of the
call type.
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
RMTAP
AUTOSWS
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
FEA4
FEA5
FEA6
FEA7
FEA8
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
FEA4 FEATURE 4
FEA5 FEATURE 5
FEA6 FEATURE 6
FEA7 FEATURE 7
FEA8 FEATURE 8
ROUTING ROUTING
CCTYPFEA CANCEL CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter cancel the feature for a call type.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 10+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
RMTAP
AUTOSWS
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
FEA4
FEA5
FEA6
FEA7
FEA8
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
FEA4 FEATURE 4
FEA5 FEATURE 5
FEA6 FEATURE 6
FEA7 FEATURE 7
FEA8 FEATURE 8
ROUTING ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT
QPOS
QWAIT
a[-b]
FUTURE1 FUTURE 1
FUTURE2 FUTURE 2
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
b: NAME=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 11+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CINCEPT CANCEL INTERCEPT
This parameter cancels the intercept for a call type.
FUTURE1 FUTURE 1
FUTURE2 FUTURE 2
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
can be supplied:
QWAIT.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
b: TIME1=
c: TIME2=
d: TIME3=
CGOS CANCEL GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter cancels the grade of service for a call type.
HOLD HOLDING
APPLID APPLICATION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 12+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L1
L1L2
L1L2L3
L1L2L3L4
L1L2L4
L1L2L4L3
L1L3
L1L3L2
L1L3L2L4
L1L3L4
L1L3L4L2
L1L4
L1L4L2
L1L4L2L3
L1L4L3
L1L4L3L2
L2
L2L1
L2L1L3
L2L1L3L4
L2L1L4
L2L1L4L3
L2L3
L2L3L1
L2L3L1L4
L2L3L4
L2L3L4L1
L2L4
L2L4L1
L2L4L1L3
L2L4L3
L2L4L3L1
L3
L3L1
L3L1L2
L3L1L2L4
L3L1L4
L3L1L4L2
L3L2
L3L2L1
L3L2L1L4
L3L2L4
L3L2L4L1
L3L4
L3L4L1
L3L4L1L2
L3L4L2
L3L4L2L1
L4
L4L1
L4L1L2
L4L1L2L3
L4L1L3
L4L1L3L2
L4L2
L4L2L1
L4L2L1L3
L4L2L3
L4L2L3L1
L4L3
L4L3L1
L4L3L1L2
L4L3L2
L4L3L2L1
NONE
Default: NONE
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 13+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
CLANG CANCEL LANGUAGE
This parameter cancels the language for a call type.
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 14-
CAN CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL PROCESSOR
This command cancels a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be PLA.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CAP : CAP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the call processor to be cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CAP- 1-
CONF CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CALL PROCESSOR
This command configures a call processor.
Notes:
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF CAP : CAP= ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the call processor to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CAP- 1-
CR CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL PROCESSOR
This command creates a call processor.
The created call processor is in the operating state PLA after the
command has been executed.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CAP : CAP= ,PBI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the call processor to be created.
PBI PHYSICAL BUS INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the call processor.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CAP- 1-
DIAG CAP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CALL PROCESSOR
for a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
1. DIAG CAP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG CAP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a call processor.
[ [
[ DIAG CAP : CAP= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the call processor to be diagnosed.
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CAP- 1+
DIAG CAP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a call
processor. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY interface test.
[ [
[ DIAG CAP : CAP= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the call processor to be diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CAP- 2-
DISP CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSOR
This command displays all call processors with their physical bus
interface numbers.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CAP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CAP- 1-
TEST CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CALL PROCESSOR
This command tests a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST CAP : [CAP=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the call processor to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active call processors
are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CAP- 1-
CAN CATAST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This command cancels the catastrophe condition for a LAC.
All subscribers are allowed to originate calls independently from catastrophe
immunities after execution of this command.
The display of CAT1 or CAT2 on the system panel is canceled if the
command has been successfully executed and no other LAC remains in this
status.
The command is acknowledged with PART. EXECD if the data cannot be transmitted
to all operational LTGs (i.e. those with OST = ACT or CBL). The
data are transferred in this case to the LTG when the LTG is reloaded the next
time from the CP memory.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CATAST : [LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local network for which the catastrophe
condition is being canceled.
The parameter is mandatory if more than one LAC is defined for
the exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CATAST- 1-
DISP CATAST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This command displays the currently valid catastrophe condition(s) of one or all
LACs.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CATAST : [LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code which is selected for the
display of the catastrophe condition.
If the parameter is omitted or an X is entered, then the catastrophe
conditions of all local area codes in the exchange are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CATAST- 1-
ENTR CATAST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This command enters a catastrophe condition for a LAC.
Attention:
Subscribers without an catastrophe immunity cannot originate any call after the
execution of this command. Terminating calls are not affected from the execution
of this command.
Subscribers need one of the catastrophe immunity values CATIM1 or CATIM2
for the origination of calls if CATCON = 1 has been activated for the LAC
where they belong to.
Subscribers need the catastrophe immunity value CATIM2 for the origination of
calls if CATCON = 2 has been activated.
Depending on the CATCON value one of the lamps CAT1 or CAT2 is
activated at the system panel if the command has been successfully executed.
No status change occurs at the system panel if that lamp was already active
before the execution of this command.
The current system status concerning the catastrophe conditions may be checked
using either DISP CATAST or DISP INDIC.
The command is acknowledged with PART. EXECD if the data cant be transmitted
to all operational LTGs (i.e. those with OST = ACT or CBL). The
data are transferred in this case to the LTG when the LTG is reloaded the next
time from the CP memory.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CATAST : CATCON= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CATCON CATASTROPHE CONDITION
This parameter specifies the catastrophe condition of a local network
of the exchange.
CATCON = 2 is more restrictive than CATCON = 1.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local network for which the catastrophe
condition is being assigned.
The parameter is mandatory if more than one LAC is defined for
the exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CATAST- 1-
ACT CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command activates either a single or all code block point groups.
It is not possible to activate the code block point group named
"MABEZ",because this group is internally used for traffic monitoring
of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Activation of all code block point groups does not include the
code block point group "MABEZ".
Prerequisites:
- The given code block point group must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block point
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CBPGRP- 1-
CAN CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command cancels a code block point group.
It is not possible to cancel the code block point group named
"MABEZ", because this group is used for traffic monitoring of
mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations) and is therefore
internally created and cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- No code block point is assigned to this group.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the existing code block
point group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CBPGRP- 1-
CR CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command creates a code block point group for the control
function Leaky Bucket. A number of code points may be assigned to
a code block point group with the MML command CR CBPT.
The Leaky Bucket control function limits the number of call attempts
to the code block points of the group to a predefined call attempt
rate. Reduction is active if the defined threshold of call attempts
per second is exceeded.
This results in the rejection of all call attempts to this group
which exceed the predefined limit (parameter LBUCLCR).
Notes:
- It is not possible to create a code block point group named
"MABEZ", because this group is internally used for traffic
monitoring of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
- The number of code block point groups within an exchange is
limited to 500.
- The administered leaky bucket threshold may not be less than
the administered leaky bucket limit call rate.
- The maximum number of code block points assigned to one CBPGRP
is 64.
- The CBPGRP has to be activated by the command ACT CBPGRP,
in order to start traffic control.
- The network management function Leaky Bucket may be activated
(parameter PRIVTRAF=CNTRL, standard value) or deactivated
(parameter PRIVTRAF=NOCNTRL) for a privileged subscriber
(i.e. BEV subscriber).
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CBPGRP : CBPGRP= ,LBUCLCR= [,LBTHR=] [,PRIVTRAF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group.
LBUCLCR LEAKY BUCKET LIMIT CALL RATE
This parameter specifies the limit of call attempts for the Leaky
Bucket function.
LCPS0P05 LIMIT 0.05 CALLS PER SECOND
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CBPGRP- 1+
CR CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LBTHR LEAKY BUCKET THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the maximum number of call
attempts per second which are not controlled by
Leaky Bucket.
Standard value of this parameter is 30 calls.
PRIVTRAF PRIVILEGED TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the privileged traffic,
i.e. traffic initiated by a BEV subscriber.
NOCNTRL NO_CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that privileged
traffic is not subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
CNTRL CONTROL
traffic is subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CBPGRP- 2-
DACT CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command deactivates either a single or all code block point groups.
Code block points connected to this code block point group will thus
no longer be blocked via the code block point translator.
It is not possible to deactivate the code block point group named
"MABEZ" because this group is used internally for traffic monitoring
of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Deactivation of all code block point groups does not include the
code block point group "MABEZ".
The deactivation of a code block point group has no effect on the
related code block points. Call Processing always has to process all
digits of the code block points before the activity status of the
code block point group can be evaluated.
Prerequisites:
- The given code block point group must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CBPGRP- 1-
DISP CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command displays a single, all or a list of code block point
groups with their specified limit call rate and the indicator for
privileged traffic.
The data of the code block point group "MABEZ" will be displayed,
although this code block point group is not created by the command
CR CBPGRP.
This code block point group is created internally after activation
of mass call event recognition, detection of a mass call event and
start of rate reduction for the relevant code.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CBPGRP- 1-
MOD CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command changes the limit call rate, leaky bucket threshold
and the indicator for privileged traffic for the specified CBPGRP.
Notes:
- The limit call rate can be changed at any time, i.e. even when
the controlling network function is in use.
- It is not possible to modify the code block point group named
"MABEZ" because this group is used internally for traffic
monitoring of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CBPGRP : CBPGRP= <,LBUCLCR= ,LBTHR= ,PRIVTRAF=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block
point group.
LBUCLCR LEAKY BUCKET LIMIT CALL RATE
This parameter specifies the limit of call attempts for the Leaky
Bucket function.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CBPGRP- 1+
MOD CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LBTHR LEAKY BUCKET THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the maximum number of call
attempts per second which are not controlled
by Leaky Bucket.
PRIVTRAF PRIVILEGED TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the privileged traffic,
i.e. traffic initiated by a BEV subscriber.
NOCNTRL NO_CONTROL
traffic is not subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
CNTRL CONTROL
traffic is subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CBPGRP- 2-
CAN CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT
This command cancels a code block point.
The code block point is either defined by NAME or by the
combination of CODE, ORIGDC or CAT.
Prerequisite:
- The code block point already exists.
Notes:
- It is not possible to cancel code block points belonging to
the code block point group "MABEZ", because they are used
internally to reduce traffic to mass call destinations
(MABEZ destinations).
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [CODE=[ ; [
[ CAN CBPT : NAME= [,ORIGDC=] [,CAT=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (i.e. the destination)
where traffic is blocked.
NAME CODE BLOCK POINT OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies the code block point object.
ORIGDC ORIG FOR DESTINATION CONTROLS
This parameter specifies the originating mark of the code block point.
ORIGDC serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic to
the entered digit combination.
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the code block point.
CAT serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic
to the entered digit combination.
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
COINB COIN BOX
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CBPT- 1+
CAN CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CBPT- 2-
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT
This command creates a code block point, i.e. a network traffic
management control is defined for the specified digit combination.
The parameter NAME specifies the code block point object.
The type of network traffic management control is defined by the
parameters PERC, CGAP or CBPGRP.
The destination code to be controlled by code blocking may be national
or international telephone numbers, service codes, local area codes,
carrier codes, country codes, etc. or suitable concatenations of these.
All code block points have to be preceded by the international or, if
applicable, the national prefix.
Especially in an open numbering plan using local areas a code block point
controlling a subscriber number has to be build by concatenation of
the national prefix, the local area code and the subscriber number.
In a closed numbering plan without local areas the subscriber number itself
has a national significant format and can be created as code block point.
Example: Within the local area 089 of an exchange a subscriber number
4711 exists.
- The code block point 0894711 blocks traffic to the given subscriber.
- The code block point 089 blocks traffic to the local area 089.
- If there is another local area 088 within the exchange, the code block
point 08 blocks the traffic to 088 and 089.
- The code 4711 is not controlled by code blocking as it represents not
a national or international telephone number or the most signficant digits
of such a number.
Code block points consist of digit combinations together with parameters
ORIGDC und CAT. Because the digit translator is not checked
to ensure that a code point exists for this digit combination, only code
block points should be created which refer to existing code points in
the digit translator.
This command facilitates
- the blocking of a certain percentage of traffic (see parameter PERC).
Thus it is possible to block a certain percentage of call attempts
for a given code block point.
- the blocking of call attempts for a certain time interval
(see parameter CGAP).
After each successful call attempt to a given code block point, it is
possible to block further call attempts for a certain time interval.
The first call after creation of the code block point or after recovery
is never blocked by call gapping.
- the assignment of code block points to a code block point group for
the Leaky Bucket control function (see parameter CBPGRP).
A total of 64 code block points may be assigned to a code block point
group.
Notes:
- The number of code block points within an exchange is limited to 10000.
- Each code block point can be marked with parameter TRAMEA=YES to be
controlled by traffic measurement (TRAMEA=NO, standard value).
In this case the assigned traffic measurement index is displayed
together with the command execution message.
- It is not possible to create a code block point for the code block point
group "MABEZ", because this group contains only code block points which
are used internally to reduce traffic to mass call destinations
(MABEZ destinations).
- In case of IN service numbers traffic to the original dialed number
(leading to an IN-trigger) as well as traffic to the number received
from the SCP (service control point) can be reduced.
Creating the IN service number and the translated number received
from the SCP as code block points in parallel would lead to a traffic
reduction to both destinations independently of each other.
Traffic reduction for IN service numbers can be used to prevent
the SCP from overload.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CBPT- 1+
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,PERC= [ [
[ CR CBPT : CODE= [,NAME=] [,ORIGDC=] [,CAT=] ,CGAP= [
[ [,CBPGRP=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,INCEPT= [,TRAMEA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies a unique name for a code block point object.
This name is the key that identifies the code block point and must not
be changed.
Six control types share a naming pool:
- CR CBPT,
- ENTR TRSVCNTL,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = SKIP,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANTO,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANFROM,
- ENTR ACC.
This means that each NAME may only be used by one of these
controls.
The user may specify any name not yet used in the above-mentioned
naming pool except for two specific values:
- The user must not choose a single "X" as name because this input
stands for all existing values of a display command parameter.
- The NAME "MABEZ" is reserved for the mass call control function
which is an automatic network management control.
Therefore "MABEZ" must not be entered in this command.
Automatic instance naming is performed if this parameter is not
entered, i.e. the system itself assigns a name to the code block
point object.
the entered destination depending on the origin of the call.
Using the parameter ORIGDC the following points must be considered:
- Value 0 is used as subscriber origin. All subscribers are
implicitly assigned this value. Assigning this value to trunk groups
is not possible.
- If a code block point is created without ORIGDC, the specified
control is independent of the origin of the call. If, in addition,
a code block point with the same code and a specific ORIGDC-value
is created, all calls with this origin are controlled in the specified
way. Calls with any other ORIGDC-value are controlled by the code
block point created without origin.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CBPT- 2+
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example:
A code block point 1234 is created without ORIGDC, and specifying
PERC=PERC100. The same code is created with ORIGDC=1, and
specifying PERC=PERC50. All calls with ORIGDC unequal 1 are then
blocked with 100%. Calls with ORIGDC=1 are blocked with 50%.
CAT CATEGORY
COINB COIN BOX
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
PERC PERCENTAGE OF BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the percentage of traffic to the
code block point which has to be blocked.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12.5 % BLOCKING
CGAP CALL GAPPING TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval when the traffic to
the code block point is blocked.
SEC0 0 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P1 0.1 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC1 1 SECOND CALL GAP
INF INFINITE CALL GAP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CBPT- 3+
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group
for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter specifies the intercept code (e.g. an announcement)
where the blocked traffic will be diverted if blocking is valid.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 0
TRAMEA TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement has
to be activated or deactivated for the code block point.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CBPT- 4-
DISP CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT
This command displays the code block points and their blocking
functions. One or more of the parameters CODE, NAME, PERC,
CGAP, CBPGRP, TRAMEA or INCEPT may be entered.
The code block point belonging to the code block point group "MABEZ"
will also be displayed although it is not created by the command
CR CBPT.
This code block point group is created internally after activation of
mass call recognition, detection of a mass call event and start of
rate reduction for the relevant code.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [CODE=[ [[,PERC= [[ [
[ DISP CBPT : NAME= [,CGAP= [ [,TRAMEA=] [,INCEPT=] ; [
[ [ [ [[,CBPGRP=[[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code
block point(s) to be displayed.
This parameter specifies the percentage of traffic to the code
block point which has to be blocked.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
X ALL PERC VALUES
This parameter specifies the time interval when the traffic to
the code block point is blocked.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CBPT- 1+
DISP CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL GAP VALUES
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group
for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement is
activated or deactivated for the code block point.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
INDEP INDEPENDENT
This parameter specifies the intercept for the code block point(s)
to be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CBPT- 2-
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT
This command modifies the percentage, time interval or code block
point group of a particular code block point according to the values
entered for the parameters PERC, CGAP or CBPGRP.
The blocking function may not be changed (e.g. from code blocking
to call gapping).
The modification of INCEPT and the activation or deactivation
of traffic measurement for the code block point by parameter
TRAMEA are also possible.
The code block point is either defined by NAME or by the combination
of CODE, ORIGDC or CAT.
Prerequisite:
- The code block point already exists.
Note:
- It is not possible to modify a code block point belonging to, or so
that it subsequently belongs to, the code block point group "MABEZ".
The code block points belonging to this group are used internally
to reduce traffic to mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [CODE=[ [[,PERC= [[ [
[ MOD CBPT : NAME= [,ORIGDC=] [,CAT=] [,CGAP= [ [,INCEPT=] [
[ [ [ [[,CBPGRP=[[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TRAMEA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
the entered digit combination.
CAT CATEGORY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CBPT- 1+
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COINB COIN BOX
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
This parameter specifies the (new) percentage of traffic to the
code block point which has to be blocked.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the (new) time interval when the
traffic to the code block point is blocked.
This parameter specifies the (new) name of a code block point
group for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter specifies the (new) intercept code (e.g. an announce-
ment) where the blocked traffic will be diverted if blocking is
valid.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CBPT- 2+
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement has
to be activated or deactivated for the code block point.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CBPT- 3-
DISP CBPULS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COIN BOX PULSE
This command displays the currently valid coinbox pulse factors.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CBPULS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CBPULS- 1-
ENTR CBPULS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COIN BOX PULSE
This command enters coinbox pulse factors.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CBPULS : CBPULS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPULS COINBOX PULSE
This parameter specifies the coinbox pulse factors.
a-b
a: NUMBER OF THE COINBOX PULSES=
Specifies the number of the coinbox
pulse which is to be repeated
(i.e. the nth).
b: MULTIPLICATION FACTOR=
Specifies the multiplication factor
for coinbox pulses.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CBPULS- 1-
CONF CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This command configures a central clock generator side to the requested
operating state.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF CCG : CCG= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the side of CCG.
This parameter specifies the target operational states.
The following table shows which operational state transitions
are permitted.
Compatibilities:
+------------+---------------------+
! from / to ! ACT STB MBL !
+------------+---------------------+
! ACT ! - 1 !! !
! STB ! - - + !
! MBL ! - + - !
! NAC ! - - + !
! UNA ! - + + !
+------------+---------------------+
+ : legal state transition
- : illegal state transition
1 : legal state transition, if the redundant CCG
is in the operational state STB.
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or loss of
calls. This operational state transition is permitted, if the
redundant CCG is in the operational state STB.
STB STANDBY
If parameter SUP=Y is specified, messages from the periphery are
suppressed during command execution.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCG- 1-
DISP CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This command displays the state and error registers for the central
clock generator CCG.
Notes:
- Reference frequencies which are not set are evaluated as GOOD in the
associated output mask.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CCG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CCG- 1-
STAT CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCG
This command displays the CCG operating state.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT CCG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT CCG- 1-
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCG-PARAMETER
This command displays the internal CCG parameters.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CCGPAR : CCG= ,DATA0= ,DATA1= ,DATA2= ,DATA3= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central clock generator side.
DATA0 SPECIFIC CCG DATA0
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
CCG.
CCG.
CCGA only.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
The following modifications of SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 .. SPECIFIC CCG DATA3
a) REQMOD: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 01
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the modifications made by
PRIOFR, DISFS and DISCONF.
Expected acknowledgement: REQMODACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 01 xx yy zz
with: xx see xx for PRIOACK - MOD CCGPAR b)
= 00 = Reference frequencies have HW priority
= 01 = Reference frequency 1 has priority
yy see xx for DISFSACK - MOD CCGPAR c)
= 00 = Reference frequencies are supervised
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 1+
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
= 01 = Reference frequency supervision disabled
zz see xx for DISCOACK - MOD CCGPAR d)
= 00 = All reference frequencies are enabled
01 = Reference 0 disabled
03 = Reference 0 and reference 1 disabled
04 = Partner reference disabled
05 = Partner reference and reference 0 disabled
07 = Partner reference and
references 0 and 1 disabled
b) PDACT: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 02
This byte combination interrogates the current PD value. An
evaluation is only useful in conjunction with the current phase
offset (Acknowledgement to the command OFFSET).
Expected acknowledgement: PDACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in PD contents
yy = 1st byte before point in PD contents
zz = 2nd byte before point in PD contents (MSB)
c) OFFSET: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 03
This byte combination interrogates the present phase offset, which
is a result of the previous phase corrections.
Expected acknowledgement: OFFACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in offset contents
yy = 1st byte before point in offset contents
zz = 2nd byte before point in offset contents (MSB)
d) SIREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 04
This byte combination interrogates the original contents of the
integration register stored in the ANMOD.
Expected acknowledgement: SIACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in safeguarding IR
yy = 1st byte before point in safeguarding IR
zz = 2nd byte before point in safeguarding IR (MSB)
e) IREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 05
This byte combination interrogates the current contents of the
integration register.
Expected acknowledgement: IACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in integration register
yy = 1st byte before point in integration register
zz = 2nd byte before point in integration register (MSB)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 2+
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
f) DAC: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 06
This byte combination interrogates the current DAC value.
Expected acknowledgement: DACACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in DAC value
yy = 1st byte before point in DAC value
zz = 2nd byte before point in DAC value (MSB)
g) PREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 07
This byte combination interrogates the current contents of the
proportional register.
Expected acknowledgement: PACK
and output of
with: xx = Byte after point in the proportional register
yy = 1st byte before point in proportional register
zz = 2nd byte before point in proportional register (MSB)
CCGE only.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
a) REQPRIO: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 12
PRIOFR.
Expected acknowledgement: PRIOACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 12 mn op qr
with: m = priority for frequency 1
n = priority for frequency 2
o = priority for frequency 3
p = priority for frequency 4
q = priority for GPS
r = priority for RB
possible values for m, n, o, p, q, and r
= 1 = highest priority
= 2-6 = level of the priority
= 7 = lowest priority
= 8 = disabled
b) REQAFR: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 14
This byte combination interrogates the current AFR mode.
Expected acknowledgement: AFRACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 14 mm oo pp
with: mm = AFR mode
possible values for mm
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 3+
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
= 1 = AFR disabled
= 2 = AFR enabled , normal
= 3 = AFR enabled , corrected
oo = age of the quarz-fault in days
pp = time for learning in hours max. 24
c) REQCLKTYPE: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 15
This byte combination interrogates the clock characteristic
combined with AFR.
Expected acknowledgement: CLKTYPEACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 15 xx 00 00
with: xx = clock characteristic combined with AFR
possible values for xx
= 1 = G812 T1, AFR =1*10 exp -8
= 2 = G812 T1, AFR =2*10 exp -7
= 3 = G812 T1, AFR =5*10 exp -6
= 4 = Stratum3E, AFR =5*10 exp -6
= 5 = Stratum3, AFR =5*10 exp -6
d) REQSQUELCH: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 17
ENSQELCH.
Expected acknowledgement: ENSQUELCHACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 17 0m no pq
with: m = T4-HOSquelch CCGES
n = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 1
o = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 2
p = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 3
q = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 4
e) REQREVERT: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 18
This byte combination interrogates the current
revertconfiguration.
Expected acknowledgement: REVERTACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 18 mm nn 00
with: = mm
= 1 = strategy Non Revertive
= 2 = strategy Revertive
= nn choice of reference
possible values for nn
= 0 = holdover
= 1 = input reference 1
= 5 = GPS module
= 6 = RB module
= F = auto
f) REQFREQMIST: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 20
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 4+
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This byte combination interrogates the frequency fault
of the local quarz. The age of the correctionvalue can
be read with REQAFR, if it is younger than 100 days.
Expected acknowledgement: FREQMISTAcK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 20 vm mm mm
with: v = sign of the relativ frequency fault
possible values for v
= 0 = positiv
= 1 = negativ
m...m = mantisse of the relativ frequency fault
*10 exp -11 decimal
g) REQREF SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 22
This byte combination interrogates the current state
of the references.
Expected acknowledgement: REFACK
and output of
with: m = state of reference frequency 1
n = state of reference frequency 2
o = state of reference frequency 3
p = state of reference frequency 4
q = state of GPS
r = state of RB
possible values for m, n, o, p, q and/or r
= 0 = disabled
= 1 = search
= 2 = check
= 3 = signal error
= 4 = wait
= 5 = frequency error
= 6 = ok
= 7 = selected
h) REQVER SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 24
This byte combination interrogates the current
FPGA- and FW-version.
Expected acknowledgement: VERACK
and output of
with: m.n.o = FPGA-version in hexadecimal
p.q.r = FW-version
i) UNKACK
This acknowledgement arrives, if wrong or for the
CCGE unknown data were sent :
output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 30 00 00 00
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 5-
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCG-PARAMETER
This command modifies the CCG control parameters.
This command is a dangerous command because it may destroy the
network synchronism.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CCGPAR : CCG= ,DATA0= ,DATA1= ,DATA2= ,DATA3= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central clock generator side.
CCG.
CCG.
CCG.
CCGA only.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
a) RESET: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 01
With this byte combination the CCG is reset, i.e. start in
mode A, if a reference frequency is available (without heating
the VCO).
Expected acknowledgement: MSTSY
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 01 00 00 00
b) PRIOFR: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 02,
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Restoration of HW priority
= 01 = Reference frequency 1 now has priority
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 1+
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
= 02 = Reference frequency 2 now has priority
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination changes the hardware priority of the
reference frequencies. If the frequency given in the command is
available, a switchover is made correspondingly.
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 02 xx 00 00
with: xx = 00 = HW priority restored
c) DISFS: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 03
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Switch off disable
= 01 = Switch on disable
This byte combination disables or reactivates the supervision of
the reference frequency (frequencies) being applied.
Expected acknowledgement: DISFSACK
and output of
with: xx = 00 = Disable switched off (supervision)
= 01 = Disable switched on (no supervision)
d) DISCONF: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 04
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Switch off disable
= 01 = Disable reference 0
= 02 = Disable reference 1
= 03 = Disable reference 0 and reference 1
= 04 = Disable partner reference
= 05 = Disable partner reference and reference 0
= 06 = Disable partner reference and reference 1
= 07 = Disable partner reference and
references 0 and 1
This byte combination disables or reactivates the reference
frequencies being applied at the CCG. Any combination of
the two external reference frequencies (reference 0 and
reference 1) and of the reference frequency of the partner
CCG (partner reference) can be disabled.
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 07 puts the CCG in HOLDOVER mode.
Expected acknowledgement: DISCOACK
and output of
with: xx = 00 = All disables switched off
03 = Reference 0 and reference 1 disabled
04 = Partner reference disabled
07 = Partner reference and
references 0 and 1 disabled
e) UIREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 15
This byte combination saves the contents of the integration
register on disk.
Expected acknowledgement: SADIR
and output of
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 2+
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCGE only.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
a) RESET: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 11
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = AF
With this byte combination the CCG is reset,
i.e. a power-on-reset is started. While booting there is no
frequency available.
Expected acknowledgement: MSTSY
b) PRIOFR: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 12,
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = mn
m = Reference frequency 1 has priority
n = Reference frequency 2 has priority
possible values for m and n:
= 0 = no change
= 1 = highest priority
= 2-6 = level of the priority
= 7 = lowest priority
= 8 = disabled
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = op
o = Reference frequency 3 has priority
p = Reference frequency 4 has priority
possible values as for m and n
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = qr
q = GPS has priority
r = RB has priority
possible values as for m and n
This byte combination changes the hardware priority of the
reference frequencies. If the frequency given in the command is
available, a switchover is made correspondingly.
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 12 mn op qr
with: mn, op, qr from the command
c) AFR: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 14
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = not used
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = nn = quarz-fault learning algorithm
= 0 = no change
= 1 = restart of quarz-fault learning algorithm
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = not used
With the AFR (Advanced Frequency Rejection) the
quarz-fault learning algorithm can be restarted.
Expected acknowledgement: AFRACK
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 14 mm oo pp
with: mm = AFR mode
= 1 = AFR disabled
= 2 = AFR enabled , normal
= 3 = AFR enabled , corrected
oo = age of the quarz-fault in days
pp = time for learning in hours max. 24
d) CLKTYPE: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 15
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = xx = clock characteristic combined wi
possible values for xx
= 0 = no change
= 1 = G812 T1, AFR =1*10 exp -8
= 2 = G812 T1, AFR =2*10 exp -7
= 3 = G812 T1, AFR =5*10 exp -6
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 3+
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
= 4 = Stratum3E, AFR =5*10 exp -6
= 5 = Stratum3, AFR =5*10 exp -6
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 73 to prevent errors
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = B1 to prevent errors
With this byte combination the clock charcteristic can be
decided.
Expected acknowledgement: CLKTYPEACK
and output of
for xx see CLKTYPE
e) ENSQELCH SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 17
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 0m
possible values for m
see table below
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = no = T3-HOSquelch
possible values for no
n = for CCGED-1
o = for CCGED-2
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = pq
possible values for pq
p = for CCGED-3
q = for CCGED-4
This byte combination determines which T4-clockoutputs
disable the clockoutput (squelch), if the clockquality
gets too bad.
On CCGES there are 4 clockoutputs, on CCGED there are
16 clockoutputs, this are 4 groups with 4 clockoutputs.
Bit = 1 means Squelch enabled.
CCGES 4 3 2 1
CCGED 26,28,30,32 18,20,22,24 10,12,14,16 2,4,6,8
bit in m 8 4 2 1
Expected acknowledgement: ENSQUELCHACK
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 17 0m no pq
m = T4-HOSquelch CCGES
n = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 1
o = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 2
p = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 3
q = T4-HOSquelch CCGED 4
as shown in the table beyond
f) REVERT SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 18
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = mm
= 0 = no change
= 1 = strategy Non Revertive
= 2 = strategy Revertive
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = nn choice of reference
= 0 = no change / holdover
= 5 = GPS module
= 6 = RB module
= F = auto
With this byte combination there is the possibility
to choice a special reference and the strategy for
changing the references.
Expected acknowledgement: REVERTACK
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 18 mm nn 00
mm and nn see REVERT
g) SETDEF SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 19
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 4+
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = AF to prevent errors
This byte combination sets the default values for
all CCG parameters. It takes 45 minutes.
Expected acknowledgement: SETDEFACK
and output of
h) UNKACK
This acknowledgement arrives, if wrong or for the
CCGE unknown data were sent :
output of
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 5-
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CCNC
This command configures the CCNP and all other CCNC processors to
a new operating state.
If active units SIPA, SILTC or SILT are to be configured to target
state MBL, messages may get lost in the rerouting of traffic to
alternative signal channels. This loss of messages can be avoided
if the signal channels concerned are configured to state BL1 or BL2
beforehand (see command CONF C7LINK).
If CCS7 rejection of change to MBL via MMI for the last active unit
(LM15903) has been implemented it is not allowed to switch off
the last active unit of a MUXM or CCNP pair or the last active
SILTC or SILT as this may cause total breakdown of CCS7 signaling.
The configuration command can be logged because there is no
cr eate command for processors CCNP, SIPA, SILTC and SILT.
If execution of the configuration command is not successful
the following error messages are output,
displaying the reason for the failure.
Possible errors are :
Module 1:
Error| Fault text | Cause/measure
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
1 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT DATA NOT EXEC- | Try again later.
| UTED, NO SUPERVISION TIMER AVAILABLE | If several attempts are
| LACK OF RESOURCES OR SW ERROR | unsuccessful use NSTART 0.
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
2 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT NETWORK DATA |Run diagnosis for CCNP in
| STOPPED, SECOND NEGATIVE OR MISSING | state STB.
| RESPONSE, SW OR HW FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
3 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT DATA STOPPED, |Configure redundant CCNP
| STB-CCNP NOT LOADED | to STB.
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
4 | TRANSFER OF TRANSIENT DATA STOPPED, |Configure redundant CCNP
| NO END FROM TRT SIMP, | to STB.
| SW OR HW FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
5 | SECOND MISSING RESPONSE TO |Configure redundant CCNP
| START_TRANS, HW OR SW FAULT | to STB
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
7 | EVENT IS INVALID IN THE CURRENT | NSTART 0 necessary
| PROCESS, STATE OF MSSMD, SW ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
8 | PROCESS FOR CCNP LOADING COULD NOT | Try again later.
| BE STARTED, LACK OF RESOURCES | If several attempts are
| OR SW ERROR | unsuccessful use NSTART 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Module 3 :
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
1 | TASK NOT EXECUTED BECAUSE OF ERRORS | Dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
2 | WRONG PID IN MESSAGE, SOFTWARE ERROR | Write SW error report,
| | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
3 | CONFIGURATION NOT ALLOWED -- | Repeat command using
| WRONG DEVICE NUMBER | correct device number
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
4 | CONFIGURATION NOT ALLOWED -- | Repeat command using
| WRONG PARAMETER VALUES | correct values
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
5 | TIMER ORDER FAILED: LACK OF RESOUR- | Try again later if no SWSG
| CES OR SOFTWARE ERROR IF SWSG OCCURS | occurs
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
6 | CURRENT STATUS OF CCNP DOES NOT |Try again after CCNP has
| ALLOW TASK EXECUTION, | been configured to ACT
| NO CCNP IS ACTIVE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
7 | UPDATE ON DISK NOT POSSIBLE | Try again later
| BECAUSE NO NOTEBOOK AVAILABLE |
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 1+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
8 | UPDATE ON DISK NOT POSSIBLE; | Try to repeat command
| NEW STATES ARE NOT ON DISK |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
9 | NO PARALLEL TASK FOR CONFIGURATION | Try again later
| ALLOWED |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
10 | STATE TRANSITION OR RESULTING | Check operating states.
| COMBINATION OF OPERATING STATES | No other operator measures
| ILLEGAL AFTER OPERATOR REQUEST | necessary
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
11 | REQUESTED STATE ALREADY ENTERED | Dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
12 | REQUEST NOT ALLOWED BECAUSE STOP | Dont retry
| LOADING IS ACTIVE FOR A CCNP |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
13 | TASK TERMINATION BECAUSE OF HARD | Try again later
| SWITCHOVER |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
14 | INTERNAL ERROR IN PROCESS, SWSG | Write SW error report,
| OCCURS | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
15 | ERROR WHEN CALLING A SUBSYSTEM C7 | Write SW error report,
| EXTERNAL PROCEDURE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
16 | ERROR WHEN CALLING A SUBSYSTEM C7 | Write SW error report,
| INTERNAL PROCEDURE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
17 | ERROR WHEN READING A TRANSIENT | Write SW error report,
| DEVICE STATE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
18 | ERROR WHEN WRITING A TRANSIENT | Write SW error report,
| DEVICE STATE. ONLY SEMIPERMANENT | check states
| STATES MAY HAVE CHANGED |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
19 | ERROR WHEN READING A SEMIPERMANENT | Write SW error report,
| DEVICE STATE | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
20 | ERROR WHEN WRITING A SEMIPERMANENT | Write SW error report if
| DEVICE STATE | an SWSG occurs; otherwise
| | lack of resources,
| | dont retry if SWSG occurs
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
21 | UNDEFINED MESSAGE FROM CCNC | Corrective maintenance
| | according to MMN, run
| | diagnosis for processor
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
22 | UNDEFINED RESPONSE VALUE FROM IOCP | Corrective maintenance
| | according to MMN,
| | check IOCP
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
23 | UNDEFINED VALUES IN RECEIVED MESSAGE | Corrective maintenance
| | according to MMN,
| | dont retry
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
24 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF | Corrective maintenance
| ANSWER FROM CCNP | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
25 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF | Corrective maintenance
| ANSWER FROM IOCP, SW ERROR | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+-------------------------
26 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF ANSWER | Corrective maintenance
| FROM CCNP DURING SOFTSWITCHOVER | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
27 | DEPAS DENIES ACCESS TO CCNC SEMILIB | Try later
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
28 | CCNP NOT IN STATE SEZ_R AFTER POSI- | Write SW error report
| TIVE LOAD ACKNOWLEDGE FROM FA:CCNC, |
| OR SIMP NOT SEZ_R DURING INI2 CON- |
| TROLLED BY FA:CCNC |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
29 | INVALID IOGPGCH COMMAND FOR IOCP | Write SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
30 | INVALID IORSOUT COMMAND FOR IOCP | Write SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
31 | INVALID IOKONF COMMAND FOR IOCP | Write SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 2+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
32 | "NO IOP AVAILABLE FOR CCNC ACCESS" | Corrective maintenance
| IS RESPONSE FROM IOCP | according to MMN, check
| | IOCP, no CCNC error
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
33 | COMMAND ACK BETWEEN IOP AND CCNP NOT | Corrective maintenance
| SUCCESSFUL DURING CCNP RESET, | according to MMN
| CCNP ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
34 | COMMAND RDY BETWEEN IOP AND CCNP NOT | Corrective maintenance
| SUCCESSFUL DURING CCNP RESET, | according to MMN
| CCNP ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
35 | SIMP STATUS NOT THE SAME AS THE ONE |Reload CCNP
| STORED IN CP DATABASE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
36 | SIMP DEVICE NUMBER NOT THE SAME AS |Corrective maintenance
| THE ONE STORED IN CP DATABASE | according to MMN,
| | reload CCNP
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
37 | CONFIGURATION IN SIMP IS NOT IN |Corrective maintenance
| STATE IDLE | according to MMN,
| | reload CCNP
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
38 | SIPA CONFIGURATION FAILED IN PARTNER |Run diagnosis for affected
| CCNP, HARDWARE FAILURE OR NO TIMER | CCNP, repeat command,
| FOR CONFIGURATION COMMAND TO CCNP IN | display states.
| STATE STB; FOR DETAILS SEE INI2 | Corrective maintenance
| MEASURE FOR CCNP IN STATE STB | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
39 | START OF REQUESTED CCNP HARD SWITCH- |Check CCNP states
| OVER |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
40 | PROCESS OF ADMINISTRATION: | Try again later
| CCS7 RUNNING, |
| SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
41 | CHANGING OF SEMIPERMANENT CCS7 DATA | Try again later
| ACTIVE, SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE |
---+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
42 | AFTER LOADING STB CCNP, ONE OR |Corrective maintenance
| MORE PARTIAL FAILURES IN STB CCNP | according to MMN,
| | check state of all SILTC
| | in STB CCNP. SILTCs
| | in state NAC are the
| | ones affected.
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
43 | SIPA STATES IN THE SIMP ARE NOT THE | Corrective maintenance
| SAME AS THE STATES STORED IN | according to MMN
| CP DATABASE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
44 | ERROR AT INTERFACE TO SUBSYSTEM P7; | Write SW error report
| CORRECT ALARMING NOT POSSIBLE, |
| SW ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
45 | DURING INCLUSION OF CCNP INTO | Corrective maintenance
| CP SCAN CYCLE THE TIMER FOR | according to MMN
| CCNP STATUS CHECK EXPIRES |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
46 | DANGEROUS STATUS REQUEST: | Decide what to do
| TAKING THE LAST CCNP OUT OF SERVICE | ( enter + or - )
| WILL LEAD TO CCS7 FAILURE. |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
47 | NEW SIPA STATUS ONLY TRANSFERRED TO | Write SW error report,
| ACT CCNP; CHANGE OF CP DATABASE | repeat the command
| (AND STB CCNP) NOT POSSIBLE, |
| UPDATE ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
48 | STOP OF CCNC COMMUNICATION TEST WAS | Write SW error report
| NOT SUCCESSFUL DURING CCNC SOFT |
| SWITCHOVER,SW ERROR IN PROCESS MSTCT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
49 | SETTING OF TIMER NOT POSSIBLE DURING | Try again later
| REPETITION OF A CONFIGURATION |
| COMMAND TO SIMP AFTER SIMP-RESPONSE |
| NOT IDLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
50 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF RECEIPT, | Corrective maintenance
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 3+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| NO ANSWER FROM CCNP AFTER | according to MMN
| CONF_MUXS_CCNC COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
51 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF ANSWER |Check alarming for
| FROM CCNP AFTER STATUS SILTC REQUEST | SILT/SILTC
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
52 | SIMP RESPONDS WITH "CONF-SIMP- |Configure SILT/SILTC in
| NOT-IDLE MONITORING" AFTER COMMAND | state UNA to state MBL
| REPETITIONS. SIMP ERROR IN |
| SILT/SILTC STATE MONITORING FOR UNA |
| SILT/SILTC |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
53 | CONFIGURATION OF THE LAST ACTIVE | Dont retry! If you want
| UNIT TO STATE MBL NOT ALLOWED ! | to take this unit out of
| | service, switch off its
| | power !
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
54 | REQUESTED UNIT NOT IN STATE MBL |If you want to repeat the
| | command change state of
| | unit to MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
55 | DEFAULT ERROR MESSAGE: DURING |Check states of SILT and
| CP-ISTART OR CCNP HARD SWITCHOVER OR | SILTC with MML command
| ACT CCNP LOADING OR INTERRUPTION OF | STAT CCNC
| MML SILT/SILTC CONFIGURATION, A SILT |
| OR SILTC FAILED;CONFIGURATION TO UNA.|
| THE ORIGINAL ERROR MESSAGE IS LOST. |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
56 | WRONG SEQUENCE OF JOBS FROM PROCESS | Dont retry,
| MSFCT | write SW error report
| | for MSFCT
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
57 | DURING CCNP HARD SWITCHOVER THE NEW | Corrective maintenance
| ACT CCNP SENDS NO RESPONSE TO THE | according to MMN
| SWITCHOVER COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
70 | ACKNOWLEDEMENT NOT USED BY | Write SW error report
| MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
71 | STATE TRANSITION ILLEGAL | Check processor state
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
72 | PROCESSOR NOT LOADABLE; | Write SW error report
| NOT USED FOR MMI-OUTPUT |
| (FOR DETAILED INFO, SEE CFIDEN, |
| FNR_C_100) |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
73 | PROCESSOR CANNOT BE CONFIGURED, | Run diagnosis for
| PROCESSOR DOES NOT RESPOND TO | affected processor
| CONFIGURATION COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
74 | SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT ALLOWED, | Try again later
| BECAUSE TRAFFIC LOAD TOO HIGH |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
75 | SIMP CONFTIMER RUN DOWN, PROCESSOR | Run diagnosis for
| DOES NOT RESPOND TO | affected processor
| CONFIGURATION COMMAND |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
76 | UPDATE OF SEMIPERMANENT DATA NOT | Try again later
| POSSIBLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
77 | SIMP UPDATE SEMAPHORE SET, | Try again later
| ANOTHER TASK IS RUNNING |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
78 | PROCESSOR STATE ALREADY ENTERED, | Write SW error report
| ERROR NUMBER NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
79 | PROCESSOR NOT ACCESSIBLE, | Check operating states of
| CONFIGURATION NOT POSSIBLE | preceding processors
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
80 | DANGEROUS STATE TRANSITION, |
| NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
81 | CCNC NOT COMPLETELY LOADED/CONFIGURED|Check operating states of
| | SILTCs and SILTs;
| | corrective maintenance for
| | processors in state UNA
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 4+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
82 | PROCESSOR TO BE CONFIGURED IS | Check operating states of
| CONNECTED WITH OTHER ACTIVE | succeeding processors
| PROCESSOR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
83 | CONFIGURATION IN SIMP NOT IN STATE | Try again later
| IDLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
84 | CCNP OR LINK(S) CONGESTED; | Try again later or request
| SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE | hard switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
85 | LEVEL 3 IN SIMP NOT IN STATE IDLE, | Try again later
| SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
86 | AT LEAST ONE SILTC NOT ACCESSIBLE BY | Corrective maintenance
| STB CCNP, SOFT SWITCHOVER | according to MMN; then
| NOT ALLOWED | try again
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
87 | MORE THAN 5 MSUS IN QUEUE SQPSIMP, | Try again later or request
| SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT POSSIBLE | hard switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
88 | CENTRAL SPOOL PROCESS DOES NOT ALLOW | Try again later or request
| SOFT SWITCHOVER | hard switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
89 | SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT ALLOWED AS TOO | Try again later or request
| MANY OUT OF SERVICE MESSAGES | hard switchover (uncond)
| RECEIVED FOR LINKS |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
90 | SOFT SWITCHOVER NOT ALLOWED BECAUSE | Corrective maintenance
| AT LEAST ONE SILTC WITH PARTIAL | according to MMN. Then try
| FAILURE IN STB CCNP | again or request hard
| | switchover (uncond)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
91 | STATUS MONITORING FOR UNA SILT OR | Try later; check status
| SILTC IS ACTIVE IN PU:SIMP; SIMP | of SILT and SILTC;
| ALWAYS RESPONDS WITH NOT-IN-IDLE, | configure UNA devices to
| SIMP ERROR | MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
92 | CONFIGURATION OF LAST ACTIVE SILT TO | Dont retry; if you want
| MBL NOT ALLOWED | to take this unit out of
| | service switch off its
| | power and configure it
| | from UNA to MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
93 | CONFIGURATION OF LAST ACTIVE SILTC | Dont retry; if you want
| TO MBL NOT ALLOWED | to take this unit out of
| | service switch off its
| | power and configure it
| | from UNA to MBL
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
94 | SOFTWARE ERROR, IMPLAUSIBLE DATA IN | Dont retry; if SWSG
| COMMAND TO CCNP | occurs, write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
100 | INITIAL VALUE AFTER POWER UP NOT |
| USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
101 | TEST PATTERN CORRUPTED DURING | Run diagnosis for affected
| PROCESSOR LOADING, HARDWARE FAULT | processor. Corrective
| | maintenance according to
| | MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
102 | CHECKSUM FAILURE, DATA CORRUPTED | Check load file on disk,
| DURING PROCESSOR LOADING, | write SW error report
| HARDWARE FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
103 | SUMMARY ALARM (HARDWARE) IN FIRM- | Corrective maintenance
| WARE-APS. AN ALARM OCCURS WHEN | according to MMN
| LOADING A PROCESSOR, HW FAULT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
104 | WATCHDOG-ALARM 1 IN FIRMWARE-APS, | Corrective maintenance
| HW OR SW FAULT | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
105 | WRONG SEQUENCE OF LOAD SOFTWARE WHEN | Write SW error report
| LOADING THE SIMP, SW ERROR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
106 | RESET BY RESET-COMMAND IN | Write SW error report
| SOFTWARE-APS NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 5+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
107 | TIMER FAILURE WHILE LOADING A | Repeat command after
| PROCESSOR, SW ERROR | delay; if error remains
| | present: write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
108 | RESET BY RESET-COMMAND IN FIRMWARE- |
| APS NOT USED BY MMI-OUTPUT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
109 | WATCHDOG ALARM 2 BY COMMUNICATION- | Run diagnosis for affected
| TEST, RESET OF A PROCESSOR BECAUSE A | processor. Corrective
| COMMUNICATION COMMAND DOES NOT REACH | maintenance according to
| THE PROCESSOR, HW OR SW FAULT | MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
110 | HALT IN PROCEDURE INDIC, WORK QUEUE | Run diagnosis for affected
| IS FULL | processor. Corrective
| | maintenance according to
| | MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
111 | TIMER FOR CYCLIC LOAD_REQUEST CANNOT | Repeat command after
| BE SET, SW ERROR | delay; if error remains
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
112 | TIMER FOR LOAD_DATA CANNOT BE SET, | Repeat command after
| SW ERROR | delay; if error remains
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
113 | SUMMARY ALARM (HARDWARE) IN SOFT- | Run diagnosis for affected
| WARE APS, HW OR SW FAULT | processor, repeat command
| | after delay; if error
| | remains present: write
| | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
114 | WATCHDOG ALARM 1 IN SOFTWARE-APS, | Run diagnosis for affected
| HW OR SW FAULT | processor, repeat command
| | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
115 | WRONG STATE EVENT IN PK:RECOVERY, | Run diagnosis for affected
| SW ERROR | processor, repeat command
| | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
116 | FAILURE WHEN TESTING A DUALPORT | Corrective maintenance
| HW FAULT | according to MMN
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
117 | HALT IN FA, WORK QUEUE IS FILLED, | Run diagnosis for affected
| HW OR SW FAULT | CCNP; write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
118 | TIMER IN FA COULD NOT BE SET, | Run diagnosis for affected
| SW ERROR | SIMP. If error occurs
| | again: write SW error
| | report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
119 | NO LOAD_REQUEST OF A PROCESSOR, | Repeat command after
| HW FAULT | delay; if error remains
| | present: replace
| | affected processor
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
120 | LOAD FILE FOR THE PROCESSORS SIPA, | Reset the processor
| SILTC, SILTD TOO LONG | manually, if error remains
| | present: change CCNC load-
| | lib (change of APS-genera-
| | tion); load data for this
| | processor are destroyed
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
121 | SUPERVISION TIMER FOR INTERFACE TEST | Reset the processor
| CANNOT BE SET | manually; if error remains
| | present: replace affected
| | processor
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
122 | INTERFACE TEST TIMER RUN OUT | Reset the processor
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 6+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| | manually; if error remains
| | present: replace affected
| | processor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Module 21 :
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
1 | WRONG UNIT IN CONFIGURATION REQUEST | Use right unit
| FOR MSCCM | (only MUXM)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
2 | WRONG UNIT NUMBER IN CONFIGURATION | Use only valid unit number
| REQUEST FOR MSCCM | for MUXM
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
3 | ERROR IN MSCCM, SWSG | Write SW error report and
| | initiate recovery 1_1
| | (if possible)
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
4 | REQUESTED MUXM STATUS TRANSITION NOT | Use only valid status
| ALLOWED FOR THIS ORIGINATOR, OR MUXM | requests, check MUXM
| STATUS NOT YET ADAPTED TO CHANGED | states
| TSG STATUS |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
5 | REQUESTED MUXM NOT CREATED |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
6 | MESSAGE CHANNEL SYNCHRONIZATION NOT |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
7 | PROCESS MSCCM NOT IN IDLE STATE. | Try again later
| AT LEAST ONE JOB STORED FOR |
| ORIGINATOR |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
8 | JOB NOT ALLOWED DURING INSTALLATION | Try again later
| RECOVERY |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
9 | DEMAND TEST FOR MUXM NOT SUCCESSFUL: | MUXM not usable as ACT
| NO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIVED FROM UNIT | or STB MUXM
| MUXMA |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
10 | TSG CONFIGURATION IS ACTIVE. | Try again later
| TSG STATES COULD NOT BE READ |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
11 | NO VALID STATUS COMBINATION FOUND | Write SW error report
| FOR THIS REQUEST. INTERNAL ERROR IN |
| PROCESS MSCCM |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
12 | INTERNAL ERROR HANDLING FOR ALL |Write SW error report and
| MUXM: NEW DEFINITION OF ALL MUXM | check MUXM states
| STATES |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
13 | NO CONFIGURATION TASK NECESSARY FOR |
| THIS REQUEST |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
14 | MUXM NOT IN ACT/STB STATE | Configure MUXM to
| | ACT/STB before
| | repeating this command
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
15 | STATUS REQUEST NOT POSSIBLE AT THIS |
| STATE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
17 | ERROR DURING TSG ACTION: A TSG |
| (SWITCHOVER FROM STB TO ACT NOT |
| POSSIBLE) |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
18 | NO TIMER AVAILABLE FOR CHON COMMAND | Try again later
| OR FOR THE ACTION CHANGE_SEMI_DATA |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
19 | NO NOTEBOOK AVAILABLE FOR WRITING | Try again later, check
| SEMIPERMANENT DATA | MUXM/s state
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
20 | MAXIMUM NUMBER OF RECOVERY ACTIONS | Check MUXM/s state, write
| REACHED; INTERNAL ERROR | SW error report
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| RECEIVED MESSAGE FOR MUXMA FAULTY | or STB MUXM
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 7+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
22 | DEMAND TEST FOR MUXM NOT SUCCESSFUL: | Write SW error report
| INVALID DEMAND TEST REQUEST MESSAGE |
| FROM PROCESS MSCCM |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| SOFTWARE ERROR IN ROUT:MUX |
| (PROCESS MSTRT) |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| INVALID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FOR DEMAND |
| TEST REQUEST MUXMA |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| NO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIVED FROM UNIT | or STB MUXM
| MUXMB |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| RECEIVED ACKNOWLEDGE FROM MUXMB IS | STB MUXM
| FAULTY |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
| INVALID ACKNOWLEDGE FOR DEMAND TEST |
| REQUEST MUXMB |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
28 | MESSAGE CHON OR DEMAND TEST FOR MUXM | Check new MUXM states
| NOT SUCCESSFUL BECAUSE TSG HAS |
| CHANGED ITS STATE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
29 | OLD MUXM STATE (ACT OR EAC) NOT |
| TSG STATE CHANGE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
30 | IT WAS NOT POSSIBLE TO WRITE NEW | Release update function or
| SEMIPERMANENT MUXM STATES TO DISK | make disks available.
| BECAUSE UPDATE FUNCTION IS NOT | Then configure one MUXM
| USABLE (BLOCKED BY MML COMMAND), | to save all new MUXM
| OR NO DISK IS AVAILABLE. STATES ARE | states on disk. Otherwise,
| ONLY STORED IN CP | the old MUXM states may
| | be used after the next
| | CP recovery
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
31 | JOB NOT ALLOWED ON THE NONSWITCHING | Dont retry
| CP SIDE |
-----+--------------------------------------+---------------------------
32 | CONFIGURATION REQUEST NOT ALLOWED | Configure second MUXM to
| BECAUSE MUXM IS THE LAST OF A PAIR | ACT,then try again.It is
| | possible that the STAT SN SWOV
| | is not possible (if the
| | second MUXM is already
| | in state ACT)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Input format
[ [
[ CONF CCNC : UNIT= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT CCNC PROCESSOR UNIT
This parameter specifies the unit.
Compatibilities:
+-------+----------------+
! a = ! b = !
+-------+----------------+
! CCNP ! 0...1 !
! SIPA ! 0...7, 10...17 !
! SILTC ! 0...31 !
! SILT ! 0...255 !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 8+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! MUXM ! 0, 1, 10, 11 !
+-------+----------------+
a-b
a: TYPE
CCNP COMM.CHANN.NETWORK PROCESSOR
SIPA SIGNALING PERIPHERAL ADAPTER
SILTC SIGNALING TERMINAL CONTROL
SILT SIGNALING LINK TERMINAL
MUXM MASTER MULTIPLEXER
b: NUMBER=
OST OPERATING STATE
Compatibilities:
- State transitions for the CCNC
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! Unit Current !Target state: !
! state ! !
! !ACT !STB !MBL !PLA !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! CCNP: ACT !- !-,1 !xx,9,2 !- !
! STB !x,3,8 !- !x !- !
! MBL !x,4 !x,5 !- !x !
! UNA !- !- !x !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! SIPA: ACT !- !-,1 !xx,9,11!- !
! STB !-,3 !- !- !- !
! MBL !x !- !- !x !
! UNA !- !- !- !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! SILTC/SILT: ACT !- !- !xx,9,12!- !
! STB !- !- !- !- !
! MBL !x !- !- !x !
! UNA !- !- !x !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
! MUXM: ACT !- !xx,6 !xx,9 !- !
! STB !xx,7 !- !10 !- !
! MBL !x !10 !- !x !
! EAC !- !- !xx,9 !- !
! UNA !- !- !x !- !
! PLA !- !- !x !- !
+---------------------+------------------------------+
- illegal combination
x This state transition does not lead to system failure
and is always executed.
xx This is a dangerous state transition which may lead to system
failure.
1 This state transition occurs implicitly during soft
switchover (it is not initiated by command input).
SIPA is also configured.
2 This state transition is only executed if there is no
standby CCNP.
3 This state transition occurs implicitly during soft and
hard switchover. SIPA is also configured.
4 This state transition is only executed if there is no
active CCNP.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 9+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5 This state transition is only executed if a redundant CCNP is
active.
6 If link distribution on both STAT SNs (LM12948) has been implemented
this state transition is not allowed. If link distribution has not
been implemented, state transition is only possible after command
CONF SN has been given and if redundant MUXM is in state STB.
The Operator must confirm the command with +.
this state transition is not allowed. If link distribution has not
been implemented, state transition is only possible after command
CONF SN has been given and if redundant MUXM is in state ACT.
The Operator must confirm the command with +.
8 In case soft switchover turns out to be dangerous the operator
has the choice to allow a hard switchover by entering + or to
cancel the command by entering -.
9 If CCS7 rejection of change to MBL via MMI for the last active
unit (LM15903) has been implemented state, transition is not
allowed if the redundant unit is not available. If rejection of
change has not been implemented, state transition is executed after
confirmation by the operator.
state transition is not allowed. If link distribution has not
been implemented, state transition is executed.
11 Transition is rejected if an active SILTC is connected to
the SIPA.
12 Configuration of SILTC is dangerous if an active SILT is
connected to the SILTC. Configuration of SILT is dangerous
if it carries an active link.
- The following state combinations are possible for the two CCNP:
+----------+---------------------------------------------------------+
! For ! For !
! CCNP 0 ! CCNP 1 !
! ! ACT STB CBL_A CBL_S MBL SEZ_R SEZ_D NAC UNA PLA !
+----------+-----+----+------+------+---+------+------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! - ! + ! - ! T ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
! STB ! + ! - ! - ! T ! - ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - !
! MBL ! + ! - ! - ! - ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
! PLA ! + ! - ! - ! - ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
! SEZ_R/D ! T ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - ! - ! - ! T ! T !
! NAC ! T ! - ! - ! - ! T ! - ! - ! T ! T ! T !
! UNA ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! T ! T ! T ! + ! + !
+----------+-----+----+------+------+---+------+------+----+----+----+
+: Legal state combination
-: Illegal state combination
T: This state combination may exist temporarily. It includes at
least one transitional state which the system automatically
converts to a stable state. This state combination is not
necessarily apparent to the operating personnel, i.e. it only
occurs in exceptional cases during state interrogation.
Notes:
- Configuration commands for SIPA must always contain a processor
number in the active CCNP, if there is an active CCNP.
If the partner CCNP is in state STB, the redundant SIPA will
also be configured automatically when the command is executed.
It is also possible to configure a SIPA without an active CCNP.
- If active SIPAs, SILTCs or SILTs are configured to target
state MBL, messages may be lost when the signaling
traffic is diverted onto alternative signaling links. Message loss
can, however, be avoided by configuring the signaling links in
question to state BL1 or BL2 beforehand.
- A soft switchover (configuration of the standby CCNP to
active) may escalate to hard switchover (e.g. under heavy load
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 10+
CONF CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
conditions), if the operator requests an unconditional
switchover (+).
PLA PLANNED
STB STANDBY
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CCNC- 11-
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CCNC
This command is used to start the diagnosis of the CCNC. Depending on the
message routing, diagnostic results may be output on the OMT. Diagnosis is
based on processor self tests, interface tests and loading of the
processors. These sequences are run:
- once for the unit CCNP,
- once for unit MUXM with only MUXMA,
- twice for unit MUXM with MUXMA and MUXMB,
- twice for unit SILTC,
- twice or three times for unit SILT.
The aim of the diagnosis is to confirm that a processor is capable of
functioning correctly or, if an error has occurred, to reproduce that
the error is located in the specified unit. In case of CCNP or MUXM
the faulty module may be identified.
Diagnosis is started
- before a processor is started for the first time
- after a CCS7 error message
- after module replacement.
Prequisites:
- Before entering of the diagnosis command the unit to be diagnosed
has to be configured into state MBL using the command CONF CCNC.
After unsuccessful execution of the diagnosis the following mask is output
displaying the reason for the failure.
Possible errors are:
Module 2:
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
1 | NO ACCESS TO ADMINISTRATIVE | DISPLAY THE MUX DATA
| MUX DATA, DATA FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
2 | NO ACCESS TO NUC DATA | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| DATA FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
3 | DEVICE AT OUTGOING SIDE OF | PROOF THE CONFIGURATION OF NUC
| NUC CONNECTION IS NOT MUX |
| NUC CONFIGURATION FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
4 | DEVICE AT INCOMING SIDE OF | PROOF THE CONFIGURATION OF NUC
| NUC CONNECTION IS NOT LTG |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
5 | NUC IS NOT ACTIVATED | ACTIVATE NUC
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
17 | MSTRT SENDS INVALID_DETEST_ | WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
| REQ SOFTWARE-FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
18 | INTERN FAULT IN PROCESS MSTRT| WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
| SOFTWARE-FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
23 | SOFTWARE FAULT IN MSFAM OR | LOOK AT SWSG OF MSDCT
| MSTRT, SOFTWARE-FAULT | WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
24 | INCONSISTENCY IN MSFAM AND | WRITE AN ERROR REPORT
| MSTRT MESSAGES | (SAVE CIRCUMSTANCES)
| SOFTWARE-FAULT |
Module 3
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
4 | CONFIGURATION NOT ALLOWED - | REPEAT COMMAND USING CORRECT
| WRONG PARAMETER VALUES | VALUES
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
5 | TIMER ORDER FAILED: LACK OF | TRY AGAIN LATER IF NO SWSG
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CCNC- 1+
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| RESOURCES OR SOFTWARE ERROR | OCCURS
| IF SWSG OCCURS |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
6 | ACTUAL STATUS OF CCNP | TRY AGAIN AFTER CCNP WAS CON-
| FORBIDS TASK EXECUTION, NO | FIGURATED TO ACT
| CCNP IS ACTIVE |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
9 | NO PARALLEL TASK FOR CONFI- | TRY AGAIN LATER
| GURATION ALLOWED |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
14 | INTERNAL ERROR IN PROCESS, | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| SWSG OCCURS | DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
16 | ERROR WHEN CALLING A SUB- | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| SYSTEM C7 INTERNAL PROCEDURE,| DO NOT RETRY
| WRONG PARAMETER VALUES |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
17 | ERROR WHEN READING A TRAN- | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| SIENT DEVICE STATE | DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
18 | ERROR WHEN WRITING A TRAN- | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT,
| SIENT DEVICE STATE PERHAPS | CHECK STATES, TRY TO REPEAT,
| ONLY SEMIPERMANENT STATES | BE CAREFUL !!
| CHANGED |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
19 | ERROR WHEN READING A SEMIPER-| WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| MANENT DEVICE STATE | DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
22 | UNDEFINED RESPONSE VALUE FROM| CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| EAVT | DING TO MMN, CHECK EAVT/IOCP
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
23 | UNDEFINED VALUES IN RECEIVED | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| MESSAGE | DING TO MMN, DO NOT RETRY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
24 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF RE- | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CEIPT NO ANSWER FROM CCNP | DING TO MMN
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
25 | TIMER MESSAGE INSTEAD OF RE- | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CEIPT NO ANSWER FROM EAVT/ | DING TO MMN
| IOCP, SOFTWARE ERROR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
28 | CCNP NOT IN STATE SEZ_R | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| AFTER POSITIVE LOAD ACKNOW- |
| LEDGE FROM FA:CCNC OR SIMP NO|
| SEZ_R DURING INI2 |
| CONTROLLED BY FA:CCNC, |
| SOFTWARE FAULT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
29 | INVALID IOGPGCH COMMAND FOR | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| EAVT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
30 | INVALID IORSOUT COMMAND FOR | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| EAVT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
31 | INVALID IOKONF COMMAND FOR | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| EAVT |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
32 | NO IOP AVAILABLE FOR CCNC | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| ACCESS TOLD US IN RESPONSE | DING TO MMN, CHECK IOP, NO CCNC
| FROM EAVT/IOCP | ERROR
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
33 | COMMAND ACK BETWEEN IOP AND | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CCNP NOT SUCCESSFUL DURING | DING TO MMN
| CCNP RESET, CCNP ERROR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
34 | COMMAND RDY BETWEEN IOP AND | CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ACCOR-
| CCNP NOT SUCCESSFUL DURING | DING TO MMN
| CCNP RESET, CCNP ERROR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
52 | SIMP ALWAYS ANSWERS WITH | CONFIGURE UNA SILT/SILTC TO
| CONF-SIMP-NO-IDLE MONITORING | MBL
| AFTER COMMAND-REPETITIONS. |
| THIS MEANS SIMP-ERROR IN FEA-|
| TURE SILT/SILTC STATUSMO- |
| NITORING FOR UNA SILT/ |
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CCNC- 2+
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| SILTCS. |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
54 | REQUESTED UNIT NOT IN MBL. | CONFIGURE UNIT TO MBL
Module 4 (MSFCTA5S):
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
20 | LOAD REQUEST NOT SUPERVISED | TRY AGAIN LATER
| BY TIMER, LACK OF RESOURCES |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
23 | SIPA DEFECT OR NOT EXISTING | CONF. AFFECTED SIPA TO MBL OR
| HARDWARE-FAULT | CHANGE IT, MAINTENANCE ACCORDING
| | TO MMN
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
30 | MESSAGE IOPOFF (TOTAL LOSS OF| TRY AGAIN LATER
| IOP:MB PAIR) FROM IOCP RECEI-|
| VED |
Module 5:
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
63 | UNEXPECTED RERTEST RESPONSE | HAS NO EFFECT ON SYSTEM OPERATION
| FROM CCNP RECEIVED (E.G. | BUT SHOULD NOT OCCUR
| WITH AN OLD MESSAGE NUMBER) | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
64 | ROUTINE SWITCH OVER REJECTED | TRY AGAIN LATER
| LOAD TOO HIGH IN CCNC OR - |
| ADMINISTRATION TASK RUNNING |
| OR CONF:SIMP NOT IN STATE |
| IDLE |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
65 | ROUTINE SWITCH OVER NOT POS- | CONFIGURE CCNP TO STB,
| SIBLE, NO CCNP IN STATE | ACTIVATE ALL SILTC
| STB OR AT LEAST ONE SILTC |
| NOTACCESSIBLE BY STB CCNP |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
68 | RTEST RECEIPT ARRIVES IN | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT, IF
| WRONG STATE | ERROR OCCURS MORE THEN TWICE A
| | DAY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
69 | INCORRECT RTEST RESPONSE, | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT, IF
| SPORADIC ERROR | ERROR OCCURS MORE THEN TWICE A
| | DAY
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
70 | NO RTEST RESPONSE, SPORADIC | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT, IF
| ERROR | ERROR OCCURS MORE THEN TWICE A
| | DAY
Module 21:
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
1 | WRONG DEVICE IN CONFIGURATION| USE RIGHT DEVICE (ONLY MUXM)
| REQUEST FOR MSCCM |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
2 | WRONG DEVICE NUMBER IN CON- | USE ONLY VALID DEVICE NUMBER
| FIGURATION REQUEST FOR MSCCM | FOR MUXM
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
3 | ERROR IN MSCCM | LOOK AT SWSG
| | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
4 | REQUESTED MUXM STATUS | USE ONLY VALID STATUS REQUESTS
| TRANSITION NOT ALLOWED FOR |
| THIS ORIGINATOR |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
5 | REQUESTED MUXM NOT CREATED | FIRST USE COMMAND CR MUX,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CCNC- 3+
DIAG CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
| | THEN CONF CCNC FOR MUXM
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
6 | MESSAGE CHANNEL SYNCHRONI- | MUXM NOT USABLE AS ACT OR
| SATION NOT POSSIBLE | STB MUXM
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
7 | MSCCM PROCESS NOT IN IDLE | TRY AGAIN LATER
| STATE AND AT LEAST ONE JOB |
| STORED FOR ORIGINATOR IF POS-|
| SIBLE FOR HIM |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
8 | JOB NOT ALLOWED DURING | TRY AGAIN LATER
| INSTALLATION |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
10 | TSG CONFIGURATION IS ACTIVE | TRY AGAIN LATER
| IT WAS NOT POSSIBLE TO READ |
| THE TSG STATES |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
11 | NO VALID STATUS COMBINATION | WRITE SOFTWARE ERROR REPORT
| FOUND FOR THIS REQUEST. IN- |
| TERNAL ERROR IN PROCESS MSCCM|
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
15 | STATUS REQUEST NOT POSSIBLE | TRY AGAIN LATER
| AT THIS TIME BECAUSE OF ACTU-| CHECK MUX/TSG STATUS BEFORE
| AL MUXM/TSG STATUS |
| SITUATION |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
18 | NO TIMER FOR CHON COMMAND | TRY AGAIN LATER
| AVAILABLE |
-----+------------------------------+----------------------------------
28 | MESSAGE CHANNEL ON OR DEMAND-| CHECK NEW MUXM STATES
| TEST OF MUXM NOT SUCCESSFUL |
| BECAUSE TSG CHANGES ITS |
| STATES |
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG CCNC : UNIT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT CCNC PROCESSOR UNIT
Compatibilities:
+-------+----------------+
! unit !
! type ! number !
+-------+----------------+
! SILT ! 0...255 !
! SILTC ! 0...31 !
! CCNP ! 0...1 !
! MUXM ! 0,1,10,11 !
+-------+----------------+
a-b
a: UNIT TYPE
CCNP COMM. CHANN. NETWORK PROCESSOR
SILTC SIGNALING TERMINAL CONTROLLER
MUXM MASTER MULTIPLEXER
b: UNIT NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CCNC- 4-
STAT CCNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OST OF CCNC
This command is used to interrogate the operating states of the
CCNP and all other CCNC processors.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT CCNC : UNIT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the unit.
Compatibilities:
+-------+----------------+
! a = ! b = !
+-------+----------------+
! CCNP ! 0...1 !
! SIPA ! 0...7, 10...17 !
! SILTC ! 0...31 !
! SILT ! 0...255 !
! MUXM ! 0, 1, 10, 11 !
+-------+----------------+
a-b
a: PROCESSOR TYPE
CCNP COM.CHANNEL NETWORK PROCESSOR
SIPA SIGNALING PERIPHERY ADAPTER
SILTC SIGNALING LINK TERM. CONTROL
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT CCNC- 1-
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CCNC TRACER
This command activates the CCNC tracer in the CCNC units CPI,
SIMP or SILT.
Trace selection is made by specifying the process, the message field
and its contents, and a mask with which these contents can be traced.
The trigger types correspond to those of the LTG tracer. Up to 8
CCNC processes can be traced in one CCNC processor.
Example:
- ACT CCNCTRAC:
UNIT = SIMP-1,
MODE = COM-CIFEV-"H00"-"H00"&
FAN-CIFEV-"H00"-"H00",
TRITYP = AFTER,
TRIEV = PCH-EVENT-"H06"-"HFF";
Compatibilities:
- The CCNC, LTG, DLU and ISDN trace functions may not be activated at the
same time.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CCNCTRAC : UNIT= ,MODE= [,TRITYP=] [,TRIEV=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT CCNC UNIT
This parameter specifies the CCNC processor.
Compatibilities:
+------------+----------------+
! a = ! b = !
+------------+----------------+
!CPI,SIMP ! 0...1 !
!SILT ! 0...255 !
+------------+----------------+
a-b
a: PROCESSOR TYPE
CPI COORDINATION PROC. INTERFACE
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
MODE TRACE MODE
This parameter defines the object to be traced in a hierarchical
structure.
Note:
- A trace selection is made by specifying the units
CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT and CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK.
To select the trace events, the unit CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT
defines the location for a mask on message content.
Unit CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK defines a mask with which these
contents can be traced.
It is therefore possible to mask a message content in order to
trace specified messages only.
Not all combinations of input are possible and useful.
CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT and CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK are
connected and may have the same length.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC- 1+
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: CCNC PROCESS=
This unit specifies a process, in which tracing is made.
The input can be done in the following two ways:
1. By entering a symbolic name of the table below.
Table: Possible trace processes in the processor type
+---+------------------------------+
! ! !
!a= ! INPUT FOR CPI !
! ! !
+---+------------------------------+
!ANA! Fault analysis !
!BRC! Broadcasting !
!CNF! Configuration !
!COM! Communication test !
!CON! Administration configuration !
!FLM! Flow measurement !
!HIN! Incoming handling !
!HOU! Outgoing handling !
!HTR! Transfer handling !
!LOA! Loading of data !
!MDU! Memory Dump utility !
!OCO! Overload control !
!PAR! Parameter administration !
!PCH! Patch utility !
!REC! Recovery !
!REP! Reporting !
!RTF! Routine test !
!TMM! Traffic measurement !
!TRC! Trace utility !
+---+------------------------------+
+---+------------------------------+
! ! !
!a= ! INPUT FOR SILT !
! ! !
+---+------------------------------+
!ANA! Fault analysis !
!FAD! Administration !
!FCO! Congestion part !
!FLP! Link state part !
!FOC! Overload control !
!FRP! Reception part !
!FRT! Retrieval Part !
!FTP! Transmission part !
!IFT! Interface test !
!MDU! Memory dump utility !
!MEB! Message buffer control !
!REC! Recovery !
!REP! Reporting !
!ROU! Routine test !
+---+------------------------------+
The trace process FRP only collects MSU data.
Following MODE combinations are allowed:
FRP-CIFEV-"H05"-"HFF"
FRP-SIO-"Hxx"-"Hxx"
FRP-SIF-"Hxx"-"Hxx"
+---+------------------------------+
! ! !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC- 2+
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!a= ! INPUT FOR SIMP !
! ! !
+---+------------------------------+
!AUC! Automatic uninhibiting contr.!
!CBA! Change back for adjacent !
! ! routes !
!CBH! Change back high priority !
! ! processes !
!CBT! Change back low priority and !
! ! time controlled diversion !
! ! processes !
!CCL! Configuration of !
! ! administration !
!CGC! Congestion control !
!COB! Changeover/changeback !
!CON! Configuration !
!CSP! Central spooler !
!FAN! Fault analysis !
!LCC! Local congestion control !
!LIT! Local inhibiting test !
!LSR! Link state retrieval !
!MDU! Memory dump utility !
!MIU! Management inhibiting/ !
! ! uninhibiting !
!OCT! Overload control !
!PCH! Patch utility !
!RCT! Route set congestion test !
!RDI! Route direction !
! ! initialization !
!REC! Recovery !
!REP! Reporting !
!RIT! Remote inhibiting test !
!ROT! Routine test !
!ROU! Routing !
!RRC! Rerouting control !
!RSP! Reporting of CCS7 parameters !
!RST! Route set test !
!SLA! SLIC restart control !
!SLI! Signalling link control !
!SRC! Start/restart control !
!TAP! Transfer allowed/ !
! ! prohibited !
!TCC! Threshold control !
!TCR! Transfer message after change!
! ! current routes !
!TFC! Traffic flow control !
!TMQ! Testing and maintenance ack !
!TRT! Transfer of transient data !
!UPD! Updating !
+---+------------------------------+
Data will be received only if the selected trace
process is available in the specified processor type.
2. By entering a hexadecimal value in the range of
00H - 0FFH. Hexadecimal inputs are marked with
a beginning numerical character (0-9).
b: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD=
This unit specifies the message field to be traced. This
can be done in the following two ways:
1. By entering a symbolic name. The symbolic names
depend on the processor type and the message type.
For the processors CPI, SIMP and SILT the
input for the CCNC INTERNAL MESSAGE FORMAT is
as follows:
1 MESSAGE HEADER
Unit b = DC Destination complex
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC- 3+
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LI Length indicator
SC Source complex
2 CCS7 MESSAGE
Unit b = SIF Service information field
SIO Service information octet
3 INTERNAL MESSAGES
Unit b = DASA Destination address/
source address
EVENT Event
JC1 Process number (CP)
PROCNR Process number (CCNC)
TASK Program complex (CCNC)
input for the CENTRAL INPUT INTERFACE is
as follows:
Unit b = CIFBUF Buffer address
CIFDAT Data
CIFEV Event
CIFPCB PCB address
CIFPRC Program complex
input for the PROCESS CONTROL BLOCK is
as follows:
Unit b = PCBSTA State
PCBUSE User Data
For the processor CPI the input for the
EWSD MESSAGE FORMAT is as follows:
1 MESSAGE HEADER
Unit b = CEVENT Event
CDASA Destination address/
source address
CJC1 Job code 1 (process number)
CJC2 Job code 2 (job number)
DMCHO Destination message channel
number
LENGTH Length
OJC1 Outgoing job code 1
OJC2 Outgoing job code 2
ODASA Destination address/
source address
OEVENT Event
SMBUO Source message buffer number
SMCHO Source message channel number
2. By entering a hexadecimal value in the range of
00H - 0FFH. Hexadecimal inputs are marked with
a beginning numerical character (0-9). This is
only possible for messages.
c: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT=
This information unit is to be entered in hexadecimal notation.
- "Hhex. figures 1...16" or
- "Xhex. figures 1...16".
Each byte has to be represented by two hexadecimal characters.
In use of H: Least significant byte standing on the left.
In use of X: Least significant byte standing on the right.
Example for CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT input:
- "H0001020304050607" or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC- 4+
ACT CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- "X0A090807".
The bytes, the user did not entered, will be filled with 0.
d: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK=
This information unit is to be entered in hexadecimal notation.
see CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT.
TRITYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies the trigger possibilities.
AFTER AFTER TRIGGER EVENT
The first appearance of a user-selectable trigger
event initiates the data collection which ends as
soon as the cyclic memory space for the trace file
is full.
MIDDLE MIDDLE TRIGGER EVENT
Reception of activation commands in the periphery
starts data collection which ends after the first
appearance of a user-selectable trigger event when
half of the cyclic memory space for the trace file
is full.
UNTIL UNTIL TRIGGER EVENT
Reception of activation commands in the periphery
starts data collection. It ends after the first
appearance of a user-selectable trigger event.
Trace data can be overwritten.
USER USER CONTROLLED
Reception of the activation command in the
periphery starts data collection. It ends after
arrival of the deactivation command. With longer
trace jobs, trace data are overwritten.
Default: AFTER
TRIEV TRIGGER EVENT
This parameter specifies the trigger event and defines the end or
start of data collection.
The input options are identical with those of the parameter MODE.
a-b-c-d
a: CCNC PROCESS=
b: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD=
c: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD CONTENT=
d: CCNC MESSAGE FIELD MASK=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CCNCTRAC- 5-
CAN CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCNC TRACER
This command cancels an active CCNC trace job. The data of the CCNC tracer
are retained until the next start.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CCNCTRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CCNCTRAC- 1-
DISP CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNC TRACER
This command displays the state and, if activated, the job data of the CCNC
tracer.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CCNCTRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CCNCTRAC- 1-
DMP CCNCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CCNC TRACER
This command dumps the data of the CCNC tracer from the backup file
( P2.CCNCTRAC ) to the O&M terminal.
Prerequisites:
- This command is only executed if the tracer is inactive.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DMP CCNCTRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CCNCTRAC- 1-
ACT CDS
CENTREX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command activates a call distribution system configuration in a common
service group.
Prerequisites:
- The common service group must exist and must have a call distribution
system.
1. ACT CDS - CENTREX ACT CDS FOR A CENTREX CDS
2. ACT CDS - OSS ACT CDS FOR AN ADMOSS CDS
1. Input format
ACT CDS FOR A CENTREX CDS
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CONF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
local area codes this parameter can be omitted.
group.
CONF CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the call distribution system configuration.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CDS- 1+
ACT CDS
OSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ACT CDS FOR AN ADMOSS CDS
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CONF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
local area codes this parameter can be omitted.
group.
CONF CONFIGURATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CDS- 2-
CAN CDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command cancels a task group for common call distribution system.
Notes:
- If the task group is assigned to an operator location, the location
is canceled too.
- If a queue is assigned to the task group, the queue is canceled too.
Prerequisites:
- A task group can only be canceled, if it is not assigned in common
service subscriber database.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the task group.
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDS- 1-
CR CDS
CRCXCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command creates a task group for a common call distribution system.
If necessary, the task group can be connected either with an attendant
operator location or a booth operator location.
Notes:
- Only the task groups in an ADMOSS common service group can be connected
with an operator location.
- It is only allowed to connect 100 Call Types per one command.
Prerequisites:
- A task group can only be created if the common service group is already
existing.
- The task group name must be unique within a common service group.
- To create a task group, the call type must already exist.
1. CR CDS - CRCXCDS CREATE CENTREX CDS DATA
2. CR CDS - CROSCDS CREATE ADMOSS CDS DATA
1. Input format
CREATE CENTREX CDS DATA
This input format is used to create a task group
for a CENTREX common service group.
[ [
[ CR CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,CONF=] [,CTYP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,FORCE=] [,FRWDINC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CDS- 1+
CR CDS
CRCXCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The task group must not exist in the common service group.
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must already exist.
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the force, which the task group
should belong to.
FRWDINC FORWARD INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the forward intercept.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CDS- 2+
CR CDS
CROSCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE ADMOSS CDS DATA
This input format is used to create a task group
for an ADMOSS common service group.
[ [
[ CR CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,CONF=] [,CTYP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,FORCE= [,FRWDINC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CDS- 3+
CR CDS
CROSCDS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the force, which the task group
should belong to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CDS- 4-
DISP CDS
DISCDSCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command displays call distribution system data for MSB.
Prerequisites:
- The common service group must exist and must have a call
distribution system.
<job number>.
1. DISP CDS - DISCDSCO DISP CDS CONF OF A CSG
2. DISP CDS - DISTGRCX DISP TASKGRP DATA OF CTX CSG
3. DISP CDS - DISTGROS DISP TASKGRP DATA OF ADMOSS CSG
1. Input format
DISP CDS CONF OF A CSG
This input format is used to display the current call
distribution system configuration of a specific common
service group.
[ [
[ DISP CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDS- 1+
DISP CDS
DISTGRCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISP TASKGRP DATA OF CTX CSG
This input format is used to display the task group data
of a CENTREX common service group.
[ [
[ DISP CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORMAT= [,TASKGRP=] [,CONF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
FORMAT FORMAT
This parameter specifies, whether task group data or operator
location data should be displayed.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not entered, the actual CDS
configuration of the common service group is displayed.
parameter is obligatory.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Notes:
CONF CONFIGURATION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDS- 2+
DISP CDS
DISTGRCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDS- 3+
DISP CDS
DISTGROS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISP TASKGRP DATA OF ADMOSS CSG
This input format is used to display the task group data
of an ADMOSS common service group.
[ [
[ DISP CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORMAT= [,TASKGRP=] [,CONF=] [
[ [
[ [,FORCE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
FORMAT FORMAT
This parameter specifies, whether task group data or operator
location data should be displayed.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not entered, the actual CDS
configuration of the common service group is displayed.
parameter is obligatory.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDS- 4+
DISP CDS
DISTGROS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONF CONFIGURATION
Notes:
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the force.
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDS- 5-
MOD CDS
MCTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DATA
This command modifies a task group for a common call distribution system.
If necessary, an existing task group can be connected either with an
attendant operator location or a booth operator location.
Notes:
- Only the task groups in an ADMOSS common service group can be connected
with an operator location.
- It is only allowed to connect and cancel 100 Call Types per one command.
1. MOD CDS - MCTGRDA MODIFY CTX TASK GROUP DATA
2. MOD CDS - MOTGRDA MODIFY ADMOSS TASK GROUP DATA
1. Input format
MODIFY CTX TASK GROUP DATA
This input format is used to modify the data
of an existing task group in a CENTREX common
service group.
[ [
[ MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,NTASKGRP=] [,CONF=] [
[ [
[ [,CTYP=] [,FRWDINC=] [,CCONF=] [,CCTYP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CFRWDINC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CDS- 1+
MOD CDS
MCTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The task group must exist in the common service group.
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
NTASKGRP NEW TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the new name of the task group.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- NTASKGRP = X
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
CCONF CANCEL CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the cancel call distribution
system configuration.
CCTYP CANCEL CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the cancel ADMOSS call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist if it is used within the command.
Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CDS- 2+
MOD CDS
MCTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- CTYP = X
CFRWDINC CANCEL FORWARD INTERCEPT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CDS- 3+
MOD CDS
MOTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY ADMOSS TASK GROUP DATA
of an existing task group in an ADMOSS common
service group.
[ [
[ MOD CDS : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,NTASKGRP=] [,CONF=] [
[ [
[ [,CTYP=] [,CCONF=] [,CCTYP=] [,FRWDINC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CFRWDINC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- TASKGRP = X
NTASKGRP NEW TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the new name of the task group.
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- NTASKGRP = X
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CDS- 4+
MOD CDS
MOTGRDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONF CONFIGURATION
CTYP CALL TYPE
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
CCONF CANCEL CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the cancel call distribution
system configuration.
CCTYP CANCEL CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the cancel ADMOSS call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist if it is used within the command.
Incompatibilities:
- CTYP = X
CFRWDINC CANCEL FORWARD INTERCEPT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CDS- 5-
DISP CDSFILE
CALLTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS STATISTICS FILE
This command displays the Calltype Summary report in a specified ADMOSS
or CENTREX Common Service Group for
- a list or all Calltypes of the Common Service Group
- a list or all Taskgroups of the Common Service Group
- all Taskgroups within a Force
Prerequisites:
- The Calltype Summary Data are only collected, if this feature is
active for the Common Service Group
<job number>.
1. DISP CDSFILE - CALLTYPE CALLTYPE SPECIFIC DISPLAY
2. DISP CDSFILE - FORCE SPECIFIC FORCE
3. DISP CDSFILE - TASKGRP SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
1. Input format
CALLTYPE SPECIFIC DISPLAY
This input format is used to display the Calltype Summary
Display for a list or for all created calltypes.
[ [
[ DISP CDSFILE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,CTYP=] [,DISPFUNC=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the local area code of the Common Service
Group. This parameter allows only low keyed numbers.
This parameter specifies the directory number of the Common Service
Group. This parameter allows only high keyed numbers.
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the name(s) of the call type(s).
Incompatibilities:
- If CTYP is entered, it is not allowed to enter FORCE or TASKGRP.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSFILE- 1+
DISP CDSFILE
CALLTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPFUNC DISPFUNC
This parameter specifies the type of output mask.
Notes:
- DISPFUNC=DETAIL is only allowed with parameter CTYP.
DETAIL DETAILED
EXT EXTENDED
SAS SUPPORT APPLICATION SERVER
STD STANDARD
TIME TIME
VOP VIRTUAL OPERATOR
Default: STD
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the time period from which
the Taskgroup Status report will be displayed.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the time period from which
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the time period to which
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the time period to which
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSFILE- 2+
DISP CDSFILE
CALLTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSFILE- 3+
DISP CDSFILE
FORCE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIC FORCE
Display for all taskgroups of a force.
[ [
[ DISP CDSFILE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORCE= [,DISPFUNC=] [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORCE FORCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS force, which the entered task group
should belong to.
Incompatibilities:
- If FORCE is entered, it is not allowed to enter TASKGRP or CTYP.
DISPFUNC DISPFUNC
Notes:
EXT EXTENDED
STD STANDARD
TIME TIME
Default: STD
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSFILE- 4+
DISP CDSFILE
FORCE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDATE END DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSFILE- 5+
DISP CDSFILE
TASKGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
Display for a list or for all created taskgroups.
[ [
[ DISP CDSFILE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,DISPFUNC=] [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name(s) of the task group(s).
Incompatibilities:
- If TASKGRP is entered, it is not allowed to enter FORCE or CTYP.
DISPFUNC DISPFUNC
Notes:
EXT EXTENDED
STD STANDARD
TIME TIME
Default: STD
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSFILE- 6+
DISP CDSFILE
TASKGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
ENDDATE END DATE
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSFILE- 7-
ACT CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command activates a certain CDS time program.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into several
group.
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CDSPROG- 1-
CAN CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command cancels one or several common service subscribers from a
certain program time for the program TGASSIGN.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,TASKGRP= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSSUBID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
This parameter specifies the time program TGASSIGN.
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDSPROG- 1+
CAN CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
CSSUBID COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the number of the common service
subscriber.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDSPROG- 2-
DACT CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command deactivates a certain CDS time program.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into several
group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CDSPROG- 1-
DISP CDSPROG
DCDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command displays a CDS time program data for a specified time program.
<job number>.
1. DISP CDSPROG - DCDSCONF DISPLAY CDSCONF DATA
2. DISP CDSPROG - DSUBTOTG DISPLAY CSSUB TO TASKGROUP DATA
3. DISP CDSPROG - DTGTOSUB DISPLAY TASKGROUP TO CSSUB
1. Input format
DISPLAY CDSCONF DATA
This input format is used to display a CDS-Configuration
for a certain or all created program times for the program
CDSCONF.
[ [
[ DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 1+
DISP CDSPROG
DCDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 2+
DISP CDSPROG
DSUBTOTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY CSSUB TO TASKGROUP DATA
This input format is used to display the CSSUBs for a certain
or all task groups for a certain or all program times for the
program TGASSIGN.
[ [
[ DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] [,TASKGRP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 3+
DISP CDSPROG
DSUBTOTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
- The task group have to exist in the common service group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 4+
DISP CDSPROG
DTGTOSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY TASKGROUP TO CSSUB
This input format is used to display all task groups for a
certain CSSUB for a certain or all program times for the
program TGASSIGN.
[ [
[ DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] ,CSSUBID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 5+
DISP CDSPROG
DTGTOSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
subscriber.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 6-
ENTR CDSPROG
ECDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command enters a new CDS time program for a specified program time.
1. ENTR CDSPROG - ECDSCONF ENTER CDSCONF DATA
2. ENTR CDSPROG - ETGASSGN ENTER TGASSIGN DATA
1. Input format
ENTER CDSCONF DATA
This input format is used to enter a CDS-Configuration
for a certain program time for the program CDSCONF.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,CONF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 1+
ENTR CDSPROG
ECDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
CONF CONFIGURATION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 2+
ENTR CDSPROG
ETGASSGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTER TGASSIGN DATA
This input format is used to enter one or several CSSUBs to a
certain task group for a certain program time for the program
TGASSIGN.
[ [
[ ENTR CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,TASKGRP= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSSUBID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 3+
ENTR CDSPROG
ETGASSGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
Prerequisites:
- The task group have to exist in the common service group.
subscriber.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 4-
CAN CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command cancels a CDS program time for a specified time program.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDSPRTIM- 1+
CAN CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALL EVERY DAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDSPRTIM- 2-
CR CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command creates a new CDS program time for a specified time program.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= [,INIT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CDSPRTIM- 1+
CR CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALL EVERY DAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
INIT INITIAL CONFIGURATION
Initial value of the assignments at the time of
creating a program time.
DEFAULT DEFAULT
SET SET
RESET RESET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CDSPRTIM- 2-
DISP CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command displays a CDS program time for a specified time program.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPRTIM- 1+
DISP CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSPRTIM- 2-
MOD CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command modifies a CDS program time for a specified time program.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,NTIME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
group.
Notes:
group.
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CDSPRTIM- 1+
MOD CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALL EVERY DAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
NTIME NEW CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the new program time, that shall be
administred.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
b: HOUR=
c: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CDSPRTIM- 2-
ACT CDSSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CDS STATUS REPORT
This command displays the Taskgroup Status report in a specified Common
Service Group for some specified Taskgroups.
This command is permitted for ADMOSS and CENTREX Common Service Groups.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CDSSTAT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= [,FORCE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name(s) of the task group(s).
FORCE FORCE NUMBER ADMOSS
should belong to.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CDSSTAT- 1-
DISP CDSSTAT
FORCE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS STATUS REPORT
This command displays the Taskgroup Status report in a specified Common
Service Group for some specified Taskgroups or for all Taskgroups within
a force.
This command is permitted for ADMOSS and CENTREX Common Service Groups.
<job number>.
1. DISP CDSSTAT - FORCE SPECIFIC FORCE
2. DISP CDSSTAT - TASKGRP SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
1. Input format
SPECIFIC FORCE
[ [
[ DISP CDSSTAT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,FORCE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORCE FORCE NUMBER ADMOSS
should belong to.
Incompatibilities:
- If FORCE is entered, it is not allowed to enter TASKGRP.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSSTAT- 1+
DISP CDSSTAT
TASKGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIC TASKGROUPS
[ [
[ DISP CDSSTAT : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TASKGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the task group(s).
Incompatibilities:
- If TASKGRP is entered, it is not allowed to enter FORCE.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDSSTAT- 2-
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
This command cancels:
- control flags for call data treatment;
- non standard (extra and alternative) data for several recording types;
- activation of preventive meter observation.
This command resets:
- preventive meter observation thresholds, category and traffic type
dependent.
- the record version identification, recording type dependent.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CDTDAT : [REC=] <,EXTNSD= ,ALTNSD= ,MARKS= ,VERSID= [
[ [
[ ,PMOBS=> [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies for which recording type the extra
data no longer has to be recorded for a call by the
EWSD-switching system, and/or for which recording type
the specified version identification is no longer valid.
METSUB SUBSCRIBER METERING
MOBORIG METER OBSERVATION ORIGINATING
MOBTERM METER OBSERVATION TERMINATING
IARSTAT INTER ADMINISTR. REVENUE STAT.
MDR MESSAGE DATA RECORDING
TRST TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
DNOBS DN OBSERVATION
INAMA INTELIGENT NETWORK AMA
OPERAMA AMA FOR OPERATOR INPUT
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERING
EXTNSD EXTRA NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which extra data no longer have
to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
If no recording is specified, the entered extra data items
are reset for each relevant recording.
CHARGES CALL CHARGES
RECTRID RECORD TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
BMETPULS B SIDE METER PULSES
OCLGDN ORIGINATING CALLING PARTY DN
DURBANS DURATION BEFORE ANSWER
THRDPRTY THIRD PARTY NUMBER
CLDRCVD RECEIVED CALLED PARTY NUMBER
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
BGID BUSSINES GROUP IDENTIFICATION
CTXNO CENTREX NUMBERS
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE NUMBER
CHECKSUM CHECKSUM
CALLIND ADDITIONAL CALL INDICATORS
CALLTAR CALL TARIFF
GCR GLOBAL CHARGE REFERENCE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDTDAT- 1+
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONNID CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
FAUPRTNR FAU BY PARTNER
TRAFQUAL TRAFFIC QUALITY DATA
ADVCUMCH ADVISED CUMULATED CHARGES
ADDCLGDN ADDITIONAL CALLING PARTY DN
DEFMSN DEFAULT MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO.
CLDSENT SENT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
CLDTOSCP CALLED PARTY DN SENT TO SCP
SCPRDGDN PROVIDED REDIRECTING DN BY SCP
RECOWNER RECORD OWNER DN
PFXNATIN NATIONAL/INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
EXCHNAME EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NAME
VERSID RECORD VERSION IDENTIFICATION
ADDTAR ADD-ON TARIFF DATA
PBXOPN PBX OPERATOR NUMBER
RELIND RELEASE INDICATOR
INSERVK IN SERVICE KEY
MLPP M LEVEL PRECEDENCE/PREEMPTION
REFINDUR REFINED DURATION
CLGSENT SENT CALLING PARTY NUMBER
REDSENT SENT REDIRECTING NUMBER
CATSENT SENT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
CATRCVD RECEIVED CALLING PARTY CATEG.
SERVINFO SERVICE INFO
MAPCREF MAP CALL REFERENCE
IMSI IMSI NUMBER
SPC SIGNALLING POINT CODE
OSSCLDUR OSS CALL LEG DURATION
TRACEFAC TRACE FACTOR
TERMTYPE TERMINAL TYPE
OPMODE OPMODE A/B SIDE
DLUV52 DLU/V52 A/B SIDE
PATHSEL PATH SELECTION
PORTADR PORT OR EQUIPMENT ADDRESS
TRIGGER TRIGGER DATA
ADDRELC ADDITIONAL RELEASE CAUSE
FAUNONCH NON CHARGEABLE OWN FAU
TIMETNTH TIME IN TENTHS OF SECONDS
ACCURCHG ACCUMULATED CURRENCY CHARGES
SSN SUBSCRIBER SERVICE NUMBER
IPSTATS IP CONNECTION STATISTICS
IPCONOPT IP LOCAL CONNECTION OPTIONS
ALTNSD ALTERNATIVE NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which alternative data no longer
has to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
TGNA TRUNK GROUP NAME
CACTYPE CAC TYPE
OWNCAC OWN CAC
EXCHIDNO EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
RANSWTIM RECORD ANSWER TIME
EXTBDIG EXTENDED B DIGITS
RECTRCIC RECORD TRUNK IDENT. WITH CIC
TGN2 SECOND TRUNK GROUP NO. IDENT.
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies which specific control data are disabled.
AMASFAI AMA IMM.OUTP.FOR SUB.FAC.INPUT
UCALLAMA UNANSWERED CALLS WITH AMA
DEBFA DEB FOR FACILITY INPUT/USAGE
UCALLIAC UNSUCCESS. CALLS WITH IACHASTA
AMAFAIID AMA F.SUB.FAC.INP.IMPL. DEACT.
CXSFAICH CENTREX STATION FAC.INP.CHARG.
CTXFAU CENTREX FAU CHARGING
UCALMOBT UNANSW. CALLS FOR MOBTERM.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDTDAT- 2+
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PMOBIO PREVENT.MOB IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ATTNOCHA RECORD CHRG.FREE CALL ATTEMPT
UCALLINA INAMA FOR UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS
This parameter specifies the record version identification
value which is to be reset. This value refers to the APS software
version.
A recording type (parameter REC) must also be specified when
previously the record version identification was entered with
a specified recording type.
Prerequisite:
This value can only be reset when this value is not requested
as EXTNSD data by any recording type (parameter REC).
PMOBS CANCEL ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
This parameter specifies that the activation of the PMOBS feature is
canceled (with reset of the threshold value).
ACT CANCEL ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
TYPE PMOB TYPE
This parameter specifies for which category and traffic type
combination the PMOB threshold is no longer valid.
a-b
a: CATEGORY
COINB COINBOX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
b: TRAFFIC TYPE
NAT NATIONAL
INAT INTERNATIONAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CDTDAT- 3-
DISP CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
- the extra and/or alternative data items.
- the activated call data treatment control flags
- non standard (extra and alternative) data for several recording types
- the status and the threshold value for preventive meter observation.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CDTDAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CDTDAT- 1-
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
This command enters:
- control flags for call data treatment,
- non standard (extra and alternative) data items for several recording
types,
- charging counter for facility input and facility usage,
- activation and threshold value (charge limit) for preventive meter,
observation (can be entered per category and traffic type),
- the record version identification value (per recording).
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CDTDAT : [REC=] <,EXTNSD= ,ALTNSD= ,MARKS= ,FAICNTR= [
[ [
[ ,FAUCNTR= ,VERSID= ,PMOBS=> [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies for which recording type the extra
data has to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching
system, and/or for which recording type the version identification
is valid.
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be
recorded for a subscriber metering
registration.
non standard data items to be recorded
with AMA registration.
with meter observation at the
originating side.
with meter observation at the
terminating side.
recorded for an active PMOB
registration.
MDR MESSAGE DATA RECORDING
for CENTREX subscriber charging with
MDR registration.
for traffic structure measurement.
DNOBS DN OBSERVATION
for directory number observation.
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
THIS IDENTIFIER ALLOWS TO ENTER EXTRA
NON STANDARD DATA ITEMS TO BE
RECORDED FOR AN ACTIVE IN AMA
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 1+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REGISTRATION.
OPERAMA OPERATOR AMA
recorded for AMA registration
for an operator input.
non standard data items to record with
AMA at active IACHASTA registration.
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERING
non standard data items to
record for an active
IACHASTA metering registration.
EXTNSD EXTRA NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which extra data items must be
recorded by the EWSD switching system for a call.
For a specific recording type, the amount of data to be
collected per recording type consists of:
- basic data items, which are always collected (i.e. fixed)
- extra data items, which are collected if entered via this
parameter (i.e. administrable).
Notes:
1. In case no recording type is specified (see parameter REC),
the extra data items entered are set for all relevant
recordings (see next overview).
2. The Extra Non Standard Data Items CONNID, FAUPRTNR,
TRAFQUAL, CAC and SERVINFO are default set for the relevant
recordings. They can be removed with the CAN CDTDAT
command.
3. If the feature CDR (Call Detail Recording) is activated with
the command ACT IAFEAT, common records are generated for both
the AMA and the IACAMA recording. To keep the contents of
the CDR records clear, the following settings are strongly
recommended in this case:
- the extra non standard data item REFINDUR should be set for
both the AMA and the IACAMA recording, or for none of them.
- if the extra non standard data item VERSID is set for both
the AMA and the IACAMA recording, the parameter VERSID
should have the same value for both recording types.
4. Although the Extra Non Standard Data Item TIMETNTH is only
relevant for ADMOSS, it must be administrated for the recording
AMA.
The following overview shows which extra data items can be
administered for which recording types by entering the respective
parameter value(s):
METSUB
PFXNATIN: National/International prefix digit(s).
AMA,
DEB
ACCURCHG: Currency IN charging and AOC support.
ADDCLGDN: Additional calling party directory number.
ADDRELC : Additional release cause.
ADDTAR : Add-on tariff data.
ADVCUMCH: Advised Cumulated Charges.
BGID : Business group identification.
BMETPULS: B-side meter pulses.
CAC : Carrier Access Code.
CALLIND : Additional call indicators.
CALLTAR : Call tariff.
CATRCVD : Received calling party category.
CATSENT : Sent calling party category.
CHARGES : Charge units for connection, charge units for
facility usage, zone and charge band.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
CLDRCVD : Received called party number.
CLDSENT : Sent called party number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 2+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CLGSENT : Sent calling party number.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
CTXNO : CENTREX numbers.
DEFMSN : Default multiple subscriber number.
DLUV52 : DLU/V52 A/B side.
DURBANS : Duration before answer.
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
FAUNONCH: Non chargeable own FAU.
FAUPRTNR: Facility Usage by Partner.
GCR : Global Charge reference.
INSERVK : IN service key.
MLPP : MLPP level.
NEWDEST : New destination.
OCLGDN : Originating calling party directory number.
OPMODE : Opmode A/B side.
OSSCLDUR: OSS call leg duration.
PATHSEL : Path selection.
PBXOPN : PBX operator number.
PORTADR : Port address.
RECOWNER: Record owner directory number.
RECTRID : Trunk Identification incoming/outgoing.
REDSENT : Sent redirecting number.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
RELIND : Release indicator.
SEQUENCE: Sequence number.
SERVINFO: Service info.
SPC : Signalling point code.
SSN : Service Subscriber Number.
TERMTYPE: Terminal type.
THRDPRTY: Third party number.
TIMETNTH: Time in tenths of seconds.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
VERSID : Record version identification.
MOBORIG
ACCURCHG: CURRENCY IN CHARGING AND AOC SUPPORT.
FAUNONCH: non chargeable own FAU.
MLPP : MLPP level.
PFXNATIN: Prefix national/international.
RECOWNER: Record owner.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 3+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOBTERM
PFXNATIN: Prefix national/international.
RECOWNER: Record owner.
PMOB
IACHASTA: IACAMA
ACCURCHG: CURRENCY IN CHARGING AND AOC SUPPORT.
ADDRELC : ADDITIONAL RELEASE CAUSE.
CHARGES : Charge units for connection.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
MLPP : MLPP level.
OSSCLDUR: OSS call leg duration.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 4+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IACHASTA: IACMET
MDR
TRST
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
IPCONOPT: IP Local Connection Options.
IPSTATS : IP Connection Statistics.
MLPP : MLPP level.
TRACEFAC: Trace Factor.
TRIGGER : Trigger Data.
DNOBS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 5+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
FAUNONCH: Non chargeable own FAU.
MLPP : MLPP level.
INAMA
ACCURCHG: Currency IN charging and AOC support.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
CLDTOSCP: Called party number sent to SCP.
DLUV52 : DLU/V52 A/B SIDE.
IMSI : IMSI number.
MAPCREF : MAP call reference.
SCPRDGDN: SCP redirecting number.
OPERAMA
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 6+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHARGES CALL CHARGES
This identifier allows to record charge units,
zone and charge band.
RECTRID RECORD TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
This identifier allows the recording of the trunk
identification.
The trunk identification can be recorded in the
following form:
- trunk group number + line number
or
- trunk group number + CIC identification
(see parameter ALTNSD).
BMETPULS B SIDE METER PULSES
This identifier allows to collect the B side
meter pulses for an IACHASTA registration.
OCLGDN ORIGINATING CALLING PARTY DN
This identifier allows to record the originating
calling party number within several recording type
records.
In case of PBX with DDI, this is the signalled
and screened directory number.
In case of CAMA and IACAMA this is the
inter-office signalled directory number.
DURBANS DURATION BEFORE ANSWER
This identifier allows to record the
call duration before answer.
THRDPRTY THIRD PARTY NUMBER
This identifier allows to provide the
third party number of a call transfer or
call forwarding within the tickets.
E.g. in case of serial call forwarding
the AMA records of all the call legs
contain the original calling party.
CLDRCVD RECEIVED CALLED PARTY NUMBER
received called party number within the tickets.
new destination number within the
tickets.
BGID BUSINESS GROUP IDENTIFICATION
CENTREX business group identifier within
the tickets.
CTXNO CENTREX NUMBERS
CENTREX numbers within the tickets.
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE NUMBER
sequence number within the tickets.
CHECKSUM CHECKSUM
checksum within the tickets.
CALLIND ADDITIONAL CALL INDICATORS
additional call indicators within the tickets.
CALLTAR CALL TARIFF
call tariff within the tickets.
GCR GLOBAL CHARGE REFERENCE
global charge reference .
Because this is an extension of the local
charge reference (controlable with the
identifier CONNID) the connection
identification will no longer be available
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 7+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
in the charging ticket when the global
charge reference is requested.
CONNID CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
connection identification.
FAUPRTNR FAU BY PARTNER
facility usage by the partner.
TRAFQUAL TRAFFIC QUALITY DATA
traffic quality data.
ADVCUMCH ADVISED CUMULATED CHARGES
advised cumulated charges.
ADDCLGDN ADDITIONAL CALLING PARTY DN
additional calling party number.
DEFMSN DEFAULT MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO.
default multiple subscriber number.
CLDSENT SENT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
sent called party number.
CLDTOSCP CALLED PARTY DN SENT TO SCP
called party number sent to the SCP.
SCPRDGDN PROVIDED REDIRECTING DN BY SCP
SCP provided redirecting number.
RECOWNER RECORD OWNER DN
record owner directory number.
PFXNATIN NATIONAL/INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
This identifier allows to have the
national and/or international prefix
included in the directory numbers.
EXCHNAME EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NAME
exchange identification name.
record version identification.
Prerequisite:
A record version identification value
(see parameter VERSID) must either
have been entered before or is entered
in the same command.
ADDTAR ADD-ON TARIFF DATA
add-on tariff data.
PBXOPN PBX OPERATOR NUMBER
PBX operator number.
RELIND RELEASE INDICATOR
release indicator.
INSERVK IN SERVICE KEY
IN service key.
MLPP M LEVEL PRECEDENCE/PREEMPTION
MLPP precedence level.
REFINDUR REFINED DURATION
This identifier allows recording of the
refined duration.
CLGSENT SENT CALLING PARTY NUMBER
sent calling party number.
REDSENT SENT REDIRECTING NUMBER
sent redirecting number.
CATSENT SENT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 8+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
sent calling party category.
CATRCVD RECEIVED CALLING PARTY CATEG.
received calling party category.
SERVINFO SERVICE INFO
service info.
MAPCREF MAP CALL REFERENCE
MAP call reference.
IMSI IMSI NUMBER
IMSI number.
SPC SIGNALLING POINT CODE
signalling point code.
OSSCLDUR OSS CALL LEG DURATION
OSS call leg duration.
TRACEFAC TRACE FACTOR
trace factor.
TERMTYPE TERMINAL TYPE
terminal type.
OPMODE OPMODE A/B SIDE
operation mode for A/B side.
DLUV52 DLU/V52 A/B SIDE
DLU/V52 A/B side.
PATHSEL PATH SELECTION
RSU path.
PORTADR PORT OR EQUIPMENT ADDRESS
port or equipment address.
TRIGGER TRIGGER DATA
trigger data.
ADDRELC ADDITIONAL RELEASE CAUSE
additional release cause.
FAUNONCH NON CHARGEABLE OWN FAU
non chargeable own FAU.
TIMETNTH TIME IN TENTHS OF SECONDS
time stamps in tenths of seconds.
ACCURCHG ACCUMULATED CURRENCY CHARGES
accumulated currency charges.
SSN SUBSCRIBER SERVICE NUMBER
subscriber service number.
IPSTATS IP CONNECTION STATISTICS
IP Connection Statistics.
IPCONOPT IP LOCAL CONNECTION OPTIONS
IP Local Connection Options.
ALTNSD ALTERNATIVE NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which alternative data items must be
recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
The possibility exists to collect alternative data items instead of
the standard data items for some recording types.
The alternative data items are administered independent from
the recording type. This means that when an alternative data item
is entered, it is valid for all recording types for which it is
relevant.
Following overview shows for which recording types, which
alternative data items are relevant:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 9+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AMA
DEB
CACTYPE : CAC type.
EXCHIDNO: Exchange identification number instead of name.
EXTBDIG : More than 18 B-digits can be registered (only
relevant for old ticket layout of V4.X).
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
RANSWTIM: Recording of begin time instead of end time.
RECTRCIC: Trunk identification with CIC instead of
the line number.
TGN2 : Special representation of the trunk group number.
TGNA : Trunk group name.
IACHASTA: IACAMA
CACTYPE : CAC type.
the line number.
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
MOBORIG
INAMA
CACTYPE : CAC type.
the line number.
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
MOBTERM
OPERAMA:
PMOB:
MDR
CACTYPE : CAC type.
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
TRST
DNOBS:
the line number.
TGNA TRUNK GROUP NAME
This identifier allows to record a trunk group
in form of the trunk group name instead of the
standard trunk group number (parameter TGNA
in command CR TGRP).
Incompatibilities: ALTNSD=TGN2.
CACTYPE CAC TYPE
CAC type instead of the MCE type.
OWNCAC OWN CAC
own carrier access code.
EXCHIDNO EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
exchange identification number instead
of the exchange identification name.
RANSWTIM RECORD ANSWER TIME
begin date/time of the call instead
of the end date/time.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 10+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTBDIG EXTENDED B DIGITS
This identifier allows to collect more than
18 B-digits in the old ticket layout of V4.X
(AMA, DEB).
RECTRCIC RECORD TRUNK IDENT. WITH CIC
This identifier allows to record a trunk in form
of circuit identification code instead of line
number for Signaling System No. 7 trunk groups.
This alternative data item only becomes active
if the extra data item RECTRID is set.
TGN2 SECOND TRUNK GROUP NO. IDENT.
This identifier allows to record a trunk group in
form of the second trunk group number instead of
the standard trunk group number (parameter TGN2
in command CR TGRP).
Incompatibilities: ALTNSD=TGNA.
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies the control flags that can be used
to control specific functions of call data treatment.
AMASFAI AMA IMM.OUTP.FOR SUB.FAC.INPUT
If this flag is set, the AMAIO-feature (immediate
output of the AMA record) also applies to AMA
records generated for subscriber controled inputs.
UCALLAMA AMA FOR UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS
If this flag is set, AMA-tickets are generated
for unsuccessful calls, i.e. calls that have not
been answered, if AMA must be performed for that
call, e.g. due to zoning result or 1st dialed
digit (project specific GP implementation).
This flag is not valid for DEB.
DEBFA DEB FOR FACILITY INPUT/USAGE
If this flag is set, DEB records are also
generated for facility input/usage by the
subscriber if the DEB feature is activated
for this subscriber.
UCALLIAC IACHASTA FOR UNSUCCESS. CALLS
If this flag is set, IACHASTA registration is
performed for unsuccessful calls, i.e. calls
that have not been answered and for which
IACHASTA registration with METERING or with
AMA must be performed (cfr. UCALLAMA).
AMAFAIID AMA FOR IMPLICIT DEACTIVATION
If this flag is set, AMA tickets are generated
for facilities that are implicitly deactivated
by activating another facility via SCI.
CXSFAICH CENTREX STATION FAC.INP.CHARG.
If this flag is set, AMA tickets are also
generated for subscriber controled inputs from
CENTREX subscribers.
CTXFAU CENTREX FAU CHARGING
UCALMOBT UNANSW. CALLS FOR MOBTERM.
PMOBIO PREVENT.MOB IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ATTNOCHA RECORD CHRG.FREE CALL ATTEMPT
If this flag is set, AMA, DEB and MDR
tickets are also generated for charge free
call attempts.
The new mark that controls the generation
of charge records for charge free call attempts
will only be applicable for valid call attempts
with no call attempt units engineered.
For chargeable call attempts that are made
charge free by a no charge indication, the new
mark will not be applicable (a record will be
generated).
UCALLINA INAMA FOR UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS
If this flag is set, IN AMA tickets are generated
for unsuccessful calls. These are calls that have
not been answered but IN AMA must be performed
nevertheless for that call, e.g. because of the
zoning result or 1st dialed digit (project
specific GP implementation).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 11+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FAICNTR FACILITY INPUT CHARGE COUNTER
This parameter specifies on which counter the charge units for
facility input have to be accumulated.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
FAUCNTR FACILITY USAGE CHARGE COUNTER
This parameter specifies on which counter the charge units for
facility usage have to be accumulated.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
VERSID RECORD VERSION IDENT. VALUE
This parameter specifies the record version identification
value per recording.
If no recording type (parameter REC) is specified, the
entered record version identification value is set for all
relevant recordings, i.e. for those recordings for which
the EXTNSD value VERSID can be set.
PMOBS PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
This parameter allows the PMOB feature to be activated together with
entering the PMOB threshold value.
PMOB tickets are generated for calls whose charges have reached
or exceeded the threshold specified in the command.
The generated PMOB tickets can be displayed with DISP CHAREC.
The PMOB threshold can be displayed with DISP CDTDAT.
a-b
a: ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
ACT ACTIVATE PMOBS
b: PMOBS THRESHOLD VALUE=
TYPE PMOB TYPE
This parameter specifies for which category and traffic type
combination the PMOB threshold becomes valid.
a-b
a: CATEGORY
COINB COINBOX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 12+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TRAFFIC TYPE
NAT NATIONAL
INAT INTERNATIONAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 13-
RESET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS
This command resets the command file options to their defaults in the
session level. If it forms part of a command file, this command sets the
command file options to the values of the next higher level.
Input format
[ [
[ RESET CFOPT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RESET CFOPT- 1-
SET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS
This command sets the command file options. In dialog, the parameters
defined with this command remain in effect until the command is entered
again or until the command is input from a command file with parameter
SCOPE=GLOBAL or until the defaults are set with the appropriate
command.
If the command SET CFOPT is entered from a command file, the
following is valid:
- It remains in effect until the command is entered again or until
RESET CFOPT is entered from the command file.
- In a command file addressed from this command file (lower level)
it remains in effect until the command SET CFOPT/RESET CFOPT is
entered from the lower level command file.
When the higher level command file is re-entered, the last
SET CFOPT/RESET CFOPT entered there is valid.
- Otherwise the command is valid up to the end of the command file.
Input format
[ [
[ SET CFOPT : <ACKCFS= ,ON= ,OFF= ,DANCMD= ,ACKREQ=> [
[ [
[ [,SCOPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACKCFS EXTEND OF CMD ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This parameter defines to what extent commands from command files
ALL ALL
CMDERR COMMAND ACKNOWLEDGE + ERROR
ERROR ERROR ACKNOWLEDGE
Default: ERROR
ON SWITCH ON
This parameter specifies which of the switches are set to ON.
OFF SWITCH OFF
This parameter specifies which of the switches are set to OFF.
Default value: X
DANCMD EXECUTION OF DANGEROUS COMMAND
This parameter specifies whether commands in the command file
with the attribute Dangerous command are to be executed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET CFOPT- 1+
SET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXEC EXECUTION
NOEXEC NO EXECUTION
Default: NOEXEC
ACKREQ ACKNOWLEDGE OF READ REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether acknowledgement requests
arising due to command input are to be answered positively
or negatively.
POS POSITIVE ACKNOWLEDGE
NEG NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE
Default: NEG
SCOPE RANGE OF VALIDITY
This parameter specifies the range of validity of the other
parameters.
LOCAL ONLY FOR ACTUAL NESTING LEVEL
GLOBAL GLOBAL VALIDITY FOR ALL LEVELS
Default: LOCAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET CFOPT- 2-
DISP CFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL FAILURE TREATMENT
This command prints out the entire RCF table (call failure treatment table).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CFT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CFT- 1-
ENTR CFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL FAILURE TREATMENT
This command can allocate or remove a table for a certain type of program.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CFT : PRTYPE= ,CFTTAB= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRTYPE PROGRAM TYPE
This parameter specifies the user program.
CFTTAB CALL FAILURE TREATMENT TABLE
This parameter specifies the call failure handling table that
defines the response to specific call failures. Its values are:
0 Initial value
1...15 Table number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CFT- 1-
DISP CFTJOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMAND FILE TIME JOB
This command displays the significant data for timed command file-jobs.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CFTJOB : [JN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number. If this parameter
is omitted, all existing scheduled command file-jobs are
displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CFTJOB- 1-
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING DATA RECORDS
This command displays EWSD charging data records, i.e. call detail
records and administrative records that are used for charging purposes
or for charging observation purposes.
The charging data records to be displayed may be stored on the following
locations:
- the EWSD CP (Central Processor) disk
- the EWSD MP (Main Processor) disk
- a tape or magneto optical disk.
Following types of charging data records exist and can be displayed:
- for charging purposes:
AMA records: To charge a PSTN subscriber or a TFS subscriber.
If feature type AMA is activated these records are
stored in the default file IA.ICAMA , otherwise if
feature type CDR is activated these records are
stored in the default file IA.ICCDR or the two files
IA.ICCDR1 and IA.ICCDR2.
INAMA records: To charge an IN service subscriber.
These records are stored in the default file
IA.ICINA.
IACAMA records: To perform inter-operator charging.
If feature type IARA is activated these records are
stored in the default file IA.ICIAR or the two files
IA.ICIAR1 and IA.ICIAR2, otherwise if feature type
CDR is activated these records are stored in the
default file IA.ICCDR or the two files IA.ICCDR1 and
IA.ICCDR2.
- for observation purposes:
MOB records: To observe charges of a PSTN/TFS subscriber.
IA.ICMOB.
PMOB records: To observe expensive calls (calls for which the
charges exceed a certain limit) for PSTN subscribers.
IA.ICPMB.
<job number>.
1. DISP CHAREC - AMA DISPLAY AMA RECORDS
2. DISP CHAREC - CDR DISPLAY CDR RECORDS
3. DISP CHAREC - CHN DISPLAY AMA/INA RECORDS FOR PROJ. CHINA
4. DISP CHAREC - IACAMA DISPLAY IACAMA RECORDS
5. DISP CHAREC - INAMA DISPLAY INAMA RECORDS
6. DISP CHAREC - MOB DISPLAY MOB RECORDS
7. DISP CHAREC - PMOB DISPLAY PMOB RECORDS
1. Input format
DISPLAY AMA RECORDS
This input format is used to display the AMA records.
[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [
[ [
[ [,NEWDEST=] [,ADDNO=] [,ICTGNO=] [,OGTGNO=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,FILE=] [,FILEAR=] [,FILEOUT=] [,VSN=] [
[ [
[ [,UNREL=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 1+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
data record.
OWNERDN OWNER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the "Owner Directory Number" of the
relevant charging records :
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
The parameter must be entered with local area code and without
discriminating digits.
The "Owner Directory Number" in the charging data records can
be stored in different fields :
* In the field "Record-Owner" if this field is available.
* In the data package mentioned in the field "Record Owner Type".
The Record Owner Type refers to either:
- the data package "Calling Party Number" ,
- the data package "Redirecting Number" ,
- the data package "System Provided Number" ,
- the data package "Connected Party Number" ,
- the data package "Called Party Number" or
- the data package "Service Subscriber Number".
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digits as stored in the data package
"Calling Party Number" of the relevant charging records :
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
The national or international prefix digits (e.g. "0" for national
and "00" for international) are never present in the data package
"Calling Party Number".
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter specifies the new destination digits
stored in the data package "New Destination"
ADDNO ADDITIONAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies one of the additional numbers
stored in the data package "Additional Numbers".
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 2+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ICTGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the incoming trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
OGTGNO OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the outgoing trunk group of the
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 3+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 4+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILEAR FILE NAME OF THE SAMAR FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the SAMAR (SAMAR = array
of SAM files which logically belong together) stored on the
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
This parameter can be used in combination with parameter FILE.
The following table gives an overview of the location where
the charging data records are searched:
FILE FILEAR SEARCH ON
- - the default file on EWSD CP disk
- x all the SAM files of the SAMAR on EWSD
MP disk
x - the indicated file on EWSD CP disk or
on tape/magneto optical disk
x x the indicated SAM file of the SAMAR on
the EWSD MP disk
FILEOUT FILE NAME OF THE RESULT FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the file where
the records matching the search criteria are stored.
The parameter is not relevant when the file contains
records with a customer specific format.
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
UNREL DISPLAY ONLY FROM UNREL.BLOCKS
This parameter gives the possibility to restrict
the search area of the cyclic file to that part
of the file, which is not yet released.
N SEARCH AREA IS THE WHOLE FILE
NO SEARCH AREA IS THE WHOLE FILE
Y SEARCH AREA IS THE UNREL PART
YES SEARCH AREA IS THE UNREL PART
Default: N
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 5+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY CDR RECORDS
This input format is used to display the IACAMA and the AMA records
stored in the CDR file IA.ICCDR.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,UNREL=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
data record.
CDR COMMON DATA RECORD
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 6+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 7+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 8+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
MP disk
the EWSD MP disk
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 9+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: N
or not.
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 10+
DISP CHAREC
CHN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY AMA/INA RECORDS FOR PROJ. CHINA
This input format is used to display the AMA/INA records
for Project China.
[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] [
[ [
[ [,VSN=] [,UNREL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
data record.
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK WITH AMA
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 11+
DISP CHAREC
CHN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 12+
DISP CHAREC
CHN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
Notes:
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 13+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISPLAY IACAMA RECORDS
This input format is used to display the IACAMA records.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,UNREL=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
data record.
IACAMA INTERADMIN. CHARGING VIA AMA
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 14+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 15+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 16+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
MP disk
the EWSD MP disk
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 17+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: N
or not.
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 18+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISPLAY INAMA RECORDS
This input format is used to display the INA records.
[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,CLI=] [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,NEWDEST=] [
[ [
[ [,ADDNO=] [,ICTGNO=] [,OGTGNO=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [,FILEAR=] [,FILEOUT=] [,VSN=] [,UNREL=] [
[ [
[ [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
data record.
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK WITH AMA
CLI CALLING LINE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the directory number as stored in the
data package "Calling Line Id" for the relevant charging record
INAMA.
The parameter must be entered with local area code, and, depending
on the project, with or without discrimination digit.
The "Calling Line Id" data package contains the signalled calling
party number.
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 19+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 20+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 21+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
MP disk
the EWSD MP disk
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 22+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: N
or not.
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 23+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
DISPLAY MOB RECORDS
This input format is used to display the MOB records.
[ [
[ [
[ [,OGTGNO=] [,NEWDEST=] [,ADDNO=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [,FILEOUT=] [,VSN=] [,UNREL=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
data record.
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 24+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 25+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
FILE FILE NAME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 26+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
Default: IA.ICMOB
Notes:
Default: N
or not.
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 27+
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
DISPLAY PMOB RECORDS
This input format is used to display the PMOB records.
[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [,FILEOUT=] [,VSN=] [,UNREL=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
data record.
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 28+
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
- - no lower limit
- x (today,BEGTIME)
x - (BEGDATE,00:00:00)
a-b-c
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
ENDTIME END TIME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 29+
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- - no upper limit
- x (today,ENDTIME)
x - (ENDDATE,23:59:59)
a-b-c
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
Default: IA.ICPMB
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 30+
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: N
or not.
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHAREC- 31-
DISP CHF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT RECORD
This command displays the disk based charging fault records for the
specified fault cases. To narrow down the selection, a date/time interval
can be entered. Omitting this interval indicates that there are no
constraints.
Notes :
- Only when the AREA and CLASS parameters are missing and all values
is specified for CASE are the internal fault cases included in the
selection. For all other combinations only the user fault cases are
considered.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CHF : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] [,DATE= [,TIME=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CASE CHARGING FAULT CASE(S)
This parameter specifies the fault case. This constitutes the
lowest level of the fault classification system adopted by
Charging Fault Treatment. It corresponds to a complete error
as detectable in the generated accounting data.
MISMETER MISSING METERING DATA
INVMETCK INVALID METER CHECKSUM
INVMETDN INVALID METERING DN
INVRCDNG INVALID RECORDING TYPE
MISDIGIT MISSING DIGITS
ILLCHUNI ILLEGAL CHARGE UNITS
INVDURAT INVALID DURATION
TARAUDIT TARIFF AUDIT
NORESPTA NO RESPONSE FROM TARIFF AUDIT
INVCDMSG INVALID CALL DATA MESSAGE
ILLSUMF2 ILL. SUB METERING FOR FORMAT 2
INVCNTR INVALID COUNTERS
INVCNTF1 INVALID COUNTERS FOR FORMAT 1
INVICAMA INVALID IAC AMA
INVICMET INVALID IAC METERING
ICDBINC IAC DATABASE INCONSISTENCY
CASE17 FAULT CASE 17
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHF- 1+
DISP CHF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Represents all defined user fault case values.
AREA CHARGING FAULT AREA(S)
This parameter specifies the fault area. This is the highest
level of the fault classification system adopted by Charging
Fault Treatment. It reflects a partitioning of the available
charging recordings according to the way in which the accounting
information is gathered.
METERING FAULT AREA METERING
Fault area for charging recordings relying on
memory based counters.
TICKET FAULT AREA TICKETING
disk based records.
Represents all defined fault area values.
CLASS CHARGING FAULT CLASS(ES)
This parameter specifies the fault class. This represents the
intermediate level of the fault classification adopted by
Charging Fault Treatment. It provides a cause/effect based
partitioning of the individual fault cases.
DETERMIN FAULT CLASS DETERMINATION
Fault class which groups all cases related to the
determination of the requested charging recordings
and -for every concurrent recording- of the
required charging information.
INFORM FAULT CLASS INFORMATION
Fault class which groups all the cases which are
(in)directly caused by incorrect or inconsistent
(within or between recordings) charging
information.
SECURITY FAULT CLASS SECURITY
related to the safeguarding of the generated
charging data. This includes checksum monitoring
and handling of system recovery.
Represents all defined fault class values.
DATE RECORD DATE INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the date that can be
entered to narrow down the selection of displayed
charging fault records.
The date can be entered on its own or in
combination with a time.
A single value for this parameter is taken as the
start date of an open ended interval.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHF- 2+
DISP CHF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME RECORD TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time that can be
entered to narrow down the selection of displayed
charging fault records.
The time can only be entered if the date is
also specified.
A single value for this parameter is taken as the
starting time of an open ended interval.
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHF- 3-
ACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command allows the activation of the specified fault case(s) and,
therefore, of the corresponding code-based plausibility checkpoints. Once
activated, the latter can monitor various system functions and gather
information. The specified case(s) can either be hard-coded or have been
created by operator command.
Notes :
- Cases can be entered individually or globally for selected AREA/CLASS
combinations.
- The status of the user fault cases can be verified by means of the
DISP CHFCASE command.
- The eventual status of a fault case is determined by the overall Charging
Fault Treatment settings as controlled by the MOD CHFSTAT command.
- Individual plausibility checkpoints can pertain to multiple fault cases
and their status is, therefore, dependent on all of these cases.
- The local fault case status table in the active LTGs is automatically
updated by this command.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CHFCASE : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CHFCASE- 1+
ACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
disk based records.
information.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CHFCASE- 2-
CR CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command creates a new user fault case for Charging Fault Treatment
for the specified AREA/CLASS combination.
As such, it allows the definition of additional cases in an existing APS
which can be used in plausibility checkpoints implemented via code patches.
The symbolic identifier, which will represent the new user case in
subsequent ACT CHFCASE and DACT CHFCASE commands or in the output of
the DISP CHFCASE command, is determined by the system and reported
in the result message.
This new case is indistinguishable, both to administration and software
users from the hard-coded fault cases. In particular, this means that it
can not be destroyed or reassigned to another AREA/CLASS
classification.
Notes :
- the created case is initially inactive and must be explicitly activated
with the ACT CHFCASE command.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CHFCASE : AREA= ,CLASS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AREA CHARGING FAULT AREA
disk based records.
CLASS CHARGING FAULT CLASS
intermediate level of the fault classification adopted by Charging
Fault Treatment. It provides a cause/effect based partitioning of
the individual fault cases.
information.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CHFCASE- 1-
DACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command allows the deactivation of the specified fault case(s) and,
therefore, of the corresponding code-based plausibility checkpoints. Once
deactivated, the latter stop monitoring system functions and gathering
information. The specified case(s) can either be hard-coded or have been
created by operator command.
Notes :
combinations.
- The status of the user fault cases can be verified by means of the
DISP CHFCASE command.
- Individual plausibility checkpoints can pertain to multiple fault cases
and their status is, therefore, dependent on all of these cases.
updated by this command.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CHFCASE : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CHFCASE- 1+
DACT CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Represents all the defined user fault case values.
charging recordings according to the way in which accounting
disk based records.
Represents all the defined fault area values.
Fault class which groups all the cases related to
the determination of the requested charging
recordings and -for every concurrent recording-
of the required charging information.
information.
Represents all the defined fault class values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CHFCASE- 2-
DISP CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command displays information about all the user fault cases and, therefore,
of the corresponding plausibility checkpoints belonging to the specified
AREA/CLASS combination.
Both the hard-coded user fault cases and the ones created with the
CR CHFCASE command are reported.
The information to display is specified with the FUNC parameter and includes :
- the status of the user fault cases
- statistical data about the user fault cases : daily occurrence thresholds
and daily and total occurrence counters
Notes :
- This command only lists the relevant fault cases for every specified
combination. It is possible that particular combinations contain no fault
cases and return an empty list.
- The status reported by this command corresponds to the one controlled by the
ACT CHFCASE and DACT CHFCASE commands.
The eventual status as determined by the overall Charging Fault Treatment
settings, as controlled by the MOD CHFSTAT, command is not taken into
account.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CHFCASE : AREA= ,CLASS= [,FUNC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
charging recordings according to the way in which the
accounting information is gathered.
disk based records.
Represents all the defined fault area values.
intermediate level of the fault classification adopted by Charging
Fault Treatment. It provides a cause/effect based partitioning of
the individual fault cases.
information.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHFCASE- 1+
DISP CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Represents all the defined fault class values.
FUNC DISPLAY FUNCTION
This parameter specifies which information must be displayed for
the selected fault cases. Not entering the parameter displays
the status.
STATUS FAULT CASE STATUS
This function displays the status of the selected
user fault cases.
CNTR FAULT CASE COUNTERS
This function displays the statistical information
of the selected user fault cases : the daily
occurrence thresholds and the daily and total
occurrence counters.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHFCASE- 2-
MOD CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT CASE
This command has a dual purpose : it can be used to change the daily
occurrence thresholds or to reset (i.e. return to 0) the daily and total
occurrence counters for the specified user fault cases. The threshold
values are used by the system to suppress operator alarming and disk storage
for the case once the daily occurrence falls outside the selected interval.
The specified case(s) can either be hard-coded or have been created by
operator command.
Notes :
combinations.
- The threshold and counter values of the user fault cases can be verified
by means of the DISP CHFCASE command.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CHFCASE : CASE= [,AREA= ,CLASS=] <,DCNTRTHR= ,RCNTR=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHFCASE- 1+
MOD CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
disk based records.
information.
DCNTRTHR DAILY OCCURRENCE COUNTER THR.
This parameter specifies the lower and upper threshold
values for the daily occurrence of a user fault case.
This provides a suppression of output when the daily
occurrence falls outside the selected boundaries.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHFCASE- 2+
MOD CHFCASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: LOWER THRESHOLD VALUE=
b: UPPER THRESHOLD VALUE=
RCNTR RESET OCCURRENCE COUNTERS
This parameter allows a reset (i.e. return to 0) of
the daily and total occurrence counters of a user
fault case.
NO NO COUNTER RESET
Indicates that the daily and total occurrence
counters must not be reset.
YES COUNTER RESET
Indicates that the daily and total occurrence
counters must be reset.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHFCASE- 3-
DISP CHFSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS
This command displays global status information about the Charging
Fault Treatment System consisting of :
- the current global plausibility checkpoint and immediate
output settings as determined by the MOD CHFSTAT command.
- statistical information about all the internal fault cases :
daily occurrence thresholds and daily and total occurrence
counters.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CHFSTAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHFSTAT- 1-
MOD CHFSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CHARGING FAULT TREATMENT STATUS
This command modifies the global plausibility checkpoint and immediate
output settings (status) of the Charging Fault Treatment system.
Notes :
- The overall plausibility checkpoint status controlled with this command
overrules the status of the individual fault case(s) as determined by
ACT CHFCASE and DACT CHFCASE commands.
This means that, regardless of any other settings, all fault cases and
checkpoints, including those used by the system itself, are deactivated
if the global status is set to OFF.
Changing the status to ON restores the individual states of the
fault cases.
updated by this command if the checkpoint status was changed.
- Immediate output of detected charging errors is also dependent on
the fault case specific filtering thresholds and on the overall
plausibility checkpoint status.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CHFSTAT : <CHECK= ,ALARM=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CHECK FAULT TREAMENT CHECK STATUS
This parameter determines the overall status of the Charging Fault
Treatment plausibility checkpoints and of their controlling fault
cases.
OFF CHECK STATUS INACTIVE
Status is OFF (i.e. inactive)
ON CHECK STATUS ACTIVE
Status is ON (i.e. active)
ALARM FAULT TREATMENT ALARM STATUS
This parameter determines the overall operator alarming (i.e.
immediate output) status for Charging Fault Treatment.
OFF ALARM STATUS INACTIVE
Status is OFF (i.e. inactive)
ON ALARM STATUS ACTIVE
Status is ON (i.e. active)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHFSTAT- 1-
DISP CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING FEATURES
This command displays charging features of a subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- DISP CHRGFEA is only accepted for a main station (analog) or
an ISDN basic access.
DISP CHRGFEA displays the charging features of a subscriber:
- Class Of Service
- Class Of Service with Data.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CHRGFEA : [LAC=] ,DN= [,FUNCTION=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
The parameter specifies the local area code of the
subscriber.
Notes:
- LAC is mandatory if in the subscriber is connected to an
exchange with multiple diretory volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FUNCTION DISPLAY FUNCTION
SCLSSUB SCLS SUBSCRIBER
Subscribers that have SCLS assigned are displayed.
Parameters LAC and DN have to specify the full
range (value X).
SCLSLIM SCLS LIMIT REACHED
Subscribers that have reached the SCLS limit are
displayed.
Parameters LAC and DN have to specify the full
range (value X).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHRGFEA- 1-
MOD CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CHARGING FEATURES
This command modifies the charging features of individual
subscribers as described below.
Notes:
- MOD CHRGFEA starts (stops) credit limit supervision
for individual subscribers or modifies the credit limit
of a subscriber under supervision. With the parameter COSDAT,
the type of credit limit supervision and the credit limit
itself can be entered. CCOSDAT cancels the credit limit
supervision level for the given subscriber. COSDAT and
CCOSDAT cannot be entered together.
- MOD CHRGFEA resets (to zero) the charge counters for subscriber
credit limit supervision if the RSTCNTR parameter is specified.
This is only possible if manual reset was previously allowed with
the MOD CHRGOPT command. Depending on the values of the LAC
and DN parameters either the counter for a single subscriber
or the counters for all subscribers are reset.
- MOD CHRGFEA sets (cancels) the charging features FAIAMA,
FAUAMA, UCALLAMA and SCLSMOD. COS and CCOS parameters
can be entered simultaneously as long as different features are
specified for the two parameters.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CHRGFEA : [LAC=] ,DN= <,COSDAT= ,CCOSDAT= ,COS= ,CCOS= [
[ [
[ ,RSTCNTR=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
The parameter specifies the local area code of the subscriber.
Notes:
- LAC is mandatory if the subscriber is connected to an
exchange with multiple directory number volume.
The value X (all) is only allowed in combination with the
parameter RSTCNTR and the value all (X) for the DN parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
The value X (all) is only allowed in combination with the parameter
RSTCNTR and the value all (X) for the LAC parameter.
COSDAT CLASS OF SERVICE WITH DATA
This parameter specifies the type of credit limit supervision
level and the credit limit.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed for:
analog main stations,
ISDN-BA POTS,
CTX subscribers and
coinboxes.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGFEA- 1+
MOD CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: CHARGING CLASS OF SERVICE
SCLSIMM SCLS IMMEDIATE RELEASE
SCLSIMM is a type of subscriber credit limit
supervision that immediately releases a call
when the credit limit has been reached.
Additionally, once the limit has been reached,
only calls to non-barrable destinations are
possible until the feature is cancelled or new
credit becomes available. The subscriber gets a
tone or announcement before dialing if the
credit limit has been reached.
Remarks:
- Non-barrable destinations remain reachable after
the credit limit has been reached.
- The feature is canceled with CCOSDAT.
- The credit limit value must always be entered
simultaneously.
SCLSDEF SCLS DEFERRED RELEASE
SCLSDEF is a type of subscriber credit limit
supervision that prohibits all calls except
those to non-barrable destinations, once the
credit limit has been reached.
Active calls are not released when the credit
limit is reached. The subscriber gets a tone or
announcement before dialing if the credit limit
has been reached.
Remarks:
- Non-barrable destinations remain reachable
after the credit limit has been reached.
- The feature is canceled with CCOSDAT.
- The credit limit value must always be entered
simultaneously.
SCLSINF SCLS INFORMATIVE
SCLSINF is a type of subscriber credit limit
supervision that does not release the active
call or prohibit new calls once the credit
limit has been reached. Only a warning tone or
announcement is applied before dialing once the
credit limit has been reached. Charges continue
to be added to the supervision counter of the
subscriber until the feature is canceled with
CCOSDAT.
SCLSMSN CENTRAL SCLS FOR MSN
SCLSMSN is a type of subscriber credit limit
supervision that allows to use the credit limit
of the default DN for a member of a Multiple
Subscriber Number (MSN).
The supervision counter and the supervision
level for the member using SCLSMSN are
defined at the default directory number.
The feature can be canceled with CCOSDAT.
b: CREDIT LIMIT=
This unit specifies the credit limit for
the supervision levels SCLSIMM,
SCLSDEF or SCLSINF.
This unit is mandatory when one of the
supervision levels is entered.
The entered value is in pulses or in
currency depending on the SCLSAFMT
set with MOD CHRGOPT
CCOSDAT CANCEL CLASS OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the charging feature that is to be
canceled.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGFEA- 2+
MOD CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCLSIMM SCLS IMMEDIATE RELEASE
SCLSDEF SCLS DEFERRED RELEASE
SCLSINF SCLS INFORMATIVE
SCLSMSN SCLS MSN
COS CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the classes of service for charging
features that are to be entered or modified.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed for analog main stations,
ISDN-BA POTS and CTX subscribers,
incoming or bothway PBX-lines.
- The activation of a feature that is already active is
rejected.
FAIAMA FACILITY INPUT WITH AMA
AMA tickets must be generated for all the facility
inputs (i.e.SCI) made by the specified subscriber.
This is the subscriber specific counterpart of
the per facility/action AMA activation with the
CR FAICHA command.
FAUAMA FACILITY USAGE WITH AMA
AMA tickets must be generated for every facility
usage by the specified subscriber.
This is the subscriber specific counterpart of
the per facility AMA activation that is possible
with the CR FAUCHA command.
UCALLAMA UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS WITH AMA
AMA tickets must be generated for all the unsuc-
cessful calls made by the specified subscriber.
This is the subscriber specific counterpart of the
global AMA for unsuccessful calls activation that
is possible with the ENTR CDTDAT command. As for
the global setting, the subscriber specific
UCALLAMA activation is only operative for calls
for which the AMA recording is active. It is not
a recording by itself.
SCLSMOD SCLS MODIFICATION AUTHORITY
When the subscriber has the SCLSMOD feature he is
allowed to change his own credit limit for the
credit limit supervision features via subscriber
controlled input.
CCOS CANCEL CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the classes of service for charging
features that are to be canceled.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed for analog main stations,
ISDN-BA POTS and CTX subscribers,
incoming or bothway PBX-lines.
- The cancellation of an inactive feature is rejected.
FAIAMA FACILITY INPUT WITH AMA
FAUAMA FACILITY USAGE WITH AMA
UCALLAMA UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS WITH AMA
SCLSMOD SCLS MODIFICATION AUTHORITY
RSTCNTR RESET SCLS COUNTERS
This parameter specifies that one or all subscriber credit
limit supervision charge counter(s) must be reset.
The parameter is entered in combination with the LAC and
DN parameters.
Notes:
- Parameters LAC and DN can have the value X only in
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGFEA- 3+
MOD CHRGFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
combination with this parameter (and must then both
have this value).
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGFEA- 4-
DISP CHRGOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING OPTIONS
This command displays charging options for subscriber
credit limit supervision that are defined on switch
level with the command MOD CHRGOPT.
- SCLS administration format specifies the format
of the credit limit input and display.
- SCLS advance warning threshold specifies the
percentage of the limit that has to be reached before
a warning tone or announcement is applied.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CHRGOPT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CHRGOPT- 1-
MOD CHRGOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CHARGING OPTIONS
This command modifies the switch level charging options.
Each command parameter corresponds to one or more charging options
according to the description below.
In order to administer the parameters, subscriber metering must
be activated first with the ENTR EXDDAT command.
Only the parameters NETID and CNYTYPE can be entered
without subscriber metering being active.
Notes:
- Parameter SCLSAFMT specifies the entry and display format of
the subscriber credit limit and the maximum credit limit that can
be given to individual subscribers with the MOD CHRGFEA
command.
- Parameter SCLSWTHR sets the advance warning threshold for
subscriber credit limit supervision. The warning threshold gives
the percentage of the subscriber credit limit that has to be
reached before an advance warning tone or announcement is applied
before dialling.
- Parameter NETID defines the National Regulation Authority and
the Network Identification for charging messages sent by this
switch with the Application Transport Mechanism.
- Parameter AOCCFACT specifies the pulse and currency conversion
factors for Advice Of Charge. Separate conversion factors can be
entered for different, predefined connection types.
- Parameter AOCCDOPT determines the display precision and the
minimum difference between two consecutive displays for Advice
Of Charge.
- Parameter CNYTYPE specifies the type of all the currency
values in the same exchange and the currency identification
string for Advice Of Charge for all access types. The currency
type is also used for charging messages in currency sent by this
switch with the Application Transport Mechanism.
- Parameter AOCQPLSS specifies the pulse identification string
for Advice Of Charge to QSIG accesses.
- Parameter SCLSRST specifies the method of resetting the SCLS
aggregate counters.
The counters can be reset
- manually by entering MANUAL,
- automatically at a specified day (method AUTO) or
- when an account file is made (method METSUB).
- Parameter SCLSBLK specifies if terminating calls must also be
blocked (besides the blocking of originating calls) when the
SCLS limit has been reached.
- Parameter SCLSESS makes charging information essential for a
call by a subscriber with the SCLS feature activated.
- Parameter SASSCLS allows the SCLS feature during the Stand
Alone Service of an RSU (Remote Switching Unit).
- Parameter SASIAC allows the registration of
Inter Administration CHArging and STAtistics (IACHASTA)
during the Stand Alone Service of an RSU (Remote Switching Unit).
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CHRGOPT : <SCLSAFMT= ,SCLSWTHR= ,NETID= ,AOCCFACT= [
[ [
[ ,CNYTYPE= ,AOCCDOPT= ,SCLSRST= ,AOCQPLSS= [
[ [
[ ,SCLSBLK= ,CSCLSBLK= ,SCLSESS= ,SASSCLS= [
[ [
[ ,SASIAC=> ; [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGOPT- 1+
MOD CHRGOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
SCLSAFMT SCLS ADMINISTRATION FORMAT
This parameter specifies the format of the subscriber
credit limit and the maximum value for the credit limit
that can be given to individual subscribers with the
MOD CHRGFEA command. Both settings can be changed
as long as no credit limits have been entered in the
switch.
a[-b]
a: SCLS ADMINISTRATION FORMAT
PLS SCLS PULSE FORMAT
The subscriber credit limit is specified in
pulses.
The commands MOD CHRGFEA and DISP CHRGFEA to
enter/display the credit limit use the pulse
format.
CNY SCLS CURRENCY FORMAT
The subscriber credit limit is specified in
currency.
The commands MOD CHRGFEA and DISP CHRGFEA to
enter/display the credit limit use the currency
format.
b: MAXIMUM CREDIT LIMIT=
This parameter unit sets the maximum credit limit that
can be entered with MOD CHRGFEA for individual subscribers.
Depending on the value entered for the first unit the limit
fixes the maximum number of pulses or the maximum amount
in currency. Entering a maximum currency amount also defines
the precision of the aggregate counters:
- maximum from 1 to 10.000 : 3 decimal digits
- maximum from 10.001 to 100.000 : 2 decimal digits
- maximum from 100.001 to 1.000.000 : 1 decimal digit
- maximum from 1.000.001 to 10.000.000 : no decimal digits.
SCLSWTHR SCLS WARNING THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the percentage of the subscriber
credit limit that has to be reached before the subscriber
receives an advance warning tone or announcement before
dialling.
Advance warning threshold value.
NETID NETWORK IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of the sending
network (i.e. the originating operator) for charging
messages that are sent with the Application Transport
Mechanism. The parameter contains units for the National
Regulation Authority and the Network Identification.
a-b
a: NATIONAL REGULATION AUTHORITY=
National Regulation Authority.
b: NETWORK IDENTIFICATION=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGOPT- 2+
MOD CHRGOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Network Identification.
AOCCFACT AOC CONVERSION FACTORS
This parameter specifies the pulse and currency conversion
factors for Advice Of Charge for pre-defined connection
types.
a-b[-c]
a: AOC CONVERSION FACTOR
COM1CM COMMUNIC.TMQ1 CURR.MULTIP.
COM1CM identifies the pulse to currency
(and vice-versa) conversion factor for
communication charges with transmission medium
Quality 1.
COM2CM COMMUNIC.TMQ2 CURR.MULTIP.
COM2CM identifies the pulse to currency
communication charges with transmission medium
Quality 2.
FAUCM FACILITY USAGE CURR.MULTIPLIER
FAUCM identifies the pulse to currency
facility usage charges.
DVCM DATA VOLUME CURR.MULTIPLIER
DVCM identifies the volume to currency
conversion factor for data volume charging.
DVPM DATA VOLUME PULSE MULTIPLIER
DVPM identifies the volume to pulse conversion
factor for data volume charging.
The conversion factor for DVPM is an integer
value, no decimals are allowed.
b: FACTOR INTEGER PART=
Factor Integer Part. A maximum value of
9999 can be entered. The number of significant
digits is restricted to 4.
c: FACTOR DECIMAL PART=
Factor Decimal Part. The total number of
significant digits is restricted to 4.
CNYTYPE CURRENCY TYPE
This parameter specifies the currency for all currency
values used in the same exchange and the currency
identification string for Advice Of Charge.
The currency type is also used for charging messages
in currencies that are sent with the Application Transport
Mechanism.
Notes:
According to the applicable standards, the maximum
length of the currency identification string that can be
used for Advice Of Charge on accesses with Frequency
Shift Keying is 3 characters. It is, therefore,
advisable to enter only 3 characters for the second unit
of this parameter especially since this also complies
with the internationally agreed currency codes. Longer
strings are truncated to 3 characters when used with
Frequency Shift Keying.
The currency that is identified by the two units should
be the same. This condition is not checked by the
system.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGOPT- 3+
MOD CHRGOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: CURRENCY TYPE=
Currency Type.
b: CURRENCY DISPLAY STRING=
Currency Display String.
AOCCDOPT AOC CURRENCY DISPLAY OPTIONS
This parameter specifies the currency display options
consisting of the precision of the display of charges
in currency and the minimum difference between two
consecutive displays.
a-b[-c]
a: CURRENCY DISPLAY DECIMAL DIGITS=
This unit determines the display precision of the
currency charges used for Advice Of Charge.
- 0 corresponds to a precision of 0.001
- 1 " " " " " 0.01
- 2 " " " " " 0.1
- 3 " " " " " 1
- 4 " " " " " 10
- 5 " " " " " 100
- 6 " " " " " 1000
b: MINIMUM DISPLAY DIFFERENCE=
This unit specifies the minimum difference between
two consecutive Advice Of Charge displays.
The Advice Of Charge is not refreshed as long as
this minimum difference is not reached. The value of
this unit must not have a precision greater than the
one defined in the first unit.
A maximum value of 9999 can be entered. The number
of significant digits is restricted to 4.
c: MIN DIFF DECIMAL PART=
Minimum display difference decimal part.
The total number of significant digits
is restricted to 4.
SCLSRST SCLS RESET METHOD
This parameter specifies the method that can/will be used
for resetting the charge counters for subscriber credit
limit supervision.
a[-b]
a: SCLS RESET METHOD
MANUAL MANUAL RESET WITH COMMAND
MANUAL makes it possible to reset the
subscriber credit limit supervision charge
counters with the command MOD CHRGFEA.
It is possible to reset the counters for one
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGOPT- 4+
MOD CHRGOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
or for all subscribers with SCLS. This can be
specified with the LAC and DN combination.
AUTO AUTOMATIC RESET
AUTO specifies that the charge counters are
reset automatically at 00:00 hours of the day
of the month specified in the second unit of
this parameter.
Notes:
- Default day is day one.
- Only one day for the automatic reset can
be entered.
- This value can be combined with the MANUAL
method.
METSUB RESET WITH ACCOUNT FILE
METSUB specifies that the counters are reset
when a metering account file is set up with
the command EDIT MET.
Note:
- This value cannot be combined with any of
the other methods.
b: DAY FOR AUTOMATIC RESET=
Day of the month for automatic reset
AOCQPLSS QSIG PULSE DISPLAY TEXT
This parameter specifies the text to be displayed
for Advice Of Charge in pulses for QSIG accesses.
QSIG Pulse Display String.
SCLSBLK SCLS BLOCKING
This parameter specifies that besides the originating calls
also the terminating calls will be blocked in case the SCLS
limit has been reached for all subscribers with the
supervision level immediate or deferred.
BLKTERM SCLS BLOCKING TERMINATING
When the subscriber with an assigned SCLS
immediate or deferred has reached the credit
limit, originating calls are no longer possible.
By setting the SCLS blocking BLKTERM it is
also possible to prohibit terminating calls
for these subscribers.
The flag is set at exchange level.
CSCLSBLK CANCEL SCLS BLOCKING
This parameter allows to reset the blocking of the
terminating calls in case the SCLS limit has been
reached for all subscribers with the supervision
level immediate or deferred.
BLKTERM SCLS BLOCKING TERMINATING
When the subscriber with an assigned SCLS
immediate or deferred has reached the credit
limit, originating calls are no longer possible.
By resetting the SCLS blocking BLKTERM it is
possible again to receive terminating calls
for subscribers that have reached their limit.
The flag is valid at exchange level.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGOPT- 5+
MOD CHRGOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCLSESS SCLS ESSENTIAL
This parameter specifies whether charging
information is necessary to allow a call by
a subscriber with the SCLS feature.
Charging information essential means that
the call is released when no charging info
is available at answer.
N CHARGING INFO IS NOT ESSENTIAL
NO CHARGING INFO IS NOT ESSENTIAL
Y CHARGING INFO IS ESSENTIAL
YES CHARGING INFO IS ESSENTIAL
SASSCLS SCLS DURING SAS
This parameter specifies if SCLS is
performed during the Stand Alone Service
status of an RSU (Remote Switching Unit).
N NO SCLS DURING RSU SAS
NO NO SCLS DURING RSU SAS
Y SCLS DURING RSU SAS
YES SCLS DURING RSU SAS
Default: N
SASIAC IACHASTA FOR SAS CALLS
This parameter specifies if registration
of Inter Administration CHArging and
STAtistics (IACHASTA) must be performed
during the Stand Alone Service status
of an RSU (Remote Switching Unit).
N NO IACHASTA FOR SAS CALLS
NO NO IACHASTA FOR SAS CALLS
Y IACHASTA FOR SAS CALLS
YES IACHASTA FOR SAS CALLS
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CHRGOPT- 6-
CAN CITERA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
This command cancels a command interface for teradyne.
Prerequisites:
- The command interface for teradyne must be PLA.
- If the command interface is connected to an IOPSCDV, this processor
must be in the operating state MBL or PLA.
- If the command interface is connected to an IOPUNI, this processor
must be in the operating state MBL, PLA or ACT.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CITERA : CITERA= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the command interface for teradyne
to be cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CITERA- 1-
CONF CITERA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
This command configures a command interface for teradyne.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL is considered dangerous.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF CITERA : CITERA= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CITERA- 1-
CR CITERA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
This command creates a command interface for teradyne.
The created command interface will be PLA after the command has been
executed.
Prerequisites:
- If the specified input/output processor is an IOPSCDV, it must not be
in the operating state ACT.
- If the specified input/output processor is an IOPUNI, it may be in
the operating state ACT.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CITERA : IOP= ,CHAN= ,CITERA= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor at which the
command interface for teradyne is to be connected.
If IOPSCDV is specified, the range of numbers is
restricted to 0..5.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
CHAN IOP CHANNEL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the channel number at the input/output
processor.
If IOPUNI is specified, the range of channel numbers is
restricted to 0..2.
to be created.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CITERA- 1-
DISP CITERA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
This command displays the environment of a command interface for
teradyne as there are the preceding IOP, channel number, baud rate,
connection to IOP, handshaking, parity, character length, echo and
fault informations.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CITERA : CITERA= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the command interface for teradyne.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CITERA- 1-
MOD CITERA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
This command modifies the device parameters of a command interface
for teradyne.
The parameters have default values in the IOPUNI.
The device parameters can be displayed with the DISP CITERA command.
Prerequisites:
- The specified command interface must be MBL or PLA.
- The corresponding IOP of the specified command interface must be an IOPUNI
and it must be ACT.
If the command interface to be modified is connected to either IOPUNI-0
or IOPUNI-1, then both of those IOPs must be ACT.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CITERA : CITERA= <,BAUDRATE= ,HANDSHK= ,CONNECT= ,PARITY= [
[ [
[ ,CHRLNGTH= ,ECHO=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the command interface for teradyne.
BAUDRATE BAUD RATE
This parameter specifies the baud rate of a command interface
for teradyne.
B300 300 BAUD
B600 600 BAUD
B1200 1200 BAUD
B2400 2400 BAUD
B4800 4800 BAUD
B9600 9600 BAUD
HANDSHK HANDSHAKING
This parameter specifies whether a handshaking procedure for
communication is used or not.
N NO HANDSHAKING
NO NO HANDSHAKING
Y WITH HANDSHAKING
YES WITH HANDSHAKING
CONNECT CONNECTION TO IOP
This parameter specifies the kind of connection to the IOP.
DIRECT DIRECT CONNECTION
MODEM CONNECTION WITH MODEM
PARITY PARITY
This parameter specifies the setting for parity on a
command interface channel of an IOPUNI.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CITERA- 1+
MOD CITERA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ODD ODD PARITY
EVEN EVEN PARITY
NONE NO PARITY
CHRLNGTH CHARACTER LENGTH
This parameter specifies the length (in bits) of a character
on a command interface channel of an IOPUNI.
B7 7 BITS
B8 8 BITS
ECHO ECHO
This parameter specifies the setting for echo on a
command interface channel of an IOPUNI.
OFF ECHO OFF
ON ECHO ON
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CITERA- 2-
ACT CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command activates a connection list trace task.
The task records connections, if one port as A-sided or B-sided part
of a connection is a member of the trace object data set.
- The record includes all relevant object data necessary to describe
the A-sided or B-sided port.
- The record of connections is connected to the occurence of the call
processing report SET_UP_COMPLETE.
Prerequisites:
- The trace object data must be entered by ENTR CLSTTRAC, otherwise
the command is rejected.
- Not more than one trace task may run at any one time.
Notes:
- The connection trace task stores the traced data to a magnetic disk
file which must have 402 PAM.
- Data from former call, signaling or connection list trace tasks are
overwritten.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CLSTTRAC : [STORE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
STORE STORAGE TYPE
Notes:
- Cyclic storing means that old data are overwritten, if the disk file
TC.CALL is full.
- Sequential storing means that the tracer is cancelled, if the disk
file TC.CALL is full.
SEQU STORE TRACE DATA SEQUENTIAL
CYCLIC STORE TRACE DATA CYCLIC
Default: CYCLIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CLSTTRAC- 1-
CAN CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command cancels the connection list tracer.
All data entered with ENTR CLSTTRAC or/and ACT CLSTTRAC are
deleted.
Prerequisites:
- The object data must be entered by the command ENTR CLSTTRAC.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CLSTTRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CLSTTRAC- 1-
DACT CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command deactivates the trace task of the connection list tracer.
All data entered with ACT CLSTTRAC are deleted.
Prerequisites:
- A trace job by the connection list tracer must be activated by the
command ACT CLSTTRAC.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CLSTTRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CLSTTRAC- 1-
DISP CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command displays the connection list tracer state and informs about
existing trace data. If the connection list tracer is entered, the command
DISP CLSTTRAC displays data about the currently traced objects, and if
it is active the tracer activation data will be displayed.
If either the call tracer or the connection list tracer is active object
and activation data associated with the currently running tracer will be
displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CLSTTRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CLSTTRAC- 1-
DMP CLSTTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CONNECTION LIST TRACER
This command dumps data collected by the connection list tracer.
The data can be dumped either with the tracer still active or
with a deactivated or cancelled tracer.
Prerequisites:
- The tracer must have been activated previously.
Trace activation is accomplished with ENTR CLSTTRAC and
ACT CLSTTRAC.
- The connection list tracer stores the collected data to the
magnetic disk file TC.CALL which has 402 PAM. For a dump, an additional
402 PAM pages of disk space are needed to create a temporary copy
TC.CALLTEMP of the trace data file.
Notes:
- The collected data can be dumped repeatedly if the tracer was
deactivated by DACT CLSTTRAC or cancelled by CAN CLSTTRAC.
In this case the user can vary the data displayed with each dump
with parameters.
- The collected data are dumped only once if the tracer is still
active. In this case, the data displayed are those which have been
collected since the last DMP CLSTTRAC. If no such command has been
entered previously, the dumped data go back to the activation
command ACT CLSTTRAC.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DMP CLSTTRAC : [DN= [,LAC=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter restricts the dump of data collected
by the connection list tracer.
After entering the parameter, only connections
which have the entered directory number as B-side / termi-
nation are displayed.
Other connections are suppressed in the trace protocol.
LAC LOCAL AREA NUMBER
This parameter restricts the dump of data collected
by the connection list tracer.
After entering the parameter, only connections
which have the entered directory number and the entered
local area code as B-side / termination are displayed.
Other conections are suppressed in the trace protocol.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CLSTTRAC- 1-
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CONNECTION LIST TRACER OBJECT DATA
This command enters the object data to be traced by the connection list tracer.
Prerequisites:
- Other trace tasks must not be running.
1. ENTR CLSTTRAC- DN PBX SELECTION
2. ENTR CLSTTRAC- DNEQN PBX SUBSET SPECIFIED BY EQN
3. ENTR CLSTTRAC- DNRESTR PBX SELECTION WITH RESTRICTION
4. ENTR CLSTTRAC- EQN EQUIPMENT SELECTION
5. ENTR CLSTTRAC- LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP SELECTION
6. ENTR CLSTTRAC- TGNO TRUNK GROUP SELECTION
1. Input format
PBX SELECTION
Input format for specifying the trace object set by a PBX: a selection
of a subset by the parameter OPMODE and additionally by the parameter
LNO is possible.
[ [
[ ENTR CLSTTRAC : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE= [,LNO=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
OPMODE OPERATION MODE
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the
operating mode of these lines.
ABW PBX GROUPS: ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC PBX GROUPS: ANALOG INCOMING
AOG PBX GROUPS: ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6
IIC PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING 1TR6
IOG PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6
MBW PBX GROUPS: MIXED BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CLSTTRAC- 1+
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DNEQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PBX SUBSET SPECIFIED BY EQN
Input format for a subset of PBX lines connected to
selected DLU.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,OPMODE= [[ [
[ ENTR CLSTTRAC : [LAC=] ,DN= ,EQN= [,PBXRESTR=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the set of objects to
be traced.
Notes:
- Only the following partial qualifications of ports to be traced are
allowed:
DLU: EQN = a
EQN = a-b-c-d
V5IF: EQN = a
EQN = a-b-c-d
- Up to six parameter values, fully qualified or partly qualified,
can be linked with &.
- DLU number : 10,20,30,..,2550 for DLU port
- V5IF number: 6000..8999 for V5IF port
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the
AIC PBX GROUPS: ANALOG INCOMING
AOG PBX GROUPS: ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6
IIC PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING 1TR6
IOG PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6
MBW PBX GROUPS: MIXED BOTHWAY
PBXRESTR PBX RESTRICTED BY LINE TYPES
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the type
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DNEQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of these lines.
AN ANALOG OBJECTS
BA BASIC ACCESS OBJECTS
BW BOTHWAY PBX GROUPS
IC INCOMING PBX GROUPS
N NO RESTRICTION
NO NO RESTRICTION
OG OUTGOING PBX GROUPS
PA PRIMARY ACCESS OBJECTS
Default: N
ENTR CLSTTRAC
DNRESTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PBX SELECTION WITH RESTRICTION
Input format for specifying a set of trace objects by defining a subset
of PBX lines with the parameter PBXRESTR.
[ [
[ ENTR CLSTTRAC : [LAC=] ,DN= ,PBXRESTR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
PBXRESTR PBX RESTRICTED BY LINE TYPES
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines referring to the type
of these lines.
AN ANALOG OBJECTS
BA BASIC ACCESS OBJECTS
BW BOTHWAY PBX GROUPS
IC INCOMING PBX GROUPS
N NO RESTRICTION
NO NO RESTRICTION
OG OUTGOING PBX GROUPS
PA PRIMARY ACCESS OBJECTS
Default: N
ENTR CLSTTRAC
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
EQUIPMENT SELECTION
Input format for specifying the trace object data set by the
parameter EQN.
[ [
[ ENTR CLSTTRAC : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be traced.
Notes:
allowed:
DLU: EQN = a
EQN = a-b-c-d
V5IF: EQN = a
EQN = a-b-c-d
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: EQUIPM.NO.FOR DLU/V5IF=
b: EQUIPM.NO.FOR SHELF=
- Shelf : 0..7 for DLU port
- 0 for V5IF port
c: EQUIPM.NO.FOR MODULE=
- Module : 0..15 for DLU port
- 0 for V51-IF port
- 0..20 for V52-IF port
d: EQUIPM.NO.FOR CIRCUIT=
- Circuit : 0..7 for DLU port (DLU8)
- Channel : 0..31 for V51-IF port
- Channel : 0..99 for V52-IF port
ENTR CLSTTRAC
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
LINE TRUNK GROUP SELECTION
Input format for specifying the trace object data set by the
parameter LTG and LC.
[ [
[ ENTR CLSTTRAC : LTG= [,LC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be traced.
Notes:
a-b
LTGSET : 0..31
and upper ones)
LTG : 1..63
LC LINE CONNECTION
Notes:
LC = a
LC = a-b
- The fully qualified entry of this parameter is rejected
in case of LTGB ports connected to DLUs.
a[-b]
a: LTU NO.OF A LTG=
LTU : 0..7
Channel : 0..31
ENTR CLSTTRAC
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SELECTION
Input format for specifying the trace object data set by a trunk group:
a selection of a subset specified either by the parameter EQN or the
parameter LNO or the parameter CIC is possible.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,EQN=[[ [
[ ENTR CLSTTRAC : TGNO= [,LNO=[ ; [
[ [[,CIC=[[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be traced.
Notes:
allowed:
DLU: EQN = a
EQN = a-b-c-d
V5IF: EQN = a
EQN = a-b-c-d
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of CCS7
lines.
Prerequisites:
- Input of a trunk group specified by the parameter TGNO
a-b
a: PCM LINK NUMBER=
PCM 24 = 0...681
PCM 30 = 0...511
ENTR CLSTTRAC
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
PCM 24 = 0...23
PCM 30 = 0...31
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CLSTTRAC- 8-
SKIP CMD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKIP COMMAND
This command skips a command sequence which is dependent on the
control switches. They are set with ON or OFF .
The command labeled with LABEL = <NAME> is processed next.
This command is only legal in a command file, and cannot be entered
from the terminal.
Input format
[ [
[ SKIP CMD : LABEL= [,ON=] [,OFF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LABEL LABEL OF TARGET COMMAND
This parameter identifies the label of the target command.
ON SWITCH ON
This parameter lists the control switches which must be set to
ON for the command to be executed.
OFF SWITCH OFF
This parameter lists the control switches which must be set to
OFF for the command to be executed.
Notes:
- OFF overrides ON.
- 32 is the error switch.
- Command SET CFOPT sets the switches (1...16) for use in the
command file.
- Only forward skips are legal.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SKIP CMD- 1-
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXECUTE COMMAND FILE
This command starts the execution of a command file. The file can
execute on a specified date and/or time, but will execute immediately
if no future time or date is specified. Command files can also be
scheduled to execute periodically.
Timer jobs with an insecure start time are accepted, but not started,
either at the specified start time or retrospectively.
At 23.50 the time administration sets the weekday and the weekday
category.
Timer jobs which are started at 23.50 and 23.55 are only executed at
the desired time if the operator takes the characteristics of the time
administration into consideration when he enters a timer job (e.g.
non-recurring timer jobs must be predated).
Commands may also exist in the command file through which a nested call
of command files is possible. The nesting depth for command files is
three. After the internal command file finishes processing, the
processing of the external file is continued.
Notes:
- In the case of tape / optical disk files, only one file can be open
at a time, i.e., tape / optical disk files may not be nested in one
another, and during a COFIP run, one tape / optical disk file can be
accessed from a disk file and must be processed and closed before a
second tape / optical disk file may be opened. Tape / optical disk
files must have ASCII text format with variable record size.
- It is possible to read MML commands from the O&M terminal. The input
of an asterisk (*) for the file name causes the display of a
number sign (#) on the O&M terminal, which marks the input
request of an MML command. This feature allows the execution of a
command file which is situated on a PC if the PC is capable of
reading MML commands from a PC file. Nested files are not allowed in
this case.
It is possible to store 120 timer jobs but only 10 timer jobs can be
started at the same time. Timer jobs are illegal in command files.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ EXEC CMDFILE : FILE= [,STEP=] [,VSN=] [,CHOL=] [,TIME= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PER= [,WDCAT=]]] [,DATE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the command file name.
STEP STEP COMMAND
This parameter specifies that, after errors have occurred in the
execution of a command, a branch is made to the next STEP command
or if this next STEP command does not exist, a branch is made to
the end of the file.
If the parameter is omitted, the STEP command will be ignored.
N NO
NO NO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXEC CMDFILE- 1+
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y YES
YES YES
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of a
tape / optical disk or disk. It is mandatory for tape /
optical disk files.
CHOL CHECK ONLY
This parameter checks MML commands for syntax errors.
The only command which is executed is EXEC CMDFILE.
It is rejected if the commands are located in nested command
files. For nested command files only the parameter value of the
outermost file is valid.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies when the command file is to be executed.
Immediate start is the default. This parameter is illegal in
nested command files.
a-b
a: HOUR=
Corresponds to <Hour>
b: MINUTE=
Corresponds to <Minutes>
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter indicates a periodic timer job. Workdays, international
half holidays, international full holidays, national holidays, half
weekend, full weekend, all the days of the week, or a non-periodic
job can be identified. This parameter is illegal in nested command
files.
Notes:
- Weekdays MO, TU, ... SU: execution on the respective
weekday (irrespective of the entered category, i.e. SU
means: execution on every Sunday)
- The combination of several weekdays with & corresponds to a
logical OR, i.e. execution on all the days entered
- Categories WO, EH, EF, HO, HH, HN: execution
in the respective category
- The combination of several categories with & corresponds to
a logical OR, i.e. execution in all categories specified
- The combination of category and weekday, in PER is not
possible. However it is possible to enter a weekday in
PER and a category in WDCAT. This corresponds to a
logical AND, i.e. both parameters must be entered
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXEC CMDFILE- 2+
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NOT A PERIODIC JOB
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAYS
HH HOLIDAY HALF (INTERNATIONAL)
HO HOLIDAY FULL (INTERNATIONAL)
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
YES EVERY DAY OF THE WEEK
This parameter specifies the weekday category, which must be
valid at job execution time. This parameter is illegal in nested
command files.
Compatibilities:
- WDCAT is only allowed if parameter PER is not NO.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF (INTERNATIONAL)
HO HOLIDAY FULL (INTERNATIONAL)
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date when command processing is to
start. The current date is the default. This parameter is illegal
in nested command files.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
Corresponds to <Year>
b: MONTH=
Corresponds to <Month>
c: DAY=
Corresponds to <Day>
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXEC CMDFILE- 3-
CONF CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE COMMON MEMORY
This command configures a common memory.
Notes:
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF CMY : [CMY=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
This parameter specifies the common memory to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CMY- 1-
DIAG CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE COMMON MEMORY
This command initiates a diagnosis for a common memory. The diagnosis
includes a BCMY interface test. Repeated diagnosis is not possible.
Prerequisites:
- The common memory must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG CMY : [CMY=] [,SUP=] [,ONEBIT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
Default: YES
ONEBIT ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
N NO ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
NO NO ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
Y ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
YES ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CMY- 1-
TEST CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST COMMON MEMORY
This command tests a common memory.
Prerequisites:
- Both CMYs must be ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST CMY : [CMY=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
This parameter specifies the common memory to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, both CMYs are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CMY- 1-
DMP CNIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CCNC MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of CCNC
platforms or of the corresponding load library on system disk.
If UNIT = DISK is entered, the specified address range to be
dumped will be read from load library.
To dump contents of a platforms memory, select the appropriate
platform using parameter PLF.
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [PLF= [ [
[ DMP CNIMDMP : UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIPA SIGNALING PERIPHERY ADAPTER
SILTC SIGNALING LINK TERMINAL CTRL
This unit specifies the platform type.
This unit specifies the processor number.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
This parameter specifies the system unit.
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the CCNC loadlib
at the specified address range will be performed.
DISK REQUEST READ FROM DISK
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter defines the address (range) of the memory
content to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either an address range is entered with ADDR,
or, if only the start address is given, you have to specify
the length of the dump using parameter LENGTH.
Following inputs are possible:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CNIMDMP- 1+
DMP CNIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e load
module name (can be repeated or not) and module name are
entered (8 characters each), plus a distance within the
module
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="LOADNAME.LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
or rather:
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter "H" and a
single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name (i.e.
the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
- Address ranges must be specified by entering the start address
and the upper limit, separated by "&&".
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The load module name has to be entered with the start address only
and must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
The upper limit of an address range may be specified in
relation to the lower limit in the following way:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"MODULE0C+HCF"
The second address is interpreted as number of bytes to be dumped if
it begins with the character plus ("+").
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label is
preceded by the letter "L" and a single quote:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C
+MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
Up to 5 different address ranges may be entered, concatenated by "&".
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
This parameter provides the length of a single chained
element of a linked list, or, in case of a linear dump,
the number of bytes which shall be dumped if only a start
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CNIMDMP- 2+
DMP CNIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
address is entered.
This parameter specifies the format type of the output.
If HEX is chosen an output in hexadecimal form will be
produced, in case of ASCII the output will contain ASCII
characters additionally to the hex output.
HEX HEXADECIMAL OUTPUT
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CNIMDMP- 3-
ACT CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action AM (Activate in Memory) in
parallel on all respective platforms in operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CNPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CNPRPCH- 1-
CAN CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Permanent
Patches on disk implicitly deactivating them in the memory on all
platforms in operation. Successful execution of the command
results in execution of the atomic actions DUD
(Deupdate on Disk), DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CD (Cancel
on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CNPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CNPRPCH- 1-
DACT CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Permanent
of the atomic actions DUD (Deupdate on Disk) and
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) in parallel on all respective
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CNPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CNPRPCH- 1-
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on disk and patch states concerning
Permanent Patches for all platform(s) in operation specified
by parameter PLF.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
If ID = X is entered, parameter LIB is also required.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ID= [ [
[ DISP CNPRPCH : ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified load module and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname" or
ID="loadname.*" or
ID="loadname.A?CD*EF"
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from load module
begin or symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="loadname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="loadname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"loadname.modname+offset+distance", or
"loadname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 1+
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
loadname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem loadname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of load module or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 2+
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
Notes:
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
Notes:
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 3+
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: SECOND=
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
NOTENTER NEITHER ENTERING NOR ENTERED
HIT HIT
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
NOTUPD OTHER THAN UPDATED
PARTACT PARTLY ACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
UPD UPDATED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 4-
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Permanent Patch into the
patch administration on disk. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic action ED (Enter on
Disk).
With each ENTR CNPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatch types can be entered:
- Insert Rucksack Subpatches using parameter INSRADDR
- Replace Subpatches using parameter REPADDR
- Insert Procedure Subpatches using parameter INSPREF
- Insert Variable Subpatches using parameter INSVREF
The subpatch types can be entered in the form of subpatches
belonging to a specified Patch ID. Under one specified Patch ID
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR CNPRPCH command is
necessary.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO.
All Subpatches with the exception of Insert Variable can be
entered in subpatch parts for each part using an individual
ENTR CNPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Procedure Subpatches are referred to the same patch address.
The concatenation of those subpatch parts is supported by
means of parameter SUBPPART.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,INSRADDR=[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CNPRPCH : ID= ,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= [
[ [,INSVREF= [ [
[ [,SUBPCHNO=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
load module name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
subpatch part is entered for a certain patch the identifier
must be identical.
INSRADDR INSERT RUCKSACK SUBPATCH ADDR.
This parameter provides the insert rucksack subpatch
address. The address format is an interval within the
module boundaries in the form of begin address and end
address (linked by &&) whereby the latter may be given as a
distance relative to the begin address. At the begin address
the instruction is replaced by a branch instruction for jumping
to the respective rucksack. The end address serves as
continuation address from which the program will continue
after the rucksack code has been executed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 1+
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The old instruction (6 Byte), overwritten by the branch
instruction, is at users own risk to add to the rucksack
or not.
An address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from load module begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="loadname.modname.symbol+distance" or
INSRADDR="offset+distance" or
INSRADDR="label+distance",
&&"loadname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"label+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
The given address is valid for the load module denoted within
parameter ID.
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address, where address can
be specified in the same way as described for the first part
of INSRADDR.
INSPREF INSERT PROCED. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert procedure subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert procedure.
The inserted procedure is only visible within the defining
patch. The number <n> serves to address the inserted
procedure within other subpatches of the defining patch.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
INSVREF INSERT VARIAB. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert variable subpatch
insert variable and the length of the variable in bytes.
The inserted variable is only visible within the defining
patch.
e.g.: INSVREF="IV5"-50
a-b
a: "INSERT VARIABLE" SUBPATCH REFERENCE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 2+
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit serves to address the inserted variable
within other subpatches of the defining patch.
b: LENGTH OF INSERT VARIABLE IN BYTES=
This unit specifies the length of the variable to be
declared.
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR CNPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
SUBPPART ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART
This parameter characterizes a part of a subpatch. A subpatch
of a Permanent Patch may, for some reason, have more than one
part in the case of Insert Rucksack Subpatch, Permanent
Replace Subpatch, or Insert Procedure Subpatch.
e.g.: SUBPPART="partcounter-lastsign"
The partcounter denotes the subpatch part sequence number
and serves as concatenation controller.
The lastsign denotes either the last or not last part of a
subpatch.
If SUBPPART is omitted, e.g., typical proceeding in case
of a short subpatch consisting of only one part, the default
value 1-LAST is assumed.
a[-b]
a: ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART TO BE ENTERED=
This unit denotes the subpatch part sequence number.
b: INDICATOR THAT LAST PART OF SUBPATCH IS ENTERED
NOTLAST NOT LAST SUBPATCH PART
LAST LAST SUBPATCH PART
This unit denotes either last or not last part.
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
Must not be used for Insert Variable or Insert Procedure
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 3+
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 4-
UPD CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can update one or more Permanent
Patches on disk, whereby they are implicitly activated in
memory on all active platforms. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic actions
AM (Activate in Memory) and UD (Update on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ UPD CNPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 UPD CNPRPCH- 1-
ACT CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
AM (Activate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Transient
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CNTRPCH- 1-
CAN CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform by implicitly
deactivating them in the memory on this platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution of
the atomic actions DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CM (Cancel
in Memory) on the respective platform in operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CNTRPCH- 1-
DACT CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Transient
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CNTRPCH- 1-
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
patch administration on the individual platform and patch
states concerning Transient Patches for a specified platform in
operation.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,ID= [ [
[ DISP CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
specified load module and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname" or
ID="loadname.*" or
ID="loadname.A?CD*EF"
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 1+
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from load module
begin or symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="loadname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="loadname.address"&&"+distance"
structures:
"loadname.modname+offset+distance", or
"loadname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
omitted in the case of load module or module the entire address
LIB LIBRARY NAME
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 2+
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 3+
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 4-
ENTR CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Transient Patch into the
patch administration on a platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action EM (Enter into Memory) on the
respective platform in operation.
With each ENTR CNTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
Subpatch can be entered by using parameter REPADDR.
parameter SUBPCHNO. For each subpatch of a patch a new
ENTR CNTRPCH command is necessary.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
load module name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
entered for a certain patch the identifier must be
identical.
address format is a replacement address.
e.g.: REPADDR="loadname.modname.symbol+distance" or
REPADDR="offset+distance" or
REPADDR="label+distance",
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CNTRPCH- 1+
ENTR CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The given address is valid for the load module denoted within
parameter ID.
ENTR CNTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CNTRPCH- 2-
CAN CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COUNTRY CODE
This command cancels one country code from country code table.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CNTRYCOD : CC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CC COUNTRY CODE
This parameter determines the country code to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CNTRYCOD- 1-
DISP CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COUNTRY CODE
This command displays:
- the country code,
- the country name,
- whether or not the country code is belonging
to this exchange.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CNTRYCOD ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CNTRYCOD- 1-
ENTR CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COUNTRY CODE
This command enters the country code data.
It determines:
- the country code,
- the name of the dependend country,
- whether the entered country code is the country code
belonging to this exchange.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CNTRYCOD : CC= ,CNTRY= [,OWNCC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CC COUNTRY CODE
This parameter determines the country code.
Notes:
- Up to 1000 country codes can be set up in an exchange.
CNTRY COUNTRY
This parameter specifies the country name.
OWNCC OWN COUNTRY CODE
This parameter specifies whether or not the entered country code
is the country code belonging to this exchange.
YES OWN COUNTRY CODE
NO NOT OWN COUNTRY CODE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CNTRYCOD- 1-
DISP CODNEGTAB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Codec Negotiation Table
This task displays an entry within the codec negotiation table.
The codec type must be choosen whose parameters are to be changed.
At least one additional parameter is necessary
(this one you want to change!).
It is not possible to create a new entry in this table by using tasks.
The Media Gateway codec negotiation table stores profiles
for codecs. Profiles define a couple parameters associated
with each codec. These profiles will be sent to the B-side
of the call. The B-side selects a profile that it supports
and returns it to the A-side.
Note:
Not all profile information is exchanged, only
hiMgcTCodec, hiMgcTCodecBandwidth, hiMgcTSilenceSuppression.
In accordance with the negotiated codec, the remaining two attributes
hiMgcTMaxJitterBuffer, hiMgcTSilenceSuppression are retrieved from
the table.
The following default values are defined (priorities for icoG711u/a
are project specific):
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ Codec Type + Prio. + Bandwidth + Silence + Packet.+ Max +
+ + + + Suppres. + Period + Jitter +
+ + + + + + Buffer +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG711u + 1/2 + ico64000 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG711a + 2/1 + ico64000 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG7231 + 3 + ico6400 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG729 + 0 + ico8000 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoModem + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 100+
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoClearmodeV7kHZ + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoClearmodeData + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 100+
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoT38 + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 100+
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
The following values are allowed (please note: not all values may be
suitable in your configuration or ranges may vary):
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ Codec Type + Prio. + Bandwidth + Silence + Packetiz. + Max Jitter +
+ + + + Suppres. + Period + Buffer +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG711u + 1-4 + ico64000 + on + + +
+ + + ico56000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ + + ico48000 + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG711a + 1-4 + ico64000 + on + + +
+ + + ico56000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ + + ico48000 + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG7231 + 1-4 + ico5300 + on + 30-60 + 30-180 +
+ + + ico6400 + off + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG729 + 1-4 + ico6400 + on + + +
+ + + ico8000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ + + ico11800 + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoModem + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoClear + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ modeV7kHZ + + + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoClear + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ modeData + + + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoT38 + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CODNEGTAB- 1+
DISP CODNEGTAB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Please note: For Packetization Period and Max Jitter Buffer the
given values are recommended values. The range checked by the task
are the following (independent from Codec Type):
Packetization Period: 10-90
Max Jitter Buffer: 0-200
Max Jitter Buffer can also be set to 0 for activation of autoadaptive
jitter buffer. But this makes sense only in case of voice codecs
(icoG7xxx).
Bandwidth is given in bits/sec,
Packetization Period and Max Jitter Buffer are given in milliseconds.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CODNEGTAB : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
You can find the needed EQN in the containment view
under the corresponding network element.
It is case sensitive !
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CODNEGTAB- 2-
MOD CODNEGTAB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Codec Negotiation Table
This task modifies an entry within the codec negotiation table.
The codec type must be choosen whose parameters are to be changed.
At least one additional parameter is necessary
(this one you want to change!).
It is not possible to create a new entry in this table by using tasks.
The Media Gateway codec negotiation table stores profiles
for codecs. Profiles define a couple parameters associated
with each codec. These profiles will be sent to the B-side
of the call. The B-side selects a profile that it supports
and returns it to the A-side.
Note:
Not all profile information is exchanged, only
hiMgcTCodec, hiMgcTCodecBandwidth, hiMgcTSilenceSuppression.
In accordance with the negotiated codec, the remaining two attributes
hiMgcTMaxJitterBuffer, hiMgcTSilenceSuppression are retrieved from
the table.
The following default values are defined (priorities for icoG711u/a
are project specific):
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ Codec Type + Prio. + Bandwidth + Silence + Packet.+ Max +
+ + + + Suppres. + Period + Jitter +
+ + + + + + Buffer +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG711u + 1/2 + ico64000 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG711a + 2/1 + ico64000 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG7231 + 3 + ico6400 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoG729 + 0 + ico8000 + on + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoModem + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 100+
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoClearmodeV7kHZ + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 30 +
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoClearmodeData + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 100+
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
+ icoT38 + 0 + ico64000 + off + 30 + 100+
+-------------------+-------+-----------+----------+--------+--------+
The following values are allowed (please note: not all values may be
suitable in your configuration or ranges may vary):
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ Codec Type + Prio. + Bandwidth + Silence + Packetiz. + Max Jitter +
+ + + + Suppres. + Period + Buffer +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG711u + 1-4 + ico64000 + on + + +
+ + + ico56000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ + + ico48000 + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG711a + 1-4 + ico64000 + on + + +
+ + + ico56000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ + + ico48000 + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG7231 + 1-4 + ico5300 + on + 30-60 + 30-180 +
+ + + ico6400 + off + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoG729 + 1-4 + ico6400 + on + + +
+ + + ico8000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ + + ico11800 + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoModem + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoClear + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ modeV7kHZ + + + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoClear + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+ modeData + + + + + +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
+ icoT38 + 0 + ico64000 + off + 20-30 + 10-200 +
+------------+-------+-----------+----------+-----------+------------+
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CODNEGTAB- 1+
MOD CODNEGTAB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Please note: For Packetization Period and Max Jitter Buffer the
given values are recommended values. The range checked by the task
are the following (independent from Codec Type):
Packetization Period: 10-90
Max Jitter Buffer: 0-200
Max Jitter Buffer can also be set to 0 for activation of autoadaptive
jitter buffer. But this makes sense only in case of voice codecs
(icoG7xxx).
Bandwidth is given in bits/sec,
Packetization Period and Max Jitter Buffer are given in milliseconds.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CODNEGTAB : EQN= ,Codec Type= [,Bandwidth=] [
[ [
[ [,Silence Suppression=] [,Packetizing Period=] [
[ [
[ [,Max Jitter Buffer=] [,Priority=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
You can find the needed EQN in the containment view under the
corresponding network element. It is case sensitive !
Codec Type
This is the codec type for which parameters are
changed in the codec negotitation table.
Bandwidth
The bandwidth (in bits/sec) assigned to the corresponding Codec.
For default values or allowed ranges please refer to the
description of this task. If you are working with the
Workbench simply click with the mouse on this task in the
task tree and press F1 to see the tasks help text.
Silence Suppression
Silence Suppression switched on or off.
Packetizing Period
Requested Packetizing Period in ms for the IP connection at the MG.
Max Jitter Buffer
Maximum allowed Buffer Jitter in ms for the IP connection at the MG.
If you want to choose an autoadaptive jitter buffer,
please set this parameter to 0.
Please note: autoadaptive jitter buffer is only suitable
for voice codecs (icoG7xxx).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CODNEGTAB- 2+
MOD CODNEGTAB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Priority
Priority of the Codec:
1: highest priority,
4: lowest priority,
0: not used for priority selection
Note:
It is not allowed to assign the same priority to different codecs.
The only exception is prio 0, which can be assigned to any number of
codecs. To assign an existing priority to a different codec proceed
in the following way (Example):
codec A: prio 1
codec B: prio 2
Set codec B to prio 1 will be rejected, because prio 1 is already
assigned to codec A. Therefore, proceed in the following way:
Assign prio 0 to codec A. Now assign prio 1 to codec B. This is
ok now, because prio 1 is no longer assigned to codec A.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CODNEGTAB- 3-
DISP CONFL
CONFDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LARGE CONFERENCE
This command displays the conference data for
large conferences.
<job number>.
1. DISP CONFL - CONFDATA CONFERENCE DATA FORMAT
2. DISP CONFL - MAXDATA MAXIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
1. Input format
CONFERENCE DATA FORMAT
This input format displays the conference IDs,
and the port specific data for large conferences.
[ [
[ DISP CONFL : FORMAT= ,LTG= [,COU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT MASK
CONFLST CONFERENCE ID LIST
a-b
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the conference unit.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONFL- 1+
DISP CONFL
MAXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MAXIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
This input format is used to display all existing values
of the max. no. of conferees for a large conference,
originated by an analog/ISDN-subscriber or by an
OSS-operator.
[ [
[ DISP CONFL : FORMAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT MASK
MAXNUM MAXIMAL NUMBERS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONFL- 2-
MOD CONFL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LARGE CONFERENCE
This command modifies the max. no.
of conferees in a large conference.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CONFL : <MAXSUB= ,DEFSUB=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MAXSUB MAX. NO. OF SUB. CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the max. no. of conference
subscribers for a large conference originated by an
analog or ISDN-subscriber.
DEFSUB DEFAULT NO. OF SUB. CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the default value of the max.
no. of conferees for a large conference originated by
an ISDN-subscriber, in case of no value is given for
this no. by the subscriber.
Notes :
- The value of this parameter should not exceed
the value of MAXSUB-parameter.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CONFL- 1-
CAN CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CONFERENCE
This command cancels the 32 conference ports belonging to a conference
unit (CONFERENCE UNIT).
Prerequisites :
- The conference unit must be in safeguarding status planned.
- None of the CONFERENCE UNIT conference circuits
is allocated to a telephone meeting group.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CONFRNC : LTG= ,COU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CONFRNC- 1-
CR CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CONFERENCE
This command creates the 32 conference ports belonging to a conference unit
(CONFERENCE UNIT) for a specified service feature application.
Prerequisites :
- The LTU must have previously been created with the appropriate type for
conference units.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CONFRNC : LTG= ,COU= ,COUTYP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
The application of this CONFERENCE UNIT is the
service feature large conference.
PHONMEET TELEPHONE MEETING
The application of this CONFERENCE UNIT is the
service feature telephone meeting.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CONFRNC- 1-
DISP CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONFERENCE
This command displays the application of one or all CONFERENCE UNITs
within a specified range (interval) of LTGs.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CONFRNC : LTG= [,COU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONFRNC- 1-
DISP CONN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONNECTIONS
This command displays the port address, processor number, speech
channel, and, if possible, the directory number or the trunk group
number and line number of ports seized by a call in progress.
The display is a snapshot of the situation at the time of the command.
The scope of data displayed can be specified by equipment number,
directory number or trunk group.
If there are several local networks a subscriber in a specific
local network can be specified.
Notes:
- The command only displays complete data for connections which are
occupying two channel registers.
Therefore, the output mask displays either NO MORE DATA or a
series of stars (*) in the SIDE column for connections to recorded
announcements, for incomplete connections or for SULIM connections.
Recorded announcements can be displayed by the command
DISP LISTTOAN.
<job number>.
1. DISP CONN - DN DN FOR ANALOG OR ISDN SUBSCRIBER
2. DISP CONN - DNPBX DN FOR ANY PBX LINE
3. DISP CONN - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
4. DISP CONN - LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
5. DISP CONN - RSULINK RSU LINK NUMBER OF RSU TRUNK GROUP
6. DISP CONN - TGNO TGNO FOR TRUNK GROUP OR TRUNK
1. Input format
DN FOR ANALOG OR ISDN SUBSCRIBER
[ [
[ DISP CONN : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber
or PBX.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONN- 1+
DISP CONN
DNPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN FOR ANY PBX LINE
[ [
[ DISP CONN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= ,OPMODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber
or PBX.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or
trunk group.
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines, referring to the
operation mode of these lines.
ABW HUNT GROUP: ANALOG BOTHWAY
[AIC [ HUNT GROUP: ANALOG INCOMING
[AOG [ HUNT GROUP: ANALOG OUTGOING
[IBW [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN BOTHWAY
[IBW1TR6 [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6
[IIC [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN INCOMING
[IIC1TR6 [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN INCOMING 1TR6
[IOG [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN OUTGOING
[IOG1TR6 [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6
!MBW - HUNT GROUP: MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONN- 2+
DISP CONN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[ [
[ DISP CONN : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- The following port qualifications are allowed:
DLU: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific DLU port
EQN = a-b-X all DLU ports of a shelf
EQN = a-b-c all DLU ports of a module
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific DLU port in each module
V5IF: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific V5IF port
a-b-c[-d]
(in steps of 10)
b: SHELF=
For V5IF port: 0
c: MODULE OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For V51IF port: 0
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range 0...7 for DLU8
0...15 for DLU16
0...31 for DLUG
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONN- 3+
DISP CONN
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
LINE TRUNK GROUP
[ [
[ DISP CONN : LTG= [,LC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be traced.
a-b
LTGSET : 0..31
and upper ones)
LTG : 1..63
LC LINE CONNECTION
Notes:
LC = X All channels of LTG
LC = X-b One specific channel on all LTUs
LC = a All channels on specific LTU
LC = a-b One specific channel
a[-b]
a: LTU NO.OF A LTG=
LTU : 0..7
unit values.
Channel : 0..31
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONN- 4+
DISP CONN
RSULINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
RSU LINK NUMBER OF RSU TRUNK GROUP
[ [
[ DISP CONN : RSULINK= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RSULINK RSU LINK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the Link Number in a RSU
trunk group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONN- 5+
DISP CONN
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TGNO FOR TRUNK GROUP OR TRUNK
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LNO=[[ [
[ DISP CONN : TGNO= [,CIC=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or
trunk group.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of CCS7 lines.
Prerequisites:
a-b
a: PCM LINK NUMBER=
For DIU 30 the input 0...511 is possible.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CONN- 6-
REL CONN
DNPATH1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CONNECTION
This command sends an appropriate message to the CP call
processing programs for connections to ordinary
subscribers and to the relevant LTGs for connections to
ISDN PA.
the exchange!
1. REL CONN - DNPATH1 RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. REL CONN - DNPATH2 RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
3. REL CONN - EQNPATH RELEASE BY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
4. REL CONN - LTGPATH RELEASE BY LINE TRUNK GROUP
5. REL CONN - TGNOPA RELEASE BY TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This input format should be used if there is
only one OPMODE for each LNO.
[ [
[ REL CONN : DN= [,LAC=] [,LNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber, an
analog or ISDN PBX line (pilot DN or line service number) or test
phone control.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter must be specified if several local area codes
have been created within an exchange. If there is only one
local area code for each exchange, this parameter need not
be specified.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of a trunk in a trunk group
or a line of an analog or ISDN PBX.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REL CONN- 1+
REL CONN
DNPATH2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This input format should be used if
there are several OPMODE for each
LNO.
[ [
[ REL CONN : DN= [,LAC=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber, an
analog or ISDN PBX line (pilot DN or line service number) or test
phone control.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter must be specified if several local area codes
have been created within an exchange. If there is only one
local area code for each exchange, this parameter need not
be specified.
LNO LINE NUMBER
The operating mode must be specified if the PBX
is created with two or more operating modes.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
DEF DEFAULT VALUE (NOT INPUT)
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REL CONN- 2+
REL CONN
EQNPATH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RELEASE BY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[ [
[ REL CONN : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT/V5 INTERFACE=
b: SHELF NUMBER=
c: MODULE NUMBE=
d: CIRCUIT NUMBER/V5IF PORT NUMBER=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REL CONN- 3+
REL CONN
LTGPATH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
RELEASE BY LINE TRUNK GROUP
[ [
[ REL CONN : LTG= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
When LTG and LC are entered, a check is made as
to whether the corresponding connection has been set up
and the specified connection group is type A. Tasks
executed by the call processing programs cannot be
monitored.
a-b
LC LINE CHANNEL
The line circuit number must be entered in connection
with the LTG number.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REL CONN- 4+
REL CONN
TGNOPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
RELEASE BY TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
[ [
[ [
[ [,CIC=[ [
[ REL CONN : TGNO= ,LNO= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of a trunk group or a
recorded announcement group. It must be input in connection with LNO
or CIC.
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for CCS7
trunks.
CIC can only be input in conjunction with TGNO.
a-b
LNO LINE NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REL CONN- 5-
STAT COPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STAT COMMERCIAL PLATFORM
This command displays the transient status of the Commercial Platform
(COPL) Interface.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT COPL ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT COPL- 1-
START COPLBUPP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Start CoPl Backup Procedure
This task is used to start a backup procedure on the commercial platform (CoPl).
Output Parameters:
CmdResult:
This parameter shows the command result.
CmdResultInfo:
This parameter shows the command result info.
AddResultInfo:
This parameter shows the additional result info,
if available.
Input format
[ [
[ START COPLBUPP : Host= ,BaseDir= [,ExecutionType=] [,BackupDir=] [
[ [
[ [,Timeout=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Host
The host name of the CoPl.
BaseDir
Location of the backup on the Host in URL format. User and password are
optional and if not specified, the conventions for anonymous FTP are
used. Host and file-path are mandatory. Port specification is only
required when the default FTP port (21) is not used.
(ftp://Hugo:tarzan@NetMFS/<NetMBaseDir>/SWMCoPlArchive/BackupArchive)
ExecutionType
This parameter is used to distinguish between a manual and a scheduled
backup. If the task is executed via the Task Scheduler, the parameter
has to be set to scheduled, otherwise to manual.
BackupDir
If a manual Backup procedure is performed this parameter defines,
together wih the BaseDir and the CoPl-Type information, the directory
where the backup will be stored. (e.g.
<baseDir>/hiQ20_V1.0_Node1/<backupDir>)
Timeout
The timeout used for the operation given in minutes. This value is split
between the creation of the backup and the download of the backup. The
task will wait this amount of time at maximum for a result of the
operation. If no result arrives before this time, the task will fail
with a timeout error. If the parameter is not entered, 60 minutes will
be used as timeout.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START COPLBUPP- 1-
START COPLSWEX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Start CoPl Software Exchange
This task is used to start a software exchange on the Commercial
Platform (CoPl).
Prerequisite for this task is, that the software package to be installed
or deinstalled, has been transferred to the CoPl via the task
Start File Transfer. The following list shows as an example the input
values for the task Start File Transfer.
Host = T54PM-04
Command = transferData
CoPl Files = ftp:///var/tmp/pkgs.surpass/surpass_pkg.gz
Host Files =
ftp://V2%5CFTPUser:ftp_user@139.21.198.82/SWMCoPlArchive/SWArchive/hiQ30_V1/patch/
surpass-hiQ30-0335-P1-TEST_pkg.gz
Transfer Operation = put
Transfer Type = binary
Ascii Files =
Transfer Mode = overwrite
Append Files =
Create Destination Directory= false
Delete Sources = false
Show Transfered Files = true
Timeout =
Each package, for which a software exchange is to be done, has to
be transferred to the CoPl into the directory /var/tmp/pkgs.surpass
and into a file with the name surpass_pkg.gz if the package on the
NetM is gzipped. If the package on the NetM is not gzipped, the
extension .gz has to be omitted from the filenames in both
parameters CoPl Files and Host Files.
All parameter values can be entered as shown above, except for the
parameter Host and Host Files.
The parameter Host is the host name of the Commercial Platform.
It can be seen in Containment View (CV) or Basic Configuration and
System Setup (BCSS).
In the parameter Host Files the string part V2%5C is the domain
name followed by a back slash (5C is the ASCII value in hex of the
back slash character). In some network constellations it is necessary
to add the domain name as shown above. The parts of the parameter value,
that depend on the NetM environment and installation are:
- the name of the FTP user (here: FTPUser)
- the password (here: ftp_user)
- the ip address of the file server of the NetM (here: 139.21.198.82)
- the directory name where the package is located on the NetM (here:
SWMCoPlArchive/SWArchive/hiQ30_V1/patch/)
- the name of the package on the NetM (here:
surpass-hiQ30-0335-P1-TEST_pkg.gz)
Output Parameters:
Command Results:
This parameter shows a table of command results for all
function groups that have been issued in the input parameters.
Each row in the table corresponds to one function group.
FunctionGroup:
This parameter shows the function group, the result
belongs to. This parameter is only available for a
single process install or deinstall.
CmdResult:
This parameter shows the command result.
CmdResultInfo:
This parameter shows the command result info.
AddResultInfo:
if available.
If the task fails, an exception message will be displayed in the
output of the task. This message contains the following parameters
(the numeric values are explained in the parmaeter decriptions):
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START COPLSWEX- 1+
START COPLSWEX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CmdResult:
This parameter shows the command result. The possible values are:
1 - none
2 - inProgress
3 - success
4 - partlyExec
5 - notSupported
6 - unableToRun
7 - aborted
8 - failed
CmdResultInfo:
This parameter shows the command result info. The possible values are:
1 - noError
2 - unrecognizedCommand
3 - unsupportedCommand
4 - pendingBackup
5 - pendingSwExchange
6 - error
7 - timeout
8 - mswErrorBeforeEnteringSw
9 - mswErrorDuringEnteringSw
10 - mswSynchError
11 - mswRestartSwFailed
12 - mswOfflineScriptsFailedNoReboot
13 - mswOfflineModeNotReachedAfterReboot
14 - mswOfflineScriptsFailedAfterReboot
15 - mswOnlineModeNotReachedAfterReboot
16 - mswUnexpectedEvents
17 - mswGeneralError
18 - mswSwError
19 - swmGeneralError
20 - swmSwError
21 - swmDatabaseError
AddResultInfo:
if available.
Input format
[ [
[ START COPLSWEX : Host= ,CmdFunctionType= [,CmdParameter=] [
[ [
[ [,Timeout=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Host
This is the host name of the Commercial Platform.
CmdFunctionType
This parameter is used to select the command function type, i.e.
which type of SW exchange is to be performed. If singleProcessInstall or
singleProcessDeinstall is selected, the function group to be
installed or deinstalled has to be given in the parameter CmdParameter.
CmdParameter
This parameter is used to specify the command parameter, i.e.
the function group to be installed or deinstalled if in parameter
CmdFunctionType the value singleProcessInstall or singleProcessDeinstall
is selected. In all other cases, this parameter will be ignored.
More than one function group (a maximum of five) may be specified
separated with blank.
Timeout
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START COPLSWEX- 2+
START COPLSWEX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The timeout used for the operation
given in minutes.
The given value will always be rounded up to five minute
intervals (e.g. if you enter 13 minutes for timeout, the task
will use 15 minutes for timeout).
The task will wait this amount of time at maximum for a result
of the operation. If no result arrives before this time, the task
will fail with a timeout error.
If the parameter is not entered, 60 minutes
will be used as timeout.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START COPLSWEX- 3-
DISP COPLTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display CoPl Type Information
This task is used to display the type info of the Commercial
Platform (CoPl).
Output Parameters:
ProductName:
This parameter shows the product name of the CoPl.
ProductVersion:
This parameter shows the product version of the CoPl.
ProductType:
This parameter shows the product type of the CoPl.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP COPLTI : Host= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Host
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP COPLTI- 1-
DISP COPLVI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display CoPl Version Information
This task is used to display the version info of the Commercial
Platform (CoPl).
Output Parameters:
Version Table:
This parameter shows a table of version information for all
SW objects on the CoPl.
Each row in the table corresponds to one object.
ProductionType:
This parameter shows the type of the SW object.
The type can be Product, Package, or FctGroup.
Product can only occur in the first row of the table
and describes the whole APS. The following rows contain the
packages (Package) and function groups (FctGroup). The
packages are the units, for which a software exchange operation
can be executed. The rows below a package list the function groups
contained in the package.
ProductionName:
This parameter shows the name of the SW object.
ProductionLabel:
This parameter shows a textual description of the
production label.
FctVersion:
functional version of the SW object defining
the basic functionality.
SubVersion:
sub-version of the SW object defining some refinements and
corrections.
ValidityInfo:
This parameter shows whether there is a currently running
software exchange for the SW object, which means
that the version of this SW object might change soon. The value
valid(1) indicates that there is no software exchange
running and the version of the object is valid.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP COPLVI : Host= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Host
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP COPLVI- 1-
CONF COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURATE CONFERENCE UNIT
This command configures a conference unit to one of the states
PLA, MBL, ACT or CBL.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF COU : LTG= ,COU= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
This parameter specifies the unit number in an LTG.
The following state transitions are permitted:
MBL <-> PLA
MBL --> ACT
MBL <-- ACT (when the LTG is not active)
ACT <-> CBL
UNA --> ACT, MBL, CBL
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF COU- 1-
DIAG COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CONFERENCE UNIT
This command starts diagnosis of a conference unit in an LTG.
Precondition: the LTG must be in the operating status
ACT or CBL and the associated COU must be in the
operating status MBL.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG COU : LTG= ,COU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG COU- 1-
STAT COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CONFERENCE UNIT
This command displays the operating status of
- one COU in a certain LTG
- one COU in all LTGs
- all COUs in a particular LTG
- all COUs in all LTGs
- all COUs in a particular operating status in a particular
LTG
- all COUs in a particular operating status in all LTGs
For the parameter LTG a value or X must always be entered.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT COU : LTG= [,COU=] [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT COU- 1-
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD COORDINATION PROCESSOR
This command initiates recording of CP traffic data (total load and
callprocessing load).
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- Only one measurement job can be started.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY.
Input format
[ [
[ REC CP : [INTTIM=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INTTIM INTEGRATION TIME
This parameter specifies the time over which the load values are
to be averaged (integrated).
If output is to the OMT, it is not permissible to enter SEC4.
Default: MIN3
SEC4 4 SECONDS
SEC36 36 SECONDS
MIN1 1 MINUTE
MIN3 3 MINUTES
MIN5 5 MINUTES
MIN15 15 MINUTES
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CP- 1+
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OUTPUT MODE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
to daily files. The measurement starts
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CP- 2+
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CP- 3+
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CP- 4-
ACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP DUMP CONDITIONS
This command activates a dump condition with specification of CP core storage
address range. The CP dump conditions are activated upon command entry.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [RADDR=[ [
[ ACT CPDMPC : AADDR= [,SWSG=] [,UNIT=] [,MODULE=] [,COUNT=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,LEVEL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RADDR RELATIVE ADDRESS
Only 5 address ranges are allowed
a-b
a: MODULE NAME=
This information unit allows only alphanumeric characters.
b: OFFSET=
0...7FFFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
AADDR ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
Only 5 address ranges are allowed
SWSG SWSG IDENTIFICATION
For a SWSG number less than 128
a module name must be specified.
UNIT CP PROCESSOR UNIT
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAPM MASTER BASE PROCESSOR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CPDMPC- 1+
ACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BAPS SPARE BASE PROCESSOR
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
MODULE MODULE NAME
COUNT TERMINATION COUNT
Default: 1
LEVEL RECOVERY LEVEL
NSTART3 NEWSTART WITH CODE LOAD
NSTART2 NEWSTART WITH SEMIDATA LOAD
NSTART1 NEWSTART OF ALL PROCESSES
SASDATS SAVING SW DATA WITH STATISTICS
SASDAT SAVING SW DATA W/O STATISTICS
NSTART0 NEWSTART NON CALLPROS. GROUP
The only non-call-processing processes
are restarted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CPDMPC- 2-
DACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CONDITIONAL CPDUMP
This command deactivates conditions set in the dump condition list.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CPDMPC : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the deactivation conditions.
Note:
- Up to 10 information units can be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CPDMPC- 1-
DISP CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONDITIONAL CPDUMP
This command displays the conditional CP dump addresses and conditions
as well as their present state.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CPDMPC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPDMPC- 1-
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of CP
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped,
or, in case of a dump of memory, chained lists of data.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [PLF= [ [
[ DMP CPIMDMP : UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,CHOFFS=] [,CHNO=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform.
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the CP loadlib
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CPIMDMP- 1+
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
In case of dumping chained elements (a linked list), only
a start address has to be specified, the length of each
chained element has to be entered via parameter LENGTH.
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e capsule,
SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters each), plus a
distance within the module
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
single quote.
omitted.
Notes:
module names have to be entered always in combination with
the corresponding SPU names.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The capsule name has to be entered with the start address only and
must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HCF"
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
e.g.: ADDR="LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0"&&"+H28"
- Indirect dump can be specified by a begin address: It contains
a pointer which indicates the real start address preceded by
the letters "IN" and a single quote:
e.g.: ADDR="INCAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C+H8"
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CPIMDMP- 2+
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LENGTH LENGTH OF CHAINED ELEMENT
address is entered.
CHOFFS OFFSET OF POINTER TO NEXT ELE.
This parameter specifies the offset of the link pointer
to the next element within the chained (linked) list to
be dumped.
The memory location of this pointer is the begin address
of the current chained element plus the offset defined by
CHOFFS.
Notes:
- a dump of a linked list is specified by the corresponding
parameters LENGTH, CHOFFS, and CHNO.
- chained elements can only be dumped from CP memory and not
from system disk.
- all pointers of the chained list must have the same
offset within their corresponding chained elements.
CHNO NUMBER OF CHAINED ELEMENTS
This parameter specifies the number of chained elements to be
dumped. If the current linked list contains less elements than
the value specified, only the current number of chained elements
will be dumped.
Default: 50
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CPIMDMP- 3-
DMP CPMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CP MEMORY
This command safeguards CP memory areas, specified as address ranges, to the
SESYMP file.
The command executes internally the following actions:
- Entry of a dump condition for a special software error.
- Creation of a software error.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [RADDR=[ [
[ DMP CPMEM : AADDR= [,UNIT=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RADDR RELATIVE ADDRESS
This parameter indicates the selected address areas relative
to the link module name.
Note:
- Up to 5 address areas can be linked with &.
a-b
a: MODULE NAME=
This information unit allows only alphanumeric characters.
.
b: OFFSET=
0...7FFFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
AADDR ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
This parameter indicates the selected address areas absolutely.
Note:
- Up to 5 address areas can be linked with &.
UNIT CP PROCESSOR UNIT
BAPM MASTER BASE PROCESSOR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CPMEM- 1+
DMP CPMEM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BAPS SPARE BASE PROCESSOR
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CPMEM- 2-
ACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Permanent
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CPPRPCH- 1-
CAN CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CP PERMANENT PATCH
on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CPPRPCH : ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CPPRPCH- 1-
DACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY NAME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CPPRPCH- 1+
DACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CPPRPCH- 2-
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CP PERMANENT PATCH
by parameter PLF.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ID= [ [
[ DISP CPPRPCH : ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
specified capsule and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname" or
ID="capsname.*" or
ID="capsname.A?CD*EF"
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
structures:
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 1+
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
LIB LIBRARY NAME
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 2+
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 3+
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
HIT HIT
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
UPD UPDATED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 4-
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CP PERMANENT PATCH
Disk).
With each ENTR CPPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR CPPRPCH command is
necessary.
parameter SUBPCHNO.
ENTR CPPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,INSRADDR=[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CPPRPCH : ID= ,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= [
[ [,INSVREF= [ [
[ [,SUBPCHNO=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,OLDCNT=]] [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
must be identical.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 1+
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
or not.
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
of INSRADDR.
insert procedure.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
patch.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 2+
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
declared.
ENTR CPPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
subpatch.
a[-b]
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 3+
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 4-
UPD CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ UPD CPPRPCH : ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 UPD CPPRPCH- 1-
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE POINT
This command cancels the specified code point. Call attempts to the canceled
code point will be diverted to the specified intercept code.
Prerequisites :
- If the code point was created with special codes
MFCAT (MFC CATEGORY),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT),
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE),
ORIG1 (ORIGINATING MARK 1) or
LAC (LOCAL AREA CODE)
these without their positions within the digit combination must be
specified when the code point is to be canceled.
- Any code blocking (CR CBPT), trunk reservation (ENTR TRSVCRIT),
destination (REC DEST) or code measurement (ENTR NTMINFO) that is
existing for the code point, or part of the code point to be canceled,
should be canceled first, because no checks are done.
An indication of whether other code points or test points use the
destination area of the canceled code point is output.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CPT : CODE= [,INCEPT=] [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,ANNDIG=[[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,TXTNO= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
canceled. If the code point was created with special codes then these
have to be entered to define the code point uniquely.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter determines the intercept code to which call attempts
will be diverted. If the intercept UNOBDE0 is entered, the code
point will be deleted completely. If no value is entered, the value
UNOBDE0 is used by default.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
UNOBDE0 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 00
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CPT- 1+
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
ILLDEST ILLEGAL DESTINATION
CHCPTIND CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
RESANN RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
Unit b must be specified.
b: RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
This parameter determines the number of the reserve
user announcement intercept.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
COINB COIN BOX
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CPT- 2+
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EWSD-versions.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
ANNDIG INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT
This parameter specifies the number of the text to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = RESANN-X.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CPT- 3-
CR CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE POINT
This command creates a code point, i.e. a destination is defined for the
specified digit combination. All digit combinations that are not created
as code points, test points or as subscriber controlled input access codes
are diverted to the UNOBDE0 intercept code.
The type of destination and the destination itself are specified by the
the parameters CPTGRP, DEST, INCEPT and TRATYP.
According to the entered code and the special codes
LAC (LOCAL AREA CODE),
ORIG1 (ORIGINATING MARK 1),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT) or
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE)
the blocks are seized in the digit-destination translator. If no position is
input, the special code is attached at the end of the code or, if there is
already such a special code existing for the desired code, the existing position
is used. However, it is possible to determine the positions of the special codes
freely within the digit combination. The last block in the digit chain contains
the reference to the destination.
It is possible to create a code point for a ported directory number
by extending an existing digit chain. For example:
CR CPT:CODE=1234, DEST=A;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, LAC=089, TRATYP=CPTDN;
Using the special code ORIG1 the following must be considered:
- Creating a code point with ORIG1=DEF has the same effect for call
processing as entering up to 3840 code points with ORIG1=0 through to
ORIG1=3839. So a code point with ORIG1=DEF stands for all code points
(with the same CODE) which are not explicitly created with a specific
ORIG1-value.
Example: CODE=12345, split by origination as follows:
For the origination value 10 the digit translation shall lead to
destination A, for value 200 to destination B, for all other values
to destination C.
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=10, DEST=A;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=200, DEST=B;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=DEF, DEST=C;
These commands may be entered in any sequence. Instead of 3840
commands now only 3 commands are needed.
Using ORIG1=DEF, the position of this special code should be at the end of
the code. All exceptional code points must be entered, specially those,
which shall lead to an intercept.
Compatibilities:
- Only one of the parameters CPTGRP, DEST, TRATYP and INCEPT may be entered,
except for TRATYP value NBARCPT for which additional parameter DEST or
CPTGRP must be entered.
For following TRATYP values the additional parameter DEST must be entered:
SELCWROU,
ITGW,
MOBHAND,
MOBINTER,
MOBTERM,
MOBBOTH,
MOBPHA,
MOBPHB,
VBS,
VGCS,
ASCITERM.
- The parameter LAC is only allowed if the DN-attribute (see ENTR DNATT) is
multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number block
(i.e. TRATYP=CPTDN).
- Before entering code points beginning with a carrier access code,
the carrier access code must be defined first (see CR CAC).
These code points may only lead to a destination or an intercept.
- Parameter SYMCON may be entered for parameters CPTGRP, DEST and
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 1+
CR CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRATYP and for following TRATYP values:
MOBBOTH,
MOBHAND,
MOBINTER,
MOBPHA,
MOBPHB,
MOBTERM.
- Parameter AMA may be entered for parameters CPTGRP and DEST and
for following TRATYP values:
NBARCPT,
MOBBOTH,
MOBTERM.
1. CR CPT - CPTGRP CPT TO CODE POINT GROUP
2. CR CPT - DEST CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
3. CR CPT - INCEPT CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
4. CR CPT - TRATYP CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
1. Input format
CPT TO CODE POINT GROUP
If the code point to the specified code point group should be non barrable
NBARCPT must be entered for the parameter TRATYP.
Additional prerequisites :
[ [
[ CR CPT : CODE= ,CPTGRP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] <,TRATYP=> [,SYMCON=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,AMA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
The parameter CODE determines the digits for which the code point
is created. In addition to the selected digits, special codes can also
be entered in order to determine the destination.
CPTGRP CODE POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the code point group selected by the digit
combination. The specified code point group must exist.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Input is only permitted if the directory number attribute of the
exchange is multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number
block. The use of this parameter may affect the value of the parameter
MINMAX (see CR DEST). The operator has to take care for a
correct value of the parameter MINMAX.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 2+
CR CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
b: POSITION OF LOCAL AREA CODE=
This unit specifies the position of the local area code
in the digit combination.
entered.
a[-b]
This unit specifies the position of the origin code
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[CAT12 [ CATEGORY 12
[COINB [ COIN BOX
[DATRANS [ DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
[OPOS [ OPERATORS POSITION
[OPOSINAT[ OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
[SUBINAT [ ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBORD [ ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
[SUBPINAT[ PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBPRIOR[ PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
This unit specifies the position of the category in the digit
combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 3+
CR CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
This unit specifies the position of the language digit
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
a[-b]
a: ROUTE TYPE
[ [ The origin of the call is an actual trunk which
[ [ does not benefit from transition into ISDN. The
[ [ call should be held by conventional means.
[ROUTYP1 [ ROUTE TYPE 01
[ROUTYP10[ ROUTE TYPE 10
[ [ A call of an ISDN subscriber for which a
[ [ transition into the analog network is permitted
(on the telephone service). These calls should as
[ [ far as possible be held in ISDN to guarantee a
[ [ defined handling of service features. A transition
[ [ to a conventional line is only advisable if no
[ [ ISDN line exists for the selected direction.
[ [ transition into the analog network is not
[ [ permitted (in the non-telephone service). These
[ [ calls must be held in ISDN as they cannot be
[ [ handled in the analog network. The corresponding
[ [ destination may therefore only contain ISDN
[ [ routes.
b: POSITION OF ROUTE TYPE=
This unit specifies the position of the ROUTE TYPE
AMBIG AMBIGUOUS CODE
This parameter indicates whether the code is ambiguous or not.
Notes:
- The parameter value YES takes only effect
for intermediate results.
For final results (if no longer code points beginning with these
digits exist) it works the same way as value NO.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter may not be entered with value YES
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 4+
CR CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
if CODE is exactly equal to a carrier access code.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
NO NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
[Y [ YES AMBIGUOUS CODE
YES YES AMBIGUOUS CODE
Default: NO
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter indicates the traffic type for the code point.
NBARCPT NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
This parameter value indicates that the code
point cannot be barred, i.e. call requests from
blocked subscribers are allowed for this code
point. It can only be entered in addition to the
parameter DEST or CPTGRP.
SYMCON SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
This parameter indicates whether the connection is symmetric or
not.
N NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
NO NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
[Y [ YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
YES YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
Default: NO
This parameter specifies if charging data will be collected
at the specified code point.
N NO AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
[NO [ NO AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
[Y [ AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
!YES - AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 5+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
If the code point to the specified destination area should be non barrable
NBARCPT must be entered for the parameter TRATYP.
- The destination area must already exist in the destination area table
(see CR DEST).
[ [
[ CR CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] [,TRATYP=] [,SYMCON=] [,AMA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area selected by the digit
combination. The specified destination area must exist with at least
one route or be created with a new code.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 6+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[COINB [ COIN BOX
addressed.
combination.
a[-b]
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
a[-b]
a: ROUTE TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 7+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ routes.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
Default: NO
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
ASCITERM ASCI TERMINATING
[ITGW [ INTERNET GATEWAY
[ [ This parameter value indicates that the code
[ [ point leads to an access point for internet
[ [ telephony. It can only be entered in addition
[ [ to the parameter DEST.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 8+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[MOBBOTH [ MOBILE BOTH
[MOBHAND [ MOBILE HANDOVER
[MOBINTER[ MOBILE INTERROGATION
[MOBPHA [ MOBILE PACKET A
[MOBPHB [ MOBILE PACKET B
MOBTERM MOBILE TERMINATING
[NBARCPT [ NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
[ [ point cannot be barred, i.e. call requests from
[ [ blocked subscribers are allowed for this code
[ [ point. It can only be entered in addition to the
[ [ parameter DEST or CPTGRP.
[SELCWROU[ SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call with routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk within the trunk group is
[ [ determined by the digit combination selected.
[VBS [ VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
not.
Default: NO
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 9+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
The call requests for the specified code are diverted to the intercept code.
[ [
[ CR CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,ANNDIG=[[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] [,TXTNO= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected by the code point.
a[-b]
[ILLDEST [ ILLEGAL DESTINATION
[RESANN [ RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
[ [ Unit b must be specified.
[UNALLROU[ UNALLOCATED ROUTE
[UNOBDE1 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
[UNOBDE10[ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 10+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
entered.
a[-b]
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[COINB [ COIN BOX
addressed.
combination.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 11+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
a[-b]
a: ROUTE TYPE
[ [ routes.
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 12+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
Default: NO
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
This parameter specifies the number of the text to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = RESANN-X.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 13+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
These code points must be entered first.
- If the code point refers to a directory number block, this must exist
(see CR DN).
- If the code point refers to an intelligent network service, this
service trigger table must exist (see CR INTRIG).
[ [
[ CR CPT : CODE= ,TRATYP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] [,PROVNAM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
CLOCKTST CLOCK TEST
[CPTDN [ CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
[ [ Code point to a directory number.
[IACBPROC[ INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
[IN [ INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
[ [ Code point for intelligent network service.
[ [ Units b and c must be specified.
[MOBPROV [ MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER
[ [ Parameter PROVNAM must be specified.
PHONMEET PHONE MEETING
[RADIOSUB[ RADIO SUBSCRIBER
[SELCWORO[ SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call without routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk is determined directly by the
[ [ digit combination selected.
[TOLLFRNO[ TOLL FREE NUMBER
[ [ Code point for tollfree service. Unit b must be
[ [ specified.
TWOPARTY TWO PARTY LINE
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
Unit a = TOLLFRNO: 0-9
Length of the tollfree service directory number.
Unit a = PHONMEET: 0-99
Telephone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN: 0-15
Length of the IN subscriber number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 14+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Unit a = IACBPROC: 0-15
Length of the call back service directory number.
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
Unit a = IN: Name of the IN service.
The name of the IN service specified in the command
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID) must be entered.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
entered.
a[-b]
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[COINB [ COIN BOX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 15+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
addressed.
combination.
a[-b]
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
a[-b]
a: ROUTE TYPE
[ [ routes.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 16+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
Default: NO
PROVNAM SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the service provider. It may
only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPT- 17-
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE POINT
This command displays the data related to the specified code point(s).
The displayed data may be restricted to certain code points by specifying
parameters CODE, ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG, ROUTYP or LAC.
Examples: DISP CPT: CODE=X; (show all masks)
DISP CPT: DEST=X,CODE=12; (code and type restricted)
DISP CPT: DEST=MUNICH; (destination restricted)
DISP CPT: PROVNAM=ABCDEF; (provider name restricted)
If X is entered for ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG, ROUTYP or LAC, only
those objects are displayed that have a valid value for this parameter.
The parameters DEST, TRATYP, INCEPT and PROVNAM may be specified
at the same time, then all related masks will be displayed. If none of these
parameters is entered, all data will be displayed.
After successful execution of the command, the command text is repeated
and all data is output within a table.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CPT : [CODE=] [,DEST=] [,INCEPT=] [,CPTGRP=] [,TRATYP=] [
[ [
[ [,PROVNAM=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [
[ [
[ [,ROUTYP=] [,LAC=] [,AMBIG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter restricts the code points to be displayed. Only code
points that begin with the entered digits will be displayed.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area.
Only objects matching this destination will be displayed.
Compatibilities:
- If destination area is specified together with parameter
CODE, then DEST=X must be entered.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept code.
Only objects matching this intercept code will be displayed.
Compatibilities:
- If intercept code is specified together with parameter
CODE then INCEPT=X must be entered.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPT- 1+
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESANN RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
X ALL VALUES
This parameter determines the number of the reserve user
announcement intercept. If this parameter is not entered
all reserve user announcement intercepts are output.
This parameter specifies the code point group.
Compatibilities:
- If code point group is specified together with parameter
CODE then CPTGRP=X must be entered.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the traffic type.
Only objects matching this traffic type will be displayed.
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
X ALL VALUES
NBARCPT NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
TOLLFRNO TOLL FREE NUMBER
SELCWROU SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
SELCWORO SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
MOBBOTH MOBILE BOTH
RADIOSUB RADIO SUBSCRIBER
MOBPROV MOBILE PROVIDER
CLOCKTST CLOCK TEST
CPTDN CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
MOBINTER MOBILE INTERROGATION
MOBHAND MOBILE HANDOVER
IN INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
MOBPHA MOBILE PACKET A
MOBPHB MOBILE PACKET B
IACBPROC INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
ITGW INTERNET GATEWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPT- 2+
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
Unit a = PHONMEET : 0-99
Phone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN : 0-15
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
Unit a = IN : Name of the IN service.
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID).
PROVNAM PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the provider name.
Compatibilities:
- If provider name is specified together with parameter
CODE, then PROVNAM=X must be entered.
entered. Only objects matching this parameter value may
be displayed.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
Only objects matching this parameter value may
be displayed.
COINB COIN BOX
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPT- 3+
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
X ALL VALUES
addressed.
Only objects matching this parameter value may be displayed.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
X ALL VALUES
X
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter indicates whether the code is ambiguous or
not.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
Y YES AMBIGUOUS CODE
X ALL VALUES
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPT- 4-
MERGE CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE CODE POINT
This command merges parallel code points. The existing code points and their
destinations are cancelled and a new code point is created with the specified
destination (destination area, intercept code).
Parallel code points are code points whose last digits differ or code points
which have one of the following special codes at the end of the digit string:
ORIG1, (ORIGINATING MARK 1),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT),
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE).
Prerequisites:
- At least two code points to be merged must refer to a destination or
intercept code other than UNOBDE0.
- When merging by a digit, the entered code must be one digit shorter than
the code points to be merged.
- When merging by a special code, the entire code must be entered.
- Before using this command, the operator has to verify that no traffic
measurement job is running for the digit combination to be merged.
An indication of whether other code points or test points still use the
destination areas of the merged code points is output.
Notes:
- The parameter AMBIG is set to value NO for the code point
which is newly created with MERGE CPT.
To change the AMBIG value to YES the command MOD CPT
must be used.
1. MERGE CPT - CPTGRP MERGE CPT WITH CPTGRP
2. MERGE CPT - DEST MERGE CPT WITH DEST
3. MERGE CPT - INCEPT MERGE CPT WITH INCEPT
1. Input format
MERGE CPT WITH CPTGRP
This input format describes the merging of code points with CPTGRP.
[ [
[ MERGE CPT : CODE= ,CPTGRP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
merged.
This parameter specifies the code point group selected by the digit
combination. The specified code point group must exist.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE CPT- 1+
MERGE CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the originating code of the code
points to be merged. only decimal numbers, range 0..3839,
and the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the code
points to be merged.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
OPOSINAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATORS POS.
This parameter specifies the language digit of the code
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic of the code
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE CPT- 2+
MERGE CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MERGE CPT WITH DEST
This input format describes the merging of code points with DEST.
[ [
[ MERGE CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
merged.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area selected by the digit
combination. The specified destination area must exist with at
least one route or be created with a new code.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE CPT- 3+
MERGE CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE CPT- 4+
MERGE CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MERGE CPT WITH INCEPT
This input format describes merging of code points with INCEPT.
[ [
[ MERGE CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
merged.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE CPT- 5+
MERGE CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE CPT- 6-
MOD CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE POINT
This command modifies the destination for the specified code point. If the code
point is created with special codes
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE)
then the special codes must also be specified in order to define the particular
point uniquely.
If the code point is created for a particular local network, the local area code
(LAC) must be specified.
An indication of whether other code points or test points use the old
destination area of the modified code point is output.
Prerequisites:
- The code point specified by the digit combination must exist.
Compatibilities:
- Only one of the parameters CPTGRP, DEST, TRATYP and INCEPT may be entered,
except for TRATYP values:
SELCWROU,
MOBHAND,
MOBINTER,
MOBTERM,
MOBBOTH,
MOBPHA,
MOBPHB,
VBS,
VGCS,
ASCITERM.
For these values the additional parameter DEST must be entered.
- Parameter SYMCON may be entered for parameters CPTGRP, DEST and
TRATYP and for following TRATYP values:
MOBBOTH,
MOBHAND,
MOBINTER,
MOBPHA,
MOBPHB,
MOBTERM.
- Parameter AMA may be entered for parameters CPTGRP, DEST and TRATYP
and for following TRATYP values:
NBARCPT,
MOBTERM,
MOBBOTH.
1. MOD CPT - CPTGRP CPT TO CODE POINT GROUP
2. MOD CPT - DEST CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
3. MOD CPT - INCEPT CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
4. MOD CPT - TRATYP CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
1. Input format
CPT TO CODE POINT GROUP
The destination of the code point is modified to specified code point
group, or the data for specific code point group is modified.
[ [
[ MOD CPT : CODE= ,CPTGRP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] [,SYMCON=] [,AMA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 1+
MOD CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
modified. Special codes have to be entered to define the code point
uniquely.
This parameter specifies the new code point group selected by the
digit combination. The specified code point group must exist.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the destination
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[COINB [ COIN BOX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 2+
MOD CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the category for which the destination
is addressed.
EWSD-versions.
a[-b]
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIM. Z-DIGIT=
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
The parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
Notes:
For final results (if no longer code points beginning with
these digits exist) it works the same way as value NO.
Incompatibilities:
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 3+
MOD CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NO
not.
Standard Behavior:
- If type of destination is modified, the connection will
not be symmetric.
- If only data for a type of destination is modified, then
there is no affect on database.
Standard Behavior:
- If type of destination is modified, no AMA record is
generated.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 4+
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
The destination of the code point is modified to specified destination
area, or the data for specific destination area is modified.
- The code point to the old destination area specified by the digit
combination must exist.
- The new destination area must already exist in the destination
area table (see CR DEST).
[ [
[ MOD CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] <,TRATYP=> [,SYMCON=] [,AMA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
uniquely.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination area selected by the
digit combination. The specified destination area must exist with at
least one route or must be created with a new code.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 5+
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[COINB [ COIN BOX
is addressed.
EWSD-versions.
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 6+
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
Default: NO
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
[ITGW [ INTERNET GATEWAY
[ [ point leads to an access point for internet
[ [ telephony. It can only be entered in addition
[ [ to the parameter DEST.
[MOBBOTH [ MOBILE BOTH
[MOBHAND [ MOBILE HANDOVER
[MOBINTER[ MOBILE INTERROGATION
[MOBPHA [ MOBILE PACKET A
[MOBPHB [ MOBILE PACKET B
[NBARCPT [ NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
[ [ point cannot be barred, i.e. call requests from
[ [ blocked subscribers are allowed for this code
[ [ point. It can only be entered in addition to the
[ [ parameter DEST or CPTGRP.
[SELCWROU[ SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call with routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk within the trunk group is
[ [ determined by the digit combination selected.
[VBS [ VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
not.
Standard Behavior:
- If type of destination is modified, the connection will
not be symmetric.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 7+
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Standard Behavior:
- If type of destination is modified, no AMA record is
generated.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 8+
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
The old intercept value is changed to another intercept value.
[ [
[ MOD CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,ANNDIG=[[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] [,TXTNO= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
uniquely.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the new intercept code selected by the
code point.
a[-b]
[ILLDEST [ ILLEGAL DESTINATION
[RESANN [ RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
[UNALLROU[ UNALLOCATED ROUTE
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 9+
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[COINB [ COIN BOX
is addressed.
EWSD-versions.
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 10+
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
Default: NO
This parameter may only be entered
if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
This parameter specifies the number of the text
to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT =
RESANN-X
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 11+
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
The destination of the code point is modified to specified traffic type,
or the data for specific traffic type is modified.
- If the code point refers to an intelligent network service, this service
trigger table must exist (see CR INTRIG).
[ [
[ MOD CPT : CODE= ,TRATYP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,AMBIG=] [,PROVNAM=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,NPROVNAM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
uniquely.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
CLOCKTST CLOCK TEST
[CPTDN [ CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
[ [ Code point to a directory number.
[IACBPROC[ INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
[IN [ INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
[ [ Code point for intelligent network service.
[ [ Units b and c must be specified.
[MOBPROV [ MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER
[ [ Parameter PROVNAM must be specified.
[RADIOSUB[ RADIO SUBSCRIBER
[SELCWORO[ SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call without routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk is determined directly by the
[ [ digit combination selected.
[TOLLFRNO[ TOLL FREE NUMBER
[ [ Code point for tollfree service. Unit b must be
[ [ specified.
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
Unit a = TOLLFRNO: 0-9
Length of the tollfree service directory number.
Unit a = PHONMEET: 0-99
Telephone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN: 0-15
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 12+
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Unit a = IACBPROC: 0-15
Length of the call back service directory number.
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
Unit a = IN: Name of the IN service.
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID) must be entered.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[COINB [ COIN BOX
is addressed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 13+
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EWSD-versions.
a[-b]
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
Notes:
Incompatibilities:
if TRATYP = CPTDN.
N NO AMBIGUOUS CODE
Default: NO
PROVNAM OLD SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the old name of the service provider.
It may only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 14+
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NPROVNAM NEW SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the new name of the service provider.
It may only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CPT- 15-
SPLIT CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPLIT CODE POINT
This command splits an existing code point into 16 new code points. The option
of specifying 16 new destinations for that code point is created (by using
MOD CPT).
A code point can be split by a digit or by a special code
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE).
Only the code point specified by the parameter SPLITBY, ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG or
ROUTYP in the command receives the new destination. The other newly-created
code points retain the destination of the old code point. If the code point is
split by digit, the entered code must have one digit more than the code point
to be split.
Notes:
- The parameter AMBIG is set to value NO
by command SPLIT CPT newly created code point.
To change the AMBIG value to YES the command MOD CPT
must be used.
1. SPLIT CPT - CPTGRP SPLIT CPT WITH CPTGRP
2. SPLIT CPT - DEST SPLIT CPT WITH DEST
3. SPLIT CPT - INCEPT SPLIT CPT WITH INCEPT
1. Input format
SPLIT CPT WITH CPTGRP
This input format describes the splitting of code points with CPTGRP.
[ [
[ SPLIT CPT : CODE= ,CPTGRP= ,SPLITBY= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
split.
This parameter specifies the new code point group for the code point
specified by the parameter ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG or ROUTYP.
The specified code point group must exist.
SPLITBY DETERMINE KIND OF SPLIT
This parameter specifies the kind of special code for which the split
shall be done.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT CPT- 1+
SPLIT CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIGIT SPLIT BY DIGIT
MFCAT SPLIT BY BRANCHING CATEGORY
ORIG1 SPLIT BY ORIG1
ROUTYP SPLIT BY ROUTE TYPE
ZDIG SPLIT BY LANGUAGE DIGIT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
entered.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the new code
point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
This parameter specifies the language digit of the new code
intercept code.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic of the
new code point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT CPT- 2+
SPLIT CPT
CPTGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT CPT- 3+
SPLIT CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPLIT CPT WITH DEST
This input format describes the splitting of code points with DEST.
[ [
[ SPLIT CPT : CODE= ,DEST= ,SPLITBY= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
split.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination area for the code point
The specified destination area must exist with at least one route or
must be created with a new code.
shall be done.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
entered.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT CPT- 4+
SPLIT CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
intercept code.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
intercept code.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
intercept code.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT CPT- 5+
SPLIT CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SPLIT CPT WITH INCEPT
This input format describes splitting of code points with INCEPT.
[ [
[ SPLIT CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= ,SPLITBY= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
split.
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the new intercept code for the code point
shall be done.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT CPT- 6+
SPLIT CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
entered.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
intercept code.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
intercept code.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
intercept code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT CPT- 7-
CAN CPTNAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE POINT NOT ALLOWED FOR FEAT.
This command cancels a code point which is not allowed
to be used with the given feature(s).
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CPTNAF : CODE= ,FEAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter determines the digits for which the feature-related
blocking should be canceled.
FEAT FEATURES TO BE BLOCKED
This parameter specifies the features for which the use
of the code point is not allowed.
DIV CALL DIVERSION
Using this identifier, the functions for
call deflection and partial rerouting are
also included.
X ALL VALUES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CPTNAF- 1-
CR CPTNAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE POINT NOT ALLOWED FOR FEAT.
This command specifies a code point which is not allowed to be used
with the given feature(s). Only codes for services which are available
in the whole network may be entered. The entered code points not allowed
for features are not checked by call processing, e.g., call diversions
which were activated before entering the code point not allowed for call
diversion are not blocked and are still possible.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CPTNAF : CODE= ,FEAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter determines the digits for which the code point not
allowed for features is created. Codes that begin with a Local Area
Code of the exchange must not be entered. All code points that begin
with the entered digits are blocked for the given feature(s).
of the code point is not allowed.
DIV CALL DIVERSION
also included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CPTNAF- 1-
DISP CPTNAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPL. CODE POINTS NOT ALLOWED FOR FEAT.
This command displays code points which are not allowed
to be used with the given feature(s).
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [CODE=[ [
[ DISP CPTNAF : FEAT= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter restricts the code points to be displayed. Only code
points that begin with the entered digits will be displayed.
of the code point is not allowed. Only code points with this (these)
feature(s) are displayed.
DIV CALL DIVERSION
also included.
X ALL VALUES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPTNAF- 1-
ACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Transient
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CPTRPCH- 1-
CAN CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CP TRANSIENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CPTRPCH- 1-
DACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CPTRPCH- 1-
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,ID= [ [
[ DISP CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
be displayed.
ID="capsname.*" or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 1+
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolically.
structures:
LIB LIBRARY NAME
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 2+
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 3+
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: SECOND=
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 4-
ENTR CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With each ENTR CPTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
ENTR CPTRPCH command is necessary.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
identical.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CPTRPCH- 1+
ENTR CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g.: REPADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
parameter ID.
ENTR CPTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CPTRPCH- 2-
ENTR CQDAT
MEASIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CARRIER QUOTA DATA
This command assigns data to one carrier of a quota group. These data may
be either trunk group sizes or quotas and possibly a list of trunk groups
to be measured. The type of required data depends on the quota procedure,
which is valid for the specified carrier quota group.
The carrier quota group is activated as soon as correct quota data are
assigned to all carriers of that group. The craft will be notified of the
activation with the display of all quota data of that carrier quota group.
For this purpose the same output mask is used as for the command
DISP CQGRP, but no trunk groups to be measured will be displayed in this
case regardless of their existence.
The data which were entered with this command may be displayed with
DISP CQGRP. These data may be cancelled either completely with the
command CAN CQGRP or selectively with MOD CQDAT.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier quota group and the carrier are already created.
1. ENTR CQDAT - MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
2. ENTR CQDAT - STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
3. ENTR CQDAT - TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
1. Input format
MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
This input format is entered for carrier data belonging to a quota group
with quota procedure MEASIC.
For the quota procedure MEASIC it is necessary to provide a quota to
start with as well as a list of trunk groups to be measured for each
carrier.
Notes:
- The quotas to start with are valid until the first actualization took
place, depending on the measured incoming call duration time. The
actually valid quotas may be displayed with the command DISP CQGRP.
Prerequisites:
- The sum of quotas for all carriers equals exactly 100 %.
- Each TGNO to be measured already exists as an incoming or bothway
trunk group.
- None of the trunk groups to be measured is already part of another list
of trunk groups to be measured, neither for the same quota group nor for
another.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
CARR CARRIER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 1+
ENTR CQDAT
MEASIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
This parameter specifies the quota of outgoing calls to
be assigned to the specified carrier after activation
of the carrier selection destination. If 0 is entered,
the carrier is deactivated until the operator enters a
different value.
This parameter specifies the names of the trunk groups for which
the times for incoming calls are to be summed up.
Up to 48 parameter values can be specified.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 2+
ENTR CQDAT
STAQUO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STATIC QUOTAS
with quota procedure STAQUO.
For the quota procedure STAQUO it is necessary to specify a percentage
quota for each carrier of that quota group.
Prerequisites:
- The sum of quotas for all carriers equals exactly 100%.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
different value.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 3+
ENTR CQDAT
TGSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SIZE
with quota procedure TGSIZE.
The quota procedure TGSIZE requires the specification of trunk group
sizes.
Those sizes result in calculated percentages for each carrier of the quota
group. The result of this calculation may be displayed with the command
DISP CQGRP.
The trunk group sizes to be entered in this command refer to the sum of
numbers of trunks in all outgoing trunk groups in the own switch, which are
operated by that carrier. No internal check is executed if the crafts
input matches the trunk group data in the call processing data base.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
different value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 4-
MOD CQDAT
ATGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA DATA
This command modifies quota data for one or more carriers of a quota group.
Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
Depending on the actual status of the data the following actions are
possible:
- add trunk groups to an existing list,
- modify name of a carrier,
- cancel trunk groups from an existing list,
- modify the quota value of a single or all carriers,
- modify the trunk group size of a single or all carriers,
- modify the quota procedure.
Prerequisites:
- The value of at least one parameter is input to be changed.
- All entered objects exist already.
1. MOD CQDAT - ATGNO ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP
2. MOD CQDAT - CARR CARRIER
3. MOD CQDAT - CTGNO CANCEL TRUNK GROUP
4. MOD CQDAT - QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
5. MOD CQDAT - QUOTAIND QUOTA INDIVIDUAL CARR
6. MOD CQDAT - QUOTALL QUOTA ALL CARR
7. MOD CQDAT - TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
1. Input format
ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP
This input format is entered to add trunk groups to an already existing
list of incoming/bothway trunk groups to be measured. Each trunk group
specified in this input format occupies an element in a pool (group
index list). This pool is not expandable and comprises 1000 elements.
Additional prerequisites:
- A list of trunk groups to be measured already exists for the entered
carrier (refer to ENTR CQDAT for creation of such a list).
- The number of trunk groups already entered and of those being added does
not exceed 48.
- None of the trunk groups to be measured is a member of another list,
neither in the same nor in another quota group.
- Each TGNO to be measured already exists as an incoming or bothway
trunk group.
- There are enough free elements available in the group index list.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,ATGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 1+
MOD CQDAT
ATGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ATGNO ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 2+
MOD CQDAT
CARR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CARRIER
This input format is entered to modify the name of a carrier.
- The new name has not been assigned to any carrier within the same carrier
quota group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,NCARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
NCARR NEW CARRIER NAME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 3+
MOD CQDAT
CTGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP
This input format is entered to remove trunk group numbers from the list of
trunk groups to be measured.
It is possible to remove trunk group numbers from a list of trunk groups to
be measured, and to cancel completely a list that was created provisio-
nally.
- At least one trunk group number is left in the list of trunk groups to be
measured, if QUOPRO=MEASIC is active for the specified carrier quota
group .
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,CTGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
CTGNO CANCELLED TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 4+
MOD CQDAT
QUOPRO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
QUOTA PROCEDURE
This entry is made to modify the quota procedure for a carrier
quota group.
But it is not permissible to change the kind of quota procedure
to or from CDD.
The existing lists of trunk groups to be measured are kept if the quota
procedure MEASIC was active before the execution of this command. A
similar status as for prepared lists is achieved. These lists may be
deleted if not needed any longer after the modification of the quota
procedure with this command using the parameter CTGNO (see above).
- The quota group is active.
- Each carrier name of the group is entered, possibly with a trunk group size
of 0 or a quota of 0 % . Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
- At least one trunk group to be measured is assigned to each carrier of
the group if MEASIC is entered as new quota procedure.
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers is exactly 100 %, if a new quota
procedure is entered which requires quota values (STAQUO or MEASIC).
If the execution of this command results in previously deactivated carriers
being activated (i.e. instead of a quota of 0 % now a non-zero quota comes
into effect) then the following prerequisites need to be fulfilled for
successful command execution in addition to the standard prerequisites:
- All destinations for carrier selection which belong to this quota group
have a carrier destination assigned to the carrier being activated.
- Each of these carrier destinations has at least one route.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,QUOPRO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a[-b]
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
This parameter unit specifies quota data of the carrier.
Depending on the specified quota procedure, the numerical
value entered represents either a quota (percentage) or a
trunk group size (to be specified as a number of trunks).
QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
This parameter specifies the quota procedure used to distribute the
call processing load to the carriers in the carrier quota group.
MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 5+
MOD CQDAT
QUOPRO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The outgoing calls are distributed to the
carriers initially in accordance with the
specified start quotas and later in the ratio
of the total call times measured in the incoming
direction. The quotas are updated whenever
an incoming call time of at least 9000 seconds
is measured for all carriers of the carrier
quota group at a full quarter-hour.
Notes:
Arrangements with the corresponding exchanges must
be taken to ensure that this quota procedure is
only used at one end of the connection. Otherwise,
after a certain time, a stable quota distribution
would result whereby one carrier would be assigned
100% of the load and all other carriers would have
no load.
STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
The outgoing calls are distributed according to
the specified quotas.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZES SUM
The outgoing calls are distributed in the ratio of
the trunk group sizes entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 6+
MOD CQDAT
QUOTAIND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
QUOTA INDIVIDUAL CARR
This input format is entered to modify the quota of a single carrier
belonging to one quota group.
- The carrier quota group is not active.
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers, including the value to be entered,
is not greater than 100%.
- Only one carrier is specified.
- Prior to command execution a value was specified with
ENTR CQDAT.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 7+
MOD CQDAT
QUOTALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
QUOTA ALL CARR
This input format is entered to modify the quotas of all carriers in a
group. Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
- The quota group is active.
- Each carrier in the quota group is named, possibly with a new quota of 0%
(deactivation of the carrier).
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers is exactly 100% .
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 8+
MOD CQDAT
TGSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SIZE
This input format is entered to modify trunk group sizes.
- It is only permissible to specify one carrier or all carriers of the carrier
quota group.
- The carrier quota group was created before with QUOPRO=TGSIZE.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQDAT- 9-
CAN CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command cancels the specified carrier quota group.
If lists of trunk groups to be measured exist for carriers of the quota
group to be cancelled, then those entries are deleted.
If all carriers of the group being deleted have more than 48 measured
trunk groups assigned in total, then either those lists have to be
cancelled first (MOD CQDAT, parameter CTGNO) or the carriers have to be
deleted individually (MOD CQGRP, parameter CCARR).
Prerequisites:
- No carrier selection destination refers to the quota group that is to be
cancelled.
- The trunk group lists of all carriers do not contain more than 48 trunk
groups.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CQGRP : CQGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CQGRP- 1-
CR CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command creates a carrier quota group, which is a prerequisite for
routing with load sharing. The following data are assigned to the carrier
quota group.
- the name by which the carrier quota group is addressed
- the quota procedure used
- the names of the carriers belonging to the carrier quota group.
All destinations for carrier selection assigned to a quota group are
subject to joint quota assignment. Destinations for carrier selection must
be assigned to quota groups in such a way that each carrier involved can
serve all subscriber directory numbers or lines within the area represented
by the sum of all destination area groups.
Prerequisites:
- The quota group name does not yet exist.
- No carrier name occurs more than once in the quota group that is to be
created.
To enable a quota group to be activated, it is necessary to assign the
quota data for each carrier with the command ENTR CQDAT.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CQGRP : CQGRP= ,QUOPRO= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group.
The name is user specifiable, it is not permissible to specify
a single X.
call processing load to the carriers in the carrier quota group.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZES SUM
The outgoing calls are distributed
in the ratio of the trunk group
sizes entered.
The outgoing calls are distributed
according to the specified quotas.
The outgoing calls are distributed to the
carriers initially in accordance with the
specified start quotas and later according to the
total call times measured in the incoming
direction. The quotas are updated whenever an
incoming call time of at least 9000 seconds is
measured for all carriers of the carrier quota
group at a full quarter-hour.
Notes:
- Arrangements must be made with the
corresponding exchanges to ensure that this
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CQGRP- 1+
CR CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
quota procedure is only used at one end of the
connection. Otherwise, after a certain time, a
stable quota distribution would result whereby
one carrier would be assigned 100% of the load
and all other carriers would have no load.
CDD CARRIER DIVERGENCE DESTINATION
A call is routed to a new directory number, which
is selected on a cyclic basis in order to
guarantee equal distribution.
The new directory numbers can be allocated to the
carrier destinations used in this quota procedure,
by means of the parameter FOVCODE.
CARR CARRIER NAME
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CQGRP- 2-
DISP CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command displays the data of all or selected carrier quota groups.
The display of all quota group data is achieved by input of CQGRP = X.
The amount of display may be reduced by entering additional parameters:
Only those quota groups out of all existing groups are displayed which have
the specified carrier name (CARR) or quota procedure (QUOPRO).
If several parameters are entered only those quota groups are displayed
which fulfill all conditions at the same time.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CQGRP : CQGRP= [,CARR=] [,QUOPRO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CARR CARRIER
call processing load to the carriers of the carrier group.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
CDD CARRIER DIVERGENCE DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CQGRP- 1-
MOD CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command modifies data of a quota group. The name of the group may be
changed as well as the amount of assigned carriers.
It is required to modify each destination for carrier selection which is
assigned to the quota group in an identical manner, in order to maintain
consistent data (MOD DESTDAT).
Prerequisite:
- The value of at least one parameter is changed.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQGRP : CQGRP= <,NCQGRP= ,CARR= ,CCARR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the carrier quota group for which data
are to be modified.
NCQGRP NEW CARRIER QUOTA GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the new name for the
carrier quota group.
CARR ADDITIONAL CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier to be assigned
to the carrier quota group. Up to 19 parameter
values can be specified.
CCARR CANCELLED CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier to be deleted
from the carrier quota group. Up to 19 parameter
values can be specified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CQGRP- 1-
CONF CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CODE RECEIVER
With this command one or all codereceiver of a module can be
configured to one of the states MBL, ACT or PLA.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,LCPOS=[ [
[ CONF CR : LTG= ,CRPOS= ,OST= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
LCPOS LINE CIRCUIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the position of a codereceiver in
the line trunk unit.
a-b[-c]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values are
affected.
CRPOS CODE RECEIVER POSITION
This parameter specifies the position of a codereceiver in
a signaling unit SU.
a[-b]
a: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the position of the module.
Compatibilities:
0-2 for LTGB
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CR- 1+
CONF CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: CODE RECEIVER NUMBER=
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values
are affected.
This parameter specifies the destination operating status.
The following status transitions are permitted:
ACT <-> MBL
MBL <-> PLA
UNA --> ACT or MBL
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CR- 2-
DIAG CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CODE RECEIVER
This command starts diagnosis for one or more code receivers on a
module.
Prerequisites:
- A diagnosis is only possible module by module.
- The code receiver to be diagnosed must be MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
- The LTG control unit must be ACTIVE or CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED.
- The code receiver must be MAINTENANCE BLOCKED.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,CRPOS=[ [
[ DIAG CR : LTG= ,LCPOS= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the position of a code receiver in the
signaling unit.
This unit specifies the position of the CR module.
The following value ranges are permissible:
0-3 for LTGB
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
This parameter specifies the position of a code receiver in the
line trunk unit.
The mounting locations are to be determined from the exchange-
specific documentation.These documents must be kept current.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG CR- 1-
STAT CR
CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CODE RECEIVER
This command displays the operating state(s) of
- a particular code receiver module in a particular LTG
- a particular code receiver module in all LTGs
- all code receiver in a particular LTG
- all code receiver in all LTGs
- all code receiver in a particular operating state in a particular LTG
- all code receiver in a particular operating state in all LTGs
1. STAT CR - CR CODE RECEIVER
2. STAT CR - OST OPERATIONAL STATUS
1. Input format
CODE RECEIVER
Input format for displaying the CR operating states.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LCPOS=[[ [
[ STAT CR : LTG= [,CRPOS=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
a[-b]
a: MODULE NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT CR- 1+
STAT CR
CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the position of the module.
Compatibilities:
0-2 for LTGB
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
b: CODE RECEIVER NUMBER=
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values are affected.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT CR- 2+
STAT CR
OST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OPERATIONAL STATUS
Input format for determining code receivers in a particular operating
state.
Notes:
- If the parameter LTG NUMBER is omitted, all possible values are affected.
[ [
[ STAT CR : LTG= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
STB STANDBY
UNA UNAVAILABLE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT CR- 3-
CAN CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command cancels a code receiver module in the signaling
unit of an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- The code receiver module must be PLA.
- The ports of the code receiver must not be in service.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CRMOD : LTG= ,CRMOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG.
a-b
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
This unit specifies the LTG number.
CRMOD CODE RECEIVER MODULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module
to be cancelled.
For the signaling unit LTG type LTGB only the code receiver
modules 0, 1 or 2 may be specified. For the signaling unit of
LTG type LTGD only the code receiver modules 0 may be specified.
Notes:
If, in spite of the LTG being operational, the port data cannot
be sent to the GP, it is possible to configure the associated
LTG to MBL. If it is configured from this state to
ACT, the LTG receives the data stored in the CP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CRMOD- 1-
CR CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command creates a code receiver module in the signaling unit
of an LTG.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CRMOD : LTG= ,CRMOD= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG.
a-b
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module.
For the signaling unit of LTG type LTGB only the code receiver
LTG type LTGD only the code receiver module 0 may be specified.
For the LTG types and LTGH no code receiver modules may be
specified.
The configuration data for the four ports of a code receiver
module depend on the code receiver type.
The ports are assigned to the code receiver modules as follows:
LTG type LTGB:
+------------+----------------+
! Port no.: ! CR module no.: !
+------------+----------------+
! 256 - 259 ! 0 !
! 260 - 263 ! 1 !
! 264 - 267 ! 2 !
+------------+----------------+
LTG type LTGC:
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! CR module no.! 0 ! 1 ! 2 ! 3 ! 4 ! 5 ! 6 ! 7 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! Port no. ! 160 ! 161 ! 162 ! 163 ! 164 ! 165 ! 166 ! 167 !
! ! 168 ! 169 ! 170 ! 171 ! 172 ! 173 ! 174 ! 175 !
! ! 176 ! 177 ! 178 ! 179 ! 180 ! 181 ! 182 ! 183 !
! ! 184 ! 185 ! 186 ! 187 ! 188 ! 189 ! 190 ! 191 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
LTG type LTGD:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CRMOD- 1+
CR CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+------------+----------------+
+------------+----------------+
! 256 - 259 ! 0 !
+------------+----------------+
LTG type LTGG, LTGM or LTGN operated as LTGB:
+------------+----------------+
+------------+----------------+
! 256 - 259 ! 0 !
! 260 - 263 ! 1 !
+------------+----------------+
Code receiver module 0 and 1 must be created with
the same code receiver module type.
RMCTC may only be specified for code receiver module 0;
in this case module 1 is unused.
LTG type LTGG, LTGM or LTGN operated as LTGC:
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! CR module no.! 0 ! 1 ! 4 ! 5 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! Port no. ! 160 ! 161 ! 164 ! 165 !
! ! 168 ! 169 ! 172 ! 173 !
! ! 176 ! 177 ! 180 ! 181 !
! ! 184 ! 185 ! 188 ! 189 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+
Code receiver module 0 and 1, respectively 4 and 5, must
be created with the same code receive module type.
RMCTC may only be specified for code receiver module 0;
in this case module 1 is unused.
Note:
If, in spite of the LTG being operational, the port data
cannot be sent to the GP, it is advisable to cancel the job
with the command CAN CRMOD and to recreate the code receiver
module. Alternatively, the associated LTG can be configured to
MBL. If the LTG is configured from this state to ACT, it
receives the data stored in the CP.
TYPE CODE RECEIVER TYPE
This parameter specifies the code receiver module type.
CRPC CODE RECEIVER PUSHBUTTON CEPT
CRMR2 CODE RECEIVER MFC R2 SIGNALING
RMCTC CODE RECEIVER RMCTC
This module type may only be specified for
code receiver type 0.
CRMR1 CODE RECEIVER MFC R1 SIGNALING
CRMSC CODE RECEIVER MSC SIGNALING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CRMOD- 2-
DISP CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command displays the code receiver module data for one, several or
all the LTGs in an exchange.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CRMOD : LTG= [,CRMOD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG. Depending on the value entered
the following options are possible:
1. <ltgset> - <ltg>
All objects for the specified LTG are displayed.
Only in this case is it permissable to specify parameter
CRMOD.
2. <ltgset> - <ltg> && <ltgset> - <ltg>
All objects for the specified range of LTGs are displayed.
The first limit must be lower than the second limit.
3. <ltgset> - X
The objects of all LTGs for the specified LTGSET are displayed.
4. X - X
The objects for all LTGs and LTGSETs are displayed.
a-b
unit values.
unit values.
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module.
For the signaling unit LTG type LTGB the code receiver
LTG type LTGD only code receiver module 0 may be specified.
For the LTG type LTGH no code receiver modules may be specified.
Default: All code receivers in the specified LTGs are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CRMOD- 1-
CAN CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command cancels a central service channel in the CP113.
Prerequisites:
- A connecting IOPSCDV or IOPSCDX must be PLA or MBL.
A connecting IOPUNI must be PLA, MBL or ACT.
- The operating channel itself must be PLA.
- The central service channel groups must be cancelled.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CSC : CSC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel to be cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSC- 1-
CONF CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command configures a central service channel.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ CONF CSC : CSC= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel to be configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF CSC- 1-
CR CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command creates a central service channel.
The created central service channel is PLA after the command
is executed.
Prerequisites:
- The specified IOPSCDV or IOPSCDX must not be ACT.
- The specified IOPUNI may be ACT.
Notes:
- If the specified IOP is an IOPUNI the CSC parameters (baud rate,
address of channel, connection to IOP, interface) can be modified with
the command MOD CSC. The parameters have default values in
the IOPUNI.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CSC : IOP= ,CHAN= ,CSC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to
which the central service channel is to be connected.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
CHAN IOP CHANNEL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the channel number at the input/output
processor. If the specified IOP is an IOPUNI the range of channel
numbers is restricted to 0..2.
This parameter specifies the central service channel to be
created.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSC- 1-
DISP CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command displays the environment of a central service channel as
there are the preceding IOP, channel number, baud rate, address of
channel, connection to IOP, interface and fault informations.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CSC : CSC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSC- 1-
MOD CSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This command modifies the device parameters of a central service
channel. The parameters have default values in the IOPUNI. The device
parameters can be displayed with the DISP CSC command.
Prerequisites:
- The specified central service channel must be MBL or PLA.
- The preceding IOP of the specified central service channel
must be an IOPUNI and it must be ACT.
If the central service channel to be modified is connected to
either IOPUNI-0 or IOPUNI-1, then both of those IOPs
must be ACT.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CSC : CSC= <,BAUDRATE= ,ADDR= ,CONNECT= ,INTERF=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the central service channel.
BAUDRATE BAUDRATE
This parameter specifies the baud rate of the central service
channel.
B2400 2400 BAUD
B4800 4800 BAUD
B9600 9600 BAUD
B19200 19200 BAUD
B38400 38400 BAUD
B48000 48000 BAUD
B56000 56000 BAUD
B64000 64000 BAUD
ADDR ADDRESS OF CHANNEL
This parameter specifies the address of the central service
channel.
CONNECT CONNECTION TO IOP
This parameter specifies the kind of connection to the IOP.
DIRECT DIRECT CONNECTION
MODEM CONNECTION WITH MODEM
INTERF INTERFACE
This parameter specifies the interface.
V24 V24 INTERFACE
X21 X21 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSC- 1-
CAN CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command cancels a channel group. The relevant data are deleted from the
background memory. The channel group can only be cancelled if it is no
longer being used as a computer channel.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CSCGRP : CSCGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSCGRP CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the channel group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSCGRP- 1-
CR CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command creates groups together two mutually redundant channels to a
partner DCP to form a channel group. The first channel entered is regarded
as the channel to be used. The relevant data are saved on a background
memory. No more than two channels may be assigned to a channel group; if
more are entered, an error message is issued. The links are entered must
already be created. In the case of CP103, the channels already exist.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CSCGRP : CSCGRP= ,CSC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the channel number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSCGRP- 1-
DISP CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command displays all information on all defined channel groups and
the associated channels.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CSCGRP : CSCGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSCGRP- 1-
MOD CSCGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL GROUP
This command modifies the assignment of channels to a channel group and the
group name. The first channel entered is regarded as the channel to be used.
The relevant data are saved on a background memory. The channels entered
must already be created. In the case of CP103, the channels already exist.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CSCGRP : CSCGRP= [,CSC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
n/o
This parameter specifies the channel number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSCGRP- 1-
ACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CSC-TRACER
This command activates the trace function.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT CSCTRAC : TRACNO= ,CSC= [,MODE=] [,STPCRI=] [,BLKLEN=] [
[ [
[ [,BLKSUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRACNO TRACER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the tracer number. The trace number
determines which trace memory is to be overwritten even if it
has not yet been read.
MODE MODE
This parameter specifies the recording mode.
ALL TRACING OF ALL DATA
The line traffic is to be logged.
TRANSPLV TRACING OF TRANSPORT LEVEL
Only blocks containing information are to be
logged (only applies to HDLC lines).
Default: ALL
STPCRI STOP CRITERIA
This parameter specifies a stop criterion which causes the trace
function to be switched off.
Note:
- Stop criteria 1-14 and 19-35 are detected by the IOP and
reported to the trace process.
0 stop criterion not switched on (prefilled)
1 SNRM command received
(Set Normal Response Mode)
2 UI command (message) received (sent)
(Unnumbered Information)
The UI command has not yet been implemented.
3 DISC command received
(DISConnect)
4 RR command with P=1 (message) received (sent)
(Receive Ready)
5 RNR command (message) received (sent)
(Receive Not Ready: e.g. no container available,
container too small).
6 REJ command (message) received (sent)
(REJect)
7 I frame received (sent)
(Information block)
8 UA message sent
(Unnumbered Acknowledge)
9 DM message sent
(Disconnected Mode)
10 FRMR message sent
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSCTRAC- 1+
ACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(FRaMe Rejected: non-implemented commands,
I-field too long, or wrong send/receive counter).
11 Line failure detected (spontaneously by IOP)
Line failure is detected in the IOP by timer expiry
or changeover to DM:
1) Timer expiry 1 : two successive RR (with P=1) not
detected in the NRM.
2) Frame end not detected.
12 Frame defect
(incorrect FCS (Frame Check Sequence))
13 Not expected frame
(incorrect counter status, non-implemented command)
14 Not equal to SNRM command in DM mode
-Stop criteria 15 - 18 are detected by the PIO:DEV and
reported to the trace process.
15 Line failure detected
(PIO-MSG1/2=H10/01)
Parameter BLKSUP is ineffective here.
16 Line restoral
(PIO-MSG1/2=H10/04)
17 Recovery has occurred
If the PIO:DEV reports RESET IOP or if a recovery
has occurred, an attempt is made to start the tracer again.
If the tracer cannot be started, (PIO-MSG1/2=H04/01,H04/02),
a trace end message is sent.
18 IOP was reset
(PIO-MSG1/2=H10/0B)
parameter BLKSUP is ineffective here.
If the PIO:DEV reports RESET IOP or if a recovery
has occurred, an attempt is made to start the tracer again.
If the tracer cannot be started, (PIO-MSG1/2=H04/01,
H04/02) a trace end message is sent.
- Stop criteria 19-35 are detected by the IOP and reported to the
trace process.
19 RR command sent
20 RNR command sent
21 REJ command sent
22 REJ command received
23 I frame sent
24 I frame received
25 RR command or RNR command or I frame sent
26 RR command or RNR command or I frame received
27 RR command or RNR command or REJ command sent
28 RR command or RNR command or REJ command received
29 RNR command or REJ command or FRMR command sent
30 FCS faulty or SNRM or Line Fault received
(line mutilates frames)
31 NEF or not SNRM received in DM
(all non-permissible/non-implemented commands)
32 DM message or UA message sent
33 SNRM command or Line Fault or DM command sent or
received
(CSC fails for unknown reasons
DCP, line, RESET IOP in disconnected mode)
34 Reserve (currently same as 33)
35 Reserve (currently same as 33)
Default: 0
BLKLEN BLOCK LENGTH
This parameter specifies how many bytes per block are to be
traced.
Default: 5200
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSCTRAC- 2+
ACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLKSUP SUPPLEMENTARY BLOCKS
This parameter specifies how many entries are still to be made
to the trace memory after a stop criterion has arrived.
It is only advisable to specify this for a stop criterion
recognized by the IOP.
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSCTRAC- 3-
DACT CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CSC-TRACER
This command deactivates the trace function.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CSCTRAC : CSC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CSCTRAC- 1-
DISP CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CSC-TRACE COMMAND
This command displays the current trace states for all 4 tracers.
It checks whether or not the trace functions are set.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CSCTRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSCTRAC- 1-
DMP CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CSC-TRACE DATA
This command dumps data in the trace memory. The trace function is
stopped by this command. The last event stored is printed first.
If the command is entered several times, the trace memory can be
output to the end (oldest frame).
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DMP CSCTRAC : CSC= [,BLKCO=] [,BLKLEN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BLKCO BLOCK COUNT
This parameter specifies the number of data blocks
to be printed out.
Default: 9999
BLKLEN BLOCK LENGTH
This parameter specifies how many bytes per block are to be
printed out.
Default: 5200
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CSCTRAC- 1-
ACT CSF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command activates the CSF monitoring of the object given by
parameters. Status reports will be produced for the objects whenever
the triggering events, setup by parameters, occur.
Restrictions:
A maximum of 32 ports can be monitored simultaneously.
Prerequisites:
- There may be no other ACT CSF command running in the site and
- no other tracer may run in the same LTG.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with
DACT CSF.
1. ACT CSF - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. ACT CSF - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
3. ACT CSF - LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
4. ACT CSF - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
[ [
[ [
[ [[,SELRCF= [[ [
[ ACT CSF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,DSELRCF=[ [,SUCC=] [,COUNT=] [
[ [[,SYMRCF= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,TIME=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code. It is required if there
is more than one local network connected to an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
SELRCF SELECT RCF
This parameter specifies a set of RCF (Reason for Call Failure)
values triggering CSF.
RCF 1-127 = CAUSE, according to ETSI Q.850.
Default 0&&255
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 1+
ACT CSF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DSELRCF DESELECT RCF
values NOT triggering CSF.
All other values will trigger CSF.
SYMRCF SYMBOLIC RCF
This parameter specifies a symbolic name of a set of SELRCF or
DSELRCF values stored in a diskfile.
The SYMRCF name and SELRCF/DSELRCF values must be stored in the
file TC.CSF.SYMRCF by use of EDTS8 and have the following format:
Symbolic name:SELRCF/DSELRCF=rcf values;
Example:
MSGFAULT:SELRCF=95&&101&110&111;
NOT_MSGFAULT:DSELRCF=95&&101&110&111;
NOTE:
Before editing TC.CSF.SYMRCF use the MML command DACT FNS: FNS=TC;
After editing use MML command ACT FNS: FNS=TC;
SUCC SUCCESSFUL CALLS
This parameter specifies if status reports must be given when a
successful call is obtained.
N NO TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
[NO [ NO TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
[Y [ TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
!YES - TRIGGER ON SUCCESSFUL CALLS
Default: NO
COUNT MAX. NUMBER OF STATUS REPORTS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of status reports
generated by CSF.
Default: 1
TIME MAX. ACTIVE TIME
This parameter specifies the maximum time for CSF to be active.
a-b[-c]
a: HOURS=
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 2+
ACT CSF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTES=
Default: 30
c: SECONDS=
Default: 0
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or in
a trunk group.
- PBX group : 1..9999
- TGNO : 1..16383
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines refering to the
[AIC [ PBX GROUPS: ANALOG INCOMING
[AOG [ PBX GROUPS: ANALOG OUTGOING
[IBW [ PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY
[IBW1TR6 [ PBX GROUPS: ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6
[IIC [ PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING
[IIC1TR6 [ PBX GROUPS: ISDN INCOMING 1TR6
[IOG [ PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING
[IOG1TR6 [ PBX GROUPS: ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6
!MBW - PBX GROUPS: MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 3+
ACT CSF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
[ [
[ [
[ [[,SELRCF= [[ [
[ ACT CSF : EQN= [,DSELRCF=[ [,SUCC=] [,COUNT=] [,TIME=] ; [
[ [[,SYMRCF= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU or V5IF equipment number
a-b-c[-d]
a: NUMBER FOR DLU/V5IF=
- V5IF number : 6000..8999 for V5IF port
b: NUMBER FOR SHELF=
- Shelf : 0..7 for DLU port
- V5IF : 0 for V5IF port
c: NUMBER FOR MODULE=
- 0 for V51-IF port
- 0..20 for V52-IF port
d: NUMBER FOR CHANNEL/CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT=
- Circuit : 0..7 for DLU port (SLM8)
- Circuit : 0..15 for DLU port (SLM16)
- Circuit : 0..31 for DLUG port(SLM32)
- Port : 0..31 for V51-IF port
- Port : 0..99 for V52-IF port
SELRCF SELECT RCF
Default 0&&255
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 4+
ACT CSF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SYMRCF SYMBOLIC RCF
Example:
NOTE:
Default: NO
generated by CSF.
Default: 1
a-b[-c]
a: HOURS=
Default: 0
b: MINUTES=
Default: 30
c: SECONDS=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 5+
ACT CSF
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 6+
ACT CSF
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LINE TRUNK GROUP
[ [
[ [
[ [[,SELRCF= [[ [
[ ACT CSF : LTG= ,LC= [,DSELRCF=[ [,SUCC=] [,COUNT=] [
[ [[,SYMRCF= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,TIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be traced.
a-b
LTGSET : 0..31
and upper ones)
LTG : 1..63
LC LINE CONNECTION
Notes:
LC = a
LC = a-b
a[-b]
a: LTU NO.OF A LTG=
LTU : 0..7
Channel : 0..31
SELRCF SELECT RCF
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 7+
ACT CSF
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default 0&&255
SYMRCF SYMBOLIC RCF
Example:
NOTE:
Default: NO
generated by CSF.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 8+
ACT CSF
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b[-c]
a: HOURS=
Default: 0
b: MINUTES=
Default: 30
c: SECONDS=
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 9+
ACT CSF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
[ [
[ [
[ [,LNO=[ [[,SELRCF= [[ [
[ ACT CSF : TGNO= ,CIC= [,DSELRCF=[ [,SUCC=] [,COUNT=] [
[ [ [ [[,SYMRCF= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,TIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or in
a trunk group.
- PBX group : 1..9999
- TGNO : 1..16383
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of CCS7 lines.
Prerequisites:
a-b
PCM 24 = 0...681
PCM 30 = 0...511
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
PCM 24 = 0...23 Channels
PCM 30 = 0...31 Channels
SELRCF SELECT RCF
Default 0&&255
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 10+
ACT CSF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0, range of decimal numbers
SYMRCF SYMBOLIC RCF
Example:
NOTE:
Default: NO
generated by CSF.
Default: 1
a-b[-c]
a: HOURS=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 11+
ACT CSF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
b: MINUTES=
Default: 30
c: SECONDS=
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT CSF- 12-
DACT CSF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command deactivates CSF (Call Status Facility) in the whole site.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT CSF ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT CSF- 1-
DISP CSF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command displays CSF activation information: the ACT CSF
input parameters, starting time and the number of status reports
given so far from the last ACT CSF command.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CSF ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSF- 1-
DMP CSF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CALL STATUS FACILITY
This command shows the status reports collected in a disk file
during execution of the last ACT CSF command.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DMP CSF : [FORM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORM OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the dump format. The dump can be given
in either a SMALL interpreted report or a LARGE including the small
one and a hex dump of registers. Default is SMALL.
SMALL SMALL STATUS REPORT
LARGE LARGE STATUS REPORT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP CSF- 1-
CAN CSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command cancels a common service group for CENTREX or OSS.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the common service group local area code,
when the EWSD exchange serves for more than one local area (code).
Notes:
- For an exchange with multiple DN volume this parameter is mandatory.
- Entering LAC the parameter DN is required.
This parameter specifies the common service group directory number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSGRP- 1-
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCPX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command creates a common service group for CENTREX or ADMOSS.
1. CR CSGRP - CRCSGCPX CREATE CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
2. CR CSGRP - CRCSGCTX CREATE CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
1. Input format
CREATE CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
[ [
[ CR CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= ,CXGRP= ,CXDN= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CHSITE=] ,DIV= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the common service group type.
CTXCPLX CENTREX COMPLEX CSGRP
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of an existing
CENTREX group.
This command is rejected if the CENTREX group is
related to a secured CENTREX business group (BGID)
for which the operator has no administration
permission (see command DISP CXSEC).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 1+
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCPX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CXDN CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the CENTREX intercom number.
The CXDN for intercom - calls is created and corresponded to a
directory number of the subscriber.
CHSITE CHARGING SITE
This parameter specifies the charging zone
for the CENTREX Group Specific Charging Method.
Default: 1
DIV DIVERSION FEATURES
This parameter specifies the diversion features.
a-b
a: DIVERSION
LFCD LINK FAILURE CALL DIVERSION
USECSGRP USE OF SHARED CSGRP
In case of USECSGRP the diversion number is
the CENTREX group number of the destination
CENTREX group within the CENTREX complex.
b: DIVERSION NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 2+
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
[ [
[ CR CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= ,CXGRP= ,CXDN= [,NAME=] [
[ [
[ ,LANG= ,PWBASIC= [,PWMINLN=] [,PWEXP=] [,FEA=] [
[ [
[ [,HUNT=] [,CHSITE=] [,DIV=] [,TIMVAL=] [,LIMVAL=] [
[ [
[ [,FRWDINC=] [,ACTFWINC=] [,RESLIM=] [,SENDNO=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PSEUDONO=] [,RMTAPGT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
TYPE TYPE
CTX CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
CENTREX group.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX intercom number.
The CXDN for intercom - calls is created and corresponded to a
directory number of the subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 3+
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the common service group.
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the default language.
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL LANGUAGE 1
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
PWBASIC PASSWORD BASIC
This parameter specifies the initial password for the
common service group.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
PWMINLN PASSWORD MINIMUM LENGTH
This parameter specifies the minimum length of the password.
Default: 4
PWEXP PASSWORD EXPIRATION DAY
This parameter specifies the expiration days of the password.
(the password will expire in xxx days)
Default: 30
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features of the common service group.
ACTBDTA ACT B-PARTY DIAL THROUGH ATT.
ACTENABL ACT ENABLE BASIC ATTENDANT
ACTFDTA ACT FORCE ATT. ANSW. DTA CALL
ACTGMB ACTIVATE GROUP MAKE BUSY
ACTNS ACTIVATE NIGHT SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 4+
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTPCPER PERSONAL CALLTYPE PERFORM ACT
ACTPPER PERSONAL PERFORM ACT
ACTRMTAP ACTIVATE REMOTE APPLICATION
Activates network wide routing and monitoring
functions with an application that is located
on a remote platform in the network.
Prerequisites:
- This feature can only be set if the feature
RMTAP is set, as well.
ACTSCPER SYSTEM CALLTYPE PERFORM ACT
BARGE BARGE IN
CDSPROG CDS PROGRAMS ALLOWED
CENTSAS CENTRAL SUPPORT APPL. SERVER
Makes the support application server of this
common service group associated to a central
support application server.
This means that another common service group in
the network with the feature RMTAP can define
the CSGLAC/CSGDN of this group as address of
the remote application (RMTAPGT).
Incompatibilities:
- RMTAP
DINUMCAL DISPLAY NUMBER WAITING CALL
FLOGOFF FORCE LOGOFF
MANUACC MANUAL ACCEPTANCE MODE
MLPPHUNT MLPP HUNTING
NOFORCE NO FORCE
PROP00 PROPERTY 0
PROP01 PROPERTY 1
PROP02 PROPERTY 2
PROP03 PROPERTY 3
PROP04 PROPERTY 4
PROP05 PROPERTY 5
PROP06 PROPERTY 6
PROP07 PROPERTY 7
PROP08 PROPERTY 8
PROP09 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
PROP12 PROPERTY 12
PROP13 PROPERTY 13
PROP14 PROPERTY 14
PROP15 PROPERTY 15
PRVCSGRP PROVIDING COMMON SERVICE GROUP
Declares that an application that is located on a
remote platform in the network exists for routing
and monitoring purposes of this common service
group.
Notes:
- This feature is prerequisite for feature
activation ACTRMTAP.
Prerequisites:
- The parameter RMTAPGT has to be entered with
the same MML command.
SOREPCON SUPPRESS OP. REP. ON CONSOLE
SOREPOMT SUPRESS OP. REP. ON OMT
HUNT HUNTING
This parameter specifies the hunting procedure.
CIR CIRCULAR HUNTING
SEQ SEQUENTIAL HUNTING
UNI UNIFORM HUNTING
Default: UNI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 5+
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 1
a-b
a: DIVERSION
In case of USECSGRP the diversion number is
the CENTREX group number of the destination
CENTREX group within the CENTREX complex.
USELFCD USE OF SHARED LFCD NUMBER
TIMVAL TIME VALUE
This parameter specifies the timer and timer values.
Notes:
- In case of a CENTREX common service group only PCTIMER,
ACTIMER and ACOTIMER are valid inputs.
- In case of an ADMOSS common service group all TIMVAL
parameters are valid, except ACOTIMER.
a-b
a: TIME
ACOTIMER ATTENDANT CAMP ON TIMER
ACTIMER ACCEPTANCE TIME INTERVAL
PCTIMER POST CALL TIME INTERVAL
b: TIME VALUE=
LIMVAL LIMIT VALUE
This parameter specifies the limit and the limit values.
a-b
a: LIMIT
ACLIMIT ACCEPTANCE LIMIT
PCPER PERSONAL CALLTYPE PERF. LIMIT
SUPLOGON SUPERVISOR LOGON LIMIT
b: LIMIT VALUE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 6+
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FRWDINC FORWARD INTERCEPTS LINKAGE
This parameter specifies the possibile forward intercept links
of this common service group.
ACTFWINC ACTIVATED FORWARD INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the activated forward intercept
RESLIM RESOURCE LIMIT
This parameter specifies the maximum number of resources which may used
in this common service group depending on the type of resource.
a-b
a: RESOURCE TYPE
CDS CALL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Maximum number of task groups for this common
service group.
CTYPE CALLTYPE
Maximum number of calltypes for this common
service group.
b: MAXIMUM VALUE=
Notes:
valid Range Default
------------ -------
- range for CDS : 0 - 4095 10
- range for BCHDL CDS : 1 1
- range for ADMOSS CTYPE: 0 - 4095 255
- range for CTX CTYPE: 0 - 4095 0
- range for BCHDL CTYPE: 1 1
SENDNO SENDNUMBER
This parameter specifies which calling party number should be sent by
operator outgoing calls.
a[-b]
a: SENDNUMBER A TYPE
AGENTNO AGENT NUMBER
Agent number should be sent by operator outgoing
calls.
CSGNO COMMON SERVICE GROUP NUMBER
Common service group number should be sent by
NONE NONE
None number should be sent by operator outgoing
calls.
PSEUDONO PSEUDONUMBER
Pseudo number should be sent by operator outgoing
calls.
b: SENDNUMBER B TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 7+
CR CSGRP
CRCSGCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[NONE ] NONE
calls.
This parameter specifies the Pseudo number value for the SENDNO
parameter if required.
RMTAPGT REM. APPLICATION GLOBAL TITLE
This parameter specifies the Global Title of the remote application.
If a central Support Application Server is used this parameter must
be supplied with CSGLAC/CSGDN of the common service group with
the associated central support application server.
The SS7-database, the global title digit tree and the global title
must have been created.
If the GT digit tree exists in international format the country code
must be prefixed.
Notes:
- The parameter is only allowed, when the feature RMTAP is set.
Notes:
- Up to 19 digits may be evaluated
(including up to 3 discrimination digits.
- The digits 20 to 24 are for future use.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CSGRP- 8-
DISP CSGRP
CSGDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command displays one or more common service groups for CENTREX or OSS.
<job number>.
1. DISP CSGRP - CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DISP CSGRP - CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
3. DISP CSGRP - TYPE TYPE
1. Input format
COMMON SERVICE GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER
[ [
[ DISP CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSGRP- 1+
DISP CSGRP
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CENTREX GROUP
[ [
[ DISP CSGRP : CXGRP= [,DIV=] [,FEA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies an existing CENTREX group.
a-b
a: DIVERSION
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSGRP- 2+
DISP CSGRP
TYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TYPE
[ [
[ DISP CSGRP : TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
CTX CENTREX
CTXCPLX CENTREX COMPLEX CSGRP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSGRP- 3-
MOD CSGRP
MOCSGCPX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY COMMON SERVICE GROUP DATA
This command modifies a common service group for CENTREX or ADMOSS.
1. MOD CSGRP - MOCSGCPX MODIFY CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
2. MOD CSGRP - MODCSGCX MODIFY CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
3. MOD CSGRP - MODCSGOS MODIFY ADMOSS COMMON SERVICE GROUP
1. Input format
MODIFY CTXCPLX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= <,CHSITE=> ,DIV= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
a-b
a: DIVERSION
In case of USECSGRP the diversion number is the
CENTREX group number of the destination CENTREX
group within the CENTREX complex.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 1+
MOD CSGRP
MOCSGCPX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 2+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY CENTREX COMMON SERVICE GROUP
[ [
[ MOD CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,NAME=] [,LANG=] [,PWBASIC=] [
[ [
[ [,PWMINLN=] [,PWEXP=] [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] [,HUNT=] [
[ [
[ [,CHSITE=] [,DIV=] [,CDIV=] [,TIMVAL=] [,LIMVAL=] [
[ [
[ [,FRWDINC=] [,CFRWDINC=] [,ACTFWINC=] [,CANFWINC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,RESLIM=] [,SENDNO=] [,PSEUDONO=] [,RMTAPGT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
NAME NAME
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 3+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
Prerequisites:
BARGE BARGE IN
Incompatibilities:
- RMTAP
NOFORCE NO FORCE
PROP00 PROPERTY 0
PROP01 PROPERTY 1
PROP02 PROPERTY 2
PROP03 PROPERTY 3
PROP04 PROPERTY 4
PROP05 PROPERTY 5
PROP06 PROPERTY 6
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 4+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP07 PROPERTY 7
PROP08 PROPERTY 8
PROP09 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
PROP12 PROPERTY 12
PROP13 PROPERTY 13
PROP14 PROPERTY 14
PROP15 PROPERTY 15
group.
Notes:
Prerequisites:
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features for deactivation of the
Deactivates network wide routing and monitoring
BARGE BARGE IN
Deactivates the support application server
association of this common service group to a
central support application server.
PROP00 PROPERTY 0
PROP01 PROPERTY 1
PROP02 PROPERTY 2
PROP03 PROPERTY 3
PROP04 PROPERTY 4
PROP05 PROPERTY 5
PROP06 PROPERTY 6
PROP07 PROPERTY 7
PROP08 PROPERTY 8
PROP09 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
PROP12 PROPERTY 12
PROP13 PROPERTY 13
PROP14 PROPERTY 14
PROP15 PROPERTY 15
Deactivates that an application that is located on
a remote platform in the network exists for
routing and monitoring purposes of this common
service group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 5+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- The prerequisite for cancellation the feature
RMTAP is the cancellation of the ACTRMTAP
feature.
- With cancellation of feature RMTAP the
parameter RMTAPGT will be deleted
automatically.
HUNT HUNTING
UNI UNIFORM HUNTING
a-b
a: DIVERSION
In case of USECSGRP the diversion number is the
CENTREX group number of the destination CENTREX
group within the CENTREX complex.
CDIV CANCEL DIVERSION
This parameter specifies the diversion features to be cancelled.
TIMVAL TIME VALUE
Notes:
a-b
a: TIME
ACOTIMER ATTENDANT CAMP ON TIMER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 6+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TIME VALUE=
LIMVAL LIMIT VALUE
a-b
a: LIMIT
ACLIMIT ACCEPTANCE LIMIT
b: LIMIT VALUE=
CFRWDINC CAN FORWARD INTERCEPTS LINKAGE
This parameter specifies the release of possibile forward intercept
links of this common service group.
CANFWINC DEACTIVATED FORWARD INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the deactivated forward intercept
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 7+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: RESOURCE TYPE
service group.
CTYPE CALLTYPE
service group.
Default: CDS
b: MAXIMUM VALUE=
Notes:
valid Range Default
----------- -------
- range for CDS : 0 - 4095 10
SENDNO SENDNUMBER
a[-b]
calls.
CSGNO COMMON SERVICE GROUP NUMBER
Common service group number should be sent by
NONE NONE
calls.
calls.
[NONE ] NONE
calls.
must be prefixed.
Notes:
- The parameter will be deleted automatically with cancellation of
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 8+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
feature RMTAP.
Notes:
(including up to 3 discrimination digits).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 9+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY ADMOSS COMMON SERVICE GROUP
[ [
[ MOD CSGRP : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,NAME=] [,LANG=] [,PWBASIC=] [
[ [
[ [,PWMINLN=] [,PWEXP=] [,HUNT=] [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] [
[ [
[ [,TIMVAL=] [,LIMVAL=] [,RESLIM=] [,FRWDINC=] [
[ [
[ [,CFRWDINC=] [,ACTFWINC=] [,CANFWINC=] [,SENDNO=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PSEUDONO=] [,RMTAPGT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
NAME NAME
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 10+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
HUNT HUNTING
UNI UNIFORM HUNTING
FEA FEATURE
Prerequisites:
Incompatibilities:
- RMTAP
NOFORCE NO FORCE
PROP00 PROPERTY 0
PROP01 PROPERTY 1
PROP02 PROPERTY 2
PROP03 PROPERTY 3
PROP04 PROPERTY 4
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 11+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP05 PROPERTY 5
PROP06 PROPERTY 6
PROP07 PROPERTY 7
PROP08 PROPERTY 8
PROP09 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
PROP12 PROPERTY 12
PROP13 PROPERTY 13
PROP14 PROPERTY 14
PROP15 PROPERTY 15
group.
Notes:
Prerequisites:
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features for deactivation of the
Deactivates network wide routing and monitoring
Deactivates the support application server
association of this common service group to a
central support application server.
PROP00 PROPERTY 0
PROP01 PROPERTY 1
PROP02 PROPERTY 2
PROP03 PROPERTY 3
PROP04 PROPERTY 4
PROP05 PROPERTY 5
PROP06 PROPERTY 6
PROP07 PROPERTY 7
PROP08 PROPERTY 8
PROP09 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
PROP12 PROPERTY 12
PROP13 PROPERTY 13
PROP14 PROPERTY 14
PROP15 PROPERTY 15
Deactivates that an application that is located on
a remote platform in the network exists for
routing and monitoring purposes of this common
service group.
Notes:
- The prerequisite for cancellation the feature
RMTAP is the cancellation of the ACTRMTAP
feature.
- With cancellation of feature RMTAP the
parameter RMTAPGT will be deleted
automatically.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 12+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TIMVAL TIME VALUE
Notes:
a-b
a: TIME
b: TIME VALUE=
LIMVAL LIMIT VALUE
a-b
a: LIMIT
b: LIMIT VALUE=
a-b
a: RESOURCE TYPE
service group.
CTYPE CALLTYPE
service group.
Default: CDS
b: MAXIMUM VALUE=
Notes:
valid Range Default
----------- -------
- range for CDS : 0 - 4095 10
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 13+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CFRWDINC CAN FORWARD INTERCEPTS LINKAGE
This parameter specifies the release of possibile forward intercept
links of this common service group.
CANFWINC DEACTIVATED FORWARD INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the deactivated forward intercept
SENDNO SENDNUMBER
a-b
calls.
NONE NONE
calls.
calls.
calls.
NONE NONE
calls.
calls.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 14+
MOD CSGRP
MODCSGOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
must be prefixed.
Notes:
- The parameter will be deleted automatically with cancellation of
feature RMTAP.
Notes:
(including up to 3 discrimination digits).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CSGRP- 15-
CAN CSSUB
CANCSSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA
This command cancels an existing common service subscriber or
modifies the data of an existing common service subscriber.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if the common service subscriber
is related to a secured CENTREX business group BGID for
which the operator has no administration permission.
- If at least one value of traffic restriction classes for
a subscriber exist, the OSS common service subscriber
feature value restriction for outgoing calls must be not
canceled.
1. CAN CSSUB - CANCSSUB CANCEL CS-SUBSCRIBER
2. CAN CSSUB - MODCXATN MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
3. CAN CSSUB - MODCXBAS MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
4. CAN CSSUB - MODCXSUP MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE SUPER
5. CAN CSSUB - MODMAINT MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE MAINT
6. CAN CSSUB - MODOPR MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE OPR
7. CAN CSSUB - MODOSCHI MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE CHIEF
8. CAN CSSUB - MODOSSUP MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE SUPER
9. CAN CSSUB - MODVOPR MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE VOPR
1. Input format
CANCEL CS-SUBSCRIBER
This input format is used to cancel an existing
common service subscriber.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of an existing
common service subscriber. Input is mandatory for an exchange
with a multiple directory number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of an
existing common service subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 1+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
This input format is used to modify the data of an existing
common service subscriber with TYPE=ATN.
[ [
[ CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features.
ACTPCPER ACT.PERS.CALL TYPE PERFORMANCE
AEAACT ACCESS TO EXT.APPLICATION ACT.
BCHDL B-CHANNEL DATALINK
CHCXGRPD CHANGE CTX GROUP DATA AUTH.
CHCXSUBD CHANGE CTX SUBSCR. DATA AUTH.
CXMOD CTX MODIFICATION AUTHORIZATION
CXPERAUT CENTREX PERFORMANCE AUTH.
DICXGRPD DISPLAY CTX GROUP DATA AUTH.
DICXSUBD DISPLAY CTX SUBSCR. DATA AUTH.
DINUMCAL DISPLAY NUMBER OF CALLS AUTH.
DSBADM1 DSB ADMINISTRATION 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 2+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GMBACT GROUP MAKE BUSY ACT. AUTH.
MDRACT MSG DETAIL RECORDING ACT.AUTH.
MDRGACT MDR REPORT GENERATION ACT.
MDRMACT MDR MODIFICATION ACTIVATION
NSACT NIGHT SERVICE ACT. AUTH.
PCPERACT PERS. CALL TYPE PERF. ACT.
PDMACT PHONE DIRECTORY MAINT.ACT.
PFAACT PROTECT FILE ACCESS ACTIVATION
PPERACT PERSONAL PERFORMANCE ACT.
PRVCXMOD PROVIDE CTX GROUP MODIFICATION
RESETPW RESET PASSWORD
SASIW SUPPORT APPL. INTERWORKING
SCPERACT SYSTEM CALL TYPE PERF. ACT.
SWPCXSUB SWAP TWO CTX SUBSCRIBER AUTH.
TRAFACT TRAFFIC ACTIVATION
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the existing task groups,
that the common service subscriber can handle.
Up to 16 task groups can be linked with &.
DACTTGRP DEACTIVATED TASK GROUP
that the common service subscriber can not handle.
PTASKGRP PRIORITY TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies in which sequence the common
service subscriber processes the assigned priority
task group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 3+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
a: FIRST PRIORITY TASK GROUP=
b: SECOND PRIORITY TASK GROUP=
c: THIRD PRIORITY TASK GROUP=
RCTYP RESTRICTED CALL TYPE OSS
This parameter specifies which OSS call types are restricted.
LANG LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the common service
subscriber language.
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 4+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
common service subscriber with TYPE=BATN.
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 5+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 6+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE SUPER
CENTREX common service subscriber with TYPE=SUPER.
[ [
[ [
[ [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] [,SUPGRPAD=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUPGRPMO=] [,SUPGRPPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
ADMINAUT ADMINISTRATION AUTHORIZATION
ALERTAUT ALERT AUTHORIZATION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 7+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PERAUT PERFORMANCE AUTHORIZATION
RSTOGCA RESTR. FOR OUTGOING CALLS
RSTSUBC RESTR.SETTING UP BOOKING CALLS
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 8+
CAN CSSUB
MODCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
SUPGRPAD SUPERV. GROUPS FOR ADMINISTR.
This parameter specifies assigned supervisor groups
for administration.
SUPGRPMO SUPERV. GROUPS FOR MONITORING
for monitoring.
SUPGRPPE SUPERV. GROUPS FOR PERFORMANCE
for performance.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 9+
CAN CSSUB
MODMAINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE MAINT
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,FEA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 10+
CAN CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE OPR
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 11+
CAN CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 12+
CAN CSSUB
MODOSCHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE CHIEF
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= ,FEA= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 13+
CAN CSSUB
MODOSCHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 14+
CAN CSSUB
MODOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE SUPER
OSS common service subscriber with TYPE=SUPER.
[ [
[ [
[ [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] [,SUPGRPAD=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUPGRPMO=] [,SUPGRPPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 15+
CAN CSSUB
MODOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 16+
CAN CSSUB
MODOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
for administration.
for monitoring.
for performance.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 17+
CAN CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
MOD CSSUB OSS TYPE VOPR
[ [
[ CAN CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
task group.
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 18+
CAN CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CSSUB- 19-
DISP CSSUB
DCSCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA
This command displays common service subscriber
data.
- A specified common service subscriber can be
displayed.
- All common service subscribers of a common service
group (ADMOSS) can be displayed.
group (ADMOSS), which have the input selection criteria.
group (CENTREX) can be displayed.
- All common service subscribers of a CENTREX group
can be displayed.
<job number>.
1. DISP CSSUB - DCSCSGRP DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CSGRP
2. DISP CSSUB - DCSCXGRP DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CXGRP
3. DISP CSSUB - DCSSUB DISPLAY SPECIFIED CSSUB
4. DISP CSSUB - DSCCSGRP DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CSGRP
5. DISP CSSUB - DSCCXGRP DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CXGRP
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CSGRP
This input format is used to display parts of common
service subscriber data for all common service subscriber
of a common service group.
[ [
[ DISP CSSUB : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the local area code of
an existing common service group.
CSGDN COMMON SERVIVE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 1+
DISP CSSUB
DCSCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY ALL CSSUB OF A CXGRP
of a CENTREX group.
[ [
[ DISP CSSUB : CXGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 2+
DISP CSSUB
DCSSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY SPECIFIED CSSUB
This input format is used to display the common service
subscriber data for a common service subscriber.
[ [
[ DISP CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of an
existing common service subscriber. Input is mandatory
for an exchange with a multiple directory number
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number
of an existing common service subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 3+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CSGRP
This input format is used to display parts of common service
subscriber data for all common service subscriber of a common
service group, which have the input selection parameter.
[ [
[ DISP CSSUB : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,TYPE=] [,ID=] [,FEA=] [
[ [
[ [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [
[ [
[ [,LANG=] [,SUPGRP=] [,SUPGRPAD=] [,SUPGRPMO=] [
[ [
[ [,SUPGRPPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGDN COMMON SERVIVE GROUP DN
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the TYPE of common service
subscriber.
ATN ATTENDANT
BATN BASIC ATTENDANT
SUPER SUPERVISOR
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies a common service subscriber
identification.
FEA FEATURE
AEAACT ACCESS TO EXT.APPLICATION.ACT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 4+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUTOOPR AUTOMATED OPERATOR
CXPERAUT SUPPORT APPL. INTERWORKING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 5+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies, in which sequence the common
service subscriber processes the assigned priority task group.
a[-b[-c]]
RCTYP RESTRICTED CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies which call types are
restricted processed.
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 6+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
SUPGRP SUPERVISOR GROUP
for administration.
for monitoring.
for performance.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 7+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISPL. SELECTED CSSUB OF CXGRP
of a CENTREX group, which have the input selection parameter.
[ [
[ DISP CSSUB : CXGRP= [,TYPE=] [,ID=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [
[ [
[ [,DACTTGRP=] [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] [
[ [
[ [,SUPGRP=] [,SUPGRPAD=] [,SUPGRPMO=] [,SUPGRPPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
subscriber.
ATN ATTENDANT
SUPER SUPERVISOR
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
FEA FEATURE
CXPERAUT SUPPORT APPL. INTERWORKING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 8+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 9+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 10+
DISP CSSUB
DSCCXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for administration.
for monitoring.
for performance.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CSSUB- 11-
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER DATA
This command has to perform following functions:
- Create a new common service subscriber.
- Modification of the data of an existing
Notes:
- With parameter SUPGRPAD, SUPGRPMO or SUPGRPPE
it is possible to assign the authorization for the own and
three other supervisor groups. Up to 4 supervisor groups
can be assigned to a common service subscriber of
TYPE=SUPER. Without own SUPGRP only 3 other
supervisor groups can be assigned. On creation a common
service subscriber of TYPE=SUPER will get all
SUPGRPAD, SUPGRPMO or SUPGRPPE authorizations
for his own SUPGRP (initial value).
- The command is rejected if the common service subscriber
is related to a secured CENTREX business group BGID for
which the operator has no administration permission.
- Following subscriber features are incompatible for an ADMOSS
common service subscriber:
1) All charging values except value no charge for A -
subscriber.
2) All classes of service except the values call hold
for enquiry, three - way calling, call transfer,
call transfer A - side, call waiting activation,
call line identification presented, calling line
identification restriction, calling line identification
restriction ignored, large conference, connected line
identification restriction, catastrophe immunity 1,
and catastrophe immunity 2.
3) All traffic restrictions except the value subscriber
requested original call susp.
- If at least one value of traffic restriction classes for
a subscriber exist, the ADMOSS common service subscriber
feature value restriction for outgoing calls must be
entered.
Prerequisites:
- A common service subscriber can only be entered,
if the common service group he shall be assigned
to already exists.
- A common service subscriber can only be entered if
a subscriber with the same directory number and, if
necessary, with the same local area code already
exists.
- An ISDN common service subscriber can only be entered
if at least one voice service is assigned to the designated
subscriber.
- Following classes of service of an subscriber must
exist, if an ADMOSS common service subscriber shall
be created:
1) directory number specific:
inhibit trunk offering,
functional protocol,
stimulus protocol
2) service specific:
call hold for enquiry,
three - way calling,
call transfer,
call transfer A - side,
call waiting activation,
call line identification presented,
calling line identification restriction,
calling line identification restriction ignored,
large conference
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=ATN, BATN can
only be entered if a CENTREX subscriber with the same
directory number and, if necessary, with the same
local area code already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=BATN can only
be entered if a CENTREX subscriber with an equipment
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 1+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
number already exist.
be entered if layer 1 is active for this subscriber.
be entered if a CENTREX subscriber with the same
directory number and, if necessary, with the same
local area code already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=BATN (digital)
can only be entered if a subscriber with the category
IBA already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=BATN (analog)
can only be entered if a subscriber with the category
MS already exists.
- A common service subscriber of TYPE=ATN can only
log in at consoles of his own CENTREX group which are
assigned to a DLU serving the local area code of the
1. ENTR CSSUB - ENTCXATN ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
2. ENTR CSSUB - ENTCXBAS ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
3. ENTR CSSUB - ENTCXSUP ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE SUPER
4. ENTR CSSUB - ENTOSSUP ENTER CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE SUPER
5. ENTR CSSUB - MODCXATN MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
6. ENTR CSSUB - MODCXBAS MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
7. ENTR CSSUB - MODCXSUP MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE SUPER
8. ENTR CSSUB - MODMAINT MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE MAINT
9. ENTR CSSUB - MODOPR MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE OPR
10. ENTR CSSUB - MODOSCHI MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE CHIEF
11. ENTR CSSUB - MODOSSUP MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE SUPER
12. ENTR CSSUB - MODRES MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE RES
13. ENTR CSSUB - MODVOPR MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE VOPR
1. Input format
ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
This input format is used to assign an ATN
of common service group, or create a common
service subscriber of TYPE=ATN.
[ [
[ ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TYPE= ,ID= [
[ [
[ [,NAME=] [,SEQNO=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SUPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
subscriber. Input is mandatory for an exchange with a multiple
directory number volume.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 2+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
existing subscriber.
an existing common service group. This parameter is only
used to create a new common service subscriber.
TYPE TYPE
subscriber. This parameter is only used to create a
new common service subscriber.
ATN ATTENDANT
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
SEQNO SEQUENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the sequence number for
ATN or BATN.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 3+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 4+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
A list of 1 to 3 task groups in the order they are
to be searched starting with the task group to be
searched first and seperated by "-".
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 5+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
This parameter specifies the supervisor group.
One supervisory group contains at most 256 common
service subscribers.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 6+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
This input format is used to assign a BATN
of common service group, or create a common
service subscriber of TYPE=BATN.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SUPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 7+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 8+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 9+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ENTER CSSUB CENTREX TYPE SUPER
This input format is used to assign an CENTREX SUPER
of common service group, or create a CENTREX common
service subscriber of TYPE=SUPER.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SUPGRP= [,SUPGRPAD=] [,SUPGRPMO=] [,SUPGRPPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
SUPER SUPERVISOR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 10+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 11+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 12+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
for administration.
for monitoring.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 13+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for performance.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 14+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ENTER CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE SUPER
This input format is used to assign an ADMOSS SUPER
of common service group, or create an ADMOSS common service
subscriber of TYPE=SUPER.
[ [
[ [
[ [,NAME=] [,FEA=] [,TASKGRP=] [,DACTTGRP=] [
[ [
[ [,PTASKGRP=] [,RCTYP=] [,LANG=] ,SUPGRP= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUPGRPAD=] [,SUPGRPMO=] [,SUPGRPPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
TYPE TYPE
SUPER SUPERVISOR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 15+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 16+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 17+
ENTR CSSUB
ENTOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
for administration.
for monitoring.
for performance.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 18+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE ATN
of an existing common service subscriber
with TYPE=ATN.
[ [
[ ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,SEQNO=] [,FEA=] [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,LANG=] [,SUPGRP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 19+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 20+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 21+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXATN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 22+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE BATN
of an existing common service subscriber
with TYPE=BATN.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
ATN or BATN.
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 23+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 24+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXBAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 25+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
MOD CSSUB CENTREX TYPE SUPER
of an existing CENTREX common service subscriber
with TYPE=SUPER.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUPGRPPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
ATN or BATN.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 26+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 27+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 28+
ENTR CSSUB
MODCXSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
for administration.
for monitoring.
for performance.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 29+
ENTR CSSUB
MODMAINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE MAINT
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,FEA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 30+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE OPR
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 31+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 32+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 33+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOSCHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE CHIEF
[ [
[ ; [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 34+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOSCHI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 35+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE SUPER
of an existing ADMOSS common service subscriber
with TYPE=SUPER.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUPGRPPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
FEA FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 36+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 37+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 38+
ENTR CSSUB
MODOSSUP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for administration.
for monitoring.
for performance.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 39+
ENTR CSSUB
MODRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
12. Input format
MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE RES
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 40+
ENTR CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
13. Input format
MOD CSSUB ADMOSS TYPE VOPR
[ [
[ ENTR CSSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ID=] [,NAME=] [,TASKGRP=] [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUPGRP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
ID IDENTIFICATION
identification.
NAME NAME
name.
.,,,-,:,;,+,*,#,!,,$,%,&,/,(,),=,?,\
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 41+
ENTR CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
LANG LANGUAGE
ENGLSH ENGLISH
FRENCH FRENCH
GERMAN GERMAN
LOCAL1 LOCAL
LOCAL2 LOCAL
LOCAL3 LOCAL
PROP1 PROPERTY
PROP2 PROPERTY
PROP3 PROPERTY
PROP4 PROPERTY
PROP5 PROPERTY
PROP6 PROPERTY
RUSSIN RUSSIAN
SPANSH SPANISH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 42+
ENTR CSSUB
MODVOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CSSUB- 43-
START CSWD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START CSWD PROCESSES
This command starts the control and switching device processes which handle the
configuration of peripheral units.
Start of functions for activating the call processing(classic) periphery (LTG,
MB, SN, DLU) and start of CALLP.
Notes:
This command is only allowed during the installation phase (installation
recovery).
This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into service.
Input format
[ [
[ START CSWD ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START CSWD- 1-
DISP CTRLTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL CONTROL TIME
This command displays the currently valid call control time.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CTRLTIME ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CTRLTIME- 1-
ENTR CTRLTIME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL CONTROL TIME
This command enters the duration of call control time.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CTRLTIME : TIME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the control time.
a[-b]
a: HOURS=
b: MINUTES=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CTRLTIME- 1-
TEST CTYPE
EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CIRCUIT TYPE
This command tests one type of circuit.
During test job execution if more than one test object was specified,
semipermanent test job, test results are periodically ( every 15 min )
stored on temporary disk files.
These files are identified by the current job number, two letters
(for the file type) and a sequence number of two digits (01 to 99)
for example : TE.ATE0018.TS01.
The following file types are used :
TS (Test sequence) : Last test object.
FA : Faulty/Ambiguous results.
NA : Not accessible test objects.
BS : Final busy results.
RD : Responder data ("Faulty Responders").
At the end of test job execution test results along with statistics
are outputed and existing temporary disk files deleted.
To look at test results kept in temporary disk files the operator must
issue the MML command DISP TSTRES with the job number of the test
job.
To look at test results kept in archive files the operator must issue
the MML command SEL AENTRY with the job number of the test job.
<job number>.
This command starts a job with breakpoints. After a breakpoint the job can be
continued with CONT JOB.
1. TEST CTYPE - EXCH
2. TEST CTYPE - LTG
1. Input format
This input format is valid for testing all circuits of a type in an exchange.
[ [
[ TEST CTYPE : CTYPE= ,LTG= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CTYPE CIRCUIT TYPES
This parameter specifies the circuit types.
ATCL ACCESS TEST CIRCUIT F SUB LINE
ATE ATE
ATM ATE TEST MEASUREMENT
ETEAE END TO END ANSWER EQUIPMENT
MULTIPLE MULTIPLE
SLCABMO SLCA B WIRE MONITORING
SLCACB SLCA: COINBOX
SLCACBR SLCA COINBOX REVERSAL
SLCACWA SLCA: C WIRE
SLCACWM SLCA: C WIRE METER PULSE
SLCACWS C WIRE SUPERVISION
SLCAECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
SLCAMMO SLCA METERING MONITORING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CTYPE- 1+
TEST CTYPE
EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SLCAM12 SLCAM12
SLCAM12B SLCAM12B
SLCAM16 SLCA: MP16KHZ
SLCAM50 SLCA: MP50HZ
SLCAOS SLCA: ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLCAR16 METER PULSE 16KHZ REVERS.
SLCASEC SLCA: SELECTIVE CONNECTION
TCB200F TC PULSE BOTHWAY F2
TCB200P TC PULSE BOTHWAY DIR INW DIAL
TCB601C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY 1
TCB601CB TC CARRIER BOTHWAY BSMT
TCB800C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY
TCB800CA TC RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
TCI300N TC N2 INCOMING
TCI301N TC N2 INCOMING 2
TCI304P TCI304P
TCI601C TC CARRIER INCOMING 1
TCI702P TC PULSE INCOMING 4 WIRE
TCI800C TC INC CARRIER
TCO300N TC N2 OUTGOING
TCO301N TC N2 OUTGOING 1
TCO304P TCO304P
TCO305P TCO305P
TCO601C TC CARRIER OUTGOING 1
TCO702P TC PULSE OUTGOING 4 WIRE
TCO800C TC OUTG-CARRIER
TEMLE ACCESS CIRCUIT TEMLE
TETRL TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL
TETRLN TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL NBL
TLFAOG TRANSLATION FUNCTION A OUTG.
TOG TONE GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the LTG number.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
Corresponds to <TSG no>
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the test variant of the circuit test for
short testing with the automatic test equipment.
The tests that are omitted for the corresponding type of short testing
are marked in the test table.
The test table of the object is country-specific and is contained in
the GP APS microfiche, load type ATE of LTG, module TTC.
S1 SHORT TEST 1
Short test of the RAC TCB800C with
annoucement equipment switched off,
otherwise the normal circuit test is carried out.
S2 SHORT TEST 2
For a single test job a TCB601C, TCO702P or
TCB800C which is already connected to a
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CTYPE- 2+
TEST CTYPE
EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
corresponding circuit and created can, by entering
S2, be tested in the same way as a circuit
without a line if the line is isolated from the
test object at the MDF with a break plug.
S9 SHORT TEST 9
Manual test of TCB601C, TCI702P, TCO702P and
TCB800C: the a-/b-wires and the signal wires of
analog trunk circuits are accessed for the manual
test function by the additional input of the
optional parameter TTYPE=S9 and
STEP=5 and, if required, PERM for the test
job.
When step number 5 has been reached, the external
test equipment can be connected to the jacks on
the faceplate of the ATE module TEM:COP. By
pressing key STP an advance is made to step 8.
By pressing key MA the functions of the rotary
switches LT, FS and LR are taken over by the
ATE control.
This parameter specifies the schedule number which
determines the sequence of the tasks.
Before this parameter is entered, this number must be allocated
to a schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CTYPE- 3+
TEST CTYPE
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format is valid for testing all circuits of a type in an LTG.
[ [
[ TEST CTYPE : CTYPE= ,LTG= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] [,PERM=] [
[ [
[ [,STEP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CTYPE CIRCUIT TYPES
This parameter specifies the circuit types.
ATCL ACCESS TEST CIRCUIT F SUB LINE
ATE ATE
ATM ATE TEST MEASUREMENT
ETEAE END TO END ANSWER EQUIPMENT
MULTIPLE MULTIPLE
SLCABMO SLCA B WIRE MONITORING
SLCACB SLCA: COINBOX
SLCACBR SLCA COINBOX REVERSAL
SLCACWA SLCA: C WIRE
SLCACWM SLCA: C WIRE METER PULSE
SLCACWS C WIRE SUPERVISION
SLCAECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
SLCAMMO SLCA METERING MONITORING
SLCAM12 SLCAM12
SLCAM12B SLCAM12B
SLCAM16 SLCA: MP16KHZ
SLCAM50 SLCA: MP50HZ
SLCAOS SLCA: ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLCAR16 METER PULSE 16KHZ REVERS.
SLCASEC SLCA: SELECTIVE CONNECTION
TCB200F TC PULSE BOTHWAY F2
TCB200P TC PULSE BOTHWAY DIR INW DIAL
TCB601C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY 1
TCB601CB TC CARRIER BOTHWAY BSMT
TCB800C TC CARRIER BOTHWAY
TCB800CA TC RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
TCI300N TC N2 INCOMING
TCI304P TCI304P
TCI601C TC CARRIER INCOMING 1
TCI702P TC PULSE INCOMING 4 WIRE
TCI800C TC INC CARRIER
TCO300N TC N2 OUTGOING
TCO304P TCO304P
TCO305P TCO305P
TCO601C TC CARRIER OUTGOING 1
TCO702P TC PULSE OUTGOING 4 WIRE
TCO800C TC OUTG-CARRIER
TEMLE ACCESS CIRCUIT TEMLE
TETRL TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL
TETRLN TE TRANSMISSION LEVEL NBL
TLFAOG TRANSLATION FUNCTION A OUTG.
TOG TONE GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the LTG number.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CTYPE- 4+
TEST CTYPE
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: TSG NUMBER=
Corresponds to <TSG no>
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the test variant of the circuit test for
short testing with the automatic test equipment.
The tests that are omitted for the corresponding type of short testing
are marked in the test table.
The test table of the object is country-specific and is contained in
the GP APS microfiche, load type ATE of LTG, module TTC.
S1 SHORT TEST 1
Short test of the RAC TCB800C with
annoucement equipment switched off,
otherwise the normal circuit test is carried out.
S2 SHORT TEST 2
For a single test job a TCB601C, TCO702P or
TCB800C which is already connected to a
corresponding circuit and created can, by entering
S2, be tested in the same way as a circuit
without a line if the line is isolated from the
test object at the MDF with a break plug.
S9 SHORT TEST 9
Manual test of TCB601C, TCI702P, TCO702P and
TCB800C: the a-/b-wires and the signal wires of
analog trunk circuits are accessed for the manual
test function by the additional input of the
optional parameter TTYPE=S9 and
STEP=5 and, if required, PERM for the test
job.
When step number 5 has been reached, the external
test equipment can be connected to the jacks on
the faceplate of the ATE module TEM:COP. By
pressing key STP an advance is made to step 8.
By pressing key MA the functions of the rotary
switches LT, FS and LR are taken over by the
ATE control.
determines the sequence of the tasks.
Before this parameter is entered, this number must be allocated
to a schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED.
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test is to be done.
Circuit types that allow permanent test : ATE, MULTIPLE, ATM
and TOG.
N NO
NO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CTYPE- 5+
TEST CTYPE
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y YES
YES
Default: N
STEP STEP COMMAND
This parameter specifies the breakpoint for single test jobs.
The test steps that represent breakpoints are marked in the test table
with two leading zeros before the test step number.
The test table of the test object is country-specific.
Circuit types that allow breakpoint testing : ATE, MULTIPLE, ATM
and TOG.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST CTYPE- 6-
CAN CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP
This command cancels
- the existing membership of a subscriber/PBX in one closed user
group,
- the membership of one or several services in a closed user group,
- the traffic restriction within the closed user group for the
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- If the last closed user group of a subscriber/PBX or of a service
is canceled, then also the network authorizations and the prefe-
rential closed group are canceled.
- The command is rejected if the subscriber/PBX is related to a
secured CENTREX business group BGID for which the operator has
no administration permission (see command DISP CXSEC).
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= ,CUGID= [,SERV=] [,CUGBLK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or
the PBX.
CUGID CUG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the closed user group identification, which
is specific per subscriber/PBX.
SERV SERVICE
This parameter specifies the services of the subscriber/PBX
for which the closed user group is to be canceled.
ANALOG ANALOG PART OF MIXED PBX
CMSPEECH CIR. MODE SPEECH BEARER SRV
CMUNRST CIR. M. 64KBIT/S UNR. BEA. SRV
CMAUDIO CIR. MODE 3.1KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
CMAUDI7K CIR. MODE 7KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CUG- 1+
CAN CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE SWITCHED BD-CHAN.
TEL3K TELEPHONY 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY 7KHZ
TTX64K TELETEXT 64KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEO TEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEO TELEPHONY
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICE GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICE GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICE GROUP
CUGBLK CUG BLOCKING
This parameter specifies a restriction on the communication with
other members within the same closed user group.
TERM TERM. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
ORIG ORIG. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CUG- 2-
DISP CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CLOSED USER GROUP DATA
This command displays closed user group data for
- a specified subscriber or PBX,
- all subscribers and PBX in a directory number interval,
- all subscribers and PBX of a specified local area code or
- all subscribers and PBX in the exchange.
A selection can be made on
- the closed user group identification or
- the interlock code or
- the interlock code and the data network identification code.
Notes:
- If desired, also the service dependant closed user group data of
ISDN-subscribers, ISDN- and mixed PBX can be displayed.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CUGID=[[ ; [
[ DISP CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ILC= [ [,DNIC=] [,FORMAT=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number or directory number
interval. The directory number or, if an interval is entered, the
directory number boundaries, must be numbers of a created directory
number interval. Only one interval can be entered.
ILC INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interlock code, which is the national
identification of the closed user group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CUG- 1+
DISP CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DNIC DATA NETWORK IDENTIFICAT. CODE
This parameter specifies the data network identification code, which
is the international identification of the closed user group.
This parameter specifies whether, for ISDN subscribers and ISDN or
mixed PBX, only the subscriber/PBX specific closed user group data are
displayed or additionally the service specific closed user group data.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, then only the subscriber/PBX specific
closed user group data are displayed.
CUG OUTPUT OF CUG DATA
Only subscriber/PBX specific closed user group
data are displayed.
ALL OUTPUT OF CUG AND SERVCUG DATA
Subscriber/PBX specific and service specific
closed group data are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CUG- 2-
ENTR CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP
This command
- assigns a subscriber (analog mainstation or ISDN) or PBX (analog,
mixed or ISDN) to a closed user group,
- enters data for the closed user group of a subscriber/PBX.
With the first assignment of a subscriber/PBX to a closed user group,
the closed user group is implicitly created in the public network.
A closed user group is identified by the international identi-
fication data network identification code DNIC and the national
identification interlock code ILC.
The different closed user groups of a subscriber/PBX are identified
by the closed user group identification CUGID.
A subscriber/PBX can be a member of 100 different closed user groups.
The services which a subscriber/PBX can use within the closed user
group can be entered. For a mixed PBX, the analog part must expli-
citly be administered with the parameter SERV=ANALOG.
ISDN1TR6 services can only be a member in one closed user group,
which will automatically be set as preferential closed user group for
the service.
With the assignment of the first closed user group to a service, the
protocol types for the service are adopted from the office data. The
office data can be determined with the command DISP CALLPOPT.
For an ISDN-DSS1 or analog subscriber/PBX the traffic restrictions
within the closed user group can be entered. The traffic within a
closed user group may be restricted either to only receiving calls or
to only originating calls within the specified closed user group.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if the subscriber/PBX is related to a
secured CENTREX business group BGID for which the operator has
no administration permission (see command DISP CXSEC).
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= ,CUGID= [,DNIC=] <,ILC= ,SERV= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CUGBLK=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
the PBX.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CUG- 1+
ENTR CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DNIC DATA NETWORK IDENTIFICAT. CODE
This parameter specifies the data network identification code, which is
the international identification of the closed user group.
ILC INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interlock code, which is the national
identification of the closed user group.
Notes:
- When entering a new closed user group, this parameter is
obligatory.
SERV SERVICE
This parameter specifies the existing services of the subscriber/PBX
for which the closed user group is to be entered.
ANALOG ANALOG PART OF MIXED PBX
CMSPEECH CIR. MODE SPEECH BEARER SRV
CMUNRST CIR. M. 64KBIT/S UNR. BEA. SRV
CMAUDIO CIR. MODE 3.1KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
CMAUDI7K CIR. MODE 7KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE SWITCHED BD-CHAN.
TEL3K TELEPHONY 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY 7KHZ
TTX64K TELETEXT 64KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEO TEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEO TELEPHONY
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICE GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICE GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICE GROUP
CUGBLK CUG BLOCKING
This parameter specifies a restriction on the communication with
other members within the same closed user group.
Notes:
- This parameter is only relevant for ISDN-DSS1 and analog
subscribers/PBX.
TERM TERM. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
ORIG ORIG. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CUG- 2-
MOD CUGAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CLOSED USER GROUP AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies closed user group data of a subscriber/PBX The closed user
group data that can be modified are
- the authorizations for the traffic to/from the public network,
- the preferential closed user group.
These closed user group data are valid if no service-specific data are assigned
with the command ENTR SERVCUG.
Notes:
- At least one of the parameters NETAUTH, CNETAUTH, PCUGID and CPCUGID
must be entered.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CUGAUTH : [LAC=] ,DN= [,NETAUTH=] [,CNETAUTH=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,PCUGID= [[ ; [
[ [,CPCUGID=[ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
the PBX.
NETAUTH NETWORK AUTHORIZATION
This parameter enters authorizations for the traffic to/from the
public network.
ICTRAF I/C TRAFFIC FROM PUBLIC NETW.
Incoming traffic from the public network
Notes:
- the incoming traffic is only relevant for
ISDN-DSS1 and analog subscribers/PBX.
OGTRREQ O/G TRAF. TO PUB. NET. ON REQ.
Outgoing traffic to the public network on
explicit request
CNETAUTH CANCEL NETWORK AUTHORIZATION
This parameter cancels existing authorizations for the traffic to/from
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CUGAUTH- 1+
MOD CUGAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the public network.
ICTRAF I/C TRAFFIC FROM PUBLIC NETW.
Incoming traffic from the public network
OGTRREQ O/G TRAF. TO PUB. NET. ON REQ.
Outgoing traffic to the public network on
explicit request
PCUGID PREFERENTIAL CUG IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter enters the preferential closed user group of the
subscriber/PBX.
CPCUGID CANCEL PREF. CUG IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter cancels the preferential closed user group of the
subscriber/PBX.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CUGAUTH- 2-
CAN CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA
This command cancels CENTREX Customer Access Treatment (CAT) features of
particular CAT codes.
If no CENTREX group is specified (parameter CXGRP), this cancelation is done
for the default definitions of CAT codes. The default definition of this CAT
code is valid for all CENTREX groups of the switch that have no individual
assignment.
If a CENTREX group is specified, the cancelation is done individually for CAT
codes of the CENTREX group. If all CAT features (parameter CATFEA) of a
CENTREX group specific CAT code are canceled, the default definition is valid
again.
The command removes the CAT features of
- one CAT code
- a list of up to 10 CAT codes
- a range of CAT codes
- a list of up to 10 CAT code ranges.
This command is rejected if the CENTREX group is related to a secured
CENTREX business group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration
In case the command affects more than one CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP
is not specified), it will be executed even if one or more CENTREX groups
are related to a BGID for which special operator permission
(command ENTR CXSEC) is necessary.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXCATFEA : [CXGRP=] ,CATCOD= ,CATFEA= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Leading zeroes may not be entered.
CATCOD CUSTOMER ACCESS TREATMENT CODE
This parameter specifies a number which identifies a set of Customer
Access Treatment features.
CATFEA CUSTOMER ACC. TREATM. FEATURES
This parameter specifies the Customer Access Treatment features.
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPM. LINE
LOCDIAL LOCATION DIALING
DCW DIAL CALL WAITING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXCATFEA- 1+
CAN CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICK UP
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICK UP
DTA DIAL THROUGH ATTENDANT
CACDIAL CARRIER ACCESS CODE DIALING
CPECPU CPELINE CALL PICKUP
PARK CALL PARK
SUBBI SUBSCRIBER BARGE IN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXCATFEA- 2-
DISP CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA
This command displays the Customer Access Treatment (CAT) features of particular
or all CAT codes.
If no CENTREX group is specified (parameter CXGRP), the display is done for
the default definitions of CAT codes.
If one, several or all CENTREX groups are specified, the display is done for the
CAT codes of the CENTREX groups. In the output mask, the CAT features assigned
by default and the ones assigned individually for a CENTREX group are listed
separately.
The CAT features assigned by default and the ones assigned individually for a
CENTREX group are listed separately.
For one or no CENTREX group specified, the CAT features of
- one CAT code
- a list of up to 10 CAT code ranges
- all CAT codes
can be displayed.
For several or all CENTREX groups specified, only the features of all CAT codes
are displayed (no value entered for CATCOD).
CAT codes without features will not be displayed. CENTREX groups are not
displayed in sequential order. CAT codes are displayed in sequential order.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CXCATFEA : [CXGRP=] [,CATCOD=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies one or several existing CENTREX groups.
Leading zeroes must not be entered.
This parameter specifies a number which identifies a set of Customer
Access Treatment features.
Input is allowed only if just one or no CENTREX group is specified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXCATFEA- 1-
ENTR CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX CAT FEATURE DATA
This command assigns CENTREX Customer Access Treatment (CAT) features to
particular CAT codes.
If no CENTREX group is specified (parameter CXGRP), the assignment is done for
the default definitions of CAT codes. The default definition of this CAT code is
valid for all CENTREX groups of the switch that have no individual assignment.
If a CENTREX group is specified, particular CAT codes of the CENTREX group may
be defined that overrule the default definitions.
The command assigns the CAT features to
- one CAT code
- a list of up to 10 CAT code ranges.
In case the command affects more than one CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP
is not specified), it will be executed even if one or more CENTREX groups
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CXCATFEA : [CXGRP=] ,CATCOD= ,CATFEA= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a CAT code which identifies a set of Customer
Access Treatment features. If this CAT code is assigned to a CENTREX
station (e.g. ENTR CXSUB, parameter CATCOD), it authorizes the
usage of the corresponding CAT features.
CATFEA CUSTOMER ACC. TREATM. FEATURES
This parameter specifies the Customer Access Treatment features, i.e.
authorizations that are activated by dialing an access code (created
with CR CXCPT, parameter TRATYP).
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPM. LINE
Customer Premise Equipment, i.e. specific customer
owned terminals such as paging units, may be
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXCATFEA- 1+
ENTR CXCATFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
accessed by dialing an access code.
A location, e.g. a PBX, CENTREX stations or
non-CENTREX subscribers, may be accessed by
dialing an access code, which may be followed by
further numbers. As an example, this allows access
to the internal dialing plan of a (remote) PBX.
Call waiting on a busy subscriber may be activated
for a single call by predialing an access code.
The busy subscriber has to reside within the same
business group or, if no BGID (parameter COSDAT)
is assigned, within the same CENTREX group.
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICK UP
In order to pick up a call to a ringing station
within the same CENTREX group an access code
followed by the intercom number of the ringing
station has to be dialed.
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICK UP
Calls to the night service number may be picked up
by the stations of the CENTREX group by dialing an
access code.
In order to reach a destination outside the
CENTREX group, an access code followed by the
public B-party number has to be dialed. The call
is first presented to the MAC attendant who has
to permit the call.
Notes:
- Stations with the restriction RSTORIGF assigned
(e.g. ENTR CXSUB, parameters COS or SUBBGCOS)
can not use this feature.
The carrier may be specified by predialing an
access code.
CPECPU CPELINE CALL PICK UP
Calls to customer premises equipment may be
picked up by dialing an access code.
PARK CALL PARK
An active call can be parked by dialling
an access code.
A station may barge into an established call
between two stations of the same business group
(BGID) by dialing an access code code followed
by the extension number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXCATFEA- 2-
CAN CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX CODE POINT
This command cancels a CENTREX code point in the CENTREX digit translator for
non intercom dialing sequences for a specified CENTREX group.
The command is rejected if the CXGRP is related to a secured CENTREX
business group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration
Notes:
- When cancelling the very last public network access code (TRATYP=PNASDT
or PNANDT) of a CENTREX group, all access codes with TRATYP=DTA and
all access codes USE-AR, ACT-CCIBI and ACT-CCIBU must previously
be cancelled.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number from 1 to 9999 which identifies the
corresponding CENTREX group.
CXCODE CENTREX FEATURE ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the previously assigned one to five digit
access code.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXCPT- 1-
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX CODE POINT
This command creates a CENTREX code point in the CENTREX digit translator for
non intercom dialing sequences for a specified CENTREX group.
The command is rejected if the CXGRP is related to a secured
CENTREX business group (BGID) for which the operator has no
1. CR CXCPT - CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
2. CR CXCPT - NORMAL NORMAL FEATURE ACCESS CODES
1. Input format
CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
This input format is used to create a CENTREX access code for Custom Calling
Features.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= ,TRATYP= ,FEA= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the corresponding CENTREX group.
Notes:
- No leading zeros are allowed for the value of this parameter.
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX group must have been previously created with the
CR CXGRP command.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX feature access code for the
Notes:
- The first digit may be either a hash sign (#), an asterisk (*),
or in the range 0-9. The second digit may also be a hash sign,
an asterisk or in the range 0-9, whereby the following restrictions
must be considered: If the second digit is an asterisk, the first
one must be an asterisk too. If the second digit is a hash sign and
the first one is a hash sign too, no further digits may follow.
If the second digit is a hash sign and the first one is an asterisk,
at least one digit in the range 0-9 must follow.
The remaining digits must be in the range 0-9 or as the very last
digit a pound sign for solving an ambiguity in the length of an
access code:
When an ambiguity exists in the length of an access code, the
pound sign must be input as the last digit for all but the largest
access code in the sequence.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 1+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of access required for the code
point.
CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
Indicates access for custom calling features.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX subscriber controled features.
Notes:
- This parameter will only be allowed if the TRATYP parameter has
been entered with value CCFEA, no other optional parameters will be
allowed.
- This parameter must be entered with both units.
- For access codes to usage of Abbreviated Dialing of type AB1COL0,
AB1COL1, AB2COL0, AB2COL1 and AB2COL2 the following rule
exists:
For ABxCOLy and x>y, the last n=x-y digits of the
access code must be in the range of 0 to 9.
- For the access code ACT-CCBS the length of code must not be
greater than 3.
- For the access code USE-ARNO the first digit of parameter
CXCODE must always be an asterisk (*).
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
Activates the feature identified by the second
unit of the parameter
ACTDAT ACTIVATE WITH/WITHOUT DATA
unit of the parameter with or without data
DACT DEACTIVATE
Deactivates the feature identified by the second
info unit of the parameter
DEL DELETE
Deletes the feature identified by the second info
DELDACT DELETE WITH DEACTIVATION
Deletes with deactivation the feature identified
by the second info unit of the parameter
ENTR ENTER
Enters the feature identified by the second info
ENTRACT ENTER WITH ACTIVATION
Enter with activation of the feature identified
REQALL REQUEST STATUS WITH DATA
Requests the status and/or data of the feature
identified by the second info unit of the
parameter
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
Requests the data of the feature identified by
the second info unit of the parameter
REQSTAT REQUEST STATUS
Requests the status of the feature identified by
USE FEATURE USAGE
Allows the usage of the feature identified by the
second info unit of the parameter
Indicates the type of activity desired by the subscriber
concerning the feature involved.
b: FEATURE
ABBD ABBR. DIAL USAGE
Notes:
- Allowed values of unit 1:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 2+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USE
ABMOD1 UPDATE 1-DIG. ABBR. DIAL LISTS
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
AB1COL0 ABBR. DIALING 1 DIG. COLLECT 0
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
ACMO AUTOMATIC CALL MEMORY OUTGOING
Notes:
USE
ACREJ REJECTION OF ANONYMOUS CALLS
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
Notes:
USE
Prerequisites:
- At least one public network access code
(TRATYP=PNASDT or PNANDT) must
be existing for the given CENTREX group.
This does not apply to CENTREX Minigroup-s.
Notes:
USE
ATNBI ATTENDANT BARGE IN
Notes:
USE
ATNBIWOT ATN BARGE IN WITHOUT TONE
Notes:
USE
ATNCACO ATN CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
ENTR, DEL, REQDAT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 3+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ATNCO ATTENDANT CAMP ON
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNDACO ATN DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
ENTR, DEL, REQDAT
ATNEO ATTENDANT EMERGENCY OVERRIDE
Notes:
USE
ATNGMB ATTENDANT GROUP MAKE BUSY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNLOGON BASIC ATTENDANTS LOGON
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNNS ATTENDANT NIGHT SERVICE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNPMB ATTENDANT POSITION MAKE BUSY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
ATNSACO ATN SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
ENTR, DEL, REQDAT
ATNTR ATTENDANT TRAFFIC RESTRICTION
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, REQALL
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
CACLST CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
CACO CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
Notes:
USE
CALR CALLED LINE PRESENTATION RSTR.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCBS CALL COMPLETION BUSY SUBSCRIB.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCIBI CALL COMPL. INTNET BUSY IMMED.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 4+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Prerequisites:
CCIBU CALL COMPL.INTNET BUSY USRCNTR
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Prerequisites:
CCNR CALL COMPLETION ON NO REPLY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCSC COLLECT CALL SCREENING
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCW CANCEL CALL WAITING
Notes:
USE
CLIR CALLING LINE PRESENTATN. RSTR.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CLIRREQ CLIR REQUEST
Notes:
USE
CLIRSUSP CLIR SUSPENSION
Notes:
USE
CNIR CALLING NAME IDENT.RESTR.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
COLR CONNECTED LINE IDENT.RESTR.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CONFADD ISDN CONFERENCE ADD TO
Notes:
USE
CONFBEG ISDN CONFERENCE BEGIN
Notes:
USE
CONFDRP ISDN CONFERENCE DROP
Notes:
USE
CONFISO ISDN CONFERENCE ISOLATE FROM
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 5+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
USE
CONFL ANALOG CONFERENCE
Notes:
USE
CONFREA ISDN CONFERENCE REATTACH TO
Notes:
USE
CONFSPL ISDN CONFERENCE SPLIT
Notes:
USE
CTC CALL TRANSFER CONNECTION
Notes:
DACT, REQSTAT
CW CALL WAITING
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CWIB CALL WAITING ON INTNET BUSY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DACO DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
DEBCL DET.BILL. DEPEND. OF TRA.CLASS
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, DELDACT, ENTRACT,
REQALL
DEBNC DETAILED BILLING NEXT CALL
Notes:
USE
DIVA CALL DIV. TO FIXED ANNOU.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVAI 1-15 ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
Notes:
DELDACT, ENTRACT, REQALL
DIVBS CALL DIVERSION BUSY SELECTIVE
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, ENTRACT, DELDACT,
REQALL
Notes:
REQALL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 6+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVBYQS BUSY LINE DIV. QSIG-PBX
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
DIVBYVMS VMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVCDVMS VMS CONDITIONAL DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
DIVDAQS DONT ANSWER DIV. QSIG-PBX
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
DIVDAVMS VMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVDS CALL DIV.DONT ANSW.SELECTIVE
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
REQALL
DIVIA CALL DIV. TO INDIV.ANNOU.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVIP CALL DIV. PARALLEL RINGING
Notes:
ACTDAT, ENTRACT, DACT,
DELDACT, REQALL
DIVIQS IMMEDIATE DIV. QSIG-PBX
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
DIVIS DIV. IMMEDIATE WITH SCREENING
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
DIVIVMS VMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVLO CALL DIVERSION LOGGED OUT
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
DIVND DO NOT DISTURB DIVERSION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 7+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVSAE DIV. TO SHORT ANNOU. EQUIP.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
DIVTA DIVERSION TO ANSWER SERVICE
Notes:
DACT, REQSTAT
GFRWIAC GENL. FACILITY RST. W ALARM
Notes:
DACT
GFRWOAC GENL. FACILITY RST. W/O ALARM
Notes:
DACT
Notes:
REQALL
INFEAT IN FEATURE ACCESS
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ENTR
MCI MALICIOUS CALL IDENTIFICATION
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
MCIREQ REQUEST MALICIOUS CALL IDENT.
Notes:
USE
MLPP MULTI LEVEL PREC./PREEMPT.
Notes:
USE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SUBSCR. CONTR. INPUT 1
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
RCREQS REVERSE CHRG REQ. SET UP TIME
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 8+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USE
RCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
RNGPRF MANAGER/SECR. RINGING PROFILE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, ENTR, DEL, REQALL
RSTSCI SERVICE RESTRICTION
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
SACO SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
SCLIM SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT
Notes:
ENTR, REQDAT
SCLST SCREENING LISTS
Notes:
DELDACT
SCLSTCW SCREENING LIST CALL WAITING
Notes:
ACT, DACT, ENTR, DEL, REQSTAT, REQDAT,
REQALL
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LST CALL DIV.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, DEL, DELDACT,
ENTR, REQALL, REQDAT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ENTR, DEL
SCLSTO SCREENING LST ORIG. CALLS
Notes:
SCLSTO2 SCREENING LIST CALL ORIG 2
Notes:
ACT, DACT, DEL, ENTR,
REQALL, REQDAT, REQSTAT
SCLSTRCW SCREENING LST SEL.RINGING / CW
Notes:
SCLSTT SCREENING LST CALL TERMIN.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 9+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCLSTT2 SCREENING LST CALL TERMIN. 2
Notes:
STH STOP HUNT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
SUBST MANAGER SECRETARY SUBSTITUTE
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
TESTREQ TEST REQUEST
Notes:
USE
TIMDIVA TIMER CALL DIV.TO FIXED ANNOU.
Notes:
ENTR
TIMDIVDA TIMER DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
Notes:
ENTR
TIMDIVDV TIMER VMS DONT ANSWER DIV.
Notes:
ENTR
Notes:
REQALL
TRARSTRT TERMINATING TRAFFIC RESTR.
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, ENTR, ENTRACT, DELDACT,
REQALL
TRARSUSP TRAFFIC RESTR. SUSPENSION
Notes:
USE
TRSREM TRARSUSP FROM REMOTE STATION
Notes:
USE
TW TELEWORKER LOGON
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
TWR TELEWORKER REMOTE LOGON
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
VDP VOICE DATA PROTECTION
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 10+
CR CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT, DACT, USE, REQSTAT
VMSRETR VMS RETRIEVE USAGE
Notes:
USE
Identifies the feature being requested by the subscriber.
The type of activity affecting the feature is identified
by the first info unit of this parameter.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 11+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NORMAL FEATURE ACCESS CODES
This input format is used to create CENTREX access codes for all but Custom
Calling Features kind of traffic type.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,DEST= [[ [
[ CR CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= ,TRATYP= [,NEWCODE=[ [,LAC=] [
[ [[,DN= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,CAC=] [,CHKRSTR=] [,PRIMCODE=] [,MDR=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,COLDIG=] [,CHSITE=] [,CDIALLOW=] [,CDIDESAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
Prerequisites:
CR CXGRP command.
Notes:
access code:
When an ambiguity exists in the length of an access code, the
pound sign must be input as the last digit for all but the largest
access code in the sequence.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of access required for the code
point.
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
Indicates access to a Virtual Private Network
service. For the creation of an access code for
AWC parameter DEST or NEWCODE must be entered,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 12+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
as well as parameter COLDIG.
Compatibilities:
- DEST (first info unit)
- NEWCODE (first info unit)
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- COLDIG
- CHSITE
Incompatibilities:
- CENTREX group (CR CXGRP) with COS=AWC or
COS=AWCRMT.
Indicates subsequent dialing of a carrier access
code. Explicite dialing of a carrier access code
overrides all default carrier access codes which
may have been created before on exchange, CENTREX
group, subscriber or on specific access code
level.
CCPU COMMON CALL PICKUP
Indicates access to the features
Group Call Pickup (GCPU) and
Directed Call Pickup (DCPU)
using the same CENTREX feature access code.
Depending on the dialed digits, the following
feature is invoked:
Access code for CCPU:
Group Call Pickup
Access code for CCPU + CENTREX intercom number
to be picked up:
Directed Call Pickup
Indicates access for pickup of calls to
CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIP. LINE.
If the Customer Premises Equipment Line is
locally connected, the combination of LAC
and DN parameters must be given. If it is
remotely connected parameter DEST or NEWCODE
is required.
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIP. LINE
Indicates access for customer premises equipment
line. If this equipment is locally connected, the
combination of LAC and DN parameters must be
given. If it is remotely connected parameter
DEST or NEWCODE is required.
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
- MDR
- CHSITE
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICKUP
Allows pickup of a call at a specific station in
the same CENTREX group and in the same exchange.
DNATN DN OF ATTENDANT
Indicates access to an attendant station or to an
attendant group.
For the creation of an access code to a locally
connected attendant, the directory number of the
attendant must be entered using the combination
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 13+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of LAC and DN.
For the creation of an access code to a remotely
connected attendant, parameter DEST or NEWCODE
(first info unit) is required.
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
- MDR
- PRIMCODE
Indicates access to the public network through
an attendant station.
If the attendant is locally connected, the
combination of the parameters LAC and DN must
be given. If the attendant is remotely connected,
parameter DEST or NEWCODE is required.
The attendant must be member of the same CENTREX
group or if a BGID is assigned to the CENTREX
group (CR CXGRP, parameter COSDAT), member of
the same business group.
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
- LAC
- DN
- CAC
- MDR
GCPU GROUP CALL PICKUP
Indicates access for pickup of a call to any
station in the same call pickup group
(created with ENTR CXSUB, parameter COSDAT).
GRPDIAL CENTREX GROUP DIALING
Indicates (remote) access to stations of a CENTREX
group with an assigned public directory number
(CR CXGRP, parameter DNDAT).
Notes:
- Parameter NEWCODE must be input, as well as
parameter COLDIG.
Compatibilities:
- CAC
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- COLDIG
- CHSITE
- CDIALLOW
- CDIDESAT
ITGW INTERNET TELEPHONY GATEWAY
Internet telephony gateway makes the public
feature Improved Access to Voice over Internet
available for CENTREX subscribers.
For the creation of an access code for ITGW,
parameter DEST or NEWCODE must be entered.
Compatibilities:
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- CHSITE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 14+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- CDIALLOW
- CDIDESAT
Indicates access to a PBX equipment via location
dialing or to a non CENTREX subscriber or to a
CENTREX station. The addressed PBX equipment, the
non CENTREX subscriber respectively the CENTREX
station may be locally or remotely connected.
Notes:
- Parameter DEST or NEWCODE (both info units)
must be entered for both the local and the
remote case, as well as the parameter COLDIG.
- In case of an access code to a non CENTREX
subscriber or to a CENTREX station parameter
COLDIG must always be entered with value 0.
Compatibilities:
- DEST
- NEWCODE
- CAC
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- COLDIG
- CHSITE
- CDIALLOW
- CDIDESAT
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICKUP
Indicates access for pickup of night service calls
when a CENTREX group has the night service call
pickup feature and has been assigned a night
service directory number.
OVRIPNAC OVERRIDE IMPLICITE PUB.NET.AC
Indicates access to the CENTREX features when the
CENTREX group has been created with the Implicite
Public Network Access feature (Minigroup).
Compatibilities:
- MDR
PARK CALL PARK
Indicates access to the feature Call Park, which
allows a CENTREX station to park an active call
and replace the handset.
PARKCPU CALL PARK PICKUP
Indicates access for pickup of a call by any third
station within the same BGID or from the station
where the call was parked.
PNABNDT PNANDT BUSINESS CALL
Indicates public network access for a business
call, with no second dial tone returned.
Compatibilities:
- MDR
PNABSDT PNASDT BUSINESS CALL
Indicates public network access for a business
call, with second dial tone returned.
Compatibilities:
- MDR
PNANDT PUBLIC NET. NO 2ND DIAL TONE
Indicates public network access, with no second
dial tone returned.
Compatibilities:
- MDR
- PRIMCODE
PNASDT PUBLIC NETWORK 2ND DIAL TONE
Indicates public network access, with second dial
tone returned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 15+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- MDR
- PRIMCODE
SDDIAL SINGLE DIGIT DIALLING
Single digit dialling allows dialling on a single
digit basis of call originated at a CENTREX
station in the CENTREX group and directed to a
non-single digit intercom destination or to a
preselected external destination.
Notes:
- Parameter DEST or NEWCODE (both info units)
must be entered for both the intercom as
the external
destination.
Compatibilities:
- DEST
- NEWCODE
- CAC
- CHKRSTR
- MDR
- CHSITE
- CDIALLOW
- CDIDESAT
For the access code of the TRATYP=SDDIAL, only
one digit may be specified for parameter CXGRP.
The access code must be in the range from 3 to 8.
DEST DESTINATION AREA
This parameter specifies the name of a destination area.
Notes:
- The entered value must correspond to an existing newcode
destination area and an existing code point.
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values AWC,
CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA, SDDIAL and LOCDIAL.
a[-b]
a: NAME=
Identifies the newcode destination area (CR DEST, parameters
DEST, NEWCODE).
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
Identifies whether the type of calls terminating on the
destination area identified by the first info unit of
DEST, are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
- The second info unit used together with the first is required
for TRATYP value SDDIAL and LOCDIAL.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code by which the selected
CXCODE will be replaced.
Notes:
- The entered value must correspond to an existing code point
(CR CPT).
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values AWC,
CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA, GRPDIAL SDDIAL and
LOCDIAL.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 16+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: NEW CODE DIGITS=
Identifies the new code digits.
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
new code identified by the first info unit of NEWCODE,
are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
for TRATYP values SDDIAL and LOCDIAL.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the public directory number used for locally
terminated attendant stations, CPE line equipment, for pickup of calls
to the locally terminated CPE line equipment and for the locally
terminated attendant station used for the Dial Through Attendant
feature.
Notes:
- If the EWSD exchange is split in Local Areas, the parameter LAC is
required together with the DN parameter.
- The PRIMCODE parameter can optionally be entered with DN if the
TRATYP value is DNATN.
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values CPELINE,
DNATN, CPECPU and DTA.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number must have been previously assigned with the
CR DN command.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter designates the local area code.
Notes:
- The DN parameter is required when entering this parameter.
Prerequisites:
- The Local Area Code must have been previously assigned with the
ENTR AREACODE command.
This parameter specifies the carrier access code.
Notes:
- Enter of this parameter is only possible for traffic types
LOCDIAL, SDDIAL, CPELINE, CPECPU, DNATN and DTA
but only for the remote case, i.e. when parameter DEST or
NEWCODE is also input.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 17+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHKRSTR CHECK TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS
This parameter defines whether traffic restrictions administered
with command CR SUB (parameter TRARSTR) must be considered
during call setup or not.
Notes:
- Parameter value YES means traffic restrictions must be
considered during call setup.
- Parameter value NO means traffic restrictions must be not
- Enter of this parameter is only possible for the traffic types
AWC, LOCDIAL, SDDIAL and GRPDIAL.
- If parameter is omitted, default value YES in case of LOCDIAL
and SDDIAL resp. NO in case of AWC will be set automatically.
N NO CHECK OF TRAF.RESTRICTIONS
NO NO CHECK OF TRAF.RESTRICTIONS
Y CHECK TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS
YES CHECK TRAFFIC RESTRICTIONS
PRIMCODE PRIMARY ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies that the access code is to be used in the
event that the remote control unit (RCU) is isolated from the host.
The code point produced will be entered into the CENTREX group data and
thereby will be downloaded into the LTG. This access code will be used
in the LTG in Stand Alone Service at the RCU, as well as for ISDN call
signaling in order to support the automatic callback feature for
incoming calls to an ISDN terminal within CENTREX.
Notes:
- A primary access code is only allowed once for each allowed TRATYP,
and only for one public network access code (either PNASDT or
PNANDT, but not both), and is only valid for the traffic types:
- DNATN
- PNANDT
- PNASDT
- This parameter has two possibilities:
- YES creates a primary access code
- NO creates a non primary access code.
N NO PRIMARY CODE
NO NO PRIMARY CODE
Y PRIMARY CODE
YES PRIMARY CODE
MDR MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
This parameter specifies whether Message Detailed Recording data is
to be collected during the call.
Notes:
- This parameter is compatible with the TRATYP values:
PNASDT, PNANDT, PNABSDT, PNABNDT, GRPDIAL, DTA, DNATN, LOCDIAL,
AWC, SDDIAL and CPELINE (only for remote CPE line equipment)
and OVRIPNAC (in case of a Minigroup)
N NO MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
NO NO MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
Y MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
YES MESSAGE DETAILED RECORDING
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of additional digits that must
be collected by the LTG, but not translated, for the access to:
- PBX equipment via Location Dialing
- Virtual Private Network via Area Wide CENTREX
- stations of a CENTREX group via CENTREX Group Dialing
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 18+
CR CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- For an access code with TRATYP=LOCDIAL leading to
non CENTREX subscribers or to CENTREX stations, parameter
COLDIG must always be entered with value 0.
This parameter specifies the charging site the CENTREX code
point administered with DEST or NEWCODE belongs to.
CDIALLOW CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
This parameter specifies the access code for Master Group function.
It can be used during Central Dial In.
Notes:
GRPDIAL, LOCDIAL, ITGW and SDDIAL
N NO CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
NO NO CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
Y CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
YES CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
CDIDESAT DEST. TO SAT. GROUP WITH CDI
This parameter specifies the access code for master to slave
traffic for a destination to a Satellite Group, which is able
to perform Central Dial In.
Notes:
N NO DEST. TO SAT. GROUP W. CDI
NO NO DEST. TO SAT. GROUP W. CDI
Y DEST. TO SAT. GROUP WITH CDI
YES DEST. TO SAT. GROUP WITH CDI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXCPT- 19-
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX CODE POINT
This command displays the data of CENTREX code points in a standard
output mask or in an output mask for custom calling features.
Following data can be output in a standard output mask
- All CENTREX code points of a CENTREX group, when a single value is
given for parameter CXGRP.
- Up to 32 specific CENTREX code points of a CENTREX group, when a
single value is given for parameter CXGRP and a single value for
parameter CXCODE.
- All CENTREX code points of a CENTREX group of specific CENTREX
traffic types, when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP
and a single value for parameter TRATYP.
- All CENTREX code points of a CENTREX group associated with specific
PSTN directory numbers, when a single value is given for parameter
CXGRP and all values for parameter LAC and DN.
- All CENTREX code points of one or all CENTREX groups, associated
with a specific or a range of PSTN directory numbers, when a single
value is given for parameter CXGRP or all CXGRP, a single value
for parameter LAC and a single value or a range for parameter
DN.
with PSTN newcode destinations or newcodes, when a single value is
given for parameter CXGRP or all CXGRP and all values for
parameter DEST and NEWCODE.
- All CENTREX code points of a CENTREX group, associated with PSTN
newcode destinations, when a single value is given for parameter
CXGRP and all values for parameter DEST.
with a specific PSTN newcode destinations, when a single value is
given for parameter CXGRP or all CXGRP and a single value for
parameter DEST.
newcodes, when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP and
all values for parameter NEWCODE.
with a specific PSTN newcode, when a single value is given for
parameter CXGRP or all CXGRP and a single value for parameter
NEWCODE.
carriers, when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP and
all values for parameter CAC.
with a specific PSTN carrier, when a single value is given for
parameter CXGRP or all CXGRP and a single value for parameter
CAC.
Following data can be output for CENTREX code points in an output mask
for custom calling features.
- All CENTREX SCI code points of a CENTREX group, when a single value
is given for parameter CXGRP and parameter TRATYP is CCFEA.
- All CENTREX SCI code points of a CENTREX group of a specific feature,
when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP, parameter TRATYP
is CCFEA and a single value for parameter FEA.
- Up to 32 specific CENTREX SCI code points of a CENTREX group, when a
single value is given for parameter CXGRP, a single value for
parameter CXCODE and parameter TRATYP is CCFEA.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CXCPT : CXGRP= [,CXCODE=] [,TRATYP=] [,FEA=] [,DEST=] [
[ [
[ [,NEWCODE=] [,DN=] [,LAC=] [,CAC=] [,CDIALLOW=] [
[ [
[ [,CDIDESAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXCPT- 1+
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
- All access codes for the specified CENTREX group are displayed if
only this parameter is entered.
- When parameter CXGRP is not input, at least one of the parameters
DEST, NEWCODE, DN must be input.
This parameter specifies the existing CENTREX feature access code.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of access required for the
code point.
DNATN DN OF ATTENDANT
PNASDT PUBLIC NETWORK 2ND DIAL TONE
PNANDT PUBLIC NET. NO 2ND DIAL TONE
NSCPU NIGHT SERVICE CALL PICKUP
DCPU DIRECTED CALL PICKUP
GCPU GROUP CALL PICKUP
CPELINE CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIP. LINE
CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
CACDIAL EXPLICITE DIALING OF CAC
OVRIPNAC OVERRIDE IMPLICITE PUB.NET.AC
CCPU COMMON CALL PICKUP
GRPDIAL CENTREX GROUP DIALING
PNABSDT PNASDT BUSINESS CALL
PNABNDT PNANDT BUSINESS CALL
SDDIAL SINGLE DIGIT DIALLING
PARK CALL PARK
PARKCPU CALL PARK PICKUP
ITGW INTERNET TELEPHONY GATEWAY
Internet telephony gateway makes the public
feature Improved Access to Voice over Internet
available for CENTREX subscribers.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the required CENTREX subscriber controled
feature.
Notes:
- Input of this parameter is only allowed, when parameter TRATYP
is entered with value CCFEA. No other optional parameters
are allowed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXCPT- 2+
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
DACT DEACTIVATE
ENTR ENTER
DEL DELETE
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
USE FEATURE USAGE
Indicates the type of activity concerning the feature
entered with the second info unit.
b: FEATURE
CW CALL WAITING
SCLSTO SCREENING LST ORIG. CALLS
STH STOP HUNT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXCPT- 3+
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CCIBI CALL COMPL. IMMED. INTNET BUSY
CCIBU CALL COMPL.USRCNTR.INTNET BUSY
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
TW TELEWORKER LOGON
Identifies the feature that can be requested by the
CENTREX station.
This parameter specifies the name of the destination area.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXCPT- 4+
DISP CXCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code by which the CXCODE
will be replaced.
DN PUBLIC DIRECTORY NUMBER
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter allows to select the remote CENTREX code points
with or without the Central Dial In Allowance.
Y CDI ALLOWANCE
YES CDI ALLOWANCE
N NO CDI ALLOWANCE
NO NO CDI ALLOWANCE
This parameter allows to select the remote CENTREX code points
with or without Destination to Satellite Group with Central Dial In.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXCPT- 5-
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX CODE POINT
This command modifies the attributes of an existing CENTREX code point.
Parameter values may be modified if the new values are compatible with the
stored traffic type. This command does not modify the CENTREX group for which
the code point was created, neither the access code nor the TRATYP value.
The command is rejected if the CXGRP is related to a secured CENTREX business
group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration permission
(see command DISP CXSEC).
Notes:
- This command allows the modification of several parameters at the same time.
- If the DN of the attendant is modified using the command
MOD DN the old CXGRP of the attendant must be cancelled using the
command CAN CXCPT and created again for the new DN of the attendant using
the command CR CXCPT.
1. MOD CXCPT - CCFEA CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
2. MOD CXCPT - NORMAL NORMAL FEATURES ACCESS CODE
1. Input format
CUSTOM CALLING FEATURES
This input format is used to modify an existing CENTREX access code for Custom
Calling Features.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= ,FEA= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
Notes:
access code.
- The entered value must correspond to an already existing access code.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 1+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX subscriber controled features.
Notes:
- This parameter will only be allowed if the access code being
modified has been created with TRATYP=CCFEA. No other
optional parameters will be allowed.
- For access codes to usage of Abbreviated Dialing of type AB1COL0,
AB1COL1, AB2COL0, AB2COL1 and AB2COL2 the following rule
exists:
For ABxCOLy and x>y, the last n=x-y digits of the
access code must be in the range of 0 to 9.
- For the access code ACT-CCBS the length of code must not be
greater than 3.
- For the access code USE-ARNO the first digit of parameter
CXCODE must always be an asterisk (*).
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
unit of the parameter with or without data
DACT DEACTIVATE
Deactivates the feature identified by the second
info unit of the parameter
DEL DELETE
Deletes the feature identified by the second info
Deletes with deactivation the feature identified
ENTR ENTER
Enters the feature identified by the second info
Enters and activates the feature identified by
Requests the status and/or data of the feature
identified by the second info unit of the
parameter
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
Requests the data of the feature identified by
Requests the status of the feature identified
USE FEATURE USAGE
Allows the usage of the feature identified by the
second info unit of the parameter
Indicates the type of activity desired by the subscriber
concerning the feature involved.
b: FEATURE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 2+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
Notes:
USE
Prerequisites:
(TRATYP=PNASDT or PNANDT) must be
existing for the given CENTREX group.
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ENTR, DEL, REQDAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 3+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR, DEL, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ENTR, DEL, REQDAT
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, REQALL
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
CCIBI CALL COMPL. INTNET BUSY IMMED.
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 4+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCIBU CALL COMPL.INTNET BUSY USRCNTR
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Prerequisites:
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 5+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
DACT, REQSTAT
CW CALL WAITING
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DELDACT, ENTRACT, REQALL
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 6+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
Notes:
ENTRACT, DELDACT
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DELDACT, REQALL
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 7+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
DACT
Notes:
DACT
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ENTR
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 8+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, ENTR, DEL, REQALL
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
DELDACT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, ENTR, DEL, REQSTAT, REQDAT,
REQALL
Notes:
Notes:
ENTR, DEL
SCLSTO SCREENING OF ORIGINATING CALLS
Notes:
REQDAT, REQSTAT
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 9+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STH STOP HUNT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
DEL, ENTR, REQDAT
Notes:
USE
Notes:
ENTR
Notes:
ENTR
Notes:
ENTR
Notes:
REQALL
Notes:
ACTDAT, DACT, ENTR, ENTRACT, DELDACT,
REQALL
Notes:
USE
Notes:
USE
TW TELEWORKER LOGON
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, REQSTAT
Notes:
ACT, DACT, USE, REQSTAT
Notes:
USE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 10+
MOD CXCPT
CCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Identifies the feature being requested by the subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 11+
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NORMAL FEATURES ACCESS CODE
This input format is used to modify CENTREX access codes for all but Custom
Calling Features kind of traffic types.
[ [
[ MOD CXCPT : CXGRP= ,CXCODE= <,DEST= ,NEWCODE= ,DN= ,LAC= [
[ [
[ ,CAC= ,CCAC= ,CHKRSTR= ,PRIMCODE= ,MDR= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,COLDIG= ,CHSITE= ,CDIALLOW= ,CDIDESAT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
Notes:
access code.
- The entered value must correspond to an already existing access code.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered at code points created with TRATYP
value AWC, CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA, SDDIAL or LOCDIAL.
a[-b]
a: NAME=
Identifies the newcode destination area (CR DEST, parameters
DEST, NEWCODE).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 12+
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
destination area identified by the first info unit of
DEST, are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
for TRATYP value SDDIAL and LOCDIAL.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
CXCODE will be replaced.
Notes:
(CR CPT).
- This parameter can be entered at code points created with TRATYP
value AWC, CPECPU, CPELINE, DNATN, DTA, GRPDIAL,
SDDIAL or LOCDIAL.
a[-b]
a: NEW CODE DIGITS=
Identifies the new code digits.
b: TYPE OF CALL
EXT EXTERNAL CALL
INT INTERCOM CALL
new code identified by the first info unit of NEWCODE,
are treated as intercom or external calls.
Notes:
for TRATYP values SDDIAL and LOCDIAL.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the public directory number used for locally
terminated attendant stations, CPE line equipment, pickup of calls
to the locally terminated CPE line equipment and for the locally
terminated attendant station used for the Dial Through Attendant
feature.
Notes:
- If the EWSD exchange serves different local area codes, the LAC
parameter is required together with the DN parameter.
- The PRIMCODE parameter can optionally be entered with DN if the
TRATYP value is DNATN. This parameter is compatible with the
TRATYP values CPELINE, DNATN, CPECPU and DTA.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number must have been previously assigned with the
CR DN command.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter designates the local area code.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 13+
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The DN parameter is required when entering this parameter.
Prerequisites:
- The local area code must have been previously assigned with the
Notes:
SDDIAL, LOCDIAL, CPELINE, CPECPU, DNATN and DTA
but only for the remote case, i.e. when at creation of the
access code parameter DEST or NEWCODE was input.
This parameter specifies the carrier access code to be
cancelled.
Notes:
SDDIAL, LOCDIAL, CPELINE, CPECPU, DNATN and DTA
but only for the remote case, i.e. when at creation of the
access code parameter DEST or NEWCODE was input.
Notes:
- Enter of this parameter is only possible for the traffic types
AWC, SDDIAL, LOCDIAL, GRPDIAL.
PRIMCODE PRIMARY ACCESS CODE
Indicates that the access code is to be used in the event that the
remote control unit (RCU) is isolated from the host.
The code point produced will be entered into the CENTREX group data and
thereby will be downloaded into the LTG. This access code will be used
in the LTG in Stand Alone Service at the RCU, as well as for ISDN call
signaling in order to support the automatic callback feature for
incoming calls to an ISDN terminal within CENTREX.
Notes:
- A primary access code is only allowed once for each allowed TRATYP,
and only for one public network access code (either PNASDT or
PNANDT, but not both), and is only valid for the traffic types:
- DNATN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 14+
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- PNANDT
- PNASDT
- This parameter has two possibilities:
- YES modifies a non primary access code into a primary
access code
- NO modifies a primary access code into a non primary
access code.
N NO PRIMARY CODE
NO NO PRIMARY CODE
Y PRIMARY CODE
YES PRIMARY CODE
This parameter specifies whether Message Detailed Recording data is
to be collected or not during the call.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered if the code point being modified was
created (see command CR CXCPT) for one of the TRATYP values:
PNASDT, PNANDT, PNABSDT, PNABNDT, GRPDIAL, DTA, DNATN, LOCDIAL,
SDDIAL, AWC, CPELINE (only for remote CPE line equipment) and
OVRIPNAC (in case of a Minigroup)
This parameter specifies the number of additional digits that must
be collected by the LTG, but not translated, for the access to:
- PBX equipment via Location Dialing
- Virtual Private Network via Area Wide CENTREX
- stations of a CENTREX group via CENTREX Group Dialing
Notes:
- For an access code created with TRATYP=LOCDIAL and
leading to non CENTREX subscribers or to CENTREX stations,
parameter COLDIG should not be modified to any other value
than 0.
This parameter specifies the charging site the CENTREX code
point administered with DEST or NEWCODE belongs to.
This parameter specifies the access code for Master Group function.
It can be used during Central Dial In.
Notes:
N NO CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
NO NO CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
Y CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
YES CENTRAL DIAL IN ALLOWANCE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 15+
MOD CXCPT
NORMAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the access code for master to slave
traffic for a destination to a Satellite Group, which is able
to perform Central Dial In.
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXCPT- 16-
CAN CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command cancels a range of CENTREX directory numbers or a single CENTREX
directory number, that have been previously created.
group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration permission (see
command DISP CXSEC).
The command is rejected if the CXDN or one of the CENTREX directory numbers
of the CENTREX directory number interval is used as a no hunt number.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXDN : CXGRP= ,CXDN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group for which CENTREX directory
numbers are to be cancelled.
Notes:
This parameter identifies a CENTREX directory number or a logical range
of CENTREX directory numbers.
Notes:
- Intervals are to be entered in steps of 10, 100 or 1000.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXDN- 1-
CR CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command creates a single CENTREX directory number or range of CENTREX
directory numbers that are either locally or remotely connected. Each one will
be assigned to one CENTREX station within the CENTREX group. When the CENTREX
directory number (or range) is handled locally, the relationship between the
CENTREX directory number (or range) and the local public directory number
(or range) is defined. When the CENTREX directory number (or range) is handled
as a remote destination, the relationship between the CENTREX directory number
(or range) and a destination respectively a new code is defined.
The command is rejected if the CXGRP is related to a secured CENTREX
business group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration
Notes:
- This command must be entered prior to assigning a CENTREX subscriber with
the ENTR CXSUB command.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,DN= [ [
[ CR CXDN : CXGRP= ,CXDN= [,LAC=] ,DEST= [,CAC=] [
[ [,NEWCODE=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,CHKRSTR=] [,MDR=] [,CHSITE=] [,CDIAUTH=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CDIALLOW=] [,CDIDESAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group for which CENTREX directory
numbers are to be created.
Notes:
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX group must have been assigned with the CR CXGRP
command.
This parameter specifies a CENTREX directory number or a range of
CENTREX directory numbers, used for intercom calls within a CENTREX
group.
It is only allowed to construct CENTREX directory number ranges
with the sizes 10, 100 or 1000. CENTREX directory numbers may be built
with the same sequence of another CENTREX feature access code or
CENTREX directory number already existing, if the last digit is not
equal. All digits but the last one of the code may be any digit ranging
from 0 to 9, but can not be of type character.
If an ambiguity exists in the length of a CENTREX directory number
sequence, the character # or C must be input as the last CENTREX
directory digit for all but the longest CENTREX directory number in the
sequence.
Notes:
- Local intercom number means, CXDN has been created with LAC, DN.
- Remote intercom number means, CXDN has been created with DEST or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXDN- 1+
CR CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NEWCODE.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code, when the EWSD exchange
serves for more than one local area (code).
Notes:
- For an exchange with multiple DN volume this parameter is
mandatory.
Prerequisites:
- It must have been previously assigned with the
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a local public directory number (or a range of
local public directory numbers) which is to be assigned to a (range of)
CENTREX directory number(s).
Notes:
- To create a CENTREX directory number range the first part of the
corresponding local public directory number range must be entered,
the second part of this number being optional.
- To create a single CENTREX directory number a specific DN must be
entered corresponding to an existing directory number.
- When creating a range of CENTREX directory numbers the corresponding
local public directory numbers must have been created with at least
the same range size.
Prerequisites:
- The local public directory number must have been previously created
with the CR DN command.
Notes:
NEWCODE NEW CODE
CXDN will be replaced.
Notes:
(CR CPT).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXDN- 2+
CR CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- This parameter is only possible for remote intercom dialing.
Notes:
- If parameter is omitted for remote intercom dialing, default
value NO will be set automatically.
This parameter defines whether Message Detailed Recording is to be
performed during the call.
Notes:
This parameter specifies the charging site the remote CENTREX
intercom number administered belongs to.
CDIAUTH CENTRAL DIAL IN AUTHORIZATION
This parameter defines whether the subscriber, connected to the CENTREX
directory number by its remote code point (NEWCODE), has the
authorization to use the full CENTREX group dialing plan to dial into a
CENTREX group. After this CENTREX group directory number the CENTREX
group dialing plan can be used. In addition a subset of GeoCENTREX
features can be activated.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, the default value NO will be set
automatically.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXDN- 3+
CR CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y CDI AUTHORIZATION
YES CDI AUTHORIZATION
N NO CDI AUTHORIZATION
NO NO CDI AUTHORIZATION
This parameter defines whether the remote intercom number
is included in the dialing plan for Master Group function.
If so, then this number can be used during Central Dial In.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, the default value YES will be set
automatically.
Y CDI ALLOWANCE
YES CDI ALLOWANCE
N NO CDI ALLOWANCE
NO NO CDI ALLOWANCE
This parameter marks a remote intercom number for master to
slave traffic as destination to a Satellite Group, which is
able to perform Central Dial In.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, the default value NO will be set
automatically.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXDN- 4-
DISP CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command displays the data of CENTREX directory number(s) in a standard
output mask or in a directory number type oriented output mask.
Following data can be output in a standard output mask
- All CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group, when a single value is
given for parameter CXGRP.
- A specific CENTREX directory number or CENTREX directory number range,
when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP and a single value
or a range for parameter CXDN.
- All local intercom CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group, when a
single value is given for parameter CXGRP and all values for parameter
LAC and DN.
- All local intercom CENTREX directory numbers of one or all CENTREX groups,
associated with a specific PSTN directory number or number range, when a
single value is given for parameter CXGRP or all CXGRP, a single
value for parameter LAC and a single value or range for parameter DN.
- All remote intercom CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group, when a
single value is given for parameter CXGRP and all values for parameter
DEST and NEWCODE.
- All CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group, associated with newcode
destinations, if a single value is given for parameter CXGRP and all
values for parameter DEST.
- All CENTREX directory numbers of one or all CENTREX groups, associated with
a specific newcode destination, when a single value is given for parameter
CXGRP or all CXGRP and a single value for parameter DEST.
- All CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group, associated with newcodes,
when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP and all values for
parameter NEWCODE.
- All CENTREX directory numbers of one or all CENTREX groups, associated with
a specific newcode, when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP or
all CXGRP and a single value for parameter NEWCODE.
- All remote intercom CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group,
associated with carriers, when a single value is given for parameter
CXGRP and all values for parameter CAC.
- All remote intercom CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group or all
CENTREX groups, associated with a specific carrier, when a single value is
given for parameter CXGRP or all CXGRP and a single value for parameter
CAC.
- All CENTREX directory numbers of a CENTREX group, associated with a central
dial in authorization or no central dial in authorization, when a single
value is given for parameter CXGRP and a single value for parameter
CDIAUTH.
Following data can be output in a mask when parameter FORMAT is DNTYPE
- A specific CENTREX directory number or CENTREX directory number range,
when a single value is given for parameter CXGRP and a single value
or a range for parameter CXDN.
- A specific CENTREX directory number or CENTREX directory number range for,
all CENTREX groups, when no value is given for parameter CXDN and all
values for parameter CXGRP.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CXDN : CXGRP= [,CXDN=] [,DN=] [,DEST=] [,NEWCODE=] [
[ [
[ [,LAC=] [,CAC=] [,CDIAUTH=] [,CDIALLOW=] [
[ [
[ [,CDIDESAT=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXDN- 1+
DISP CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
This parameter identifies a CENTREX directory number or a logical range
of CENTREX directory numbers.
Notes:
- Input of this parameter reduces the data being displayed to the
corresponding CENTREX directory number(s).
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the public directory number or a range of
public directory numbers.
This parameter specifies the destination area name.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code by which the CXDN
will be replaced.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXDN- 2+
DISP CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows to select the remote CENTREX directory numbers
with or without the Central Dial In Authorization.
Y CDI AUTHORIZATION
with or without the Central Dial In Allowance.
Y CDI ALLOWANCE
YES CDI ALLOWANCE
N NO CDI ALLOWANCE
NO NO CDI ALLOWANCE
with or without Destination to Satellite Group with Central Dial In.
This parameter specifies the kind of representation of the existing
CENTREX intercom numbers data.
STD output format results in display of all data administered by
commands CR CXDN, MOD CXDN (standard output mask).
DNTYPE output format results in display of CXDN, LAC and DN
together with the type of DN (SUB, PBX, PBXLN, CSGRP,
CALLTYPE) the CXDN has been created with (directory number
type oriented output mask).
STD STANDARD FORMAT
DNTYPE DNTYPE FORMAT
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXDN- 3-
MOD CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command modifies the attributes of an existing CENTREX intercom number
respectively of a range of CENTREX intercom numbers.
Parameter values may be modified if the new values are compatible with the
type of the existing intercom number (local or remote).
group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration permission
Notes:
- Local intercom number means, CXDN has been created with LAC, DN.
- Remote intercom number means, CXDN has been created with DEST or
NEWCODE.
- It is not possible to change the type of the existing intercom number
from local to remote or vice versa.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CXDN : CXGRP= ,CXDN= <,DN= ,DEST= ,NEWCODE= ,LAC= [
[ [
[ ,CAC= ,CCAC= ,CHKRSTR= ,MDR= ,CHSITE= ,CDIAUTH= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CDIALLOW= ,CDIDESAT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter identifies the corresponding CENTREX group.
Notes:
This parameter identifies a CENTREX directory number or a range of
CENTREX directory numbers of which the attributes are to be modified.
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a public directory number (or a range of
public directory numbers) which is to be assigned to a (range of)
CENTREX intercom number(s).
Prerequisites:
- The public directory number must have been previously created
(CR DN).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXDN- 1+
MOD CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
NEWCODE NEW CODE
CXDN will be replaced.
Notes:
(CR CPT).
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- This parameter is only possible for remote intercom numbers.
This parameter specifies the carrier access code to be
cancelled.
Notes:
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXDN- 2+
MOD CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies how MDR is to be changed.
Notes:
This parameter specifies the charging site the remote CENTREX intercom
number administered belongs to.
This parameter defines whether the subscriber, connected to the CENTREX
directory number by its remote code point (NEWCODE),has the
authorization to use the CENTREX group directory number to dial into a
GeoCENTREX group. After this CENTREX group directory number the CENTREX
numbering plan can be used.
In addition a subset of GeoCENTREX features can be activated.
Notes:
Y CDI AUTHORIZATION
This parameter defines whether the remote intercom number
is included in the dialing plan for Master Group function.
If so, then this number can be used during Central Dial In.
Notes:
Y CDI ALLOWANCE
YES CDI ALLOWANCE
N NO CDI ALLOWANCE
NO NO CDI ALLOWANCE
This parameter marks a remote intercom number for master to
slave traffic as destination to a Satellite Group, which is
able to perform Central Dial In.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXDN- 3+
MOD CXDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXDN- 4-
CAN CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP
This command cancels an existing CENTREX group.
Notes:
The following data is automatically canceled together with the CENTREX group
data:
- CENTREX access codes created by the command CR CXCPT,
- CENTREX directory numbers created by the command CR CXDN,
- CENTREX subscriber controlled features modified by the command MOD CXSCFEA.
Prerequisites:
- All members of the CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All MAC of the CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All CENTREX code points assigned with NEWCODE existing for the
CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All CENTREX directory numbers assigned with NEWCODE existing for the
CENTREX group have been canceled.
- All zone points for the CENTREX group have been canceled
(DISP CXZOPT).
- All resource data (directory number reservations and resource limits)
for the CENTREX group have been canceled
(DISP CXGRPRES).
- All Common Service groups for the CENTREX group have been canceled
(DISP CSGRP).
- CENTREX intercepts must not exist for the CENTREX group
(DISP CXINC).
- All TDP3 CENTREX codes created with CR INSCMREF have been canceled.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXGRP : CXGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXGRP- 1-
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX GROUP
This command defines a new CENTREX group and determines data that is valid for
all members of the group.
The number of CENTREX groups is restricted to 3000 within a switch.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CXGRP : CXGRP= [,DNDAT=] [,COS=] [,COSDAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
Each CENTREX group number occurs only once in a switch. Leading
zeroes must not be entered.
DNDAT DN DATA OF CTX GROUP
Assigns public directory number(s) to the CENTREX group. The number(s)
followed by the intercom number may be used to call a station of the
CENTREX group.
Notes:
- A CENTREX group may have up to 10 directory number(s) assigned.
- The directory number(s) may only be used by an public calling
party, if the CENTREX group additionally has the class of service
PUBDIAL assigned.
- Only one directory number per local area (ENTR AREACODE) is
allowed.
- The provider has to guarantee that the length of the directory
number(s) followed by the intercom number does not exceed the
network transport capabilities.
- Central Dial In for explicite directory numbers is only valid
when the classes of service is not CDI. In this case all
directory numbers are Central Dial In points via which remote
destinations can be reached.
- Central Dial In Satellite permission (CDISATPE) for explicite
directory numbers is not allowed.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number(s) have to be created before (CR DN), and
must not be connected.
- The directory number(s) must not be within an account number
interval (ACCNO) or be part of a PBX volume (PBXVOL).
- The directory number(s) must not be reserved for another CENTREX
group (DISP CXGRPRES).
a-b[-c]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE OF CTX GROUP=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXGRP- 1+
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: DIRECTORY NUMBER OF CTX GROUP=
c: MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN FLAG
N NO MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
NO NO MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
Y MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
YES MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
Default: N
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service.
This parameter is at least specified either by DIGCTRL or HOOKCTRL.
If neither of the two values is entered, DIGCTRL is taken as the
default.
HOOKCTRL HOOKFLASH FOR FEAT.CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by hookflash.
DIGCTRL and HOOKCTRL are mutually exclusive.
DIGCTRL is taken as the default, if neither of the
two values is entered.
DIGCTRL DIGITS FOR FEATURE CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by control
digits.
DIGCTRL is taken as the default, if neither of the
two values is entered.
DISTRING DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Provides distinctive ringing sequences for calls
from business group internal and business group
external stations, or, if no BGID (parameter
COSDAT) is assigned, for calls from CENTREX
group internal and external stations.
SUBBGRNG and DISTRING are mutually exclusive.
IPNAC IMPLICIT PUBLIC NETWORK ACCESS
Assigns implicit public network access (CENTREX
minigroup). This public network access is not
used, when the access code OVRIPNAC (CR CXCPT)
is dialed.
SUPCHINF SUPPRESS CHARGE INFORMATION
Charge information for non-public calls
is suppressed.
DLVCXDN DELIV.OF CXDN IN BUSINESS GRP.
Within a business group the CENTREX directory
number is displayed to a subscriber who has
following COS values assigned:
COLP, if he is the A-subscriber,
CLIP, if he is the B-subscriber.
DIVANN DIVERSION IS ANNOUNCED
Within the CENTREX group call diversion
is announced to the calling subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding office data has to be set
(see MOD CALLPOPT, parameter ANNFCFW,
value YES or SUBINDIV).
PUBDIAL PUBLIC DIALING OF CTX GROUP DN
Allows public subscribers to dial the CENTREX
group directory number(s) (DNDAT) followed by the
intercom number in order to call a CENTREX
station.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXGRP- 2+
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- At least one directory number (DNDAT) must
exist for the CENTREX group.
SUBBGRNG SUBBUSINESS GROUP DIST. RING.
from subbusiness group internal and subbusiness
group external stations.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=SUBBGID
Local intercom numbers as well as remote intercom
numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive.
Incompatibilities:
- CENTREX code points (CR CXCPT) with traffic
type (parameter TRATYP):
AWC
AWCRMT AREA WIDE CENTREX REMOTE ONLY
Remote intercom numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive.
Incompatibilities:
AWC
RSTORIGS RESTRICT ORIG. CALLS (SEMI)
Restricts the origination of calls to CENTREX
group internal calls only.
A station may call an attendant in order to
reach subscribers outside the CENTREX group.
INHCACD INHIBIT CARRIER DIALING
Inhibit carrier access code selection.
AWCUNALL AWC TRANSL. OF UNALLOCAT. CXDN
Unallocated CENTREX intercom numbers
are translated via IN.
CDI CENTRAL DIAL IN GROUP
Defines the CENTREX group directory number(s)
(DNDAT) as Central Dial In point(s) via which
remote destinations can be reached.
CDISATPE CDI SATELLITE PERMISSION
Permits members of other CENTREX groups
connected to non-EWSD switches to dial into
the CENTREX group and use the business-group
internal numbering plan and a subset of features.
DDVBYFN DISP.BUSY LINE DIV.FORW.NO.
If the CENTREX group of the B1-User or the
Bn-1 User has this feature in addition to DIVBY,
then the number of this user is presented to the
Bn-User.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=DIVBY
DDVDAFN DISP.DONT ANSW.DIV.FORW.NO.
Bn-1 User has this feature in addition to DIVDA,
Bn-User.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=DIVDA
CDIDEB CDI DETAILED BILLING
During Central Dial In a detailed billing
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXGRP- 3+
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
record will be generated for the second
leg of the call.
COSDAT CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service
with data.
Each class of service with data (except CUSTROUT) has to
be specified by a second unit (b).
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
DIVBY DIVERSION ON BUSY
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that lead to
a busy station are diverted to the directory
number (CENTREX group internal or external)
specified by the second unit (b).
Notes:
- In order to specify destinations outside a
CENTREX group or within a CENTREX minigroup
(COS=IPNAC), respectively, the public
network access code or the OVRIPNAC have
to be entered at the beginning of the digits.
DIVDA DIVERSION DONT ANSWER
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that are not
answered within a fix time period are diverted to
the directory number (CENTREX group internal or
external) specified by the second unit (b).
Notes:
network access code or the OVRIPNAC
have to be entered at the beginning of the
digits.
CUSTID CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION
Assigns a customer identification to the CENTREX
group by the second unit (b).
CUSTROUT CUSTOMER ROUTING ACTIVATION
Customer routing is activated only by
the first unit. A second unit must not
be entered.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
Assigns the CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP)
to a business group specified by the second
unit (b).
CPLX CENTREX COMPLEX IDENTIFICATION
to a complex specified by the second unit
(b).
Notes:
- The number of CENTREX complexes is restricted to
255 within a switch.
- To change the assigned CENTREX complex
identification, it has to be canceled first
(MOD CXGRP, parameter CCOSDAT) and
then redefined.
USENS USE NIGHT SERVICE
If an attendant group of the own CENTREX
group (parameter CXGRP) activates night
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXGRP- 4+
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
service (ACTNS), attendant group calls are
diverted to an attendant group of a foreign
CENTREX group. This foreign CENTREX group is
If the foreign attendant group has
also activated night service (ACTNS),
calls are further diverted to their
night service station.
Notes:
- To change the assigned foreign CENTREX
group, this feature has to be canceled first
(MOD CXGRP) and then redefined.
Prerequisites:
- The own and the foreign CENTREX group
are members of the same CENTREX complex.
- An attendant group within the
foreign CENTREX group provides
the feature PRVCSGRP.
USECXMOD USE MAC FOR CENTREX DATA MOD.
CENTREX database administration (CXMOD)
of the own CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP)
is done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX group.
This foreign CENTREX group is specified by
the second unit (b).
Notes:
Prerequisites:
- A MAC of the foreign CENTREX group
provides the feature PRVCXMOD.
USETRAF USE MAC FOR TRAFFIC RECORDING
Traffic recording (TRAF) of the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is
done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX
group. This foreign CENTREX group is
Notes:
Prerequisites:
provides the feature PRVTRAF.
CXORIG CENTREX ORIGINATION MARK
An origination mark used for zoning (CR ZOPT),
is specified by the second unit (b).
SUBBGID SUBBUSINESS GROUP IDENT.
Assigns the CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) to a
subbusiness group.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=BGID
KEYA KEY A OF TELEPHONE
The sequence of digits specified by the second
unit (b) is sent, when the key A of the
telephone is pushed.
KEYB KEY B OF TELEPHONE
unit (b) is sent, when the key B of the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXGRP- 5+
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KEYC KEY C OF TELEPHONE
unit (b) is sent, when the key C of the
KEYD KEY D OF TELEPHONE
unit (b) is sent, when the key D of the
Calls of an A-side CENTREX station are routed via
the specified carrier (second unit b), unless
another carrier access code is specified for this
destination for a subscriber, PBX, PBX line,
for the code point (CR CXCPT), or dialed.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier access code has to be created
(command CR CAC)
Prerequisites:
(command CR CAC)
TIMDIVDA DIVERSION DONT ANSWER TIMER
Calls from outside the CENTREX group, that
are not answered within the time specified
by the second unit (b) are diverted
to the directory number (CENTREX group
internal or external), which is specified
by the second unit of the parameter DIVDA.
TIMPARK CALL PARK TIMER FOR RETRIEVE
A parked call can be retrieved by a CENTREX
station within the time specified by the
second unit (b).
USEPER USE MAC FOR ATN. PERFORM. REP.
Attendant performance data (PER) of the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is sent to
a MAC of a foreign CENTREX group. This foreign
CENTREX group is specified by the second
unit (b).
Notes:
Prerequisites:
provides the feature PRVPER.
NUMPUBIC NO. OF INCOMING PUBLIC CALLS
Restricts the number of simultaneous incoming
calls from the public network to the value
specified with the second unit (b).
NUMPUBOG NO. OF OUTGOING PUBLIC CALLS
Restricts the number of simultaneous outgoing
calls into the public network to the value
Assigns the originating mark 1 used for routing
of Central Dial In (CDI) calls.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXGRP- 6+
CR CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Assigns the originating mark 2 used for zoning
b: DIGITS=
The following values are allowed:
- DIVBY : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- DIVDA : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- CAC1 : 1..6 hexadecimal digits
- CUSTID : Up to 5 decimal digits
(without leading zeroes)
Value: 1..16383
- CUSTROUT : (No second unit)
- BGID : Up to 8 decimal digits
Value: 2..16,777,215
- CPLX : Up to 3 decimal digits
- USENS : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USECXMOD : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USETRAF : Up to 4 decimal digits
- CXORIG : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 0..15
Default: 0
- SUBBGID : Up to 5 decimal digits
Value: 2..65,535
- KEYA : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
Further digits: B, C, 0-9
- KEYB : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYC : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYD : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- NUMPUBIC : Up to 5 decimal digits
Value: 1..65535
- NUMPUBOG : Up to 5 decimal digits
Value: 1..65535
- TIMPARK : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 1..10
Default: 10 minutes
- TIMDIVDA : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 5..60 seconds
- USEPER : Up to 4 decimal digits
- ORIG1 : Up to 4 decimal digits
Value: 0..3839
Default: 0
Value: 0..255
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXGRP- 7-
DISP CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP DATA
- data of a particular CENTREX group,
- data of up to 10 CENTREX groups,
- data of all CENTREX groups,
- data of the CENTREX group with specified directory number(s),
- data of all CENTREX groups with a specified local area code,
- data of all CENTREX groups with directory number(s) assigned,
- data of all CENTREX groups of a particular complex/(sub-)business group/
customer identification/carrier access code,
- data of all CENTREX groups of all complexes/(sub-)business groups/
customer identifications/carrier access codes,
- all CENTREX group numbers of a particular CENTREX complex,
- all CENTREX group numbers of all CENTREX complexes,
- owned/provided and used features of a particular CENTREX complex,
- additional information of a particular CENTREX group,
- number of allowed simultaneous incoming/outgoing public calls.
Notes:
- CENTREX groups, directory number(s), CENTREX complexes, (sub-)business
groups, customer identifications and carrier access codes are not displayed
in sequential order.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,DNDAT= [[ ; [
[ DISP CXGRP : CXGRP= [,COSDAT=[ [,FORMAT=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Notes:
- Up to 10 parameter values may be linked with &.
- Input X is required, if the parameter COSDAT or DNDAT are
entered.
This parameter specifies the directory number(s) of the CENTREX group
as a selection criterion.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X is required.
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT:CPLXOVW
CPLXFEA
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXGRP- 1+
DISP CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
Specifies the local area code of the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- If X is entered, the input X for the second unit
is required.
unit values.
Specifies the directory number of the CENTREX group.
unit values.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service with
data as a selection criterion. All CENTREX groups for a selected
COSDAT-value that may be specified by a second unit (b)
are displayed.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X is required.
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Prerequisites:
- BGID, specified by the second unit (b).
b: DIGITS=
Optionally, following values may be entered:
Value: 1..16383
Value: 2..16,777,215
Value: 2..65535
This parameter specifies the output format of the display.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXGRP- 2+
DISP CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STD CENTREX GROUP DATA STANDARD
Displays all data valid for the CENTREX group.
CPLXOVW CENTREX COMPLEX OVERVIEW
Lists all CENTREX group numbers of complex
members.
Notes:
- If the CENTREX group numbers of a particular
complex are to be displayed, then the identifier
CPLX and identifying second unit (b)
must be entered for the parameter COSDAT.
- If the CENTREX group numbers of all complexes
are to be displayed, then no input is necessary
for parameter COSDAT.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X
is required.
CPLXFEA CENTREX COMPLEX FEATURES
For a specific CENTREX complex all CENTREX groups
together with their owned/provided and used
features are output.
Prerequisites:
- For parameter CXGRP the input X
is required.
- For parameter COSDAT the identifier
CPLX and identifying second unit (b)
must be entered.
ADDINF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Additional information of a specified CENTREX
group (CXGRP) is displayed:
The existence of
- IN trigger detection points (DISP INTRIG)
- Central Dial In (CDI) authorizations (DISP CXDN)
is indicated.
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXGRP- 3-
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX GROUP
This command modifies the data of an existing CENTREX group.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CXGRP : CXGRP= <,DNDAT= ,CDNDAT= ,COS= ,CCOS= ,COSDAT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CCOSDAT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Assigns public directory number(s) to the CENTREX group. The number(s)
followed by the intercom number may be used to call a station of the
CENTREX group.
Notes:
- A CENTREX group may have up to 10 directory number(s) assigned.
- The directory number(s) may only be used by an public calling
party, if the CENTREX group additionally has the class of service
PUBDIAL assigned.
- Only one directory number per local area (ENTR AREACODE) is
allowed.
- The provider has to guarantee that the length of the directory
number(s) followed by the intercom number does not exceed the
network transport capabilities.
- Central Dial In for explicite directory numbers is only valid
when the classes of service is not CDI. In this case all
directory numbers are Central Dial In points via which remote
destinations can be reached.
- Central Dial In Satellite permission (CDISATPE) for explicite
directory numbers is not allowed.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number(s) have to be created before (CR DN), and
must not be connected.
- The directory number(s) must not be within an account number interval
(ACCNO) or be part of a PBX volume (PBXVOL).
- The directory number(s) must not be reserved for another CENTREX
group (DISP CXGRPRES).
a-b[-c]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 1+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN FLAG
N MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
NO MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
Y NO MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
YES NO MASTER CENTREX GROUP DN
CDNDAT CANCEL DN DATA OF CTX GROUP
Cancels the directory number(s) of the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- If the last directory number of the CENTREX group is canceled,
COS=PUBDIAL is canceled implicitly
a-b
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service.
HOOKCTRL HOOKFLASH FOR FEAT.CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by hookflash.
Thus, input of HOOKCTRL deletes DIGCTRL.
DIGCTRL DIGITS FOR FEATURE CALL CTRL.
Feature call control is performed by control
digits.
Thus, input of DIGCTRL deletes HOOKCTRL.
from business group internal and business group
external stations, or, if no BGID (parameter
COSDAT) is assigned, for calls from CENTREX
group internal and external stations.
Thus, input of DISTRING deletes SUBBGRNG.
Assigns implicit public network access (CENTREX
minigroup). This public network access is not
used, when the access code OVRIPNAC (CR CXCPT)
is dialed.
Incompatibilities:
- For ENTR CXMDR the CTYP=STST must
not be assigned.
- The CENTREX code points must not have the
following parameter values assigned:
PNASDT
PNANDT
PNABSDT
PNABNDT
Charge information for non-public calls
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 2+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is suppressed.
Within a business group the CENTREX directory
number is displayed to a subscriber who has
following COS values assigned:
COLP, if he is the A-subscriber,
CLIP, if he is the B-subscriber.
Within the CENTREX group
call diversion is announced to the
calling subscriber.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding office data has to be set
(see MOD CALLPOPT, parameter ANNFCFW,
value YES or SUBINDIV).
Allows public subscribers to dial the CENTREX
group directory number(s) (DNDAT) followed by the
intercom number in order to call a CENTREX
station.
Prerequisites:
- At least one directory number (DNDAT)
must exist for the CENTREX group.
from subbusiness group internal and subbusiness
group external stations.
Thus, input of SUBBGRNG deletes DISTRING.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=SUBBGID
Local intercom numbers as well as remote intercom
numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive. Thus,
input of AWC deletes AWCRMT.
Incompatibilities:
AWC
Remote intercom numbers are translated via IN.
AWC and AWCRMT are mutually exclusive. Thus,
input of AWCRMT deletes AWC.
Incompatibilities:
AWC
group internal calls only.
A station may call an attendant in order to
reach subscribers outside the CENTREX group.
Inhibit carrier access code selection.
Unallocated CENTREX intercom numbers
are translated via IN.
Defines the CENTREX group directory number(s)
(DNDAT) as Central Dial In point(s) via which
remote destinations can be reached.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 3+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Permits members of other CENTREX groups
connected to non-EWSD switches to dial into
the CENTREX group and use the business-group
internal numbering plan and a subset of features.
Bn-1 User has this feature in addition to DIVBY,
Bn-User.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=DIVBY
Bn-1 User has this feature in addition to DIVDA,
Bn-User.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=DIVDA
During Central Dial In a detailed billing
record will be generated for the second
leg of the call.
CCOS CANCEL CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group classes of service to
be canceled.
Removes implicit public network access (CENTREX
minigroup).
Prerequisites:
- For ENTR CXMDR the CTYP=IPNAC must not be
assigned.
- The CENTREX code points existing for the
CENTREX group must not have the following
parameter values assigned:
OVRIPNAC
DTA
USE-AR
ACT-CCIBI
ACT-CCIBU
Removes translation of local intercom numbers
as well as remote intercom numbers via IN.
Notes:
- An existing TDP2 trigger is removed if none
of the classes of service AWC, AWCRMT or
AWCUNALL exist any more.
Removes translation of remote intercom
numbers via IN.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 4+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Removes translation of unallocated intercom
numbers via IN.
Notes:
with data.
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that lead to
a busy station are diverted to the directory
number (CENTREX group internal or external)
Notes:
network access code or the OVRIPNAC have
to be entered at the beginning of the digits.
Calls from outside the CENTREX group that are not
answered within a fix time period are diverted to
the directory number (CENTREX group internal or
external) specified by the second unit (b).
Notes:
network access code or the OVRIPNAC
have to be entered at the beginning of the
digits.
NSN NIGHT SERVICE NUMBER
Calls to an attendant group that has
activated night service (ACTNS) are
diverted to a CENTREX directory number
(night service station) specified by
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=USENS
Assigns a customer identification to the CENTREX
group by the second unit (b).
Customer routing is activated only by
the first unit. A second unit must not
be entered.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=CUSTID
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 5+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to a business group specified by the second
unit (b).
to a complex specified by the second unit
(b).
Notes:
- The number of CENTREX complexes is restricted to
255 within a switch.
- To change the assigned CENTREX complex
identification, it has to be canceled first
(parameter CCOSDAT) and then redefined.
If an attendant group of the own CENTREX
group (parameter CXGRP) activates night
service (ACTNS), attendant group calls are
diverted to an attendant group of a foreign
CENTREX group. This foreign CENTREX group is
If the foreign attendant group has
also activated night service (ACTNS),
calls are further diverted to their
night service station.
Notes:
group,this feature has to be canceled first
(parameter CCOSDAT) and then redefined.
Prerequisites:
- An attendant group within the foreign
CENTREX group provides the feature
PRVCSGRP.
Incompatibilities:
- COSDAT=NSN
CENTREX database administration (CXMOD)
of the own CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP)
is done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX group.
This foreign CENTREX group is specified by
Notes:
group, this feature has to be canceled
first (parameter CCOSDAT) and then
redefined.
Prerequisites:
provides the feature PRVCXMOD.
Incompatibilities:
- The MACs of the own CENTREX group
must not provide one of the following features:
CXMOD
PRVCXMOD
USEMDR USE MAC FOR MDR
Message detail recording (MDR) for the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is done by
CENTREX group is specified by the second unit
(b).
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 6+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
redefined.
Prerequisites:
- Message detail recording data is
already specified for the own CENTREX
group (ENTR CXMDR).
- a MAC of the foreign CENTREX group
provides the feature PRVMDR.
Incompatibilities:
- The MACs of the own CENTREX group must not
provide one of the following features:
MDR
PRVMDR
Traffic recording (TRAF) of the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is
done by a MAC of a foreign CENTREX
group. This foreign CENTREX group is
Notes:
redefined.
Prerequisites:
provides the feature PRVTRAF.
Incompatibilities:
- The MACs of the own CENTREX group
must not provide one of the following features:
TRAF
PRVTRAF
CXORIG CENTREX ORIGINATION MARK
An origination mark used for zoning (CR ZOPT),
is specified by the second unit (b).
Assigns the CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) to a
subbusiness group.
Prerequisites:
- COSDAT=BGID
unit (b) is sent, when the key A of the
unit (b) is sent, when the key B of the
unit (b) is sent, when the key C of the
unit (b) is sent, when the key D of the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 7+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
(command CR CAC)
Prerequisites:
(command CR CAC)
Calls from outside the CENTREX group, that
are not answered within the time specified
by the second unit (b) are diverted
to the directory number (CENTREX group
internal or external), which is specified
by the second unit of the parameter DIVDA.
TIMPARK CALL PARK TIMER FOR RETRIEVE
A parked call can be retrieved by a CENTREX
station within the time specified by the
second unit (b).
Attendant performance data (PER) of the own
CENTREX group (parameter CXGRP) is sent to
CENTREX group is specified by the second
unit (b).
Notes:
Prerequisites:
provides the feature PRVPER.
Incompatibilities:
- The MACs of the own CENTREX group must not
provide one of the following features:
PER
PRVPER
Restricts the number of simultaneous incoming
calls from the public network to the value
Restricts the number of simultaneous outgoing
calls into the public network to the value
Assigns the originating mark 1 used for routing
Assigns the originating mark 2 used for zoning
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 8+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: DIGITS=
- DIVBY : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- DIVDA : Up to 23 hexadecimal digits
- NSN : Up to 7 decimal digits
Value: 1..16383
- CUSTROUT : (No second unit)
Value: 2..16,777,215
- USENS : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USECXMOD : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USEMDR : Up to 4 decimal digits
- USETRAF : Up to 4 decimal digits
- CXORIG : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 0..15
Default: 0
Value: 2..65,535
- KEYA : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYB : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYC : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- KEYD : Up to 16 hexadecimal digits
First digit : B, C
- NUMPUBIC : Up to 5 decimal digits
Value: 1..65535
- NUMPUBOG : Up to 5 decimal digits
Value: 1..65535
- TIMPARK : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 1..10
Default: 10 minutes
- TIMDIVDA : Up to 2 decimal digits
Value: 5..60 seconds
- USEPER : Up to 4 decimal digits
Value: 0..3839
Default: 0
Value: 0..255
Default: 0
CCOSDAT CANCEL CL. OF SERV. WITH DATA
with data to be canceled. The corresponding second unit (b)
is also canceled.
Notes:
- When the Diversion On Busy number is canceled,
the class of service DDVBYFN is also
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 9+
MOD CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
canceled implicitly.
Notes:
- When the Diversion Dont Answer number is
canceled, the class of service DDVDAFN is also
NSN NIGHT SERVICE NUMBER
Notes:
- When the customer identification is canceled,
the class of service CUSTROUT is also
Notes:
- When the business group identification is
canceled, COSDAT=SUBBGID and
COS=SUBBGRNG are also canceled
implicitly.
Notes:
- The CENTREX complex membership must not be
canceled, if
- one of the following classes of service with
data is assigned for the CENTREX group:
USECXMOD
USEMDR
USETRAF
USENS
- an attendant group within this CENTREX group
has one of the following diversions assigned:
USECSGRP
USELFCD
- an attendant group within this CENTREX group
provides the feature PRVCSGRP
- a MAC of this CENTREX group provides one of
the following features:
PRVCXMOD
PRVMDR
PRVTRAF
USEMDR USE MAC FOR MDR
Notes:
- When the subbusiness group identification
is canceled, COS=SUBBGRNG is also
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXGRP- 10-
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD CENTREX GROUP
This command calls down the CENTREX traffic data every 15 minutes within the
specified recording period and outputs them to the specified output device.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT.
1. REC CXGRP - NOSEL NO SELECTION OF OUTPUT FORMAT
2. REC CXGRP - SELCTX CENTREX GROUP OUTPUT FORMAT
3. REC CXGRP - SUMMARY SUMMARY OUTPUT FORMAT
1. Input format
NO SELECTION OF OUTPUT FORMAT
This input format is for output of all data, without using any selection.
[ [
[ [
[ [GRP= [ [
[ REC CXGRP : CXGRP= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GRP TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of a traffic object group for
whose elements (a maximum of 512 CENTREX groups) measurements
are to be obtained.
Notes:
- Only valid group names may be entered.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group number. A
maximum of 16 CENTREX group numbers can be linked with &.
Measurement of all CENTREX groups is possible.
output.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 1+
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes:
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 2+
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 3+
REC CXGRP
NOSEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 4+
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CENTREX GROUP OUTPUT FORMAT
This input format selects the CENTREX group basic data
and optionally further data for output.
[ [
[ [
[ [GRP= [ [
[ REC CXGRP : CXGRP= ,FORMAT= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GRP TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of a traffic object group for
whose elements (a maximum of 512 CENTREX groups) measurements
are to be obtained.
Notes:
- Only valid group names may be entered.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the data to be output.
CTX CENTREX GROUP BASIC DATA
ATN ATTENDANT / CONSOLE DATA
[FEA [ FEATURE DATA
!SUM - SUMMARY DATA
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 5+
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 6+
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 7+
REC CXGRP
SELCTX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 8+
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SUMMARY OUTPUT FORMAT
This input format selects only the summary data for output.
The parameter CXGRP accepts only the value X.
[ [
[ REC CXGRP : CXGRP= ,FORMAT= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [
[ [
[ [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the data to be output.
SUM SUMMARY DATA
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes:
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 9+
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 10+
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 11+
REC CXGRP
SUMMARY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC CXGRP- 12-
DISP CXGRPLTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP LTG RELATIONSHIP
This command displays the association of CENTREX groups and LTGs.
This association is a result of the creation of CENTREX stations. A station of
a CENTREX group is connected via a DLU to one or two LTGs. Thus, the command
displays the representation of CENTREX groups at the LTGs.
If the parameter CXGRP is entered, all LTGs where the CENTREX group is
represented are displayed.
If the parameter LTG is entered, all CENTREX groups that are represented on
that LTG are displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [CXGRP=[ ; [
[ DISP CXGRPLTG : LTG= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a Line Trunk Group in the switch.
a-b
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXGRPLTG- 1-
CAN CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES
- CENTREX group resource limits and / or
- directory number reservations.
The command is rejected if the CXGRP is related
to a secured CENTREX business group (BGID) for
which the operator has no administration permission
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,LAC=] <,DN= ,RESLIM=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory, when a directory number will be entered and the
exchange has a multiple directory number volume.
- The parameter DN is required when a LAC is entered.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies an existing directory number or a range of
directory numbers. The number(s) reserved for the given CENTREX group
will be released.
Prerequisites:
- All directory numbers within the given range have to reside in the
same directory number interval.
RESLIM RESOURCE LIMITS
This parameter specifies the resource limits to be canceled.
NUMCPUGR NO. OF CALL PICK UP GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of call pick up
groups created with ENTR CXSUB, parameter COSDAT.
NUMTDU NO. OF TRANSLATION DATA UNITS
Cancel restriction on the number of translation
data units created with CR CXDN or CR CXCPT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXGRPRES- 1+
CAN CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NUMCSGRP NO. OF COMMON SERVICE GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of common service
groups created with CR CSGRP.
NUMCSSUB NO. OF COMMON SERV. SUBSCRIBER
Cancel restriction on the number of common service
subscribers created with ENTR CSSUB.
NUMTGRP NO. OF TASK GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of task groups
created with CR CDS.
NUMCTYPE NO. OF CALL TYPES
Cancel restriction on the number of call types
created with CR CALLTYPE.
NUMQUE NO. OF QUEUES
Cancel restriction on the number of queues
created with ENTR QUE.
SIZEQUE SIZE OF ALL QUEUES IN THE GRP.
Cancel restriction on the combined size of all
queues in the CENTREX group. The size of a queue
is administered with ENTR QUE, parameter SIZE.
NUMMST NO. OF MANAGER/SECRETARY TEAMS
Cancel restriction on the number of
Manager/Secretary teams created with
ENTR CXSUB, parameter MST.
NUMSUPGR NO. OF SUPERVISOR GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of supervisor
groups created with ENTR CSSUB, parameter SUPGRP.
NUMCPUNG NO. OF CPU NOTIFICATION GROUPS
Cancel restriction on the number of call pick up
notification groups created with ENTR CXSUB,
parameter COSDAT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXGRPRES- 2-
DISP CXGRPRES
DNTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES
This command displays the resource data of the specified CENTREX group(s).
The output depends on the input format.
The standard format (DISP CXGRPRES) displays for the given CENTREX group(s):
- the CENTREX group number(s);
- all directory number ranges reserved;
- a list of resources with their limit value and with their currently
used amount.
Only those resources are listed, which are actually used for the CENTREX
group or have a limit specified.
The detailed list with dntype format (DISP CXGRPRES) displays for the given
CENTREX group(s):
- the CENTREX group number(s);
- all individual directory numbers reserved for the given CENTREX groups
and within the given directory number interval;
- for each directory number, its type.
As a default the standard format (DISP CXGRPRES) is applied.
<job number>.
1. DISP CXGRPRES- DNTYPE DETAILED LIST WITH DNTYPE
2. DISP CXGRPRES- STD STANDARD FORMAT
1. Input format
DETAILED LIST WITH DNTYPE
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] ,FORMAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies an existing CENTREX group or a list of CENTREX
groups. This parameter restricts the display to the data of the given
CENTREX group(s).
Notes:
- Leading zeroes may not be entered.
- Up to 10 parameter values can be linked with &.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXGRPRES- 1+
DISP CXGRPRES
DNTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies an existing directory number or directory
number range. It restricts the display to directory numbers
within the range.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number or, if a range is entered, the directory
number boundaries, have to be existing directory numbers.
- For a directory number range, the lower boundary may not exceed
the upper range boundary.
DNTYPE DETAILED LIST WITH DN TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXGRPRES- 2+
DISP CXGRPRES
STD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STANDARD FORMAT
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,FORMAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies an existing CENTREX group or a list of CENTREX
groups. This parameter restricts the display to the data of the given
CENTREX group(s).
Notes:
- Leading zeroes may not be entered.
STD STANDARD OUTPUT FORMAT
This is the default output format
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXGRPRES- 3-
ENTR CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX GROUP RESOURCES
This command
- enters and modifies the CENTREX group resource limitations
and / or
- enters directory number reservations.
An attendant with permission to administer data of his own
CENTREX group or complex (created with ENTR CSSUB,
parameter FEA), may allocate EWSD database resources, which
need to be limited per CENTREX group.
The resources will be restricted to the specified resource
limits for the given CENTREX group. If no limit is
specified for a given resource, the attendant may not
allocate this resource.
If resource limits are specified, they are also valid for
command input by the EWSD operator. If no limit is
specified for a given resource, the use of this resource is
not restricted for the EWSD operator.
A specified directory number (range) will be reserved for the
given CENTREX group, i.e. for assignment of a CENTREX group
membership or creation of an attendant group an attendant may
only access those directory numbers, which are reserved for
the corresponding CENTREX group.
An EWSD operator needs no directory number reservation in
order to assign a CENTREX group membership. But a directory
number which is already reserved for a given CENTREX group,
may not be assigned to a different CENTREX group.
If a directory number is reserved for a CENTREX group, a
CENTREX specific intercept may be applied (created
with CR CXINC), if this number is called.
The command is rejected if the CXGRP is related
to a secured CENTREX business group (BGID) for
which the operator has no administration permission
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CXGRPRES : CXGRP= [,LAC=] <,DN= ,RESLIM=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXGRPRES- 1+
ENTR CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies an existing directory number or a range of
directory numbers. The specified number(s) will be reserved for the
given CENTREX group.
Prerequisites:
- All directory numbers within the given range have to reside in
the same directory number interval.
- No directory number within the given range may be connected to or
reserved for an other than the specified CENTREX group.
RESLIM RESOURCE LIMITS
This parameter specifies the resource limits. The values specify the
maximum number of resources allowed to be allocated by the attendant.
Prerequisites:
- The specified limit for a resource may not be lower than the current
amount of resources in use.
a-b
a: RESOURCE LIMIT
NUMCPUGR NO. OF CALL PICK UP GROUPS
Restricts the number of call pick up groups
created with ENTR CXSUB, parameter COSDAT.
NUMTDU NO. OF TRANSLATION DATA UNITS
Restricts the number of translation data units
created with CR CXDN or CR CXCPT.
NUMCSGRP NO. OF COMMON SERVICE GROUPS
Restricts the number of common service groups
created with CR CSGRP.
NUMCSSUB NO. OF COMMON SERV. SUBSCRIBER
Restricts the number of common service
subscribers created with ENTR CSSUB.
NUMTGRP NO. OF TASK GROUPS
Restricts the number of task groups
created with CR CDS.
NUMCTYPE NO. OF CALL TYPES
Restricts the number of call types
created with CR CALLTYPE.
NUMQUE NO. OF QUEUES
Restricts the number of queues
created with ENTR QUE.
SIZEQUE SIZE OF ALL QUEUES IN THE GRP.
Restricts the combined size of all queues in the
CENTREX group. The size of a queue is administered
with ENTR QUE, parameter SIZE.
NUMMST NO. OF MANAGER/SECRETARY TEAMS
Restricts the number of Manager/Secretary teams
created with ENTR CXSUB, parameter MST.
NUMSUPGR NO. OF SUPERVISOR GROUPS
Restricts the number of supervisor groups
created with ENTR CSSUB, parameter SUPGRP.
NUMCPUNG NO. OF CPU NOTIFICATION GROUPS
Restricts the number of call pick up
notification groups created with ENTR CXSUB,
parameter COSDAT.
b: VALUE=
For each resource, following value ranges are allowed:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXGRPRES- 2+
ENTR CXGRPRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0... 4095 (for NUMCPUGR)
0...65535 (for NUMTDU)
0... 4095 (for NUMCSGRP)
0... 9999 (for NUMCSSUB)
0... 4095 (for NUMTGRP)
0... 4095 (for NUMCTYPE)
0... 4095 (for NUMQUE)
0...65535 (for SIZEQUE)
0... 4095 (for NUMMST)
0... 255 (for NUMSUPGR)
0... 4095 (for NUMCPUNG)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXGRPRES- 3-
CAN CXINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX INTERCEPT
This command cancels a CENTREX group specific intercept identification.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [INCEPT=[ ; [
[ CAN CXINC : NAME= [,CXGRP=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT CENTREX INTERCEPT ID
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which the data are to
be cancelled.
INREST INCOMING RESTRICTION
OUTREST OUTGOING RESTRICTION
NONWORK NON-WORKING CENTREX STATION
UNDEFCOD UNDEFINED ACCESS CODE DIALED
TOLLREST TOLL RESTRICTION
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
TAGNA TASK GROUP NOT ASSISTED
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUING
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which the data are to
be cancelled.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX group for which intercepts can
be administered.
In case the command affects a default intercept (parameter CXGRP is
not specified) it will be executed even if one or more CENTREX groups
This parameter should not be entered if a default intercept is to be
used.
However, default handling is not possible for intercepts with NAME.
Therefore, this parameter is mandatory for NAME intercepts.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXINC- 1-
CR CXINC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX INTERCEPT
This command is used to define CENTREX group specific intercept handling to
make system reaction more flexible for CENTREX customers. The system reactions
are defined with CR INC.
1. CR CXINC - IGNORE IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
2. CR CXINC - NEWCODE ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
3. CR CXINC - NEWDEST RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
4. CR CXINC - TONE SUPPLY WITH A TONE
1. Input format
IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
Input format for creating an intercept code which, when accessed, causes
the originally required connection to be set up after all.
[ [
[ [
[ [INCEPT=[ ; [
[ CR CXINC : NAME= ,INRES= [,CXGRP=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
Sequencing is not allowed.
If a call is queued because no operator is
currently available, an announcement or tone will
be applied by this intercept.
If no operator is available and the queue is full,
the subscriber is informed about this by the
intercept. Afterwards, the call will be released.
If an A-party has the feature SCOACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCOREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an outgoing call is checked as to
whether the called number is in the Blacklist
or not present in the Whitelist. If so, the call
is rejected. The A-party is then informed
accordingly by this intercept, or rerouted to an
attendant.
If a B-party has the feature SCTACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCTREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an incoming call will be checked. If
the A-party number is in the Blacklist or not in
the Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is then informed accordingly by this
intercept, or rerouted to an attendant.
This intercept is used to redirect an A-party to
a service user or to the CENTREX Group Attendant
if the B-party has the feature SVI (Service
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 1+
CR CXINC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Interception) or ACTCCS (Collect Call Screening)
(see CR SUB).
No operator is currently logged into the system.
The subscriber is informed accordingly.
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which data are to
be created.
This parameter can be used to define new intercepts. For more
flexibility of the user resources (e.g. announcements), it is possible
to create a variable number of these intercepts per group. The linkage
between the intercept and the object that uses this resource can be
created by other commands. For addressing the intercept, use its name.
INRES INTERCEPT ADDITIONAL RESULT
This parameter specifies the response which is to be triggered when the
intercept code is accessed.
IGNORE IGNORE REASON FOR TERMINATION
be administered.
used.
However, default handling is not possible for intercepts with
NAME. Therefore, this parameter is mandatory for NAME intercepts.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 2+
CR CXINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
Input format for creating an intercept code via which the digit translator is
re-accessed. An intercept code of this type serves to access an
- announcement or
- operator.
[ [
[ [
[ [INCEPT=[ [
[ CR CXINC : NAME= ,INRES= ,CODE= [,TONE=] [,CXGRP=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
attendant.
(see CR SUB).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 3+
CR CXINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
be created.
NEWCB1 NEW CODE AND SEND B1 NUMBER
NEWCB1NL NEW CODE SEND B1 NUMBER NO LAC
NEWCOD NEW CODE
CODE NEW CODE
The entered value is evaluated as CENTREX internal DN.
All public DN have to be extended with the public network access code
(see command CR CXCPT).
a[-b]
a: DIGITS FOR NEW CODE=
This unit specifies the digit sequence to be used for
retranslation.
b: CATEGORY FOR NEW CODE
CATAC CATEGORY OF ACTUAL CONNECTION
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
This unit specifies the new class to be used for digit
translation. Translation with another class allows the
accessibility of a destination to be restricted
(e.g. in order to prevent the destination being dialed
directly).
Default: CATAC
TONE TONE AND TONE TIME DURATION
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
ACKNTNEG ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE NEGATIVE
ACKNTPOS ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE POSITIVE
CONGTONE ALL TRUNKS BUSY TONE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
This value is not allowed for SEQ=1.
If this value is entered, no further sequence
is allowed.
Unit b cannot be specified for this value.
INFOTONE SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NOTONE NO TONE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 4+
CR CXINC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NUTONE NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE TONE
PROJTON1 PROJECT TONE 1
RNGTONE RINGING TONE
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY TONE
This unit specifies the tone which is to be applied if the
intercept code is accessed. If the INRES parameter is
also specified for the intercept code, the tone is only
applied if the response specified by INRES (e.g. access
an announcement) is not possible.
b: TONE TIME DURATION=
This parameter unit specifies how long (in seconds) the tone
is to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
PROJTON1 = 30
PROJTON2 = 30
PROJTON3 = 30
PROJTON4 = 30
PROJTON5 = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
be administered.
used.
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies the position in which the response created
by this command will be located if several responses are created for
one intercept code. This value must start with 1 and be entered
without gaps.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 5+
CR CXINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
Input format for creating an intercept code reached via a destination area to
incorporate resources (e.g. pool echo suppressors) into the connection.
[ [
[ [
[ [INCEPT=[ [
[ CR CXINC : NAME= ,INRES= ,DEST= [,CXGRP=] [,TONE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
attendant.
(see CR SUB).
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
be created.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 6+
CR CXINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEST DESTINATION AREA NAME
This parameter specifies the destination area to be accessed by the
intercept code.
be administered.
used.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 7+
CR CXINC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
PROJTON1 = 30
PROJTON2 = 30
PROJTON3 = 30
PROJTON4 = 30
PROJTON5 = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
without gaps.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 8+
CR CXINC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SUPPLY WITH A TONE
Input format for creating an intercept code via which an intercept tone is
accessed.
[ [
[ [
[ [INCEPT=[ ; [
[ CR CXINC : NAME= ,TONE= [,CXGRP=] [,SEQ=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be created.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
attendant.
(see CR SUB).
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
be created.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 9+
CR CXINC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
is allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
is to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
PROJTON1 = 30
PROJTON2 = 30
PROJTON3 = 30
PROJTON4 = 30
PROJTON5 = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
be administered.
used.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 10+
CR CXINC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
without gaps.
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXINC- 11-
DISP CXINC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX INTERCEPT
This command displays the intercept identification, intercept result,
destination area name, and the sequence number for a CENTREX group.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CXINC : <INCEPT= ,NAME=> [,CXGRP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be displayed.
Up to 34 intercept identifiers may be linked.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
X ALL VALUES
NAME INTERCEPT NAME
This parameter specifies the intercept name for which the data are to
be displayed.
Up to 34 intercept names may be linked.
be displayed.
It has to be ignored, if a default intercept should be displayed.
For intercepts with NAME default handling is not possible,
therefore this parameter is mandatory for these intercepts.
Up to 34 CENTREX group numbers may be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXINC- 1-
CAN CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX MDR DATA
This command determines
- single call types (CTYP) for which CENTREX Message Detail Recording
for a CENTREX group is not generated any more or
- that the entire CENTREX Message Detail Recording of a CENTREX group is not
generated any more.
Prerequisites:
- Canceling of all MDR data is not allowed, if
an MDR MAC still exists within the own CENTREX group (DISP DSB) or
an MDR MAC of another CENTREX group is used (DISP CXGRP).
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXMDR : CXGRP= [,CTYP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of an existing CENTREX group.
CTYP MDR CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the call types for which MDR records are
not generated any more.
ATTEMPT CALL ATTEMPTS
STST STATION TO STATION CALLS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXMDR- 1-
DISP CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX MDR DATA
This command displays data for CENTREX Message Detail Recording of a
CENTREX group.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CXMDR : CXGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies one or more existing CENTREX group(s).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXMDR- 1-
ENTR CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX MDR DATA
This command is a precondition for CENTREX Message Detail Recording of a
CENTREX group.
If this command is executed for the specified CENTREX group for the
first time, the parameter MDR must be entered.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CXMDR : CXGRP= <,MDR= ,CTYP= ,FRAUD=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
MDR MDR OUTPUT MODE
This parameter specifies the output mode for MDR data sent
to the MDR MAC (CR DSB, parameter FEA).
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT TO MDR MAC
BULK MDR BULK OUTPUT
MDR records are sent to the MDR MAC when
either the MDR buffer is filled or the MDR
time threshold is reached, whichever occurs
first.
The MDR time threshold has to be specified
by the second unit (b).
DEMAND MDR OUTPUT ON DEMAND
MDR records are sent to the MDR MAC when
a transfer request is initiated from the MDR
MAC. If there is no request, MDR records are
sent, when either the MDR buffer is filled or
the MDR time threshold is reached, whichever
occurs first. The MDR time threshold has to be
IMMED MDR IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
An MDR record is sent to the MDR MAC
immediately after its generation.
b: TIME THRESHOLD=
10,20,30,40,50,60, range of decimal numbers
The unit of the time threshold is minutes.
For the identifiers BULK and DEMAND a time
threshold must be specified. For IMMED a time
threshold must not be specified.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXMDR- 1+
ENTR CXMDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CTYP MDR CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the call types for which MDR records are
generated.
ATTEMPT CALL ATTEMPTS
MDR data are generated for attempted calls.
STST STATION TO STATION CALLS
MDR data is collected for CENTREX station
to station calls (both for intercom calls and
remote intercom calls).
Incompatibilities:
- The CENTREX group must not have the following
class of service assigned:
IPNAC
MDR data is generated for implicit public network
calls of stations of the CENTREX group.
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX group must be a CENTREX minigroup,
i.e. the following class of service (CR CXGRP)
must be assigned:
IPNAC
FRAUD FRAUD PROTECTION
This parameter specifies the reaction, if a fraud is
detected.
CONTINUE CONTINUE MDR SERVICE
After detection of a fraud the transfer of
MDR data to the MDR MAC is continued.
STOP STOP MDR SERVICE
After detection of a fraud the transfer of
MDR data to the MDR MAC is stopped.
Default: CONTINUE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXMDR- 2-
CAN CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
- selected CENTREX station data of a CENTREX Private Branch Exchange (PBX),
- the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX PBX.
In order to cancel specific CENTREX data, the corresponding parameters
must be entered. In order to cancel the CENTREX group membership, only the
parameters LAC and DN must be specified.
It is not permissible to cancel the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX PBX
if CENTREX PBX lines still exist for this PBX with individual station data.
It is not permissible to cancel the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX PBX
if teleworkers still exist (see command DISP TW).
When a CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX PBX is cancelled, all queues
still assigned to it (ENTR QUE) are deleted implicitly.
If the CENTREX PBX has existing PBX lines (see DISP PBXLN) and the
CENTREX membership is removed, it is checked if the conversion is possible
in one step. In this case a dangerous command message is output. If the
PBX lines are spread over too many peripheral units (V5IF, DLU, LTG),
then the request is rejected.
In this case the command can be repeated after manual cancellation of one
or more PBX lines.
The request can start a long running job. In general the execution time
depends on the number of PBX lines connected to the PBX.
The command is rejected if the CENTREX PBX is related to a secured
CENTREX Business group (BGID) for which the operator has no
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CXPBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [,COSDAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,NAME=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with a multiple
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the PBX directory number.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of service within a
CENTREX/Business group (when the CENTREX group is assigned to a BGID).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXPBX- 1+
CAN CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CWORIG CALL WAITING ORIGINATING
DIVICO DIV. IMMEDIATE INCOMING ONLY
DIVBYICO DIV. BUSY LINE INCOMING ONLY
DIVDAICO DIV. DONT ANSWER INC. ONLY
DIVGRPO DIV. WITHIN CENTREX GROUP ONLY
AOCHICO ADD ON CONSULT. HOLD INC. ONLY
CTATNO CALL TRANS. INC. TO ATN ONLY
CTGRPO CALL TRANS. WITHIN GROUP ONLY
CTICO CALL TRANS. INCOMING ONLY
CTOGO CALL TRANS. OUTGOING ONLY
RSTORIGF RESTRICT ORIG. CALLS (FULLY)
RSTTERMF RESTRICT TERM. CALLS (FULLY)
RSTTERMS RESTRICT TERM. CALLS (SEMI)
CNIP CALLING NAME ID.PRESENTATION
CONP CONNECTED NAME ID.PRESENTATION
CNIR NAME ID.RESTRICTION
CNIRIGN IGNORE NAME ID.RESTRICTION
RSCINOKW NO KEYWORD FOR REMOTE SCI.
NOATNBI NO ATTENDANT BARGE IN
NOSUBBI NO SUBSCRIBER BARGE IN
NOTRSREM NO TRARSTR SUSP REMOTE
RSTHEXT RESTRICT HUNTING TO EXT CALLS
RSTHINT RESTRICT HUNTING TO INT CALLS
CT1EXTO CALL TRANS. 1 EXTERNAL ONLY
REROUATN REROUTE BY ATTENDANT
PRVDDINO PROVIDE DDI NUMBER
ALLOWMDR ALLOW MDR
SUBBGCOS SUBBUSINESS GROUP COS
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of service
within a Subbusiness group (when the CENTREX group is assigned to a
BGID and a SUBBGID).
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of
service with data to be cancelled. The corresponding second
unit (b) is cancelled implicitly.
CPUGRP CALL PICK UP GROUP
When cancelling the CHSITE, then the default
CHSITE is assigned.
NOHNO NO HUNT NUMBER
This parameter value specifies the no hunt number
to which a call can be terminated if a hunt
restriction is applied.
Prerequisites:
- The no hunt number must not be cancelled when
a hunt restriction (RSTHEXT or RSTHINT) is
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXPBX- 2+
CAN CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
applied on the CENTREX PBX
NAME NAME OF PBX
This parameter specifies the name of the CENTREX PBX used for
identification purposes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXPBX- 3-
DISP CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This command displays CENTREX station data of
- a specified CENTREX PBX,
- all CENTREX PBXs in a directory number interval,
- all CENTREX PBXs of a specified local area code,
- all CENTREX PBXs in the exchange.
CENTREX PBX data is displayed in the following order:
- for a multiple directory number volume, they are displayed per local
area code, for each local area they are sorted by directory numbers
in ascending order,
- for a unique directory number volume, they are sorted by directory
numbers in ascending order without regard to of the local area code.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CXPBX : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CXGRP=] [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [
[ [
[ [,COSDAT=] [,CXDN=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
interval.
Notes:
- For a directory number interval, the lower boundary must not exceed
the upper interval boundary.
Prerequisites:
- The entered directory number or directory number interval must exist.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies an existing CENTREX group
as a selection criteria.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXPBX- 1+
DISP CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
within a CENTREX/Business group as a selection criteria.
ALLOWMDR ALLOW MDR
within a Subbusiness group as a selection criteria.
with data as a selection criteria.
If only the first unit (a) is entered, all CENTREX PBXs are
displayed, who have the entered class of service with data
assigned.
If also the second unit (b) is entered, only those CENTREX PBXs
are displayed, who have the entered class of service with data
together with the input digits assigned.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXPBX- 2+
DISP CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Since each CENTREX PBX is assigned a charging site
as default, for a selection also the second
unit (b) must be specified.
b: DIGITS=
- ARNO : 1..8 decimal digits
- CPUGRP : 1..4095, range of decimal numbers
- CHSITE : 0..255, range of decimal numbers
- NOHNO : 1..7 decimal digits
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX intercom number
This parameter defines the data which is printed.
If the parameter is not defined then a default output format
is determined depending on the entered parameters.
STD STANDARD OUTPUT
The standard output contains the following
information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN and NAME.
DATA DATA OUTPUT
The data output contains the following
information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CATCOD, COS and COSDAT.
ALL ALL OUTPUT
The all output contains all data assigned to
the CENTREX PBX:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN, CATCOD, NAME, COS,
SUBBGCOS and COSDAT.
SUBBGCOS SUBBGCOS OUTPUT
The Subbusiness group classes of service output
contains the following information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, COS and SUBBGCOS.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXPBX- 3-
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This command
- assigns an existing Private Branch Exchange created by CR PBX
as a Multiline Hunt Group (parameter TYPE=MLHG),
as a conventional Private Branch Exchange (parameter TYPE=PBX)
with or without direct inward dialing,
as a Remote Service Number (parameter TYPE=RSN) for Remote
Subscriber Controlled Input (class of service is RSNSCI),
as a PBX which supports the QSIG protocol (parameter TYPE=QSIG),
as a PBX for which the DDI number range can be administered freely
(parameter TYPE=PBXDDINO),
as a Subscriber Hunt Group (parameter TYPE=SHG),
as a PBX which serves as prerequisite to make exactly one Primary
Access member of a Subscriber Hunt Group (parameter TYPE=PA),
as a H323 pure client, with VoIP only (parameter TYPE=H323)
to an existing CENTREX group
- enters CENTREX station data for an existing CENTREX Private Branch Exchange
(This CENTREX station data will be valid for all lines of the PBX as long as
it is not in conflict with the PBX line own data:
classes of service (COS & SUBBGCOS) assigned to the CENTREX PBX, become valid
in addition to the classes of service defined at the CENTREX PBX line level.
However when a COS value is entered at CENTREX PBX level which is incompatibel
with COS or SUBBGCOS values at CENTREX PBX line level, then the command is
not rejected but the values at CENTREX PBX line level take priority over those
at CENTREX PBX level.
The same applies when a SUBBGCOS value is entered at CENTREX PBX level which
should be incompatible with COS or SUBBGCOS values at CENTREX PBX line level.)
When a PBX is assigned to a CENTREX group:
- the input of parameters CXGRP is mandatory,
- the PBX can only be assigned to one CENTREX group,
- if the PBX already has existing lines (see DISP PBXLN), it is checked
if the conversion is possible in one step.
In this case a dangerous command message is output.
If the PBX lines are spread over too many peripheral units
(V5IF, DLU, LTG), then the request is rejected.
In this case the command can be repeated after manual cancellation of one or
more PBX lines.
The request can start a long running job. In general the execution time
depends on the number of PBX lines connected to the PBX.
The following data can be assigned to a Multiline Hunt Group (TYPE=MLHG)
and a Subscriber Hunt Group (TYPE=SHG):
- a CENTREX directory number,
- a customer access treatment code,
- station classes of service,
- station classes of service with data,
- Subbusiness group classes of service,
- a name.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX (TYPE=PBX)
with direct inward dialing and a PBX with free administrable DDI numbers
(TYPE=PBXDDINO):
- station classes of service (only identifiers that concern identification),
- a name.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX (TYPE=PBX) without
direct inward dialing and to a PBX of type Primary Access (TYPE=PA):
- station classes of service (only identifiers that concern identification),
- a name.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX of type Remote Service Number
(TYPE=RSN):
- station classes of service (only identifier RSCINOKW),
- station classes of service with data.
The following data can be assigned to a PBX with Q-signaling (TYPE=QSIG)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 1+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- a customer access treatment code.
The following data can be assigned to a H323 pure client, with VoIP only
(TYPE=H323):
- station classes of service (only identifiers CNIR, RSTTERMS,
RSTTERMF, RSTORIGS, RSTORIGF, PRVDDINO),
- station classes of service with data (only identifiers ARNO, CHSITE) ,
- a name.
Notes:
- Only PBX, which have a CENTREX directory number assigned, can be administered
from a MAC (created by CR DSB).
- If the directory number (DN) is reserved for a CENTREX group
(see DISP CXGRPRES) then this CENTREX group must correspond to the
CENTREX group the PBX and PBX lines will belong to.
- When for the CENTREX PBX specific charging site information is
set up, then this information will be ignored by Call processing
in case of local and remote calls via IN-AWC. Both type of calls will then
be charged by means of the public zoning (SCP returns only public numbers).
Incompatibilities:
- The following PBX operation modes are incompatible with CENTREX:
IBW1TR6
IOG1TR6
IIC1TR6
- The following PBX classes of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
IADIPP
- The following PBX classes of service with data are incompatible with CENTREX:
SERCOMP
OVRFIN1
OVRFIN2
OVRFIN3
OVRFEX
- The following PBX diversion types are incompatible with CENTREX:
ACTDIVCD
DIVCD
DIVCDMOD
The command is rejected if the CENTREX PBX is related to a secured
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CXPBX : [LAC=] ,DN= <,CXGRP= ,CXDN= ,CATCOD= ,COS= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SUBBGCOS= ,COSDAT= ,NAME=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 2+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Input is mandatory if a PBX is to be assigned to a CENTREX group.
Prerequisites:
- The CENTREX directory number for intercom calls is created and
corresponds to the directory number of the PBX.
This parameter specifies the Customer Access Treatment (CAT) code.
All CAT features assigned to the entered CAT code with command
ENTR CXCATFEA may be used.
Default: 0
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes of service within a
CENTREX/Business group (when the CENTREX group is assigned to a BGID).
Values existing for SUBBGCOS are automatically cancelled if the same
values are entered for parameter COS.
Allows an originating CENTREX PBX to wait for
a busy subscriber in the CENTREX/Business group,
even if the terminating subscriber does not have
a call waiting feature.
Restricts the PBX diversion types DIVI.
Call diversion is only allowed for calls from
outside the CENTREX/Business group.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX/Business
group are diverted if the called station is
busy. Calls from within the group receive
busy treatment.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVDA.
group are diverted if the called station
does not answer within a specified time
period. Calls from within the group are not
diverted.
Restricts all variants of call diversion.
Call diversion is only allowed to a destination
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 3+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
which can be reached by a CENTREX internal call.
Restricts the PBX class of service:
- CT.
Only incoming calls from outside the CENTREX/
Business group are allowed to be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
Calls from outside the CENTREX/Business
group are allowed to be transferred to an
attendant only.
This restriction is not valid for A-side
call transfer (CTAS).
The call transfer restrictions CTATNO,
CTGRPO, CTICO and CTOGO are mutually
exclusive. Thus, input of CTATNO deletes
the others.
Call transfer is allowed only, if controller
and add-on subscriber are members of the same
CENTREX/Business group.
exclusive. Thus, input of CTGRPO deletes
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Only calls from outside the CENTREX/Business
group are allowed to be transferred.
The restriction is not valid for A-side call
transfer (CTAS).
exclusive. Thus, input of CTICO deletes
the others.
and add-on subscriber are not member of the
same CENTREX/Business group.
exclusive. Thus, input of CTOGO deletes
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Restricts the origination of calls to CENTREX/
Business group internal calls only.
The restrictions RSTORIGF and RSTORIGS are
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTORIGF
deletes RSTORIGS.
Restricts the reception of calls to CENTREX/
The restrictions RSTTERMF and RSTTERMS are
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTTERMF
deletes RSTTERMS.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 4+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The station may also call a station with call
transfer or call diversion authorization in order
to get a connection outside the CENTREX/Business
group.
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTORIGS
deletes RSTORIGF.
Business group internal calls only. Calls from
outside can be directed to the station concerned
only via stations with a call transfer or call
diversion feature.
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTTERMS
deletes RSTTERMF.
The assigned name of the calling CENTREX station
(parameter NAME) is presented to the connected
CENTREX PBX.
The assigned name of the connected CENTREX
station is presented to the calling CENTREX
PBX.
The presentation of the name of the CENTREX
PBX (CNIP, CONP) is suppressed.
The restriction is ignored if the calling/
connected station has the feature CNIRIGN
assigned.
Ignores the restriction CNIR of the
presentation of the assigned name of the
calling/connected station.
For Remote Subscriber Controlled Input
no keyword is necessary.
Prerequisites:
- Only possible for PBX of TYPE=RSN
which has class of service RSNSCI assigned.
Assigns a privacy profile to the CENTREX
PBX which inhibits the CENTREX attendant
from barging in on an active call.
PBX which inhibits another CENTREX station
Assigns a privacy profile to the CENTREX PBX
which inhibits another CENTREX station from
suspending an active traffic restriction.
Restricts the hunting for external calls only.
No hunting is started for internal calls. In
case of an internal call, the call is diverted
to the no hunt number.
The restrictions RSTHEXT and RSTHINT are
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTHEXT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 5+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
deletes RSTHINT.
Prerequisites:
- the PBX must be of type SHG
- a no hunt number is required (COSDAT=NOHNO)
Restricts the hunting for internal calls only.
No hunting is started for external calls. In
case of an external call, the call is diverted
to the no hunt number.
The restrictions RSTHINT and RSTHEXT are
mutually exclusive. Thus, input of RSTHINT
deletes RSTHEXT.
Prerequisites:
- the PBX must be of type SHG
- a no hunt number is required (COSDAT=NOHNO)
Call transfer is allowed only, if maximum 1
involved party is not member of the same
CENTREX/Business group.(external-to-external
call transfers are not allowed)
The call transfer restriction CT1EXTO can be
combined with CTATNO, CTICO or CTOGO in
order to restrict for those Call Transfer types
also the external-to-external call transfers.
Specifies the CENTREX PBX as Call Forwarding
point to a centralised MAC attendant.
Defines that the CENTREX PBX DDI number will
be treated as intercom number.
Prerequisites:
- Only possible for a PBX which has the class of
service DDI assigned.
ALLOWMDR ALLOW MDR
Indicates that the MDR record generation
should not be suppressed when during the
call MDR data is collected.
Prerequisites:
- Only possible for a PBX which has the class of
service DDI assigned.
- COS=PRVDDINO
within a Subbusiness group (when the CENTREX group is assigned to
a BGID and a SUBBGID).
The classes of service within a Subbusiness group (SUBBGCOS values)
are mutually exclusive with the classes of service within the
Business group (COS values).
Values existing for COS are automatically cancelled if the same values
are entered for parameter SUBBGCOS.
Restricts the PBX diversion types DIVI.
Call diversion is only allowed for calls from
outside the CENTREX Subbusiness group.
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group are diverted if the
called station is busy. Calls from within
the group receive busy treatment.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 6+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Restricts the PBX diversion type DIVDA.
Subbusiness group are diverted if the
called station does not answer within a
specified time period. Calls from within
the group are not diverted.
Restricts the PBX class of service:
- CT.
Only incoming calls from outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group are allowed to be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
Calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
attendant only.
This restriction is not valid for A-side call
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
CENTREX Subbusiness group.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Only calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
same CENTREX Subbusiness group.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
Subbusiness group internal calls only.
deletes RSTORIGS.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 7+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Restricts the reception of calls to CENTREX
deletes RSTTERMS.
to get a connection outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
Subbusiness group internal calls only. Calls
from outside can be directed to the station
concerned only via stations with a call
transfer or call diversion feature.
deletes RSTTERMF.
CENTREX Subbusiness group.(external-to-external
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX classes
of service with data.
The classes of service with data has to be specified
by a second unit (b).
a-b
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
The specified account is used for charging, unless
another account is dialed.
The specified account record number is added to
each AMA record as additional billing information.
This parameter value specifies the call pick-up
group.
If the PBX is the first member for the specified
call pick-up group, the call pick-up group is
implicitly created. In a switch up to 65,535 call
pick-up groups can be created.
All members of one call pick-up group reside in
the same CENTREX group. Within the CENTREX group
the call pick-up group number is unique.
The number of call pick-up groups per CENTREX
group must not exceed the value of NUMCPUGR for
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 8+
ENTR CXPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter RESLIM (see DISP CXGRPRES).
A CENTREX PBX cannot be assigned to more than one
call pick-up group. If the PBX is a member in call
pick-up group A and call pick-up group number B is
specified, the membership is changed from group A
to B.
The assignment of a call pick-up group is rejected
for a CENTREX PBX with :
- terminating line trigger,
- TYPE=PBX,
- TYPE=PBXDDINO,
- TYPE=QSIG,
- TYPE=RSN,
- TYPE=PA
This parameter value specifies the charging site
to which the CENTREX PBX belongs in the CXGRP.
If during the creation of the CENTREX Private
branch exchange no CHSITE is given, then the
CENTREX private branch exchange is assigned the
default CHSITE.
Default: 1
This parameter value specifies the no hunt number
to which a call can be terminated if a hunt
restriction is applied.
Prerequisites:
- The PBX must be of type SHG
- The no hunt number must be a valid intercom
number of the same CENTREX group the CENTREX
PBX is assigned to.
b: DIGITS=
- NOHNO : 1..7 decimal digits
NAME NAME OF PBX
This parameter specifies the name which can be assigned to the
CENTREX PBX for identification purposes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBX- 9-
CAN CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX PBX LINE
This command cancels the specified CENTREX data related to a CENTREX PBX line.
If no CENTREX data is specified (i.e. only the parameters LAC, DN, OPMODE
and LNO are input), all individual CENTREX data of the line is cancelled.
The command is rejected if the CENTREX PBXLN is related to a secured
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CXPBXLN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= [,CATCOD=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [,COSDAT=] [,NAME=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Input is mandatory if the PBX comprises more than one
operating mode.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
Notes:
- If the CAT code is cancelled, the CAT code of the PBX is valid
for this PBX line.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXPBXLN- 1+
CAN CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX line classes of service
within a CENTREX/Business group (when the CENTREX group is
assigned to a BGID).
CNIP CALL. NAME ID.PRESENTATION
CONP CONN. NAME ID.PRESENTATION
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX line classes of
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NO.
NAME NAME OF PBXLN
This parameter specifies the name of the CENTREX PBX line used
for identification purposes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXPBXLN- 2-
DISP CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX PBX LINE
This command displays CENTREX station data of
- a specified line of a CENTREX PBX,
- all lines of an operating mode of a CENTREX PBX,
- all lines of a CENTREX PBX,
- all lines of all CENTREX PBXs in a directory number interval,
- all lines of all CENTREX PBXs of a specified local area code,
- all lines of all CENTREX PBXs in the exchange.
CENTREX lines are displayed per operating mode per CENTREX PBX. The CENTREX
PBXs are listed as follows:
- for a multiple directory number volume they are grouped per local area code,
for each local area they are listed by directory numbers in ascending order,
- for unique directory number volume they are listed by directory numbers in
ascending order without regard to of the local area code.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CXPBXLN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LNO=] [,CXGRP=] [
[ [
[ [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [,COSDAT=] [,CXDN=] [
[ [
[ [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
interval.
Notes:
the upper interval boundary.
Prerequisites:
This parameter specifies an operating mode of the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXPBXLN- 1+
DISP CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a line number of an operating mode of the PBX.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXPBXLN- 2+
DISP CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If only the first unit (a) is entered, all CENTREX PBX lines are
displayed, who have the entered class of service with data
assigned.
If also the second unit (b) is entered, only those CENTREX PBX lines
are displayed, who have the entered class of service with data
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
b: DIGITS=
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX line intercom number
STD STANDARD OUTPUT
information:
LAC, DN, OPMODE, LNO, CXGRP, CXDN, and NAME.
DATA DATA OUTPUT
information:
LAC, DN, OPMODE, LNO, CXGRP, CATCOD, COS,
and COSDAT.
ALL ALL OUTPUT
the CENTREX PBX line:
LAC, DN, OPMODE, LNO, CXGRP, CXDN,
CATCOD, NAME, COS, SUBBGCOS and COSDAT.
LAC, DN, OPMODE, LNO, CXGRP, COS
and SUBBGCOS.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXPBXLN- 3-
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX PBX LINE
This command assigns individual CENTREX station data to a line of a CENTREX
PBX created as a Multiline Hunt Group. (Note, that if no individual CENTREX
station data is assigned to the line, the station data defined at the PBX
level is relevant.)
(Classes of service (COS & SUBBGCOS) assigned to the CENTREX PBX line,
become valid in addition to the classes of service defined at the CENTREX
PBX level.
However when a COS value is entered at CENTREX PBX line level which is
incompatibel with COS or SUBBGCOS values at CENTREX PBX level, then the
command is not rejected but the value at CENTREX PBX line level takes
priority over those at CENTREX PBX level.
The same applies when a SUBBGCOS value is entered at CENTREX PBX line
level which should be incompatible with COS or SUBBGCOS values at
CENTREX PBX level.)
Notes:
- Only lines, which have been assigned a CENTREX directory number, can be
administered from a MAC (created by CR DSB).
- The command is rejected for objects with POTS-feature IADIPP assigned.
The command is rejected if the CENTREX PBXLN is related to a secured
CENTREX Business group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CXPBXLN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= <,CXDN= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CATCOD= ,COS= ,SUBBGCOS= ,COSDAT= ,NAME=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with a multiple directory
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Input is mandatory if the PBX comprises more than one
operating mode.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 1+
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
Prerequisites:
corresponds to the line service number of the PBX line.
- One of the following PBX line classes of service must be assigned:
DCANORM
DCAHUNT
All CAT features assigned to the entered CAT code with
Notes:
- If no customer access treatment (CAT) code is assigned to the
line, the CAT code of the PBX is valid.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX line classes of service within
a CENTREX/Business group (when the CENTREX group is assigned to a
BGID).
Values existing for SUBBGCOS are automatically cancelled if the same
values are entered for parameter COS.
Allows an originating CENTREX PBX line to
wait for a busy subscriber in the same
CENTREX/Business group, even if the
terminating subscriber does not have
a call waiting feature.
Restricts the line diversion types DIVI.
Call diversion is allowed only for calls from
Prerequisites:
- The following PBX line class of service is
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the line diversion type DIVBY.
group are diverted if the called station is
busy. Calls from within the group receive
busy treatment.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the line diversion type DIVDA.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 2+
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
group are diverted if the called station does
not answer within a specified time period.
Calls from within the group are not diverted.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Call diversion is allowed only to a destination
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the PBX line classes of service:
- CALLHOLD
- CONF3
and the PBX class of service CT.
Only incoming calls from outside the
CENTREX/Business group are allowed to be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
attendant only.
the others.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 3+
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
deletes RSTORIGS.
deletes RSTTERMS.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
The station may also call a station
with call transfer or call diversion authorization
in order to get a connection outside the CENTREX/
Business group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
Calls from outside can be directed to the
station concerned only via stations with a call
deletes RSTTERMF.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
The assigned name of the calling CENTREX
station (parameter NAME) is presented to the
connected CENTREX PBX line.
station is presented to the calling
CENTREX PBX line.
PBX line (CNIP, CONP) is suppressed.
assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 4+
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Assigns a privacy profile to the CENTREX PBX line
which inhibits the CENTREX attendant from
barging in on an active call.
barging in on an active call.
suspending an active traffic restriction.
Values existing for COS are automatically cancelled if the same values
are entered for parameter SUBBGCOS.
Restricts the line diversion types DIVI.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the line diversion type DIVBY.
Subbusiness group are diverted if the called
station is busy. Calls from within the group
receive busy treatment.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
Restricts the line diversion type DIVDA.
Subbusiness group are diverted if the called
station does not answer within a specified
time period. Calls from within the group
are not diverted.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 5+
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Restricts the PBX line classes of service:
- CALLHOLD
- CONF3
and the PBX class of service CT.
CENTREX Subbusiness group are allowed to
be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
attendant only.
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
deletes RSTORIGS.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 6+
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
deletes RSTTERMS.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
The station may also call a station
with call transfer or call diversion authorization
in order to get a connection outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
station concerned only via stations with a call
deletes RSTTERMF.
Prerequisites:
required:
DCANORM
This parameter specifies the CENTREX PBX line classes
The classes of service with data has to be specified
a-b
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NO.
Notes:
- If no account record number is assigned, the
account record number specified on PBX level is
valid for the line.
b: DIGITS=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 7+
ENTR CXPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAME NAME OF PBXLN
CENTREX PBX line for identification purposes.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXPBXLN- 8-
DISP CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE
This command displays CENTREX subscriber controled operation
and feature data.
Notes:
- If several parameters are specified at the same time,
only the data which meet all requirements are displayed.
- Initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled input data
will be displayed when no CENTREX group number is specified.
These initial values are valid for all CENTREX groups
of those SCI data never before modified by entering the
specific CENTREX group number within the command MOD CXSCFEA.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CXSCFEA : <CXGRP= ,FEA= ,MARKS= ,RSTSCI=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number which identifies the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- Data of all features for the specified CENTREX group will be
displayed if only this parameter is entered.
- For display of initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled input
data this parameter must be omitted.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX features.
Notes:
- For display of initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled
input data FEA=X-X must be input and parameter CXGRP
must be omitted.
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
DACT DEACTIVATE
ENTR ENTER
DEL DELETE
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
REQALL REQUEST STATUS AND DATA
USE FEATURE USAGE
X ALL VALUES
Indicates the type of activity desired by the CENTREX
station concerning the feature involved.
b: FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSCFEA- 1+
DISP CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIVI DIVERSION IMMEDIATE
DIVBY DIVERSION BUSY LINE
DIVND DIVERSION DO NOT DISTURB
DIVAI DIVERSION TO ANNOU 1 OF 15
DIVIVMS DIVI TO VOICE MAIL SERVICE
DIVBYVMS DIVBY TO VOICE MAIL SERVICE
DIVDAVMS DIVDA TO VOICE MAIL SERVICE
VMSRETR VOICE MAIL SYSTEM RETRIEVAL
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALING
CLIR CALLING LINE PRESENTATION RSTR
HOTLDEL HOT LINE DELAYED
TRARSTR OUTGOING TRAFFIC RESTRICTION
GFRWIAC GEN.FAC.RESET WITH ALARM CALLS
GFRWOAC GEN.FAC.RESET W/O ALARM CALLS
RSTSCI RESTRICTION FOR SCI
RCS REVERSE CHARGE SECURITY
CACO CASUAL APPOINTMENT CALL ORDER
DACO DAILY APPOINTMENT CALL ORDER
CCBS CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUB
CW CALL WAITING
DIVIA DIVERSION INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT
DIVA DIV. TO FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT
SCLSTO SCREENING LIST ORIGINATING
STH STOP HUNT
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LIST DIVERSIONS
SCLSTT SCREENING LIST TERMINATING
SCLSTRCW SCREENING LIST RINGING/CW
DIVIP DIV IMMEDIATE PARALLEL RINGING
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
SCLSTT2 SCREENING LIST TERMINATING 2
MCIREQ MCI ON REQUEST
CCNR CALL COMPLETION NO REPLY
DIVBYQS DIVERSION BUSY QSIG
DIVDAQS DIVERSION DO NOT ANSWER QSIG
DIVIQS DIVERSION IMMEDIATE QSIG
RCREQS REVERSE CHARGING AT SETUP
REJDIV DIVERTED CALL REJECTION
CWIB CALL WAITING ON INTERNET BUSY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSCFEA- 2+
DISP CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCIBI CALL COMPL INTERNET BUSY IMM.
CCIBU CALL COMPL INTERNET BUSY USER
CTC CALL TRANSFER CONNECTIONS
ATNBIWOT ATN. BARGE IN WITHOUT TONE
DIVBS DIV. BUSY LINE W. SCREENING
DIVDS DIV. NO ANSWER WITH SCREENING
SUBST SUBSTITUTE ADMINISTRATION
RNGPRF RINGING PROFILE
TW TELEWORKING
ATNCACO ATTENDANT CACO
ATNDACO ATTENDANT DACO
ATNSACO ATTENDANT SACO
CONFADD CONF. CALL, ADD REM. USER
CONFBEG CONFERENCE CALL, BEGIN
CONFDRP CONF. CALL, DISC. REM. PARTY
CONFISO CONF. CALL, ISOLATE REM. USER
CONFREA CONF. CALL, REATTACH REM. USER
CONFSPL CONF. CALL, SPLIT REM. USER
MLPP M. LEVEL PRECED. AND PREEMPT.
SCLSTO2 SCREENING LIST ORIGINATING 2
SCLIM LIMIT FOR SCLS
SCLSTKO SCREENING LIST FOR KICK OUT
DIVLO DIVERSION ON LOGGED OUT
TWR TELEWORKING
X ALL VALUES
CENTREX station.
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies the marks for a CENTREX subscriber
controled feature.
BLKD SERVICE TYPE BLOCKED
UNBLKD SERVICE TYPE UNBLOCKED
AUTH AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
NOAUTH NO AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
KEYWD KEYWORD REQUIRED
NOKEYWD NO KEYWORD REQUIRED
RSCI REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
NORSCI NO REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
GFR GENERAL FACILITY RESET ALLOWED
NOGFR NO GENERAL FAC. RESET ALLOWED
UI USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
NOUI NO USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
ISCI SCI VIA INTERNET ALLOWED
NOISCI SCI VIA INTERNET NOT ALLOWED
RSTSCI RESTRICTION CLASS FOR SCI
This parameter specifies the restriction class for CENTREX
subscriber controled operation and feature data.
RSTSCI0 NO SCI RESTRICTION
RSTSCI1 SCI RESTRICTION CLASS 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSCFEA- 3-
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CTX SUBSCRIBER CONTROLED FEATURE
This command modifies CENTREX subscriber controled operation and
feature data.
Notes:
- Initial values of CENTREX subscriber controled input data
will be modified when no CENTREX group number is specified.
These initial values are valid for all CENTREX groups
of those SCI data never before modified by entering the
specific CENTREX group number within the command MOD CXSCFEA.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD CXSCFEA : [CXGRP=] ,FEA= <,MARKS= ,RSTSCI= ,INCSUC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,INCERR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number which identifies the CENTREX group.
Notes:
- If this parameter is omitted the initial values of CENTREX
subscriber controled input data will be modified.
- In case the command affects more than one CENTREX group,(parameter
CXGRP is not specified), it will be executed even if one or more
CENTREX groups are related to a BGID for which special operator
permission (command ENTR CXSEC) is necessary.
Prerequisites:
CR CXGRP command.
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies CENTREX features.
a-b
a: ACTIVITY
ACT ACTIVATE
DACT DEACTIVATE
ENTR ENTER
DEL DELETE
REQDAT REQUEST DATA
REQALL REQUEST STATUS AND DATA
USE FEATURE USAGE
X ALL ACTIVITIES
Indicates the type of activity desired by the CENTREX
station concerning the feature involved.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 1+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: FEATURE
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
- Allowed values of parameter MARKS:
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
DIVBY DIVERSION BUSY LINE
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 2+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
DIVAI DIVERSION 1-15 ANNOUNCEMENT
Notes:
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 3+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
- Allowed value of unit 1:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
USE
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
KEYWD (When unit 1 is ACT, DACT, REQSTAT)
ISCI (When unit 1 is ACT, DACT, REQSTAT)
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 4+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOISCI
Notes:
DEL
ENTR
REQDAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DEL
ENTR
REQDAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 5+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 6+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
ENTR
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQSTAT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DACT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DACT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 7+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DEL
ENTR
REQDAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DEL
ENTR
REQDAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DEL
ENTR
REQDAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 8+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
AUTH (When unit 1 is ACT, DACT)
NOAUTH (When unit 1 is REQSTAT)
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
AUTH (When unit 1 is ACT, DACT)
NOAUTH (When unit 1 is REQSTAT)
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 9+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
CW CALL WAITING
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 10+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
DIVIA DIV. INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 11+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
DEL
DELDACT
ENTR
REQALL
REQDAT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ENTR
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 12+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STH STOP HUNT
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
DEL
ENTR
REQDAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 13+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 14+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LIST DIVERSIONS
Notes:
ACT
DACT
DEL
DELDACT
ENTR
REQALL
REQDAT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
DEL
DELDACT
ENTR
REQALL
REQDAT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
SCLSTRCW SCREENING LIST RINGING/CW
Notes:
ACT
DACT
DEL
DELDACT
ENTR
REQALL
REQDAT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
DELDACT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 15+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
DIVIP DIV IMMEDIATE PARALLEL RINGING
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 16+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
SCLSTT2 SCREENING LIST TERMINATING 2
Notes:
ACT
DACT
DEL
ENTR
REQALL
REQDAT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
MCIREQ MCI ON REQUEST
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
DEL
ENTR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 17+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REQDAT
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
DIVBYQS DIVERSION BUSY QSIG
Notes:
DELDACT
ENTRACT
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
DIVDAQS DIVERSION DO NOT ANSWER QSIG
Notes:
DELDACT
ENTRACT
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
DIVIQS DIVERSION IMMEDIATE QSIG
Notes:
DELDACT
ENTRACT
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
RCREQS REVERSE CHARGING AT SETUP
Notes:
- Allowed value for unit 1:
USE
NOAUTH
AUTH
BLKD
NOUI
GFR
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOISCI
REJDIV DIVERTED CALL REJECTION
Notes:
- Allowed values for unit 1:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 18+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
GFR
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
GFR
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
GFR
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
GFR
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 19+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
GFR
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
Notes:
ENTR
DEL
REQDAT
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
CTC CALL TRANSFER CONNECTIONS
Notes:
- Allowed value for unit 1:
DACT
REQSTAT
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
ATNBIWOT ATN. BARGE IN WITHOUT TONE
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
DIVBS DIV BUSY LINE WITH SCREENING
Notes:
DACT
ENTRACT
DELDACT
ACTDAT
REQALL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 20+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
RSCI
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
UI
NOUI
GFR
NOGFR
DIVDS DIV NO ANSWER WITH SCREENING
Notes:
DACT
ENTRACT
DELDACT
ACTDAT
REQALL
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
RSCI
NORSCI
ISCI
NOISCI
UI
NOUI
GFR
NOGFR
SUBST SUBSTITUTE ADMINISTRATION
Notes:
ENTR
DEL
REQDAT
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
Notes:
ACT
DACT
ENTR
DEL
REQALL
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
TW TELEWORKING
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 21+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
ATNCACO ATTENDANT CACO
Notes:
ENTR
DEL
REQDAT
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
ATNDACO ATTENDANT DACO
Notes
ENTR
DEL
REQDAT
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
ATNSACO ATTENDANT SACO
Notes:
ENTR
DEL
REQDAT
AUTH
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
Notes:
DACT
ACTDAT
REQALL
AUTH
KEYWD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 22+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
CONFADD CONF. CALL, ADD REMOTE USER
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
CONFBEG CONFERENCE CALL, BEGIN
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
CONFDRP CONF. CALL, DISC. REM. PARTY
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
CONFISO CONF. CALL, ISOL. REM. USER
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
CONFREA CONF. CALL, REATT. REM. USER
Notes:
USE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 23+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
CONFSPL CONF. CALL, SPLIT REMOTE USER
Notes:
USE
BLKD
UNBLKD
NOAUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
MLPP M. LEVEL PRECED. AND PREEMPT.
Notes:
USE
BLKD
AUTH
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOGFR
NOUI
NOISCI
SCLSTO2 SCREENING LIST ORIGINATING 2
Notes:
ACT
DACT
ENTR
DEL
REQSTAT
REQDAT
REQALL
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
GFR
RSCI
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOISCI
SCLIM LIMIT FOR SCLS
Notes:
ENTR
REQDAT
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
UI
RSCI
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOISCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 24+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
ENTR
DEL
AUTH
KEYWD
BLKD
NOUI
NOGFR
UNBLKD
NOKEYWD
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOTES:
- ALLOWED VALUES OF UNIT 1:
ACTDAT
DACT
DELDACT
ENTRACT
REQALL
- ALLOWED VALUES OF PARAMETER MARKS:
BLKD
UNBLKD
AUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
RSCI
NORSCI
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
NOISCI
TWR TELEWORKING
Notes:
ACT
DACT
REQSTAT
NOAUTH
KEYWD
NOKEYWD
BLKD
UNBLKD
RSCI
NORSCI
NOISCI
NOUI
NOGFR
CENTREX station.
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies the marks for a CENTREX subscriber
controled feature.
BLKD SERVICE TYPE BLKD
UNBLKD SERVICE TYPE UNBLKD
AUTH AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
NOAUTH NO AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED
KEYWD KEYWD REQUIRED
Operator hint:
KEYWD can be entered via MML-command
ENTR KEYWORD.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 25+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOKEYWD NO KEYWORD REQUIRED
RSCI REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
NORSCI NO REMOTE SCI ALLOWED
GFR GENERAL FACILITY RESET ALLOWED
NOGFR NO GENERAL FAC. RESET ALLOWED
UI USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
NOUI NO USER INTERACTION ALLOWED
ISCI SCI VIA INTERNET ALLOWED
NOISCI SCI VIA INTERNET NOT ALLOWED
Allowed values of parameter MARKS are depending
on entered values at parameter FEA. For detailed
information see Notes to the parameter values
(unit 2) of parameter FEA.
Prerequisites :
GFR
NOGFR
UI
NOUI
ISCI
NOISCI
are only allowed for ACTIVITY (UNIT 1) of parameter FEA = X
Default: BLKD
RSTSCI RESTRICTION CLASS FOR SCI
This parameter specifies a restriction class to which CENTREX
subscriber controled features (entered with parameter FEA)
will be assigned.
Restriction classes may be activated by the operator using the
command CR SUB or by the CENTREX station using the previously
created access code for ENTR-RSTSCI.
RSTSCI0 NO SCI RESTRICTION
Default: RSTSCI0
INCSUC INTERCEPT BY SUCCESS
This parameter specifies an intercept identifier
for successful input.
With FEA=USE-nnnnnn parameter INCSUC is not permitted.
SCISUC SCI SUCCESSFUL
SCIUNSUC SCI UNSUCCESSFUL
FEAYACT FEATURE YET ACTIVE
FEAYDACT FEATURE YET DEACTIVE
FEANSUB FEATURE NOT SUBSCRIBED
FEAUNSUC FEATURE UNSUCCESSFUL
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INPACC INPUT ACCEPTED
FEAACT FEATURE ACTIVE
DACHKSUC DATA CHECK SUCCESSFUL
INPTREJ INPUT TEMPORARILY REJECTED
INPREJ INPUT REJECTED
FEAINACT FEATURE INACTIVE
NODATA NO DATA AVAILABLE
DACHKERR DATA CHECK ERROR
REPALC REPEAT ALARM CLOCK
CFWNOREJ CFW NUMBER REJECTED
SCIREP2 SCI RESPONSE 02
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 26+
MOD CXSCFEA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: SCISUC
INCERR INTERCEPT BY ERROR
This parameter specifies an intercept identifier
for unsuccessful input.
With FEA=USE-nnnnnn parameter INCERR is not permitted.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
Default: SCIUNSUC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXSCFEA- 27-
CAN CXSEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX SECURITY
This command removes the association between userid(s) and
CENTREX business group(s).
Notes:
- If the last USERID is cancelled for a specific BGID, then
no special operator permission is necessary for administration
of the BGID and the objects belonging to it (see command
ENTR CXSEC).
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXSEC : BGID= ,USERID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the CENTREX business group(s)
for which the association to userid(s) (see parameter
USERID) is to be removed.
Prerequisites:
- If multiple values for USERID are entered, then
only one value is allowed for BGID.
USERID USER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the userid(s) for which the
association to CENTREX business groups (see parameter
BGID)is to be removed.
Prerequisites:
- If multiple values for BGID are entered, then
only one value is allowed for USERID.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXSEC- 1-
DISP CXSEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX SECURITY
This command displays the association between userid(s) and
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [BGID= [ [
[ DISP CXSEC : USERID= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter causes the display of the associated
userid(s).
This parameter causes the display of the associated
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSEC- 1-
ENTR CXSEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX SECURITY
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CXSEC : BGID= ,USERID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the business group(s) which
is to be secured.
Notes:
- The business group(s) need not to be referenced yet
in the parameter COSDAT of a CR CXGRP command.
Prerequisites:
- If multiple values for USERID are entered, then
only one value is allowed for BGID.
This parameter specifies the userid(s) which is permitted
for administration of the CENTREX business group(s)
and the objects belonging to it.
Prerequisites:
- The USERID must exist (see command CR USERID)
- If multiple values for BGID are entered, then
only one value is allowed for USERID.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSEC- 1-
CAN CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX SUBSCRIBER
- selected CENTREX station data of a CENTREX subscriber,
- the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX subscriber.
If specific CENTREX data is to be cancelled, the corresponding parameters
must be entered. In order to cancel the CENTREX group membership, only the
parameters LAC and DN have to be specified.
It is not permissible to cancel the CENTREX group membership of a CENTREX
subscriber
- if this subscriber still belongs to a common service group (created
with CR CSGRP),
- if the CENTREX directory number of the subscriber is specified as the
link failure call diversion number of a common service group,
night service number of the CENTREX group,
substitute of a Manager/Secretary team member.
The command is rejected if the CENTREX subscriber is related to a secured
Input format
[ [
[ CAN CXSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [,COSDAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,NAME=] [,MST=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber directory number.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX subscriber classes of service
within a CENTREX/Business group (when the CENTREX group is assigned
to a BGID).
CWICO CALL WAITING INCOMING ONLY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXSUB- 1+
CAN CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RSCINOKW NO KEYWORD FOR REMOTE SCI
This parameter specifies the CENTREX subscriber classes of
When cancelling the CHSITE, then the default
CHSITE is assigned.
TWCODN TELEW.COMPANY DIRECTORY NUMBER
TWCOINT TELEW.COMPANY INTERNAL NUMBER
TWCOAC TELEW.COMPANY ACCESS CODE
TWCODNG TELEW.COMPANY GROUP DIR.NUMBER
TWCOINTG TELEW.COMPANY GROUP INT.NUMBER
CPUNGRP CALL PICK UP NOTIFICATION GRP
NAME NAME OF SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the name of the CENTREX subscriber used for
identification purposes.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXSUB- 2+
CAN CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MST MANAGER/SECRETARY TEAM DATA
This parameter specifies the Manager/Secretary team data.
The corresponding second unit is cancelled implicitly.
MSTNO MANAGER/SECRETARY TEAM NUMBER
When entering the MSTNO, all
Manager/Secretary team data is
cancelled for the subscriber.
RNGPRF1 RINGING PROFILE 1
When cancelling the RNGPRF1, then
the default RNGPRF1 is assigned.
When cancelling the RNGPRF2, then
the default RNGPRF2 is assigned.
SUBST SUBSTITUTE
SUBSTMOD SUBSTITUTE MOD. AUTHORIZATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXSUB- 3-
DISP CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX SUBSCRIBER
This command displays the CENTREX station data of
- a specified CENTREX subscriber,
- all CENTREX subscribers in a directory number interval,
- all CENTREX subscribers of a specified local area code,
- all CENTREX subscribers in the exchange.
CENTREX subscriber data is displayed in the following order:
- for multiple directory number volume, they are displayed per local area code,
for each local area they are listed by directory numbers in ascending order,
- for unique directory number volume, they are listed by directory numbers in
ascending order without regard to the local area code.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP CXSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= [,CXGRP=] [,COS=] [,SUBBGCOS=] [
[ [
[ [,COSDAT=] [,CXDN=] [,MST=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number or the directory
number interval.
Notes:
the upper boundary.
Prerequisites:
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSUB- 1+
DISP CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If only the first unit (a) is entered, all CENTREX subscribers are
displayed, who have the entered class of service with data assigned.
If also the second unit (b) is entered, only those CENTREX subscribers
are displayed, who have the entered class of service with data together
with the input digits assigned.
a[-b]
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
Since each CENTREX subscriber is assigned a
charging site as default, for a selection
also the second unit (b) must be specified.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSUB- 2+
DISP CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: DIGITS=
- CPUNGRP: 1..4095, range of decimal numbers
- TWCODN : 1..18 hexadecimal digits
- TWCODNG: 1..18 hexadecimal digits
This parameter specifies the CENTREX subscriber intercom number
This parameter specifies the Manager/Secretary team data
If only the first unit (a) is entered, all CENTREX subscribers are
displayed, who have the entered Manager/Secretary team data assigned.
If also the second unit (b) is entered, only those CENTREX subscribers
are displayed, who have the entered Manager/Secretary team data
a[-b]
a: MANAGER/SECRETRY TEAM DATA
b: DIGITS=
- MSTNO : 1..4095, range of decimal numbers
STD STANDARD OUTPUT
information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN and NAME.
DATA DATA OUTPUT
information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CATCOD, COS and COSDAT.
ALL ALL OUTPUT
the CENTREX subscriber:
LAC, DN, CXGRP, CXDN, CATCOD, NAME,
COS, SUBBGCOS, COSDAT and MST.
LAC, DN, CXGRP, COS and SUBBGCOS.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSUB- 3+
DISP CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSTDATA MANAGER/SECRETARY TEAM OUTPUT
The Manager/Secretary team data output contains
the following information:
LAC, DN, CXGRP and MST.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXSUB- 4-
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CENTREX SUBSCRIBER
This command
- assigns an existing subscriber created by CR SUB
as an analog main station (parameter CAT=MS),
as an analog mobile station (parameter CAT=CTM),
as ISDN EDSS1 subscriber (parameter CAT=IBA),
as a virtual subscriber (parameter CAT=VIRTSUB) with
class of service RSNSCI, SNLUISCI, SNRUISCI,
SNUISCI,SNLUIFS or SNRUIFS assigned to,
as a subscriber without physical access and prepared to
become a CENTREX attendant on a MAC (parameter CAT=IDSB),
as a H323 subscriber with the Full Feature Set subscribed
(parameter CAT=H323FFS),
as a H323 subscriber with the Reduced Feature Set subscribed
(parameter CAT=H323RFS),
as a H323 pure client, with VoIP only
(parameter CAT=H323PURE)
to an existing CENTREX/Business group (when the CENTREX
group is assigned to a BGID)
- enters CENTREX station data for an existing CENTREX subscriber.
When a subscriber is assigned to a CENTREX group:
- the parameter CXGRP must be entered,
- the subscriber can only be assigned to one CENTREX group,
- the subscriber must be connected to a Digital Line Unit (DLU) or a V5
interface (V5IF) via Line Trunk Group B (LTGB).
- the CENTREX directory number for intercom calls is created with the command
CR CXDN and corresponds to the directory number of the subscriber,
- the subscriber must not yet belong to a common service group for OSS.
- the maximum number of 90 CENTREX groups per LTG must not be exceeded.
Notes:
- If a directory number of a Multiple Subscriber Number port is assigned to a
CENTREX group, all other directory numbers of the port should also be made
CENTREX. They can be assigned to different CENTREX groups, but the CENTREX
directory numbers must be unique for the port to identify the origination of
a call. Only one MSN access can become a Manager/Secretary team member.
- A CENTREX subscriber that is assigned to a Common Service Group can not become
a Manager/Secretary team member.
- If the directory number is reserved for a CENTREX group (see DISP CXGRPRES)
then this CENTREX group must correspond to the CENTREX group the subscriber
will belong to.
Incompatibilities:
- For subscribers with CAT=IDSB, the following CENTREX subscriber classes
of service are incompatible:
DIVICO
DIVBYICO
DIVDAICO
DIVGRPO
- The following subscriber line attributes are incompatible with CENTREX:
DIFFRING
ISDN1TR6
- The following subscriber classes of service are incompatible with CENTREX:
ECLN
IADIPP
- The following subscriber classes of service with data are incompatible with
CENTREX:
SERCOMP
- The following subscriber diversion types are incompatible with CENTREX:
ACTDIVCD
DIVCD
DIVCDMOD
The command is rejected if the CENTREX subscriber is related to a secured
CENTREX Business group (BGID) for which the operator has no administration
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 1+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR CXSUB : [LAC=] ,DN= <,CXGRP= ,CXDN= ,CATCOD= ,COS= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SUBBGCOS= ,COSDAT= ,NAME= ,MST=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber directory number.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
Input is mandatory if a subscriber is to be assigned to a CENTREX
group.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if a subscriber is to be assigned to a
CENTREX group.
Exceptions:
- Subscriber is a teleworker in his home exchange (TWCODN).
- Subscriber is member of a Subscriber Hunt Group (SHG).
- If the CENTREX directory number of the subscriber is modified,
then the old CENTREX directory number may not be specified as:
- the night service number of the CENTREX group,
- the link failure call diversion number of a common service group.
Prerequisites:
corresponds to the directory number of the subscriber.
All CAT features assigned to the entered CAT code with command
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 2+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
within a CENTREX/Business group (when the CENTREX group is assigned
to a BGID).
The classes of service within a Business group (COS values)
Subbusiness group (SUBBGCOS values).
Values existing for SUBBGCOS are automatically cancelled if
the same values are entered for parameter COS.
Restricts call waiting to calls from outside the
Allows an originating CENTREX subscriber to
wait for a busy subscriber in the CENTREX/
Business group, even if the terminating subscriber
does not have a call waiting feature.
Restricts the subscriber diversion types DIVI.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX/Business group
are diverted if the called station is busy.
Calls from within the group receive
busy treatment.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVDA.
All calls from outside the CENTREX/Business group
are diverted if the called station does not
answer within a specified time period. Calls from
within the group are not diverted.
Call diversion is allowed only to a destination
Restricts the subscriber classes of service:
- CALLHOLD
- CONF3
- CT
CENTREX/Business group are allowed to be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
attendant only.
the others.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 3+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
deletes RSTORIGS.
deletes RSTTERMS.
to get a connection outside the CENTREX/Business
group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
station concerned only via stations with a
call transfer or call diversion feature.
deletes RSTTERMF.
The assigned name of the calling CENTREX
station (parameter NAME) is presented
to the connected CENTREX subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 4+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
station is presented to the calling
CENTREX subscriber.
subscriber (CNIP, CONP) is suppressed.
assigned.
For Remote Subscriber Controlled Input no keyword
is necessary.
Prerequisites:
- Only possible for virtual subscribers which have
class of service RSNSCI or SNRUISCI assigned.
subscriber which inhibits the CENTREX attendant
subscriber which inhibits another
CENTREX station from barging in on an
active call.
subscriber which inhibits another CENTREX
station from suspending an active traffic
restriction.
Specifies the CENTREX subscriber as Call
Forwarding point to a centralised MAC attendant.
Values existing for COS are automatically cancelled if the same
values are entered for parameter SUBBGCOS.
Restricts call waiting to calls from outside the
Subbusiness group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 5+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Restricts the subscriber diversion types DIVI.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVBY.
All calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
group are diverted if the called station is busy.
Calls from within the group receive
busy treatment.
Restricts the subscriber diversion type DIVDA.
All calls from outside the CENTREX Subbusiness
group are diverted if the called station does not
answer within a specified time period. Calls from
within the group are not diverted.
Restricts the subscriber classes of service:
- CALLHOLD
- CONF3
- CT
CENTREX Subbusiness group are allowed to
be held.
Incompatibilities:
- CTGRPO
- CTOGO
attendant only.
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
transfer (CTAS).
the others.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 6+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the others.
Incompatibilities:
- AOCHICO
deletes RSTORIGS.
deletes RSTTERMS.
to get a connection outside the CENTREX
Subbusiness group.
deletes RSTORIGF.
station concerned only via stations with a
call transfer or call diversion feature.
deletes RSTTERMF.
This parameter specifies the CENTREX subscriber classes
The classes of service with data have to be specified
a-b
a: CLASS OF SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 7+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter value specifies the call
pick-up group.
If the subscriber is the first member
for the specified call pick-up group,
the call pick-up group is implicitly
created. In a switch up to 65,535 call
pick-up groups can be created.
All members of one call pick-up group
reside in the same CENTREX group.
Within the CENTREX group the call pick-up
group number is unique.
The number of call pick-up groups per
CENTREX group must not exceed the value
of NUMCPUGR for parameter RESLIM
(see DISP CXGRPRES).
A CENTREX subscriber cannot be assigned
to more than one call pick-up group.
If the subscriber is a member in call
pick-up group A and call pick-up group
number B is specified, the membership
is changed from group A to B.
The assignment of a call pick-up group is
rejected for a CENTREX subscriber with
terminating line trigger.
This parameter value specifies the charging site
to which the CENTREX subscriber belongs in the
CXGRP.
If during the creation of the CENTREX subscriber
no CHSITE is given, then the CENTREX subscriber
is assigned the default CHSITE.
Default: 1
This parameter value specifies the
subscriber as teleworker in his home
exchange and assigns the teleworkers
company directory number.
TWCOINT TELEW.COMPANY INTERNAL NUMBER
company internal number of a
teleworker in his home exchange.
Notes:
- The parameter value is mandatory
if the subscriber has no CXDN.
Prerequisites:
- The parameter value TWCODN must
have been entered.
TWCOAC TELEW.COMPANY ACCESS CODE
the company access code of a
teleworker in his home exchange.
Prerequisites:
- The parameter value TWCODN must
have been entered.
This parameter assigns the public directory
number of the teleworkers company CENTREX
group.
Prerequisites:
- The parameter value TWCODN must have been
entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 8+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TWCOINTG TELEW.COMPANY GROUP INT.NUMBER
This parameter value specifies the company
internal number of a teleworker in his home
exchange, which must be used together with
TWCODNG to reach the teleworker in his company
exchange.
Prerequisites:
- The parameter value TWCODNG must have been
entered.
This parameter value specifies the call
pick-up notification group. IP-subscriber
within a Call pick-up notification group
are notified, when a call is ringing at
another subscriber in the same group. The
call can be picked up via direct call pickup.
If the subscriber is the first member
for the specified call pick-up notification
group, the call pick-up notification group is
implicitly created. In a switch up to 65,535
call pick-up notification groups can be created.
All members of one call pick-up notification
group reside in the same CENTREX group.
Within the CENTREX group the call pick-up
notification group number is unique.
The number of call pick-up notification groups
per CENTREX group must not exceed the value
of NUMCPUNG for parameter RESLIM
A CENTREX subscriber cannot be assigned
to more than one call pick-up notification group.
To change the assignment of a call pick-up
notification group, the old group has to be
removed first, then the new goup can be assigned.
b: DIGITS=
- CPUNGRP : 1..4095, range of decimal numbers
- TWCODN : 1..18 hexadecimal digits
- TWCOINT : 1..7 decimal digits
- TWCOAC : 1..5 hexadecimal digits
- TWCODNG : 1..18 hexadecimal digits
- TWCOINTG : 1..7 decimal digits
NAME NAME OF SUBSCRIBER
CENTREX subscriber for identification purposes.
This parameter specifies the Manager/Secretary team data.
a[-b]
a: MANAGER/SECRETARY TEAM DATA
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 9+
ENTR CXSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Manager/Secretary team.
The parameter value is a prerequisite for
all Manager/Secretary related identifiers.
If the subscriber is the first member for the
specified Manager/Secretary team, then the
Manager/Secretary team is created implicitly.
In a switch up to 65,535 Manager/Secretary
teams can be created.
The number of Manager/Secretary teams per
CENTREX group must not exceed the value of
NUMMST for parameter RESLIM
A CENTREX subscriber cannot be assigned to
more than one Manager/Secretary team.
This parameter value assigns one of the
ringing profiles pre-defined on office
level to the Manager/Secretary team
members ringing profile 1.
Default: 1
This parameter value assigns one of the
ringing profiles pre-defined on office
level to the Manager/Secretary team
members ringing profile 2.
Default: 2
ACTPRF ACTIVATE PROFILE
This parameter value activates:
- ringing profile 0 defined on office
level (not administrable)
- ringing profile 1 (RNGPRF1) of the
Manager/Secretary team member.
- ringing profile 2 (RNGPRF2) of the
Manager/Secretary team member.
Default: 0
SUBST SUBSTITUTE
This parameter value specifies the intercom
number of the substitute that is appointed
to the Manager/Secretary team member.
Each Manager/Secretary team member can have
assigned one substitute only of the own
Manager/Secretary team.
SUBSTMOD SUBSTITUTE MOD. AUTHORIZATION
This parameter value specifies that the
Manager/Secretary team member is authorized
to assign and modify his substitute.
Notes:
- For this value no second unit can be entered.
b: DIGITS=
- MSTNO : 1..4095, range of decimal numbers
- RNGPRF1 : 0..255, range of decimal numbers
- RNGPRF2 : 0..255, range of decimal numbers
- ACTPRF : 0..2, range of decimal numbers
- SUBST : 1..7 decimal digits
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR CXSUB- 10-
CAN CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command cancels a CENTREX zone point for a CENTREX group.
In order to cancel a CENTREX zone point, the complete path
(TSITE, OSITE, TMQ) must be entered.
Notes:
- For intercom calls to sites that have no CENTREX zone point created
the default zoning result is enabled. The same tariff rates as for
public calls are applied. The billing method can be modified with
the command MOD CXZOPT.
- The command is rejected if the CXGRP belongs to a secured
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CXZOPT : CXGRP= ,TSITE= [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TSITE TERMINATING SITE
This parameter specifies the charging site of the
called party.
OSITE ORIGINATING SITE
calling party.
TMQ TRANSMISSION MEDIUM QUALITY
This parameter specifies the Transmission Medium
Quality the CENTREX zone point is depending on.
VOICE VOICE
HSDATA HIGH SPEED DATA
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN CXZOPT- 1-
CR CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command creates an entry in the CENTREX zone translator.
The CENTREX zone translator offers the possibility to a CENTREX
group to apply a specific charging for intercom calls, e.g.
apply reduced tariffs, apply charge free, generate AMA-records.
The destination of an intercom call is specified by the charging
site of the called party. Optional parameters are the charging
site of the calling party for origin dependency and the
Transmission Medium Quality of the call.
The charging site of the called party is retrieved from the
subscriber database in case of CENTREX group internal traffic and
from the CENTREX digit translator in case of CENTREX group
external traffic.
Notes:
- For intercom calls to sites that have no CENTREX zone point created,
the default zoning result is enabled. The same tariff rates as for public
calls are applied. The billing method can be modified with the
command MOD CXZOPT.
- If the command CR CXGRP: COS=AWC or COS=AWCRMT
was entered, it is not effective to create CENTREX zone
points for local & remote or remote respectively, because
charging sites are not considered for Area Wide CENTREX
calls that are processed with trigger detection point 2.
Prerequisites:
- Entering a zone number (CHRGIND = ZONE - <no>) is only
accepted, if this zone has at least one tariff assigned. Refer to
ENTR TAR.
Input format
[ [
[ CR CXZOPT : CXGRP= ,TSITE= [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] ,CHRGIND= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,BILLING= [,CXCHCNTR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
called party.
calling party.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXZOPT- 1+
CR CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Quality values the CENTREX zone point is depending on.
VOICE VOICE
CHRGIND CHARGING INDICATOR
This parameter specifies what tariff rate will be charged
for the call.
a[-b]
a: CHARGING INDICATOR
NOPULSE NO CHARGE PULSE GENERATION
No tariff rate will be charged for the call.
ZONE ZONE
The tariff rate the call is charged for is
determined by the zone number that is
entered in unit b.
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Zone number is mandatory if unit a = ZONE,
The zone numbers 0, 127 and 255 are reserved by
the system.
Entering a zone number is only accepted, if it has at
least one tariff assigned. Refer to ENTR TAR.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the registration method that will
be used to bill the call.
Notes:
- The parameter BILLING is designed to enter multiple values
linked with &. However, this possibility is blocked because
no customer requirements exist.
METERING SUBSCRIBER PULSE METERING
METERING is only accepted, if a charge counter
CXCHCNTR is also assigned to this CENTREX zone
point.
NOREG NO REGISTRATION
NOREG offers the possibility e.g. to disable the
generation of AMA-records for intercom calls that
are charge free (CHRGIND = NOPULSE).
CXCHCNTR CENTREX CHARGE COUNTERS
This parameter specifies the charge counters.
Notes:
- All five counters (CNTR1 to CNTR5) can be used as CENTREX
charge counter.
- The same counter must not be used for charging and call counting
purposes within the same switch.
Prerequisites:
- Assigning one or more charge counters with the parameter CXCHCNTR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXZOPT- 2+
CR CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is only allowed, when BILLING = METERING is entered as well.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR CXZOPT- 3-
DISP CXZOPT
DSPFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command displays the CENTREX zone points according
to the entered parameters.
1. DISP CXZOPT - DSPFORM DISPLAY ALL USED ZONE NUMBERS
2. DISP CXZOPT - DSPPARAM DISPLAY OF ZONE DATA ACCORDING CRITERIA
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL USED ZONE NUMBERS
This path is used to display all zone numbers
in use by any CENTREX zone point.
[ [
[ DISP CXZOPT : FORMAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT FORMAT OF THE MASK TO DISPLAY
This parameter specifies which data are to be displayed.
USEDZONO DISPLAY ALL USED ZONES
This parameter value initiates the display
of all zone numbers which are assigned to
a zone point of any CENTREX group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXZOPT- 1+
DISP CXZOPT
DSPPARAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY OF ZONE DATA ACCORDING CRITERIA
This path is used to display specific zone data.
Which data is to be displayed can be specified
using the different parameters
[ [
[ DISP CXZOPT : <CXGRP= ,CHRGIND=> [,BILLING=] [,TSITE=] [
[ [
[ [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- This parameter is mandatory, except if a search for a specific
zone number is performed with CHRGIND = ZONE.
If no CENTREX group number is entered, only the data that is needed
to cancel the CENTREX zone point are displayed.
for the call.
ZONE ZONE
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the registration method that will
be used to bill the call.
called party.
calling party.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXZOPT- 2+
DISP CXZOPT
DSPPARAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOICE VOICE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP CXZOPT- 3-
MOD CXZOPT
CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT
This command is used to modify the zoning result of a CENTREX
zone point or to modify the billing method of the default zoning
result. The default zoning result applies the same tariff rates
as for public calls and is enabled for intercom calls to sites
that have no CENTREX zone point administered.
Notes:
- If intercom calls to a specific site should no longer be charged
in an own way, cancel the CENTREX zone point of this site to enable
the default zoning result. Refer to CAN CXZOPT for details.
1. MOD CXZOPT - CXZOPT MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT
2. MOD CXZOPT - DEFZORES MODIFY DEFAULT ZONING RESULT
1. Input format
MODIFY CENTREX ZONE POINT
This path is used to modify the zoning result of an existing
CENTREX zone point.
[ [
[ MOD CXZOPT : CXGRP= ,TSITE= [,OSITE=] [,TMQ=] <,CHRGIND= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,BILLING= ,CBILLING= ,CXCHCNTR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
called party.
calling party.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXZOPT- 1+
MOD CXZOPT
CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOICE VOICE
for the call.
a[-b]
a: CHARGING INDICATOR
No tariff rate will be charged for the call.
ZONE ZONE
The tariff rate the call is charged for is
determined by the zone number that is
entered in unit b.
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Zone number is mandatory if unit a = ZONE,
The zone numbers 0, 127 and 255 are reserved by
the system.
Entering a zone number is only accepted, if it has at
least one tariff assigned. Refer to ENTR TAR.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter enters a registration method.
Notes:
METERING is only accepted, if a charge counter
CXCHCNTR is or has been assigned to this CENTREX
zone point.
NOREG offers the possibility e.g. to disable the
generation of AMA-records for intercom calls that
are charge free (CHRGIND = NOPULSE).
CBILLING CANCEL BILLING
This parameter deletes a registration method.
Notes:
- The parameter CBILLING is designed to enter multiple values
When METERING is cancelled, the charge counters
CXCHCNTR are cancelled too.
If NOREG is cancelled, then the registration of
the charges must be defined in this exchange
by assigning one of the values AMA or METERING
with the BILLING parameter.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXZOPT- 2+
MOD CXZOPT
CXZOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CXCHCNTR CENTREX CHARGE COUNTERS
This parameter specifies the charge counters.
The previous counter assignment is overwritten with the new one.
Notes:
- All five counters (CNTR1 to CNTR5) can be used as CENTREX
charge counter.
- The same counter must not be used for charging and call counting
purposes within the same switch.
Prerequisites:
- Assigning one or more charge counters with the parameter CXCHCNTR
is only allowed, when BILLING = METERING is or has been assigned
to this CENTREX zone point.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXZOPT- 3+
MOD CXZOPT
DEFZORES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DEFAULT ZONING RESULT
This path is used to modify the billing method of the default
zoning result. The default zoning result applies the same tariff
rates as for public calls and is enabled for intercom calls to
sites that have no CENTREX zone point administered.
The command offers the possibility to activate AMA.
In case AMA is activated, the billing method from the public
zone point is disabled.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CXZOPT : CXGRP= <,BILLING= ,CBILLING=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BILLING BILLING
This parameter enters a registration method.
Notes:
PUBREG PUBLIC REGISTRATION
The registration of the charges is done
according to the registration in the public zone
translator. The public number of the call is used
to access the public zone translator.
This parameter deletes a registration method.
Notes:
- The parameter CBILLING is designed to enter multiple values
PUBREG PUBLIC REGISTRATION
If PUBREG is cancelled, then the registration
of the charges must be assigned with
BILLING = AMA.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD CXZOPT- 4-
REL CYCFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CYCLIC FILE
This command releases the last saved data in the specified cyclic file
for overwriting. In addition, an entry is made in the administrative
part of the file stating that the next save is to be started from the
oldest record that has not yet been saved.
Prerequisite:
- The file must not be in the process of being saved.
- The file must be a cyclic file.
- The file must have been saved at least once before.
Notes:
- If no data to be released exist (file was not copied at least once),
or if the copied part of the file was already overwritten, it is
possible that command execution is reported (EXECUTED) but that the
occupancy level of the file does not change.
Input format
[ [
[ REL CYCFILE : FILE= [,UNCOND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk file.
The following characters must not be used:
- A succession of periods (...)
- A single period, or a combination ending in a period.
- A single asterisk, or a combination ending in an asterisk.
- A single X.
+,%,#
This parameter allows files to be deleted if they have been
transferred at least once to an external data carrier, even
if backup copies are missing.
N CHECK EXECUTED COPIES
NO CHECK EXECUTED COPIES
Y CHECK FILE TRANSFERRED ONCE
YES CHECK FILE TRANSFERRED ONCE
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REL CYCFILE- 1-
START DB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START DATA BASE
This command starts processes necessary to create and populate the Data Base.
Notes:
recovery).
Input format
[ [
[ START DB ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START DB- 1-
ACT DBQUERY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE DATABASE QUERY
This command activates a database query to create a file on disc with
data related to unconnected ports or with connected and unconnected ports.
The query can be performed on :
- all hardware created on the local exchange,
- a single DLU,
- a single LTG,
- a single V5IF.
Prerequisites:
- No file for the same query (FREE/ALL) may exist.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,DLU= [[ [
[ ACT DBQUERY : QUERY= [,LTG= [ [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [[,V5IF=[[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
QUERY QUERY TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of query to be activated.
FREE FREE PORTS
ALL ALL PORTS
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET NUMBER=
V5IF V5 INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the V5 interface.
FORMAT FORMAT TYPE
This parameter specifies the display format of the LTG in the
BUBFU file.
- New format : 0
- Old format : 1
Incompabilities:
Is the old format entered, the first unit of LTG has to be in
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT DBQUERY- 1+
ACT DBQUERY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the range 0...7
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT DBQUERY- 2-
DISP DBSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DATA BASE DESCRIPTION
This command enables the display of information about the expandable
part of database. Parameters can be input in continuation mode.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP DBSIZE : [DPUSED=] [,GROUP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPUSED DISPLAY PERCENT USED
This parameter specifies the displayed information.
Default is NO.
YES PERCENT USED DISPLAY
Input of YES or Y includes the display of
filling levels of the expandable data arrays
specified by the group parameter.
Y PERCENT USED DISPLAY
See YES.
NO NO PERCENT USED DISPLAY
Input of NO or N or no input excludes the
display of filling levels of the expandable data
arrays specified by group parameter.
N NO PERCENT USED DISPLAY
See NO.
GROUP NAME OF EXPANDABLE GROUP
Input of group names (three to five characters) in continuation mode
restricts the display of information to those groups. If the
parameter is omitted, all group information is displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DBSIZE- 1-
MOD DBSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DB-SIZE
This command expands the areas of database. This command is part of
the file generation concept of CP113. The command always creates a new
file generation with modified SY.TASKLIB and SY.SEMILIB by expanding
the database. The files SY.SIMP and SY.LOADLIB.LA will be copied
from the current generation. All other files will be connected from
the current generation without any change.
Depending on the system state the new generation will be
- set valid and introduced into the system immediately by
Recovery .
- set blocked.
It is possible to repeat the parameters of this command up to
100 times.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DBSIZE : GROUP= ,SIZE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GROUP NAME OF EXPANDABLE GROUP
This parameter specifies a group of modules with expandable
structures of data to be expanded together.
.,+,*,%,#,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
SIZE WANTED SIZE OF EXP. GROUP
This parameter specifies the desired number of elements of an
expandable structure of data. The given value has to be greater than
the actual number of elements and less then or equal to the maximum
number of elements.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DBSIZE- 1-
DIAG DCR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER
This command initiates LTG digital code receiver diagnosis.
ACT or CBL and the associated DIU must be in the
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG DCR : LTG= ,DCR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
DCR DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER
This parameter specifies the position of the DCR within
the LTG. A DCR is allocated to the DIU with the same
number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG DCR- 1-
DIAG DES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR
This command is necessary to diagnose a digital echo
suppressor in an LTG.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG DES : LTG= ,DES= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
DES DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR
This parameter specifies the position of the DES within
the LTG. A DES is allocated to the DIU with the same
number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG DES- 1-
ACT DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE DESTINATION
This command activates the specified destination for carrier selection.
This destination may be either a newly created destination for carrier
selection (ENTR DESTDAT) or an already used destination for carrier
selection, which was expanded beforehand (MOD DESTDAT).
The necessity for another activation of an already earlier activated
destination for carrier selection may result from the change of quotas or
trunk group sizes within an active carrier quota group (MOD CQDAT).
Prerequisites:
- The destination is created.
- It is a destination for carrier selection.
- Each assigned carrier specific destination has at least one route, except
for the case, that the specified carrier is deactivated within the quota
group.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT DEST : DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT DEST- 1-
CAN DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION
This command cancels a standard destination or a destination with new code.
Carrier destinations may be cancelled automatically, if the assignment to
the superior destination of carrier selection was removed with the help of
a MOD DESTDAT or CAN DESTDAT command. If they have been transformed
into standard destinations, they may be cancelled with CAN DEST.
Destinations for carrier selection may only be cancelled, if they were
deactivated first with the help of the command DACT DEST and afterwards
transformed into standard destinations with the help of the command
CAN DESTDAT.
Prerequisites:
- There must be no code point or test point in existence (created) that refers
to this destination.
- There must be no code point group in existence referring to this destination.
- There must be no operator position point in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no centrex code point in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no centrex directory number in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no directory number destination in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no network management traffic data in existence referring to
this destination.
- There must be no route in existence to this destination.
- There must be no carrier data referring to this destination.
- There must be no intercept code data referring to this destination.
- There must be no call booking limit referring to this destination.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DEST : DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DEST- 1-
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DESTINATION
This command creates a destination. A destination is normally accessed via
code points. A distinction is made between different types of
destinations, depending on the further treatment of call requests:
- Standard Destinations
These access routes are for trunk group clusters, trunk groups, trunk work
station groups, test equipment, announcement trunk groups, call types and
digit conversion masks addressing PBXs.
- Destinations with new code translation
These are used to access another destination with aid of repeated digit
translation (Call Processing).
These destinations cannot be linked to an optimized dynamic routing
(ODR)-list.
- Destinations for carrier selection and carrier destinations
These are required for conditional alternative routing. Destinations for
carrier selection are initially created as standard destinations
(ENTR DESTDAT).
These destinations cannot be linked to an optimized dynamic routing
(ODR)-list.
Prerequisites:
- The destination does not yet exist.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination
area name, the range of values must be extended with the
command MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
1. CR DEST - RETRANS DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
2. CR DEST - STANDARD STANDARD DESTINATION
1. Input format
DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
This input format is entered for destinations with retranslation.
Destinations with new code replace the originally dialed digit combination
with a new digit combination specified in the parameter NEWCODE. This
happens independently of the digit combination which led to the destination
with new code, i.e. many code points may refer to the same destination.
Immediately after the code replacement a new digit translation process
is started in the own switch.
Destinations with NEWCAC replaces the existing carrier access code or
define a new carrier access code.
Immediately after the carrier access code replacement a new digit
translation is started in the own switch.
Destinations with NEWORIG1 replaces the existing originating mark 1 or
define an originating mark 1.
Immediately after the originating mark 1 replacement a new digit
translation is started in the own switch.
A destination that has a digit conversion assigned allows another
destination to be accessed thanks to the new digit translation.
The CONVCODE, NEWCODE, NEWCAC and NEWORIG1 parameters perform a
similar function (i.e. starting a new digit translation).
CONVCODE refers to the dialed digits, i.e. it permits modification of
digits that have not yet been translated (B - DN), but leaves any dialed
area code unchanged that is administered as a LAC in the own switch.
NEWCODE performs a complete replacement of the codepoint, i.e. it allows
the LAC to be replaced, but leaves the B - DN unchanged.
NEWCAC performs a replacement of the carrier access code.
NEWORIG1 performs a replacement of the originating mark 1.
Note:
Combination of NEWCODE with NEWCAC and NEWORIG1 and CONVCODE with
NEWCAC and NEWORIG1 are possible.
Combination of NEWCODE and CONVCODE is not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DEST- 1+
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DEST : DEST= <,NEWCODE= ,NEWCAC= ,NEWORIG1= ,CONVCODE=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination name.
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code with which the
originally dialed code is replaced.
This parameter specifies the code which replaces an existing
carrier access code or which defines a new carrier access
code if none exists.
Note:
- The existence of this parameter is not checked
in the carrier database.
NEWORIG1 NEW ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code which replaces
an existing originating code or which defines a new
originating code if none exists.
CONVCODE CONVERTED CODE
This parameter specifies a conversion mask which is used
to modify the originally dialed code.
Any dialed area code which is administered as a local
area code in the own switch remains unchanged.
The modified code is immediately retranslated.
Valid input characteres:
0-9, A-F, #, *, +, ., X
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask
consisting of control characters and digits.
The control characters have the following significance:
X : The digit of the old code is left as it is.
. : The digit of the old code is deleted.
+ : The digits following this character, up to the next
control character, are inserted.
: Digits without a preceeding "+" replace the old code.
Input is subject to the following conditions:
- At least one modification in the code is done.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DEST- 2+
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Not more than two modifications may be made.
- Per modification, a maximum of 15 digits can be affected
but the total of both modifications is restricted to 24.
Example:
CONVCODE = 123xx. specifies that the first 3 digits of the
existing dial information are replaced by 1 2 3, the next
2 digits remain and the 6th digit is omitted.
The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DEST- 3+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STANDARD DESTINATION
This input format is entered for standard destinations.
Standard destinations refer to up to 16 routes, which are used for the
selection of a trunk group in order to route a call to the outside of the
switch.
The trunk group is selected with a fixed alternative or an optimized
routing scheme, i.e. the routes are checked in ascending hunting sequence
if the addressed trunk group has at least one idle trunk.
If the ODR algorithm is used the routes of the ODR-list are checked
cyclically after the fixed alternate route at the position LINK has failed.
If the route is not allowed to seize the last idle trunk, then a check must
be made to determins whether the addressed trunk group has at least two idle
trunks. The first route in the hunting sequence which fulfills this condition
is seized for the call being set up.
The rerouting feature deviates from the fixed alternative routing scheme.
Rerouting means that in case of an unsuccessful attempt to get through
(i.e. successful seizure of a trunk in the own switch but congestion in a
transit switch), an attempt is made to establish the connection using a route
belonging to another rerouting group, i.e. the congested transit switches
are not addressed again.
[ [
[ CR DEST : DEST= [,FOVCODE=] [,MINMAX=] [,TLIM=] [,DEFEAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ODR= ,LINK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination name.
FOVCODE FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final alternate
route. This code is used for retranslation after all routes
of the overflow sequence have been checked without success.
It will not be used if ODR routes have been checked.
MINMAX MIN/MAX NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies that the end-of-selection is determined
by an abbreviated timeout if the minimum number of digits is present.
If the maximum number of digits is present, selection is considered
to be ended.
Note:
- The number of digits of the LAC (known in the own exchange)
associated with the CPT which points to the destination, must not
be considered.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DEST- 4+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: MINIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
Default: 1
b: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
Default: 24
TLIM TIME LIMIT
This parameter specifies the time limits which are to be activated or
deactivated for the destination. The project-specific time values
of the specified timers can be output using the command DISP TIOUT.
The following time limit groups are possible:
Group 1:
The parameter values in this group determine the EOS supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, dialing is considered
to be ended when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 2:
The parameter values in this group determine the ring time limit
for the destination. If this is activated, the ring time is limited
to the value specified in the relevant timer.
Group 3:
The parameter values in this group determine the clearback signal
supervision for the destination. If this is activated, the connection
is released when the relevant timer has timed out and the clearback
signal has been received from the called end.
Group 4:
The parameter values in this group determine the call time supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released
when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 5:
The parameter values in this group determine the release delay for
the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released when
the relevant timer has timed out after the calling party has replaced
the receiver.
DIALTM1 DIAL TIME 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 07 for trunks.
[DIALTM2 [ DIAL TIME 2
[[DIALTM3 [[ DIAL TIME 3
!OFFDIA - SWITCH OFF DIAL CONTROL
Switches off the EOS supervision.
RINGTM0 RING TIME LIMIT 0
[[ [[ Switches off the ring time limit. This is a
[[ [[ mandatory input if TRACA=ORIG is to be
[[ [[ specified for one of the routes.
[[RINGTM1 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 19.
[ [ Corresponds to timer 20.
!RINGTM7 - RING TIME LIMIT 7
Corresponds to timer 25.
CLEATM1 CLEAR BACK TIME 1
[[CLEATM2 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 2
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DEST- 5+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ Corresponds to timer 37.
[[OFFEND [[ SWITCH OFF END CONTROL
[[ [[ Supervision of the called party clearback signal
[[ [[ is switched off (e.g. to avoid premature release).
!RELCLEA - RELEASE CLEAR BACK
Release takes place as soon as the clearback
signal is received from the called end.
CONVTM1 CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 1
[[CONVTM2 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 2
[CONVTM4 [ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 4
!OFFCALL - NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
Switches off the conversation time limit.
RELTM0 RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 0
[[ [[ Specifies that the connection is held until
[[ [[ released by an operator.
[RELTM1 [ RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 1
[[ [[ Specifies that the connection is released as soon
[[ [[ as the dialing party has replaced the receiver.
[[RELTM2 [[ RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 2
!RELTM3 - RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 3
This parameter value corresponds to timer 43.
Default: DIALTM1, RINGTM1, CLEATM1, OFFCALL, RELTM3
DEFEAT DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter value specifies particular call processing
destination characteristics.
AUTOINFO AUTOMATIC INFORMATION SERVICE
Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
speech path after the connection has been
established.
FEATCHCK FEATURE CHECK
This value marks a destination for the
protocol check to check a number of
parameters.
FIRSTACT FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE AS PRIMARY
This value assigns the network traffic status
primary traffic to the first active route,
i.e. to the lowest route number in the
overflow sequence to the destination that is
not blocked. Omitting this value assigns the
network traffic status primary traffic to
route number 1 to the destination even if
that route has been deactivated.
INDIDEN INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
This value marks a destination as one
requiring individual identification of an
originating CR PBX.
ODR OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which has to be linked
to the destination and is used to find an idle route by the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DEST- 6+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ODR algorithm.
This is only allowed for standard destinations.
LINK LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
This parameter specifies the position in the ascending hunting
sequence of the fixed alternate route where the routing
algorithm changes to ODR and the routes of the ODR list
are checked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DEST- 7-
DACT DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE DESTINATION
This command deactivates a destination for carrier selection. A standby
carrier destination is specified for the entire traffic volume assigned to
the destination for carrier selection.
Prerequisites:
- The destination has been created.
- A destination is a destination for carrier selection.
- The specified standby carrier destination belongs to the
destination for carrier selection that is to be deactivated.
- The specified standby carrier destination has at least one route.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT DEST : DEST= ,SCDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
SCDEST STANDBY CARRIER DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT DEST- 1-
DISP DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DESTINATION
This command displays the data of all or some specified destinations.
To display all parameters the different types of destinations require
three different output masks, which will be displayed successively.
The amount of display may be reduced by specifying the parameter FORMAT .
The amount of display may be reduced further by specifying additional
parameters.
When specifying several parameters at the same time, only those
destinations will be displayed that fulfill all requirements at the same
time.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DEST : DEST= [,FORMAT=] [,CQGRP=] [,CARR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination.
The display of all existing destinations will be performed if
parameter DEST= X is specified.
This parameter is used to control the amount of information
displayed.
Notes:
There are three identifier groups:
- The first group displays all data of all specified
destinations with ALL.
- The third group specifies in which order the destinations
will be displayed. The display can be in alphabetical
(SORT) or in nonalphabetical (NOSORT) order of the
destinations.
Only one identifier of a group can be linked with an
identifier of another group.
The default values are: ALL and SORT.
ALL DISPLAY ALL DESTINATIONS
All data for all specified
destinations are output.
NEWCODE SELECT NEW CODE DESTINATIONS
Only the data of destinations with
digit retranslation are output.
STD SELECT STANDARD DESTINATIONS
Only the data of standard destinations,
carrier destinations and destinations
for carrier selection are output.
CARRSEL SELECT CARRIER SELECTION DESTS
Only the data of carrier destinations
and destinations for carrier selection
are output.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DEST- 1+
DISP DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SORT SORTED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
All destinations will be displayed in
alphabetical order ifparameter
FORMAT=SORT is specified.
The carrier destinations belonging to one
destination for carrier selection will not be
displayed in an alphabetical order, because
they are related to the corresponding
carriers of the quota group.
NOSORT NOT SORTED IN ALPHA. ORDER
The linkage between the destinations and
the ODR lists are displayed.
Default: ALL, SORT
This parameter specifies the carrier quota group.
Data output is limited to the destinations for carrier selection
that belong to the specified carrier quota group.
CARR CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier.
Data output is limited to the destinations for carrier selection
that contain the specified carrier.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DEST- 2-
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DESTINATION
This command modifies one of the following destination data:
- the name of any destination,
- the data of a standard destination,
- the data of a destination for carrier selection and automatically all the
assigned carrier destinations,
- the destination link to an optimized dynamic routing (ODR) list,
- it creates or cancels the link from a destination to an ODR-list.
Notes:
- This command is not intended for changing a standard destination into
a destination with retranslation. Nor is it intended for changing
a destination in the reverse direction. Such modifications have to be
performed using the commands CAN DEST and CR DEST.
- It is possible to modify a destination with NEWCODE into a
destination with CONVCODE and vice versa.
- It is possible to modify a destination with NEWCODE or CONVCODE by
extending the destination with NEWCODE or NEWCODE.
Prerequisites:
- The destination exists already.
- The specified ODR-list exists.
- The specified new value does not yet exist.
- The specified old value is equal to the existing data.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination
area name, the range of values must have been extended with
the command MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
Compatibilities:
- The parameters FOVCODE and CFOVCODE are only allowed in case of
standard or carrier-selection destinations.
Exception: The parameter FOVCODE is also allowed for carrier destinations
which are used for CDD to administrate the code for call
divergence.
1. MOD DEST - DESTDATA MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
2. MOD DEST - DESTNAME MODIFY DESTINATION NAME
3. MOD DEST - RETRANS MODIFY DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
1. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
This input format is entered in order to modify:
- data of standard destinations,
- data of destinations for carrier selection or
- linkage of a standard destination to an ODR-list.
The change of a parameter for a destination for carrier selection results
in an identical change of that value within all assigned carrier specific
destinations.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for successful command
execution in addition to the standard prerequisites, if one ofthe parameters
DEFEAT, MINMAX or TLIM is changed:
- The name of a standard or carrier specific destination (DEST) is
specified.
- New and old value of the parameter TLIM refers to the same time limit.
Note if changing the parameter DEFEAT:
- Each command input permits the addition of new values (using parameter
DEFEAT) and/or cancellation of existing values (using parameter CDEFEAT);
unspecified values remain unchanged in the database.
Note if changing the parameter TLIM:
- Each command input allows the value of a single time limit to be changed;
the unspecified values of other time limits remain unchanged in the
database.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 1+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ MOD DEST : DEST= <,FOVCODE= ,CFOVCODE= ,MINMAX= ,TLIM= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,DEFEAT= ,CDEFEAT=> [,ODR=] <,LINK=> [,CODR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION NAME
FOVCODE FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final
alternate route. This code is used for retranslation
after all routes of the overflow sequence have been
checked without success.
This parameter is also allowed for carrier destinations
which are used for CDD to administrate the code for
call divergence.
It will not be used if ODR routes have been checked.
CFOVCODE CANCELLED FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final
alternative route that has to be cancelled.
MINMAX NEW MIN/MAX NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies that the end-of-selection is determined by
an abbreviated timeout if the minimum number of digits is present.
If the maximum number of digits is present, selection is considered
to be ended.
Notes:
- The number of digits of the LAC (known in the exchange)
associated with the CPT which points to the destination,
must not be considered.
a-b
a: MINIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
b: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
TLIM NEW TIME LIMIT
This parameter specifies the time limits which are to be activated or
deactivated for the destination. An entry can only be made to change
the existing values; if no value was entered for the parameter TLIM
the values created with the command CR DEST remain in the database.
The project-specific time values of the specified timers can
be displayed using the command DISP TIOUT.
The following time limit groups are possible:
Group 1:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 2+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The parameter values in this group determine the EOS
supervision for the destination. If this is activated,
dialing is considered to be complete when the relevant timer
has timed out.
Group 2:
The parameter values in this group determine the ring time limit
for the destination. If this is activated, the ring time is limited
to the value specified in the relevant timer.
Group 3:
The parameter values in this group determine the clearback signal
supervision for the destination. If this is activated, the connection
is released when the relevant timer has timed out and the clearback
signal has been received from the called end.
Group 4:
The parameter values in this group determine the call time supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released
when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 5:
The parameter values in this group determine the release delay for
the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released when
the relevant timer has timed out after the calling party has replaced
the receiver.
DIALTM1 DIAL TIME 1
[DIALTM2 [ DIAL TIME 2
[[DIALTM3 [[ DIAL TIME 3
!OFFDIA - SWITCH OFF DIAL CONTROL
Switches off the EOS supervision.
RINGTM0 RING TIME LIMIT 0
[[ [[ Switches off the ring time limit.
[[ [[ This is a mandatory input if TRACA=ORIG
[[ [[ is to be specified for one of the routes.
[ [ Default for ring time supervision.
!RINGTM7 - RING TIME LIMIT 7
CLEATM1 CLEAR BACK TIME 1
[[ [[ Default for supervision of the clearback
[[ [[ signal.
[CLEATM4 [ CLEAR BACK TIME 4
[[OFFEND [[ SWITCH OFF END CONTROL
[[ [[ Supervision of the called party clearback signal
[[ [[ is switched off (e.g. to avoid premature release).
!RELCLEA - RELEASE CLEAR BACK
Release takes place as soon as the clearback
signal is received.
CONVTM1 CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 1
[CONVTM4 [ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 4
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 3+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!OFFCALL - NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
Switches off the call time limit.
RELTM0 RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 0
[[ [[ Specifies that the connection is held until it
[[ [[ is released by an operator.
[ [ Specifies that the connection is released as
[[ [[ soon as the called party has replaced the
[[ [[ receiver.
!RELTM3 - RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 3
Corresponds to timer 43.
DEFEAT NEW DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter specifies particular call-processing
destination characteristics.
Default: No value
[ [ Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
[ [ speech path after the connection has been
[ [ established.
[FEATCHCK[ FEATURE CHECK
[ [ This value marks a destination for the
[ [ protocol check to check a number of
[ [ parameters.
[FIRSTACT[ FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE AS PRIMARY
[ [ This value assigns the network traffic status
[ [ primary traffic to the first active route,
[ [ i.e. to the lowest route number in the
[ [ overflow sequence to the destination that is
[ [ not blocked. Omitting this value assigns the
[ [ network traffic status primary traffic to
[ [ route number 1 to the destination even if
[ [ that route is deactive.
!INDIDEN - INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
originating CR PBX.
CDEFEAT CANCELED DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter specifies particular call-processing
destination characteristics to be canceled.
Default: No value
[ [ Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
[ [ speech path after the connection has been
[ [ established.
[FEATCHCK[ FEATURE CHECK
[ [ This value marks a destination for the
[ [ protocol check to check a number of
[ [ parameters.
[FIRSTACT[ FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE FLAG
[ [ The first active route to the destination has
[ [ the network traffic status primary traffic.
!INDIDEN - INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
originating CR PBX.
ODR OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which has to be linked
to the destination and is used to find an idle route by the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 4+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ODR algorithm.
This is only allowed for standard destinations, which are
not already linked to an ODR-list.
This parameter specifies the position in the ascending hunting
sequence of the fixed alternate routes where the routing
algorithm changes to ODR and the routes of the ODR-list
are scanned.
Note:
This parameter must be entered in combination with ODR or
can be entered when ODR already exists.
CODR CANCEL LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which should no longer
be linked from the destination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 5+
MOD DEST
DESTNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION NAME
This input format is to modify a destination name.
The name of a destination can be modified independently of the type, i.e:
- the names of standard and carrier specific destinations can be changed
as well as the names of destinations for carrier selection and
destinations with new code.
Prerequisite:
- The new name is not in use for another destination.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DEST : DEST= ,NDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NDEST NEW DESTINATION NAME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 6+
MOD DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
This input format is to modify destination data for destinations with
retranslation.
[ [
[ [
[ [,NEWCODE= [ [
[ [,NEWCAC= [ ; [
[ MOD DEST : DEST= ,NEWORIG1= [
[ [,CONVCODE=[ ! [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NEWCODE NEW NEWCODE
This parameter specifies the new code with which the
originally dialed code is replaced.
This parameter is removed by canceling the whole destination
and creating the destination together with the other
parameters.
For your convenience the following shortcut is provided by
this command:
- Reenter the existing value of this parameter again
and it will be canceled.
This only works as long as at least one code processing
parameter remains for this destination.
Caution:
- If you want to enter a new value for this parameter,
please check that it not exists, using the display
command.
This parameter specifies the code which replaces an existing
carrier access code or which defines a new carrier access
code if none exists.
parameters.
this command:
Caution:
command.
Note:
- The existence of this parameter is not checked
in the carrier database.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 7+
MOD DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NEWORIG1 NEW ORIGINATION MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code which replaces
an existing originating code or which defines a new
originating code if none exists.
parameters.
this command:
Caution:
command.
CONVCODE CONVERTED CODE
This parameter specifies a conversion mask which is used
to modify the originally dialed code.
Any dialed area code which is administered as a local
area code in the own switch remains unchanged.
The modified code is immediately retranslated.
Valid input characteres:
0-9, A-F, #, *, +, ., X
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask
consisting of control characters and digits.
The control characters have the following significance:
X : The digit of the old code is left as it is.
. : The digit of the old code is deleted.
+ : The digits following this character, up to the next
control character, are inserted.
: Digits without a preceeding "+" replace the old code.
Input is subject to the following conditions:
- At least one modification in the code is made.
- Not more than two modifications may be made.
- For each modification, a maximum of 15 digits can be
affected but the total of both modifications is limited
to 24.
Example:
CONVCODE = 123xx. specifies that the first 3 digits of the
existing dial information are replaced by 1 2 3, the next
2 digits remain and the 6th digit is omitted.
The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.
parameters.
this command:
Caution:
command.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEST- 8-
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DESTINATION
This command initiates recording of destination load data.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 8 jobs of this type with a sum of 512 destinations
(specified via group or destination origin code) may be entered
at the same time.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more
than one job.
- In case of high system load it is possible that not all
measurement data can be displayed on OMT or written into
the file within a 15 minute interval.
The data record remains incomplete.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,GRP= [ [
[ REC DEST : UNIT= ,DOCODE= [,FORMAT=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DEST- 1+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
GRP TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a group (containing a
maximum of 512 destinations). One of the two measurement parameters
(group or destination origin code) must be specified; a combination
is not permitted. If a group is specified, output is only possible
to disk. Only valid group names may be entered.
DOCODE DESTINATION ORIGIN CODE
This parameter specifies the destination origin code.
Up to 16 destination origin codes may be linked with &.
One of the two measurement parameters (destination origin code or
group) must be specified; a combination is not permitted.
The destinations for which measurement is to be carried out may
lie inside or outside the home exchange.
The destination codes have to be specified including the
traffic discrimination digit(s) and the local area code.
In the destination code part it is possible to specify any digit
combination (up to 18 digits per code). No checks are performed
during command acceptance whether the digit combinations lead
to an existing destination.
The operator must be careful not to put invalid codes under
measurement.
If a code to be measured is too long and not valid (e.g. 089 722 05),
the calls to the smaller and valid digit combination (e.g. 089 722 0)
cannot be performed.
Measurement of subdestinations is possible (e.g. 09 & 098 & 0987 &...),
but not in combination with different origin or language code values.
A maximum of 18 subdestinations can be measured at the same time.
Multiple measurement of identical measurement objects (same digit
combination) is not permitted.
However, identical destinations can be distinguished by providing
different carrier access codes at part of the destination codes.
a[-b[-c]]
a: DESTINATION CODE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DEST- 2+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the destination.
b: ORIGIN CODE=
This information unit specifies the origin.
The origin code corresponds to the originating mark 1
used for routing purposes.
c: LANGUAGE CODE=
0...F, range of hexadecimal numbers
This information unit specifies the language digit.
This parameter determines the output format to the output medium.
The identifiers ALL (output of all traffic data counters) or
VOL (output of the following traffic data counters: calls carried,
calls carried with answer, traffic volume and traffic volume
with answer) are permitted.
Default: ALL
ALL ALL DATA
VOL VOLUME DATA
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DEST- 3+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DEST- 4+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
period
NO DEFAULT
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DEST- 5-
CAN DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION CONTROL DATA
This command cancels from the existing TMRIPI combination the specified call
history data or the relation of all TIRDESTs to their DEST (and in addition
this destination itself).
To re-assign an intercept to a pure TMRIPI combination, the operator has to
enter the parameter TMRIPI with only two info units. After entering this
command the actual assignment to this TMRIPI combination will be cancelled,
modifying it into an assignment of an intercept.
To cancel the call history data, the operator has to enter the parameter
TMRIPI with all three info units. After entering this command, the call
history data of this specific TMRIPI combination will not be evaluated for an
incoming call anymore. If call processing comes with all three values
(transmission requirement, ISUP preference indicator, call history data), the
call can be routed over a TIRDEST to be specified belonging to the specific
TMRIPI combination, ignoring the given call history data.
In case that the operator only entered the parameter DEST, it will be
assumed, that he wants to cancel the whole TMRIPI constellation. Therefore
after entering this command, the destination for TMRIPI selection will be
deleted. The corresponding TIRDEST elements will always be kept.
Prerequisites:
- There must be no code point or test point (created) that refers to this
destination.
- There must be no code point group that refers to this destination.
- There must be no operator position point that refers to this destination.
- There must be no centrex code point that refers to this destination.
- There must be no centrex directory number that refers to this destination.
- There must be no directory number destination that refers to this destination.
- There must be no network management traffic data that refers to this
destination.
- There must be no route to this destination.
- There must be no carrier data that refers to this destination.
- There must be no intercept code data that refers to this destination.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DESTCNTL : DEST= [,TMRIPI=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of destination for
TMRIPI selection.
TMRIPI TMR/IPI COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the valid combinations and consists
of three information units, one for the transmission
requirement, a second for the ISUP preference indicator and
the third info unit for special call history data.
a-b[-c]
a: TRANSMISSION MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DESTCNTL- 1+
CAN DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S UNRES. FALLBACK CAP.
b: ISDN-UP PREFERENCE INDICATOR
NOTREQ NOT REQUIRED
PREF PREFERRED
REQ REQUIRED
c: CALL HISTORY DATA
ICTUPP INCOMING TUP+
NOGTUPP SERVICE NO OUTGOING TUP+
ORIGMOB ORIGINATING MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
ICR2ECHO IC MFC R2 WITH HALF ECHO SUPPR
ASUBDLU ORIGINATING ANALOG SUB AT DLU
ISDNANCA ISDN ORIGIN WITH ANALOGUE CALL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DESTCNTL- 2-
ENTR DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DESTINATION CONTROL DATA
This command creates a new type of destination, called destination for TMRIPI
selection (DEST).
This destination is used to route a call depending on its incoming
characteristics.
These characteristics are defined with the parameter TMRIPI.
Depending on the valid TMRIPI combinations, a certain destination (TIRDEST)
will be choosen to route the traffic.
This means, that the code point points to the destination for TMRIPI
selection, and depending on the TMRIPI value (coming from the LTG incoming
side) the call will be routed over a certain TMRIPI routing destination
(TIRDEST).
If the specified destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST) does not yet
exist, a new element will be occupied in the datatable, having the new
destination type (destination for TMRIPI selection). In case that the
destination exists already, and it is of the correct type, it is assumed
that the operator wants to:
- enter additional data
- change data
If the parameter TIRDEST is entered:
- an additional TMRIPI combination may be entered for an already
existing destination, as well as for a new destination;
- a change may be made from intercept or destination (TIRDEST) to
a new destination.
If the parameter TIRDEST is not entered:
- a call history value may be brought into the administered state
(i.e. the call history value will be evaluated by Call Processing)
and be assigned to intercept handling;
- a call history value already administered may be reassigned from a
TIRDEST to intercept handling.
Prerequisites:
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area name, the
range of values must have been extended with the command MOD CALLPOPT :
DESTMAXL = LONG.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR DESTCNTL : DEST= ,TMRIPI= [,TIRDEST=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of destination for TMRIPI
selection.
TMRIPI TMR/IPI COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the valid combinations and consists of three
information units, one for the transmission requirement, a second for
the ISUP preference indicator and the third info unit for special call
history data.
Valid input combinations for this parameter:
KBIT64FB-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DESTCNTL- 1+
ENTR DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KBIT64-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
SPEECH-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
A3KHZ1-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
KBIT64-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
SPEECH-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
A3KHZ1-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
KBIT64-REQ-NOGTUPP
-PREF-NOGTUPP
-NOTREQ-NOGTUPP
SPEECH-PREF-ORIGMOB
-PREF-ISDNANCA
-NOTREQ-ORIGMOB
-NOTREQ-ICR2ECHO
-NOTREQ-ASUBDLU
A3KHZ1-PREF-ORIGMOB
-PREF-ISDNANCA
-NOTREQ-ORIGMOB
-NOTREQ-ICR2ECHO
-NOTREQ-ASUBDLU
a-b[-c]
a: TRANSMISSION MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S UNR. FALLBACK CAPAB.
b: ISDN-UP PREFERENCE INDICATOR
NOTREQ NOT REQUIRED
PREF PREFERRED
REQ REQUIRED
c: CALL HISTORY DATA
ICTUPP INCOMING TUP+
NOGTUPP SERVICE NO OUTGOING TUP+
ORIGMOB ORIGINATING MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
ICR2ECHO IC MFC R2 WITH HALF ECHO SUPPR
ASUBDLU ORIGINATING ANALOG SUB AT DLU
ISDNANCA ISDN ORIGIN WITH ANALOGUE CALL
TIRDEST TMR/IPI ROUTING DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of a destination, which will be
referable via a destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST).
The destination may be reached with a code combination directly, or
indirectly via a destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST).
Prerequisites:
- The destination specified for parameter TIRDEST has to be
created as standard or newcode destination, or as a destination
for carrier selection, with help of the command CR DEST or
ENTR DESTDAT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DESTCNTL- 2-
CAN DESTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION DATA
This command converts a destination for carrier selection into a standard
destination. The assignment to a carrier quota group is cancelled. With
the command CAN DESTDAT all routes created for the standby destination
are transferred to the former destination for carrier selection. As a
result, this destination becomes a standard destination again. The former
standby carrier destination is then cancelled.
The other carrier destinations are converted into standard destinations
if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
- a test point exists for the carrier destination
- a route exists for the carrier destination.
Carrier destinations for which neither of these conditions is fulfilled
are cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- The destination has been created.
- It is a destination for carrier selection.
- The destination for carrier selection has already been deactivated.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DESTDAT : DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DESTDAT- 1-
ENTR DESTDAT
NOROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DESTINATION DATA
This command modifies a standard destination to form a destination for
carrier selection. This applies even if calls are already processed via
the standard destination.
Note:
The modification is not allowed for destinations with optimized
dynamic routing (CR ODR) reference.
Prerequisites:
- The standard destination to be modified to form a destination
for carrier selection is created.
- If one of the carrier destinations has already been created
as standard destination, no code points refer to this destination.
- The carrier quota group has been created and is active.
- A carrier destination is specified for each active carrier of the
carrier quota group.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area
name, the range of values must have been extended with the command
MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
1. ENTR DESTDAT - NOROUTE
2. ENTR DESTDAT - ROUTE
1. Input format
Input format to be used if the destination to be expanded has no routes
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR DESTDAT : DEST= ,CQGRP= ,CDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the standard destination
which is being converted into a carrier selection destination.
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group
which is assigned to the carrier selection destination.
CDEST CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 20 parameter values may be specified.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DESTDAT- 1+
ENTR DESTDAT
NOROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: CARRIER DESTINATION NAME=
This parameter unit specifies the name of a carrier destination
which can be assigned to the carrier selection destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier to
which the carrier destination will be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DESTDAT- 2+
ENTR DESTDAT
ROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Input format to be used if the destination to be expanded has routes.
The routes of the standard destination are transferred to the specified
standby carrier destination.
- The standby carrier destination must be specified in the list of
carrier destinations.
- No routes may have been created for the standby carrier destination.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR DESTDAT : DEST= ,CQGRP= ,CDEST= ,SCDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the standard destination
which is being converted into a carrier selection destination.
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group
which is assigned to the carrier selection destination.
CDEST CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 20 parameter values may be specified.
a-b
This parameter unit specifies the name of a carrier destination
which can be assigned to the carrier selection destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
SCDEST STANDBY CARRIER DESTINATION
This parameter specifies to which carrier destination the routes
which are assigned to the standard destination, being converted
into carrier selection destination, are to be transferred.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DESTDAT- 3-
MOD DESTDAT
ACDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
This command modifies the assignment of carrier destination to a carrier
selection area.
It is possible to
- assign further carrier destinations to a destination for carrier
selection or
- cancel the assignment of carrier destinations to a destination for
carrier selection.
Prerequisites:
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area
name, the range of values must have been extended with the command
MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
1. MOD DESTDAT - ACDEST ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
2. MOD DESTDAT - CCDEST CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
1. Input format
ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
This input format is used to modify the extension for a destination for
carrier selection (add carrier destinations).
All destinations for carrier selection need to be expanded after the
addition of one or more carriers to a quota group (MOD CQGRP) in order to
bring the additional carriers into effect for the load sharing scheme.
The expansion of destinations for carrier selection is also necessary, if
no carrier destinations were assigned during the initial ENTR DESTDAT to
carriers with a quota of zero, and if the carriers shall be activated now.
All added carrier destinations with already assigned routes are activated
automatically, if the destination for carrier selection is already active
(ACT DEST).
Prerequisites:
- The name of the additional carrier destination is not yet used.
- The additional carrier destination already exists as a standard
destination without any code points using this destination.
- The carrier name already exists in that quota group used by the specified
destination for carrier selection.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DESTDAT : ACDEST= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACDEST ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 19 parameter values can be entered.
a-b
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier
destination which can be assigned to the carrier selection
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DESTDAT- 1+
MOD DESTDAT
ACDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier selection area.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DESTDAT- 2+
MOD DESTDAT
CCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
This input format is entered to modify the extension of destination for
carrier selection (cancel carrier destination).
All carrier destinations assigned to a deactivated carrier (MOD CQDAT)
need to be deleted from the destination for carrier selection before the
carrier can be removed from the quota group (MOD CQGRP).
Additionally, a table is displayed which shows if the cancelled carrier
destinations have been deleted or if they were kept as standard
destinations.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier, which the carrier destination being cancelled is assigned
to, is deactive within the quota group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DESTDAT : CCDEST= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CCDEST CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the carrier destination for which the
assignment to the carrier selection area should be cancelled.
Up to 19 parameter values can be cancelled.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier selection area.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DESTDAT- 3-
DISP DEVAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION
This command displays authorizations assigned to devices.
A table is displayed showing the authorizations of individual
or all devices.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP DEVAUT : [DEV=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter specifies the device for which the basic or maximum
authorization is to be modified, or which devices authorizations are
to be displayed.
a-b
a: DEVICE TYPE
OMT O&M TERMINAL
WST WORKSTATION
This information unit specifies the device type.
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
This information unit specifies the device number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DEVAUT- 1-
MOD DEVAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies the input device authorization.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DEVAUT : DEV= ,AUT= ,OAUT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter specifies the device for which the authorization must
be modified.
a-b
a: DEVICE IDENTIFIER
OMT O&M TERMINAL
WST WORKSTATION
b: DEVICE IDENTIFIER=
AUT NEW AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the new device authorization.
OAUT OLD AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the old device authorization.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DEVAUT- 1-
DISP DIAGSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS STATISTICS
This command displays interim results of the active permanent
diagnosis. The number of cyclic runs, the number of faults found,
information on different faults, and the basic information on
the last fault are displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DIAGSTAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DIAGSTAT- 1-
DISP DIGITCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITS CP
This command displays the digit translator data related to the
specified digit combination.
The displayed data may be restricted to certain digit combinations
specifying parameters CODE and ORIG1.
Examples: DISP DIGITCP; (no restrictions)
DISP DIGITCP: CODE=X; (no restrictions)
DISP DIGITCP: CODE=12; (code restricted)
DISP DIGITCP: ORIG1=DEF; (origination mark 1 restricted).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DIGITCP : [CODE=] [,ORIG1=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter restricts the digit translation data to be displayed:
Only digit translation data that begin with the entered digits will
be displayed.
This parameter restricts the digit translation data to be displayed:
Only digit translation data that contain the entered originating
mark will be displayed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and
the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DIGITCP- 1-
CAN DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITS GP
This command cancels the control record for the GP according to the digit
combination entered in the command CR DIGITGP.
The appropriate digit combinations will then be pretranslated according to
the standard values.
Prerequisites :
- The appropriate digit combinations in the digit translator must first be
cancelled if the number of digits for pretranslation is to be changed.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DIGITGP : CODE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination for the control record
for the GP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DIGITGP- 1-
CR DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITS GP
This command creates the control record for the GP. Based on this record, the
number of digits to be pretranslated in the GP is determined.
The record consists of two units. The first unit specifies the code for pre-
translation. The second unit determines the number of digits to be evaluated
by the GP. Codes that dont appear in the control record are handled by using
default values.
(These default values are:
Subscriber Controlled Input - 6 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=TOLLFRNO - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=CLOCKTST - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=NBARCPT - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=ITGW - 24 digits,
Local areacodes - 6 digits.)
Since the pretranslator receives its data from the commands that create the
digit translator, the described command must be entered first.
Prerequisites :
- The entered control record must not already exist.
- The command must be entered before the digit translator is created.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DIGITGP : CODE= ,DIGITS= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter determines the digit combination for the control record
for the GP.
DIGITS DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits to be evaluated
in the GP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DIGITGP- 1-
DISP DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITS GP
This command displays the digit control data for the GP and also the digit
pretranslation table.
If the parameters are omitted or standard list format is selected, all digit
sequences for which the digit pretranslation differs from the standard setup
(evaluation of a maximum of 4 digits in the GP), are displayed.
If extended list format is selected, the complete digit pretranslation data is
displayed for all digit sequences specified by the parameter CODE.
If all data of digit preanalysis table is selected, the data of the not used
elements (i.e. elements of the digit preanalysis table with initial values)
will be displayed too.
If utilization list format is selected, the rate of capacity utilization of the
digit pretranslation table is displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DIGITGP : [CODE=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit sequence for which data is to be
displayed.
The parameter is mandatory if FORMAT = EXT or
FORMAT = ALL.
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT = STD
- FORMAT = USE
STD STANDARD LIST FORMAT
EXT EXTENDED LIST FORMAT
ALL ALL DATA OF PREANALYSIS TABLE
USE USE OF PREANALYSIS TABLE
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DIGITGP- 1-
MOD DIGITGP
COLDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITS GP
This command modifies the number of digits which are to be collected after the
digit pretranslation in the GP. (Prerequisite for this command is a good working
knowledge of the system.) The call is not passed on to the CP until the GP has
received the required number of digits.
The number of GP-CP messages (M:DIGIT_BLOCK_C - C:COME_AGAIN_C cycles) is
reduced if more digits are collected in the GP. This affects the time for
setting up a call as well as the used processor time, but only if the called
party digits are received with an "overlap" protocol. Otherwise a single
GP-CP message M:DIGIT_BLOCK_C is used to send all digits at once to the CP.
The GP uses a subtree of the CP digit translation tree to perform the digit
pretranslation. This subtree, in the standard configuration, comprises four
digits, i.e. the root of the digit tree plus three additional nodes of the digit
tree.
This global standard length can be modified with the DIGITS parameter.
A changed value of this parameter affects only entries created in the
digit tree after the execution of MOD DIGITGP. Existing entries remain
unchanged.
Note:
Besides this global setting of the subtree size it is also possible to optimise
specific codes using CR DIGITGP.
Using a higher DIGITS value improves the system performance, but more memory
is required to store the digit combinations. This limits the possible number of
digit combinations in the CP digit tree, which are entered with these commands:
- CR CPT
- SPLIT CPT
- CR TEPT
- ENTR AREACODE, if parameter LAC is entered
- MOD AREACODE, if parameter LAC is entered
- ENTR SCFEA, if parameter CODE is entered
All these commands are rejected if the GP digit tree does not have sufficient
space, and additional nodes have to be allocated.
It is also possible to increase the number of digits that are collected in the
GP for specific digit combinations.
The parameters CODE and possibly LAC define the digit combination.
Parameter COLDIG defines how many digits still have to be collected after
the digit pretranslation is finished.
This optimisation does not affect the number of allocated nodes in the GP digit
tree. It is additional data for a pretranslation result.
Note:
This number of additionally collected digits is reset whenever one of the above
listed commands is entered for a digit combination that completely includes
LAC (if present) and CODE. The COLDIG value has to be
re-entered if it still applies.
Caution:
The length of LAC (if present) and CODE plus the value of
COLDIG may not exceed the total length of the shortest called party number
starting with LAC (if present) and CODE.
Entering a COLDIG value that does not comply with this rule REMOVES short
called party numbers beginning with LAC (if present) and CODE the
service!
The called party numbers concerned are not recognized as completely dialed.
The calls are released after a time-out.
1. MOD DIGITGP - COLDIG INDIVIDUAL COLLECTION OF DIGITS
2. MOD DIGITGP - DIGITS DEFAULT LENGTH OF PRETRANSLATION TREE
1. Input format
INDIVIDUAL COLLECTION OF DIGITS
This path is used to modify the code individual amount of additionally collected
digits.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DIGITGP- 1+
MOD DIGITGP
COLDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DIGITGP : CODE= [,LAC=] ,COLDIG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the control record digit combination for
the GP.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if multiple directory
number volumes exist in the exchange.
This parameter specifies the number of digits which are to be collected
in the GP after the digit pretranslation.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DIGITGP- 2+
MOD DIGITGP
DIGITS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DEFAULT LENGTH OF PRETRANSLATION TREE
This path is used to modify the global standard length of the digit combinations
that are stored in the GP pretranslator.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DIGITGP : DIGITS= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DIGITS PRETRANSLATED DIGITS (DEFAULT)
This parameter specifies the default value for the number of digits
which are stored in the GP digit pretranslator und used for the digit
pretranslation.
Digit combinations with a length lower or equal to the value of this
parameter may be stored completely in the GP. Longer digit combinations
are cut off at the specified length and partially stored in the GP.
The GP handles a subset of the CP functions for digit translation.
Fewer digits than the specified length are stored in GP if a digit
combination uses a CP-only function.
An example for these is a CR CPT using the evalution of
ORIG1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DIGITGP- 3-
DISP DISK
FILEOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DISK
This command displays data from a disk or from a file of a disk
or transfers these data to tape / magneto optical disk.
1. DISP DISK - FILEOMT FILE DATA TO OMT
2. DISP DISK - FILETAPE FILE DATA TO TAPE / MO
3. DISP DISK - MDDOMT MDD DATA TO OMT
4. DISP DISK - MDDTAPE MDD DATA TO TAPE / MO
1. Input format
FILE DATA TO OMT
This command displays data from a file of a disk in the
status ACT (active).
Prerequisites:
- The (specified) magnetic disk must be available.
[ [
[ DISP DISK : FILE= [,MDD=] [,SECTOR=] [,BYTE=] [,GEN=] [
[ [
[ ,LENGTH= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the logical device number
of the magnetic disk device.
Notes:
- Only the decimal values 0 and 1 are legal.
SECTOR SECTOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the begin sector (and the end sector
- if a parameter interval can/must be entered) of the magnetic
disk or the specified file.
BYTE BYTE
This parameter specifies the offset to the sector begin
in byte.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DISK- 1+
DISP DISK
FILEOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the name of the generation.
LENGTH RECORD LENGTH
This parameter specifies the length of the data to be
displayed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DISK- 2+
DISP DISK
FILETAPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
FILE DATA TO TAPE / MO
This command transfers data from a file of a disk in the
status ACT (active) to tape / magneto optical disk.
Prerequisites:
- The (specified) magnetic disk must be available.
- The specified volume must be mounted / inserted.
[ [
[ DISP DISK : FILE= ,VSN= [,MDD=] [,SECTOR=] [,BYTE=] [,GEN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
tape / magneto optical disk.
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric characters are legal.
- The following character strings are reserved for disk
devices and therefore illegal: VSN000 and VSN001.
Notes:
BYTE BYTE
in byte.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DISK- 3+
DISP DISK
FILETAPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the name of the generation.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DISK- 4+
DISP DISK
MDDOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MDD DATA TO OMT
This command displays data from a disk in the status
ACT (active) or MBL (maintenance blocked).
[ [
[ DISP DISK : MDD= ,LENGTH= ,SECTOR= [,BYTE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
This parameter specifies the length of the data to be
displayed.
BYTE BYTE
in byte.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DISK- 5+
DISP DISK
MDDTAPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MDD DATA TO TAPE / MO
This command transfers data from a disk in the status
ACT (active) or MBL (maintenance blocked) to tape
/ magneto optical disk.
Prerequisites:
- For the parameter SECTOR a parameter interval must be entered
by linking two parameter values with &&.
- The specified volume must be mounted / inserted.
[ [
[ DISP DISK : MDD= ,VSN= ,SECTOR= [,BYTE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
tape / magneto optical disk.
Notes:
- The following character strings are reserved for disk
devices and therefore illegal: VSN000 and VSN001.
BYTE BYTE
in byte.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DISK- 6-
PATCH DISK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PATCH DISK
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ PATCH DISK : MDD= ,SECTOR= ,BYTE= ,LENGTH= ,DATA= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BYTE BYTE
DATA DATA
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DISK DATA=
b: DISK DATA=
c: DISK DATA=
d: DISK DATA=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 PATCH DISK- 1-
STOP DISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP DISPLAY
This command stops the display being output on the O&M terminal.
The command is only effective if the display was started with a command
that performs a display function (e.g. DISP, SEL, STAT commands).
Notes:
- The command must be entered on the same terminal as the command which
causes the output that should be stopped.
Input format
[ [
[ STOP DISP : JN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a display job.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STOP DISP- 1-
CONF DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
With this command a digital interface unit can be configured
to one of the states MBL, ACT, CBL or PLA.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF DIU : LTG= ,DIU= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the destination operating status.
The following status transitions are permitted:
PLA <-> MBL
MBL --> ACT
ACT --> MBL (when the LTG is not active)
MBL <-> CBL
UNA --> MBL or CBL or ACT
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DIU- 1-
DIAG DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
This command diagnoses a DIU of the type DIU24 or DIU30 in
an LTG.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG DIU : LTG= ,DIU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG DIU- 1-
STAT DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
- one DIU in a particular LTG
- one DIU in all LTGs
- all DIUs in a particular LTG
- all DIUs in all LTGs
- all DIUs with a particular operating status in a
particular LTG
- all DIUs with a particular operating status in all LTGs
Input format
[ [
[ STAT DIU : LTG= [,DIU=] [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DIU- 1-
DISP DLCI
DLCI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DATA LINK CONNECTION IDENTIFIER
- data link connection identifiers on the BD-channel
- frame handler reference numbers
- terminal end point identifiers
- local area codes
- directory numbers
- line numbers of PBX lines and
- the equipment numbers of DLU- or V5IF ports
depending on the given input parameters.
1. DISP DLCI - DLCI INPUT OF DLCI AND FRAMEHD
2. DISP DLCI - DN INPUT OF LAC AND DN
3. DISP DLCI - EQN INPUT OF EQN
1. Input format
INPUT OF DLCI AND FRAMEHD
In this path the input of DLCI and FRAMEHD is considered.
The DLCI value has to specify a DLCI on the Bd-channel.
[ [
[ DISP DLCI : DLCI= ,FRAMEHD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLCI DATA LINK CONNECTION ID
This parameter specifies the data link connection identifier on
a BD-channel. The input of the DLCI on a BDDLUCH or BDSILCCH
is not valid.
FRAMEHD FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the frame handler reference number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCI- 1+
DISP DLCI
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INPUT OF LAC AND DN
In this path the input of LAC and DN of a subscriber or PBX line
is considered.
For PBX lines the input of LNO has to be done.
The parameter TEI is optional and only valid for subscribers or
PBX lines on DLU modules with at most 8 ports. It is invalid for
subscribers or PBX lines on DLU modules with 16 ports or V5
interfaces.
If the parameter TEI is entered, the DLCI value is calculated
and displayed according to the entered value.
If the parameter TEI is not entered, all DLCIs are calculated
and displayed according to the stored TEIs of this port.
[ [
[ DISP DLCI : LAC= ,DN= [,LNO=] [,TEI=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of a PBX line.
TEI TERMINAL END POINT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the value of the terminal end point
identifier.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCI- 2+
DISP DLCI
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
INPUT OF EQN
In this path the input of EQN is considered.
The EQN has to specify a subscriber or PBX line on a DLU
or V5IF. If an access with multiple DN is specified, the
first object on this access will be evaluated.
The parameter TEI is optional and only valid for subscribers or
PBX lines on DLU modules with at most 8 ports. It is invalid for
subscribers or PBX lines on DLU modules with 16 ports or V5
interfaces.
If the parameter TEI is entered, the DLCI value is calculated
and displayed according to the entered value.
If the parameter TEI is not entered, all DLCIs are calculated
and displayed according to the stored TEIs of this port.
[ [
[ DISP DLCI : EQN= [,TEI=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of a DLU port
or V5IF port.
a-b-c-d
This unit specifies a DLU- or V5IF number.
10, 20, 30 ... 2550 specifies a DLU number
6000, 6001 ... 8999 specifies a V5IF number
b: SHELF NUMBER OR EXTENSION UNIT=
This unit specifies the shelf number of a DLU or the
extension unit of a V5IF. The extension unit of a V5IF
is always 0.
c: MODULE NO OR UPPER V5IF PORTNO=
This unit specifies the module number of a DLU or the
upper two digits of a V5IF port number.
e.g. V5IF port 1739 -> 17
253 -> 2
27 -> 0
d: CIRCUIT NO OR LOWER V5IF PORTNO=
This unit specifies the circuit number of a DLU port or
the lower 2 digits of a V5IF port.
e.g. V5IF port 1739 -> 39
253 -> 53
27 -> 27
TEI TERMINAL END POINT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the value of the terminal end point
identifier.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCI- 3+
DISP DLCI
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCI- 4-
CR DLCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create DLCI Entry
This task creates a new entry within the frCircuitTable.
Input format
[ [
[ CR DLCIE : EQN= ,DLCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLCIE- 1-
DEL DLCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete DLCI Entry
This task removes an existing entry from the frCircuitTable.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL DLCIE : EQN= ,DLCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL DLCIE- 1-
DISP DLCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display DLCI Entry
This task displays an existing entry within the frCircuitTable.
Output Parameters:
State:
Indicates whether the particular virtual circuit is operational. In
the absence of a Data Link Connection Management Interface, virtual
circuit entries (rows) may be created by setting virtual circuit state
to active, or deleted by changing Circuit state to invalid.
CreationTime:
The value of sysUpTime when the virtual circuit was created, whether
by the Data Link Connection Management Interface or by a SetRequest.
LastTimeChange:
The value of sysUpTime when last there was a change in the virtual
circuit state
CommittedBurst:
This variable indicates the maximum amount of data, in bits, that the
network agrees to transfer under normal conditions, during the
measurement interval.
ExcessBurst:
This variable indicates the maximum amount of uncommitted data bits
that the network will attempt to deliver over the measurement
interval.
Throughput:
Throughput is the average number of Frame Relay Information Field
bits transferred per second across a user network interface in one
direction, measured over the measurement interval.
If the configured committed burst rate and throughput are both
non-zero, the measurement interval, T, is
T=frCircuitCommittedBurst/frCircuitThroughput.
If the configured committed burst rate and throughput are both zero,
the measurement interval, T, is
T=frCircuitExcessBurst/ifSpeed.
RowStatus:
The RowStatus is used to manage the creation and deletion of
conceptual rows.
Possible values are:
- `active, which indicates that the conceptual row is available for
use by the managed device;
- `notInService, which indicates that the conceptual row exists in
the agent, but is unavailable for use by the managed device;
- `notReady, which indicates that the conceptual row exists in the
agent, but is missing information necessary in order to be available
for use by the managed device.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DLCIE : EQN= ,DLCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCIE- 1+
DISP DLCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCIE- 2-
MOD DLCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify DLCI Entry
This task modifies an existing entry within the frCircuitTable.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD DLCIE : EQN= ,DLCI= [,State=] [,CommittedBurst=] [
[ [
[ [,ExcessBurst=] [,Throughput=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
State
Indicates whether the particular virtual circuit is operational. In
the absence of a Data Link Connection Management Interface, virtual
circuit entries (rows) may be created by setting virtual circuit state
to active, or deleted by changing Circuit state to invalid.
Input format:
Selection from:
- invalid
- active
- inactive
CommittedBurst
This variable indicates the maximum amount of data, in bits, that the
network agrees to transfer under normal conditions, during the
measurement interval.
ExcessBurst
This variable indicates the maximum amount of uncommitted data bits
that the network will attempt to deliver over the measurement
interval.
By default, if not configured when creating the entry, the Excess
Information Burst Size is set to the value of ifSpeed.
Throughput
Throughput is the average number of Frame Relay Information Field
bits transferred per second across a user network interface in one
direction, measured over the measurement interval.
If the configured committed burst rate and throughput are both
non-zero, the measurement interval, T, is
T=frCircuitCommittedBurst/frCircuitThroughput.
If the configured committed burst rate and throughput are both zero,
the measurement interval, T, is
T=frCircuitExcessBurst/ifSpeed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLCIE- 1-
DISP DLCIPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display DLCI Performance Data
This task displays the current performance data for an existing DLCI within the
frCircuitTable.
Output Parameters:
ReceivedFECNs:
Number of frames received from the network indicating forward
congestion since the virtual circuit was created. This occurs when the
remote DTE sets the FECN flag, or when a switch in the network
enqueues the frame to a trunk whose transmission queue is congested.
ReceivedBECNs:
Number of frames received from the network indicating backward
congestion since the virtual circuit was created. This occurs when the
remote DTE sets the BECN flag, or when a switch in the network
receives the frame from a trunk whose transmission queue is congested.
SentFrames:
The number of frames sent from this virtual circuit since it was
created.
SentOctets:
The number of octets sent from this virtual circuit since it was
created. Octets counted are the full frame relay header and the
payload, but do not include the flag characters or CRC.
ReceivedFrames:
Number of frames received over this virtual circuit since it was
created.
ReceivedOctets:
Number of octets received over this virtual circuit since it was
created. Octets counted include the full frame relay header, but do
not include the flag characters or the CRC.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DLCIPD : EQN= ,DLCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCIPD- 1-
CR DLCMIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create DLCMI Entry
This task creates a new entry within the frDlcmiTable.
Input format
[ [
[ CR DLCMIE : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLCMIE- 1-
DEL DLCMIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete DLCMI Entry
This task removes an existing entry from the frDlcmiTable.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL DLCMIE : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL DLCMIE- 1-
DISP DLCMIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display DLCMI Entry
This task displays an existing entry within the frDlcmiTable.
Output Parameters:
State:
This variable states which Data Link Connection Management scheme is
active (and by implication, what DLCI it uses) on the Frame Relay
interface.
Address:
This variable states which address format is in use on the Frame Relay
interface.
AddressLen:
This variable states the address length in octets. In the case of Q922
format, the length indicates the entire length of the address
including the control portion.
PollingInterval:
This is the number of seconds between successive status enquiry
messages.
FullEnquiryInterval:
Number of status enquiry intervals that pass before issuance of a full
status enquiry message.
ErrorThreshold:
This is the maximum number of unanswered Status Enquiries the
equipment shall accept before declaring the interface down.
MonitoredEvents:
This is the number of status polling intervals over which the error
threshold is counted. For example, if within MonitoredEvents number
of events the station receives ErrorThreshold number of errors, the
interface is marked as down.
MaxSuppotedVCs:
The maximum number of Virtual Circuits allowed for this interface.
Usually dictated by the Frame Relay network.
Multicast:
This indicates whether the Frame Relay interface is using a multicast
service.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DLCMIE : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLCMIE- 1-
CAN DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command cancels a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
- The existing DLU systems must be PLA.
- The DIUs in the LTGs the DLU is connected
to must be PLA.
- No nailed up connection must exist for this DLU.
- If the DLU is of the type DLUG, no
administerable DLU equipment must exist in
this DLU.
- No administerable DLU modules must exist in
this DLU.
- The DLU must not be object to IACHASTA (see
MML command CR IACOBJ.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DLU : DLU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DLU- 1-
CONF DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command configures a DLU system to the desired operating status.
If a DLU system of any DLU type except DLUG is configured, then the
connected DIUs on the LTG will be configured automatically together
with the DLU system.
If a DLU system of a DLUG is configured, then the connected DIUs on
the LTG are not configured automatically together with the DLU system.
The command CONF DIU must be used to configure the DIUs of a
connected DLUG.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,DLUC0=[ [
[ CONF DLU : DLU= ,DLUC1= ,OST= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL 0
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
This parameter specifies the desired operating status.
Compatibilities:
+--------------------------+-------------------+
! ! ! New state !
! Old ! Access- +----+----+----+----+
! state ! Degrading ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+==========================+====+====+====+====+
! UNA ! * ! + ! + ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! MBL ! * ! + ! + ! + ! !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! * ! ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! * ! ! + ! ! + !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLU- 1+
CONF DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! accessible ! + ! ! ! !
! ACT ! not accessible ! + ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
*: not relevant
Notes:
- During installation recovery there are no restrictions for state
transitions and the compatibility table is not relevant.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLU- 2-
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command creates a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must not yet exist.
- All LTGs connected to the DLU must be
of the same type.
- All LTGs connected to the DLU must have
the same load type.
- All LTUs connected to the DLU must be
of the same type and not be connected to
another DLU. Allowed types are:
D24
D30
- Enough memory must be provided in the CP
database (see command MODIFY DB-SIZE),
Input format
[ [
[ CR DLU : DLU= ,TYPE= <,DLUC0= ,DLUC1=> [,PORTGRID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CCSWIDTH=] [,ALEXF=] [,ALPROF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must not yet exist.
TYPE DLU TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU type.
DLUA DLU TYPE A
DLUB DLU TYPE B
DLUK DLU TYPE K
DLUO DLU TYPE O
DLUD DLU TYPE D
DLUV DLU TYPE V
DLUX DLU TYPE X
DLUI DLU TYPE I
DLUG DLU TYPE G
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROLLER 0
This parameter specifies the connection of
DLU controller 0 to LTUs in up to two LTGs.
Compatibilities:
- The specified LTGs and LTUs must exist.
- The specified LTGs must be of the
type LTGB.
- The type of these LTUs must be one of the
following:
D24
D30
- The PCM links of all DLU controllers of
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLU- 1+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the DLU must be connected to LTUs of the
same type.
- If the type of the LTUs is D30, only the
LTUs 0 to 3 may be used for connecting
the DLU.
- The specified DIUs must not yet be connected
to another DLU.
- CCS links must be connected to DIUs with the
following applications:
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
- Extension links must be connected to DIUs
with the following applications:
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
- All CCS links of a DLU controller must be
connected to DIUs with the same application.
- To each LTG connected to the DLU there must
be exactly one CCS link.
- The CCS links of DLU controller 0 must be
connected to different LTGs than the CCS links
of DLU controller 1.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTDLU.
CCSLDI, all extension links of this DLU
application EXTLDI.
- The CCS link connected to the port CCS0 of
the DLU controller must lead to a different
LTG than the CCS link connected to port CCS1.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS0,
EXT0, EXT1, EXT2 and EXT3 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- The ports EXT3 and EXT7 of the DLU
controller can only be used if they are
connected to LTUs of the type D24.
- For all DLU types except DLUG, only the
ports CCS0 and EXT0 of the DLU controller
can be used for LTG connections.
- If the CCS link of a DLU of the type DLUV
is connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, no extension link may be created.
At maximum 10 values can be linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
This unit specifies the LTG set.
b: LTG NUMBER=
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
This unit specifies the DIU to which
the DLU controller 0 is connected via
a PCM link.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLU- 2+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: DLUC PORT
CCS0 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 0
EXT0 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 0
This unit specifies the PCM port on the
DLU controller 0 to which the PCM is
connected.
Compatibilities:
type LTGB.
following:
D24
D30
same type.
the DLU.
to another DLU.
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
application EXTDLU.
application EXTLDI.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLU- 3+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
connected.
PORTGRID PORT GRID OF THE DLU
This parameter specifies how many ports are
assigned to each DLU module is this DLU.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU of the type DLUG.
CCSWIDTH CCS WIDTH
This parameter specifies how many timeslots
on each CCS link of the DLU are used as
CCS channel.
Compatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
- If the DLU is connected to LTUs of the
type D24, only values from 1 to 8 may
be entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLU- 4+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALEXF ALARM EXTERNAL FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether the integrated
ALEX function of the DLU controllers are used.
Compatibilities:
N NO ALEX FUNCTION
NO NO ALEX FUNCTION
Y ALEX FUNCTION
YES ALEX FUNCTION
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
CRITICAL critical
If this parameter is omitted for a DLU of
the type DLUG, the alarm profile MAJESC
will be used by default.
Prerequisites:
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
Compatibilities:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLU- 5-
DIAG DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF THE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command starts the diagnosis of a digital line unit or a specific
DLU system.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU system(s) to be diagnosed must have been created.
- No other diagnosis may run on this DLU.
- The pre-switched units (LTG and DIU(CCS)) must be in the operating states
ACT or CBL.
- The DLU system(s) to be diagnosed must be in the operating state(s) MBL.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,DLUC0=[[ [
[ DIAG DLU : DLU= [,DLUC1=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies whether DLUC0 is to be diagnosed.
Default: 1.) Y if neither DLUC0=Y nor DLUC1=Y is specified or
2.) N if DLUC1=Y is specified.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: Y
This parameter specifies whether DLUC1 is to be diagnosed.
Default: 1.) Y if neither DLUC1=Y nor DLUC0=Y is specified or
2.) N if DLUC0=Y is specified.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: Y
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG DLU- 1-
DISP DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command displays data of one DLU, a range of DLUs or
all DLUs.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DLU : DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLU- 1-
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTEND DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command creates news PCM connections from a DLU
to currently unconnected LTUs.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU to be extended must exist.
- The LTUs of the type D30 or D24 to which
the additional PCMs are to be connected must not
be connected to another DLU.
- If a new CCS link is to be created and there are
any modules created in the DLU, the corresponding
LTG must be PLA or MBL.
- If the DLU type is not DLUG, the specified DLU
controller must be PLA.
- The maximum amount of created DLU ports managed
by each affected LTG must not exceed 2048.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ EXT DLU : DLU= <,DLUC0= ,DLUC1=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
type LTGB.
following:
D24
D30
same type.
the DLU.
to another DLU.
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXT DLU- 1+
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
application EXTDLU.
application EXTLDI.
- The specified port of the DLU controller must
not yet be used by an already existing PCM
link.
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXT DLU- 2+
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
connected.
Compatibilities:
type LTGB.
following:
D24
D30
same type.
the DLU.
to another DLU.
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
application EXTDLU.
application EXTLDI.
- The specified port of the DLU controller must
not yet be used by an already existing PCM
link.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXT DLU- 3+
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
connected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXT DLU- 4-
MOD DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command modifies a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must be of the type DLUG.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DLU : DLU= <,CCSWIDTH= ,ALEXF= ,ALPROF=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
CCSWIDTH CCS WIDTH
This parameter specifies how many timeslots
on each CCS link of the DLU are used as
CCS channel.
Compatibilities:
- If the DLU is connected to LTUs of the
type D24, only values from 1 to 8 may
be entered.
- The DLU controllers of the DLU must
be PLA or MBL.
- The corresponding LTUs must be PLA
or MBL.
ALEXF ALARM EXTERNAL FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether the integrated
ALEX function of the DLU controllers are used.
N NO ALEX FUNCTION
NO NO ALEX FUNCTION
Y ALEX FUNCTION
YES ALEX FUNCTION
Valid profiles are:
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLU- 1+
MOD DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLU- 2-
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command records DLU traffic measurement data for specified DLUs
to operator terminal or to disk every 15 minutes within a given time
interval.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 8 jobs of this type may be entered at the
same time.
Input format
[ [
[ REC DLU : DLU= ,UNIT= [,FORMAT=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [
[ [
[ [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the numbers of the DLUs for which data
has to be recorded.
It is possible to choose a single DLU, single DLUs linked with &,
a range of DLUs, ranges of DLUs linked with & or a combination
of these possibilities linked with & .
A maximum of 5 links is permitted.
The maximum number of DLUs which can be measured/monitored
simultaneously with either job REC DLU or ENTR TRAMON (for DLU)
is limited depending on the configuration. It is not allowed to
run REC DLU and ENTR TRAMON (for DLU) simultaneously.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all DLUs (DLU=X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD is specified.
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DLU- 1+
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
FORMAT OUTPUT_FORMAT
This parameter determines the output format to the output medium.
The identifiers can be concatenated, with the exception of the
following case:
SHORT together with LONG;
are not permitted.
Default: SHORT
SHORT SHORT FORMAT
If this option is selected, the common DLU
counters and the short format of CC counters
are recorded.
LONG LONG FORMAT
counters and the long format of CC counters
are recorded.
TIMESLOT TIME SLOT COUNTER
counters, the CC counters and the time slot
occupation counters are recorded.
SPEECHCH SPEECH CHANNEL COUNTER
counters, the CC counters and the speech
channel counters are recorded.
This value is not allowed in a measurement
of all DLUs (DLU = X) .
ALLTRAFF ALL TRAFFIC DATA
counters, the CC counters , the time slot
occupation- and the speech channel counters
are recorded.
PORT PORT DATA
Additional to the selected counters (default =
DLU) the DLU port data are collected.
In case of UNIT=OMT the port data will be
displayed at the beginning of the measurement.
In case of UNIT=MDD[-DAILY] the port data
will be written at the beginning of all files.
This information unit selects the output format.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DLU- 2+
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DLU- 3+
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DLU- 4-
RED DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUCE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command cancels existing PCM connections of a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU must exist.
- The specified PCM connections must exist
for this DLU.
Compatibilities:
- If a PCM link is to be removed from a DLU
which is not of the type DLUG, the corresponding
DLU controller must be PLA.
- If a CCS link is to be removed from a DLU of
the type DLUG, the corresponding
DLU controller must be PLA.
- If a CCS link is to be removed and there are any
modules created in the DLU, the corresponding
LTG must be PLA.
- If a PCM link is to be removed from a DLU of
the type DLUG, the corresponding LTUs must
be PLA.
- At least one CCS link must remain on this DLU!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ RED DLU : DLU= <,DLUC0= ,DLUC1=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
- The specified PCM connection must exist
for this DLU.
a-b-c[-d]
a: LTG SET=
b: LTG NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RED DLU- 1+
RED DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
connected.
Compatibilities:
- The specified PCM connection must exist
for this DLU.
a-b-c[-d]
a: LTG SET=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
connected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RED DLU- 2-
STAT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU SYSTEMS
This command displays the DLU system operating states of all DLUs, an
interval of DLUs or only one DLU.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT DLU : DLU= [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OST OPERATING STATUS IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies an operating status for selective display.
ACT ACTIVE
DST DISTURBED
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
FLT FAULTY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLU- 1-
CAN DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command cancels DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU equipment must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DLUEQ : DLU= ,EQ= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the location of
the DLU equipment within the DLU.
a-b[-c]
a: LOCATION TYPE
EQG EQUIPMENT DLUG SLOT
MOD MODULE SLOT
This unit specifies the location type
of the DLU equipment.
b: SHELF NUMBER=
This unit specifies the shelf number.
c: EQUIPMENT NUMBER / MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the DLU equipment
number respectively the DLU module number
associated with the DLU equipment.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DLUEQ- 1-
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU EQUIPMENT
This command configures one or more DLU equipment to the desired
operating status.
DLUV equipment will be configured automatically together with
the DLU system. It cannot be configured by this MML command.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,DCC= [ [
[ [,RGMG=[ [
[ CONF DLUEQ : DLU= ,RGB= ,OST= ; [
[ [,EQ= [ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the direct
current converter.
The parameter DCC is valid for all DLU types except DLUG.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: DCC NUMBER=
This information unit specifies the DCC number within
a shelf.
unit values.
RGMG RING METER GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the ringing and metering generator.
The parameter RGMG may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLUEQ- 1+
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RGB RING GENERATOR SHELF B
This parameter specifies the ringing generator.
The parameter RGB may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the equipment of a DLUG.
Depending on the entered unit values, the following
equipment will be configured :
1. for EQG - <shelf> - <eqg_no> or
EQG - <shelf> - X or
EQG - <shelf>
the central DCC in a shelf of a DLUG
2. for EQG - X - X or
EQG - X
all central DCCs within a DLUG
3. for MOD - <shelf> - <mod>
one module located equipment
4. for MOD - <shelf> - X
all module located equipment within a shelf
5. for MOD - X - X
all module located equipment within a DLUG
6. for BD - <bd_no>
one bus distributor specified by its ID
7. for BD - X
all bus distributors within a DLUG
8. for X - X - X
all equipment within a DLUG.
a-b[-c]
a: EQUIPMENT ADDRESS TYPE
EQG CENTRAL DCC LOCATION
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE LOCATED EQUIPMENT
X ALL EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the address type of the equipment.
b: EQUIPMENT UNIT 2=
The meaning of equipment unit 2 depends on the selected
address type.
It specifies the shelf number for the address types EQG
and MOD respectively the ID of the bus distributor for
the address type BD.
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT UNIT 3=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLUEQ- 2+
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
address type.
For the address type EQG the central equipment position
in a shelf of a DLUG is selected.
For the address type MOD the module position within a
shelf has to be entered.
For the address type BD the equipment unit 3 has to be
omitted.
unit values.
Compatibilities for any equipment except BDs in the DLUG:
+-----------+--------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+
! state ! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+===========+====+====+====+
! MBL ! + ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! PLA ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
Notes:
- DCC status transition from ACT to MBL in all DLU types except
DLUG are only allowed if the depending switching modules or the
supplied DLU system is in the status PLA.
- DCC status transitions in the DLUG can be executed independent
of the supplied DLU modules.
Compatibilities for BDs (bus distributors) in the DLUG:
+--------------------------+-------------------+
! ! ! New state !
! Old ! Access- +----+----+----+----+
! state ! Degrading ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+==========================+====+====+====+====+
! MBL ! * ! + ! + ! + ! !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! * ! ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! * ! ! + ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! accessible ! + ! ! ! !
! ACT ! not accessible ! + ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
*: not relevant
During installation recovery there are no restrictions for state
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLUEQ- 3-
CR DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command creates DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU equipment address
must be free.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DLUEQ : DLU= ,TYPE= ,EQ= [,ALPROF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
TYPE DLU EQUIPMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU
equipment type.
DCC4 DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER 4
DCCPOOL DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER POOL
EQ EQUIPMENT
a-b[-c]
a: LOCATION TYPE
MOD MODULE SLOT
b: SHELF NUMBER=
This unit specifies the shelf number.
c: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the DLU module number
This unit may only be entered if the
location type is MOD.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUEQ- 1+
CR DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Valid profiles are:
CRITICAL critical
If this parameter is omitted, the alarm
profile MAJNOESC will be used by default.
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUEQ- 2-
DIAG DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-EQUIPMENT
This command starts the diagnosis of a digital line unit equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The equipment to be diagnosed must have been created.
- The pre-switched units must be in the operating states ACT or
CBL.
- At least one equipment within the specified range must be in the
- No equipment within the specified range must be in the operating
status ACT or CBL.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,RGMG=[ [
[ DIAG DLUEQ : DLU= ,RGB= ; [
[ [,EQ= [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGMG RING METER GENERATOR
DLUG.
RGB RING GENERATOR
DLUG.
EQ EQUIPMENT
equipment will be diagnosed :
EQG - <shelf>
EQG - X
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG DLUEQ- 1+
DIAG DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. for MOD - X - X
5. for BD - <bd_no>
6. for BD - X
7. for X - X - X
a-b[-c]
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
address type.
unit values.
address type.
omitted.
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG DLUEQ- 2-
DISP DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command displays DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU equipment must
exist.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,TYPE=[[ ; [
[ DISP DLUEQ : DLU= [,EQ= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
TYPE DLU EQUIPMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU
equipment type.
RGMG RINGING / METERING GENERATOR
DCCPOOL DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER POOL
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
EQ EQUIPMENT
a[-b[-c]]
a: LOCATION TYPE
EQ EQUIPMENT (CLASSIC) SLOT
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE SLOT
RGMG RINGING / METERING GENERATOR
b: SHELF / RGMG / BD NUMBER=
This unit specifies the shelf number,
the Ringing and Metering Generator number,
or the bus distributor number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLUEQ- 1+
DISP DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT NUMBER / MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the DLU equipment
number respectively the DLU module number
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLUEQ- 2-
MOD DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command modifies DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU equipment must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DLUEQ : DLU= ,EQ= ,ALPROF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Prerequisites:
EQ EQUIPMENT
a-b[-c]
a: LOCATION TYPE
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE SLOT
b: SHELF NUMBER / BD NUMBER=
This unit specifies the shelf number
or the BD number.
c: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the DLU module number
This unit may only be entered if the
location type is MOD.
Valid profiles are:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLUEQ- 1+
MOD DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLUEQ- 2-
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OST OF DLU EQUIPMENT
This command displays the operating states of DLU equipment.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,DCC= [ [
[ [,RGMG=[ [
[ STAT DLUEQ : DLU= ,RGB= [,OST=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [,EQ= [ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONV. LOCATION
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the
direct current converter.
The parameter DCC is valid for all DLU types except DLUG.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: DCC NUMBER=
unit values.
RGMG RINGING/METERING GENER. NUMBER
DLUG.
RGB RINGING GENERATOR SHELF B
DLUG.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLUEQ- 1+
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EQ EQUIPMENT
equipment will be displayed :
EQG - <shelf>
EQG - X
4. for MOD - <shelf> - X
all module located equipment within a shelf
5. for MOD - X - X
6. for BD - <bd_no>
7. for BD - X
8. for X - X - X
a-b[-c]
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
X ALL EQUIPMENT
address type.
unit values.
address type.
omitted.
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLUEQ- 2+
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE
DST DISTURBED
PLA PLANNED
FLT FAULTY
TYPE EQUIPMENT TYPE SELECTOR
This parameter specifies an equipment type for selective display.
RGB RINGING GENERATOR TYPE B
RGMG RINGING/METERING GENERATOR
DCC4 CLASSIC DCC FOR 4 MODULES
DCC8 CLASSIC DCC FOR 8 MODULES
DCCPOOL POOL DCC
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLUEQ- 3-
TEST DLULC
MULTIPLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST DLU LINE CIRCUIT
This command only tests analog subscriber line circuits
in the DLU.
<job number>.
1. TEST DLULC - MULTIPLE MULTIPLE SUBSCR. LINE CIRCUITS
2. TEST DLULC - SINGLE ONE SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT
3. TEST DLULC - UNCOND UNCONDTIONAL SLMI:FMA
1. Input format
MULTIPLE SUBSCR. LINE CIRCUITS
This command tests more than one DLU analog subscriber line circuit.
The circuits to be tested are specified by entering port-oriented
data.
[ [
[ TEST DLULC : DLU= ,LC= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number in an exchange.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the position of one or more line
circuits in the DLU.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
This unit value corresponds to the shelf number.
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit value corresponds to the module number.
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
This unit value corresponds to the circuit number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST DLULC- 1+
TEST DLULC
MULTIPLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the program variant of testing analog
circuits in a DLU.
In the case of S1 the RINGING TEST for only the first port per
module is carried out.
In the case of S2 only the RINGING TEST is carried out.
In the case of S3 only if TU position 0-11-0 is specified,
TU Calibration will be executed.
In all other cases the COMPLETE CIRCUIT TEST is carried out
(as if optional parameter TTYPE had not been entered).
S1 RINGING TST.FOR 1.CIRC.OF MOD.
S2 RINGING TST.FOR EACH SEL.CIRC.
S3 TU CALIBRATION
S4 TEST FUNCTION 4 (NORMAL TEST)
determines the tasks.
If this parameter is entered, this number must first have
been assigned to a schedule with the command ENTER TEST SCHEDULE.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST DLULC- 2+
TEST DLULC
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ONE SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT
This command tests a single DLU analog subscriber line circuit.
data.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,PERM=[[ [
[ TEST DLULC : DLU= ,LC= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] [,STEP=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
TTYPE TEST TYPE
circuits in a DLU.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST DLULC- 3+
TEST DLULC
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
S3 TU CALIBRATION
determines the tasks.
been assigned to a schedule with the command ENTER TEST SCHEDULE.
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test job is to be
performed.
A permanent test is only allowed for a single line circuit.
The job runs continuously and can be stopped by the STOP JOB
command.
N DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
NO DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
Y SET PERMANENT TEST
YES SET PERMANENT TEST
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a breakpoint during a step test.
The test table of the test object indicates which
test steps represent a breakpoint (country-specific).
A step test is only allowed for a single test of one line circuit.
The test program runs until the defined test step and must
be continued with the command CONT JOB.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST DLULC- 4+
TEST DLULC
UNCOND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
UNCONDTIONAL SLMI:FMA
This command tests a single DLU analog subscriber line circuit, type
SLMI:FMA, with the possibility to override the high bit rate busy
status.
data.
[ [
[ TEST DLULC : DLU= ,LC= ,UNCOND= [,TTYPE=] [,PERM=] [,STEP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL TEST
This parameter specifies whether or not the high bit rate portion
of a subscriber is to be tested independently of the high bit rate
busy status. YES means that the high bit rate status busy is to be
overriden and the test performed. NO means that the test is to be
performed only if the high bit rate status is idle. By default the
value of this parameter is NO.
N NORMAL TESTING
NO NORMAL TESTING
Y TEST UNCONDITIONALLY
YES TEST UNCONDITIONALLY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST DLULC- 5+
TEST DLULC
UNCOND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTYPE TEST TYPE
circuits in a DLU.
S3 TU CALIBRATION
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test job is to be
performed.
A permanent test is only allowed for a single line circuit.
The job runs continuously and can be stopped by the STOP JOB
command.
N DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
NO DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
Y SET PERMANENT TEST
YES SET PERMANENT TEST
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a breakpoint during a step test.
The test table of the test object indicates which
test steps represent a breakpoint (country-specific).
A step test is only allowed for a single test of one line circuit.
The test program runs until the defined test step and must
be continued with the command CONT JOB.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST DLULC- 6-
CAN DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DLU MODULE
This command cancels a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The module to be canceled must exist and must be PLA.
- The ports of the module must be PLA.
This prerequisite does not apply to modules of the
following types:
IWEA
IWEB
IWEC
IWED
IWEE
IWEF
- The module type must be administrable.
- The associated DLU ports must not be connected.
- No frame handler must be assigned to this DLU module.
- The last DLU module COTU may only be canceled if no
remote DLU module exists in the DLU.
- The DLU module MGB may only be canceled if no depending
DLU module exists in the DLU.
- The DLU module LTAM may only be canceled if the
inter-DLU bus it is connected to is not being used
by a test access for testing the DLU.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting
location of the DLU module.
Depending on the DLU type, several DLU module
positions cannot be administered, because they
are used by vital DLU hardware. These positions
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLU type ! Non-administerable DLU module positions !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DLUMOD- 1+
CAN DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: SHELF NUMBER=
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
For a DLU of the type DLUA values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUB values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUD values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=16 values from 0 to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUI values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUK values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUO values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUV values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUX values from 0
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DLUMOD- 2-
CONF DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU MODULE
This command configures one or more DLU modules to the desired operating
status.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE NAME
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the DLU module.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
unit values.
Compatibilities:
+-----------+-------------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+----+
! state ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+===========+====+====+====+====+
! MBL ! + ! + ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! ! + ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! + ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
Notes:
- Status transitions to the status CBL are only allowed for
call-processing DLU modules.
- During installation recovery there are no restrictions for state
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLUMOD- 1+
CONF DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLUMOD- 2-
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE
This command creates a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The specified mounting location must be free and administrable.
- DLU type, module type and mounting location must be compatible.
- The module type and the LTG load type must be compatible.
- Memory space must be provided in the CP database.
(see MOD DBSIZE)
Input format
[ [
[ CR DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ,TYPE= [,MEAS=] [,PACC=] [,PATHID=] [
[ [
[ [,SLMXID=] [,REMOTE=] [,IDLB=] [,PHUBMODE=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PARTNER=] [,ALPROF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location of
the DLU module.
It is possible to create more than 1 module by
specifying an interval. The interval must not
exceed the range of one shelf.
Compatibilities:
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
The exact compatibilities of module type, mounting
location and shelf type are described in the
projecting handbook. The CP only checks the
compatibilities listed below.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUA:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 1+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-15 !
! COTU ! 0-4, 1-4 !
! EMSP ! 0-14, 0-15, 1-11, 1-12 !
! FMTU ! 0-11 !
! FTEM ! 0-11 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! LMEM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! LTAM ! 1-14 !
! LVMM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! MTAM ! 1-13 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SASC ! 0-2 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! TBAM ! 1-15 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUB:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11 !
! COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 2+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUB:
- DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and SLMAITM must
be created as SLMAFPE.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUD:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 3+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUD:
- Only one DLU module ALEX may be created per DLU.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUG:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-6 !
! LCMM ! 0-5 !
! LTAM ! 0-4 !
! MTAM ! 0-2 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SASCG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 1-15 !
! SLMAITFG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAITHG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAITMG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDQFC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDTFC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-3 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUG:
- If the DLU was created with PORTGRID=32, only
the shelves 0 to 3 are available.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUI:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 4+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUI:
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUK:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 5+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUK:
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUO:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! FMTU ! 0-11 !
! LCMM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! LTAM ! 1-14 !
! MTAM ! 1-13 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 6+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! TBAM ! 1-15 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUV:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11 !
! SLMX ! 1-0 .. 1-4 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUX:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! COTU ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 7+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUX:
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
TYPE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU module type.
SLMACOS SLMA DLU ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLMACM16 SLMA DLU METER PULSE 16 KHZ
SLMACCBR SLMA DLU COINBOX REVERSAL
SLMACRMP SLMA DLU METER PULSE 16 REVERS
SLMD SLM DIGITAL (4 CIRCUITS)
LMEM LINE MEASURING MODULE
LVMM LEVEL MEASURING MODULE
FTEM FUNCTION TEST MODULE
ALEX ALARM EXTERN
EMSP EMERGENCY SERVICE PUSHBUTTON
SLMAC12R SLMA DLU 12 KHZ REVERSAL
SLMACMC SLMA DLU 12 KHZ C-WIRE
SLMADID SLMA DLU DIRECT INWARD DIALING
SLMACMRL SLMA DLU 16 KHZ REVERSAL
MTAM METALLIC TEST ACCESS MODULE
TBAM TEST BUS ACCESS MODULE
LTAM LOOP TEST ACCESS MODULE
SLMAFPB SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. B
SLMACSR SLMA CONC SILENT REVERSAL
SLMABEL SLMA DLU BALANCED EXTENDED
SLMA12R SLMA METER PULSE 12 KHZ REVERS
SLMDB SLM DIGITAL B (8 CIRCUITS)
FMTU FUNCTION TEST MODULE FOR TU
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 8+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LCMM LINE AND CIRCUIT MEASURING MOD
SASC STAND ALONE SERVICE CONTROLLER
SLMAFPS SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. S
IWEA INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT A
IWEB INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT B
SLMACSP SLMA DLU COINBOX SEMIPUBLICO
SLMAMC SLMA METER PULSE C-WIRE
SLMIAMA SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE A
SLMX SUBSCRIBER LINE MULTIPLEXER
SLMIPH1 SLM INTERNET PACKET HUB TYPE 1
IWEC INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT C
IWED INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT D
IWEE INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT E
IWEF INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT F
SLMIFMA SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM A
SLMAFPE SLMA DLU FEATURE PROG. E
DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and
SLMAITM must be created as SLMAFPE.
MGB METERING GENERATOR DLUB
COTU CENTRAL OFFICE TERMINAL UNIT
SLMISDA SLM INTERNET SYMM. DIGITAL A
SLMIMSB SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE B
SLMIAMC SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE C
SLMIMSA SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE A
SLMDQFB SLM DIGITAL QFB (16 CIRCUITS)
SLMDTFB SLM DIGITAL TFB (16 CIRCUITS)
NODLUMOD NON DLU MODULE
This DLU module type marks a DLU module slot
used by a DLU integrated external hardware.
SLMIMPB SLM INTERNET MODEM POOL CARD B
SLMAITFG SLMA INTEGR. TEST FUNC. G
SLMAITMG SLMA INTEGR. METAL. TEST G
SLMISDB SLM INTERNET SYMM. DIGITAL B
SASCG STAND-ALONE SERV. CONTR. G
SLMISDC SLM INTERNET SYMM. DIGITAL C
SLMIAMB SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE B
SLMIAME SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE E
SLMIFMB SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM B
SLMIFMC SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM C
SLMIFMD SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM D
SLMDQFC SLM DIGITAL QFC
SLMDTFC SLM DIGITAL TFC
SLMIMPC SLM INTERNET MODEM POOL CARD C
SLMAITHG SLMA INTEGR. TEST HIGH CURR. G
SLMIMSC SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE C
SLMIMSD SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE D
MEAS MEASUREMENT INDEX
This parameter specifies the test data record index for a DLU
module.
PACC ACCESS TO PACKET SWITCHING MOD
This parameter specifies the packet access authorization.
Prerequisites:
To assign the packet access authorization, one of
the following packet data connections from the
DLU to the packet handler must exist for the
specified DLU:
- A nailed up connection of the type IPCH.
- A nailed up connection of the type BDDLUCH to a
frame handler.
The PATHID of this nailed up connection must
match the PATHID of the DLU module.
The frame handler must either be in mode NUC and
be connected to the packet handler via a nailed up
connection of the type BDCH, or it must be in the
mode SWITCHED.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 9+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Packet access authorization may only be assigned to
DLU modules of the following types:
SLMD
SLMDB
SLMX
SLMDQFB
SLMDQFC
SLMDTFB
SLMDTFC
SLMIAMC
SLMIAME
SLMISDA
SLMISDB
SLMISDC
NO NO PACKET ACCESS
YES PACKET ACCESS
PATHID PACKET DATA PATH ID
This parameter specifies the packet data path ID
for a DLU module.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter is only allowed for DLU modules
in a DLU of the type DLUG.
- This parameter is only allowed if the DLU
module has packet access authorization.
- A nailed-up connection with the specified
PATHID must exist for the DLU.
SLMXID SLMX IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the SLMX identifier.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered for DLU modules of the type
SLMX. Its value has to be unique within the DLU.
REMOTE REMOTE INFORMATION
This parameter marks a DLU module as remote.
Compatibilities:
A remote DLU module can only be created if the DLU module
COTU has been created before.
NO LOCAL DLU MODULE
YES REMOTE DLU MODULE
N LOCAL DLU MODULE
Y REMOTE DLU MODULE
IDLB INTER-DLU BUS
This parameter specifies the inter-DLU bus.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered if the
DLU module is of the type LTAM and if
the country code has been set to BEL
via the command ENTR EXDDAT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 10+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PHUBMODE PACKET HUB MODE
This parameter specifies the packet hub mode.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered for DLU
modules of the type SLMIPH1.
SUPERIOR SUPERIOR
SUPERRED SUPERIOR REDUNDANT
INFERIOR INFERIOR
PARTNER PACKET HUB PARTNER
This parameter specifies the packet hub partner.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered for DLU
modules of the type SLMIPH1.
a-b
a: PACKET HUB PARTNER SHELF=
b: PACKET HUB PARTNER MODULE=
This parameter specifies the alarm profile
of the DLU module.
Valid profiles are:
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
DLU module in a DLU of the type DLUG.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DLUMOD- 11-
DIAG DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-MODULES
This command starts the diagnosis of DLU modules.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU module(s) to be diagnosed must have been created.
- The pre-switched units must be in the operating states ACT or
CBL.
- At least one DLU module within the specified range must be in the
- No DLU module within the specified range must be in the operating
status ACT or CBL.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE NAME
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG DLUMOD- 1-
DISP DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DLU MODULE
This command displays the data of DLU modules.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,MOD= [[ [
[ DISP DLUMOD : DLU= [,SLMXID=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location
of the DLU module.
Prerequisites:
It may only be specified if no parameter
interval is entered for the parameter DLU.
Compatibilities:
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLUMOD- 1+
DISP DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the module number
in the DLU shelf.
SLMXID SLMX IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the SLMX identifier.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLUMOD- 2-
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE
This command modifies the data of a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU module to be modified must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= <,MEAS= ,PACC= ,IDLB= ,PATHID= [
[ [
[ ,ALPROF=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the DLU module.
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLUMOD- 1+
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the module number in
the DLU shelf.
MEAS MEASUREMENT INDEX
This parameter specifies the test data record
index for a DLU module.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed for DLU modules
in a DLU of the type DLUV.
PACC PACKET ACCESS AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the packet access authorization.
Prerequisites:
To assign the packet access authorization, one of
the following packet data connections from the
DLU to the packet handler must exist for the
specified DLU:
- A nailed up connection of the type IPCH.
- A nailed up connection of the type BDDLUCH to a
frame handler.
The PATHID of this nailed up connection must
match the PATHID of the DLU module.
The frame handler must either be in mode NUC and
be connected to the packet handler via a nailed up
connection of the type BDCH, or it must be in the
mode SWITCHED.
Compatibilities:
- Packet access authorization may only be assigned to
DLU modules of the following types:
SLMD
SLMDB
SLMX
SLMDQFB
SLMDQFC
SLMDTFB
SLMDTFC
SLMIAMC
SLMIAME
SLMISDA
SLMISDB
SLMISDC
NO NO PACKET ACCESS
YES PACKET ACCESS
IDLB INTER-DLU BUS
This parameter specifies the inter-DLU bus.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered if the
DLU module is of the type LTAM and if
the country code has been set to BEL
via the command ENTR EXDDAT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLUMOD- 2+
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
n/o
n/
/o
If no value for new a is entered
the connection of the DLU to the
inter-DLU bus will be canceled. This
connection may only be canceled if
the inter-DLU bus is not being used by
a test access for testing the DLU.
PATHID PACKET DATA PATH ID
This parameter specifies the packet data path ID
for a DLU module.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter is only allowed for DLU modules
in a DLU of the type DLUG.
- This parameter is only allowed if the DLU
module has packet access authorization.
- A nailed-up connection with the specified
PATHID must exist for the DLU.
This parameter specifies the alarm profile
of the DLU module.
Valid profiles are:
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
DLU module in a DLU of the type DLUG.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DLUMOD- 3-
STAT DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU MODULES
This command displays the operating states (with access
degradations), the states of packet data accesses and INTERNET
failures of all modules, an interval of modules or one module for
the specified DLU.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= [,OST=] [,PACC=] [,INTERNET=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MODULE LOCATION
This parameter specifies the module location.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
DST DISTURBED
PLA PLANNED
BLK BLOCKED
NCP NO CALL-PROCESSING
PACC PACKET DATA ACCESS STATE
This optional parameter specifies one packet access state for the
selective display.
Default: no effect on display
NO NO P-DATA ACC. AUTHORISATION
YES P-DATA ACCESS AUTHORISATION
AVAIL PACKET DATA ACCESS AVAILABLE
NAC PACKET DATA NOT ACCESSIBLE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLUMOD- 1+
STAT DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PCHAN P-CHANNEL FAILURE
INTERNET INTERNET FAILURES
This parameter allows the selective display of DLU modules
with a specific INTERNET failure state.
Default: no effect on display
ALL ALL INTERNET MODULES
NOFAIL INTERNET MOD. WITHOUT FAILURE
INTFAIL INTERNET MOD. WITH INT. FAIL.
EXTFAIL INTERNET MOD. WITH EXT. FAIL.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLUMOD- 2-
DISP DLUPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY TRANSIENT DLU PATH DATA
This command displays transient DLU path data.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DLUPD : <EQN= ,LTG=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- Only the following port qualification is allowed:
DLU: EQN = a
The input of an V5IF number will be rejected with an operator hint.
- If EQN is given for a DLU path data will be displayed of this DLU
which can be connected to up to 4 LTGBs.
For DLU : a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V5IF : a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
Input of V5 interface will be rejected with an operator hint.
be traced.
Notes:
- Only the following port qualification is allowed:
LTG = a-b
- If LTG is given for an LTG path data will be displayed of this LTGB
which can be connected to up to 4 DLUs.
a-b
LTGSET : 0..31
and upper ones)
LTG : 1..63
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLUPD- 1-
CONF DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU PORTS
This command initiates the operating status transition of one or more
DLU ports.
Note:
The current operating status of DLU ports can be displayed by the
MML command STAT DLUPORT.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF DLUPORT : DLU= ,LC= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Notes:
- X can be specified only for the CIRCUIT unit, simultaneously for
the MODULE and CIRCUIT unit or simultaneously for all 3 units.
- For a DLU with type DLUB (compact DLU) or DLUD only the input
of SHELF values 0..3 is allowed.
- For a DLU with type DLUA only the input of PORT values 0..7 is
allowed.
(The current DLU type can be displayed using the MML command
DISP DLU.)
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
unit values.
b: MODULE=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLUPORT- 1+
CONF DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the new operating state.
Compatibilities:
+-----------+--------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+
! state ! PLA! MBL! ACT!
+===========+====+====+====+
! PLA ! ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! MBL ! + ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF DLUPORT- 2-
DISP DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT PORT
This command displays the port data for a specified range.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DLUPORT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of a port on the
DLU. Depending on the parameter entered, the following ranges are
displayed:
1. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - <modulno> - <circno>
- precisely the DLU port specified
2. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - <modulno> [ - X ]
- all DLU ports of the specified module
3. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all DLU modules of the specified shelf
4. for <dluno> - X - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all DLU modules in all shelves of the
specified DLU
5. for X - X - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all created DLUs
a-b-c[-d]
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER=
This unit specifies the DLU number.
unit values.
b: SHELF NUMBER=
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
to 3 are valid.
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLUPORT- 1+
DISP DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: MODULE NUMBER=
This unit specifies the module number
in the DLU shelf.
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
This unit specifies the circuit number.
to 7 are valid.
to 15 are valid.
to 15 are valid.
to 15 are valid.
to 15 are valid.
to 7 are valid.
to 15 are valid.
to 15 are valid.
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DLUPORT- 2-
SEL DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF DLU PORT
This command displays the port data of one, several or all DLUs.
Input format
[ [
[ SEL DLUPORT : DLU= ,LCTYPE= [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCTYPE LINE CIRCUIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the line circuit type of a DLU port.
SLCACOS SLCA DLU ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLCACM16 SLCA DLU METER PULSE 16 KHZ
SLCACRMP SLCA DLU METER PULSE 16 REVERS
SLCACCBR SLCA DLU COINBOX REVERSAL
SLCAC12R SLCA DLU 12 KHZ SILENT REVERSA
SLCACMRL SLCA DLU 16 KHZ REVERSAL
SLCACMC SLCA DLU 12 KHZ C-WIRE
SLCD SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT DIGITA
FTEC DLU FUNCTION TEST CIRCUIT
LMEC DLU LINE MEASURING CIRCUIT
LVMC DLU LEVEL MEASURING CIRUIT
EMSP DLU EMERGENCY SERVICE EQUIPMEN
UNUSEPRT UNUSED PORT
MTAC DLU METALLIC TEST ACCESS CIRCU
TBAC DLU TEST BUS ACCESS CIRCUIT
LTAC DLU LOOP TEST ACCESS CIRCUIT
SLCAFPB SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. B
SLCACSR SLCA DLU SILENT REVERSAL
SLCAMCD SLCA DLU THIRD GENERATION SLIC
SLCAFPC SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. C
SASCL STAND ALONE SERV CONTR LINK
SLCABEL SLCA DLU BALANCED EXTENDED
SLCAMC SLCA DLU 12KHZ C WIRE
SLCAFPS SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. S
FCTU DLU FUNCTION TEST CIRCUIT TU
LCMC DLU LINE AND CIRCUIT MEASURING
SLCACCSP SLCA DLU COINBOX SEMIPUBLICO
SLCAFPE SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. E
SLCX SLCX V51IF PORT
COTPRT CENTRAL OFFICE TERMINAL PORT
SLCSL SLC SDSL LOW
SLCSH SLC SDSL HIGH
SLCADSL SLC ADSL
SLCFMA SLC FLEXIBLE MODEM A
SLCSLB SLC SDSL LOW TYPE B
SLCSHB SLC SDSL HIGH TYPE B
TYPE TABLE TYPE
This parameter specifies the table type for a port.
Default value:
If no entry is made for this parameter, no table type is selected.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL DLUPORT- 1+
SEL DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FREE NOT CONNECTED
SUB SUBSCRIBER
ISUB ISDN SUBSCRIBER
PBXLN PBX LINE
IPBXBA ISDN PBX BASIC ACCESS
TEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TRUNK TRUNK
CONSOLE CONSOLE
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL DLUPORT- 2-
STAT DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DLU PORTS
This command is used to display the operating status of DLU ports.
A specific operating status can be entered to search for DLU ports
with given status.
Note:
The current operating status of DLU ports can be modified using
the MML command CONF DLUPORT.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT DLUPORT : DLU= ,LC= [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the DLU number.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Notes:
- X can be specified only for the CIRCUIT unit, simultaneously for
the MODULE and CIRCUIT unit or simultaneously for all 3 units.
- For a DLU with type DLUB (compact DLU) or DLUD only the input
of SHELF values 0..3 is allowed.
- For a DLU with type DLUA only the input of PORT values 0..7 is
allowed.
(The current DLU type can be displayed using the MML command
DISP DLU.)
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
unit values.
b: MODULE=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLUPORT- 1+
STAT DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This optional parameter specifies the operating state of the DLU
ports to be displayed.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
DST DISTURBED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DLUPORT- 2-
ACT DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command activates the dump of safeguarding messages.
Prerequisites:
- The dump may not previously be active.
- Activation of the dump causes following dump initiations to be processed
but not at the same time as the activation.
- External activations must be specified with the command DMP SGMSG.
This cancels the suppression of internal initiations (internal = from the
distribution process to the dump process, as soon as 200 messages have been
collected since the initiation last processed).
- If no external initiation is specified, there is automatically an internal
initiation after 200 messages have been collected by the distribution
process. This internal initiation initiates the dump of all previously
stored messages.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT DMPSGMSG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT DMPSGMSG- 1-
DACT DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command deactivates the dump of stored safeguarding messages.
Notes:
- Internal initiations from the distribution process to the dump process
are suppressed.
- External initiations to dump by the command DMP SGMSG are rejected
with the appropriate output.
- One reason for the deactivation can be that SG.OPER is full. In this
case, this cyclic file would be (partially) overwritten by further dumping.
The dump can be reactivated if dumping is at first suppressed and
SG.OPER is then dumped.
- Deactivation can also be initiated before the SG.OPER is created with
more than 90 PAM pages.
Prerequisites:
- If the dump is deactivated no further messages are written to SG.OPER,
but messages to be displayed continue to be collected by the distribution
process in its memory area.
- If the memory area is full, the oldest stored messages are compulsorily
overwritten.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT DMPSGMSG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT DMPSGMSG- 1-
DISP DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command displays the activation state for the dump of safeguarding
messages.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DMPSGMSG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DMPSGMSG- 1-
CAN DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command cancels a directory number interval or a single directory
number.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number interval must not be connected (command
DISP DN, TYPE=CONNECT) or accessible by the digit
translator (command DISP DN, ACT=YES).
- The directory number interval must not be activated for IACHASTA
registration (command DISP IACOBJ).
- There must not be any ported directory number (command DISP DN,
INCEPT=PORTEDDN) in the interval.
- There must not be any directory number ported by location
( command DISP DN, INCEPT=PORTEDLP) in the interval.
- There must not be any individual announcements (command DISP DN,
INCEPT=CHGDNIND) for directory numbers in the interval.
- There must not be any extended directory number (command DISP DN,
EXTDN=YES) in the interval.
- There must not be any directory numbers reserved for CENTREX
(command DISP CXGRPRES) in the interval.
- There must not be any references from the CENTREX translator to
directory numbers in the interval (commands DISP CXCPT,
DISP CXDN).
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DN : [LAC=] ,DN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number interval or the single
directory number to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DN- 1-
CR DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command creates a directory number interval or a single directory number
with or without economy.
Prerequisites:
- The local area code must be defined.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DN : LAC= ,DN= [,PBXVOL=] [,DNGRP=] [,STMGRP=] [,ACCNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
- Intervals that are used for subscribers should be decimal.
These intervals can be connected with a code point.
- Non-dialable intervals (e.g. for accounting purposes) might
be hexadecimal.
- Intervals of 1, 10, 100, 1000 directory numbers can be entered:
Intervals of 10, 100, 1000 dir.numbers with 2...12 digits
Single DN with PBX volume with 2...12 digits
Single DN without PBX volume with 1...12 digits
- Length of DN is not allowed to be longer tha specified
by DNMAXL to be displayed with DISP CALLPOPT.
PBXVOL PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
- For a single directory number used for a PBX, the PBX volume
indicates which directory number digits of a decade belong
to the PBX. The PBX volume must contain the last digit of the
given directory number.
DNGRP DIRECTORY NUMBER GROUP
This parameter specifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to a subgroup (e.g. for
creating an accounting file).
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric digits are possible for input.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DN- 1+
CR DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STMGRP STATISTIC METER GROUP
interval or the single directory number to counter groups.
ACCNO MARK FOR ACCOUNT NUMBER
This parameter specifies whether the directory number interval is only
used for accounting purposes. In this case the directory number
interval cannot be connected with a code point.
N DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
NO DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Y DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
YES DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DN- 2-
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA
This command displays data for either all directory numbers, the
directory numbers within an interval or a single directory number.
It displays directory numbers within a certain interval with the
specified information.
A search can be made for one of the following selection criteria:
- Accounting numbers or non-accounting numbers ACCNO
- Directory number group DNGRP
- Access from digit translator ACT
- Statistics meter group STMGRP
- Directory number type TYPE
- Intercept identifier INCEPT
- Extended directory numbers EXTDN.
If TYPE, INCEPT or EXTDN are specified each directory number with
the selected criteria will be displayed besides the data that are valid
for the whole interval.
If ACCNO, DNGRP, ACT or STMGRP are specified the directory
number interval data is displayed.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,DNGRP= [[ [
[ [[,INCEPT=[[ [
[ [[,ACT= [[ [
[ DISP DN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,STMGRP=[ [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [[,TYPE= [[ [
[ [[,ACCNO= [[ [
[ [[,EXTDN= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number range or the single
directory number to be displayed.
This parameter specifies the subgroup of the directory number
interval or single directory number.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DN- 1+
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
UNOBDN UNOBTAINABLE DIRECTORY NUMBER
CHGDNIND CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER IND.
PORTEDDN NUMBER PORTABILITY
PORTEDLP LOCATION PORTABILITY
ACT ACTIVATED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether or not the
directory number interval or the single directory number is
accessible by the digit translator.
N DISPLAY NOT ACTIVATED DN ONLY
NO DISPLAY NOT ACTIVATED DN ONLY
Y DISPLAY ACTIVATED DN ONLY
YES DISPLAY ACTIVATED DN ONLY
interval or the single directory number to counter groups.
TYPE SUBSCRIBER TYPE FOR DN
This parameter specifies the directory number type of the directory
number.
FREE FREE LINE
Specifies that only directory numbers
with no further connections are selected.
Also directory numbers with an intercept
identification will be selected.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
PBXLN PBX LINE
PBX PBX
PBXADDNO PBX ADDITIONAL NUMBER
Additional number of PBX.
PBXDDINO PBX DIRECT DIALING NUMBER
Direct dialing number of PBX
WST WORK STATION
MEETME MEET ME
CSGRP COMMON SERVICE GROUP
RESCSGRP RESERVED FOR COM. SERV. GROUP
CALLTYPE COMMON CDS CALLTYPE
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
CONNECT CONNECTED DIRECTORY NUMBER
Specifies that directory numbers with
further connections are selected.
A connection can be:
-SUB
-PBXLN
-PBX
-PBXADDNO
-PBXDDINO
-WST
-MEETME
-CSGRP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DN- 2+
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-RESCSGRP
-CALLTYPE
-CXGRP
ACCNO MARK FOR ACCOUNT NUMBER
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether or not the
directory number interval is used for accounting purposes only.
N DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
NO DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Y DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
YES DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Default: NO
EXTDN MARK FOR EXTENDED DN
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether
extended directory numbers are to be displayed.
Y DN IS EXTENDED
YES DN IS EXTENDED
This parameter specifies the output format of the display.
INTERVAL DIRECTORY NO. INTERVALS ONLY
specifies that only the data valid for the whole
interval (e.g. activation, kind of interval,
directory number group, statistic meter group,
PBX volume, extended directory number in interval
existing) will be displayed.
ALL ALL DIRECTORY NUMBERS
specifies the display of the individual data
of each directory number within the specified
directory number interval (including directory
number type, intercept identification and extended
directory number).
Furthermore the data valid for the whole
interval (e.g. activation, type of interval,
directory number group, statistic meter group
and PBX directory number volume) will be
displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DN- 3-
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command modifies a directory number interval or the data of a
directory number interval.
The following data can be changed:
- PBX directory number volume (PBXVOL) (for a single
directory number only)
- directory number group (DNGRP)
- statistic meter group (STMGRP)
It is also used to enter, modify and cancel the intercept identification
(INCEPT) or the intercept digits (b) of a single directory
number.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,NEWDN= [ [
[ [,PBXVOL=[ ; [
[ MOD DN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,DNGRP= [
[ [,STMGRP=[ ! [
[ [,INCEPT=[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the existing directory number interval or an
existing single directory number.
NEWDN NEW DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new directory number interval or a new
single directory number.
Notes:
- When connected (DISP DN, TYPE=CONNECT) or ported (MOD DN,
INCEPT=PORTEDDN) directory numbers are modified, a dangerous
command message is output. In this case care should be taken that
meter observation is stopped and traffic observation/measurement
is canceled.
- When connected directory numbers ported by location (MOD DN,
INCEPT=PORTEDLP) directory numbers are modified, a dangerous
command message is output. In this case care should be taken that
meter observation is stopped and traffic observation/measurement
is canceled.
- The mask is also output, if directory numbers are in the interval,
which are ported with location portability (INCEPT=PORTEDLP).
- The directory number interval must not be accessible by the digit
- If ported directory numbers are existing in the interval (to be
displayed with DISP DN), two cases can be distinguished:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DN- 1+
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a) The ported directory numbers in the exchange, where the
concerned subscribers are located, remain the same:
After the modification of the directory number interval the
directory numbers marked with INCEPT=PORTEDDN values must
be modified (MOD DN, parameter INCEPT=UNOBDN which
means this number is not valid). Because ported subscribers
are only reachable through their original numbers it necessary
to recreate the original numbers as single directory numbers
(CR DN) and modify them (MOD DN, parameter INCEPT=
PORTEDDN-b) so the link from the original number
to the ported number is like before.
b) The ported directory numbers in these exchanges are modified
accordingly:
No further ported directory number handling after the
modification of the directory number interval is necessary.
- For the new directory number (interval) a zone point should exist.
- The size of the directory number interval cannot be changed.
- Intervals that are used for subscribers which can be dialed must
be decimal.
- Intervals that are only used for accounting purposes might be
hexadecimal.
- The PBX volume must contain the last digit of the new directory
number.
- The new directory number with PBX volume must have at least two
digits.
- If a directory number in the interval is part of an operator
number of a PBX (OPN) and the length of the directory numbers
of the interval is changed, the length of the operator number
must not exceed the maximum length of a directory number
(12 digits).
- The Start Position Digits to Send (SSDI) for direct inward
dialing PBXs in the interval has to be adapted after the
modification, if the length of the interval has changed.
- Length of NEWDN is not allowed to be longer than specified
by DNMAXL to be displayed with DISP CALLPOPT.
- If extended directory numbers (EXTDN) are existing within the
interval, the new directory number cannot be longer than
DNMAXL-1 digits.
- If in the interval a PBX pilot directory number exists and the PBX
has additional numbers (ADDNO) in other directory number
intervals, the modification is not possible.
The additional numbers in the other intervals have to be
canceled (see MOD PBX) before the execution of the command and
recreated afterwards.
- If there are additional numbers (ADDNO) of a PBX in the interval
and the pilot directory number or further additional number of the
PBX are in another intervals, then the modification is not
possible.
The additional numbers in the interval to be changed have to be
canceled (see MOD PBX) before the execution of the command and
recreated afterwards.
- If in the interval a DDI-PBX direct dialing number (PBXDDINO)
or a PBX of type PBXDDINO exists, the modification is not
possible.
- The command is rejected if the interval consists of only one
directory number and this directory number is related to
a secured CENTREX business group BGID for which the operator
has no administration permission (see command DISP CXSEC).
In case the interval consists of more than one directory number,
it will be executed even if one or more directory numbers are
related to a BGID for which special operator permission
PBXVOL PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
Notes:
- The directory number interval must not be accessible by the digit
- Only an already existing PBX volume can be changed.
- A new PBX volume indicating which directory number digits of a decade
belong to a PBX can be entered for single directory numbers. The PBX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DN- 2+
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
volume must contain the last digit of the given directory number.
- The new PBX volume must be compatible with the operator number of
the PBX if there is one existing.
This parameter modifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to a subgroup (e.g. for
creating an accounting file).
Notes:
This parameter modifies the allocation of the directory number interval
or the single directory number to counter groups.
This parameter specifies
- the intercept identification and if needed the
individual announcement number or
- the porting information
for the desired directory number.
a[-b]
A second unit must not be entered.
UNOBDN UNOBTAINABLE DIRECTORY NUMBER
A second unit must not be entered.
CHGDNIND CHANGED DIRECTORY NO INDIV.
A second unit must be entered.
PORTEDDN NUMBER PORTABILITY
A second unit can be entered.
PORTEDLP LOCATION PORTABILITY
The PORTEDLP defines location portability
in project Singapore. A second unit must not
be entered.
b: INTERCEPT DIGITS=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DN- 3-
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DIRECTORY NUMBERS
This command records directory numbers to detect high load
connections. Up to 1000 subscribers can be measured by one
measurement. Only subscribers are measured, all other types
(e.g. PBX) are ignored.
The command will be rejected if there is no created subscriber in
the selected intervals. The measurement can only be run once at
any one time. The data of the measured records are output
exclusively to MDD.
The period of every single data collection and data output can be
varied by the command parameter SCANTIME.
If more than 1000 subscribers exist in the selected directory
number intervals, an indication follows in the "started mask".
The "started mask" contains a command repetition which confirms
the selected directory number intervals. In addition, the lowest
and highest directory numbers measured and the total number of
measured subscribers are output.
The three information units (lowest and highest measured
directory number, number of measured subscribers) appear in the
"started mask" and in the "finished mask".
Due to the information about the highest measured subscriber, the
directory number intervals in a subsequent measurement can be
selected optionally.
Which directory numbers from the selected directory number
interval are created subscribers is checked at the moment of
command receipt. The establishment of the directory numbers to be
measured is therefore a snapshot recording. This means that
subscribers created subsequently within the directory number
intervals selected in the command will be disregarded.
Selected subscribers who are deleted or modified after command
receipt will not be measured any more but they remain in the
output data.
Directory numbers can be specified by a digital line unit (DLU)
as an alternative to using intervals. The establishment of the
directory numbers is also a snapshot recording, which means that
the created subscribers at the DLU (including subscribers
connected via a V5 interface) to be measured will be
established at the moment of command receipt. If the number of
created subscribers of a selected DLU exceeds 1000, only
the first 1000 created subscribers will be measured.
With the "started mask" and the "finished mask" the user receives
information about the number of measured subscribers analogous
to the specification of directory number intervals. Information
is also output about the lowest and highest port where
subscribers are measured.
Subscribers to be measured are always selected from the port
with the lowest port number to the port with the highest port
number. A subsequent measurement can be started at the port where
the last measurement has ended by selecting command parameters
DLU and EQN. All or none of the created directory numbers
at an MSN port or connected via a V5 interface are measured.
Directory numbers in the output are not sorted in ascending
order but in the order in which they are found by searching
at the DLU.
If the number of directory numbers to be measured exceeds the
limit of 1000 and the last DLU port is an MSN port or a V5
interface is connected to this DLU port, this DLU port
cannot be measured within the running measurement job.
There could thus be a measurement whose directory number total is
less than 1000 even though the number of created subscribers at
the DLU exceeds 1000.
It is only advisable to measure REC DN for MSN ports if all
the directory numbers at an MSN port are measured in the same
measurement job.
For each subscriber to be measured the following counters are
provided:
- TC:I traffic carried (incoming)
- TC:O traffic carried (outgoing)
- CC:I number of calls carried (incoming)
- CC:O number of calls carried (outgoing)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 1+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Disk Size:
If 1000 directory numbers are measured, 87 kbytes are required
(89 bytes per directory number) on hard disk for every output.
1. REC DN - DLU DLU SPECIFICATION
2. REC DN - DN DN SPECIFICATION
1. Input format
DLU SPECIFICATION
This input format records directory numbers of subscribers
connected to the specified digital line unit.
[ [
[ REC DN : UNIT= ,DLU= [,EQN=] [,SCANTIME=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
output.
Notes:
- UNIT=MDD-DAILY is not allowed in combination with
BEG, TER, PER or IV.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
Notes :
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
b: OUTPUT MODE
[ [ If this option is selected, the data are
[ [ output to daily files. The measurement starts
[ [ immediately and has no defined end. Time
[ [ parameters are not permitted.
[ [ To secure the required space on disk, all 7
[ [ daily files are prepared and created at the
[ [ start of measurement.
[ [ A daily file is closed at the end of the day and a
[ [ new file for the next day is automatically
[ [ created, or the existing file is replaced.
[ [ Daily files will be overwritten in the
[ [ following week on the same day.
!SINGLE - SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 2+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
output to single measurement file.
This information unit specifies the desired output mode
This parameter specifies the start port of the DLU.
Notes:
- The chosen DLU value in the parameter EQN must be equal to
the parameter DLU.
Default: EQN = DLU-0-0-0
a-b-c-d
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER=
b: SHELF NUMBER=
c: MODULE NUMBER=
d: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
SCANTIME SCAN TIME FOR DATA OUTPUT
This parameter specifies a duration in minutes. For this duration,
counter data will be collected and output. The SCANTIME can be
selected in the range from 15 to 720 in the 15 minutes frame.
Restrictions:
If a time parameter is selected, the intervals of measurement must
be a multiple of the selected SCANTIME. In all other cases the
command will be rejected.
Therefore the following combinations between time parameters and
SCANTIME are possible:
For the combinations of time parameter
BEG,
BEG and TER,
BEG and TER and PER or
TER and PER
the default IV 00-00-24-00 is used. In this case the possible
values for the SCANTIME are 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240,
360, 480 and 720, only.
For any combination of time parameters containing the parameter
IV, the possible values of the SCANTIME depend on the duration
of the selected intervals. All selected intervals must be a
multiple of the selected SCANTIME.
The SCANTIME can be arbitrary in the range of 15 to 720 in the 15
minutes frame if TER is the only specified time parameter in the
command or if the parameter UNIT=MDD-DAILY is chosen.
Default: 15 minutes.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 3+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameter cannot be specified for the
data output in daily files.
be linked with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
command input.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date
a-b-c
This parameter indicates the measurement time termination
date.
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for
- The earliest possible termination date is the day after the
command input.
- If no BEG parameter is enterred, recording starts
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 4+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
begin date (BEG)is selected.
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurement over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e. g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted..
interval times, e. g. 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
times only.
a-b-c-d
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
[HO [ HOLIDAY
[ [ Full national and international holidays are
[ [ included.
[ [ The full weekend day (the day marked EF
[ [ in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
[ [ Half holidays are not included.
[MO [ MONDAY
[NO [ NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
[ [ Measurement every day
[SA [ SATURDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 5+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[SU [ SUNDAY
[TH [ THURSDAY
[TU [ TUESDAY
[WE [ WEDNESDAY
!WO - WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 6+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN SPECIFICATION
This input format records subscriber directory numbers
specified as directory number intervals.
[ [
[ REC DN : UNIT= [,LAC=] ,DN= [,SCANTIME=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
output.
Notes:
- UNIT=MDD-DAILY is not allowed in combination with
BEG, TER, PER or IV.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
postprocessing.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
[ [ If this option is selected, the data are
[ [ output to daily files. The measurement starts
[ [ immediately and has no defined end. Time
[ [ parameters are not permitted.
[ [ To secure the required space on disk, all 7
[ [ daily files are prepared and created at the
[ [ start of measurement.
[ [ A daily file is closed at the end of the day and a
[ [ new file for the next day is automatically
[ [ created, or the existing file is replaced.
[ [ Daily files will be overwritten in the
[ [ following week on the same day.
!SINGLE - SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
output to single measurement file.
This information unit specifies the desired output mode
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 7+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number intervals. A
maximum of 5 intervals can be linked with &.
The upper interval limit must be higher than the lower interval
limit and the directory number intervals must be disjunct.
By selecting the command parameter DN=X a maximum of 1000
created subscribers will be measured. The selection starts with
the lowest directory number in the exchange or with the
lowest directory number belonging to the selected LAC.
Restrictions:
Additional directory numbers of PBXs are rejected.
SCANTIME SCAN TIME FOR DATA OUTPUT
This parameter specifies a duration in minutes. For this duration,
counter data will be collected and output. The SCANTIME can be
selected in the range from 15 to 720 in the 15 minutes frame.
Restrictions:
If a time parameter is selected, the intervals of measurement must
be a multiple of the selected SCANTIME. In all other cases the
command will be rejected.
Therefore the following combinations between time parameters and
SCANTIME are possible:
For the combinations of time parameter
BEG,
BEG and TER,
BEG and TER and PER or
TER and PER
the default IV 00-00-24-00 is used. In this case the possible
values for the SCANTIME are 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240,
360, 480 and 720, only.
For any combination of time parameters containing the parameter
IV, the possible values of the SCANTIME depend on the duration
of the selected intervals. All selected intervals must be a
multiple of the selected SCANTIME.
The SCANTIME can be arbitrary in the range of 15 to 720 in the 15
minutes frame if TER is the only specified time parameter in the
command or if the parameter UNIT=MDD-DAILY is chosen.
Default: 15 minutes.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 8+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
a-b-c
date.
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurement over
midnight.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 9+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
times only.
a-b-c-d
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
[HO [ HOLIDAY
[ [ Full national and international holidays are
[ [ included.
[ [ The full weekend day (the day marked EF
[ [ in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
[ [ Half holidays are not included.
[MO [ MONDAY
[NO [ NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
[ [ Measurement every day
[SA [ SATURDAY
[SU [ SUNDAY
[TH [ THURSDAY
[TU [ TUESDAY
[WE [ WEDNESDAY
!WO - WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC DN- 10-
DISP DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE
This command displays :
- whether the directory number volume within the exchange
is multiple or unique,
- whether the local area codes are to be evaluated in the
digit-destination translator,
- the national prefix digits,
- the international prefix digits,
- the prefix digits for carrier access code,
- whether the local area code is part of directory number.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DNATT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DNATT- 1-
ENTR DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE
This command enters the directory number attributes.
It determines:
- whether the directory number volume within the exchange is
multiple or unique,
- whether the local area codes are to be evaluated in the
digit-destination translator,
- the national prefix digits,
- the international prefix digits,
- the prefix digits from carrier access code,
- whether national prefix digits or international prefix digits
or the prefix digits for carrier access code are used,
- whether the local area code is part of directory number,
- whether a not dialed LAC will be inserted before the
dialed B-number to build up a national significant number.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR DNATT : <DNVOL= ,EVLAC= ,PFXNAT= ,PFXINAT= ,PFXCAC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NOPFX= ,LACPNO=> [,LACINSOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DNVOL DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
This parameter specifies whether the directory number volume
in the exchange is multiple or unique.
Notes:
- Two subscribers of the exchange may have the same directory number
but a different local area code only if directory number volume
is assigned MULTIPLE.
UNIQUE UNIQUE DIRECTORY NUMBERS
MULTIPLE MULTIPLE DIRECTORY NUMBERS
EVLAC EVALUATION OF LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies whether the local area codes are to be
evaluated.
Prerequisites:
- An evaluation of the local area codes can only be prevented within an
exchange with a unique directory number volume.
YES EVALUATE LAC
NO DO NOT EVALUATE LAC
PFXNAT PREFIX NATIONAL
This parameter specifies the national prefix digits.
Attention:
- A changed national prefix could be incompatible
to existing local area codes or codepoints.
PFXINAT PREFIX INTERNATIONAL
This parameter specifies the international prefix digits.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DNATT- 1+
ENTR DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PFXCAC PREFIX CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the prefix digits for carrier access code.
NOPFX NO PREFIX
This parameter specifies that existing national or
international prefix digits or the prefix digits
for carrier access code are canceled.
NAT NATIONAL PREFIX
INAT INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE PREFIX
LACPNO LOCAL AREA CODE IS PART OF NO
This parameter specifies if the local area code is part of
of a national significant number.
Y LOCAL AREACODE IS PART OF NO
(initial value)
N LOC. AREACODE ISNT PART OF NO
LACINSOC LAC INSERT. FOR OUTG. CALL
This parameter specifies whether a LAC, which was not
dialed, must be inserted before the dialled B-number
to build up a national significant number.
Y INSERT LAC
YES INSERT LAC
N DO NOT INSERT LAC
(initial value)
NO DO NOT INSERT LAC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DNATT- 2-
CAN DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command either cancels or limits an existing directory number
observation job by cancelling certain object groups (consisting of
subscribers or private branch exchanges).
Input format
[ [
[ CAN DNOBS : [GRP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GRP GROUP OF OBJECTS
This parameter specifies object groups of subscribers or private
branch exchanges. Object groups may be linked with &.
Default: all objects are cancelled
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DNOBS- 1-
DISP DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command displays the directory number observation data.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DNOBS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DNOBS- 1-
ENTR DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command may be used to enter a new/expand an existing
directory number observation job by specifying which object
groups (consisting of subscribers or private branch exchanges)
should be measured at a determined time.
Note:
Partly executed commands will completed later
(see different statuses in the output mask of the display command).
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR DNOBS : GRP= [,RREC=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,PER=] [,IV=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GRP GROUP OF OBJECTS
This parameter specifies object groups of subscribers or private
branch exchanges. Up to 10 object groups may be linked with &.
RREC NUMBER OF REQUESTED RECORDS
This parameter specifies the number of requested observation
records. The value can be changed during observation.
Default: no restriction.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
- A maximum of four begin dates in chronological order may be
linked with &. In case of linked begin dates, termination
date is not permitted.
If no termination date is selected, the measurement is active
on the specified begin days only.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after command input.
- The first begin date must be at the latest one month after the
actual date.
- The last begin date must be at the latest one year after the
actual date.
Default: immediately measurement start.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DNOBS- 1+
ENTR DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
TER TERMINATING DATE
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered. The earliest
possible termination date is the day after command input.
- If no begin date is entered, recording starts immediately.
Default: unlimited measurement depending on begin date.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
This parameter specifies the periodic weekdays or the weekday category.
Up to 8 weekdays/categories may be linked with &, the maximum number of
weekdays is limited to 6.
Notes:
- The input of this parameter is only permissible in connection with
a termination date.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement period.
NO DEFAULT VALUE
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
Days which are full national and
international holidays.
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
- Interval times are only permitted if at least one begin date
is selected.
may be linked with &.
- An interval may not include midnight. A measurement over
midnight requires the input of two interval times.
only.
Default: 24 hour measurement on the specified measurement period.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DNOBS- 2+
ENTR DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
c: END HOUR=
d: END MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR DNOBS- 3-
DISP DNP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DESTINATION NUMBER POINTS
This command displays destination number points which are entered in the
special digit translator for traffic measurements (with REC DEST). The
destination number points are output with their digit combination,
destination number and origin language digit.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DNP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DNP- 1-
DISP DS1IFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display DS1 Interface Attributes
This task displays relevant interface attributes based on entries from the
ifTable and ifXTable.
Output Parameters:
Index:
Descr:
Type:
Speed:
PhysAddress:
AdminStatus:
AdminStatus is then changed to either the up or testing states
OperStatus:
components.
LastChange:
Name:
The textual name of the interface. The value of this object should be
the name of the interface as assigned by the local device and should
be suitable for use in commands entered at the devices `console. This
might be a text name, such as `le0 or a simple port number, such as
`1, depending on the interface naming syntax of the device. If
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS1IFATT- 1+
DISP DS1IFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
several entries in the ifTable together represent a single interface
as named by the device, then each will have the same value of ifName.
Note that for an agent which responds to SNMP queries concerning an
interface on some other (proxied) device, then the value of ifName for
such an interface is the proxied devices local name for it.
If there is no local name, or this object is otherwise not applicable,
then this object contains a zero-length string.
LinkUpDownTrapEnable:
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this
interface.
By default, this object should have the value enabled for
interfaces which do not operate on top of any other interface (as
defined in the ifStackTable), and disabled otherwise.
HighSpeed:
An estimate of the interfaces current bandwidth in units of 1,000,000
bits per second. If this object reports a value of `n then the speed
of the interface is somewhere in the range of `n-500,000 to
`n+499,999. For interfaces which do not vary in bandwidth or for
those where no accurate estimation can be made, this object should
contain the nominal bandwidth. For a sub-layer which has no concept of
bandwidth, this object should be zero.
ConnectorPresent:
This object has the value true if the interface sublayer has a
physical connector and the value false otherwise.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DS1IFATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
identify a module or port uniquely within the NE.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS1IFATT- 2-
MOD DS1IFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify DS1 Interface Attributes
This task modifies the writeable interface attributes within the
ifTable and the ifXTable.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD DS1IFATT : EQN= [,AdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
AdminStatus
Input format:
Selection from:
- up
- down
- testing
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DS1IFATT- 1-
DISP DS1PHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display DS1 Phub Attributes
This task displays relevant attributes based on entries from the
dsx1ConfigTable and the phubDs1MonitorTable.
Output Parameters:
LineType:
This variable indicates the variety of DS1 Line implementing this
circuit. The type of circuit affects the number of bits per second
that the circuit can reasonably carry, as well as the interpretation
of the usage and error statistics. The values, in sequence, describe:
dsx1ESF: Extended SuperFrame DS1 (T1.107)
dsx1D4: AT&T D4 format DS1 (T1.107)
dsx1E1: ITU-T Recommendation G.704 (Table 4a)
dsx1E1-CRC: ITU-T Recommendation G.704 (Table 4b)
dsxE1-MF: G.704 (Table 4a) with TS16 multiframing enabled
dsx1E1-CRC-MF: G.704 (Table 4b) with TS16 multiframing enabled
dsx1Unframed: DS1 with No Framing
dsx1E1Unframed: E1 with No Framing (G.703)
dsx1DS2M12: DS2 frame format (T1.107)
dsx1E2: E2 frame format (G.704)
For clarification, the capacity for each E1 type
is as listed below:
dsx1E1Unframed - E1, no framing = 32 x 64k = 2048k
dsx1E1 or dsx1E1CRC - E1, with framing,
no signalling = 31 x 64k = 1984k
dsx1E1MF or dsx1E1CRCMF - E1, with framing,
signalling = 30 x 64k = 1920k
LineCoding:
This variable describes the variety of Zero Code Suppression used on
this interface, which in turn affects a number of its characteristics.
- dsx1JBZS refers the Jammed Bit Zero Suppression, in which the AT&T
specification of at least one pulse every 8 bit periods is literally
implemented by forcing a pulse in bit 8 of each channel. Thus, only
seven bits per channel, or 1.344 Mbps, is available for data.
- dsx1B8ZS refers to the use of a specified pattern of normal bits and
bipolar violations which are used to replace a sequence of eight zero
bits.
- ANSI Clear Channels may use dsx1ZBTSI, or Zero Byte Time Slot
Interchange.
- E1 links, with or without CRC, use dsx1HDB3 or dsx1AMI.
- dsx1AMI refers to a mode wherein no zero code suppression is present
and the line encoding does not solve the problem directly. In this
application, the higher layer must provide data which meets or exceeds
the pulse density requirements, such as inverting HDLC data.
- dsx1B6ZS refers to the user of a specifed pattern of normal bits and
bipolar violations which are used to replace a sequence of six zero
bits. Used for DS2.
SendCode:
This variable indicates what type of code is being sent across the DS1
interface by the device. Setting this variable causes the interface to
send the code requested. The values mean:
- dsx1SendNoCode:
sending looped or normal data
- dsx1SendLineCode:
sending a request for a line loopback
- dsx1SendPayloadCode:
sending a request for a payload loopback
- dsx1SendResetCode:
sending a loopback termination request
- dsx1SendQRS:
sending a Quasi-Random Signal (QRS) test
pattern
- dsx1Send511Pattern:
sending a 511 bit fixed test pattern
- dsx1Send3in24Pattern:
sending a fixed test pattern of 3 bits set in 24
- dsx1SendOtherTestPattern:
sending a test pattern other than those described by this object
CircuitIdentifier:
This variable contains the transmission vendors circuit identifier,
for the purpose of facilitating troubleshooting.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS1PHATT- 1+
DISP DS1PHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LoopbackConfig:
This variable represents the desired loopback configuration of the DS1
interface. Agents supporting read/write access should return
inconsistentValue in response to a requested loopback state that the
interface does not support. The values mean:
- dsx1NoLoop:
Not in the loopback state. A device that is not capable of
performing a loopback on the interface shall always return this as
its value.
- dsx1PayloadLoop:
The received signal at this interface is looped through the device.
Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission
after it has passed through the devices framing function.
- dsx1LineLoop:
The received signal at this interface does not go through the device
(minimum penetration) but is looped back out.
- dsx1OtherLoop:
Loopbacks that are not defined here.
- dsx1InwardLoop:
The transmitted signal at this interface is looped back and received
by the same interface. What is transmitted onto the line is product
dependent.
- dsx1DualLoop:
Both dsx1LineLoop and dsx1InwardLoop will be active simultaneously.
LineStatus:
This variable indicates the Line Status of the interface. It contains
loopback, failure, received alarm and transmitted alarms
information.
This parameter is a bit map represented as a binary number where the
rightmost digit represents bit 1. Therefore, it can represent multiple
failures (alarms) and a LoopbackState simultaneously.
dsx1NoAlarm must be set if and only if no other flag is set.
If the dsx1loopbackState bit is set, the loopback in effect can be
determined from the dsx1loopbackConfig object.
1: dsx1NoAlarm
No alarm present
2: dsx1RcvFarEndLOF
Far end LOF (a.k.a., Yellow Alarm)
3: dsx1XmtFarEndLOF
Near end sending LOF Indication
4: dsx1RcvAIS
Far end sending AIS
5: dsx1XmtAIS
Near end sending AIS
6: dsx1LossOfFrame
Near end LOF (a.k.a., Red Alarm)
7: dsx1LossOfSignal
Near end Loss Of Signal
8: dsx1LoopbackState
Near end is looped
9: dsx1T16AIS
E1 TS16 AIS
10: dsx1RcvFarEndLOMF
Far End Sending TS16 LOMF
11: dsx1XmtFarEndLOMF
Near End Sending TS16 LOMF
12: dsx1RcvTestCode
Near End detects a test code
13: dsx1OtherFailure
any line status not defined here
14: dsx1UnavailSigState
Near End in Unavailable Signal State
15: dsx1NetEquipOOS
Carrier Equipment Out of Service
16: dsx1RcvPayloadAIS
DS2 Payload AIS
17: dsx1Ds2PerfThreshold
DS2 Performance Threshold Exceeded
SignalMode:
-none indicates that no bits are reserved for signaling on this
channel.
- robbedBit indicates that DS1 Robbed Bit Signaling is in use.
- bitOriented indicates that E1 Channel Associated Signaling is in
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS1PHATT- 2+
DISP DS1PHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
use.
- messageOriented indicates that Common Channel Signaling is in use
either on channel 16 of an E1 link or channel 24 of a DS1.
TransmitClockSource:
The source of Transmit Clock.
- loopTiming indicates that the recovered receive clock is used as
the transmit clock.
- localTiming indicates that a local clock source is used or when an
external clock is attached to the box containing the interface.
- throughTiming indicates that recovered receive clock from another
interface is used as the transmit clock.
Fdl:
This bitmap describes the use of the facilities data link and is a
binary number where the rightmost digit represents bit 1.
1: other
indicates that a protocol other than one following is used.
2: dsx1AnsiT1403
refers to the FDL exchange recommended by ANSI.
3: dsx1Att54016
refers to ESF FDL exchanges
4: dsx1FdlNone
indicates that the device does not use the FDL.
LineLength:
The length of the ds1 line in meters. This objects provides
information for line build out circuitry. This object is only useful
if the interface has configurable line build out circuitry.
LineStatusLastChange:
The value of MIB IIs sysUpTime object at the time this DS1 entered
its current line status state. If the current state was entered prior
to the last re-initialization of the proxy-agent, then this object
LineStatusChangeTrapEnable:
Indicates whether dsx1LineStatusChange traps should be generated for
this interface.
LoopbackStatus:
This variable represents the current state of the loopback on the DS1
interface. It contains information about loopbacks established by a
manager and remotely from the far end.
rightmost digit represents bit 1. Therefore is can represent multiple
loopbacks simultaneously.
1: dsx1NoLoopback
2: dsx1NearEndPayloadLoopback
3: dsx1NearEndLineLoopback
4: dsx1NearEndOtherLoopback
5: dsx1NearEndInwardLoopback
6: dsx1FarEndPayloadLoopback
7: dsx1FarEndLineLoopback
ChannelNumber:
This variable represents the channel number of the DS1/E1 on its
parent Ds2/E2 or DS3/E3. A value of 0 indicated this DS1/E1 does not
have a parent DS3/E3.
Channelization:
Indicates whether this ds1/e1 is channelized or unchannelized. The
value of enabledDs0 indicates that this is a DS1 channelized into
DS0s. The value of enabledDs1 indicated that this is a DS2 channelized
into DS1s. Setting this value will cause the creation or deletion of
entries in the ifTable for the DS0s that are within the DS1.
AlarmDetectTime:
The time in 100th of a second until an alarm is generated.
AlarmClearTime:
The time in 100th of a second until a pending alarm is cleared.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS1PHATT- 3+
DISP DS1PHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DS1PHATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS1PHATT- 4-
MOD DS1PHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify DS1 Phub Attributes
This task modifies the writeable configuration attributes within the
dsx1ConfigTable and the phubDs1MonitorTable.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD DS1PHATT : EQN= [,CircuitIdentifier=] [,LineLength=] [
[ [
[ [,LineStatusChangeTrapEnable=] [,LoopbackConfig=] [
[ [
[ [,TransmitClockSource=] [,AlarmDetectTime=] [
[ [
[ [,AlarmClearTime=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
CircuitIdentifier
LineLength
The length of the ds1 line in meters. This objects provides
information for line build out circuitry. This object is only useful
if the interface has configurable line build out circuitry. For E1
only the value 0 is valid.
Input format:
0...64000, range of decimal numbers,
for E1 only 0
LineStatusChangeTrapEnable
this interface.
Input format:
Selection from:
- enabled
- disabled
LoopbackConfig
This variable represents the desired loopback configuration of the DS1
interface. Agents supporting read/write access should return
inconsistentValue in response to a requested loopback state that the
interface does not support.
Input format:
Selection from:
- dsx1NoLoop:
its value.
- dsx1PayloadLoop:
- dsx1LineLoop:
- dsx1OtherLoop:
- dsx1InwardLoop:
The transmitted signal at this interface is looped back and received
by the same interface. What is transmitted onto the line is product
dependent.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DS1PHATT- 1+
MOD DS1PHATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- dsx1DualLoop:
TransmitClockSource
Prerequisites:
Bring down the DS1 interface (set AdminStatus to down) before
changing this value.
Input format:
Selection from:
- loopTiming:
indicates that the recovered receive clock is used as
the transmit clock.
- localTiming:
indicates that a local clock source is used or when an
- throughTiming:
indicates that recovered receive clock from another
interface is used as the transmit clock.
AlarmDetectTime
AlarmClearTime
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DS1PHATT- 2-
DISP DS3ATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display DS3 Attributes
This task displays DS3 configuration attributes from the dsx3ConfigTable and
phubDs3MonitorTable on top of a specified port.
Output Parameters:
LineIndex:
This object should be made equal to ifIndex. The next paragraph
describes its previous usage. Making the object equal to ifIndex
allows propoer use of ifStackTable.
Previously, this object was the identifier of a DS3/E3 Interface on a
managed device. If there is an ifEntry that is directly associated
with this and only this DS3/E3 interface, it should have the same
value as ifIndex. Otherwise, number the dsx3LineIndices with an unique
identifier following the rules of choosing a number that is greater
than ifNumber and numbering the inside interfaces (e.g., equipment
side) with even numbers and outside interfaces (e.g, network side)
with odd numbers.
IfIndex:
This value for this object is equal to the value of ifIndex from the
Interfaces table of MIB II (RFC 1213).
LineType:
This variable indicates the variety of DS3 C-bit or E3 application
implementing this interface. The type of interface affects the
interpretation of the usage and error statistics. The rate of DS3 is
44.736 Mbps and E3 is 34.368 Mbps. The dsx3ClearChannel value means
that the C-bits are not used except for sending/receiving AIS. The
values, in sequence, describe:
dsx3M23: ANSI T1.107-1988 [9]
dsx3SYNTRAN: ANSI T1.107-1988 [9]
dsx3CbitParity: ANSI T1.107a-1990 [9a]
dsx3ClearChannel: ANSI T1.102-1987 [8]
e3Framed: CCITT G.751 [12]
e3Plcp: ETSI T/NA(91)18 [13].
LineCoding:
This variable describes the variety of Zero Code Suppression used on
this interface, which in turn affects a number of its characteristics.
dsx3B3ZS and e3HDB3 refer to the use of specified patterns of normal
bits and bipolar violations which are used to replace sequences of
zero bits of a specified length.
SendCode:
This variable indicates what type of code is being sent across the
DS3/E3 interface by the device. (These are optional for E3
interfaces.) Setting this variable causes the interface to begin
sending the code requested. The values mean:
- dsx3SendNoCode:
sending looped or normal data
- dsx3SendLineCode:
sending a request for a line loopback
- dsx3SendPayloadCode:
sending a request for a payload loopback (i.e., all DS1/E1s in
a DS3/E3 frame)
- dsx3SendResetCode:
sending a loopback deactivation request
- dsx3SendDS1LoopCode:
requesting to loopback a particular DS1/E1 within a DS3/E3
frame. The DS1/E1 is indicated in dsx3Ds1ForRemoteLoop.
- dsx3SendTestPattern:
sending a test pattern.
CircuitIdentifier:
LoopbackConfig:
This variable represents the desired loopback configuration of the
DS3/E3 interface. The values mean:
- dsx3NoLoop:
its value.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS3ATT- 1+
DISP DS3ATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- dsx3PayloadLoop:
- dsx3LineLoop:
- dsx3OtherLoop:
- dsx3InwardLoop:
The sent signal at this interface is looped back through the device.
- dsx3DualLoop:
LineStatus:
This variable indicates the Line Status of the interface. It contains
loopback state information and failure state information. This
parameter is a bit map represented as a binary number where the
rightmost digit represents bit 1. Therefore, it can represent multiple
failures and a loopback (see dsx3LoopbackConfig object for the type of
loopback) simultaneously. The dsx3NoAlarm must be set if and only if
no other flag is set. If the dsx3loopbackState bit is set, the
loopback in effect can be determined from the dsx3loopbackConfig
object.
1: dsx3NoAlarm
No alarm present
2: dsx3RcvRAIFailure
Receiving Yellow/Remote Alarm Indication
3: dsx3XmitRAIAlarm
Transmitting Yellow/Remote Alarm Indication
4: dsx3RcvAIS
Receiving AIS failure state
5: dsx3XmitAIS
Transmitting AIS
6: dsx3LOF
Receiving LOF failure state
7: dsx3LOS
Receiving LOS failure state
8: dsx3LoopbackState
Looping the received signal
9: dsx3RcvTestCode
Receiving a Test Pattern
10: dsx3OtherFailure
any line status not defined here
11: dsx3UnavailSigState
Near End in Unavailable Signal State
12: dsx3NetEquipOOS
Carrier Equipment Out of Service
TransmitClockSource:
- loopTiming indicates that the recovered receive clock is used as
the transmit clock.
- localTiming indicates that a local clock source is used or that an
- throughTiming indicates that transmit clock is derived from the
recovered receive clock of another DS3 interface.
LineLength:
The length of the ds3 line in meters. This object provides information
for line build out circuitry if it exists and can use this object to
adjust the line build out.
LineStatusLastChange:
The value of MIB IIs sysUpTime object at the time this DS3/E3 entered
its current line status state. If the current state was entered prior
to the last re-initialization of the proxy-agent, then this object
LineStatusChangeTrapEnable:
this interface.
LoopbackStatus:
This variable represents the current state of the loopback on the DS3
interface. It contains information about loopbacks established by a
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS3ATT- 2+
DISP DS3ATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
manager and remotely from the far end.
rightmost digit represents bit 1. Therefore is can represent multiple
loopbacks simultaneously.
1: dsx3NoLoopback
2: dsx3NearEndPayloadLoopback
3: dsx3NearEndLineLoopback
4: dsx3NearEndOtherLoopback
5: dsx3NearEndInwardLoopback
6: dsx3FarEndPayloadLoopback
7: dsx3FarEndLineLoopback
Channelization:
Indicates whether this ds3/e3 is channelized or unchannelized. The
value of enabledDs1 indicates that this is a DS3 channelized into
DS1s. The value of enabledDs3 indicated that this is a DS3 channelized
into DS2s. Setting this object will cause the creation or deletion of
DS2 or DS1 entries in the ifTable.
AlarmDetectTime:
AlarmClearTime:
TrailTraceSend:
This attribute is used to specify the value of the outgoing TR byte
trail trace message (supported for E3 only).
TrailTraceExpect:
This attribute is used to specify the value of the expected TR byte
TrailTraceReceive:
This attribute is used to know the value of the incoming TR byte trail
trace message (supported for E3 only).
TrailTraceTrapEnable:
Indicates whether trail trace traps should be generated (supported for
E3 only).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DS3ATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Physical Equipment Number of the DS3 line. The EQN serves to
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS3ATT- 3-
MOD DS3ATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify DS3 Attributes
This task modifies DS3 attributes from dsx3ConfigTable and phubDs3MonitorTable
Input format
[ [
[ MOD DS3ATT : EQN= [,CircuitIdentifier=] [,LineLength=] [
[ [
[ [,LineStatusChangeTrapEnable=] [,LoopbackConfig=] [
[ [
[ [,TransmitClockSource=] [,AlarmDetectTime=] [
[ [
[ [,AlarmClearTime=] [,TrailTraceSend=] [
[ [
[ [,TrailTraceExpect=] [,TrailTraceTrapEnable=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
CircuitIdentifier
LineLength
The length of the ds3 line in meters. This object provides information
for line build out circuitry if it exists and can use this object to
adjust the line build out (supported for T3 only).
Input format:
0...64000, range of decimal numbers,
for E3 only 0
LineStatusChangeTrapEnable
this interface.
Input format:
Selection from:
- enabled
- disabled
LoopbackConfig
This variable represents the desired loopback configuration of the
DS3/E3 interface.
Input format:
Selection from:
- dsx3NoLoop:
its value.
- dsx3PayloadLoop:
- dsx3LineLoop:
- dsx3OtherLoop:
- dsx3InwardLoop:
The sent signal at this interface is looped back through the device.
- dsx3DualLoop:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DS3ATT- 1+
MOD DS3ATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TransmitClockSource
The source of Transmit Clock. A wrong value may cause synchronization
problems.
Input format:
Selection from:
- loopTiming:
indicates that the recovered receive clock is used as the transmit
clock.
- localTiming:
indicates that a local clock source is used or that an external
clock is attached to the box containing the interface.
- throughTiming:
indicates that transmit clock is derived from the recovered receive
clock of another DS3 interface.
AlarmDetectTime
AlarmClearTime
TrailTraceSend
This attribute is used to specify the value of the outgoing TR byte
TrailTraceExpect
This attribute is used to specify the value of the expected TR byte
TrailTraceTrapEnable
Indicates whether trail trace traps should be generated (supported for
E3 only).
Input format:
Selection from:
- true
- false
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DS3ATT- 2-
DISP DS3IFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display DS3 Interface Attributes
This task displays DS3 interface attributes from ifTable and ifXTable on top of
a specified port.
Output Parameters:
Index:
Descr:
Type:
Mtu:
The size of the largest packet which can be sent/received on the
interface, specified in octets. For interfaces that are used for
transmitting network datagrams, this is the size of the largest
network datagram that can be sent on the interface.
Speed:
PhysAddress:
AdminStatus:
OperStatus:
components.
LastChange:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS3IFATT- 1+
DISP DS3IFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
InOctets:
The total number of octets received on the interface, including
framing characters.
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at re-
initialization of the management system, and at other times as
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.
InUcastPkts:
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)
layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at
this sub-layer.
InNUcastPkts:
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)
layer, which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at
this sub-layer.
This object is deprecated in favour of ifInMulticastPkts and
ifInBroadcastPkts.
InDiscards:
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable
to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a
packet could be to free up buffer space.
InErrors:
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that
contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-
layer protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the
number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing
them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
InUnknownProtos:
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of packets received via the
interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces that
support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units
received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown
or unsupported protocol. For any interface that does not support
protocol multiplexing, this counter will always be 0.
OutOctets:
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
OutUcastPkts:
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not
sent.
OutNUcastPkts:
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not
sent.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS3IFATT- 2+
DISP DS3IFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This object is deprecated in favour of ifOutMulticastPkts and
ifOutBroadcastPkts.
OutDiscards:
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up
buffer space.
OutErrors:
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of outbound packets that
could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or
fixed-length interfaces, the number of outbound transmission units
that could not be transmitted because of errors.
OutQLen:
The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this
interface.
By default, this object should have the value enabled for
interfaces which do not operate on top of any other interface (as
defined in the ifStackTable), and disabled otherwise.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DS3IFATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DS3IFATT- 3-
MOD DS3IFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify DS3 Interface Attributes
This task modifies DS3 interface attributes on top of a specified port.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD DS3IFATT : EQN= [,AdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
AdminStatus
Input format:
Selection from:
- up
- down
- testing
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DS3IFATT- 1-
CAN DSB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command cancels a Digital Switchboard for an
OSS-Group or a CENTREX-Group.
Prerequisites:
- The Digital Switchboard can be canceled, while
a common service subscriber is not logged-on.
the FEA = MDR, TRAF and PER are not activated.
the FEA = MDR, TRAF, CXMOD and PER are not
provided.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DSB : EQN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT=
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DSB- 1-
CR DSB
CRDSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command creates a Digital Switchboard for
an ADMOSS-Common Service Group or a CENTREX Group.
1. CR DSB - CRDSBCX CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
2. CR DSB - CRDSBOSS CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR ADMOSS
1. Input format
CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
This input format is used to create a Digital Switchboard
for CENTREX.
[ [
[ CR DSB : EQN= ,CXGRP= ,ID= [,FEA=] [,OCT=] [,CSGLAC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSGDN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
CENTREX group.
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of a
Digital Switchboard for ADMOSS and CENTREX.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DSB- 1+
CR DSB
CRDSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of a Digital Switchboard
for ADMOSS or CENTREX.
Compatibilities:
Allowed combinatons of features:
- activate AUTOOPR and
TRAF,
MDR,
PER,
CXMOD at the same time
CXMOD CENTREX MODIFICATION AUTH.
MDR MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING AUTH.
PER PERFORMANCE AUTHORIZATION
PRVCXMOD CENTREX MOD. AUTH. PROV
PRVMDR MESSAGE DETAIL REC. AUTH. PROV
PRVPER PROVIDE PERFORM. AUTHORIZATION
PRVTRAF TRAFFIC RECORDING AUTH. PROV
RESFEA1 RESERVED FEA FOR EXCHANGE USER
SASLINK SUPPORT APPL. SERVER LINK
TRAF TRAFFIC RECORDING AUTH.
OCT OBJECT CONTROL TABLE
CARS APS file name for ADMOSS or CENTREX.
This parameter specifies the local area code
of an existing common service group.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DSB- 2+
CR DSB
CRDSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE DSB:ISDN FOR ADMOSS
This input format is used to create a Digital Switchboard
for ADMOSS.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DSB : EQN= ,ID= [,CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,FEA=] [,OCT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
ID IDENTIFICATION
FEA FEATURE
Compatibilities:
TRAF,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DSB- 3+
CR DSB
CRDSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MDR,
PER,
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DSB- 4-
DISP DSB
DICSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command displays digital switchboard specific data for
- one specific DSB
- several individual DSBs
- all DSBs in an equipment number interval
- all DSBs in the exchange
Notes:
- Data output is sorted according to the specified selection
parameter(s).
<job number>.
1. DISP DSB - DICSGRP DISPLAY DSB FOR CSGRP
2. DISP DSB - DICXGRP DISPLAY DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
1. Input format
DISPLAY DSB FOR CSGRP
[ [
[ DISP DSB <EQN= ,ID= ,OST= ,FEA= ,OCT=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DSB- 1+
DISP DSB
DICSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID IDENTIFICATION OF CONSOLE
This parameter specifies the identification
of the DSB.
This parameter specifies the operating status.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features of a digital
switchboard.
Notes:
- Selection of DSBs by an element list for
the FEA parameter results in display of
all DSBs with at least one of the selected
features. Omitting this parameter displays
DSBs with or without any feature.
ACTPCPER ACT. PERS. CALLTYPE PERF. M.
ACTPPER ACT. PERS. PERF. MEASURM.
ACTSCPER ACT. SYS. CALLTYPE PERF. M.
RESFEA1 SUPPORT APPL. SERVER LINK
This parameter specifies the CARS APS file name
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DSB- 2+
DISP DSB
DICXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
[ [
[ DISP DSB : <EQN= ,CXGRP= ,ID= ,FEA= ,OST= ,OCT=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of an
existing CENTREX group.
of the DSB.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DSB- 3+
DISP DSB
DICXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the features of a digital
switchboard.
Notes:
- Selection of DSBs by an element list for
the FEA parameter results in display of
all DSBs with at least one of the selected
features. Omitting this parameter displays
DSBs with or without any feature.
ACTMDR ACT. MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
ACTPPER ACT. PERS. PERF. MEASURM.
ACTSCPER ACT. SYS. CALLTYPE PERF. M.
ACTTRAF ACTIVATE TRAFFIC RECORDING
PRVCXMOD CENTREX MODIFICATION AUTH. PRV
PRVMDR MESSAGE DETAIL REC. AUTH. PRV
PRVPER PERFORMANCE AUTHORIZATION
PRVTRAF TRAFFIC RECORDING AUTH. PRV.
This parameter specifies the operating status.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
This parameter specifies the CARS APS file name
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DSB- 4-
MOD DSB
MODSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command modifies the data of a Digital Switchboard.
1. MOD DSB - MODSBCX MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
2. MOD DSB - MODSBOSS MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR ADMOSS
1. Input format
MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR CENTREX
This input format is used to modify a Digital Switchboard
for CENTREX or create a saslink for CENTREX.
[ [
[ MOD DSB : EQN= [,ID=] [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] <,OCT=> [,CSGLAC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSGDN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
ID IDENTIFICATION
It can only be changed if CSSUB is in status logoff.
FEA FEATURE
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DSB- 1+
MOD DSB
MODSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRAF,
MDR,
PER,
ACTMDR ACTIVATE MSG DETAIL RECORDING
ACTPPER ACT. PERSONAL PERF. M.
ACTSCPER ACT. SYS. CALLTYPE PERF.
PRVPER PROVIDE PERFORMANCE AUTH.
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter cancels the feature of a Digital Switchboard
Compatibilities:
- cancel AUTOOPR feature if only the
TRAF,
MDR,
PER feature are active
Incompatibilities:
Not allowed combinatons of features:
- activate ACTPCPER and cancel PER features at the same time
- activate ACTSCPER and cancel PER features at the same time
- activate ACTTRAF and cancel TRAF or PRVTRAF features
at the same time
- activate ACTMDR and cancel MDR or PRVMDR features at the same time
- activate ACTPPER and cancel PER or PRVPER features at the same time
- activate and cancel anyone of the following features
at the same time:
ACTMDR,
ACTPPER,
ACTPCPER,
ACTSCPER,
ACTTRAF
AUTOOPR,
CXMOD,
MDR,
PER,
PRVCXMOD,
PRVMDR,
PRVPER,
PRVTRAF,
RESFEA1 ... RESFEA8,
SASLINK,
TRAF
- cancel SASLINK feature together with any other feature
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DSB- 2+
MOD DSB
MODSBCX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTMDR ACTIVATE MSG DETAIL RECORDING
PRVPER PROVIDE PERFORMANCE AUTH.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DSB- 3+
MOD DSB
MODSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DSB:ISDN FOR ADMOSS
This input format is used to modify a Digital Switchboard
for ADMOSS or create a saslink for ADMOSS.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DSB : EQN= [,ID=] [,FEA=] [,CFEA=] <,OCT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b-c-d
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
ID IDENTIFICATION
It can only be changed if CSSUB is in status logoff.
FEA FEATURE
Compatibilities:
TRAF,
MDR,
PER,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DSB- 4+
MOD DSB
MODSBOSS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CFEA CANCEL FEATURE
This parameter cancels the feature of a Digital Switchboard
Compatibilities:
- cancel AUTOOPR feature if only the
TRAF,
MDR,
PER feature are active
Incompatibilities:
Not allowed combinatons of features:
- activate ACTPCPER and cancel PER features at the same time
- activate ACTSCPER and cancel PER features at the same time
- activate ACTTRAF and cancel TRAF or PRVTRAF features
at the same time
- activate ACTMDR and cancel MDR or PRVMDR features at the same time
- activate ACTPPER and cancel PER or PRVPER features at the same time
- activate and cancel anyone of the following features
at the same time:
ACTMDR,
ACTPPER,
ACTPCPER,
ACTSCPER,
ACTTRAF
AUTOOPR,
CXMOD,
MDR,
PER,
PRVCXMOD,
PRVMDR,
PRVPER,
PRVTRAF,
RESFEA1 ... RESFEA8,
SASLINK,
TRAF
- cancel SASLINK feature together with any other feature
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DSB- 5-
STAT DSB
STACSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
This command displays digital switchboard status of
- one specific DSB
- several individual DSBs
- all DSBs in an equipment number interval
- all DSBs in the exchange
Notes:
- Data output is sorted according to the
specified selection parameter.
<job number>.
1. STAT DSB - STACSGRP STAT DSB FOR CSGRP
2. STAT DSB - STACXGRP STAT DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
1. Input format
STAT DSB FOR CSGRP
[ [
[ STAT DSB <EQN= ,ID= ,ACCDEG= ,FEA=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DSB- 1+
STAT DSB
STACSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of the DSB.
ACCDEG ACCESS DEGRADING ON DLU PORT
This parameter specifies the status of line access.
DST DISTURBED
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
NON NONE
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of a DSB
used for SAS LINK .
Notes:
- Selection of DSBs by the FEA parameter
results in display of all DSBs with the
selected feature. Omitting this parameter
displays DSBs with or without any feature.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DSB- 2+
STAT DSB
STACXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STAT DSB FOR CENTREX GROUP
[ [
[ STAT DSB : <EQN= ,CXGRP= ,ID= ,ACCDEG= ,FEA=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
unit values.
b: SHELF=
unit values.
c: MODULE=
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
unit values.
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of an
existing CENTREX group.
of the DSB.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DSB- 3+
STAT DSB
STACXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCDEG ACCESS DEGRADING ON DLU PORT
This parameter specifies the status of line access.
DST DISTURBED
NAC NOT ACCESSIBLE
NON NONE
FEA FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of a DSB
used for SAS LINK .
Notes:
- Selection of DSBs by the FEA parameter
results in display of all DSBs with the
selected feature. Omitting this parameter
displays DSBs with or without any feature.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT DSB- 4-
CAN DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DEVICE GROUP
This command cancels a device group.
Prerequisite:
- the device group must exist
- the device group must not be assigned to a message group.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DVGRP : DVGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group of the message control.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN DVGRP- 1-
CR DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DEVICEGROUP
This command creates a device group from different types of output device.
A distinction is made between local devices (archive and
functional O&M terminals), remote devices (processors with their
respective applications) and the source terminal.
Prerequisite:
- the device group must not already exist,
- the pair of processor-name applications specified in parameter REMDEV
must not be assigned to a server which cannot process print or dialog
tasks,
- the output devices must exist,
- no more than 5 output devices may be specified,
- if parameter SRC=NO is entered, either parameter
LOCDEV or parameter REMDEV must be specified.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DVGRP : DVGRP= <,LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group to the message
control.
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter designates a local output device.
a-b
a: LOCAL DEVICE NAME=
b: LOCAL DEVICE TYPE
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M-TERMINAL
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
REMDEV REMOTE DEVICE
This parameter designates an output device in the network.
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
b: APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DVGRP- 1+
CR DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SRC SOURCE O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies whether the input terminal is to serve
as output device for a device group.
NO OUTPUT NOT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
YES OUTPUT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR DVGRP- 2-
SEL DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT DEVICE GROUP
This command selects those device groups to which
at least one of the specified output devices is assigned.
This data is then output as a table.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL DVGRP : <LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter designates a local output device.
a-b
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter designates an output device in the network.
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL DVGRP- 1-
DISP DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP DEVICE GROUP LINK
This command displays the output devices to which the device groups
specified in parameter DVGRP are assigned. The display is table.
In this way, a distinction is made between local output devices,
remote output devices and the source terminal as output device.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP DVGRPLNK : DVGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group of the message control.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP DVGRPLNK- 1-
MOD DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DEVICE GROUP LINK
This command modifies the assignment of a device group to the respective
output devices. With parameter SRC, it is possible to indicate whether
the source terminal is to be used as output device.
Prerequisites:
- When adding and replacing an output device, those output devices
specified in parameters LOCDEV or REMDEV must have been previously
created using command CR AFILE or CR FUOMT, if LOCDEV was entered
and CR PRO and possibly CR APPL, if REMDEV was entered.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DVGRPLNK : DVGRP= <,LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a customer device group of the message
control.
Incompatibilities:
- If the DVGRP is linked to the MSGRP MSYP.ALARM or
MSYP.REPORT it must consist only of output devices of
DCP type or applications which can handle binary structured
outputs.
These applications must have been created with the command
CR APPL with APPLID = SMMLB.
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter specifies a local output device.
n/o
n/
/o
a-b
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter specifies an output device in the O&M network.
n/o
n/
/o
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DVGRPLNK- 1+
MOD DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD DVGRPLNK- 2-
CAN EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command cancels the assignment of an alarm text for an external alarm
line or for a DLU external alarm line. In case of DLU it also cancels the
assignment of the alarm priority and set it to the default value "critical".
Input format
[ [
[ CAN EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SITE HARDWARE INSTALLATION SITE
This parameter specifies whether an exchange or a digital
line unit is involved.
EXCH EXCHANGE
EAL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE NUMBER
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EAL- 1-
CR EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command assigns an alarm text to a specified external alarm line or
for a DLU external alarm line. In case of DLU it also assigns a priority
to an external alarm line.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for
the specified external alarm line.
Input format
[ [
[ CR EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ,TEXTNO= [,ALPRIO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EXCH EXCHANGE
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number assigned to an alarm text.
This parameter specifies the priority of an alarm.
Prerequisites:
SITE = DLU
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EAL- 1-
DISP EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command displays the assignment of a single external alarm line
or of all external alarm lines of the exchange or of the DLU.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EXCH EXCHANGE
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP EAL- 1-
CR EALLVL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE EAL LEVEL
This command creates the "No Alarm" level for an external alarm line
of a specified DLU.
Input format
[ [
[ CR EALLVL : DLU= ,EAL= ,LVL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the number of an external alarm line.
LVL ELECTRICAL NON-ALARM LEVEL
This parameter specifies whether a high or a low signal is
to be transmitted when there is no alarm.
Default: HIGH
HIGH HIGH LINE LEVEL
LOW LOW LINE LEVEL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EALLVL- 1-
DISP EALLVL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EAL LEVEL
This command displays the "No Alarm" level for an external alarm line
or for all external alarm lines of the specified DLU.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP EALLVL : DLU= ,EAL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Here the number of the affected DLU is specified in the
three high-order positions. ( Value range 1 to 255 ). The
lowest-order position must always be 0.
This parameter specifies the number of an external alarm line.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP EALLVL- 1-
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXECUTE EDT SYSTEM 8
This command calls the EDTS8 file editing subroutine to process SAM files.
EDTS8 processes control inputs in interactive mode from a data terminal or
in batch mode from a SAM file on disk. These control inputs are subdivided
into:
- Commands in command mode
Command mode is activated after EDTS8 has started or after data mode has
terminated.
- Data lines in data mode
Data mode is activated when a data line is input. EDTS8 interprets
all subsequent inputs as data lines. The changeover from data mode to
command mode is initiated by
pressing the input key
entering a period
end of a SAM file (with data lines)
- Dialog responses on the data terminal (in interactive mode)
All EDTS8 outputs appear on the data terminal. Optional outputs to a
printer are:
- An EDTS8 command log
- Contents of the EDTS8 line memory (file window)
When data are written to a SAM file, the specified lines of the EDTS8
line memory are written to disk. When data are read from a SAM file, the
specified records are entered as data lines in the EDTS8 line memory.
The records of this SAM file can be up to 252 bytes long.
EDTS8 commands
AGAIN Repetition of no more than the last 5 commands except
AGAIN and HELP
A P Output (print) of the last 5 commands
n Repetition of n commands
Repetition of the last command
CHANGE Changes in text lines or columns in specific lines
CH range domain search := new text
ALL search := new text
.. search := new text
search..:= new text
domain1 := new text
domain1 op search := new text
COPY Copy whole lines or columns to a required position
C range domain TO ln STEP m CLc
ST m
DELETE Delete specific lines
D range
domain search
domain op search
END End EDTS8
FILE Define file and type of access (Write or read)
F file INPUT OUTPUT
I O
HELP Summary of the operating instructions in English
H Command
Command OPD
OPD
OPD operand
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 1+
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INSERT Insert text or data sections in specific lines
in the required position
I range domain := new text
domain op search := new text
domain1 .. search := new text
search .. := new text
ALL search := new text
ALL search .. := new text
LIST List specific lines on the printer
L range domain NON HEX
search N H
domain1 op search
LOG Log the next commands on the printer
Activate the logging function
OFF Deactivate the logging function
MOVE Move lines or columns to the required position
The source data are deleted
M range domain TO ln STEP m CLc
ST m
NUMBER Renumber all lines
N Standard numbering 1,2,3...
ln STEP m
ST m
PRINT Print lines and columns on the data terminal
P range domain NON HEX
search N H
domain1 op search
READ Read in SAM files in the required position
R # file
recrange FROM file
recrange domain FR file
SELECT Select particular lines by deleting lines which are not
selected
S range
range domain search
range domain op search
SPACE Delete spaces to the left up to beginning of text or to
the right after end of text up to end of line
SP range R
L
TAB Tabulator declaration for data input in tabular form and
definition of a tab mark
T t CLn1 n2 n3 ....n32
OFF
TRANSLATE Translate data to EBCDIC or ASCII code
TR range domain TO EBCDIC
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 2+
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E
ASCII
A
VERIFY If the text is modified using the commands CHANGE, INSERT,
MOVE, COPY and SELECT, all the lines concerned are output
as a verification
V Activate verification function
OFF Deactivate verification function
WRITE Write all or part of the line memory as a SAM file to
disk
W # file
EXTEND
range TO file EXT
range domain TO file EXT
ln Line input to the line memory, line number
STEP m domain :=data <<
ST m
range Line area
ln1 :ln2
domain Column area, column number
recchange Records (lines) in a SAM file
<< Command linkage with the command character
EDTS8 word symbols
A SCII USASCII code
A GAIN Command abbreviation
CH ANGE Command abbreviation
CL Column data
C OPY Command abbreviation
D ELETE Command abbreviation
E BCDIC EBCDIC code
END End of EDTS8
EXT ENT Extend file
F ILE Command abbreviation
FR OM Direction specification "from"
H ELP Command abbreviation
H EX Hexadecimal specification
I NPUT Read file
I NSERT Command abbreviation
L Left
L IST Command abbreviation
LOG IN log
M OVE Command abbreviation
N ON Output without line number
O UTPUT Write file
OFF Switch off
OPD Operand
P RINT Command abbreviation
R Right
R EAD Command abbreviation
REC Record of a SAM file
S ELECT Command abbreviation
SP ACE Command abbreviation
ST EP Command abbreviation
T AB Command abbreviation
TO Direction specification "to"
TR ANSLATE Command abbreviation
V ERIFY Command abbreviation
W RITE Command abbreviation
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 3+
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EDTS8 character symbols
+ Page forward
- Page backward
<< Command link, command character
% First line in line memory
* Current line in line memory
$ Last line in line memory
? Free space after last line in line memory
& Whole line memory
: Start:End
:= Is replaced by
.. Area before or after
= Equal to
/= Not equal to
< Less than
> Greater than
Limit
" Text separator
. Period, end of data
Input format
[ [
[ EXEC EDTS8 ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 4-
CAN ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command cancels an elementary message for a given OCANEQ variant.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ELMSG- 1-
CR ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command creates an elementary message for a given OCANEQ variant and
assigns it to an elementary message identification, known by the SCP
(Service Control Point).
1. CR ELMSG - INDPHR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
2. CR ELMSG - OPRASS ELMSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
3. CR ELMSG - STAN ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR STD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to assign elementary messages of message type
"INDAS phrase" to an elementary message identification.
An INDAS phrase is composed of fixed text parts and up to six different
variable parts.
The variable part is represented by parameter ELMPAR.
The indas phrases can be used for user confirmation of input information or to
announce frequently changing parts, such as directory number, date/time,...
[ [
[ CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= [,ELMPAR=] ,LANELMSG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUBVOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(only for INDPHR and STAN) its announcement number.
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ELMSG- 1+
CR ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter unit is used to define the message type of the
elementary message.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
This parameter unit is used to define the announcement number.
ELMPAR ELMSG PARAMETER
This parameter builds the contents of the variable part of the INDAS
phrase. The variable part is used to announce variable information as
there are: directory numbers, date/time,....
The variable part can contain up to 6 ELMPAR values, linked with &.
The order in which the different values are given determines
the sequence of the ELMPAR values in the INDAS phrase.
The different values can be placed on any position within the INDAS
phrase. Each of the possible values can be specified more than once.
example: TIME&PRICE&TIME&DIGITS&INTEGER
DATE DATE
DIGITS DIGITS
INTEGER INTEGER
PRICE PRICE
TIME TIME
WEEKDAY WEEKDAY
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
SUBVOC SUBVOCABULARY
This parameter is only applicable for announcements
which prompt the subscriber to give a response (e.g. acknowledge).
The parameter indicates to the voice recognition system which
subset of the recognizable words can be expected in the response
(e.g.YES and NO for an acknowledge).
SVOC0 SUBVOCABULARY 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ELMSG- 2+
CR ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ELMSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
This input format is used to assign an elementary message of message type
"operator assistance" to an elementary message identification.
The different kind of operator assistances are defined by parameter OPRMODE.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= [,OPRMODE=] ,LANELMSG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OPRASS OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
elementary message.
OPRMODE OPERATOR MODE
This parameter is used to define the kind of operator
assistance.
OPRASSAP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE AFTER PIN
Operator assistance after the user has entered
the Personal Identification Number (PIN).
OPRASSBP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PIN
Operator assistance before the user has entered
the Personal Identification Number (PIN).
OPRASSO OPERATOR ASSISTANCE OUT
Operator assistance has to be finished.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ELMSG- 3+
CR ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ELMSG- 4+
CR ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR STD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format is used to assign an elementary message of message type
"fixed text announcement" to an elementary message identification.
A fixed text announcement is completely represented by its announcement number.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= ,LANELMSG= [,SUBVOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
STAN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
elementary message.
This parameter unit is used to define the announcement number.
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ELMSG- 5+
CR ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ELMSG- 6-
DISP ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command displays one or more elementary messages for a certain
OCANEQ variant.
A selective display can be achieved by specifying the message type of the
elementary message and (or) the language.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= [,ELMSG=] [,LANELMSG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
(depending on the message type) its announcement number.
For display purposes, only the message function can be specified.
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
elementary message.
This parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ELMSG- 1+
DISP ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ELMSG- 2-
MOD ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command modifies, for a given OCANEQ variant, the contents of the
elementary message assigned to an elementary message identification.
It is also possible to change the message type (parameter ELMSG).
If the message type is changed, all parameters necessary for the new
message type must be entered in the command. No data from the old
message type is kept in this case.
1. MOD ELMSG - INDPHR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
2. MOD ELMSG - OPRASS ELEMENTARY MSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
3. MOD ELMSG - STAN ELEMENTARY MSG FOR STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to change the linking of an elementary message
identification assigned to a standard announcement or an operator assistance
into an elementary message identification, assigned to an INDAS phrase.
It can also be used to modify the announcement number of the INDAS phrase, the
variable part of the INDAS phrase and (or) the language, assigned to the
elementary message identification. The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.
[ [
[ MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,ELMPAR= ,LANELMSG= [
[ [
[ ,SUBVOC=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ELMSG- 1+
MOD ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ELMPAR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER
This parameter builds the contents of the variable part of the INDAS
phrase. The variable part is used to announce variable information as
there are: directory numbers, date/time,....
The variable part can contain up to 6 ELMPAR values, linked with &.
The order in which the different values are given, determine
the sequence of the ELMPAR values in the INDAS phrase.
The different values can be placed on any position within the INDAS
phrase. Each of the possible values can be specified more than once.
example: TIME&PRICE&TIME&DIGITS&INTEGER
Note that when the announcement number the old parameters in the
are cleared. If the new INDAS phrase requires parameters, these
must be entered.
DATE DATE
DIGITS DIGITS
INTEGER INTEGER
PRICE PRICE
TIME TIME
WEEKDAY WEEKDAY
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ELMSG- 2+
MOD ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ELEMENTARY MSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
identification assigned to an INDAS phrase or a standard announcement into an
elementary message identification, assigned to an operator assistance. It can
also be used to modify the operator mode and (or) the language, assigned to the
elementary message identification.
The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.
[ [
[ MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,OPRMODE= ,LANELMSG=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OPRMODE OPERATOR MODE
This parameter is used to define the kind of operator
assistance.
OPRASSAP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE AFTER PIN
OPRASSBP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PIN
OPRASSO OPERATOR ASSISTANCE OUT
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ELMSG- 3+
MOD ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ELMSG- 4+
MOD ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ELEMENTARY MSG FOR STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
identification assigned to an INDAS phrase or an operator assistance into an
elementary message identification, assigned to a standard announcement.
It can also be used to modify the standard announcement number and (or) the
language, assigned to the elementary message identification.
The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.
[ [
[ MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,LANELMSG= ,SUBVOC=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
Notes:
OCANEQ variant.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ELMSG- 5+
MOD ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ELMSG- 6-
CAN ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command cancels for a given OCANEQ variant, the assignment of a fixed
text announcement to a given combination of an error code and error treatment.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ERRTR ERROR TREATMENT
This parameter defines how the detected input error of the user
interaction should be treated.
SEI STANDARD ERROR AND INFORMATION
This kind of error treatment results in an
immediate release of a pending announcement or
tone, stops the digit collection and starts a
standard announcement.
HLP HELP
This kind of error treatment is used to assist the
end-user with a standard announcement.
The UI(User Interaction)-LTG waits for a corrected
input from the end-user.
UIERRCOD USER INTERACTION ERROR CODE
This parameter defines the possible
user interaction error codes.
FDT FIRST DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the first digit timer.
IDT INTER DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the inter digit timer and minimum
number of digits not yet reached.
EOR END OF REPLY
End Of Reply digit received and minimum number of
digits not yet reached.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN ELMSGERR- 1-
CR ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command assigns, for a given OCANEQ variant, a fixed text announcement
to a combination of an error treatment and an error code.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ,STANNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HLP HELP
user interaction error codes.
EOR END OF REPLY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR ELMSGERR- 1-
DISP ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command displays, for a given OCANEQ variant, the fixed text announcements
assigned to the different combinations of error codes and error treatments.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ELMSGERR- 1-
MOD ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command modifies, for a given OCANEQ variant, the assignment of a fixed
text announcement to a combination of error code and error treatment.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ,STANNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HLP HELP
user interaction errors.
EOR END OF REPLY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD ELMSGERR- 1-
RESET EMERGOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET EMERGENCY OPERATION
This command resets the emergency operation flag.
Emergency operation is caused by a hardware recovery.
Notes:
- Configuration, diagnosis and test commands for central units, IOPs and
devices cant be executed while the CP is in emergency operation.
Input format
[ [
[ RESET EMERGOP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RESET EMERGOP- 1-
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This command changes the equipment number of a subscriber or a
PBX Line without changing any of the subscriber or PBX Line related
data under consideration of the following points:
- A modification is possible from DLU/V5IF to DLU/V5IF port.
- The old equipment number is assigned to a subscriber/PBX Line.
- ISDN-subscriber and all analog subscriber categories besides
mobile stations can be handled.
- The category of the PBX Line can either be mainstation (for analog
lines) or Basic Access (for ISDN lines).
- No nailed up connection must exist for the old equipment number.
- If the object on the parallel port from the new low bit rate or
high bit rate port of an SDSL access is a subscriber/PBX line,
the moved object has to be of the same type (subscriber/PBX line).
- If the object is moved to an SDSL port the transferrate values are set
to the old values if existing or the values of object connected on
the parallelport or the office values.
- If the object is moved from an SDSL port the transferrate values are
deleted implicitly.
- the number of B-channels must be supported on the new port
- The subscriber/PBX Line can be assigned to one CENTREX Group (Commands
ENTR CXSUB, ENTR CXPBX), but must not be a CENTREX Attendant.
- The command is rejected if the access is related to a secured CENTREX
business group for which the operator has no administration permission
(see DISP CXSEC). In case the command affects more than one
subscriber/PBX line, it will be executed even if one or more relations
to a CENTREX business group exists, for with special operator permission
is necessary.
Prerequisites:
- The new equipment number must previously be a free DLU/V5IF port.
- The new equipment must be able to support all the subscriber/PBX Line/PBX
features that exist for the subscriber/PBX Line/PBX to be moved.
- If the subscriber/PBX has bearer service for transmission of
packet data on the D-channel (PMDCHANN), the DLU module of the new
equipment must also provide the packet access. In case of packet access
(PLL-Service), the data link connection identifier changes
(Command DISP DLCI).
- The limitations concerning LTG resources must be fulfilled
(Command DISP LTGRES).
- Compatibility between the circuit type of the new equipment and
the category of the subscriber/PBX Line.
the operation mode of the PBX Line.
line attributes of the subscriber/PBX Line.
classes of service of the subscriber/PBX Line.
charging features of the subscriber/PBX Line.
1. MOD EQN - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. MOD EQN - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
Input format for addressing a subscriber/PBX Line via DN.
[ [
[ MOD EQN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ,NEWEQN= [,COSDAT=] [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EQN- 1+
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ [,V5EQBCH0=] [,V5EQBCH1=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Note:
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber directory number or the pilot
directory number of a PBX, to which the PBX Line is assigned.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX Line.
NEWEQN NEW EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new equipment number to which the
subscriber/PBX Line will be reconnected.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU=
b: SHELF=
- Shelf : 0...7 for DLU port
- 0 for V5IF port
c: MODULE=
- V5Port : digit 1,2 of portnumber
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EQN- 2+
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0 for V5IF port (V5.1)
0..20 for V5IF port (V5.2)
d: CIRCUIT=
- Circuit : 0...7 for DLU port (DLU8)
0...15 for DLU port (DLU16)
a-b
a: CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
V5ACCID V5 ACCESS IDENTIFICATION
[ [ This is the envelope function address for ISDN
[ [ subscribers on a V5 interface or the layer 3
[ [ address for subscribers on a V5 interface
[ [ according to ETS.
[V5DSDAT [ V5 CHANN. SIGN. DATA PATHID
[ [ Selection of one V5 communication path for ISDN
[ [ signalling data traffic in the D-channel. The
[ [ selected path must be an existing DS-path at the
[ [ V5 interface that connects the access.
[ [ The selection is mandatory, if there are more than
[ [ one DS-path at the V5 interface.
[ [ A DS-path selection must always be administered in
[ [ access network data, too.
[ [
[ [ Prerequisite:
[ [ - COSDAT=V5ACCID
!V5PDAT - V5 PACKET DATA
Selection of one V5 communication path for
packet data traffic in the D-channel.The selected
path must be an existing P-path at the V5
interface that connects the access.
A P-path selection can only be made, if the port
is in status planned and must always be
administered in frame handler data and access
network data, too.
Note:
- For accesses on a V5 interface, this identifier
must be assigned for the packet data in the
D channel service to work.
Prerequisite:
- COSDAT=V5ACCID
b: NUMBER=
Allowed ranges :
- V5ACCID for ISDN subscriber : 0..8175, range of
decimal numbers
for analog subscriber : 0..32767, range of
decimal numbers
These ranges overlap: values 0..8175 may be used twice
on the same V5 interface. Once for an analog subscriber
and once for an ISDN subscriber
- V5DSDAT (V5PATHID OF DS-PATH), 0..12, range of
decimal numbers
- V5PDAT (V5PATHID OF P-PATH), 0..12, range of
decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EQN- 3+
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
V5EQBCH0 B0 CHANNEL TIMESLOT
This parameter defines a V5 bearer channel timeslot that
is assigned to an access connected through a V5.1 interface.
It is mandatory for an analog access on a V5.1 interface,
but optional for an ISDN access on a V5.1 interface.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is only allowed for a V5.1 access.
Prerequisite:
- COSDAT=V5ACCID
Timeslot 0 is always used by the PCM system, so
it is not available for subscriber administration.
Timeslot 16 is always used by the V5.1 interface, so
it is not available for access administration.
Timeslots 15 and 31 may be used as communication
channels by the V5.1 interface; in this case, they
are not available for access administration.
is assigned to a access connected through a V5.1 interface.
It is not allowed for an analog access on a V5.1 interface,
but optional for a ISDN access on a V5.1 interface.
Incompatibilities:
- same Timeslot for V5EQBCH0 and V5EQBCH1.
Prerequisites:
- V5EQBCH0
- COSDAT=V5ACCID
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EQN- 4+
MOD EQN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Input format for addressing a subscriber/PBX Line via EQN.
[ [
[ MOD EQN : EQN= ,NEWEQN= [,COSDAT=] [,V5EQBCH0=] [,V5EQBCH1=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number to which the subscriber/
PBX Line is connected.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/V5IF=
b: SHELF=
- 0 for V5IF port
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
NEWEQN NEW EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new equipment number to which the
subscriber/PBX Line will be reconnected.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU=
b: SHELF=
- 0 for V5IF port
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EQN- 5+
MOD EQN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: MODULE=
d: CIRCUIT=
a-b
V5ACCID V5 ACCESS IDENTIFICATION
[ [ This is the envelope function address for ISDN
[ [ subscribers on a V5 interface or the layer 3
[ [ address for subscribers on a V5 interface
[ [ according to ETS.
[V5DSDAT [ V5 CHANN. SIGN. DATA PATHID
[ [ Selection of one V5 communication path for ISDN
[ [ signalling data traffic in the D-channel. The
[ [ selected path must be an existing DS-path at the
[ [ V5 interface that connects the access.
[ [ The selection is mandatory, if there are more than
[ [ one DS-path at the V5 interface.
[ [ A DS-path selection must always be administered in
[ [ access network data, too.
[ [
[ [ Prerequisite:
[ [ - COSDAT=V5ACCID
!V5PDAT - V5 PACKET DATA
Selection of one V5 communication path for
packet data traffic in the D-channel.The selected
path must be an existing P-path at the V5
interface that connects the access.
A P-path selection can only be made, if the port
is in status planned and must always be
administered in frame handler data and access
network data, too.
Note:
- For accesses on a V5 interface, this identifier
must be assigned for the packet data in the
D channel service to work.
Prerequisite:
- COSDAT=V5ACCID
b: NUMBER=
Allowed ranges :
- V5ACCID for ISDN subscriber : 0..8175, range of
decimal numbers
for analog subscriber : 0..32767, range of
decimal numbers
These ranges overlap: values 0..8175 may be used twice
on the same V5 interface. Once for an analog subscriber
and once for an ISDN subscriber
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EQN- 6+
MOD EQN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- V5DSDAT (V5PATHID OF DS-PATH), 0..12, range of
decimal numbers
- V5PDAT (V5PATHID OF P-PATH), 0..12, range of
decimal numbers
is assigned to an access connected through a V5.1 interface.
It is mandatory for an analog access on a V5.1 interface,
but optional for an ISDN access on a V5.1 interface.
Incompatibilities:
Prerequisite:
- COSDAT=V5ACCID
is assigned to a access connected through a V5.1 interface.
It is not allowed for an analog access on a V5.1 interface,
but optional for a ISDN access on a V5.1 interface.
Incompatibilities:
- same Timeslot for V5EQBCH0 and V5EQBCH1.
Prerequisites:
- V5EQBCH0
- COSDAT=V5ACCID
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EQN- 7-
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE EQUIPMENT TRAP
This command activates an instant printout for each occurrence of the specified
error codes:
- on a particular port or on the ports
- in a port area of a particular line/trunk unit
- in a particular line/trunk unit
- in a line/trunk unit area of a particular line/trunk group
- in a particular line/trunk group
Incompatibilities:
- The functionality which is activated by the MML commands
ACT TRTRAP and ACT EQTRAP is not supported by the BSSAP LTG.
If either of these MML commands is entered, the correct handling
of the BSSAP protocol at the GSM A-interface cannot be guaranteed.
1. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHALL PRINT ALL HOLD ALL
2. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHNON PRINT ALL HOLD NONE
3. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHSPE PRINT ALL HOLD SPECIFIED
4. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHUSP PRINT ALL HOLD UNSPECIFIED
5. ACT EQTRAP - PSPEHSPE PRINT SPECIFIED HOLD SPECIFIED
6. ACT EQTRAP - PUSPHNON PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD NONE
7. ACT EQTRAP - PUSPHUSP PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD UNSPEC.
1. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD ALL
Input format for activating a printout and the attempt to hold the
connection for the occurrence of any MDII (machine detected interoffice
irregularity).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,HOLD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 1+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any
MDII occurs.
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a connection is to be held for
a port when an error code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Holds a connection for a port when any MDII
occurs.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 2+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD NONE
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of any MDII
(machine detected interoffice irregularity).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
MDII occurs.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 3+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD SPECIFIED
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all MDIIs
and the attempt to hold the connection for the occurrence of specified
MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
MDII occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 4+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: ERROR CODE
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
E231 PBX SCREENING FAULT
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
The connection is to be held for a port, when
a certain MDII occurs.
Specifies whether the connection is to be held for
a port when a certain error code occurs.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 5+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD UNSPECIFIED
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all MDIIs
and the attempt to hold the connection for the occurrence of all except
the specified MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,HOLD= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
code occurs.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
MDII occurs.
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERRORCODES
Holds a connection of a port when any other
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 6+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
than the specified MDIIs occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 7+
ACT EQTRAP
PSPEHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
PRINT SPECIFIED HOLD SPECIFIED
connection for the occurrence of specified MDIIs (machine detected
interoffice irregularity).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 8+
ACT EQTRAP
PSPEHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 9+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD NONE
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all except
the specified MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
code occurs.
Activates a printout of a port when any other
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 10+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 11+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD UNSPEC.
connection for the occurrence of all except the specified MDIIs (machine
detected interoffice irregularity).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,HOLD= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
upper ones).
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
code occurs.
Activates a printout of a port when any other
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
Holds a connection of a port when any other
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 12+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 13-
CAN EQTRAP
ALLEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL EQUIPMENT TRAP
This command deactivates the instant printout for the occurrence of the
specified or any error codes:
- on a particular port or on the ports
- in a port area of a particular line/trunk unit
- in a particular line/trunk unit
- in a line/trunk unit area of a particular line/trunk group
- in a particular line/trunk group
- in a line/trunk group area of a particular time switch group
- in a time switch group
- in the complete exchange.
<job number>.
1. CAN EQTRAP - ALLEQ ALL EQUIPMENTS
2. CAN EQTRAP - SPECEQ SPECIFIED EQUIPMENTS
1. Input format
ALL EQUIPMENTS
[ [
[ CAN EQTRAP : [ERCO=] [,PRINT=] [,HOLD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
E0 NO ERROR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 1+
CAN EQTRAP
ALLEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
This parameter defines together with the parameters HOLD and ERCO
a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports on
that it was activated with this combination.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERROR CODES
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameter PRINT and
ERCO a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
on that it was activated with this combination.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 2+
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIED EQUIPMENTS
[ [
[ CAN EQTRAP : [ERCO=] ,LTG= ,LC= [,PRINT=] [,HOLD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ERCO ERROR CODE
Notes:
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
E0 NO ERROR
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E68 PREMATURE MCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 3+
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
a[-b]
upper ones).
unit values.
unit values.
LC LINE CONNECTION
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
unit values.
This parameter defines together with the parameters HOLD and ERCO
a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports on
that it was activated with this combination.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 4+
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameter PRINT and
ERCO a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
on that it was activated with this combination.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 5-
DISP ERRNB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Error Notebook
This task displays entries logged in software or hardware error notebook.
Output Parameters:
SoftwareErrorNotebookEntries:
Information about occurence of SW errors in human readable
form.
HardwareErrorNotebookEntries:
Information about occurence of HW errors in human readable
form.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ERRNB : EQN= ,Type= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the device whose error notebook is to be displayed.
Type
Type of error notebook to display.
Possible values are HardwareErrorNotebook or SoftwareErrorNotebook.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ERRNB- 1-
RSET ERRNB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Reset Error Notebook
This task clears all entries in designated software or hardware error notebook.
Input format
[ [
[ RSET ERRNB : EQN= ,Type= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the device whose error notebook is to be reset.
Type
Type of error notebook to reset.
Possible values are HardwareErrorNotebook or SoftwareErrorNotebook.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RSET ERRNB- 1-
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ERROR STATISTIC DATA
This command displays audit or SWSG (software safeguarding)
statistic tables from
- the cycle disk file IA.ERST
- a sequential statistic disk file
- a statistic tape / magneto optical disk file
Prerequisites:
--------------
- A statistic file is:
a) the cycle disk file IA.ERST
b) a sequential file generated by copying the cycle disk
file IA.ERST
(command TRANS FILE)
c) a sequential file generated by copying the sequential file
created with b)
(command TRANS FILE).
- Before copying a statistic file to tape / magneto optical disk,
the tape / magneto optical disk must be initialized
(command INIT MT).
- If data are read from the cycle disk file IA.ERST, the statistic
data available in the IA-buffer (but not yet written into IA.ERST)
are automatically displayed. This means that no transfer of the
IA-buffer to the cycle disk file IA.ERST is necessary before
displaying the statistic tables
(command TRANS BUFFER).
Possible effects:
-----------------
- If no further data applicable to the input parameter are found,
the final message is "NO (MORE) DATA FOR DISPLAY AVAILABLE".
Notes:
------
1) The following audit error tables can be provided:
a) Summary tables, i.e. how many errors were detected by audit?
. number of errors detected by each audit,
in descending order of number of occurrence
. number of errors detected for one given equipment
(DLU number, LTG number, port number)
. number of errors detected by one AUDIT
. number of errors for which an audit correction failed
. all these tables within a given date/time interval
b) Sequential tables, i.e. when were the errors detected by audit?
. all errors detected by audit
. all errors detected by one audit
. all errors detected for one given equipment
. all errors for which an audit correction failed
. all these tables, within a given date/time interval
2) The following SWSG error tables can be provided:
a) Summary tables, i.e. how many errors?
. number of SWSG errors for each module,
in descending order of number of occurrence
. number of SWSG errors for one selected module
. number of SWSG errors for a particular processor
. number of SWSG errors with a given recovery level
. all these tables within a given date/time interval
b) Sequential tables, i.e. when did the errors occur?
. all SWSG errors
. all SWSG errors reported by one selected module
. all SWSG errors with a given module name and error number
. all SWSG errors for a particular processor
. all SWSG errors with a given recovery level
. all these tables, within a given date/time interval
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 1+
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3) All parameter combinations are allowed in this command, but only
the parameters OBJECT and FORM determine the data to be
displayed.
<job number>.
1. DISP ERRSTDAT- AUDIT AUDIT TABLES
2. DISP ERRSTDAT- SWSG SOFTWARE SAFEGUARGING TABLES
1. Input format
AUDIT TABLES
This path is legal for displaying audit tables from
- the cyclic disk file IA.ERST
The cyclic disk file IA.ERST is:
- created with ACT IAFEAT;
- written by: - IA-buffer management
(automatically when a buffer is full)
- the command TRANS BUFFER
Note:
-----
- It is possible that data already copied to tape / magneto optical
disk are displayed if addressing the cyclic disk file IA.ERST.
The command REL CYCFILE does not delete data from a cyclic
disk file but releases the data for overwriting.
[ [
[ DISP ERRSTDAT : TYPE= [,FORM=] [,OBJECT=] [,ERRNO=] [
[ [
[ [,LOADTYPE=] [,PORTTYPE=] [,LTG=] [,LC=] [
[ [
[ [,DATE= [,TIME=]] [,MARK=] [,FILE=] [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF DATA
This parameter specifies the type of the displayed data.
AUDIT ERROR DETERMINED BY AUDIT
FORM FORMAT
This parameter specifies the format of the displayed data.
SEQ SEQUENTIAL TABLE (WHEN)
SUM SUMMARY TABLE(HOW MUCH ERRORS)
OBJECT OBJECT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the object identification.
(audit name or module name)
1 ... 13 characters from the symbolic character set.
Exception: see prerequisites.
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Symbolic character set consists of:
- letter : A | B | ..... | Y | Z
- digit : 0 | 1 | ..... | 8 | 9
- special values : + | # | * | % | .
The audit name consists of:
- character 1 ... 13 = audit name e.g. ABILREG
The module name consists of:
- character 1 ... 5 = name, e.g. SIPRC
- character 6 ... 7 = variant, e.g. D2
- character 8 = type, e.g. C
- character 9 = separator,
- character 10 ... 13 = version, e.g. 0101
Prerequisites: (for module name only)
--------------
- type : C (source module) or
T (transient data module)
- separator : always dot (.)
- version : . each character must have a value between 0 and 9;
. when entering the version,
"name, variant, type and separator"
must be entered.
e.g. SIPRCD2C.0101
ERRNO ERROR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the error number.
The errors listed in the table are reduced to the given error number.
LOADTYPE LOAD TYPE OF GP
This parameter specifies the GP load type.
a[-b]
a: TYPE OF LTG
A LTG-A
B LTG-B
C LTG-C
CB LTG-CB
D LTG-D
H LTG-H
b: LOAD TYPE=
unit values.
PORTTYPE PORT TYPE
This parameter specifies the port type.
ANETW ACCESS NETWORK
ANNOU RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
CO CONFERENCE
CONS CONSOLE
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DLU DIGITAL CONCENTRATOR
DSW DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
EQUIP EQUIPMENT
IWE INTERWORKING
KEY KEY
LINE LINE
MDN MULTIPLE DN
MPLX MULTIPLEXER
NC NOT CONNECTED
PADCF PRIMARY ACCESS D-CHANNEL FIXED
PANC PRIMARY ACCESS NOT CONNECTED
PBXLN PBX LINE
SUB SUBSCRIBER
TEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TPC TEST PHONE CONTROL
TRUNK TRUNK
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line trunk group of the errors detected
by audit.
Possible values:
----------------
1) Equipment is DLU -> LTG = dlu, shelf
2) Equipment is LTGA/B/C -> LTG = ltgset, ltg
a[-b]
a: DLU OR LTGSET=
unit values.
b: SHELF OR LTG=
unit values.
LC LINE CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line connection number of the errors
detected by audit.
Possible values:
----------------
1) Equipment is DLU -> LC = module, circuit
2) Equipment is LTGA/B/C -> LC = ltu, channel
a[-b]
a: MODULE OR LTU=
unit values.
b: CIRCUIT OR CHANNEL=
unit values.
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date when the error occurred,
i.e. the date software error treatment was called or the date audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
- The listed errors are reduced to those that occurred within
the given interval. If only one date is entered, the errors
are listed from the given date to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
- This parameter also displays all invalid "errors".
(=date/time insecure)
There is no comparison between insecure date/time in the file and
secure date/time which is entered by the operator.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time the error occurred,
i.e. the time software error treatment was called or the time audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
the given interval. If only one time is entered, the errors
are listed from the given time to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
MARK MARK OF AUDIT ERROR
This parameter specifies the mark of the error detected by audit.
F AUDIT CORRECTION FAILED
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
S AUDIT CORRECTION SUCCESSFUL
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which the
statistic data are read.
Default: IA.ERST
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the tape / magneto
optical disk from which the statistic data are read.
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SOFTWARE SAFEGUARGING TABLES
This path is legal for displaying software safeguarding tables from
- the cyclic disk file IA.ERST
The cyclic disk file IA.ERST is:
- created with ACT IAFEAT;
- written by: - IA-buffer management
(automatically when a buffer is full)
- the command TRANS BUFFER
Note:
-----
- It is possible that data already copied to tape / magneto optical
disk are displayed by adressing the cyclic disk file IA.ERST.
The command REL CYCFILE does not delete data from a cyclic
disk file but releases the data for overwriting.
[ [
[ DISP ERRSTDAT : TYPE= [,FORM=] [,OBJECT=] [,ERRNO=] [,PRO=] [
[ [
[ [,REC=] [,DATE= [,TIME=]] [,FILE=] [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF DATA
This parameter specifies the type of the displayed data.
SWSG ERROR REPORTED SOFTW.SAFEGUARD
FORM FORMAT
This parameter specifies the format of the displayed data.
SEQ SEQUENTIAL TABLE (WHEN)
SUM SUMMARY TABLE(HOW MUCH ERRORS)
OBJECT OBJECT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the object identification.
(audit name or module name)
1 ... 13 characters from the symbolic character set.
Exception: see prerequisites.
Symbolic character set consists of:
- letter : A | B | ..... | Y | Z
- digit : 0 | 1 | ..... | 8 | 9
- special values : + | # | * | % | .
The audit name consists of:
- character 1 ... 13 = audit name e.g. ABILREG
The module name consists of:
- character 1 ... 5 = name, e.g. SIPRC
- character 6 ... 7 = variant, e.g. D2
- character 8 = type, e.g. C
- character 9 = separator,
- character 10 ... 13 = version, e.g. 0101
Prerequisites: (for module name only)
--------------
- type : C (source module) or
T (transient data module)
- separator : always dot (.)
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- version : . each character must have a value between 0 and 9;
. when entering the version,
"name, variant, type and separator"
must be entered.
e.g. SIPRCD2C.0101
ERRNO ERROR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the error number.
The errors listed in the table are reduced to the given error number.
PRO PROCESSOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the processor for which the errors are to be
displayed.
AMP0 ATM PROCESSOR 0
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR / MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR / SPARE
REC PERFORMED RECOVERY LEVEL
This parameter must be entered when the error tables are to be reduced
to those which occurred with the given recovery level
(performed by SWET).
Notes:
------
- The performed recovery level is the recovery level executed by
SWET (software error treatment). The requested recovery level
is the recovery level entered by SWSG-user.
Normally, the performed recovery level corresponds to the
requested recovery level. Only in case of escalation the requested
level is increased (by SWET) to a higher recovery level (performed).
INSTAL RECOVERY DURING INSTALLATION
ISTART1 NEW LOAD OF CP, NSTART PROCESS
ISTART1B BASIC ISTART1
ISTART2 ISTART1, LOAD PERIPHERY
ISTART2E EMERGENCY RECOVERY
ISTART2F FORCE RECOVERY
ISTART2G GENERATION CHANGE
ISTART2R RELOAD RECOVERY
NSTART0 NEW START OF ALL NOT CALLP
NSTART1 NEW START OF ALL CP PROCESSES
NSTART1B BASIC NSTART1
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NSTART2 NSTART1, LOAD OF SEMIPERM.DATA
NSTART3 NSTART2, LOAD CODE
PROBRD ONE PROCESSOR BREAKDOWN
SASDAT SAVING SYMPTOM WITHOUT STATIS.
SASDATS SAVING SYMPTOM WITH STATISTIC
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date when the error occurred,
i.e. the date software error treatment was called or the date audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
the given interval. If only one date is entered, the errors
are listed from the given date to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time the error occurred,
i.e. the time software error treatment was called or the time audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
the given interval. If only one time is entered, the errors
are listed from the given time to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which the
statistic data are read.
Default: IA.ERST
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the tape / magneto
optical disk from which the statistic data are read.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 10-
SAVE ERRSYMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Save Error Symptoms
Input format
[ [
[ SAVE ERRSYMP : Report Number= ,Begin Date= ,CP Symptom File= [
[ [
[ ,CP Faultclass= ,Exchange Name= ,Exchange Type= [
[ [
[ ,SSNC Faultclass= ,SSNC Event Log= ,Symptoms Server= [
[ [
[ ,Additional symptoms= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Report Number
Please enter a 8-digit number FMLNUMxx:
xx version number
Example:
05109901
No blanks are allowed !
Begin Date
Begin date of symptom saving:
6-digit number YYMMDD
YY Year
MM Month
DD Day
CP Symptom File
Select a CP archive file.
CP Faultclass
Select CP Faultclass:
- CP problems / CP recovery
- Problems in the peripherals
- Call processing / charging / traffic
- OSI application problems
- CCNC problems
- Miscellaneous (incl. BOP)
Exchange Name
Enter Exchange Name.
Exchange Type
Select Exchange Type:
- Classic
- Powernode
- STP
SSNC Faultclass
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SAVE ERRSYMP- 1+
SAVE ERRSYMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Select SSNC Faultclass:
- SSNC #7 problems
- SSNC administration / security
- SSNC hardware problems
- SSNC software problems
- SSNC recovery (incl. BOP)
SSNC Event Log
Select SSNC Event Log.
Symptoms Server
Enter the FTP parameter. If the values are not changed no
filetransfer is excecuted.
Example:
139.21.206.211 anonymous guest symptoms
The parameter PATH is optional.
Additional symptoms
If additional symptoms must be saved please select "yes".
The task will be stopped. Please copy additional symptoms
to the working directory and press the "OK" button.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SAVE ERRSYMP- 2-
DISP ETHSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Ethernet Statistics
This Task allows to display the Ethernet
statistics for an Ethernet port.
Output Parameters
AlignmentErrors:
A count of frames received on a particular
interface that are not an integral number of
octets in length and do not pass the FCS check.
The count represented by an instance of this
object is incremented when the alignmentError
status is returned by the MAC service to the
LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for
which multiple error conditions obtain are,
according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3
Layer Management, counted exclusively according
to the error status presented to the LLC.
FCSErrors:
interface that are an integral number of octets
in length but do not pass the FCS check.
object is incremented when the frameCheckError
SingleCollisionFrames:
A count of successfully transmitted frames on
a particular interface for which transmission
is inhibited by exactly one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this
object is also counted by the corresponding
instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts,
ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts,
and is not counted by the corresponding
instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames
object.
MultipleCollisionFrames:
A count of successfully transmitted frames on
a particular interface for which transmission
is inhibited by more than one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this
object is also counted by the corresponding
instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts,
ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts,
and is not counted by the corresponding
instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames
object.
DeferredTransmissions:
A count of frames for which the first
transmission attempt on a particular interface
is delayed because the medium is busy.
object does not include frames involved in
collisions.
LateCollisions:
The number of times that a collision is
detected on a particular interface later than
512 bit-times into the transmission of a
packet.
Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ETHSTAT- 1+
DISP ETHSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to 51.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. A
(late) collision included in a count
represented by an instance of this object is
also considered as a (generic) collision for
purposes of other collision-related
statistics.
ExcessiveCollisions:
A count of frames for which transmission on a
particular interface fails due to excessive
collisions.
InternalMacTransmitErrors:
A count of frames for which transmission on a
particular interface fails due to an internal
MAC sublayer transmit error. A frame is only
counted by an instance of this object if it is
not counted by the corresponding instance of
either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object, the
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by
an instance of this object is implementation-
specific. In particular, an instance of this
object may represent a count of transmission
errors on a particular interface that are not
otherwise counted.
CarrierSenseErrors:
The number of times that the carrier sense
condition was lost or never asserted when
attempting to transmit a frame on a particular
interface.
object is incremented at most once per
transmission attempt, even if the carrier sense
condition fluctuates during a transmission
attempt.
FrameTooLongs:
interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
object is incremented when the frameTooLong
InternalMacReceiveErrors:
A count of frames for which reception on a
particular interface fails due to an internal
MAC sublayer receive error. A frame is only
counted by an instance of this object if it is
not counted by the corresponding instance of
either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object, or the
dot3StatsFCSErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by
an instance of this object is implementation-
specific. In particular, an instance of this
object may represent a count of receive errors
on a particular interface that are not
otherwise counted.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ETHSTAT- 2+
DISP ETHSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ETHSTAT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the Ethernet port or of the MGC.
For MGC you can find the needed EQN in the
containment view under the selected hiQ.
The EQN has the format LTG-*-*-LTU-* (f.e.LTG-1-35-LTU-5).
The EQN is case sensitive!
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ETHSTAT- 3-
CAN EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Event Destination
This Task cancels one Event destination.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN EVDEST : Event destination= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination.
Enter its unique name to cancel one single Event destination.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EVDEST- 1-
DISP EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Event Destination
This Task displays parameters of Event destination. It is possible
to display one Event destination with all parameters or several with
a subset of parameters. The subset of parameters is:
Event destination, Event filter, Administrative state,
Destination, Destin with backUp and Availability.
Omit all parameters to display all Event destination.
Enter Event destination parameter to display one Event destination
Enter Start id to display all Event destination starting with
this name.
Enter End id to display all Event destination up to this name.
Enter Start id and End id to display all Event destination
between these two names.
The Availability parameter cannot be entered. Its values {-, On, Off}
represents the scheduling states. The value "-" means that no scheduling
parameter was entered, so scheduling has no efect whether the Event
destination is "On" or "Off".
Input format
[ [
[ DISP EVDEST : [Event destination=] [,Start id=] [,End id=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
Enter a unique name to display one single Event destination
with all parameters.
This parameter is optional and may be omitted if all Event
destination shall be displayed with a subset of parameters.
Start id
All Event destination will be displayed starting with this
name. If a value for End id is entered all Event destination
between Start id and End id will be displayed.
End id
All Event destination up to this name will be displayed. If a
value for Start id is entered all Event destination between
Start id and End id will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP EVDEST- 1-
CR EVDESTCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Event Destination CP
This Task creates an Event destination. The Event destination is
used to determine which Event Reports are forwarded to a particular
Destination during specified time periods. A Destination is an
Application running on a remote OS with the capability of receiving
Event Reports. It may also be used to specify the mode (confirm or no -
confirm) an Application has to act on received Event Reports. Each
Event destination may contain a scheduling capability determining the
intervals during which Event Reports are selected for forwarding. Each
Event destination contains an Event filter which specifies the
characteristics an Event Report must satisfy in order to be forwarded.
There is the opportunity to create a new Event destination with an
existing Event destination as reference. All parameter values of the
referenced Event destination will be used.
Parameters that are entered will overwrite the referenced ones.
If the creation by reference is not used the following parameters are
mandatory: Destination, Dest. with backup and Event filter.
The Availability parameter cannot be entered. Its values {-, On, Off}
represents the scheduling states. The value "-" means that no scheduling
parameter was entered, so scheduling has no efect whether the Event
destination is "On" or "Off".
Note:
- The parameters for daily scheduling and weekly scheduling exclude
one another.
- The parameters Destination and Dest. with backup exclude
one another.
- It is not possible to add parameters by the MOD EVDEST Task if they
were omitted in this Task.
Input format
[ [
[ CR EVDESTCP : Event destination= [,Reference event dest.=] [
[ [
[ [,Destination=] [,Dest. with backup=] [
[ [
[ [,Conf on receipt=] [,Event filter=] [
[ [
[ [,Administrative state=] [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
Reference event dest.
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination
already created. All parameter values of this referenced
Event destination will be used. Parameters that are entered
will be used instead of the referenced values.
Destination
This parameter defines single or multiple Application
Entity Title (AET). An AET represents the address of an
application running on a remote TMN-OS. This application
receives Event Reports routed by this Event destination.
An AET value entered for this parameter must be administrated
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EVDESTCP- 1+
CR EVDESTCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
in the Layer Management too.
If this parameter is entered the parameter Dest. with backup
must not be entered.
It is possible to select 2 different types of Destination:
single : only one AET
multiple : up to 6 AET
Input format for AET: 3 Up to 16 numbers separeted by blanks
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Dest. with backup
This parameter defines one active AET and up to 5 BackUp AETs
used in case of communication failure with the active one.
remote TMN-OS. This application receives Event Reports routed
by this Event destination. An AET value entered for this
parameter must be administrated in the Layer Management too.
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Conf on receipt
This parameter defines if a confirmation on receipt is required.
The value Yes will force the receiving application to confirm
each Event Report routed by this Event destination.
The value No means that the application does not confirm
each Event Report routed by this Event destination.
Input format: Yes confirmation required
No no confirmation required
Event filter
This parameter defines a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be routed by this Event
destination.
Each Event Report consists of three significant attributes.
They are Emitting object class, Emitting object and
Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
Each member of the triplet is optional, but you must enter at
least one of them. The overall number of entered members must
not exceed the amount of 10.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of
a triple the Event Report will be routed to the application
specified with the Destination or Dest. with backUp
parameter.
Administrative state
This parameter is used to suspend and resume Event Report
routing by this Event destination.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be routed by
this Event destination
Locked: Event Reports will not be routed by
Default : Unlocked
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the
Event destination becomes active. If only the Start time
is set the Stop time will be set automatically to
Continuous. The time value is rounded up to a multiple of
5 minutes.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Stop time is set.
Stop time
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EVDESTCP- 2+
CR EVDESTCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the
Event destination becomes inactive. If only the Stop time
is set the Start time will be set automatically to actual
system time of the switch.
time values
Start time is set.
Daily intervals
intervals can be specified within which the Event destination
is active. If this parameter is entered the parameter for
weekly scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Default: whole day
Weekly intervals
intervals can be defined for each day of the week. The
Event destination will be inactive on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals selected. At least one
day with one interval must be selected.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EVDESTCP- 3-
MOD EVDESTCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Event Destination CP
This Task modifies one Event destination with parameters given by
the user. If a value is omitted the corresponding parameter remains
unchanged.
Note:
- You cannot add parameters if they are not entered previously with
the CR EVNTDEST Task. You may execute DISP EVNTDEST Task to look up
the parameters entered before.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD EVDESTCP : Event destination= [,Destination=] [
[ [
[ [,Dest. with backup=] [,Event filter=] [
[ [
[ [,Administrative state=] [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
This parameter defines a unique Name for an existing
Event destination that is to be modified.
Destination
This parameter replaces single or multiple Application
Entity Title (AET). An AET represents the address of an
application running on a remote TMN-OS. This application
receives Event Reports routed by this Event destination.
An AET value entered for this parameter must be administrated
in the Layer Management too.
If this parameter is entered the parameter Dest. with backup
must not be entered.
It is possible to select 2 different types of Destination:
single : only one AET
multiple : up to 6 AET
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Dest. with backup
This parameter replaces one active AET and up to 5 BackUp AETs
used in case of communication failure with the active one.
remote TMN-OS. This application receives Event Reports routed
by this Event destination. An AET value entered for this
parameter must be administrated in the Layer Management too.
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Event filter
This parameter replaces a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be routed by this Event
destination. Each Event Report consists of three significant
attributes. They are Emitting object class, Emitting object
and Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of a
triple the Event Report will be routed to the application
specified with the Destination or Dest. with backUp
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EVDESTCP- 1+
MOD EVDESTCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter.
routing by this Event destination.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be routed by
Locked: Event Reports will not be routed by
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the Event
destination becomes active. The parameter can be replaced only
if a Start time or Stop time was entered when the Event
destination was created.
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the Event
destination becomes inactive. The parameter can be replaced
only if a Start time or Stop time was entered when the
Event destination was created.
time values
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces Daily intervals (up to 6), at
which the Event destination is active. The parameter can be
entered only if Daily intervals were entered when the
Event destination was created. The time values are rounded up
to a multiple of 5 minutes. Overlapping intervals are combined
to one interval.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces Weekly intervals, at which the
Event destination is active. Only days of the week selected
in the parameter are replaced. The intervals of the days not
selected will not be changed. Enter 0 intervals to disable the
whole day. At least one day with one interval must be active
in the resultant Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is
rejected.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EVDESTCP- 2-
CAN EVLOGCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Event Log on CP
This task cancels an Event log with all Event log records contained .
Note:
Make sure that an Event log is not canceled before all
Event log records have been retrieved with the DISP EVREC task.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN EVLOGCP : Event log= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log to be deleted.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 12 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, 0 .. 9,
%, #, +, *
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Note: String must begin with a letter.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN EVLOGCP- 1-
CR EVLOGCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Event Log on CP
This task creates an Event log, which is used to store Event Reports. Each
Event log contains an Event filter which defines the characteristics for
an Event Report to be selected for storage. An Event Report that is selected
for storage is supplemented with additional information generated as a part
of the storage process to create so called Event log records.
Possible effects:
It is possible to supply all Event log parameters without restriction.
In some cases, this may lead to high system load. For further details,
please refer to the help texts of the specific parameters.
Notes:
- The parameters for Daily intervals and Weekly intervals exclude one
another.
- Note that optional parameters must be selected when the Event log is
created. It is not possible to add optional parameters later on by the
MOD EVLOG task.
Input format
[ [
[ CR EVLOGCP : Event log= [,Log size=] [,Log full action=] [
[ [
[ ,Event filter= [,Administrative state=] [,Start time=] [
[ [
[ [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log to be created.
This can either be a String or a Number.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 12 characters of the following character set
(the first character must be a letter):
A .. Z, 0 .. 9,
%, #, +, *
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Log size
This parameter specifies the size (storage capacity) of the Event log
in kilo bytes.
Input format: RANGE (100 .. 100 000)
Default: 10 000
Note: It is possible to create Event logs with a storage capacity of up
to 100 mega bytes. Note however that this will considerably reduce
available disk space!
Log full action
This parameter defines overwrite characteristics.
Input format:
Wrap: The oldest Event log records will be overwritten when new
Event log records are stored.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EVLOGCP- 1+
CR EVLOGCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: Wrap
Event filter
This parameter defines a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be stored by this Event
log.
Each Event Report consists of three significant attributes.
They are Emitting object class, Emitting object and
Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of
a triple the Event Report will be stored in this Event log.
storage by this Event log.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be stored by
this Event log
Locked: Event Reports will not be stored by
this Event log
Default : unlocked
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time the Event log
becomes active. If only the Start time is set the Stop time
will be set automatically to Continuous. The time value is
rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time the Event log
becomes inactive. If only the Stop time is set the
Start time will be set automatically to actual system time
of the switch.
time values
Start time is set.
Daily intervals
intervals can be specified, the Event log is active
within. If this parameter is entered the parameter for weekly
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Default: whole day
Weekly intervals
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EVLOGCP- 2+
CR EVLOGCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
intervals can be defined for each day of the week. The
Event log will be inactive on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals selected. At least one
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR EVLOGCP- 3-
DISP EVLOGCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Event Log on CP
This task displays status information of all Event logs for the whole system.
If the name of a specific Event log is specified, detailed information for
this Event log will be displayed.
It is also possible to display status information for a subset of Event logs
which begin with the character string specified. For this case the parameter
Event log subset is used.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP EVLOGCP : [Event log=] [,Event log subset=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of an Event log for which detailed
information is requested. If neither the parameter Event log nor the
parameter Event log subset is used, an overview about all Event logs
in the whole system will be shown.
Input format:
String:
A .. Z, 0 .. 9,
%, #, +, *
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Event log subset
This parameter specifies an initial string for Event logs with names in
String representation. Status information will be displayed for all
Event logs beginning with this initial string. If neither the parameter
Event log nor the parameter Event log subset is used, an overview
about all Event logs of the whole System will be shown.
Input format:
String:
A .. Z, 0 .. 9,
%, #, +, *
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP EVLOGCP- 1-
MOD EVLOGCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Event Log on CP
This task modifies a specific Event log.
If a parameter value is omitted the corresponding parameter remains unchanged.
Note:
- Adding parameters with MOD EVLOG is not possible if they have not been entered
previously with the CR EVLOG task. Use the DISP EVLOG task to check the
parameters entered before.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD EVLOGCP : Event log= [,Event filter=] [,Administrative state=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log to be modified.
Input format:
String:
A .. Z, 0 .. 9,
%, #, +, *
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Event filter
This parameter replaces a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be stored by this Event
log. Each Event Report consists of three significant
attributes. They are Emitting object class, Emitting object
and Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of a
triple the Event Report will be stored in this Event log.
storage by this Event log.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be stored by
this Event log
Locked: Event Reports will not be stored by
this Event log
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time the Event
log becomes active. The parameter can be replaced only
if a Start time or Stop time was entered, when the Event
destination was created.
Stop time
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EVLOGCP- 1+
MOD EVLOGCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter replaces the Stop time the Event log
becomes inactive. The parameter can be replaced only, if a
Start time or Stop time was entered, when the Event
log was created.
time values
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces the Daily intervals (up to 6), the
Event log is active within. The parameter can be
entered only, if Daily intervals were entered when the
Event dlog was created. The time values are rounded up
to a multiple of 5 minutes. Overlapping intervals are combined
to one interval.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces the Weekly intervals, the Event
log is active within.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are replaced.
rejected.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD EVLOGCP- 2-
DISP EVRECCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Event Log Records on CP
This task displays Event log records of a specific Event log. It is
possible to define a Range of Event log records to be displayed. Furthermore
it is possible to reduce the amount of displayed Event log records by using
a Detailed filter of several Event log record attributes.
Possible Effects:
If neither the Record range nor the Detailed filter parameter is used, the
whole amount of contained Event log records will be displayed. This may lead
to a long running job with a high amount of output data.
Note:
The output will be in an internal CMIS Syntax Notation format.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP EVRECCP : Event log= [,Record range=] [,Detailed filter=] [
[ [
[ [,Destination file=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log, from which Event
log records are to be displayed.
Input format:
String:
A .. Z, 0 .. 9,
%, #, +, *
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Record range
This parameter allows the definition of a filter for the Event log
records to be displayed. It is possible to define a Range of
either the Logging time attribute or the Event log record name
itself.
Input Format:
Selection Logging time range:
Begin time: standard values for date and time
End time: standard values for date and time
Selection Record range:
Begin record: RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
End record: RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Note:
- Searching for specific Event log records using this Record
range filter is very fast.
- If neither the Record range nor the Detailed filter parameter
is used, the whole amount of contained Event log records will
be displayed. This may lead to a long running job with a high
amount of output data.
- If also the Detailed filter parameter is used, both filter
conditions are combined with a logical AND.
Detailed filter
This parameter allows the definition of additional filter conditions for
Event log records to be displayed. Each Event log record consists of
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP EVRECCP- 1+
DISP EVRECCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
several significant attributes. You can enter a set of those attributes.
Each member of this set is optional, but you must enter at least one of
them. The overall number of entered members must not exceed the amount
of 10.
If the attributes of a Event log record matches those set of attributes
the Event log record will be displayed. Members that are not entered
will always match the according attribute in the Event log record. It
is possible to define up to 3 different sets of attributes.
Input Format:
Emitting object class: standard Object class selection
Emitting object: standard Object selection
Emitted event type: standard Event type selection
Record class: standard Object class selection
Note:
- Searching for specific Event log records using the Detailed
filter may be time consuming.
- If neither the Record range nor the Detailed filter parameter
is used, the whole amount of contained Event log records will
be displayed. This may lead to a long running job with a high
amount of output data.
- If also the Record range parameter is used, both filter
conditions are combined with a logical AND.
Destination file
This parameter defines a Windows NT output file for the records
retrieved. The entered value must specify a correct file name
in the Windows NT network.
Input format : Windows NT file name in UNC (Universal Naming
Convention) format:
\\<host name>\<share name>\<file name with
relative path from share>
Default value: If this parameter is omitted, the output is displayed
on terminal.
Note: An existing Windows NT file will be overwritten.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP EVRECCP- 2-
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD EXCHANGE DATA
This command is used to record exchange load and traffic data
of calls carried and rejected due to network management and
internal protection mechanisms.
This measurement includes the following values:
- Processor load (mErl)
- Call processing load (mErl)
- Number of offered seizures
- Number of carried calls
- Number of calls rejected due to Leaky Bucket
- Number of calls rejected due to Trunk Reservation
- Number of calls rejected due to CancelTo
- Number of calls rejected due to All Trunks Busy
- Number of calls rejected due to internal protection mechanisms
- Number of calls with answer
- Congestion level indicator
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of 1 job of this type may be entered at the
same time.
Input format
[ [
[ REC EXCH : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN. TERMINAL
to the OMT.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC EXCH- 1+
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC EXCH- 2+
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &,
except the values NO, WO and HO which
cannot be linked with other values.
period
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC EXCH- 3+
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC EXCH- 4-
STAT EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTERFACE DCP TO SSP
THIS COMMAND IS USED FOR STATUS DATA REQUEST FROM DCP.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT EXCH ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT EXCH- 1-
ENTR EXCHID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION
This command enters the exchange identification and the
system title of the local processor.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,IDNO= [[ [
[ ENTR EXCHID : NAME= [,IDNOWB=[ [,OSYT=] [,NSYT=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the exchange name. The
exchange name is the name of the local processor.
Notes:
- The name of the local processor can be seen after
entering the command DISP PRO and in the header of
each output mask.
IDNO IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
This parameter defines the exchange identification number.
IDNOWB IDENTIFICATION NO WITH BLANKS
This parameter defines the exchange identification number.
In opposition to the parameter IDNO you can enter also
blanks with this parameter (IDNO allowes only symbolic
names).
Notes:
- Only symbolic names and blanks are allowed.
OSYT OLD SYSTEM TITLE
This parameter specifies the old value of the
system title.
The system title is a part of the application
entity title. It specifies the processor specific
part.
Notes:
- The system title has to be unique in the DIB.
- The system title has a minimum of two and a
maximum of 16 components.
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR EXCHID- 1+
ENTR EXCHID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NSYT NEW SYSTEM TITLE
This parameter specifies the new value of the
system title.
The system title is a part of the application
entity title. It specifies the processor specific
part.
Notes:
- The system title has to be unique in the DIB.
- The system title has a minimum of two and a
maximum of 16 components.
2 are allowed.
39 is allowed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR EXCHID- 2-
DISP EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA
This command displays exchange description data such as:
- country CNTRY,
- generic type GNTYPE,
- digital exchange type DETYPE,
- metering type MET,
- entity ENTITY,
- q3-active sign Q3ACTIVE,
- common-memory size CMYSIZE
- system configuration CONFIG
Input format
[ [
[ DISP EXDDAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP EXDDAT- 1-
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA
This command enters exchange description data, such as
- country CNTRY,
- metering MET,
- entity type ENTITY,
- q3-active sign Q3ACTIVE,
- common-memory size CMYSIZE
- system configuration CONFIG.
Notes:
Following parameters may only be specified during installation
recovery:
- country CNTRY,
- entity type ENTITY,
- q3 active sign Q3ACTIVE,
- system configuration CONFIG.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR EXDDAT : <CNTRY= ,GNTYPE= ,DETYPE= ,MET= ,ENTITY= [
[ [
[ ,Q3ACTIVE= ,CMYSIZE= ,CONFIG=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CNTRY COUNTRY
This parameter specifies the code for country-specific
features.
The parameter may only be entered during installation
recovery.
BRD GERMANY
FIN FINLAND
RSA REP. OF SOUTH AFRICA
LBY LIBYA
GRI GREECE
SWZ SWITZERLAND
OES AUSTRIA
PHI PHILIPPINES
EGY EGYPT
KOL COLUMBIA
OMA OMAN
IDS INDONESIA
ARG ARGENTINA
USA UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
IRN IRAN
BRA BRAZIL
DAN DENMARK
LUX LUXEMBOURG
PAR PARAGUAY
TAI TAIWAN
BGD BANGLADESH
BEL BELGIUM
POR PORTUGAL
SWD SWEDEN
NOR NORWAY
FRR FRANCE
KAM CAMEROON
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR EXDDAT- 1+
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GBR GREAT BRITAIN
ITL ITALY
SAR SAUDI ARABIA
GNTYPE GENERIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the generic type of exchange.
The parameter may only be entered during installation recovery.
LOCAL LOCAL EXCHANGE
TRANSIT TRANSIT EXCHANGE
MOBILE MOBILE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE
ITRANSIT INTERNATIONAL TRANSIT EXCHANGE
DETYPE DIGITAL EXCHANGE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of digital exchange (i.e.
its capacity).
DE4 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 4
DE51 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 5/1
MET METERING FOR CHARGING
This parameter specifies the type of traffic metering.
Notes:
- Only the charge meter types for which the associated process
functions are linked in the APS may be entered.
METSTAT STATISTIC METERING
METTR TRUNK METERING
ENTITY ENTITY CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the type of entity (AC,HLR,MSC,VLR,EIR).
AC AUTHENTICATION CENTER
HLR HOME LOCATION REGISTER
VLR VISITOR LOCATION REGISTER
MSC MOBILE SERV SWITCHING CENTER
EIR EQUIPMENT IDENTITY REGISTER
Q3ACTIVE Q3 ACTIVE
This parameter specifies if Q3 - Logging File(s) should
be created automatically (Q3ACTIVE
is YES)
or not (Q3ACTIVE
is NO).
recovery.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR EXDDAT- 2+
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO Q3 IS NOT ACTIVE
YES Q3 IS ACTIVE
CMYSIZE COMMON MEMORY SIZE
This parameter specifies the size of the common memory
(CMY) in megabyte.
Corresponds to <CMYSize>
CONFIG CONFIGURATION OF APS
This parameter specifies the configuration
of the system. (CP Stand Allone or CP and MP)
recovery.
CPSA COMMUNIC. PROC. STAND ALLONE
CPMP COMMUNIC. PROC. AND MAIN P.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR EXDDAT- 3-
CAN FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command cancels the charging instructions for Facility Input by
Subscriber and recording instructions for Facility Input by Operator.
For both Subscriber and Operator Input the instructions can be can-
celed based on a FAC-ACTION combination.
Once the billing method has been entered for the whole facility, no changes per
ACTION are possible any more.
e.g. CR FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, BILLING=METERING, METPULS=1;
-> CAN FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, ACTION=...; is not possible any more
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FAICHA : FAC= [,ACTION=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility that no longer has to be
charged or recorded.
For detailed information see CR SUB,
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
The value ACCSUSP is only used as a global entry for ACCSPORI and
ACCSPTER, i.e. when ACCSUSP is given in as FAC in command
CAN FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are cancelled.
When the billing method for a specific facility is canceled, this
implies that the facility will be charged as is defined with the
default billing method ( if the latter has been created ).
The value X for this parameter means that the default billing method
for facility inputs has to be deleted. This has the consequence
that the facilities that were not foreseen with a billing method
will be charge free from now on.
X DEFAULT FACILITY
ACCSUSP ACCOUNT SUSPENSION
ACCSPORI ACCOUNT SUSPENSION ORIGINATING
ACCSPTER ACCOUNT SUSPENSION TERMINATING
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED
ADMIN1 ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED 1
CCBS CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER
PR PARTIAL REROUTING
DIVCDE DIVERSION BY CALL DEFLECTION
VACNC VERBAL ANN. CHARGES NEXT CALL
DNREG DIRECTORY NUMBER REGISTRATION
AMAIO AMA IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ALLNO SCI FOR ALL ISDN NUMBERS
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
NOCDIV NO CALL DIVERSION
TRACL BLOCKING FOR TRAFFIC CLASS
DIFFRING DIFFERENT RINGING
SADTRANS SUBADDRESS TRANSMISSION
CW CALL WAITING
GFRESET GENERAL FACILITY RESET
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FAICHA- 1+
CAN FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CATIM1 CATASTROPHE IMMUNITY 1
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CT CALL TRANSFER B-SIDE
NOCHARG CHARGE FREE B SUBSCRIBER
CLIPCW CLIP FOR CALL WAITING
CLIP CALL. LINE ID. PRESENTATION
CLIR CALL. LINE ID. RESTRICTION
CLIRIGN CALL. LINE ID. RESTR. IGNORE
CLIRREQ CALL. LINE ID. RESTR. ON REQ.
CLIRSUSP CALL. LINE ID. RESTR. SUSPENS.
NOCOLC COLLECT INCOMING CALLS INHIBIT
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
CUGIC CUG INCOMING TRAFFIC
CUGORIB CUG ORIGINATING CALLS BLOCKED
CUGOGREQ CUG OUTG. TRAFFIC ON REQUEST
CUGTERB CUG TERMINATING CALLS BLOCKED
SDATRANS DATA TRANSMISSION
DEB DETAILED BILLING
DEBCL DETAILED BILLING CLASS
CALR CALLED LINE ID RESTRICTION
CALP CALLED LINE ID PRESENTATION
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
VMSREC VOICE MAIL SERVICE RECORDING
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
SCLSTDIV SCREENING LIST DIVERSION
SCLSTRCW SCLST RINGING AND CALL WAITING
DIVIS DIVI WITH SCREENING
ALLNOCL CLASSES FOR ALL NUMBERS
CTAS CALL TRANSFER A-SIDE
CCIBI CALL COMPL. INTERNET BUSY IMM.
TRARSUSP TRAFFIC RESTRICTION SUSPENSION
DIVCD DIVERSION CONDITIONAL
DIVSAE DIV.TO SHORT ANNOUN.EQUIPMENT
SCLSTMWI SCREENING LIST MWI
DIVA DIVERSION TO ANNOUNCEMENT
DIVOPD DIV. TO OPERATOR ON NO ANSWER
DIVOP DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
VMSQUERY VOICE MAIL SERVICE QUERY
DIVIP DIVI WITH PARALLEL RINGING
DIVGEN DIVERSION GENERAL
DPNUC D CHANNEL PACKET NAIL.UP CONN.
REJDIV REJECTION OF CALL DIVERSION
INHTROFF INHIBIT TRUNK OFFERING
KEYWORD KEYWORD SECURE NUMBER
LAY1HOLD LAYER 1 MUST BE HELD
MCIREQ MALICIOUS CALL ID. ON REQUEST
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FAICHA- 2+
CAN FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MCIIMM MALICIOUS CALL ID. IMMEDIATE
RCREQS REVERSE CHARGE AT SETUP REQ.
RCACCS REVERSE CHARGE AT SETUP ACCEPT
MOBIO MET. OBSERVATION IMMED. OUTPUT
PMB POSITION MAKE BUSY
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
ACO ATTENDANT CAMP ON
ATNLOGON ATTENDANT LOGON
TIMDIV DIVERSION TIMER
SVI SERVICE INTERCEPTION
MCIOPASS MCI OPERATOR ASSIST
SUBPRIO PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
SMET SUBSCRIBER METER
REQSPORI REQUESTED SUSPENS. ORIGINATING
REQSPTER REQUESTED SUSPENS. TERMINATING
CLIPNOSC SCREENING OF CALL.LINE INHIBIT
FEATSUB FEATURE SUBSCRIPTION
UNLISTDN SECRET DIRECTORY NUMBER
DIVCDVMS DIVCD TO VMS
SERVINC SERVICE INTERCEPT
CNIP CALLING NAME PRESENTATION
CNIR CALL. NAME PRESENTATION RESTR.
STH STOP HUNT
DECI DIV EXCHANGE CONTROLLED IMM.
DECBY DIV EXCHANGE CONTROLLED BUSY
DECDA DIV EXCHANGE CONTROLLED NO ANS
CWDELUXE CALL WAITING DELUXE
CLIMO CALLING NAME MAPPING ORIG
TRACLT INCOMING CALL BARRING
SCLSTCW SCLST CALL WAITING
ISCI INTERNET SCI
KEYPRF KEY PROFILE
ANNPDIAL ANNOUNCEMENT PRIOR TO DIALTONE
ATO AUTOMATIC TURN ON
DIVBS DIVBY WITH SCREENING
DIVDS DIVDA WITH SCREENING
SUBST SUBSTITUTE
DIVALD DIV ALL LINES DISTURBED
CRR CONNECT WITH REROUTING
DIVCL DIV TRAFFIC CLASS
TW TELEWORKER
EECT EXTENDED ECT
NUMBCH NUMBER OF B CHANNELS
SCLIM SUBS. CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
DIVEI DIVERSION EXTENSION INDIVIDUAL
YACO YEARLY ALARM CALL ORDER
NOTSTSUL SULIM TEST NOT ALLOWED
TERMPORT TERMINAL PORTABILITY
DIVANN DIVERSION WITH ANNOUNCEMENT
TESTCAOR TEST CALL ORIGINATING ALLOWED
CONF3 THREE WAY CALLING
TOLLCAT TOLL CATASTROPHE IMMUNITY
CHATIMM CHARGE TRANSFER IMMEDIATELY
CHATREQ CHARGE TRANSFER REQUEST
UTUSIG USER TO USER SIGNALLING 1
UTUSIG3 USER TO USER SIGNALLING 3
ERING ENHANCED RINGING CODE
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
PROP7 PROPERTY 7
PROP8 PROPERTY 8
PROP9 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FAICHA- 3+
CAN FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
LRF LOW RESISTANCE FEEDING
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
DIVIA DIV. TO INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT
RSTSCI SCI RESTRICTION
DDIVSTAT DISP.CALL DIV.B1 CALL FORW.ST.
DDIVCF DISP. CALL DIV. B1 CALL FORW.
DDIVBFN DISP. CALL DIV. B2 FORW. NO S.
DDIVACF DISP. CALL DIV. A CALL FORW.
DDIVAFN DISP. CALL DIV. A FORW. NO.
SERCOMP SERVICE COMPLETION
MCIHOLD1 MAL. CALL ID. WITH HOLDING 1
PRTSF PRINT RECORD FOR SUB. FAC.ACT.
AOC1P AOC AT BEGINNING PERMANENT
AOC2P AOC DURING CALL PERMANENT
AOC3P AOC AT END PERMANENT
AOC1C AOC AT BEGINNING PER CALL
AOC2C AOC DURING CALL PER CALL
AOC3C AOC AT END PER CALL
COLP CONN. LINE ID. PRESENTATION
COLPNOSC CONN.LINE ID.PRES.NO SCREENING
COLR CONNECTED LINE ID. RESTRICTION
COLRREQ COLR ON REQUEST
COLRSUSP COLR SUSPEND
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
CWNOTIFY CALL WAITING NOTIFICATION
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
ACTION FACILITY INPUT ACTION
This parameter specifies the action of the given facility that no
longer has to be charged or recorded.
ACT ACTIVATE FACILITY INPUT
DACT DEACTIVATE FACILITY INPUT
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
ASGNMOD ASSIGN MODIF. AUTHORIZATION
RMVMOD REMOVE MODIF. AUTHORIZATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FAICHA- 4-
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command creates charging instructions for Facility Input by Sub-
scriber and recording instructions for Facility Input by Operator.
For both Subscriber and Operator Input the instructions can be entered
based on a FAC-ACTION combination. Charging instructions are the
billing method (metering, automatic message accounting) and - in case
of metering - the number of meter pulses.
In case of Operator Input Recording it can be specified to make AMA
or FIR records.
For one facility, each ACTION must have the same billing method or
the ACTION must be chargefree.
No mixing within a facility is allowed.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING METPULS
DIVBY ENTRDAT METERING 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN
REMOVE
ASGNMOD
RMVMOD
Once the billing method has been entered for the whole
facility, no changes per ACTION are possible any more, and
vice versa.
-> MOD FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, ACTION=...; is not possible
any more.
The parameter FAIOPER is meant for operator inputs
only and is independent of the BILLING for subscriber input.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING FAIOPER METPULS
TRACL ENTRDAT METERING AMA 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN FIR
REMOVE AMA & FIR
Input format
[ [
[ CR FAICHA : FAC= <,BILLING= ,FAIOPER=> [,METPULS=] [,ACTION=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility that has to be charged or
recorded.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
CR FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are created.
When the value X is entered for this parameter, default charging
instructions are defined. These default charging instructions are
valid for all the facilities that are not created seperately.
This means that it is no longer possible not to charge a certain
facility.
X DEFAULT FACILITY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAICHA- 1+
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CW CALL WAITING
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAICHA- 2+
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
STH STOP HUNT
ISCI INTERNET SCI
KEYPRF KEY PROFILE
SUBST SUBSTITUTE
TW TELEWORKER
EECT EXTENDED EXPLICIT CT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAICHA- 3+
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
PROP7 PROPERTY 7
PROP8 PROPERTY 8
PROP9 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
BILLING BILLING INPUT BY SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the billing method for subscriber input.
Only facilities that can be controled via subscriber input can
be assigned a billing method. For not subscriber controlable
facilities, the input of BILLING is blocked.
METERING METERING
FAIOPER FACILITY INPUT BY OPERATOR
This parameter specifies that an operator input for the given facility
has to be recorded for charging (AMA) or other purposes (FIR).
The recording with FIR, is only possible for certain facilities,
nl. ACCSUSP, ACCSPORI, ACCSPTER, REQSPORI, REQSPTER and
TRACL.
For all other facilities, FAIOPER=FIR is rejected.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAICHA- 4+
CR FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
METPULS METER PULSES
This parameter specifies the number of meter pulses to be applied for
a facility input by subscriber.
The meter pulses can also be used for charge display at
station terminal (Advice Of Charge (ISDN) or
with Subscriber Privat Meter (analog)).
This parameter specifies for which action of the given facility the
instructions are created.
For all facilities, a check is made on whether the FAC-ACTION
combination is plausible. Implausible combinations are rejected.
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAICHA- 5-
DISP FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command displays the charging instructions for Facility Input
by Subscriber and the recording instructions for Facility Input
by Operator.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FAICHA : FAC= [,ACTION=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility for which the chargings
and the recordings have to be displayed.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
DISP FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are displayed.
If X is entered for this parameter, all created facility input charging
instructions are displayed. First the default charging instructions,
followed by all facility inputs that are created with charging
instructions different from the default.
Facilities that are not displayed all get the same charging
instructions as given in the first line.
CW CALL WAITING
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CT CALL TRANSFER B SIDE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FAICHA- 1+
DISP FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FAICHA- 2+
DISP FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STH STOP HUNT
ISCI INTERNET SCI
KEYPRF KEY PROFILE
SUBST SUBSTITUTE
TW TELEWORKER
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
PROP7 PROPERTY 7
PROP8 PROPERTY 8
PROP9 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FAICHA- 3+
DISP FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
This parameter specifies the action for which the instructions
have to be displayed.
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FAICHA- 4-
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FACILITY INPUT CHARGING
This command modifies charging instructions for Facility Input by Sub-
scriber and recording instructions for Facility Input by Operator.
For both Subscriber and Operator Input the instructions can be entered
based on a FAC-ACTION combination. Charging instructions are the
billing method (metering, automatic message accounting) and - in case
of metering - the number of meter pulses.
In case of Operator Input Recording it can be specified to make AMA
or FIR records.
For one facility, each ACTION must have the same billing method or
the ACTION must be chargefree.
No mixing within a facility is allowed.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING METPULS
DIVBY ENTRDAT METERING 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN
REMOVE
ASGNMOD
RMVMOD
Once the billing method has been entered for the whole
facility, no changes per action are possible any more, and
vice versa.
-> MOD FAICHA: FAC=DIVBY, ACTION=...; is not possible
any more.
The parameter FAIOPER is meant for operator inputs
only and is independent of the BILLING for subscriber input.
e.g. FAC ACTION BILLING FAIOPER METPULS
TRACL ENTRDAT METERING AMA 3
DELDAT
INTERR METERING 1
ASSIGN FIR
REMOVE AMA & FIR
ASGNMOD
RMVMOD
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FAICHA : FAC= <,BILLING= ,CBILLING= ,METPULS= ,FAIOPER= [
[ [
[ ,CFAIOPER=> [,ACTION=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FAC FACILITY
This parameter specifies the facility that has to be charged or
recorded.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
Note:
MOD FAICHA, both ACCSPORI and ACCSPTER are modified.
The value X for this parameter implies that the default charging
instructions are changed. All facilities that do not have seperate
charging instructions will be charged with the new instructions
defined by this command.
X DEFAULT FACILITY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAICHA- 1+
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CW CALL WAITING
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CT CALL TRANSFER B SIDE
CALRIGN CALR IGNORE
NSCI1 NEUTRAL SCI 1
NSCI2 NEUTRAL SCI 2
NSCI3 NEUTRAL SCI 3
NSCI4 NEUTRAL SCI 4
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAICHA- 2+
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GMB GROUP MAKE BUSY
NS NIGHT SERVICE
STH STOP HUNT
ISCI INTERNET SCI
KEYPRF KEY PROFILE
SUBST SUBSTITUTE
TW TELEWORKER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAICHA- 3+
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP0 PROPERTY 0
PROP1 PROPERTY 1
PROP2 PROPERTY 2
PROP3 PROPERTY 3
PROP4 PROPERTY 4
PROP5 PROPERTY 5
PROP6 PROPERTY 6
PROP7 PROPERTY 7
PROP8 PROPERTY 8
PROP9 PROPERTY 9
PROP10 PROPERTY 10
PROP11 PROPERTY 11
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
COLRIGN COLR IGNORE
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
BILLING BILLING INPUT BY SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the billing method for subscriber input
that has to be entered.
Only facilities that can be controled via subscriber input can
be assigned a billing method. For not subscriber controlable
facilities, the input of BILLING is blocked.
METERING METERING
CBILLING CANCEL BILLING INPUT BY SUB.
This parameter specifies the billing method for subscriber input that
has to be canceled.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAICHA- 4+
MOD FAICHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
METERING METERING
This parameter specifies the number of meter pulses to be applied for
a facility input by subscriber.
The existing value is overwritten by the new one.
FAIOPER FACILITY INPUT BY OPERATOR
This parameter specifies the recording method for operator input that
has to be entered.
The recording with FIR, is only possible for certain facilities,
nl. ACCSUSP, ACCSPORI, ACCSPTER, REQSPORI, REQSPTER and
TRACL.
For all other facilities, FAIOPER=FIR is rejected.
CFAIOPER CANCEL FAC. INPUT BY OPERATOR
This parameter specifies the recording method for operator input that
has to be canceled.
This parameter specifies for which action of the given facility the
instructions are modified.
ENTRDAT ENTER DATA
DELDAT DELETE DATA
INTERR INTERROGATE
ASSIGN ASSIGN
REMOVE REMOVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAICHA- 5-
CAN FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command cancels charging instructions for facility usage by subscriber
and facility usage by call center service.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [CCSFAC=[ [
[ CAN FAUCHA : FAC= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CCSFAC FACILITY USAGE BY CCS
This parameter specifies the facility usage by call center service for
which usage no longer has to be charged.
The value X for this parameter means that the default values for
facility usages by call center service have to be deleted. This has the
consequence that all facility usages by call center service that have
not been created before will be charge free from now on.
DELCBREQ DELAY CALL BOOKING REQUIRED
DELCRREQ DELAY CALL REBOOKING REQUIRED
DELCEDIT DELAY CALL EDIT
TCKSREQ TICKET SEARCH REQUIRED
ROCCUR RECALL OCCURED
VNOTREQ VERBAL NOTIFY REQUIRED
VNOTPER VERBAL NOTIFY PERFORMED
PIPNTREQ PIPTONE NOTIFY REQUIRED
CDUREQ CALL DURATION LIMIT REQUIRED
MESSERV MESSENGER SERVICE
TROFFREQ TRUNK OFFER REQUIRED
BVERSERV BUSY VERIFICATION
APRTVER A PARTY VERIFIED
TPRTVER THIRD PARTY CHARGE VERIFIED
DIDOPR DIRECT INWARD DIAL TO OPERATOR
DALOC DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE LOCAL
DANAT DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE NAT.
DAINAT DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE INTNAT.
RRA RATE ROUTE ASSISTANCE
DAC DATA CALL
TCKRET TICKET RETRIEVAL
ACSB ALARM CALL SERVICE BOOKING
ACSD ALARM CALL SERVICE DELETE
ACSS ALARM CALL SERVICE SEEK
ACSR ALARM CALL SERVICE REBOOKING
ACC AUTOMATIC CALL COMPLETION
ACCANNB ACC ANNOUNCEMENT OF B NUMBER
ACCROPR ACC RECONNECT OPERATOR
DANATCC DA NAT. WITH CALL COMPL.
DAINATCC DA INTNAT. WITH CALL COMPL.
CREDIT CREDIT
ONAASERV ONAA REROUTE TO SELECTED SERV.
ONAAOPR ONAA REROUTE TO OPR REQ BY SUB
DANSMS DIR. ASSIST. NAT. VIA SMS
DANMAIL DIR. ASSIST. NAT. VIA EMAIL
DANMED1 DIR. ASSIST. NAT. VIA MEDIA 1
DAISMS DIR. ASSIST. INTNAT. VIA SMS
DAIMAIL DIR. ASSIST. INTNAT. VIA EMAIL
DAIMED1 DIR. ASS. INTNAT. VIA MEDIA 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FAUCHA- 1+
CAN FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSSMS MESSAGE SERVICE VIA SMS
MSMAIL MESSAGE SERVICE VIA EMAIL
MSMED1 MESSAGE SERVICE VIA MEDIA 1
X DEFAULT CCS FACILITY
CUSDEF0 CUSTOMER DEFINED 0
FAC FACILITY USAGE BY SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the facility usage by subscriber for which
the usage no longer has to be charged.
When the billing method for a specific facility is canceled, this
implies that the facility will be charged as is defined with the
default billing method (if the latter has been created).
The value X for this parameter means that the default billing method
for facility usages by subscriber has to be deleted. This has the
consequence that the facilities that were not provided with a billing
method will be charge free from now on.
X DEFAULT FACILITY TYPE
DIVI CALL DIVERSION IMMEDIATLY
DIVCD CALL DIVERSION CONDITIONALLY
DIVDA CALL DIVERSION ON NO REPLY
DIVBY CALL DIVERSION ON BUSY
HOTLIMM HOT LINE IMMEDIATE
DIVIA DIV.TO INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
CLIRREQ CLIR ON REQUEST PER CALL
CLIRSUSP CLIR SUPPRESSION PER CALL
COLRREQ COLR ON REQUEST PER CALL
COLRSUSP COLR SUPPRESSION PER CALL
MCIREQ MAL.CALL IDENTIFIC. ON REQUEST
MCI3 MAL.CALL ID.ON REQ. W. HOLDING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FAUCHA- 2+
CAN FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
CCBSREQ CCBS REQUEST
CCBSINT CCBS INTERROGATION
CCBSCAN CCBS CANCEL
DIVSAE DIV.TO SHORT ANN.EQUIPMENT
CCBSCALL CCBS CALL
PBXOVFLW OVERFLOW DDI PBX
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
ARANN AUTOMATIC RECALL ANNOUNCEMENT
CCNRREQ CCNR REQUEST
CCNRCAN CCNR CANCEL
CCNRINT CCNR INTERROGATION
CCNRCALL CCNR CALL
DIVIS DIVERSION WITH SCREENING
TESTREQ TEST REQUEST MESSAGE
DIVITW DIVI TELEWORKER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FAUCHA- 3-
CR FAUCHA
CCSFAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command creates charging instructions for facility usage by
subscriber and facility usage by call center service, i.e. billing
method (metering, automatic message accounting), number of meter
pulses in case of metering and control parameter for special purposes.
1. CR FAUCHA - CCSFAC FACILITY USAGE BY CCS
2. CR FAUCHA - FAC FACILITY USAGE BY SUBSCRIBER
1. Input format
FACILITY USAGE BY CCS
Input format for creating charging instructions for facility usage
by call center service.
[ [
[ CR FAUCHA : CCSFAC= <,METPULS= ,CNYADDON=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the facility usage by call center service
for which usage charging will be entered.
When the value X is entered for this parameter, defined default
charging instructions apply. These default charging instructions are
valid for all facility usages by call center service that are not
created separately. This means that it is no longer possible not to
charge a certain facility usage by call center service.
CREDIT CREDIT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAUCHA- 1+
CR FAUCHA
CCSFAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DAC DATA CALL
This parameter specifies the number of meter pulses which have to be
applied.
CNYADDON CURRENCY ADD-ON
This parameter specifies the add-on charges for facility usage by
subscriber or facility usage by call center service in currency format.
An add-on charge for the call center service is applied as soon as
a call center agent invokes or has successfully performed
the requested service (e.g. directory number inquiry).
Once applied, add-on charges are not changed by any tariff switch
during the call.
The currency charge is entered in two information units a - b
where the dash (-) is used as a decimal separator:
a = integer part of the currency amount. This information
unit accepts a string of up to 9 digits. If present,
digits 7 to 9 must be 0.
b = decimal part of the currency amount. This information
unit accepts a string of up to 7 digits. If 7 digits
are entered, the first digit must be 0.
Leading zeroes for unit a and trailing zeroes for unit b are
allowed within the respective length limits and do not affect
the actual value (i.e. are not significant).
If units a and b both contain significant digits, then only a
maximum of up to 6 significant digits in both units together are
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAUCHA- 2+
CR FAUCHA
CCSFAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
allowed. Significant means that the first and the last digit in
this sequence must be unequal to zero.
Examples of valid entries: 123456000 - 0,
123 - 456,
123 - 0,
123,
0 - 0123456,
Examples of invalid entries: 1234567,
0 - 1234567,
1230 - 456
a[-b]
a: CURRENCY UNITS FOR ADD-ON CHARGES=
b: CURRENCY DECIMALS FOR ADD-ON CHARGES=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAUCHA- 3+
CR FAUCHA
FAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
FACILITY USAGE BY SUBSCRIBER
Input format for creating charging instructions for facility usage
by subscriber.
Note:
- For all facilities that are charged for usage, the billing method
must be the same.
[ [
[ CR FAUCHA : FAC= [,MARKS=] ,BILLING= [,METPULS=] [,CNYADDON=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
the usage charging will be entered.
CR PBX, CR PBXLN.
When the value X is entered for this parameter, default charging
instructions are defined. These default charging instructions are
valid for all facility usages by subscriber that are not created
separately. This means that it is no longer possible not to charge
a certain facility usage by subscriber.
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
CCBSCALL CCBS CALL
CCBSCAN CCBS CANCEL
CCNRCALL CCNR CALL
CCNRCAN CCNR CANCEL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAUCHA- 4+
CR FAUCHA
FAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
X DEFAULT FACILITY
MARKS REGISTRATION MARKS
This parameter specifies marks used to control the charging of facility
usage in special cases.
BUSY BUSY FOR ALARM CALL
This mark specifies that facility usage for this
facility will be charged also in case of B-party
busy.
Notes:
The mark can only be set for facilities CACO and
DACO and SACO.
NOANSW NO ANSWER FOR ALARM CALL
This mark specifies that usage of the facility
will be charged even though the B-party does not
answer.
Note:
The mark can only be set for facilities CACO and
DACO and SACO.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the billing method for the usage of the given
facility.
For all facilities that are charged for usage, the billing method must
be the same. E.g. if at first input CONF3 has BILLING=AMA, all
following facilities must have BILLING=AMA or must be chargefree.
METERING METERING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAUCHA- 5+
CR FAUCHA
FAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the number of meter pulses which have to be
applied.
This parameter specifies the add-on charges for facility usage by
An add-on charge for the call center service is applied as soon as
a call center agent invokes or has successfully performed
during the call.
123 - 456,
123 - 0,
123,
0 - 0123456,
0 - 1234567,
1230 - 456
a[-b]
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FAUCHA- 6-
DISP FAUCHA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command displays the charging instructions in case of facility usage
by subscriber and facility usage by call center service.
If X has been entered with CR FAUCHA, first the default charging
instructions are displayed, followed by all existing single facility usage
charging instructions.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FAUCHA ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FAUCHA- 1-
MOD FAUCHA
CCSFAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FACILITY USAGE CHARGING
This command modifies charging instructions for facility usage by
subscriber and facility usage by call center service.
1. MOD FAUCHA - CCSFAC FACILITY USAGE BY CCS
2. MOD FAUCHA - FAC FACILITY USAGE BY SUBSCRIBER
1. Input format
FACILITY USAGE BY CCS
Input format for modifying charging instructions for facility usage
by call center service.
[ [
[ MOD FAUCHA : CCSFAC= <,METPULS= ,CNYADDON=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the facility usage by call center service
for which usage charging has to be modified.
When the value X is entered for this parameter, the default charging
instructions for facility usage by call center service are modified.
CONFL LARGE-CONFERENCE
CREDIT CREDIT
DAC DATA CALL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAUCHA- 1+
MOD FAUCHA
CCSFAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the new number of meter pulses to be
applied for a facility usage or a call center facility usage.
This parameter specifies the new add-on charges for facility usage by
An add-on charge for the call center service is applied as soon
as a call center agent invokes or has successfully performed
during the call.
123 - 456,
123 - 0,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAUCHA- 2+
MOD FAUCHA
CCSFAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
123,
0 - 0123456,
0 - 1234567,
1230 - 456
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAUCHA- 3+
MOD FAUCHA
FAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
FACILITY USAGE BY SUBSCRIBER
Input format for modifies charging instructions for facility usage
by subscriber.
Note:
- For all facilities that are charged for usage, the billing method must
be the same.
[ [
[ MOD FAUCHA : FAC= <,MARKS= ,CMARKS= ,BILLING= ,CBILLING= [
[ [
[ ,METPULS= ,CNYADDON=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
the usage charging has to be modified.
When the value X is entered for this parameter, the default charging
instructions for facility usage by subscriber are modified.
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
CALLHOLD CALLHOLD
CCBSCALL CCBS CALL
CCBSCAN CCBS CANCEL
CCNRCALL CCNR CALL
CCNRCAN CCNR CANCEL
CRR CONNECT WITH REROUTE/RECALL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAUCHA- 4+
MOD FAUCHA
FAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENQUIRY ENQUIRY
X DEFAULT FACILITY
MARKS REGISTRATION MARKS
This parameter specifies (for the given facility usage) which
charging control parameters have to be modified.
CMARKS CANCEL REGISTRATION MARKS
This parameter specifies the charging control parameters that have to
be modified for the given facility usage.
BILLING BILLING
This parameter specifies the billing method that has to be
modified for a given facility usage.
For all facilities that are charged for usage, the billing method must
be the same. E.g. if at first input CONF3 has BILLING=AMA, all
following facilities must have BILLING=AMA or must be chargefree.
METERING METERING
This parameter specifies the billing method that has to be
canceled for the given facility usage.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAUCHA- 5+
MOD FAUCHA
FAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
METERING METERING
This parameter specifies the new number of meter pulses to be
applied for a facility usage or a call center facility usage.
This parameter specifies the new add-on charges for facility usage by
An add-on charge for the call center service is applied as soon
as a call center agent invokes or has successfully performed
during the call.
123 - 456,
123 - 0,
123,
0 - 0123456,
0 - 1234567,
1230 - 456
a[-b]
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FAUCHA- 6-
START FCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START FILE CONTROL PROCESSING
This command starts the file control processes function so that disk and tape
files can be used.
Notes:
recovery).
Input format
[ [
[ START FCP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START FCP- 1-
DISP FCS
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FCS COUNTERS
This command displays the counters for the specified lines.
This command is only legal for basic access.
1. DISP FCS - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
2. DISP FCS - LC EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
[ [
[ DISP FCS : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if multiple directory
number volumes exist in an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber
line. Up to ten parameters can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FCS- 1+
DISP FCS
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
[ [
[ DISP FCS : DLU= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the circuit position in a DLU.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FCS- 2-
CAN FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE GROUP
This command deletes file groups from the file group table. Only file
groups created by the user can be deleted.
Prerequisites:
For attribute file groups:
- All attributes must be reset with RSET FGRPATT.
For password file groups:
- All files must be detached from the file group with the
command MOD FGRP.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FGRP : FGRP= [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the file group name.
TYPE TYPE OF FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the type of the file group
which has to be canceled.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file group for file
attributes is cancelled.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file group for file
passwords is cancelled.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file group
for file attributes is cancelled.
FILEATTR FILE ATTRIBUTE TYPE
FILEPW FILE PASSWORD TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FGRP- 1-
CR FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FILE GROUP
This command creates an element in the file group table.
It is possible to create an attribute- or a password file group.
It is possible to create an cyclic or a normal file group.
Notes:
- If the parameter TYPE is not entered, an attribute file group
is created.
- If the parameter CYCLIC is not entered, a non cyclic file
group is created. Only attribute file groups can be created
cyclic.
- The file group features for attribute file groups:
threshold upgrades,
threshold downgrades,
threshold features and
maximum copy length
can only be set for cyclic file groups (via SET FGRPATT).
Input format
[ [
[ CR FGRP : FGRP= [,TYPE=] [,CYCLIC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the file group which is to be
created.
Notes:
- Each file group name can exist not more than twice:
As the name of an attribute file group and as the name
of a password file group.
- Password file group names can be fully or partly
qualified because the name has only symbolic meaning.
- For password file group names there is no hierarchy in
opposition to attribute file group names.
- Attribute file group names can be a subset or a superset
of the already existing file group names.
which has to be created.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file group is created
for file attributes.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file group is created
for file passwords.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file group is
created for file attributes.
CYCLIC CYCLIC SELECTION
This parameter specifies if a cyclic or a non cyclic file group is
to be created.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FGRP- 1+
CR FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Only attribute file groups can be created cyclic.
NO CREATE NON CYCLIC FILE GROUP
YES CREATE CYCLIC FILE GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FGRP- 2-
DISP FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE GROUPS
This command displays the file groups. The file groups were
generated automatically or were created by the user with the
command CR FGRP.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FGRP : [FGRP=] [,TYPE=] [,FILELIST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the file group which
has to be displayed.
Notes:
- If X is entered or the parameter is not entered,
all filegroups of the specified type are displayed.
- A file group name can be entered only for password file
group types in combination with FILELIST = YES.
which has to be displayed.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file groups for file
attributes are displayed.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file groups for file
passwords are displayed.
- If ALL is entered, all types of file groups are
displayed.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file groups
for file attributes are displayed.
ALL ALL FILE GROUP TYPES
FILELIST FILELIST
This parameter specifies if a list of the files of
the filegroup has to be displayed.
Notes:
- The filelist can be displayed only for password file
group types.
Y DISPLAY FILELIST
YES DISPLAY FILELIST
N DO NOT DISPLAY FILELIST
NO DO NOT DISPLAY FILELIST
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FGRP- 1-
MOD FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FILE GROUP
With this command files can be attached and detached to/from
password file groups.
Prerequisites:
- The filegroup has to exist.
Notes:
- This command can be entered only by the system
administrator.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,FILE= [ [
[ MOD FGRP : FGRP= ,CFILE= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the file group name.
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file
which has to be attached to the password file
group.
Notes:
- The file may not yet exist.
CFILE CANCEL FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file
which has to be detached from the password file
group.
Notes:
- To detach the last file of the file group no
password may exist for this file group.
- If "X" is entered, all files are detached
from the file group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FGRP- 1-
DISP FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command displays all file group features of one file group.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FGRPATT : FGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the group features
Default: BLANK
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FGRPATT- 1-
RSET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command resets the file group features (set to default
value) of one file group.
Prerequisite:
- The file group must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ RSET FGRPATT : FGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
are to be reset.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RSET FGRPATT- 1-
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command sets file group features for one attribute
file group.
If there are files belonging to this file group, the
specified features will be changed in the file catalogs, too.
Prerequisites:
- The copy attributes must be compatible with the already
existing attributes.
- A specified copy service process must exist.
- The cyclic attributes THRD, THRU, THRF and MAXCOPLE
cannot be changed in the file catalogs of the files
belonging to this file group if these files are empty and
opened for writing.
Input format
[ [
[ SET FGRPATT : FGRP= <,RETPER= ,SAFCOP= ,COPATT= ,PRNAME= [
[ [
[ ,THRU= ,THRD= ,THRF= ,MAXCOPLE=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
are to be set.
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD
This parameter specifies the number of days the file is retained
(protected against deleting and overwriting).
SAFCOP SAFECOPY
This parameter specifies the number of the required
safecopies.
COPATT COPY ATTRIBUTES
This parameter specifies the following features for copies of files
belonging to this file group: - block size
- retention period
a[-b]
a: BLOCK SIZE=
b: RETENTION PERIOD=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET FGRPATT- 1+
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRNAME PROCESS NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a copy service process.
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric characters are allowed.
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADES
This parameter specifies the thresholds of a cyclic file group for
increasing filling capacity.
If a threshold is reached and the threshold feature was set to ALARM,
an alarm will be triggered on the System Panel.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter THRD.
- The second threshold upgrade must be greater than the first one
and the third threshold upgrade must be greater than the second
one, with the following exception:
- The threshold upgrades can be equal if all threshold upgrades
and all threshold downgrades have the value 0.
In this case no threshold control will be performed.
- The threshold upgrades must be greater than or equal to the
threshold downgrades.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UP 1=
b: THRESHOLD UP 2=
c: THRESHOLD UP 3=
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADES
This parameter specifies the thresholds of a cyclic file group for
decreasing filling capacity.
the alarm on the System Panel will be reset.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter THRU.
- The second threshold downgrade must be greater than the first one
and the third threshold downgrade must be greater than the second
one, with the following exception:
- The threshold downgrades can be equal if all threshold downgrades
and all threshold upgrades have the value 0.
In this case no threshold control will be performed.
- The threshold downgrades must be lower than or equal to the
threshold upgrades.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWN 1=
b: THRESHOLD DOWN 2=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET FGRPATT- 2+
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: THRESHOLD DOWN 3=
This parameter specifies the threshold features for increasing and
decreasing filling capacities.
an alarm will be triggered or reset on the System Panel.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE 1
ALARM DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
NOALARM DONT DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE 2
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE 3
MAXCOPLE MAXIMUM COPY LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum copy length
(in PAM-pages) for the cyclic files of the file
group.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered only for cyclic
file groups.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET FGRPATT- 3-
CAN FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command cancels all assignments of a file group password to the
specified access types for a file group.
The password will be requested by the system and will not be displayed.
The password may have a length from one up to 40 characters.
All characters are allowed.
Upper case and lower case letters count as distinct.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file group name must exist.
- The specified file group password must exist.
- All specified file accesses must be protected by the same password.
- The file group must be entered fully qualified (e.g.: IA.ICAMA).
- Update must be activated.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,CRYPTPW=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the relevant
function is to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed.
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
ACCESS FILE ACCESSES
This parameter specifies the access(es) of which the file group
password has to be cancelled.
DEL DELETE PROTECTED
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
CN CHANGE FILE NAME PROTECTED
CR CHANGE RETENTION PERIOD PROT.
CRYPTPW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted password that shall be
cancelled.
Note:
- This parameter is only allowed when the command is started from a
command file (COFIP).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FGRPPW- 1-
RSET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RSET FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command resets all assignments of a file group password to the
specified access types for a file group. The file group password will
be reset to a defined value that must be entered with the command.
The password will be requested by the system and will not be displayed.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file group name must exist.
- The file group must be entered fully qualified (e.g.: IA.ICAMA).
- All specified accesses must be protected by the same password.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ RSET FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,NCRYPTPW=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
function has to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
This parameter specifies the access(es) of which the file group
password has to be reset.
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
NCRYPTPW NEW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted new password that shall replace
the unknown password.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RSET FGRPPW- 1-
SET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command protects file accesses by a file group password.
It can also be used to rename the file group password and/or to
change the accesses, protected by a file group password.
For changing an existing password the parameter CHANGEPW =
YES has to be entered.
The password(s) will be requested by the system and will not be
displayed.
Prerequisites:
- In the case of renaming the file group password or changing
the protected accesses, the old password must be correct.
- The file group name must be entered fully qualified
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ SET FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,CHANGEPW=] [,NCRYPTPW= [
[ [
[ [,CRYPTPW=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
function is to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
This parameter specifies the access(es) which are to be protected
by a file group password.
Note:
- This parameter is always mandatory, even when renaming a file
group password .
This guarantees that no file group passwords of other users are
renamed.
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
CHANGEPW CHANGE PASSWORD
This parameter specifies whether the operator wants to enter a new
password or to change an existing password.
Note:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET FGRPPW- 1+
SET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- If a new password is to be entered, the parameter has to be entered
with the value NO.
- If an existing password is to be changed, the parameter has to be
entered with the value YES.
- If the parameter is not given, CHANGEPW=NO is assumed.
N ENTER NEW PASSWORD
NO ENTER NEW PASSWORD
Y CHANGE EXISTING PASSWORD
YES CHANGE EXISTING PASSWORD
Default: NO
NCRYPTPW NEW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted new password when the password
is to be changed.
Note:
- The parameter CHANGEPW has to be entered with the value YES.
CRYPTPW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted password that is to be entered
or changed.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET FGRPPW- 2-
CONF FHM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE FRAME HANDLER MODULE
This command configures a frame handler module to one of the states
PLA, MBL or ACT.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF FHM : LTG= ,FHM= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
FHM FRAME HANDLER MODULE
This parameter specifies the unit number in an LTG.
The following state transitions are permitted:
MBL <-> PLA
MBL <-> ACT
UNA --> ACT, MBL
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF FHM- 1-
DIAG FHM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE FRAME HANDLER MODULE
This command starts diagnosis of a frame handler module in
an LTG.
ACT or CBL and the associated FHM must be in the
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG FHM : LTG= ,FHM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG FHM- 1-
STAT FHM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF FRAME HANDLER MODULE
- one Frame Handler Module in a particular LTG
- one Frame Handler Module in all LTGs
- all Frame Handler Modules in one LTG
- all Frame Handler Modules in all LTGs
- all Frame Handler Modules in a particular operating status
in a particular LTG
- all Frame Handler Modules in a particular operating status
in all LTGs
Input format
[ [
[ STAT FHM : LTG= [,FHM=] [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
unit values.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT FHM- 1-
CAN FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel NE Files
DELETE FILE
This task deletes a file at the Network Element. It
uses FTP/FTAM protocol to delete the file at the
Network Element. The desired protocol and the file
to be deleted are the input parameters
for the task
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FILE : TRANSFER TYPE= ,FILE NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRANSFER TYPE
TRANSFER TYPE
The transfer type identifies the file transfer
server at the Network Element which will be the
partner for this File Transfer. This could be one
of the following values :
- FTAM
- FTP
FILE NAME
FILE NAME
This is the name of the file at the Network Element,
that has to be deleted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FILE- 1-
CAT FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CATALOG FILE
This command modifies the catalog entry of a disk file. The file
can be renamed and the retention period can be changed.
Prerequisites for renaming of files:
- The new filename must not already exist.
- The new filename must conform with system conventions.
- The new filename must not contain a protected name segment.
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions or
file group passwords.
- The file must not be protected by a retention period, or the
correct expiration date must be entered via parameter EXPDAT.
- The file must not belong to any generation.
Prerequisites for changing the retention period:
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions or
file group passwords.
- The retention period can not be changed if this was already
administered via the command SET FGRPATT.
Nevertheless the execution of the command will be acknowledged
with EXECD.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,RETPER=[[ [
[ CAT FILE : FILE= [,EXPDAT=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
The following characters may not be used:
- A single X.
n
n/o
This parameter specifies the number of days the file
is retained (protected against overwriting).
Notes:
- If a value is entered for this parameter, a new retention
period becomes valid (and the old one becomes invalid).
EXPDAT EXPIRATION DATE
This parameter specifies the expiration date of the file.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAT FILE- 1+
CAT FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter FILE for renaming the file.
- The file may not be deleted before this date.
- The file can be renamed if the correct expiration date is entered.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAT FILE- 2-
CR FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FILE
This command creates a file on magnetic disk.
The created file has no protection.
Prerequisites:
- The file name must conform to system conventions.
- The file name must not contain a protected stem.
- The file must not already exist.
- There must be free storage space on the magnetic disk.
- The specified disk must be available.
Input format
[ [
[ CR FILE : FILE= ,TYPE= ,SIZE= [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
Notes:
The following characters must not be used:
- A single X.
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies single or double file type.
SINGLE SINGLE
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the amount of space to be reserved
on the data carrier.
Notes:
- The maximum amount of space must be specified, because
dynamic file expansion is not possible.
- The size is specified as a number of blocks (PAM pages of
2048 bytes each).
- The maximum value depends on the disk capacity.
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the disk.
Note:
- If TYPE = DOUBLE is entered, the parameter VSN will be
ignored and the file will be created as a double file.
VSN000 VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER 000
VSN001 VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER 001
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FILE- 1-
DEL FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DELETE FILE
This command deletes disk files, tape / magneto optical disk
files or all files on tape / magneto optical disk.
Prerequisites:
- The file must be closed.
- The file and the data carrier must exist.
- The expiration date must be passed or entered.
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions.
- The file must not belong to any generation.
Notes:
- The command can be used also for tape / magneto optical disk files.
The specified tape / magneto optical disk file and the following
files cannot be accessed any more. (The FCP will set a section mark
before the specified file, this means that the end of the tape /
magneto optical disk is reached.)
Input format
[ [
[ DEL FILE : FILE= [,VSN=] [,EXPDAT=] [,UNCOND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
In the case of disks, this parameter specifies the name of
the file.
Note:
- Full or partial qualification of the filename is mandatory.
- If a tape / magneto optical disk file is to be deleted, not
only the specified file but also all subsequent files are
deleted.
- When tape / magneto optical disk files are deleted, they
are deleted logically but not physically.
disk, tape or magneto optical disk on which the file is to
be deleted.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not entered, the file will be
deleted on both disk drives.
-The parameter VSN will be ignored for disk files.
Only if parameter FILE is entered with X (erase all files)
the command will be rejected if parameter VSN wasnt
entered or was set to VSN000 or VSN001.
.
EXPDAT EXPIRATION DATE
This parameter allows files to be deleted before their
retention period has expired. This can be done on condition
that the access restrictions permit changes to the retention
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL FILE- 1+
DEL FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period.
Note:
- Deletion of the file is enabled by entering the correct
expiration date, to prove that it is known.
- In the case of tape / magneto optical disk files, an entire
tape / magneto optical disk can only be deleted once the
retention period for the first section of the file expired.
- The retention period can be overwritten in this case by
entering the correct expiration date.
- When tape / magneto optical disk files are deleted, links
to continuation tapes / magneto optical disks are ignored.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
This parameter allows files to be deleted if they have been
transferred at least once to an external data carrier, even
if backup copies are missing.
N CHECK OF EXECUTED COPIES
NO CHECK OF EXECUTED COPIES
Y CHECK IF FILE COPIED ONCE
YES CHECK IF FILE COPIED ONCE
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL FILE- 2-
DISP FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE
This command displays disk, tape and magneto optical disk files
attributes and comprises the functions:
- List of files on the medium (table of contents) giving the main file
attributes.
- List of all attributes of a file that can be determined from the
disk catalog or the tape / magneto optical disk labels.
- List of mutilated and invalid disk files and disk files in the
process of being copied, with brief information from the catalog.
The execution of the command (output of table of contents) can be
stopped with the STOP DISP command.
Prerequisites:
- The file must exist
- The specified volume must be accessible
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FILE : [FILE= [,ALL=]] [,GEN=] [,VSN=] [,DAM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file for which the
attributes are to be output.
Notes:
- If X is entered here, a table of contents of the relevant
volume containing the main information on the specified
file(s) and the medium is displayed.
- X is illegal in conjunction with the parameter ALL=
YES.
- If an alias file name is entered, only a fully qualified
name is allowed (last character must not be .).
Default: X
ALL ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies that all attributes of a file that can
be determined from the disk catalog or the tape / magneto optical disk
labels are output.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction
with a fully qualified filename.
N DONT LIST ALL PARAMETERS
NO DONT LIST ALL PARAMETERS
Y LIST ALL PARAMETERS
YES LIST ALL PARAMETERS
Default: N
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation name. It must be
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FILE- 1+
DISP FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
represented by four pairs of characters which correspond
to:
- Function version
- Correction version
- ODAGEN run number
- Checkpoint serial number
Notes:
- To get all attributes of a generation file which does not belong
to the current generation, the name of this generation has to be
entered.
- If the parameter is omitted, all files with or without generation
are displayed.
This parameter specifies the volume (medium) on which the file to
be processed is located.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, both disk files are accessed.
- The following character strings are reserved for disk devices:
VSN000 for MDD-00 and
VSN001 for MDD-01.
DAM DAMAGED
If this parameter is entered, an extract of the disk catalog
is output with all mutilated and invalid files and files in the
process of being copied. This output includes the associated
generation names.
Notes:
- This parameter is illegal for tape / magneto optical disk files
and in conjunction with parameter ALL.
N DISPLAY ALL FILES
NO DISPLAY ALL FILES
Y DISPLAY ONLY INVALID FILES
YES DISPLAY ONLY INVALID FILES
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FILE- 2-
RCV FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Receive File from NE
RECEIVE FILE
This task transfers a file from the Network Element to the OS. It
uses FTP/FTNEA/FTAM protocol to receive the file from the
Network Element. The desired protocol is an input parameter
of the task
Input format
[ [
[ RCV FILE : SOURCE FILE NAME= ,TRANSFER TYPE= ,COPY MODE= [
[ [
[ ,DESTINATION FILE NAME= ,FILE WRITING MODE= [
[ [
[ ,RECORD LENGTH= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SOURCE FILE NAME
SOURCE FILE NAME
This is the name of the source file that has to be
received from the Network Element.
logical device name:\pathname\SrcFileName -> for files on an archive
device
pathname\SrcFileName -> for files on system device
SrcFileName -> for files in the root-directory(non-gene
files)
where logical device name= logical name of the backup store. It must be
supplied
only for a removable disk. It can be max. 8 character
path name= Level 1 directory (=generation)It can be max. 8
characters
SrcFileName= Name of the Source File.
TRANSFER TYPE
TRANSFER TYPE
The transfer type specifies which protocol is
to be used for the transfer. One of the following
values is possible:
- FTNEA
- FTAM
- FTP
FTNEA is the standard value.
COPY MODE
COPY MODE
The copy mode specifies, how the file is to be
transferred to the network element. One of the
following values is possible:
- ASCII
File is transferred as text file.
- BINARY
File is transferred as binary file without record structure
- USER
is not supported
- EXTENSION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RCV FILE- 1+
RCV FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The file is transferred transparently (binary). This
parameter is valid only for FTAM and FTNEA.
ASCII is standard value
DESTINATION FILE NAME
Destination file name: Specifies the UNC name of the
destination file in the NT network. UNC names have
the following format:
\\<MachineName>\<ShareName>\<FileName>
Example:
\\FILESERVER1\XXXBase\UserHomeDir\User1\File.txt
(Where XXX is ENM for ENM V3.2,XXX = NetM for Version > V3.2)
It can be max. 256 characters
FILE WRITING MODE
FILE WRITING MODE
Write mode: Specifies whether, the present destination
file is to be overwritten, extended or remain unchanged.
If the destination file does not exist as yet, it is created.
- OVERWRITE
If the destination file already exists, it is
overwritten. Otherwise, a new destination file is
created.
- NOOVERWRITE
A non-existing destination file is created newly. If the
destination file exists, no file transfer is executed and
an error messages is displayed in the output window.
- EXTEND
The new file is attached to the existing destination
file.
Standard value is OVERWRITE. This valus is valid
only for the file transfer types FTAM and FTNEA.
RECORD LENGTH
RECORD LENGTH
The parameter is optional and a value that is equal to
or greater than the longest record length of the file,
which is to be transferred, must be specified. When the
record length is incorrect (very small value), an error
message is displayed and no file transfer is executed.
If the field remains empty, transfer occurs automatically
with the correct record length.
Standard value is 1024.
This parameter is valid only for the file transfer types
FTAM and FTNEA.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RCV FILE- 2-
SEND FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Send File to NE
SEND FILE
This task transfers a file to the Network Element. It
uses FTP/FTNEA/FTAM protocol to transfer the file to the
Network Element. The desired protocol is an input parameter
of the task
Input format
[ [
[ SEND FILE : SOURCE FILE NAME= ,TRANSFER TYPE= ,COPY MODE= [
[ [
[ ,DESTINATION FILE NAME= ,FILE WRITING MODE= [
[ [
[ ,RECORD LENGTH= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SOURCE FILE NAME
SOURCE FILE NAME
Source file name: Specifies the UNC name of the
original file, which is to be sent to the network element.
UNC names have the following format:
\\<MachineName>\<ShareName>\<FileName>
Example:
\\FILESERVER1\XXXBase\UserHomeDir\User1\File.txt
(Where XXX is ENM for ENM V3.2,XXX = NetM for Version > V3.2)
It can be max. 256 characters
TRANSFER TYPE
TRANSFER TYPE
Transfer type:The transfer type specifies, which
protocol is to be used for the transfer. One of the
following values is possible.
- FTNEA
- FTAM
- FTP
FTNEA is the standard value.
COPY MODE
COPY MODE
The copy mode specifies, how the file is to be
transferred to the network element. One of the
following values is possible:
- ASCII
File is transferred as text file.
- BINARY
File is transferred as binary file without record structure
- USER
is not supported
- EXTENSION
The file is transferred transparently (binary). This
parameter is valid only for FTAM and FTNEA.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEND FILE- 1+
SEND FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ASCII is standard value
Destination file name: Name of the destination file on
the network element.
logical device name:\pathname\DestFileName -> for files on an archive
device
pathname\DestFileName -> for files on system device
DestFileName -> for files in the root-directory(non-gene
files)
where logical device name= logical name of the backup store. It must be
supplied
only for a removable disk. It can be max. 8 character
path name= Level 1 directory (=generation)It can be max. 8
characters
DestFileName= Name of the Destination File
File names are allowed from symbolic character set only up to 17
characters max
Symbolic Character set :
0123456789#%+.
abcdefhghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
.(dot) is not allowed as the last character in file name
Successive ..(more then one dot in succession) not allowed
File name as .(dot) is not allowed
FILE WRITING MODE
FILE WRITING MODE
Write mode: Specifies whether, the present destination
file is to be overwritten, extended or remain unchanged.
If the destination file does not exist as yet, it is created.
- OVERWRITE
If the destination file already exists, it is
overwritten. Otherwise, a new destination file is
created.
- NOOVERWRITE
A non-existing destination file is created newly. If the
destination file exists, no file transfer is executed and
an error messages is displayed in the output window.
- EXTEND
If the destination file already exists, the new file is
attached to it. Otherwise a new destination file is
created.
Standard value is OVERWRITE. This valus is valid
only for the file transfer types FTAM and FTNEA.
RECORD LENGTH
RECORD LENGTH
The parameter is optional and a value that is equal to
or greater than the longest record length of the file,
which is to be transferred, must be specified. When the
record length is incorrect (very small value), an error
message is displayed and no file transfer is executed.
If the field remains empty, transfer occurs automatically
with the correct record length.
Standard value is 1024.
This parameter is valid only for the file transfer types
FTAM and FTNEA.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEND FILE- 2+
SEND FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEND FILE- 3-
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRANSFER FILE
This command transfers files between data carriers, i.e. hard disk,
floppy disk, optical disk, tape and cartridge. Files can be transferred
- between any local data carriers (local transfer) or
- between a local and a remote data carrier (remote transfer).
Notes:
Three file formats are defined for EWSD:
- The Post-Processing format is defined by the system conventions
for magnetic tape storage based on ISO standards. This format allows
data to be exchanged between processors of different manufacturers
and is used for customer files containing post-processing data.
- The SSW format is an EWSD-specific format. It also fulfills the
system conventions for magnetic tape storage and has an EWSD-specific
internal structure. It is used for creating save copies of EWSD-
system-files on tape/optical disk at the CP and transporting EWSD-
software from HOST to CP by tape.
- The CP format exists only on local disk. Files of data type TEXTCMP
or MMLCMPR contain compressed text data with mask numbers as editing
specification. These files are converted into Post-Processing format
producing target files containing printable text data. Source files
of data type TEXTCMP are only converted into editable files if these
target files have variable records with a maximum record length of
256 bytes. Editable files are always generated from source files of
data type MMLCMPR.
The following table shows the correlation between file format, file
type, data type and data carrier.
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
! File ! File ! Possible ! Possible data carriers !
! format ! type ! data types ! local disk ! local tape/ !
! ! ! ! ! local optical disk/ !
! ! 1) ! 2) ! ! remote data carrier !
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
! Post- ! SAM ! TRANSP ! X ! X !
! Processing ! ! ! ! !
! format ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTNCMP ! X ! X !
! ! ! ! ! !
! SSW format ! SAM ! TRANSP ! ! X !
! ! ! ! ! !
! CP format ! SAM ! TEXTCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! PAM ! TRANSP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! CYC ! TRANSP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTNCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! MMLCMPR ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
1) see output parameter type of file of command DISP FILE
2) see output parameter data storage form of command DISP FILE
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ TRANS FILE : FILE= [,VSNS=] [,VSNR=] [,PRONAM=] [,USINF=] [
[ [
[ [,REQPSW=] [,SIZE=] [,MODE=] [,COPMOD=] [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 1+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ [,RETPER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file to be transferred. The following
conventions must be observed:
- The new parameter value specifies the target file name, the old
parameter value specifies the source file name.
- If only a fully/partially qualified target file name or value X
is specified, the names of source and target files are identical.
- When copying from local disk to local disk, target and source
file names must neither be identical nor start with the same
partial qualification.
- Value X is only permitted for local transfers from tape/optical
disk.
- If a partially qualified name or value X is specified, all other
parameters apply to all files being copied.
- Partial qualification is only allowed for local transfers and for
remote transfers where CP is initiating and sending processor.
- By appending an * (asterisk) to the target file name, the exchange
code is appended.
- The exchange code can only be appended if the source file is on
local disk and the target file is not on local disk.
- If the target file name already ends with the exchange code, it
is not appended in duplicate.
- Input of * (asterisk) at the end of a fully qualified file name
or as fully qualified file name for local disk is not permissible.
- A . (period) is neither allowed at the end of a fully qualified
file name nor as a fully qualified file name.
- An initial . (period) and .. (successive periods) are not
allowed for files on local disk.
- Target files can only be created on local disk if their name does
not begin with a protected file name segment (see DISP FNS).
Notes:
- If a file at the remote processor is specified, the input of the
corresponding file password is requested after the command was
entered correctly. The following conventions must be observed:
- If the source file is at the remote processor, the password
which authorizes read access must be entered.
- If the target file is at the remote processor, the password
to be entered depends on the intended action.
If MODE = CR is specified, no file password is requested.
The output of the entered file password is suppressed.
n
n/o
VSNS VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER SENDER
This parameter specifies the data carrier of the source file.
The following conventions must be observed:
- To access files on data carriers other than on disk, a VSNS
must be specified.
- To access files on disk, a VSNS must be specified for the DCP
but is optional for the CP.
- For direct access to local disk MDD-00 or MDD-01, the associated
VSNS must be specified.
- At the HOST, only public disks can be accessed. If a VSNS is
specified, it is ignored.
- Tapes cannot be accessed at the HOST.
- VSN000 and VSN001 are not permitted as tape/optical disk names.
Default : local disk
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 2+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VSNR VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER RECEIVER
This parameter specifies the data carrier of the target file.
The following conventions must be observed:
- To access files on data carriers other than disk, a VSNR must
be specified.
- To access files on disk, a VSNR must be specified for the DCP
but is optional for the CP.
- For direct access to local disk MDD-00 or MDD-01, the associated
VSNR must be specified.
- At the HOST, only public disks can be accessed. If a VSNR is
specified, it is ignored.
- Tapes cannot be accessed at the HOST.
- VSN000 and VSN001 are not permitted as tape/optical disk names.
Default : local disk
a[-b]
a: LIST 1 ELEMENT=
This information unit specifies one of up to five VSN of the
first list of data carriers of the target file. The following
- Only one VSN is permitted for remote transfer or local
transfer to disk.
- If local transfer to tape/optical disk, at least one VSN
and up to four continuation tape/optical disks are to be
specified.
b: LIST 2 ELEMENT=
This information unit specifies one of up to five VSN of the
second list of data carriers of the target file. The following
- This information unit must not be used for remote transfer
or local transfer to disk.
- If local transfer to tape/optical disk, at least one VSN
and up to four continuation tape/optical disks are to be
specified.
This parameter specifies the receiving and the sending processor via
its symbolic processor name. The following conventions must be
observed:
- The new parameter value specifies the receiving processor, the old
parameter value specifies the sending processor.
Default : local processor/local processor
n/o
n/
/o
USINF USER INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the user identification and authorization
for the remote processor. The user authorization is composed of the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 3+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
user password and a user account number. The input of the user
password is requested separately after the command was entered
correctly. The output of the entered user password is suppressed.
Notes:
- The parameter may be omitted if a default identification for
file transfer exists and the file is to be processed under this
identity.
- For remote processors, which uses FTAC profiles for identification
and authorization (e.g. UNIX or Windows OS`ses), the transfer
admission of the FTAC profile must be entered.
a[-b]
a: USER IDENTIFICATION=
User identification as required by remote processor.
b: USER ACCOUNT NUMBER=
Input of a user account number if required by remote processor.
REQPSW REQUEST PASSWORDS FOR REMOTE
This parameter specifies if passwords have to be requested for remote
processor.
Notes:
- Input and therefore requests for passwords for remote processor are
not necessary, if they are already stored there (e.g. in
FTAC-Profiles at UNIX or Windows OS`ses). The parameter must be
entered with N/NO to avoid the dialog messages explicitely.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
Default: Y
SIZE SIZE OF RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the size of the target file for files on disk
in PAM pages (1 PAM page = 2048 bytes). The following conventions must
be observed:
- At the CP, a target file is reduced to the actual size after
transmission if MODE = CR/CRD is entered.
- At the DCP, the size of the file on disk remains unchanged.
- If the value specified for FILE is a partial qualification or
value X, SIZE applies to every file transferred.
The input is ignored if:
- the source file is in SSW format and the target file was created
on local disk
- the target file is on tape/optical disk
- MODE = OVWR or MODE = EXT
- COPMOD = SSWF.
If no input is made for SIZE, the file transfer determines the
size of the target file, except the following case:
If the source file is in Post-Processing format on tape/optical disk
and the target file is to be created on local disk, the system
attempts to correct the preset value of SIZE as far as possible. If
the difference between actual file size and preset value is too great,
the transfer may be aborted due to lack of space. In this case, the
transfer procedure must be repeated with the correct SIZE value.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 4+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 100
MODE MODE TO OPEN RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the opening mode of the target file.
CR CREATE
Create file before transfer.
CRD CREATE DOUBLE
Create file in duplicate before transfer
(only possible for local disk).
OVWR OVERWRITE
Existing file will be overwritten.
- If the file does not exist, it is created.
If SSW format is decomposed, the information
in the file key block applies.
- The parameter value is not valid for local tape/
optical disk.
- The parameter value is valid for the DCP tape if
the file is the last on the tape.
- If the target file is a CYC file, the parameter
value is not valid.
EXT EXTEND
Existing file will be extended.
- For tape/optical disk this parameter value is
only valid if the target file is the last on
the tape/optical disk.
- For DCP tape this parameter value is only valid
if the tape file is empty.
- The parameter value is not valid if the target
carrier is a tape/optical disk and a partial
qualification has been entered.
- The parameter value is not valid for the DCP
disk.
- The parameter value is not valid if the
target file is a PAM file/ CYC file or if
COPMOD = SSWF.
- If a file transfer with target file on local
disk is aborted due to lack of space and this
parameter value has been entered, the following
options exist:
a) use CR FILE to create a new file with
sufficient capacity,
b) use OVWR to transfer the file that was to
be extended to the newly created file,
c) use EXT to extend the newly created file.
Default: CR
COPMOD COPY MODE OF FILE
This parameter specifies the copy mode (file and/or data reformatting).
Assignment of parameter values to copy direction/default:
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! Copy from .. to .. ! Possible param. values ! Default !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local disk --> ! KEEP ! KEEP !
! local disk ! POST ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local disk --> ! ! !
! local optical disk / ! POST ! POST !
! local tape ! SSWF ! !
! remote data carrier ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local optical disk / ! ! !
! local tape --> ! ! !
! local disk / ! BIN ! BIN !
! local optical disk / ! CHAR ! !
! local tape / ! ! !
! remote data carrier ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------!
! remote data ! ! !
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 5+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! carrier --> ! ! !
! local disk / ! BIN ! BIN
! local optical disk / ! CHAR !
! local tape ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
BIN COPY BINARY DATA
This parameter value enables
1) a file in Post-Processing format containing
binary data to be copied 1:1 in the directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ +--------------+ !
! ! ! local ! !
! ! ! optical disk/! !
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ ! <-+
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The target file attributes are determined
by the source file attributes.
- The data are not reformatted.
- If the target file is on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set,
b) the number of requested copies is set
to 0 (zero).
2) a file in SSW format to be copied in the
directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
! ! ! optical disk/!
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ !
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The SSW format is decomposed.
- By decomposing the SSW format, the file which
was copied with COPMOD = SSWF is
reconstructed.
- The target file attributes are taken from the
file key block, which is output as SSW
INFORMATION in connection with DISP FILE
for the local tape/optical disk.
3) a file in SSW format to be copied in the
directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ !
! local ! !
! optical disk/! !
! local tape/ ! <-+
! remote data !
! carrier !
+--------------+
- The SSW format is not decomposed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 6+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- DISP FILE for a file on local tape/
optical disk specifies whether it has
Post-Processing format or SSW format.
CHAR COPY CHARACTER
This parameter value enables a file in
Post-Processing format containing text data to be
copied 1:1 in the directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ +--------------+ !
! ! ! local ! !
! ! ! optical disk/! !
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ ! <-+
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The entry is ignored for source files in
SSW format.
- The target file attributes are determined by the
source file attributes.
- The data are recoded and stored on the target
data carrier
EBCDIC tape/
optical disk in EBCDIC.DF.03 code
ASCII tape/
optical disk in ASCII code
Disk in processor internal code.
- If the target file is on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set,
b) the number of required copies is set
to 0 (zero).
SSWF CREATE SUPPORT SOFTWARE FORMAT
This parameter value copies a file from local disk
creating SSW format in the directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
! local disk ! ------> ! local tape/ !
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- This parameter value is primarily used for
creating save copies on EBCDIC tape/optical
disks.
- This parameter value is not possible for CYC
files and generation files.
- Since the target file is created in SSW format,
the following restrictions apply to the source
file:
a) record size <= 2048 byte, if record format is
variable,
b) record size <= 2040 byte, if record format is
fix.
- The copying information is ignored as the target
file attributes are defined by SSW format.
- The number of performed copies is not increased.
- The source file attributes are stored in the
file key block of the target file, enabling the
source file to be reconstructed when the target
file is recopied to local disk.
Notes:
- EBCDIC tape/optical disks created with this
parameter value can be processed by IMON.
- File copies produced with this parameter value
can be read by the host using SYSUPD.
- Files in SSW format are structured with:
a) file type SAM,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 7+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b) record format FIX,
c) data type TRANSP,
d) record size (block length) 2048 bytes.
KEEP KEEP FILE STRUCTURE
This parameter value creates a 1:1 copy in the
directions
+--------------+
! !
+-- ! local disk !
! ! !
! +--------------+
!
! +--------------+
! ! !
+-> ! local disk !
! !
+--------------+
- The parameter value is not possible for
CYC files.
- File attributes (especially file type and
data type) are retained. For exceptions see
below.
- For the target file on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set, but the write
protection is adopted from the source file,
b) the number of required copies file is set
to default 0 (zero),
c) the service process of the source file is not
assigned to the target file.
POST CREATE POST PROCESSING FORMAT
This parameter value copies a file creating
Post-Processing format in the directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
+-- ! local disk ! ------> ! local tape/ !
! ! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! ! carrier !
! +--------------+ +--------------+
!
! +--------------+
! ! !
+-> ! local disk !
! !
+--------------+
- This parameter value is only allowed for PAM
file if a service process exists.
- The target file is a file in
Post-Processing format with non-compressed data
(SAM/TRANSP or SAM/TEXTNCMP).
- The target file attributes are derived from the
copying information of the source file (see
DISP FILE output block COPY INFORMATION).
- The copy block length determines the block
length for the local tape/optical disk, but not
for a remote tape.
- The number of copies made is incremented by 1 if
the target file is on local tape/local optical
disk/remote data carrier and the number of
requested copies is > 0 (zero).
- If the target file is on local disk, then:
a) no access restrictions are set, but the write
protection is adopted from the source file,
b) the number of requested copies is set
to 0 (zero).
- Reformatting is controlled via the data type or
is performed independently of the data type by a
service process, if one exists (see DISP FILE
output block FILEGROUP INFORMATION).
- The following table provides an overview of
reformatting controlled by data type:
+-------+-------------+--------------------------+
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 8+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!CP ! ! !
!source ! Data type ! File and/or data !
!file ! 1) ! reformatting !
!-------+-------------+--------------------------!
! SAM ! TRANSP ! No reformatting !
! ! ! (copy of binary data) !
! ! ! !
! ! TEXTNCMP ! No reformatting !
! ! ! Character conversion !
! ! ! (ASCII <--> EBCDIC.DF.03)!
! ! ! dependent on target data !
! ! ! carrier or according to !
! ! ! link protocol !
! ! ! (copy of text data) !
! ! ! !
! ! TEXTCMP ! Data edited into !
! ! ! printable characters !
! ! ! according to the !
! ! ! editing information !
! ! ! stored in the file !
! ! ! and character conversion !
! ! ! (as above) !
! ! ! !
!-------+-------------+--------------------------!
! CYC ! ! Decomposition of cyclic !
! ! ! structure for all data !
! ! ! types !
! ! ! (target file type SAM) !
! ! ! Depending on copy record !
! ! ! size, records in cyclic !
! ! ! files may also be split !
! ! ! !
! ! ! ) !
! ! TRANSP ! ! !
! ! TEXTNCMP ! > data reformatting !
! ! TEXTCMP ! ! all as above !
! ! ! ) !
! ! ! !
! ! MMLCMPR ! As for TEXTCMP but with !
! ! ! addition of conversion !
! ! ! into a format that can !
! ! ! be processed by text !
! ! ! editors !
! ! ! !
+-------+-------------+--------------------------+
1) see output parameter data storage form of
command DISP FILE
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the retention period of the target file
in days. The following conventions must be observed:
- If no input is made for RETPER and COPMOD = POST, the copy
retention period of the source file is adopted implicitly as
retention period of the target file.
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TRANS FILE- 9-
MOD FILEAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FILE AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to modify the access restrictions and/or the
number of safe copies in a file catalog.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FILEAUT : FILE= <,AR= ,SAFCOP=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file whose catalog is to
be modified.
+,*,%,#
AR ACCESS RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the type of access restrictions.
Note:
- Any access restrictions not specified are reset
if they are set in the catalog.
NOCN NO CATALOG NAME
NOCR NO CATALOG RETENTION PERIOD
NODEL NO DELETE
NORD NO READ
NOWR NO WRITE
NOAR NO ACCESS RESTRICTION
SAFCOP SAFECOPY
This parameter specifies the number of safe copies
that have already been made.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FILEAUT- 1-
ENTR FILEPSW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE PASSWORD
This command enters a session file password.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR FILEPSW ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR FILEPSW- 1-
DISP FILESEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE SECURITY METHOD
This command is used to show the selected File Security
method.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FILESEC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FILESEC- 1-
SET FILESEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE SECURITY METHOD
This command is used to switch between the two methods of File
Security.
File based File Security names the method where per file an
optional password can be administrated for each file access.
Access to files is allowed when no password is set.
This is independently of the initiator who attempts to access
the file.
Initiator based File Security names the method where for each
initiator, defined by a user id, access rights can be set for
single files or a number of files. Access to files is not
allowed for a specific initiator when nothing is administrated
for this initiator.
Note:
- With the File based File Security method passwords have to
be administrated using the commands CR FGRP and SET FGRPPW.
- With the Initiator based File Security method administration
can only be done using Q3 operations.
Input format
[ [
[ SET FILESEC : FILESEC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILESEC FILE SECURITY METHOD
This parameter is always mandatory.
The parameter specifies which File Security method shall be
selected.
The value FBFS stands for the File based File Security
method.
The value IBFS stands for the Initiator based File
Security method.
FBFS FILE BASED FILE SECURITY
IBFS INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SET FILESEC- 1-
START FILET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Start File Transfer
This task initiates a file transfer between CoPl and other machines, e.g. NetM.
The only precondition for the machine used is a working FTP client.
Input format
[ [
[ START FILET : Host= ,Command= [,CoPl Files=] [,Host Files=] [
[ [
[ [,Transfer Operation=] [,Transfer Type=] [
[ [
[ [,Ascii Files=] [,Transfer Mode=] [,Append Files=] [
[ [
[ [,Create Destination Directory=] [,Delete Sources=] [
[ [
[ [,Show Transfered Files=] [,Timeout=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Host
This is the host name of the Commercial Platform used for file transfer.
Command
FTP command to be executed.
listDirFiles will list all files specified in the
Parameters CoplFiles and HostFiles.
transferData will transfer the files.
cleanDir will delete all files specified in the
Parameters CoplFiles and HostFiles.
removeDir will delete all directories specified
in the Parameters CoplFiles and HostFiles.
CoPl Files
Location of the files on the CoPl in URL format.
Only the component file-path is used/evaluated.
Example: ftp:///lvol1/SURPASS/op/*.c
Only the following characters are allowed:
- numbers: 0 to 9
- characters: A to Z (upper case and lower case)
- special charaters: - _ . /
- wildcards: ? and *
In case that file names contain special characters such
as # or $, wildcards must be used to specify the file names.
User, password and host should not be entered for CoPl Files.
These parts of the URL are only for later use (and therefore
not given in the default by now).
Generally, subdirectory paths and special UNIX files (pipes,
sockets,...) can not be transfered.
Examples:
Allowed (example for CoPl to NetM, but it is possible
vice versa as well):
o File to File (no renaming)
ftp:///etc/help.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/help.txt
o File to File (with renaming)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START FILET- 1+
START FILET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ftp:///etc/help.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/help3.txt
o File to Directory
ftp:///etc/test.cnf to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/cfg/
o Files to Directory (with wildcards)
ftp:///etc/*.cnf to ftp://ss-golf/PLA?/c*/
o Files to Directory (seperated by blanks)
ftp:///etc/*.cfg data.cnf to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/cfg/
o Directory to Directory
ftp:///etc/data/ to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/data/
Not Allowed:
o Renaming more than 1 file
ftp:///etc/*.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/*.cfg
o Use of special characters (eg. $, ~, #, etc.)
ftp:///etc/tmp/help~.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/$temp/
o Blanks in directory paths
ftp:///etc/test /conf/ to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/ cfg/
o Directory to File
ftp:///etc/temp/ to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/temp
Host Files
Location of the file(s) on the Host in URL format.
User and password are optional and if not specified,
the conventions for anonymous FTP are used. Host and
file-path are mandatory. Port specification is only
required when the default FTP port (21) is not used.
Example: ftp://Hugo:tarzan@ss-golf/etc/bin/snmp*
Only the following characters are allowed:
- numbers: 0 to 9
- characters: A to Z (upper case and lower case)
- special charaters: - _ . /
- wildcards: ? and *
- also @ and : can be used in the way given in the default value,
but not as part of the user data (file path, host, ...)
In case user or password require special characters, they must be
given in the following syntax: %xx , where xx is the ascii number
(hex value) of the character, e.g. %20 for a blank. But this syntax
is not allowed in other components (file path, host, ...).
In case that file names contain special characters such as # or $,
wildcards must be used to specify the file names.
Generally, subdirectory paths and special UNIX files (pipes,
sockets,...) can not be transfered.
Examples:
Allowed (example for CoPl to NetM, but it is possible
vice versa as well):
o File to File (no renaming)
ftp:///etc/help.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/help.txt
o File to File (with renaming)
ftp:///etc/help.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/help3.txt
o File to Directory
ftp:///etc/test.cnf to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/cfg/
o Files to Directory (with wildcards)
ftp:///etc/*.cnf to ftp://ss-golf/PLA?/c*/
o Files to Directory (seperated by blanks)
ftp:///etc/*.cfg data.cnf to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/cfg/
o Directory to Directory
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START FILET- 2+
START FILET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ftp:///etc/data/ to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/data/
Not Allowed:
o Renaming more than 1 file
ftp:///etc/*.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/*.cfg
o Use of special characters (eg. $, ~, #, etc.)
ftp:///etc/tmp/help~.txt to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/$temp/
o Blanks in directory paths
ftp:///etc/test /conf/ to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/ cfg/
o Directory to File
ftp:///etc/temp/ to ftp://ss-golf/PLAT/temp
Transfer Operation
Requested file transfer operation as seen from the command initiator,
i.e remote host/NetM.
Transfer Type
Requested type of file transfer. If not specified, ascii is assumed for
all the files to transfer. If mixed is choosen, the files to be
transfered in ASCII have to be specified in the parameter Ascii Files.
Ascii Files
Subset of source file names to be transfered in ascii when the transfer
type is mixed. The rest of the files will be transfered in binary.
Transfer Mode
Requested mode of file transfer. If not specified, overwrite is assumed
for all the files to transfer. If mixed is choosen, the files to be
appended have to be specified in the parameter Append Files.
Append Files
Subset of source files to be appended to their potencially existing
destination file couterparts when the transfer mode is mixed.
The other files will be overwritten by the transfer.
Create Destination Directory
Option to create the destination directory if it does not exist.
Delete Sources
Option to delete successfully transfered source file(s).
Show Transfered Files
Option to show the file names, which were transfered. This is only
used in case that transferData was selected for Command.
Timeout
Timeout given in minutes.
It will always be rounded up to five minute intervals
(e.g. if you give 13 minutes for timeout, task will
use 15 minutes for timeout).
Task will abort file transfer after this time. If it
is not given 60 minutes are used for timeout.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 START FILET- 3-
DISP FILETEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILETEXT
This command displays the content of a file.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file must be a sequential dataset with variable
record length.
- The records contain only ASCII characters (see note).
Notes:
- Unprintable characters are substituted by ..
- Continuation lines of a record start with >>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FILETEXT : FILE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter identifies the dataset for display with its
filename.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FILETEXT- 1-
CAN FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE TRANSFERS
This command cancels FTAM file transfer(s).
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FILETRF : <JN= ,JST=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a FTAM file
transfer.
Notes:
- If exactly one FTAM filetransfer is specified, the value entered
for JST is checked against the actual jobstate (see output
parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF).
- If X is entered, all FTAM file transfers are cancelled.
If JST is entered additionally, only the corresponding FTAM
jobs are cancelled.
- If no value is entered here, JST has to be specified.
JST JOB STATE
This parameter specifies an additional selection criterion.
ACT ACTIVE
INTR INTERRUPTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FILETRF- 1-
DISP FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE TRANSFERS
This command displays data of FTAM file transfer(s) and comprises
the functions:
- list of all FTAM file transfers giving main job data.
- list of all job data for one FTAM file transfer.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FILETRF : <JN= ,JST=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
transfer.
Notes:
- If exactly one FTAM filetransfer is specified, the value entered
for JST is ignored.
- If X is entered, a list of all FTAM file transfers is displayed.
If JST is entered additionally, only the corresponding FTAM
jobs are displayed.
- If no value is entered here, JST has to be specified.
JST JOB STATE
This parameter specifies an additional selection criterion.
ACT ACTIVE
INTR INTERRUPTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FILETRF- 1-
STOP FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP FILE TRANSFERS
This command stops FTAM file transfer(s). The jobstate changes to
interrupted (see output parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF).
Prerequisites:
- the interruption of the FTAM file transfer(s) must be possible
(see output parameter interrupt possible of command DISP FILETRF).
- the FTAM file transfer(s) must be activ.
(see output parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF)
Input format
[ [
[ STOP FILETRF : JN= [,INTRPER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
transfer.
Notes:
- If X is entered, all FTAM file transfers are stopped
INTRPER INTERRUPT PERIOD
This parameter specifies the interrupt period for FTAM file
transfer(s) suggested by the operator. The value is entered
in the form HH-MM (H=Hour, M=Minute). As the value is
transferred in the form 2 to the power of x seconds by the
FTAM protocol, the entered value is calculated in seconds
and rounded up. Due to this exact values cannot be produced.
Default : 10 minutes
a-b
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STOP FILETRF- 1-
DISP FIRREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FACILITY INPUT RECORDING RECORD
This command displays Facility Input Records (FIR), which are stored
on disk.
Contrary to AMA data records, Facility Input Records are charge free.
They are generated in order to record the date of creation or
cancelation of subscriber services (e.g. account suspension) via the
administration.
Generation of this Facility Input Records is created with:
CR FAICHA:FAIOPER=FIR;
The Facility Input Records are output by the system in a cyclic disk
file with occupancy level alarm on the system panel.
They can also be copied onto a SAM disk file by the operator with
TRANS FILE, and from here they can be displayed as well.
The display is related to directory numbers and can be restricted
concerning service, creation date and file.
Display from the magnetic tape/optical disk is not implemented.
Therefore the magnetic tape/optical disk file has to be copied with
TRANS FILE into the disk.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FIRREC : DN= [,FILE=] [,BEGDATE=] [,ENDDATE=] [,FAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter allows a selective display based on directory
number digits.
Notes:
- The directory numbers are stored in Facility Input Records with the
local area code and without discrimination digits.
- That is why the local area code must always be entered when defining
the directory number.
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a file on disk in which
FIR records are stored.
Default : IA.ICFIR.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the interval to be
displayed.
Default : no lower limit of the interval to be displayed.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FIRREC- 1+
DISP FIRREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the interval to be
displayed.
Default : no upper limit of the interval to be displayed.
a-b-c
c: DAY OF END DATE=
FAC FACILITY
This parameter allows a selective display based on the
facility that is stored in a FIR record.
Up to 5 parameter can be linked with &.
Default : no selection of facilities.
a[-b]
a: FACILITY INPUT
TRACL ACTIV.BLOCKING F.TRAFFIC CLASS
TRACLSUS TRACL SUSPENSION
b: TRAFFIC CLASS=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FIRREC- 2-
ACT FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command activates the filename segment protection
for one element or for all elements of the filename
segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must exist.
- The syntax of the filename segment element must be correct.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT FNS : [FNS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FNS FILE NAME SEGMENT
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment
for which the relevant function is to be carried out.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT FNS- 1-
CAN FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command cancels elements of the filename segment
table which were created retrospectively.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must be an external element
(created with ENTR FNS).
- Update must be switched on.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FNS : FNS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Note:
- The filename segment must be entered as a fully
qualified name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FNS- 1-
DACT FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command deactivates the filename segment protection for
one element or all elements of the filename segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The file name segment element must exist.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT FNS : [FNS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the file name segment.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT FNS- 1-
DISP FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command displays one or all elements of the filename
segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FNS : [FNS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FNS- 1-
ENTR FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command is used to add new elements to the file name segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment must be entered as a fully
qualified name.
- The specified element may not exist.
- The table should not be full.
- The syntax of the specified element must be correct.
- Update must be switched on.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR FNS : FNS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment.
Note:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR FNS- 1-
CAN FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command cancels a frame handler reference.
Prerequisites:
- No depending NUC may exist for the frame handler.
- If a logical frame handler shall be cancelled, no packet data
path may exist for the assigned V5CHANID.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FRAMEHD- 1-
CR FRAMEHD
CON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command creates a frame handler reference.
1. CR FRAMEHD - CON CONCENTRATING FRAME HANDLER
2. CR FRAMEHD - LOG LOGICAL FRAME HANDLER
1. Input format
CONCENTRATING FRAME HANDLER
In this path a concentrating frame handler is created.
This frame handler type consists of one (Simplex-Mode)
or two (Duplex-Mode) frame handler modules. They have
to be created with CR LTU (TYPE=FHM) in an LTGH.
The Bd-ports of the frame handler modules are specified
by the parameters LTG1-LC1 and LTG2-LC2.
A frame handler with TYPE=CON can concentrate packet
data frames of DLUs and logical V5-communication channels
within EWSD.
[ [
[ CR FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= [,TYPE=] ,MODE= <,LTG1= ,LC1= ,LTG2= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,LC2=> [,CONTCHK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE FRAME HANDLER TYPE
This parameter specifies the frame handler type.
CON CONCENTRATING FRAME HANDLER
Default: CON
MODE CONNECTION MODE
This parameter specifies the connection mode of the
Bd-channels of the frame handler to the packet handler.
NUC NAILED-UP BD-CHANNEL
SWITCHED SWITCHED BD-CHANNEL
LTG1 LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER 1
This parameter specifies the LTG number of the
Bd-channel, which shall be assigned to LTG number 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FRAMEHD- 1+
CR FRAMEHD
CON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of a concentrating frame handler.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
This unit specifies the ltgset number.
This unit specifies the line trunk group.
LC1 LINE CONNECTION NUMBER 1
This parameter specifies the Bd-channel on the frame
handler module, which shall be assigned to line
connection number 1 of a concentrating frame handler.
Prerequisites:
- The Bd-channel of the frame handler module has to be
connected with a PBX line of the category FHBD.
- The specified frame handler module must not be
assigned to an other frame handler reference.
- Command parameter LTG1 has to be entered as well.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
This unit specifies the line trunk unit of the frame
handler module.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
This unit specifies the port number of the Bd-channel.
This parameter specifies the LTG number of the
Bd-channel, which shall be assigned to LTG number 2
of a concentrating frame handler.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
This parameter specifies the Bd-channel on the frame
handler module, which shall be assigned to line
connection number 2 of a concentrating frame handler.
Prerequisites:
- The Bd-channel of the frame handler module has to be
connected with a PBX line of the category FHBD.
- The specified frame handler module must not be
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FRAMEHD- 2+
CR FRAMEHD
CON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
assigned to an other frame handler reference.
- Command parameter LTG2 has to be entered as well.
a-b
handler module.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
CONTCHK CONTINUITY CHECK
This parameter specifies the type of the continuity check
on the Bd-channel.
HDLCFL HDLC FLAG
MNGFR BOTHWAY MANAGEMENT FRAME
Default: MNGFR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FRAMEHD- 3+
CR FRAMEHD
LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LOGICAL FRAME HANDLER
In this path a logical frame handler is created.
The frame handler reference of a logical frame handler
have to be assigned to a logical V5-communication channel
of a V5.2 interface via the parameters V5IF and V5CHANID.
The logical frame handler executes no further concentration
of packet data frames within EWSD.
Note:
- The Bd-channels of a logical frame handler are reserved
automatically.
Prerequisites:
- The specified V5IF must be a V5.2 interface.
- The specified V5CHANID have to exist.
- No other frame handler reference or BDSILCCH must be
assigned to the specified V5CHANID.
- All ports of the SILCs in the LTGs, which are connected
with the V5.2 interface, must be connected with PBX lines
of the category FHBD.
[ [
[ CR FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= ,TYPE= ,MODE= ,V5IF= ,V5CHANID= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CONTCHK=] [,NUMBDCH=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE FRAME HANDLER TYPE
This parameter specifies the frame handler type.
LOG LOGICAL FRAME HANDLER
Default: CON
MODE CONNECTION MODE
This parameter specifies the connection mode of the
Bd-channels of the frame handler to the packet handler.
NUC NAILED-UP BD-CHANNEL
SWITCHED SWITCHED BD-CHANNEL
This parameter specifies the V5 interface number of a
V5.2 interface.
V5CHANID V5 CHANNEL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the V5-channel identification
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FRAMEHD- 4+
CR FRAMEHD
LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for a logical V5-communication channel, which shall be
assigned to a logical frame handler.
This parameter specifies the type of the continuity check
on the Bd-channel.
HDLCFL HDLC FLAG
Default: MNGFR
NUMBDCH NUMBER OF BD-CHANNELS
This parameter specifies the number of the Bd-channels
for a logical frame handler.
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FRAMEHD- 5-
DISP FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command displays frame handler reference data.
Additionally to the administered frame handler data the reserved
SILC ports for logical frame handlers and the connected DLUs and
logical V5-communication channels for concentrating frame handlers
are displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FRAMEHD- 1-
MOD FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FRAME HANDLER REFERENCE
This command modifies frame handler reference data.
For a concentrating frame handler the parameters
LTG1-LC1, LTG2-LC2 and CONTCHK may be modified.
For a logical frame handler the parameters CONTCHK and
NUMBDCH may be modified.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FRAMEHD : FRAMEHD= [,LTG1=] [,LC1=] [,LTG2=] [,LC2=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CONTCHK=] [,NUMBDCH=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter modifies the assignment of LTG number 1
to a concentrating frame handler.
If only the new LTG number is entered (n/ ), a new
frame handler module will be assigned to the frame handler
reference.
If only the old LTG number is entered ( /o), an already
assigned LTG will be released.
New and old LTG number may not be entered together (n/o).
n/o
n/
/o
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
This parameter modifies the assignment of line connection
number 1 in the given LTG to a concentrating frame handler.
If the new LTG number is entered in LTG1, only the new line
connection number (n/ ) may be entered and a new frame handler
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FRAMEHD- 1+
MOD FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
module will be assigned to the frame handler reference.
If the old LTG number is entered in LTG1, only the old line
connection number ( /o) may be entered and an already assigned
frame handler module will be released.
New and old line connection number may not be entered
together (n/o).
n/o
n/
/o
a-b
handler module.
b: PORT NUMBER=
This parameter modifies the assignment of LTG number 2
to a concentrating frame handler.
If only the new LTG number is entered (n/ ), a new
frame handler module will be assigned to the frame handler
reference.
If only the old LTG number is entered ( /o), an already
assigned LTG will be released.
New and old LTG number may not be entered together (n/o).
n/o
n/
/o
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
This parameter modifies the assignment of line connection
number 2 in the given LTG to a concentrating frame handler.
If the new LTG number is entered in LTG2, only the new line
connection number (n/ ) may be entered and a new frame handler
module will be assigned to the frame handler reference.
If the old LTG number is entered in LTG2, only the old line
connection number ( /o) may be entered and an already assigned
frame handler module will be released.
New and old line connection number may not be entered
together (n/o).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FRAMEHD- 2+
MOD FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
n/o
n/
/o
a-b
handler module.
b: PORT NUMBER=
This parameter modifies the type of the continuity check on
the Bd-channel.
The modification will be activated at the next built-up of
the Bd-channels.
HDLCFL HDLC FLAG
NUMBDCH NUMBER OF BD-CHANNELS
This parameter modifies the number of the Bd-channels for a
logical frame handler.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FRAMEHD- 3-
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REC FRAMEHANDLER
The command starts traffic measurement of all existing frame handlers
at an exchange.
Traffic data are delivered separately for those frame handler modules
which are accessible at the recording time.
The existence of a frame handler is not necessary to start a measurement
job. However, no traffic data will be recorded unless a frame handler
exists.
Prerequisites :
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT.
- Only one frame handler measurement job can be started.
UNIT=OMT is not permissible for the REC FRAMEHD measurement.
Input format
[ [
[ REC FRAMEHD : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC FRAMEHD- 1+
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC FRAMEHD- 2+
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
- Interval times BEG are only permitted if at least one
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. BEG =
interval times, e.g. BEG = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
times only.
BEG with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval BEG, it will be finished.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC FRAMEHD- 3+
REC FRAMEHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC FRAMEHD- 4-
DISP FSCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security Configuration
This Task displays the File Security Configuration, which defines
the possible Rule restrictions and the Default access rights
provided no Rule applies.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FSCFG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FSCFG- 1-
MOD FSCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security Configuration
This Task modifies the File Security Configuration, which defines
the possible Rule restrictions and the Default access rights
provided no Rule applies.
The Rule restriction cannot be changed if this would lead to
inconsistancies with existing Rules.
At least one of the parameters Default access and Rule restriction
has to be specified.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FSCFG : [Default access=] [,Rule restriction=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default access
This parameter specifies the Default access rights that are used for
file access check, if no File Security Rule applies.
Input format:
Allow : Allows default access right for the file operation.
Deny : Denies default access right for the file operation.
Select the Default access for the file operations:
Read, Write, Create, Delete, Read attributes
Rule restriction
This parameter can restrict the supported Rule type of the File
Security Rules. Such a restriction may help to get a less complex File
Security system and therefore may help to avoid conflicting Rules.
Prerequisite:
If the Rule restriction is set to Deny rules or Allow rules only,
then no File Security Rule of the other Rule type may exist.
Input format:
Allow rules: Only Rules of Rule type Deny are supported.
Deny rules : Only Rules of Rule type Allow are supported.
All rules : All Rule types are supported.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSCFG- 1-
CAN FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel File Security File Group
This task cancels a File Security File group, which defines a set of file
name patterns and the file operations on these file name patterns.
Prerequisite:
The File group is not canceled, if it is still referenced by a File
Security Rule.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FSFGRP : File group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter specifies the name of the File group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Dependencies:
The File group is not canceled, if it is referebced by a File
Security Rule
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FSFGRP- 1-
CR FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create File Security File Group
This task creates a File Security File group, which defines a set of file
A File group is referenced by one or more File Security Rules in order
to Allow or Deny access rights for the file operations on the file name
patterns.
The set of file name patterns is defined by the File list.
The file operations are defined by the Operations list.
Optionally to each of the file operations a Password can be entered.
The file names within the File list parameter can be fully qualified file
names or file name patterns defined by special characters.
Dependencies:
Passwords are ignored at access checks if this File group is referenced
by a Deny Rule.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have one
of the following reasons:
- There are already too many File groups in the database.
- The maximum number of passwords (200) or file names (400)
is reached.
Input format
[ [
[ CR FSFGRP : File group= ,File list= ,Operations list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter specifies the name of the File group. This name is used
by a File Security Rule to reference the File group.
Input format:
File list
This parameter specifies a list of file names and file name patterns on
which the file operations specified within Operations list will be
allowed or denied.
Selected elements of this list must not be suplied with an empty string.
Input format:
Set (1-20 elements) of file names.
One element consists of a choice:
File on CP: String (1-17 characters) for CP file names,
only capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#", "%", "+", ".", "*"
and "?" are allowed.
File on MP: String (1-48 characters) for MP file names,
small and capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#" "%" "+" "." "*" "!"
"$" "&" "(" ")" "," ":" "-" "/"
";" "<" ">" "=" "@" "[" "]" ""
"_" "{" "}" "?" "\" are allowed.
For files on MP the device must be specified either by the device
name or by a wildcard.
A file name pattern is defined as follows:
- "Partly qualified" file names are specified by a dot (".") at
the end of the name.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FSFGRP- 1+
CR FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A file name matches this file name pattern, if it contains this
"partly qualified" file name as a prefix including the dot.
- "Fully qualified" file names are given uniquely without any
wild cards.
- One or more question marks ("?") can be entered at any position
of the file name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the file name and
the file name pattern are equal except the character positions
indicated by the question mark within the file name pattern.
One question mark substitutes exactly one character.
- One asterisk ("*") can be entered at any position of the file
name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the part before the
asterisk is contained as a prefix and if the part after the asterisk
is contained as a suffix.
The asterisk substitutes none, one or more characters.
- A question mark can be used in combination with a "partly qualified"
file name and with an asterisk.
- An asterisk cannot be used in combination with a dot as the last
character of the file name pattern.
Examples for files on CP:
- "Partly qualified" file name "SY." matches to
"SY.TASKLIB", "SY.SEMILIB", etc.
"SYSTEM.FILE" does NOT match this pattern.
- The file name pattern "RG.F?.FILE" applies to
"RG.FC.FILE", "RG.FS.FILE", etc.
- The file name pattern "IA.IC*" applies to "IA.IC",
"IA.ICAMA", "IA.ICMAL", etc.
Examples for files on MP:
- The file name pattern "SYS:\ab*" applies to all files on the
system device beginning with the prefix "ab". A generation
beginning with this prefix also matches to this file name pattern.
(e.g. ab, ab0, abC, ... , \ab\systemcode, \abCd\systemfile, ... )
- The file name pattern "SYS:\\def*" applies to all files of the
actual generation on the system device, beginning with the
prefix "def".
- The file name pattern "MOD:\*" applies to all files on the
MOD device.
- The file name pattern "???:\ab*" applies to all files on any
device with 3 letters beginning with the prefix "ab".
Operations list
This parameter specifies a list of file operations that are defined for
this File group.
The Rule that references this File group defines whether these file
operations are allowed or denied.
Optionally to each of this file operations a Password can be entered
for restricted file access.
The Password has to be entered twice for verification.
A Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical
character and one special character.
Dependencies:
- Optionally entered Passwords are ignored at access checks if this
File group is referenced by a Deny Rule.
- For file access via FTP no password may be administrated.
Input format:
Set (1-5) of file operations
One file operation element consists of:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FSFGRP- 2+
CR FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Operation:
Create : Create file operation
Delete : Delete file operation
Read : Read file operation
Write : Write file operation
Read attributes: Read file attributes operation
Password:
Verify password:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FSFGRP- 3-
DISP FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security File Group
This task displays one or more File Security File groups, which define a
set of file name patterns and the file operations on these file name patterns.
- One single File Security File group:
--> Enter the File group
- All File Security File groups:
--> Enter Substring for File group name (match at any position).
--> Enter File entry for File list (File name is in the list).
If more than one filter criteria are entered they must be all fulfilled.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FSFGRP : [File group=] [,Substring=] [,File location=] [
[ [
[ [,File name=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter selects one specific File group by its name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if all File groups shall be
selected or Substring or File entry is entered as filter parameter.
Input format:
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the File group name.
The File group name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if a File group is entered.
Input format:
File location
This parameter specifies where the file, specified in File name,
is located.
Dependencies:
- This parameter must be entered together with the parameter File name.
File name
This parameter specifies a file name which must be contained in the File
list. It is only looked for exact matches of the given file name and
that
one in the File list.
Dependencies:
- This parameter must be entered together with the parameter File
location.
- It must not be entered, if a File group was entered.
Input format:
File on CP: String (1-17 characters) for CP file names
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FSFGRP- 1+
DISP FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
File on MP: String (1-48 characters) for MP file names
wild cards.
name pattern.
system device beginning with the prefix "ab". A generation beginning
with this prefix also matches to this file name pattern.
(e.g. ab, ab0, abC, ... , \ab\systemcode,
\abCd\systemfile, ... )
prefix "def".
MOD device.
- The file name pattern "???:\ab*" applies to all files on any device
with 3 letters beginning with the prefix "ab".
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FSFGRP- 2-
MOD FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security File Group
This task modifies a File Security File group, which defines a set of file
Passwords can be entered to an Operation or can be removed with an
Operation.
To remove an Operation with a Password, the Password has to be
specified.
To change an existing Password without affecting the Operation, the
task MOD FSFGRPPW has to be used.
Dependencies:
The parameters Add operations and Remove operations must not be
specified at the same time.
Note:
- There are already too many File groups in the database.
- The maximum number of passwords (200) or file names (400)
is reached.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FSFGRP : File group= [,File list=] [,Remove operations=] [
[ [
[ [,Add operations=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
Input format:
File list
This parameter specifies a list of file names that will replace the
existing list of file names of the specified File group.
Input format:
Operation:
REPLACE: Replace File list.
ADD : Add file names in File list to the existing list.
REMOVE : Remove file names in File list from the existing list.
File list :
Set (1..20) of file names.
One list element consists of a choice:
File on CP: String (1-17 characters) for CP file names,
only capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#", "%", "+", ".", "*"
and "?" are allowed.
File on MP: String (1-48 characters) for MP file names,
small and capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#" "%" "+" "." "*" "!"
"$" "&" "(" ")" "," ":" "-" "/"
";" "<" ">" "=" "@" "[" "]" ""
"_" "{" "}" "?" "\" are allowed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSFGRP- 1+
MOD FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A file name matches this file name pattern, if it contains this
"partly qualified" file name as a prefix including the dot.
wild cards.
name pattern.
system device beginning with the prefix "ab". A generation
beginning with this prefix also matches to this file name pattern.
(e.g. ab, ab0, abC, ... , \ab\systemcode, \abCd\systemfile, ... )
prefix "def".
MOD device.
- The file name pattern "???:\ab*" applies to all files on any
device with 3 letters beginning with the prefix "ab".
Remove operations
This parameter specifies a list of Operations that will be removed from
the existing Operations list of the specified File group.
Optionally existing Passwords for the specified Operations must also
be specified.
Input format:
Operation:
Password:
Add operations
This parameter specifies a list of Operations that will be added to
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSFGRP- 2+
MOD FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the existing Operations list the specified File group.
Optionally a Password can be specified for each of the entered
Operations. The Password has to be entered twice for verification.
A Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical
character and one special character.
Input format:
Operation:
Password:
Verify password:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSFGRP- 3-
MOD FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security File Group Password
This task modifies a Password of a File Security File group, which
defines a set of file name patterns and the file operations on these file
name patterns.
If an existing Password is to be changed then this Old password has to
be specified.
If a New password is entered it has to be entered twice for verification.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have the
following reasons:
- The maximum number of passwords (200) is reached.
- M-SET Error: Either the New Password is invalid or the Old Password
is wrong or the Operation you specified is not in the Operations List
of this File Group.
If the passwords are correct, pleas check the Operations List of the
File group with DISP FSFGRP. If the Operation is not in the
Operations List, you can add it with MOD FSFGRP.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FSFGRPPW : File group= ,Operation= [,Old password=] [
[ [
[ [,New password=] [,Verify password=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
Input format:
Operation
This parameter specifies the Operation for which the Password will
be changed.
Input format:
Old password
This parameter specifies the Old password of the specified Operation.
Input format:
New password
This parameter specifies the New password of the specified Operation
to be set.
The Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical character and one special character.
Dependencies:
If this parameter is specified Verify password must also be entered.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSFGRPPW- 1+
MOD FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Verify password
This parameter specifies the verification of the New password.
The Passwords entered in New password and in Verify password must
be equal.
This parameter may only be specified, if New password is entered.
Input format:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSFGRPPW- 2-
RSET FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Reset File Security File Group Password
This task resets or cancels the Password of an Operation of a File
Security File group.
If a New password is entered it has to be entered twice for verification.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have the
following reasons:
- The maximum number of passwords (200) is reached.
- The given password is invalid.
Input format
[ [
[ RSET FSFGRPPW : File group= ,Operation= [,New password=] [
[ [
[ [,Verify password=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
Input format:
Operation
This parameter specifies the Operation for which the Password will
be changed.
Input format:
New password
This parameter specifies the New password of the specified Operation
to be set.
The Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical character and one special character.
If this parameter is not entered, the existing Password of the
Operation will be canceled.
Dependencies:
If this parameter is specified Verify password must also be entered.
Input format:
String (3-40 characters): The Password will be reset.
Default: The Password will be canceled.
Verify password
This parameter specifies the verification to the New password of the
specified Operation.
This parameter may only be specified, if New password is entered.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RSET FSFGRPPW- 1+
RSET FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 RSET FSFGRPPW- 2-
CAN FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel File Security Initiator Group
This task cancels a File Security Initiator group, which defines a list of
Initiators.
Prerequisite:
The Initiator group is not canceled, if it is referenced by a File Security
Rule.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FSINIGRP : Initiator group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter specifies the name of the Initiator group to be
canceled.
Dependencies:
The Initiator group is not canceled, if it is referenced by a File
Security Rule.
Input format:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FSINIGRP- 1-
CR FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create File Security Initiator Group
This task creates a File Security Initiator group, which defines a
list of Initiators.
A File Security Initiator group is referenced by one or more File Security
Rules in order to Allow or Deny file access rights to file operations.
Note:
- There are already too many Initiator groups in the database.
- The maximum number of Initiators (200) is reached.
Input format
[ [
[ CR FSINIGRP : Initiator group= ,Initiator list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter defines the name of the Initiator group. This name is
used by a File Security Rule to reference the Initiator group.
Input format:
Initiator list
This parameter defines a list of Initiators for this File Security
Initiator group. Each Initiator is represented by its name.
Dependencies:
This task does not check if the Initiators exist within Authentication.
Input format:
Set (1..20) of Initiators
One Initiator consists of a String (1-8 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FSINIGRP- 1-
DISP FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security Initiator Group
This task displays one or more File Security Initiator groups, which
define a list of Initiators.
- One single File Security Initiator group:
--> Enter the Initiator group
- All File Security Initiator groups:
--> Enter Substring for Initiator group name (match at any position)
--> Enter Initiator entry for Initiator list (Initiator is in the list)
If both criteria are entered they must be both fulfilled.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FSINIGRP : [Initiator group=] [,Substring=] [,Initiator entry=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter selects one specific Initiator group by its name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if all Initiator groups shall
be selected or Substring or Initiator entry is entered as filter
parameter.
Input format:
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the Initiator group name.
The Initiator group name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if an Initiator group is entered.
Input format:
Initiator entry
This parameter specifies an Initiator which must be contained in the
Initiator list.
Dependencies:
- This parameter must not be entered, if an Initiator group was
entered.
- If this parameter is entered together with Substring then all
Initiator groups will be displayed that reference the given
Initiator.
- If the given Initiator is an element of a Initiators list of some
Initiator group, these Initiator group will be displayed.
Input format:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FSINIGRP- 1-
MOD FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security Initiator Group
This task modifies a File Security Initiator group, which defines a list
of Initiators that have the same File Security access rights.
The Initiator list of the Initiator group can be replaced or
Initiators may be added to or removed from the list.
Note:
- There are already too many Initiator groups in the database.
- The maximum number of Initiators (200) is reached.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FSINIGRP : Initiator group= ,Initiator list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter specifes the name of the File Security Initiator group.
This name is used by a File Security Rule to reference the
Initiator group.
Input format:
Initiator list
This parameter specifies a list of Initiators that will replace, or
will be added to or removed from the existing Initiator list.
Dependencies:
The Initiators must have been created using the Authentication
function.
This task does not check if the Initiators exist within Authentication.
Input format:
Operation
REPLACE: Replace Initiator list.
ADD : Add Initiators of Initiator list to the
existing list.
REMOVE : Remove Initiators in Initiator list from the
existing list.
Initiator list
Set (1..20) of Initiators
One Initiator consists of a String
(1-8 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSINIGRP- 1-
CAN FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel File Security Rule
This task cancels a File Security Rule, which defines the access
rights of a File Security Initiator group on a File Security
File group for the file operations defined by File group.
Depending on the Rule type the cancel operation can remove existing
access rights (Rule type = Allow) or grant new access rights
(Rule type = Deny).
Input format
[ [
[ CAN FSRULE : Rule= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter specifies the name of the File Security
Rule.
Input format:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FSRULE- 1-
CR FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create File Security Rule
This task creates a Rule which defines the access rights of a File
Security Initiator group on files specified within a File Security
File group.
An Allow Rule (Rule type = Allow) allows the file access, as
long as no matching Deny Rule exists. A Deny Rule rejects the
file access (Rule type = Deny).
Rules with an empty Initiator group parameter are Common rules and
apply to all File Security Initiators.
Rules with an empty File group parameter are Global rules and apply
to all files.
Rules with both the Initiator group and the File group parameter
supplied apply only to the File Security Initiators listed in the
referenced Initiator group and only on the files listed in the
referenced File groups.
Optional time dependencies may be defined by scheduling parameters.
The validity of the Rule can be restricted by:
- duration: a Start time and Stop time and/or
- daily scheduling: time intervals for all days (of the week) or
- weekly scheduling: time intervals per individual days of the week.
- Stop time: if Start time is given, Stop time is optional.
Prerequisite:
- The referenced File Security Initiator group and File Security
File group must exist.
- The supported Rule restriction can have been restricted by the task
MOD FSCFG. In this case only Allow Rules or only Deny Rules
can be created.
The administrated restrictions can be displayed using the task
DISP FSCFG.
Note:
- The parameters for daily scheduling and weekly scheduling exclude
each other.
- The scheduling parameters must be selected when the Rule is created.
It is not possible to add scheduling parameters by MOD FSRULE.
- There are already too many Rules in the database.
- Some internal resources exceed their limits
Input format
[ [
[ CR FSRULE : Rule= ,Rule type= [,Initiator group list=] [
[ [
[ [,File group list=] [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter specifies the name of the File Security Rule.
Input format:
Rule type
This parameter specifies the desired action performed if the Rule
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FSRULE- 1+
CR FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
applies to a file access check.
The supported values can be restricted by MOD FSCFG.
Input format:
Allow : Allow file access (if no other matching Deny Rule
exists).
Deny : Deny file access.
Default value : Deny
This parameter specifies a reference to a list of File Security
Initiator groups. The Rule applies to all Initiators in this
groups.
If no Initiator group is entered, a Common rule is generated,
which is valid for all Initiators.
Prerequisite:
The referenced Initiator group(s) must have been created by CR
FSINIGRP.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) : Reference to an Initiator group
no entry : Common rule
Default value : "" (empty string) : Common rule
File group list
This parameter specifies a reference to a list of File Security
File groups, which define the File lists and the File Security
Operations for this Rule.
If no File group is entered, a Global rule is generated, which
is valid to all files and all Operations within the system for
the referenced Initiator group.
Prerequisite:
The referenced File group(s) must have been created by CR FSFGRP.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) : Reference to a File group
no entry : Common rule
Default value : "" (empty string) : Global rule
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the Rule becomes
active.
If only the Start time is set the Stop time will be set
automatically to Continuous.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Input format:
standard date and time values.
Default value:
Actual system time.
Will be set if this parameter is omitted but Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the Rule becomes
inactive.
If only the Stop time is set the Start time will be set automatically
to the actual system time of the system.
Input format:
option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and time values
Default value:
option Continuous
Will be set if this parameter is omitted but Start time is set.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FSRULE- 2+
CR FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Daily intervals
This parameter defines Daily Intervals (up to 6), within which the
Rule is active.
If this parameter is entered, the parameter for weekly intervals must
not be entered.
Input format:
hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day.
Default:
00:00-00:00 (whole day)
Weekly intervals
This parameter defines weekly intervals within which the Rule is
active. Up to 6 time intervals can be defined for each day of the week.
The Rule will be inactive on days of the week not selected and on
days with no intervals set.
At least one day with one interval must be specified.
If this parameter is entered, the parameter for Daily intervals must
not be entered.
Input format:
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Default:
Selects all days of the week without any time restriction.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FSRULE- 3-
DISP FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security Rule
This task displays one or more File Security Rules, which define the
access rights of a File Security Initiator group on files specified
within a File Security File group.
- One single File Security Rule:
--> Enter Rule
- All File Security Rules:
--> Enter Substring for Rule name (match at any position).
--> Enter Rule type (equality)
--> Enter Initiator group (equality)
--> Enter File group (equality)
All entered criteria must be fulfilled for the Rules displayed.
Different output formats are supported for the display of a single
File Security Rule.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FSRULE : [Rule=] ,Output format= [,Substring=] [,Rule type=] [
[ [
[ [,Initiator group=] [,File group=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter selects one specific File Security Rule.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if all File Security Rules shall
be selected or one of the following filter parameters is entered.
Input format:
Output format
This parameter defines the Output format of the displayed File Security
Rules. Format Compact must be used, if parameter Rule is not
given.
Input format:
Compact displays File Security Rule parameters without
scheduling parameters.
Complete displays all File Security Rule parameters.
Expanded displays all File Security Rule parameters including
the referenced File Security Initiator group and
File Security File group.
Default:
Compact
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the Rule name.
The Rule name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Rule was specified.
Input format:
String (1-12) characters
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FSRULE- 1+
DISP FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Rule type
This parameter selects the Rule type of the Rules to display.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Rule was specified.
Input format:
Allow Select Allow Rules.
Deny Select Deny Rules.
Initiator group
This parameter selects the referenced Initiator group of the Rules
to display.
Dependencies:
This parameter cannot be entered at the same time with the Rule
parameter.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for Initiator group name.
"" (empty string) selects Common rules (with no
Initiator group).
File group
This parameter selects the referenced File group of the Rules
to display.
Dependencies:
This parameter cannot be entered at the same time with the Rule
parameter.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for File group name.
"" (empty string) selects Global rules (with no
File group).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FSRULE- 2-
MOD FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security Rule
This task modifies a File Security Rule, which defines the access
rights of a File Security Initiator group on files specified within
a File Security File group.
Depending on the parameters specified, the Rule type, the referenced
File group or Initiator group is changed.
Scheduling parameters can be modified as follows:
- Duration: replace Start time and/or Stop time.
- Daily scheduling: replace Daily intervals.
- Weekly scheduling: replace time intervals of single days of the week.
Note:
- It is not possible to change a Common rule (no Initiator group) to
a non Common rule and vice versa.
It is only possible to replace an existing reference to an Initiator group.
- It is not possible to change a Global rule (no File group) to a non
Global rule and vice versa.
It is only possible to replace an existing reference to a File group.
- Only scheduling parameters specified by CR FSRULE can be modified.
- There are already too many Rules in the database.
- Some internal resources exceed their limits
Input format
[ [
[ MOD FSRULE : Rule= [,Initiator group list=] [,File group list=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter specifies the name of the Rule.
Input format:
This parameter specifies a list of File Security Initiator groups
that replace the existing reference.
Note:
It is not possible to set a reference to an
Initiator group for a Common rule (no
Initiator group), or to remove the reference to an
Initiator group.
Input format:
File group list
This parameter specifies a list of File Security File groups
that replace the existing reference.
Note:
It is not possible to set a reference to a File group for a Global
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSRULE- 1+
MOD FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
rule (no File group), or to remove the reference to a File group.
Input format:
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the Rule becomes
active.
The parameter can be replaced only if a Start time or Stop time
was specified, when the Rule was created.
Input format:
Standard date and time values.
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the Rule becomes
inactive.
The parameter can be replaced only, if a Start time or Stop time
was specified, when the Rule was created.
Input format:
option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and time values
Default value:
option Continuous
Will be set if this parameter is omitted but Start time is set.
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces the Daily intervals (up to 6) within which
the Rule is active.
The parameter can be entered only if Daily intervals were specified,
when the Rule was created.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes. Overlapping
intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format:
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces the Weekly intervals within
which the Rule is active.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are
replaced.
rejected.
Input format:
hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FSRULE- 2-
CAN FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This command cancels functional O&M terminals.
Prerequisites:
- the functional O&M terminal must exist.
- the functional O&M terminal must not be assigned to any device group.
- the functional O&M terminal must not be assigned as the output device
of the deactivated output suppression.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN FUOMT : FUOMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a functional O&M terminal.
Notes:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN FUOMT- 1-
CR FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This command creates functional O&M terminals to which a physical O&M
terminal is assigned at the same time; there is the option of assigning
a second O&M terminal as an alternative device.
Prerequisite:
- the functional device may not already exist.
- a physical device must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR FUOMT : FUOMT= ,OMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter designates a real device or a real device and an
alternate device.
Notes:
- the primary device must not be an alternative device.
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR FUOMT- 1-
SEL FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINALS
This command selects a table of functional O&M terminals.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL FUOMT : OMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a real (physical) terminal or a real
terminal and an alternative terminal.
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
If parameter value a is specified, all
O&M terminals are displayed for which the
specified terminal is entered as first or
second O&M terminal.
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
If parameter values a and b are specified,
the O&M terminals are displayed which are
assigned to the terminal stated in the
first information unit as first terminal
and to the terminal stated in the second
information unit as alternative terminal.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SEL FUOMT- 1-
DISP FUOMTLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS
This command displays a table of functional O&M terminals and their
assignment to physical terminals. A selection of functional terminals or
all functional terminals can be output.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP FUOMTLNK : FUOMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FUOMTLNK- 1-
MOD FUOMTLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS
This command modifies the assignment of physical O&M terminals to
functional O&M terminals. It can be executed for two or more functional
terminals provided that they are assigned the same combination of real
devices.
Prerequisite:
- the functional O&M terminals must exist.
- the physical terminals must exist.
- the specified original combination of physical O&M terminals must be
assigned to the functional O&M terminal.
- the combination of O&M terminals resulting from the modification may not
be identical with the existing one.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD FUOMTLNK : FUOMT= ,OMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Note:
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter designates a real device or a real device and an
alternate device.
Note:
- the primary device must not be an alternate device.
n/o
n/
/o
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD FUOMTLNK- 1-
COPY FWLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPY FIRMWARE LOAD
This command switches the selector between the active load
and the backup load in the RSUC and/or MHs for the RSU.
The command copies the active load and the backup load in the
DLUC or SLMD for the DLUG, or FOCO for the LTGO.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ COPY FWLOAD : UNIT= ,MODULE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the name of the unit.
a-b[-c]
a: UNIT
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT TYPE G
b: RSU TSI- OR LTGO TSG NUMBER OR DLU NUMBER=
c: RSU SIDE ID OR LTGO LTG NUMBER=
MODULE MODULE
This parameter specifies the module name and number.
a[-b[-c]]
a: MODULE TYPE
RSUC RSU CONTROLLER
MH MESSAGE HANDLER
DLUC24 DIG LINE UNIT CNTL FOR PCM24
DLUCLDI DIG LINE UNIT CNTL LOC INTF
SLMAITFG SLMA INT LINE TEST FOR DLUG
SLMAITMG SLMA WITH MTA, LINE TST TYPE G
SLMAITHG SLMA HIGH CURR L. TST FOR DLUG
SLMDTFC SLMD FOR DLUG (4B3T CODE)
SLMDQFC SLMD FOR DLUG (2B1Q CODE)
SLMAFPG SLMA (US / 16 PORTS) FOR DLUG
SLMDQSC SLMD (US / 16 PORTS) FOR DLUG
b: MH MODULE NUM,DLUG INF OR SHELF NO=
unit values.
c: DLUG SLM MODUL NO=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COPY FWLOAD- 1-
DISP FWLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FIRMWARE LOAD
This command will display FW information for all units / modules that
match the module type requested, where access is possible.
The command may generate a long running job.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP FWLOAD : UNIT= ,MODULE= [,LOADLIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT TYPE
a-b[-c]
a: UNIT
MODULE MODULE
a[-b[-c]]
a: MODULE TYPE
DIU240A DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 240 A
DIU240B DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 240 B
TSIMA TIME SLOT INTERCHANGE MATRIX A
TSIMB TIME SLOT INTERCHANGE MATRIX B
MH MESSAGE HANDLER FOR RSU
RSUC RSU CONTROLLER FOR RSU
b: DIG IF NO, DIG LINE CNT NO,SHELF NO=
unit values.
c: SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE NO=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FWLOAD- 1+
DISP FWLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
LOADLIB LOAD LIBRARY
This parameter is used to request the list of valid load(s)
for a specific module from the CP Disk and display it as
part of the output.
Information will only display if LOADLIB = Y.
Default: No display.
Y DISPLAY LOAD LIBRARY INFO
N DO NOT DISPLAY LIBRARY INFO
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP FWLOAD- 2-
LOAD FWLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LOAD FIRMWARE LOAD
This command loads FW to one of the following units:
- RSU-TSIM or RSU-DIUS,
- DLUG-DLUC or DLUG-SLMS,
- LTGO-IOP or LTGO-FOCO.
The new load overwrites the current online load in these units.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ LOAD FWLOAD : UNIT= ,MODULE= ,FWVAR= [,FWCOMP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT TYPE
a-b[-c]
a: UNIT
MODULE MODULE
a[-b[-c]]
a: MODULE TYPE
DIU240A DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 240 A
DIU240B DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 240 B
TSIMA TIME SLOT INTERCHANGE MATRIX A
TSIMB TIME SLOT INTERCHANGE MATRIX B
MH MESSAGE HANDLER FOR RSU
RSUC RSU CONTROLLER FOR RSU
b: DIG IF NO, DIG LINE CNT NO,SHELF NO=
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 LOAD FWLOAD- 1+
LOAD FWLOAD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE NO=
unit values.
FWVAR FIRMWARE VARIANT
This parameter specifies the firmware variant.
FWCOMP HW/FW COMPATIBILITY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the firmware version.
0...FE, range of hexadecimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 LOAD FWLOAD- 2-
ACT GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE GENERATION
This command activates a blocked file generation.
The generation must have been created by command
ENTR GEN or MOD DBSIZE.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT GEN : GEN= [,ACTLEVEL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GEN NAME OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies the file generation
to be activated
.,+,*,%,#
ACTLEVEL ACTIVATION LEVEL
This parameter specifies how to introduce the new
generation into the system.
NOACT NO ACTIVATION
The new generation will not be introduced into
the system. It will be set valid
MINACT MINIMAL ACTIVATION
The new generation will be introduced into
the system without recovery.
LOWACT LOW ACTIVATION LEVEL
The new generation will be set valid and
introduced into the system with the lowest
CP recovery level as possible. Peripheral
units have to be configurated manually
afterwards.
GLOBACT GLOBAL ACTIVATION LEVEL
introduced into the system with the
recovery level needed to load all impacted
units.
Default: GLOBACT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT GEN- 1-
CAN GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GENERATION
With this command, file generations stored on disk are deleted logically
and physically. All files of the specified generation are marked as
being not associated with the generation and files which do not belong
to any other generation are physically deleted. Before this is done,
the generation list is specified and an acknowledgment requested.
The list of the physically deleted files is output.
A check is made whether the generation to be deleted is not identical
with the current one and whether it is not the only valid golden
generation.
Log files which belong to a generation are not deleted.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN GEN : GEN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation to be deleted. It is not
permissible to specify the current generation.
Structure of the generation name:
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
ff - APS function version
kk - APS correction version
l - local correction version (special patch status)
o - ODAGEN sequence number
ii - fixpoint sequence number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN GEN- 1-
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPY GENERATION
This command copies either all files of a generation or only the
semipermanent files to disk or tape/optical disk. Only the current
generation, i.e. the loaded generation whose phase (code and data) is
active, can be copied to disk. Non-current generations, e.g. safeguarding
generations stored on disk can only be copied to tape / optical disk.
If a generation is copied to tape/optical disk, a modified generation
list (consisting of only one entry for the generation to be saved) is
also transferred to tape/optical disk.
In the following differences/restrictions between CP-standalone (CP/SA) and
CP running with a connected MP (CP/MP) will be marked.
The type of the generation to be created (command parameters TYPE=
GOLDEN,BACKUP) can be administrated.
If all files of a generation are copied, the destination generation is
of type backup (BACKUP) or golden (GOLDEN) and is set to
CP/SA: valid (VALID)
CP/MP: blocked (BLOCKED).
When creating a new generation the generation compatibility sign (GCS) is
set to
CP/SA: 0 and can never be modified
CP/MP: 9999 and can be modified with command MOD GEN
Note:
The GCS is needed when the CP is running with a connected MP. It is
needed by startup to determine compatible generations on both the CP and the MP
(compatible generations: GCS-CP = GCS-MP).
The value GCS=0 is reserved for CP/SA.
The value GCS=9999 indicates an invalid value, which needs to be changed
with the command MOD GEN.
CP/SA: If only the semipermanent data is copied, the destination generation is
of type fixpoint (FIX) and is set to blocked (BLOCKED).
CP/MP: the creation of a generation of type fixpoint (FIX) is not possible.
A generation on tape/optical disk is assigned the same validity status it
has on disk.
The validity flag can be changed with the command MOD GEN.
COPY GEN is an essential part of the system for APS safeguarding: it can
be used to create safeguarding generations on tape/optical disk or disk.
For APS safeguarding, a distinction must be made between an initial
installation generation which is created with ENTR INSTGEN, and
a database extension which is performed with MOD DBSIZE. UPD GEN
belongs to the disk debugging procedures.
A generation is a consistent, self-contained subset of the EWSD system files
which are required for the operation of an EWSD switching center. One such
file can be assigned to several generations.
Each generation is assigned a generation name. This generation name is a
character string consisting of 8 digits.
All generations of a switching system are listed in a special system file,
i.e. SY.GENLIST, which is not assigned to any generation. The entries, i.e.
the generations that exist in the system, are in the sequence in which
a fallback, if any, is to take place. In general, new generations precede
elder generations. A maximum of 31 generations can be administrated.
Safeguarding generations are generations which can be created by a special
safeguarding action from the current, i.e. the loaded generation.
The following table indicates which files/file types belong to which type
of safeguarding generation:
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
File | Fixpoint | Snapshot | Remarks
(file type) |on disk |on tape / |on disk |on tape /|
| |opt. disk | |opt. disk|
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COPY GEN- 1+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-------------|----------|----------| ---------|---------|--------------------
SY.GENLIST | | * | | * |On tape, the SY.
| | | | |GENLIST has only
| | | | |one entry, no
| | | | |generation file
SY.INSTALL | | | | * |no generation
| | | | |file
SY.SEMILIB | * | * | * | * |
SY.SIMP | * | * | * | * |only in exchanges
| | | | |with CCNC
SY.TASKLIB | z | | * | * |Z: file is merely
SY.LOADLIB.LA| z | | * | * |assigned to safe-
SY.LOADLIB.CA| z | | * | * |guarding generation,
SY.LOADLIB.MA| z | | * | * |and not physically
SY.PSW.T<nnn>| z | | * | * |copied; it also
| | | | |belongs to
| | | | |other generations
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Legend: * = physical copy of file
The following types of safeguarding generations exist:
Fixpoint : Safeguarding generation consists physically only of the
semipermanent data, i.e. of the files SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP;
all other files are identical with those of the current
generation and are only logically assigned to it.
Backup : Safeguarding generation consists of physical copies of all
files of an original generation;
Golden : Safeguarding generation is a backup having been tested with
startup by the operator.
A generation may have one of the validity flags BLOCKED, VALID and
invalid. The validity flag can be modified with the command MOD GEN,
but only from BLOCKED to VALID and vice versa. A generation on tape/
optical disk is assigned the same status it has on disk. With this command,
the type of a safeguarding generation can also be changed from BACKUP to
GOLDEN. This is useful especially in case one wants to adjust a generation
which was retransferred from tape/optical disk with TRANS SYFILE for a
specified purpose.
The validity status determines the startup capability of a generation. It
is of significance for all generation types. Only a valid generation can
be selected for the automatic fallback. A non-valid or blocked generation
is not used for automatic fallbacks.
However, a manual startup with blocked generations is always possible.
Generations which are to be copied to tape/optical disk are initially
copied to disk, if they contain the current semipermanent database
(SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP, if existing). Source generations having such a
property are either the current generation or generations originating from
merging a non-current generation with the current semipermanent database
("semicurrent" generation). The purpose of this procedure is to generate a
fixpoint of the semipermanent database on disk within a short period of time.
In a second step, this intermediate generation is copied to tape/optical disk.
On the other hand, source generations containing a non-current semipermanent
database are copied directly to tape/optical disk without using an
intermediate copy on disk.
In case the intermediate generation is not required to be permanent
(i.e., the source is semipermanent or OUTPUT = TAPMOD has been specified),
this intermediate generation is temporary, i.e. it appears to be an
invalid fixpoint generation.
CP/MP: OUTPUT = TAPMOD is not allowed.
Type and Validity of created generation on tape/optical disk
------------------------------------------------------------
(VSN /= SYSVSN) with COPY GEN
----------------------------
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| | created with
Source generation | Destination generation | command parameters
TYPE / Actuality | TYPE / VALIDITY | OUTPUT / TYPE
--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------
NONE non-current | FIX * | FIX -
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COPY GEN- 2+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NONE non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
FIX non-current | FIX * | FIX -
| |
BACKUP non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
MERGED non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
GOLDEN non-current | GOLDEN * | GEN GOLDEN
| |
--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------
arbitrary current | BACKUP VALID | GEN/TAPMOD BACKUP
type | |
arbitrary current | GOLDEN VALID | GEN/TAPMOD GOLDEN
type | |
arbitrary current | FIX BLOCKED | FIX -
type | |
| |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
Legend: * = Validity of copy on tape/optical disk is taken to be the
same as that of source generation
TYPE = TYPE
BACKUP = BACKUP
GOLDEN = GOLDEN
VALIDITY = VALIDITY
VALID = VALID
BLOCKED = BLOCKED
OUTPUT = OUTPUT
GEN = GEN
TAPMOD = TAPMOD
FIX = FIX
MERGED = generated by MERGE GEN
For copy to tape, other OUTPUT/TYPE parameter combinations of the
command COPY GEN than those listed in the third column are not possible.
If the current source generation is specified for COPY GEN, and
OUTPUT = FIX or OUTPUT = GEN, then also a permanent copy on disk
is generated besides the copy on tape/optical disk.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ COPY GEN : OUTPUT= [,VSN=] [,GEN=] [,TYPE=] [,VERIFY=] [
[ [
[ [,RETPER=] [,REWIND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUTPUT OUTPUT MODE OF COPYGEN
This parameter specifies whether all files of the generation or only
the semipermanent data (SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP) are to be copied or
the total current generation is to be copied directly to tape/optical
disk without generating a permanent copy on disk. If only the
semipermanent data are to be copied, the parameter TYPE is ignored.
FIX SAVE SEMILIB/SIMP ONLY
Copies only the semipermanent data.
GEN SAVE WHOLE GENERATION
Copies all files of the generation.
TAPMOD SAVE GEN TO TAPE/OPT.DISK ONLY
Copies the current generation to tape/optical disk
immediately.
In contrary to the other possible methods for
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COPY GEN- 3+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
creating a copy of the current generation on tape/
optical disk (OUTPUT= FIX/GEN, VSN =
Volume Serial Number of the tape/optical disk
used), no permanent copy of the current generation
on disk prior to the final copy on tape/optical
disk will be made. Only that part of the current
generation which contains its semipermanent data
is put into a temporary copy on disk.
Specification of a generation different from the
current one is not allowed. VSN is mandatory.
With OUTPUT=TAPMOD, it is not possible to
generate a fixpoint (= semipermanent data only)
on tape/optical disk.
The resulting copy on tape/optical disk of
TYPE=BACKUP/GOLDEN is set to VALID.
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER LIST
This parameter list specifies whether the generation is to be copied
on disk (VSN=SYSVSN) or tape/optical disk. Up to 5 tapes/optical
disks can be specified in the list:
VSN = <tape1> & <tape2> & <tape3> & <tape4> & <tape5>
(<tape1>...<tape5>: Volume Serial Number of tapes/optical disks).
It is not allowed to specify both VSN of tapes/optical disks and
SYSVSN in the list described above (VSN list).
The specification of VSNs of several tapes/optical disks before
starting the copy process to tape/optical disk allows COPY GEN
execution with automatic write access to continuation tapes/optical
disks. This is useful if the generation to be saved is very large.
The tapes/optical disks can be mounted on arbitrary tape/optical
disk units; not mounted tapes/optical disks will be requested by the
system. The system will also check if the initialization of the
continuation tapes/optical disks is identical with that of the first
one.
NOTE: for copy to tape/optical disk:
The copy of a generation may only occur either on tape OR on
optical disk (e.g. if copy has been started on tape then the
continuation medium must be tape!).
A compound of both mediums is not allowed!
The first tape/optical disk specified in the VSN list, must be
initialized before the copy to tape/optical disk starts. For this
action one has to use the following command:
For tape:
<INIT MT:VSN=<tape VSN>,CD=EBC,DENS=6250,MTD=<#tape device>;
For optical disk (MOD):
<INIT MO:VSN=<mod VSN>,CD=EBC,MOD=<#mod device>;
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation to be copied. The default
value is the current generation.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COPY GEN- 4+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TYPE TYPE OF SAVE GENERATION
This parameter can be used (for OUTPUT = GEN or OUTPUT = TAPMOD)
to select whether a backup or golden generation is to be created. The
default value is BACKUP. For OUTPUT = FIX, the parameter TYPE is
not evaluated.
BACKUP BACKUP GENERATION
Creates a backup generation.
CP/SA: If the current generation is copied with
OUTPUT = GEN and a permanent backup
generation on disk is created, all other
fixpoint and backup generations on disk are
deleted. A warning is output in this case.
In case that OUTPUT = TAPMOD was specified,
no existing fixpoints or safeguard generations
on disk are deleted.
CP/MP: no automatic deletion of older generations
will occur
GOLDEN GOLDEN GENERATION
Creates a golden generation.
CP/SA:If the current generation is copied with
OUTPUT = GEN and a permanent golden
generation on disk is created, all other
fixpoint, backup and golden generations are
deleted. A warning is output in this case.
In case that OUTPUT = TAPMOD was specified,
no existing fixpoints or safeguard generations
on disk are deleted.
CP/MP: no automatic deletion of generations
will occur.
Default: BACKUP
VERIFY VERIFY CHECKSUM
This parameter specifies whether a checksum audit is to be initiated
during COPY GEN. If a copy on disk is created with this option,
checksum audits are initiated both for the generation files to be
copied and for their copies. In this way, the copying process disk to
disk can be checked. If a copy on tape/optical disk is created,
checksum audits are initiated for the source generation files, and the
calculated checksums, together with the copies, are transferred to
tape/optical disk. When writing to tape/optical disk, the consistency
of the checksum is not checked against the tape/optical disk contents.
This is not possible until the tape/optical disk contents have been
copied back to disk with the aid of command TRANS SYFILE using its
verify function.
If the result of the checksum check is negative, COPY GEN is aborted
with an error message. If, on the one hand, checksum errors are
reported for the source generation, the latter has been found to be
faulty before the start of COPY GEN. If, on the other hand, checksum
errors are reported for the destination generation, errors within
COPY GEN have occurred.
See also the description of the command parameter VERIFY belonging
to the command TRANS SYFILE.
YES ACTIVATE CHECKSUM
Checksum audit is initiated
Y ACTIVATE CHECKSUM
Checksum audit is initiated
NO DEACTIVATE CHECKSUM
No checksum audit is initiated
N DEACTIVATE CHECKSUM
No checksum audit is initiated
Default: YES
This parameter specifies the retention period of the copy on tape/
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COPY GEN- 5+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
optical disk in days, taken from the creation date. During this time
period the tape/optical disk copy is protected against erasure. If no
value or 0 days is given, the tape/optical disk copy is not protected
at all. If VSN is not specified or VSN = SYSVSN, i.e. if only a
copy on disk is required, this parameter is ignored.
REWIND REWIND TAPE
This parameter specifies whether the tape/optical disk should be
rewound/reset after execution of the command COPY GEN or not. The
default value is YES.
If REWIND = YES is specified, the tape/optical disk is rewound/
reset and released after execution of the command COPY GEN. Otherwise
the tape/optical disk is only released and
- subsequent commands (e.g. TRANS FILE) are allowed to continue
writing on the tape/optical disk mounted for COPY GEN
- access of following commands to this tape/optical disk can be
specified either by the tape/optical disk VSN or by the VSN of the
first tape/optical disk used for COPY GEN (File Group Name).
Therefore one is not forced to evaluate the actual VSN for following
commands, but can always refer to the static File Group Name.
YES REWIND TAPE
Y REWIND TAPE
NO DONT REWIND TAPE
N DONT REWIND TAPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 COPY GEN- 6-
DISP GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GENERATION
This command displays file generation information for specific files or
for file generations.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP GEN : [DISPL=] [,GEN=] [,LIB=] [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DISPL DISPLAY FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the information to be output.
GEN GENERATION
Displays the generations with which a file given
in LIB is associated. LIB is mandatory,
GEN and VSN are ignored.
FILES FILES
Displays all files of the generation specified
in GEN. If GEN is not specified, the file
list of the currently loaded generation
is output. LIB and VSN are ignored.
LIST GENERATION LIST
Outputs the entire generation list in edited form
if GEN is not input, otherwise the desired
generation. LIB is ignored.
If VSN is specified and VSN is not identical
with SYSVSN, the information of the generation
list is output from tape/optical disk, otherwise
from disk.
Entries VSN000 and VSN001 are not permissible.
Default: LIST
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation, the information of which is to
be output.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command
description for COPY GEN.
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies the library (i.e. generation file),
whose generation membership is to be output.
This parameter specifies whether either the generation information
of the disk or the tape/optical disk is to be output.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP GEN- 1-
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GENERATION
This command creates a new file generation. It is part of the file
generation concept of CP113.
A file generation is a summary of all system files of an APS.
This command enables to change or introduce systemfiles. Files that
are not changed will be taken from the current generation to the new.
It is possible to exclude classic GP-files (SY.PSW.nnn).
Depending on the state of the system the new generation will be set
valid and if necessary introduced into the system by recovery
immediately. Or it will be set blocked. The recovery level necessary
for bringing up the new generation will be ascertained automatically.
It results of the changed librarys.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR GEN : [LIB=] [,EXCLSMOD=] [,EXCLLMOD=] [,EXCLCPS=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,EXCLLTYP=] [,EXCLLIB=] [,ACTLEVEL=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a library which is to be taken into the new
generation. The library has to be a Core Image format. The type of
the library will be ascertained automatically. This parameter can be
linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode. The maximal number
of inputs is dependent on the type of library:
- resident CP-SW (Tasklib) (1)
- non resident software (Loadlib.L) (1)
- non resident masks (Loadlib.M) (1)
- non resident command descriptions (Loadlib.C) (1)
- loadlib for peripheral software (20)
- GP-Load for MP (1)
- GP-Load for AMX (1)
- GP-Load for IWU (1)
Non resident CP-librarys can be delta or basis libraries.
The libraries have to be available on disk. They have to be doubled
and non generation files. Files names beginning with KS. are not
allowed.
+,*,%
EXCLSMOD EXCLUDE SEMIP. DATA MODULE
This parameter specifies a data module of the semilib.
This parameter has a connection to the tasklib that was specified
by the LIB-parameter.
The data of the specified T/P-module will not be copied to the new
semilib.
This parameter can be linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR GEN- 1+
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
up to 50 times.
EXCLLMOD EXCLUDE LOAD MODULE
This parameter specifies a load module of a CP-loadlib.
This parameter has a connection to the library that was specified by
the LIB-parameter.
Only allowed if the new library is a delta library.
The specified load module is not taken to the new system loadlib.
for each CP-loadlib , up to 50 times.
EXCLCPS EXCLUDE CAPSULE
This parameter specifies a capsule of actual MPULIB.
The specified capsule will not be taken into the new system
library.
up to 20 times.
EXCLLTYP EXCLUDE LOAD TYPE
This parameter specifies a loadtype of actual MPULIB.
The specified loadtype and all capsules, belonging to this loadtype
only, will not be taken into the new system library.
up to 20 times.
EXCLLIB EXCLUDE LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a PSW-Lib of the actual generation that
should not be taken into the new generation.
up to 20 times.
+,*,%
ACTLEVEL ACTIVATION LEVEL
This parameter specifies how to introduce the new
generation into the system.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR GEN- 2+
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOACT NO ACTIVATION
The new generation will not be introduced into
the system. It will be set blocked
MINACT MINIMAL ACTIVATION
The new generation will be introduced into
the system without recovery.
LOWACT LOW ACTIVATION LEVEL
introduced into the system with the lowest
CP recovery level as possible. Peripheral
units have to be configured manually
afterwards.
GLOBACT GLOBAL ACTIVATION LEVEL
introduced into the system with the
recovery level needed to load all impacted
units.
Default: GLOBACT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR GEN- 3-
MERGE GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE GENERATION
This command creates a new generation which contains the code of that
source generation specified as GENTASKL and the semipermanent data
of that one specified as GENSEMIL. The files are solely assigned to
the new generation, that is, they are not copied physically.
Subsequently, the newly created generation is set to blocked.
With command MOD GEN, such a generation can be set to VALID and from
VALID to BLOCKED subsequently.
One of the two source generations must be the loaded generation that
is in operation. The first six characters of the generation names of both
source generations must be identical.
This command can be used to save an APS from backup by (a) combining it with
a saved Semilib in the case of an APS whose Semilib is destroyed but whose
code is O.K., or (b) by combining it with code files in the case of an APS
whose code is destroyed (by patches) but whose Semilib is O.K.
Input format
[ [
[ MERGE GEN : GENTASKL= ,GENSEMIL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GENTASKL FILE GENERATION OF TASKLIB
This parameter is used to specify the generation whose code is to be
transferred into the generation to be newly created, i.e., whose
tasklib, loadlibs and PSWlibs are to be used.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
GENSEMIL FILE GENERATION OF SEMILIB
This parameter is used to specify the generation whose semipermanent
data are to be transferred into the generation to be newly created,
i.e., whose files SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP are to be used.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GEN- 1+
MERGE GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GEN- 2-
MOD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GENERATION
This command changes the validity flag and the type of a generation.
The latter is possible only if the specified generation is
of type backup.
If the CP is running with a connected MP (CP/MP) then also the
generation compatibility sign (GCS) can be changed.
Fixpoints and combined (merged) generations are always blocked at the time
they are created (BLOCKED), backups and golden generations always valid
(VALID).
CP/MP: backup (BACKUP) and golden (GOLDEN) generations are always blocked
(BLOCKED) at the time they are created.
Status invalid is exclusively set by the system itself.
The valid flag defines the startup capability of a generation. It is of sig-
nificance for both current and non-current generations as well as for all
generation types. A valid generation can be selected for the automatic fall-
back. An invalid or blocked generation is not used for automatic fallbacks.
A manual startup, however, is also possible with blocked generations.
In the following cases, a required change of validity is rejected:
- The generation is neither blocked nor valid
- The generation is a valid current generation
- The generation is the initial generation
- The generation is the only valid golden generation on the disk
The change of type of generations which are of other type than of
backup is rejected.
The GCS of a generation can only be changed in CP/MP state.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD GEN : GEN= ,VALIDITY= [,TYPE=] [,GCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation whose validity flag is to be
changed. The current generation must not be specified.
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
VALIDITY VALIDITY OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies whether a generation is to be set to blocked
or to valid.
Status invalid is exclusively set by the system itself.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GEN- 1+
MOD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BLOCKED SET GENERATION BLOCKED
The generation will be set to blocked.
VALID SET GENERATION VALID
The generation will be set to valid.
TYPE NEW TYPE OF GENERATION
This parameter can be used to change the type of a generation
simultaneously with its validity. If no value is specified, the type
will be left unchanged.
It is only allowed to specify TYPE = GOLDEN for a generation of
initial type backup.
BACKUP BACKUP GENERATION
This parameter value is not permitted, i.e.
it is not allowed to change a generation of
TYPE = GOLDEN into BACKUP.
GOLDEN GOLDEN GENERATION
A generation of TYPE = BACKUP is changed
to GOLDEN.
GCS GENERATION COMPATIBILITY SIGN
This parameter can only be entered when the CP is running with a
connected MP.
It specifies the generation compatibility sign, i.e. the criterion
to find the compatible generation on the MP.
If this parameter is not entered the GCS will remain unchanged.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GEN- 2-
UPD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE GENERATION
This command is called after a double disk failure or when the Semilib of
the current generation is defective, invalid or no longer exists, in
order to restore an executable generation on disk and to continue system
operations.
UPD GEN can be used for saving the current status of the semipermanent
data during the debugging procedures for disk failures.
If the Semilib exists on disk after a double disk failure, the Semilib is
checked for compatibility with the semipermanent main memory area and is
then overwritten with the contents of the main memory area. If SY.SEMI-
LIB does not exist, it is newly created and overwritten with the contents
of the semipermanent main memory area of the CP (mass update).
UPD GEN does not perform a reconstruction of CCNC-Semilib SY.SIMP. Before
a command is executed, a check is made whether system file SY.SIMP, which
contains semipermanent CCNC data, is compatible with the current status of
the semipermanent main memory area in the CP.
Incompatibility may occur when, after a failure of the exchange, a SY.SIMP
with an old status has been read in with the aid of TRANS SYFILE. The
status of SY.SIMP is obsolete if CCNC commands have been processed between
the dump of this file and the failure. The SY.SIMP used before the failure
thus contains more recent entries which do not exist in the SY.SIMP read
in, but are in accordance with the current status of SY.SEMILIB. The SY.SIMP
read in is then not compatible with the current SY.SEMILIB.
The compatibility check consists of a checksum comparison between the
SY.SIMP read in (old status) and the checksum of the current SY.SIMP
stored in the main memory.
After a forced termination during the reconstruction with a recovery level
higher than a newstart of the processes without code or data reloading,
restoring the SY.SEMILIB is no longer possible. In this case, a recovery
with a safeguarding generation and an off-line disk reconstruction must be
carried out.
For general information on the generation concept, see command descrip-
tion for COPY GEN.
Input format
[ [
[ UPD GEN ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 UPD GEN- 1-
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD GRADE OF SERVICE
This command activates the recording function for grade-of-service data
for the entire exchange.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- The traffic data are output to MDD file every 15 minutes within
the selected measurement intervals.
UNIT=OMT is not permissible
for the grade-of-service measurement.
Input format
[ [
[ REC GOS : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GOS- 1+
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GOS- 2+
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GOS- 3+
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GOS- 4-
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD GROUP PROCESSOR
This command activates the recording function for the load data of the GP.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- A maximum of together 8 jobs of REC GP and REC LTG may be
entered at the same time.
Input format
[ [
[ REC GP : LTG= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the number of the LTG for which traffic
data have to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all LTG (LTG=X-X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY].
- Measurement of LTGSETS (LTG=n-X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY] (n = 0 to 31).
Notes:
- A maximum of 16 single LTG may linked per command.
- The single LTG list will be automaticaly expanded if the
single LTG is a Master or Slave LTG.
* LTG = Master
all Slaves will be added
* LTG = Slave
the Master LTG and all other Slaves will be added.
- A maximum of 8 LTGSETS may linked per command.
- It is not possible to combine single LTG and LTGSETS
in one Measurement Job.
- The maximum number of LTGs which can be measured
simultaneously with either job REC LTG or REC GP
is limited depending on the configuration. It is not
possible to start more than one job with LTG=X-X.
a-b
Dependent on the switching network hardware this unit
represents the time stage group (TSG for SNB) or the
switching network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GP- 1+
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the GP number.
unit values.
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
to the OMT.
Notes :
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced.
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GP- 2+
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
Notes:
must be specified.
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
midnight.
times only.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GP- 3+
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
Notes:
period
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC GP- 4-
CAN GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command cancels global title translation calling party address
conversion data.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- no calling party address conversion data is entered
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GTCGPACD : TRID= ,FNETW= ,TNETW= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
FNETW FROM NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the originating network.
TNETW TO NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the destinating network.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN GTCGPACD- 1-
DISP GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command displays the global title translation calling party address
conversion data of the concerned tree(s).
The command is stoppable with the STOP DISP command.
Notes:
- When no data was found for the query, the message "NO (MORE) DATA FOR
DISPLAY AVAILABLE" will be displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP GTCGPACD : TRID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP GTCGPACD- 1-
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command enters global title translation calling party address conversion
data for an existing digit tree in a gateway node.
Whenever a SCCP message is transferred to another network (in a gateway node),
it might be necessary to transform the calling party address (e.g. if we, as
gateway node, transfer a message from the national network to the international
network, we have to transform the national global title number to an
international number).
The calling party address depends on the following items:
- Translation type of the calling party address
- Numbering plan of the calling party address
- Nature of address of the calling party address
- The netwerk border to be crossed.
Prerequisites:
- The digit tree should first be created with the CR GTDIGTR
command.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR GTCGPACD : TRID= ,FNETW= ,TNETW= [,TTID=] [,NP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,NA=] [,DICON=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FNETW FROM NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the originating network.
TNETW TO NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the destinating network.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR GTCGPACD- 1+
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier for the
modified global title of the calling party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the TTID-value given in the CR GTDIGTR
command will be used for the modified global title.
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
MSCSMLC MSC TO SMLC ROUTING
MSCGMLC MSC TO GMLC ROUTING
LMUSMLC LOCATION MEAS UNIT TO SMLC
TT1 TRANSLATION TYPE 1
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the calling party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the NP-value given in the CR GTDIGTR
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the calling party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the NA-value given in the CR GTDIGTR
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
NATUSE NATIONAL USE
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
- insertion/append of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=00492134
DICON=..R32XXS
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR GTCGPACD- 4-
CAN GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command cancels a global title translation code point.
Prerequisites:
- Associated global title translation destinations have to be cancelled
prior to the execution of this command.
Notes:
- the global title digit pattern does not exist
- there is still a destination assigned to this code point
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN GTCPT- 1-
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command creates a global title translation code point.
This code point contains the information required for global title translation
purposes.
This command should be executed prior to the global title translation desti-
nation commands.
Prerequisites:
- The CR GTDIGTR command should be executed prior to the execution of
this command.
Notes:
- the global digit pattern exists already
- the code point digits or a part of the code point digits already
exist, e.g. :
The code point with GTDIG = 1234 already exists.
An attempt to create a code point with GTDIG = 12 or
GTDIG = 123456 will be rejected.
- a GTT database table is saturated
Input format
[ [
[ CR GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [,DICON=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [,TTID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTCPT- 1+
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- insertion of digits
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
NP NUMBERING PLAN
title of the called party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the same NP-value as given in the
CR GTDIGTR will be used.
global title of the called party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the same NA-value as given in the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTCPT- 2+
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
If the parameter is omitted, the same TTID-value as given in the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTCPT- 3+
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTCPT- 4+
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
It is only applicable for global titles with TTID=IMSI. The
parameter is used by internal applications (e.g. traffic data
recording) to discriminate the destination of the global title
without analysing the global title digits.
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTCPT- 5-
DISP GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command displays the global title translation code point.
If the GTDIG parameter is omitted, all the code point information of the
requested digit tree(s), identified by the translator identification, will be
displayed.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP GTCPT : TRID= [,GTDIG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
If the parameter is omitted, all the code points of the concerned
TRID will be displayed.
a[-b[-c]]
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP GTCPT- 1-
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command merges a global title translation code point.
Parallel code points are code points that have all but their last digit
in common. If such code points ( and their associated destination
information ) exist, merging cancels those parallel code points (
and the associated destination ) and creates a new code point with a new
destination.
Compared with the parallel code points, the new code point has the
parallel code points digit combination, shortened by the last digit.
The digit combination of the new code point is given in the GTDIG
parameter.
The new code point can have one of the following destination types :
- LTG processor number in the own switch
- internal route, i.e. signaling point in the own area
- translator service group
- subsystem group
- retranslation in the own node.
The route parameter decides which optional parameter values should be entered.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must have been created.
- The global title translation code points to be merged must have been created.
- The global title translation destinations of the code points to be
merged, must have been created.
- The particular destination route ( e.g. a translator service group )
must have been created in the SCCP database.
Notes:
- no parallel code points exist
- one or more parallel code points do not have associated destination
information
- one or more parallel code points have associated destination
information that requires retranslation in the own node
- the particular destination route does not exist in the SCCP
database
- the new code point exists already
- a specific global title translation database table is saturated
1. MERGE GTCPT - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
2. MERGE GTCPT - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
3. MERGE GTCPT - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
4. MERGE GTCPT - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
5. MERGE GTCPT - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in the own area
as a global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The specified destination point code must have been created.
- The specified subsystem must have been created.
[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= [
[ [
[ [,SSID=] [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 1+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the global title digits of the new code point.
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 2+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT1=
Default: 0
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT2=
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT3=
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT4=
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
Default: INAT0
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the subsystem identification.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
BISDN BROADBAND ISDN
BSAPLC BSSAP PLUS ON CP
BSAPLCE BSSAP LOCATION SERVICES EXT
BSAPLM BSSAP PLUS ON MP
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 3+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GGPRSN GATEWAY GPRS SUPPORT NODE
GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
GSMSCF GSM SERVICE CONTROL FUNCTION
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
IS41AC AC CONFORM IS41 STANDARD
IS41EIR EIR CONFORM IS41 STANDARD
IS41HLR HLR CONFORM IS41 STANDARD
IS41IGAP IGAP CONFORM IS41 STANDARD
IS41MSC MSC CONFORM IS41 STANDARD
IS41SMS SMS CONFORM IS41 STANDARD
IS41VLR VLR CONFORM IS41 STANDARD
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
OSUN1 OPEN SERVICE UNIT 1
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
RANAP RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPL PART
SGPRSN SERVING GPRS SUPPORT NODE
SMLC SERVING MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
TCTR TC TEST RESPONDER
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTOP TEST USER PART OPERATION
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 4+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 5+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 6+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
It is only applicable for global titles with TTID=IMSI.
The parameter is used by internal applications (e.g. traffic
data recording) to discriminate the destination of the global
title without analyzing the global title digits.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 7+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 8+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a LTG processor number as a
global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG has to exist. For this purpose, the CR LTG command has
to be executed prior to the MERGE GTCPT command.
[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,LTGNR= ,NI= [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
signaling point.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 9+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
account )
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
This parameter specifies the LTG a message has to be relayed to by
the CP.
a-b
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and upper ones)
Default: 0
Default: INAT0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 10+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 11+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 12+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 13+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 14+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 15+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a linked code point as a
Prerequisites :
- The specified LTRID must have been created.
[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,DICON=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TTID=] [,ND=] ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
RETRANS RETRANSLATION IN OWN NODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 16+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
NP NUMBERING PLAN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 17+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 18+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 19+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LTRID LINKED TRANSLATOR IDENTIF.
This parameter specifies the linked translator identification.
RDIG RETRANSLATION DIGIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the first digit to be retranslated in the
own node.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 20+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a subsystem group as a
Prerequisites:
- The subsystem group must have been created.
[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,SSG= [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [,ND=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 21+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
This parameter specifies the subsystem group.
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 22+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 23+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 24+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 25+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 26+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a translator service group as a
Prerequisites:
- The translator service group must have been created.
[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,TRLG= [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 27+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRLG TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies the translator service group.
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 28+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 29+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 30+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 31+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NATOWN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 32-
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command modifies the global title translation code point.
Omitted parameters will not be taken into account, i.e. they keep their
current values.
Prerequisites:
- The CR GTDIGTR and CR GTCPT commands should be executed prior to
the execution of this command.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= <,DICON= ,NP= ,NA= ,TTID= ,ND=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTCPT- 1+
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ : The digit values following this control character are to beinserted
or to be appended in the corresponding position.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code, from
the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
NP NUMBERING PLAN
NA NATURE OF ADDR. INDICATOR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTCPT- 2+
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTCPT- 3+
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the new network discriminator.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTCPT- 4-
SPLIT GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPLIT GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command splits a global title translation code point.
Starting from an existing code point, NUM new global title code
points will be made. Compared to the old code point, the new code points
all have 1 different extra digit, ranging from 0 to ( NUM - 1 ).
All new code points get the same destination information as was
associated with the old code point.
The old code point - and its associated destination information - is
cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must be created.
- The global title translation code point to be split must be created.
- The codepoint associated global title translation destination
information must be created.
Notes:
- there is no destination assigned to this code point
- the destination assigned to this code point requires retranslation
in the own node
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ SPLIT GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [,NUM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT GTCPT- 1+
SPLIT GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NUM NUMBER OF NEW CODEPOINTS
This parameter specifies the number of new codepoints.
It denotes :
- how many ( NUM ) new code points will be created
- the range of the extra digit : 0 to (NUM-1).
Default: 10
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SPLIT GTCPT- 2-
CAN GTDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command cancels a global title translation destination.
Notes:
- there is no destination assigned to this code point
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN GTDEST- 1-
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command creates a global title translation destination.
Six types of destinations are possible:
- LTG processor number in the own switch
- internal route, i.e. signaling point in the own area
- translator service group
- subsystem group
- retranslation in the own node.
The route parameter decides which optional parameter values should be entered.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation code point must have been created.
- The particular objects the route is referring to must have been
created in the SCCP or GTT database.
Notes:
- the code point does not exist
- the required SCCP or GTT objects are not available
- a destination exists already for this codepoint
1. CR GTDEST - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
2. CR GTDEST - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
3. CR GTDEST - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
4. CR GTDEST - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
5. CR GTDEST - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in the own area
as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 1+
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 2+
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DBC DEBIT CENTER
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 3+
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 4+
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format is used for creating a LTG processor number as a
global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
to be executed prior to the CR GTDEST command.
[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,LTGNR= ,NI= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 5+
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the CP.
a-b
Default: 0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 6+
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 7+
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 8+
CR GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a linked code point.
Prerequisites :
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
own node.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 9+
CR GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 10+
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
This input format is used for creating a subsystem group as a global title
translation destination.
Prerequisites:
[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,SSG= [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 11+
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 12+
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 13+
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
This input format is used for creating a translator service group as
a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,TRLG= [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 14+
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 15+
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDEST- 16-
DISP GTDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command displays the global title translation destination information.
If the GTDIG parameter is omitted, all the destination information of the
requested digit tree(s), identified by the translator identification, will be
displayed.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP GTDEST : TRID= [,GTDIG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
If the parameter is omitted, the associated destination information
of all codepoints of the concerned TRID will be displayed.
a[-b[-c]]
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP GTDEST- 1-
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command modifies a global title translation destination.
Six types of destinations are possible ( see CR GTDEST ).
Parameters are treated as in the CR GTDEST command :
- all mandatory parameters have to be entered
- the default values as defined will be taken into account.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation code point must have been created.
- A global title translation destination must have been created for
the code point.
- The particular objects the route is referring to must have been
created in the SCCP or GTT database.
Notes:
- the code point does not exist
- no destination exists for this codepoint
- the required SCCP or GTT objects are not available
1. MOD GTDEST - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
2. MOD GTDEST - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
3. MOD GTDEST - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
4. MOD GTDEST - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
5. MOD GTDEST - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for modifying a signaling point in the own
area as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ,DPC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NI= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 1+
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
Standard behaviour :
account )
CRTGP CANCEL ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences which are to be set
to their default values before ( eventually ) taking into account the
RTGP parameter.
CRTGP=CANGT indicates that the global title will be kept.
CRTGP=PGTT indicates that no global title translation is
CRTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address does not
contain a signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, it is not taken into account.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 2+
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
Default: 0
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 3+
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 4+
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format is used for modifying a LTG processor number
as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
to be executed prior to the MOD GTDEST command.
[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,LTGNR= ,NI= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 5+
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP parameter.
the CP.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 6+
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DBC DEBIT CENTER
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 7+
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 8+
MOD GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This format is used for creating a linked code point.
Prerequisites :
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
own node.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 9+
MOD GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 10+
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
This input format is used for modifying a subsystem group as a global
title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ,SSG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 11+
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP parameter.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 12+
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 13+
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
This input format is used for modifying a translator service group as a
global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,TRLG= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a[-b[-c]]
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
destination.
signaling point.
account )
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 14+
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP parameter.
DBC DEBIT CENTER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 15+
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INMP1 IN FOR MP 1
INMP2 IN FOR MP 2
INMP3 IN FOR MP 3
INMP4 IN FOR MP 4
INMP5 IN FOR MP 5
ISUP ISDN USER PART
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDEST- 16-
CAN GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command cancels a global title translation digit tree.
Prerequisites:
- Associated global title translation destinations, code points and
calling party address conversion data have to be cancelled prior to
the execution of this command.
- Retranslated code points linked to this translator identification
have to be cancelled prior to the execution of this command
( see parameter LTRID in the commands CR GTDEST, MOD GTDEST and
MERGE GTCPT ).
Notes:
- there are still global title translation calling party address
conversion data assigned to this translator identification
- there are still global title digit patterns associated with this
translator identification
- there are still retranslated global title code points linked to
this translator identification
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GTDIGTR : TRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN GTDIGTR- 1-
CR GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command creates a global title translation digit tree.
When signalling points in other CCS7 networks than the own one have to be
addressed, a signalling point code cannot be used, because a signalling point in
one CCS7 network cannot address the signalling points of all other CCS7
networks. So a global title is needed in order to have a world wide address
capability.
The global title, which may be the international ISDN number of a mobile
subscriber for instance, cannot be used for direct routing by the MTP, but will
be translated to an appropriate signalling point code by the SCCP.
This signalling point code is derived
- by evaluating the parameters of the global title (TTID, NP, NA)
- by a digit translation.
Several translations can be necessary until the final destination is reached.
The global title translation function is only available in the CP.
This command should be executed prior to all other global title transla-
tion commands (except the DISP GTDIGTR command).
Notes:
- the translator identification already exists
- the associated translator identification-parameters are already
assigned to another translator identification
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred
- a GTT database table is saturated.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR GTDIGTR : TRID= ,TTID= ,NP= ,NA= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers
to a certain digit tree.
This parameter specifies the translation type identification.
The TTID refers to the root of a digit tree.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDIGTR- 1+
CR GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDIGTR- 2+
CR GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan.
The first digit of the tree root is always the NP-digit.
This parameter specifies the nature of address indicator.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDIGTR- 3+
CR GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR GTDIGTR- 4-
DISP GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command displays the global title translation digit tree information.
The TTID, NP and NA parameters allow a selective display. When a
parameter is omitted, all the corresponding values will be taken into
account.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP GTDIGTR : TRID= [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the translation type identification.
The TTID refers to the root of a digit tree.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP GTDIGTR- 1+
DISP GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP GTDIGTR- 2+
DISP GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan.
This parameter specifies the nature of address indicator.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP GTDIGTR- 3-
MOD GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DIGIT TREE
This command modifies the global title translation digit tree information.
Omitted parameters will not be taken into account.
Prerequisites:
- The CR GTDIGTR command should be executed prior to the execution of
this command.
Notes:
- the associated translator identification parameters are already
assigned to another translator identification
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD GTDIGTR : TRID= <,TTID= ,NP= ,NA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDIGTR- 1+
MOD GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDIGTR- 2+
MOD GTDIGTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan.
This parameter specifies the new nature of address indicator.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD GTDIGTR- 3-
DISP H323SC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display H323 Stack Configuration
This task displays the H.323 stack configuration.
Output Parameters:
GatekeeperDiscovery:
The gatekeeper discovery method
GatekeeperIpAddress:
The IP address of the gatekeeper currently being used.
GatekeeperOperState:
The operational state of the gatekeeper discovery and communication.
GatekeeperTimeStamp:
Time stamp of last change of hiH323GatekeeperOperState.
PrimaryGatekeeperIpAddress:
The IP address of the primary gatekeeper. In manual discovery mode, this
gatekeeper is addressed first.
In automatic mode this gatekeeper is addressed only if automatic discovery failed.
SecondaryGatekeeperIpAddress:
The IP address of the secondary (backup) gatekeeper.
ResponseTimeout:
The amount of time, in seconds, the Stack waits until it notifies the application
that the called party has failed to respond to a transaction.
CallSignallingPort:
The number of the port that receives the calls directed to the current endpoint.
MaxCalls:
The number of simultaneous H323-calls in the endpoint allowed by administration.
The maximum number of actual calls may be restricted further by system internal
limitations.
GatekeeperId:
Identifier for Identification of Gatekeeper.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP H323SC : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the Packet Control Unit (PCU) on CoPl.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP H323SC- 1-
MOD H323SC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify H323 Stack Configuration
This task modifies the H323 stack configuration.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD H323SC : EQN= [,GatekeeperDiscovery=] [
[ [
[ [,PrimaryGatekeeperIpAddress=] [
[ [
[ [,SecondaryGatekeeperIpAddress=] [,ResponseTimeout=] [
[ [
[ [,CallSignallingPort=] [,MaxCalls=] [,GatekeeperId=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
GatekeeperDiscovery
The gatekeeper discovery method.
PrimaryGatekeeperIpAddress
The IP address of the primary gatekeeper. In manual discovery
mode, this gatekeeper is addressed first. In automatic mode
this gatekeeper is addressed only if automatic discovery failed.
SecondaryGatekeeperIpAddress
The IP address of the secondary (backup) gatekeeper.
ResponseTimeout
The amount of time, in seconds, the Stack
waits until it notifies the application that the
called party has failed to respond to a transaction.
CallSignallingPort
The number of the port that receives the
calls directed to the current endpoint.
MaxCalls
The number of simultaneous calls in the endpoint allowed by
administration. The maximum number of actual calls may be restricted
further by system internal limitations.
GatekeeperId
Identifier for Identification of Gatekeeper.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD H323SC- 1-
DISP H323SECC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display H323 Security Configuration
This task displays the H323 security configuration.
Output Parameters:
Password:
Password for authentication with Gatekeeper.
TimeWindow:
Used for protection against replay attacks.
SecurityProfile:
Security profile.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP H323SECC : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP H323SECC- 1-
MOD H323SECC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify H323 Security Configuration
This task modifies the H323 security configuration.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD H323SECC : EQN= [,Password=] [,TimeWindow=] [,SecurityProfile=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Password
Password for authentication with Gatekeeper.
TimeWindow
Used for protection against replay attacks.
SecurityProfile
Security profile.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD H323SECC- 1-
CAN HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL HOLIDAY
This command cancels one or two holidays.
The holiday can either be specified by DATE only or by DATE and
WDCAT.
If there are two entries for a date in the holiday table,
both existing entries are canceled with one CAN HOLIDAY command
if specified by DATE only.
Prerequisites:
- The command is rejected if the holiday does not exist or the time
is not SECURE.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN HOLIDAY : DATE= [,WDCAT=] [,FEAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the holiday date.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
Notes:
- X means fix holidays.
- The value 0 represents the year 2000.
unit values.
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
This parameter specifies the holiday category.
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the charging feature of the calendar group for
which a holiday calendar is to be canceled.
For fix networks this parameter is optional, for mobile networks it can
be optional depending on the released features. As a default COMMON
will be taken.
COMMON FIX NET CHARGING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN HOLIDAY- 1+
CAN HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MCHARGE MOBILE CHARGING
Default: COMMON
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN HOLIDAY- 2-
DISP HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HOLIDAY
This command displays holidays.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP HOLIDAY : [FEAT=] [,YEAR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FEAT FEATURE
which a holiday calendar is to be displayed.
will be taken.
Default: COMMON
YEAR CALENDAR YEAR
This parameter specifies the year of the calendar group for
which a holiday calendar is to be displayed.
Notes:
- If "X" is entered for the year, a holiday calendar is displayed
which contains holiday dates fixed for every year (e.g.
Christmas). If the year is entered, a holiday calendar is
displayed which contains the specific holiday dates for that
year (e.g. Easter).
- Fixed holiday dates can also be displayed in the year specific
holiday calendars.
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP HOLIDAY- 1-
ENTR HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER HOLIDAY
This command enters holidays.
Prerequisites:
- The time must be secure.
Following types of holidays can be entered:
- 13 fixed international half holidays (category HH).
- 13 fixed international full holidays (category HO).
- 13 fixed national full holidays (category HN).
- 16 movable international full holidays per year (category HO)
for 30 years.
- 16 movable national full holidays per year (category HN)
for 30 years.
Notes:
- When <year> = X is entered, the date entered is interpreted as
a fixed holiday applicable for every year and the date does
not change from year to year.
- When <year> is entered, the date is interpreted as a movable
holiday only applicable in the specified year.
- Movable holidays must be specified each year and the date
changes from year to year.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR HOLIDAY : DATE= ,WDCAT= [,FEAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the holiday date.
Notes:
- All linked parameters must be for same year.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
Notes:
unit values.
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
This parameter specifies the holiday category.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR HOLIDAY- 1+
ENTR HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HH HALF HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HO FULL HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HN FULL HOLIDAY NATIONAL
FEAT FEATURE
which a holiday calendar is to be created.
will be taken.
Default: COMMON
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR HOLIDAY- 2-
CAN HOPFEAT
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL THE HOT OPERATION FEATURE
This command cancels the hot operation feature.
1. CAN HOPFEAT - IP HOT BILLING ON MP VIA IP
2. CAN HOPFEAT - X25 HOT BILLING ON CP VIA X25
1. Input format
HOT BILLING ON MP VIA IP
This input format cancels the hot operation feature on MP via IP.
[ [
[ CAN HOPFEAT : HOPFEAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HOPFEAT HOT OPERATION FEATURE NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the hot operation
feature.
Notes :
- It is only possible to cancel the hot operation feature after
a previous de-activation of all the activated individual hot
operation feature(s). A de-activation of the individual hot
operation is done by the MML-command CAN IAFEAT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN HOPFEAT- 1+
CAN HOPFEAT
X25
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
HOT BILLING ON CP VIA X25
This input format cancels the hot operation feature on CP via X25.
[ [
[ CAN HOPFEAT : HOPFEAT= ,BUFFID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
feature.
Notes :
- It is only possible to cancel the hot operation feature after
a previous de-activation of all the activated individual hot
operation feature(s). A de-activation of the individual hot
operation is done by the MML-command CAN IAFEAT.
BUFFID BUFFER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the buffer
identification.
Notes :
- Currently the following buffer identifications are allowed :
HOPS1, HOPS2, HOPL1, HOPL2.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN HOPFEAT- 2-
CR HOPFEAT
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE THE HOT OPERATION FEATURE
This command creates the hot operation feature.
Notes :
- The activation of the hot operation feature must be done by
the MML-command ACT IAFEAT.
- When using hot billing via X.25, the following fixed X.25
application identifications have to be created with the
MML-command $CR APPL$, parameter $APPLID$ : HOPLE (local)
and HOPRE (remote).
1. CR HOPFEAT - IP HOT BILLING ON MP VIA IP
2. CR HOPFEAT - X25 HOT BILLING ON CP VIA X25
1. Input format
This input format creates the hot operation feature on MP via IP.
[ [
[ CR HOPFEAT : HOPFEAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
feature.
This hot operation feature name can be common to several applications
Symbolic character set consists of :
- letter : A | B | ..... | Y | Z
- digit : 0 | 1 | ..... | 8 | 9
- special values : + | # | * | % | .
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR HOPFEAT- 1+
CR HOPFEAT
X25
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format creates the hot operation feature on CP via X25.
[ [
[ CR HOPFEAT : HOPFEAT= ,BUFFID= ,PRIDEST1= [,PRIDEST2=] [
[ [
[ [,ALTDEST1=] [,ALTDEST2=] [,APPLID=] [,OUTTIMER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
feature.
This hot operation feature name can be common to several applications
Symbolic character set consists of :
- letter : A | B | ..... | Y | Z
- digit : 0 | 1 | ..... | 8 | 9
- special values : + | # | * | % | .
identification.
Notes :
- HOPS1 and HOPS2 refer to buffers designed for * real time *
applications. The size of each of these buffers is small.
Any output timer can be assigned to each of these applications.
- HOPL1 and HOPL2 refer to buffers designed for * near real time *
applications. The size of each of these buffers is large.
Only an output timer with a minimum value of 1 minute can be
assigned to each of these applications.
PRIDEST1 PRIMARY DESTINATION 1
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the first primary
destination.
Notes :
- This destination is identical to the symbolic processor name
entered by the MML-command CR PRO.
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the second primary
destination.
Notes :
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR HOPFEAT- 2+
CR HOPFEAT
X25
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALTDEST1 ALTERNATIVE DESTINATION 1
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the first alternative
destination.
Notes :
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the second alternative
destination.
Notes :
This parameter specifies the application identification.
Notes :
- The default value is 1.
OUTTIMER OUTPUT TIMER
This parameter specifies the time period for the
periodic saving of the hot operation buffer to the
remote partner.
Notes :
- The default value is 2 minutes.
a[-b]
a: MINUTES=
b: SECONDS=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR HOPFEAT- 3-
DISP HOPFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY THE HOT OPERATION FEATURES
This command displays the hot operation features.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP HOPFEAT : [HOPFEAT=] [,BUFFID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
feature.
identification.
Notes :
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP HOPFEAT- 1-
MOD HOPFEAT
IP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY THE HOT OPERATION FEATURE
This command modifies the hot operation feature.
1. MOD HOPFEAT - IP HOT BILLING ON MP VIA IP
2. MOD HOPFEAT - X25 HOT BILLING ON CP VIA X25
1. Input format
This input format modifies the hot operation feature on MP via IP.
[ [
[ MOD HOPFEAT : HOPFEAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
feature.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD HOPFEAT- 1+
MOD HOPFEAT
X25
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format modifies the hot operation feature on CP via X25.
The parameters HOPFEAT, BUFFID, OUTTIMER are currently allowed.
The other parameters are possibly subject to further stipulations.
[ [
[ MOD HOPFEAT : HOPFEAT= ,BUFFID= [,PRIDEST1=] [,PRIDEST2=] [
[ [
[ [,ALTDEST1=] [,ALTDEST2=] [,APPLID=] [,OUTTIMER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
feature.
identification.
Notes :
- HOPS1 and HOPS2 refer to buffers designed for * real time *
applications. The size of each of these buffers is small.
Any output timer can be assigned to each of these applications.
- HOPL1 and HOPL2 refer to buffers designed for * near real time *
applications. The size of each of these buffers is large.
Only an output timer with a minimum value of 1 minute can be
assigned to each of these applications.
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the first primary
destination.
Notes :
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the second primary
destination.
Notes :
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD HOPFEAT- 2+
MOD HOPFEAT
X25
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the first alternative
destination.
Notes :
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the second alternative
destination.
Notes :
This parameter specifies the application identification.
OUTTIMER OUTPUT TIMER
periodic saving of the hot operation buffer to the
remote partner.
Notes :
- The default value is 2 minutes.
a[-b]
a: MINUTES=
b: SECONDS=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD HOPFEAT- 3-
STAT HOPFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY THE STATUS OF THE OPERATION LINK
This command displays the status of the hot operation feature link.
Input format
[ [
[ STAT HOPFEAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT HOPFEAT- 1-
ACT HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command is used to activate the hard to reach
control feature for destinations.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT HTRCDEST ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT HTRCDEST- 1-
DACT HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command is used to deactivate the hard to reach control
feature.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT HTRCDEST ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT HTRCDEST- 1-
DISP HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command displays the hard to reach control criteria.
The output is determined by the parameter FUNC.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP HTRCDEST : FUNC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FUNC FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the information that will be
output.
The following values can be entered:
STATUS for output of status of Hard to Reach
Control Destination Function
MON for output of all Monitored Destinations.
CNTL for output of all Controlled Destinations
(Automatic and Manual).
MON&CNTL for output of all Monitored and Automatic
Controlled Destinations.
STATUS STATUS
The status of the hard to reach control function.
MON MONITORING
The list of information concerning monitoring.
CNTL CONTROLLING OF HARD TO REACH
The list of information concerning controlling.
Default: STATUS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP HTRCDEST- 1-
MOD HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD HARD TO REACH CONTROL DESTINATION
This command modifies the criteria for hard to reach control.
The values for the parameters FUNC, ASR, MINCALLS,
NDICO and CDICO will overwrite the old values.
The parameter CDICO can be entered alone without any other
parameter.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [FUNC= [ [
[ MOD HTRCDEST : CDICO= [,NDICO=] [,ASR=] [,MINCALLS=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FUNC FUNCTION
This parameter specifies which function is required:
Monitoring and/or Controlling.
MON MONITORING
CNTL CONTROLLING
CDICO CANCEL DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter defines the digit combination that will be
canceled from control or monitoring lists.
NDICO NEW DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter defines digit combination to be monitored
and / or controlled.
Note: The Operator must be careful not to input an invalid
digit combination under measurement.If a digit combination
to be measured is too big and not valid (e.g. 0402807490),
the calls to the smaller valid digit combination
(e.g. 040280749) can not be performed.
ASR ANSWER SEIZURE RATIO THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the answer seizure ratio threshold
for the automatic recognition of hard to reach destinations.
To be recognized as a hard to reach destination, the answer
seizure ratio of a destination must be lower than or equal to
ASR.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD HTRCDEST- 1+
MOD HTRCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINCALLS MINIMUM OF CALLS PER 5 MIN
This parameter defines the number of calls that must be exceded
for a destination to be considered a hard to reach
destination.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD HTRCDEST- 2-
CAN IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IACHASTA OBJECT
This command cancels an IACHASTA object for a trunk group, a directory
number block, an announcement group, a private branch exchange,
a digital line unit, a V5 interface, a destination or a statistic index.
Notes:
For the canceling of an object, several cases can occur:
1/ There are other call processing elements (trunk groups, DN-blocks, etc.)
for the same object:
In this case, the IACHASTA object itself is not deleted. Only the connection
between the specified element and the object is canceled.
2/ No further elements exist for the object and the object does not participate
(i.e. as the origin, destination or destination classification) in an active
IACHASTA registration point. In this case, the object is immediately canceled.
3/ No further elements exist for the object but the object still participates
in an active registration point.
The command is rejected. All registration points for this object must be
canceled before the object itself can be canceled.
1. CAN IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. CAN IACOBJ - DEST DESTINATION
3. CAN IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
4. CAN IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
5. CAN IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
6. CAN IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
7. CAN IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
8. CAN IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a recorded
announcement group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,ANGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This parameter specifies a recorded announcement group.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 1+
CAN IACOBJ
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a destination.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies a destination.
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 2+
CAN IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a digital line unit.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DLU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies a digital line unit.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 3+
CAN IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a directory number block.
The parameter DN refers to the first directory number of the directory
number block.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 4+
CAN IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a private branch exchange.
The parameter DN refers to the pilot directory number of the private
branch exchange.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
YES YES (PBX)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 5+
CAN IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a statistic index
assigned to a zone point.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,STAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
STAT STATISTIC INDEX
This parameter specifies a statistic index assigned to a zone point.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 6+
CAN IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a trunk group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies a trunk group number.
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 7+
CAN IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a V5 interface.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,V5IF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
This parameter specifies a V5 interface.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 8-
CR IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IACHASTA OBJECT
This command creates an IACHASTA object for a trunk group, a directory
number block, an announcement group, a private branch exchange,
a digital line unit, a V5 interface, a destination or a statistic index.
This object can then be used as the origin or destination of an
IACHASTA registration point. The same object name can be used for
multiple call processing elements of the same or a different type.
Exception: objects created for a destination, with the additional
destination classification unit can only be used for multiple
call processing elements of the same kind, i.e. destinations.
If the object is created for a destination with the additional unit for
destination classification, then the object can additionally be used
for destination classification of an IACHASTA registration point.
1. CR IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. CR IACOBJ - DEST DESTINATION
3. CR IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
4. CR IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
5. CR IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
6. CR IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
7. CR IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
8. CR IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a recorded
announcement group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,ANGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 1+
CR IACOBJ
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a destination.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
DEST DESTINATION
a[-b]
a: DESTINATION=
.
b: DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter unit specifies whether the object is created as
a destination classification object. If so, only destinations
can be assigned to it and it can be used for the creation of
registration points with destination classification.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 2+
CR IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a digital line unit.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DLU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 3+
CR IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a directory number block.
number block.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 4+
CR IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a private branch exchange.
branch exchange.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
YES YES (PBX)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 5+
CR IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a statistic index
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,STAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 6+
CR IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a trunk group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 7+
CR IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a V5 interface.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,V5IF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACOBJ- 8-
DISP IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA OBJECT
This command displays IACHASTA objects. The output depends
on the input format used.
1. DISP IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. DISP IACOBJ - DEST DESTINATION
3. DISP IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
4. DISP IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
5. DISP IACOBJ - OBJ OBJECT
6. DISP IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
7. DISP IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
8. DISP IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
9. DISP IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a recorded announcement
group.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : ANGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 1+
DISP IACOBJ
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a destination.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : DEST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 2+
DISP IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a digital line unit.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 3+
DISP IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a directory number block.
number block.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 4+
DISP IACOBJ
OBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
OBJECT
When a specific IACHASTA object name is entered, this input format
displays all elements (trunk groups, directory number blocks, ...)
connected to that object.
When the value "X" is entered for parameter OBJ, an alphabetical
list of all existing IACHASTA objects (i.e. names) is displayed.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : OBJ= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies an IACHASTA object name.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 5+
DISP IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a private branch exchange.
branch exchange.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
YES YES (PBX)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 6+
DISP IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a statistic index
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : STAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 7+
DISP IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a trunk group.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 8+
DISP IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a V5 interface.
[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : V5IF= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 9-
ACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command activates an IACHASTA registration immediately or at the specified
date and time. The registration will be deactivated automatically if a
termination time is specified.
1. ACT IACRG - AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
2. ACT IACRG - MET METERING REGISTRATION
1. Input format
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This input format activates a ticketing registration.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT IACRG : OUT= [,ALLTRAFF=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type. When metering is chosen,
the call data are added on counters. When ticketing is chosen,
the call data are written in separate tickets.
ALLTRAFF ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
This parameter specifies whether all traffic combinations must be
registered without reference to the IACHASTA registration point
database.
N NOT ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
NO NOT ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
Y ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
YES ALL TRAFFIC COMBINATIONS
Default: NO
BEG BEGIN DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the activation time for the registration.
If the parameter is omitted, the registration is activated
immediately.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IACRG- 1+
ACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
TER TERMINATION DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the deactivation date and time for
a registration. If the parameter is omitted, continuous
registration is activated.
a-b-c-d
d: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IACRG- 2+
ACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERING REGISTRATION
This input format activates a metering registration.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT IACRG : OUT= ,RGPTTYPE= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,FILEEXT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type. When metering is chosen,
the call data are added on counters. When ticketing is chosen,
the call data are written in separate tickets.
MET METERING
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided or
double sided or mixed single/double sided) for which the registration
is activated.
It must be identical to the value that was used for activation.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
MIXED MIXED
SINGLE SINGLE
BEG BEGIN DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the activation time for the registration.
If the parameter is omitted, the registration is activated
immediately.
a-b-c-d
d: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
TER TERMINATION DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the deactivation date and time for
a registration. If the parameter is omitted, continuous
registration is activated.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IACRG- 3+
ACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
FILEEXT FILE EXTENSION
This parameter specifies the file extension. It offers the
possibility of labeling the account files made for the activated
meter registrations.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IACRG- 4-
DACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command deactivates an IACHASTA registration.
1. DACT IACRG - AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
2. DACT IACRG - MET METERING REGISTRATION
1. Input format
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This input format deactivates a ticketing registration.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT IACRG : OUT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT IACRG- 1+
DACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERING REGISTRATION
This input format deactivates a metering registration.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT IACRG : OUT= ,RGPTTYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type.
MET METERING
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided or
double sided or mixed single/double sided) for which the registration
is deactivated. It must be identical to the value that was used for
activation.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
MIXED MIXED
SINGLE SINGLE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT IACRG- 2-
DISP IACRG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command displays the status and characteristics of all activated
IACHASTA registrations.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IACRG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACRG- 1-
CAN IACRGPT
ANONYM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command cancels an anonymous or named IACHASTA registration point
or removes an origin/destination/destination classification object
combination from a named registration point.
Notes:
For the canceling of a registration point, several cases can occur:
1/ There are other origin/destination/destination classification object
combinations created for the same named registration point.
In this case, the link with the named registration point is canceled,
the registration point itself is not deleted.
2/ No further origin/destination/destination classification object
combinations exist and no registration is active for the specified
registration point.
In this case, the registration point is immediately canceled.
3/ No further origin/destination/destination classification object
combinations exist and a registration is active for the specified
registration point.
In this case, the registration point is placed in an inactive status.
The registration point remains inactive until accounting (automatic or
forced by MML) for the registration has taken place. The registration
point is then canceled automatically.
1. CAN IACRGPT - ANONYM ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
2. CAN IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
1. Input format
ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
This input format cancels an anonymous registration point.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACRGPT- 1+
CAN IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
This input format cancels a named registration point.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [,DESTCLSF=] ,RGPT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination classification
object for the definition of the registration point.
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IACRGPT- 2-
CR IACRGPT
AMAANON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command creates an IACHASTA registration point.
In general this means that an output type (AMA and/or metering)
is assigned to the specified combination of origin and/or
destination objects and eventually a destination classification
object.The specified combination can be a single registration point
(OBJORIG specified OR OBJDEST specified), which means that
only traffic is registered with IACHASTA, routed over the specified
object(s). The specified combination can also be a double registration
point (OBJORIG specified AND OBJDEST specified), which means
that only traffic is registered with IACHASTA, routed over the specified
origin object AND the specified destination object.
1. CR IACRGPT - AMAANON IACAMA ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
2. CR IACRGPT - AMARGPT IACAMA NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
3. CR IACRGPT - METANON IACMET ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
4. CR IACRGPT - METRGPT IACMET NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
1. Input format
IACAMA ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates an anonymous registration point
for ticketing.
This means that the point has no name of its own.
It is identified by the unique combination of origin
and/or destination object and output type.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,OUT= [,SUCCONLY=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type, i.e. whether call data must
be added to counters or written in a ticket.
This value must be compatible with the stored value if a registration
point with the same name already exists.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACRGPT- 1+
CR IACRGPT
AMAANON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUCCONLY SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
This parameter specifies that only successful
calls must be registered for IACAMA.
N NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
NO NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Y SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
YES SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACRGPT- 2+
CR IACRGPT
AMARGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IACAMA NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates a named registration point for ticketing.
This means that the point has its own name and that different
origin/destination/destination classification object combinations
with the same output type can be assigned to it.
Note: Any given origin/destination/destination classification
output type combination can only exist once in the system.
[ [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [,DESTCLSF=] [,SUCCONLY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,OUT= ,RGPT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Every other combination of origin- and/or destination objects
(standard objects) can be combined with a destination
classification object. In this case, a registration only takes
place, if these standard objects AND the destination
classification object are part of the connection.
Default: NO
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACRGPT- 3+
CR IACRGPT
AMARGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the registration point name. When a
registration point name is specified, and the registration
point name already exists, the output type (AMA or MET) must
be the same as the registration point(s) available in the IACHASTA
registration point database under the same registration point name.
The kind of registration point(s) under the same registration point
name must also have the same point type (single-sided (only OBJORIG or
OBJDEST specified) or double-sided (both OBJORIG and OBJDEST
specified)).
When a named registration point is created with SUCCONLY=YES,
all subsequent additions of object combinations for this named
registration point have to be specified with SUCCONLY=YES too.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACRGPT- 4+
CR IACRGPT
METANON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IACMET ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates an anonymous registration point
for metering.
This means that the point has no name of its own.
It is identified by the unique combination of origin
and/or destination and output type.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,OUT= ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
MET METERING
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule that should be used for
the metering registration point to split up the call data
in different time groups.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACRGPT- 5+
CR IACRGPT
METRGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IACMET NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates a named registration point for metering.
This means that the point has its own name and that different
origin/destination/destination classification object combinations
with the same output type can be assigned to it.
Note: Any given origin/destination/destination classification
output type combination can only exist once in the system.
[ [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [,DESTCLSF=] ,OUT= ,RGPT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Every other combination of origin- and/or destination objects
(standard objects) can be combined with a destination
classification object. In this case, a registration only takes
place, if these standard objects AND the destination
classification object are part of the connection.
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
MET METERING
This parameter specifies the registration point name. When a
registration point name is specified, and the registration
point name already exists, the output type (AMA or MET) must
be the same as the registration point(s) available in the IACHASTA
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACRGPT- 6+
CR IACRGPT
METRGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
registration point database under the same registration point name.
The kind of registration point(s) under the same registration point
name must also have the same point type (single-sided (only OBJORIG or
OBJDEST specified) or double-sided (both OBJORIG and OBJDEST
specified)).
When a named registration point is created with SUCCONLY=YES,
all subsequent additions of object combinations for this named
registration point have to be specified with SUCCONLY=YES too.
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule that should be used for
the metering registration point to split up the call data
in different time groups.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IACRGPT- 7-
DISP IACRGPT
OBJDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command displays IACHASTA registration points. The output depends
on the input format used.
1. DISP IACRGPT - OBJDEST SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJDEST
2. DISP IACRGPT - OBJORIG SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJORIG
3. DISP IACRGPT - OTHER OTHER REGISTRATION POINTS
4. DISP IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINTS
1. Input format
SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJDEST
This input format displays the single sided registration points for the
specified destination object. The following table gives an overview of
the allowed parameter combinations and their results. Both named and
anonymous registration points are displayed with this input format.
OBJORIG OBJDEST DESTCLSF Result
- value value single sided registration points with
OBJDEST=value, DESTCLSF=value and no OBJORIG
- value - single sided registration points with
OBJDEST=value, no OBJORIG and no DESTCLSF
- value X single sided registration points with
OBJDEST=value, no OBJORIG and any DESTCLSF
[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : OBJDEST= [,DESTCLSF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object.
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 1+
DISP IACRGPT
OBJORIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJORIG
This input format displays the single sided registration points for
the specified origin object. The following table gives an overview of
the allowed parameter combinations and their results. Both named and
anonymous registration points are displayed with this input format.
value - value single sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, DESTCLSF=value and no OBJDEST
value - - single sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, no OBJDEST and no DESTCLSF
value - X single sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, no OBJDEST and any DESTCLSF
[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : OBJORIG= [,DESTCLSF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object.
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 2+
DISP IACRGPT
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OTHER REGISTRATION POINTS
This input format displays the registration points for the specified
input parameters. The following table gives an overview of the allowed
parameter combinations and their results. Both named and anonymous
registration points are displayed with this input format.
value value value double sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, OBJDEST=value and DESTCLSF=value
value value - double sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, OBJDEST=value and no DESTCLSF
value value X double sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, OBJDEST=value and any DESTCLSF
value X value registration points with OBJORIG=value,
DESTCLSF=value and any OBJDEST
value X - registration points with OBJORIG=value,
any OBJDEST and no DESTCLSF
value X X registration points with OBJORIG=value,
any OBJDEST and any DESTCLSF
X value value registration points with OBJDEST=value,
DESTCLSF=value and any OBJORIG
X value - registration points with OBJDEST=value,
any OBJORIG and no DESTCLSF
X value X registration points with OBJDEST=value,
any OBJORIG and any DESTCLSF
X X - ALL registration points
(any OBJORIG, any OBJDEST and ANY DESTCLSF)
X X X ALL registration points
(any OBJORIG, any OBJDEST and any DESTCLSF)
[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST= [,DESTCLSF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object.
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object.
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 3+
DISP IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINTS
This input format displays named registration points.
When a name is specified, all the information of the registration
point is displayed. When the value "X" is entered, an
alphabetical list of all the named registration points is displayed.
[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : RGPT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 4-
MOD IACRGPT
ANAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command modifies the schedule that is to be used for the
specified IACHASTA metering registration point. Furthermore,
this command modifies if IACAMA tickets must be generated only
for successful calls or for unsuccessful calls too.
1. MOD IACRGPT - ANAMA ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
2. MOD IACRGPT - ANMET ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
3. MOD IACRGPT - RGPTAMA NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
4. MOD IACRGPT - RGPTMET NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
1. Input format
ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
This input format modifies the call type (successful
calls only or not) of an anonymous registration point
for IACAMA.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,SUCCONLY= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
of the modified registration point.
definition of the modified registration point.
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 1+
MOD IACRGPT
ANMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
This input format modifies the schedule of an anonymous registration point
for IACMET.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
of the modified registration point.
definition of the modified registration point.
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule which becomes valid.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 2+
MOD IACRGPT
RGPTAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
This input format modifies the call type (successful calls
only or not) of a named registration point for IACAMA.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : RGPT= ,SUCCONLY= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 3+
MOD IACRGPT
RGPTMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
This input format modifies the schedule of a named registration point
for IACMET.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : RGPT= ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule which becomes valid.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 4-
DISP IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA SCHEDULE
This command displays the specified IACHASTA schedule for metering registration.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IACSCHED : SCHED= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACSCHED- 1-
MOD IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA SCHEDULE
This command modifies an IACHASTA schedule for metering registration.
The schedules contain sequences of valid time groups per weekday category.
This makes it possible to split the data collected for a registration
point across different time groups based on the time and weekday category.
In the default configuration, the schedules use time group 1 for all
weekday categories from 0 until 24 hours.
Using this command it is possible, for one schedule, to enter up to three
periods for one time group, for all weekday categories indicated.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACSCHED : SCHED= ,TIMGRP= ,TIME= [,WDCAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule.
TIMGRP TIME GROUP
This parameter specifies the time group for which the entered
periods are valid.
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the valid time periods (i.e. intervals)
for the time group. The specified time group then becomes valid
for the entered time interval.
Time periods can only be entered in whole 15-minute increments.
Up to 3 time intervals can be linked
a-b
a: HOUR (0..24)=
b: MINUTES (ONLY 00-15-30-45 ALLOWED)=
This parameter specifies the weekday category for which the
schedule is modified.
HO , HH > EF , EH > HN , WO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACSCHED- 1+
MOD IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH WEEKEND HALF
EF WEEKEND FULL
Default: HO, HH, EF, EH, HN, WO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACSCHED- 2-
DISP IACSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA SETTINGS
This command displays the current settings for IACHASTA meters.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IACSET ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACSET- 1-
ENTR IACSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IACHASTA SETTINGS
This command enters the settings for IACHASTA meters. These settings define
the meter layout (i.e. how large it must be), by specifying the number of
traffic distinction groups and the number of time groups that are used for
IACHASTA metering registration. Furthermore the counter behaviour of the
IACHASTA meters is defined with this command. It can be chosen between reset
counters (default) and cyclic counters.
The command overwrites the existing values with the entered parameter values.
The command is rejected when registration points with meters or active
registrations exist.
The command is also rejected when the new values are incompatible with the
existing traffic distinction groups and schedules as entered with the
MOD IACTRADI and MOD IACSCHED commands.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR IACSET : TIMGRPMX= ,TRAGRPMX= [,CYCLCNTR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TIMGRPMX TIME GROUPS MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the highest time group that
will be used in an IACHASTA metering schedule.
TRAGRPMX TRAFFIC GROUPS MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the highest traffic distinction
group that will be used for IACHASTA metering registration.
CYCLCNTR CYCLIC COUNTERS
This parameter specifies if cyclic counters will be used
for IACHASTA metering registration.
NO NO CYCLIC COUNTERS
YES CYCLIC COUNTERS
N NO CYCLIC COUNTERS
Y CYCLIC COUNTERS
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR IACSET- 1-
DISP IACTRADI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION
This command displays the IACHASTA traffic distinction criteria
for metering registration.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IACTRADI ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IACTRADI- 1-
MOD IACTRADI
CHRGTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION
This command modifies the traffic distinction for the specified IACHASTA
meter registration point type. The traffic groups make it possible to split
the collected call data according to line category, transmission medium
requirement or charge type.
In the default situation, no distinction is made between traffic types.
1. MOD IACTRADI - CHRGTYPE CHARGE TYPE
2. MOD IACTRADI - LINECAT LINE CATEGORY
3. MOD IACTRADI - NONE NONE
4. MOD IACTRADI - TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
1. Input format
CHARGE TYPE
This input format is entered when traffic distinction according to
charge type is required.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided
or double sided) for which the traffic distinction groups are entered.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
DISTINCT DISTINCTION
This parameter specifies the distinction criterion.
Notes:
If differentiation according to traffic distinction has already been
modified before, a reset is possible with parameter value NONE.
CHRGTYPE CHARGE TYPE
This parameter value refers to the charge type.
TRAGRP1 TRAFFIC GROUP 1
This parameter specifies the traffic group 1.
CHARGE CHARGE
NOCHARGE NO CHARGE
CHARGE CHARGE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 1+
MOD IACTRADI
CHRGTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOCHARGE NO CHARGE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 2+
MOD IACTRADI
LINECAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINE CATEGORY
line category is required.
[ [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TRAGRP3=]] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
Notes:
LINECAT LINE CATEGORY
This parameter value refers to the line category.
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 3+
MOD IACTRADI
NONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
NONE
This input format is entered when no traffic distinction is required.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
Notes:
NONE NONE
This parameter refers to the default installation
(no traffic distinction criterion)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 4+
MOD IACTRADI
TMR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
transmission medium requirement is required.
[ [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TRAGRP3= [,TRAGRP4=]]] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
Notes:
TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement.
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALL BACK CAPAB.
SPEECH SPEECH
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 5+
MOD IACTRADI
TMR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPEECH SPEECH
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 6-
CAN IADLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST
This command cancels an international automatic call back
initiator address from the initiator address list.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IADLST : IAD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IAD INITIATOR ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of the international
automatic call back initiator system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IADLST- 1-
DISP IADLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST
This command displays all international automatic call back
addresses on the initiator address list.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IADLST ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IADLST- 1-
ENTR IADLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER INITIATOR ADDRESS LIST
This command enters an address into the initiator address list
which is used to call back the international automatic call
back initiator system by the international call back responder
system.
The initiator address list contains up to 10 addresses with
a maximum of 12 digits each.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR IADLST : IAD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IAD INITIATOR ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of the international
automatic call back initiator system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR IADLST- 1-
ACT IAFEAT
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE
This command activates call data recording for the specified feature
type.
Prerequisites :
- The specified feature type must not yet be active (advisory and
command rejection).
the exchange!
1. ACT IAFEAT - CDR COMMON CALL DETAIL RECORD
2. ACT IAFEAT - FIXFORM DISK FEATURES WITH FIXED RECORD FORMAT
3. ACT IAFEAT - HOPFEAT HOT OPERATION FEATURE
4. ACT IAFEAT - IOFEAT IMMEDIATE OUTPUT FEATURES
5. ACT IAFEAT - MP DISK FEATURES FOR MAIN PROCESSOR
6. ACT IAFEAT - NUMFILES DISK FEATURES WITH ONE OR TWO FILES
7. ACT IAFEAT - VARFORM DISK FEAT. WITH VARIABLE RECORD FORMAT
1. Input format
COMMON CALL DETAIL RECORD
This input format activates the CDR disk feature.
Note :
- The specified recording types (parameter REC) must not already be activated
via their corresponding feature type (parameter TYPE).
The following activations are mutually exclusive:
TYPE= TYPE= REC=
AMA and CDR, AMA;
IARA and CDR, IACAMA;
DNOB and CDR, DNOBS;
TRST and CDR, TRST;
[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,REC= [,SIZE=] [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the recording types to be activated
with the feature type CDR.
DNOBS DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the CP disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 1+
ACT IAFEAT
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
TST 2500
TOB 2500
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA, CDR or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/CDR/INA variable
records and possibly a filler record in order to fill up the file
record completely.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 2+
ACT IAFEAT
FIXFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISK FEATURES WITH FIXED RECORD FORMAT
This input format activates a disk feature with the fixed record format
defined by DT or project specific.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if there is sufficient
storage capacity on the system disk (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file is not deleted before the disk feature is reactivated
and the previous activation was carried out with another record format,
the feature will not be activated (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file is not deleted before the disk feature is reactivated
with the same record format, the existing disk file with the same size
and contents is restored (advisory and command execution).
[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,RECFORM= [,SIZE=] [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
[IARA [ INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
RECFORM RECORD FORMAT
This parameter specifies the fixed record format defined
by DT or project specific.
FIX2 FIXED FORMAT 2 (project spec.)
Notes :
AMA 15000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
TST 2500
TOB 2500
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 3+
ACT IAFEAT
FIXFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
record completely.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 4+
ACT IAFEAT
HOPFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
HOT OPERATION FEATURE
This input format activates a feature type for output
via hot operation.
[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,HOPFEAT= [,REC=] [,FILEAR=] [,FILRECSZ=] [
[ [
[ [,SIZE=] [,NUMFILES=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMAI AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. IMMED.
INAI INTELL. NETWORK AMA IMMEDIATE
feature. The same hot operation feature can be used for several
feature types.
REC RECORDING TYPE
FILEAR FILE ARRAY ON MP
This parameter specifies the name of the SAM file array on the MP.
record completely.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 5+
ACT IAFEAT
HOPFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes :
AMA 15000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
TST 2500
TOB 2500
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
NUMFILES NUMBER OF FILES
This parameter specifies the number of files.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 6+
ACT IAFEAT
IOFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IMMEDIATE OUTPUT FEATURES
This input format activates an immediate output feature.
Prerequisites :
- Immediate output features can only be activated if the APS
contains the relevant subsystems (advisory and command rejection).
[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CTEI CENTRAL TEST EQUIPMENT IMMED.
[MALI [ MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
[MOBI [ METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
PMOBI PREVENTIVE METER OBSERV. IMM.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 7+
ACT IAFEAT
MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISK FEATURES FOR MAIN PROCESSOR
This input format activates a disk feature for the main processor.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if the main processor is
available.
[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,FILEAR= [,REC=] [,FILRECSZ=] [,RECFORM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILEAR FILE ARRAY ON MP
This parameter specifies the name of the SAM file array on the MP.
REC RECORDING TYPE
record completely.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 8+
ACT IAFEAT
NUMFILES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
DISK FEATURES WITH ONE OR TWO FILES
This input format activates a disk feature with the possibility to
provide one or two files.
Prerequisites :
- If the disk file(s) is (are) not deleted before the disk feature is
reactivated and the previous activation was carried out with another
record format, the feature will not be activated (advisory and command
rejection).
- If the disk file(s) is (are) not deleted before the disk feature is
reactivated with the same record format, the existing disk file(s)
with the same size and contents is (are) restored (advisory and
command execution).
[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,NUMFILES= [,REC=] [,SIZE=] [,RECFORM=] [
[ [
[ [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUMFILES NUMBER OF FILES
This parameter specifies the number of files.
REC RECORDING TYPE
Notes :
AMA 15000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
TST 2500
TOB 2500
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 9+
ACT IAFEAT
NUMFILES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
record completely.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 10+
ACT IAFEAT
VARFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
DISK FEAT. WITH VARIABLE RECORD FORMAT
This input format activates a disk feature with a variable record format.
Prerequisites :
- If the disk file is not deleted before the disk feature is reactivated,
the existing disk file with the same size and contents is restored
(advisory and command execution).
[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= [,REC=] [,SIZE=] [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
[CDR [ CALL DETAIL RECORDING
[DNOB [ DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
[ERS [ ERROR STATISTICS
[FIR [ FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
[INA [ INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
[MAL [ MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
[MOB [ METER OBSERVATION
[PMOB [ PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
[TOB [ TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
REC RECORDING TYPE
Notes :
AMA 15000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
TST 2500
TOB 2500
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 11+
ACT IAFEAT
VARFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
record completely.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 12-
CAN IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE
This command cancels the individual call data recording for the
specified feature type.
For feature types with disk file, the associated disk file is
retained, but the writing of new records is prevented.
Before the command is executed, all data of the specified type still
present in the CP buffer are automatically transferred to the
appropriate disk files. The file access permission is changed,
allowing the system operator to delete this file. Files named
IA.XXXXX may not be deleted until the file contents have been saved.
Notes :
- IA data type MOB may not be canceled unless all meter observation
requests for subscribers have been deactivated.
- This command should only be used in special cases, for instance
APS change, ODAGEN run or change of disk file size.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IAFEAT : TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOBI METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
MALI MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
INAI INTELLIGENT NETW. AMA IMMED.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IAFEAT- 1-
DISP IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURES
This command displays the activated individual call data feature
types.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IAFEAT : [TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE FEATURE TYPE
When feature type is entered, all information upon the feature type
is displayed. When the the parameter is omitted, a list of all
activated feature types and their registration method is displayed.
MOBI METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
MALI MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
INAI INTELL. NETWORK AMA IMMEDIATE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IAFEAT- 1-
MOD IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE
This command modifies the individual call data recording for
the specified feature type.
Prerequisites :
- The specified feature type must be active.
(advisory and command rejection)
This input format modifies the saving timer
for the specified feature type.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IAFEAT : TYPE= ,SAVTIMER= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE CALL DATA RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of call data recording.
[IARA [ INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
SAVTIMER SAVING TIMER PERIOD IN MINUTES
periodic saving of the buffer data to disk.
It can be entered and changed for activated recordings.
Notes :
- The default value is 0. When 0, periodic saving
to disk takes place every 2 minutes if the
amount of the buffer data is equal to the block size
(= 2K or 4K or 8K).
- When the value of SAVTIMER is not equal to 0,
saving of all the buffer data to disk takes place
periodically according to the entered value.
All data is guaranteed to be available on disk within
a maximum of (2 + SAVTIMER) minutes.
An incomplete block is filled up with zeros. Due to
the periodic saving, it is possible to have a high amount
of filled up zeros.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IAFEAT- 1-
ACT IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command is used to activate the generation and output to disk of
special optional record types and to block the buffering of
administrative records.
The special optional record types can only be generated for activated
IA features with disk output. They are used to evaluate the following
information:
- BRD = Recovery level and restoral time after a system failure
(breakdown)
- DTC = Date/time change due to error or change of summer/winter time
- OVF = Start and end time of buffer overflow and number of records lost
due to overflow
Storage of feature-specific call data records is suppressed if the buffer
input block is set. This acts as a safeguard against multiple billing of
special subscriber services.
The block must be set before the REGEN command file is processed and
then reset immediately after processing.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [SPREC= [ [
[ ACT IAOPT : BLBUFR= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SPREC SPECIAL OPTIONAL RECORD TYPE
This parameter specifies the special optional record types.
The activated optional special data records are not related
to data types TOB and UAM, consequently no administrative
data records are entered.
DTC DATE TIME CHANGE
BRD BREAKDOWN
OVF OVERFLOW
BLBUFR BLOCKING OF BUFFER INPUTS
This parameter specifies the call data record type.
ADMREC ADMINISTRATIVE RECORDS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IAOPT- 1-
CAN IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command is used to cancel the generation and output to disk of
special optional record types and to cancel the buffer input block
for individual call data administration records.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [SPREC= [ [
[ CAN IAOPT : BLBUFR= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SPREC SPECIAL OPTIONAL RECORD TYPE
This parameter specifies the special optional record types.
DTC DATE TIME CHANGE
BRD BREAKDOWN
OVF OVERFLOW
BLBUFR BLOCKING OF BUFFER INPUTS
This parameter specifies the call data record type.
ADMREC ADMINISTRATIVE RECORDS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IAOPT- 1-
DISP IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command displays the activated special optional record types and
states whether buffers are blocked.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IAOPT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IAOPT- 1-
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD ISDN BASIC ACCESS D-CHANNEL LOAD
This command calls down the ISDN Basic Access D-channel load
traffic measurement data every 15 minutes within the specified
measurement period and outputs them to the specified output
device.
Prerequisites:
With this measurement up to 5 measurement tasks each for a
maximum of 10 directory numbers can be carried out in
parallel.
The user is able to specify up to 10 directory numbers for
each of the 5 tasks with this MML-command. Whether or not the
traffic of all selected directory numbers will be measured
depends on the total number of all BA-lines. The total number
of BA-lines over all active tasks may not be more than 50,
otherwise the task will be rejected.
Within a measurement task all these directory numbers must be
created either exclusively for ISDN-BA subscriber or
exclusively for PBX (ISDN- or mixed PBX) each with a minimum
of a ISDN PBX line at the BA. A mixture of both types within a
measurement task is not allowed.
The measured data can be output either to OMT or MDD. It
contains the following data for all directory numbers:
per BA :
- number of received frames
- number of received octets
- number of transmitted frames
- number of transmitted octets
The packet data and the signaling data (p+s data) are recorded
here.
For Private Branch Exchange (PBX) the counter values are
recorded per D Channel (per ISDN BA PBX line). There is an output
of sums of D channels belonging to a PBX.
The traffic measurement counters for D-channel Basic Access
load are installed on a port-related basis in the SLMD, SDSL,
SLMX or SILC and run permanently. The SLMD, SDSL, SLMX or SILC
always count all layer 2-frames and octets, in the D-channel for
ISDN BA connected to a SLMD port, connected to a SDSL port or
connected via V5 interface to a V5IF port.
For ISDN BAs connected via SLMD or SLMX the traffic measurement
counters in the SLMD or SLMX distinguish between I-,UI- and
S-Frames.
For ISDN BAs connected via SDSL or V5.2 interface the traffic
measurement counters in the SDSL or SILC collect seperate by the
s- and p-data-frames. The CP eliminates these differences by forming
and listing the sum of the frames.
As regards ISDN BA subscribers there is a correspondence
between port and directory number only if one directory number
is linked to the DLU/V5IF port. If more than one directory
number is linked to the same DLU/V5IF port as a Multiple
Subscriber Number (MSN), it is not possible to record separate
counter data for each of the directory numbers belonging to
the MSN, because the counters are port-related. So the data
recorded in this case represent the sum of D-channel layer-2
frames and octets constituting the total traffic of all
concerned directory numbers belonging to the same MSN and
linked to the same port.
For all indicated valid directory numbers the equipment
numbers (DLU/V5IF-ports) as well as the corresponding line
trunk groups (LTGX way and LTGY way) are determined at the
moment of command acceptance in order to determine both
alternative paths for the CP access to the counters in the
SLMD, SDSL, SLMX or SILC.
Directory numbers or PBX lines which are deleted or modified
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 1+
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
after command acceptance are treated as follows. They remain
in the output list. However, deleted or modified directory
numbers or lines show blanks and a special availability
mark instead of measured traffic data in the output mask. For
directory numbers or PBX lines which have only been linked to
another port after command accept, the traffic data is
recorded further.
MSN directory numbers are indicated as such. In the output
list, the equipment number for each directory number appears.
For each MSN directory number, this is followed by information
about the number of all MSN directory numbers belonging to
this MSN port. If a command acceptance several directory
numbers are specified all of which are related to the same
port, the traffic data is recorded under this directory number
which was first specified at command acceptance. The reason
for this is the port individuality of the traffic data. The
other directory numbers of this MSN, which are jointly
responsible for these traffic data show no data in the output
mask, but they refer to the data of the first directory number
already listed, which is linked to the same MSN port.
As regards Private Branch Exchange including ISDN BA lines the
PBX directory numbers have to be specified as directory
number. Line Service Numbers are not allowed and will be
rejected, because the object of this traffic measurement is
the PBX and not seperate BA lines of a PBX.
For the D-channel load traffic measurement of an ISDN Basic
Access within a Manager/Secretary and Team service (MASET) group
the Primary Directory Number (PrimDN) of this MASET member has
to be specified as directory number.
In exchange with only one local network, this command
parameter LAC may be omitted.
Within the command parameter NSN the parameter LAC has to
be entered.
It is not allowed to use the command parameter NSN if no
LAC exists in the exchange.
1. REC IBADCH - DN DN SPECIFICATION
2. REC IBADCH - NSN NSN SPECIFICATION
1. Input format
DN SPECIFICATION
Input format to call down ISDN Basic Access
D-channel load traffic measurement data
with input parameter directory number.
[ [
[ REC IBADCH : [PER=] [,IV=] [,TER=] [,BEG=] ,UNIT= ,DN= [
[ [
[ [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
are to be recorded.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 2+
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
at least 30 minutes apart exept for measurement over
midnight.
times only.
a-b-c-d
date.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 3+
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for the
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
a-b-c
output.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 4+
REC IBADCH
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
the file. The start and the finish message
postprocessing.
Notes :
IF this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced. Daily files will be overwritten in
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended, an
advisory is output to the OMT.
UNIT = MDD.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
A maximum of 10 directory numbers can be linked with &.
Restrictions:
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 5+
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NSN SPECIFICATION
Input format to call down ISDN Basic Access
D-channel load traffic measurement data
with input parameter national significant
number.
[ [
[ REC IBADCH : [PER=] [,IV=] [,TER=] [,BEG=] ,UNIT= ,NSN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
are to be recorded.
Notes:
period
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
included.
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
IV INTERVAL TIME
Notes:
at least 30 minutes apart exept for measurement over
midnight.
times only.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 6+
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
date.
Notes:
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for the
command input.
immediately.
single day (BEG).
a-b-c
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
must be specified.
is not permitted.
command input.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 7+
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
output.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
the file. The start and the finish message
postprocessing.
Notes :
IF this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
b: OUTPUT MODE
replaced. Daily files will be overwritten in
UNIT = MDD.
NSN NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the national significant number,
consisting of local area code and the directory number.
A maximum of 10 national significant numbers can be linked
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 8+
REC IBADCH
NSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
with &.
Restrictions:
a-b
a: AREA CODE=
b: DIRECTORY NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC IBADCH- 9-
ACT IBFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY
This command is used to re-activate the Initiator based File
Security mechanism for all MML-Userids.
Note:
- When this command is entered then all MML-Userids that were
deactivated with the command DACT IBFS will be deleted from
the list of deactivated Userids.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT IBFS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IBFS- 1-
DACT IBFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY
This command deactivates the Initiator based File Security method for up
to five MML-UserIds.
From this moment the File Security checks will not be done for the entered
MML-UserIds as long as the MP:OA&M is not available.
Note:
- On CP an InitiatorId is equal to a MML-UserId.
- The command may only be entered when the system is running in Innovation
together with a MP:OA&M.
- When the MP:OA&M is not available then the File Security checks will not
be done for the (previously) entered UserId(s).
- When the MP:OA&M is available then the File Security checks will be done
for all users and initiators and the deactivation for the entered
UserId(s) will be ignored.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT IBFS : USERID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT IBFS- 1-
DISP IBFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INITIATOR BASED FILE SEC. STATUS
This command can be used to display the actual status of the
Initiator based File Security mechanism.
The status can be changed with the commands DACT IBFS and
ACT IBFS.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IBFS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IBFS- 1-
DISP ICMPSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ICMP Statistics
This task displays ICMP protocol related statistics.
Output Parameters:
InMsgs:
The total number of ICMP messages which the entity
received. Note that this counter includes all those counted
by InErrors.
InErrors:
The number of ICMP messages which the entity received but
determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP
checksums, bad length, etc.).
InDestUnreachs:
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.
InTimeExcds:
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.
InParmProbs:
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.
InSrcQuenchs:
The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.
InRedirects:
The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.
InEchos:
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.
InEchoReps:
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.
InTimestamps:
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ICMPSTAT- 1+
DISP ICMPSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
InTimestampReps:
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.
InAddrMasks:
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.
InAddrMaskReps:
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.
OutMsgs:
The total number of ICMP messages which this entity
attempted to send. Note that this counter includes all
those counted by OutErrors.
OutErrors:
The number of ICMP messages which this entity did not send
due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of
buffers. This value should not include errors discovered
outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route
the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may
be no types of error which contribute to this counters value.
OutDestUnreachs:
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.
OutTimeExcds:
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.
OutParmProbs:
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.
OutSrcQuenchs:
The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.
OutRedirects:
The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host,
this object will always be zero, since hosts do not send
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ICMPSTAT- 2+
DISP ICMPSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
redirects.
OutEchos:
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.
OutEchoReps:
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.
OutTimestamps:
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.
OutTimestampReps:
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.
OutAddrMasks:
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.
OutAddrMaskReps:
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP ICMPSTAT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP ICMPSTAT- 3-
SWOFF IDTONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SWITCH OFF IDENTIFICATION TONE
This command switches off an identification tone to an incoming
trunk of a malicious call connection. This command does not
influence the holding state of the malicious call connection.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,LNO=[ [
[ SWOFF IDTONE : TGNO= ,CIC= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for
CCS7 signalling.
a-b
a: DIU-NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SWOFF IDTONE- 1-
SWON IDTONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SWITCH ON IDENTIFICATION TONE
This command switches on an identification tone to an incoming
line of a malicious call connection.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,LNO=[ [
[ SWON IDTONE : TGNO= ,CIC= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for
CCS7 signaling. The input 0-0 is illegal.
a-b
a: PCM LINK NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 SWON IDTONE- 1-
STAT ILAYER1
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LAYER 1 FOR ISDN PORTS
This command displays the saved status of the layer 1 activation
procedure.
1. STAT ILAYER1 - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
2. STAT ILAYER1 - LC EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
[ [
[ STAT ILAYER1 : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
The parameter is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT ILAYER1- 1+
STAT ILAYER1
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
[ [
[ STAT ILAYER1 : DLU= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the circuit position in a DLU.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
b: MODULE NUMBER=
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT ILAYER1- 2-
CR IMAGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create IMA Group
This task creates an IMA Layer.
Input format
[ [
[ CR IMAGRP : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of the DS1 port.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IMAGRP- 1-
DEL IMAGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete IMA Group
This task deletes an IMA Group on the PHUB.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL IMAGRP : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL IMAGRP- 1-
DISP IMAGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IMA Group Attributes
This task displays the Attributes of an IMA layer.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IMAGRPATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of one of the DS1 port belonging to the IMA group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IMAGRPATT- 1-
MOD IMAGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IMA Group Attributes
This task modifies the Attributes of an IMA layer.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IMAGRPATT : EQN= [,MinNumTxLinks=] [,MinNumRxLinks=] [
[ [
[ [,NeTxClkMode=] [,DiffDelayMax=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of one of the DS1 ports belonging to the IMA group.
MinNumTxLinks
The minimum number of transmit links required to be Active
for the IMA group to be in the Operational state. The value of this
parameter has to be the same as of parameter MinNumRxLinks.
MinNumRxLinks
The minimum number of receive links required to be Active
for the IMA group to be in the Operational state. The value of this
parameter has to be the same as of parameter MinNumTxLinks.
NeTxClkMode
Transmit clocking mode used by the near-end IMA group.
Possible values are ctc or itc.
DiffDelayMax
The maximum number of milliseconds of differential delay
among the links that will be tolerated on this interface. The maximum
value which is supported is 50 ms.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IMAGRPATT- 1-
DISP IMAGRPCSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IMA Group Current Statistics
This task displays the statistics of an IMA layer for the current
15 minute interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IMAGRPCSTAT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IMAGRPCSTAT- 1-
DISP IMAGRPISTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IMA Group Interval Statistics
This task displays the statistics of an IMA layer for the specified
15 minute interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IMAGRPISTAT : EQN= ,IntervalNumber= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
IntervalNumber
A number between 1 and 96, where 1 is the most
recently completed 15 minute interval and 96 is t
recently completed 15 minutes interval (assuming
96 intervals are valid).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IMAGRPISTAT- 1-
ADD IMALNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Add IMA Link
This task adds a new link to an IMA Group.
Input format
[ [
[ ADD IMALNK : EQN_ImaGroup= ,EQN_ImaLink= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN_ImaGroup
The equipment number of a DS1 port that already belongs to the IMA Group.
EQN_ImaLink
The equipment number of the DS1 port that should be added to the IMA
Group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ADD IMALNK- 1-
DEL IMALNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete IMA Link
This task removes a link from an IMA Group.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL IMALNK : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
The equipment number of the DS1 port that should be removed from the IMA
Group.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL IMALNK- 1-
DISP IMALNKATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IMA Link Attributes
This task displays the Attributes of an IMA link.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IMALNKATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IMALNKATT- 1-
DISP IMALNKCSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IMA Link Current Statistics
This task displays the statistics of an IMA link for the
current 15 minute interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IMALNKCSTAT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IMALNKCSTAT- 1-
DISP IMALNKISTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IMA Link Interval Statistics
This task displays the statistics of an IMA link for the
specified 15 minute interval.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IMALNKISTAT : EQN= ,IntervalNumber= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
IntervalNumber
A number between 1 and 96, where 1 is the most
recently completed 15 minute interval and 96 is t
recently completed 15 minutes interval (assuming
96 intervals are valid).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IMALNKISTAT- 1-
CAN INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN AUTHORIZATION
This command removes the IN authorization for a subscriber identified
by its A-number id (ANI long form, ANI short form), B-number id (BNI)
or by a specific authentication code id (ACI).
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ ; [
[ CAN INAUTH : ACI= [
[ [BNI=[ ! [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the A-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization must be removed.
ANS A-NUMBER ID SHORT
This parameter specifies the A-number identification in short form
of the subscriber for which the IN authorization must be removed.
ACI AUTHENTICATION CODE ID
This parameter specifies the authentication code (= personal
identification number) of the subscriber for which the IN
authorization must be removed.
BNI B-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the B-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization must be removed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INAUTH- 1-
CR INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to give a subscriber identified by its number id
(ANI long form/ANS short form/BNI) or by a specific authentication
code id (ACI), the authorization to make use of an IN service specified
by the parameter PRID.
In case that the subscriber identified by ANI/ANS/BNI or ACI is a transit
exchange subscriber (TXS), this command is also used to identify the TXS
feature data.
Notice that TXS features are realized as "integrated service logic (ISL)
services".
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have been
created by the command CR INTRIG.
- The service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have
been created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the TXS profile referenced by the
parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB (with
CAT=TXS).
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ ; [
[ CR INAUTH : ACI= [,PRID= ,SCMID=] [,TXSPROF=] [
[ [BNI=[ ! [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which IN authorization is given.
At least TXSPROF or the combination of SCMID and PRID
must be entered.
ANS A-NUMBER ID SHORT
subscriber for which IN authorization is given in a short form.
must be entered.
identification number) of the subscriber for which IN
authorization is given.
must be entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INAUTH- 1+
CR INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BNI B-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which IN authorization is given.
Parameters PRID and SCMID are mandatory.
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile
which is used for the IN service for which authorization
is given.
This parameter is mandatory for BNI.
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the corresponding IN
service class mark which is used for the triggering of the
subscriber calls.
This parameter is mandatory for BNI.
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the virtual subscriber that contains
the TXS feature data.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INAUTH- 2-
DISP INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to display the IN authorization data of a subscriber
identified by its number id (ANI long form/ANS short form/BNI) or by
a specific authentication code id (ACI).
For transit exchange subscribers (TXS), this command can also be used to
display the corresponding TXS profile.
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have been created
by the command CR INTRIG.
- The service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have been
created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the TXS profile referenced by the
parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB (with
CAT=TXS).
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ [
[ DISP INAUTH : ACI= [,PRID=] [,SCMID=] [,TXSPROF=] ; [
[ [BNI=[ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The ANI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
ANS A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the short form of A-number identification
of the subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
displayed.
Note:
- The ANI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INAUTH- 1+
DISP INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The ACI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
BNI B-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The BNI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
This parameter specifies the name of the IN trigger profile to be
used as a selection criterion for the display.
Only the IN authorization entries (ANI/ANS/ACI/BNI) with
the specified IN service will be displayed.
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark to be
used as a selection criterion for the display.
the specified IN service class mark will be displayed.
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the TXS profile to be used as a selection
criterion for the display.
the specified TXS profile will be displayed.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INAUTH- 2-
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies the IN authorization data for a subscriber
identified by its number id (ANI long form/ANS short form/BNI)
or by a specific authentication code id (ACI).
Prerequisites:
- The new trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have
been created by the command CR INTRIG.
- The new service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have
been created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the new TXS profile referenced by
the parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB
(with CAT=TXS).
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ [
[ MOD INAUTH : ACI= <,PRID= ,SCMID= ,TXSPROF= ,CTXSPROF= [
[ [BNI=[ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSCMID=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
modified.
ANS A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the short form of A-number identification
of the subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
modified.
authorization data must be modified.
BNI B-NUMBER ID
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
modified.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INAUTH- 1+
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the name of the new trigger profile
which is used for the IN service for which authorization is
given.
When the PRID is newly added, the SCMID must also be entered.
Incompatibilities:
- Cannot be entered together with CSCMID.
This parameter specifies the name of the new corresponding IN
service class mark which is used for the triggering of the
subscriber calls.
When the SCMID is newly added, the PRID must also be entered.
Incompatibilities:
- Cannot be entered together with CSCMID.
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the virtual subscriber that contains
the new TXS feature data.
Incompatibilities:
- CTXSPROF may not have been entered.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
CTXSPROF CANCEL TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the TXS profile must be removed for
the subscriber or not.
Incompatibilities:
- TXSPROF may not have been entered.
- for ANI or ACI only allowed when PRID and SCMID exist.
N TXS PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO TXS PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL TXS PROFILE
YES CANCEL TXS PROFILE
Default: N
CSCMID CANCEL SCMID
When CSCMID is entered, the PRID is also cancelled.
Incompatibilities:
- Cannot be entered together with SCMID or PRID
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INAUTH- 2+
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Cannot be entered together with BNI
- for ANI or ACI only allowed when TXSPROF exists.
N SCMID & PRID REMAIN UNCHANGED
NO SCMID & PRID REMAIN UNCHANGED
Y SCMID & PRID ARE CANCELLED
YES SCMID & PRID ARE CANCELLED
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INAUTH- 3-
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INTERCEPT
This command cancels the data entered for the specified intercept identification
and applies an intercept tone coded in the GP if the intercept is accessed by
call processing.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INC : INCEPT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be cancelled.
a[-b]
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
SBLOAD SUB BLOCKING ADMINISTR. (ORIG)
SBLOMAIN SUB BLOCKING MAINT. (ORIG)
ACCSPORI ACCOUNT SUSPENSION (ORIG)
REQSPORI REQUESTED SUSPENSION (ORIG)
ABBRDERR ABBREVIATED DIALING ERROR
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
ACCSPTER ACCOUNT SUSPENSION (TERM)
REQSPTER REQUESTED SUSPENSION (TERM)
ADMIN ADMINISTRATION BLOCKING
ADMIN1 ADMINISTRATION BLOCKING 1
MAINT MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
MAINT1 MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 1
TESTCALL TEST CALL ONLY
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
CHGDNIND CHANGED DN INDIVIDUAL
SLTOUTO SUB LINE TEMP OUT OF ORDER
OPRVNA OPERATOR VERIF. NOT ALLOWED
TERMPERM TERMINATED SUB PERMANENT
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
MOBSUBAB MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ABSENT
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INC- 1+
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
CHCPTIND CHANGE CODE POINT INDIVIDUAL
RESANN RESERVE ANNOUNCEMENT
Unit b is required.
ACTDIVOP CALL DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
ACTDVA1 DIV TO FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT 01
ACTDIVND DO NOT DISTURB ACTIVE IDLE
ACTDIVOD ACTIVATED DIV. TO OPERATOR 1
DIVVMSF CALL DIV. TO VMS FIXED
ACTDIVTA ACT DIV. TELEPHONE ANNOUNCEM.
NOMULDIV NO MULTIPLE CALL DIVERSION
DIVIA1 DIV TO INDIV. ANNOUNCEMENT 01
CALLFW CALL FORWARDED, PLEASE HOLD
NOCALLFW CALL CANNOT BE FORWARDED
INPERR INPUT ERROR
WUPCAS WAKE UP CASUAL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INC- 2+
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
WUPDAY WAKE UP DAILY
WUPWEEK WAKE UP WEEKLY
ANNCDVDN ANNOUNCEM. DIV DN INDIVIDUAL
SWUPCAS SHIFT WAKE UP CASUAL
SWUPDAY SHIFT WAKE UP DAILY
CHRGANN ANN OF CHARGE
CHRGNOTA ANN CHARGE NOT AVAILABLE
MALCALL MALICIOUS CALL TRACED
ANNSCLDN ANNOUNCEMENT SCREENING LIST DN
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
GFRSUC GEN. FACILITY RESET SUCCESSFUL
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
ANIF ANI FAILURE
BILRUNA BILLING REGISTER UNOBT. AUTOM.
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
CCS7OVL SIGNALING LINK OVERLOAD
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
DIDBSYT DIRECT INWARD DIALING BUSY
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
TMRNOTAV TMR NOT AVAILABLE
IPINOTAV IPI NOT AVAILABLE
BPRECEDA BLOCKED PRECEDENCE ANN.
EGMBUSY EXTERNAL GROUP MAKE BUSY
PRECEDAL PRECEDENCE ACCESS LIMIT
COINNEAR INTERNATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
CONANEAR NATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
TRSV TRUNK RESERVATION
COINFAR INTERNATIONAL FAR CONGESTION
CONAFAR NATIONAL FAR CONGESTION
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY
INFOTON INFORMATION TONE
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
NETOOS NET OUT OF SERVICE
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
PROTERRI PROTOCOL ERROR ISDN
UNCOFAR UNDEFINED CONGESTION FAR END
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
CALLWAIT CALL WAITING
TESTWAIT WAITING FOR TEST OPERATOR
ECS EMERGENCY CALL SET UP
ECHOSIC ECHO SUPPRESSOR INCOMING
ECHOSOG ECHO SUPPRESSOR OUTGOING
MEETME MEET ME
PHONM2 TELEPHONE MEETING 2
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
RSCIUI REMOTE SCI USER INTERACTION
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
BLPOOLN5 BLOCKER POOL FOR MFNO5
CTXI1TR6 CTX INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORK. 1TR6 (TDP12&LNP)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INC- 3+
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
I1TR6IN IN INTERWORK. 1TR6 (TDP3)
PSTN2IP PSTN TO IP MEDIA GATEWAY LOOP
IP2PSTN IP TO PSTN MEDIA GATEWAY LOOP
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
BLICON BLOCKAGE INTERCONTIN.TRAFFIC
BLINAT BLOCKAGE INTERNATIONAL TRAFFIC
BLONAT4 BLOCKAGE NATIONAL TRAFFIC 4
BLOLOCAL BLOCKAGE LOCAL TRAFFIC
BLOP1 BLOCKAGE OPERATOR 1 TRAFFIC
ALLBLOCK ALL CONNECTIONS BLOCKED
OHQTO OFF-HOOK QUEUE TIME OUT
OHQ OFF-HOOK QUEUEING
RBQ RING BACK QUEUEING
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM. CALLBACK
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
IPRA IP ROUTING ADDRESS
Unit b is required.
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
Compatibilities:
For RESANN only value 0..9 is permitted.
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
For IPRA only value 0..127 is permitted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INC- 4-
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INTERCEPT
This command defines how a call is to be handled if call processing diverts it
to an intercept code.
1. CR INC - IGNORE IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
2. CR INC - NEWCODE ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
3. CR INC - NEWDEST RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
4. CR INC - TONE SUPPLY WITH A TONE
1. Input format
IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
Input format for creating an intercept code which, when accessed, causes
the originally required connection to be set up after all.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which data are to
be created.
This parameter is subdivided into functional blocks.
This subdivision is explained in parameter INTYP
of the command DISP INC.
a[-b]
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
If an A-party has the feature CLIR (see CR SUB)
and the B-party has the feature ACTACREJ (see
CR SUB), the call will be rejected. The A-party
will be informed about this by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=CALLDIV.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 1+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=BLOTREAT.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIF ANI FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=AMA.
If an office-specific Whitelist or Blacklist
feature is active and the number of the A-party
is not available, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is informed about this with this
intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=SCPANN.
Unit b is required.
When a B-party has the automatic recall feature
and does not answer an incoming call or is busy,
the number of the A-party is stored by the system.
The B-party can initiate a recall by keying in
an access code. The B-party is informed by this
intercept about the stored A-party number.
This value belongs to INTYP=SUBCONIN.
When going off hook, the A-party will get an
announcement before the dial tone is applied.
The intercept is used to address the announcement
machine (UI-LTG).
When a call is queued, the A-party will get an
announcement about the position in which the
A-party is waiting and/or the estimated waiting
time. The intercept is used to address the
announcement machine. The type of information to
be applied can be administered with the
commands CR CALLTYPE and/or ENTR QUE.
This value belongs to INTYP=QUEUSUCC.
When an A-Party-Specific Whitelist or Blacklist
feature is active, the A-Party is informed about
the stored B-Party numbers by this intercept.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 2+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
An A party that has been blocked by "Hacker
Detection" will be informed by the intercept
that access is denied.
Incoming calls are checked against an office-
specific Blacklist or Whitelist. If the A-party
number is in the Blacklist or missing in the
Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The A-party
is then informed about this via this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
An A-party tries to set up a call to a B-party
where an equal or higher precedence call is in
progress. Therefore the completion of the new call
is prevented. The A-party is informed accordingly
by the intercept.
When the B-party is busy and the station is not
equipped for call-waiting or preemption, the
A-party is informed accordingly by the intercept.
If an A-party is not authorized to dial a carrier
access code, the call will be rejected. The system
reaction for the A-party is administered with this
intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=EQUALACC.
When an A-party dials a number with a carrier
access code, but access to the destination via
this carrier is not possible or allowed, either
the carrier access code for routing may be ignored
or the call may be rejected.
If the call is to be rejected, the appropriate
system reaction for A-party handling is
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 3+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered with this intercept.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
If B-party is busy this intercept leads to an
announcement to inform the A-party that he can
activate the feature CCBS.
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a ACTCCS Operator (see
CR SUB). The intercept SUSVICCS must also be
created to enable addressing of the service user.
This value belongs to INTYP=OPREQ.
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
This value belongs to INTYP=NETWOMA.
An A-party with the Credit Limit Supervision
feature who wants to set up a call, will first get
an announcement and afterwards the dialtone
depending on the status of his account. This
announcement can be a warning (credit limit almost
reached) or a blocking (credit limit reached)
announcement. This intercept is used to address
the announcement machine (UI-LTG).
If a CENTREX station wants to set up a call to a
1TR6-subscriber, a SW-loop is required. This loop
is addressed via this intercept.
INRES=NEWCB1.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 4+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
the service user to a UI-LTG for user interaction.
At least one of the intercepts SUSCI or SUSCICTX
must also be created to address the service user.
This intercept leads to an announcement to inform
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 5+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the subscriber that the general facility reset was
successful.
This value belongs to INTYP=SSPANN.
As an 1TR6 subscriber is not able to handle IN, a
HW-loop is required if a 1TR6 subscriber wants to
perform an IN-Call. This loop is addressed via
this intercept. This intercept is applicable for
Trigger Detection Point 12 (TDP12) and LNP-
Triggers (Local Number Portabilitiy) using IN to
perform requests.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
This value belongs to INTYP=IPROUTES.
Unit b is required.
If an IP-subscriber wants to reach a
PSTN-subscriber, a SW-loop is required.
This loop is addressed via this intercept.
INRES=NEWCB1.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
If ISUP is not recognized on the A-side the
ISUP HW loop will be initiated via this
intercept before the remote intercom number
is code processed.
INRES=NEWCB1.
Trigger Detection Point 3 (TDP3).
INRES=NEWCB1.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 6+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was successful.
Kick-Out list was not successful.
This intercept is used to address a loop-LTG for
the call identification recording feature (see
CR SUB). This feature enables the recording of
malicious call data.
MEETME MEET ME
If an A-party has the feature MWI (see CR SUB),
the A-party is informed by this intercept about
messages in the mailbox.
OHQ OFF HOOK QUEUEING
OHQTO OFF HOOK QUEUE TIME OUT
This value belongs to INTYP=QUEUFAIL.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 7+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This intercept is used to warn the subscriber
that the PIN Code entered is wrong.
where a precedence access limitation prevents the
completion of the call. The A-party is informed
accordingly by the intercept.
If a priority A-party wants to make a call and all
trunks are busy, the call will be queued in a
priority queue. The A-party is informed about this
by the intercept.
If a PSTN-subscriber wants to reach an
IP-subscriber, a SW-loop is required.
INRES=NEWCB1.
When a call is forwarded, the B2-party may have
the feature ACTRJDIV (see CR SUB), which means
that the B2-subscriber does not accept forwarded
calls. The A-party will be informed about this by
the intercept.
Unit b is required.
the service user to the UI-LTG for remote SCI.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 8+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This intercept leads to an announcement to
confirm that entry of the new subscriber
credit limit has been successful.
This intercept leads to an announcement saying
that entry of the new subscriber credit limit
has failed.
the subscriber about the current subscriber credit
limit.
accordingly by this intercept.
A-party is then informed accordingly.
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect an ordinary
subscriber to the service user for SCI.
intercept is used to redirect a CENTREX subscriber
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 9+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to the service user for SCI.
a service user if the B-party has the feature
SVI (SERVICE INTERCEPTION) or ACTCCS (COLLECT
CALL SCREENING) (see CR SUB).
the service user to an SVI Operator (see CR SUB).
The intercept SUSVICCS must also be created to
enable addressing of the service user.
If no resources are available for the requested
time interval, the casual wakeup request is
shifted to the previous interval. The subscriber
is informed about this by the intercept.
time interval, the daily wakeup request is
time interval, the weekly wakeup request is
If an A-party number is not in the IN
Authorization Database, this non-registered caller
is routed to an operator or to an announcement via
this intercept.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 10+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
This intercept is used to confirm successful
input of a casual wakeup request.
This intercept is used to confirm a successful
input of a daily wakeup request.
input of a weekly wakeup request.
Compatibilities:
This parameter specifies the response which is to be triggered when
the intercept code is accessed.
IGNORE IGNORE REASON FOR TERMINATION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 11+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
Input format to create an intercept code via which the digit translator is
re-accessed. An intercept code of this type serves to access an announcement or
an operator.
To hear an announcement the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
(For the complete command syntax see the corresponding CML.)
- Create a standard destination
CR DEST:DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create an announcement group
CR ANGRP:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create (an) announcement line(s)
CR ANLN:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a route to the announcement device
CR ROUTE:DEST=<ANNOU1>,TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a code point
CR CPT:CODE=<123456789>,DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create a zone point (for announcements that can be dialled directly too)
CR ZOPT:CODE=<123456789>,ZOCHA=NOPULSE,...
- Create an intercept
a:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWCOD/NEWCB1/NEWCB1NL,CODE=<123456789>;
To access an operator the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
- Create a common service group
CR CSGRP:CSGLAC=<01>,CSGDN=<2345>,...
- Create an intercept (with the common service group number)
- Create a calltype for the common service group
CR CALLTYPE:CSGLAC=<01>,CSGDN=<2345>,LAC=<01>,DN=<6789>,...
- Create an intercept (with the calltype number)
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,CODE= [,TONE=] [,DIVTYP=] [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be created.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 12+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
intercept.
Unit b is required.
machine (UI-LTG).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 13+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
by the intercept.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 14+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
intercept.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 15+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWCB1.
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 16+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
successful.
perform requests.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWCB1.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
is code processed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 17+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWCB1.
INRES=NEWCB1.
MEETME MEET ME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 18+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
by the intercept.
INRES=NEWCB1.
the intercept.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 19+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
has failed.
limit.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 20+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
this intercept.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 21+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
NEWCB1 NEW CODE AND SEND B1 NUMBER
NEWCB1NL NEW CODE SEND B1 NUMBER NO LAC
NEWCOD NEW CODE
CODE NEW CODE
a[-b]
a: DIGITS FOR NEW CODE=
This unit specifies the digit sequence to be used for
retranslation.
b: CATEGORY FOR NEW CODE
CATAC CATEGORY OF ACTUAL CONNECTION
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 22+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
This unit specifies the new class to be used for digit
translation. Translation with another class allows the
accessibility of a destination to be restricted
(e.g. in order to prevent the destination being dialed
directly).
Default: CATAC
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
If this value is entered, no further sequence is
allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
If the INRES parameter is also specified for the intercept
code, the tone is only applied if the response specified
by INRES (e.g. access an announcement) is not possible.
This parameter unit specifies how long (in seconds) the tone is
to be applied.
Value 0 means endless tone time duration.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
PROJTON1 = 30
PROJTON2 = 30
PROJTON3 = 30
PROJTON4 = 30
PROJTON5 = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
DIVTYP CALL DIVERSION TYPE
This parameter specifies how an incoming call request is to be
diverted if the called party has activated call diversion to the
operator or to an announcement.
This parameter is only allowed with the input of the
following INCEPT-values:
ACTDIVOP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 23+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTDVA1
ACTDVA2
ACTDVA3
ACTDVA4
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
DIVVMSF
ACTDIVTA
NOMULDIV
ACTDVA5
ACTDVA6
ACTDVA7
ACTDVA8
ACTDVA9
ACTDVA10
ACTDVA11
ACTDVA12
ACTDVA13
ACTDVA14
ACTDVA15
DIVIA1
DIVIA2
DIVIA3
DIVIA4
DIVIA5
DIVIA6
DIVIA7
DIVIA8
DIVIA9
DIVIA10
DIVIA11
DIVIA12
DIVIA13
DIVIA14
DIVIA15
CALLFW
NOCALLFW
Incompatibilities:
- SEQ > 1
- INRES = NEWCB1NL
DIVDA CALL DIV. IF B1 DIDNT ANSWER
This value specifies that the call request is to
be diverted if the B1-subscriber does not reply
within a given time.
DIVI CALL DIVERSION IMMEDIATE
be diverted immediately.
DIVIP CALL DIV. IMMED. AND PARALLEL
This value specifies that a connection to the B1
subscriber is to be set up at the same time as a
connection to the B2-subscriber. The subscriber
whose response is first detected in the B1-LTG
cuts into the call.
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies the position in which the response
created by this command is located if several responses are created
for one intercept code. This value must start with 1 and be entered
without gaps.
Incompatibilities:
- DIVTYP exists on a previous sequence.
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 24+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
Input format for creating an intercept code reached via a destination area to
incorporate resources (e.g. pool echo suppressors) into the connection. An
intercept code of this type can also serve to access an announcement device.
To incorporate resources into the connection the following actions (MML-
commands) are necessary:
CR DEST:DEST=<RESOU1>,...
- Create a trunk group
CR TGRP:TGNO=<RS001>,GCOS=ECDPGRP,...
- Create (a) trunk(s)
CR TRUNK:TGNO=<RS001>,...
- Create a route to the destination
CR ROUTE:DEST=<RESOU1>,TGNO=<RS001>,...
a:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWDEST,DEST=<RESOU1>;
To hear an announcement the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
CR DEST:DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create an announcement group
CR ANGRP:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create (an) announcement line(s)
CR ANLN:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a route to the announcement device
CR ROUTE:DEST=<ANNOU1>,TGNO=<A001>,...
a:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWDEST,DEST=<ANNOU1>;
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,DEST= [,DIVTYP=] [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be created.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 25+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
intercept.
Unit b is required.
machine (UI-LTG).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 26+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
by the intercept.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 27+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
intercept.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 28+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWCB1.
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 29+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
successful.
perform requests.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWCB1.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
is code processed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 30+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWCB1.
INRES=NEWCB1.
MEETME MEET ME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 31+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
by the intercept.
INRES=NEWCB1.
the intercept.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 32+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
has failed.
limit.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 33+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
this intercept.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 34+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
DEST DESTINATION AREA NAME
This parameter specifies the destination area to be accessed by the
intercept code.
DIVTYP CALL DIVERSION TYPE
This parameter specifies how an incoming call request is to be
diverted if the called party has activated call diversion to the
operator or to an announcement.
This parameter is only allowed with the input of the
following INCEPT-values:
ACTDIVOP
ACTDVA1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 35+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTDVA2
ACTDVA3
ACTDVA4
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
DIVVMSF
ACTDIVTA
NOMULDIV
ACTDVA5
ACTDVA6
ACTDVA7
ACTDVA8
ACTDVA9
ACTDVA10
ACTDVA11
ACTDVA12
ACTDVA13
ACTDVA14
ACTDVA15
DIVIA1
DIVIA2
DIVIA3
DIVIA4
DIVIA5
DIVIA6
DIVIA7
DIVIA8
DIVIA9
DIVIA10
DIVIA11
DIVIA12
DIVIA13
DIVIA14
DIVIA15
CALLFW
NOCALLFW
Incompatibilities:
- SEQ > 1
- INRES = NEWCB1NL
DIVDA CALL DIV. IF B1 DIDNT ANSWER
be diverted if the B1-subscriber does not reply
within a given time.
DIVI CALL DIVERSION IMMEDIATE
be diverted immediately.
DIVIP CALL DIV. IMMED. AND PARALLEL
This value specifies that a connection to the B1
subscriber is to be set up at the same time as a
connection to the B2-subscriber. The subscriber
whose response is first detected in the B1-LTG
cuts into the call.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 36+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
PROJTON1 = 30
PROJTON2 = 30
PROJTON3 = 30
PROJTON4 = 30
PROJTON5 = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
without gaps.
Incompatibilities:
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 37+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SUPPLY WITH A TONE
Input format to create an intercept code via which an intercept tone is
accessed.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,TONE= [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be created.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 38+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
intercept.
Unit b is required.
machine (UI-LTG).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 39+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
by the intercept.
intercept.
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 40+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
INRES=NEWCB1.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 41+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES=NEWDEST.
INRES=NEWDEST.
successful.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 42+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
perform requests.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INPERR INPUT ERROR
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
INRES=NEWCB1.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
is code processed.
INRES=NEWCB1.
INRES=NEWCB1.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 43+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MEETME MEET ME
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 44+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
by the intercept.
INRES=NEWCB1.
the intercept.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 45+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
has failed.
limit.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 46+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
this intercept.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 47+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
allowed.
NOTONE NO TONE
to be applied.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
PROJTON1 = 30
PROJTON2 = 30
PROJTON3 = 30
PROJTON4 = 30
PROJTON5 = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 48+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
without gaps.
Incompatibilities:
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INC- 49-
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INTERCEPT
This command displays the created data for the specified intercept code.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP INC : <INCEPT= ,INTYP=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which the data are
to be displayed.
Up to 34 intercept identifiers may be linked.
a[-b]
X ALL VALUES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 1+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 2+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 3+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INPERR INPUT ERROR
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 4+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANIF ANI FAILURE
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
CAUSE2 CAUSE 2
CAUSE3 CAUSE 3
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 5+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAUSE4 CAUSE 4
CAUSE5 CAUSE 5
CAUSE6 CAUSE 6
MEETME MEET ME
CALLHLD CALL HOLD
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 6+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OHQTO OFF-HOOK QUEUE TIME OUT
OHQ OFF-HOOK QUEUEING
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Unit b is required.
Unit b is required.
Compatibilities:
INTYP INTERCEPT TYPE
This parameter restricts data display to the specified intercept type.
An intercept type contains all intercept codes which are accessed for
similar reasons.
For example, if the DIZO intercept type is specified, the data are
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 7+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
displayed for all created intercept codes that are accessed if call set
up fails because of problems in digit translation or zoning.
This parameter is only allowed with INCEPT=X.
Division of intercept codes into groups:
ORIG:
ANNPDIAL
MWI
OCUB
SBLOAD
SBLOMAIN
ACCSPORI
REQSPORI
ABBRDERR
SCLSTO
TXSCASU
CREDLIMS
CCBS
TERM:
NOSERV
ACCSPTER
REQSPTER
ADMIN
ADMIN1
ADMIN2
ADMIN3
MAINT
MAINT1
MAINT2
MAINT3
SERVINC
TESTCALL
CHANGEDN
UNOBDN
CHGDNIND
SLTOUTO
OPRVNA
TERMPERM
ICUB
MOBSUBAB
SCLSTT
REJDIV
ACREJ
BUSYNFEA
DIZO:
UNOBDE0
UNOBDE1
UNOBDE2
UNOBDE3
UNOBDE4
UNOBDE5
UNOBDE6
UNOBDE7
UNOBDE8
UNOBDE9
UNOBDE10
UNOBDE11
UNALLROU
ILLDEST
UNOBDE12
UNOBDE13
CHCPTIND
RESANN
CALLDIV:
ACTDIVOP
ACTDVA1
ACTDVA2
ACTDVA3
ACTDVA4
ACTDIVND
ACTDIVOD
DIVVMSF
ACTDIVTA
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 8+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOMULDIV
ACTDVA5
ACTDVA6
ACTDVA7
ACTDVA8
ACTDVA9
ACTDVA10
ACTDVA11
ACTDVA12
ACTDVA13
ACTDVA14
ACTDVA15
DIVIA1
DIVIA2
DIVIA3
DIVIA4
DIVIA5
DIVIA6
DIVIA7
DIVIA8
DIVIA9
DIVIA10
DIVIA11
DIVIA12
DIVIA13
DIVIA14
DIVIA15
CALLFW
NOCALLFW
SUBCONIN:
SCISUC
SCIUNSUC
FEAYACT
FEAYDACT
FEANSUB
FEAUNSUC
INPERR
INPACC
FEAACT
DACHKSUC
INPTREJ
INPREJ
FEAINACT
NODATA
DACHKERR
REPALC
CFWNOREJ
SCIREP2
SCIREP3
SCIREP4
SCIREP5
SCIREP6
SCIREP7
SCIREP8
SCIREP9
SCIREP10
WUPCAS
WUPDAY
WUPWEEK
ANNCDVDN
SWUPCAS
SWUPDAY
CHRGANN
CHRGNOTA
MALCALL
ANNSCLDN
ANNARDN
SWUPWEEK
PINERR
SCLIMACC
SCLIMERR
SCLIMINF
KONSUC
KONUNSUC
GFRSUC
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 9+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OPREQ:
CCSOPR
SVIOPR
AMA:
ANIF
BILRUNA
ROUTING:
NOROUTE
NOALTROU
ALLROUBA
CCS7OVL
ANIFLIST
DIDBSYT
BLOCKLST
BLKWINFO
TMRNOTAV
IPINOTAV
BPRECEDA
EGMBUSY
PRECEDAL
NETWOMA:
NETWOMA0
NETWOMA1
NETWOMA2
NETWOMA3
NETWOMA4
NETWOMA5
COINNEAR
CONANEAR
NETWOMA6
TRSV
BASICAUS:
COINFAR
CONAFAR
SUBBUSY
INFOTON
CALLREJ
CAUSE1
CAUSE2
CAUSE3
NETOOS
USNRESP
CAUSE4
CAUSE5
PROTERR
PROTERRI
UNCOFAR
CAUSE6
COMDEST:
CALLWAIT
TESTWAIT
ECS
ECHOSIC
ECHOSOG
PHONMEET
MEETME
PHONM2
SUSCI
SUSCICTX
RSCIUI
CALLHLD
BLPOOLN5
CTXI1TR6
INI1TR6
FCOFFUI
SUSVICCS
LOOPCIDR
I1TR6IN
PSTN2IP
IP2PSTN
ISUPLOOP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 10+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EQUALACC:
CACNEXEC
CACNAUTH
BLOTREAT:
BLOTRA0
BLICON
BLINAT
BLONAT4
BLONAT3
BLONAT2
BLONAT1
BLOLOCAL
BLOP1
BLOP2
BLOTRA10
BLOTRA11
BLOTRA12
BLOTRA13
BLOTRA14
BLOTRA15
ALLBLOCK
QUEUFAIL:
OHQTO
QUEUSUCC:
OHQ
RBQ
PRIOQ
ANNQINFO
SSPANN:
SNA0
SNA1
SNA2
SNA3
SNA4
OVL1
OVL2
OVL3
OVL4
INV1
INV2
INANIF
IACB
SCPANN:
ANN
IPROUTES:
IPRA
Up to 34 intercept types may be linked.
ORIG ORIGINATING TRAFFIC
TERM TERMINATING TRAFFIC
DIZO DIGIT TRANSLATION ZONING
CALLDIV CALL DIVERSION ACTIVATED
SUBCONIN SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED INPUT
OPREQ OSS NATIONAL CALLS
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNT
ROUTING ROUTING
NETWOMA NETWORK MANAGEMENT
BASICAUS BACKWARD SIGNALED CAUSES
COMDEST COMMON DESTINATIONS
EQUALACC EQUAL ACCESS FUNCTION
BLOTREAT BLOCKAGES TREATMENT
QUEUSUCC QUEUEING SUCCESSFUL
QUEUFAIL QUEUEING FAILURE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 11+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSPANN SERVICE SWITCHING POINT ANN.
SCPANN SERVICE CONTROL POINT ANN.
IPROUTES INTELL. PERIPHERY ROUTING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INC- 12-
TEST INDAN
ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INDAS ANNOUNCEMENT
This command tests announcements which are played via an operator
controlled announcement equipment (OCANEQ).
The announcement to be tested is specified by entering the announcement
object related data.
Prerequisites:
- The test connection to the test object OCANEQ specified with the
parameters LTG and OCNO (port 0 of LTU:OCANEQ used) must be
already established via MML command SETUP TSTCALL.
So the prerequisites of the MML command SETUP TSTCALL must be
observed too.
Attention:
- If the MML command TEST INDAN is executed and the test announcement
can be heard, the test connection is released by the OCANEQ LTG
after the number of announcement cycles has been reached.
- If the MML command TEST INDAN is rejected (acknowledge "NOT EXECUTED")
it is up to the operator to decide whether a further (corrected) command
input is possible or the test call must be explicitly released with the
MML command REL TSTCALL.
Notes:
- The project-specific INDAS document should be available.
The INDAS document must be related to the OCANEQ variant which is
assigned to the specified LTG by a previously executed MML command
ENTR OCAVAR.
This document contains all information about the available announcement
related objects for an OCANEQ variant and enables the operator to
assemble the parameters of the MML command TEST INDAN with plausible
values.
The language definition (reference between the LANGUAGE value and the
foreign language) is also specified in this document.
- Before the audible checking of announcements is started, the announcement
related objects should have been created in the correlative databases:
announcement elements INDAS word, INDAS phrase, INDAS standard
announcement for the corresponding OCANEQ variant with MML command
CR ANELEM,
elementary messages with MML command CR ELMSG,
announcement text numbers with MML command CR ANTXT.
This is not necessary if only a test of OCANEQ fragments is to be performed.
1. TEST INDAN - ANTXT TEST ANTXT ANNOUNCEMENT
2. TEST INDAN - FRAGM TEST OCANEQ FRAGMENT
3. TEST INDAN - IFUANN TEST IFU ANNOUNCEMENT
4. TEST INDAN - STDANN TEST INDAS STDANN
5. TEST INDAN - UIANN TEST UI ANNOUNCEMENT
6. TEST INDAN - WORD TEST INDAS WORD
1. Input format
TEST ANTXT ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format is used to test an announcement based on Text Element
Dictionary (ANTXT announcement).
The announcement that corresponds to the selected text number is played.
The number of announcement cycles (NUMCYC) and the flag for special
information tone (SIT) depend on the values stored in the correlative
database (see MML command CR ANTXT) with the following exceptions:
- If NUMCYC = 1, two announcement cycles are executed to allow the check
of the announcement element pause between announcement cycles.
- IF NUMCYC = 0 (meaning unlimited repetition), only two announcement cycles
are executed to limit the seizure time.
Notes:
- Any INDAS word which is addressed by the components of the selected text
number but not created is replaced by an error tone in the test announcement.
An additional warning is displayed to the operator.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 1+
TEST INDAN
ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- OCANEQ fragments which are addressed by the entered announcement data but
unavailable are replaced by a sequence of two error tones in the test
announcement.
[ [
[ TEST INDAN : LTG= ,OCNO= ,TESTTYPE= ,TXTNO= ,LANGUAGE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group of the test object.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
This parameter specifies the unit number of the test object in an LTG.
TESTTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the required test type of audible checking.
ANTXT ANTXT ANNOUNCEMENT
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the ANTXT announcement
to be tested.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 2+
TEST INDAN
FRAGM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TEST OCANEQ FRAGMENT
This input format is used to test OCANEQ fragment(s).
IF an OCANEQ fragment range is entered, all available fragments in the
specified range with more than 100 fragments are played in groups of
100 fragments.
Notes:
- OCANEQ fragments within an entered range which are unavailable
are replaced by a tone in the test announcement (a sequence of
two error tones is played for each).
[ [
[ TEST INDAN : LTG= ,OCNO= ,TESTTYPE= ,FRAGM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
TESTTYPE TEST TYPE
FRAGM OCANEQ FRAGMENT
FRAGM OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ fragment number(s) to be tested.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 3+
TEST INDAN
IFUANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TEST IFU ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format is used to test an IFU announcement, i.e. the announcement
element INDAS phrase used for INDAS function or the INDAS function itself.
The announcement that corresponds to the selected INDAS phrase or the selected
INDAS function is played.
If an INDAS function is selected the number of announcement cycles (NUMCYC) and
the flag for special information tone (SIT) depend on the values stored in the
correlative database (see MML command MOD ANPREV) with the following exceptions:
- If NUMCYC = 1, two announcement cycles are executed to allow the check
of the announcement element pause between announcement cycles.
- IF NUMCYC = 0 (meaning unlimited repetition), only two announcement cycles are
executed to limit the seizure time.
If an announcement element INDAS phrase is selected, only one announcement cycle
is executed, no special information tone (SIT) is played.
Notes:
- The parameter ANELEM is only allowed if TESTTYPE = ANELEM is entered.
- The parameter IFU is only allowed if TESTTYPE = IFU is entered.
- Any announcement element which is addressed by the entered announcement data
but not created is replaced by an error tone in the test announcement. An
additional warning is displayed to the operator.
announcement.
[ [
[ [
[ [,ANELEM=[ [
[ TEST INDAN : LTG= ,OCNO= ,TESTTYPE= ,IFU= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,INDPAR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
TESTTYPE TEST TYPE
IFU INDAS FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the announcement element to be tested.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 4+
TEST INDAN
IFUANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
IFU INDAS FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the INDAS function to be tested.
The INDAS function is used to select individual announcements.
Individual announcement fed in as an information
about the stored A party number if requested by
subscriber controlled input.
ANNAUTGR IFU ANN AUTOMATIC GREETING
Individual announcement played to a subscriber
after the call has been forwarded to an operator
and before the subscriber is connected to the
operators headset.
ANNCDVDN IFU ANN CALL DIVERSION DN
Individual announcement used as a call
diversion acknowledgement after successful
activation of call forwarding or for data
query by subscriber controlled input.
ANNCHARG IFU ANN OF CHARGE
verbal information of the charge for an
outgoing call after it has been completed
and the subscriber has released.
ANNDINUM IFU ANN RETRIEVED DN
information of the directory number retrieved
by an operator for national or international
enquiry.
ANNQINF IFU ANN QUE INFO
about the current queue position in an ADMOSS
or CENTREX queue and/or the estimated delay
time.
ANNSCLDN IFU ANN SCREENING DN
Individual announcement for individual
screening list of directory numbers,
used as a positive acknowledgement for
data query by subscriber controlled input.
ANNSCLIM IFU ANN SCLIM
Individual announcement for subscriber credit
case of interrogation by subscriber controlled
input.
ANNTIME IFU ANN TIME
Individual announcement used as time
announcement.
elements)
announcement.
CHCPTIND IFU ANN CHANGED CPT
if a destination code number has changed.
CHGDNIND IFU ANN CHANGED DN
Individual announcement if the B-side
directory number has changed.
SWUPCAS IFU SHIFT WAKEUP CASUAL
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 5+
TEST INDAN
IFUANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SWUPDAY IFU SHIFT WAKEUP DAILY
SWUPWEEK IFU SHIFT WAKEUP WEEKLY
WUPCAS IFU WAKEUP CASUAL
WUPDAY IFU WAKEUP DAILY
Notes:
INDPAR INDAS PARAMETER
This parameter specifies the contents of the variable parts of an
INDAS phrase which is assigned to an INDAS function.
The variable parts are used to announce variable information as
directory number, hour/minute etc.
The following input format is used for parameter INDPAR:
<indpar type> - "<indpar value(s)>"
DAY - "1" ... "31"
DECISION - "FALSE" / "TRUE"
DIGITS - "< max. 36 digits 0..F>"
HOUR - "0" ... "23"
MINUTE - "0" ... "59"
MONTH - "1" ... "12"
NUMBERS - "0" ... "99"
RELDAY - "TODAY" / "TOMORROW"
SECOND - "0" ... "59"
SECONDTQ - "0" / "10" / "15" / "20" / "30" / "40" / "45" / "50"
TXTELEM - "1" ... "199"
WEEKDAY - "1" ... "1234567" [1 = Monday, 7 = Sunday
Examples:
- INDPAR = DIGITS-"4711"
- INDPAR = RELDAY-"TODAY"&HOUR-"9"&MINUTE-"30"
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 6+
TEST INDAN
IFUANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The parameter INDPAR is mandatory if
an announcement element INDAS phrase used for INDAS function with
variable parts is specified (parameter ANELEM)
or
an INDAS function is given (parameter IFU) and
one or more announcement elements INDAS phrase with variable parts
are assigned to the INDAS function.
- Theoretically up to 63 INDPAR values can be linked with &.
But the maximum number which is allowed depends from the highest
possible number of INDAS parameters for an INDAS phrase or an INDAS
function in a specific EWSD version (determined by the INDAS
catalogue).
The length of the INDPAR values is also restricted by the maximum
number of permissible characters for an MML command. As a result,
e.g. the given number of digits must follow this restriction.
- The order in which the INDPAR values are given must be in accordance
with the definition of the INDAS phrase in the INDAS catalogue and
via MML command CR ANELEM. If an INDAS functions is given this
condition must be fulfilled with regard to the assigned INDAS
phrase(s).
- A special case is INDAS phrase 1023. All "INDAS PARAMETER TYPEs"
(except DECISION, RELDAY, SECOND, SECONDTQ) can be combined
for that phrase.
In accordance with MML command CR ANTXT up to 50 values can be
given at which digits or weekdays have to be counted one by one.
If the last value of the input "INDAS PARAMETER TYPE" shall be
announced with decreased pitch the value must be given with .
at the end (this is not allowed for TXTELEM).
Example:
INDPAR = TXTELEM-"66"&TXTELEM-"13"&DIGITS-"4711."
- The unit "INDAS PARAMETER TYPE" is mandatory.
But it is allowed to omit the unit "INDAS PARAMETER VALUE(S)" or
to input "#" instead. In that case any created value compatible to
the "INDAS PARAMETER TYPE" will be generated by EWSD.
a[-b]
a: INDAS PARAMETER TYPE
DAY DAY OF MONTH
DECISION DECISION
DIGITS DIGITS
HOUR HOUR
MINUTE MINUTE
MONTH MONTH
NUMBERS NUMBERS
RELDAY RELATVE DAY
SECOND SECOND
SECONDTQ SECONDS (TENS, QUARTERS)
TXTELEM TEXT ELEMENT
WEEKDAY DAY OF WEEK
b: INDAS PARAMETER VALUE(S)=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 7+
TEST INDAN
STDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TEST INDAS STDANN
This input format is used to test the announcement element INDAS standard
announcement. The specified INDAS standard announcement is played once.
[ [
[ TEST INDAN : LTG= ,OCNO= ,TESTTYPE= ,ANELEM= ,LANGUAGE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
TESTTYPE TEST TYPE
a-b
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 8+
TEST INDAN
UIANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TEST UI ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format is used to test an User Interaction (UI) announcement
in the intelligent network, i.e. the announcement element INDAS phrase
used for User Interaction or the elementary message.
The announcement that corresponds to the selected INDAS phrase or the selected
elementary message is played. Only one announcement cycle is executed.
Notes:
- The parameter ANELEM is only allowed if TESTTYPE = ANELEM is entered.
- The parameter ELMSGID is only allowed if TESTTYPE = ELMSG is entered.
- The parameter LANGUAGE is to be input in case of TESTTYPE = ANELEM.
- Any INDAS word which is addressed by the unit "ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER
VALUE(S)" of parameter ELMPAR but not created is replaced by an error tone
in the test announcement. An additional warning is displayed to the operator.
announcement.
[ [
[ [
[ [,ANELEM= [ [
[ TEST INDAN : LTG= ,OCNO= ,TESTTYPE= ,ELMSGID= [,LANGUAGE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,ELMPAR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
TESTTYPE TEST TYPE
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 9+
TEST INDAN
UIANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Control Point) to be tested. The elementary message identification
defines implicitly the language of the elementary message.
Notes:
ELMPAR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER
This parameter specifies the contents of the variable parts of an
INDAS phrase which is assigned to an elementary message.
The variable parts are used to announce variable information as
directory number, date/time etc.
The following input format is used for parameter ELMPAR:
<elmpar type> - "<elmpar value(s)>"
DATE - "0-1-1" ... "9999-12-31" [Year-Month-Day
DIGITS - "< max. 50 digits 0..F>"
INTEGER - "0" ... "999999"
PRICE - "0.00" ... "999999.99" [PriceInteger.PriceFraction
TIME - "0:0" ... "23:59" [Hour:Minute
WEEKDAY - "1" ... "1234567" [1 = Monday, 7 = Sunday
Examples:
- ELMPAR = DATE-"1999-12-31"
- ELMPAR = INTEGER-"99"&DIGITS-"4711"
- ELMPAR = PRICE-"7.95"
Notes:
- The parameter ELMPAR is mandatory if
an announcement element INDAS phrase used for User Interaction with
variable parts is specified (parameter ANELEM)
or
an elementary message identification is given (parameter ELMSGID)
and an announcement element INDAS phrase with variable parts is
assigned to the elementary message.
- Up to 6 ELMPAR values can be linked with &.
- The order in which the ELMPAR values are given must be in accordance
with the definition of the elementary message and the assigned
announcement element INDAS phrase in the INDAS catalogue and via
MML command CR ELMSG.
- The unit "ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER TYPE" is mandatory. But it
is allowed to omit the unit "ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER VALUE(S)"
or to input "#" instead. In that case any created value compatible
to the "ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER TYPE" will be generated by
EWSD.
- In case of <elmpar type> PRICE the Price.Fraction part must always
be input with two digits.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 10+
TEST INDAN
UIANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER TYPE
DATE DATE (YEAR, MONTH, DAY)
DIGITS DIGITS
INTEGER INTEGER
PRICE PRICE (INTEGER, FRACTION)
TIME TIME (HOUR, MINUTE)
WEEKDAY DAY OF WEEK
b: ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER VALUE(S)=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 11+
TEST INDAN
WORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TEST INDAS WORD
This input format is used to test the announcement element(s) INDAS word.
If an INDAS word range is entered, the range may not contain more than
100 INDAS words.
The OCANEQ fragment(s) corresponding to the specified INDAS word(s)
is(are) played.
Notes:
- INDAS words within an entered range which are not created are replaced
by an error tone in the test announcement. An additional warning is
displayed to the operator.
- Assigned OCANEQ fragments which are unavailable are replaced by a
sequence of two error tones in the test announcement.
[ [
[ TEST INDAN : LTG= ,OCNO= ,TESTTYPE= ,ANELEM= ,LANGUAGE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
OCNO OCANEQ NUMBER
TESTTYPE TEST TYPE
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 12+
TEST INDAN
WORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INDAN- 13-
DISP INDIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDICATION STATUS
This command displays all functional units out of service, all blocked
trunks and all catastrophe conditions. The status information appears
as a continuous message.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP INDIC : [OBJECT=] [,RSUINF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJECT INDICATION OBJECT
This parameter specifies the object for an indication.
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
SIGLBL SIGNALING LINK BLOCKED
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
CU CENTRAL UNITS
TGBL TRUNK GROUP BLOCKED
CAT1 CATASTROPHE CONDITION 1
CAT2 CATASTROPHE CONDITION 2
ALDSUP ALARM DISPLAY SUPPRESSION
RSUINF RSU INFORMATION
This parameter specifies, whether an extended output with
additional RSU information for RSU specific alarms is
requested.
NO NO RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
N NO RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
YES RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
Y RSU INFORMATION DESIRED
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INDIC- 1-
DISP INEXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA
This command displays specific data of the home exchange concerning Intelligent
Network services.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP INEXDATA ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INEXDATA- 1-
ENTR INEXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA
This command creates exchange specific data concerning the Intelligent Network
service execution on the home exchange.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR INEXDATA : <LAC= ,TDDIG= ,LCCODE=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the Service Switching
Point in the Intelligent Network.
If it will be used as zoning destination, the command CR ZOPT has to
be entered with the local area code specified in the CODE parameter.
TDDIG TRAFFIC DISCRIMINATION DIGITS
2 digit decimal number
LCCODE LEG CONTROLLER CODE
This parameter specifies the code for the selection of a Leg
Controller LTG. The code must be created with command CR CPT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INEXDATA- 1-
CAN INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Initiator CP
This task cancels an Initiator.
The required input parameters for an unique Initiator selection are:
1) Initiator AET or alternativly Initiator name
2) and Password type
Note:
Cancel Initiator removes the specified Initiator from the Q3 authentication
database and does not cancel an existing association.
The operation will be not executed, if no further (unrestricted) system access
possible.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN INICP : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] ,Password type= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
This parameter specifies an remote Initiator (OS
application) by the application entity title (AET).
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator name
is specified.
Input format: {nn nn nn ... }
Initiator name
This parameter defines the unique initiator name within
the specified password type.
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator AET
is specified.
Password type
This mandatory parameter is used for an unique Initiator
selection and specifies the type of password mechanism.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiator with a replay
protected password
No PW : Initiator without a password
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INICP- 1-
CR INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Initiator CP
This task creates an Initiator, at Q3 Authentication function with the specified
password type.
Possible password types are the "Replay protected PW" for replay-protected
authentication
and type "No PW" (without password) which supports only an identification.
Each Initiator must be specified by its AET (application entity title).
Further it is possible to define time dependencies and restrict the system access
of
each Initiator by following scheduling parameters:
- duration: defines a Start Time and Stop Time and/or
- daily scheduling: time intervals for all days of the week or
- weekly scheduling: time intervals per individual days of the week.
The parameter Availability status indicates if a Initiator with scheduling
parameters is available (On) or not (Off). The output "-" indicates that no
scheduling parameter was entered.
Note:
- The parameters for daily scheduling and weekly scheduling exclude one another.
- The scheduling paramters must be selected when the initiator is created. If not,
then it is not possible to add scheduling parameters later by MOD INI.
If no scheduling parameters created then the Initiator is permanent valid and
can get system access every time.
Input format
[ [
[ CR INICP : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] ,Password type= [
[ [
[ [,Password=] [,Verify password=] [,Accept time range=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
This parameter is mandatory.
Initiator name
If this optional parameter is not specified, the system
generates automatically a name:
AUTHNULLnnnn : for initiators without passwords
("No PW") types
AUTHRPPWnnnn : for "Replay protected PW" initiators.
Password type
This mandatory parameter defines the type of password
mechanism. It specifies if the Initiator should
be identified without a password or if it should be
authenticated by a replay-protected password.
Input values:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INICP- 1+
CR INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
protected password
Password
This parameter specifies the password.
Prerequisites:
The password should contain at least a letter, a digit
and a special character and the password length should
be between 4 (minimum) and 24 (maximum) characters.
Verify password
Please enter password string again.
Accept time range
This parameter is only used for Initiators with
Password type "Replay protected PW" to specify
the accept time range.
This means the maximum time interval between generating
the authentication value at the Initiator and receiving
it at the responder.
If the parameter is not specified for an "replay
protected PW" Initiator then the default value of
5 minutes will be used.
Input format: hh:mm:ss (String )
hh hour (00..23),
mm minute (00..59),
ss second (00..59).
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the
Initiator gets system access.
If only the Start time is set the Stop time will be
set automatically to Continuous.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
will be set if this parameter is omitted
but Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the
Initiator loses system access.
If only the Stop time is set the Start time will be
set automatically to the actual system time of the switch.
time values
will be set if this parameter is omitted
but Start time is set.
Daily intervals
intervals can be specified within the Initiator gets
system access.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for weekly
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INICP- 2+
CR INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Default: whole day.
Weekly intervals
intervals can be defined for each day of the week.
The system access will be denied on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals set. At least one
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled from
the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INICP- 3-
DISP INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Initiator CP
This task is used to display the attributes of one or more Initiators.
The following selection is possible:
- Output of one Initiator:
--> Please enter 1) Initiator AET or Initiator name
and 2) Password type.
- Output of all Initiators:
--> No input necessarry.
- Idividual selections:
--> You can do selection by
1) Initiator AET or Initiator name or Name substring
and/or
2) Password type.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP INICP : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] [,Name substring=] [
[ [
[ [,Password type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
Dependencies:
or Name substring is specified.
Initiator name
This parameter selects a initiator by a name string.
Dependencies:
or Name Substring is specified.
Name substring
This parameter specifies a pattern (Substring) for the
Initiator name. Only Initiators which name contains
this Substring at any position will be displayed.
Dependencies:
or Initiator name is specified.
Password type
This parameter selects Initiators by a specific password
type. If the parameter is omitted then all Initiators,
otherwise only the Initiators with the specified Password
type will be displayed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INICP- 1+
DISP INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiators with a replay
protected password
No PW : Initiators without a password
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INICP- 2-
MOD INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Initiator CP
This task modifies the authentication parameters of an existing Initiator.
The following parameters are used for an unique Initiator selection and
can not be changed:
1) Initiator AET or alternativly Initiator name and
2) Password type.
Following parameters are changeable:
- Password,
- Accept time range
- Scheduling data
Note: A creation of new scheduling parameters is not possible. Only
scheduling paramters selected when the initiator was created can
be modified in the following way:
- duration: replace Start Time and/or Stop Time,
- daily scheduling: replace daily intervals,
- weekly scheduling: replace time intervals of single days of the week.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD INICP : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] ,Password type= [
[ [
[ [,Password=] [,Verify password=] [,Accept time range=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
Dependencies:
is specified.
Initiator name
This parameter must not be entered, if the Initiator AET
is specified.
Password type
This mandatory parameter is used for an unique Initiator
selection and specifies the type of password mechanism.
Input values:
protected password
Password
This parameter defines the new password value.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INICP- 1+
MOD INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
The password should contain at least a letter, a digit
and a special character and the password length should
be between 4 (minimum) and 24 (maximum) characters.
Verify password
Please enter new password string again.
Accept time range
This parameter is only used for Initiators with
Password type "Replay protected PW" to specify
the accept time range.
This means the maximum time interval between generating
the authentication value at the Initiator and receiving
it at the responder.
Input format: hh:mm:ss (String )
hh hour (00..23),
mm minute (00..59),
ss second (00..59).
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the
Initiator gets system access.
Stop time was entered, when the Initiator was created.
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the
Initiator loses system access.
The parameter can be replaced only, if a Start time or
Stop time was entered, when the Initiator was created.
time values
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces the Daily intervals (up to 6)
within the Initiator gets system access.
The parameter can be entered only, if Daily intervals
were entered when the Initiator was created.
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces the Weekly intervals within
the Initiator gets system access.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are
replaced. The intervals of the days not selected will
not be changed.
Enter 0 intervals to disable the whole day. At least
one day with one interval must be active in the resultant
Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is rejected.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INICP- 2+
MOD INICP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INICP- 3-
CAN INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command removes the Congestion Control data.
Note:
Some guidelines have to be taken into account using the following
parameters:
- using CLGPTY : SKEY is mandatory,
LOCNO and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using LOCNO : SKEY is mandatory,
CLGPTY and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using CLDPTY : CLGPTY and LOCNO are incompatible.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INOVLCO : <CLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO= ,SKEY=> [,CTRLTYPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party number for
which the Congestion Control data will be removed.
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party number for
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number for
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the service key for which
Congestion Control data have to be removed.
CTRLTYPE CONTROL TYPE
This parameter specifies the originator of the Congestion
Control data, which have to be deleted.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INOVLCO- 1+
CAN INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSPOP SSP OPERATOR
SCPOP SCP OPERATOR
SCPAUT SCP AUTOMATIC
Default: SSPOP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INOVLCO- 2-
DISP INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command displays data concerning specified or all Intelligent Network
Congestion Control data. These data can be the parameters or the statistics
about Congestion Control. It is also possible to distinguish between SCP
originated or operator originated Congestion Control data.
Note:
parameters:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP INOVLCO : <CLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO= ,SKEY=> [,FORMAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CTRLTYPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the called party number for which
Congestion Control data have to be displayed.
This parameter specifies the calling party number for which
This parameter specifies the location number for which
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the service key for which
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INOVLCO- 1+
DISP INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FORMAT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the kind of data which has to be displayed:
- PA has to be used for the selection of control data for a
specified SKEY, CLDPTY, CLGPTY or LOCNO.
- ST has to be used for the selection of SKEY, CLDPTY,
CLGPTY or LOCNO specific statistic data.
PA DISPLAY CONTROL PARAMETERS
ST DISPLAY CONTROL STATISTICS
This parameter determines whether to display statistics
or the parameters of Congestion Control.
Default: PA
CTRLTYPE CONTROL TYPE
This parameter specifies the originator of the Congestion
Control data, which have to be displayed.
If no value is entered the data of all origins will be displayed.
SSPOP SSP OPERATOR
SCPOP SCP OPERATOR
SCPAUT SCP AUTOMATIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INOVLCO- 2-
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command enters the control data to prevent the SCP
from overload. This will be done for a control criterion,
i.e. either for a given service key SKEY, called party
number CLDPTY, calling party number CLGPTY or location
number LOCNO. The maximal number of controlled and allowed
requests to the SCP concerning the control criterion is
specified by the parameter BURST. The decrease value
DECVAL is expected to be the number of requests answered in
the decrease time DECTIME.
Prerequisites:
- a service key must have been created with the command
CR INTRIG.
Note:
parameters:
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR INOVLCO : CODURA= ,BURST= ,DECVAL= <,SKEY= ,CLDPTY= [
[ [
[ ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO=> [,DECTIME=] [,RELCA=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TREAT=] [,DURA=] [,ANNCYC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODURA CONTROL DURATION
This parameter specifies the control duration in seconds.
A value greater than 86400 means an infinite duration.
BURST BURST OF ALL. SIMUL. CALLS
This parameter specifies the maximal number of controlled and
simultaneous allowed requests to the SCP concerning the
control criterion.
DECVAL DECREASE VALUE
This parameter specifies the decrease value.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INOVLCO- 1+
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter is used to specify the control criterion, i.e.
the IN service for which overload control data will be
entered.
the called party number for which overload control data will be
entered.
the calling party number for which overload control data will be
entered.
the location number for which overload control data will be
entered.
DECTIME DECREASE TIME
This parameter specifies the decrease time in milliseconds.
A value greater than 60000 means an infinite decrease time.
Incompatibilities:
- if BURST greater than 0,
this parameter value must not be greater than 60000
Default: 100
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to control the call release and intercept treatment. It is related
to the announcement determined by the TREAT parameter.
a-b
a: LOCATION
USER USER
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INOVLCO- 2+
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
Default: PUL
b: CAUSE VALUE=
Default: 42
TREAT CALL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies the intercept code for blocked IN calls.
a-b
a: ANNOUNCEMENT IDENTIFICATION
TONE SCP TONE
ANN SCP ANNOUNCEMENT
Default: TONE
Compatibilities:
- For TONE identifier this value is of range (1..31).
Default: 4
DURA ANNOUNCEMENT / TONE DURATION
This parameter specifies the time limitation of the entered tone or
announcement. It is related to the tone / announcement determined
by the TREAT parameter.
Default: 40
ANNCYC ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of cycles of the entered
announcement. It is related to the announcement determined by the
TREAT parameter.
Incompatibilities:
- if TREAT = TONE, this parameter is not allowed
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INOVLCO- 3-
CAN INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command removes an IN service class mark.
Prerequisites:
- No IN service class mark reference (assigned with the MML command
CR INSCMREF) and no IN authorization (assigned with the MML command
CR INAUTH) may exist which refer to this IN service class.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCM : SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be removed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCM- 1-
CR INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command creates an INSCM that is used for the installation
of trigger detection points (TDP) of several types.
The following types of trigger detection points can be controlled
with IN service class marks:
TDP1 - Originating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the A-side seizure processing when the
off-hook for a certain object is detected.
TDP2 - Collected Information:
This trigger is detected when the A-side wants to setup a call and
a specified number of digits is collected.
TDP3 - Analyzed Information:
This trigger is detected during the IN specific analysis of the
called party number, the calling party number or its category.
TDP4 - Route Select Failure:
This trigger is detected when the indication was received that no
route to the required destination can be found.
TDP5 - Originating Busy:
This trigger is detected when the originating call party receives
an indication of user busy from the terminating call party.
TDP6 - Originating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the A-side processing when the B-side
does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
TDP5O6 - Combines TDP5 and TDP6.
TDP12 - Terminating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
the call setup to a certain object was detected.
TDP13 - Terminating Busy:
B-party is busy.
TDP14 - Terminating No Answer:
B-side does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
Precondition for the use of a trigger detection point is the creation
and the activation of an INSCM reference (respectively by the CR INSCMREF
and ACT INSCMREF command) or the creation of an IN authorization
(by means of the command CR INAUTH)
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID has to
be created by command CR INTRIG.
- SSF type must be NORMAL.
1. CR INSCM - TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
4. CR INSCM - TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
10. CR INSCM - TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 1+
CR INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP1.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 2+
CR INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
type TDP12.
[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLDPTY=] [,NCLDPTY=] [,CLGPTY=] [,PROP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 3+
CR INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
with &.
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
PROP PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties.
<CNAM > CALLING NAME NOT PRESENT
< > This parameter value specifies an extra trigger
< > condition. It is used to detect an IN service
< > request depending on the unavailability of the
< > calling name.
<PROP3 > PROPERTY 3
<PROP4 > PROPERTY 4
<PROP5 > PROPERTY 5
<PROP6 > PROPERTY 6
<PROP7 > PROPERTY 7
<PROP8 > PROPERTY 8
<PROP9 > PROPERTY 9
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 4+
CR INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
type TDP13.
[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,CLGPTY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,RELCA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 5+
CR INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 6+
CR INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
type TDP13O14.
[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 7+
CR INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 8+
CR INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
type TDP14.
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLGPTY=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 9+
CR INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 10+
CR INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
type TDP2.
[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,COLDIG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ESCAPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
collected.
ESCAPE ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies the escape code to be used in case
of TDP2 for the setup of a normal non-IN call.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 11+
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
type TDP3.
[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= [,PRID=] [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [,CAT=] [,NCAT=] [,PROP=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
collected.
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 12+
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
CAT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is
used to restrict the IN-triggering to a specific category of
calling parties.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as NCAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 13+
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the category of the calling party.
NCAT NOT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is used
to restrict the IN-triggering to calling parties which are NOT of
the entered category.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as a.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
PROP PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties.
ETRIND EVALUATE RETRIGGER INDICATION
This parameter value specifies that the retrigger
indication "IN Triggering Inhibited After Connect"
delivered by the IN service logic will be
evaluated.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 14+
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
type TDP4.
[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
collected.
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 15+
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 16+
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 17+
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
type TDP5.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,NCLDPTY=[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
digit combination.
administered.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 18+
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 19+
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 20+
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
type TDP5O6.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 21+
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 22+
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 23+
CR INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
type TDP6.
[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be created.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX
be started.
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 24+
CR INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCM- 25-
DISP INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command displays the data concerning a specified or all
IN service class marks.
Depending on the TYPE parameter only service class marks of
special type will be displayed.
Depending on the PRID parameter only service class mark using
this profile identifier will be displayed.
Depending on the FORMAT parameter specific data of the service
class mark related to the trigger condition or trigger profile
will be displayed.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCM : SCMID= [,TYPE=] [,PRID=] [,FORMAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be displayed.
for which the IN service class mark shall be displayed.
for which the IN service class mark shall be displayed.
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION FOR DISPLAY
This parameter specifies the kind of data which has to be displayed
for an Service Class Mark:
- PA has to be used to display the specific trigger conditions.
- CT has to be used to display the profile identification of the SCM.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INSCM- 1+
DISP INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PA PARAMETERS TRIGGER CONDITIONS
CT CALL TREATMENT
Default: PA
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INSCM- 2-
MOD INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command modifies an IN service class mark that is used for
the triggering at the following trigger detection points:
TDP1 - Originating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the A-side seizure processing when the
off-hook for a certain object was detected.
TDP2 - Collected Information:
This trigger is detected when the A-side wants to setup a call and
a specified number of digits was collected.
TDP3 - Analyzed Information:
This trigger is detected during the IN specific analysis of the
called party number, the calling party number or its category.
TDP4 - Route Select Failure:
This trigger is detected when the indication was received that no
route to the required destination can be found.
TDP5 - Originating Busy:
This trigger is detected when the originating call party receives
an indication of user busy from the terminating call party.
TDP6 - Originating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the A-side processing when the B-side
does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
TDP12 - Terminating Attempt Authorized:
the call setup to a certain object was detected.
TDP13 - Terminating Busy:
B-party is busy.
TDP14 - Terminating No Answer:
B-side does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
Notes:
- The type of service class mark must not be changed.
- The MOD command allows to overwrite existing parameter values.
- Removal of trigger conditions is only allowed for an escape code.
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID has to
be created by command CR INTRIG.
- SSF type must be NORMAL.
1. MOD INSCM - TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
4. MOD INSCM - TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
8. MOD INSCM - TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4.
9. MOD INSCM - TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5.
10. MOD INSCM - TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 1+
MOD INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point
of type TDP1.
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
be started.
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 2+
MOD INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP12.
[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,COLDIG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,PROP= ,CPROP=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
collected.
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 3+
MOD INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
PROP PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties to be
added to the already existing values.
< > calling name.
<PROP3 > PROPERTY 3
<PROP4 > PROPERTY 4
<PROP5 > PROPERTY 5
<PROP6 > PROPERTY 6
<PROP7 > PROPERTY 7
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 4+
MOD INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<PROP8 > PROPERTY 8
<PROP9 > PROPERTY 9
CPROP CANCEL SCM PROPERTY
canceled from the already existing values.
< > calling name.
<PROP3 > PROPERTY 3
<PROP4 > PROPERTY 4
<PROP5 > PROPERTY 5
<PROP6 > PROPERTY 6
<PROP7 > PROPERTY 7
<PROP8 > PROPERTY 8
<PROP9 > PROPERTY 9
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 5+
MOD INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
type TDP13.
[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLGPTY= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 6+
MOD INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 7+
MOD INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
type TDP13O14.
[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 8+
MOD INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 9+
MOD INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
type TDP14.
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLGPTY=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 10+
MOD INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 11+
MOD INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
type TDP2.
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,ESCAPE= ,CESCAPE=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
collected.
ESCAPE ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies the modified escape code to be used in case
of TDP2 for the setup of a normal non-IN call.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 12+
MOD INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CESCAPE CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies if the escape code has to be cancelled.
N ESCAPE CODE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO ESCAPE CODE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
YES CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 13+
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
type TDP3.
[ [
[ [
[ ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,CAT= ,NCAT= ,PROP= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CPROP=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
collected.
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 14+
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
CAT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is
used to restrict the IN-triggering to a specific category of
calling parties.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as NCAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 15+
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COINB COIN BOX
NCAT NOT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is used
to restrict the IN-triggering to calling parties which are NOT of
the entered category.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as CAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
PROP PROPERTY
added to the already existing values.
evaluated.
CPROP CANCEL SCM PROPERTY
canceled from the already existing values.
evaluated.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 16+
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4.
type TDP4.
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
collected.
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 17+
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 18+
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 19+
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5.
type TDP5.
[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLDPTY= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
digit combination.
administered.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 20+
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 21+
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 22+
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
type TDP5O6.
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 23+
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 24+
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 25+
MOD INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
type TDP6.
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be modified.
detected.
be started.
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 26+
MOD INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered.
Compatibilities:
valid :
with &.
Compatibities:
with &.
Notes:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCM- 27-
ACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command activates an IN service class mark assigned to a subscriber,
PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a CENTREX group, a common service group,
a call type or a digit code.
Prerequisites :
- The corresponding INSCMREF must have been created with the command
CR INSCMREF.
1. ACT INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. ACT INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. ACT INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. ACT INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. ACT INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. ACT INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. ACT INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to
a digit combination (code).
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 1+
ACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 2+
ACT INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a call type or
a common service group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 3+
ACT INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned
to a CENTREX group and code.
Incompatibilities :
- The command is rejected if the CXGRP is related to a secured CENTREX
business group BGID for which the operator has no administration
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 4+
ACT INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 5+
ACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
Activate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :
- The command is rejected if the DN is related to a secured CENTREX
business group DN for which the operator has no administration
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= [,OPMODE=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
LNO LINE NUMBER
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 6+
ACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 7+
ACT INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
Activate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a subscriber or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :
business group DN for which the operator has no administration
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 8+
ACT INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a trunk group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : TGNO= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 9-
CAN INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command cancels the assignment of an IN service class mark reference
to a subscriber, a PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a CENTREX group, a
call type, a common service group or a digit code.
Notes :
- The SCMREF must be deactivated before it may be cancelled.
1. CAN INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. CAN INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. CAN INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. CAN INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. CAN INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. CAN INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. CAN INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference to a digit combination
(for office based IN-triggering).
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
may be entered.
entered.
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 1+
CAN INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assigned to a call type
or a common service group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 2+
CAN INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assigned
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 3+
CAN INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 4+
CAN INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assignment to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
Notes:
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 5+
CAN INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 6+
CAN INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assignment to
a subscriber or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 7+
CAN INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference to a trunk group
(for trunk group based IN-triggering).
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 8-
CR INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command assigns an IN service class mark to a subscriber, PBX,
PBX line, a trunkgroup, a CENTREX group, a call type, a common service
group or a digit code.
Prerequisites :
- The INSCM specified in parameter SCMID must have been created
with command CR INSCM.
1. CR INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. CR INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. CR INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. CR INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. CR INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. CR INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. CR INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a digit combination (for office based
IN-triggering).
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code) to
which the IN service class mark is assigned.
may be entered.
entered.
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 1+
CR INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 2+
CR INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a call type or a common service group.
Prerequisites :
- The parameters LAC, DN must address a call type or a common service
group, previously created with the CR CALLTYPE or the CR CSGRP command
respectively.
Incompatibilities :
- An INSCM may only be assigned to CENTREX common service groups or
to call types for a CENTREX common service groups.
- Only INSCMs of type TDP12 can be assigned.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 3+
CR INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a CENTREX group and code.
Prerequisites :
- The parameter CXGRP must address a CENTREX group, previously created with
the command CR CXGRP.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group
to which the IN service class mark is assigned.
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code) to
which the IN service class mark is assigned.
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 4+
CR INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a CENTREX group.
Prerequisites :
- The parameter CXGRP must address a CENTREX group, previously created with
the command CR CXGRP.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group
to which the IN service class mark is assigned.
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 5+
CR INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a PBX line.
Prerequisites:
- The parameters LAC, DN, OPMODE and LNO must address a PBX line
previously created with command CR PBXLN.
- Terminating IN service class marks may only be assigned to PBX lines with
COS = DCANORM.
Incompatibilities :
- Originating INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the
same object simultaneously.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a PBX line, no reference to an
originating INSCM must already exist for the PBX line and no
reference to an INSCM of incompatible TYPE must exist for the
belonging PBX.
- To assign a terminating INSCM to a PBX line, no terminating INSCM must
already be assigned to the PBX line.
- INSCMs are incompatible with:
- OPMODE = IIC1TR6
= IBW1TR6
= IOG1TR6
- Originating INSCMs are incompatible with
OPMODE = IOG
= AOG.
- Terminating INSCMs are incompatible with
OPMODE = IIC
= AIC.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to a PBX line if the line itself
or the PBX is assigned :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
Notes:
- In case an IN service class mark is also assigned to the PBX, the IN service
class mark assigned to the PBX line will take precedence.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 6+
CR INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 7+
CR INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a subscriber or a PBX.
Prerequisites :
- The parameters LAC, DN must address a subscriber or a PBX
previously created respectively with commands CR SUB or CR PBX.
- Originating INSCMs may only be assigned to a PBX having at least
one of the following OPMODEs : IIC, AIC, IBW, ABW.
- Terminating INSCMs may only be assigned to a PBX having at least
one of the following OPMODEs: IOG, AOG, IBW, ABW.
Incompatibilities :
- Originating INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the
same object simultaneously.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a subscriber, no reference to
an originating INSCM must already exist for the subscriber.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a PBX, no reference to an
originating INSCM must already exist for the PBX and no reference
to an INSCM of incompatible TYPE must exist for the PBX lines
belonging to that PBX.
- To assign a terminating INSCM to a subscriber or a PBX, no terminating
INSCM must already be assigned to the subscriber or PBX.
- INSCMs may not be assigned to:
- subscribers with CAT = COINB1
= COINB2
= COINB3
= TPLRNG
= TPLTIP
= TESTNO
= IDSB
= ECS
= ECSP
- subscribers with LNATT = ISDN1TR6
- PBX with TYPE = FRAMEHD
= PHI
- PBX with OPMODE = IIC1TR6
= IBW1TR6
= IOG1TR6
- Originating INSCMs may not be assigned subscribers with CAT = VIRTSUB.
- Terminating INSCMs, except of type TDP12, may not be assigned to CENTREX
users.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to subscribers with :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to a PBX if the PBX itself or
one of its lines is assigned :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 8+
CR INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 9+
CR INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a trunk group (for trunk group
based IN-triggering).
Prerequisites :
- The parameter TGNO must address a trunk group, previously created with
the command CR TGRP.
Incompatibilities :
- INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the same object
simultaneously.
[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to which the
IN service class mark is assigned.
to be assigned.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INSCMREF- 10-
DACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REF.
This command deactivates an IN service class mark previously activated.
1. DACT INSCMREF- CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT CODE
2. DACT INSCMREF- CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. DACT INSCMREF- CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. DACT INSCMREF- CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. DACT INSCMREF- PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. DACT INSCMREF- SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. DACT INSCMREF- TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT CODE
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned
to a digit combination (code).
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
may be entered.
entered.
to be deactivated.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 1+
DACT INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a call type or
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Deactivate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= [,OPMODE=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
LNO LINE NUMBER
Notes:
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
Deactivate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a subscriber or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be deactivated.
DACT INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a trunk group.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : TGNO= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be deactivated.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 8-
DISP INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command displays references of subscribers, PBXs, PBX lines, trunk
groups, CENTREX groups, call types, common service groups and digit
codes to IN service class marks.
<job number>.
1. DISP INSCMREF- CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. DISP INSCMREF- CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
3. DISP INSCMREF- CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
4. DISP INSCMREF- DN IN SCM REFERENCE ASSIOCIATED TO DN
5. DISP INSCMREF- TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Displays references of digit combinations (codes) to IN service class marks.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
may be entered.
entered.
This parameter specifies the name of an IN service class mark.
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service whose data has to be displayed.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 1+
DISP INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
DISP INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Displays references of CENTREX groups and code to IN service class marks.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
DISP INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Displays references of CENTREX groups to IN service class marks.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : CXGRP= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
DISP INSCMREF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE ASSIOCIATED TO DN
Displays references of subscribers, PBXs, PBX lines, call types or
common service groups to IN service class marks.
[ [
[ DISP INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OTPTYPE=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
- If LAC=X is entered, DN=X has to be entered, too.
OTPTYPE ORIG./TERM. PARTY TYPE
This parameter specifies the type for orginating or terminating
party.
Notes:
- If it is not entered, all types of originating or terminating
party are displayed.
CSGRP COMMON SERVICE GROUP
CTYPE CALL TYPE
PBX PBX
PBXLN PBX LINE
SUB SUBSCRIBER
LNO LINE NUMBER
Notes:
DISP INSCMREF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
DISP INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Displays references of trunk groups to IN service class marks.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : TGNO= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 7-
MOD INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command permits to replace an IN service class mark assigned to a
subscriber, a PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a CENTREX group, a call type,
a common service group or a digit code by another IN service class mark.
Prerequisites :
- The IN service class mark specified in parameter SCMID must have been
created with command CR INSCM.
1. MOD INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. MOD INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. MOD INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. MOD INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. MOD INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. MOD INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. MOD INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a digit combination
(for office based IN-triggering).
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
may be entered.
entered.
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 1+
MOD INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 2+
MOD INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a call type or
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 3+
MOD INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a CENTREX group and code.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 4+
MOD INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 5+
MOD INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
Replacement of the IN service class mark assigned to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
Notes:
to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 6+
MOD INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 7+
MOD INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
Replacement of the IN service class mark assigned to a subscriber
or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
object.
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 8+
MOD INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a trunk group
(for trunk group based IN-triggering).
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 9-
ACT INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command will be used for the activation of the service with the
feature Service Filtering for the specified Intelligent Network subscriber
which was deactivated by the operator before.
Prerequisites:
- The subscriber activated by the partner Service Control Point has been
deactivated by the DACT INSLDAT command.
Notes:
- Generally the activation of the subscriber will be done by the Service
Control Point.
- At this activation the counter for valid votes will not be reset.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [VOTEDN=[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ ; [
[ ACT INSLDAT : SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [
[ [ [ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VOTEDN VOTE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number for which Service
Filtering has to be executed.
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service for which
Service Filtering has to be executed.
This parameter specifies the calling party
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter specifies the location number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INSLDAT- 1-
CAN INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command removes the service logic data that are necessary for the
feature Service Filtering of an Intelligent Network vote directory
number.
Prerequisites:
- The status of Service Filtering for the specified vote directory
number has to be inactive.
Notes:
- Generally Service Filtering will be deactivated by an administration
message from the partner Service Control Point. If it is not able to
send this message, the DACT INSLDAT command may be used.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ CAN INSLDAT : SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [
[ [ [ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SKEY SERVICE KEY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INSLDAT- 1-
DACT INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command deactivates the feature Service Filtering of an Intelligent
Network service subscriber. Generally Service Filtering will be deactivated
by an administration message from the partner Service Control Point or a timer.
If it is not able to send such a message, this command may be used. It can be
used in case of canceling an element, if the Service Control Point is not able
to do it.
Prerequisites:
- The status of Service Filtering for the specified subscriber identifier
has to be active.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ DACT INSLDAT : SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [
[ [ [ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SKEY SERVICE KEY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT INSLDAT- 1-
DISP INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
numbers for the feature Service Filtering. In order to select a vote
directory number (possibly in connection with an origin)
also the protocol type has to be entered. Depending on the FORMAT
parameter specific data for the control of Service Filtering related to a
vote directory number, for the treatment of filtered calls, a SCP address
description or specific statistics (counter) will be displayed. A further
choice can be reached by means of the parameters STATUS, SKEY and
MODE to select all active or inactive Service Filtering entities, all
entities related to a service or all entities related to a control mode,
respectively.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ [
[ DISP INSLDAT : <VOTEDN= ,SKEY=> [,LOCNO= [ [,PROT=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,FORMAT=] [,STATUS=] [,MODE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SKEY SERVICE KEY
Service Filtering entities have to be displayed:
Notice:
- If SKEY and VOTEDN are entered all Service Filtering entities
with the specified SKEY and VOTEDN will be displayed.
- If the SKEY is entered without the VOTEDN, only these Service
Filtering entities will be displayed, which have the specified
SKEY as filter criteria.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INSLDAT- 1+
DISP INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent
Network application protocol the service execution is
based on.
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION FOR DISPLAY
for an Intelligent Network service subscriber on the own exchange:
- PA has to be used for the selection of control data for the
specified directory number.
- CT has to be used for the selection of information about the
treatment of filtered calls.
- AD has to be used for the selection of an address description
of the partner Service Control Point.
- ST has to be used for the selection of directory number
specific statistic data (counter).
PA DISPLAY CONTROL PARAMETER
CT DISPLAY CALL TREATMENT
AD ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
ST STATUS OF COUNTER
Default: PA
STATUS STATUS OF SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the state of the Service Filtering entities
which are selected to display. Omitting this parameter the active
and inactive entities are displayed. If a vote directory number is
specified, the STATUS parameter should be omitted.
INACT INACTIVE SUBSCRIBER
ACT ACTIVE SUBSCRIBER
MODE CONTROL MODE
This parameter specifies the mode of Service Filtering control
to be selected for the display.
TI TIME CONTROLLED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INSLDAT- 2-
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command will be used for the generation and regeneration of
Service Filtering feature data for Intelligent Network subscriber.
The execution of this command includes the activation of the feature
Service Filtering for this subscriber. All counters assigned to the
subscriber entities (the subscriber with VOTEDN and all with
SELCODES entered consecutive numbered directory numbers). In case
of expired TERDATE and TERTIME, the subscriber will be canceled.
Entering this command not for the purpose of data regeneration but for
the creation, modification or cancelation purpose, a conflict for the
partner Service Control Point could be caused.
Prerequisites:
1. General:
- There must be created a trigger profile for the SKEY by the command
CR INTRIG.
- The Service Filtering subscribers and all consecutive numbers
must belong to the same by CR CPT created Code Point.
The Code Points which are relevant for Service Filtering subscribers
may not contain the optional parameters LAC, MFCAT, ZDIG, ORIG1 or
ROUTYP.
2. In case of a CCNC configuration:
If MODE = TI then additional following prerequisites are necessary:
- The destination point referenced by the parameters DPC and NETIND has to
be created by command CR C7DP.
- If RTGP = SPC then the SCCP subsystem on the partner SCP identified by
parameter SSID has to be created by command CR SCSS.
- If RTGP = GT and no DPC was entered, i.e. the global title translation
will be executed in the own exchange, then a global title has to be created
in the corresponding global title tree (CR GTDIGTR) by means of GT commands
(CR GTCPT, CR GTDEST).
- If the SSP address used for non call associated dialogues with the
partner SCP shall be a global title then this global title has to be
administered by command CR SCCGPA.
Notes:
- The specified data correspond to the data sent by the Service Control
Point.
- If MODE = TI, all counters are sent to the Service Control Point
in case of modification or cancellation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ [
[ ENTR INSLDAT : [VOTEDN=] ,SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [,CHARIND=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ,TREAT= [,PROT=] [,ACNSEL=] [,SELCODES=] [
[ [
[ [,MODE=] [,PRECVAL=] [,INTERV=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,CODURA=] [,TERDATE=] [,TERTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,RELCA=] [,DURA=] [,ANNCYC=] [,RTGP=] [
[ [
[ ,NETIND= [,TTID= ,NA= ,NP= ,GTDIG=] [,DPC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSID=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 1+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service
to be installed on the home exchange.
CHARIND CHARGE INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the kind of charging for calls to all IN
numbers, assigned to this subscriber.
A not entered parameter will be interpreted as invalid charging
indicator. Therefore the entry is not useful for Service Filtering.
It only indicates the SCP to send a specific charging information.
Note:
- Up to two parameter values can be linked with &.
The parameter values PLSATT and PLSSUP or
CNYATT and CNYSUP can be entered together.
a[-b[-c]]
a: CHARGE INDICATOR
NOCHAR NOT TO BE CHARGED
ZONE CHARGED BY ZONE
NOACTR NO SPECIFIC ACTION REQUIRED
PLSATT PULSE CALL ATTEMPT TARIFF
Compatibilities:
- PLSSUP
Incompatibilities:
- CNYATT
- CNYSUP
PLSSUP PULSE SET-UP TARIFF AT ANSWER
Compatibilities:
- PLSATT
Incompatibilities:
- CNYATT
- CNYSUP
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 2+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNYATT CURRENCY CALL ATTEMPT TARIFF
Compatibilities:
- CNYSUP
Incompatibilities:
- PLSATT
- PLSSUP
CNYSUP CURRENCY SET-UP TARIFF
Compatibilities:
- CNYATT
Incompatibilities:
- PLSATT
- PLSSUP
b: ZONE NUMBER / TARIFF OR CURRENCY UNITS=
Compatibilities:
- If CHARIND = ZONE, PLSATT, PLSSUP, CNYATT or CNYSUP
this parameter value is mandatory.
Note the different admissible ranges:
- PLSATT, PLSSUP: 1..255
- ZONE : 0..511
- CNYATT, CNYSUP: 0..999999000
In case of CNYATT, CNYSUP it represents the
integer part of the currency amount. This information
c: CURRENCY DECIMALS=
Compatibilities:
- If CHARIND = CNYATT or CNYSUP this parameter value
is mandatory.
Note: This is the decimal part of the currency amount. This
information unit accepts a string of up to 7 digits.
When 7 digits are entered, the first digit must be 0.
TREAT CALL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies the intercept code to confirm a counted call
for a valid selection code while executing Service Filtering.
Compatibilities:
- For TONE identifier the b is of range (1..31).
a-b
a: TONE/ANNOUNCEMENT IDENTIFICATION
TONE SCP TONE
ANN SCP ANNOUNCEMENT
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent
Network application protocol the service execution is
based on.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 3+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: CS1
ACNSEL APPLIC. CONTEXT NAME SELECTOR
This parameter specifies an application context name
selector which is used for the selection of the protocol
version for the dialogue with the SCP.
SELCODES LIMIT OF SELECTION CODES
This parameter specifies the number of selection codes that will be
created for the subscriber.
Compatibilities:
- Only in case of whitebook SCCP 100 selection codes will be
supported. If bluebook SCCP is used in the network, the number
of selection codes is limited to 30.
Default: 1
MODE CONTROL MODE
This parameter specifies the mode of Service Filtering control
to be selected.
TI TIME CONTROLLED
Default: TI
PRECVAL PRECOUNT VALUE
This parameter specifies the number of calls for valid selection codes
that have to be counted until a request to the partner Service Control
Point has to be initiated.
One of the parameters PRECVAL or INTERV must be entered.
Incompatibilities:
- INTERV
INTERV PRECOUNT INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval in seconds during which the
calls with valid selection code have to be counted. After expiration
a request to the partner Service Control Point has to be initiated.
A value greater than 32000 means an infinite interval.
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of Service Filtering for
an entity.
It must be entered together with the begin time BEGTIME.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 4+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of Service Filtering for
an entity.
It must be entered together with the begin date BEGDATE.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
Default: current time
a-b[-c]
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECONDS=
CODURA CONTROL DURATION
This parameter specifies the time (in seconds) service filtering
will be performed for this entity after the BEGDATE / BEGTIME.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI .
Incompatibilities:
- If no value was entered, the TERDATE and TERTIME has to be entered.
TERDATE TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the stop date of Service Filtering for
an entity.
It must be entered together with the stop time TERTIME.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
In this case either CODURA or this parameter has to be entered.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 5+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
TERTIME TERMINATING TIME
This parameter specifies the stop time of Service Filtering for
an entity.
It must be entered together with the stop date TERDATE.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
In this case either CODURA or this parameter has to be entered.
a-b[-c]
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECONDS=
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
to control the call release and intercept treatment.
a-b
a: LOCATION
USER USER
PRL PRIVATE NETWORK LOCAL USER
PUL PUBLIC NETWORK LOCAL USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
PUR PUBLIC NETWORK REMOTE USER
PRR PRIVATE NETWORK REMOTE USER
Default: PUL
b: CAUSE VALUE=
Default: 31
DURA TONE/ANNOUNCEMENT DURATION
This parameter specifies the time limitation (in seconds) of the
entered tone or announcement.
Default: 40
ANNCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of cycles of the entered
announcement . It is related to the announcement determined by the
TREAT parameter.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 6+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 1
This parameter specifies the routing preferences for the
delivery of a Signalling Connection Control Part message
to the Service Control Point.
SPC ROUTE BY SPC AND SSN
GT ROUTE BY GT
Default: SPC
This parameter specifies the network of the
Service Switching Point.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier
of the global title.
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 7+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title.
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title. The digits can
be input in a structured format.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 1=
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 2=
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 3=
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 4=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 8+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the service
specific application part on the partner Service Control Point.
IN2 IN APPLICATION 2
If a destination point code which specifies an
EWSD node is entered together with this subsystem
identifier then the LNP (local number portability)
server function on that EWSD node is addressed.
If a destination point code which specifies the
own EWSD node is entered together with this
subsystem identifier then the internal SCF on the
own node is addressed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 9-
END INSTALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
END INSTALLATION RECOVERY
This command terminates the installation phase.
As a result of this command, normal handling of software faults via SW error
treatment and recovery action groups is possible.
Notes:
During the installation phase software faults cause a processor stop.
Input format
[ [
[ END INSTALL ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 END INSTALL- 1-
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD INTELLIGENT NETWORK STATISTIC
This command starts the recording of IN statistic measurement.
To store the data on disk a measurement file will be created and
the name of the file will be displayed at the OMT. A maximum of
2 commands can be entered.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ REC INSTAT : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
every 15 minutes throughout the specified
measurement period.
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first
be copied to a removable medium.
b: OUTPUT MODE
output to day files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
files (MO...SU) are prepared and created before
the command is accepted.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data
are output. Time parameters are not permissible
for these measurements.
A day file is closed at the end of the day and a
new file for the next day is automatically created
on the disk, or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the
file for the same day of the week is
overwritten.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC INSTAT- 1+
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(day file or single measurement file).
BEG BEGIN DATE
Notes:
specified.
in day files.
linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
command entry.
a-b-c
This parameter indicates the measurement time termination date.
Notes:
entry.
- Throughout the specified recording period, the measurement data
are called down every 15 minutes and output on the relevant output
device.
specified.
in day files.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
a-b-c
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates the daily measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a begin date
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC INSTAT- 2+
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(BEG).
a-b-c-d
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data are to be recorded.
Notes:
- Up to 6 weekdays (MO..SU) may be linked with &.
The categories of weekdays (NO, WO, HO) may be entered alone.
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with a
termination date (TER).
- If the value HO is selected all sundays, national holidays
and international holidays will be measured.
- The parameter values NO, HO and WO are not usable in
combination with other parameter values.
- Exception: Time parameter may not be specified for the data
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
No input means measurement on all days.
NO EVERY DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 REC INSTAT- 3-
ENTR INSTGEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER INSTALLATION GENERATION
This command creates an initial installation generation as part of the
initial installation of an application program system (APS) in a
switching processor.
Another differentiation must be made between the initial installation of an
APS and database extension for this APS. Once the initial installation
procedure has been performed, database extension is possible. For this
purpose, the commands MOD DBSIZE and DISP DBSIZE are used.
For creating the initial installation generation, the system files read in
from tape/optical disk are combined to form a file generation. The name of
the generation to be created is taken from the Tasklib. File SY.SEMILIB
(semipermanent database) is extracted from the Tasklib. File SY.SIMP is
extracted from file SY.PSW.T098, provided the latter exists. All these
starting files (production system files) are delivered as non-generation
files by the manufacturer on tape/optical disk. Only in course of
ENTR INSTGEN they are assigned to the generation to be introduced. The
loadlibs are attached and connected and update is activated.
If no files or not all of the files required for creating the initial
installation are specified, the disk is searched for the missing production
system files. Only those files that conform to the conventions for system
files and, of these, only the first file found in each case are used.
A precondition for creating the initial installation generation is that
the complete production system files exist (at least one PSW Lib must exist)
and that they do not belong to different APSs.
The specified file name need not be in accordance with the name conventions
for EWSD system files; if required, the name of the file is automatically
changed to a file name that is in accordance with the EWSD conventions,
when the file is introduced in the initial installation generation.
The name of the initial installation generation is formed as follows:
|---------------|
| ff kk 00 00 |
|---------------|
The command is rejected if a generation exists already.
For information about the generation concept see the command description
for COPY GEN.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR INSTGEN : [LIB=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a library in the SSP LIB113D format. Only
TASKLIB, SEMILIB, LOADLIB.LA, LOADLIB.MA, LOADLIB.CA type files and
PSW libraries are accepted. The parameter can be used in the
continuation mode, i.e. several libraries can be specified one after
the other. If the library name is not a system file name, it will be
renamed.
This parameter is used to specify the system files that are to be
incorporated in the installation generation. The specified file must
be without generation,i.e., it must be a production system file read
in from the production tape/optical disk. Accordingly, it is not
permissible to specify a CP-Semilib or Simp-Semilib; these are not
automatically created from the production Tasklib until the initial
installation generation is created. In continuation mode, some or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSTGEN- 1+
ENTR INSTGEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
all production files can be specified one after the other.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR INSTGEN- 2-
TEST INTLTRK
LNOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INTERNATIONAL TRUNK
This command starts a test of transmission performance and signaling
on international trunks using the test equipment ATE:TM (ATME2 DIR).
It can be used also for the ATME2 application self test.
The test can also be performed on RSU interface or sidedoor trunks.
Note: The test is not possible if the trunk is a busy High Speed Link.
job.
<job number>.
1. TEST INTLTRK - LNOINT LINE NUMBER INTERVAL
2. TEST INTLTRK - LNORAN LINE NUMBER RANGE
3. TEST INTLTRK - SELFTEST ATME2 SELFTEST
4. TEST INTLTRK - SINGLE SINGLE TRUNK OBJECT TEST
1. Input format
LINE NUMBER INTERVAL
Input format for the operator to request that more than one trunk
object is to be tested.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LNO=[[ [
[ TEST INTLTRK : TGNO= [,FULL=] [,CIC=[ [,TSTSEL=] [,SCHED=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,HIGHER=] [,BERRPAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
For the ATME2 on demand selftest, this parameter must specify the TGNO
of an ATME2 responder.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 1+
TEST INTLTRK
LNOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FULL FULL VIEW
Keep information of fault free test results.
If this parameter is specified in the command, the fault free test
result is outputed to the printer (for a transient test job) or kept in
a disk file (for a semipermanent test job). For this last case, it uses
the same file as the faulty results.
N DONT KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
NO DONT KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
Y KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
YES KEEP FAULT FREE RESULTS
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk number.
The operating personnel can specify one, a range or a list of trunks,
from one trunk group, to be tested.
This parameter defines the circuit identification code for CCS7 trunks.
The operating personnel can specify one or a list of trunks, from one
trunk group, to be tested.
a-b
TSTSEL TEST SELECTION
Selection of the tests to perform.
BERM BIT ERROR RATE MEASURING
Measurement of bit error rate.
LVLCF MEASURE LEVEL OF CARRIER FREQ.
Measurement of level at the carrier frequency.
LVLHF MEASURE LEVEL OF HIGH FREQ.
Measurement of the level at the high frequency.
LVLLF MEASURE LEVEL OF LOW FREQ.
Measurement of the level at low frequency.
NOISE MEASURING OF NOISE LEVEL
Measurement of the noise level.
QD QUANTIZING DISTORTION
Measurements of quantizing distortion at -10dbm0
and -25dbm0.
RSPDRC RESPONDER C
Responder type C (for the test of busy flash
signal).
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 2+
TEST INTLTRK
LNOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SIGTST SIGNALING TEST
Signaling test.
X EXECUTE ALL TESTS ABOVE
Perform all tests .
Depending on the trunk tests class and Responder type
there are the following default values:
# Test class Resp. Type Default values
1 127 Analog all but QD and BERM
2 127 Dig. Loopback LVLCF,NOISE,QD
3 128 Analog all but QD
4 128 Dig. Loopback as in #2 plus BERM
5 129 Analog BERM
6 129 Dig. Loopback as in #5
Restriction:
for level measurement there are only two possibilities:
- LVLCF
- LVLCF&LVLLF&LVLHF
BERM is not allowed for test class 127
This parameter specifies the schedule number which determines the
sequence of the tasks.
Before this parameter is entered, this number must be allocated to a
schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED .
HIGHER HIGHER
Perform level measurings at 0 dbm0.
N NO LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
NO NO LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
Y LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
YES LEVEL MEASURING WITH 0 DBM0
BERRPAT BER RANDOM TEST PATTERN
This parameter specifies whether or not random bit test pattern
is to be used for bit error rate measurement.
NO FIXED BER PATTERN SELECTED
YES RANDOM BER PATTERN SELECTED
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 3+
TEST INTLTRK
LNORAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINE NUMBER RANGE
Input format for the operator to request that more than one trunk
object is to be tested.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LNO=[[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,HIGHER=] [,BERRPAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FULL FULL VIEW
LNO LINE NUMBER
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 4+
TEST INTLTRK
LNORAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
and -25dbm0.
RSPDRC RESPONDER C
signal).
Signaling test.
Perform all tests .
5 129 Analog BERM
Restriction:
- LVLCF
- LVLCF&LVLLF&LVLHF
HIGHER HIGHER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 5+
TEST INTLTRK
LNORAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 6+
TEST INTLTRK
SELFTEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ATME2 SELFTEST
Input format for the operator to request an ATME2 selftest.
[ [
[ TEST INTLTRK : TGNO= [,FULL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FULL FULL VIEW
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 7+
TEST INTLTRK
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SINGLE TRUNK OBJECT TEST
Input format for the operator to request that a single trunk object
is to be tested.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,LNO=[[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,BERFPAT=[[ [
[ [,HIGHER=] [,BERTIME=] [,BERTHR=] [,BERRPAT=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FULL FULL VIEW
LNO LINE NUMBER
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 8+
TEST INTLTRK
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
and -25dbm0.
RSPDRC RESPONDER C
signal).
Signaling test.
Perform all tests .
5 129 Analog BERM
Restriction:
- LVLCF
- LVLCF&LVLLF&LVLHF
HIGHER HIGHER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 9+
TEST INTLTRK
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BERTIME BER TEST TIME
This parameter specifies the bit error ratio measurement time.
The value entered overwrites the correspondent value in the trunk group
test data.
Restriction: this parameter is only allowed for single tests.
Corresponds to the duration of bit error ratio measurements, in
seconds.
BERTHR BER TEST THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the bit error rate threshold value, in
percentage.
The value entered overwrites the correspondent value in the trunk group
test data.
a-b
a: BER THRESHOLD INTEGER PART=
Corresponds to the integer part of threshold.
b: BER THRESHOLD FRACTIONAL PART=
Corresponds to the fractional part of threshold.
BERFPAT BER FIXED TEST PATTERN
This parameter specifies the bit pattern for the bit error rate
measurement.
The value entered overwrites the correspondent value in trunk group
test data.
Corresponds to the bit pattern.
If less than 8 bits entered, the pattern will be completely
filled with zeros at left.
The default bit pattern is "00000000", the values entered by
the operator overwrite this pattern starting on the rigth
position.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST INTLTRK- 10-
ACT INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command activates an already created Intelligent Network service.
Precondition for the use of this service is the creation of specific
code points by means of CR CPT, of specific zone points by means of
CR ZOPT, or of line triggers by the commands CR INSCM, CR INSCMREF
and ACT INSCMREF.
Prerequisites:
- A trigger profile for the specified profile identifier must exist.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INTRIG : PRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile the
Intelligent Network service of which has to be activated on
the home exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT INTRIG- 1-
CAN INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command removes an Intelligent Network service.
Prerequisites:
- The service has to be in inactive status.
- For this trigger profile no related Service Filtering data administered
by a partner SCP or per MML by command ENTR INSLDAT must exist.
- No IN Service Class Marks administered by command CR INSCM and
referring to this trigger profile must exist.
- No specific code or zone points for this trigger profile must exist.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INTRIG : PRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile
to be removed from the home exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN INTRIG- 1-
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command creates a trigger profile which is used to install an
Intelligent Network (IN) service on an exchange.
Precondition for the use of this service is the creation of IN
specific code points by means of CR CPT, of specific zone points
by means of CR ZOPT or of line, trunk group, centrex group specific
or office based triggers by the commands CR INSCM, CR INSCMREF
and ACT INSCMREF.
The service has to be activated by ACT INTRIG.
Prerequisites:
1. General:
- For a zone number specified by the parameter CHGINF a tariff has to be
entered by command ENTR TAR.
- If RTGP = GT and no translator service group was entered, i.e. the
global title translation will be executed in the own exchange, then a global
title must have been created in the corresponding global title tree
(CR GTDIGTR) by means of GT commands (CR GTCPT, CR GTDEST).
- If RTGP = GT together with a translator service group was entered,
i.e. the global title translation will be executed in a remote node, then
the corresponding translator service group must have been created by means
of the SCCP command CR SCTRLG.
1. CR INTRIG - GT PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
2. CR INTRIG - SPC PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
1. Input format
PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to create a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a global title and any combination of
a translator service group and a subsystem identifier.
[ [
[ CR INTRIG : PRID= ,NETIND= ,RTGP= ,TTID= [,NP= ,NA=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,GTDIG= [[ [
[ [,PREFIX=[ [,TRLG=] [,SSID=] [,PROT=] [,ORIG1=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,ACNSEL=] [,SSFTYPE=] [,SKEY=] [,SSPGT=] [
[ [
[ [,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG=] [
[ [
[ [,TRAT=] [,INCAT=] [,GENPROP=] [,EODRAN=] [
[ [
[ [,IWRULE=] [,RELEASE=] [,CHGINF=] [,CHGPROF=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,DACTINC=] [,SSFTIMER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 1+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile for the
installation of an Intelligent Network service on the home exchange.
Since the service logic may be distributed on several Service Control
Points, for one service different trigger profiles may be created.
This parameter specifies the network of the SSP.
exchanges.
This parameter is mandatory in a configuration with CCNC;
in a configuration with SSNC this parameter is only mandatory when
the feature "multiple networks" is not activated.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
delivery of a SCCP message to the SCP.
GT ROUTE BY GT
Default: SPC
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the global
title.
If it was specified with INPPDD the parameter PREFIX has to
be entered instead of the parameter GTDIG. If it was specified
with INCGPA or INDD the parameters GTDIG, PREFIX, NP and
NA must not be entered. The corresponding values will be determined
from the calling party address or the called party address,
respectively.
For all other values of this parameter GTDIG, NP and NA must
be entered.
Incompatibilities:
- PREFIX, GTDIG, NP and NA.
Incompatibilities:
Compatibilities:
- PREFIX.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 2+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
a[-b[-c]]
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be used to assemble a
global title dynamically together with the digit information of the
called party number. This means that the global title is composed of
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 3+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the prefix digits and the address signals of the called party number.
This parameter specifies a translator service group which performs
the global title translation in case the translation shall not be
executed in the SSP.
Prerequisites:
- In case of a CCNC configuration the translator service group
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the partner
Service Control Function (SCF).
INMP1 IN APPLICATION 1 ON MP
If a destination point code which specifies a
node containing a SSNC-based Number Portability
Server is entered together with this subsystem
server function on that node (Stand-alone STP or
with EWSD as host) is addressed.
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent Network
application protocol the service execution is based on.
Default: CS1
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 4+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the originating code with which the
destination digits sent by the SCP are to be evaluated.
may be entered.
entered in the digit translator table.
This parameter is evaluated only if GENPROP=UORIG1 is set.
SSFTYPE SERVICE SWITCHING FUNCT. TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Service Switching
Function for which the trigger profile was created. If an
IN trigger was detected the SSF can act as initiating
(normal) or assisting SSF.
ASST ASSISTING
BU2CUSF BEARER UNRELATED TO CUSF
BU2SSF BEARER UNRELATED TO SSF
NORM NORMAL
Default: NORM
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service to be
installed on the home exchange. The same service key may occur in
different trigger profiles.
Notes:
The SKEY=0 is used as master key in case of Call Gap. So, if a
trigger profile is entered with SKEY=0 it is not possible to gap
service requests with this service key individually.
SSPGT SSP GT REQUIRED
This parameter specifies if a global title for the SSP is to be
entered that will be used instead of the calling party address of
the IN application administered with the command CR SCCGPA.
N SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
NO SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
Y SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
YES SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 5+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORTTID ORIG. TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
ORSSID ORIGINATOR SUBSYSTEM ID.
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the IN application
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
ORNP ORIGINATOR NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 6+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORNA ORIGINATOR NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
ORGTDIG ORIG. GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title in the calling
party address of the SSP. The digits can be input in a structured
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies a traffic type assigned to the Intelligent
Network service in the trigger profile and is only used, if no
corresponding traffic type codepoint was engineered.
That means the traffic type administrated with CR TRATCPT has
priority over this one.
Default: NOBLOCK.
INCAT IN CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories for the digit translation.
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 7+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
GENPROP GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to
the Intelligent Network service execution.
ADPBIN ABBREV. DIALLING PROC. BY IN
CLIREQ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
CONINH CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
DPINH DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
The activation of internal detection points is
not allowed for the current service key. This
property is only relevant for the execution of
special services, e.g. international calls and
Area Wide Centrex with CCBS.
ENACPH ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
EODREQ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
FTALLOW FEATURE TRANSPARENCY ALLOWED
FTRINH FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
MCIHLD MCI HOLD REQUESTED
MCIPRE MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
MHNCLI MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
ONLCHG ONLINE CHARGING
PASSBA PASS B PTY CHARGE MSG TO A PTY
PCNCHG PER CONNECTION CHARGING
PROP18 PROPERTY 18
PROP19 PROPERTY 19
PROP20 PROPERTY 20
PROP21 PROPERTY 21
PROP22 PROPERTY 22
PROP23 PROPERTY 23
PROP24 SPECIAL PROPERTY 24
RCNCLI REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
Prerequisites:
- The intercept identifier INANIF must have been
created by the command CR INC.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 8+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SFINH SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
UINCAT USE IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- INCAT must be specified.
UORIG1 USE ORIG1
EODRAN END OF DIALLING RANGE
This parameter specifies a minimal number of dialled digits
and a maximal number of dialled digits to have a general
end of dialling condition.
This parameter is evaluated only if GENPROP=EODREQ is set.
a-b
a: MIN=
Default: 0
b: MAX=
Default: 31
IWRULE INTERWORKING RULE
This parameter is used to control the interworking of IN
with basic network features. The first unit addresses the set
of default values for the Service Interaction Indicator (SII)
to be applied if the SCP did not send any. The second unit
specifies the interaction level which is applied for the
control of the SIIs influence on this interworking
(project specific).
a[-b]
a: SERVICE INTERACTION INDICATOR INDEX=
Default: 0
b: INTERACTION LEVEL=
Default: 0
RELEASE RELEASE REQUIRED INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a value to decide whether an Intelligent
Network call has to be released in the case that a protocol
abnormality occurs.
N RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
NO RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
YES RELEASE REQUIRED
Default: YES
CHGINF DEFAULT CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the charging information in case no
information about how to charge an Intelligent Network call
was sent by the partner SCP.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 9+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INFORMATION
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
NOINTV NO INTERVENTION BY IN
REJECT REJECT THE CALL
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
Default: NOINTV
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
- ZONE is entered for the first unit.
CHGPROF CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies the charging profile that is applied
in case that an IN service request was detected with an
originating line trigger.
The charging profile determines the billing registration
method and - in case of metering - the subscriber charge
counters CNTR1 .. CNTR5.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
No billing registration.
PROF1 PROFILE 1
Automatic Message Accounting.
PROF10 PROFILE 10
Metering on charge counters 1&5.
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3.
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
Metering on charge counter 1.
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
PROF27 PROFILE 27
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4.
PROF28 PROFILE 28
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 10+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4&5.
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
DACTINC DEACTIV. SERV. INTERCEPT ID.
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected in case the
Intelligent Network service is in status inactive.
Default: SNA0
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
This parameter specifies the time, in which the answer
from SCP/SCF is expected, in steps of 100ms.
Default: 100
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 11+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to create a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a destination point code and a
subsystem identifier.
[ [
[ CR INTRIG : PRID= ,NETIND= [,RTGP=] ,SSID= ,DPC= [,PROT=] [
[ [
[ [,ORIG1=] [,ACNSEL=] [,SSFTYPE=] [,SKEY=] [
[ [
[ [,SSPGT=] [,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= [
[ [
[ ,ORGTDIG=] [,TRAT=] [,INCAT=] [,GENPROP=] [
[ [
[ [,EODRAN=] [,IWRULE=] [,RELEASE=] [,CHGINF=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CHGPROF=] [,DACTINC=] [,SSFTIMER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile for the
installation of an Intelligent Network service on the home exchange.
Since the service logic may be distributed on several Service Control
Points, for one service different trigger profiles may be created.
exchanges.
This parameter is mandatory in a configuration with CCNC;
in a configuration with SSNC this parameter is only mandatory when
the feature "multiple networks" is not activated.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
Default: SPC
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 12+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
Default: CS1
may be entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 13+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ASST ASSISTING
BU2CUSF BEARER UNRELATED TO CUSF
BU2SSF BEARER UNRELATED TO SSF
NORM NORMAL
Default: NORM
SKEY SERVICE KEY
Notes:
Default: NO
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 14+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- SSPGT = YES
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 15+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- SSPGT = YES
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
Default: NOBLOCK.
INCAT IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 16+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
This parameter specifies the general properties related to
the Intelligent Network service execution.
PROP18 PROPERTY 18
PROP19 PROPERTY 19
PROP20 PROPERTY 20
PROP21 PROPERTY 21
PROP22 PROPERTY 22
PROP23 PROPERTY 23
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 17+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UORIG1 USE ORIG1
a-b
a: MIN=
Default: 0
b: MAX=
Default: 31
(project specific).
a[-b]
Default: 0
Default: 0
abnormality occurs.
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
Default: YES
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 18+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
Default: NOINTV
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
PROF0 PROFILE 0
PROF1 PROFILE 1
PROF10 PROFILE 10
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
PROF27 PROFILE 27
PROF28 PROFILE 28
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 19+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
Default: SNA0
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
Default: 100
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR INTRIG- 20-
DACT INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command deactivates an Intelligent Network service.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INTRIG : PRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile the
Intelligent Network service of which has to be deactivated
on the home exchange.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT INTRIG- 1-
DISP INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
trigger profiles.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP INTRIG : PRID= [,FORMAT=] [,SKEY=] [,PROT=] [,SSFTYPE=] [
[ [
[ [,STATUS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile to be
displayed.
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION
for an Intelligent Network service on the own exchange:
- PA may be used for the selection of installation data,
- CT may be used for the selection of call treatment data,
- AD may be used for the selection of address description data,
Compatibilities:
- If FORMAT = ST only a profile identifier may be specified. The
service key and the SCP address available in the trigger profile will
be used to select the service specific statistic. If any Service Con-
trol Point concerning the selected service is addressed by a global
title no address may be specified in the corresponding output mask.
PA TRIGGER PROFILE PARAMETER
CT DISPLAY CALL TREATMENT
Incompatibilities:
- SSFTYPE = ASST.
AD SCP AND SSP ADDRESSES
ST STATISTICS OF INTELL.NETWORK
Incompatibilities:
- The parameters PROT, STATUS and SKEY must not
be specified.
Default: PA
SKEY SERVICE KEY
displayed.
Incompatibilities:
- The SKEY parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INTRIG- 1+
DISP INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- The PROT parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
NORM NORMAL
ASST ASSISTING
service the data of which has to be displayed.
Incompatibilities:
- The STATUS parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP INTRIG- 2-
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command modifies the trigger profile data of an Intelligent
Network service on an exchange, independent of the status of the
service. All parameters except the profile identifier and the
SSF type may be changed.
Prerequisites:
1. General:
- If the protocol type will be changed Service Filtering entities must not
exist for this trigger profile.
- For a zone number specified by the parameter CHGINF a tariff has to be
entered by command ENTR TAR.
- If GENPROP = SFINH will be entered Service Filtering entities must
not exist for this trigger profile.
- If RTGP = GT and no translator service group was entered, i.e. the
global title translation will be executed in the own exchange, then a global
title must have been created in the corresponding global title tree
(CR GTDIGTR) by means of GT commands (CR GTCPT, CR GTDEST).
- If RTGP = GT together with a translator service group was entered,
i.e. the global title translation will be executed in a remote node, then
the corresponding translator service group must have been created by means
of the SCCP command CR SCTRLG.
1. MOD INTRIG - GT PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
2. MOD INTRIG - SPC PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
1. Input format
PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format has to be used to modify a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a global title and any combination of
a translator service group and a subsystem identifier.
[ [
[ MOD INTRIG : PRID= <,SKEY= ,NETIND= ,RTGP= ,TTID= ,NP= [
[ [
[ ,NA= ,GTDIG= ,PREFIX= ,TRLG= ,SSID= ,PROT= [
[ [
[ ,ORIG1= ,ACNSEL= ,SSPGT= ,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= [
[ [
[ ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG= ,TRAT= ,INCAT= [
[ [
[ ,GENPROP= ,CGENPROP= ,EODRAN= ,IWRULE= ,RELEASE= [
[ [
[ ,CHGINF= ,CHGPROF= ,CCHGPROF= ,DACTINC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SSFTIMER=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 1+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
modified. Since the service logic may be distributed on several
Service Control Points, for one service different trigger
profiles may be created.
SKEY SERVICE KEY
Notes:
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
GT ROUTE BY GT
title.
If it was specified with INPPDD the parameter PREFIX has to
be entered instead of the parameter GTDIG. If it was specified with
INCGPA or INDD the parameters GTDIG, PREFIX, NP and NA
must not be entered. The corresponding values will be determined from
the calling party address or the called party address, respectively.
For all other values of this parameter GTDIG, NP and NA
must be entered.
Incompatibilities:
Incompatibilities:
Compatibilities:
- PREFIX.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 2+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NP NUMBERING PLAN
a[-b[-c]]
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be used to assemble a
global title dynamically together with the digit information of the
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 3+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
called party number. This means that the global title is composed of
the prefix digits and the address information of the called party
number.
This parameter specifies a translator service group which performs
the global title translation in case the translation shall not be
executed in the SSP.
Prerequisites:
- In case of a CCNC configuration the translator service group
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 4+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
may be entered.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the
global title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address. It depends on the
entered protocol type.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 5+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
format.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 6+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
Default: NOBLOCK.
INCAT IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
This parameter specifies the general properties related to the
Intelligent Network service execution to be added to the already
existing values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 7+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP18 PROPERTY 18
PROP19 PROPERTY 19
PROP20 PROPERTY 20
PROP21 PROPERTY 21
PROP22 PROPERTY 22
PROP23 PROPERTY 23
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
UORIG1 USE ORIG1
CGENPROP CANCELED GENERAL PROPERTIES
Intelligent Network service execution to be canceled from the
existing trigger profile.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 8+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP18 PROPERTY 18
PROP19 PROPERTY 19
PROP20 PROPERTY 20
PROP21 PROPERTY 21
PROP22 PROPERTY 22
PROP23 PROPERTY 23
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- If this value is specified the parameter INCAT
will be initialized.
UORIG1 USE ORIG1
a-b
a: MIN=
b: MAX=
(project specific).
a[-b]
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 9+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
abnormality occurs.
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
a[-b]
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
PROF0 PROFILE 0
PROF1 PROFILE 1
PROF10 PROFILE 10
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 10+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
PROF27 PROFILE 27
PROF28 PROFILE 28
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
CCHGPROF CANCEL CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the charging profile shall be
cancelled.
N PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PROFILE
YES CANCEL PROFILE
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 11+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 100
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 12+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to modify a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a destination point code and a
subsystem identifier.
[ [
[ MOD INTRIG : PRID= <,NETIND= ,RTGP= ,DPC= ,SKEY= ,SSID= [
[ [
[ ,PROT= ,ORIG1= ,ACNSEL= ,SSPGT= ,ORTTID= [
[ [
[ ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG= ,TRAT= [
[ [
[ ,INCAT= ,GENPROP= ,CGENPROP= ,EODRAN= ,IWRULE= [
[ [
[ ,RELEASE= ,CHGINF= ,CHGPROF= ,CCHGPROF= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,DACTINC= ,SSFTIMER=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
modified. Since the service logic may be distributed on several
Service Control Points, for one service different trigger
profiles may be created.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 13+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKEY SERVICE KEY
Notes:
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 14+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
may be entered.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the
global title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address. It depends on the
entered protocol type.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 15+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
format.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 16+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- SSPGT = YES
a[-b[-c]]
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
Default: NOBLOCK.
INCAT IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
addressed.
Intelligent Network service execution to be added to the already
existing values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 17+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP18 PROPERTY 18
PROP19 PROPERTY 19
PROP20 PROPERTY 20
PROP21 PROPERTY 21
PROP22 PROPERTY 22
PROP23 PROPERTY 23
Prerequisites:
Compatibilities:
UORIG1 USE ORIG1
CGENPROP CANCELED GENERAL PROPERTIES
Intelligent Network service execution to be canceled from the
existing trigger profile.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 18+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROP18 PROPERTY 18
PROP19 PROPERTY 19
PROP20 PROPERTY 20
PROP21 PROPERTY 21
PROP22 PROPERTY 22
PROP23 PROPERTY 23
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- If this value is specified the parameter INCAT
will be initialized.
UORIG1 USE ORIG1
a-b
a: MIN=
b: MAX=
(project specific).
a[-b]
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 19+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
abnormality occurs.
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
a[-b]
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
b: ZONE NUMBER=
Compatibilities:
PROF0 PROFILE 0
PROF1 PROFILE 1
PROF10 PROFILE 10
PROF11 PROFILE 11
PROF12 PROFILE 12
PROF13 PROFILE 13
PROF14 PROFILE 14
PROF15 PROFILE 15
PROF16 PROFILE 16
PROF17 PROFILE 17
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 20+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF18 PROFILE 18
PROF19 PROFILE 19
PROF2 PROFILE 2
PROF20 PROFILE 20
PROF21 PROFILE 21
PROF22 PROFILE 22
PROF23 PROFILE 23
PROF24 PROFILE 24
PROF25 PROFILE 25
PROF26 PROFILE 26
PROF27 PROFILE 27
PROF28 PROFILE 28
PROF29 PROFILE 29
PROF3 PROFILE 3
PROF30 PROFILE 30
PROF31 PROFILE 31
PROF32 PROFILE 32
PROF4 PROFILE 4
PROF5 PROFILE 5
PROF6 PROFILE 6
PROF7 PROFILE 7
PROF8 PROFILE 8
PROF9 PROFILE 9
CCHGPROF CANCEL CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the charging profile shall be
cancelled.
N PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PROFILE
YES CANCEL PROFILE
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 21+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 100
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD INTRIG- 22-
TEST IO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM
This command tests all input/output processors and O&M equipment
which are active.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST IO : [SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST IO- 1-
CAN IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command cancels the input/output controllers IOC-2 and IOC-3.
Prerequisites:
- Both input/output controllers must be PLA.
- All input/output processors must be cancelled first.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IOC : IOC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This parameter specifies one of the input/output controllers to be
cancelled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IOC- 1-
CONF IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command configures an input/output controller.
Notes:
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF IOC : IOC= ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be
configured.
OST OPERATING STATE
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis of the input/output controller
before configuring it from MBL or UNA to ACT.
Default: YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF IOC- 1-
CR IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command creates a second pair of input/output controllers (IOC-2/3).
Input format
[ [
[ CR IOC : IOC= ,PBI= ,IOCR= ,PBIR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be created.
PBI PHYSICAL BUS INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
input/output controller.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the input/output controller specified by parameter IOC.
IOCR REDUNDANT IOC
This parameter specifies the redundant input/output controller to be
created.
PBIR PBI OF REDUNDANT IOC
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
redundant input/output processor.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location of
the redundant input/output controller specified by parameter IOCR.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IOC- 1-
DIAG IOC
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
for an input/output controller.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output controller must be MBL.
the exchange!
<job number>.
1. DIAG IOC - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG IOC - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an input/output controller.
[ [
[ DIAG IOC : IOC= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be diagnosed.
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG IOC- 1+
DIAG IOC
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for an
input/output controller. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY
interface test.
[ [
[ DIAG IOC : IOC= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be diagnosed.
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
command.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG IOC- 2-
DISP IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command displays all input/output processors attached
to the input/output controller and their associated bus
connection numbers.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IOC : IOC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IOC- 1-
TEST IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command tests an input/output controller.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output controller and the redundant input/output
controller must be in the operating state ACT.
the exchange!
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST IOC : [IOC=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active input/output
processors are tested.
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST IOC- 1-
CAN IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command cancels an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
- The specified input/output processor must be in the operating
state PLA.
- All devices on this input/output processor must be cancelled.
Notes:
- IOPUNI-0/1 with the initial loading devices can neither
be created nor cancelled.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be cancelled.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IOP- 1-
CONF IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command configures an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output processor must have been created.
- Load file SY.PSW.Tnnn (nnn = load type) must exist
on disk if IOPLAU or IOPUNI is to be entered subsequently.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ CONF IOP : IOP= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the type and number of the processor
to be configured.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMDD IOP FOR MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPTA IOP FOR TIMER AND ALARM
b: IOP NUMBER=
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state of the input/output
processor.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF IOP- 1-
CR IOP
IOPLAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command creates a new input/output processor. The created
input/output processor is in the operating state PLA after
the command has been executed.
1. CR IOP - IOPLAU CREATE IOPLAU
2. CR IOP - IOPMB CREATE IOPMB
3. CR IOP - IOPUNI CREATE IOPUNI
4. CR IOP - SPEC CREATE IOPMTD,IOPSCDV,IOPSCDX
1. Input format
CREATE IOPLAU
This input creates an input/output processor for a link
adaption unit
[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ,IOPR= ,BIOCR= [,LOADTP=] [
[ [
[ [,LDPRTY=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output controller number
associated with the input/output processor.
BIOC IOC BUS CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter assigns the input/output processor to the bus
connection number.
This parameter specifies the input/output processor connected
to the input/output controller.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
IOPR REDUNDANT IOP
This parameter specifies the number of the redundant input/output
processor for a redundant input/output processor.
Notes:
- This input/output processor must be connected to the redundant
input/output controller specified by the IOC parameter.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IOP- 1+
CR IOP
IOPLAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: TYPE OF REDUNDANT IOP
b: NUMBER OF REDUNDANT IOP=
BIOCR REDUNDANT B:IOC CONNECTION NO.
This parameter assigns the redundant input/output processor
to the bus connection number.
LOADTP LOAD TYPE
This parameter defines the load file name.
Notes:
- The file name SY.PSW.TNNN is derived from load type NNN.
Default: 100
LDPRTY LOAD PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the load priority.
Notes:
- The load priority specifies the moment during system recovery
(initial start with reloading of the LTGs) at which the IOPLAU
is loaded.
The loading of a high priority IOPLAU delays the start of call
processing.
HIGH HIGH LOAD PRIORITY
Loading of high priority IOPLAUs
before or during loading of LTGs.
LOW LOW LOAD PRIORITY
Loading of low priority IOPLAUs
after loading of LTGs and start of
call processing.
Default: LOW
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IOP- 2+
CR IOP
IOPMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE IOPMB
This input creates an input/output processor
for a message buffer.
[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ,SUBST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
connection number.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
SUBST SUBSTITUTE FOR IOP MSG BUFFER
This parameter specifies the substitute input/output processor
for the message buffer.
Notes:
- This parameter must only be specified in connection with this
processor type.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IOP- 3+
CR IOP
IOPUNI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE IOPUNI
This input creates an input/output processor unified for O&M devices.
Notes:
- IOPUNI-0/1 with the initial loading devices can neither be
created nor be cancelled.
[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= [,LOADTP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
connection number.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
LOADTP LOAD TYPE
This parameter defines the load file name.
Notes:
- The file name SY.PSW.TNNN is derived from load type NNN.
Default: 121
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IOP- 4+
CR IOP
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CREATE IOPMTD,IOPSCDV,IOPSCDX
This input creates an input/output processor for:
- an OMT/operator terminal
- an operator terminal
- a MTD
[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
connection number.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IOP- 5-
DIAG IOP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
for an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output processor must be MBL.
<job number>.
1. DIAG IOP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG IOP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an input/output processor.
[ [
[ DIAG IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be diagnosed.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
Prerequisites:
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring
must be inserted in the magnetic tape device.
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG IOP- 1+
DIAG IOP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for an
input/output processor.
[ [
[ DIAG IOP : IOP= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be diagnosed.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
Prerequisites:
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring
must be inserted in the magnetic tape device.
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
Default: NO
in minutes.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted there is no statistic output.
command.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG IOP- 2+
DIAG IOP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG IOP- 3-
DISP IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command displays the operating state of the specified input/output
processor, the associated input/output controller, the connection number on
the B:IOC, the connected devices and the redundant partner for an IOPMB.
Additional information for IOPLAU: number and operating state of the
link adaption unit, load type and load priority of the IOPLAU and
the number of the redundant input/output processor.
Additional information for IOPUNI: load type and information whether
system or init part of the flash memory is used. During normal operation
code of system part is used. Code of init part is used during hardware
recovery of CP (basic input/output function) or in case of a missing or
destroyed system part.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IOP- 1-
TEST IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command tests one or all input/output processors of one
type.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output processor must be ACT.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be tested.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST IOP- 1-
CONF IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE IOP GROUP
This command configures the input/output processor group belonging to
the specified input/output controller.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF IOPG : IOC= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state of the input/output
processor group.
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF IOPG- 1-
DIAG IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE IOP GROUP
This command initiates diagnosis of the input/output processor group
belonging to the specified input/output controller. All input/output
processors with operating state MBL are diagnosed.
Prerequisites:
- Each input/output processor of the input/output processor group
must be MBL or PLA.
Input format
[ [
[ DIAG IOPG : IOC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG IOPG- 1-
TEST IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST IOP GROUP
This command tests an input/output processor group on the specified
input/output controller. All active input/output processors are tested.
Prerequisites:
- Each input/output processor of the input/output processor group
must be ACT or PLA.
Input format
[ [
[ TEST IOPG : IOC= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST IOPG- 1-
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP IOP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of IOP
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [PLF= [ [
[ DMP IOPIMDMP : UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
This unit specifies the platform number.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the IOP loadlib
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e capsule,
SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters each), plus a
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP- 1+
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
distance within the module
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
single quote.
omitted.
Notes:
module names have to be entered always in combination with
the corresponding SPU names.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The capsule name has to be entered with the start address only and
must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HCF"
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
e.g.: ADDR="LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0"&&"+H28"
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
address is entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP- 2+
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP- 3-
ACT IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT IOPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Permanent
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
This unit specifies the IOP number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IOPPRPCH- 1-
CAN IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IOP PERMANENT PATCH
on Disk).
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IOPPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IOPPRPCH- 1-
DACT IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT IOPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT IOPPRPCH- 1-
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IOP PERMANENT PATCH
by parameter PLF.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [ID= [ [
[ DISP IOPPRPCH : ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
be displayed.
ID="capsname.*" or
symbolically.
structures:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IOPPRPCH- 1+
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
LIB LIBRARY NAME
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
HIT HIT
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
UPD UPDATED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IOPPRPCH- 4-
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IOP PERMANENT PATCH
Disk).
With each ENTR IOPPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR IOPPRPCH command is
necessary.
parameter SUBPCHNO.
ENTR IOPPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,INSRADDR=[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR IOPPRPCH : ID= ,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= [
[ [,INSVREF= [ [
[ [,SUBPCHNO=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
must be identical.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH- 1+
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
or not.
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
parameter ID.
of INSRADDR.
insert procedure.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
patch.
a-b
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
declared.
ENTR IOPPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
subpatch.
a[-b]
subpatches.
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH- 4-
UPD IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ UPD IOPPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 UPD IOPPRPCH- 1-
ACT IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ ACT IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Transient
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IOPTRPCH- 1-
CAN IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IOPTRPCH- 1-
DACT IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ DACT IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT IOPTRPCH- 1-
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
operation.
additionally.
<job number>.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,ID= [ [
[ DISP IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
be displayed.
ID="capsname.*" or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IOPTRPCH- 1+
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolically.
structures:
LIB LIBRARY NAME
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
ENDDATE END DATE
Notes:
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
b: MONTH=
c: DAY=
ENDTIME END TIME
Notes:
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
b: MINUTE=
c: SECOND=
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IOPTRPCH- 4-
ENTR IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
With each ENTR IOPTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
ENTR IOPTRPCH command is necessary.
Input format
[ [
[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
b: IOP NUMBER=
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
identical.
e.g.: REPADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR IOPTRPCH- 1+
ENTR IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter ID.
ENTR IOPTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
ENTRG to ENTRD.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR IOPTRPCH- 2-
CAN IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AN IP-ADDRESS
This command cancels an IP-address which has been created
by CR IPADR
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IPADR : ADRNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of an IP-address.
Note:
- The first three characters must be IPA.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IPADR- 1-
CR IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE AN IP-ADDRESS
This command creates a new IP-address.
Input format
[ [
[ CR IPADR : ADRNAM= [,IPADR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Note:
IPADR ADDRESS VALUE
This parameter specifies the value of the remote IP-address.
Note:
- The parameter IPADR is defined in that way that either an
IPv4 or an IPv6 value can be entered.
- An IPv4 address has four units : V1-V2-V3-V4, where each
Vx (x=1..4) is defined as a range of 0..255. Always all
four units must be entered.
- For an IPv6 address only the first unit can be entered.
- An IPv6 address consist of 8 components with the following
format : V1&V2&V3&V4&V5&V6&V7&V8 where each Vx (x=1..8) is
defined as a range of 0..FFFF. Always all eight components
must be entered.
- In case of a local IP address no IPADR can be entered.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ADDRESS VALUE1=
b: ADDRESS VALUE2=
c: ADDRESS VALUE3=
d: ADDRESS VALUE4=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPADR- 1-
DISP IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IP-ADDRESSES
This command displays information about one or all defined
IP-address(es).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPADR : ADRNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Note:
- If x is entered the information of all IP-addresses is
displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPADR- 1-
MOD IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IP-ADDRESS
This command modifies a remote IP-address which has been created
by CR IPADR.
Note:
- A local IP-address cannot be modified.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPADR : ADRNAM= ,OIPADR= ,NIPADR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Note:
OIPADR OLD ADDRESS VALUE
This parameter specifies the old value of the remote IP-address.
Notes:
- The parameter OIPADR allows a value of format IPv4 or IPv6.
- An IPv4 address has four units : V1-V2-V3-V4, where each
Vx (x=1..4) is defined as a range of 0..255. Always all
four units must be entered.
- For an IPv6 address only the first unit can be entered.
- An IPv6 address consist of 8 components with the following
format : V1&V2&V3&V4&V5&V6&V7&V8 where each Vx (x=1..8) is
defined as a range of 0..FFFF. Always all eight components
must be entered.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OLD ADDRESS VALUE1=
b: OLD ADDRESS VALUE2=
c: OLD ADDRESS VALUE3=
d: OLD ADDRESS VALUE4=
NIPADR NEW ADDRESS VALUE
This parameter specifies the new value of the remote IP-address.
Note:
- The parameter NIPADR allows a value of format IPv4 or IPv6.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPADR- 1+
MOD IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: NEW ADDRESS VALUE1=
b: NEW ADDRESS VALUE2=
c: NEW ADDRESS VALUE3=
d: NEW ADDRESS VALUE4=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPADR- 2-
DISP IPFWD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IP Forwarding
This task displays IP forwarding and default TTL attributes.
Output Parameters:
Forwarding:
The indication of whether this entity is acting as an IP
router in respect to the forwarding of datagrams received
by, but not addressed to, this entity. IP routers forward
datagrams. IP hosts do not (except those source-routed via
the host).
DefaultTTL:
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of
the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity,
whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer
protocol.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPFWD : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPFWD- 1-
MOD IPFWD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IP Forwarding
This task modifies IP forwarding and IP default TTL attributes.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPFWD : EQN= [,Forwarding=] [,DefaultTTL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Forwarding
The indication of whether this entity is acting as an IP
router in respect to the forwarding of datagrams received
by, but not addressed to, this entity. IP routers forward
datagrams, IP hosts do not (except those source-routed via
the host).
Possible values are forwarding or notForwarding.
DefaultTTL
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of
the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity,
whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer
protocol.
Possible values range from 1 to 255.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPFWD- 1-
ACT IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command activates one or two ISDN packet data nailed-up
connections.
Prerequisites:
- The ISDN packet data nailed-up connection must be created with
CR IPNUC.
TYPE BDCH:
The BD-channel nailed-up connection is activated.
TYPE BDDLUCH or IPCH:
If the parameter NUC is specified without an extension X
or Y both nailed-up connections belonging to the given
identifier are activated.
If the parameter NUC is specified with an extension X
or Y only the one nailed-up connection with the given
identifier is activated.
Input format
[ [
[ ACT IPNUC : NUC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the ISDN packet data nailed-up connection
to be activated.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ACT IPNUC- 1-
CAN IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command cancels existing nailed-up connections.
If the nailed-up connections are active they are first
deactivated automatically.
If the parameter NUC is specified with the extension X or Y
only the corresponding nailed-up connection is canceled.
Otherwise both nailed-up connections belonging to the NUC
identifier are canceled.
TYPE BDCH:
The specified nailed-up connection is canceled.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN IPNUC : NUC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the packet data nailed-up connection to be
cancelled.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN IPNUC- 1-
CR IPNUC
BDCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command creates an ISDN packet data nailed-up connection.
It does NOT activate the nailed-up connection.
Notes:
- ISDN packet data nailed-up connections can now be created on
all 2016 LTG
1. CR IPNUC - BDCH BD-CHANNEL NUC
2. CR IPNUC - BDDLUCH BD-DLU-CHANNEL NUC
3. CR IPNUC - BDSILCCH BD SILC CHANNEL NUC
4. CR IPNUC - BDV52CH BD V52 CHANNEL NUC
5. CR IPNUC - IPCH ISDN PACKET DATA NUC
1. Input format
BD-CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create a BD-channel nailed-up connection.
[ [
[ CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,LTGIC= ,LCIC= ,LTGOG1= ,LCOG1= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name
of a packet data nailed-up connection.
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDCH BD CHANNEL NUC
LTGIC LTG INCOMING
This parameter specifies the LTG on the incoming side of the
nailed-up connection.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDCH
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
LCIC LTU CHANNEL INCOMING
This parameter specifies the LTU channel on the incoming side of
the nailed-up connection. Special ports (e.g. announcements or coin
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 1+
CR IPNUC
BDCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
boxes) or ports that are not in service are not accepted.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LTGOG1 LTG OUTGOING
This parameter specifies the LTG on the outgoing side of the
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
LCOG1 LTU CHANNEL OUTGOING
This parameter specifies the LTU channel on the outgoing side of
the nailed-up connection.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 2+
CR IPNUC
BDDLUCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
BD-DLU-CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create one or two BD-DLU-channel nailed-up
connections.
If both LTGs are specified, two nailed-up connections will
be created.
In this case, only five characters are allowed for the
parameter NUC. The command extends this value by X
and Y for the two ways of the DLU.
If only one outgoing LTG is specified, the last character of
the parameter NUC must be an X or a Y to indicate
which way of the DLU shall be used.
If a BD-DLU-channel nailed-up connections to a DLUG will be
created the parameter PATHID must be entered.
[ [
[ CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,DLU= ,LTGOG1= ,LCOG1= [,LTGOG2=] [
[ [
[ [,LCOG2=] [,PATHID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDDLUCH BD DLU CHANNEL NUC
This parameter specifies the incoming <DLU number> of ISDN packet data
nailed-up connections.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDDLUCH
- TYPE = IPCH
LTGOG1 LTG OUTGOING
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 3+
CR IPNUC
BDDLUCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LTGOG2 LTG OUTGOING
This parameter specifies the LTG on the outgoing side of a
Only an LTG connected to an outgoing or bothway access
is legal.
For nailed-up connections of TYPE IPCH, BDDLUCH, BDSILCCH,
BDV52CH it is possible to enter two outgoing LTGs.
In this case this parameter specifies the standby channel.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
PATHID PATH ID
This parameter specifies a pair of BD-DLU-channel
Notes:
- This parameter is only valid for DLUG
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 4+
CR IPNUC
BDSILCCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
BD SILC CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create an BD Silc channel nailed-up connection.
If both outgoing LTGs are specified, two nailed-up connections
will be created.
and Y for the two ways of the V5.2 C-channel.
which way of the V5.2 C-channel shall be used.
[ [
[ CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,V5IF= ,V5CHANID= ,LTGOG1= ,LCOG1= [
[ [
[ [,LTGOG2=] [,LCOG2=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDSILCCH BD SILC CHANNEL NUC
This parameter specifies the V5 interface number for ISDN packet
data nailed-up connections.
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
V5CHANID V5 CHANNEL ID
This parameter specifies the V5 channel ID for ISDN packet
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
LTGOG1 LTG OUTGOING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 5+
CR IPNUC
BDSILCCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LTGOG2 LTG OUTGOING
is legal.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 6+
CR IPNUC
BDV52CH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
BD V52 CHANNEL NUC
Input format to create an BD V52 channel nailed-up connection.
If both outgoing LTGs are specified, two nailed-up
connections will be created.
and Y for the two ways of the V5.2 C-channel.
If only one outgoing LTG is specified, the last character
of the parameter NUC must be an X or a Y to indicate
which way of the V5.2 C-channel shall be used.
[ [
[ CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,V5IF= ,V5CHANID= ,LTGOG1= ,LCOG1= [
[ [
[ [,LTGOG2=] [,LCOG2=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
BDV52CH BD V52 CHANNEL NUC
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
LTGOG1 LTG OUTGOING
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 7+
CR IPNUC
BDV52CH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LTGOG2 LTG OUTGOING
is legal.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 8+
CR IPNUC
IPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
ISDN PACKET DATA NUC
Input format to create an ISDN packet data nailed-up connection.
If both outgoing LTGs are specified, two nailed-up connections
will be created.
and Y for the two ways of the DLU.
which way of the DLU shall be used.
If an ISDN packet data nailed-up connections to a DLUG will be
created the parameter PATHID must be entered.
[ [
[ CR IPNUC : NUC= ,TYPE= ,DLU= ,LTGOG1= ,LCOG1= [,LTGOG2=] [
[ [
[ [,LCOG2=] [,PATHID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE NUC TYPE
IPCH ISDN PACKET CHANNEL NUC
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDDLUCH
- TYPE = IPCH
LTGOG1 LTG OUTGOING
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 9+
CR IPNUC
IPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
LTGOG2 LTG OUTGOING
is legal.
a-b
a: TSG NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
PATHID PATH ID
This parameter specifies a pair of BD-DLU-channel
Notes:
- This parameter is only valid for DLUG
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPNUC- 10-
DACT IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACT PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command deactivates the specified ISDN packet data
If the parameter NUC is specified with the extension X or Y
only the corresponding nailed-up connection is deactivated.
Otherwise both nailed-up connections belonging to the NUC
identifier are deactivated.
TYPE BDCH:
The specified nailed-up connection is deactivated.
Input format
[ [
[ DACT IPNUC : NUC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the ISDN packet nailed-up connection to be
deactivated.
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DACT IPNUC- 1-
DISP IPNUC
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP PACKET DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command displays the data for specified or for all ISDN packet
<job number>.
1. DISP IPNUC - ALL DISPLAY ALL NUCS
2. DISP IPNUC - NAME DISPLAY ONE NUC
3. DISP IPNUC - UNIT DISPLAY NUCS VIA EQN
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL NUCS
Input format to display all packet data nailed-up connections.
The output can be restricted with the TYPE and STATE parameters.
[ [
[ DISP IPNUC : [STATE=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
STATE NUC STATUS
Status of the ISDN packet data nailed-up connections to be displayed.
ACTIVE ACTIVE NUC
CREATE CREATED NUC
PCM ACTIVE NUC WITH PCM FAULT
UNA UNAVAILABLE NUC
TYPE NUC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the nailed-up connection.
BDCH BD CHANNEL NUC
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPNUC- 1+
DISP IPNUC
NAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY ONE NUC
Input format to diplay packet data nailed-up connections by their
NUC identifier.
[ [
[ DISP IPNUC : [NUC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
.,+,*,%,#
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPNUC- 2+
DISP IPNUC
UNIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY NUCS VIA EQN
Input format to display all packet data nailed-up connections
selected via equipment number.
The output can be restricted with the TYPE and the STATE
parameters.
[ [
[ DISP IPNUC : [LTG= [,LC=]] [,TYPE=] [,STATE=] [,FRAMEHD=] [
[ [
[ [,V5CHANID=] [,V5IF=] [,DLU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
LC LTU CHANNEL NUMBER
a[-b]
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: PORT NUMBER=
TYPE NUC TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the nailed-up connection.
BDCH BD CHANNEL NUC
STATE NUC STATUS
Status of the ISDN packet data nailed-up connections to be displayed.
ACTIVE ACTIVE NUC
CREATE CREATED NUC
PCM ACTIVE NUC WITH PCM FAULT
UNA UNAVAILABLE NUC
FRAMEHD FRAME HANDLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the frame handler reference number for
ISDN packet data nailed-up connections.
This value is determined automatically by the CR IPNUC command
depending on the entered outgoing equipment numbers.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPNUC- 3+
DISP IPNUC
UNIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- TYPE = BDDLUCH
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDV52CH
- TYPE = BDSILCCH
Compatibilities:
- TYPE = BDDLUCH
- TYPE = IPCH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPNUC- 4-
MOD IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD ISDN P DATA NAILED-UP CONNECTION
This command deactivates an existing ISDN packet nailed-up connection
and activates a new connection with the new port. When a port fails,
this command allows fast switchover to another port.
Prerequisites:
- the specified nailed-up connection must be active
- a suitable standby port must be available
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPNUC : NUC= ,LTG= ,LC= ,NEWLTG= ,NEWLC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NUC NUC IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the ISDN packet nailed-up connection.
For nailed-up connections with TYPE IPCH or BDDLUCH the
name must be entered with X or Y in the last position.
.,+,*,%,#
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter specifies the old LTG number.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
LC LTU CHANNEL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the old LTU channel number.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: PORT NUMBER=
NEWLTG NEW LTG NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new LTG number.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPNUC- 1+
MOD IPNUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
b: LTG NUMBER=
NEWLC NEW LTU CHANNEL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new LTU channel number.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
b: PORT NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPNUC- 2-
MOD IPOAATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IP over ATM Attributes
This task allows the editing of attributes of IP over ATM interface.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPOAATT : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= [,IpAddress=] [,IpNetmask=] [
[ [
[ [,IpoaLisTrapEnable=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the DS3 or DS1 (in case of IMA/DS1) interface.
VPI
Virtual path identifier of the AAL5 layer
over which the IPOA layer will be placed. Together with
the VCI input, this should uniquely identify a specific
AAL5 interface.
VCI
Virtual channel identifier of the AAL5 layer
over which the IPOA layer will be placed.
Together with the VPI input, this should
uniquely identify a specific AAL5 interface.
IpAddress
The new IP address for this interface.
IpNetmask
The new network mask for this interface.
IpoaLisTrapEnable
Indicates whether ipoaLisCreate and ipoaLisDelete
traps should be generated by this system. By default, this object
should have the value enabled(1) for systems where ATMARP Servers are
present and disabled(2) on systems where only clients reside.
Possible values are enabled or disabled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPOAATT- 1-
DISP IPOAIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IP over ATM Interface Attributes
This task displays relevant data for IP over ATM interface.
Output Parameters:
Index:
Interface Index.
Descr:
Type:
The type of interface. Additional values for Type
Speed:
value (4,294,967,295) and ifHighSpeed must be used to
has no concept of bandwidth, this object should be zero.
PhysAddress:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAIFA- 1+
DISP IPOAIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AdminStatus:
the up(1) state (or remains in
the down(2) state).
OperationalStatus:
can be passed. If AdminStatus is down(2) then
OperationalStatus should be down(2). If AdminStatus is
changed to up(1) then OperationalStatus should change to
LastChange:
The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface
entered its current operational state. If the current
state was entered prior to the last re-initialization
of the local network management subsystem, then this
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAIFA- 2+
DISP IPOAIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Name:
The textual name of the interface. The value of this
object should be the name of the interface as assigned
by the local device and should be suitable for use in
commands entered at the devices `console. This
might be a text name, such as `le0 or a simple port
number, such as `1, depending on the interface naming
syntax of the device. If several entries in the
ifTable together represent a single interface as named
by the device, then each will have the same value of
Name. Note that for an agent which responds to SNMP
queries concerning an interface on some other
(proxied) device, then the value of Name for such an
interface is the proxied devices local name for it.
If there is no local name, or this object is otherwise
not applicable, then this object contains a zero-
length string.
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be
generated for this interface.
By default, this object should have the value
enabled(1) for interfaces which do not operate on
top of any other interface (as defined in the
ifStackTable), and disabled(2) otherwise.
ConnectorPresent:
This object has the value true(1) if the interface
sublayer has a physical connector and the value
false(2) otherwise.
StackStatus:
The status of the relationship between two sub-
layers.
Changing the value of this object from active to
notInService or destroy will likely have
consequences up and down the interface stack. Thus,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAIFA- 3+
DISP IPOAIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
write access to this object is likely to be
inappropriate for some types of interfaces, and many
implementations will choose not to support write-
access for any type of interface.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPOAIFA : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the DS3 or DS1 (in case of IMA/DS1) interface
VPI
Virtual path identifier of the aal5 layer
aal5 interface.
VCI
Virtual channel identifier of the aal5 layer
uniquely identify a specific aal5 interface.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAIFA- 4-
MOD IPOAIFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IP over ATM Interface Attributes
This task modifies attributes of IP over ATM interface.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPOAIFA : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= [,IfAdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
AAL5 interface.
VCI
IfAdminStatus
The desired state of the interface.When a
managed system initializes, all interfaces start with ifAdminStatus
in the down(2) state. As a result of either explicit management
action or per configuration information retained by the managed
system, ifAdminStatus is then changed to the up(1) state (or
remains in the down(2) state).
Possible values are up, down.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPOAIFA- 1-
CR IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create IP over ATM Layer
This task creates an IP over ATM interface.
Input format
[ [
[ CR IPOAL : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ,IpAddress= ,IpNetmask= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
AAL5 interface.
VCI
IpAddress
IpNetmask
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPOAL- 1-
DEL IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete IP over ATM Layer
This task deletes an existing IP over ATM interface.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL IPOAL : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
AAL5 interface.
VCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL IPOAL- 1-
DISP IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IP over ATM Layer
This task displays relevant data for IP over ATM interface.
Output Parameters:
InArpInReqs:
The number of InATMARP requests received by this client.
InArpOutReqs:
The number of InATMARP requests sent by this client.
InArpInReplies:
The number of InATMARP replies received by this client.
InArpOutReplies:
Total number of InATMARP replies sent by this client.
InArpInvalidInReqs:
The number of times that this client detected an
invalid InATMARP request.
InArpInvalidOutReqs:
The number of times that this client did not
receive an InATMARP reply.
ArpInReqs:
Total number of ATMARP requests received by this client.
ArpOutReqs:
Total number of ATMARP requests sent by this client.
ArpInReplies:
Total number of ATMARP replies received by this client.
ArpOutReplies:
Total number of ATMARP replies sent by this client.
ArpInNaks:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAL- 1+
DISP IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Total number of negative ATMARP replies
received by this client.
ArpOutNaks:
Total number of negative ATMARP replies sent by this client.
Classic IP and ARP over ATM does not require an
ATMARP client to transmit an ATMARP_NAK upon
receipt of an ATMARP request from another ATMARP
client. However, implementation experience has
shown that this error condition is somewhat easy
to create inadvertently by configuring one ATMARP
client with an ipoaArpRemoteSrvrTable entry
containing an ipoaArpRemoteSrvrAtmAddr value which
is the ATM address of another ATMARP client-only
system.
If an ATMARP client supports the transmission of
ATMARP_NAKs, then it should increment
ArpOutNaks each time it transmits
an ATMARP_NAK. Otherwise, support of this
object is considered optional.
ArpUnknownOps:
The number of times that this client received
an ATMARP message with an operation code for which
it is not coded to support.
ArpNoSrvrResps:
The number of times this client failed to receive
a response from a ATMARP Server within the
ipoaLisTimeout value for ipoaLisRetries times.
This may imply that the client will re-elect a
new primary ATMARP Server for this LIS from the
ipoaArpRemoteSrvrTable.
ArpClientRowStatus:
This object allows entries to be created and
deleted from the ipoaArpClientTable.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAL- 2+
DISP IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VcVpi:
The VPI value for the Virtual Circuit.
VcVci:
The VCI value for the Virtual Circuit.
VcType:
The type of the Virtual Circuit.
NegotiatedEncapsType:
The encapsulation type used when communicating over
this circuit.
NegotiatedMtu:
The MTU used when communicating over this circuit.
PvcIfIndex:
The ifIndex of the ATM Interface that this PVC
is associated with.
ConfigPvcVpi:
The VPI value for the Virtual Circuit.
ConfigPvcVci:
The VCI value for the Virtual Circuit.
ConfigPvcDefaultMtu:
Classical IP and ARP over ATM allows use of
other MTU values for PVCs but considers how a
value other than 9180 could be selected to be out
of scope. ConfigPvcDefaultMtu can be used to
configure the MTU to be used for the PVC.
Both ends MUST have the same value configured.
ConfigPvcRowStatus:
This object allows rows to be created and deleted in
the ipoaConfigPvcTable. Creation of an entry in this
table should eventually result in the creation of an
ipNetToMediaEntry and a corresponding ipoaVcEntry
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAL- 3+
DISP IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
after InATMARP has determined the destination address
of the remote system that the PVC is connected to.
Setting this object to destroy(6) should remove the
corresponding ipNetToMediaTable and ipoaVcTable entries.
LisTrapEnable:
Indicates whether ipoaLisCreate and ipoaLisDelete
traps should be generated by this system.
enabled(1) for systems where ATMARP Servers are
present and disabled(2) on systems where only
clients reside.
PhubIfConfigIndex:
This object contains an appropriate value to be used
for phubIfConfigIndex when creating an entry in the
phubIfConfigTable. The value 0 indicates that no unassigned
entries are available. To obtain the phubIfConfigIndex
value for a new entry, the manager issues a management
protocol retrieval operation to obtain the current value
of this object. After each retrieval, the agent should modify
the value to the next unassigned index.
PhubIfIndex:
Provides the ifIndex value of the interface sublayer
to identify corresponding rows in the Interfaces MIB.
If this sublayer shall be created by the agent, phubIfIndex
must be set to zero.
An existing ifIndex value can be given to connect the lower
layer defined in phubIfLowerLayer and this layer.
PhubIfType:
Specifies the interface type to be created.
PhubIfLowerLayer:
Defines if a created sublayer shall be put on top of
an existing interface sublayer or if it shall be created
without any relationship to existing sublayers. In the latter
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAL- 4+
DISP IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
case, phubIfLowerLayer must be set to 0.
If a lower layer is specified, the existence of the lower
layer and the compatibility with the upper layer is checked.
PhubIfConfigStatus:
IpAddress:
IpNetmask:
PhubIpConfigRowStatus:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPOAL : EQN= ,VPI= ,VCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
VPI
AAL5 interface.
VCI
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAL- 5+
DISP IPOAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOAL- 6-
CR IPOFRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create IP over FR Layer
This task creates an IP over frame relay interface.
Input format
[ [
[ CR IPOFRL : EQN= ,DLCI= ,IpAddress= ,IpNetmask= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the DS1 network interface.
DLCI
Data Link Connection Identifer for the targeted
frame relay interface.
IpAddress
IpNetmask
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPOFRL- 1-
DEL IPOFRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete IP over FR Layer
This task deletes an IP over frame relay interface.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL IPOFRL : EQN= ,DLCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL IPOFRL- 1-
DISP IPOFRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IP over FR Layer
This task displays relevant attributes of a specific IP over frame relay
interface.
Output Parameters:
IpAddress:
IpNetmask:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPOFRL : EQN= ,DLCI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOFRL- 1-
MOD IPOFRL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IP over FR Layer
This task allows editing of attributes associated with a specific IP over frame
relay interface.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPOFRL : EQN= ,DLCI= [,IpAddress=] [,IpNetmask=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DLCI
IpAddress
IpNetmask
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPOFRL- 1-
CR IPOMLPPP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create IP over MLPPP
This task creates an IP over frame relay interface.
Input format
[ [
[ CR IPOMLPPP : EQN= ,MLPPPIfIndex= ,IpAddress= ,IpNetmask= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the packet hub.
MLPPPIfIndex
Interface index of the desired MLPPP interface.
IpAddress
IpNetmask
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPOMLPPP- 1-
DISP IPOMLPPP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IP over MLPPP
This task displays relevant attributes of a specific IP over MLPPP interface.
Output Parameters:
IpAddress:
IpNetmask:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPOMLPPP : EQN= ,Index= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the packet hub.
Index
The index of the desired interface (ifIndex).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPOMLPPP- 1-
MOD IPOMLPPP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IP over MLPPP
This task allows editing of attributes associated with a specific IP over frame
relay interface.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPOMLPPP : EQN= ,MLPPPIfIndex= [,IpAddress=] [,IpNetmask=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
MLPPPIfIndex
Interface index of the desired MLPPP interface.
IpAddress
IpNetmask
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPOMLPPP- 1-
CR IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create IP Pool Entry
This task creates an entry in the IP pool table for a specific domain.
Input format
[ [
[ CR IPPOOLE : EQN= ,Name= ,IpPoolLow= ,IpPoolHigh= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Name
The name which identifies the domain
IpPoolLow
Start address of the IP pool. The IP pool can lie within an arbitrary
address class area. The IP pool can contain at most 510 addresses
independent of the address class (e. g. X.Y.Z.1 - X.Y.(Z+1).254).
Examples:
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.126 (C-class subnet)
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.254 (C-class net)
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.11.254 (two subsequent C-class nets)
172.168.10.1 - 172.168.11.254 (B-class subnet)
The borders of the net or subnet specified must not be included.
Examples:
1) subnet 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.127
the borders are 192.168.10.0 and 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.120
(not correct - 192.168.10.0 is a subnet border)
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.11 - 192.168.10.125
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPPOOLE- 1+
CR IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(correct)
2) subnet 192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.250
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
3) net 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.250
(not correct - 192.168.10.0 is a net border)
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
4) 2 nets 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.250
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.250
(correct)
IpPoolHigh
End address of the IP pool. The IP pool can lie within an arbitrary
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPPOOLE- 2+
CR IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Examples:
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.126 (C-class subnet)
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.254 (C-class net)
172.168.10.1 - 172.168.11.254 (B-class subnet)
Examples:
1) subnet 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.120
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.11 - 192.168.10.125
(correct)
2) subnet 192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.250
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPPOOLE- 3+
CR IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3) net 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.250
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
4) 2 nets 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.250
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.250
(correct)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPPOOLE- 4-
DEL IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete IP Pool Entry
This task deletes an entry in the IP pool table for a specific domain.
Note:
If any PPP Subscriber Layer is created, its status must be down
before the IP pool can be changed or deleted.
- Modify PPP Subscriber State
Additionally, RAS maintenance ensures that all IP addresses have
been returned to the pool, i.e. no PPP session must be active.
ModifyAllPPPSubscriberState (adminStatus=down) aborts all active
sessions, but this may take a while.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL IPPOOLE : EQN= ,Name= ,IpPoolIndex= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Name
IpPoolIndex
Index of the IP pool. A list of existing IP pools can be
obtained with the task Display Packet Hub Domain.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL IPPOOLE- 1-
MOD IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IP Pool Entry
This task modifies an entry in the IP pool table for a specific domain.
Note:
If any PPP Subscriber Layer is created, its status must be down
before the IP pool can be changed or deleted.
- Modify PPP Subscriber State
Additionally, RAS maintenance ensures that all IP addresses have
been returned to the pool, i.e. no PPP session must be active.
ModifyAllPPPSubscriberState (adminStatus=down) aborts all active
sessions, but this may take a while.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPPOOLE : EQN= ,Name= ,IpPoolIndex= [,IpPoolLow=] [
[ [
[ [,IpPoolHigh=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Name
IpPoolIndex
Index of the IP pool. A list of existing IP pools can be
obtained with the task Display Packet Hub Domain.
IpPoolLow
Start address of the IP pool. The IP pool can lie within an arbitrary
Examples:
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.126 (C-class subnet)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPPOOLE- 1+
MOD IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.254 (C-class net)
172.168.10.1 - 172.168.11.254 (B-class subnet)
Examples:
1) subnet 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.120
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.11 - 192.168.10.125
(correct)
2) subnet 192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.250
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
3) net 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.250
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPPOOLE- 2+
MOD IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
4) 2 nets 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.250
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.250
(correct)
IpPoolHigh
End address of the IP pool. The IP pool can lie within an arbitrary
Examples:
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.126 (C-class subnet)
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.254 (C-class net)
172.168.10.1 - 172.168.11.254 (B-class subnet)
Examples:
1) subnet 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.120
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPPOOLE- 3+
MOD IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.127
192.168.10.11 - 192.168.10.125
(correct)
2) subnet 192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.128 - 192.168.10.250
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.129 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
3) net 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.10.250
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.255
192.168.10.1 - 192.168.10.250
(correct)
4) 2 nets 192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.255
192.168.10.0 - 192.168.11.250
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.255
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPPOOLE- 4+
MOD IPPOOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
192.168.10.200 - 192.168.11.250
(correct)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPPOOLE- 5-
CR IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create IP Route
This task creates a row in the Packet Hubs IP Routing table.
Input format
[ [
[ CR IPROUTE : EQN= ,RouteDest= ,RouteMask= ,RouteTos= [
[ [
[ ,RouteNextHop= [,RouteIfIndex=] [,RouteType=] [
[ [
[ [,RouteInfo=] [,RouteNextHopAS=] [,RouteMetric1=] [
[ [
[ [,RouteMetric2=] [,RouteMetric3=] [,RouteMetric4=] [
[ [
[ [,RouteMetric5=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
RouteDest
address value.
ipCidrRouteMask object is not equal to x.
RouteMask
the value in the ipCidrRouteDest field. For
the ipCidrRouteMask by reference to the IP Ad-
dress Class.
ipCidrRouteDest object is not equal to ipCidrRoute-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPROUTE- 1+
CR IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dest.
RouteTos
policy applies.
Only the value zero is supported.
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
| | | |
| | | |
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
IP TOS IP TOS
0 0 0 0 ==> 0 0 0 0 1 ==> 2
0 0 1 0 ==> 4 0 0 1 1 ==> 6
0 1 0 0 ==> 8 0 1 0 1 ==> 10
0 1 1 0 ==> 12 0 1 1 1 ==> 14
1 0 0 0 ==> 16 1 0 0 1 ==> 18
1 0 1 0 ==> 20 1 0 1 1 ==> 22
1 1 0 0 ==> 24 1 1 0 1 ==> 26
1 1 1 0 ==> 28 1 1 1 1 ==> 30
RouteNextHop
RouteIfIndex
Possible values range from -2147483648 to 2147483647.
RouteType
which the next hop is not the final destina-
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPROUTE- 2+
CR IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
tion.
Possible values are other, reject, local, or remote.
RouteInfo
particular routing protocol which is responsi-
ble for this route, as determined by the value
specified in the routes ipCidrRouteProto value.
which is a syntactically valid object identif-
ier, and any implementation conforming to ASN.1
RouteNextHopAS
ipCidrRouteProto value. When this object is
to zero.
RouteMetric1
ipCidrRouteProto value. If this metric is not
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPROUTE- 3+
CR IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RouteMetric2
RouteMetric3
RouteMetric4
RouteMetric5
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CR IPROUTE- 4-
DEL IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Delete IP Route
This task deletes a row in the Packet Hubs IP Routing table.
Input format
[ [
[ DEL IPROUTE : EQN= ,RouteDest= ,RouteMask= ,RouteTos= [
[ [
[ ,RouteNextHop= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
RouteDest
address value.
RouteMask
dress Class.
Dest.
RouteTos
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL IPROUTE- 1+
DEL IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
policy applies.
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
| | | |
| | | |
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
IP TOS IP TOS
0 0 0 0 ==> 0 0 0 0 1 ==> 2
0 0 1 0 ==> 4 0 0 1 1 ==> 6
0 1 0 0 ==> 8 0 1 0 1 ==> 10
0 1 1 0 ==> 12 0 1 1 1 ==> 14
1 0 0 0 ==> 16 1 0 0 1 ==> 18
1 0 1 0 ==> 20 1 0 1 1 ==> 22
1 1 0 0 ==> 24 1 1 0 1 ==> 26
1 1 1 0 ==> 28 1 1 1 1 ==> 30
RouteNextHop
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DEL IPROUTE- 2-
DISP IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IP Route
This task displays one row of the Packet Hubs IP Routing table.
Output Parameters:
RouteIfIndex:
RouteType:
which the next hop is not the final destination.
RouteProto:
The routing mechanism via which this route was
learned. Inclusion of values for gateway routing
protocols is not intended to imply that
hosts should support those protocols.
RouteAge:
The number of seconds since this route was
last updated or otherwise determined to be
correct. Note that no semantics of `too old
can be implied except through knowledge of the
routing protocol by which the route was
learned.
RouteInfo:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPROUTE- 1+
DISP IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
particular routing protocol which is responsible
for this route, as determined by the value
specified in the routes RouteProto value.
which is a syntactically valid object identifier,
and any implementation conforming to ASN.1
RouteNextHopAS:
RouteProto value. When this object is
to zero.
RouteMetric1:
RouteMetric2:
RouteMetric3:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPROUTE- 2+
DISP IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RouteMetric4:
RouteMetric5:
RouteStatus:
The row status variable, used according to
row installation and removal conventions.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPROUTE : EQN= ,RouteDest= ,RouteMask= ,RouteTos= [
[ [
[ ,RouteNextHop= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
RouteDest
address value.
RouteMask
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPROUTE- 3+
DISP IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
dress Class.
Dest.
RouteTos
policy applies.
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
| | | |
| | | |
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
IP TOS IP TOS
0 0 0 0 ==] 0 0 0 0 1 ==] 2
0 0 1 0 ==] 4 0 0 1 1 ==] 6
0 1 0 0 ==] 8 0 1 0 1 ==] 10
0 1 1 0 ==] 12 0 1 1 1 ==] 14
1 0 0 0 ==] 16 1 0 0 1 ==] 18
1 0 1 0 ==] 20 1 0 1 1 ==] 22
1 1 0 0 ==] 24 1 1 0 1 ==] 26
1 1 1 0 ==] 28 1 1 1 1 ==] 30
RouteNextHop
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPROUTE- 4+
DISP IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPROUTE- 5-
MOD IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify IP Route
This task allows editing of the Packet Hubs IP Routing table.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD IPROUTE : EQN= ,RouteDest= ,RouteMask= ,RouteTos= [
[ [
[ ,RouteNextHop= [,RouteIfIndex=] [,RouteType=] [
[ [
[ [,RouteInfo=] [,RouteNextHopAS=] [,RouteMetric1=] [
[ [
[ [,RouteMetric2=] [,RouteMetric3=] [,RouteMetric4=] [
[ [
[ [,RouteMetric5=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the PHUB.
RouteDest
address value.
RouteMask
dress Class.
Dest.
RouteTos
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPROUTE- 1+
MOD IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
policy applies.
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
| | | |
| | | |
+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
IP TOS IP TOS
0 0 0 0 ==] 0 0 0 0 1 ==] 2
0 0 1 0 ==] 4 0 0 1 1 ==] 6
0 1 0 0 ==] 8 0 1 0 1 ==] 10
0 1 1 0 ==] 12 0 1 1 1 ==] 14
1 0 0 0 ==] 16 1 0 0 1 ==] 18
1 0 1 0 ==] 20 1 0 1 1 ==] 22
1 1 0 0 ==] 24 1 1 0 1 ==] 26
1 1 1 0 ==] 28 1 1 1 1 ==] 30
RouteNextHop
RouteIfIndex
RouteType
which the next hop is not the final destina-
tion.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPROUTE- 2+
MOD IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Possible values are other, reject, local, or remote.
RouteInfo
particular routing protocol which is responsi-
ble for this route, as determined by the value
specified in the routes ipCidrRouteProto value.
which is a syntactically valid object identif-
ier, and any implementation conforming to ASN.1
RouteNextHopAS
ipCidrRouteProto value. When this object is
to zero.
RouteMetric1
RouteMetric2
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPROUTE- 3+
MOD IPROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RouteMetric3
RouteMetric4
RouteMetric5
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD IPROUTE- 4-
DISP IPRSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display IP Routing Statistics
This task displays routing statistics.
Output Parameters:
InReceives:
The total number of input datagrams received from
interfaces, including those received in error.
InHdrErrors:
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in
their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number
mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors
discovered in processing their IP options, etc.
InAddrErrors:
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP
address in their IP headers destination field was not a
valid address to be received at this entity. This count
includes invalid addresses (e.g., 0.0.0.0) and addresses of
unsupported Classes (e.g., Class E). For entities which are
not IP routers and therefore do not forward datagrams, this
counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination
address was not a local address.
ForwDatagrams:
The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not
their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt
was made to find a route to forward them to that final
destination. In entities which do not act as IP routers,
this counter will include only those packets which were
Source-Routed via this entity, and the Source-Route option
processing was successful.
InUnknownProtos:
The number of locally-addressed datagrams received
successfully but discarded because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPRSTAT- 1+
DISP IPRSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
InDiscards:
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were
encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which
were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that
this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while
awaiting re-assembly.
InDelivers:
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered
to IP user-protocols (including ICMP).
OutReqests:
The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-
protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for
transmission. Note that this counter does not include any
datagrams counted in ForwDatagrams.
OutDscards:
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was
encountered to prevent their transmission to their
destination, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of
buffer space). Note that this counter would include
datagrams counted in ForwDatagrams if any such packets met
this (discretionary) discard criterion.
OutNoRoutes:
The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could
be found to transmit them to their destination. Note that
this counter includes any packets counted in ForwDatagrams
which meet this `no-route criterion. Note that this
includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all
of its default routers are down
ReasmTimeout:
The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are
held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPRSTAT- 2+
DISP IPRSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ReasmReqds:
The number of IP fragments received which needed to be
reassembled at this entity.
ReasmOKs:
The number of IP datagrams successfully re-assembled.
ReasmFails:
The number of failures detected by the IP re-assembly
algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc).
Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP
fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in
RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by
combining them as they are received.
FragOKs:
The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully
fragmented at this entity.
FragFails:
The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because
they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not
be, e.g., because their Dont Fragment flag was set.
FragCreates:
The number of IP datagram fragments that have been
generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP IPRSTAT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP IPRSTAT- 3-
TEST ISUB
DLULC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST OF ISDN SUBSCRIBER BASIC ACCESS
This command initiates a test job for:
QUICK Test.
CTC, continuity test check.
The subscribers to be tested with QUICK test are
specified by entering either directory-number-oriented or
equipment-number-oriented data.
The subscribers to be tested with a continuity test check are
specified by entering equipment-number-oriented, data.
For CTC, it is possible to test multiple subscribers, but it is
not possible to perform a CTC for subscribers in DLU and
V5IF at the same time.
The CTC cannot be controlled by a schedule, and the addressing
of the subscribers is always done via the physical termination.
The routine test is a QUICK test with schedule, i.e. it is started
automatically. The schedule must first be created.
<job number>.
1. TEST ISUB - DLULC EQN ORIENTED
2. TEST ISUB - DNQUICK DN ORIENTED QUICK TEST
3. TEST ISUB - V5CTC V5 CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
1. Input format
EQN ORIENTED
Input format for dlu equipment-oriented continuity test check
or quick test.
[ [
[ TEST ISUB : [UNCOND=] ,DLU= [,LC=] ,TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter is only valid for SLMI:SDSL and for a single test
object.It allows overriding the Busy status of the HBR (High Bit
Rate) part of the line. So execution of the test depends only on
status of the LBR (Low Bit Rate).
N NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
NO NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
Y YES
YES YES
This parameter specifies the DLU number where the test is to
be run.
When x is entered this command initiates parallel testing on
all DLUs.
Either DN or DLU must be specified, but not both in the case of
routine test type or quick test.
Either V5IF or DLU must be specified, but not both in the case of
a continuity test check.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST ISUB- 1+
TEST ISUB
DLULC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LC LINE CIRCUIT
LC may only be used if parameter DLU was input.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF=
unit values.
b: MODULE=
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
TYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the test type.
QUICK in the case of quick or routine test type.
CTC in the case of continuity test check.
CTC CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
QUICK QUICK TEST
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST ISUB- 2+
TEST ISUB
DNQUICK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN ORIENTED QUICK TEST
Input format for directory-number-oriented quick test or routine
test type.
[ [
[ TEST ISUB : [UNCOND=] ,DN= [,LAC=] [,SCHED=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter is only valid for SLMI:SDSL and for a single test
object.It allows overriding the Busy status of the HBR (High Bit
Rate) part of the line. So execution of the test depends only on
status of the LBR (Low Bit Rate).
N NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
NO NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
Y YES
YES YES
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber
line.
A test job for a DN interval can be given by linking two parameters
with &&.
This parameter is only allowed for Routine test type or quick test.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code .It is required, if
there is more than one local network in the exchange.
LAC may only be used if parameter DN was input.
This parameter is only allowed for routine test type or quick test.
This parameter associates the test job with a pre-defined
test schedule (which must have already been set up using the
ENTER TEST SCHEDULE command). Instead of running immediately, the
test job will execute at the time specified in the Test
Schedule. This may be used to cause the test job
to run routinely (i.e. every night at a certain time).
TYPE TEST TYPE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST ISUB- 3+
TEST ISUB
DNQUICK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!QUICK - QUICK TEST
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST ISUB- 4+
TEST ISUB
V5CTC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
V5 CONTINUITY TEST CHECK
Input format for V5 interface-number-oriented continuity test check.
[ [
[ TEST ISUB : V5IF= [,V5PORT=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the v5 interface number where the
continuity test check is to be run.
When x is entered this command initiates parallel testing on
all V5IFs.
Either V5IF or DLU must be specified, but not both in the
case of a continuity test check.
V5PORT V5 PORT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the port number of one or more line circuits
in the V5 interface.
V5PORT only be used if parameter V5IF was input.
TYPE TEST TYPE
!QUICK - QUICK TEST
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST ISUB- 5-
CAN JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL JOB
This command cancels semipermanent jobs. Timer jobs scheduled
for predetermined times can be cancelled. Time jobs which are
running must first be stopped before they can be cancelled.
Notes:
- This command may not be entered from command files.
Input format
[ [
[ CAN JOB : JN= ,CMDCOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a job.
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies the command code of the job to be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN JOB- 1-
CONT JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONTINUE JOB
This command reactivates user processes which were started by commands
with the attribute CONTINUE.
Prerequisite:
Input format
[ [
[ CONT JOB : JN= [,STEP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the logical step up to which the job
should be processed.
Note:
With some processes this parameter is mandatory.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONT JOB- 1-
DISP JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY JOB
This command displays job data for one job or all jobs.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP JOB : [JN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP JOB- 1-
STOP JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP JOB
This command stops transient jobs or part-jobs which have the command
attribute STOP.
Notes:
Input format
[ [
[ STOP JOB : JN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STOP JOB- 1-
DISP JOSITDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY JOSIT DATA
This command displays internal tracer data specified by the parameter
SELECT.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP JOSITDAT : [SELECT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SELECT SELECTION
This parameter determines the displayed tracer data.
X ALL AVAILABLE SS DATA
COLLECT PARAM VALUES OF LAST ACTOSITRA
Parameter values of the last ACT OSITRAC command.
TSTATE ACTUAL TRACER STATUS
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP JOSITDAT- 1-
CAN KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL KEYWORD
This command cancels keyword-specific data for a subscriber, a PBX line, a PBX
or a Subscriber Profile.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if the subscriber/PBX/PBX line is related to a
secured CENTREX business group BGID for which the operator
has no administration permission (see command DISP CXSEC).
- If applicable an AMA-ticket can be generated.
- If applicable an FIR-ticket can be generated.
1. CAN KEYWORD - PBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
2. CAN KEYWORD - PROFILE KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
3. CAN KEYWORD - SUBPBX KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
1. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= [,PURPOSE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber,
PBX-line or PBX.
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX / MOD PBX /
CR PBXLN.
Notes:
- This parameter is ommissible if only one OPMODE exists for the
chosen PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
[AIC [ ANALOG INCOMING
[IBW [ ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 1+
CAN KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[IBW1TR6 [ ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
[IIC [ ISDN INCOMING
!IIC1TR6 - ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
LNO LINE NUMBER
PURPOSE PURPOSE OF CANCELING
This parameter specifies the keyword-specific data which should
be cancelled.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not entered, then KEY, INTKEY and
KEYPRF will be cancelled.
- If this parameter is entered, then the according keyword-speicifc
data will be cancelled.
INTKEY INTERNET KEYWORD
[KEY [ KEYWORD
!KEYPRF - KEYWORD PROFILE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 2+
CAN KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN KEYWORD : PRFID= [,PURPOSE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRFID PROFILE IDENTIFICATION
Specifies the profile identification (see command CR SUBPRFID),
for which a keyword should be canceled.
be cancelled.
Notes:
KEY KEYWORD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 3+
CAN KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,PURPOSE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber,
PBX-line or PBX.
be cancelled.
Notes:
[KEY [ KEYWORD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 4-
DISP KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY KEYWORD
This command displays keyword-specific data of a subscriber, a PBX line, a
PBX or a subscriber profile.
Keyword-specific data may be displayed for:
- a single subscriber,
- a single PBX line,
- a single PBX,
- a single subscriber profile,
- a range of directory numbers,
- a range of subscriber profiles,
- all directory numbers in an exchange,
- all subscriber profiles in an exchange.
Keyword-specific data include:
- the normal keyword
- information, if the normal keyword is a security keyword or not
- information about the existence of an internet keyword
- the keyword profile
Notes:
- The Parameter KEY will not be displayed if it is a security keyword.
- An information will be given, if an Internet Keyword is existing but the
Internet Keyword itself will not be displayed.
- A selective display is possible with input of DN=X (or interval) or
PRFID=X (or interval) and parameter KEYPRF.
<job number>.
1. DISP KEYWORD - PROFILE KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
2. DISP KEYWORD - SUBPBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX/PBXLN
1. Input format
Input format for display of keyword specific data for Subscriber Profiles.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP KEYWORD : PRFID= [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
for which data should be displayed.
Notes:
- Together with parameter KEYPRF only the input of PRFID=X
is allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- LAC
- OPMODE
- LNO
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 1+
DISP KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KEYPRF KEYWORD PROFILE
Specifies the keyword profile identification, which should be
searched for.
Prerequisites:
- Input of DN=X (or interval) or PRFID=X (or interval).
PRF1 KEYWORD PROFILE 1
[[PRF10 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 10
[PRF16 [ KEYWORD PROFILE 16
!PRF9 - KEYWORD PROFILE 9
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 2+
DISP KEYWORD
SUBPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX/PBXLN
Input format for display of keyword specific data for Subscriber, PBX
or PBX Lines.
Notes:
- If data for a specific PBX Line should be displayed, then parameter
LNO has to be entered too.
- If DN=X (or interval) is entered, then the keyword data for all
existing objects (resp. all existing objects within this interval)
are displayed.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LNO=] [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Together with parameter KEYPRF only the input of LAC=X is
allowed.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber/PBX-line/PBX.
Notes:
- Together with parameter KEYPRF only the input of DN=X or
a DN-interval is allowed.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX and MOD PBX.
Notes:
- Keyword and Keyword Profile are not allowed for IOG,
AOG and IOG1TR6 lines.
- If OPMODE is specified, LNO must be entered too.
chosen PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
[IBW [ ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 3+
DISP KEYWORD
SUBPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
searched for.
Prerequisites:
- Input of DN=X (or interval) or PRFID=X (or interval).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 4-
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER KEYWORD
This command enters a keyword for
- a subscriber (categories main station,ISDN basic access, ISDN digital
switch board, two party line, coinbox and cordless terminal mobility,
H323 protocol subscriber with full and reduced feature set)
- a PBX line (bothway or incoming to the switch; categories main station,
ISDN basic access, B-channel of ISDN primary access fixed and cordless
terminal mobility)
- a PBX
(for TYPE = PBX, MLHG, PASLAVE, SHG, PBXDDINO, PA,
or no special PBX-TYPE)
- a Subscriber Profile
via parameter KEY.
For some subscriber classes of service administered via SCI
(subscriber controled input) a keyword is mandatory.
Only Subscribers with security keyword are allowed to modify keyword per SCI.
This command enters an internet keyword for
terminal mobility)
- a PBX
via parameter INTKEY.
This command enters a keyword profile for
terminal mobility)
- a PBX
- a Subscriber Profile
via parameter KEYPRF.
Notes:
- The command is rejected if the subscriber/PBX/PBX line is related to a
secured CENTREX business group BGID for which the operator has no
- A secure Keyword is stored and logged in coded form.
- An Internet Keyword and a not secure keyword is stored and logged in uncoded
form.
- If applicable an AMA-ticket can be generated except for an Internet Keyword.
- If applicable a FIR-ticket can be generated except for an Internet Keyword.
- If no Keyword is entered, a default value may be set (for detailed
description about setting of default values see parameter KEY and
INTKEY, for the default Keyword and Internet Keyword see command
DISP CALLPOPT).
1. ENTR KEYWORD - PBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
2. ENTR KEYWORD - PROFILE KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
3. ENTR KEYWORD - SUBPBX KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
1. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
Input format for assigning a keyword, internet keyword or keyword profile to a
PBX line.
Notes:
- If parameter SECURE is not entered, then NO will be set as default
if a keyword is entered.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 1+
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ ENTR KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= [,KEY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SECURE=] [,INTKEY=] [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- For PBX-lines the pilot directory number of the
relevant PBX must be entered within this parameter.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX / MOD PBX /
CR PBXLN.
Notes:
- Keyword is not allowed for IOG, AOG and IOG1TR6 lines.
chosen PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
[IBW [ ISDN BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
KEY KEYWORD
Notes:
- If no keyword is entered, a default value will be set
except when parameter INTKEY or KEYPRF is entered and
parameter SECURE is not entered.
(see command DISP CALLPOPT)
- If the keyword (personal identification number) specified during
SCI does not correspond to the keyword stored for the subscriber
then SCI is rejected.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 2+
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SECURE SECURITY KEYWORD
A security keyword may be modified by SCI. A normal keyword
may not be modified by SCI.
Notes:
- A security keyword can not be displayed.
- A security keyword is logged in enciphered format.
N NORMAL KEYWORD
[NO [ NORMAL KEYWORD
[[Y [[ SECURITY KEYWORD
!YES - SECURITY KEYWORD
Keyword used for Internet sessions.
Notes:
- If none of the parameters INTKEY, KEY, KEYPRF
or SECURE is entered, then a default keyword for KEY and
INTKEY will be set.
- If parameter INTKEY is not entered and parameter KEY and/or
parameter SECURE and/or parameter KEYPRF is entered, then no
default value for INTKEY will be set.
- If the parameters KEY is not entered and parameter INTKEY is
entered, then a default value for KEY will only be set, when
parameter SECURE is entered too.
- If the internet keyword specified during login into an internet
session does not correspond to the internet keyword stored for the
subscriber then login is rejected.
assigned. The keyword profile includes a set of features. For using
these features the input of a keyword is mandatory.
Keyword profiles can be created via command ENTR SCFEA and can be
displayed via DISP SCFEA.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 3+
ENTR KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Input format for assigning a keyword or a keyword profile to a subscriber
profile.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR KEYWORD : PRFID= [,SECURE=] [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
for which a keyword and/or a keyword profile should be entered.
Notes:
- The specified profile has to be an existing CREATE-profile.
- For entering a keword for subscriber profiles SECURE=YES
has to be entered without input of parameter KEY, so that the
default keyword will be written.
Notes:
Y SECURITY KEYWORD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 4+
ENTR KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
Input format for assigning a keyword, internet keyword or keyword profile to a
subscriber or a PBX.
Notes:
- If parameter SECURE is not entered, then NO will be set as default,
if a keyword is entered.
[ [
[ ENTR KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,KEY=] [,SECURE=] [,INTKEY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- For PBX-lines the pilot directory number of the
relevant PBX must be entered within this parameter.
KEY KEYWORD
Notes:
- If no keyword is entered, a default value will be set
except when parameter INTKEY or KEYPRF is entered and
parameter SECURE is not entered.
- If the keyword (personal identification number) specified during
SCI does not correspond to the keyword stored for the subscriber
then SCI is rejected.
Notes:
N NORMAL KEYWORD
[NO [ NORMAL KEYWORD
[[Y [[ SECURITY KEYWORD
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 5+
ENTR KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Keyword used for Internet sessions.
Notes:
- If none of the parameters INTKEY, KEY, KEYPRF
or SECURE is entered, then a default keyword for KEY and
INTKEY will be set.
- If parameter INTKEY is not entered and parameter KEY and/or
parameter SECURE and/or parameter KEYPRF is entered, then no
default value for INTKEY will be set.
- If the parameters KEY is not entered and parameter INTKEY is
entered, then a default value for KEY will only be set, when
parameter SECURE is entered too.
- If the internet keyword specified during login into an internet
session does not correspond to the internet keyword stored for the
subscriber then login is rejected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 6-
DISP L2TPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display L2TP Attributes
This task displays the L2TP attributes of a packet hub.
Output Parameters:
AdminState:
This object defines the administrative state of
the L2TP protocol. Setting this object to
disabled causes all tunnels to be immediately
disconnected and no further tunnels to be either
initiated or accepted.
DrainTunnels:
Setting this object to true will prevent any new
tunnels and/or sessions to be either initiated or
accepted but does NOT disconnect any active
tunnels/sessions. Setting this object to true(1)
causes all domains and their respective tunnels
to transition to the draining state. Note that
when this occurs the xxxDraining status objects of
the domains and their tunnels should reflect that
they are draining. Setting this object has no
affect on the domains or their tunnels
xxxDrainTunnels configuration objects. To cancel
a drain this object should be set to false(2).
The object l2tpDrainingTunnels reflects
the current L2TP draining state.
ProtocolVersion:
Vector of supported L2TP protocol version and
revision numbers. Supported versions are identified
via a two octet pairing where the first octet indicates
the version and the second octet contains the revision.
VendorName:
This object identifies the Vendor name of the L2TP
protocol stack.
FirmwareRev:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP L2TPATT- 1+
DISP L2TPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This object defines the firmware revision for the
L2TP protocol stack.
DrainingTunnels:
DrainTunnels that are set to true(1).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP L2TPATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP L2TPATT- 2-
MOD L2TPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify L2TP Attributes
This task is used to modify the L2TP attributes of a packet hub.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD L2TPATT : EQN= [,AdminState=] [,DrainTunnels=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
AdminState
This object defines the administrative state of
the L2TP protocol. Setting this object to
disabled causes all tunnels to be immediately
disconnected and no further tunnels to be either
initiated or accepted.
DrainTunnels
Setting this object to yes will prevent any new
tunnels and/or sessions to be either initiated or
accepted but does NOT disconnect any active
tunnels/sessions. Setting this object to yes(1)
causes all domains and their respective tunnels
to transition to the draining state. When the
last tunnel disconnects the l2tpAdminState
transitions to disabled(2). Note that the
administrative states of the domains and its
tunnels do not transition to the disabled state.
When reading this object it should always return
no(2). The object l2tpDrainingTunnels reflects
the current draining state.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD L2TPATT- 1-
DISP L2TPIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display L2TP Interface Attributes
This task displays the interface attributes of an L2TP tunnel.
Output Parameters:
Index:
A unique value, greater than zero, for each
interface. It is recommended that values are assigned
contiguously starting from 1. The value for each
interface sub-layer must remain constant at least from
one re-initialization of the entitys network
management system to the next re-initialization.
Descr:
Type:
The type of interface. Additional values for ifType
Mtu:
The size of the largest packet which can be
sent/received on the interface, specified in octets.
For interfaces that are used for transmitting network
datagrams, this is the size of the largest network
datagram that can be sent on the interface.
Speed:
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP L2TPIFATT- 1+
DISP L2TPIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
value (4,294,967,295) and HighSpeed must be used to
has no concept of bandwidth, this object should be
zero.
PhysAddress:
AdminStatus:
The desired state of the interface. When a managed
system initializes, all
the up(1) state (or remains in
the down(2) state).
OperStatus:
The current operational state of the interface.
If AdminStatus is down(2) then
OperStatus should be down(2). If AdminStatus is
changed to up(1) then OperStatus should change to
DISP L2TPIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Name:
The textual name of the interface. The value of this
object should be the name of the interface as assigned
by the local device and should be suitable for use in
commands entered at the devices `console. This
might be a text name, such as `le0 or a simple port
number, such as `1, depending on the interface naming
syntax of the device. If several entries in the
ifTable together represent a single interface as named
by the device, then each will have the same value of
Name. Note that for an agent which responds to SNMP
queries concerning an interface on some other
(proxied) device, then the value of Name for such an
interface is the proxied devices local name for it.
If there is no local name, or this object is otherwise
not applicable, then this object contains a zero-
length string.
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be
generated for this interface.
enabled(1) for interfaces which do not operate on
top of any other interface (as defined in the
ifStackTable), and disabled(2) otherwise.
HighSpeed:
units of 1,000,000 bits per second. If this object
reports a value of `n then the speed of the interface
is somewhere in the range of `n-500,000 to
`n+499,999. For interfaces which do not vary in
bandwidth. For a sub-layer which has no concept of
DISP L2TPIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
bandwidth, this object should be zero.
PromiscuousMode:
This object has a value of false(2) if this interface
only accepts packets/frames that are addressed to this
station. This object has a value of true(1) when the
station accepts all packets/frames transmitted on the
media. The value true(1) is only legal on certain
types of media. If legal, setting this object to a
value of true(1) may require the interface to be reset
before becoming effective.
The value of PromiscuousMode does not affect the
reception of broadcast and multicast packets/frames by
the interface.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP L2TPIFATT : EQN= ,DomainName= ,ConfigID= ,LnsIndex= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DomainName
The name of the L2TP domain of the LNS
ConfigID
If the encapsulation protocol only allows one tunnel per set
of endpoint addresses (such as for GRE or IP-in-IP), the
value of this object is 1. For encapsulation methods (such
as L2F) which allow multiple parallel tunnels, the manager
is responsible for choosing any ID which does not conflict
with an existing row, such as choosing a random number.
LnsIndex
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP L2TPIFATT- 4-
MOD L2TPIFATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify L2TP Interface Attributes
This task is used to modify the interface attributes of an L2TP tunnel.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD L2TPIFATT : EQN= ,DomainName= ,ConfigID= ,LnsIndex= [
[ [
[ [,ifAdminStatus=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
DomainName
The name of the L2TP domain of the LNS
ConfigID
If the encapsulation protocol only allows one tunnel per set
of endpoint addresses (such as for GRE or IP-in-IP), the
value of this object is 1. For encapsulation methods (such
as L2F) which allow multiple parallel tunnels, the manager
is responsible for choosing any ID which does not conflict
with an existing row, such as choosing a random number.
LnsIndex
ifAdminStatus
The desired state of the interface.
Setting ifAdminStatus to (down) disconnects the specified tunnel if
active.
A tunnel with ifAdminStatus= (down) is disabled, it cannot be used until
ifAdminStatus is set to (up).
After booting the PHub all tunnels have an ifAdminStatus of (up).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD L2TPIFATT- 1-
DISP LACNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Line Alarm Configuration Profile
This task displays parameters that are used to determine when and under what
conditions the agent should send traps.
Output Parameters:
AtucThresh15MinLofs,AturThresh15MinLofs:
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds,
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15
minutes performance data collection period, which causes
the SNMP agent to send an AtucPerfLofsThreshTrap.
Limit of one trap will be sent for any one interval.
A value of 0 will disable the trap.
AtucThresh15MinLoss,AturThresh15MinLoss:
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds,
the SNMP agent to send an AtucPerfLossThreshTrap.
AtucThresh15MinLols,AturThresh15MinLols:
The number of Loss of Link Seconds,
the SNMP agent to send an AtucPerfLolsThreshTrap.
AtucThresh15MinLprs,AturThresh15MinLprs:
The number of Loss of Power Seconds,
the SNMP agent to send an AtucPerfLprsThreshTrap.
AtucThresh15MinESs,AturThresh15MinESs:
The number of Errored Seconds,
the SNMP agent to send an AtucPerfESsThreshTrap.
AtucInitFailureTrapEnable:
Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This
object is defaulted disable(2).
ThreshSeverelyErroredSecLineNe:
The number of Severely errored seconds,
the SNMP agent to send an SeverelyErroredSecLineNeThreshTrap.
ThreshSeverelyErroredSecLineFe:
The number of Severely errored seconds far-end,
the SNMP agent to send an SeverelyErroredSecLineFeThreshTrap.
ThreshUnavailableSecNe:
The number of Unavailable seconds,
the SNMP agent to send an UnavailableSecNeThreshTrap.
ThreshUnavailableSecFe:
The number of Unavailable seconds far-end,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LACNFPRF- 1+
DISP LACNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the SNMP agent to send an UnavailableSecFeThreshTrap.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP LACNFPRF : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LACNFPRF- 2-
MOD LACNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Line Alarm Configuration Profile
This task allows editing of the conditions under which traps are sent by the
agent.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD LACNFPRF : EQN= [,AtucThresh15MinLofs=] [,AtucThresh15MinLoss=] [
[ [
[ [,AtucThresh15MinLols=] [,AtucThresh15MinLprs=] [
[ [
[ [,AtucThresh15MinESs=] [,AtucInitFailureTrapEnable=] [
[ [
[ [,AturThresh15MinLofs=] [,AturThresh15MinLoss=] [
[ [
[ [,AturThresh15MinLprs=] [,AturThresh15MinESs=] [
[ [
[ [,SlmuThreshSeverelyErroredSecLineNe=] [
[ [
[ [,SlmuThreshSeverelyErroredSecLineFe=] [
[ [
[ [,SlmuThreshUnavailableSecNe=] [
[ [
[ [,SlmuThreshUnavailableSecFe=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
AtucThresh15MinLofs
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap.
Limit of one trap will be sent for any one interval. A
value of 0 will disable the trap.
AtucThresh15MinLoss
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap.
AtucThresh15MinLols
The number of Loss of Link Seconds,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LACNFPRF- 1+
MOD LACNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap.
AtucThresh15MinLprs
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap.
AtucThresh15MinESs
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap.
AtucInitFailureTrapEnable
Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap.
Possible values are enable or disable.
AturThresh15MinLofs
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LACNFPRF- 2+
MOD LACNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AturThresh15MinLoss
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap.
AturThresh15MinLprs
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap.
AturThresh15MinESs
the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap.
SlmuThreshSeverelyErroredSecLineNe
The number of Severely errored seconds,
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15 minutes
performance data collection period, which causes the SNMP agent
to send an slmuSeverelyErroredSecLineNeThreshTrap. Limit of
one trap will be sent for any one interval. A value of 0
will disable the trap.
SlmuThreshSeverelyErroredSecLineFe
The number of Severely errored seconds
far-end, encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15 minutes
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LACNFPRF- 3+
MOD LACNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
performance data collection period, which causes the SNMP agent
to send an slmuSeverelyErroredSecLineFeThreshTrap. Limit of
one trap will be sent for any one interval. A value of 0
will disable the trap.
SlmuThreshUnavailableSecNe
The number of Unavailable seconds, encountered by
an ADSL interface within any given 15 minutes performance data
collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an
slmuUnavailableSecNeThreshTrap. Limit of one trap will be
sent for any one interval. A value of 0 will disable the trap.
SlmuThreshUnavailableSecFe
The number of Unavailable seconds
far-end, encountered by an ADSL interface within any
given 15 minutes performance data collection period,
which causes the SNMP agent to send an slmuUnavailableSecFeThreshTrap.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LACNFPRF- 4-
CONF LAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This command configures a LAU.
The LAU is activated without test.
Input format
[ [
[ CONF LAU : LAU= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACT ACTIVE
Because of its influence on the X25LINKs,
configuration of a LAU from ACT to MBL is
considered as dangerous. A dialog mask is output.
The operating personnel must decide, by entering
+ or -, whether the command should
be executed.
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CONF LAU- 1-
DIAG LAU
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE LINK ADAPTION UNIT
for a link adaption unit.
Prerequisites:
- The link adaption unit must be MBL.
<job number>.
1. DIAG LAU - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG LAU - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a link adaption unit.
[ [
[ DIAG LAU : LAU= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG LAU- 1+
DIAG LAU
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a link
adaption unit.
[ [
[ DIAG LAU : LAU= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
INT INTERRUPTION
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the interval between
statistic outputs in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the
DISP DIAGSTAT command.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DIAG LAU- 2-
TEST LAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This command tests LAUs. The interface to the IOPLAU
is tested, and also X25LINK specific HW parts of the LAU
in case a X25LINK is not ACT.
Prerequisite:
- The units which are to be tested must be ACT.
- The IOP must be active.
the exchange!
Input format
[ [
[ TEST LAU : [LAU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the link adaption unit to be tested.
Note:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active
link adaption units are tested.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LAU- 1-
DISP LCNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Line Configuration Profile
This task displays modem configuration data.
Output Parameters:
AtucConfRateMode:
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is
configured on this modem. See WT008 for more
information.
AtucConfRateChanRatio:
Configured allocation ratio of excess transmit
bandwidth between fast and interleaved channels. Only
applies when two channel mode and RADSL are supported.
Distribute bandwidth on each channel in excess of the
corresponding ChanConfMinTxRate so that:
AtucConfRateChanRatio =
[Fast / (Fast + Interleaved)] * 100
In other words this value is the fast channel percentage.
AtucConfTargetSnrMgn:
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin.
This is the Noise Margin the modem must achieve
with a BER of 10-7 or better to successfully complete
initialization.
AtucChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate:
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for Interleave
channels, in bps. See AtucConfRateChanRatio for
information regarding RADSL mode and see
ATUR transmit rate for receive rates.
AtucChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate:
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for Interleave
channels, in bps. See AtucConfRateChanRatio for
information regarding RADSL mode and ATUR transmit
rate for ATUC receive rates.
AtucChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay:
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel
per ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d)
-------------
4 milli-seconds,
payload latency.
AturConfRateMode:
fixed (1), -- no rate adaption
adaptAtStartup (2), -- perform rate adaptation
-- only at initialization
adaptAtRuntime (3) -- perform rate adaptation at
-- any time (i.e., RADSL)
AturConfRateChanRatio:
Configured allocation ratio of excess transmit
bandwidth between fast and interleaved channels. Only
applies when two channel mode and RADSL are supported.
Distribute bandwidth on each channel in excess of the
corresponding ChanConfMinTxRate so that:
AturConfRateChanRatio =
[Fast / (Fast + Interleaved)] * 100
In other words this value is the fast channel
percentage.
AturConfTargetSnrMgn:
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin.
This is the Noise Margin the modem must achieve
with a BER of 10-7 or better to successfully complete
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LCNFPRF- 1+
DISP LCNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
initialization.
AturChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate:
channels, in bps. See AturConfRateChanRatio for
information regarding RADSL mode and ATUC transmit rate
for ATUR receive rates.
AturChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate:
channels, in bps. See AturConfRateChanRatio for
ATUC transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
AturChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay:
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel per
ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d)
-------------
4 milli-seconds,
payload latency.
ConfAdslTrSysEnaAtuc:
ATU-C ADSL Transmission System Enabling: This parameter defines
the ATU-C ADSL transmission system coding types allowed on this
line. It is coded in a bit-map representation with following
definition:
Bit 1 Regional standards
Bit 3 G.992.1 operation over POTS non-overlapped spectrum
(Annex A of G.992.1)
Bit 4 G.992.1 operation over POTS overlapped spectrum
Bit 5 G.992.1 operation over ISDN non-overlapped spectrum
(Annex B of G.992.1)
Bit 6 G.992.1 operation over ISDN overlapped spectrum
Bit 7 G.992.1 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN
non-overlapped spectrum (Annex C of G.992.1)
overlapped spectrum (Annex C of G.992.1)
Bit 9 G.992.2 operation over POTS non-overlapped spectrum
Bit 10 G.992.2 operation over POTS overlapped spectrum
non-overlapped spectrum (Annex C of G.992.2)
overlapped spectrum (Annex C of G.992.2)
This parameter only applies to the Q-interface.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP LCNFPRF : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LCNFPRF- 2+
DISP LCNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LCNFPRF- 3-
MOD LCNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Line Configuration Profile
This task allows editing of modem configuration.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD LCNFPRF : EQN= [,AtucChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AtucChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AtucChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay=] [
[ [
[ [,AturChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AturChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AturChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay=] [
[ [
[ [,SlmuConfAdslTrSysEnaAtuc=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
AtucChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate
channels, in kbps. See adslAtucConfRateChanRatio for
Possible values (in kilobits) range from 64 to 1536.
AtucChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate
AtucChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay
per ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d)
-------------
4 milli-seconds,
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LCNFPRF- 1+
MOD LCNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
payload latency.
AturChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate
channels, in kbps. See adslAturConfRateChanRatio for
AturChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate
AturChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay
ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d)
-------------
4 milli-seconds,
payload latency.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LCNFPRF- 2+
MOD LCNFPRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SlmuConfAdslTrSysEnaAtuc
SEE IMPORTANT NOTE AT BOTTOM
ATU-C ADSL Transmission System Enabling:
This parameter defines the ATU-C ADSL transmission system coding
types allowed on this line. It is coded in a bit-map representation
with following definition:
Bit 1 Regional standards (T 1.413 iussue 2)
Bit 3 G.992.1 operation over POTS non-overlapped spectrum (Annex A of
G.992.1)
Bit 4 G.992.1 operation over POTS overlapped spectrum (Annex A of
G.992.1)
Bit 5 G.992.1 operation over ISDN non-overlapped spectrum (Annex B of
G.992.1)
Bit 6 G.992.1 operation over ISDN overlapped spectrum (Annex B of
G.992.1)
Bit 7 G.992.1 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped
spectrum (Annex C of G.992.1)
Bit 8 G.992.1 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN overlapped spectrum
(Annex C of G.992.1)
Bit 9 G.992.2 operation over POTS non-overlapped spectrum (Annex A of
G.992.2)
Bit 10 G.992.2 operation over POTS overlapped spectrum (Annex B of
G.992.2)
Bit 11 G.992.2 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped
Bit 12 G.992.2 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN overlapped
NOTE: Only the value 256 is presently supported for this variable.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LCNFPRF- 3-
MOD LCNFPRFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Line Configuration Profile
This task allows editing of modem configuration.
Input format
[ [
[ MOD LCNFPRFA : EQN= [,AtucChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AtucChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AtucChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay=] [
[ [
[ [,AturChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AturChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate=] [
[ [
[ [,AturChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay=] [
[ [
[ [,SlmuConfAdslTrSysEnaAtuc=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
Equipment number of the line card port.
AtucChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate
Input format:
32...8160, range of decimal numbers (values in kilobits)
AtucChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate
Input format:
AtucChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay
per ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d) / 4 milli-seconds,
payload latency.
Input format:
AturChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate
Input format:
AturChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LCNFPRFA- 1+
MOD LCNFPRFA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format:
AturChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay
ANSI T1.413, ==
(S-factor x d) / 4 milli-seconds,
payload latency.
Input format:
SlmuConfAdslTrSysEnaAtuc
ATU-C ADSL Transmission System Enabling:
This parameter defines the ATU-C ADSL transmission system coding
types allowed on this line. It is coded in a bit-map representation
with following definition:
Bit 1: Regional standards (T 1.413 iussue 2)
Bit 2: Regional standards
Bit 3: G.992.1 operation over POTS non-overlapped spectrum
Bit 4: G.992.1 operation over POTS overlapped spectrum
Bit 5: G.992.1 operation over ISDN non-overlapped spectrum
Bit 6: G.992.1 operation over ISDN overlapped spectrum
Bit 7: G.992.1 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped
Bit 8: G.992.1 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN overlapped
Bit 9: G.992.2 operation over POTS non-overlapped spectrum
Bit 10: G.992.2 operation over POTS overlapped spectrum
Bit 11: G.992.2 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped
Bit 12: G.992.2 operation in conjunction with TCM-ISDN overlapped
Input format:
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LCNFPRFA- 2-
DISP LCOMATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Line Common Attributes
This task displays attributes that are common to both the central-office side and
subscriber side.
Output Parameters:
LineCoding:
Specifies the ADSL coding type used on this line.
LineType:
noChannel (1), -- no channels exist
fastOnly (2), -- fast channel exists only
interleavedOnly (3), -- interleaved channel exists only
fastOrInterleaved (4),-- either fast or interleaved
-- channels can exist, but
-- only one at any time
fastAndInterleaved (5)-- both fast or interleaved
-- channnels exist
LineConfProfile:
Each entry consists of a list of parameters that
represents the configuration of an ADSL modem. A
profile is created in one step with all necessary
parameter values and LineProfileRowStatus set to
createAndGo. This RowStatus object is also used
to delete destroy profiles.
LineAlarmConfProfile:
This table contains information on the ADSL line
configuration. One entry in this table reflects a
profile defined by a manager which can be used to
configure the modem for a physical line.
TestDiagStatusAtucAdslTrSysCapabilities:
ATU-C ADSL Transmission System Capabilities: This
parameter defines the ATU-C transmission system
capability list of the different coding types. It is coded in
a bit-map representation with the bits defined in 7.3.2 of G.997.1.
TestDiagStatusAturAdslTrSysCapabilities:
ATU-R ADSL Transmission System Capabilities: This
parameter defines the ATU-R transmission system
capability list of the different coding types. It is coded in
a bit-map representation with the bits defined in 7.3.2 of G.997.1.
TestDiagStatusTrSystem:
ADSL Transmission System: The actual ADSL transmission
system in use. It is coded as an integer with the value
correlated to the bit-map representation with the bits
defined in 7.3.2 of G.997.1.
TestDiagStatusLineStates:
The ADSL line has three line states:
l0 - Synchronized - This Line state (l0) is when the ADSL has
full transmission (i.e. showtime). The on/off hook conditions in
Recommendation G.992.2 is regarded as the l0 state.
l3 - No-power - This Line state (l3) is when there is No Power
transmitted on the line at all.
l1 - Power Down Data transmission - This line state (l1) is when
there is transmission on the line but the net data rate is reduced.
(E.g. only for OAM and higher layer connection and session control).
Input format
[ [
[ DISP LCOMATT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LCOMATT- 1+
DISP LCOMATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LCOMATT- 2-
DISP LCOMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Line Common Performance
This task displays performance data related to both the central-office side
and subscriber side.
Output Parameters:
TestDiagStatusFastRetrainCount:
The Fast-Retrain-Count performance parameter is
a count of the total number of fast retrains since agent reset.
Parameter procedures shall be as defined in 7.2.3 of G.997.1.
TestDiagStatusFailedFastRetrainCount:
The Failed-Fast-Retrain-Count performance parameter is
a count of the total number of failed fast retrains since agent reset.
A failed fast retrain is either when:
_ A crc error is detected
_ A time-out occur
_ A profile is unknown
Parameter procedures shall be as defined in 7.2.3 of G.997.1.
TestDiagStatusCurr15MinFastRetrainCount:
Count of the total number of fast retrains
TestDiagStatusCurr15MinFailedFastRetrainCount:
Count of the total number of failed fast retrains
TestDiagStatusPrev15MinFastRetrainCount:
within the most recent previous 15 minute interval.
TestDiagStatusPrev15MinFailedFastRetrainCount:
within the most recent previous 15 minute interval.
TestDiagStatusCurr1DayFastRetrainCount:
TestDiagStatusCurr1DayFailedFastRetrainCount:
TestDiagStatusPrev1DayFastRetrainCount:
TestDiagStatusPrev1DayFailedFastRetrainCount:
Input format
[ [
[ DISP LCOMP : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LCOMP- 1-
MOD LCVAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LINE CIRCUIT VARIANT
This command modifies a line circuit variant in a created LTU.
Prerequisites:
- Higher-ranking objects (LTG, LTU) must already exist.
- The specified equipment number must not be in service.
Input format
[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LCVAR : LTG= ,LC= ,LCVAR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group number.
a-b
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit number.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
This unit specifies the LTU number.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
This unit specifies the channel number.
LCVAR LINE CIRCUIT VARIANT
This parameter specifies the (new/old) line circuit variant
(serves to check attenuation and impedance).
Notes:
- Meaning of the parameter values
1. For TCB 800 C:
0 Transmit level -10.5 ... -11.0 dBm
Receive level + 5.5 ... + 6.0 dBm
1 As in LCVAR = 0, but test object disconnected,
HW exists, call location and distant operator not connected
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LCVAR- 1+
MOD LCVAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2 As in LCVAR = 3, but test object disconnected
3 Transmit level 0.0 dBm
Receive level 0.0 dBm
2. For ETEAE:
0 Receive threshold value is ignored in test
1 Receive threshold value + 3.0 ... - 4.0 dBm
2 Receive threshold value - 4.0 ... -13.0 dBm
3 Receive threshold value -12.5 ... -25.0 dBm
n/o
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 MOD LCVAR- 2-
DISP LDFACTOR
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR
This command displays the load factor for an LTG, an MGI
or a PCU APPLICATION. It is used to display the load factor
of one or several of the above objects.
<job number>.
1. DISP LDFACTOR- ALL DISPLAY ALL LOAD FACTORS
2. DISP LDFACTOR- LTG DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR FOR AN LTG
3. DISP LDFACTOR- MGI DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR FOR AN MGI CARD
4. DISP LDFACTOR- PCU DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR FOR A PCU
1. Input format
DISPLAY ALL LOAD FACTORS
This path displays all load factors.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP LDFACTOR [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LDFACTOR- 1+
DISP LDFACTOR
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR FOR AN LTG
This path displays the load factor for an LTG.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP LDFACTOR : LTG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the LTG for which the load factor
is displayed.
a-b
If X is entered for this unit, all LTGs will be
considered for display.
unit values.
If X is entered for this unit, all LTGs of the specified
LINE TRUNK GROUP SET will be considered for display.
unit values.
DISP LDFACTOR
MGI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR FOR AN MGI CARD
This path displays the load factor for an LTU of type MGI.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP LDFACTOR : LTG= ,LTU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
is displayed.
a-b
If X is entered for this unit, all LTGs will be
considered for display.
unit values.
If X is entered for this unit, all LTGs of the specified
LINE TRUNK GROUP SET will be considered for display.
unit values.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTU number of the MGI.
If X is entered for this unit, all MGIs of the specified
LTG will be considered for display.
DISP LDFACTOR
PCU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISPLAY LOAD FACTOR FOR A PCU
This path displays the load factor for a PCU.
[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP LDFACTOR : PCU= [,APPLIC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PCU PACKET CONTROL UNIT
This parameter specifies the PCU for which
the load factor is displayed.
If X is entered for this unit, all APPLICATIONs of the specified
PCU will be considered for display.
APPLIC APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the APPLICATION of the PCU.
This parameter allows to filter for the specified APPLICATION.
VODSL VOICE OVER DSL
VOH323 VOICE OVER H323
VOPTRUNK VOICE OVER PACKET TRUNK
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LDFACTOR- 4-
ENTR LDFACTOR
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOAD FACTOR
This command enters the load factor for a LTG, a MGI
or a PCU APPLICATION. It is used to individually change the
load laid on the according objects.
1. ENTR LDFACTOR- LTG ENTER LOAD FACTOR FOR AN LTG
2. ENTR LDFACTOR- MGI ENTER LOAD FACTOR FOR A MGI CARD
3. ENTR LDFACTOR- PCU ENTER LOAD FACTOR FOR A PCU APPLICATION
1. Input format
ENTER LOAD FACTOR FOR AN LTG
In this path the load factor for an Call Control LTG is entered.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG must exist.
- The specified LTG must provide the correct load type with feature IPLTG.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR LDFACTOR : LDFACTOR= ,LTG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LDFACTOR LOAD FACTOR
This parameter specifies the load factor.
is entered.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR LDFACTOR- 1+
ENTR LDFACTOR
MGI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTER LOAD FACTOR FOR A MGI CARD
In this path the load factor for an LTU of type MGI is entered.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG must exist.
- The specified LTG must provide the correct load type with feature IPLTG.
- The specified LTU must exist.
- The specified LTU must be of the type MGI.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR LDFACTOR : LDFACTOR= ,LTG= ,LTU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
is entered.
a-b
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR LDFACTOR- 2+
ENTR LDFACTOR
PCU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ENTER LOAD FACTOR FOR A PCU APPLICATION
In this path the load factor for a PCU is entered.
Prerequisites:
- The specified PCU must exist.
- The specified PCU must provide the specified APPLICATION.
[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR LDFACTOR : LDFACTOR= ,PCU= ,APPLIC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PCU PACKET CONTROL UNIT
This parameter specifies the PCU for which
the load factor is entered.
APPLIC APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the APPLICATION of the PACKET CONTROL UNIT.
VODSL VOICE OVER DSL
VOH323 VOICE OVER H323
VOPTRUNK VOICE OVER PACKET TRUNK
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR LDFACTOR- 3-
TEST LIC
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINE CIRCUIT
This command tests circuits in an LTGA.
job.
<job number>.
1. TEST LIC - ALL
2. TEST LIC - SPEC
1. Input format
This input format is to be used for testing the circuits of a directory
number volume or all circuits in an exchange.
[ [
[ TEST LIC : LTG= ,LC= [,SCHED=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group number of the lines
to be tested.
a-b
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LIC- 1+
TEST LIC
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
unit values.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit number of the lines
to be tested.
Restriction:
Channels 0 and 16 are not allowed in PCM-30 systems.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
determines the sequence of the started job.
been assigned to a schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LIC- 2+
TEST LIC
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format is to be used for testing a circuit. The parameters
PERM and STEP can only be used in connection with a test object.
[ [
[ TEST LIC : LTG= ,LC= [,SCHED=] [,PERM=] [,STEP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the line trunk group number of the lines
to be tested.
a-b
unit values.
unit values.
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit number of the lines
to be tested.
Restriction:
Channels 0 and 16 are not allowed in PCM-30 systems.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
determines the sequence of the started job.
been assigned to a schedule with the command ENTR TSTSCHED.
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test is to be
performed.
N NO PERMANENT TEST
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LIC- 3+
TEST LIC
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y PERMANENT TEST
Default: N
STEP STEP COMMAND
This parameter specifies the breakpoint for single test jobs.
The test steps that represent breakpoints are marked in the test table
with two leading zeros before the test step number.
The test table of the test object is country-specific and is contained
in the GP APS microfiche, load type ATE of LTG, module TTC.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LIC- 4-
STAT LINE
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ENHANCED STATUS OF SUB AND PBXLN
This command displays the enhanced status of a subscriber or of PBX lines. In
case of PBX lines this status is displayed also for the operating mode and the
PBX, to which the lines belong.
The enhanced status consists of both the transient and the semipermanent data
indicating the busy/idle status or any kind of blocking. In case of an ISDN
basic access the busy/idle information contains the number of busy B-channels.
More information about the basic access can be obtained by the command
STAT BA.
This command also displays the total number of lines of a PBX and the number
of lines blocked for administrative and maintenance reasons.
<job number>.
1. STAT LINE - DN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA DN
2. STAT LINE - EQN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA EQN
3. STAT LINE - LSN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LSN
4. STAT LINE - LTG ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LTG/LC
1. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA DN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via directory number.
[ [
[ ; [
[ STAT LINE : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE= [,LNO=]] [,FORMAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more than one
local network connected to an exchange.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or the
pilot directory number of the PBX with the line to be displayed.
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line. AIC, IIC
and IIC1TR6 refer to lines coming to the switch from the PBX. AOG,
IOG and IOG1TR6 refer to lines going from the switch to the PBX.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
[AOG [ ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT LINE- 1+
STAT LINE
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[IIC1TR6 [ ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
[IOG [ ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line to be
displayed.
FORMAT OUTPUT MASK FORM
This parameter displays a table with the total number of lines of a
PBX and the number of lines blocked for administrative and maintenance
reasons.
BLOCKED BLOCKED PBX LINES
This identifier outputs the total number of lines
of a PBX and the number of lines blocked for
administrative and maintenance reasons.
The number of PBX lines will be listed separately
per each category and operating mode.
Incompatibility: parameter OPMODE.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT LINE- 2+
STAT LINE
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA EQN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via equipment number.
[ [
[ ; [
[ STAT LINE : EQN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the DLU port or of
the V5 interface connected to the subscriber or the PBX line to be
displayed.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/V5IF=
- DLU number (10,20,30..2550 for a DLU port)
- V5IF number (6000..8999 for a V5 interface)
b: SHELF=
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..3 for a DLU16 port)
- (0 for a V5 interface)
c: MODULE/V5IFPORT=
- Module number (0..15 for a DLU port)
- V5IF port number (0 for a V5.1 interface,
0..20 for a V5.2 interface)
d: CIRCUIT/V5IFPORT=
- Circuit number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..15 for a DLU16 port)
- V5IF port number (0..31 for a V5.1 interface,
0..99 for a V5.2 interface)
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT LINE- 3+
STAT LINE
LSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LSN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via line service number.
This format can be used only for PBX lines with a line service number
associated.
[ [
[ ; [
[ STAT LINE : [LAC=] ,LSN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
LSN LINE SERVICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line service number of a PBX line to be
displayed. A line service number is a number associated with a
PBX line to make this line direct dialable or for billing purposes.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT LINE- 4+
STAT LINE
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LTG/LC
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via line trunk group and
line connection.
[ [
[ ; [
[ STAT LINE : LTG= ,LC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter specifies together with LC the LTG port connected to
the subscriber or the PBX line to be displayed.
a-b
- LTGSET number (0..31 for a LTG port)
- LTG number (1..63 for a LTG port)
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter specifies together with LTG the LTG port connected to
the subscriber or the PBX line to be displayed.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
- LTU number (0..7 for a LTG port)
b: CHANNEL=
- Channel number (0..31 for a LTG port)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 STAT LINE- 5-
TEST LINE
GROUPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINE
This command tests and monitors analog and digital subscriber lines
connected to DLUs or LTGAs and analog terminal equipment.
Prerequisites:
- A work station must be created and activated.
- This command may not be entered until a test and speech connection
has been set up to the test object using command START LTEST.
Notes:
- If the test object is busy, connection can be broken into.
1. TEST LINE - GROUPT GROUP TEST
2. TEST LINE - ONLYFCT TESTS WITHOUT FCTPAR
3. TEST LINE - SINGLET SINGLE TEST
4. TEST LINE - WITHFCTP TESTS THAT NEED PARAM FCTPAR
1. Input format
GROUP TEST
Input format, if the value GT is entered for parameter
FCT.
[ [
[ TEST LINE : FCT= [,MEAVOL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the test function.
GT GROUP TEST
MEAVOL MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE
This parameter specifies the volts value for resistance
and capacity measurements on analog and digital ba lines.
This parameter allow only the test type ST or GT
entered for parameter FCT.
The default value for analog line is 50.
The default value for digital BA line is 11.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LINE- 1+
TEST LINE
ONLYFCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TESTS WITHOUT FCTPAR
Input format for all test functions without parameter FCTPAR.
[ [
[ TEST LINE : FCT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
DP DIAL PULSE TEST
DT DIAL TEST MF
Push button dialing
EC TEST OF EMERGENCY CALL
Test of coinbox emergency call equipment
EL EXTERN LINE
Switch test access to external line or
release an existing speech connection
ER EARTH RESISTANCE
ET TEST OF EMERGENCY TELEPHONE
FP FLASH PULSE
GR GENERAL RELEASE
Complete release of test and speech connection
GT GROUP TEST
HT HOWLER TONE
IL INTERN LINE
LF LINE FEED
LP LOOP
Test circuit loop detection
MO MONITORING
MT METER TEST
Increase private meter for functional test
OF FUNCTION OFF
End current test function
RI RINGING
RL RESISTANCE LOOP
SA SUPERVISION A
Foreign voltage end indication;
voltage to a-wire, ground to b-wire
SB SUPERVISION B
Foreign voltage end indication;
ground to a-wire, voltage to b-wire
SC SUPERVISION C
Indication of loop short on the subscriber line,
and search tone injection
SD SUPERVISION D
Indication of loop short or incoming call
SE SUPERVISION E
Indication of loop open or end of conversation
TO TONE
Search tone
TU SELFTEST TU
XL CROSS LINE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LINE- 2+
TEST LINE
SINGLET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SINGLE TEST
Input format, if the value ST is entered for parameter
FCT.
[ [
[ TEST LINE : FCT= [,FCTPAR=] [,MEAVOL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
ST SINGLE TEST
FCTPAR FUNCTION PARAMETER
This parameter allows test types ST, CB or OA, entered for
parameter FCT, to be given more detailed classification.
(see MMN:TE)
Test type ST = SINGLE TEST
CAG or CAE CAPACITANCE A-wire to ground
CBG or CBE CAPACITANCE B-wire to ground
CAB CAPACITANCE A-wire to B-wire
RAG or RAE RESISTANCE A-wire to ground
RBG or RBE RESISTANCE B-wire to ground
RAB RESISTANCE A-wire to B-wire
AAG or AAE AC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
ABG or ABE AC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
AAB AC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
DAG or DAE DC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
DBG or DBE DC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
DAB DC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
<blank> Output of previous test results
Test type CB = COINBOX TEST
CM COINBOX PARAMETER - only world market
CP COIN PRESENT - only USA
CC COIN COLLECT - only USA
CR COIN RETURN - only USA
HT OWN EXCHANGE STATISTICS METER - only USA
Test type OA = OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
1 - 8 digits (0 to F) - world market
1 - 14 digits (0 to F) - only DBP
MEAVOL MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE
This parameter specifies the volts value for resistance
and capacity measurements on analog and digital ba lines.
This parameter allow only the test type ST or GT
entered for parameter FCT.
The default value for analog line is 50.
The default value for digital BA line is 11.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LINE- 3+
TEST LINE
SINGLET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LINE- 4+
TEST LINE
WITHFCTP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TESTS THAT NEED PARAM FCTPAR
Input format, if the values CB or OA are entered for
parameter FCT.
[ [
[ TEST LINE : FCT= ,FCTPAR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FCT TEST FUNCTION
CB COINBOX TEST
OA OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
Test digit recognition of circuit
FCTPAR FUNCTION PARAMETER
This parameter allows test types ST, CB or OA, entered for
parameter FCT, to be given more detailed classification.
(see MMN:TE)
Test type ST = SINGLE TEST
CAG or CAE CAPACITANCE A-wire to ground
CBG or CBE CAPACITANCE B-wire to ground
CAB CAPACITANCE A-wire to B-wire
RAG or RAE RESISTANCE A-wire to ground
RBG or RBE RESISTANCE B-wire to ground
RAB RESISTANCE A-wire to B-wire
AAG or AAE AC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
ABG or ABE AC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
AAB AC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
DAG or DAE DC VOLTAGE A-wire to ground
DBG or DBE DC VOLTAGE B-wire to ground
DAB DC VOLTAGE A-wire to B-wire
<blank> Output of previous test results
Test type CB = COINBOX TEST
CM COINBOX PARAMETER - only world market
CP COIN PRESENT - only USA
CC COIN COLLECT - only USA
CR COIN RETURN - only USA
HT OWN EXCHANGE STATISTICS METER - only USA
Test type OA = OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
1 - 8 digits (0 to F) - world market
1 - 14 digits (0 to F) - only DBP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 TEST LINE- 5-
DISP LINEDATA
COSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE DATA
This command displays alternatively
- the international portable user identities (IPUI) of cordless terminal
mobilities (CTM) SUB or PBX line,
- the public business group identifications (BGID) of SUB or PBX,
- the ported number (PN=<N1>(-<DDRN>)),
- the unique identification (UNIQUEID) of SUB, PBX or PBX line.
<job number>.
1. DISP LINEDATA- COSDAT CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
2. DISP LINEDATA- PN PORTED NUMBER
3. DISP LINEDATA- UNIQUEID UNIQUE IDENTIFICATION
1. Input format
CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
This input format displays alternatively
- the international portable user identities (IPUI) of cordless terminal
mobilities (CTM) SUB or PBX line,
- the public business group identifications (BGID) of SUB or PBX.
[ [
[ DISP LINEDATA : COSDAT= [,LAC=] [,DN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
This parameter selects the display of the international portable user
identities or business group identifications.
a[-b]
IPUI INTERNATIONAL PORTABLE USER ID
b: NUMBER=
Following values are allowed:
- IPUI 1..25 digits hexadecimal
- BGID 2..16777215 range of decimal numbers
Note:
If no value is entered, it represents the entire range of unit
values.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is only allowed together with parameter DN or LSN.
volume.
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LINEDATA- 1+
DISP LINEDATA
COSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
pilot directory number of the PBX to be displayed.
Note:
Input is only allowed if the unit NUMBER of the parameter COSDAT is
not entered or UNIQUEID=X is entered.
DISP LINEDATA
PN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PORTED NUMBER
This input format selects the display of the number portability composed of
a routing number (N2), an additional dialled/ported number (N1) and a flag
if the routing number is to dial (DDRN).
[ [
[ DISP LINEDATA : PN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PN PORTED NUMBER
This parameter selects the display of the number portability composed
of a routing number (N2), an additional dialled/ported number (N1) and
a flag if the routing number is to dial (DDRN).
- PN=N1
- PN=N1-DDRN
a[-b]
a: PORTED NUMBER=
Note:
A complete or partly qualified number may be entered.
unit values.
b: ROUTING NUMBER DIALLING ALLOWED
NO ROUTING NUMBER NOT DIALLABLE
YES ROUTING NUMBER DIALLABLE
DISP LINEDATA
UNIQUEID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
UNIQUE IDENTIFICATION
This input format displays the unique identification (UNIQUEID) of SUB, PBX
or PBX line.
[ [
[ [
[ [[,DN= [[ [
[ DISP LINEDATA : UNIQUEID= [,LAC=] [,LSN=[ [,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIQUEID UNIQUE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter selects the display of the unique identification.
The unique identification consists of the main key and the
supplementary key.
The supplementary key includes a flag, it is the first digit and called
object class, which is 0 for subscriber/PBX/customer profile or 1 for
PBX line/SHG member/customized resources.
a[-b]
a: MAINKEY=
The main key represents a unique identification for a specified
object class.
- object class 0 1..1114110
- object class 1 1..262143
unit values.
b: SUPPLKEY=
8 digit decimal number
The supplementary key takes care for uniqueness of a unique
identification in a specified time interval. It contains the
object class and a counter which is increased every time a new
creation command is executed.
- object class 0 00000001..08388607
- object class 1 10000001..18388607
Notes:
- The first digit represents the object class, it must be 0
or 1.
- If the entered main key is X, the supplementary key is not
allowed.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is only allowed together with parameter DN or LSN.
volume.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
DISP LINEDATA
UNIQUEID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
pilot directory number of the PBX to be displayed.
Note:
Input is only allowed if the unit NUMBER of the parameter COSDAT is
not entered or UNIQUEID=X is entered.
LSN LINE SERVICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line service number of the PBX line to be
displayed. A line service number is a number associated with a
PBX line to make this line direct dialable or for billing purposes.
Note:
Input is only allowed if UNIQUEID=X is entered.
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line to be
displayed.
Note:
Input is only allowed together with parameter DN.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
[IBW [ ISDN BOTHWAY
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line to be
displayed.
Note:
Input is only allowed together with parameter DN.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LINEDATA- 5-
DISP LINETHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP LINE THRESHOLDS
This command displays thresholds for monitoring individual and
PBX lines. These thresholds must have been entered with the
command ENTR LINETHR.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP LINETHR ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LINETHR- 1-
ENTR LINETHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LINE THRESHOLDS
This command is used to enter the thresholds for monitoring
individual or PBX lines in an exchange.
- Individual lines are monitored for over long events and for
port faults. If the threshold is exceeded, the alarm unnecessary
seizure appears on the system panel.
- PBX groups are monitored for the number of disturbed and seized
lines in the group. If for a group the disturbed lines exceed
the threshold, the alarm PBX group alarm appears on the system panel.
Input format
[ [
[ ENTR LINETHR : <LNLOCKAL= ,PGATHR=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNLOCKAL LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
This parameter specifies the threshold for individual lines.
Note:
- The threshold for individual lines is entered as the maximum
number of disturbed lines.
Default: 5
PGATHR PBX GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the threshold for PBX trunks.
Note:
- All trunks (bothway, outgoing and incoming) of all PBXs are
monitored.
a[-b]
a: PBX GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD=
The threshold for PBX trunks is entered as minimum availability
in percent.
Default: 50
b: MINIMUM NUMBER OF LINES IN PBX GROUP FOR THRESHOLD=
Monitoring is started for a PBX trunk when this minimum number
of lines is reached.
Default: 10
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR LINETHR- 1-
DISP LISTTOAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LISTENER TO ANNOUNCEMENT
This command displays the transient announcement lists for
one, anyone or all lines of one or all announcement trunk groups.
Notes:
- The command can only display announcements which use
broadcasting.
- Announcements installed as normal trunks are
not displayed by this command.
Input format
[ [
[ DISP LISTTOAN : TGNO= [,LNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Notes:
- For this parameter the value X is allowed to display the
announcement lists of all announcement trunk groups.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number within the recorded
announcement group.
Notes:
- up to 32 line numbers can be linked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP LISTTOAN- 1-
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
This command cancels a call processing block for a PBX, a PBX line group,
a PBX line, a subscriber or a port with several different directory numbers.
1. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKPL CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE
2. CAN LMBLK - CANMDNEQ CANCEL BLOCKED MULTIPLE DN VIA EQN
3. CAN LMBLK - CANMDNLT CANCEL BLOCKED MDN VIA LTG
4. CAN LMBLK - CANPBXGR CANCEL BLOCKED PBX GROUP
5. CAN LMBLK - CANPBXLD CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE VIA DN
6. CAN LMBLK - CANPBXLE CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE VIA EQN
7. CAN LMBLK - CANPBXLL BLOCK PBX LINE VIA LTG
8. CAN LMBLK - CANSUBDN CANCEL BLOCKED SUB VIA DN
9. CAN LMBLK - CANSUBEQ CANCEL BLOCKED SUB VIA EQN
10. CAN LMBLK - CANSUBLT CANCEL BLOCKED SUB VIA LTG
1. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX line.
[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,DN= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the blocked port.
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 1+
CAN LMBLK
CANMDNEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED MULTIPLE DN VIA EQN
Input format for canceling blocked port with several different
directory numbers (all directory numbers of a specific equipment number
are unblocked).
[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
MDN PORT WITH FEATURE MULTIPLE DN
Note:
- If the equipment type (DLU or V5IF) is selected, the following
subdivision of the equipment number parameter is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...31 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/V5IF=
b: SHELF=
c: MODULE/TH V52PORT=
d: CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 2+
CAN LMBLK
CANMDNLT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED MDN VIA LTG
Input format for canceling blocked port with several different
directory numbers (all directory numbers of a specific equipment number
are unblocked).
[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,LTG= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
Note:
- If the line trunk group is selected, the following subdivision
of the line trunk group parameter is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...31 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b
a: TIME STAGE GROUP NUMBER=
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Note:
- If the line circuit is selected, the following subdivision
of the line circuit parameter is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LC Unit : a = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! b = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 3+
CAN LMBLK
CANPBXGR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX GROUP
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX group.
[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,DN= ,OPMODE= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
PBXGRP PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE GROUP
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the trunk group.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 4+
CAN LMBLK
CANPBXLD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE VIA DN
[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,DN= ,LNO= ,OPMODE= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
PBXLN PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE LINE
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number associated with a PBX line.
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the trunk group.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 5+
CAN LMBLK
CANPBXLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE VIA EQN
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/V5IF=
b: SHELF=
d: CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 6+
CAN LMBLK
CANPBXLL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
BLOCK PBX LINE VIA LTG
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! b = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 7+
CAN LMBLK
CANSUBDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED SUB VIA DN
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a subscriber.
[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,DN= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
SUB SUBSCRIBER
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 8+
CAN LMBLK
CANSUBEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED SUB VIA EQN
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
SUB SUBSCRIBER
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/V5IF=
b: SHELF=
d: CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 9+
CAN LMBLK
CANSUBLT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED SUB VIA LTG
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
SUB SUBSCRIBER
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b
LC LINE CIRCUIT
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! b = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
E N D
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 CAN LMBLK- 10-
ENTR LMBLK
BLKMDNEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
This command creates a call processing blocking for a PBX, a PBX line group,
a PBX line, a subscriber or a port with several different directory
numbers. Calls are diverted to a recorded announcement. If a blocking already
exists, it is overwritten when the new blocking is entered.
1. ENTR LMBLK - BLKMDNEQ BLOCK MULTIPLE DN VIA EQN
2. ENTR LMBLK - BLKMDNLT BLOCK MULTIPLE DN VIA LTG
3. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBX BLOCK PBX
4. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXGR BLOCK PBX GROUP
5. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXLD BLOCK PBX LINE VIA DN
6. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXLE BLOCK PBX LINE VIA EQN
7. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXLL BLOCK PBX LINE VIA LTG
8. ENTR LMBLK - BLKSUBDN BLOCK SUBSCRIBER VIA DN
9. ENTR LMBLK - BLKSUBEQ BLOCK SUBSCRIBER VIA EQN
10. ENTR LMBLK - BLKSUBLT BLOCK SUBSCRIBER VIA LTG
1. Input format
BLOCK MULTIPLE DN VIA EQN
Input format for blocking a port with several different directory numbers
(all directory numbers of a specific equipment number are blocked).
[ [
[ ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the port
to be blocked.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the type of call processing block.
Note:
- The meaning of the parameter values is country specific.
MAINT BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 0
MAINT1 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 1
Note:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 1+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKMDNEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! b = 0

Ewsd v16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ewsd v16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ewsd v16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S I E M E N S

[ Graphic display of [ Comment [

P30305-V6000-A843-02-7619 DISP AIPROUTE- 4+

You might also like

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.